JP2020022886A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: During a first dynamic display period, and a second dynamic display period that is long by predetermined multiples or more of the first dynamic display period, a first performance is executed a timing when a first period has passed from start of a dynamic display period. In the second dynamic display period, after the first performance is displayed, the first performance is executed for a predetermined number of times at the same timing each time when the first dynamic display period passes. Therefore, execution timings of the first performance executed during the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period can be matched while including different dynamic display periods such as the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period. Therefore, based on setting of the second dynamic display period (namely, when a determination result becomes a specific determination result), a player is allowed to recognize that the first performance is under execution, thus enhancing player's interest.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning opening is a hit, the game machine shifts to a winning state that is advantageous to the player. In this conventional gaming machine, each time a lottery is executed, a suggestive effect indicating whether or not a win is made is executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

JP 2001-25543 A

  However, the suggestive effect of the conventional gaming machine has not been able to sufficiently improve the interest of the player.

  Therefore, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in a game.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a ball-in means for allowing a game ball to enter,
Acquiring means for acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the entering means, determining means for determining the information obtained by the obtaining means based on establishment of a determining condition, at least the determining condition Until the condition holds, a storage unit in which the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored, a display unit on which identification information based on the determination result of the determination unit is displayed, and the determination result specific to the display unit A privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the identification information is displayed, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information displayed on the display means, and a dynamic display means. A dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed, and a first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means; Previous The first dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period storage unit in which at least a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period by a predetermined multiple or more is stored, and the dynamic display period determination unit. In this case, the first effect execution means for executing the first effect at a timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the first dynamic display period, and the result of the determination by the determination means is the specific result of the determination. When the second dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination means based on the above, the first effect is performed at the timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the second dynamic display period. A second effect execution unit that executes the first effect and repeats the execution of the first effect up to a predetermined number of times at the same timing every time the first dynamic display period elapses. Specific format If not the result, the limiting means for limiting the number of times that the first effect is performed in a continuous below the predetermined number of times, and has a.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the dynamic display period determining means is configured to determine the first dynamic display period more easily than the second dynamic display period. Is what it is.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the first effect execution means executes the first effect based on a start timing of the first dynamic display period. It is.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the first dynamic display period is configured to have a period shorter than twice a rendering period of the first rendering. Is what it is.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the ball entry means into which the game ball can enter, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry means, and the acquisition means Discriminating means for discriminating the acquired information based on satisfaction of a discriminating condition; storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquiring means at least until the discriminating condition is satisfied; Display means for displaying identification information based on the result; privilege providing means for providing a benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means; Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, Display period determination means A dynamic display period storing means for storing at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period by a predetermined multiple as the dynamic display period to be determined. And when the first dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means, a first effect is executed at a timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the first dynamic display period. When the second dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit based on the result of the determination by the effect execution unit and the determination unit being the specific determination result, the second dynamic Executing the first effect at a timing when the first period elapses from the start of the dynamic display period, and repeatedly executing the first effect at a predetermined timing the same time each time the first dynamic display period elapses Possible (2) an effect executing means; and limiting means for limiting the number of times the first effect is continuously executed to less than the predetermined number of times when the result of the determination by the determining means is not the specific result of determination. .

  This has the effect of increasing the interest of the player.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display period determining means is configured to determine the first dynamic display period more easily than the second dynamic display period.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect execution means executes the first effect based on the start timing of the first dynamic display period.

  Thus, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first dynamic display period is configured to have a period shorter than twice as long as the production period of the first production.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the control processing can be simplified.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of an upper lifting unit. It is a front view of an upper lifting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper elevating unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of an upper elevating unit. (A) is a front view of the first gear, (b) is a rear view of the first gear, (c) is a front view of the second gear, and (d) is a second gear. FIG. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front perspective view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side slide member. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a driving slide member. It is a rear view of a drive side slide member. 26A is a front perspective view of the connection member, FIG. 26B is a front view of the connection member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26A, and FIG. 26C is an arrow of FIG. It is a rear view of the connection member seen in XXVIc direction. It is a rear view of a 2nd passage formation member and a connection member. It is a rear view of a 2nd passage formation member and a connection member. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXX in FIG. 29. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and a left swing unit. It is a front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a swing operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a swing operation unit. It is a front view of a swing operation unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit and a left swing unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit and a left swing unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of the rotation unit in the state where the guide member was removed. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit in the state where a guide member was removed. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of the rotation unit in the state where the rotation member, a part of the pitching device, and the guide member were removed. It is a front schematic diagram of a guide member. (A) is a front view of the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-side rotation member and the other-side rotation member along the line LIb-LIb in FIG. 51 (a). is there. It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit cut | disconnected by the plane containing the rotation axis of a center transmission member. It is a front view of a case member and a drive mechanism. (A) is a front view of the rotating member, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LV in FIG. 54 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of a division member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a division member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a division member. It is an exploded back perspective view of a division member. (A) and (b) are the upper surface perspective view and the lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned at the 1st area. (A) and (b) are the upper surface perspective view and the lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned at the 2nd area. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is an exploded front perspective view of an arm rotation mechanism. It is a front view of the pitching apparatus in the state where the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism was arranged in the holding position. It is a front view of the pitching apparatus in the state where the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism was arranged at the separated position. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding pieces are arranged at a protruding position. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at a retracted position. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the protruding position, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the holding piece retracting mechanism along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. It is sectional drawing. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the holding piece retracting mechanism along the line LXIXb-LXIXb in FIG. 69 (a). It is sectional drawing. It is a front perspective view of a guide member. It is a rear perspective view of a guide member. It is a front view of a guide member and a rotating member. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotation member in the first section, and (b) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotation member in the second section. (A) to (d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation driving member is rotated by 30 degrees. FIG. 9 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the state of engagement or disengagement of the one-side rotation drive member and the other-side rotation drive member with the divided member and the phase. (A) to (c) are state transition diagrams for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member. It is the elements on larger scale which expanded the part in the 1st section of a rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left swing unit in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a front view of the main body member of the distal end wall member, (b) is a top view of the main body member of the distal end wall member, and (c) is a line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 79 (b). It is sectional drawing of the main body member of a front-end wall member, (d) is a front view of the main body member of a front-end wall member. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit and the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. (A) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a), and (c) FIG. 4 is a partial front view of a driving-side slide member. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during symbol variable display, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where a combination of symbols to be lost is stopped and displayed. . (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case where the combination of the symbol which becomes a big hit is stopped and displayed, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during execution of a time saving suggestion effect. is there. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case where a departure is reported in a time-saving suggestion effect, and (b) is an example of a display mode in a case where a hit is reported in a time-saving suggestion effect. FIG. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during execution of an increase effect. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during execution of a roulette chance production, and (b) is a figure showing a state where a thrown ball is performing a rocking operation on a holding piece. . (A) is a diagram showing a state where a ball has fallen into a pocket in a roulette chance effect, and (b) is a diagram showing a state where a ball has fallen into a hit pocket. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a case where an additional effect is executed, and (b) is an example of a display mode in a case where a lucky number corresponding to the additional effect is notified in the increased effect. FIG. It is a front view of back LED. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a case where a lighting area of a part of a rear LED is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%. It is a front view of the rotating member in the case where the lighting area of a part of back LED is set to the lighting state of 100% of lighting rates. (A) is a front view of the back LED when the lighting state is set for each lighting area of the back LED, and (b) is a lighting state setting for each lighting area of the back LED. It is a front view of the rotating member when performing. (A) is a front view of the back LED at the time when the back LED turns 1/3 after the setting of the lighting state, and (b) is the front view of the back LED when the back LED turns 1/3 after the setting of the lighting state. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the rear LED when the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the correction section is corrected, and (b) is a case where the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the correction section is corrected. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a figure which shows the case where the ball which is oscillating is arrange | positioned out of the detection range of a ball detection sensor, (b) is the figure which shows the ball which is oscillating in the detection range of a ball detection sensor. It is a figure showing the case where it is arranged. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing about the control of a stepping motor. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number table, and (c) is a first random number table. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special figure per hit type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special type 2 winning type selection table. It is the model which showed typically the state transition method of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number table, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal middle and big hit table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal middle-out table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time-saving medium-and-large jackpot table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detailed contents of the extended holiday table included in the time-saving medium-and-large jackpot table; FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table during the working hours, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the detailed contents of the table during the extended holiday included in the working hours table. FIG. (A) is a timing chart showing the time change of the mode of the roulette chance, and (b) is a timing chart showing the time change of the mode of the roulette chance when the fluctuation is interrupted during the working hours. is there. (A) is a timing chart showing the time change of the mode of the winning roulette chance, and (b) is a timing chart showing the time change of the mode of the winning roulette chance when the fluctuation is interrupted during the working hours. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a game result setting table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a state setting table. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of an operation scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents of an upper elevating unit table, and (c) is a contents of a specific opening table. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the initial operation table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the rotation position determination table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the hit position storage area typically. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a lighting position storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first storage area, and (c) is a second storage area. (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third storage area. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the display data table typically. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 change start process performed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on state setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the origin return process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the swing effect process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fall control process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows discharge detection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process performed by MPU in an audio ramp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the disconnection determination process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an execution command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an initial operation process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a rotation setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lighting setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket allocation process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 winning command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the display number selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece in the second control example, and (b) is a front view of the holding piece in the second control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the arrangement | positioning of each ball detection sensor in 2nd control example, and the correspondence with an area. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the amplitude discrimination table in the second control example. It is. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a swing angle determination table in a second control example. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the swing effect process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fall control process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows amplitude discrimination processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 2nd example of control. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a swing angle control process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a rotation setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating execution command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the arrangement | positioning specific processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the specific process during rotation performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of non-specification performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the specific process during rocking | swing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of the time change of the effect mode when the hit middle variation is set during the extended-play mode in the third control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the third control example. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the time change of the effect form when the deviation middle fluctuation | variation was set during the extended play mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the timing change of the effect mode when the hit short fluctuation is determined after the disconnection short fluctuation has been determined twice consecutively in the extended play mode in the third control example. (B) is a timing chart showing the time-based change of the presentation mode when the short-circuit variation is determined three times consecutively during the extended-villa mode. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM in an audio ramp control device in a third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the third control example. is there. It is the mimetic diagram which showed typically the contents of the extended-short-home big hit table in the 3rd example of control. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a table for out-of-condominium in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an additional region selection table. . FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the hit position storage area in the 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket distribution process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the additional position determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 winning command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous variation pattern selection table in the fourth control example. It is a figure, (c) is a block diagram showing the composition of the operation scenario table in the 4th example of control, and (d) showed the contents of the upper swing effect table in the 4th example of control typically. It is a schematic diagram. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM in a voice lamp control device in the 4th example of control. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a rotation setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 winning command processing 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern selection process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the upper swing effect process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the operation | movement aspect of the left swing unit in the case of a left swing effect in execution in 5th control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the pitching press effect in 5th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the left swing unit table in the fifth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the first left swing unit table in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd left swing unit table in 5th control example. FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows fall control processing 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the notice effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pitching press effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket distribution processing 5 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 winning command processing 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed the display aspect of the variable display performed during "normal mode" in the 6th control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which showed the display aspect of the variable display performed during "preparation mode" in the 6th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the symbol position selection table in the sixth control example. FIG. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM in a sound lamp control device in the 6th example of control. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the display position selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop position selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 5 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a signal waveform of a lighting control command in a first control example.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  On the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to (i), whereby the ball is hit on the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged in the front direction. By sliding the ball-pulling lever 52 in the rearward direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand boxes") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640a, the second variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is formed by the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1). See) on the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640a, the second variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be properly used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640a. . Specifically, when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball has won the second ball entrance 640a, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by a lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device is used to display a round during a jackpot. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to a prize winning at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, there are prepared probability change jackpots A to K and normal jackpots A and B. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “probable change jackpots A to K” have a maximum number of rounds of two rounds, and shift to a special symbol high probability state after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, when "normal jackpots A and B" are reached, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the special symbol low probability state after two rounds of jackpots.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) according to the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of a second symbol described later increases and a ball easily wins at the second entrance 640a. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a state of a game in which a ball can easily be won to 640a. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable changes or during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the motorized accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is opened is changed, and a longer time than during normal times Is set. When the electric accessory 640b is in an open state (open state), a ball is awarded to the second entrance 640a as compared to when the electric accessory 640b is in a closed state (closed state). It is easy to do. Therefore, during probable changes or during working hours, it is easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640a, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a, or in addition to changing the opening time, one time A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640b is opened from the normal number. In addition, during probability change or during working hours, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640b is opened once. At least one of the number of times to perform the change may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640b is opened per one time is not determined. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal case.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a as a trigger to synchronize with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing symbol variation display, and an LED for varying display of the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device 83 (not shown).

  Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol “O” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol). If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entrance 640a is moved. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640b of the second entrance 640a. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640a.

  In addition, the second entrance 640a may be increased during the probability change or during the working hours by increasing the probability of hitting during the probability changing or the working hours, or by increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640b per hit. If the hemisphere is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640b may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. If so, a symbol "x" is displayed as a symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol display. You may make it perform using a part of 3 symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball wins in the first entrance opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is made at 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in a front view, a second entrance 640a where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second entrance 640a, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on by the second entrance switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640a is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640a are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640a are different numbers, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball opening 64 may be set to three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640a may be set to five.

  An electric accessory 640b is attached to the second entrance 640a. The electric accessory 640b is configured to be openable and closable, and usually, the electric accessory 640b is in a closed state (extended state), so that the ball is unlikely to enter the second entrance 640a. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640 b is in the open state ( (Retracted state), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640a.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640b is opened (retracted) increases. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640b is opened is longer than during normal working. Therefore, during probable changes and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second entrance 640a as compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball has won the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball has won the second entrance 640a is the same regardless of whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state. is there. However, as the type of the jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot, the selection ratio of the jackpot type that can acquire a relatively large amount of prize balls is set higher when a ball is won at the second entrance 640a. Have been. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have a motorized accessory as in the second entrance 640a, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second entrance 640a is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640a. The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the 64 (so-called “left hit”). It is more advantageous for a player to aim for a jackpot.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, the ball is passed through the through gate 67, so that the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a tends to be in an open state, and the second entrance 640a can be easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 a so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to be driven by the electric accessory. It is more advantageous for the player to make the player open and aim for a big hit by winning the second entrance 640a.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 82a is provided at the upper left of the first entrance 64, and a first specific winning opening 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the first variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to a predetermined opening pattern according to the jackpot type at the time of a specific jackpot (for example, the probability jackpot A). As a predetermined opening pattern, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times (opening pattern A) and an opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once ) Are provided.

  The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 82a according to a predetermined opening pattern can be repeated, for example, at most twice (two rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed. In each round, even if the opening pattern has not been completed, when it is detected that a predetermined number (for example, 10) or more balls have won the first specific winning opening 82, the first forcing is forcibly performed. The variable winning device 82a is closed and the end of the round is set.

  A second variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first entrance 64, and a second rectangular winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion of the second variable winning device 65. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to a prize in the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640a becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. When the jackpot type is the type corresponding to the second specific winning opening 65a, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball easily enters the second specific winning opening 65a. In this special game state, the second specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won). That is, a longer opening time is set as compared to the type of the big hit in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened. Therefore, in the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened, the upper limit number (for example, 10) of balls can be won in the second specific winning opening 65a in many cases. On the other hand, more prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to make the second specific winning opening 65a of the type of the jackpot to be opened. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot, the second specific winning opening 65a can be noticed. .

  The second specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the second specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the second specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, at most twice (two rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The second variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening / closing frontward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis ( (Not shown)). The second specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or is hardly won. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front lower side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the state with the closed state.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first entrance port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 uses the MPU 201 to perform major jackpot lotteries, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. Execute the process.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp, and a cover for opening and closing the second specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the lower side as an axis, and the MPU 201 issues various commands to these via an input / output port 205. And control signals.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, various sensors 230, the frame button 22, and the like.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

  FIGS. 6 and 7 show a state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the lowered position. In FIGS. 9A and 9B, the second path forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the first path forming member of the left swing unit 500 are shown. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is connected to the liquid crystal lifting unit 520, and FIG. FIGS. 6 to 10 show a state in which the upper elevating unit 300 is arranged at the ascending position.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and includes an upper elevating unit 300, a liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and a left swing unit in an inner space of the rear case 210. 500, a rotation unit 600, and a light emitting decoration member 700 are respectively housed.

  The rear case 210 includes a bottom wall 211 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 212 erected from four outer edges of the bottom wall 211 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. The bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 has a concave portion having a substantially circular frontal shape at the center thereof, and the rotating unit 600 is housed in the concave portion. The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the rotating unit 600, and the upper elevating unit 300, the left swing unit 500, and the decorative light emitting member 700 are connected to the upper edge, the left edge, and the lower edge of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. It is arranged in each part.

  The upper elevating unit 300 includes a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating members 330 arranged side by side in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 8), and the elevating members 330 are independently provided in the height direction (FIG. 8). It is formed to be able to move up and down (up and down) (see FIGS. 12 and 13). In a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the lowered position, when the elevating body 330 is arranged at the elevating position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 8). When the 330 is arranged at the lowered position (see FIG. 12), a part of the third symbol display device 81 is made invisible by the elevating body 330.

  The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 has a pair of guide rods 451 that are disposed in a vertical position with their axes aligned in the vertical direction and that are disposed at predetermined intervals in the width direction. A drive slide member 420 and a driven slide member 430 supported so as to be slidably displaceable, and a drive motor 441 that drives the drive slide member 420 up and down are provided. The drive motor 441 drives the drive slide member 420 up and down. Accordingly, the driven slide member 430 is moved up and down by being driven.

  That is, when the drive side slide member 420 is raised, the drive side slide member 420 pushes the driven side slide member 430 upward while resisting the action of gravity, while the drive side slide member 420 is lowered. As the drive side slide member 420 is lowered, the driven side slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight.

  The drive side slide member 420 is provided with a second passage forming member 422, and the driven side slide member 430 is provided with a display device 81 shown in FIG. When the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the connection position between the raised position and the lowered position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (FIG. 9). When the drive-side slide member 420 is located at the ascending position, the upper area of the third symbol display device 81 is located on the back side of the upper elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 10).

  The left swing unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 that swings around the base end in a direction in which the distal end is moved up and down. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the front end side, it is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 9), and the front end side is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, while When swinging in the direction of swinging the distal end side down, it is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10), and the connection of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 to the second passage forming member 422 is released.

  The ball flowing down the game area can flow into the left swing unit 500, and the left swing unit 500 flows in the state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 9). The thrown ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520, while the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10). The inflow ball is sent to the game area via a passage, which will be described later, provided separately from the first passage forming member 520.

  The rotating unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate roulette. In other words, a member (rotating member 640) corresponding to a wheel (rotating disk) formed rotatably, and the wheel formed by partitioning the wheel in the circumferential direction are colored red or black and different numbers are displayed. (A display plate 646 and a partition plate 647) corresponding to a pocket to be thrown, and a ball B thrown from a device on the inner peripheral side of the wheel (a pitching device 650) is provided. It is formed to fall on either.

  In a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is disposed at the lower position (see FIG. 8), almost the entire rotating unit 600 is shielded by the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 so as to be invisible to the player, while the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is at the connection position. In the arranged state (see FIG. 9), a part (lower part) of a member corresponding to the wheel is exposed, and in a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the ascending position (see FIG. 10), In addition to the part (lower part) of the corresponding member, the ball B held on the inner peripheral side of the member corresponding to the wheel and the path from when the ball B is thrown until it falls into the part corresponding to the pocket are They are exposed and made visible to the player.

  The light emitting decoration member 700 includes a case body formed of a light transmissive material, and a plurality of LEDs disposed inside the case body, and forms a light emitted from the LED (for example, a light emitting LED). By changing the number and the light emission time), an effect by light emission is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20, the detailed configurations of the upper elevating unit 300, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotating unit 600, and the light emitting decoration member 700 will be described. First, the upper elevating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper elevating unit 300. 11 and 12 show a state in which all the elevating bodies 330 arranged side by side in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 12) are arranged at the ascending position. In FIG. 13, all the elevating bodies 330 are lowered. The state where it is arranged at the position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, in the upper elevating unit 300, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating bodies 330 are arranged in the width direction of the base member 310 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape. It is configured to be able to move up and down between a raised position (see FIG. 12) and a lowered position (see FIG. 13). Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each lifting / lowering body 330 will be described.

  FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the upper elevating unit 300 includes a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310 and a space for accommodating the transmission device 350 between the base member 310 and the base member 310. A back cover 320 fastened and fixed to the back side, an elevating body 330 in which a rack 332 is accommodated between the base member 310 and the back cover 320 and a circular effect part 331 is arranged on the front side of the base member 310; A driving device 340 that is fastened and fixed to the back cover member 320 and generates a driving force required for the elevating operation of the elevating body, and a transmission device 350 that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the elevating body 330 Prepare.

  The cover member 310 includes a semicircular recessed portion 311 having a semicircular shape with the center of the circle disposed at the lower end and recessed from the front side surface to the rear side, and a rack 332 of the elevating body 330 from the rear side surface. A guide rib 312 protruding in a rib shape toward a position with a slight gap left and right.

  The semicircular recessed portion 311 has a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rendering portion 331 of the elevating body 330, and the center of the circle of the semicircular recessed portion 311 and the center of the rendering portion 331 are in a vertical line. Is arranged at the position that matches. Thus, when the rendering section 331 moves upward, it can be moved to a position in front of the base member 310 up to a position where the rendering section 331 interferes with the semicircular concave section 311, and the vertical width of the base member 310 is secured. Also, it is possible to secure a large moving width of the staging unit 331.

  The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-shaped portion extending in the vertical direction, and protrudes to a position where the guide rib portion 312 can contact the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 in an assembled state (see FIG. 11). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the elevating body 330 from moving in the left-right direction during the elevating movement (parallel movement or tilting operation).

  Further, by forming the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recessed portion recessed from the front side to the back side, the area in which the back side can be made invisible can be increased as compared with the case where the space penetrates in the front-back direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for arranging a mechanical portion (a portion not intended to be visually recognized by a player, such as a gear and a motor).

  The rear cover 320 includes a main body 321 configured in a case shape with the front side and the lower part opened, a cylindrical shaft support 322 protruding from the main body 321 to the front, and a front surface from the shaft support 322. A guide hole 323, which is a long hole formed in a position displaced in the left-right direction with the extension direction coinciding with the vertical direction, and a shaft support portion from the bottom where the upper shaft support portion 322 protrudes. 322, and a locking portion 324 formed in a rib shape along the radial direction.

  The shaft support 322 is a portion that supports the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, respectively, and the guide hole 323 is a hole that guides the elevating operation of the elevating body 330.

  The locking portion 324 is disposed vertically above and vertically below the axis of the upper shaft support portion 322, and in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the ascending position or the descending position, respectively, the first The end of the locking arc 351c of the gear 351 is a portion that can be brought into contact in the rotation direction.

  The elevating body 330 includes an effect portion 331 configured in a circular plate shape, and a rack 332 fixed to the back surface of the effect portion 331 and extending vertically in a position spaced from the rear side surface of the effect portion 331. , Is provided.

  The rendering section 331 is a section in which a circular liquid crystal panel is disposed inside a circular outer frame, and performs rendering by displaying patterns and graphics on the liquid crystal panel.

  The rack 332 includes a slide shaft 332 a protruding to the rear side and protruding to a position where the rack 332 is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the rear cover 320.

  The slide shaft 332a does not have a plurality of protrusions but one protrusion. Therefore, the number of the guide holes 323 can be reduced to one, so that the space for disposing the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction can be suppressed, and a large moving distance of the rack 332 can be secured. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can contact the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, even if the rack 332 is connected to the guide hole 323 at one position, the rack 332 is not moved in the left-right direction. Can be prevented. Thereby, when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, the staging portion 331 can be prevented from swinging in the left and right direction, and the gap between the second gear 352 and the rack 332 can be prevented from fluctuating and the meshing relationship can be prevented from deteriorating. be able to.

  The driving device 340 includes a driving motor 341 that is a driving source fastened and fixed to the rear cover 320, and a driving gear 342 that is rotated by rotation of a driving shaft of the driving motor 341 and transmits driving force to the transmission device 350. .

  The transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support 322 and meshed with the drive gear 342, and is meshed with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and supported by the shaft support 322. And a second gear 352.

  As described above, the plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating members 330 are provided with the independent driving motors 341, respectively. It can be individually raised and lowered. Since the technical ideas of the lifting members 330 are common, the lifting member 330 arranged at the left end of FIG. 11 will be described below, and the description of the other lifting members 330 will be omitted.

  Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16B is a rear view of the first gear 351, and FIG. 16C is a front view of the second gear 352. FIG. 16D is a rear view of the second gear 352.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the first gear 351 has a through hole through which the shaft support 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and a main body 351a in which gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. In the outer peripheral surface of the main body 351a, a portion where the formation of the gear teeth is omitted is extended to about half the length of the gear teeth (extends to a pitch circle C1 where the contacts of the meshing teeth are connected). Abutment portion 351b formed in the radial direction with an extension length), and a lock projecting from the rear side surface of main body portion 351a in an arc shape centered on the axis along a direction parallel to the axis. And an arc portion 351c.

  The abutting portion 351b has a distal end surface in a radial direction having an arc shape with a radius r around the center axis of the main body portion 351a, and has a tooth thickness (circular arc) of approximately two to three gear teeth formed on the main body portion 351a. (The tooth thickness in the range of approximately 45 degrees to 60 degrees). That is, since the formation length in the circumferential direction of the main body 351a is longer than the tooth thickness of one gear tooth, the strength in the circumferential direction can be secured as compared with the gear teeth of the main body 351a.

  The locking arc portion 351c is a portion whose distal end in the circumferential direction can contact the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the rear cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. Has a role.

  As shown in FIGS. 16C and 16D, the second gear 352 includes two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side and the rear side, and has an intermediate plate 353 configured in a donut plate shape. And a gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially irregular tooth shape, and a spur gear shape formed on the back side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshed with a rack 332 (see FIG. 15). And a transmission gear unit 355.

  The intermediate plate 352 is formed so as to protrude radially outward from tips of gear teeth of the modified gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the mating member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (refer to FIG. 15)) overlaps in a direction parallel to the tooth surface and can be brought into contact with the mating member (refer to FIG. 17). The movement in the direction parallel to the tooth surface during the elevating operation of the 330 can be suppressed.

  The deformed gear portion 354 is a portion that meshes with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), and has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted. A main body 354a to be formed, a receiving portion 354b formed on a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the main body 354a where the gear teeth are not formed, and one end of the receiving portion 354b (the right side of FIG. 16C) And an adjacent gear tooth 354c adjacent to the end).

  The receiving portion 354b extends counterclockwise from the adjacent gear teeth 354c along the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a (the side where the first gear 351 bites into the adjacent gear portion 354c when the lifting body 330 is moved upward. ) Is formed at an arrangement angle of about two gear teeth (approximately 30 degrees to 50 degrees), and when the transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support portion 322, the distal end surface of the contact portion 351b is formed. And the tooth height of the adjacent gear tooth 354c between the curved wall portion 354b1 and the circumferential tooth surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c. And a connecting wall portion 354b2 formed with a half of the tooth height (tooth length extending to a pitch circle C2 connecting the contact points of the meshing teeth). Therefore, the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the side of the connection wall portion 354b2 has an overhang length that is approximately half the radial extension length of the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the side opposite to the connection wall portion 354b2. The connecting wall 354b2 is formed integrally with the connecting wall 354b2 so as to protrude radially from the connecting wall 354b2.

  As shown in FIG. 16C, in a state where the transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support portion 322, the second gear 352 has a curved wall along an arc shape having a radius r formed by the distal end surface of the contact portion 351b. When the portion 354b1 is in the posture of being arranged, the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the arc of the radius r (the second gear 352 side) (the adjacent gear teeth 354c have the radius r of the radius r). It is limited to formation at a position that does not interfere with the circle).

  Next, the elevating operation of the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. Since the operation path of the ascending operation and the descending operation are common, the ascending operation will be described here, and the explanation of the descending operation will be omitted.

  17 to 20 are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in which the elevating operation of the elevating body 330 is illustrated in chronological order. Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state in which the elevating body 330 is disposed at the lowered position. In FIG. 18, the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in front view from the state illustrated in FIG. FIG. 19 illustrates a state in which the distance-up operation has been performed and the circumferential end of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 has started to mesh with the adjacent gear tooth 354c of the second gear 352. In FIG. 19, the state illustrated in FIG. The state immediately after the first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise in front view and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in front view, and the contact between the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c is released. FIG. 20 illustrates a state in which only the first gear 351 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount in a front view from the state illustrated in FIG. 19.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the elevating body 330 is moved up and down by the driving force of the driving motor 341 (see FIG. 14) being transmitted to the rack 332 via the driving gear 342 and the transmission device 350. You. More specifically, the driving force of the driving gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 meshed with the driving gear 342 to the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 meshed with the first gear 351. The rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to the rack meshed with the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 16D) of the second gear 352, so that the elevating body 330 moves up and down.

  In the lowered position illustrated in FIG. 17, the slide shaft 332a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the rear cover 320. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically prevent the rack 332 from moving further downward.

  Further, in the state illustrated in FIG. 17, the circumferential end of the locking arc portion 351 c of the first gear 351 and the locking portion 324 on the lower side of the back cover 320 abut, so that the first gear 351 is formed. Is mechanically prevented from rotating in the clockwise direction (the direction in which the rack 332 is moved down) when viewed from the front.

  Accordingly, even if the drive gear 342 is over-rotated due to poor control of the drive motor 341 or the like, a load is generated to rotate the first gear 351 further clockwise from the state shown in FIG. Since the rotation of the first gear 351 is mechanically prevented, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the situation where the rack 332 moves down can be avoided. 15) is pressed against the lower surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15), thereby preventing the slide shaft 322a or the guide hole 323 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the process of elevating the elevating body 330, the circumferential end face of the contact portion 351 b whose circumferential tooth thickness is larger than the other gear teeth meshes with the adjacent gear tooth 354 c. Therefore, the load (the load due to the weight of the elevating body 330) transmitted in the reverse direction from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 can be received by the contact portion 351b having a greater strength than other gear teeth. Thus, the durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.

  Since the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 extends to the pitch circle C1 and the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 extends to the pitch circle C2, the contact portion 351b is connected in the state of FIG. It is brought close to the position where it rubs against the wall 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b can be brought into contact with the adjacent gear tooth 354c at a portion close to the root of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be improved.

  Further, since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are connected to one side in the circumferential direction to the connecting wall portion 354b2, the strength against the load received from the circumferential direction is improved as compared with the other gear teeth. In other words, since the radially extending length of the side surface on the side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 is shortened, resistance to deformation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c in a direction perpendicular to the tooth height direction increases, and the connecting wall portion 354b also increases. Since the 354b2 is formed integrally with the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion that receives the force applied to the adjacent gear tooth 354c is increased. Accordingly, the resistance of the adjacent gear teeth 354c to deformation in the circumferential direction increases. This can prevent the adjacent gear teeth 354c from being damaged when receiving the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in a state immediately after the lifting / lowering body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, the arc-shaped tip of the abutting portion 351b abuts on the adjacent gear tooth 354c. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, the transmission of the driving force in the rotation direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. You.

  Therefore, the force supporting the weight of the elevating body 330 meshed with the second gear 352 is not transmitted from the first gear 351, and the elevating body 330 starts moving in the falling direction. It starts to rotate in the direction for lowering (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, the contact portion 351b is arranged in the range of rotation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c (inside the circle formed by the tip of the adjacent gear tooth 354c), so that the second gear When rotating 352, it is necessary to push the contact part 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

  Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component toward the axial side of the first gear 351. Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

  The axial component Fa is not in the direction in which the first gear 351 can rotate, and in a state where the rigidity of the first gear 351 is ensured (in a structure that does not expand and contract in the radial direction), the abutting portion is formed by the axial component Fa. It is difficult to push 351b out of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

  The circumferential direction component Fb is directed in the rotation direction of the first gear 351, but since the adjacent gear tooth 354 c and the contact portion 351 b contact at a point, the circumferential component Fb slides between the adjacent gear tooth 354 c and the contact portion 351 b. And the first gear 351 is not easily rotated, so that it is difficult to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the circumferential component Fb.

  Accordingly, since the abutting portion 351b is prevented from being pushed to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the second gear 352 is prevented from rotating, and the second gear 352 and The state of the elevating body 330 is maintained.

  The contact portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are both formed in an arc shape having a radius r around the first gear 351 and, as shown in FIG. Since the first gear 351 is abutted against the surface in the direction, the rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received using the entire area of the curved wall portion 354b1. Thus, even if the stop of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is delayed after the elevating body 330 reaches the ascending position, it is possible to prevent the first gear 351 from over-rotating, and to stop the drive motor 341. Can be prevented from affecting the operation mode of the elevating body 330.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates and stops until the locking arc portion 351c contacts the upper locking portion 324. Between FIG. 18 and FIG. 20, since the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 pushes the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the second gear 352 is rotated. The position of 354c is aligned with the position of the second gear 352, so that the state where the adjacent gear teeth 354c abut on the tooth tip surface of the abutment portion 351b in the state shown in FIG. 20 can be reliably formed.

  Since the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position from the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the rotation of the second gear 352 in the direction for moving the rack 332 upward (clockwise in FIG. 20) is restricted. Is done. Therefore, even if the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 19 with respect to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 does not rotate. Therefore, a state in which the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be reliably formed.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in a state in which the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, the second gear 352 has a curved wall portion 354b1 along an arc shape with a radius r formed by the distal end surface of the contact portion 351b. Since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the circular arc having the radius r (on the side of the second gear 352), only the first gear 351 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 19 (counterclockwise direction).

  At this time, since the tooth thickness of the contact portion 351b is thicker than the other gear teeth (about the thickness of two to three gear teeth), the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is moderated. can do. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops at the intermediate phase from the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b at the contact position is the same. And the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted.

  In addition, the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions can be restricted while the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is kept low. That is, even if the second gear 352 starts to rotate clockwise in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b comes into contact with the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b, so that the direction of the load is described in detail below. The rotation of the second gear 352 is regulated in the same manner as when the set gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other. Therefore, the movement of the rack 332 in both the up and down directions in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position is regulated, so that it is possible to suppress the rattling of the elevating body 330. It is difficult to regulate both the upper and lower directions (particularly, the restriction in the ascending direction) with a conventional crank mechanism, and is first achieved by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in the present embodiment. Things.

  As described above, the shape of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 can prevent the rotation of the second gear 352 in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position. It is not necessary to continuously apply the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) with a magnitude equal to or greater than its own weight in order to maintain the position at the ascending position, and it is possible to suppress energy consumption.

  Further, it is possible to maintain the elevating body 330 at the ascending position by using the dead point of the crank mechanism, but in this case, there is a problem that the crank mechanism becomes large corresponding to the moving distance of the elevating body 330. there were. In the present embodiment, the crank mechanism is not required, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted by the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, so that the size of the transmission portion can be reduced.

  A method of releasing the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, another member that interferes with the contact portion 351b in the rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is rotated in the reverse direction is not provided. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first gear 351 in the direction of lowering the elevating body 330 (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) is allowed.

  When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. 19, and further rotated in the same direction, the restriction in the rotation direction of the second gear 352 is released (the contact part 351b is not rotated). The leading end surface is separated from the adjacent gear tooth 354c), and the elevating body 330 can move downward. That is, the rotation operation of the first gear 351 can release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352, and the first gear 351 can perform another operation to release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352. Since it is unnecessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.

  Next, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 includes a drive-side slide member 420 having a staging portion 422 a having a circular liquid crystal portion and performing an ascending / descending operation, and a member that moves up and down following the drive-side slide member 420. And a driven side slide member 430 provided with a third symbol display device 81. The driven side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are communicated with a common guide rod 451 and operate in the same direction. Is done.

  FIG. 22 is a front exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 includes a base member 410 composed of a pair of long plate-like members, a driving slide member 420 configured to be capable of vertically elevating and lowering, A driven slide member 430 disposed above the side slide member 420 and configured to be operable in the vertical direction, a drive device 440 for generating a driving force for the drive slide member 420 to move up and down, and generated from the drive device 440. A transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 for transmitting the driving force to the driving slide member 420 and guiding the operation of the driving slide member 420 and the driven slide member 430, and lower end portions of the pair of base members 410 And a lower front plate member 460 connected to the drive side slide member 420 and the left side of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. And a cover member 470 which is disposed on the front side of the upper, and mainly includes a.

  The base member 410 includes a main body member 411 configured as a vertically long plate-like member, and a U-shaped concave portion that is disposed at a position that vertically coincides with both upper and lower ends of the main body member 411 and that opens to the front. A guide rod support portion 412 configured and a member disposed inside (vertical to the other base member 410) of a vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412 and extending to the front side of the main body member 411. A stopper 413, a first shaft support 414 protruding in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411 on the side opposite to the locking part 413 across a vertical line drawn from the guide rod support 412, A lowering regulating member 415 which is supported by the shaft supporting portion 414 and regulates a lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420; and a column-shaped protruding member which is disposed below the first shaft supporting portion 414 and is in front of the main body member 411. A second shaft support 416, the elevation regulating member 417 for regulating the upward movement of the driven sliding member 430 while being axially supported on the second shaft support portion 416 mainly comprises a.

  The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450, and has an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In the present embodiment, when the cover member 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, the front opening of the guide rod support 412 is closed, and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support 412.

  The locking portion 413 is a portion that vertically contacts the lower side surface of the fall prevention portion 435 of the driven slide member 430, and the driven slide member 430 further descends from the contact state. Regulate.

  The descent regulating member 415 and the ascent regulating member 417 are members that rotate in accordance with the elevating operation of the driving slide member 420 and have a role of regulating the movement of the driven slide member 430, which will be described in detail later.

  The drive-side slide member 420 is a member that has both left and right ends fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 and is moved up and down by the slide operation of the rack 452.

  The driven slide member 430 does not have an independent driving device, and its left and right ends are slidably supported by the guide rods 451, and move up and down by following the lifting and lowering operation of the drive slide member 420. The driven-side slide member 430 includes a main body member 431 having the third symbol display device 81 and configured to be long in the left-right direction, function units 432 arranged at both ends in the left-right direction of the main body member 431, A guide hole 433 which is a hole bored in the vertical direction in 432 and through which a guide rod 451 is inserted; a hook-shaped portion 434 which extends upward and downward in the left and right outer directions at the lower end of the function portion 432; It mainly includes a fall prevention portion 435 extending rearward inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the function portion 432 (on the side close to the other guide hole 433).

  The hook-shaped portion 434 is a portion that is hooked on the elevation regulating member 417. When the driven slide member 430 is located at the lowered position, the lift regulating member 417 wraps around and engages with the engagement surface 434a, which is the upper surface of the hook-shaped portion 434 (see FIG. 29), so that the driven slide can be performed. The member 430 can be prevented from moving in the ascending direction (for example, it can be prevented from bouncing due to the recoil of the fall). Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is inclined upward and the engaging claw portion 417e of the rising regulating member 417 is formed in parallel with the inclination, the engagement between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the rising regulating member 417 causes the horizontal direction. Wobble can also be suppressed.

  The shape of the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434 (outside the tip of the engagement claw 417e in the state shown in FIG. 29 (the portion on the right side in FIG. 29)) is based on the movement locus of the engagement claw 417e. Also have a shape that fits down. Therefore, even in a state where the engaging claw portion 417e and the hook-shaped portion 434 are engaged with each other and a load is applied to each other, the rotation operation of the elevation restriction member 417 can be performed.

  The drive device 440 includes a drive motor 441 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a drive gear 442 that is rotated by the drive force of the drive motor.

  The transmission device 450 includes a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410, and is slidably supported by the guide rod 451, and the drive side slide member 420 is fastened and fixed, and the drive gear 442. The rack mainly includes a rack 452 meshed from the inside (the inside of the pair of drive gears 442), and a vertically long plate-shaped contact wall 453 extending from the vicinity of the root of the rack 452 to the front side.

  The contact wall 453 has a role of rotating the elevation restriction member 417 to the release side and a role of receiving the urging force of the elevation restriction member 417 to move the rack 452 in a direction away from the drive gear 442, and details will be described later. I do.

  The lower front plate member 460 is bent such that the left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and the center portion is offset by a predetermined amount toward the back side compared to the left and right ends. A main body member 461 having a shape, a guide hole 462 formed in the left half portion of the main body member 461 along the left-right direction (in a manner inclining upward toward the outside), and extending above the main body member 461. And a tubular passage portion 463 whose upper end is opened to the front side.

  The guide hole 462 is a long hole through which the slide shaft 423b of the wiring housing member 423 is slidably guided.

  The tubular passage portion 463 is a tubular member through which a ball can pass, and in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 31), the second passage formation of the drive side slide member 420 is performed. It is a member through which a ball flowing down through the member 422 passes.

  The detailed configuration of the driving side slide member 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, FIG. 24 is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the drive side slide member 420.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the drive-side slide member 420 is a disk having a main body member 421 configured as a plate-like member elongated in the left-right direction and a rendering unit 422a configured of a circular liquid crystal. A second passage forming member 422 whose portion is fastened and fixed to the center of the main body member 421 from the front side, and a groove through which a ball can pass from the disk portion to the left as viewed from the front extends from the disc portion; A wire housing member 423 having one end pivotally supported at the lower left end of the forming member 422 in a front view and the other end supported by the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460; And a connection member 424 that has a passage portion that is axially supported and penetrates along the circumferential direction of the shaft, and that serves as a portion for introducing a sphere into the groove portion 422b of the second flow path forming member 422.

  The main body member 421 is open to the front side to a guide portion 421a that constitutes a part of a cylindrical portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and to a portion that extends from the center to the left as viewed from the front. Mainly includes a groove 421b disposed to be inclined downward to the left in a manner, and a discharge opening 421c formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at a lower left end of the groove 421b with a size larger than the diameter of the sphere. .

  The guide portion 421a is a groove portion having an arc-shaped cross section that is open to the rear side and extends in the vertical direction, and the open portion is closed by a rack 452 (see FIG. 22) of the transmission device 450, so that the guide rod is provided. 451 (see FIG. 22) is formed.

  The groove 421b is a member that forms a path of a sphere in cooperation with the second path forming member 422, and the sphere flowing down along the groove 421b is discharged to the back side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening 421c. You.

  The second passage forming member 422 includes a rendering portion 422a formed of a circular liquid crystal, a shaft support portion 422b protruding in a cylindrical shape from the disk portion disposed on the back side of the circular liquid crystal to the rear side, A sensor member 422c disposed below the shaft support portion 422b and detecting passage of a ball, and a groove that is opened to the rear side with a width that allows the ball that has passed through the sensor member 422c to flow down. A groove 422d having the same shape, a guide 422e forming a cylindrical portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and a shape capable of accommodating the connection member 424 between the shaft support 422b and the sensor member 422c. And a housing recess 422f that is recessed at the center.

  The shaft support 422b is a portion where the connection member 424 is supported. In a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is disposed at the connection position, the sphere flowing down the left swing unit 500 passes through the sensor member 422c via the connecting member 424, and then passes through the passage formed by the grooves 422d and 421b. I do.

  The wire housing member 423 is a member that houses a wire that is extended from the lower front member 460 and the like and that is connected to the effect portion 422a and the like, and that is supported by the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 in a front view. It mainly includes a main body 423a, which is a rod-shaped portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a cylindrical slide shaft 423b protruding rearward from the lower end of the main body 423a.

  The main body portion 423a is a member that accommodates wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shaped cross section, and has a shape that is curved in a manner to be convex in a direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction. You. Accordingly, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape near the position of the pivot support with the second passage forming member 422, and the wiring can be prevented from being broken and broken.

  The slide shaft 423b is a rod-shaped portion inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.

  Next, the configuration of the connection member 424 will be described with reference to FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the connection member 424, FIG. 26B is a front view of the connection member 424 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26A, and FIG. FIG. 27 is a rear view of the connection member 424 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the connecting member 424 has a cylindrical portion 424a formed in a cylindrical shape and supported by the shaft supporting portion 422b, and extends in the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 424a. A plate-shaped upper wall portion 424b to be provided, and a curved plate-shaped lower wall portion 424c arranged to face the upper wall portion 424b with a length longer than the diameter of the sphere below the upper wall portion 424b in a front view. And a connection cover 424d that connects the rear side end portions of the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c and is provided between the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c, and is wound around and connected to the cylindrical portion 424a. And a torsion spring 424e for applying a downward (counterclockwise in FIG. 25B) urging force to the member 424.

  The upper side wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases as it approaches the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a from the radial end of the cylindrical portion 424a, and the side surface is formed along a straight line in FIG. It is a plate-shaped part.

  The lower wall portion 424c is a plate-shaped portion curved and formed along an arc centered on the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a, and has a space between the upper wall portion 424b and the upper wall portion 424b. Will be arranged.

  The connection cover 424d is a plate member that suppresses the sphere passing through the connection member 424 from spilling to the rear side. The opening of the connecting member 424 on the opposite side (front side) of the connection cover 424d is closed by the bottom of the housing recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 abutting from the front side. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from spilling from the open portion of the connection member 424.

  The operation of the connection member 424 with respect to the second passage forming member 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connecting member 424. Note that FIG. 27 illustrates a downwardly inclined state in which the opening formed by the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 is oriented in the left-right direction. In FIG. FIG. 27 corresponds to an upwardly inclined state in which the opening formed by the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the member 424 is directed obliquely upward, and FIG. 27 corresponds to a separated state described later (see FIG. 41), and FIG. This corresponds to a communication state described later (see FIG. 42).

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connection member 424 is rotatable around the shaft support 422 b in a state of being housed in the housing recess 422 f of the second passage forming member 422, and The front side end surfaces of the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c abut on the bottom of the housing recess 422f.

  The accommodation recess 422f is formed in a circular arc shape centered on the shaft supporting portion 422b along the outer diameter of the lower wall portion 424c in a portion facing the lower wall portion 424c in the state shown in FIG. 27. The curved wall portion 422f1 and a surface opposed to the curved wall portion 422f1 are recessed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1 and smoothly connected to the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in an upwardly inclined state (see FIG. 42). And a facing wall portion 422f2 having a curved surface to be formed.

  Since the curved wall portion 422f1 is radially contacted with the lower wall portion 424c in the downwardly inclined state of the connection member 424, the displacement of the connection member 424 in the axial direction can be suppressed.

  Therefore, even if the fitting between the shaft support portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connection member 424 is loosened (a state where the gap is large, for example, a state where the dimension has a gap between 0.5 mm and 1 mm), the connection member When the 424 is in the downward inclined state, the posture of the connection member 424 can be maintained with high accuracy by the contact between the lower wall portion 424c and the curved wall portion 422f1.

  On the other hand, when the fitting between the shaft supporting portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened, the operating resistance generated in the shaft supporting portion is reduced, so that the connection is performed unless a load from another member occurs. The member 424 can be reliably maintained in the downwardly inclined state by the action of gravity and the urging force of the torsion spring 424e. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the connection member 424 is maintained in the upwardly inclined state even when no load is generated from another member.

  The opposing wall portion 422f2 is a portion that guides the ball from the connection member 424 to the sensor member 422c. In the present embodiment, the sphere can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c by bending the surface facing the curved wall portion 422f1.

  The upward inclined state is formed in a communication state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connection member 424 communicate with each other. In this state, since the lower wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, the ball that has rolled and passed through the lower wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1, and the sensor member 422c After passing through the opening, it flows down the groove 422d.

  On the other hand, the downward inclined state is formed in a separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connecting member 424 are separated. In this state, the lower wall portion 424c extends to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower wall portion 422c and the wall surface of the housing recess 422f disposed opposite to the lower end portion (sensor member 422c). Is smaller than or equal to the diameter of the sphere, the sphere is prevented from passing through the connecting member 424 (the sphere is discharged from the lower end).

  Therefore, as described later, even if the ball reaches the connection member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the ball can be stopped by the connection member 424.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. 33, a description will be given of the elevating operation of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430. First, the positional relationship among the drive side slide member 420, the driven side slide member 430, and the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 29 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXX in FIG. FIGS. 29 and 30 show a state in which the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged at the lowered position, and the illustration of a pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. The transmission member 450 is made visible. Further, in FIG. 29, the lowering restriction member 415 and the raising restriction member 417 on the right side in a front view are partially enlarged, and the rack immediately before the contact wall 453 contacts the release convex portion 417c of the raising restriction member 417. The outline of 452 is shown in phantom lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the driven side slide member 430, in the lowered position, the fall prevention portion 435 is brought into contact with the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from below, and the hook-shaped portion 434 is raised. It comes into contact with the regulating member 417 from above. As described above, since the driven slide member 430 is configured to be restricted from moving in both the up and down directions, it is possible to prevent the driven slide member 430 from rattling in the vertical direction at the lowered position.

  In addition, a lift restricting member 417 and a locking portion 413 are provided with a guide rod 451 inserted into the guide hole 433 therebetween, and these can be brought into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven slide member 430, so that the function is improved. The portion 432 can be prevented from rattling in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even when a disturbance occurs in the driven-side slide member 430, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by a player at the moment when the driven-side slide member 430 is placed at the lowered position, the driven-side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the vertical position of the lifting control member 417 and the locking portion 413 are displaced from each other, the functional portion 432 rattles in an oblique direction (for example, a direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the lifting control member 417). Can be suppressed. Therefore, even when a disturbance occurs in the driven-side slide member 430, such as when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player at the moment when the driven-side slide member 430 is placed at the lowered position, the driven-side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Note that, since the locking portion 413 is displaced upward as compared with the rising regulating member 417, the locking portion 413 is disposed at a position far from the driving slide member 420, and the locking portion 413 is The lifting operation of the member 420 can be hardly hindered. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the drive side slide member 420 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the descending regulation member 415 is disposed in front of the elevation regulating member 417, and the height at which the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450 is formed (length of the rack 452 protruding from the vicinity of the tooth root). Is set to a height short of reaching the descent control member 415, so that the descent control member 415 and the contact wall 453 do not abut in the rotation direction of the descent control member 415. In addition, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is disposed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the elevation regulating member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 and the descending regulation member 415 do not abut in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a protruding plate 453a that protrudes from the upper end of the contact wall 453 to the front side, and the protruding plate 453a can be brought into contact with the descent restricting member 415 in the rotation direction.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. Note that FIG. 31 illustrates a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up from the lowered position and is disposed at the connection position, and a pair of right and left cover members in the cover member 470 is not illustrated. Also, in FIG. 31, the lowering regulating member 415 and the rising regulating member 417 on the right side in a front view are partially enlarged.

  In a state where the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the connection position, a ball can be introduced into the connection member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 42).

  As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 31, the lift regulating member 417 is a member that covers the hook-shaped portion 434 from above in a state before the upper end of the contact wall 453 comes into contact with the rise regulating member 417, Rotation can be performed between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the released state shown in FIG. Note that the release state is not limited to the state of FIG. 31, but refers to a state in which the elevation restriction member 417 has been rotated from a position vertically above the hook-shaped portion 434 to a position where the elevation restriction member 417 is retracted.

  The elevation restricting member 417 includes a cylindrical portion 417a pivotally supported by the second shaft support portion 416, an extension plate 417b extending linearly in a tangential direction of the cylinder portion 417a, and one of the extension plates 417b. A release projection 417c vertically projecting from the end (lower end), an engagement projection 417d vertically projecting from the other end of the extension plate 417b, and the engagement projection At the protruding end of the hook-shaped portion 417d, the hook-shaped portion 434 extends in parallel with the extending direction of the hook-shaped portion 434 in an engaged state and is disposed above and inside (upper left of the enlarged view in FIG. 29) the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434. A dovetail portion 417e, a separation inclined portion 417f that is inclined downward on the upper side surface of the protruding end of the engagement convex portion 417d, and one end portion formed around the cylindrical portion 417a is formed on the main body member 411 of the base member 410. How to wrap the elevation regulating member 417 inward by being locked Mainly includes a spring 417g torsion biasing (Figure 29 enlarged view counterclockwise direction), the.

  The extension plate 417b extends above the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. Thus, when the release convex portion 417c is pushed up, the other end of the extension plate 417b can be moved in a direction away from the driven slide member 430, and the release operation can be performed.

  In the engaged state, even when the driven slide member 430 moves upward, the engagement claw 417e engages with the hook-shaped portion 434 (the engagement claw portion between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the functional portion 432). The movement of the driven side slide member 430 is strongly suppressed by the entry of the driven member 417e).

  The release operation of the elevation restriction member 417 will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the contact wall 453 is brought into contact with the release convex portion 417c, while the rising regulating member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. When the rack 452 is raised from this state to the state shown in FIG. 31, the end of the contact wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c, so that the lift restricting member 417 is wound in the outer winding direction (the clockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 31). ), The engaging protrusion 417d is retracted from above the hook-shaped portion 434 (released state).

  That is, the release operation of the elevation restriction member 417 can be performed only by the elevation operation of the rack 452. For this reason, for example, as compared with a case where a solenoid member for releasing the lifting restriction member 417 is separately provided, a driving device for releasing the lifting restriction member 417 is also used by the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22). And the number of driving devices can be reduced (product cost can be reduced). In addition, it is possible to prevent the rise regulating member 417 from being operated carelessly.

  In other words, according to the present embodiment, since the elevation regulating member 417 is operated in accordance with the arrangement of the rack 452, compared with the case where the elevation regulating member 417 is operated by another drive source (such as a solenoid), It is possible to prevent the operation timing of the rack 452 and the lifting control member 417 from being synchronized with each other and to cause an operation failure. When the driven slide member 430 moves upward, the lifting control member 417 is surely shifted to the release state. Can be done. For example, it is possible to prevent the rack 452 from being lifted up while the rise restricting member 417 is in the engaged state, so that an excessive load is applied to the hook-shaped portion 434 and the engaging projection 417d of the rise restricting member 417.

  Further, the rack 452 is raised, and the lift restricting member 417 is shifted to the released state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 is brought into contact with the lower end of the driven slide member 430, so that the rack 452 continues the lift operation. Only when the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 are separated from each other, an engaged state (see FIG. 29) is formed to prevent the driven slide member 430 from rattling while the driven slide member 430 is separated from the driven slide member 430. When the member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, a release state (see FIG. 31) is configured, and the driving force required for raising the driven side slide member 430 can be suppressed.

  Here, in the case where the driving slide member 420 pushes up the driven slide member 430 during the ascent operation of the drive slide member 420 as in the present embodiment, the disengagement between the driven slide member 430 and the engagement portion is performed. Can be performed by the operation of pushing up the driven side slide member 430, but in this case, it is necessary to make the engagement state enough to be released by the pushing up force of the driven side slide member 430, and it is difficult to firmly engage. Becomes In addition, in this case, there is a problem that the driven side slide member 430 vibrates due to a reaction generated when the driven side slide member 430 and the engagement portion are released, and the posture becomes unstable.

  In the present embodiment, on the other hand, the engagement is released by rotating the elevation regulating member 417 and retracting the elevation regulating member 417 from above the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven slide member 430. The force that can be applied to the driven-side slide member 430 and the force that causes the ascending restricting member 417 to rotate can be different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the force that suppresses the upward movement of the driven-side slide member 430 in the engaged state while suppressing the force required for release.

  Further, since the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 do not come into contact with each other when performing the releasing operation of the elevation restriction member 417, it is difficult for the driven side slide member 430 to recoil, and the driven side slide member 430 at the time of the release is released. Posture can be stabilized.

  In the connection state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421c of the drive side slide member 420 and the cylindrical passage 463 of the lower front plate member 460 communicate with each other. Thus, the sphere flowing down the second passage forming member 422 can be discharged to the cylindrical passage portion 463.

  32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. FIG. Note that FIG. 32 illustrates a state where the drive-side slide member 420 moves upward from the state illustrated in FIG. 31 and the protruding plate 453a of the transmission device 450 abuts on the lowering regulating member 415, and FIG. 32 shows a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 32, and the raised plate 453a is disposed at the raised position on the upper side of the lowering regulating member 415. In FIG. 33, the vicinity of the lowering control member 415 is partially enlarged.

  In the state illustrated in FIG. 32, the release convex portion 417c of the elevation restriction member 417 is in contact with the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 is disposed symmetrically, and the direction in which the release protrusion 417c contacts the contact wall 453 is also symmetrical. Therefore, the release convex portion 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive side slide member 420, and it is possible to suppress the drive side slide member 420 from rattling in the left-right direction during the elevating operation.

  Since the lift regulating member 417 is urged in the left and right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 by the torsion spring 417g, the load in the left and right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c. Can be hung. Accordingly, the driving slide member 420 is urged in a constant direction along the left-right direction, so that the posture of the driving slide member 420 during the elevating operation can be stabilized.

  Further, when the driving slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c returns the pair of left and right driving slide members 420 to the center position. The ascending restriction member 417 is left-right asymmetric.

  That is, on the side where the contact wall 453 moves in the direction approaching the release protrusion 417c, the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g is increased and the urging force is increased by further rotating the lift regulating member 417 to the release side. While the force for pushing back the contact wall 453 increases, the torsion spring 417g is rotated by rotating the ascending regulating member 417 in the direction opposite to the release side on the side where the contact wall 453 moves away from the release projection 417c. Is reduced, the urging force is reduced, and the force for pushing the contact wall 453 is reduced. Thereby, it is possible to suppress rattling in the left-right direction when the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down.

  Since the drive gear 442 and the elevation regulating member 417 are disposed on the same side with respect to the rack 452, the urging force of the torsion spring 417g acts in a direction to separate the rack 452 from the drive gear 442, so that the drive side slide member 420 The rack 452 and the drive gear 442 approach each other in the left-right direction, so that an increase in drive resistance can be suppressed (the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).

  That is, when the drive side slide member 420 rattles in the left and right direction and the rack 452 moves in a direction approaching the drive gear 442, the lift regulating member 417 is wound outward (the engagement protrusion 417 d is formed on the left and right outer sides of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400). In this case, the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g increases, and the urging force increases, so that the urging force for pushing back the drive side slide member 420 increases, while the rack 452 is driven. When moving in a direction away from the gear 442, the guide rod 451 supports the rack 452, so that the rack 452 separates from the drive gear 442 beyond a gap provided in a support structure between the guide rod 451 and the rack 452. Is regulated. Thereby, the gap between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is reduced, and it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the meshing resistance. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in a state where the driving slide member 420 and the driven slide member 430 are arranged at the ascending position, the lower surface of the projection plate 453 a of the transmission device 450 has the release projection 415 c of the descent regulating member 415. Contact the upper surface (locked state).

  The protruding plate 453a includes an inclined side surface 453a1 on the lower surface, which is inclined upward and outward toward the left and right.

  The descending inclined member 415 includes a cylindrical portion 415a pivotally supported by the first shaft support portion 414, an extended plate 415b extending linearly in a tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, and one of the extended plates 415b. A release protrusion 415c vertically projecting from an end (upper end) and having a semicircular tip is formed, and one end is connected to the main body member 411 of the base member 410 by being wound around the cylindrical portion 415a. And a torsion spring 415d for urging the descending restricting member 415 in the inner winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 33) by being stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the lowering restriction member 415. Therefore, the supply of the driving force of the driving motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held at the raised position, and the power consumption of the driving motor 441 can be reduced.

  In addition, the rotation of the descent restricting member 415 to the locked state shown in FIG. 33 is performed when the rack 452 is raised and the protruding plate 453a gets over the release convex portion 415c of the descent restricting member 415. Therefore, both the driving force for raising the rack 452 and the driving force for forming the locked state of the descent restricting member 415 can be generated by the driving motor 441 (see FIG. 2). That is, the drive motor 441 can be used as well, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Returning to FIG. 30, the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the descending regulation member 415, the elevation regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering regulating member 415 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 30) as compared with the raising regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 can abut on the rising regulating member 417 in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. And the rear side surface of the descent restricting member 415 can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the contact wall 453.

  Returning to FIG. The descent regulating member 415 and the contact wall 453 are contacted in the front-back direction. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the contact wall 453 and the elevation regulating member 417 are in contact in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 33), and the contact wall 453 and the downward regulation member 415 are in the front-rear direction (see FIG. (Vertical direction). Thereby, the rattling of the drive side slide member 420 in the left-right direction can be suppressed by the rising regulating member 417, and the longitudinal direction (the direction parallel to the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the driving gear 442) can be reduced by the descending regulating member 415. The rattling can be suppressed.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the area of the meshing surface due to the relative movement of the rack 452 and the driving gear 442 in a direction parallel to the tooth surface, and to cause the rack 452 to fall forward in a state where the rack 452 is arranged at the raised position. Can be prevented.

  By rotating the drive gear 442 in the direction in which the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, when the rack 452 is about to be lowered, the protruding plate 453a applies a load to the release protruding portion 415c, thereby lowering the lowering restricting member. 415 is rotated outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 33). Thus, the locking by the descending regulating member 415 is released, and the driving slide member 420 can be moved downward. That is, the locking by the descending regulating member 415 can be released by the driving force of the driving motor 441 (the driving source can be used as well), so that the product cost can be reduced.

  In addition, since the locking of the lowering regulating member 415 is released by the lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420, the lowering of the lowering operation is performed with the operation timing shifted as in the case of rotating the lowering restricting member 415 by another driving source. The drive-side slide member 420 is lowered before the restriction of the member 415 is released, so that it is possible to prevent the drive source and the lowering restriction member 415 from being overloaded.

  In the structure in which both the driving slide member 420 and the driven slide member 430 are maintained at the raised position in the raised position as in the present embodiment, the locking of each member at the raised position is performed by the driven slide member 430. However, in this case, the structure for connecting and separating the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 is complicated, and the cost is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the driven slide member 430 is maintained at the raised position by locking the drive slide member 420, the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 are maintained at the raised position. Therefore, the number of necessary configurations can be reduced (only the driving device 450 and the driving side slide member 420 can be used). In addition, the interlocking of the driven side slide member 430 with the drive side slide member 420 is performed solely by the action of gravity, thereby simplifying the structure between the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420. it can.

  When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven slide member 430 moves down on the rack 452. However, for example, the guide rod 451 becomes dirty and the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (see FIG. 22). ), The descending speed of the driven slide member 430 may be lower than the descending speed of the rack 452. Also in this case, when the driven side slide member 430 contacts the elevation restriction member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 acts on the separation inclined portion 417f of the elevation restriction member 417, and the elevation restriction member 417 can be rotated. By the weight of the driven side slide member 430, the lift regulating member 417 and the hook 434 can be engaged with each other.

  Next, the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 34, the left swing unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the first variable winning device 82a and the first specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13, and the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 82 is played. A passage for passage is provided inside. In the present embodiment, a sensor member 82b that detects that a ball has passed is provided between the first variable winning device 82a and the first specific winning opening 82. Note that the sensor member 82b is a part of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4).

  FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swing unit 500 is configured to hang the first passage forming member 520 downward and to the right in a front view, and is a unit that performs an effect by swinging the first passage forming member 520. is there.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the left swing unit 500 includes a base member 510 forming a skeleton, a first passage forming member 520 pivotally supported by the base member 510, and a base. A driving device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the member 510 to generate a driving force of the first passage forming member 520; a transmission device 540 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520; And a cover member 550 having an introduction cylindrical portion 552 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and connected to the first specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13.

  The base member 510 includes a main body member 511 formed of an L-shaped plate in a front view, a shaft support hole 512 formed in a front-rear direction right end of the main body member in a front-rear direction, and a shaft support hole. A first wall portion 513 which is arranged vertically above the hole 512 and has a flat plate shape whose surface faces in the front-rear direction, and at least one sphere leftward from the lower left end of the first wall portion 513 in a front view A second wall portion 514 which is disposed at an interval and has a curved plate shape whose surface faces in the left-right direction, and a sphere which is disposed on the back side of the second wall portion 514 and reaches the second wall portion 514 is A flow-down passage 515 that flows down, a shaft support portion 516 that is disposed on the lower left of the shaft support hole 512 in a front view and that is protruded in a columnar shape on the front side, and a lock that is provided around the axis of the shaft support portion 516. A wall 517 and a detection sensor 518 disposed above the shaft support 516 to detect the phase of the transmission device. To prepare for.

  The shaft support hole 512 is a hole through which the shaft support portion 521c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted. The first passage forming member 520 swings around the shaft support hole 512.

  The first wall portion 513 includes a pair of guide wall portions 513a extending from both ends in the left-right direction to the front side.

  The locking wall portion 517 includes an arc wall portion 517 a having an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 516 above the shaft support portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517 b extending downward and to the right in front view. .

  The arc wall portion 517a is an end surface of the detection sensor 518 and extends to a circumferential end surface of the shaft support portion 516.

  The first passage forming member 520 includes a long rod-shaped distribution base member 521, which is a member supported by the shaft support hole 512, and a distribution base member 521 disposed on the front side of the distribution base member 521. And a passage cover member 522 that is fastened and fixed and forms a passage through which the sphere can flow down with the distribution base member 521.

  The distribution base member 521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a that constitutes one side of the ball flow passage, and one ball extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 521a from the upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a. An intermediate plate portion 521b disposed at a position separated by a minute gap V1, and a shaft support portion 521c protruding rearward in a columnar shape near the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a and inserted through the shaft support hole 512. A long hole 521d formed in a plate-like portion extending in the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c along the extending direction, and a rear side from an end of the intermediate plate portion 521b on the side of the hanging plate portion 521a. And a gap V1 extending along the left side of the sorting projection 521e as viewed from the rear, in a manner that the width is reduced toward the outside in the radial direction of the shaft support 521c. The upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a extended to the front side Mainly and a curved wall portion 521f which is curved along the arc shape having a center.

  The hanging plate portion 521a has a shape in which the lower portion from the middle portion is bent downward from the middle portion as compared with the upper portion, and a ball feeding portion in which the front-side thick portion is shaved and thinned at the lower end portion. 521a1.

  The gap V1 is a space that allows a sphere reaching the right side of the distribution convex portion 521e in a front view to pass in the front direction.

  The passage cover member 522 has a plate-like plate-shaped portion 522a covered on the front side of the distribution base member 521, and extends in a plate-like shape from both ends in the short direction of the plate-shaped portion 522a toward the back side. And upper and lower wall portions 522b.

  The plate-shaped portion 522a is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and has a ball receiving portion 522a1 which is bent rearward at a portion of the lower end portion which is disposed in front of the ball feed portion 521a1 of the distribution base member 521. Prepare.

  The upper and lower wall portions 522b are portions that roll the sphere that has passed through the gap V1, and since the inclination angle changes at the middle portion as in the case of the hanging plate portion 521a, the falling speed of the sphere can be changed at the middle portion. it can.

  In the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b, a step is provided inside the front end portion. The step has a role of displacing the rolling sphere in a direction opposite to the upper and lower wall portions 522b (a direction from one wall portion to the other wall portion) to decelerate the sphere.

  The ball that has reached the lower end of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the rear side by the ball feeder 521a1 and the ball receiver 522a1. Thereby, the speed of the ball before discharge can be reduced, and the discharge of the ball can be stabilized.

  The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 that is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the drive gear 532 meshes with the main body gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.

  The transmission device 540 includes a main body gear portion 541 that is supported by the shaft support portion 516 and meshes with the drive gear 532, and a first passage forming member that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the eccentric position of the main body gear portion 541 to the front side. The eccentric convex portion 542 inserted into the long hole 521 d of the 520, the eccentric convex portion 542 extends in the radial direction from the main body gear portion 541, is configured to be able to abut on the locking wall portion 517, and is able to pass through the gap of the detection sensor 518. And an extension portion 543 that extends.

  The cover member 550 is connected to the first specific winning opening 82 at the right end of the main body member 551 in a front view, and has a rear end at the first end. A cylindrical introduction cylindrical portion 552 abutting on the wall portion 513, and a pair of guide wall portions 553 extending downward from the left and right ends of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 on the rear side surface of the main body member 551. Prepare mainly.

  The guide wall portion 553 is a portion that overlaps the guide wall portion 513a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The sphere that has passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 flows downward between the guide wall portions 513a and 553.

  The swing operation of the first passage forming member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40 are front views of the swing operation unit 500. FIG. 38 to 40, the illustration of the cover member 550 is omitted, and the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 in a cross-sectional view at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a is illustrated. The external shape is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  In FIG. 38, the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position is shown. In FIG. 39A, the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. In a state in which the split convex portion 521e is disposed at an intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a, in FIG. 39B, the first passage forming member 520 swings by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. 40 shows a state immediately before contacting the connecting member 424, and FIG. 40 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. You.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 occurs when the transmission device 540 is rotated and the position of the long hole 521 d is moved with the movement of the eccentric convex part 542.

  As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, a direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric convex 542 and a direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (radial direction of the shaft support 521c) intersect perpendicularly. I do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress generation of a load for rotating the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the driving gear 532, and the power consumption of the driving motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  In the release position, the extension 543 of the transmission device 540 is disposed in the gap between the detection sensors 518 and abuts against the end of the arc wall 517a. That is, the extending portion 543 has both a role as a portion used for detecting the phase of the transmission device 540 and a role as a detent member.

  As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the right side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed by the distribution convex portion 521e to a path on the left side as viewed from the front, and is discharged to the outside of the game area through the downflow passage 515. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (a), at an intermediate position between the release position and the connection position, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed at an intermediate position between the pair of guide walls 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (stays on the distal end portion of the distribution convex portion 521e). ).

  As shown in FIG. 39B, in a state immediately before the first passage forming member 520 contacts the connection member 424, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (while the ball is still riding on the distal end portion of the distribution convex portion 521e, stay). Thereby, in the state of FIG. 39 (b), the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520, is sent to the connecting member 424, and is prevented from reaching the opposing wall portion 422f2.

  Here, the opposing wall portion 422f2 is smoothly connected to the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in the upward inclined state (see FIG. 42), so that the upper end portion is connected to the connecting member 424 in the downward inclined state (see FIG. 41). From the lower end of the upper side wall 424b. Therefore, when the ball is sent to the connecting member 424 in the downwardly inclined state and the ball collides with the upper end of the opposing wall 422f2, the opposing wall 422f2 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39B, the introduction of the sphere into the first passage forming member 520 is prevented, so that the sphere can be prevented from colliding with the opposing wall portion 422f2, It is possible to prevent the opposing wall portion 422f2 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 40, at the connection position, a direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric convex 542 and a direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (radial direction of the shaft support 521c) intersect perpendicularly. I do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress generation of a load for rotating the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the driving gear 532, and the power consumption of the driving motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  In addition, at the connection position, the extending portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is brought into contact with the inclined wall portion 517b. Accordingly, the phase in which the transmission device 540 is stopped by abutting the extension portion 543 against the inclined wall portion 517b is stabilized, and the extension portion is compared with a case where a load is locally applied to the extension portion 543. 543 can be improved in durability.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the left side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is sorted by the distribution convex portion 521e into a path on the right side in front view, and moves to the front side through the gap V1. From the upper and lower walls 522b of the passage cover member 522 (see FIG. 37).

  The flow of the sphere in the connected state will be described. First, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 82 from the game area through the first variable winning device 82a moves back and forth toward the back side through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 (see FIG. 36), and the first wall portion. When it comes into contact with 513, it flows down the passage formed by the guide walls 513 a and 553, moves forward and backward through the gap V <b> 1 of the first passage forming member 520, and moves upward and downward of the passage cover member 522. Roll on the lower wall of 522b.

  That is, before the ball flows down inside the first passage forming member 520, the ball is sent in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even if the balls are supplied to the first specific winning opening 82 in a daisy chain, the balls can be prevented from jumping and the like and can smoothly flow into the first passage forming member 520. Further, by causing the ball sent in the front-back direction to flow down along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), the direction of the speed of the ball can be changed, and the ball smoothly flows into the first passage forming member 520. Can be done.

  In the first passage forming member 520, the direction in which the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend is changed at an intermediate portion. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend along the straight line Y1 from the middle portion to the base end side (the shaft support portion 521c side), and extend from the middle portion to the front end side (opposite to the base end side). Up to a straight line Y2 inclined downward from the straight line Y1.

  Therefore, the speed of the ball rolling inside the first passage forming member 520 is slower from the base end to the middle portion than from the middle portion to the front end. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the ball immediately after the ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.

  Further, as compared with the case where the first passage forming member 520 is formed in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, the direction in which the ball is thrown from the first passage forming member 520 at the connection position (see FIG. 42). The angle with respect to the direction (vertical direction) in which the sphere is introduced into the sensor member 422c can be reduced. Thereby, the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422 can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the rotation of the transmission device 540 swings the first passage forming member 520, and the arrangement of the distribution convex portion 521e switches the path through which the ball flows down.

  Here, when a wall member is disposed to face the distribution convex portion 521e in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the distribution convex portion 521e approaches the wall member to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere. If the configuration is adopted, when the ball stays in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the ball may be caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, and a malfunction may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position illustrated in FIG. 40, an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the distribution convex portion 521 e and the second wall portion 514, and the distribution convex portion No wall member is disposed on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 across the 521e, and the second wall portion 514 is opened. Therefore, a situation in which the ball is bitten in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e does not occur, and malfunction can be prevented.

  With reference to FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, connection of the flow path between the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 will be described. 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500. In FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, the second passage forming member 422 is viewed in cross section and the connecting member 424 is visible, and the first passage forming member 520 has an outer shape at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a. The distribution convex portion 521e shown in the drawing is visible.

  FIGS. 41 and 42 show a state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 31). In FIG. 41, the left swing unit 500 is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 38). FIG. 42 illustrates a state in which the left swing unit 500 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 40).

  When the first passage forming member 520 is oscillated from the state shown in FIG. 41 to the state shown in FIG. 42, the distal end thereof abuts on the lower side surface of the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424, and the connecting member 424 is moved. Rock it. That is, since the connecting member 424 is moved along with the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, even if the stop position of the drive side slide member 420 is slightly deviated from an ideal position, for example, the first The generation of a gap between the distal end of the passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 can be suppressed. This suppresses the ball from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424, and stabilizes the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. Can be.

  By swinging the connecting member 424, the lower wall portion 424c on which the ball flowing down from the first passage forming member 520 rolls is moved in a direction approaching the tip of the first passage forming member 520. The gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 can be narrowed, and the ball is prevented from falling from the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. Therefore, the throwing of the ball can be stabilized.

  In the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower wall portion 424c is inclined downward toward the sensor member 422c communicating with the groove portion 422d (see FIG. 27). Thereby, the ball can be rolled along the downward inclination, and the ball can be stably sent to the second passage forming member 422.

  Note that the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting passage of the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) and the sensor member 422c through a sphere. For example, in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connection position shown in FIG. 42, the detected numbers of the spheres of the sensor members 82b and 422c match (the sphere remains in the first passage forming member 520). The swing of the first passage forming member 520 toward the release position (see FIG. 41) is started at the timing, thereby preventing the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 to the outside of the game area. can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the ball is distributed by moving the distribution convex portion 521e, and the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 are brought into contact with each other by swinging the first passage forming member 520. The driving force required for the operation of forming the flow path of the sphere by contact is also used (provided by the driving force of the driving motor 531 (see FIG. 36) for operating the first passage forming member 520). Since the states are synchronized, for example, a situation in which a sphere is introduced into the first passage forming member 520 in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 to the outside of the game area.

  Further, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed at the upper end of the distribution base member 521, and partitions (forms the upper end) a wall of a sphere that flows down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36). Doubles. Thus, the cost of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the distribution is performed by other parts, and the balls distributed to the first passage forming member 520 can be surely separated from the hanging plate portion 521a and the passage cover member. 522.

  Next, the rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is a front view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600. FIG. 45 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the rotating unit 600 includes a case member 610 formed in a container shape with one side open, a guide member 620 covered on one side of the case member 610, A driving mechanism 630 disposed between the member 610 and the guide member 620, a rotating member 640 rotationally driven by the driving force of the driving mechanism 630, and a pitch disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. It mainly includes a device 650 and a guide member 680 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640.

  The case member 610 includes a bottom wall portion 611 having a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 erected from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front, and each of the wall portions 611 and 612 forms one surface. It is formed in a container shape whose side is open. The guide member 620 is formed in a disk shape having a ring shape in a front view, and is disposed (fixed) at the standing end of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. Thereby, an internal space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in the internal space.

  The guide member 620 is a member for holding the rotating member 640 so as to be displaceable, and has a connecting link operation groove 621 and an undulating link operation groove 622 formed in the front thereof. The connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section extending along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link of the rotating member 640, which will be described later. The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are inserted respectively.

  Note that the groove widths of the connection link operation groove 621 and the undulation link operation groove 622 are set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameters of the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connecting link operating groove 621 and the undulating link operating groove 622.

  When the rotation member 640 is rotationally driven, the connection link operation groove 621 acts on the connection link member 644 to increase or decrease the interval between the divided members DV (see FIG. 73), while the undulating link operation groove 622 Acting on the undulating link member 648, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are undulated (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, the connection link operation groove 621 and the undulating link operation groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 49 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 in a state where the rotating member 640, a part of the pitching device 650 and the guide member 680 have been removed, and FIG. 50 is a schematic front view of the guide member 620. In FIG. 50, the shapes of the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. Such a two-dot chain line is illustrated as a line passing through the center of the groove width of each of the action grooves 621 and 622.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the connecting link action groove 621 has a large-diameter portion 621a that is curved in an arc with a radius R1 about the axis O, and an arc-shaped curve with a radius R2 about the axis O. And a pair of connecting portions 621c connecting between the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to be larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2 <R1).

  The undulating link action groove 622 includes a large-diameter portion 622a curved in an arc with a radius R3 about the axis O, a small-diameter portion 622b curved in an arc with a radius R4 about the axis O, and a large-diameter portion thereof. 622a and a pair of connecting portions 622c connecting between the small diameter portion 622b. The radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to be larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4 <R3).

  In the present embodiment, the large-diameter portion 621a and the small-diameter portion 621b of the connection link operation groove 621 and the large-diameter portion 622a and the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link operation groove 622 are concentrically arranged about the axis O. In this case, the axis O coincides with the center of rotation when the rotating member 640 is rotated. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotated, the large diameter portions 621a and 622a and the small diameter portions 622a and 622b of the connection link operation groove 621 and the undulation link operation groove 622 act on the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648, respectively. The output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced by suppressing the force.

  In addition, the pair of connecting portions 621c of the connecting link action groove 621 are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase. Similarly, the pair of connecting portions 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase. Therefore, when the rotation member 640 is driven to rotate, the force applied to the connection link member 644 from one connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 and the force applied to the connection link member 644 from the other connection portion 621c. And can be offset. Similarly, the force applied to the undulating link member 648 from one connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 and the force applied to the undulating link member 648 from the other connecting portion 622c can be offset. Accordingly, the force applied to the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, so that the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced. .

  In this embodiment, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link action groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are formed to have different phases. That is, in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 becomes the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter of the undulation link operation groove 622. When the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is inserted into one of the portions 622b and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is connected to the connecting link 644a. It is inserted into one of the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b of the action groove 621.

  Since the connection portions 621c and 622c are portions for changing the interval between the divided members DV or displacing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647, they receive relatively large reaction force from the connection portions 621c and 622c. By preventing 644a and 648a from being simultaneously inserted into connection portions 621c and 622c, necessary driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the driving mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for driving the rotation of the rotating member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a first gear (first A transmission gear train to which the transmission gear 633a) meshes; a central transmission body 634 having a gear 634a meshed with the last gear (second transmission gear 633b) of the transmission gear train; The one-side distribution gear train and the other-side distribution gear train in which the first gear (first distribution gears 635a and 636a) meshes with the gear 634a, and the last gear (the first-side distribution gear train and the other-side gear train) of the one-side distribution gear train and the other-side gear train. It mainly includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and another-side rotation drive member 638 having gears 637a and 638a meshed with the three distribution gears 635c and 636c). The second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.

  The one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are members that are the end of the transmission path for transmitting the rotation driving force generated from the driving motor 631 (the output end of the driving mechanism 630). The motor itself is rotated by the rotational driving force, and the rotation causes the rotating member 640 to rotate. Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 51 (a) is a front view of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation member 638, and FIG. 51 (b) is the one-side rotation member 637 and the other on line LIb-LIb in FIG. 51 (a). It is sectional drawing of the side rotation member 638.

  Since the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are members formed in the same shape, only the one-side rotation drive member 637 will be described, and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described. Only the reference numerals are given in the diagram of FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the one-side rotation driving member 637 is formed in a disk shape, and the engaging portions 637b are recessed at a plurality of positions (three positions in the present embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer edge thereof. It is formed.

  The engaging portion 637b is a portion that engages with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and has a width (a distance between opposing surfaces) from the open side to the recessed inner side. ) Is formed substantially in a V-shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the axial direction). As described later, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement between the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641, and the rotation member 640 is rotated. Can be rotated.

  The one-side rotation driving member 637 is formed with a connection wall 637c that partially connects opposing inner surfaces of the engagement portion 637b. The connection wall 637c is formed in a shape curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front (axial view) with the center of the axis of the one-side rotation driving member 637 as a center, and at the open side of the engagement portion 637b (the one-side rotation driving member 637). (Outer edge side) are connected to each other, and the inner surfaces of the engagement portion 637b on the inner side of the concave portion are not connected.

  Here, when the rotation member 640 is driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637, the engagement and release of the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are intermittently repeated (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 starts to engage with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load is input, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 may be damaged. On the other hand, when the weight of the one-side rotation drive member 637 increases, a large output is required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the connecting wall 637c is formed only on the open side of the engaging portion 637b, reinforcement against an impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start to be engaged. And weight reduction can be effectively achieved at the same time. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced while improving the durability of the one-side drive member 637.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is disposed on the case member 610 except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the center transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back side of the guide member 620. Here, the holding structure of the center transmission member 634 on the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 600 cut along a plane including the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the central transmission body 634 is formed in a hat shape having a circular shape when viewed from the front and a central portion depressed, and a gear 634a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the central depressed portion, and the outermost edge is formed. A protruding portion 634b is formed to protrude radially outward from the portion in a flange shape.

  On the back side of the guide member 620, a pair of holding collars 623 and 624 (see FIGS. 47 and 48) are superimposed at three places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (ie, positions at 120 ° intervals). The extension 634 b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the pair of holding collars 623 and 624. Thus, the center transmission member 634 can be rotatably held on the guide member 620 via the pair of holding collars 623 and 624.

  That is, the displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 52) with respect to the guide member 620 can be regulated by bringing the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634. The displacement of the central transmission member 634 relative to the guide member 620 in the axial direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 52) is regulated by bringing the overhanging portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 into contact with the opposing surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623, 624. it can.

  In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 are formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front (when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the central transmission member 634). Accordingly, since the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 and the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634 can be in a relationship where their arc shapes circumscribe (i.e., point-contact) each other, their contact area is reduced. Thus, the frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, by adopting a structure for holding the outer edge side (overhang portion 634 b) of the central transmission member 634 in this manner, the central recessed portion of the central transmission member 634 is axially attached to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. There is no need to support it, and there is no need for a space for disposing parts for the pivotal support, so that the disposing space for the pitching device 650 described later can be secured accordingly.

  Next, the operation of the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, and illustrates a state where the center transmission member 634 is viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the drive mechanism 630 has a central transmission member 634 disposed at a position concentric with the axis O which is the center of rotation of the rotation member 640, and the second transmission member 634 is provided to the gear 634 a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633b and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged in a state where they are meshed. The third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase (that is, at positions opposing each other with the axis O interposed therebetween).

  Accordingly, when the drive motor 631 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633a, and the rotation of the second transmission gear 633b causes The center transmission member 634 is rotated.

  When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are respectively rotated with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, and the rotation is performed by the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution gear 635b and 636b. The gears 635c and 636c are transmitted to the gears 637a and 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 rotate. Is done.

  As described above, since the central transmission gear 634 is meshed with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a, the central transmission gear 634 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 631, whereby the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, the driving of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In this case, since the central transmission gear 634 is disposed concentrically with the axis O of the rotating member 640, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are viewed in the direction of the axis O. In this case, the rotary member 640 can be disposed inward (on the axial center O side) of the outer edge portion. That is, since the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 do not protrude outside the outer shape of the rotation member 640, the size can be reduced accordingly.

  When the guide member 620 is disposed on the case member 610, the engagement portions 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are located radially outward of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement between the engagement portions 637b and 638b and the engaged portion 641. Thus, the rotating member 640 can be rotated.

  In this case, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are disposed at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, at positions opposing each other with the axis O interposed therebetween). Therefore, as described later, the position at which the driving force is applied to the rotating member 640 (engagement position) is maximally separated, and the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In addition, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are disposed in postures (rotational positions) where the phases of the engaging portions 637b and 638b are different from each other. That is, when one of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is disengaged from the engaged portion 641, the other of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. (One and the other are prevented from being disengaged at the same time). Therefore, as described later, transmission of the driving force from the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 to the rotation member 640 can be suppressed from being intermittent, and the rotation of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. As described above, the rotation member 640 is an annular member in a front view that is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotation mechanism 630, and is positioned concentrically with the center transmission member 634 and the guide member 620. It is arranged on the front side of. In the present embodiment, the rotating member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Here, the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 54 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 640, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the rotating member 640 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member 640 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LV in FIG. 54B.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 includes a plurality (30 in this embodiment) of divided members DV, and the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly to each other along the circumferential direction. Thereby, it is formed in an annular shape in a front view.

  In this case, the plurality of divided members DV are formed so that the distance between adjacent divided members DV can be changed. That is, the rotating member 640 includes a first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected to each other in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a second interval in which the divided members DV have an interval smaller than the first interval. To form a second section S2 that is connected in the circumferential direction. Note that, between the first section S1 and the second section S2, the interval between the divided members DV transitions from the first interval in the first section S1 to the second interval in the second section S2 (or vice versa). Is formed.

  FIG. 56 (a) is a front perspective view of the division member DV, and FIG. 56 (b) is a rear perspective view of the division member DV. FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the division member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the division member DV. 56 to 58, the connection link member 644 of the adjacent division member DV is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to understand the connection structure between the division members DV.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the detected portion 641c is formed in a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV have The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. The divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed and the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed have the same other configuration except for the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c. Therefore, hereinafter, the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the split member DV includes an engaged portion 641, a rear side main body 642 having the engaged portion 641 disposed on the rear side, and a front side of the rear side main body 642. , A connection link member 644 whose base end is rotatably supported between the rear body 642 and the front body 643, and a front body 643 disposed on the front side of the front body 643. The plate holding member 645, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 that are displaceably held by the plate holding member 645, and the front side main body 643 and the plate holding member 645 are slidably disposed. And an undulating link member 648.

  As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion that is engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotation driving members 637 and 638 of the driving mechanism 630, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangular shape in a front view. The rear body 642 is disposed so as to protrude from the rear surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 56B).

  On the mounting surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the rear side main body 642, an opposing portion 641a is formed facing the rear side of the rear side main body 642 at a predetermined interval, and the opposing portion 641a and the rear side main body are formed. The outer edge of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the surface facing the second member 642. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the division member DV (one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642) from rising from the front of the guide member 620.

  A pair of columnar sliding rollers 641b is rotatably supported on the side of the mounting surface of the engaged portion 641 to the rear side body 642. The sliding roller 641b can make its rotation axis perpendicular to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the division member DV) and make its outer peripheral surface abut on the outer peripheral surface of the outer edge of the guide member 620. It is arranged in a posture. Thereby, the sliding resistance when the divided member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a plate-shaped detected portion 641c is formed to protrude from the surface opposite to the surface on which the engaged portion 641 is attached to the rear side main body 642. The detected portion 641c is a plate-shaped portion detected by the detection sensor 684 disposed on the guide member 680, and has a horizontal posture on the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV). You.

  The rear side body 642 is a part whose rear surface is placed on the front surface of the guide member 620 and slides on the front surface of the guide member 620 when the rotating member 640 rotates, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view. In a state where the rotating member 640 is provided on the guide member 620, the rear side main body 642 is provided in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, each of the rear side main body portions 642 is arranged in a radial straight line with the axis O as the center (see FIG. 54).

  The rear side body 642 is provided with a connecting link opening 642a and an undulating link opening 642b, which are groove-shaped openings extending linearly along the longitudinal direction, and a front surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 57). A shaft support portion 642c formed to support the base end side of the connection link member 644 between the front side main body 643 (the shaft support portion 643b) and a bent portion protruding from the rear surface on the other longitudinal side (the upper side in FIG. 58). 642d.

  The connection link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 of the adjacent division member DV is slidably inserted. When the insertion portion 644a is inserted into the connection link opening 642a, the division member is opened. The DV can be connected to the adjacent divided member DV via the connection link member 644. In addition, the connection link member 644 allows the tip of the insertion portion 644a inserted into the connection link opening 642a to be inserted into the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620.

  The opening width of the connection link opening 642a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connection link opening 642a.

  When the division member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 receives an action from the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a is connected to the connection link opening 642a. , The attitude of the connection link member 644 can be allowed to change with the action from the connection link action groove 621. As a result, the posture of the connection link member 644 with respect to the rear side main body 642 is generated, and the interval between the divided members DV can be increased or decreased.

  The undulating link opening 642b is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is slidably inserted. The undulating link member 648 guides the distal end of the insertion portion 648a inserted through the undulating link opening 642b to a guide member. 620 is inserted through the undulating link action groove 622.

  The opening width of the undulating link opening 642b is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the undulating link opening 642b.

  When the divided member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 receives an action from the undulating link operation groove 622 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 648a is moved to the undulating link opening 642b. , The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 can be undulated.

  As described above, the shaft support portion 642c is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side body 642 (the lower side in FIG. 57), so that the base end side of the connection link member 644 is viewed from the front with the engaged portion 641 in front view. It can be pivotally supported at the overlapping position. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637b, 638b of the respective rotation driving members 637, 638, and the divided member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement is set to be adjacent. To the divided member DV through the connecting link member 644.

  The bent portion 642d is protruded from the rear surface on the other longitudinal side (the upper side in FIG. 58) of the rear main body 642, and its protruding tip is opposed to the rear surface of the rear main body 642 at a predetermined interval. The inner edge of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the bent portion of the protruding tip and the opposing surface of the rear side body 642. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the rising of the divided member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620.

  In addition, the bent portion 642d is disposed in such a manner that its base can contact the inner peripheral surface of the inner edge of the guide member 620, and the distance between the base of the bent portion 642d and the sliding roller 641b described above is The dimension is set equal to or slightly larger than the radial width of the guide member 620. Accordingly, the displacement of the division member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620 can be regulated, and thus the main body member DV (the back side main body 642) is kept in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. Thus, the guide member 620 can be displaced in the circumferential direction.

  The front-side main body 643 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view having substantially the same size as the rear-side main body 642, and is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A link slide groove 643a and a shaft supporting portion 643b formed on the back surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 58) and supporting the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between a back side main body 642 (a shaft supporting portion 642c). And a support plate 643c protruding from the front and rotatably supporting the partition plate 647.

  The undulating link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the undulating link member 648 is slidably provided, and extends in parallel with the undulating link opening 642b. That is, the up / down link member 648 is slid along the up / down link slide groove 643a, so that the insertion portion 648a slides along the up / down link opening 642b.

  In the rear-side main body 642 and the front-side main body 643, the width dimension on the other side in the longitudinal direction is smaller than the width dimension on one side in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the front. That is, the rotation member 640 is formed in a wedge shape in a front view in which the width dimension of the portion located on the inner periphery side is smaller than the width dimension of the portion located on the outer periphery side. Therefore, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made smaller, the divided members DV can be brought close to each other, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, in the second section S2, the rear-side main body 642 and the front-side main body 643 are circumferentially brought into contact with the adjacent rear-side main body 642 and the front-side main body 643 (see FIGS. 54 and 73). .

  The connecting link member 644 is a long member, and its base end is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting portions 642c and 643b of the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and has a cylindrical insertion portion at the distal end side. 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a protrudes in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connection link member 644, and as described above, the connection link of the guide member 620 via the connection link opening 642a of the rear body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV. Through the working groove 621.

  The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the connection link opening 642a and the connection link operation groove 621. Therefore, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, the displacement of the divided member DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can be minimized, and the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained constant. This can suppress the variation in the position of the detected portion 641c, so that the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684 (see FIG. 71) can be improved.

  The base end side of the connecting link member 644 rotatably supported by the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the shaft supporting portions 642c and 643b of the main bodies 642 and 643) is connected to the connecting link opening 642a. Is also provided at a position close to the engaged portion 641. In the present embodiment, the base end side of the connection link member 644 is disposed at a position overlapping the engaged portion 641 in a front view (view in the direction of the axis O of the rotating member 640).

  As a result, the engagement portions 637b and 638b of the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, and the rotation of the one-side and the other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 is performed. When the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the divided member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via the connection link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  The undulating link member 648 is a member that is slidably held in the undulating link slide groove 643a of the front side main body 643, and has a columnar insertion portion 648a formed on the back side and an action groove 648b formed on the front side. It is formed. The insertion portion 648a is projected in a posture parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644, and as described above, is inserted into the up / down link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 through the up / down link opening 642b of the back side body 642. It is inserted.

  The action groove 648b is a portion for acting on the operated portion 646d of the display plate 646 by slidingly moving the undulating link member 648 to undulate the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647. It is formed in a groove shape extending linearly along the sliding direction, and an actuated portion 646d of the display panel 646 is slidably inserted between opposing surfaces of the groove portion.

  The display plate 646 has a plate portion 646a formed in a rectangular plate shape as viewed from the front, a shaft portion 646b and a connection shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and an operation groove 648b of the undulating link member 648 facing each other. And a plate-shaped actuated portion 646d inserted between the surfaces. Since the affected part 646d is formed by bending in a substantially S-shape when viewed from the front, when the undulating link member 648 is slid, the affected part 646d is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the sliding displacement. The display plate 646 can be rotated around the shaft portion 646b as a center of rotation.

  The partition plate 647 includes a plate-shaped plate portion 647a formed in a trapezoidal shape in a front view, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and a pair of shaft portions 647b on the same side as the pair of shaft portions 647b. And a shaft support portion 647c that is formed and rotatably supports the connection shaft 646c of the display panel 646.

  Here, as described above, the rotation unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate a roulette that rotates a wheel in which a plurality of pockets are continuously provided in a circumferential direction and drops a thrown ball into one of the pockets. The space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 of one divided member DV and the partition plate 647 of the adjacent divided member DV is a pocket, and the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) has a red color. Alternatively, black numbers are added and different numbers (1 to 29) are displayed.

  In this embodiment, one display panel 646 is colored green and has a predetermined mark (star shape). Further, only the display plate 646 of the rotating member 640 located in the first section S1 is visually recognized by the player. That is, the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member disposed on the front side thereof, and is made invisible to the player.

  The plate holding member 645 includes a shaft support 645a that rotatably supports the shaft 646b of the display plate 646 and a shaft support 645b that rotatably supports the shaft 647b of the partition plate 647. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front side main body 643 by the pivotal support by 645a and 645b.

  In this case, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated around the shaft portion 646b with the sliding displacement of the undulating link member 648. Then, the rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, and the partition plate 647 is rotated around the shaft portion 647b as a rotation center. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the division member DV in a state where it is disposed in the first section S1, and FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) It is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division | segmentation member DV in the state arrange | positioned in 2nd area S2. 59 and 60 show a state in which a part of the configuration is seen through for easy understanding, and the illustration of the connecting link member 644, the detected portion 641c, and the bent portion 642d are omitted. .

  As shown in FIG. 59, in a state where the division member DV is arranged in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is inserted into the small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620. It is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid and displaced to the other longitudinal side of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the inner peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the axis O side), As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is placed in the horizontal position, while the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is placed in the upright position.

  Note that the horizontal posture is a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the back surface of the rear side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the division member DV), and the standing posture is a plate of the partition plate 647. The portion 647a is in a posture of being orthogonally parallel to the rear surface of the rear side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV).

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the division member DV is arranged in the second section S2, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is connected to the large diameter portion 622a of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 (see FIG. 50). Is inserted through. Therefore, the up-and-down link member 648 is slid to one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear body 642 and the front body 643 (that is, the outer periphery of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the side opposite to the axis O). Thereby, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted from the horizontal position to the plate portion 647a side of the partition plate 647, and is disposed in the inclined position, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is moved from the upright position. The display plate 646 is tilted toward the plate portion 646a, and is disposed in an inclined posture.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, so that the display plate 646 is rotated by the sliding displacement of the undulating link member 648. The partition plate 647 can also be rotated via the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c.

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately provide the undulating link action groove and the undulating link member for the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647. The link action groove and the undulating link member can be shared. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is heavier than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (that is, the state in which the plate 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted up and the plate 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward), the state shown in FIG. When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is in the horizontal position and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is in the upright position, the rotation action of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) by its own weight is used. Thus, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and quickly.

  That is, since the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward, the display portion 646 is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the display plate 646 is tilted downward, so that a horizontal posture can be formed and the rotation of the display plate 646 (own weight). Is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, whereby the partition plate 647 can be lifted to form an upright posture. Therefore, even when the rotation is hindered by the attachment of dirt or dust, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be reliably and promptly formed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the length of the display plate 646 that the plate portion 646a projects from the shaft portion 646b is set to be larger than the length of the partition plate 647 that the plate portion 647a projects from the shaft portion 647b. Therefore, the center of gravity of the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 can be separated from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 can be close to the shaft portion 647b. As a result, the state shown in FIG. Can be performed more reliably and promptly by utilizing the weight of the display panel 646.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. The pitching device 650 is a device for throwing the ball B to the rotating member 640, is housed in a central depression of the central transmission member 634 of the driving mechanism 630, and is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Here, the pitching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the pitching apparatus 650. FIG. FIG. 62 shows a state in which the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651, and illustration of the passage member 655 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the pitching device 650 includes a case body 651 formed in a container shape with an open front side, an arm rotating mechanism 660 disposed inside the case body 651, and a holding piece projecting / retracting. It mainly includes a mechanism 670, a passage member 655 disposed on the front side of the case body 651, and a sphere B formed of a translucent material into a sphere.

  The case body 651 has a substantially circular bottom wall portion 651a in front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b standing upright from the bottom wall portion 651a toward the front, and a radially outer portion from the outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b. And an overhanging wall portion 651c formed so as to protrude in a flange shape toward the front, and the overhanging wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the back side of the guide member 620, so that the standing end (opening portion) of the outer wall portion 651b is provided. Are disposed substantially at the front of the rotating member 640 (the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646).

  A ball holding portion 652 is provided in front of the bottom wall portion 651a. A spherical depression having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the ball B is formed on the front surface of the ball holding portion 652, and the depression is set as a holding position (initial position) of the ball B. That is, when the ball B is placed on the ball holding portion 652, the ball B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).

  In this case, the pitching device 650 is disposed with the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 positioned at the lowest position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B is moved to the outer wall portion. The inner peripheral surface of 651b (inner passage 651c1) rolls and is held on holding piece 677 at the projecting position of holding piece retracting mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. FIG. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pitching apparatus 660 in a state where the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is located at the holding position. FIG. 65 is a view in which the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is located at the separated position. FIG. 17 is a front view of the pitching device 660 in a folded state. 64 and 65 show a state in which the front case 662 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 has been removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a rear case 661 disposed on the bottom wall 651a of the case body 651, a front case 662 disposed in front of the rear case 661, A crank member 663 and an arm member 664 rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, and a drive motor 665 and a pinion gear 666 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664. Prepare.

  Shafts 661a and 661b protrude from the rear case 661, and a crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a, and an arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. A gear 663a meshed with the pinion gear 676 is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the crank member 663, and a pin portion 663b protrudes at a position eccentric from the center of rotation (the shaft 661a). A sliding groove 664a into which the pin 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted extends linearly in the arm member 664, and a rotation center (shaft 661b) is formed with respect to the sliding groove 664a. ), A curved portion 664b in a front view shape obtained by dividing the annular shape into halves is formed.

  Therefore, the drive motor 665 is driven to rotate in the forward or reverse direction, and the crank member 663 is rotated through the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is rotated. By acting on the sliding groove 664a of the arm member 664, the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction around the shaft 661b.

  That is, the arm member 664 has a holding position (see FIG. 64) for holding the ball B on the ball holding portion 652 with the bending shape of the bending portion 664b along the outer peripheral portion of the ball holding portion 652, and a ball holding portion for holding the bending portion 664b. The ball B can be rotated (oscillated) between the ball holding portion 652 and the separated position (see FIG. 65) at which the ball B drops from the ball holding portion 652 to the inner peripheral passage 651c1.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b (a range of a central angle of about 90 degrees on a side (lower side) separated from the shaft 661b) is formed by the cantilever plate 664c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-like body that curves along the inner peripheral surface of the bending portion 664b, and a shaft 664c1 provided on the base end side is rotatably supported by the bending portion 664b, and has a distal end side. Is held upward (inward in the radial direction) by the elastic force of the leaf spring 667a of the limit switch 667 disposed on the rear side (outer peripheral surface side) of the optical disc.

  Therefore, when the ball B is held by the ball holding portion 652 in a state where the arm member 664 is located at the holding position, the weight of the ball B pushes down the cantilever plate 664c about the shaft 664c1 as a rotation center, If the ball B is not held by the ball holding portion 652 while the limit switch 667 is turned on, the cantilever plate 664c is set in the posture in which it is lifted as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence or absence of the ball B in the ball holding unit 652 can be detected.

  In this case, the concave portion of the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the sphere holding portion 652 are formed to have such a size that the sphere B can be displaced when the arm member 664 is arranged at the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664b and the inner diameter of the depression of the ball holding portion 652 are made larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when an external force (vibration) is input by the player being hit or shaken by the pachinko machine 10, the ball B can be displaced in accordance with the input of the vibration. That is, when the ball B is displaced (vibrated), the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced with the vibration, and the limit switch 667 can be turned on / off. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, the input of the external force to the pachinko machine 10 can be detected using the arm rotation mechanism 660.

  Returning to FIGS. 61 and 62, the description will be continued. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 is rotated to the separated position, the ball B is rolled on the inner peripheral surface (the inner peripheral passage 651c1) of the outer wall 651b, and the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is moved. It is held on the holding piece 677 at the projecting position (see FIG. 68). The holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is formed such that the holding piece 677 is able to protrude and retract between the protruding position and the retracted position, and when the retaining piece 677 is retracted to the retracted position, the ball B is moved to the plurality of rotating members 640. Is thrown on any one of the divided members DV (display panel 646). Here, the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position. FIG. 67 is a holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG.

  FIG. 68A is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the protruding position, and FIG. 68B is a holding view taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the one-side retracting mechanism 670. FIG. 69A is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 69B is a line LXIXb-LXIXb of FIG. 69A. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is formed to be curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall 651 b of the case body 651, and is disposed on the bottom wall 651 a of the case body 651. Rear case 671, a front case 672 disposed in front of the rear case 671, a slide member 673 slidably held between opposing surfaces of the rear case 671 and the front case 672, and the slide member A drive motor 675 and a pinion gear 676 for driving the 673 are provided, and a holding piece 677 that comes and goes with the sliding displacement of the slide member 673 is provided.

  The rear case 671 includes two sets of one-to-one sets of roller members 674 that are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and holds the slide member 673 between the sets of roller members 674 so as to be slidable. The rear case 671 includes a sliding base 671a having a rectangular plate shape as viewed from above, which is formed so as to protrude from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction toward the front side, and the upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the front base 672. The sliding displacement (projection to the front side and immersion to the back side) of the holding piece 677 is guided between the lower surface (outer peripheral surface) and the lower surface of the holding piece 677.

  A pin portion 673a protrudes from one end (lower portion) in the circumferential direction of the slide member 673, and a rack gear 673b meshed with the pinion gear 676 is formed on the other end (information portion) in the circumferential direction. It is engraved along the surface. Further, a sliding groove 677a into which the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 is slidably inserted is bent and extends in the holding piece 677 in a substantially Z-shape. That is, the sliding groove 677a has one end (the right side in FIG. 66) offset from the other end (the left side in FIG. 66) toward the front side.

  Therefore, by driving the drive motor 675 to rotate in the forward or reverse direction and rotating the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675, the slide member 673 is slid and displaced via the rack gear 673b. By causing the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 to act on the slide groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be protruded to the front side or immersed to the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 can be slid and displaced between a protruding position (see FIG. 68) protruding toward the front side and an immersing position (see FIG. 69) immersing toward the rear side.

  Here, on the upper surface of the holding piece 677, the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner peripheral passage 651c1) is located on the back side (the right side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). A curved surface 677b curved concentrically with the inner peripheral passage 651c1 and smoothly connected in the circumferential direction to the inner circumferential passage 651c1, and connected to the edge of the curved surface 677b and toward the front side (the left side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). And a descending inclined surface 677d which is continuous with the edge of the inclined surface 677c and which is inclined downward toward the front side.

  Therefore, in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the protruding position (see FIGS. 68A and 68B), the holding piece 677 falls down from the ball holding portion 652 and rolls on the inner circumferential passage 651c1, thereby bending the holding piece 677. The rolling of the ball B reaching the surface 677b to the front side (the left side in FIG. 68 (b)) is regulated by the rising slope of the rising slope 677c, and is held on the holding piece 677 (curved surface 677b). Can be.

  On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is sunk to the rear side from the protruding position and is arranged at the sunk position (see FIGS. 69A and 69B), the front side of the front case 672 faces the rear side (FIG. 69B ) The ball B whose movement is restricted to the right) is positioned on the descending inclined surface 677d after climbing over the ascending inclined surface 677c with the displacement of the holding piece 677 in the immersion direction (back side). Thus, the ball B can be rolled along the descending slope of the descending inclined surface 677d, and the ball B can be thrown toward the front side (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  Since the curved surface 677b has both sides in the circumferential direction smoothly connected to the inner circumferential passage 651c1, the ball B dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolling on one inner circumferential passage 651c1 is bent by the holding piece 677. It can pass over the surface 677b and roll to the other inner circumferential passage 651c1. That is, the ball B can be reciprocated between the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on one side in the circumferential direction and the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on the other side in the circumferential direction via the curved surface 677b. Also, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located below the inner peripheral passage 651c1, when the momentum of the ball B is lost and the rolling is converged, the ball B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. Can be done.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, the passage member 655 is provided on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is located on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670, and the ball B thrown by the immersion operation (immersion into the immersion position) of the holding piece 677 is divided by the dividing member DV (display) of the rotating member 640. The ball 646) has a throwing path 655a serving as a path when the ball is thrown up, and a return path 655b serving as a path when returning the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 to the ball holding portion 652.

  The throwing path 655a has a groove 655a1 having a substantially U-shaped cross-section and having a width substantially equal to that of the downwardly inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 and extending to the front side. A front portion 655a2 connected to the side edge portion and substantially flush with the display plate 646 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and a front portion 655a2 standing from both sides in the width direction of the front portion 655a2 and the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 A pair of facing portions 655a3 facing each other at substantially the same spacing as that of the partition plate 647 is provided.

  Therefore, when the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is retracted to the retracted position, the ball B rolled on the downwardly inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 is received by the groove 655a1, and the extending direction of the groove 655a1. , The ball B can be thrown while suppressing rattling.

  Further, the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the division member DV, and the opposing interval of the pair of opposing portions 655a3 is substantially the same as the opposing interval of the partition plate 647 of the split member DV. The ball B thus formed can be smoothly arranged on the display plate 646 of the division member DV. When the ball B is thrown, the rotation member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotational position) where the partition plate 647 of the division member DV matches the facing portion 655a3 based on the detection result by the detection sensor 684 described later.

  The return passage 655b includes a rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface for rolling the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 to the downstream side when the ball B is received on the upstream side, and a downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1. And a standing portion 655b2 that is formed to be upright and curved so as to direct the rolling direction of the ball B toward the back side.

  In the front view of the pitching device 650, the rolling portion 655b1 has the upstream side arranged on the inner peripheral edge of the rotating member 640 and the downstream side arranged on the front side of the ball holding portion 652b. Further, the rolling portion 655b1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side, and to be inclined downwardly toward the ball holding portion 652 on the downstream side.

  The sphere B placed on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 and conveyed in the circumferential direction with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is moved radially by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b of the guide member 680 described later. When the ball B is pushed out to the upstream side and is fed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B is rolled downstream by the rolling portion 655b1 and dropped to the ball holding portion 652 while being guided by the standing portion 655b2. You.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. As described above, the guide member 680 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member disposed along the lower part of the rotating member 640, and guides the sphere B on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 at the time of transportation accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 640 (that is, the guide member 680). The ball B is supported from below), and a detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is held. Here, the guide member 680 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG.

  70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide member 680 includes a base 681 disposed on the case member 610, a plate-shaped transmission plate 682 disposed on the front side of the base 681, and a rear side of the transmission plate 682. , And a plurality of (six in this embodiment) detection sensors 684 disposed on the base 681.

  The base portion 681 is a member formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape at a central angle of approximately 120 degrees (that is, a shape curved in an arc shape in a front view), and a guide surface 681a is formed on an inner peripheral surface side thereof. . The guide surface 681a is arranged on the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member 640, and faces the sphere B arranged on the division member DV (that is, the space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). That is, it is arranged on the division member DV of the rotating member 640, and supports the ball B conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 from below.

  A return guide 681b is formed on the inner peripheral surface side of the base 681, and is connected to the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681a. The return guide 681b is a portion for sending the ball B conveyed along with the rotation of the rotating member 640 to the return passage 655b of the passage member 655, and has a smaller width than the guide surface 681a and a radial direction. By being formed in a shape protruding inward, the rotating member 640 is disposed facing the divided member DV (display plate 646) (see FIGS. 43 and 44).

  Therefore, when the ball B placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 is conveyed in the circumferential direction along with the rotation of the rotating member 640, the return guide is provided by the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the divided member DV. Sphere B is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of 681b. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the ball B is pushed radially inward by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b, and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b.

  Here, even when the formation of the return guide 681b is omitted, if the rotating member 640 is rotated to the position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) is inclined downward toward the return passage 655b, the partition plate is not rotated. The ball B can be dropped into the return path 655b along the downward slope of 647. However, in this case, the ball B is conveyed upward before the ball B starts rolling by its own weight, so that the falling position when the ball B is dropped becomes high and the ball B Since the ball B is dropped after being rolled along the descending inclination, the moment when the ball B is dropped is large. Therefore, the return passage 655b may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, by providing the return guide 681b, the falling position when the ball B is dropped into the return passage 655b can be lowered, and the ball B slides on the return guide 681b. The ball is sent to the return passage 655b while being sent, so that the speed of the ball can be reduced. As a result, breakage of the return passage 655b can be suppressed.

  The transmission plate 682 is a portion facing the divided member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 at a predetermined interval (interval capable of holding the ball B), and a part of the upper edge side portion in the center in the width direction is formed. The passage member 655 is extended upward to a position facing the throwing path 655a (front portion 655a2). This can prevent the ball B thrown from the throwing device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 from jumping out.

  In addition, the transmission plate 682 is not only the divided member DV on which the ball B is thrown (that is, the divided member DV having the same phase as the front part 655a2 of the ball-sending passage 655a), but also the downstream side of the divided member DV (the Since it is formed with a size (width dimension) that can partially face the divided member DV adjacent to the downstream side in the transport direction), the ramp of the ball B thrown from the throwing path 655a can The ball B can be easily converged, and the ball B can be stably transported to the return guide 681b.

  On the other hand, the transmitting plate 682 has a size (width dimension) that can face the divided member DV on which the ball B is thrown and the divided member DV adjacent to the downstream side of the divided member DV, and the divided member DV on which the ball is thrown. And it does not face the divided member DV located downstream from the adjacent divided member DV. That is, the ball B can be exposed between the edge of the transmission plate 682 on the downstream side in the transport direction of the ball B (the right side in FIG. 70) and the return guide 681b, and the transport of the ball B can be visually recognized by the player. Can be easier.

  In addition, since the transmission plate 682 is entirely formed of a light-transmitting material, it is possible for a player to see through the member and the ball B located on the back side thereof. Therefore, the thrown ball B passes through the throwing path 655a, falls between the display plate 647 and the transmission plate 682 of the divided member DV, and rotates by the rotation of the rotating member 640 while being supported by the guide surface 681a. A series of transported modes can be visually recognized by the player.

  The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the base 681 together with the guide surface 681a, and is formed as a plate-like body that curves along the guide surface 681a (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the base 681). One end of the cantilever plate 683 in the circumferential direction is rotatably supported on the base 681 by a shaft 685, and the other end in the circumferential direction is formed by the elastic force of a leaf spring of a limit switch (not shown) disposed on the base 681. It is maintained in a posture raised upward (inward in the radial direction).

  In a posture in which the other end in the circumferential direction of the cantilever plate 683 is lifted upward, the limit switch is off, and when the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, the ball B Due to the weight, the cantilever plate 683 is pushed down around the shaft 685 as the center of rotation, and the limit switch is turned on. Thereby, it can be detected that the ball B thrown from the ball throwing device 650 is arranged at an appropriate position (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  On the other hand, when the ball B is conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 and the weight of the ball B acting on the cantilever plate 683 is reduced to a predetermined value or less, the posture in which the cantilever plate 683 is lifted as described above. And the limit switch is turned off.

  The detection sensor 684 is a sensor device for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640, and is formed as a non-contact type sensor in which a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit are arranged to face each other. Are disposed on the movement locus of the detection portion 641c of the divided member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1.

  Therefore, a plurality of (six in the present embodiment) divided members DV that are adjacent in the circumferential direction can be respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the detection sensor 684, and the rotating member 640 is moved by a predetermined amount (that is, corresponding to the first interval). Each time the rotation is performed by the amount corresponding to the rotation amount), the divided member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be shifted in the circumferential direction.

  In this case, as described above, the detected portion 641c is formed in a part (15 in this embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV are The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. Therefore, in the detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed is disposed, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned on. The detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed is arranged to receive the light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion, and the detection signal is turned off (see FIG. 76). As a result, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on a combination of the detection results of the respective detection sensors 684, as described later.

  In the present embodiment, six (ON / OFF) detection results based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively, so that 64 (= 2 to the sixth power) is obtained. Different combinations can be formed. In this case, the number of the divided members DV is 30. Therefore, as described later, the detection sensor 684 detects which of the plurality of divided members DV is located at the reference position. It can always be determined based on the result.

  Next, the operation of the rotation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, an operation of changing the interval between the divided members DV when the rotating member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640. FIG. 73 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the first section S1, and FIG. 73 (b) is a part of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the second section S2. It is an enlarged front view.

  In order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, FIGS. 72 and 73 show only the rear side main body 642, the connecting link member 644, and the undulating link member 648 among the components of the dividing member DV. 73 shows a state in which the connecting link operation groove 621 and the undulating link operation groove 622 are hatched.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the rotating member 640 is a member that is formed to be rotatable around the axis O as a center of rotation (that is, along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620). Endlessly connected to That is, in each of the divided members DV, the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is rotatably supported by the back side body 642, while the insertion portion 644a on the distal end side of the connecting link member 644 is on the back side of the adjacent divided member DV. It is inserted into the connection link action groove 621 through the connection link opening 642 a in the main body 642.

  As described above, the rear side main body 642 of the divided member DV has the sliding roller 641b on one side in the longitudinal direction and the bent portion 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction abutting on the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the guide member 620. When the guide member 620 is moved in the circumferential direction, the posture of the guide member 620 with respect to the guide member 620 is such that the axis O is located on an extension of the longitudinal direction of the back side body 642 (that is, the axis O is radiated about the axis O). (A linear posture). That is, only movement in a state where the posture is maintained is allowed.

  In this case, the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed at a position closer to the base end side (the rotatably supported side) of the connection link member 644 than the small-diameter portion 621b. When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the action groove 621 (see FIG. 73A), the connection link member 644 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the rear side body 642. As a result, the back-side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (the back side main body 642) in the first section S1 can be made a large interval (first interval).

  On the other hand, the small-diameter portion 621b of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the base end side (the side rotatably supported) of the connection link member 644 than the large-diameter portion 621a. When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the small diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73 (b)), the connection link member 644 is positioned along the longitudinal direction of the rear side body 642, and The side bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (the back side main body 642) in the second section S2 can be made a small interval (second interval).

  Here, as described above, the rotating member 640 is an effect device formed by imitating roulette, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a). That is, an effect is performed by allowing the player to visually recognize the identification information displayed on the display board 646. Therefore, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the display board 646 (display of identification information) is preferably large, and in order to ensure a variation in the effect, the number of display boards 646 (the identification information Type) is preferably large.

  In this case, considering the visibility of the player, the display of the identification information (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646) needs to have a certain size or more, and the size is maintained. When the number of display of the identification information (the number of the display boards 646) is increased while increasing the diameter of the rotating member 640, the rotating member 640 is not accommodated in a predetermined arrangement space, but is rotated so as to fit in a predetermined space. When the diameter is reduced, the number of displayed identification information (the number of display boards 646) decreases, and it becomes impossible to secure a variation in the effect.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and the first section S1 having the interval smaller than the first interval in the first section S1. As described above, the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) located in the first section S1 is formed while the rotating section 640 can be formed with the second section S2 in which the division member DV is circumferentially connected at intervals of 2. The display is made visible to the player (the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member).

  Therefore, compared with the case where all of the plurality of divided members DV are connected at the first interval, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In addition, the number of display of the identification information (the number of the display boards 646) can be increased while the display of the identification information (that is, the display board 646) has a certain size or more. As a result, it becomes impossible to ensure the visibility of the player and the variation of the effect.

  Here, in the first section S1, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is disposed in a horizontal posture (a posture parallel to the moving plane of the division member DV) in the first section S1. The identification information displayed at 646 can be easily recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, in the second section S2, as described above, the dividing member DV is in a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display panel 646 is higher than the horizontal posture in the first section S1. Interference with the DV can be suppressed, and the divided members DV can be brought closer to each other. That is, the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 can be reduced. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is disposed on the upper surface of the front-side main body 643 so as to be displaceable (rotatable), and in the second section S2, the plate portion 646a is connected to the adjacent divided member DV (plate holding member). The member 645) can be lifted above the upper surface (that is, a position where no interference occurs) (see FIG. 54). Therefore, the dividing member DV can be brought close to the position where the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 come into contact with each other. That is, the second interval in the second section S2 can be further reduced. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the rotating member can be suppressed.

  Next, the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 74A to 74D are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and illustrate the one-side rotation driving member 637 viewed from the front.

  FIGS. 74 (b), 74 (c), and 74 (d) correspond to the states rotated by 30, 60 and 90 degrees from FIG. 74 (a), respectively. Also, in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is shown in a cross-sectional view, and the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 is indicated by a two-dot chain line. It is illustrated by using FIG.

  Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are formed in the same shape as each other as described above. In the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by these, only the driving operation by the one-side rotation driving member 637 is described, and the description of the driving operation by the other-side rotation driving member 638 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the one-side rotation driving member 637 has a movement locus of the engagement portion 637b partially corresponding to a movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. It is arranged at an overlapping position, and in the overlapping portion, it is rotatable in a state where the engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. Note that the circular shape of the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle having a smaller diameter than the circular shape of the movement locus of the engaged portion 641.

  When the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the division member DV via the engagement between the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. Then, the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via each connecting link member 644, whereby the rotating member 640 is rotated. Rotated in the direction.

  In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the rotation amount of the rotation member 640 with respect to the unit rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 can be reduced (the rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 necessary for rotating the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased). ). Therefore, the apparent reduction ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axis O of the rotating member 640, the rotating torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotational drive of the rotating member 640 (particularly, the rotational drive from a stopped state) can be stabilized, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Here, the driving mechanism 630 includes one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638, which are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be dispersed to different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, so that the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members DV can be suppressed. That is, even when the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are arranged at positions where the phases are different by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force from each of the rotation driving members 637 and 638 can be applied to the two most distant portions of the rotation member 640 (the plurality of divided members DV), and as a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is reduced. Can be stabilized.

  In this case, in the state of the division member DV, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 that is pivotally supported by the division member DV is inserted into the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620. , The second state inserted through the small-diameter portion 621b, and the third state inserted through the connecting portion 621c. In the present embodiment, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other side The rotation driving member 638 can apply a driving force to the divided member DV in the third state (that is, the engaging portions 637b and 638b can be engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV in the third state). ).

  Thereby, the driving force can be applied to the divided member DV in a state where the distance between the adjacent divided member DV is changed from the first distance to the second distance (or vice versa). Since such a divided member DV receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c, the rotation of the entire rotating member 640 to which the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly (movement of each divided member DV in the circumferential direction). The division member DV which receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c is directly driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, so that the plurality of division members DV are endless. Can be stably displaced (rotated).

  Note that the period during which the driving force is transmitted from the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 to the division member DV completely coincides with the period when the division member DV is in the above-described third state. It is not necessary that the former period in which the driving force is transmitted and the latter period in the third state at least partially overlap.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the undulating link operation groove 622 are formed at positions where the phases are different. That is, when the divided member DV is in the third state described above, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 provided in the divided member DV is inserted into the large-diameter portion 622a or the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622. It is inserted.

  Therefore, when the division member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 supported by the division member DV passes through the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621. Thereafter, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 (or vice versa).

  Accordingly, a reaction force is not received at the same time from both the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the undulating link operation groove 622, and the timing of receiving the reaction force can be made different. As a result, the required driving force can be dispersed, and accordingly, the output required for the driving motor 631 of the driving mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged with their phases (rotational positions of the engagement portions 637b, 638b) different from each other, so that the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is performed. Can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the state of engagement or disengagement of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 with the division member DV and the phase. In FIG. 75, the upper-level state relationship diagram corresponds to the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the lower-level state relationship diagram corresponds to the other-side rotation drive member 638. In FIG. 75, the horizontal axis indicates the phase, and the vertical axis indicates the engaged or released state.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engagement portion 637b of the engagement portions 637b formed at three places of the one-side rotation drive member 637 engages with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. Is defined as 0 ° (reference position), the one-side rotation driving member 637 moves the first rotation drive member 637 until the phase reaches approximately 100 ° (that is, until the phase rotates 100 ° from the reference position). The first engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and the driving force is transmitted to the divided member DV, while the engagement is released when the phase is approximately from 100 ° to 120 °. And the transmission of the driving force to the divided member DV is released.

  After that, the second engagement portion 637b and the third engagement portion 637b of the engagement portions 637b formed at three places of the one-side rotation driving member 637 are the first engagement portion 637b. The same state of engagement and disengagement (that is, engagement during a rotation angle of approximately 100 ° and release during a rotation angle of approximately 20 °) is repeated.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 75, with respect to the other-side rotation driving member 638, the engagement portions 638 b formed at the three positions are respectively engaged and released in the same manner as in the case of the above-described one-side rotation driving member 637. (That is, engagement during a rotation angle of approximately 100 ° and release during a rotation angle of approximately 20 °) are repeated.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as described above, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged with different phases (rotational positions of the engagement portions 637b and 638b). You. That is, the other side rotation drive member 638 has a phase at which the first engagement portion 638b of the engagement portions 638b formed at the three positions starts engaging with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. The phase is set to a phase delayed by approximately 40 ° from the phase (reference position) at which the first engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 starts engagement.

  Thus, while one of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 is disengaged from the division member DV (that is, the transmission of the driving force is released), the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the other-side rotation driving member 638 is disengaged. The phase (rotational position) of the engagement portions 637b and 638b is set such that the other one of the rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the division member DV. Thus, it is possible to avoid a state in which the engagement with the division member DV is simultaneously released from both the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638. As a result, intermittent transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be suppressed, and the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly, when the transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 becomes intermittent, Due to the transmission and release of the driving force, the interval between the divided members DV tends to be increased or decreased. Therefore, the posture of the entire rotating member 640 becomes unstable, and its displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 is in the release state, the other is in the engaged state, and the driving force is applied to the rotation member 640. Can always be transmitted, so that the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained constant. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly can be stabilized, and the displacement (rotation) can be stabilized.

  Next, the operation of detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a state transition diagram for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member 640, and illustrates a state in which the arrangement of the detection sensor 684 and the divided member DV is developed on a straight line.

  In FIG. 76, for convenience of explanation, reference numerals “A to F” are shown for the detection sensor 684, and reference numerals “1 to 10, 30” are shown for the divided member DV. The detection state is illustrated by the symbol of “ON, OFF”. In FIG. 76, the detected portion 641c is hatched for easy understanding.

  Here, in the description of FIG. 76, each of the detection sensors 684 is represented by a detection sensor A, a detection sensor B,. , The detection sensor F, and the divided members DV are referred to as a first divided member DV, a second divided member DV,..., A thirtieth divided member DV, and are distinguished from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first divided member DV reaches a phase (rotational position) that can be detected by the detection sensor A, the second divided member DV switches to the sixth position. The division members DV are arranged in phases that can be detected by the detection sensors BF.

  Therefore, in the detection sensors A and C to F, the light received by the light receiving unit of the light emitted from the light emitting unit is blocked by the detected portions 641c of the first divided member DV and the third to sixth divided members DV. Then, while the detection state is turned on by detecting the detected portion 641c, the detection sensor B can receive light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion, and does not detect the detected portion 641c. And the detection state is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the divided member DV moves in the circumferential direction (FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b)). (To the left), the division member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned on by the light shielding of the third to seventh divided members DV (detected portions 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned off. You.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), the division member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed ( In the detection sensors A to D and F, the detection state is turned on by the light shielding of the third to sixth divided members DV and the eighth divided member DV (detected portion 641c), while the detection is performed. In the sensor E, the detection state is turned off.

  Thereafter, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount, the division member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one), and this is changed to the number of division members DV (this embodiment). When the rotation is repeated 30 times (that is, the rotation member 640 is rotated once), the state returns to the state shown in FIG.

  In this case, as described above, there are two types of rotating members 640, one in which the detected portion 641c is formed and one in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. By connecting these two types of divided members DV in the circumferential direction, the detected portions 641c are arranged at predetermined intervals that are unequal in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement refers to a combination of the presence or absence of the detection target portion 641c (that is, the detection sensor A), regardless of which of the six divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction is taken out of the six adjacent divided members DV.検 出 F) means sequences in which all combinations are different.

  Therefore, a table of such combinations (a table in which the detection states of the detection sensors A to F are associated with the divided members DV to be detected at the time of the detection) is created in advance and stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be ascertained by referring to the table each time the detection sensors A to F perform detection. That is, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of (30 in the present embodiment) divided members DV is located at the reference position.

  Here, a slit continuous in the circumferential direction is provided on the rotating member 640, and the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added. The rotation amount (phase) of the rotation member 640 from the reference position can also be detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a failure in light reception of the light receiving unit of the detection sensor 684 or the like, a deviation occurs between the rotation amount of the rotating member 640 and the cumulative addition number of the pulse number, and the phase of the rotating member 640 becomes accurate. Cannot be detected. That is, if a detection failure occurs even once, it affects subsequent detection results, and each time a detection failure occurs, the effect on the detection results is accumulated.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of detected parts 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and the movement of the plurality of detected parts 641c Since a plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A to F) are provided on the trajectory, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is detected based on a combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F. be able to. That is, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based only on the current detection results detected by the detection sensors A to F. Is not required, so that even if a detection failure has occurred in the past, the detection failure does not affect the detection, and the phase of the rotating member 640 can be accurately detected.

  As described above, the interval between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).

  Therefore, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV, the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F can be made different. That is, it is possible to detect the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 using the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to any of the plurality of divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction (that is, any pocket of the rotatable member 640 simulating roulette). be able to.

  Further, as described above, the arrangement interval of the detection sensors A to F is set based on the interval of the division members DV in the first section S1 (that is, the detection sensors A to F are divided by the division members DV in the first section S1). Is located at a position where the detected portion 641c can be detected), as compared with the case where the interval between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is used as a reference, the space required for disposing the detection sensors A to F. Can be easily secured, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In other words, when the detection sensors A to F are arranged at positions where the detection target 641c of the divided member DV can be detected in the second section S2, a space for disposing these detection sensors A to F is secured. Therefore, there is a limitation in reducing the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV. On the other hand, since the detection sensors A to F are disposed on the first section S1 side, the setting of the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is not restricted, and the second sensor S is not limited to the second section S2. The interval of 2 can be narrower. As a result, the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, two (on / off) detection results based on the presence or absence of the detection target portion 641c of the divided member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively. 2 6) combinations can be formed.

  In this case, since the number of the divided members DV is 30, five detection sensors 684 are sufficient (that is, 32 (= 2 to the fifth power) combinations can be formed). However, in this case, a state occurs in which all the detection results of the five detection sensors 684 are turned off (the light is not shielded by the detected portion 641c), and therefore, at a predetermined phase (rotational position) corresponding to the state. However, the timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 cannot be obtained.

  On the other hand, by using the six detection sensors 684 as in the present embodiment, the detection results of all of the six detection sensors 684 are turned off (the state in which the light is not blocked by the detected portion 641c). ) Can be avoided. That is, in at least one of the six detection sensors 684, the detection result can be turned on (light is blocked by the detection target 641), so that all the phases (rotation) At the position), the timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can be obtained.

  FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view in which a portion of the rotating member 640 in the first section S1 is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, the display plate 646 of the divided member DV has the plate portion 646a arranged in a horizontal posture and the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (see FIGS. 57 and 58). (See FIG. 77, left side) faces the side surface of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV.

  In the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is formed such that a side surface of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b is curved in an arc shape (see an enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Therefore, when the display panel 646 is arranged in a horizontal position by rotating the plate 646a about the shaft 646b, the side opposite to the shaft 646b of the plate 646a faces the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the distance between the side of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b (the arc-shaped side surface) and the side surface of the plate holding member 645.

  Thereby, in the first section S1, when the divided member DV and the adjacent divided member DV try to make a relative displacement in a direction to reduce the interval (first interval) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is closed. Such a relative displacement can be restricted by contacting the side surface with the side surface of the plate holding member 645. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the divided members DV from being displaced in a direction to reduce the distance therebetween, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684.

  On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is connected to the end of the connecting link opening 642a in the rear side body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV (the end on one side in the extending direction, FIG. ) (See FIG. 73 (a)), so that when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV try to make a relative displacement in a direction to increase their interval (first interval), When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 abuts on the end of the connection link opening 642a, such phase displacement can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the divided members DV from being displaced in a direction to increase the distance between them, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always open has been described. , A tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes the passage. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those in the above-described embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 78 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  As illustrated in FIG. 78, the left swing unit 2500 includes a base member 2510 that discharges a ball to the right rear of the first wall portion 513 in a front view, a direction in which the distribution base member 2521 extends, and a length of the elongated hole 2521d. It mainly includes a first passage-forming member 2520 whose extension direction is substantially straight, and a tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes the tip of the first passage-forming member 2520.

  The base member 2510 includes a side downflow passage 2515 extending rearward from the right side of the guide wall portion 513a. Although the outer shape of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 is different from the outer shape of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 in the first embodiment, the technical idea is the same, and therefore, the description is omitted in this embodiment.

  The side flow-down passage 2515 is a passage for discharging the ball that has reached the first wall portion 513 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is located at the release position.

  The first passage forming member 2520 includes a distribution base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The distribution base member 2521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 2521a that forms one side of the ball flow passage, a long hole 2521d extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and a gap V1. A second distribution convex portion 521e disposed to face the distribution convex portion 521e on the right side in frontal view of the front side, and a rear side toward the front side of the hanging plate portion on the right side in front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521g. And a discharge recess 2521h recessed from the side surface.

  At the lower end, the hanging plate portion 2521a has a recessed portion 2521a2 in which a portion of the lower wall surface facing the passage cover member 2522 (the left side in FIG. 78) is cut and recessed. A shaft support hole 2521a3 which is formed in a circular shape in a direction opposite to the passage cover member on the side opposite to the hole 2522a.

  The concave portion 2521a2 is a concave portion that forms an opening on the lower surface of the first passage forming member 2520 in cooperation with the concave portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The distal end wall member 2560 passes through the opening formed by the concave portion 2521a by the rotation operation.

  The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body 2561a of the distal end wall member 2560 is supported by a pin member on a rod, and is disposed at a position (coaxial position) corresponding to the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522. You.

  The second distribution convex portion 2521g is a portion having substantially the same shape as the distribution convex portion 521e, and is a portion that distributes the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 to the left and right. The discharge concave portion 2521h is provided with a space larger than the diameter of a sphere provided between the discharge concave portion 2521h and the first wall portion 513, and reaches the first wall portion 513 to the right of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in a front view. The sorted balls are introduced from the discharge concave portion 2521h into the side downflow passage 2515, and then discharged outside the game area.

  The passage cover member 2522 has a plate-like plate portion 2522a covered on the front side of the distribution base member 2521, and extends in a plate-like shape from both ends in the short direction of the plate portion 2522a toward the back side. And upper and lower wall portions 2522b.

  The plate-shaped portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described in the first embodiment and a shaft support hole 2522a2 formed at the lower end portion in a circular shape coaxial with the shaft support hole 2521a3 of the distribution base member 2521. Prepare. The shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes that rotatably support the distal end wall member 2560.

  The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are provided with recesses 2522b1 that are recessed at positions facing the recessed portions 2521a2 and that together with the recessed portions 2521a2 form an opening through which a ball can pass.

  The distal end wall member 2560 is disposed between the distribution base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520, and rotates as a rod-shaped pin member coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2. It mainly includes a main body member 2561 having a substantially Z-shape as viewed from the front, which is rotatably supported, and a torsion spring 2562 for urging the main body member 2561 clockwise as viewed from the front.

  The torsion spring 2562 is configured such that one arm is fixed to the distal end of the passage cover member 2522 and the other arm abuts on a locking pin 2561e protruding rearward from the distal end wall member 2560.

  With reference to FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 will be described. FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (d) are front views of main body member 2561 of distal wall member 2560, and FIG. 79 (b) is a top view of main body member 2561 of distal wall member 2560, and FIG. FIG. 79C is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 79B. In FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (d), the shape of the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 79 (a), the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position ( FIG. 79 (d) illustrates a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 81).

  As shown in FIG. 79, a main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 includes a cylindrical main body 2561a that is coaxially supported with the shaft supporting holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78), and a radial direction from the main body 2561a. Plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line, a flow-down hole 2561c formed in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b with a diameter equal to or larger than the diameter of a sphere, and a side opposite to the main body portion 2561a of the plate portion 2561b. A curved wall portion 2561d extending along an arc centered on the main body portion 2561a from an end of the main body portion 2561a, and a locking pin protruding at the tip end of the curved wall portion 2561d in parallel with the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a. 2561e and a portion disposed on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d with respect to the main body member 2561a, and has a shape smaller than the opening at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520. A pushing portion 2561F, mainly it comprises.

  The plate portion 2561b is formed such that the radial length (length in the extending direction) of the main body portion 2561a is longer than the dimension of the opening at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 in the short direction (vertical direction in FIG. 80). You. Thereby, the rotation stop position of tip wall member 2560 in the biasing direction of torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to the position where plate portion 2561b and upper wall portion of upper and lower wall portion 2522b abut. 79 (d)).

  In the released state (see FIG. 79 (d)), the curved wall portion 2561d stops the downward flow by causing the sphere to collide with the contact wall 2561d1 disposed opposite to the sphere flowing down the first passage forming member 2520. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball is allowed to pass by moving below the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is moved by a rolling wall disposed behind the contact wall 2561d1. Rolling over 2561d2 has the role of smoothing the subsequent flow.

  Next, the operation of the left swing unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swing unit 2500. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is not shown, FIG. 80 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position, and FIG. FIG. 82 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount when viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position. In addition, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by an outline at a middle position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is at the release position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in a front view. And stays between the discharge recess 2521h and the first wall portion 513, the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise in front view, and the discharge recess 2521h is disposed on the front side of the side flow passage 2515. This allows the ball to flow down the side downflow passage 2515, and the ball is discharged out of the game area. This prevents the ball from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 when the first passage forming member 2520 is located at the release position.

  In the state shown in FIG. 80, the sphere introduced into the discharge recess 2521h stays in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that the next incoming ball enters the discharge recess 2521h. Thus, the next ball can be kept outside the rotation trajectory of the tip of the second distribution projection 2521g (upper side in FIG. 80).

  The sphere fixed to the outside (the upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation trajectory of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g rotates the first passage forming member 2520 clockwise as viewed from the front, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g guides. By being disposed at a position along the right wall of the wall 513a, it is introduced to the left of the second distribution projection 2521g, and is supplied between the upper and lower walls 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. You. Thus, even if a plurality of balls reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, only one ball can be introduced into the discharge recess 2521h.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is located at the release position, the first passage forming member 2520 moves from the base end (the left end in FIG. 80) to the distal end (the right end in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured to be inclined upward. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated with the sphere supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 remaining, and reaches the state shown in FIG. Flows toward the base end by the action of gravity, so that the ball can be prevented from dropping from the front end.

  As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the state between the release position and the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 has the second distribution convex. The rider gets on the tip of the part 2521g and stops flowing down. Thus, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed between the release position and the connection position, the ball is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Can be prevented.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the first path forming member 2520 is inclined downward toward the distal end. For this reason, if the opening at the distal end is always open, the ball is left between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 (see FIG. 78). May fall from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be caught by another unit (such as the rotating unit 600 (see FIG. 5)), which may cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the distal end wall member 2560 is disposed at the opening at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as a lid for the opening. Can be reliably prevented from dropping from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 is the left of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in a front view. Is moved to the front side through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, and the extending direction of the first passage forming member 2520. Down along.

  At the connection position, the pushing portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 abuts against the wall surface of the housing recess 422f of the driving slide member 420 (the wall surface of the housing recess 422f is disposed on the displacement trajectory of the pushing portion 2561f). The curved wall portion 2561d of the wall member 2560 is rotated in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 82) protruding outside the first passage forming member 2520. That is, since the rotation of the tip wall member 2560 is caused by the change in the position of the first passage forming member 2520, the driving force of the tip wall member 2560 can be used also as the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. As a result, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

  At this time, at the connection position, the tip end wall member 2560 is rotated to a position where the plate portion 2561b is in a plane position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b, so that the sphere reaching the tip end of the first passage forming member 2520 can be smoothly moved. The ball can be sent to the downflow hole 2561c (without bouncing as in the case where a step is generated between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and the plate portion 2561b).

  The sphere that has passed through the downflow hole 2561c is guided to the sensor member 422c of the drive side slide member 420 by rolling on the rolling wall 2561d2 of the curved wall portion 2561d. That is, the curved wall portion 2561d serves to stop the sphere that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and to guide the sphere sent from the first passage forming member 2520 through the downflow hole 2561c. , Is also used.

  Note that, at the connection position (see FIG. 82), the plate portion 2561b is in surface position with the lower walls of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, so that before reaching the connection position. , The plate portion 2561b enters the inside (upper side in FIG. 82) of the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. That is, the ball can pass through the downflow hole 2561c only after reaching the connection position (a state where the ball is stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d until the connection position is reached).

  Accordingly, even if the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from the connected position to the release position in a state where the ball remains inside the first passage forming member 2520, the ball is moved to the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520. It can be reliably prevented from falling from. This is maintained even when a plurality of balls are thrown in a row.

  With reference to FIG. 83, a case where a plurality of balls are sent to the first passage forming member 2520 in a row will be described. FIGS. 83A to 83C are partial front views of the left swing unit 2500 and the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c), the sphere passages of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially cross-sectionally viewed. FIG. 83 (b) shows a state where the forming member 2520 is arranged at the connection position. In FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 rotates a predetermined amount counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 83 (a). 83 (c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), and the distal end wall member 2560 is partitioned. FIG.

  In addition, in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c), a sphere that flows down to the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the pushing portion 2561f is in contact with the housing recess 422f in the connected state, and has a recessed portion 2561f1 on the lower side in FIG. 83 (a) starting from the contact position. The recessed portion 2561f1 is recessed closer to the shaft support 516 than the arc C21 centered on the shaft support 516 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, the tip wall member 2560 starts rotating by the urging force of the torsion spring 2562 as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from FIG. In FIG. 83 (a), the ball disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d is referred to as a feed ball P21, and the ball disposed on the left side is referred to as a residual ball P22.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the first passage forming member 2520 starts to rotate, the tip wall member 2560 rotates, so that the curved wall portion 2561d enters the inside of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. As a result, the residual sphere P22 comes into contact with the contact wall 2561d, and the flow of the residual sphere P22 stops.

  On the other hand, the feed ball P21 is disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, so that the flowing ball P21 does not stop flowing down by the contact wall 2561d and passes through the flow-down hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520. It is possible to throw balls.

  In this case, the feed ball P21 may be lifted to the upper end of the curved wall 2561d (see FIG. 83 (b)). The upper walls of the upper and lower walls 2522b are opposed to each other in the moving direction of the curved wall 2561d. Since the feed ball P21 is pushed in by its wall, it can be ensured that the feed ball P21 passes through the downflow hole 2561c. Thus, the diameter of the opening of the flow-down hole 2561c can be suppressed to approximately the same as the diameter of the sphere, and the flow path of the sphere flowing down the flow-down hole 2561c can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c), from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (c), and the curved wall 2561d is Even if the feed ball P21 remains on the curved wall portion 2561d side when moved above the curved wall portion 422f1, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a portion for rolling the feed ball P21, and the rolling wall thereof. The feed ball P21 is caused to flow down while the distance between the lower end of the 2561d2 and the upper end of the curved wall portion 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (the first passage is formed until the feed ball P21 partitions off). By stopping the member 2520 at the position shown in FIG. 83 (c) or reducing the speed near the position shown in FIG. 83 (c)), it is ensured that the ball flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422. To do It can be.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the third symbol display device 81 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction of the driven side slide member 430 has been described. The device 81 is disposed on the left side of the driven slide member 3430 in the left-right direction. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those in the above-described embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 according to the third embodiment, illustrating the elevating operation of the driving-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 3430 in chronological order. 84 to 88, the right and left members of the cover member 470 are not shown, and the vicinity of the lowering control member 415 and the upper control member 417 is partially enlarged.

  84 shows a state immediately after the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 abuts on the driven side slide member 3430. In FIG. 85, the rack 452 is raised from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 86 shows a state in which only the drive side slide member 420 is moved down from the state shown in FIG. 85 and is arranged in the lowered position. 86, the driven side slide member 3430 is dropped from the state shown in FIG. 86, and the separation action surface 434b, which is the lower side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434, and the separation inclined portion 417f of the lift control member 417 are in contact with each other. FIG. 88 illustrates a state in which the driven side slide member 3430 is further dropped from the state illustrated in FIG. State dynamic side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 to 88, the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 3400 includes a base member 410, a driving side sliding member 420, a driven side sliding member 3430, a driving device 440, a transmission device 450, and a lower front side. It mainly includes a plate member 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 that is disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and that operates in a manner to prevent the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

  In the base member 410, the lowering control member 415 and the raising control member 417 are provided only on the left side in the front view, and the installation on the right side in the front view is omitted.

  The driven-side slide member 3430 has a third symbol display device 81 at a position eccentric leftward in front view from the left-right center position and is configured to be long in the left-right direction, and the left-right direction of the main body member 3431. Functional portions 432 disposed at both ends, guide holes 433 which are vertically formed in the functional portions 432 and through which guide rods 451 are inserted, and rise in the left and right outer directions at the lower end of the functional portions 432 A hook-shaped portion 434 extending inclining, a fall prevention portion 435 extending to the rear side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the functional portion 432 (on the side close to the other guide hole 433), Mainly equipped.

  The main body member 3431 is provided with a locking projection 3431a that is provided at the upper end thereof so as to protrude leftward in front view. The locking convex portion 3431a is a portion that is locked by a solenoid 3480 disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and is prevented from falling. The locking convex portion 3431a is inclined downward as the upper surface thereof approaches the front end in the protruding direction.

  The solenoid 3480 includes a rod member 3481 which can be protruded and retracted rightward in a front view, and the lower surface of the rod member 3481 is inclined upward toward the front end in the projecting direction. Note that the solenoid 3480 is in a retracted state when energized, and is in an extended state when not energized, and in this extended state, the tip of the rod member 3481 projects to the left and right center side beyond the tip of the locking projection 3431a. It consists of.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged to the left in front view. As a result, while securing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the area divided into the left and right of the third symbol display device 81 is gathered at one place (to the right of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84). By configuring as a large area, the degree of freedom of the size of the movable member that can be arranged in the empty area can be improved.

  Since the third symbol display device 81 is disposed closer to the left side when viewed from the front, the load applied to the rack 452 from the driven side slide member 420 is asymmetrical (the left side is larger). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the drive side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to incline the attitude of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 84, a wiring housing member 423 is provided at the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 when viewed from the front. At this time, the gravity center position G31 of the wiring housing member 423 is located to the left from the center position of the driving slide member 420. The slide member 420 may receive a load and may be inclined counterclockwise as viewed from the front.

  As described above, since the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are easily inclined counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the play side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are prevented from rattling during the elevating operation. The rattling between the state in which the 452 maintains the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) and the state in which the driving slide member 420 and the rack 452 are inclined counterclockwise in front view can be limited (driving slide). The member 420 and the rack 452 can be prevented from tilting clockwise as viewed from the front from the horizontal posture.

  Therefore, the descent regulating member 415 and the elevation regulating member 417 disposed on the left side when viewed from the front guide the elevation operation of the driving slide member 420 and the rack 452 while effectively suppressing the inclination of the driving slide member 420 and the rack 452. I do. On the other hand, since the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not tilted to the right in front view, it is not necessary to dispose the lowering and lowering control members 415 and 417 outside the functional unit 432 on the right in front view. Costs (material costs and assembly man-hours) can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the wiring housing member 423 rises as compared with the state shown in FIG. 84, and its center of gravity G31 is compared with the state shown in FIG. To the left in front view.

  Therefore, the load in the direction of inclining the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise in front view increases, and there is a possibility that the meshing relationship between the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the raised position, the protruding plate 453a is abutted on the lowering regulating member 415 and supported. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the posture of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 from inclining counterclockwise in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven slide member 3430 is arranged at the raised position, the locking projection 3431 gets over the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking projection 3431 is placed on the rod member 3481. .

  At this time, when the bar member 3481 is pushed in the left-right direction along the inclination of the upper surface of the locking projection 3431, the locking projection 3431 can get over the bar member 3481. Thus, the locking projection 3431 can be placed on the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 without passing electricity through the solenoid 3480.

  As shown in FIG. 86, even if the drive side slide member 420 is lowered in a state where the driven side slide member 3430 is located at the raised position, the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 is locked by the locking projection 3431a of the driven side slide member 3430. , The driven-side slide member 3430 is prevented from descending in conjunction with the drive-side slide member 420, and the driven-side slide member 3430 is maintained at the raised position.

  At this time, the driven side slide member 3430 is disposed at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is shifted leftward from the center position as viewed from the front, and the center of gravity is shifted leftward. Also, it is possible to suppress the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

  That is, when the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is located at the center in the left-right direction, the driven side slide member 3430 may be swung clockwise or counterclockwise in a front view due to vibration or the like. If the driven side slide member 3430 inclines clockwise as viewed from the front in a state where the solenoid 3480 is located only on the left side, the locking projection 3431a may be displaced from the rod member 3481.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is shifted to the left side in front view. Is suppressed.

  Therefore, the locking protrusion 3431a is easily inclined in the direction approaching the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the contact between the locking protrusion 3431a and the rod member 3481 is maintained. It is prevented from falling off.

  Accordingly, the driven slide member 3430 can be stably maintained at the raised position without disposing the solenoids 3480 on both sides in the left-right direction of the driven slide member 3430. The operation of the driven side slide member 3430 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the rod member 3481 is in the immersion state, the driven slide member 3430 falls. In the process of falling of the driven side slide member 3430, since the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the descent regulating member 415 are shifted in the front-rear direction, the hook-shaped portion 434 may be caught by the descent regulating member 415 and cause malfunction. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the hook-shaped portion 434 falls in a state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 is in contact with the separation inclined portion 417 f of the rise regulating member 417, thereby rotating the rise regulating member 417 in an outer winding (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 87) ( Release state).

  As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position, the elevation regulating member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engagement claw 417e of the elevation regulating member 417, The hook-shaped portion 434 is arranged to face in the vertical direction (engaged state).

  As shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, the state changes from the released state to the engaged state by the rotation of the ascending restricting member 417 with respect to the hook-shaped part 434 of the driven slide member 3430, so that the posture does not change. The amount of load and posture change required to change the disengaged state and the engaged state is increased as compared with the case where the disengaged state and the engaged state are changed by elasticity of the member. be able to. Accordingly, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven-side slide member 3430 and the elevation regulating member 417 are engaged.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the falling-down of the driven-side slide member 3430 causes the ascending restricting member 417 to rotate. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving device to form the engagement state of the elevation regulating member 417. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described embodiments, the case where the opposing wall portion 422f2 protrudes from the lower end of the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 at the lower inclined position has been described. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 disposed to oppose the wall portion 422f1 is configured as a planar wall portion extending in the up-down direction. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those in the above-described embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member 4420 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a). FIG. 89 (c) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420. In FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (c), the drive side slide member 4420 is viewed in cross section at the center position of the connecting member 4424 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 89 (a)). Also, FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b) illustrate a downward inclined state of the connecting member 4424, and FIG. 89 (c) illustrates an upward inclined state of the connecting member 4424.

  The connection member 4424 includes an extension claw 4424f that extends rightward in a front view from the lower end of the upper side wall 424b.

  The extension claw portion 4424f is disposed to face the curved wall portion 422f1 in the upwardly inclined state, is depressed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and is curved, as shown in FIG. (B) Right and left direction) A pair of concave portions is provided in the middle part.

  The second passage forming member 4422 includes an opposing wall 4422f2 that is disposed to oppose the curved wall 422f1. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion that extends in the vertical direction along the opening of the sensor member 422c. In this state, it is extended to a position overlapping with the extension claw portion 4424f.

  According to the present embodiment, in the downwardly inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (a), there is no portion (projection or the like) that is broken by the collision of the ball with the path of the ball, so that the first passage forming member is provided. When the ball is sent from 520 to the connection member 4424, it is possible to prevent the member from being damaged by colliding with the ball.

  In the upward inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (b), the extended claw portion 4424f and the opposing wall portion 4422f2 guide the sphere, so that the sphere can be suppressed from being clogged near the sensor member 422c.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 179. In the present control example, regardless of whether or not the special symbol is in the probable state, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is more advantageous to the player than the ordinary state of the ordinary symbol (low probability state). ing. More specifically, a special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol 1 lottery) executed based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 will be compared with a case where a jackpot has been won. The player who wins a special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol 2 lottery) that is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640a receives a larger amount of prize balls. The jackpot type that can be obtained (the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened) is configured to be easily selected. In other words, in the normal symbol time reduction state, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is easily opened, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily executed. Prize balls easily. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player in the normal symbol time saving state. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state) of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a becomes difficult to be opened, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes difficult to be executed (the lottery of the special symbol 1 is performed). This makes it difficult to obtain a large amount of prize balls even if a big hit occurs. Therefore, the normal state of the normal symbol is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the time reduction state of the normal symbol.

  In addition, although details will be described later, in the present control example, if a big hit occurs in the time saving state of a normal symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol is set with a high probability (for example, 97.5%) after the end of the big hit. This time-saving state of the ordinary symbol continues until the next big hit. That is, once a big hit occurs in the normal symbol time saving state, the jackpot and the normal symbol time saving state are repeated with a high probability (97.5%). Therefore, as long as the time saving state is kept set after the jackpot, the jackpot can be repeatedly won without reducing the number of possessed balls, so that an advantageous state in which a large amount of prize balls are expected to be obtained. Hereinafter, the state in which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol that is continued until the next big hit is set is referred to as “rensou mode”.

  On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state) of a normal symbol, even if a big hit occurs, it is difficult to set the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit. Even if the normal symbol time reduction state is given, most of the set time reduction state ends before the special symbol lottery is executed seven times. That is, the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol set after the big hit is mostly 7 times or less (1 time or 7 times). As described above, if a jackpot is won during this time saving state, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” with a high probability (97.5%). Because it is difficult to become, in many cases, it will return to the normal state of the ordinary symbol without a jackpot. That is, the normal state (low probability state) of the ordinary symbol in which the number of balls is easily reduced and the jackpot (a jackpot in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened) in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball are easily repeated. Therefore, the normal state of the normal symbol is disadvantageous for the player. Hereinafter, for the convenience of description, the normal state (low probability state) of a normal symbol is referred to as “normal mode”. In addition, a time-saving state in which the number of times that there is a possibility of shifting after the end of the jackpot (the job ends when a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries are executed after the end of the jackpot) is referred to as a “preparation mode”.

  By providing a configuration in which the "rensou mode" which is advantageous for the player and the "normal mode" which is disadvantageous for the player, the game can be sharpened. Therefore, it can be suppressed (prevented) that the game becomes monotonous.

  First, with reference to FIG. 90 to FIG. 96, various modes of effects performed in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 90 and FIG. 91 (a) are diagrams showing an example of a fluctuation display (fluctuation pattern effect) executed when a special symbol lottery is executed in the “normal mode” (normal state of a normal symbol). FIG. 91 (b) and FIG. 92 are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode executed at the jackpot when the jackpot is hit in the “normal mode”. FIGS. 93 to 96 show the jackpot. When the mode is shifted to the “preparation mode” after the end (one or seven time-saving periods are given), an effect mode that indicates whether to shift from the “preparation mode” to the “rensou mode” or not It is a figure showing an example.

  First, with reference to FIG. 90 and FIG. 91 (a), a description will be given of an effect mode when the variable display is executed in the “normal mode”. In the "normal mode", the number (number) displayed on the staging unit 331 of the upper elevating unit 300 notifies whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit. More specifically, of the five types (predetermined) of numbers selected in advance by the player, any four types are displayed one by one on each of the display units 331a to 331d constituting the staging unit 331. By doing so, the jackpot is announced. On the other hand, when a number different from any of the five types of predetermined numbers is displayed on at least one of the display units 331a to 331d, the special symbol is notified.

  A combination of five types of numbers indicating the special symbol lottery results is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), a combination of five types of numbers is arranged inside a vertically long and substantially rectangular small area Ds2 formed on the right side in front view on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (Lucky number) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 90 (a), five types of "2", "7", "13", "17", and "25" are displayed as a combination of five predetermined numbers (lucky numbers). ing. In addition, in the large area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a character “Get a Lucky Number !!” is displayed. By these display contents, five kinds of numbers (“2”, “7”, “13”, “17”, “25”) displayed as a lucky number are displayed on the effect part 331 so that a special symbol is displayed. Can be easily recognized by the player. The five types of lucky numbers displayed in the small area Ds2 can be selected by a player from a game menu screen, for example. The game menu screen is, for example, a screen displayed by operating the frame button 22 in a game stop state. By setting the lucky number to be selectable by the player, a combination of numbers (symbols) displayed in the rendering unit 331 when a special symbol is hit can be set to a number (symbol) desired by the player. Can be. That is, the winning symbol can be changed according to the taste of each player.

  Further, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a reserved symbol indicating the current number of retained balls is displayed inside a vertically-long and substantially rectangular small area Ds1 formed on the left side in a front view. Since the example of FIG. 90A shows the case where the number of reserved balls is four, four reserved symbols indicated by black circles are displayed in the small area Ds1. By visually recognizing the number of the reserved symbols, the player can easily recognize the number of the reserved balls.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (a), when the special symbol lottery is started, the symbol display is changed on each of the display units 331a to 331d of the rendering unit 331. When the special symbol lottery result is out of order, a number different from the lucky number is displayed on at least one display section (see FIG. 90 (b)). FIG. 90 (b) shows numbers (“8” and “1”) different from the lucky numbers on the display unit 331b and the display unit 331c in the out-of-position change display, and the display unit 331a and the display. An example in which lucky numbers (“17” and “2”) are displayed in the section 331d is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the out-of-combination combination is stopped and displayed on the rendering unit 331, the character "Sorry ..." is displayed in the large area Dm on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the result of the special symbol lottery has been lost.

  The numbers displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 are set in different modes depending on whether or not they are lucky numbers. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), when one of the numbers defined as the lucky number is displayed, white numbers are displayed (display units 331a and 331d). On the other hand, when a number different from the lucky number is displayed, the number is displayed in black characters (display units 331b and 331c). By making the display mode of numbers different according to whether or not it is a lucky number, the player can more easily recognize whether or not the number displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d is a lucky number. be able to.

  In the present control example, the lucky number is displayed in white and numbers other than the lucky number are displayed in black characters, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lucky number may be displayed in red letters so that it can be easily distinguished whether it is a lucky number or the background of the lucky number is set to red and the background of numbers other than the lucky number is set to white. By doing so, it may be configured to be easily distinguishable from the lucky number, or by increasing the character size of the lucky number, it may be configured to be easily distinguishable from the lucky number.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, one of the five lucky numbers is displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d. In the example of FIG. 91A, among the five types of lucky numbers (“2”, “7”, “13”, “17”, “25”), “17”, “25”, “25” "2" and "13" are displayed as white numbers. In addition, a lucky number is displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d, and the character "Success !!" is displayed in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. With these display contents, the player can easily recognize that the big hit has occurred.

  In the present control example, four of the five types of lucky numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed one by one on each of the display units 331a to 331d to notify the big hit. , But is not limited to this. For example, the lucky number may not be specified, and the same number may be simply displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d to notify the big hit. By doing so, it is only necessary to pay attention to whether or not the same number has been collected, and it is not necessary to illuminate the lucky number with the number displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d. It can be easier. In addition, for example, the variable display of the symbols does not necessarily need to be performed on each of the display units 331a to 331d, and the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to perform the variable display of the symbols. Accordingly, since the display units 331a to 331d can be omitted, the number of components of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, the yield rate during production can be improved by reducing the number of parts. Further, the failure rate can be reduced.

  Next, an effect performed at the jackpot in the “normal mode” will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b) and FIG. Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the first variable winning device 82a repeats the opening for 0.6 seconds and the closing for 0.9 seconds 20 times per round (opening pattern A ) And an opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which opening for 0.052 seconds per round is performed only once. In FIG. 91 (b) and FIG. 92, a description will be given of a big hit effect when the open pattern A is set.

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents at the jackpot where the opening pattern A is set. Here, when the big hit type in which the opening pattern A is set in the “normal mode” is won, first, the driving side slide member 420 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 are connected. Placed in the position. Thereafter, the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern A. By connecting the drive side slide member 420 and the first passage forming member 520 before setting the opening pattern A, all the balls that have won the first variable prize winning device 82a can be replaced by the first passage forming member 82a. It can flow down to the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 via 520. In the present control example, each time a ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 (each time the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c of the second passage forming member 422). A time saving suggestion effect is performed to indicate whether or not the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, a character "Align lucky numbers !!" is displayed. In addition, the lucky number displayed at the time of notifying the jackpot is continuously displayed on the display units 331a to 331d even during the jackpot. Further, in the effect section 422a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, a symbol change display is executed. With these display contents, the remaining one type of numbers different from the numbers displayed on the respective display units 331a to 331d among the five types of lucky numbers (see the small area Ds2) is displayed on the rendering unit 422a, so that the player is displayed. The player can easily recognize that the time saving state that is advantageous for the player is set. In addition, in the variation display of the symbol executed in the rendering unit 422a, a stop display is executed every time the ball reaches the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 (the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c).

  FIG. 92 (a) is a diagram showing a case where a ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 and is notified that the ball has come off. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), when the deviation is notified, the effect part 422a is a number different from the lucky number (see the small area Ds2) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. "3" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the characters "failure ..." are displayed in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the time saving state is given after the end of the jackpot. Even if the release is notified, if the opening period of the opening pattern A remains, the variation display of the symbol (see FIG. 91 (b)) is restarted in the rendering unit 422a. In other words, the more variable the ball is made to enter the first variable winning device 82a (winning), the more variable display is executed, so that it can be made to positively want the ball to be awarded to the first variable winning device 82a. . Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved.

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is reported. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when it is determined that the ball has passed the sensor member 422c of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400, "7", which is one type of lucky number, is given to the effect part 422a. Stopped and displayed. That is, out of the five types of lucky numbers, numbers different from the four types of lucky numbers stopped and displayed on the display units 331a to 331d to notify the big hit are stopped and displayed. In addition, the characters "Great success! Roulette chance GET!" Are displayed in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. With these displays, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the transition to the “preparation mode” (normal symbol time saving state) after the end of the big hit.

  In the present control example, a number (symbol) different from the lucky number is displayed in the rendering unit 422a when not shifting to the “prepare mode”, and is defined as a lucky number when shifting to the “prepare mode”. Although one of the numbers (symbols) is configured to be displayed on the rendering unit 422a, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the start of the big hit, an effect may be executed in which an image of a wall is displayed on the effect portion 422a, and the displayed wall is gradually broken down each time the passage of a sphere is detected by the sensor member 422c. Then, as the wall collapses, the lucky number displayed behind the wall is exposed, and the lucky number can be obtained when the wall completely collapses ("preparation mode" is notified). You may. As described above, each time the ball that has won the first variable prize device 82a is detected by the sensor member 422c, an effect is performed in a manner as if the lucky number is approaching. On the other hand, the ball can be launched more actively during the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to increase a player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game.

  In the present control example, when notifying the “preparation mode”, the lucky number is displayed on the rendering unit 422a. It is not limited to numbers. A symbol irrelevant to the lucky number may be displayed. For example, the symbol "V" may be displayed to notify the transition to the "preparation mode".

  In the present control example, in the big hit where the “opening pattern A” is set, the fluctuation display is executed every time a ball is detected by the sensor member 422c. However, the fluctuation display is not necessarily performed each time a ball is detected (“ Notification of whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode”) may be omitted. For example, a configuration in which the variable display is performed only once during the big hit may be adopted. More specifically, for example, an effect (variable display) of whether or not a lucky number is displayed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls pass through the sensor member 422c is executed. Is also good. With this configuration, the ball can be more positively launched in order to quickly know whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode”. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved. In this case, if the number of balls that have passed through the sensor member 422c is less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) before the end of the final round of the jackpot, the game enters the “preparation mode” during the ending period. It may be notified whether or not to shift, or may be configured to notify whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” when the jackpot ends and the first variable display is executed. Thereby, even if a predetermined number of balls cannot be made to enter the first variable winning device 82a during the big hit, it is notified whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode". Because it is possible, the player can accurately grasp the game state after the big hit. In addition, the number of balls to be awarded to the first variable winning device 82a before the effect (variable display) of whether or not the lucky number is displayed does not need to be fixed every time, and the "open pattern A" is not required. May be changed by lottery or the like every time a big hit is set.

  In the present control example, in the big hit where the “opening pattern A” is set, the variable display is executed every time a ball is detected by the sensor member 422c, but the present invention is not limited to this. A variation display may be performed each time the sensor member 422c detects the passage of a sphere a predetermined number of times (for example, twice or five times). With this configuration, even if the ball continuously wins in the first variable prize device 82a, a sufficient time interval can be provided between the completion of each change and the start of the next change. (It is possible to prevent the condition for starting the next change from being satisfied during the change). Therefore, it is possible to make the player confirm the result of each variable display more reliably.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the big hit of the opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which the opening is performed only once for 0.052 seconds per round, whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” is immediately notified. You. That is, in the case of shifting to the “preparation mode” after the jackpot, a lucky number is displayed on the effect portion 422a when the first variable winning device 82a is opened, regardless of whether the ball has won. On the other hand, when not shifting to the “preparation mode”, a number (symbol) different from the lucky number is displayed when the first variable winning device 82a is opened.

  The jackpot in which the “open pattern B” is set will be described in detail. The jackpot in which the “opening pattern B” is set includes an opening period of 3 seconds, a round period of 0.052 seconds (for two rounds), an interval period of 0.5 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds. Have been. That is, the jackpot ends in about 6.6 seconds. By using these 6.6 seconds, the effect display unit 422a executes the symbol change display. Then, when the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” after the jackpot, the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the staging unit 422a when 5.6 seconds have elapsed, and the lucky number continues to be displayed for about the remaining one second of the jackpot. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the mode has shifted to the “preparation mode”. On the other hand, when shifting to the “normal mode” after the jackpot, a number different from the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the rendering unit 422a. Thereby, it is possible to easily recognize the transition to the “normal mode”. By executing an effect to determine whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” during the big hit in which the “opening pattern B” is set, it is possible to draw attention to the staging unit 422a during the big hit. That is, even if the "opening pattern B" is set in which the first variable winning device 82a is released only for a short time (0.052 seconds) (that is, it is extremely difficult to obtain a prize ball), the slight opening time is set. During the opening period, the player's attention can be diverted from the first variable winning device 82a. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the fact that the “open pattern B” has reached the set jackpot, and it is possible to recognize as if it were one mode of the variable effect selected in the “normal mode”. In other words, it is possible to make the player recognize as if it were directly shifted from the “normal mode” to the “preparation mode”. Therefore, a lucky number is given to the staging unit 422a by a time-saving suggestion effect performed by causing the first variable prize device 82a to win a ball during the hit, in which the "opening pattern A" is set to the jackpot. Can be recognized even if it does not go through a plurality of stages of being displayed, so that the player can be more easily shifted to the "prepare mode". You can feel like. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG. 96, an example of the effect in the case where the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” after the end of the big hit (one or seven time-saving periods are given) will be described. As described above, in the present control example, when a big hit occurs in the time-saving state of a normal symbol, a “rensou mode” that is advantageous to the player with a high probability (for example, 97.5%) after the end of the big hit (the next big hit) To the normal symbol time-saving state, which continues until a certain time. In the “rensou mode”, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily executed. When a jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type (probably variable jackpot H to K, normal jackpot B) in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened is selected, so that more prize balls are given to the player. Can be acquired. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with one goal being to shift to the advantageous “rensou mode”.

  In order to shift from the “normal mode” to the “rensou mode”, it is basically necessary to shift to the “preparation mode” and win a jackpot during the “preparation mode”. For this reason, whether or not a big hit occurs in the “preparation mode” is one of the most important scenes in the game, because it determines the degree of advantage of the player playing the game in the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, in the present control example, in the “preparation mode”, a relatively large (flashy) “rensou mode suggestion effect” (see FIGS. 94 and 95) involving the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 (see FIG. 45) Is configured to execute.

  Although the details will be described later, in this “rensou mode suggestion effect”, the ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650 during the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 (see FIG. 45) configured to simulate roulette. Depending on the type of the pocket (the display board 646 and the partition board 647) into which the ball B falls, an effect of notifying whether or not the mode has been shifted to the “rensou mode” is executed. More specifically, 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640 are divided into a hit pocket and a missed pocket, and the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 falls into the hit pocket. By doing so, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the “rensou mode”. A rear LED 625 is provided on the rear side of the rotating member 640 (see FIG. 97). The back LED 625 is controlled to be turned on such that the back side of the hit pocket is turned on and the back side of the missing pocket is turned off. Therefore, by visually recognizing the lit pocket, the player can easily recognize the position of the hit pocket.

  The “rensou mode suggestion effect” is, specifically, an effect of setting (lighting) a winning pocket (effect of increasing a lucky number) and an effect of throwing a ball B into any pocket of the rotating member 640 (roulette chance). Production) and ending production. In the lucky number increase effect, each time a ball enters the second entrance 640a, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the hit pocket (lucky number). By increasing the number of winning pockets, the player can be made to feel as if it has become easier to shift to the “rensou mode”, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the lottery of whether or not to increase the winning pocket, whether or not the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined (whether the winning variation of the jackpot is changing or the “rensou mode” The lottery probability of whether or not to increase the number of winning pockets is made different depending on whether or not there is a probable variable jackpot inside. Specifically, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined, the hit pocket increases with a high probability (each time a ball enters the second entrance 640a, at a rate of 25%). Is determined. On the other hand, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is undetermined, or when it is confirmed that the return to the “normal mode” without the transition to the “rensou mode” is made (the last In the case where the special symbol lottery is missed), the increase in the number of hit pockets is determined with a low probability (a rate of 5% every time a ball enters the second entrance 640a). When the shift to the “rensou mode” is confirmed, the winning pockets are more likely to be increased, so that the winning pockets are increased, thereby improving the player's expectation of the “rensou mode”. Can be.

  Before increasing the number of winning pockets, a pocket having the same number as the lucky number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as the winning pocket. That is, the lucky number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 serves to notify the special symbol jackpot in the “normal mode” (see FIG. 91 (a)), and shifts to the “preparation mode” after the end of the jackpot. In addition to the role of notifying whether or not to shift (see FIG. 92 (b)), it also has the role of notifying whether or not to shift to “rensou mode”. Since the lucky number is used for various notifications that are advantageous to the player, knowing the lucky number allows the player to easily understand the result of each effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand. In addition, the notification of the special symbol jackpot in the "normal mode", the notification of "preparation mode" (normal symbol time saving state) executed in the jackpot, and the "rensou mode" executed in the "preparation mode" With the notification of, an effect aimed at obtaining all lucky numbers is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel these three different notifications as if they were one effect. Therefore, an effect with a sense of unity can be executed.

  The details of the lucky number increase effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the lucky number increase effect. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), during the effect of increasing the lucky number, the character “preparing roulette chance” is displayed in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the roulette chance effect is executed by the rotating member 640 configured as a roulette.

  In addition, below the word "roulette chance preparation" is displayed the character "Right-click to increase lucky number !!" When this character is displayed, during the execution of the lucky number increase effect, the player hits the ball toward the right side of the game board 13 (hits the ball right), thereby informing the player that the hit pocket may increase. Can be informed. Therefore, in the “preparation mode” in which the lucky number increase effect is set, the player can be made to make a right strike, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is advantageous to the player in the normal symbol time reduction state is executed. It will be easier. Therefore, a game can be played under advantageous conditions of the player, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 93 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the winning pocket (lucky number) increases in the lucky number increase effect. As shown in FIG. 93, during the execution of the lucky number increase effect, a prize (entrance) to the second entrance 640a is detected, and if the winning lottery of the winning pocket is won, an additional symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A winning pocket (lucky number) is announced. That is, in the large area Dm, the character “10GET !!” is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the number of hit pockets has increased by one, so that the player can be pleased. When the increase of the hit pocket is notified, the back side of the hit pocket is set to a lighting state. Thus, the position of the hit pocket on the rotating member 640 can be easily determined.

  In the first control example, the lottery for determining whether or not to increase the winning pocket (lucky number) is performed when the ball enters the second entrance 640a. The opportunity to increase the pocket (lucky number) is not limited to this. For example, a lottery may be performed to determine whether to increase the number of hit pockets (lucky numbers) when passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, or according to the elapsed time (for example, the end of the big hit). (Every 3 seconds have elapsed), a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of hit pockets (lucky numbers), or according to the number of ejected balls (for example, every five balls are fired). The lottery for determining whether or not to increase the winning pocket (lucky number) may be performed.

  In the first control example, during the execution of the lucky number increase effect, the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the winning pocket is made different depending on whether or not the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined. However, the variation of the lottery probability may be further increased. For example, when the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined, and when it is undecided whether to shift to the “rensou mode” (the number of start winning prizes in the time saving state is reduced to the set time saving period ), And the case where it is determined not to shift to the “rensou mode” may be configured to differ in the probability (ratio) that the increase of the winning pocket is determined. Specifically, for example, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined at the time of the lottery, a relatively high probability (for example, 25% of the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640a) ), The winning pocket (lucky number) is increased, and when it is determined that the mode does not shift to the “rensou mode”, a relatively high probability (for example, the second entrance 640a) May be configured so that the hit pocket is increased at a rate of 5% when the ball enters the ball). When it is undecided whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”, the probability between the above two cases (for example, a ratio of 10% when the ball enters the second entrance 640a) And the number of hit pockets may be increased. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a variation in how to increase the number of winning pockets, thereby further improving the interest in the lucky number increase effect.For example, it is undecided whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” In the case of (1), the probability that the number of hit pockets may be increased may be changed according to the number of working hours set as the “preparation mode”. That is, when the “preparation mode” with one time reduction period is set, the probability that the number of hit pockets is increased is lower than when the “preparation mode” with seven time reduction periods is set. May be. More specifically, for example, the configuration may be such that the number of hit pockets (lucky numbers) is increased at a rate of 8% when the number of time reductions is one, and at a rate of 12% when the number of time reductions is seven. As a result, the time-saving period can be predicted from the increase in the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers), so that it is possible to expect a shift to the “rensou mode” by increasing the number of winning pockets. In addition, it is possible to expect seven time-saving periods that are advantageous to the player (there are many chances of shifting to the “rensou mode”).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94 and FIG. 95, a roulette chance effect, which is one of the effects constituting the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, will be described. In the roulette chance effect, as described above, an effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” based on whether or not the ball B falls into the hit pocket.

  When the roulette chance effect is executed, first, in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, a character “Roulette Chance !!” is displayed, and a “ball in a shining pocket” is displayed below the character. If it falls, the text "rensou mode" is displayed. This allows the player to understand that the ball B falls into the pocket whose back side is set to the lighted state among the pockets of the rotating member 640, and that the game shifts to the “rensou mode”. .

  FIG. 94 (b) is a view showing a state where the arm member 664 of the pitching device 650 is rotated (see FIG. 65), and the ball B performs a swinging operation on the holding piece 677 at the protruding position. In FIG. 94 (b), the hitting pocket of the rotating member 640 is hatched, and the missing pocket is displayed in white.

  In the roulette chance production, when the cycle of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 second), the ball B is dropped to a target pocket (either a missing pocket or a hit pocket). (The holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position). By causing the ball B to swing once on the holding piece 677 and dropping the ball B after the period of the swing is reduced, it is possible to make it seem as if the ball B falls naturally. That is, when the ball B performs the swinging motion on the holding piece 677, the motion of the ball B can be more noticed, so that the player's interest in the roulette chance effect can be improved. In the following description, among the roulette chance effects, a series of effects from when the ball B is thrown toward the holding piece 677 until the ball B falls into one of the pockets is referred to as a rocking effect.

  FIG. 95 (a) is a diagram showing a case where the ball B has fallen and dropped into the pocket. Here, the case where the ball B comes off and falls into the pocket is, specifically, a case where the rocking effect is executed without a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol during the “preparation mode” (start of the rocking effect) At the point in time, the deviation fluctuation is being executed or the fluctuation is stopped). In this case, since the shift to the “rensou mode” has not been determined at the start of the swing effect, control is performed so that the ball B falls into the missing pocket.

  When the swinging effect is started without the special symbol jackpot, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the rotation of the rotating member 640 causes a detached pocket (opened pocket) immediately below the holding piece 677. The ball B is controlled to drop from the holding piece 677 in accordance with the arrangement. In addition, the character “Sorry” is displayed on the effect part 422 a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. This allows the player to easily understand that the transition from the "preparation mode" to the "rensou mode" could not be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode will shift to the “rensou mode” at the start of the rocking production, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the hit pocket (hatched display) is directly below the holding piece 677. Is controlled so that the ball B falls from the holding piece 677 in accordance with the arrangement of the pockets. In addition, the characters “great success” are displayed on the effect part 422 a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the transition to the “rensou mode”.

  When the ball B falls into the falling pocket or the hit pocket, the cantilever plate 683 of the guide member 680 is pushed down by the weight of the ball B as described above, so that the limit switch is turned on. By detecting the ON state of the limit switch, it can be easily determined that the ball B has dropped normally. When the falling of the ball B is detected, the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 is stopped. In other words, the pocket (the pocket where the ball B has fallen) to which the number (identification information) indicating the effect of the current “renjo mode suggestion effect” is attached is stopped immediately below the holding piece 677 as the ball B falls. You. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the result of the effect by observing the same position (immediately below the holding piece 677) in each “rendition mode suggestive effect”. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect in which the effect of the effect is more easily understood.

  As described above, the positions of the pockets while the rotating member 640 is rotating are determined by monitoring the outputs of the detection sensors A to F (see FIG. 76) provided on the guide member 680 and outputting the outputs. Is determined by the combination of That is, the type of the pocket arranged immediately below the holding piece 677 is determined based on the combination of the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F (rotational position detection sensor 684). In the following description, a position immediately below the holding piece 677 is referred to as a drop position.

  In this control example, while the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677, the type of the pocket at the drop position is specified (determined) from the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F. Then, according to the result of the determination, the type of the pocket arranged to the next drop position after the pocket currently arranged at the drop position (the pocket adjacent to the pocket currently arranged at the drop position) is determined. Is done. Next, the type of pocket arranged at the drop position matches the type of pocket (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket) in which the ball B is dropped in the present swing effect, and the ball B swings. When the cycle of the operation is equal to or shorter than a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 second), the ball B is dropped into the next pocket to be placed at the drop position.

  Here, it is not the type of the pocket at the drop position, but the type of the pocket to be arranged at the next drop position determined by the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 that is determined after the ball B is determined to be dropped. This is because it takes time for the ball to reach the pocket at the falling position. That is, a time lag occurs between the time when the driving motor (holding piece motor) 675 is driven to start the operation of the holding piece 677 to the immersion position and the time when the ball B actually falls. If the configuration in which the type of the pocket at the drop position is determined and the drop control of the ball B is performed (the operation of the holding piece 677 to the immersion position) is executed, the time until the ball B actually falls becomes long. For example, the ball B may fall after the target pocket has passed. Also, for example, while the ball B is falling in the throwing path 655a, the partition plate 647 provided on the right side in the front view of the pocket arranged at the drop position moves by a rotating operation, so that the ball B is thrown. There is a possibility that the rotary member 640 may be caught by the passage 655a and the partition plate 647 and hinder the rotation operation of the rotary member 640.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the type of the pocket to be placed next at the drop position and the drop control of the ball B based on the determination result are executed before the pocket is placed at the drop position. It is configured to That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the immersion position at a timing when the ball B can be sufficiently dropped into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the drop position). And can be immersed. Therefore, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the pocket of the target type. Therefore, although the ball B does not shift to the “rensou mode”, the ball B falls into the hit pocket, and conversely, despite the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined, The ball B can be prevented (suppressed) from falling off and falling into the pocket.

  In this control example, the type of the pocket placed at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position is determined, and the fall control of the ball B is executed. It is not limited to this. For example, the type of the pocket two or three ahead from the current drop position may be determined in advance, and the fall control of the ball B with respect to the determined pocket may be performed. With such a configuration, the drop control can be executed with more margin, so that the ball B can be reliably dropped into the pocket of the target type.

  The rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is stopped based on the detection that the ball B has fallen into the missing pocket or the hit pocket, and when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the stop, the “rensou” Ending indicating the end of the “mode suggestion effect” is started. In the ending, the result of the effect is notified again in the third symbol display device 81, and the rotating member 640 is turned in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotating operation in the “rensou mode suggesting effect” (ie, the clockwise direction in front view). Rotate. This rotating operation is performed until the rotating member 640 is disposed at a position (for example, five pockets in a counterclockwise direction) at which the ball B dropped from the holding piece 677 can be rolled to the return passage 655b. continue. In the course of the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, when the pocket in which the ball B has dropped is positioned in the upper right direction in front view with respect to the return path 655b, the ball B falls from the opening of the pocket to the return path 655b. . When the ball B falls into the return passage 655b, the ball B rolls along the inclination of the rolling portion 655b1, and is placed on the ball holding portion 652. As described above, during the ending, by returning the ball B to a state in which the ball B can be pitched by the pitching device 650, an effect of dropping the ball B into any pocket in each of the “renjo mode suggestion effects” is executed. can do.

  When the rotating operation for returning the ball B to the ball holding unit 652 performed during the ending is completed, the rotating member 640 is kept in the stopped state until the next “rensou mode suggestion effect” is executed. Dripping. That is, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 after the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is completed differs depending on the pocket where the ball B has fallen. By simply rotating the ball B from the position where the ball B was dropped for five pockets without returning the arrangement of the rotating member 640 to the determined position, the time until the end of the rotating operation can be shortened. Therefore, the operation of the rotating member 640 can be surely ended during the ending of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, an additional effect performed in order to expect the player to shift to the “preparation mode” or the “rensou mode” in the “normal mode” will be described. The "addition" mentioned here means adding (adding) the number of winning pockets (the number of lucky numbers) in the roulette chance production of the "renjo mode suggestion production". If the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is executed during that time, the number of pockets is increased by the number added in the additional effect. By adding the winning pocket (lucky number), it is possible to make the player feel as if it is easier to win in the roulette chance effect, so that the player's expectation for the roulette chance effect can be increased.

  Whether or not to execute the additional effect is determined by a lottery (additional lottery) executed when the winning in the first entrance 64 is suspended in the “normal mode”. In this additional lottery, the ratio of additional effects determined differs according to the content of each reserved ball. Specifically, a lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "preparation mode" (a jackpot in which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set) and a lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "rensou mode" (Normal probability big hit in the time saving state of the normal symbol) exists (when it is determined that the roulette chance effect succeeds), the execution of the additional effect is determined at the highest ratio (25%). On the other hand, when the holding ball does not include the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “renso mode” or the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “preparation mode” (when the roulette chance effect is not executed) , The execution of the additional effect is determined at the lowest rate (5%). Furthermore, when the holding ball does not include the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “rensou mode” and includes only the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “preparation mode” (only the execution of the roulette chance effect is performed) Is determined and the effect result is undetermined), the execution of the additional effect is determined at an intermediate ratio (15%) between the two cases described above.

  As described above, the lottery result included in the pending ball is configured to be more advantageous to the player, so that the execution of the additional effect is configured to be easily determined. By digesting the holding ball, it can be expected that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be improved.

  Next, a specific mode of the additional effect will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 96 (a), when the number of reserved balls increases in the “normal mode”, the number of reserved symbols (designated by black circles) displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 increases by one. Three. Further, when the execution of the additional effect is determined by the additional lottery executed in response to the increase in the number of the reserved balls, the character “add !!!! + 1” is displayed on the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, "+1" indicating the total added number is displayed below the lucky number displayed in the small area Ds2. The display of the number of additions to the small area Ds2 is performed until the effect of increasing the number of pockets by the number added in the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is performed when the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is executed. Continue to be displayed. On the other hand, in a case where the additional effect is executed, but the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is not executed (when the jackpot in which the time saving state is set is not included in the reserved ball), the execution of the additional effect is determined. The accumulated number of additions continues to be displayed until the reserved ball that has been triggered is consumed (the lottery of the special symbol based on the reserved ball ends).

  FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when one extra pocket (lucky number) is added by the additional effect, and then the “renjo mode suggestive effect” is started while the holding ball is being digested. is there. As described above, the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is executed when the special symbol is a big hit in the “normal mode”, and the normal symbol time-saving state is set after the big hit is finished. Therefore, at the start of the “representative mode suggestion effect”, the lucky numbers (that is, “17”, “25”, “2”, and “13”) displayed on the respective display units 331a to 331d when the jackpot is announced. The symbol is continued to be displayed, and the lucky number (that is, the symbol of “7”) displayed at the time of informing the “preparation mode” to the staging unit 422a is continuously displayed (see FIG. 96 (b)).

  In addition, when the `` rensou mode suggestion effect '' is started in an added state, as a part of the lucky number increase effect, an effect of notifying the lucky number added in the additional effect in the `` normal mode '' is executed. You. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the character “added lucky number” is displayed for the large area Dm. Then, a character "5GET !!" is displayed below the character. Since this character is displayed inside the balloon generated from the position where the total added number is displayed, the lucky number added by the additional effect before the jackpot was "5". You can recognize that. Further, the pocket of the rotating member 640 corresponding to the lucky number notified by this effect is newly set as a hit pocket. That is, the pocket numbered “5” is set to the lighting state. By performing the effect of increasing the winning pocket (lucky number), it is made to feel as if the possibility of being notified of the winning (transition to the “rensou mode”) is increased in the subsequently performed roulette chance effect. be able to. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation for the roulette chance effect can be increased.

  As described above, in the present control example, in the “normal mode”, an additional effect that is more easily executed as the lottery result advantageous to the player is suspended is provided. Thus, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the additional effect. For example, an additional effect is usually performed when the jackpot type in which the “preparation mode” is set after the jackpot is suspended is increased, so that it is normal that the extra jackpot is performed (when the additional effect is not executed). It is possible to have the player play the game with higher expectation. If the jackpot hits, the expectation of shifting to the “preparation mode” increases.

  In addition, when the jackpot is hit as expected by the player, the player can be made aware that the degree of expectation to shift to the “prepare mode” is higher than usual (when the additional effect is not executed). In this way, it is possible to more strongly expect that the lucky number is displayed on the staging unit 422a during the jackpot game. Furthermore, at the time of execution of the additional production, the case where the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “rensou mode” is suspended is compared with the case where the transition to the “rensou mode” is not determined. Since the execution ratio of the additional effect is configured to be high, when the "prepare mode" is notified as expected by the player, if the degree of expectation to shift to the "rensou mode" is higher than usual, the player Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a stronger sense of expectation for shifting to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, by executing the additional effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in a stepwise manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the present control example, the case where it is determined that the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined within the range of the reserved ball, and the case where only the transition to the “prepare mode” is determined within the range of the reserved ball. , The ratio (probability) at which the additional effect is executed is different in each of the three cases (ie, 25%, 10%, and 5%), however, the additional effect is executed. The lottery probability of whether or not may be divided into more detailed cases. More specifically, for example, when all the reserved balls are out of place, an additional effect is executed at a rate (probability) of 3%, the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot is included in the reserved balls, and the jackpot type is When only the jackpot type that shifts to the “normal mode” after the jackpot is included, an additional effect may be executed at a rate (probability) of 5%. In addition, if the holding ball includes a jackpot type that shifts to the “preparation mode”, and it is determined that the shift to the “rensou mode” is not determined at the time of the additional lottery, 7% It may be configured such that the additional effect is executed at the ratio (probability) of. Here, the case where it is determined not to shift to the “rensou mode” is, for example, a state where only the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot type to which one time saving period is given is suspended, This is the case where an additional lottery is executed due to the newly reserved ball corresponding to the lottery result. Furthermore, when only the transition to the “preparation mode” is determined at the time of the additional lottery, the additional production is determined at a rate (probability) of 10%, and When the transition is determined, the additional effect may be executed at a rate (probability) of 25%.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to divide into finer stages and give expectations to various advantageous states. That is, at the time when the additional effect is executed, it is possible to expect that a big hit will be stronger than usual (when the additional effect is not executed). This is because if a jackpot occurs, expectations for the transition to the “preparation mode” and the transition to the “rensou mode” increase. Then, when the jackpot is hit as expected by the player, it can be expected that the transition to the “preparation mode” is notified at the jackpot more strongly than usual. This is because, if a transition is made to the “preparation mode” after the additional production, the degree of expectation for the transition to the “rensou mode” is increased. Furthermore, when the jackpot is hit as expected by the player, it is more strongly expected that the roulette chance effect executed in the “preparation mode” notifies the hit (that is, shift to the “rensou mode”). Can be done.

  Next, the lighting control of the rear LED 625 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the rear LED 625 is provided to illuminate the contact pocket of the rotating member 640 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 97, the rear LED 625 includes three arc-shaped LED bars 625a, 625b, and 625c, and these are combined to form a ring shape in a front view. As shown in FIG. 97, each of the LED bars 625a, 625b, and 625c is provided with six lighting regions in which four LED chips are densely arranged at equal intervals (lighting regions A1 to A18). By lighting each of the lighting regions A1 to A18, a region having substantially the same area as one pocket of the rotating member 640 can emit light. Therefore, by lighting the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket, the hit pocket can be made to look shiny.

  Here, the lighting of each LED chip included in the rear LED 625 is controlled by a known LED driver. The LED driver can switch the ratio (DUTY ratio) between the ON period and the OFF period of the LED and change the lighting frequency based on the lighting control command received from the audio lamp control device 113. For example, when a lighting control command indicating that the ON period is 80% (DUTY ratio 80%) and the frequency is 320 Hz is output to the LED driver, the LED driver outputs 80% of one cycle (1/320 second). The ON period of the width and the OFF period of the 20% time width are repeatedly set. This operation is continued until a new lighting control command is received.

  A method of specifying the ON period by a lighting control command output to the LED driver will be described more specifically. The data (lighting rate data) indicating the length of the ON period (lighting rate) is composed of data of a plurality of bits (for example, 8 bits). If the lighting rate data is 00H (0 in decimal notation), it means the lighting rate (DUTY ratio) is 0%, and if the lighting rate data is FFH (255 in decimal number), the lighting rate (DUTY ratio) Means 100%. Further, the lighting rate is set to increase at regular intervals as the lighting rate data goes from 00H to FFH. For example, when 80H (128 in decimal notation) is set as the lighting rate data, the lighting state is 50% (that is, 128/255).

  The reference signal (synchronization signal) serving as a reference for the lighting frequency of the LED can generate the frequency designated by the lighting control command by the LED driver itself (set it to free run), or can be input from outside the LED driver. The synchronization signal (external synchronization signal) can be used. Further, whether to use the free-run mode or use the external synchronization signal can be specified by a lighting control command. When an external synchronization signal is input to the LED driver, it is not necessary to set the lighting frequency by the lighting control command.

  Further, in one cycle of turning on and off the LED, the position of the on period can be changed by the lighting control command. That is, the LED on-period can be set at the same time as the detection of the synchronization signal, and the LED off-period can be set at the end of the on-period. An on-period can also be set after the end of the period.

  A specific example of the lighting control command for setting the position of the ON period will be described in detail. The setting start position of the ON period is specified by, for example, 8-bit data. Specifically, one cycle is divided into 255 equal parts, and it is possible to specify from which section the on-period is started by 8-bit data. If the data designating the position of the ON period is 00H, the ON period starts from the first section of one cycle divided into 255 equal parts (that is, simultaneously with the start of one cycle). If the data that specifies the position of the ON period is 1EH (that is, 30 in decimal notation), the ON period starts from the 31st section of one cycle divided into 255 equal parts.

  The lighting control command includes data for specifying a lighting area. That is, the above-mentioned lighting rate, lighting frequency, lighting phase, and the like can be set by designating a part or all of the lighting areas A1 to A18. The setting of the lighting area is specified by, for example, data of 3 bytes (24 bits). Specifically, bits corresponding to each of the lighting regions A1 to A18 are set (for example, the lighting regions A1 to A18 are associated with the lower bits in order), and the lighting region corresponding to the ON bit is set. Thus, the lighting state specified by the lighting control command is reflected by the LED driver.

  As described above, the LED driver for controlling the LEDs according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to receive a lighting control command including a plurality of data. The plurality of data are output by a serial transfer method such as an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) method. That is, a signal corresponding to various lighting control data (serial data) such as a lighting rate from the audio lamp control device 113 and what data (the bit of the data is the serial data) currently being output. And a signal (serial clock) indicating the following.

  More specifically, for example, from the audio lamp control device 113, as serial data, 24-bit data corresponding to the lighting area, 8-bit data corresponding to the lighting rate of the specified lighting area, or the lighting frequency 8-bit data, 8-bit data indicating an ON period setting start position, and the like are output. The LED driver outputs a signal (so-called ACK) indicating that data has been normally received to the sound lamp control device 113 every time, for example, every data of 8 bits is received. The sound ramp control device 113 waits until an ACK is received, and outputs the next 8 bits of data when the ACK is received. Thus, omission of data reception can be prevented. In addition, the output order of various types of data output from the audio lamp control device 113 is fixed each time, and the order of data types output from the audio lamp control device 113 is also stored in the LED driver. , It is possible to easily understand what data has been received. Each data is output in synchronization with a serial clock that repeats on (1) and off (0) at a predetermined frequency (for example, 100 kHz). That is, the bit indicated by the serial clock in the output data is on depending on whether the serial data is on (1) or off (0) when the serial clock is on (1). Or off.

  Here, a specific example of the mode of the serial clock and the serial data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a diagram illustrating an example of a lighting control command including a serial clock and serial data. The serial clock and the serial data can be set to either on or off values. The data of each bit constituting the lighting control command can be notified according to the state of the serial data when the serial clock is on (1). In this example, a command for setting a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% for the lighting areas A1 and A2 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 234, the serial clock and serial data are set to ON (1) when no data is output. When the lighting control command is output, the serial data is changed from on (1) to off (0) while the serial clock is on (1). Due to this displacement, the LED driver can easily recognize that the lighting control command will be notified from now on.

  When the serial data shifts from on (1) to off (0) and notifies the start of the output of the lighting control command, first, the lighting area data (data specifying which of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is to be output). Is output. This data is composed of 24 bits, and is output in three times of 8 bits. As shown in the figure, after the start of the output of the lighting control command is notified, the serial data is set to ON while the serial clock repeats ON and OFF twice. That is, it is notified that the 0th bit and the 1st bit of the lighting area data are ON. Then, although illustration is omitted, the serial data is thereafter set to off while the serial clock repeats on and off 22 times. That is, it is notified that the third to 24th bits of the lighting area data are all off. This makes it easy for the LED driver to recognize that the current lighting control command is a command for notifying the lighting state of the lighting areas A1 and A2 corresponding to the 0th and 1st bits of the lighting area data. Can be.

  The on-period of the serial data is configured so that the beginning is earlier than the timing when the serial clock rises from off to on, and the end is later than the timing when the serial clock falls from on to off. It is configured to be. This allows the serial data to be more reliably kept on while the serial clock is on. In other words, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the LED driver from determining that the off data has been received in spite of the output of the on data, and to notify various data more accurately. For the same reason, the beginning of the off period of the serial data is configured to be earlier than the timing at which the serial clock rises from off to on, and the end is more than the timing at which the serial clock falls from on to off. It is configured to be slow.

  The lighting area data is divided into eight bits and output three times, and an ACK is returned from the LED driver for each of the three outputs (notifying that the LED driver has normally received each data of eight bits). Then, data of 8 bits is output as the lighting rate data. As described above, in this specific example, since the lighting rate is 100% (11111111B in binary notation), the serial data is set to ON while the serial clock is set to 8 times. Thereby, "11111111B" can be notified to the LED driver as the lighting rate data. Although illustration is omitted, other data (8-bit data corresponding to the lighting frequency, 8-bit data indicating a start position for setting the ON period, and the like) are output according to the same rule. When all data constituting the lighting control command has been output, the serial clock is first set to the on (1) state, and then the serial data rises from the off (0) state to the on (1) state. . When serial data rises from the off (0) state to the on (1) state during the on (1) state of the serial clock, it is possible to notify the LED driver that all data has been output.

  As described above, in this control example, the lighting state can be accurately notified by using the two types of signals, the serial clock and the serial data. Since it is not necessary to use different wiring for each data type, the number of wirings can be reduced. Therefore, the unit cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of wires.

  Note that the LED driver is not limited to the one that receives the lighting control command in the above-described mode. For example, a driver that can specify the position and length of the ON period with a simpler lighting control command may be employed. For example, an LED driver capable of receiving a lighting control command in which a lighting state of each section when one cycle is divided into eight equal to each bit of 8-bit data may be used. Specifically, the sections that are earlier in time are associated with the lower bits in order, the section corresponding to the bit of data 1 is turned on, and the section corresponding to the bit of data 0 is turned off. For example, if the control data is 07H (that is, 00000111B in binary notation), of the sections obtained by dividing one cycle into eight, the first three sections are turned on and the second half are turned off. This makes it possible to simplify the lighting control command output from the MPU 221 to the LED driver, so that the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced. Further, as the LED driver, a driver that can change the LED current value (anode voltage value) of each of the lighting regions A1 to A18 may be adopted.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a state in which the lighting areas A13, A15, and A17 are set to the lighting state (lighting rate 100%), and the other lighting areas are set to the light-off state (lighting rate 0%). . The dotted line in FIG. 98 shows the outer shape of the rotating member 640 provided on the front surface of the rear LED 625. As shown in FIG. 98, each of the divided members DV (each pocket) arranged in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) in which the divided members DV (each pocket) are circumferentially connected at a first interval. The arrangement matches the arrangement of the lighting regions A1, A2, A12 to A18.

  FIG. 99 is a view showing the appearance of the rotating member 640 when the lighting state shown in FIG. 98 is set. As shown in FIG. 99, when the lighting areas A13, A15, and A17 are set to the lighting state with the lighting rate of 100%, the pockets P2, P28, and P30 arranged on the front side of the lighting areas A13, A15, and A30 have a shining appearance. (The hatched display part in FIG. 99). In this way, by setting the lighting area arranged on the back side of the winning pocket to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, the winning pocket can be made to look shining. Therefore, the player can easily discriminate from the appearance of the winning pocket and the missing pocket.

  The rear LED 625 is controlled so as to follow the rotating member 640 and rotate around the rotation axis O of the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 at the same rotation speed as the rotating member 640. Therefore, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, the lighting area with the lighting rate of 100% can be made to follow the winning pocket, so that the winning pocket can be kept as it looks in the roulette chance effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the correspondence between the lighting position and the winning pocket is broken and the player mistakenly recognizes the winning pocket and the missing pocket.

  As described above, the rotating member 640 includes the first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and the second interval in which the divided members DV are smaller than the first interval. , And a second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed, and a total of 30 divided members DV are formed in the circumferential direction in an annular shape in a front view. On the other hand, in the rear LED 625, 18 lighting areas are arranged at equal intervals. That is, while the rear LED 625 makes one rotation, the rotating member 640 can make only 18/30 rotations. The type is shifted according to the progress of the rotation operation. For example, in the examples of FIGS. 98 and 99, the lighting area A17 is set to the lighting rate of 100%, so that the pocket P2 has a shining appearance. When the LED 625 is rotated until the rear LED 625 makes a full turn, the pocket provided on the front side of the lighting area A17 changes. That is, while the back LED 625 makes one round, the rotating member 640 moves by 18 pockets, so that the type of the pocket arranged on the front side of the lighting area A17 changes to the pocket P20. Therefore, if the same position is simply kept lit, the illuminated appearance pocket changes each time the rear LED goes around, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in the present control example, the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is corrected every time the rear LED makes 1/3 turn (that is, in units of one LED bar), and the hit pocket is always set. It is controlled so that it looks shiny. More specifically, each time any of the LED bars matches the correction section RA shown in FIG. 98, the lighting state of the LED bar that matches the correction section RA is adjusted according to the deviation from the arrangement of the rotating member 640. Correction (switching).

  Here, the correction section RA is a section that is invisibly shielded from the player by the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 disposed at the ascending position. For this reason, even if the lighting state of each lighting area arranged in the correction section RA is switched, it is impossible (difficult) for the player to visually recognize the switching. That is, the appearance of the player is always kept as if the hit pocket was shining. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more surely distinguish the winning pocket and the missing pocket from the appearance of the pocket.

  Next, the correction (switching) of the lighting state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example in which pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30 are set as hit pockets. In the present control example, when the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is started, each time the arrangement of the LED bar 625a and the correction section RA first match after the rotating member 640 is rotated, each Lighting control of the lighting area is started. Here, whether or not the correction section RA and the LED bar 625a are arranged in the same state is detected by a rotation position detection sensor 684 (not shown) for detecting the rotation position of the rear LED 625.

  In the example of FIG. 100, when the LED bar 625a is first arranged to coincide with the correction section RA after the rotation member 640 starts rotating, the pocket arranged at the drop position is the pocket P1. (See FIG. 100 (b)). In this case, the type of the six pockets (pockets P25 to P30) in the traveling direction of the rotation operation from the pocket P1 (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket) and the traveling direction of the rotation operation are opposite. The types of pockets (pockets P1 to P12) for 12 pockets are read in the direction, and the lighting state corresponding to the type of each pocket is set for each lighting area A1 to A18. That is, the types of the pockets P25 to P30 are read out, and the lighting states respectively corresponding to the lighting areas A7 to A12 are reflected. In addition, the types of the pockets P1 to P12 are read, and the lighting states corresponding to the lighting areas A6 to A13 are reflected.

  More specifically, among the pockets P25 to P30, since the pockets P28 to P30 are the winning pockets, the corresponding lighting areas A10 to A12 are set to the lighting state with the lighting rate of 100%, respectively. Further, among the pockets P1 to P12, the pocket P3 and the pockets P9 to P11 are the hit pockets, so that the lighting area A15 corresponding to the pocket P3 and the lighting areas A3 to A5 corresponding to the pockets P9 to P11 have the lighting rates. The lighting state is set to 100% (see FIG. 100A). As a result, the pocket P3 and the pockets P28 to P30 in the lower half of the rotating member 640 (arrangement that is visible to the player) have a shining appearance (see FIG. 100 (b)). Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that these shiny-looking pockets are hit pockets. Note that the type of each of the pockets P1 to P30 (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket) is stored in a hit position storage area 223k provided in the RAM 223.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating the arrangement of the rear LED 625 and the rotating member 640 when the rear LED 625 makes a 1/3 turn from the state of FIG. As shown in the figure, the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 maintain the state set in FIG. That is, the lighting regions A3 to A5, A10 to A12, and the lighting region A15 make a 1/3 turn at the same rotation speed as the rotating member 640 while maintaining the lighting state of the lighting rate of 100%. Thereby, the LED bar 625b is arranged so as to coincide with the correction section RA. Since the rear LED 625 rotates in the state described with reference to FIG. 100, each of the lighting areas A7 to A12 forming the LED bar 625b has a lighting state according to the type of the pockets P25 to P30 (whether or not it is a hit pocket). Has remained. However, as shown in FIG. 101B, the arrangement order of the pockets in the correction section RA is the arrangement of the pockets P13 to P30. That is, if the rotation operation is further continued while maintaining the state of each of the lighting areas A7 to A12 of the LED bar 625b, the lighting corresponding to the pockets P25 to P30 is performed for the six pockets P13 to P18. The state is applied. Therefore, the correspondence between the hit pocket and the missing pocket may be broken, and the player may be confused.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when any one of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged in the correction section RA, the lighting state of the lighting area forming the LED bar included in the correction section RA is corrected (switched). It is configured as follows. More specifically, six types of pockets arranged in the correction section RA are read from the beginning of the section (that is, in order of being arranged in the non-correction section NA by the rotation operation in an earlier order) and read. The lighting state according to the type is controlled to be reflected in each lighting area included in the correction section RA. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the type of all the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA from being shifted from the lighting state of the lighting area arranged on the back side of each pocket.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a case where the states of the lighting areas A7 to A12 forming the LED bar 625b are corrected according to the types of the pockets P13 to P18. As described above, of the pockets P13 to P18, there are two hit pockets, P15 and P16. That is, the third and fourth pockets out of the six pockets that will be arranged in the non-correction section NA will be the winning pockets due to the rotation operation. Accordingly, the third and fourth lighting areas A9 among the lighting areas A7 to A12 constituting the LED bar 625b are arranged such that the third and fourth pockets shine. , A10 are each set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% (see FIG. 102). As a result, the appearance of the pockets P13 to P18 to be arranged in the non-correction section NA by rotation of the rotating member 640 in the future is changed in advance to the appearance corresponding to the type of each pocket (a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, or a lighting rate of 0%). In the off state).

  Thereafter, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, each time any one of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged in the correction section RA, the lighting state of the lighting area constituting the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA. Is corrected. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (appearance in which the hit pocket shines and the missing pocket becomes dark). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from erroneously recognizing the winning pocket and the missing pocket.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a description will be given of a configuration for determining the period of the swinging operation when the ball B performs the swinging operation on the holding piece 677. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), the movable piece 677 and the front case 672 disposed on the back side of the ball B performing the swinging operation at the upper part of the movable piece 677 have a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape. An opening 678 is provided. A ball detection sensor 679 for determining whether or not the ball B is located on the near side is provided inside the opening 678. In a state where the ball B is not arranged on the near side in front view with respect to the ball detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103A), the output of the ball detection sensor 679 becomes L (low). On the other hand, when the ball B is arranged in front of the ball detection sensor 679 by performing the swinging operation (see FIG. 103B), the ball B is detected, and the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is output. H (high). In the present control example, when the ball B performs the swinging operation, the cycle of the swinging operation of the ball B is determined based on the interval (period) in which the output of the ball detection sensor 679 becomes H. For example, if the period from when the H output of the ball detection sensor 679 is detected (see FIG. 103 (b)) to when the next H output is detected is 1 second, the ball B now performs Since the half of the period of the swing operation is 1 second, it is determined that the period of the swing operation is 2 seconds.

  As described above, in the present control example, in a state where the ball B is performing the swinging operation, the cycle of the swinging operation is determined, and when the ball B becomes shorter than a predetermined period (1 second), the ball B is allowed to fall. It is configured to That is, the period of the swinging operation is sufficiently short, and even if the ball B is dropped, the ball B is dropped at a timing at which the player does not feel unnatural. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having the impression that the type of the pocket in which the ball B falls in the roulette chance effect is intentionally operated. Therefore, the production can be enjoyed to the end without giving doubt to the result of the roulette chance production.

  The holding piece 677 in the present control example has a width enough to hold the ball B thereon when the swinging motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second). For this reason, the ball B can be reliably dropped by immersing the holding piece 677 to the immersion position in a state where the amplitude of the swing operation of the ball B is equal to or less than the predetermined period (1 second).

  Next, a description will be given of a method of driving various drive motors (upper lift motor 341, liquid crystal lift motor 441, left swing motor 531, rotation motor 631, pitching motor 665, holding piece motor 675). These various drive motors are configured by, for example, known stepping motors, and a plurality of these motors are provided in association with each accessory in order to operate each accessory mounted on the pachinko machine 10. These various drive motors are driven by corresponding motor control ICs (motor drivers). Specifically, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 sends a command to the motor control IC (motor driver) including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotation direction (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotation speed. Is output. The control IC (motor driver) drives various corresponding drive motors based on the output command. The motor control IC (motor driver) may be a single IC capable of setting operations for a plurality of drive motors, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor drivers) may be provided. In this case, the drive motors corresponding to the different accessories may be respectively operated. When a motor control IC (motor driver) capable of setting the operation for a plurality of drive motors is employed, the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps and the like includes information for specifying the type of the drive motor. You only need to output it.

  Here, the operation of the drive motor will be described using the upper elevating motor 341 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the upper elevating motor 341 based on the set command, the operation is performed on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 each time the one-step operation is executed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that the operation has been performed is output. With this execution signal, the MPU 221 can grasp the progress of the set operation. Note that a step counter (not shown) is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. The step counter is provided for each accessory, and is a counter for counting how many steps each accessory has operated from the origin (retreat) position. That is, the origin (retreat) position is set to the position of 0 step, and the value is updated by 1 each time the execution signal is received from the control IC. More specifically, each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (forward direction) from the origin (retreat) position to the end point (extend) position, the value is incremented by one. In addition, the value is decremented by 1 each time one step operation is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (overhang) position to the origin (retreat) position. Therefore, the operating position of each accessory can be easily grasped based on the value of the step counter.

  Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement set for each accessory, and refers to a position to which a transition is made in returning to the origin based on power-on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not the origin position is at the origin position. If the origin sensor is not turned on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor is turned on. The accessory is varied until it is detected (that is, various drive motors are driven). This origin position is a reference position for the operation of each accessory. Note that the above-described step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory comes to the origin position due to the origin return (that is, when the origin sensor detects ON). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated by one based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

  Next, an example of control of various drive motors (here, the upper elevating motor 341) by the motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. In order to make the description easy to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one revolution in four steps) will be described as an example. It is configured so that the rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

  First, FIG. 104 (a) is a diagram showing an outline of an upper elevating motor 341 constituted by a stepping motor. The upper elevating motor 341 is configured such that a portion corresponding to the excitation control data is excited by transmitting the excitation control data from the audio lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC. Specifically, the motor control IC is excited by excitation control data composed of 4-digit binary numbers corresponding to “A, B, C, D” shown in FIG. More specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (that is, any one of A, B, C, and D) of the upper elevating motor 341 is “1”, the excitation is performed, and the excitation control data is “0”. If it is not excited. For example, if the data of the excitation control is “1100”, A and B are excited, and C and D are not excited. The excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 104 (b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The sound ramp control device 113 includes an excitation counter used to select and set one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data specified in an excitation table (see FIG. 104B). Is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from “0”, and a loop counter that returns to “0” when the value of the excitation counter is updated after the value of the excitation counter becomes “3”. Has become. Each time the excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, the excitation of each part based on the excitation control data is immediately performed (that is, the upper lifting motor 341 operates without a time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). Further, the excitation counter can be updated in the negative direction. That is, the values can be updated in the order of “0” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” starting from “0”. In the case of updating in the negative direction, the rotation direction of the upper elevating motor 341 is opposite to the case of updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (whether the direction is positive or negative) and the frequency of updating the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of accessory for which an operation is set. Note that the maximum value of the excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once in one step (that is, 360 steps are required for the motor to make one rotation), the excitation counter is updated in the range of “0” to “359”. It becomes a loop counter.

  Next, a specific example of the excitation control data for exciting each part of the upper elevating motor 341 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the excitation table defining the excitation control data and the state of the upper elevating motor 341 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. . As shown in FIG. 104 (b), the excitation table defines the excitation control data for each value of the excitation counter.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the excitation control of “1100, 0110, 0011, 1001” in the order of the excitation counters “0” to “3” is performed as the sequence data corresponding to the upper elevating motor 341. Data is specified respectively. When “1100”, which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “0”, is set, each position of A and B of the upper elevating motor 341 is excited. Further, when the sequence data “0110” corresponding to the excitation counter value “1” is set, the positions of B and C of the upper elevating motor 341 are excited, so that the excitation counter value becomes “0”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state. When the sequence data “0011” corresponding to the excitation counter value “2” is set, the positions of C and D of the upper elevating motor 341 are excited, and the excitation counter value is “1”. From 90 degrees clockwise. When the sequence data “1001” corresponding to the excitation counter value “3” is set, the positions of A and D of the upper elevating motor 341 are excited, so that the excitation counter value becomes “2”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state. In this manner, in the example shown in FIG. 104, each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by one in the positive direction, the upper elevating motor 341 rotates 90 degrees clockwise. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the upper elevating motor 341 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

  As described above, the control of the upper elevating motor 341 has been described using the simplified operation model. It can be rotated once each time (for each update). That is, when varying each of the accessories, the value of the excitation counter is updated one by one by the number of times corresponding to the number of steps to be varied, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set every time the excitation counter is updated. Each character can be accurately changed.

  As described above, in this control example, by setting a command to the motor driver, it is possible to drive various drive motors at the rotation speed, the rotation direction, and the number of rotation steps designated by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize various effect operations using the accessory.

  In addition, a unique operation pattern (operation scenario) corresponding to the effect is set for each of the accessories. Although the details will be described later, this operation pattern (operation scenario) defines a command to be set for the above-described motor control IC (motor driver) for each elapsed time.

  Further, in the present control example, it is determined whether or not the operation of the various drive motors has been completed based on the command set for the motor driver based on the number of steps in which the various drive motors have operated. That is, based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times the execution signal output from the motor driver is received each time the operation of one step is set by the motor driver, whether the operations set for the various drive motors are completed. It is determined whether or not, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the elapsed time after setting a command for operating various drive motors is measured, and whether or not the operation of each drive motor has been completed is determined based on the elapsed time. .

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting of the pachinko machine, is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display on the third symbol display device 81. Is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to make settings and the like.

  For the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. 1st hitting type counter C2 used to perform the setting, a stop type selection counter C3 used to select an outage stop type in the special symbol, and a first initial value used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1. A value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 139). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a common execution area and a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each of these areas has a first prize. The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the mouth 64 and the second entrance 640a. A special symbol lottery is executed based on various counter values stored in the common execution area. On the other hand, with respect to various counter values stored in each holding area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the execution of the lottery is held until the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied. In the present control example, only the lottery of the special symbol 1 is held, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is not held. Therefore, when the ball entry to the second entrance 640a is detected, the lottery of the special symbol 1 is not suspended, and when the symbol is not fluctuating, various counter values are stored in the common execution area and the special symbol is stored. The lottery of symbol 2 is executed.

  Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 139).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640a. It is stored in the common execution area of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. If the value matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a large jackpot than the low probability. (A period in which the symbol is in a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)) includes a first random number table for low probability and a first random number table for high probability, and is included in each table. The number of random hits to be hit is different. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B when a special symbol hits a big hit. , And reaches a maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999), and then returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present control example), and the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640a. Is stored in the common execution area of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a special symbol big hit, that is, a random number that is out of the special symbol. Then, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is the one when the special symbol is removed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol big hit, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B displays The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same common execution area or the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 999. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are 40 random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random numbers “0 to 39” are the first random numbers for the low probability. It is stored in a table 202a (see FIG. 106B). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is 40, and the total number of the random numbers is 40 in the total number of the random numbers.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 41 random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value “500 to 540” is stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability at the time of the high probability (FIG. 106 (b)). ) See). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of the random numbers is 41 out of the total number of the random numbers of 1,000, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is “1 / 24.4”. That is, the probability of a special symbol jackpot at the high probability of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol) and the low probability of the special symbol are substantially equal. This is because the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example has little benefit to the player if the jackpot is just hit in the “normal mode”. That is, as described above, in the “normal mode”, the first variable prize device 82a is likely to be a big hit in which the first variable prize device 82a is opened (that is, relatively few prize balls can be obtained), and in many cases in the case of the big hit, After that, the mode shifts to the “normal mode” again without shifting to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, since the jackpot and the normal mode in which the prize balls that can be acquired are relatively small are easily repeated, it is disadvantageous for the player while staying in the “normal mode”.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example is very advantageous for the player by shifting to the “rensou mode”. Then, in order to shift to the “rensou mode”, it is necessary to be a big hit mainly in the “preparation mode”. To shift to the preparation mode, a big hit in which the time reduction state is given in the “normal mode” It is necessary to assign a type. Therefore, the jackpot in the “normal mode” merely plays the role of shifting to the “preparation mode”, and the player plays the game in the “normal mode” with the main purpose of becoming the jackpot itself. is not. Under this situation, if the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is extremely low compared to the high probability state of the special symbol, instead of shifting to the “rensou mode” or the “preparation mode”, In some cases, the situation in which even the jackpot, which is the preceding stage, is not won may be continued for a long time, so that the motivation of the player to play the game may be significantly impaired. Therefore, in this control example, the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the special symbol have almost the same probability of a jackpot, and in either case, the jackpot is relatively easily won. I have. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which even a jackpot, which is a stage before the “rensou mode” or the “preparation mode”, does not continue for a long time, so that the motivation of the player for the game can be kept high.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The big hit type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106 (c)). The correspondence between the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the determined big hit type will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reaching, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "Completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640a. Is stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set in a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fine fluctuation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 139) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 110 (b)) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67. Are stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the ordinary symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 110 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. If the value of the random number matches the value of the random number set in the second random number table (see FIG. 110A), it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, the second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (period in a normal state of a normal symbol) and for a high probability of a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability. ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when the ordinary symbol has a low probability, there is one random number value which is a hit for the ordinary symbol, and the value is "5". This random number value is stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, the total number of the random numbers is 240 out of the total number of the random numbers, and therefore the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is “1/240”.

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 , The normal symbol change display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is “5”, it is determined that the winning has been achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, “O” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is displayed, and the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the second entrance 640a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 , The normal symbol change display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a stopped symbol (normal symbol) The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the second entrance 640a is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and the second entrance 640a is opened. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first winning opening 64. In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance 640a is opened only for “1 second × 2 times” when a normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  As described above, in the present control example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol at a low probability of a normal symbol is significantly lower than at the time of a high probability of a normal symbol. By reducing the number of times the opening 640a is opened and reducing the opening period of the second entrance 640a once, the ball is in the second state at the time of a low probability of the normal symbol (that is, the "normal mode"). It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the ball entrance 640a. Thus, when the normal symbol has a low probability (that is, in the “normal mode”), the ball is entered into the second entrance 640a, so that the jackpot (the second specific winning opening 65a is opened) where a relatively large number of prize balls can be obtained is obtained. It is possible to suppress an irregular game method of aiming at a big hit type. If the irregular gaming method is performed and the second specific winning opening 65a is successively won in the jackpot which is opened, the payout rate greatly exceeds the payout rate due to the design of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, there is a possibility that an unexpected disadvantage is given to the hall. On the other hand, in the present control example, it is extremely difficult to make the ball enter the second entrance 640a at the time of the low probability of the normal symbol (that is, the “normal mode”). In the "normal mode", it is possible to prevent (suppress) the execution of the irregular game method of hitting the ball aiming at the second entrance 640. Therefore, the payout rate as designed can be realized.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 139).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 uses the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the ROM 202 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and fixed value data.

  FIG. 106A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 106a, in the ROM 202, a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting table 202e, and a state setting table 202f are stored. Is provided at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 106B) is a data table in which the big hit determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored as described above. Specifically, as the jackpot determination value in the special symbol low probability state, 40 determination values of “0 to 39” are defined, and as the jackpot determination value in the special symbol high probability state (probable change state), “500” is set. 41 judgment values of ".about.540" are defined. If the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106B), a special symbol is displayed. Is determined to be a jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 106 (c)) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining a big hit type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for each big hit type. It is defined in association. Here, details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 106 (c) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b described above. As shown in FIG. 106 (c), the first hit type selection table 202b is a special type 1 hit type selection table 202b1 that is used to determine the big hit type when a special symbol 1 is determined to be a big hit. And a special type 2 hit type selection table 202b2 used to determine a big hit type when a special symbol 2 lottery is selected. First, the details of the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the type selection table 202b1 per special figure 1. The special figure 1 hit type selection table 202b1 includes eight types of hits of “probable change jackpot A” to “probable change jackpot G” and “normal jackpot A” in association with possible values of the first hit type counter C2. The type is specified.

  More specifically, “probably variable big hit A” is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 being “0 to 4”. As described above, the first hit type counter C2 is a counter that can take 1000 values of “0 to 999”. Among these, the number of judgment values that become “probable jackpot A” is five of “0 to 4”, and therefore, when a lottery of the special symbol 1 becomes a jackpot, the probability of becoming “probable jackpot A” is 0.5%. (5/1000).

  The “probable change jackpot A” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two rounds, and in each round, the second specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won). is there. If the player keeps hitting the ball continuously, ten balls can be sufficiently won to the second specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds elapse, and in many cases, the player A relatively large number (300) of prize balls can be obtained. After the “probable change jackpot A” ends, the state shifts to the special change state of the special symbol, and shifts to the normal symbol time reduction state. It should be noted that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol given after the end of the “probable change jackpot A” is irrespective of the state at the time of winning (whether the “normal mode”, the “preparation mode”, or the “rensou mode”). Continue until the next big hit. That is, after the “probable change jackpot A” ends, the process directly shifts to the “rensou mode” without going through the “preparation mode”. Since it is possible to acquire a relatively large amount of prize balls and to directly shift to the “rensou mode” which is the most advantageous for the player, “probable change jackpot A” is one of the jackpot types that can be selected in the special symbol 1 lottery. , Is the type of jackpot most advantageous to the player. Therefore, especially in the “normal mode”, when the jackpot is notified (the lucky numbers are displayed on all of the effect parts 331a to 331d), it is strongly expected that the player will be “probable change jackpot A”. Can be done.

  "Probably variable big hit B" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "5 to 84". Of the 1000 determination values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of determination values that are “probably variable jackpots B” is 80, “5 to 84”, so the special symbol 1 lottery Is "8% (80/1000)".

  The “probable change jackpot B” has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable prize device 82a performs the opening pattern A (opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times). A jackpot that opens and closes according to. The maximum opening time per round is a total of 12 seconds (0.6 seconds × 20 times), which is shorter than the maximum opening time (30 seconds) of the second specific winning opening 65a, and one opening period Because it is as short as 0.6 seconds, it is difficult to make the ball win continuously. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot is reduced as compared with the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. It is disadvantageous for the player in terms of the number of winning balls.

  After the “probable change big hit B” is finished, the state is shifted to the special symbol probable change state. In addition, the type of the time saving state of the ordinary symbol given after the end of the "probable change big hit B" is the game state at the time of the "probable change big hit B" ). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, in the case of “probable change big hit B” in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol which continues until the next big hit. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. As described above, since the “rensou mode” is the most advantageous state for the player, the player can be pleased by setting “probably variable big hit B” in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

  On the other hand, in the case of "low probability big hit B" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, after the big hit is completed, the state shifts to the ordinary symbol time saving state which continues until the special symbol lottery is completed seven times. I do. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. As described above, if a special symbol hits in the "preparation mode", the game shifts to the "rensou mode" which has the highest probability (97.5%) and is the most advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the “preparation mode” to which the game shifts after the “probable change big hit B” ends, a game can be played in expectation of a big hit. Also, if the number of lotteries (seven times) does not result in a jackpot, the game does not shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, anxiety about returning to the “normal mode” without hitting the jackpot, It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for shifting to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the “preparation mode” can be improved.

  As described above, in the normal symbol time-saving state, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640a, so that the special symbol 2 lottery is basically executed. Conversely, it is unlikely that the lottery of the special symbol 1 will be executed in the “normal mode”. However, since the lottery of the special symbol 1 is held up to four times at the maximum, it is possible that the "probably variable jackpot B" in the "prepare mode" is included in the reserved ball at the time of shifting to the "prepare mode". There is. In this case, it is severe for the player not to shift to the “rensou mode” (shift to the “preparation mode”). Therefore, in the present control example, there is a case where a ball is held in the special symbol 1 which is digested during the “preparation mode” or a ball is accidentally hit in the direction of the first entrance 64 in the “rensou mode”. In order to rescue the game, if the “probable change jackpot B” occurs in the normal symbol time reduction state (“preparation mode” or “rensou mode”), the mode is shifted to the “rensou mode”. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling dissatisfied with the game, and to make the game more enjoyable. In the same manner, for other probability-variable jackpots defined in the special figure 1 hit type selection table 202b1 (that is, “probability-variable jackpots C to G”), when the winning is achieved in the normal symbol time reduction state, the It is configured to shift to the “sou mode”.

  "Probable change big hit C" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "85-274". Of the 1000 determination values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of determination values that are “probable variable hit C” is 190 of “85 to 274”, so the special symbol 1 lottery In this case, the probability (proportion) of being “probably variable jackpot C” is 19% (190/1000).

  The “probable change jackpot C” has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable prize device 82a performs the opening pattern A (opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times). A jackpot that opens and closes according to. Therefore, as in the case of the "probable change jackpot B", the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot is reduced, and the player has a smaller number of prize balls than the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. Disadvantaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when the “probably variable jackpot C” is obtained in the normal symbol time reduction state, the normal symbol time reduction is performed while continuing to the special symbol probability variation state and continuing until the next large hit. Transition to state. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, in the case of "probable change big hit C" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the special change state of the special symbol, and once the big hit ends, the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol which continues until. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. The “preparation mode” set after the “probable change jackpot C” is completed has a smaller number of special symbol lotteries than the “preparation mode” set after the “probable change jackpot B” is completed. State), the “probably variable jackpot C” is more disadvantageous than the “probably variable jackpot B”.

  "Probably variable big hit D" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "275 to 774". Of the 1000 determination values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of determination values that become “probable variable jackpot D” is 500 of “275 to 774”, so the special symbol 1 lottery Is 50% (500/1000).

  The “probable change jackpot D” has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable prize device 82a performs the opening pattern A (opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times). A jackpot that opens and closes according to. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in a single jackpot is reduced as in the case of the “probably variable jackpot B” and the “probably variable jackpot C”. It is disadvantageous for the player in terms of number.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, in the case of “probable change big hit D” in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the process shifts to the special change state of the special symbol and continues until the next big hit. Transition to state. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, in the case of the “probable change jackpot D” in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol, the state shifts to the special symbol positive change state, but the normal symbol time reduction state is not set. That is, since the mode does not shift to the “preparation mode”, no chance is given to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, when the "probable variable jackpot D" is reached in the "normal mode" (non-probable variable state), the "probable variable jackpot A" directly transitions to the "rensou mode" or the "probable variable jackpot" transitions to the "preparation mode" after the jackpot. It is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the case of "B" or "probable jackpot C".

  "Probability change big hit E" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "775 to 804". Of the 1000 determination values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of determination values that become “probable variable jackpot E” is 30 of “775 to 804”, so the special symbol 1 lottery Is 3% (30/1000).

  The “probable change jackpot E” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening is performed only once for 0.052 seconds). is there. The opening time per round is 0.052 seconds at the maximum, which is a significantly shorter opening period than when the second specific winning opening 65a is opened or when the opening pattern A is set. During this time, it becomes difficult to make the first variable winning device 82a win a ball, and in many cases, the big hit ends without being able to win even one ball. Therefore, the “probable change jackpot E” is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types in terms of prize balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when the “probably variable jackpot E” is reached in the normal symbol time reduction state, the normal symbol time reduction continues to the special symbol probability variation state and continues until the next large hit. Transition to state. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, in the case of "probably variable jackpot E" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, similarly to "probably variable jackpot B", the state is shifted to the special symbol probable state, and after the jackpot, The state shifts to a normal symbol time reduction state that continues until the special symbol lottery is completed seven times. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. Except for the “probable change jackpot A” that directly shifts to the “rensou mode”, the “normal mode” is a type of jackpot in which the “preparation mode” (usually the time saving state of the symbol) continues for the longest number of lotteries. In the case of "probably variable jackpot E", the player is more advantageous than "probably variable jackpot C" in which the number of lotteries in the "preparation mode" is small or "probably variable jackpot D" which does not shift to the "prepare mode".

  "Probable change big hit F" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "805 to 874". Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are “probable variable jackpot F” is 70 of “805 to 874”, so the special symbol 1 lottery In this case, the probability (proportion) of the probability change jackpot F is 7% (70/1000).

  The “probably variable jackpot F” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two and the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening is performed only once for 0.052 seconds). Therefore, like "probable change big hit E", it is one of the most disadvantageous big hit types for the player in terms of the number of prize balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when the “probably variable jackpot F” is obtained in the normal symbol time reduction state, the normal symbol time reduction is continued while continuing to the special symbol probability variation state. Transition to state. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, in the case of “probable change big hit F” in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the special change state of the special symbol, and once the big hit ends, the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol which continues until. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. The “preparation mode” set after the “probable jackpot F” is completed has a smaller number of special symbol lotteries than the “preparation mode” set after the “probably changed jackpot B” or “probably changed jackpot E”. In the “normal mode” (non-probable variable state), “probable variable jackpot F” is more disadvantageous than “probable variable jackpot B” and “probable variable jackpot E”. On the other hand, as compared with “probable change jackpot D” in which “preparation mode” is not set, a chance to shift to “rensou mode” is given even if it is only once, which is advantageous for the player.

  The “probably variable big hit G” is associated with the range where the first hit type counter C2 is “875 to 974”. Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “probable variable jackpot G” is 100 of “875 to 974”. Is "10% (100/1000)".

  The “probable change jackpot G” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening is performed only once for 0.052 seconds). is there. Therefore, like "probably variable jackpot E" and "probably variable jackpot F", this is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types for the player in terms of the number of prize balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when the “probably variable jackpot G” is reached in the normal symbol time reduction state, the normal symbol time reduction is continued while continuing to the special symbol probability variation state. Transition to state. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, in the case of the “probable change jackpot G” in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the special symbol state of the special symbol. Is not set. That is, since the mode does not shift to the “preparation mode”, no chance is given to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, when the "probable variable jackpot D" is reached in the "normal mode" (non-probable variable state), the "probable variable jackpot A" directly transitions to the "rensou mode" or the "probable variable jackpot" transitions to the "preparation mode" after the jackpot. It is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the case of "B", "probable jackpot C", "probable jackpot E", and "probable jackpot F".

  "Normal jackpot A" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "975 to 999". Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "normal jackpot A" is 25, "975 to 999". In this case, the probability (proportion) of “normal jackpot A” is 2.5% (25/1000).

  The “normal jackpot A” has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable prize device 82a performs the opening pattern A (opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times). A jackpot that opens and closes according to. Therefore, similarly to “probably variable jackpot B” to “probably variable jackpot D”, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is smaller than that of the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. On the other hand, the number of prize balls that can be acquired increases as compared with the jackpot type in which the opening pattern B is set. Therefore, in terms of the number of prize balls, “normal jackpot A” is more disadvantageous than “probable jackpot A”, but is more advantageous than “probable jackpot E” to “probable jackpot G”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, in the case of “normal jackpot A” in the normal symbol time saving state, the state shifts to the special symbol low probability state, but does not shift to the normal symbol time saving state. . That is, the mode shifts to the “normal mode”. For this reason, when the “normal jackpot A” is set in the “preparation mode”, the mode shifts to the “normal mode” regardless of the remaining number of time savings. Also, in the case of "normal jackpot A" in the "rensou mode", since the mode shifts to the "normal mode" after the jackpot, the "rensou mode" which is most advantageous for the player ends. For this reason, in the “preparation mode” and the “rensou mode”, the “normal jackpot A” has a disadvantageous result for the player.

  On the other hand, in the case of "normal jackpot A" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, and after the jackpot, the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol which continues until it does. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. Since the “preparation mode” set after the “normal jackpot A” is completed, the number of special symbol lotteries is smaller than the “preparation mode” set after the “probable variation jackpot B” or the “probable variation jackpot E” is completed. In the "normal mode" (non-probable change state), "normal jackpot A" is more disadvantageous than "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot E". On the other hand, compared to “probably variable jackpot D” or “probably variable jackpot G” in which “preparation mode” is not set, the player is given a chance to shift to “renshou mode” although it is only once, which is advantageous for the player. Become.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 hit type selection table 202b2, which is referred to in order to determine the big hit type when the special symbol 2 has been won by lottery, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 hit type selection table 202b2. In the special figure 2 hit type selection table 202b2, five kinds of jackpots of “probable change jackpot H” to “probable change jackpot K” and “normal jackpot B” are associated with possible values of the first hit type counter C2. The type is specified.

  "Probable change big hit H" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 4". Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are “probably variable jackpots H” is 5 from “0 to 4”. Is 0.5% (5/1000).

  The “probably variable jackpot H” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two and the second specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won). Therefore, as in the case of the “probable jackpot A”, the player has a larger amount of prize balls than the jackpot types (“probable jackpot BG” and “normal jackpot A”) in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened. Can be acquired. In addition, all the jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2 have the second specific winning opening 65a opened as in the case of the “stochastic jackpot H” and the “stochastic jackpot A” described above. You. Therefore, in the case of a big win due to the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is more advantageous than the big hit of the lottery of the special symbol 1 in terms of the number of award balls that can be obtained (excluding the “probable change big hit A”).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 108, in the case of "probable change big hit H", regardless of the state at the time of winning (whether or not it is the time saving state of the ordinary symbol), the state is shifted to the special symbol probable change state. Then, it shifts to the normal symbol time-saving state which continues until the next jackpot. That is, the mode directly shifts to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, especially in the “normal mode” (non-time saving state), when the “probable change big hit H” is reached, the player is compared with the big hit type shifting to the “preparation mode” or the big hit type shifting to the “normal mode”. This is advantageous.

  The value “5” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with “probable change big hit I”. Among the 1000 determination values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of the determination value that is “probably variable big hit I” is one. The probability (proportion) of the “probable change big hit I” is 0.1% (1/1000).

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the case where the “probable change big hit I” is obtained in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the special change state of the special symbol and to the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol which continues until the next big hit. And migrate. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, when the probability is "probable jackpot I" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state is shifted to the probable state of the special symbol like "probable jackpot B" and "probable jackpot E". At the same time, after the end of the jackpot, the state shifts to a normal symbol time reduction state which is continued until the special symbol lottery ends seven times. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. Except for “probably variable jackpot A” or “probably variable jackpot H” that directly shifts to the “renjo mode”, this is a type of jackpot type in which the “preparation mode” (usually the time saving state of symbols) continues for the longest number of lotteries. Therefore, when the “probable change jackpot I” is set in the “normal mode”, the “probably changed jackpot C”, the “probably changed jackpot F”, the “normal jackpot A”, and the “preparation mode”, in which the number of lotteries to be in the “preparation mode” are small, are changed. This is advantageous for the player as compared to “probably variable jackpot D” and “probably variable jackpot G” that do not shift.

  In addition, as described above, when the “probable change big hit I” occurs in the normal state (low probability state) of the ordinary symbol, the transition to the “preparation mode” in which the time reduction period is seven times is in the “normal mode”. This is for preventing (suppressing) an irregular game method of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640a. More specifically, even if any of the special symbols 2 in the “normal mode” is selected by lottery of the special symbol 2 (that is, the “variable large hits H to K”), the mode is shifted to the “rensou mode”. In the case of the configuration, a player who hits the ball aiming at the second entrance 640a (so-called right-handed) may appear in the "normal mode" for the purpose of shifting to the "rensou mode". There is. If the game is shifted from the "normal mode" directly to the "renshou mode" due to the irregular playing method, there is a possibility that a large number of prize balls will be paid out, which greatly exceeds the design payout rate. This may cause unexpected disadvantages. Therefore, in the present control example, when a special jackpot has been hit by a lottery, the game state after the jackpot is made different depending on whether or not the time of the jackpot is a normal symbol time saving state. It has a configuration. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the merit for the player when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, in the “normal mode”). Can be prevented (suppressed). Thereby, the payout rate of each of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall can be more reliably contained within the design range, so that it is possible to easily predict the sales of the hall.

  The value “6” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with “probable change big hit J”. Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are “probably variable jackpot J” is one, so if a special symbol 2 lottery results in a jackpot, “ The probability (proportion) of the probability jackpot J ”is 0.1% (1/1000).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 108, in the case where the “probably variable jackpot J” is obtained in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the specially variable state of the special symbol, and the time reduction of the ordinary symbol continues until the next jackpot is reached. Transition to state. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, in the case of the “probable change jackpot J” in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the special symbol change state, and after the jackpot, the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol which continues until. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. The “preparation mode” set after the “probable jackpot J” is more specially designed than the “preparation mode” set after the “probably changed jackpot B”, “probably changed jackpot E”, and “probably changed jackpot I”. Since the number of lotteries is small, in the “normal mode” (non-probable change state), the “probable jackpot J” is more disadvantageous than the “probable jackpot B”, the “probable jackpot E”, and the “probable jackpot I”. On the other hand, compared to “probably variable jackpot D” or “probably variable jackpot G” in which “preparation mode” is not set, the player is given a chance to shift to “renshou mode” although it is only once, which is advantageous for the player. Become.

  "Probable change big hit K" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "7 to 974". Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are “probable variable jackpot K” is 968 of “7 to 974”. In this case, the probability (proportion) of being “probable change jackpot K” is 96.8% (968/1000).

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the case of “probable change big hit K” in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol, and to the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol which continues until the next big hit. And migrate. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, if the probability is "variable jackpot K" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the special variable probability state of the special symbol, but it is the same as the "variable jackpot D" or the "variable jackpot G" The time saving state of the normal symbol is not set. That is, since the mode does not shift to the “preparation mode”, no chance is given to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, in the "normal mode" (non-probable change state), when the "probable change big hit D" is reached, it is most disadvantageous for the player.

  "Normal big hit B" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "975 to 999". Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "normal jackpot B" is 25, "975 to 999", so the special symbol 1 lottery In this case, the probability (ratio) of “normal jackpot B” is 2.5% (25/1000).

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the case of “normal jackpot B” in the normal symbol time reduction state, the state shifts to the special symbol low probability state, but does not shift to the normal symbol time reduction state. That is, the mode shifts to the “normal mode”. For this reason, as in the case of the "normal jackpot A", when the "normal jackpot B" is set in the "preparation mode", the mode shifts to the "normal mode" regardless of the number of remaining time savings. It is disadvantageous for the player. Also, in the case of "normal jackpot B" in the "rensou mode", since the mode shifts to the "normal mode" after the hit, the "rensou mode" which is most advantageous for the player ends. Therefore, in the “preparation mode” and the “rensou mode”, the “normal jackpot B” results in a disadvantageous result for the player.

  On the other hand, in the case of “normal jackpot B” in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (non-time saving state), the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, and after the jackpot, the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol that continues until it does. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. The “preparation mode” set after the “normal jackpot B” is finished is a special symbol lottery than the “preparation mode” set after the “probably changed jackpot B”, “probably changed jackpot E” or “probably changed jackpot I”. Since the number of times is small, in the "normal mode" (non-probable change state), the "normal jackpot B" is more disadvantageous than the "probable jackpot B", the "probable jackpot E" or the "probable jackpot I". On the other hand, when compared to “probably variable jackpot D”, “probably variable jackpot G” or “probably variable jackpot K” in which “preparation mode” is not set, there is provided a chance to shift to “renso mode” although it is only once. , Which is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, in the present control example, a plurality of jackpot types are provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained and the state after the jackpot (“normal mode”, “preparation mode”, or “rensou mode”) are different. By providing a variety of jackpot types, it is possible to make the player more interested in which jackpot type will be used when a jackpot occurs. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the present control example, even when the special symbol 2 has a big hit in the “normal mode”, the big hit that shifts to the “rensou mode” (that is, the “probably variable big hit H”) or the “preparation mode” (That is, “probably variable jackpot I” and “probably variable jackpot J”) are provided, but it is not always necessary to provide all of them. For example, in the case where a jackpot has been won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, “probably variable jackpot K” is determined with a probability of 97.5%, and “normal jackpot B” is determined with a probability of 2.5%. Is also good. In other words, if the special symbol 2 has a jackpot in the “normal mode”, the game returns to the “normal mode” after the jackpot (in the case of “probable variable jackpot K”), or the time reduction period is 1 after the jackpot. It may be configured to make a transition to the “preparation mode” (for “normal jackpot B”). With this configuration, the disadvantage of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640a in the “normal mode” can be further increased, so that the irregular game method (“the normal mode”) can be more reliably performed. In this case, it is possible to prevent a game method in which the ball is aimed at the second entrance 640a.

  Next, the state transition performed by determining the big hit type based on the special symbol 1 hit type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 107) and the special symbol 2 hit type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 108). This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing conditions for switching between three types of states (“normal mode”, “preparation mode”, or “rensou mode”) in this control example. First, the state transition in the “normal mode” (non-time saving state) which is the most disadvantageous for the player will be described. This "normal mode" is shown on the upper side of FIG. As shown in FIG. 109, in the "normal mode", when a big hit occurs, the game shifts to another game state. As described above, the jackpot probability in this control example is approximately equal to 1 / 24.4 in the low probability state of the special symbol and 1/25 in the high probability state of the special symbol. For simplicity, the jackpot probability is represented as 1/25 in FIG. As described above, since the "normal mode" is a low probability state (non-time saving state) of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is hard to be opened, so that the player is required to be in the basic mode. The ball is aimed at the first entrance 64. Therefore, since the lottery of the special symbol 1 is executed, the big hit type is basically determined from the special figure 1 per type selection table 202b1.

  In the "normal mode" (probable variable non-saving time state and non-probable variable non-saving time state), if the special pattern 1 is a jackpot, a 60% rate of "probable variable jackpot D" (50%) or "probable variable jackpot G" (10%) is determined (see FIG. 107). When these jackpot types are set in the "normal mode", the mode shifts to the "normal mode" again after the end of the jackpot (see the upper left portion of FIG. 109). That is, the “normal mode” is looped. Even if the player wins “Probably Variable Jackpot D” or “Probably Variable Jackpot G”, he or she continues to win “Probably Variable Jackpot D” and “Probably Variable Jackpot G” because the prize balls that can be obtained are relatively small (the “normal mode” is looped). In many cases, more balls are consumed in the "normal mode" than prize balls obtained at the jackpot. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol 1 has been won in the lottery, the winning rate is 39.5%, one of “probably variable jackpot B, C, E, F” and “normal jackpot A”. In this case, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” (non-probable variable non-time saving state) after the end of the jackpot (see the upper center part of FIG. 109). That is, since the state is relatively easily shifted to the “rensetsu mode”, it is more advantageous to the player than “probably variable jackpot D” or “probably variable jackpot G”.

  Then, in the case of "Surely changing jackpot A" which is won at 0.5% of the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery, the process directly shifts to the "renjo mode" after the end of the jackpot (Fig. 109). See upper right). In this “renjo mode”, as described above, the time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot, and the jackpot where a relatively large amount of prize balls are easily obtained (“probably variable jackpot H” to “probably variable jackpot K”, “normal jackpot B”) ) Is easily repeated, which is the most advantageous for the player.

  As described above, in the “normal mode” (probable variable non-time saving state, non-probable variable non-time saving state), the same state (ie, “normal mode”) is looped at a rate of 60% in the case of a jackpot, while 40 At the rate of%, it is configured to shift to the “preparation mode” or the “rensou mode” which is more advantageous than the current state. Therefore, the player can play the game paying attention to the state after the big hit.

  Next, a description will be given of a state transition in the "preparation mode" which is more advantageous for the player than the "normal mode" described above (the transition to the "rensou mode" is easier). This "preparation mode" is shown in the center of FIG. Since the “preparation mode” is a normal symbol time-saving state, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is easily opened. Therefore, since the player basically plays the game aiming at the second entrance 640a, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed. However, when the lottery of the special symbol 1 is held before the big hit or during the big hit, the lottery of the special symbol 1 held is executed after the “preparation mode” starts. For this reason, in the “preparation mode”, when the player is playing a game as usual, there may be a case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 or a lottery of the special symbol 2 occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 109, in the “preparation mode”, the state shifts to another state when a big hit occurs or the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol given after the previous big hit elapses. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 109, in the “preparation mode”, a case where a normal jackpot is won at a rate of 2.5% (a case where “a normal jackpot A” is obtained in the lottery of special symbol 1) , And the special symbol 2 is "normal jackpot B" in the lottery), and after the jackpot is over, the mode shifts to the "normal mode" (see the lower left of the center in FIG. 109). That is, since the player falls into a disadvantageous state, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the “preparation mode” in the hope that the player does not usually have a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the “preparation mode”, a winning probability of 97.5% is won at a rate of 97.5%. (If any of the "variable jackpot H" to the "variable jackpot K"), the mode shifts to the "rensou mode" (see the center part of FIG. 109). For this reason, the player can expect a large amount of prize balls to be obtained in the “rensou mode”, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 109, in the “preparation mode”, when the set number of time savings (one or seven lottery times of special symbols) elapses, as in the case of the normal jackpot, the disadvantage is lower than the current situation. To the normal mode. For this reason, the game in the “preparation mode” can be performed in expectation of any one of the probability change jackpots before the number of time savings elapses. In general gaming machines, the time saving state of the design is usually such that the ball is not easily reduced, and the benefit from the jackpot does not change depending on whether it is a big hit in the time saving state or a big hit in the non-time saving state Is the most. On the other hand, in the present control example, the transition to the “rensou mode”, which is most advantageous for the player by making a probability change jackpot during the “preparation mode” (time saving state), is performed. The majority loops through the "normal mode" where the majority is the most unfavorable even during a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gaming ability in which whether or not the winning in the jackpot during the time reduction state greatly affects the subsequent development. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the “rensou mode” shown in the lower part of FIG. 109 will be described. In addition, as described above, since the “rensou mode” is a time saving state of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is easily opened. Therefore, since the player basically plays the game aiming at the second entrance 640a, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed. In addition, in many cases, the mode shifts from the “preparation mode” in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed to the “rensou mode”. It is rare. Therefore, in the “rensou mode”, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is basically executed.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 109, in the “rensou mode”, there is a possibility that the state is shifted to another state only when a special symbol hits. Specifically, in the “rensou mode”, when the “normal jackpot B” is determined at a rate of 2.5% when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the “normal mode” is set after the end of the jackpot. (See the lower left part of FIG. 109). That is, the player falls from the most advantageous state to the most disadvantageous state, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, when it becomes “probable change jackpot H” to “probable change jackpot K” determined at a rate of 97.5% in the case of a jackpot due to the lottery of the special symbol 2, after the jackpot is over, the “renso mode” is returned again. Transition (loops the “rensou mode”). For this reason, in the “rensou mode”, a jackpot (a jackpot in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened) in which a relatively large amount of prize balls can be obtained and a next jackpot are obtained as long as one of the certain jackpots is continuously won. Since the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol that continues to the big hit is repeated, it is extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the “rensou mode”, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that the player will continue to win the probability change jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the player in the “rensou mode”. Can be.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to shift to the “preparation mode” where it is easy to shift to the “rensou mode” at a part of the jackpot in the “normal mode”. Then, in the "preparation mode", by winning any one of the jackpots, the game shifts to the "rensou mode" after the end of the jackpot. In this “rensou mode”, the jackpot is likely to be a jackpot capable of obtaining a large amount of prize balls. Mode "is set. Therefore, by continuously winning the probability change jackpot, a large amount of prize balls can be continuously obtained, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to perform the game by expecting to shift to the “rensou mode” and to loop the “rensou mode” more times. Interest in games can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 106, the description is continued. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 110 (a)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, as described above, in the low probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbol, “5” is defined as the determination value for hitting the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 110A). Further, in the high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 110A). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and a normal symbol hit is obtained. It is determined whether or not there is.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a data table that defines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation indicating the current special symbol lottery result in association with the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 (b) to 113.

  FIG. 110B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in this control example. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is used to determine the fluctuation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the normal state of the ordinary symbol (ie, “normal mode”). A normal medium-and-large jackpot table 202d1, a normal middle-off table 202d2 for determining a variation time when a lottery result of a special symbol is missed in a normal state of a normal symbol, and a time-saving state of a normal symbol (that is, “preparation mode”) , Or “rensou mode”), when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, when the special symbol lottery result is missing in the time-saving medium-and-big-hit jackpot table 202d3 for determining the fluctuation time, and in the normal symbol time-saving state The table 202d4 is provided with an out-of-hours short time table 202d4 for determining the fluctuation time. Each of these tables will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS.

  First, the normal medium and large hit table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal medium and large hit table 202d1. As described above, the normal middle and big hit table 202d1 is a data table used to determine a fluctuating time (a fluctuating pattern) when a lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit in a normal state of a normal symbol. There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns: a hit normal change (7 seconds) and a hit long change (10 seconds). For each change pattern, the value of the change type counter CS1 is used as a judgment value. Is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111A, “0 to 99” is changed for the hit normal change (7 seconds), and “100 to 198” is changed for the hit long change (10 seconds). It is defined as a judgment value of the type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the normal state of the normal symbol, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the normal medium and large hit table 202d1.

  FIG. 111 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal out-of-center table 202d2. As described above, the normal out-of-place table 202d2 is a data table used to determine a fluctuating time (a fluctuating pattern) when a lottery result of a special symbol is out of order in a normal state of a normal symbol. Two types of deviation fluctuation patterns are provided: deviation normal fluctuation (7 seconds) and deviation long fluctuation (10 seconds). For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is used as a judgment value. Is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), “0 to 150” is changed for the off-normal fluctuation (7 seconds), and “151 to 198” is changed for the off-long fluctuation (10 seconds). It is defined as a judgment value of the type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the ordinary medium and large hit table 202d1.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving medium and large hit table 202d3. As described above, the time-saving medium-and-big-hit table 202d3 determines the variation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the normal symbol time-saving state (that is, “preparation mode” or “rensou mode”). Is a data table used for the following. Nine types of fluctuation patterns when a big hit occurs during the time saving state include short fluctuation (0.2 seconds), middle fluctuation (3 seconds), and long fluctuation A (90 seconds) to long fluctuation G (72 seconds). Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 112, in the normal symbol time reduction state, different fluctuation patterns (variation time) according to the previous jackpot type and the number of lotteries (variation times) of special symbols executed since the previous jackpot was completed. Is configured to be selected. This is in order to secure a sufficient effect period for executing the “representative effect in extended-villa mode” (see FIGS. 93 to 95) in the “preparation mode”. Note that the “rensou mode suggestion effect” executed in the “preparation mode” is a fixed effect with an effect time of 90 seconds. However, the maximum number of times of change in the “preparation mode” is one, or seven, as described above (see FIGS. 107 and 108). Further, even in the “preparation mode” in which seven time saving periods are set, if a big hit occurs before the seven changes are completed, the state is changed to another state before all the seven changes are displayed. Transition. Therefore, the number of lotteries of the special symbol in which the “preparation mode” is continued differs every time according to the set number of times of saving, the lottery result in the time saving state, and the like.

  Therefore, in the present control example, regardless of the set number of time savings and the lottery result during the time saving state, the previous jackpot type and the previous jackpot type are set so that the mode can be shifted from the "preparation mode" to another mode at the same timing. The configuration is such that a variation pattern (variation time) is selected according to the number of variations (number of special symbol lotteries) after the end of the big hit. Then, the selected fluctuation time is the same time (90 seconds, which is the production time of the “renjo mode suggestion production”), irrespective of the set number of time savings (one or seven times) and the lottery result during the time savings. ), All the variable displays are terminated. With this configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the effect period of the “rensou mode suggestive effect” executed in the “preparation mode”. In addition, since the production time of the “renjo mode suggested production” can be unified, there is no need to prepare a plurality of patterns of production modes having different production times. Therefore, the processing load and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  The prescribed contents of the time-saving medium-and-big-hits table 202d3 will be described more specifically. As shown in FIG. 112, if the previous jackpot type was any of “probably variable jackpots A, D, G, H, and K”, the number of fluctuations since the end of the jackpot (the number of special symbol lotteries) ), The variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to the extended table (at the time of the big hit) shown in the lower part of FIG. This extended-villa table (at the time of the big hit) is used for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in the “extended-village mode”. Note that the reason for determining the fluctuation time as the “rensou mode” irrespective of the number of fluctuations (number of special symbol lotteries) is to shift to the “preparation mode” after “probable change big hits A, D, G, H, K”. Because there is nothing. That is, if the time-saving state of the ordinary symbols is reached after the end of each of the above jackpots, the "rensou mode" is always set, so there is no need to secure the effect period of the "rensou mode suggesting effect".

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 112, in the extended table (at the time of the big hit), a short variation (0.2 seconds) is associated with the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 99” as the variation type. I have. On the other hand, when the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “100 to 198”, a middle variation of 3 seconds is associated with the variation type. As described above, in the “rensou mode”, the fluctuation time that is shorter than the fluctuation time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the “normal mode” is determined. Can be executed speedily. Further, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game in the “rensou mode” becomes monotonous.

  As shown in FIG. 112, when the previous jackpot type is any of the “probable change jackpots B, E, and I”, the variation time (the number of special symbol lotteries) varies after the jackpot. Fluctuation pattern) is determined. More specifically, if a big win is made in the first special symbol lottery after the “probable change big hit B, E, I”, the long change A is used as a change pattern regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. (90 seconds) is determined. This makes it possible to match the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) with the production time of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. The timing at which the “effect” ends can be matched.

  In addition, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I”, a long change B (87 seconds) is used as a change pattern regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. Is determined. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 113, in the present control example, when the lottery of the special symbol is lost in the “preparation mode”, the variation time is independent of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is determined to have a middle fluctuation of 3 seconds. For this reason, after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I”, if the first special pattern lottery is missed and the second lottery wins, the middle fluctuation is 3 seconds and the long fluctuation B is 87. After a fluctuation time of 90 seconds in total, the "preparation mode" ends, and a big hit occurs. In other words, even if the special symbol lottery executed for the second time after the “probable change big hits B, E, I” results in a big hit, the fluctuation time until the “preparation mode” ends is indicated in the “renso mode suggestion effect”. Can be adjusted to 90 seconds, which is the production time of ".

  Similarly, after the “probable change big hits B, E, I”, even if the third to seventh lottery of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the fluctuation indicating the departure of the special symbol executed up to the big hit. The long fluctuation C is set such that the total of the fluctuation time of the display (middle fluctuation) (3 seconds × the number of times of deviation) and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display indicating the jackpot (any of the long fluctuations C to G) becomes 90 seconds. To G are set. For example, in the case of the fifth big hit after the end of the big hit, the change time of the first to fourth out-of-change display is 3 seconds (middle change), and the change time of the fifth change display is 78 seconds ( Since the long fluctuation E) is determined, the fluctuation time is a total of 90 seconds (3 seconds × 4 + 78 seconds). Therefore, in the “preparation mode” in which the seven time-saving periods are set, even if a big hit occurs in any of the first to seventh fluctuation times (number of lotteries for special symbols), the execution is performed until the big hit is reached. The sum of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (middle fluctuation) corresponding to the departure of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (long fluctuation A to long fluctuation G) corresponding to the jackpot is referred to as “renjo mode suggestion effect”. 90 seconds, which is the production time of Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure the effect period of the “renjo mode suggestive effect” executed in the “preparation mode”. In addition, since the production time of the “renjo mode suggested production” can be unified, there is no need to prepare a plurality of patterns of production modes having different production times. Therefore, the processing load and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  Note that if the number of fluctuations (number of special symbol lotteries) after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I” is over 7 times, the extended-villa table (big hit) shown in the lower part of FIG. ), And a variation pattern (variation time) is selected. When the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I” ends, seven time-saving periods are always set. This is because, if the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol continues more than once, it means that it is in the “rensou mode”.

  Here, even when the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I” ends, the time-saving medium-and-big hit table 202d3 is referred to. If it hits within, a long fluctuation time (72 seconds to 90 seconds) is set. If a long fluctuation time is set in the “rensou mode”, the period until the big hit becomes long, and the game may be prolonged. In this regard, in the present control example, in the case where the jackpot has been won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (ratio) of determining the “probable variable jackpot I” is extremely low as 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the “rensou-so mode”, since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the special symbol 1. That is, while the “rensou mode” and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the “rensou mode” is looped), the “probable variable jackpot B” and the “probable variable jackpot E” are not obtained. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the “rensou mode” becomes long.

  As shown in FIG. 112, after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J”, if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the long change A is set as a change pattern regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. (90 seconds) is determined. This makes it possible to match the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) with the production time of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. The timing at which the “effect” ends can be matched.

  Also, if the number of fluctuations (number of special symbol lotteries) since the end of the “probable change big hit C, F, J” is two or more, the extended-house table shown at the bottom of FIG. 112 (at the time of the big hit) , A variation pattern (variation time) is selected. When the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J” is completed, the time saving period is always set only once. This is because, if the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol continues more than once, it means that it is in the “rensou mode”.

  As shown in FIG. 112, if the jackpot type is “normal jackpot A, B” and the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot after the “normal jackpot A, B”, the last jackpot type is “probable variable jackpot C, F, J”. , The long variation A (90 seconds) is determined as the variation pattern irrespective of the value of the variation type counter CS1. This makes it possible to match the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) with the production time of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. The timing at which the “effect” ends can be matched.

  On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) is two or more, the fluctuation time is not specified. There is no case where the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the “normal jackpot A, B” ends (see FIGS. 107 and 108). This is because the time reduction period is always one "preparation mode".

  As described above, regardless of the number of time savings in the “preparation mode” and the lottery result of the special symbol in the “preparation mode”, the total fluctuation time until the jackpot becomes the “time-saving mode” It is configured to coincide with 90 seconds, which is the production time of the “proposed production”. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure the effect period of the “renjo mode suggestive effect” executed in the “preparation mode”. In addition, since the production time of the “renjo mode suggested production” can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of production modes having different production times. Therefore, the processing load and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, the time-saving medium and large hit table 202d3 is configured so that the fluctuation time in the “rensou mode” is shorter than that in the “normal mode”. As a result, the game can be quickly executed during the “rensou mode”. Further, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game in the “rensou mode” becomes monotonous.

  Here, even when the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J” ends, the time-saving medium-and-big hit table 202d3 is referred to, so the first time since the “rensou mode” is entered , A long fluctuation time (90 seconds) is set. If a long fluctuation time is set in the “rensou mode”, the period until the big hit becomes long, and the game may be prolonged. In this regard, in the present control example, when a jackpot is won due to the lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (ratio) of determining the “probable variable jackpot J” is extremely low as 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the “rensou-so mode”, since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the special symbol 1. That is, while the “rensou mode” and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the “rensou mode” is looped), the “probable variable jackpot C” and the “probable variable jackpot F” are not obtained. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the “rensou mode” becomes long.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the time-saving out-of-time table 202d4 will be described. As described above, the time-saving out-of-time table 202d4 determines the fluctuation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of time in the normal symbol time-saving state (that is, “preparation mode” or “rensou mode”). Is a data table used for the following. There are four types of fluctuation patterns in the case of a deviation during the time saving state: short fluctuation (0.2 seconds), middle fluctuation (3 seconds), long fluctuation A (90 seconds), and long fluctuation G (72 seconds). Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 113, in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol, the variation pattern (variation time) varies according to the previous jackpot type and the number of lotteries (variations) of the special symbol executed since the previous jackpot was completed. Is configured to be selected. This is to ensure a sufficient effect period (90 seconds) for executing the “representative mode suggestion effect” (see FIGS. 93 to 95) in the “preparation mode” in the same manner as the time saving medium and big hit table 202 d 3. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 113, if the previous jackpot type was any of “probably variable jackpots A, D, G, H, and K”, the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) since the end of the jackpot ), The variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to the extended table (at the time of disconnection) shown in the lower part of FIG. This extended table (at the time of disconnection) is used for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in the “extended mode”. Note that the reason for determining the fluctuation time as the “rensou mode” irrespective of the number of fluctuations (number of special symbol lotteries) is to shift to the “preparation mode” after “probable change big hits A, D, G, H, K”. Because there is nothing. That is, when the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is reached after the end of each of the above-mentioned jackpots, the "rensou mode" is always provided, so there is no need to secure the effect period (90 seconds) of the "rensou mode suggesting effect". It is.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 113, in the extended table (at the time of disconnection), a short variation (0.2 seconds) is associated with the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 160” as the variation type. I have. On the other hand, in the range where the variation type counter CS1 is “161 to 198”, a middle variation of 3 seconds is associated as a variation type. As described above, in the “rensou mode”, the fluctuation time that is shorter than the fluctuation time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the “normal mode” is determined. Can be executed speedily. Further, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game in the “rensou mode” becomes monotonous. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is out of order in the “rensou mode”, the middle fluctuation (0.2 seconds) is less likely to be selected than in the case of winning. Thus, in the “rensou mode”, a relatively long (3 seconds) fluctuation time is determined, so that a sense of expectation for the special symbol jackpot can be increased. Therefore, since the game can be played while paying attention to the fluctuation time, it is possible to prevent the game in the “rensou mode” from becoming monotonous, and to improve the interest in the game.

  As shown in FIG. 113, when the previous jackpot type is any of the “probable change jackpots B, E, and I”, the variation time (the number of special symbol lotteries) varies after the jackpot. Fluctuation pattern) is determined. More specifically, when the first to sixth special symbol lotteries are missed after the “probable variation jackpot B, E, I”, the variation pattern is determined as a variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Middle variation (3 seconds) is determined. On the other hand, if the lottery of the seventh special symbol is missed after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I”, the long change G (72 seconds) as a change pattern regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. Is determined. As a result, after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I” ends, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” (seven short time periods). The total can be 90 seconds (3 seconds × 6 + 72 seconds). That is, the total fluctuation time from the end of the “preparation mode” to the transition to the “normal mode” can be made to coincide with the production time of the “renjo mode suggestion production”.

  Note that if the number of fluctuations (number of special symbol lotteries) after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I” is over 7 times, the extended-villa table (big hit) shown in the lower part of FIG. ), And a variation pattern (variation time) is selected. When the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I” ends, seven time-saving periods are always set. This is because, if the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol continues more than once, it means that it is in the “rensou mode”.

  Here, even if the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the end of the “probable change jackpot B, E, I”, the out-of-hours time table 202d4 is referred to. If the deviation is continuous, a long fluctuation time (72 seconds) is set. If a long fluctuation time is set in the “rensou mode”, the period until the big hit becomes long, and the game may be prolonged. In this regard, in the present control example, in the case where the jackpot has been won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (ratio) of determining the “probable variable jackpot I” is extremely low as 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the “rensou-so mode”, since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the special symbol 1. That is, while the “rensou mode” and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the “rensou mode” is looped), the “probable variable jackpot B” and the “probable variable jackpot E” are not obtained. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the “rensou mode” becomes long.

  As shown in FIG. 113, after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J”, if the first special symbol lottery results in a loss, the long change A is used as a change pattern regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. (90 seconds) is determined. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) can be matched with the production time of the “renjo mode suggested production”. ”And the timing when the“ rensou mode suggestion effect ”ends.

  In addition, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J” ends is two or more, the extended-village table shown at the bottom of FIG. , A variation pattern (variation time) is selected. When the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J” is completed, the time saving period is always set only once. This is because, if the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol continues more than once, it means that it is in the “rensou mode”.

  Here, even when the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J” ends, the first and second times after the “rensou mode” is entered, because the table for out-of-hours hours 202d4 is referred to. When the lottery of the special symbol is lost, a long fluctuation time (90 seconds) is set. If a long fluctuation time is set in the “rensou mode”, the period until the big hit becomes long, and the game may be prolonged. In this regard, in the present control example, in the case where a jackpot has been won due to the lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (proportion) of determining the “probably variable jackpot C” is extremely low as 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the “rensou-so mode”, since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the special symbol 1. That is, while the “rensou mode” and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the “rensou mode” is looped), the “probable variable jackpot C” and the “probable variable jackpot F” are not obtained. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the “rensou mode” becomes long.

  As shown in FIG. 113, if the last jackpot type is “normal jackpot A, B” and the first special symbol lottery is lost after the “normal jackpot A, B”, the last jackpot type is “probable variable jackpot C, F, J”. , The long variation A (90 seconds) is determined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Thereby, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) can be matched with the production time of the “representative production mode effect”, so that the “preparation mode” ends and shifts to the “normal mode”. And the timing when the “rensou mode suggestion effect” ends.

  On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) is two or more, the fluctuation time is not specified. There is no case where the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the “normal jackpot A, B” ends (see FIGS. 107 and 108). This is because the time reduction period is always one "preparation mode".

  In this way, the time-saving out-of-hours table 202d4 indicates that the total fluctuation time until the preparation mode ends is 90 seconds, which is the production time of the “renjo mode suggestion production”, regardless of the number of times of the “preparation mode”. It is configured to match. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure the effect period of the “renjo mode suggestive effect” executed in the “preparation mode”. In addition, since the production time of the “renjo mode suggested production” can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of production modes having different production times. Therefore, the processing load and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, the time-saving out-of-office table 202d4 is configured such that the fluctuation time in the “rensou mode” is shorter than that in the “normal mode”. As a result, the game can be quickly executed during the “rensou mode”. Further, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game in the “rensou mode” becomes monotonous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, a description will be given of a correspondence relationship between the fluctuation time and the effect mode when the number of times of normal symbols is reduced to seven in the “preparation mode”. FIG. 114 (a) is a diagram showing a case in which the number of times of normal symbols has been set to seven times, and all special symbols have been lost by lottery. In other words, it is a diagram showing a case where a departure is reported in a roulette chance effect.

  As shown in FIG. 114A, in the “preparation mode”, when the fluctuation effect corresponding to the departure is executed seven times, the first (hour reduction 1) to the sixth (hour reduction 6) fluctuation display is a fluctuation of 3 seconds. The time is set. On the other hand, in the seventh (time saving 7) fluctuation display, a fluctuation time of 72 seconds is set. Then, when the seventh special symbol lottery ends, the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol ends because the number of time reductions has elapsed, and the mode shifts to the “normal mode”. For a total of 90 seconds, a “renjo mode suggestion effect” is executed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), when the jackpot ends and the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”, first, a lucky number increase effect (see FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (b)) is executed. Is done. As described above, this lucky number increase effect is an effect of executing a lottery every time a ball enters the second entrance 640a and increasing the lucky number (hit pocket) when the lottery is won. . This lucky number increase effect is an effect in which the effect time is fixed for 20 seconds.

  When the lucky number increase effect ends, a roulette chance effect (see FIGS. 94 and 95) starts. As described above, this roulette chance effect is an effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” according to the type of the pocket in which the ball B falls. This roulette chance production is a production in which the production time is fixed for 65 seconds. After the end of the roulette chance effect, an ending effect for 5 seconds is set to notify the end of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”. The effect time of the ending effect may be extended depending on the game situation in the “preparation mode”.

  As described above, the “rensou mode suggestion effect” of this control example is basically a 90-second effect of a lucky number increase effect of 20 seconds, a roulette chance effect of 65 seconds, and an ending effect of 5 seconds. Are executed in this order. The fluctuation time of each fluctuation display (variation effect) executed in the “preparation mode” is set in accordance with the effect time of 90 seconds, and seven fluctuation displays are executed without intervals, and all the fluctuation displays are performed. The configuration is such that when the game ends, the “rensou mode suggestion effect” ends. As a result, even though the “preparation mode” has not ended, the “rensou mode suggestion effect” has ended. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the execution of the "suggest" effect from being continued, and to link the game state and the effect to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the current state is the “preparation mode” by the effect to be executed.

  By setting the lucky number increase effect to 20 seconds, a roulette chance effect can be executed in consideration of the lottery results of all special symbols executed in the “preparation mode”. In other words, if the special symbol lottery is executed without interruption, the seventh lottery is executed after a maximum of 18 seconds. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the seventh special symbol lottery result is a hit. It is possible to start a roulette chance production after making a determination and determining whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” according to the determination result. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether to shift to the “rensou mode” during the roulette chance production, and it is not necessary to execute processing such as rewriting the result during the production, and the result of the production at the start of the roulette chance production Since it can be set to include, the processing load during the execution of the roulette chance effect can be reduced.

  Next, referring to FIG. 114 (b), when the number of times of the normal symbol is reduced to seven and the lottery of all the special symbols is lost, a special symbol is displayed during the seven times of variable display corresponding to the departure. A description will be given of an effect mode when the symbol lottery is interrupted. That is, a case where a period in which the ball does not enter the second entrance 640a during the “preparation mode” occurs. In FIG. 114 (b), since the ball did not enter the second entrance 640a for 5 seconds after the end of the second fluctuation display, the second fluctuation display and the third fluctuation display 5 shows a case where the fluctuation stop state for 5 seconds occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (b), even if the fluctuation stop state occurs during the “preparation mode”, the lucky number increase effect and the effect time of the roulette chance effect are not changed. That is, when the “preparation mode” is started, a lucky number increase effect for 20 seconds is executed, and thereafter, a roulette chance effect for 65 seconds is executed. On the other hand, the execution period of the ending effect is extended for 5 seconds in accordance with the fluctuation stop period. That is, as shown in FIG. 114B, the ending effect is executed for 10 seconds. As described above, in the present control example, when the fluctuation stop state occurs in the “preparation mode” and the period in the “preparation mode” is shifted from 90 seconds, the production time of the ending production is varied. It is configured to be able to absorb the displacement by the. Thereby, even if the fluctuation stop state has occurred, the period in the “preparation mode” can be made to coincide with the production period of the “renjo mode suggested production”.

  In this control example, the fluctuation stop period is absorbed by changing the production period of the ending production, and the production period of the “preparation mode” is made to coincide with the production period of the “renjo mode suggested production”. , But is not limited to this. For example, the effect time of the lucky number increase effect may be changed, or the effect period of the roulette chance effect may be changed. Further, the configuration may be such that the “rensou-mode suggested effect” is interrupted when the fluctuation stop is detected, and then the effect is restarted when the start of the fluctuation is detected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (a), a description will be given of the relationship between the effect mode and the fluctuation time in the case where the special symbol is won by lottery in the “preparation mode” in the “preparation mode”. FIG. 115 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where a big win has been achieved in the fourth special symbol lottery out of seven normal symbol time reduction times set. As shown in FIG. 115 (a), in the special symbol lottery executed in the “preparation mode”, the first time (time reduction 1) to the third time (time reduction 3) are lost, and the fourth time (time reduction 4) is a big hit. Then, 3 seconds are set as the fluctuation time of the first (time reduction 1) to third (time reduction 3) fluctuation display, and 81 seconds (long fluctuation D) is set as the fluctuation time of the fourth (time reduction 4) fluctuation display. Is done. This makes it possible to make the total of the fluctuation time coincide with the 90-second effect period of the “renjo mode suggestive effect”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), the “long-shooting mode suggestion effect” for a total of 90 seconds of the lucky number increase effect for 20 seconds, the roulette chance effect for 65 seconds, and the ending effect for 5 seconds ends. At the timing, the “preparation mode” can be ended. Therefore, the game state and the effect to be executed can be linked, so that the player can recognize whether or not the current state is the “preparation mode” by the effect to be executed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 115 (b), when the number of times of normal symbol reduction is set to seven times and the fourth special symbol lottery is a big hit, the special symbol lottery is performed in the middle of the four variable displays. Will be described in the case where is interrupted. That is, a case where a period in which the ball does not enter the second entrance 640a during the “preparation mode” occurs. FIG. 115 (b) shows the third variation display and the fourth variation display because the ball did not enter the second entrance 640a for 40 seconds after the third variation display (time saving 3) was completed. The case where the fluctuation stop state for 40 seconds occurs between the fluctuation display and the fluctuation display.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (b), even if the fluctuation stop state occurs during the “preparation mode”, the effect time of the lucky number increase effect and the roulette chance effect is not changed. That is, when the “preparation mode” is started, a lucky number increase effect for 20 seconds is executed, and thereafter, a roulette chance effect for 65 seconds is executed. At the start of the execution of the roulette chance effect, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, the roulette chance effect is notified of the departure (the ball B falls into the departure pocket). ). In the example of FIG. 115 (b), the player enters the second entrance 640a in the middle of a roulette chance effect for notifying the player of a loss, and a large symbol is won by lottery of a special symbol. For this reason, in this control example, in order to notify that it shifts to the “rensou mode”, it is notified once that the roulette chance effect is being executed, and after setting the ending effect for 5 seconds as usual, It is configured to execute a roulette chance effect again (execute a resurrection roulette chance effect). This resurrection roulette chance effect is executed for 30 seconds, and finally, the ball falls into the hit pocket and the shift to the “rensou mode” is notified. After the end of the resurrection roulette chance effect, an ending effect for 10 seconds is set. The ending effect is set to absorb a shift between the effect period due to the occurrence of the fluctuation stop period and the period of the “preparation mode”, and the effect period can be changed according to the shift.

  In this way, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined in the middle of the roulette chance production for notifying the departure, the player can be pleased by executing the resurrection roulette chance. Further, even if a fluctuation stop period occurs, an effect having a length corresponding to the fluctuation stop period can be executed, so that a shift between the effect period and the period of the “preparation mode” is prevented (suppressed). can do. If the fluctuation stop period is shorter than 30 seconds and the resurrection roulette chance cannot be executed, a short display effect that does not involve the rotation of the rotating member 640 and ends in a relatively short time (for example, 5 seconds) is executed. Is done. When the fluctuation stop period is shorter than 30 seconds, whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” is notified by this short display effect, and it is determined whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”. Can be surely grasped.

  Returning to FIG. 106 (a), the description will be continued. The game result setting table 202e is a data table that defines information (state setting information) for determining a game state after a jackpot has been completed by a special symbol lottery. Further, the state setting table 202f determines various setting values (probable change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and medium time saving counter 203h) related to the game state after the end of the jackpot based on the state setting information selected from the game result setting table 202e. This is a data table used to perform the operation.

  In the pachinko machine 10, based on the winning of the jackpot, the state setting information corresponding to the type of the winning jackpot is stored in the state setting information provided in the RAM 203 from the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 116A). It is stored in the storage area 203j (see FIG. 117). The state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is retained during the jackpot, and at the end timing of the jackpot, various setting values relating to the game state after the end of the jackpot (probable change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving medium time). The counter 203h is read from the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 116B) and set. More specifically, for each value of the state setting information, a state setting table 202f (see FIG. 116 (b)) that defines various setting values (probable change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and medium time counter 203h) regarding the gaming state. Is used to select and set a combination of various setting values from. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the random number value (counter value) itself acquired in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640a is changed to the end of the jackpot. The game state after the end of the jackpot is not determined based on the random number value (counter value), and the game state is not determined based on the random number value (counter value). Only the state setting information value selected from the game result setting table 202e based on the random number value (counter value) acquired with the start winning) is held in the big hit.

  Here, when the random number value of the jackpot is held during the fluctuation pattern production at the time of the jackpot winning or during the subsequent jackpot state, the jackpot random number is read out by the unauthorized player, and the jackpot is won. A random value may be specified. Therefore, the timing at which the specified random number value appears is analyzed, and there is a possibility that the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, in the present control example, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into a state setting information value and held until the end of the jackpot, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is based on the state setting information value. Since it is configured so as to be set, the period during which the random number value itself serving as the jackpot of the special symbol is held can be limited to a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, various set values (probable change flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, and medium-time-time counter 203h) relating to the game state after the end of the big hit are displayed during the fluctuation display of the symbol for notifying the big hit. Instead of being held during the subsequent jackpot (privilege gaming state), only the state setting information is held. Rather than providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various set values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the state setting information values, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

  The game result setting table 202e and the state setting table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 (a) and 116 (b), respectively. As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the game result setting table 202e, the jackpot is ended for each of the gaming state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed and the type of the jackpot won by the special symbol lottery. The value of the state setting information which is information for setting the game state after the game is defined. Also, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the state setting table 202f, for each value of the state setting information, setting values relating to the gaming state after the end of the big hit are defined.

  More specifically, in the game result setting table 202e, "00H" is associated as the value of the state setting information with "probable change jackpots A to K" in the normal symbol time saving state, and the normal symbol time saving state Is associated with “05H” as the value of the state setting information. Similarly, “00H” is associated with the value of the state setting information for “probable change jackpot A, H” in the normal state of the normal symbol (non-time saving state), and the normal state of the normal symbol (non-time saving state). Is associated with “01H” as the value of the state setting information. Furthermore, “02H” is associated with the value of the state setting information for “probable change jackpot C, F, J” in the normal state of the ordinary symbol (non-time saving state), and the normal state of the ordinary symbol (non-time saving state). ) Is associated with “03H” as the value of the state setting information, and is associated with “normal jackpot A, B” in the normal state (non-time saving state) of a normal symbol. In this case, “04H” is associated with the value of the state setting information.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the state setting table 202f, for the value “00H” of the state setting information, the probability change flag 203f, the time reduction flag 203g, and the time reduction medium counter 203h are each “on”. , “ON”, and “0” are associated with each other. Although details will be described later, the probable change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is in the probable change state, and the time reduction flag 203g is a time reduction state of an ordinary symbol that continues until the next big hit (that is, “ The time reduction counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of time reductions of a normal symbol (that is, the remaining number of time reductions in the “preparation mode”). Therefore, if the probability change flag 203f is “ON”, the time reduction flag 203g is “ON”, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is “0”, the probability that the special symbol will change after the jackpot is over and the normal will continue to the next jackpot The state shifts to the symbol time reduction state (that is, “rensou mode”). As described above, in the case of a probability variable jackpot (probable variation jackpots A to K) in the time saving state of a normal symbol, or in the case of "probability variation jackpot A, H" in the normal state of a normal symbol, the direct connection mode is performed. (See FIGS. 107 and 108), and by referring to the game result setting table 202e and the state setting table 202f, it is possible to set a correct game state after the end of the big hit.

  In the state setting table 202f, for the value “01H” of the state setting information, “ON”, “OFF”, and “7” are respectively set as the probability change flag 203f, the time reduction flag 203g, and the medium time reduction counter 203h. Are associated. Therefore, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol (that is, in the “normal mode”), “probable change big hit B, E, I” is obtained, and “01H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (see FIG. a)), it is possible to shift to the "preparation mode" in which the number of times saved is seven after the big hit.

  In the state setting table 202f, “ON”, “OFF”, and “1” are respectively associated with the value “02H” of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the medium time counter 203h. Have been. Therefore, in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, in the “normal mode”), the “probable change big hit C, F, J” is obtained, and when “02H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (see FIG. a)), it is possible to shift to the "preparation mode" in which the number of times saved is one after the big hit.

  In the state setting table 202f, “ON”, “OFF”, and “0” are respectively associated with the value “03H” of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the medium time saving counter 203h. Have been. Therefore, in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, in the “normal mode”), “probably large hit D, G, K” is obtained, and “03H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (see FIG. a)), and after the jackpot, the mode can be shifted to the “normal mode”.

  In the state setting table 202f, “OFF”, “OFF”, and “1” are respectively associated with the value “04H” of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the medium time saving counter 203h. Have been. Therefore, in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, in the “normal mode”), “normal jackpot A, B” is obtained, and “04H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (FIG. 116 (a)). After the big hit, the special symbol can be shifted to the low probability state, and the normal symbol can be shifted to the “preparation mode” in which the number of times of saving is one.

  In the state setting table 202f, the value “05H” of the state setting information is associated with “OFF”, “OFF”, and “0” as the probability change flag 203f, the time reduction flag 203g, and the medium time reduction counter 203h, respectively. Have been. Therefore, when the normal symbol is in the time saving state (that is, “preparation mode” or “rensou mode”), “normal jackpot A, B” is set, and “05H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j. (See FIG. 116 (a)), it is possible to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot and to shift to the normal state of the ordinary symbol (that is, "normal mode").

  In this way, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the value of the state setting information corresponding to the big hit type is read from the game result setting table 202e and stored in the state setting information storage area 203j, and the big hit is stored. At the end of the process, various setting values corresponding to the state setting information are read out from the state setting table 202f and set, whereby the state transition as shown in FIG. 109 can be realized. That is, it is possible to realize a gaming ability in which three states of the “normal mode”, the “preparation mode”, and the “renshou mode” are switched.

  In the present control example, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into a state setting information value, held until the end of the jackpot, and the game state after the end of the jackpot is set based on the state setting information value. Therefore, the period during which the random number value itself serving as the special symbol jackpot is held can be limited to a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, various set values (probable change flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, and medium-time-time counter 203h) relating to the game state after the end of the big hit are displayed during the fluctuation display of the symbol for notifying the big hit. Instead of being held during the subsequent jackpot (privilege gaming state), only the state setting information is held. Rather than providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various set values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the state setting information values, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 117, the RAM 203 of this control example includes a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. A winning information storage area 203e, a probability change flag 203f, a time reduction flag 203g, a time reduction medium counter 203h, a winning number counter 203i, a state setting information storage area 203j, a state storage area 203k, and a prefetching certainty change flag 203m. , A counter buffer 203y, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing a winning in the first winning port 64, and has four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Each of these areas stores a value of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning opening 64, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Of the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is changed to the common execution area. Is shifted (moved), and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the common execution area, determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning opening 64, and as soon as each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in accordance with the starting winning, the big hit lottery of the original special symbol starts. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, a fluctuation pattern, etc.) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / wrong, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information as a winning information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning are obtained. From the above, various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted. In addition, this prediction (look-ahead) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or positively varying gaming state) at the time when the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning is started. . This makes it possible to accurately predict the result of the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). Of the vacant areas (four areas), the area numbers are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning stored in the other reserved areas. Is shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is a ball for displaying a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B based on a ball entering the first winning port 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number (the number of times of waiting) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special value 1 reserved ball number counter 203c increases by one to four. (See S404 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 131).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of times of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 131 and S405 in FIG. 133). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display retained by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the number of the spheres of the actual variable display held by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable number of reserved balls (standby) of the variable symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance (through gate) 67. Is a counter for counting the number of times up to four times. The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the number of changing display-holding balls increases, the maximum value becomes 4. One is added up to (see S704 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 135).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, the second random number counter per second The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S703 in FIG. 136: No).

  The probable change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability change flag 203f is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol change state, and if the value is OFF, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). Indicates that there is. The initial value of the probability change flag 203f is set to off, and every time the jackpot ends, a state corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. , The probability change flag 203f is set. That is, when “ON” is read from the state setting table 202f, the probability change flag 203f is set to “ON”, and when “OFF” is read, the probability change flag 203f is set to “OFF”. You. In the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 132) and the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134), it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is in the probable change state (S302 in FIG. 132, FIG. 134). Is set to off when the next big hit game is started (see S213 in FIG. 131).

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 132) or the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 132) or the special symbol 2 winning process (FIG. 134), the value of the probable change flag 203f is referred to. While the special symbol lottery is performed based on 202a, if the value of the probability change flag 203f is OFF, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  The time-saving flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state of a normal symbol that continues until the next big hit (that is, is in the “rensou mode”). If the value of the time saving flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol that continues until the next big hit, and if it is off, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the “rensou mode”. Show. In addition, as described above, in the present control example, in addition to the "rensou mode", the time of the ordinary symbol is reduced in the "preparation mode". The remaining number of time savings in the “preparation mode” is counted by the medium time saving counter 203h. That is, in the present control example, only when the time reduction flag 203g is off and the value of the during-time reduction counter 203h is 0, the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the "normal mode") is set.

  The initial value of the time saving flag 203g is set to off, and every time the jackpot ends, a state corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. , The time reduction flag 203g is set. That is, when "ON" is read from the state setting table 202f, the time saving flag 203g is set to "ON", and when "OFF" is read, the time saving flag 203g is set to "OFF". You. Then, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), it is referred to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state (see S608, S614, 619 in FIG. 135), and the next big hit game is started. Is set to off (see S213 in FIG. 131).

  The time reduction counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of time reductions of a normal symbol (that is, the remaining number of time reductions in the “preparation mode”). When the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 has the number of time reductions of the normal symbol (that is, the “preparation mode”), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0. If there is, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the "prepare mode". As described above, if the time-saving flag 203g is on even when the value of the time-saving time counter 203h is 0, it means that the symbol is in the time-saving state of a normal symbol. That is, in the present control example, only when the time reduction flag 203g is off and the value of the during-time reduction counter 203h is 0, the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the "normal mode") is set.

  The initial value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0, and a value corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f every time the jackpot ends. Then, it is set as the value of the counter 203h during the working hours. That is, when "0" is read from the state setting table 202f, the value of the counter 203h during time saving is set to "0", and when "1" is read, the value of the counter 203h during time saving is set. When “1” is set and “7” is read, the value of the during-hours counter 203h is set to “7”. Then, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), it is referred to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state (see S608, S614, 619 in FIG. 135), and the next big hit game is started. Is initialized to 0 (see S213 in FIG. 131).

  The winning number counter 203i is a counter for counting the total number of balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a or the second variable winning device 65 in each round of the jackpot. In each round of the jackpot, it is determined whether or not the end condition of each round is satisfied according to the value of the winning number counter 203i. The winning number counter 203i is incremented by one each time a win is detected in the first variable winning device 82a or the second variable winning device 65 at the big hit (see S1203 in FIG. 141). Then, when it is detected that the winning number counter 203i has reached 10 or more in the jackpot, the running round is ended (see S1207 in FIG. 141). The initial value of the winning number counter 203i is set to 0, and the value of the winning number counter 203i is initialized to 0 when each round ends. The value of the winning number counter 203i is backed up even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  The state setting information storage area 203j stores (holds) the state setting information read from the game result setting table 202e according to the type of the jackpot until the jackpot ends, when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery. This is a storage area for storing. As described above, based on the state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j, various setting values corresponding to the gaming state after the end of the big hit are read from the state setting table 202f and set (FIG. 140). See S1115).

  The state storage area 203k is a storage area in which information indicating a period during which the present is a big hit is stored. Here, the jackpot is an opening period for notifying the start of the jackpot, a round period during which the first variable prize device 82a or the second specific prize port 65a is opened and closed, and an ending period for notifying the end of the jackpot. At least. In the state storage area 203k, information for distinguishing the current period among these plural types of periods is stored. More specifically, a jackpot is started, "01H" is stored in the state storage area 203k in the opening period, "02H" is stored in the state storage area 203k in the first round, and two rounds are performed. At first, “03H” is stored in the state storage area 203k, and “04H” is stored in the state storage area 203k in the ending period. On the other hand, in the state other than the big hit, “00H” is stored in the state storage area 203k.

  The initial value of the state storage area 203k is set to “00H”, and the stored values are backed up even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The value stored in the state storage area 203k is referred to when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. A status command is set for the operation. Thereby, even if the power is cut off during the game, the game state grasped by main controller 110 when the power is restored and the game state grasped by voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an inconsistency between the actual game state and the effect.

  The pre-reading probable changing flag 203m is used when the pachinko machine 10 pre-reads a special symbol lottery result based on a random number value (counter value) acquired in accordance with the starting prize. A flag indicating whether the prize data should be analyzed as being in the "probability state" or whether the prize data should be analyzed as if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). It is.

  When the prefetching certainty changing flag 203m is ON, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the specially changed state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched. On the other hand, if the prefetching certainty changing flag 203m is off, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched. The prefetching certainty changing flag 203m is initialized to off at the time of initializing the RAM (see S916 in FIG. 138), and is set to on each time the prefetched lottery result is determined to be a certainty change big hit (FIG. 133 (S410, FIG. 134, S514). On the other hand, each time the prefetched lottery result is determined to be a normal jackpot, it is set to off (see S412 in FIG. 133 and S515 in FIG. 134).

  The counter buffer 203y includes the above-described counters (the first random number counter C1, the first random counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4). , A second initial value random number counter CINI2). The counter value stored in the counter buffer 203y is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data. And a work area (work area) for storing values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Have.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 139), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 138). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 137) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 defines at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, an operation scenario table 222b, a rotational position determination table 222c, and an additional determination table 222d.

  Since the variation pattern selection table 222a is already known, a brief description will be given. More detailed fluctuation contents are determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a based on the contents (variation time). As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode from among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from main controller 110.

  The operation scenario table 222b indicates the operation of the accessory in the case of executing a movable effect in which at least one of the various accessories (the upper elevating unit 300, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotating unit 600, etc.) is movable. It is a data table that defines contents (operation scenario). More specifically, it is a data table in which set values (operation speed, operation step number, operation direction, and the like) set for various drive motors corresponding to each accessory are defined. Details of the operation scenario table 222b will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120.

  FIG. 119A is a block diagram showing the operation scenario table 222b. The operation scenario table 222b stores data for each type of a drivable (variable) character. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), an upper elevation unit table 222b1 that is referred to when an effect for driving the upper elevation unit 300 is set, and an effect for driving the liquid crystal elevation unit 400 are set. The liquid crystal elevating unit table 222b2 referred to when the operation is performed, the left swing unit table 222b3 referred to when the effect for driving the left swing unit 500 is set, and the effect for driving the rotary unit 600 are set. And a rotation unit table 222b4 to be referred to in the case of the above. In addition, when the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 are connected to a jackpot type (specific jackpot type), a specific opening in which the operation content of each accessory in the jackpot opening period is specified. Table 222b5, a specific ending table 222b6 in which the operation content of each accessory during the ending period of the specific jackpot type is specified, and the operation content of the initial operation of each accessory executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. An initial operation table 222b7 defined for each accessory is defined.

  Each of these tables will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 119 (b) to 120. FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-described upper elevating unit table 222b1. As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the setting to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) in the upper elevating unit table 222b1 for each value of the operation pointer 223g indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario. Values (operation speed, operation step number, and operation direction) are defined.

  Here, the operation speed indicates the frequency at which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) for setting one-step operation to the corresponding drive motor (motor 341). Are output (pps, pulse per second). For example, if the operation speed is 333 pps, it means that the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) 333 times to the upper elevating motor 341 per second. That is, it means that the upper elevating motor 341 is driven at a speed of 333 steps per second. The number of operation steps indicates the number of operations performed by the upper elevating motor 341, in other words, a signal (pulse) for setting one-step operation from the motor driver to the upper elevating motor 341. ) Is output. For example, the number of operation steps 127 means that one step operation is set 127 times for the upper elevating motor 341. Further, the operation direction means a driving direction (rotation direction of the motor) of the upper elevating motor 341, and two types of directions, a positive direction and a negative direction, can be set. In the upper elevating motor 341, the direction from the ascending position (origin position) to the descending position is a positive direction, and the direction from the descending position to the ascending position (origin position) is a negative direction. By setting these set values for the motor driver for driving the upper elevating motor 341, the corresponding operation can be executed accurately.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (b), an operation for lowering the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the ascending position (origin position) to the descending position is provided at the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g (outward operation). Are associated. Specifically, 333 pps is defined as the operation speed, 127 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when the timing at which the upper elevating unit 300 is driven is reached in the effect. In addition, 127 steps mean the number of steps up to the descending position.

  An operation for stopping (resting) the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 at the lowered position is associated with the value “02H” of the operation pointer 223g. Specifically, 333 pps is specified as the operation speed, 1000 is specified as the operation step, and “stop” is specified as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that the stop command is continuously issued 1000 times at an operation speed of 333 pps. Thus, the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 can be stopped at the lowered position for about 3 seconds (1000 times / 333 pps).

  The value (03H) of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation (return operation) for raising the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the lowered position to the raised position (origin position). Specifically, 333 pps is specified as the operation speed, 127 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. Further, END data is associated with the value “04H” of the operation pointer 223g. By reading the END data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Similarly, for the liquid crystal elevating unit table 222b2, the left swing unit table 222b3, and the rotating unit table 222b4, a motor driver corresponding to the drive motor for driving each accessory is provided for each value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to each accessory. The setting contents to be set are specified.

  FIG. 119 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the specific opening table 222b5 described above. As described above, when the jackpot type (specific jackpot type) in which the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 are connected is a specific jackpot type, the specific opening table 222b5 is provided with each accessory during the jackpot opening period. Is a data table in which the operation contents are specified. Note that the specific jackpot type is, specifically, an opening pattern A (opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds 20 times with respect to the first variable winning device 82a in each round of jackpot). (A repeating opening pattern) is a jackpot type to be set.

  As described above, when the jackpot type in which the open pattern A is set in the “normal mode” is won, the driving slide member 420 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 are connected to each other. , The configuration is such that all the balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a flow down to the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520. Each time the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 (every time the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c of the second passage forming member 422), a normal symbol is used. A time saving suggestion effect is performed to indicate whether or not the time saving state is set.

  In this control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are driven during the jackpot opening period in which the opening pattern A is set in order to execute the time saving suggestion effect. Before the first round of the jackpot is started (that is, before the ball is ready to enter the first variable winning device 82a), these characters are moved to the connection position. Have been. The operation content of each accessory during this opening period is defined in the specific opening table 222b5.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in order to drive the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 from the lowered position to the connected position (see FIG. 9) for the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g in the specific opening table 222b5. Are associated with each other. Specifically, 500 pps is defined as the operation speed, 250 is defined as the operation step, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction. By setting this operation content, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 can be arranged at the connection position.

  For the value “02H” of the operation pointer 223g, an operation content for swinging the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 from the release position (origin position) to the connection position is defined. ing. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction. By setting this operation content, the first passage forming member 520 can be arranged at the connection position. Accordingly, the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 previously arranged at the connection position can be connected to the first passage forming member 520. It can be guided (flowed down) to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 via 520.

  The value “03H” of the operation pointer 223g is associated with END data indicating the end of the operation. By reading the END data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  As for the specific ending table 222b6, similarly to the specific opening table 222b5, the operation content of the left swing unit 500 and the operation content of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are defined. Specifically, settings for driving the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 from the connection position to the release position, and settings for driving the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 from the connection position to the lower position. The contents are specified. The specific ending table 222b6 is not shown in the drawing because the operation direction and the operation order of the accessory are only reversed from those of the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)).

  Next, details of the above-described initial operation table 222b7 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the initial operation table 222b7. As shown in FIG. 120, the initial operation table 222b7 includes, in association with the value of the operation pointer 223g, the type of the accessory for which the operation is set, and the set value for setting the motor driver corresponding to the accessory. Is stipulated.

  Unlike the other tables defined in the operation scenario table 222b, the initial operation table 222b7 does not specify the number of operation steps, but specifies the operation end condition and the number of steps to be determined as abnormal. That is, in the initial operation in the present control example, one-step operation is performed at the operation speed and the operation direction specified in the initial operation table 222b7 until the arrival at the various sensors provided corresponding to each accessory is detected. It is configured to execute repeatedly. For example, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is provided with a plurality of sensors for determining the lifting position. That is, when the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is located at the lowering position (origin position), the output is H (high) when the liquid crystal originating unit 400 is located at the coupling position. And at least an intermediate sensor 419 for liquid crystal. In the initial operation of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g, the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 detects that the liquid crystal has reached the connection position (the output of the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 becomes H). Until the operation speed is 500 pps, it is driven one step at a time in the forward direction (upward direction).

  During the execution of the initial operation, if it is determined that the abnormality determination step value specified in the initial operation table 222b7 has been reached without the arrival at the connection position being detected by the intermediate sensor for liquid crystal 419, the operation proceeds to the connection position. This means that the operation has not reached the connection position despite the setting of the number of steps that can be sufficiently reached. Therefore, in this case, the liquid crystal raising / lowering motor 441 for driving the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit 400 breaks down and the operation corresponding to the instruction of the motor driver cannot be executed, or the gear and the motor are displaced, and the liquid crystal is shifted. There is a possibility that a problem such as idling of the elevating motor 441 has occurred. For this reason, if the abnormality determination step value (1050 steps) is reached before the operation end condition of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is satisfied in the initial operation, an error is notified. By reporting this error, the clerk of the hall can be immediately made aware of the occurrence of the problem, so that appropriate measures such as repair can be executed.

  The operation in the case of the operation pointer “01H” has been described as an example. However, as shown in FIG. 120, the operation speed of each character, the operation end condition, the number of abnormality determination steps, The direction of operation is likewise defined. By executing the initial operation according to the initial operation table 222b7, it is possible to confirm whether or not all the accessories are operating normally each time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, by allowing the player to play the game after the initial operation is completed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in a state where each accessory always operates normally.

  Returning to FIG. 118 (a), the description will be continued. The rotation position determination table 222c is a data table in which information for specifying the current arrangement of the rotation member 640 from the output of the rotation position detection sensor 684 is specified. Details of the rotation position determination table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rotational position determination table 222c. As shown in FIG. 121, the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are different from each other in the pocket provided with the detected portion 641c, depending on the phase (arrangement) of the rotation member 640. (Divided member DV) and a pocket (divided member DV) not provided. The rotation position determination table 222c in this control example is a data table that defines combinations of outputs of the detection sensors A to F specified based on the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c for each pocket arranged at the drop position. Since the pockets P1 to P30 are arranged in this order in a counterclockwise direction, if the pocket at the drop position can be identified, the arrangement of all pockets can be identified.

  As shown in FIG. 121, the pocket P1 is defined as the pocket at the drop position for the combination of the outputs “L, L, H, H, L, H” of the detection sensors A to F. Therefore, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, if it is detected that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is L, L, H, H, L, H, respectively, It is determined that the rotation member 640 is at the rotation position where the pocket P1 is arranged at the drop position.

  Similarly, for the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F “L, L, L, H, H, L”, P2 is defined as the pocket at the drop position. Therefore, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, if it is detected that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is L, L, L, H, H, L, respectively, It is determined that the rotation member 640 is at the rotation position where the pocket P2 is arranged at the drop position.

  Similarly, for the pockets P3 to P30, combinations of outputs of the corresponding detection sensors A to F are defined in the rotation position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121). As described above, the combinations of the outputs of the different detection sensors are associated with the pockets P1 to P30. It can be specified accurately.

  Returning to FIG. 118 (a), the description will be continued. The additional discrimination table 222d is special when the ball is detected to enter the second entrance 640a during the execution of the lucky number increase effect (see FIGS. 93 (a) and (b)), and in the “normal mode”. It is a data table used to determine whether to increase the winning pocket (lucky number) when the lottery of the symbol 1 is newly suspended. Although illustration is omitted, the additional determination table 222d includes an additional high probability table in which the increase of the lucky number is determined with a relatively high probability (25%), and an additional high probability table with a relatively low probability (5%). There is provided an additional low probability table in which the number increase is determined, and an additional medium probability table in which the lucky number increase is determined with an intermediate probability (10%). If the determination condition for determining whether or not to increase the lucky number is satisfied, the above-described three types of tables are changed according to the situation (for example, whether or not the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined). One of them is selected and used to determine whether to increase the lucky number. Here, a random number value (counter) used to determine (decide) whether or not to increase the lucky number (hit pocket) is provided in, for example, the RAM 223, and the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 145). Each time is executed, the value is updated.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 118B is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a step counter 223e, an operation scenario flag 223f, and an operation pointer 223g. Origin return flag 223i, initial operation flag 223j, hit position storage area 223k, lighting position storage area 223m, probability change state flag 223n, time reduction state flag 223o, time reduction state counter 223p, and hit state. Storage area 223q, operable type storage area 223r, correction position counter 223s, first set flag 223t, rotation position storage area 223u, swing non-detection flag 223v, swing timer 223w, and designated pocket storage. Area 223x and above Counter 223av, effect timer 223bv, increased effect flag 223cv, roulette flag 223dv, swing effect flag 223ev, ball fallable flag 223fv, winning counter 223gv, discharge counter 223hv, and power-off flag. 223y and at least a memory area 223z.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area for special symbol 1), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. You. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning are obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various information (whether or not, a variation pattern, etc.) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn, and the predicted various information is The control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, fluctuation pattern, etc.) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and stores the prize information in the prize information storage area. 223a. More specifically, the extracted prize information is sequentially assigned to the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the free areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas) of the special symbol. It is memorized. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, a variable effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (and the third symbol display device 81) ( This is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of standbys) of the variation effect of the special symbol 1 which is suspended in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of retained balls of the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first winning opening 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main When the number of balls has been subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2107 in FIG. 150). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203c.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball count after the storage. In order to notify the value of the counter 223 b to the display control device 114, a display pending ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on in a fluctuation pattern reception process executed when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 151), and turned off when fluctuation display is set. (See S3302 in FIG. 162). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 uses the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command to generate the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81 and the rendering unit 331). ), The display control of the variation effect is started so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2104 in FIG. 150), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3307 in FIG. 162). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. The set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop effect of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The step counter 223e is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of each accessory driven by the drive motor. Note that the reference for counting (the position where the number of operation steps is 0) is set at the origin position of each accessory. The step counter 223e is configured to separately count the number of operation steps for each type of accessory. That is, the step counter 223 e is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the elevating body 330 in the upper elevating unit 300, and the number of operation steps of the oscillating operation of the first passage forming member 520 in the left oscillating member 500. There are provided separate counters for the number of drive motors for driving the accessory, such as a counter for counting the number of characters.

  The step counter 223e outputs the execution signal (execution command) every time it receives an execution signal indicating that a one-step operation has been executed from any of various driving motors provided in the pachinko machine 10. The counter value corresponding to the motor type is updated by one (see S2601 in FIG. 155). When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, an origin return operation is performed to return the various accessories to the origin position. 0 is set for the value. With this origin return operation, the position where the value of the step counter 223e becomes 0 can be reliably set as the origin position of each accessory, so that the operation status (drive position) of each accessory can be accurately grasped. it can.

  The operation scenario flag 223f is a flag that indicates which of the operation scenarios corresponding to the staging operation of each accessory specified in the operation scenario table 222b is set. The operation scenario flag 223f is composed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and the type of the operation scenario is associated with each bit. For example, the 0th bit of the operation scenario flag 223f corresponds to the upper lifting unit table 222b1, and if the 0th bit is 1 (ON), the upper lifting unit table 222b1 is set as the operation scenario. If 0 (off), it means that the upper elevating unit table 222b1 is not set. Similarly, for the other bits, if the operation scenario corresponding to each bit is set, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on), and if the corresponding operation scenario is not set, the corresponding bit is set to 0. (Off).

  When the operation scenario is set based on the variation pattern command in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151) (see S2204 in FIG. 151), the bit corresponding to the scenario is 1 (see FIG. 151). ON). In addition, every time the variation effect in which the operation scenario is set ends, the bit corresponding to the set scenario is set to 0 (off). With the operation scenario flag 223f, the type of the operation scenario currently set can be easily determined.

  The operation pointer 223g is a pointer used to identify the progress of the set operation scenario. As described above, in each data table constituting the operation scenario table 222b, the value of the operation pointer 223g and the operation content to be set (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction) are defined in association with each other. In this control example, the operation of the setting content of 1 is set to the drive motor, and when the operation according to the setting content is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223g is updated.

  The operation pointer 223g can separately update the pointer value for each set operation scenario. That is, the operation pointer 223g is a general term for different pointers provided for each operation scenario. The value of each pointer constituting the operation pointer 223g is set to "01H" when a corresponding operation scenario is newly set. Thereafter, each time the operation content corresponding to the pointer value is completed, the pointer value is updated (see S2612 in FIG. 155 and S2706 in FIG. 156), and the operation content corresponding to the updated pointer value is set. Further, when the variable effect in which the corresponding operation scenario is set ends, the pointer value is reset to “00H”. By using the operation pointer 223g, the set operation scenario can be accurately grasped.

  The home position return flag 223i indicates that the home position return operation (operation for returning an accessory shifted from the home position to the home position) that is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on is being executed. It is a flag indicating whether or not. If the home return flag 223i is on, it indicates that the home return operation is being performed, and if it is off, it indicates that the home return operation is not being performed. The origin return flag 223i is turned on when the origin return operation is set in the origin return process (see FIG. 144) (see S1505 in FIG. 144). On the other hand, in the home position return operation, when it is determined that all of the accessories have returned to the home position, they are set to off (see S2605 in FIG. 155). By using the origin return flag 223i, it can be easily determined whether or not the origin return operation is being performed.

  The in-initial-operation flag 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the initial operation is being performed to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally after the origin return operation is completed. . If the initial operation in-progress flag 223j is on, it indicates that the initial operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the initial operation is not being executed. The flag 223j during the initial operation is set when it is determined that all the accessories are located at the origin position when the power is turned on (S1507 in FIG. 144), or after the origin return operation executed after the power is turned on ends. It is set to on (see S2605 in FIG. 155), and is set to off when all the operations specified in the initial operation table 222b7 are completed (see S2709 in FIG. 156). By using the initial operation flag 223j, it can be easily determined whether or not the initial operation is being executed.

  The hit position storage area 223k is a storage area for storing the type of each of the pockets P1 to P30 of the rotating member 640 (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket) in the “rendition mode suggestion effect”. In the present control example, the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 is set with reference to the hit position storage area 223k. That is, the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, and the lighting area arranged on the back side of the missing pocket is set to a light-off state. When the ball B is dropped from the holding piece 677 to any of the pockets, the type of each pocket stored in the hit position storage area 223k is compared with the pocket arranged at the drop position, and the ball B is dropped. Is determined to be able to be dropped into the pocket next to the pocket arranged at the drop position.

  Details of the hit pocket storage area 223k will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 122, the storage area corresponding to each pocket is provided in the hit pocket storage area 223k. Can be stored. One bit is allocated to the storage area corresponding to each pocket, and when each bit is H (1), it means that the corresponding pocket is a hit pocket. , Meaning that the corresponding pocket is a detached pocket.

  Here, as described above, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined at the start of the roulette chance production (in the “rensou mode suggesting production” in the “preparation mode”, the special symbol is randomly selected and drawn. In the case of a big hit), the ball B is allowed to drop to any of the hit pockets, and the drop of the ball B to the missing pocket is restricted. On the other hand, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is not determined at the start of the roulette chance production (when all the special symbol lottery executed up to the start of the production is lost), the ball is placed in any of the pockets. B is allowed to fall, and falling of the ball B into the hit pocket is regulated. In the present control example, when the condition for dropping the ball B is satisfied (when the period of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes 1 second or less), the type of each pocket is determined with reference to the hit position storage area 223k. Then, it is determined whether or not the pocket arranged to the drop position next to the pocket currently arranged at the drop position is a pocket in which the ball B is allowed to fall in the present roulette chance effect. If the next pocket is a pocket that is allowed to fall, control is performed so that the ball B falls into that pocket. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from dropping into a pocket different from the pocket of the target type, so that the player determines whether or not the ball B has shifted to the “rensou mode”. An accurate notification can be given according to the type of the dropped pocket.

  FIG. 122 shows that when the pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30 are set as hit pockets, and the remaining pockets are set as missing pockets, they are stored in the hit position storage area 223k. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing data of the present invention. In this case, as shown in FIG. 122, H (1) indicating the hit pocket is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30, and the other pockets are stored. Is stored in the storage area corresponding to.

  The lighting position storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 (a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% or a light-off state with a lighting rate of 0%). The lighting of each LED of the rear LED 625 is controlled according to the information stored in the lighting position storage area 223m.

  Details of the lighting position storage area 223m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the lighting position storage area 223m. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), this lighting position storage area 223m is composed of a first storage area 223m1 to a third storage area 223m3 indicating respective lighting positions of the three LED bars 625a to 625c constituting the rear LED 625. It consists of two storage areas.

  The first storage area 223m1 is a storage area for storing the state of each lighting area A1 to A6 of the LED bar 625a. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), H (1) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area with the lighting rate of 100% among the lighting areas A1 to A6, and the storage corresponding to the lighting area in the unlit state. L (0) is stored in the area. In the example of FIG. 123 (b), H (1) indicating a lighting state at a lighting rate of 100% is set in the storage areas corresponding to the lighting areas A3 to A5. On the other hand, in the storage areas corresponding to the lighting areas A1, A2, and A6, L (0) indicating a light-off state with a lighting rate of 0% is set.

  The second storage area 223m2 corresponding to the LED bar 625b and the third storage area 223m3 corresponding to the LED bar 625c have the same configuration as the first storage area 223m1. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 123 (c) and (d), data (H or L) corresponding to the lighting state of the lighting areas A7 to A12 is set in the second storage area 223m2. A storage area is provided, and a storage area for setting data (H or L) corresponding to the lighting state of the lighting areas A13 to A18 is provided in the third storage area 223m3.

  These three storage areas are sequentially updated according to the arrangement of the hit pockets, and the state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is controlled according to the information stored in each storage area, so that only the hit pocket has a shining appearance. can do. As described above, since the rotating member 640 can make only 18/30 rotations while the rear LED 625 makes one rotation, the type of each pocket and the type of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket are determined by the rotation operation. Will shift depending on the progress of the game. Therefore, in the present control example, the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is corrected every time the rear LED makes 1/3 turn (that is, in units of one LED bar), and the hit pocket is always set. It is controlled so that it looks shiny. That is, each time the rear LED makes a 1/3 turn, the information of the storage area corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) is corrected in accordance with the displacement caused by the rotation operation. ing. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (appearance in which the hit pocket shines and the missing pocket becomes dark). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from erroneously recognizing the winning pocket and the missing pocket.

  Returning to FIG. 118 (b), the description will be continued. The probable change state flag 223n is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state. If the probable change state flag 223n is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probable change state, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not the probable change state. The probable change state flag 223n is updated in response to a state command output to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the game state is changed in the main control device 110. That is, when the certain symbol is notified of the certain symbol state by the state command, the certain symbol state flag 223n is set to ON (updated). 223n is set to off (updated) (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The time-saving state flag 223o is a flag that indicates whether or not the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol that continues until the next big hit (that is, the “rensou mode”). If the time saving state flag 223o is on, it indicates that it is in the "rensou mode", and if it is off, it is not in the "rensou mode" (that is, it is in the "normal mode" or "preparation mode"). Is shown. The time saving state flag 223o is updated in response to a state command output to the sound ramp control device 113 each time the game state is changed in the main control device 110, similarly to the probability change state flag 223n. That is, when the “long-run mode” is notified by the state command, the time-saving state flag 223o is set (updated) to ON, and when the “normal mode” or the “prepare mode” is notified, The time-saving state flag 223o is set to off (updated) (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The time reduction state counter 223p is a counter for counting the number of remaining time reductions in the “prepare mode”. If the value of the time reduction counter is 1 or more, it indicates that the "preparation mode" (that is, the normal symbol time reduction state) is continued until the number of times corresponding to the counter value and the special symbol lottery are executed. On the other hand, if the counter value is 0, it indicates that the mode is not the “prepare mode”. The time-saving state counter 223p, like the probable change state flag 223n and the time-saving state flag 223o, responds to a state command output to the sound ramp control device 113 every time the game state is changed in the main control device 110. Be updated. That is, when the number of times (one or seven times) of the “prepare mode” is notified by the status command, the value of the time-saving state counter 223p is updated to 1 or 7 according to the notified number. . On the other hand, when the “normal mode” or the “rensou mode” is notified by the state command, the value of the time saving state counter 223p is set (updated) to 0 (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The hit state storage area 223q is a storage area in which information indicating the current period during the big hit is stored, and has the same configuration as the state storage area 203k of the main control device 110. That is, during the jackpot opening period, “01H” is stored in the winning state storage area 223q, “02H” is stored in the first round, “03H” is stored in the second round, and “03H” is stored in the ending period. 04H "is stored. On the other hand, in a state other than the big hit state, “00H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q. The time reduction state counter 223p is updated according to a state command output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The operable type storage area 223r is information indicating whether or not it is permitted to operate each accessory in the initial operation when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Is a storage area in which is stored. The operable type storage area 223r is composed of, for example, one byte, and each character of the pachinko machine 10 (the upper elevating unit 300, the left swing unit 500, etc.) is associated with each bit of one byte. I have. When 0 is stored in each bit (set to H), the operation of the accessory corresponding to the bit is restricted (the origin return operation or the initial The operation cannot be executed), and when 1 is stored (set to L), it means that the operation of the accessory corresponding to the bit is permitted.

  Note that the state in which the operation of the accessory (return-to-origin operation or initial operation) is restricted is, for example, when the power is cut off during a big hit in which the opening pattern A is set for the first variable winning device 82a. It is. As described above, when the opening pattern A is set, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are connected to the first variable winning device 82a. The ball that wins the game can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. For this reason, if the home position return operation and the initial operation are performed on all the characters regardless of the state at the time of power-off, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 are connected at the time of power-off. Even in such a case, the connection is released by the home return operation or the initial operation. Therefore, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is instantaneously shut off in a state where the ball has entered the first passage forming member 520 and the power is immediately restored, the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520. During this time, the home position return operation or the initial operation is started, and the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 may be released. That is, the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 may enter the back side of the pachinko machine 10 without entering the second passage forming member 422. As a result, there is a possibility that a problem such as a short circuit of a wiring or a circuit may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the configuration is such that the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of power-on can be accurately grasped even at the sound lamp control device 113 side by the status command output from the main control device 110 at the time of power-on. When the gaming state grasped from the state command is in the middle of the jackpot set in the opening pattern A, the gaming state corresponds to the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 in the operable type storage area 223r. A 1 is stored in the bit, which means that the operation is restricted (set to L). Therefore, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off in a state where the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected, it is prevented (suppressed) that the connection is released when the power is restored. be able to. Therefore, even if the power is restored while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, the ball can reliably flow down from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited.

  The correction position counter 223 s is used to rewrite the data in the lighting position storage area 223 m in order to correct the deviation of the correspondence between the state of the lighting area provided in the rear LED 625 and the pocket of the rotating member 640. This is a counter indicating whether data stored in (first storage area 223m1 to third storage area 223m3) should be rewritten. As described above, the rotating member 640 is provided with 30 pockets P1 to P30. On the other hand, 18 lighting areas A1 to A18 are provided for lighting or extinguishing each pocket. Further, in order to operate the pocket arranged in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) by following the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket (that is, visible to the player), the rotating member 640 is provided. The rear LED 625 is configured to rotate at the same rotational speed. For this reason, since the rotating member 640 has only 18/30 rotations while the back LED 625 makes one rotation, the correspondence between the pocket and the lighting area is shifted every time the rotating member 640 enters the second section S2. Therefore, in this control example, when any one of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) in which the player cannot see (difficult), each of the LED bars constituting the LED bar 625a to 625c is arranged. By switching the state of the lighting area, the shift of the correspondence between the pocket and the lighting area is corrected. When the correction is performed, the type of the LED bar 625 to be corrected is specified from the value of the correction position counter 223s. Accordingly, no matter how much the rear LED 625 performs the rotation operation, the correspondence between the type of each pocket in the first section visible to the player and the lighting state of the lighting area arranged on the back side of each pocket. Can be immobilized. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the position of the hit pocket from the appearance of each pocket.

  The correction position counter 223s is configured as a loop counter that counts up by one in a range of “0” to “2” and returns to “0” when the value is updated in a state of “2”. If the value of the correction position counter 223s is “0”, it indicates that correction is performed for each of the lighting areas A1 to A6 configuring the LED bar 625a, and if the value is “1”, the LED bar 625b is configured. When the value is “2”, it indicates that the correction is performed on the lighting regions A13 to A18 constituting the LED bar 625c. The correction position counter 223s is updated one by one in the lighting setting processing for setting and correcting the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 (see S2912 in FIG. 158).

  The first set flag 223t indicates that the first lighting areas A1 to A18 have been turned on since the rotating member 640 (and the rear LED 625) configured to imitate a roulette has started a rotating operation in the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. This flag indicates whether the setting of the status has been executed. If the initial setting completed flag 223t is on, it means that the setting of the first lighting state has been executed after the start of the rotation operation, and if it is off, the setting of the first lighting state has not been executed. Means that. During the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625, the initial setting completed flag 223t is referred to. When the initial setting completed flag 223t is turned off, all the lights are turned on when the rotation of the rear LED 625 becomes the origin position. The lighting state of the areas A1 to A18 is set. On the other hand, when the first-time setting completed flag 223t is on, it means that the setting of the first lighting state has already been performed, so the rear LED 625 makes 1/3 turn, and the arrangement of any one of the LED bars is corrected. The lighting state of the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA is corrected each time the area matches the section RA. This first-set flag 223t is detected after the start of the “rensou-mode suggestion effect” by first detecting that the rear LED 625 has been located at the origin position (the output of the origin sensor has become H), and the respective lighting areas When the lighting state of A1 to A18 is set, it is set to ON (see S2908 in FIG. 158). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the “representative mode suggestion effect”.

  The rotation position storage area 223u is a storage area for storing the current arrangement of the rotation member 640. In the rotation position storage area 223u, during the rotation of the rotation member 640, every time when it is detected that any of the pockets is arranged at the drop position based on the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684. , Information corresponding to the pocket arranged at the drop position is stored (S2803 in FIG. 157). Based on the information stored in the rotation position storage area 223u, the current arrangement of the rotation member 640 can be specified while the rotation member 640 is rotating.

  The swing non-detection flag 223v is a flag indicating whether the ball B has been detected at least once by the ball detection sensor 679 after the swing effect has started. If the swing non-detection flag 223v is on, it means that the ball B has not been detected by the ball detection sensor 679 at least once. On the other hand, if the swing non-detection flag 223v is off, it means that the ball B has been detected at least once by the ball detection sensor 679 during the execution of the swing effect.

  As described above, in the present control example, the period (amplitude) of the swing operation of the ball B is determined based on the time interval at which the ball detection sensor 679 detects the ball B during the execution of the swing effect. It is configured to allow the ball B to fall when it becomes shorter (the cycle becomes 1 second or less). However, when the ball B is first detected by the ball detection sensor 679, the previous detection result does not exist, and the time interval cannot be calculated. Therefore, in the present control example, the swing non-detection flag 223v is provided, and whether the passage of the ball B has already been detected at least once by the ball detection sensor 679 (whether or not the cycle can be determined from the previous detection result) is determined. And the cycle of the swinging motion of the ball B is determined only when the ball detection sensor 679 is off. Thereby, it is possible to more accurately determine the period of the swing operation of the ball B.

  The swing non-detection flag 223v is set to ON based on the fact that the ball B has been thrown by the throwing operation of the throwing device 650 during execution of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” (see S3507 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, it is set to off based on the detection of passage of the ball B by the ball detection sensor 679 while the swing non-detection flag 223v is on (see S1704 in FIG. 146).

  The swing timer 223w is used to measure a time interval at which the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679 when the ball B performs a swing operation on the holding piece 677. The initial value of the swing timer 223w is set to 0, and the value is incremented by one each time a swing effect process for executing various settings during the swing effect is performed (see S1707 in FIG. 146). . This swing effect process (see FIG. 146) is a process executed every one millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, so that the swing timer 223w Is also updated in 1 millisecond units. On the other hand, the value is reset each time the passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679 (that is, the output of the ball detection sensor 679 becomes H) (see S1704 and S1710 in FIG. 146). The cycle (amplitude) of the swing operation is determined by the swing timer 223w, and the ball B is dropped by dropping the ball B after the cycle becomes sufficiently small (after the cycle becomes 1 second or less). It can make you feel as if you are falling. Therefore, it is possible to make it harder to doubt that the swinging motion of the ball B is being controlled, so that the player can more enjoy the swinging motion of the ball B.

  The designated pocket storage area 223x includes a winning symbol in the “normal mode” (see FIG. 91 (a)), a “preparation mode” notification symbol in the big hit (see FIG. 92 (b)), and a winning pocket position (FIG. 95 (b)) is a storage area for storing information corresponding to a lucky number (hit pocket) used as the lucky number. In accordance with the information stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x, it is used for displaying a lucky number in the "normal mode" (see Ds2 in FIG. 90 (a)) and controlling lighting of the hit pocket. Note that the player can select five types of lucky numbers.

  Here, the lucky number can be selected by the player from the displayed game menu screen by, for example, pressing the frame button 22 when the change is stopped. Specifically, one of the items on the game menu screen is provided with a lucky number selection. Then, on the lucky number selection screen, five numbers can be selected from the 30 types of numbers shown in each pocket (divided member DV). In the designated pocket storage area 223x, information corresponding to the five types of numbers selected on the lucky number selection screen is stored.

  Based on the storage contents of the designated pocket storage area 223x, when displaying the special symbol lottery result in the “normal mode” on each of the display units 331a to 331d of the rendering unit 331, it is stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x. The display content is determined according to the lucky number. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, four kinds of lucky numbers are selected from among the five kinds of lucky numbers and are controlled so as to be displayed one by one on the display units 331a to 331d (FIG. 163). S3408). On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, control is performed so that an off-number other than the lucky number is displayed on at least one of the display units 331a to 331d (see S3407 in FIG. 163).

  If the jackpot type shifts to the “preparation mode” after the jackpot, one lucky number that is not displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d at the time of the jackpot notification is displayed in the “preparation mode”. The number is set as a number, and is controlled so as to be displayed to the effect part a during the big hit. Furthermore, in the “rensou mode suggestion effect” which is executed when the mode is shifted to the “preparation mode”, the pocket corresponding to the lucky number selected by the player is first hit based on the storage contents of the designated pocket storage area 223x. (S3102 in FIG. 160).

  In this way, the lucky number designated (selected) by the player is the notification of the jackpot in the “normal mode”, the notification of the “preparation mode” during the jackpot, and the “rensou mode” in the Notification is commonly used for notification that is advantageous to three types of players. As a result, the pleasure of selecting a lucky number can be given to the player, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The additional counter 223av is a counter for counting the total number of winning pockets added in the “additional effect” (see FIG. 96A) executed in the normal mode. The additional counter 223av is incremented by one at the time of setting the “additional effect” (see S2312 in FIG. 152). At the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, a winning pocket is added by the winning pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) based on the count value of the adding counter 223av.

  The production timer 223bv is a timer that measures the elapsed time from the start of the “renjo mode suggested production”. The initial value of the effect timer 223bv is set to 0, and the value is incremented by one each time the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is performed during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”. (See S2007 in FIG. 149). Since the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed every millisecond, the effect timer 223bv is counted up in units of 1 millisecond. For example, if the value of the production timer 223bv is 1000, it means that one second (1000 milliseconds) has elapsed since the start of the “renjo mode suggested production”. It is determined whether or not the effect time has ended according to the value of the effect timer 223bv, and the effect mode is switched. That is, switching from the lucky number increase effect to the roulette chance effect, or switching from the roulette chance effect to the ending effect in the “rensou mode suggestion effect” (S2004, S2008: Yes in FIG. 149). For the sake of simplicity, in the following description, the lucky number increase effect is simply referred to as “increase effect”.

  The increasing effect flag 223cv is a flag indicating whether the increasing effect is being executed. If the increasing effect flag 223cv is on, it indicates that the increasing effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the increasing effect is not being executed. The flag 223cv during the increase effect is notified of the transition to the “prepare mode” in the status command output from the main control device 110 after the end of the jackpot (1 or 7 is set to the value of the time reduction status counter by the status command). Is set to ON (see S3006 in FIG. 159). On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is a value indicating the end timing of the increased effect (start of the roulette chance effect) (that is, a counter value indicating 20 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestive effect”). It is set to off when it is done.

  The roulette flag 223dv is a flag indicating whether a roulette chance effect is being executed. When the roulette 223dv is on, it indicates that a roulette chance effect is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that a roulette chance effect is not being executed. The roulette flag 223dv is such that the value of the staging timer 223bv is a value indicating the start (end of the increase effect) timing of the roulette chance effect (that is, a counter value indicating 20 seconds after the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”). Is set to ON when it is determined to be (see S2005 in FIG. 149). On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the production timer 223bv is a value indicating the end of the roulette chance production (start of the ending production) (that is, a counter value indicating 85 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestion production”). In this case, it is turned off (see S2009 in FIG. 149).

  The swing effect flag 223ev is a flag indicating whether the swing effect is being executed. When the swing effect flag 223ev is on, it indicates that the swing effect is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the swing effect is not being executed. The swing effect flag 223ev is a drive timing of the pitching device 650 during execution of the roulette chance effect, and is set to ON when the ball B is thrown (see s3505 in FIG. 164). In the present control example, the drive timing of the pitching device 650 is set to a time when 50 seconds have elapsed since the start of the “roulette chance effect”. On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the production timer 223bv is a value indicating the end of the roulette chance production (start of the ending production) (that is, a counter value indicating 85 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestion production”). In this case, it is turned off (see S2009 in FIG. 149).

  The ball droppable flag 223fv is a flag indicating whether or not the ball B can be dropped into any pocket when the ball B is swinging above the holding piece 677. . If the ball drop flag 223fv is on, it means that the ball B can be dropped, and if it is off, it means that the ball B is restricted from dropping. I do. In this control example, when the momentum of the ball B performing the swinging operation is weakened and the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging operation becomes equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second), the ball B can be dropped. It is determined that the state is possible, and the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to ON (see S1711 in FIG. 146). In addition, when the falling of the ball B is set, it is set to off (see S1807 in FIG. 147).

  The winning counter 223gv is a counter that counts the number of winning balls with respect to the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a in a jackpot. The value of the prize counter 223gv at the jackpot (probably variable jackpot BD, usually the jackpot A) where the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are connected. , The number of balls that have won the first variable prize device 82a is counted, and it is determined whether the number of balls has passed through the second passage forming member 422. Then, when the winning number and the discharge number match, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released. This prevents (suppresses) the disconnection during the passage of the first passage forming member 520, so that the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a can be reliably transferred to the second passage forming member 422. Can flow down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited. The winning counter 223gv has an initial value set to 0, and is incremented by one each time a large open mouth winning command notifying of winning of a ball is received (see S2413 in FIG. 153). On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning number and the discharge number match, and the release of the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set, it is initialized to 0 (S2505 in FIG. 154). reference).

  The discharge counter 223hv has a first jackpot 520 of the left swinging unit 500 and a second jackpot 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 that are connected to each other. This is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the two-passage forming member 422. The value of the discharge counter 223hv is compared with the value of the prize counter 223gv during the ending period of the jackpot. Then, when the values match, release of the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set. The initial value of the discharge counter 223hv is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the discharge of the ball is detected (the passage of the sensor member 422c is detected) (see S1902 in FIG. 148). On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning number and the discharge number match, and the release of the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set, it is initialized to 0 (S2505 in FIG. 154). reference).

  The power-off flag 223y is This is a flag used to determine whether there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is Upon receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110, The power is turned on before the power-off processing is performed (see S1619 in FIG. 145). In addition, Since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, Information in the RAM 223 is stored for a certain period of time (for example, Everything disappears after 100 milliseconds. Therefore, In the start-up process of the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 142), When the power-off flag 223y is on (1308 in FIG. 142: Yes), A certain period of time after the power-off flag 223y is set to on (for example, If the sound ramp control device 113 starts up before the elapse of 100 milliseconds, That is, This is when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, All information in RAM 223 has not been erased, Unnecessary information in the work area of the RAM 223 (or Information that is incomplete due to the disappearance of only some information). The information of the work area in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1309 in FIG. 142). This allows Not required (or Incomplete) information, Each process of the sound lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 150) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. Further, the output side of the output port 239 is connected to the third symbol display device 81, the effect part 331 of the upper elevating unit 300, and the effect part 422 a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 generates a third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit) based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. 331 and the display contents of the rendering unit 422a). The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction for the instruction pointer 231a, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead of storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), the character ROM 234 is provided. ing.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the reading speed is slow especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the reading of the instructions constituting the control program is not possible. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversification and complexity are increased by using the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). , MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal Transfer to video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, The second program storage area 234a1 for storing fixed value data for driving the rendering unit 331 and the rendering unit 422a), the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit) 422a) at least a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, it is possible to diversify and complicate the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). it can.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, And the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the staging unit 422a), so that the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. An increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) can be executed. Yes, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. Thereby, the display control device 114 can be brought into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are output from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory 234a in that, in reading data of the first page, it takes a long time from designating an address to outputting data. There is a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) in the display control device 114 is immediately performed. There is a problem that it may not be started.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM 234d is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the third symbol display device 81 and the like in the display control device 114 (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, And the control of the directing unit 422a) can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S3602 in FIG. 165) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S3601 in FIG. 165) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading out the control program from the work RAM 233 constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 draws an image and causes the drawn image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) at a predetermined timing. DSP). The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 129) transmitted from the MPU 231, which will be described later. By developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information of one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol) An image is displayed on the display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Are processed in parallel during the image display time for one frame (20 ms in this control example).

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and displays the image developed by drawing first on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit). 331 and a process to be displayed on the rendering unit 422a).

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Can be.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) is improved. Can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the character symbol 234, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. The images drawn on the rendering unit 331 and the rendering unit 422a) can be displayed.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Accordingly, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. , The display on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) can be prevented from being missed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. The power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is provided. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640a is detected. The fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) based on the fluctuating image at the time of power-on changes to a game state at the time of power-on (whether in the “normal mode”, the “preparation mode”, or the “rensou mode”). Irrespective of this, it is executed in the third symbol display device 81. The main image at power-on and the variation image at power-on are both displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a portion to be displayed according to the type of the image (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit) 331 or the rendering unit 422a), so that the processing can be speeded up. Therefore, the period from when the power is turned on to when the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are displayed can be further reduced.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3603 and S3604 in FIG. 165).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a).

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 proceeds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 125, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “○” is provided at a lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 125 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped. The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and it is detected that the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640a has entered the ball. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and (c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance 64 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 14, a description will be given of the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of back images and a range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. FIG. 126 (b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sky stage" and the back surface A corresponding to the "sky stage".

  As shown in FIG. 126, the character ROM 234 prepares an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scroll-displayed with a proper connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “city stage” or the “empty stage”, the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between the first position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 126 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, a game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage, which is frequently displayed, is displayed in the rear image area. By resident in the 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, in the resident video RAM 235. Is stored in the back image area 235c.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range from FIG. 125 (a) to (b)). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 125 (a) and (b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the resident video RAM 235 is stored. By using the image data resident in the back image area 235c, the initial position of the back B is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Shown to be possible, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 124) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably. Further, in the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b overlaps. Stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward in a smooth connection.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the effect unit 331 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-described 30 types of numbers (main symbols), which are numbers “1” to “30”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing the variable effect in the effect unit 331, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 every time, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the effect unit 331 starts the variable effect quickly. be able to. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has started a fluctuating effect after the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640a, the production unit 331. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Also, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “1” to “30”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, and a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the accessory symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the effect unit 331 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the effect part 331, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the display image of the rendering unit 331 without numbers.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses By reading out image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the received error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). This is an area for storing image data that has not been processed. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the character ROM 234, image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to image data required for subsequent image rendering, from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed and the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (along with the drive signal) ( By transmitting the image information to the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit). In 422a), a process of displaying the image for one frame is executed.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image of one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. , The image of one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the read one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Minute image can be displayed.

  Then, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and an image for one frame to display an image on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The frame buffer from which the information is read is designated by the MPU 231 by alternately switching one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Is done.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b is read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b stores the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit) with respect to one rendering to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 with time. 422a), a display data table describing display contents to be displayed, transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the display data table, and This is an area where a transfer data table that defines transfer timing is stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter uses the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b to display the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device). 81, the display of the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) are controlled. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using the 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), diversified and complicated renderings can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is based on a command from the main control device 110, and the effect form of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). One display data table is prepared for each of them, for example, a fluctuation effect, an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect.

  The fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) when receiving the display fluctuation pattern command from the audio lamp control device 113. It is a production. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state and the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  Note that, as described above, if the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect, the demonstration unit outputs “0” to the effect unit 331 as described above. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers from "" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and the rear image on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the rear image for demonstration. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the effect part 331 and the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that a game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table indicates the time during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) (20 milliseconds in the present control example). Corresponds to an address expressed as one unit, and defines in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) is defined. ing.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) where the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, four third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And a light in the image, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address. For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display one of the back surfaces A and B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either the "city stage" or the "empty stage") or a back surface different from the back surfaces A and B. Information for specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, in the case of specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the backs A and B is to be displayed by the back type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A and B as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In this control example, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81 or the like) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81 or the like) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81 or the like).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. Is the information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the image is displayed, or the information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display on the third symbol display device 81 or the like) is started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the immediately preceding variable effect stopped symbol is switched to the offset information of the variable effect stopped symbol performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  The “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 127) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 129) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f. 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a).

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d can be used, and the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331) can be used. , And the effect image to be displayed on the effect unit 422a) can be changed.

  Here, like the conventional pachinko machine, the MPU 231 is executed every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) is changed. When the program is configured to be activated, a great deal of load is imposed on the processing of starting and executing the program, which is complicated and enormous due to the diversification of the effect images, so that the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited. Therefore, there is a possibility that diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. Can be created in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start-up, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect part 331, and the effect This is because the effect to be displayed on the section 422a) is determined. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer 233d is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is stored frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be created is such that the pachinko machine 10 causes the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) to display in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. This can be realized for the first time based on the configuration for determining the effect mode.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. As described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 128). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 128 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 128, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 129) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 128, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like. 3 symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a It can be displayed on.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 125 (a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 165) executed by the MPU 231 (see S3605 in FIG. 165). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. , Is set to off (see S5205 in FIG. 176 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3901 in FIG. 167 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 167 (b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 167 (b) of S3909) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 168 to 172) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 173 to 175) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S5101 in FIG. 176 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 176 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 177) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, or the like) in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. And a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to a presentation mode to be displayed on the presentation section 422a). The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113. Then, a display data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 129) described below, which describes the contents of an instruction to draw an image, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). .

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 129) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 129) that describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect portion 331, and the effect portion 422a). Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 167 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S4805 in FIG. 167 (b)) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one (see S5001 in FIG. 175).

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 129), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an effect to be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) is provided. Can be changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite based on the transfer data table is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect portion 331, and the effect portion 422a). Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. This drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. , Symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,. For each sprite such as an error pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is an effect of an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. It is a counter that counts time. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data indicates that the effect time is the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) (20 milliseconds in the present control example). Divided by.

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 167 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4807 in FIG. 173). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5402 in FIG. 178).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information that has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and, together with the drive signal, displays the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display). By transferring the image information to the device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), the image information is transferred to the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). A display process for displaying an image is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see S3906 in FIG. 167 (b)) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b is read out and sent to the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). It is a flag. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S4601 in FIG. 172 (a)). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 177), and is turned off when the rear image change process is executed (see S5310 in FIG. 177). As a result, a rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the back type corresponding to the ON bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON in the rear image determination flag 233x (see FIG. 172 (a)). )) S4602). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With the back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it indicates that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it indicates that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 173) (see S4821 in FIG. 173), and the demo display data table other than the demonstration display data table is set. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S4106 in FIG. 169 (a), S4305 in FIG. 170 (a), S4405 in FIG. 170 (b), FIG. 171 of S4506). With the demonstration display flag 233y, it can be easily determined whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect is an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped (determined) for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. When the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and when it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 173) (S4814 in FIG. 173), and other than the confirmed display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S4106 in FIG. 169 (a), S4305 in FIG. 170 (a), S4405 in FIG. 170 (b), FIG. 171 of S4506). With the final display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether the final display effect is currently being produced.

<Control processing of main controller in first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 130 to 141. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up processing started upon power-on and a main processing executed after the start-up processing, and is started periodically (at an interval of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The processing and the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (999 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 999, 999, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). The details of the special symbol change process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the special symbol change process (S104), a start winning process (S105) associated with the passage of the ball at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a is executed. Details of the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134.

  After the start winning process (S105), a normal symbol variation process for performing a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106). The details of the ordinary symbol change process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the normal symbol variation process is executed, a through gate passage process (S107) for performing a process associated with the passage of a ball in the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is executed. The details of the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the execution of the through gate passage process (S107), a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, referring to FIG. 131, a special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variable display of symbols and the like performed in the effect display units 331a to 331d.

  In the special symbol change process (FIG. 131, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot game is currently being played (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the effect display units 331a to 331d are displaying a jackpot of the first special symbol (including a special symbol jackpot game). , During the predetermined time after the end of the first special symbol jackpot game. If it is determined that the present is the first special symbol big hit (S201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being changed and displayed (S202).

  If it is determined in the process of S202 that the first special symbol is not being fluctuated and displayed (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) is obtained (S202). S203), it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c ( S205), a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the subtraction is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 139) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S208). The special symbol 1 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S209: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S210), and this processing ends.

  In the processing of S209, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed (S209: Yes), the symbols for stopping the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are stopped. Is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol 1 change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined in accordance with the value of the first random number counter C1. The jackpot type (see FIGS. 107 and 108) is determined.

  After the processing in S211 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process is started. ) Is a special symbol jackpot (S212). If the current lottery result is the first special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the probability change flag 203f and the time reduction flag 203g are set to off, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is initialized to 0 (S213). Then, the start of the special symbol big hit is set (S214), and the process proceeds to S218. When the start of the jackpot of the first special symbol is set by the process of S214, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (refer to FIG. 139) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes to open the opening command. Is set. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  In the processing of S212, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S215). If it is larger (S215: Yes), the value of the during-hours counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S216), a state command for notifying the value of the during-hours counter 203h after the subtraction is set (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. I do. The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output as a voice in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 139) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the state command, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the values of the probability change state flag 223n, the time reduction state flag 223o, the time reduction state counter 223p, and the hit state storage area 223q according to the gaming state notified by the state command. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, when it is determined that the value of the during-hours counter 203h is 0 (S215: No), the processes of S216 and S217 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and thereafter, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the special symbol 1 change start process (S208 in FIG. 132) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 change start process (S208). This special symbol 1 change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol 1 change process (see FIG. 131) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and includes the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of (1), a lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is carried out (whether or not), and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol are displayed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed on the display device 81.

  In the special symbol 1 change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. Is acquired (S301).

  Next, with reference to the state of the probability change flag 203f, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is performing the probability change of the special symbol (S302). In the processing of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is performing the certainty change of the special symbol (that is, the certainty change flag 203f is ON) (S302: Yes), the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301. And a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of and the first random number table 202a for a high probability (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 41 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, 41 random numbers of “500 to 540” are set as the random numbers of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these wins. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probability change (that is, the probability change flag 203f is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not the first special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). . Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 40 random number values stored in the first large random number table 202a for low probability. As described above, 40 random numbers “0 to 39” are set as the random numbers to be the big hit of the first special symbol, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the random numbers to be hit by these are set. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), The current big hit type is specified based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special type 1 hit type selection table 202b1, and the special type big hit of eight types is obtained. It is determined what the jackpot type is among (probably variable jackpot A to probability jackpot G, normal jackpot A). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 4”, it is determined that the probability is big hit A (2R certain big hit), and if it is in the range of “5 to 84”, If it is determined to be the probability variable jackpot B (2R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of "85 to 274", it is determined to be the probability variable jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of "275 to 774", If it is determined to be the probability variable jackpot D (2R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of “775 to 804”, it is determined to be the probability variable jackpot E (2R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of “805 to 874”, If it is determined to be the probability variable jackpot F (2R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of “875 to 974”, it is determined to be the probability variable jackpot G (2R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of “975 to 999”, Usually jackpot It determines that (2R Normal jackpot) (see FIG. 107).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changed according to the determined jackpot type (any one of the probability jackpot A to the probability jackpot G and the normal jackpot A). Is set. In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (probably variable jackpot A to positive jackpot G, normal jackpot A) is set as the stop type.

  Next, state setting information corresponding to the specified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e (S307), and the value of the read state setting information is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (S308). Thereafter, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S309), and the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S310). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S310, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the time until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 110B), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. (Fluctuation time) is determined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery of the special symbol 1 is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the out is set (S311). In the process of S311, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set to a display mode corresponding to the deviated symbol, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The stop type to be displayed in the rendering unit 331 is set based on the value of.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the certain state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S312). Here, the display time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the effect symbol 331 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S310, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d, and the variation pattern ( Fluctuating time).

  When the processing of S310 or the processing of S312 ends, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S310 or S312 is set (S313). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S309 or S311 is set (S314). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 139). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114 (S315). When the process of S315 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol 1 changing process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and determines whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640a. This is a process for executing a holding process of the values indicated by the various random number counters when there is a start winning prize, and a prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203c is 4 If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N) of the ball counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 139) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  After the processing of S406, the value of the prefetch certainty changing flag 203m and the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 are stored. (S407), the winning / non-successful lottery of the special symbol, the stop type, and the variation pattern are predicted (read ahead) (S407), and the winning information command including the predicted lottery, the stop type, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is set (S407). S408). Next, in the processing of S408, it is determined whether or not the lottery of the special symbol predicted (look-ahead) is a probability change jackpot (S409). : Yes), the prefetch certainty changing flag 203m is set to ON (S410), and the process proceeds to S413.

  On the other hand, in the process of S409, if the predicted success or failure of the lottery of the special symbol is not the probability change jackpot (S409: No), then it is determined whether the predicted success or failure of the lottery of the special symbol is the normal big hit (S411). If the predicted success or failure of the special symbol lottery is a normal jackpot (S411: Yes), the prefetching certainty changing flag 203m is set to OFF (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. Further, in the process of S411, when the predicted success or failure of the lottery of the special symbol is not usually a big hit (S411: No), the process of S412 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S413.

  In the process of S413, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (started winning) the second entrance 640a (S413). If there is no winning in the second entrance 640a (S413: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second entrance 640a (S413: Yes), the sound lamp control device 113 is notified of the detection of the winning (entering) in the second entrance 640a. The special figure 2 winning command is set (S414). The special figure 2 winning command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the special figure 2 winning command during the execution of the increase effect (lucky number increase effect), the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to increase the lucky number (hit pocket).

  When the process of S414 is completed, then, a special symbol 2 winning process for executing a lottery of the special symbol 2 based on various counter values (random number values) acquired based on the winning start to the second entrance 640a. Is executed (S415), and this process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The details of the special symbol 2 winning process (S415) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 winning process (S415). As described above, the special symbol 2 winning process (S415 in FIG. 134) is based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area upon detection of the start winning to the second entrance 640a. A process of performing a lottery (judgement of success or failure) of “big hit” or “missing special symbol” and determining an effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the effect unit 331. It is.

  In the special symbol 2 winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is changing (S501). If it is determined that the current display mode is changing (S501: Yes), this process is directly performed. finish. On the other hand, if the current display mode is not fluctuating (S501: No), the value (N) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203c is acquired (S502), and it is determined whether the value is 0 (S503). ). When it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S503: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203c is 0 (S503: Yes), each counter (first random number counter C1, first random counter C2, and stop) is stopped. The value of the type selection counter C3) is stored in the common execution area (S504). Next, with reference to the state of the probability change flag 203f, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is performing a certainty change of the special symbol (S505). If it is determined that there is (S505: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S504 and the first random number table 202a for high probability. The result of the lottery is obtained (S506). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 41 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, 41 random numbers of “500 to 540” are set as the random number value which is the big hit of the second special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value of these are set. Is determined to be a big hit of the second special symbol. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S508.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S505, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probability change (that is, the probability change flag 203f is off) (S505: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S504 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S507). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 40 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As described above, 40 random numbers of "0 to 39" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these wins. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S508.

  In the processing of S508, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 2 acquired by the processing of S506 or S507 is a special symbol jackpot (S508), and if it is determined that the special symbol 2 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S508) S508: Yes), the current jackpot type (see FIG. 108) is specified based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S504, and the state setting information corresponding to the specified jackpot type is determined as a game. It is read from the result setting table 202e (S509).

  Next, the value of the read state setting information is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (S510). Thereafter, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S511), and the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S512). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S512, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the time until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 110B), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. (Fluctuation time) is determined.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determined in the processing of S512 is a probability variable jackpot (S513). If the determined jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (S513: Yes), the prefetching certainty variable flag 203m is set to ON. (S514), and the process proceeds to S518. On the other hand, if the determined jackpot is not a probability changing jackpot (S513: No), the prefetching certainty changing flag 203m is set to off (S515), and the process proceeds to S518.

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of the way (S508: No), the display mode at the time of being out of place is set (S516). In the process of S516, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the rendering section is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the common execution area. At 331, the type of stop to be displayed is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S517). Here, the display time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the effect symbol 331 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S512, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d, and the variation pattern ( Fluctuating time).

  When the process of S517 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S512 or S517 is set (S518). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S511 or S516 is set (S519). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 139). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. Upon completion of the process in S519, the process returns to the start winning process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and is performed by the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) to display the variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol), This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the control for opening and closing the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is performed during the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S602), and the normal symbol is determined. Is determined not to be in the variable display mode (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of variable display suspended in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S608). In the process of S608, if the time-saving flag 203g of the RAM 203 is ON or the value of the medium-time-time counter 203h is 1 or more, it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is set.

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time is in a state of a normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the rendering unit 331 display a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game) and a special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the second random number table 202c for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239". It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 110 (a)).

  In the processing of S608, when it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is not present (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 is Based on the probability random second hit random number table 202c, a lottery result is obtained as to whether or not a normal symbol has been won (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is "5", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. Is determined (see FIG. 110A).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “と し て” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (S614), and it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (the time reduction flag 203g is ON or the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more). In this case (S614: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617.

  In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory 640b attached to 640a is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S614, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol) (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is set. At 0.2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to one (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the processing shifts to S619.

  In the processing of S619, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (S619), and the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (the time reduction flag 203g is ON or the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more). If it is determined (S619: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S619, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol) (S619: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds. Is set (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability. Since the release period of the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is very long, "0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times,” a ball enters the second entrance 640a. It is easy to do.

  In the processing of S602, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S602: Yes), the variable time of the ordinary symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S622). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83 (not shown).

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that has been fluctuation displayed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). . In the process of S623, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) displays the symbol as the ordinary symbol (the second symbol). ○ ”is set so that the symbol is stopped (lit). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of the departure is set by the processing of S618, the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) displays the normal symbol (the second symbol) as "a normal symbol (second symbol)". The symbol "x" is set so as to be stopped (lit). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is set to the second symbol in the display mode set by the processes of S613 and S618. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the two symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S624). If it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S624: Yes), the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is set (S625). When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 139) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the processing of S625 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 130), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is to acquire and hold the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S703). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 138, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when power is turned on to the main control device 110. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 138), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S914 in this case.

  In the process of S905, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907). : No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed-up data has been destroyed. In such a case, the process also proceeds to S914. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S914). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which the payout control of the game ball can be started. . After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S915, S916).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S915, S916) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S915, S916) is performed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, S907: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S910, the values of the probability change flag 203f, the time reduction flag 203g, the medium time reduction counter 203h, and the state storage area 203k are read (S910), and the read probability change flag 203f, the time reduction flag 203g, the medium time reduction counter 203h, and the state storage area 203k are read. A status command is set based on each value of (S911). The status command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. By receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of power-on (whether the special symbol is in a certain state of change, whether a big hit is in progress, or the like). Thereby, it is possible to specify the type of the accessory that can be operated in the home position return operation or the initial operation, and to execute an effect corresponding to the state.

  When the process of S911 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (S912), and interruption is permitted (S912). S913), and proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripherals). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is prize detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130). Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command to hold the number of balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 131) and the start winning process (see FIG. 133) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the ending command, and the like set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 140) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A big hit control process for opening or closing the 1 variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or the ball has won a specified number. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the round ends. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the ordinary symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display updating process, the variation pattern is obtained by the process of S310 or S312 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 132) and the process of S512 or S517 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134). Is set in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the variation display according to the variation pattern is started. In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LED 37a of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the process of S310 or S312 of the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 132) and the process of S512 or S517 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) are performed. When the fluctuating time corresponding to the set fluctuating pattern ends, the fluctuating display executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the process of S309 of the special symbol 1 fluctuating start process (see FIG. 132) is performed. Alternatively, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in the display mode set by the process of S311 and the process of S511 or the process of S516 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134). Display (lit).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 135), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 executes a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 135). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, which means that the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1009: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, until the next main processing execution timing is reached. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (255 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1008, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 137 has been executed, the process at S1012 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. In the process at the time of power-off, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that power has been turned off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 111 or voice lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the initialization process (see S901 in FIG. 138) can be performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a first variable prize are performed. This is a process for executing opening / closing control of the device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a.

  In the big hit control process, first, it is determined whether a big hit of a special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 131) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1101, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), “01H” indicating an opening period is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1102), and an opening command is set. (S1103), this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, in the audio ramp control device. It is transmitted to 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game is included. In the process of S1104, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1104: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a corresponding to the jackpot type is opened. A pattern is set (S1106). Specifically, as described above, if the jackpot type is any one of the probable jackpots B to D and the regular jackpot A, the open pattern A (0) is set as the open pattern of the first variable winning device (first large open mouth) 82a. .6 an opening pattern in which opening for 6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times) is set, and if the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpots E to G, the first variable winning device (first large opening port) 82a An opening pattern B (an opening pattern in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once) is set as an opening pattern. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is any of the probability jackpot A, the probability jackpot H to K, or the normal jackpot B, the second specific winning port (second large opening port) 65a is set for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse). Alternatively, an opening pattern in which the ball is opened (until 10 balls are won) is set.

  When the process of S1106 is completed, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1107). The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  After the processing in S1107, the state storage area 203k is updated according to the number of rounds (S1108), and this processing ends. Specifically, as described above, if the current round is one round of a big hit, “02H” is stored in the state storage area 203k, and if the round is two, “03H” is stored. The reason why the updated value is not notified to the sound ramp control device 113 is that the sound lamp control device 113 is made to grasp the number of rounds started by the round number command set in the process of S1107. This is because you can do it. Since the number of command outputs can be reduced, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when the special game state (all two rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

  In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (S1109: Yes), the ending command is set (S1110), 04H is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1111), and the present process is performed. finish. The ending command set in the process of S1110 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects an ending effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1109 that it is not the ending start timing (S1109: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the current big hit (special game state) (S1112). In the process of S1112, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S1112: Yes), the state setting table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is read (S1113) and the current jackpot is notified. At the start of the variable display, the status setting information stored in the status setting information storage area 203j is read (S1114).

  Next, from the read state setting table 202f, a combination of set values (probable change flag 203f, time reduction flag 203g, and medium time reduction counter 203h) corresponding to the state setting information is read (S1115). The time reduction flag 203g and the medium time reduction counter 203h are set (S1116). As described above, in the present control example, the state setting information selected from the game result setting table 202e is held during the big hit, and the game state is set at the end of the big hit based on the held state setting information. are doing. With this configuration, it is not necessary to set the gaming state after the big hit from the various counter values (random number values) acquired at the time of the start winning, and the state in which the various counter values are held is used as the state setting information. It can be limited to a short time until the information is stored in the state setting information storage area 202j. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, various set values (probable change flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, and medium-time-time counter 203h) relating to the game state after the end of the big hit are displayed during the fluctuation display of the symbol for notifying the big hit. Instead of being held during the subsequent jackpot (privilege gaming state), only the state setting information is held. Rather than providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various set values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the state setting information values, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

  After the processing of S1116, “00H” is stored in the state storage area 203k, which means that no big hit is occurring (S1117), and the game state after the big hit (probable change flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, medium-time counter 203h, state) The state command for notifying the storage area 203k) to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S1118), and this processing ends. The status command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the state command, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the values of the probability change state flag 223n, the time reduction state flag 223o, the time reduction state counter 223p, and the hit state storage area 223q according to the gaming state notified by the state command. I do.

  In the process of S1112, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1112: No), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second). A prize-winning process for executing control corresponding to the case where the ball has won the large opening (65a) is executed (S1119), and the present process ends. Details of the winning process (S1119) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1119). In this winning processing (S1119 in FIG. 141), first, it is determined whether or not a round is valid (S1201). The round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, an opening pattern is set for the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. This is a collective term for the period of time and the interval period (3 seconds) after the end of the round. In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the current time is outside the round validity period (S1201: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the validity period (S1201: Yes), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a is set. It is determined whether or not a prize has been detected (S1202). If it is determined that a prize has been detected (S1202: Yes), the winning number counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1203). A large opening winning command for notifying the device 113 is set (S1204), and the process shifts to S1205. The status command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 can determine the winning number of balls based on the received large open mouth winning command.

  In addition, at the jackpot where the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are connected (probably variable jackpots B to D, usually large jackpot A), this large opening is performed. The number of balls winning the first variable winning device 82a is counted based on the winning number (the value of the winning counter 223gv) grasped based on the winning command, and the ball is discharged through the second passage forming member 422. A match with the number of spheres is determined. Then, when the winning number and the discharge number match, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released. This prevents (suppresses) the disconnection during the passage of the first passage forming member 520, so that the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a can be reliably transferred to the second passage forming member 422. Can flow down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited.

  In the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the winning in the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a is not detected (S1202: No), the process of S1203 and S1204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1205. In the processing of S1205, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203i is 10 or more (S1205). If the value is 10 or more (S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to S1207. On the other hand, in the processing of S1205, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203i is less than 10 (S1205: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1206). Here, the round time means the end time of the opening pattern set in the first variable winning device 82a or the opening time (30 seconds) set in the second specific winning opening 65a.

  In the processing of S1206, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1206: No), it means that the condition for ending the round is not satisfied, and thus this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1206, when it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1206: Yes), the process proceeds to S1207. The process of S1207 is performed when the upper limit number of balls has won the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a (S1205: Yes) or when the round time has elapsed ( S1206: Yes). That is, this is a case where the end condition of the round is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the end of the running round is set (S1207), the value of the winning number counter 203i is initialized to 0 (S1208), and the process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 142 to FIG. 164, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 142, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1620 (see FIG. 145). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 145, upon receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (S1617 in FIG. 145: Yes), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1620. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1620 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1302: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off processing in S1620 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1304. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1620 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308. .

  In the process of S1302, if the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1620, This is started by resetting the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304), and it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1305). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  In the processing of S1305, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set ( S1306). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  After the processing of S1306, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on (see S1619 in FIG. 145) when power-off processing (see S1620 in FIG. 145) is executed. In other words, the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145) is executed. This is a case where the power-up process is started after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145) has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the power-off flag 223y is set to off (S1310). The process moves to S1311. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  on the other hand, The process that leads to the process of S1308 with the power-off flag 223y turned off is as follows. This startup process, For example, whether the process was started after the power was completely shut down, and the process of S1304 was performed via the process of S1306 and then reached the process of S1308, Or, This is a case where only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, In such a case (S1308: No), S1309 for clearing the work area of the RAM 223; S1310, which is the process of setting the power-off flag 223y to off, is skipped, The process moves to S1311.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1309 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1304 to the process of S1308 via the process of S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S1311, an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1311), and then interruption permission is set (S1312). After that, based on the status command received from the main control device 110, a power-on state setting process for identifying the game state at power-on is executed (S1313), and the character mutated from the origin position is moved to the origin position. Is executed (S1314), and the process proceeds to the main process. Details of the closing state setting process (S1313) and the origin return process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, respectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 143, a power-on state setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing this state setting process at the time of insertion (S1313). This power-on state setting processing (S1313) is executed in the start-up processing (see FIG. 142), and as described above, is a processing for identifying the game state at power-on.

  In the power-on state setting process (S1313), first, the probable change state flag 223n, the time reduction state flag 223o, the time reduction state counter 223p, and the hitting state according to the state command output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113. The value of the status storage area 223q is updated (S1401).

  As described above, the status command notifies each value of the probability change flag 203f, the time reduction flag 203g, the time reduction counter 203h, and the status storage area 203k when the power is turned on during the startup processing of the main control device 110. (See S911 in FIG. 138). Based on this status command, in the processing of S1401, the probable change status flag 223n is updated to match the status of the probable change flag 203f, the time reduction status flag 223o is updated to match the status of the time reduction flag 203g, and The time reduction state counter 223p is updated so as to match the value of the counter 203h, and the hit state storage area 223q is updated so as to match the storage value of the state storage area 203k. As a result, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the gaming state recognized by the audio ramp control device 113 can be matched in the startup processing.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stored value of the updated hit state storage area 223q is a value indicating that a big hit is being made (S1402). Here, as described above, if “01H” is stored in the winning state storage area 223q, it indicates the opening period of the jackpot, and if “02H” is stored, one round of the round is performed. If “03H” is stored, it indicates a two-round period, and if “04H” is stored, it indicates an ending period. On the other hand, if “00H” is stored, it indicates that the present is not a big hit.

  In the process of S1402, if it is determined that the value of the hit state storage area 223q is not a value indicating that the big hit is occurring (that is, “00H” is stored) (S1402: No), the process proceeds to S1403. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hit state storage area 223q is a value indicating that the big hit is being made (that is, any one of “01H” to “04H”) (S1402: Yes), It is determined whether “04H” indicating the ending period is stored in the state storage area 223q (S1404).

  In the process of S1404, when it is determined that the current time is during the ending period (S1404: Yes), a wait period of 1.5 seconds is set (S1405), and the process proceeds to S1403. The wait period set here is set to delay execution of the home position return process (see FIG. 144). By setting the weight period, it is possible to prevent the origin return operation from being performed while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, thereby preventing the connection with the second passage forming member 422 from being released. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 does not enter the second passage forming member 422 but enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  More specifically, at the jackpot where the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected (probably variable jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A), the connection is released during the ending period, and Is driven to the origin position. Driving to the origin position is performed after confirming that the value of the prize counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv match during the ending period, and that no ball remains in the first passage forming member 520. You. However, when the power is turned off during the ending period and the power is turned on again, the RAM 223 is initialized during the startup process (see S1311 in FIG. 142), and the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv are reset. Since the value is also cleared, it becomes impossible to determine whether or not a sphere remains in the first passage forming member 520 when the power is turned on. Therefore, in the present control example, if it is determined that the power is turned off and turned on during the jackpot ending period, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are in a connected state, and Even if a sphere remains inside the first passage forming member 520, 1.5 seconds, which is a period during which the sphere in the first passage forming member 520 can sufficiently reach the second passage forming member 422, It is configured to wait for the home return operation. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the origin return operation from being performed while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, and to prevent the connection with the second passage forming member 422 from being released. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the ball does not enter the second passage forming member 422 but is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  In the processing of S1402, when it is determined that the game is not a jackpot (S1402: No), and in the processing of S1403 executed after the processing of S1405, the bit corresponding to all the characters in the operable type storage area 223r is set to the operation. The value 1 indicating possible is set (S1403), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the start-up process. By setting the value (1) indicating operable for all the characters by the process of S1403, the origin return operation and the initial operation can be performed for all the characters. Therefore, it can be confirmed whether all the accessories are in a normally operable state.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, when it is determined that the current time is not during the ending period (a value other than “04H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1404: No), It is determined whether it is during the opening period (whether “01H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1406). In the process of S1406, when it is determined that the opening period is in progress (“01H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1406: Yes), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member are determined. 422 are set to the connection positions, respectively (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408. On the other hand, if it is not during the opening period in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), the process of S1407 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1408.

  When the start-up process (see FIG. 142) is performed during the opening period, the setting of the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 to the connection position is performed by initializing the RAM 223 in the start-up process ( This is because the step counter 223e is initialized by S1311 in FIG. 142). For this reason, when the power is cut off during the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 during the opening periods of the probability change jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A, the power is turned on again. Sometimes the arrangement of each member is unknown. Therefore, in the present control example, the drive to the connection position is set again regardless of the arrangement of each member. Thus, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be reliably connected during the opening period.

  In the processing of S1408, a bit corresponding to the accessory (the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500) set at the connection position in the operable type storage area 223r is set to 0, and 1 is set to other bits. This is set (S1408), and this process ends. Accordingly, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be excluded from the target of the home position return operation and the initial operation, so that the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 at a big hit. And can be kept connected. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the sphere is passing through the first passage forming member 520. It is possible to suppress a problem that the light is ejected from the opening of the one passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  Next, the origin return process (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the origin return processing (S1314). This origin return processing (S1314) is executed in the start-up processing (see FIG. 142) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the character that is mutated from the origin position when the power is turned on is identified. This is a process for returning to the position.

  In the home position return processing, first, it is determined whether or not the current time is during the wait period (S1501). If the current time is during the wait period (S1501: Yes), the present processing ends. The weight period is set when the insertion state setting process is executed during the jackpot ending period, as described above (see S1405 in FIG. 143). This is set to prevent execution of the return operation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1501 that the current time is not during the wait period (S1501: No), the value stored in each bit of the operable type storage area 223r is read (S1502), and It is determined whether all the origin sensors of the corresponding accessory are in the H output state (S1503). If it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of at least one of the characters corresponding to the bit having the value of 1 is in the L state (S1503: No), the output corresponds to the origin sensor in the L state. An operation in the direction of the origin (origin return operation) is set for the accessory to be performed (S1504). Then, in order to indicate that the home position return operation is being performed, the home position return flag 223i is set to ON (S1505), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1503, when it is determined that all the outputs of the origin sensor of the accessory corresponding to the bit whose value in the operable type storage area 223r is 1 are H (S1503: Yes), the origin is returned. Since it is not necessary to execute the operation, the start of the initial operation is set (S1506), and the initial operation flag 223j is set to ON to indicate that the initial operation is being executed (S1507). The process ends.

  By executing the origin return processing (S1314), each accessory can be returned to the origin position, so that the subsequent initial operation can be started from the origin position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, a description will be given of a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing in S1601 was executed (S1601). If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1614 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1613. In the processing of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. The processing in S1602 to S1613 is mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S1614 and the variable display setting processing in S1615 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1614 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S1615 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1603 to S1616 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1602). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1604). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1605 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1605, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. Also, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1607 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1609, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the effect unit 331 based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is set. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1609 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the rendering unit 331.

  When the process of S1610 is completed, a swing effect process for performing control during the swing effect in which the ball B performs a swing operation above the holding piece 677 is executed (S1611). Next, a sphere that has passed through the second passage forming member 422 (discharged from the pachinko machine 10) is detected, and a discharge detection process for performing corresponding control is performed (S1612). Next, an effect setting process for controlling various effects performed during the execution of the "representative mode suggestion effect" is executed (S1613), and the process proceeds to S1614. The details of the swing effect process (S1611), the discharge detection process (S1612), and the effect setting process (S1613) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the process of S1614, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1614). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1615). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the rendering unit 331 to perform a variation effect (variation display). As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. Then, after the variable display setting process (S1615) ends, an accessory operation setting process for setting the operation of each accessory is executed (S1616). The details of the accessory operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S1616 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1617). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the process of S1617, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1617: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off process flag are set to ON (S1619), and the power is turned off. A disconnection process is performed (S1620). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1621), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1617 (S1617: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1618), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1618: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1618: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, so that the display contents on the rendering unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81 do not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the swing effect process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the swing effect processing (S1611). This swing effect process (S1611) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, various controls during execution of the swing effect are performed. Is

  In the swing effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the swing effect flag 223ev provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is on (S1701). If the swing effect flag 223ev is off (S1701: No) ), Since the swing effect is not being executed, the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1701, when it is determined that the swing effect flag 223ev is on (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the swing non-detection flag 223v is on (S1702). If the detection flag 223v is on (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the output of the ball detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103) is in the H state (S1703). That is, it is determined whether or not the ball B has passed the near side of the ball detection sensor 679 provided at the upper central portion of the holding piece 677.

  In the process of S1703, when it is determined that the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is not in the H state (that is, the output is in the L state) (S1703: No), the ball passes the front side of the ball detection sensor 679. This means that this processing has not been performed, so this processing is ended as it is, and the processing returns to the main processing. On the other hand, in the processing of S1703, when it is determined that the output of the ball detection sensor is in the H state (S1703: Yes), the ball B is first thrown by the ball detection sensor 679 after the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650. Therefore, the swing non-detection flag 223v is turned off, the swing timer 223w is reset (S1704), and the process ends. Thereby, every time the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679, the period of the swing operation can be determined from the measured value of the swing timer 223w.

  In the processing of S1702, when it is determined that the swing non-detection flag 223v is off (S1702: No), it is next determined whether the ball fallable flag 223fv is on (S1705). In the processing of S1705, when it is determined that the ball dropping flag 223fv is on (S1705: Yes), the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation performed by the ball B is sufficiently small, and the condition for dropping the ball B is set. Is established, a fall control process (S1706) for determining the arrangement of the rotating member 640 and controlling the fall of the ball B is executed, and the present process ends. The details of the drop control process (S1706) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1705, when it is determined that the ball fallable flag 223fv is off (S1705: No), 1 is added to the value of the swing timer 223w (S1707), and then the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is output. Is in the H state (S1708). In the process of S1708, when it is determined that the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is not H (that is, the output is in the state of L) (S1708: No), the ball B has not returned to the upper center of the holding piece 677. This indicates that the cycle cannot be determined, and thus this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1708 that the output of the ball detection sensor is in the H state (S1708: Yes), it is next determined whether the value of the swing timer 223w is greater than 500 (S1709). ). In the process of S1709, if the value of the swing timer 223w is 500 or less (S1709: No), the period from the time when the ball B was detected to pass by the ball detection sensor 679 last time to the time when the passage is detected again this time is determined. It means less than 500 milliseconds. In other words, it means that the swing cycle has become shorter than 1 second (500 milliseconds × 2) or less, so that the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to ON (S1711), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1709, if the value of the swing timer 223w is larger than 500 (S1709: Yes), it means that the period of the swing operation performed by the ball B is relatively long (the amplitude of the swing operation is large). However, if the ball B is dropped in this state, the ball B may have an unnatural appearance. Therefore, the value of the swing timer 223w is reset without satisfying the condition for dropping the ball B (keeping the ball fallable flag 223fv off). (S1710), and then return to the main process.

  Next, the drop control process (S1706) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the drop control process (S1706). This drop control process (S1706) is executed in the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the drop control process (S1706), first, it is determined whether or not the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all L (S1801). When it is determined that the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all L (S1801: Yes), the arrangement of each of the detection target 641c and each of the detection sensors A to F is shifted, and the rotating member Since the arrangement of 640 cannot be specified, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1801, when it is determined that at least one output of the detection sensors A to F is not L (that is, at least one output is H) (S1801: No), the detection sensors A to F Based on the output of F and the rotation position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121), the pocket located at the drop position (immediately below the holding piece 677) is specified (S1802). Next, from the hit position storage area 223k (see FIG. 122), the type of the pocket located at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket). ) Is specified (S1803). Then, the determined pocket type is compared with the success / failure of the current roulette chance (whether or not the shift to the “rensou mode” has been determined) (S1804), and it is determined whether the comparison results match (S1804). S1805).

  In the process of S1805, if the comparison results do not match (S1805: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if the comparison results match (S1805: Yes), the ball B is set to fall after 100 steps (that is, the holding piece 677 is driven to the immersion position) and set. (S1806), the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to off (S1807), and the process ends. Here, 100 steps are the number of steps in which the holding piece 677 is driven to the immersion position 0.2 seconds before reaching the next pocket. This 0.2 second is set to be substantially the same as the falling time of the ball B dropped from the holding piece 677. Thereby, the ball B can be exactly entered into the next pocket at the timing when the next pocket is arranged at the drop position.

  As described above, in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the present control example, the determination of the type of the pocket to be placed next at the drop position and the drop control of the ball B based on the determination result are performed when the pocket is moved to the drop position. It is configured to execute before being placed in That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the immersion position at a timing when the ball B can be sufficiently dropped into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the drop position). And can be driven (immersed). Therefore, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the pocket of the target type. Therefore, although the ball B does not shift to the “rensou mode”, the ball B falls into the hit pocket, and conversely, despite the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined, The ball B can be prevented (suppressed) from falling off and falling into the pocket.

  In the present control example, when it is determined that the holding piece 677 is dropped into the next pocket, the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position after the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 for 100 steps regardless of the arrangement of the ball B. But it is not limited to this. For example, the holding piece 677 may be immersed to the immersion position at a timing at which the ball B reaches the center portion of the holding piece 677 in the swinging operation. More specifically, for example, even after the pocket to be dropped is specified, the period (amplitude) of the rocking operation is determined each time the ball B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the determination is performed. The period of the swing operation is configured to be stored (updated) in the RAM 223. Then, when the value reaches 100 steps, the value of the swing timer 223w (the elapsed time since the passage of the ball B was detected by the previous ball detection sensor 679) is referred to, for example, the latest swing stored in the RAM 223. If it is determined that the value is close to the cycle of the moving operation (for example, a value equal to or more than 90% of the cycle of the latest swinging operation), the control may be performed so that the holding piece 677 is immersed as it is. On the other hand, if the value is less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 90% of the period of the latest rocking operation) with respect to the period of the latest rocking operation, the holding piece 677 is immersed after waiting for the predetermined ratio. It may be controlled so as to be immersed in the position. With such a configuration, when the ball B is rolling toward the outside direction (left end or right end direction) of the holding piece 677, or is disposed near the end (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677. In this case, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the holding piece 677 from entering the immersion position. That is, when the holding piece 677 is immersed, the ball B can be reliably dropped in the direction of the drop position without advancing in another direction. Therefore, the time from when the holding piece 677 is immersed to the immersion position to when the ball B starts to fall can be further shortened, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target pocket.

  In this control example, when it is determined that the ball B can be dropped into the pocket located at the drop position next to the pocket currently located at the drop position, the rotation operation for 100 steps is executed. After that, the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position, but is not limited to this. A range in which the ball B can be reliably dropped into the pocket at the drop position without falling into the pocket at the drop position and the pocket two adjacent to the drop position (for example, after 100 to 120 steps) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is randomly dropped every time (within the range). With this configuration, it is possible to vary the timing at which the ball B falls, so that the ball B has a more natural appearance than the case where the ball B is dropped at the same timing every time (the ball B acts only by gravity). The ball B can be dropped as if the ball B were falling.

  Next, the discharge detection processing (S1612) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 148. This discharge detection processing (S1612) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and has passed through the second passage forming member 422 (the pachinko machine) as described above. This is a process for detecting a ball (discharged from 10) and performing a corresponding control.

  In the discharge detection process (see FIG. 148), first, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected in the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 (S1901). If no ball has been detected (S1901: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1901 that a ball has been detected to enter the second passage forming member 422 (S1901: Yes), the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a passes through the first passage forming member 520. Since it means that it has reached the second passage forming member 422 normally, first, 1 is added to the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S1902).

  When the processing in S1902 ends, it is then determined whether or not a discharge standby flag (not shown) is on. The discharge standby flag is a flag indicating whether or not a period (discharge standby period) is set after all rounds of the jackpot have been completed in order to discharge all the winning balls to the first variable winning device 82a. is there. In the processing of S1903, when it is determined that the discharge standby flag is off (S1903: No), it means that it is not the discharge standby period, and that it is during the jackpot round period. Is set (S1904), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1903 that the discharge standby flag is ON (S1903: Yes), the value of the prize counter 223gv is read (S1905), and the read value of the prize counter 223gv is used as the discharge counter. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of 223hv (S1906). In the processing of S1906, when the read value of the winning counter 223gv does not match the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S1906: No), this processing is ended as it is to continue the discharge waiting period.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1906 that the read value of the prize counter 223gv matches the discharge counter 223hv (S1906: Yes), all the spheres that have won the first variable prize device 82a are normally replaced with the second prize. It means that it has been discharged from the passage forming member 422. Therefore, a process for releasing the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is executed. Specifically, the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the specific ending table 222b6 is set to “01H” (S1907), and an operation command for notifying the operation content according to the value of the operation pointer 223g is set. (S1908). Then, the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv are reset to 0 (S1909), and this processing ends.

  By executing this discharge detection processing, after all the balls that have entered the first variable winning device 82a are discharged via the second passage forming member 422, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming The connection (connection) with the member 422 can be released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited.

  Next, the effect setting process (S1613) in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This effect setting process (S1613) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 145), and as described above, a process for controlling various effects performed during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestive effect”. It is.

  In the effect setting process (see FIG. 149), first, it is determined whether or not the increasing effect flag 223cv is on (S2001). If the increasing effect flag 223cv is on (S2001: Yes), 1 is set to the effect timer 223bv. Is added (S2002), and it is determined whether or not the value of the effect timer 223bv after the addition is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (lucky number increase effect) (S2003).

  In the processing of S2003, if it is determined that the effect timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: Yes), a roulette chance effect is set (S2004), and the increase effect flag 223cv is turned off. At the same time, the roulette flag 223dv is set to ON (S2005), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is not the timer value indicating the end of the increased effect (S2003: No), the processes of S2004 and S2005 are skipped, and the present process is skipped. finish.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the increasing effect flag 223cv is not on (S2001: No), it is next determined whether or not the roulette flag 223dv is on (S2006) and determined to be off. If it has been performed (S2006: No), it means that the “rensou-mode suggestive effect” is not being executed, and thus this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2006 that the roulette flag 223dv is on (S2006: Yes), it is determined that the roulette chance effect is currently being executed (see FIGS. 95 (a) and (b)). Next, 1 is added to the staging timer 223bv (S2007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the staging timer 223bv after the addition is a timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008). ).

  In the processing of S2008, when it is determined that the staging timer 223bv is not the timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008: No), the process ends as it is in order to continue the roulette chance effect. On the other hand, in the processing of S2008, when it is determined that the value of the staging timer 223bv is the timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008: Yes), the roulette chance effect is ended and the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. First, the roulette flag 223dv and the swing effect flag 223ev are set to off (S2009).

  When the processing in S2009 ends, it is next determined whether or not the shift to the “rensou mode” has been notified (the ball B has hit and dropped into the pocket) in the present roulette chance effect (S2010). When the transition to the “rensou mode” (fall into the hit pocket) is notified (S2010: Yes), the display time of the ending image is displayed so that the ending image is continuously displayed until the ongoing big hit variation ends. Is set (S2011), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2010, if it is determined that the transition to the “rensou mode” has not been notified in the current roulette chance effect (S2010), then, in the current roulette chance effect, a disconnection is notified (disconnection). It is determined whether the ball B has been dropped into the pocket) (S2012), and if it is determined that the ball B has not been notified (the ball B has not been dropped into the pocket) (S2010: No), a roulette chance effect is produced. This means that the ball B has not been dropped (not notified of the result of the roulette chance effect) despite the end timing of, and a malfunction such as a malfunction of the holding piece 677 has occurred. Could be. Therefore, in this case, the display of the error is set by setting the display error command (S2013), and the process ends. By executing the error display by the display error command, the clerk of the hall can easily recognize that the malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to promptly take appropriate measures such as repair.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2012 that the ball has been notified (the ball B has been dropped into the missing pocket) (S2012: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being fluctuated and displayed. It is determined (S2014), and if it is not fluctuating (S2014: No), the display of the ending image is set to 5 seconds (S2015), and this processing ends. In addition, at the end timing of the roulette chance effect (85 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestion effect”), the fluctuation stop state is set in the “preparation mode” by the lottery of the special symbols for the number of time savings. This is a case where the fluctuation stop is performed before the execution is performed. Therefore, when the probability change jackpot is reached within the remaining number of time savings, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the termination of the probability change jackpot. In this case, a resurrection roulette chance effect (see FIG. 115 (b)) is executed, and control is performed so that the ball B falls into the hit pocket.

  In the processing of S2014, if it is determined that the special symbol is currently being displayed for fluctuation (S2014: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation type is a deviation fluctuation (S2016), and if the deviation fluctuation is being executed. (S2016: Yes), as the display time of the ending image, the remaining time until the end of the running deviation fluctuation is set (S2018), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2016 that the fluctuation is not a deviation fluctuation (that is, a jackpot fluctuation is being executed) (S2016: No), a resurrection roulette chance effect (see FIG. 115B) is set (S2017). Then, the present process ends. By executing this effect setting process (see FIG. 149), it is possible to execute an appropriate effect in the “renjo mode suggested effect”.

  Next, the command determination process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1614). This command determination processing (S1614) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  In this command determination processing, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is read from main controller 110 by main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2101). In the process of S2101, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2101: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2102), and the process returns to the main process. The details of this variation pattern command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2101: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2103). When the stop type command is received (S2103: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2104), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2105). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2103: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2106). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2106: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 is determined. The value (the number of times N of the fluctuation display in the special symbol is suspended) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2107). In the process of S2107, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S2107, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Every time is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S2107 to the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning is detected. During the lottery of the special symbol and the special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S2107 is performed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S2106, when it is determined that the command of the number of reserved balls has not been received (S2106: No), it is next determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S2108). In the process of S2108, if a winning information command has been received (S2108: Yes), a winning information command process for setting an effect according to the winning information is executed (S2109), and this process ends. The details of the winning information command processing (S2109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2108 that the winning information command has not been received (S2108: No), then, the command related to the jackpot (ie, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the large open mouth winning command, the ending command) ) Is determined (S2110). If it is determined in the process of S2110 that a command related to the jackpot has been received (S2110: Yes), a hit-related command process for executing a process corresponding to various commands related to the jackpot is executed (S2111), and this process is performed. To end. The details of the hit-related command processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2110, if a command related to the jackpot has not been received (S2110: No), it is then determined whether an execution command has been received from any of the motor drivers (S2112). In the process of S2112, if the execution command is received (S2112: Yes), the progress of the operation of the accessory driven by the motor driver is determined in accordance with the execution command output from the various motor drivers, and the progress is determined. (S2113), and terminates the present process. The execution command processing (S2113) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2112, if an execution command has not been received (S2112: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S2114), and if a status command has been received (S2114: Yes), The game state notified by the state command is determined, state command processing for performing corresponding control is executed (S2115), and this processing ends. Details of this status command processing (S2115) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  On the other hand, if the status command has not been received in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), then it is determined whether a special figure 2 winning command has been received (S2116). In the processing of S2116, if the special figure 2 prize command is received (S2116: Yes), the special figure 2 prize command processing for setting an effect corresponding to the ball entering the second entrance 640a is performed. The process is executed (S2117), and this process ends. The details of the special figure 2 winning command processing (S2117) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2116, when it is determined that the special figure 2 winning command has not been received (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is performed. Is executed (S2118), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variation pattern command processing (S2102) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S2102). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S2102) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 150), and is a processing for specifying the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) from the fluctuation pattern command and setting the operation of the accessory. is there.

  In the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 151), first, the variation start flag 223c is set to ON (S2201), and a variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2202). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory operation scenario (S2203), and if there is no accessory operation scenario (S2203: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2203 that there is an accessory operation scenario (S2203: Yes), the operation scenario of the corresponding accessory is set (S2204), and then this process ends.

  Next, the details of the winning information command processing (S2109) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This prize information command processing (S2109) is processing executed when a prize information command is received in the command determination processing (see FIG. 150), and as described above, processing for setting an effect according to the prize information It is.

  When the prize information command processing (see FIG. 152) is started, first, the winning / non-prize, the stop type, and the variation pattern are extracted from the received prize information command, and are extracted as prize information in the prize information storage area 223a of the RAM 233. It is stored (S2301). Next, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, each processing of S2302 to S2313 for setting an additional effect (see FIG. 96 (a)) is executed. As described above, this additional production is executed when the winning in the first entrance 64 is suspended in the “normal mode”, and the “preparation mode” and the “rensou mode” are set in the reserved ball. This is an effect for causing the player to expect to shift.

  The processing of S2302 to S2313 for setting an additional effect will be described more specifically. First, in the process of S2302, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state flag 223o is on (S2302). This is not a "normal mode"), and no additional effect is executed regardless of whether the winning information is correct or not. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, when it is determined that the time reduction state flag 223o is off (S2302: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S2303).

  In the process of S2303, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S2303: Yes), it means that the current mode is the “preparation mode” (not the “normal mode”), and the winning information is determined. Irrespective of the above, the additional effect is not executed, and thus this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2303 that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is 0 (S2303: No), then, the value of the additional counter 223av (the number of additional items) is 3, which is the upper limit value. This is determined (S2304), and if it is the upper limit value, no additional effect is set, and the present process is terminated as it is. In the present control example, the upper limit of the number of additional pieces is set to three uniformly, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the lottery result advantageous to the player is suspended, the upper limit number may be increased. Thereby, the number of executions of the additional effect is likely to increase as the lottery result advantageous to the player is suspended, so that the more the additional effect is performed, the higher the expectation of the player.

  In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the value of the additional counter 223av is less than the upper limit value (less than 3) (S2304: No), then, each of the holdings currently held from the respective areas of the winning information storage area 223a. The winning information corresponding to the ball is read (S2305), and the read winning information includes any of the probability variable jackpots B, C, E, F and the normal jackpot A (reserved). It is determined whether or not it is (S2306). That is, it is determined whether the jackpot type for shifting to the “preparation mode” is suspended.

  In the process of S2306, if it is determined that the jackpot that shifts to the “preparation mode” is not held (S2306: No), the jackpot falls outside the hold and the jackpot type to which the “preparation mode” is not added (“after the jackpot” This is a case where only the “normal mode”) is included, so that a lottery result that is disadvantageous for the player compared to other cases is held. Therefore, in this case, it is determined whether or not the additional effect is to be executed based on the additional low probability table in which the additional effect is determined at the lowest rate (ie, 5%) of the additional effect determination table 222d ( (S2310), the process proceeds to S2311.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2306, when it is determined that the jackpot type shifting to the “preparation mode” is suspended (S2306: Yes), the setting is performed after the end of the jackpot type shifting to the “preparation mode”. It is determined whether or not the probable change jackpot is suspended in the “preparation mode” (ordinary symbol time-saving state) (S2307). If it is determined that the probable change jackpot is suspended in the “prepare mode” (S2307: Yes), which means that the transition to the most advantageous “rensou mode” has been determined, and therefore, in the additional discrimination table 222d, the proportion of the additional effect determined by the additional effect is the lowest (that is, 25%). Based on the low probability table, it is determined whether or not to execute an additional effect (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2311.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2307, when the probability change jackpot in the “preparation mode” (the time saving state of the ordinary symbol) is not suspended (S2307), only the “preparation mode” which is relatively advantageous for the player is provided. Since it is determined, the additional effect is executed based on the additional-probability table determined by the rate at which the additional effect is determined in the additional-addition determination table 222d, which is intermediate between the low-probability table and the high-probability table (that is, 10%). It is determined whether or not to perform (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2311.

  In the process of S2311 executed after any of S2308 to S2310 is executed, it is determined whether the execution of the additional effect has been determined in the processes of S2308 to S2310 (S2311), and the execution of the additional effect has been determined. If it is (S2311: Yes), 1 is added to the additional counter 223av (S2312), the execution of the additional effect is set (S2313), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2311, when it is determined that the execution of the additional effect has not been determined (S2311: No), the processes of S2312 and S2313 are skipped, and the present process ends as it is.

  By the winning information command processing (see FIG. 152), it is possible to vary the rate at which the additional effect is determined according to the content of the reserved ball. Thus, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the additional effect. For example, an additional effect is usually performed when the jackpot type in which the “preparation mode” is set after the jackpot is suspended is increased, so that it is normal that the extra jackpot is performed (when the additional effect is not executed). It is possible to have the player play the game with higher expectation. If the jackpot hits, the expectation of shifting to the “preparation mode” increases.

  In addition, when the jackpot is hit as expected by the player, the player can be made aware that the degree of expectation to shift to the “prepare mode” is higher than usual (when the additional effect is not executed). In this way, it is possible to more strongly expect that the lucky number is displayed on the staging unit 422a during the jackpot game. Furthermore, at the time of execution of the additional production, the case where the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “rensou mode” is suspended is compared with the case where the transition to the “rensou mode” is not determined. Since the execution ratio of the additional effect is configured to be high, when the "prepare mode" is notified as expected by the player, if the degree of expectation to shift to the "rensou mode" is higher than usual, the player Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a stronger sense of expectation for shifting to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, by executing the additional effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in a stepwise manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, the hit-related command processing (S2111) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 153. The hit-related command process (S2111) is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 150), and is a process for performing a corresponding control when a command related to the big hit is received, as described above. is there.

  When the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 153) is started, it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2401). If an opening command has been received (S2401: Yes), It is determined whether it is an opening indicating any one of .about.D and the normal jackpot A (S2402). That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit in which the opening pattern A is set for the first variable winning device 82a.

  In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the command is an opening command for any of the probable jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A (S2402: Yes), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected. In order to drive to the connection position, “01H” is set to the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) (S2403). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g is read from the specific opening table 222b5, and an operation command for setting the read operation content in the motor driver is set (S2404). The process moves to S2405. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the opening command corresponding to the jackpot different from any of the probable jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A has been received (S2402: No), the first passage forming member 520 and the second Since it is not necessary to connect the passage forming member 422, the processes of S2403 and S2404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2405.

  In the processing of S2405, an opening command for display is set in order to start a jackpot opening effect (S2405), and this processing is ended to return to the command determination processing (see FIG. 150). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the display control of the opening effect so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the jackpot opening effect.

  Also, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the opening command is not included in the command received from main controller 110 (S2401: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received. (S2406) If the round number command has been received (S2406: Yes), first, the number of jackpot rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S2407). Next, it is determined whether the specified number of rounds is the first round (S2408). If it is the first round (S2408: Yes), the operation pointer corresponding to the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) It is determined whether the value of 223g is “00H” (S2409). That is, it is determined whether the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are operating. Then, when it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223g is a value other than “00H” (S2409: No), the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 despite the end of the opening period, This means that the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is in operation. Since the opening period is set to a time long enough to dispose each of the above-mentioned characters in the connection position, the opening period is specified in the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) at the start of one round. The fact that the performed operation has not been completed means that the drive motor may have stopped or run idle due to some abnormality, or an abnormality may have occurred in the communication between the motor driver and the drive motor. Therefore, in this case, a display error command is set (S2410) in order to display an error image notifying the error, and the process ends.

  By displaying the error image by the error command, the clerk of the hall can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 in which the abnormality has occurred to take appropriate measures such as repair.

  In the processing of S2408, when it is determined that the number of rounds extracted from the round number command is not the first round (that is, the second round) (S2408: No), and in the processing of S2409, the specific opening table 222b5 (FIG. 119) If it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to (c) is “00H” (S2409: Yes), a display round number command for displaying the number of rounds extracted in the processing of S2408 is issued. This is set (S2411), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2406 that the round number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S2406: No), it is then determined whether or not a large open mouth winning command has been received (S2412). If the large open mouth winning command has been received (S2412: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 223gv (S2413), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2412, when it is determined that the large opening winning command has not been received (S2412: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S2414). (S2414: Yes), it is determined whether the ending is one of the probable jackpots B to D or the normal jackpot A (S2415). That is, it is determined whether the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are the jackpot type ending driven to the connection position. In the process of S2415, if it is determined that the ending is one of the probable jackpots B to D or the normal jackpot A (S2415: Yes), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 A connection release determination process for releasing the connection (connection) is performed (S2416), and the process proceeds to S2417. Details of the connection release determination processing (S2416) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2415, if it is determined that the ending is not one of the probable jackpots B to D or the normal jackpot A (S2415: No), the process of S2416 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2417. I do. In the processing of S2417, the display ending command is set (S2417), and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the above-described connection release determination processing (S2416) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This connection release determination processing (S2416) is processing for releasing the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422.

  In this connection release processing (see FIG. 154), first, the values of the winning counter 223gv and the discharge counter 223hv are read (S2501), and it is determined whether or not these counter values match (S2502). In the process of S2502, if it is determined that the read counter values match (S2502: Yes), all the balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a have reached the second passage forming member 422 (the first passage). (There is no ball passing through the forming member 520), so that the processes of S2503 to S2505 for releasing the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are executed. .

  Specifically, “01H” is set as the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the specific ending table 222b6 (S2503), and the operation content corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g is read from the specific ending table 222b6. Then, an operation command for notifying the motor driver of the read operation content is set (S2504). Then, both the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv are reset to 0 (S2505), and this processing ends. As described above, after determining that the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a has reached the second passage forming member 422, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 ( With the configuration for releasing the connection, it is possible to prevent the connection from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the ball is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  On the other hand, if the value of the prize counter 223gv does not match the value of the discharge counter 223hv in the process of S2502 (S2502: No), it is determined whether the value of the prize counter 223gv is larger than the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S2506). If the value of the winning counter 223gv is larger (S2506: Yes), it means that a part of the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a has not reached the second passage forming member 422. Then, in order to wait until the unreached ball reaches the second passage forming member 422, the discharge standby flag is set to ON (S2507), and this processing is ended. By setting the discharge standby flag to ON, it is determined that the value of the prize counter 223gv matches the value of the discharge counter 223hv every time the above-described discharge detection processing (see FIG. 148) is executed. When they match, the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released.

  In the process of S2506, when it is determined that the value of the winning counter 223gv is equal to or less than the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S2506: No), balls equal to or more than the number of winnings in the first variable winning device 82a are passed through the second passage. Since it means that it is discharged through the forming member 422, there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred. Therefore, in this case, a display error command is set in order to display an error image notifying the error (S2508), and the process ends. By displaying the error image by the error command, the clerk of the hall can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 in which the abnormality has occurred to take appropriate measures such as repair.

  Next, the details of the execution command processing (S2113) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This execution command processing (S2113) is one processing in the command determination processing (see FIG. 150), and is a processing for executing the control according to the progress of the operation set for each character as described above. .

  When the execution command processing (see FIG. 155) is started, first, 1 is added to the value of the step counter 223e of the accessory corresponding to the received execution command (S2601). Next, it is determined whether the origin return flag 223i is on (S2602). If it is on (S2603: Yes), it means that the origin return operation is being performed. It is determined whether or not it exists (S2603). That is, it is determined whether or not all the accessories have returned to the origin position by the origin return operation. In the process of S2603, if it is determined that there is an origin sensor whose output is in the state of L (S2603: Yes), it means that the origin return operation of the accessory corresponding to the origin sensor is not completed. In order to execute the home position return operation, the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2603, when it is determined that the outputs of all the origin sensors are in the H state (all the accessories have returned to the origin positions) (S2603: No), the origin return operation is completed. Then, the start of the initial operation is set (S2604). This initial operation is executed to determine whether each of the accessories is in a normally operable state by setting a predetermined operation for each of the accessories. As described above, the operation content in this initial operation is defined in the initial operation table 222b7. That is, in the process of S2604, the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the initial operation table 222b7 is set to “01H”, and the operation content corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g is read from the initial operation table 222b7 to execute the operation. Set the command. When the process of S2604 ends, the in-return-to-origin flag 223i is set to off, and the initial operation flag 223j is set to on (S2605), and the process ends.

  In the process of S2602, if it is determined that the origin return flag 223i is off (S2602: No), then it is determined whether the initial operation flag 223j is on (S2606). That is, it is determined whether or not the initial operation is being performed. If it is determined that the initial operation flag 223j is ON (S2606: Yes), an initial operation process for executing control according to the progress of the initial operation is performed. Is executed (S2607), and this processing ends. Details of this initial operation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2606, if it is determined that the initial operation flag 223j is off (S2606: No), then, it is determined whether the execution command received this time is an execution command output from the motor driver of the rotation unit 600. Is determined (S2608). That is, it is determined whether the command is an execution command for notifying that the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 for one step has been performed. If it is determined in step S2608 that the command is an execution command output from the motor driver of the rotating unit 600 (S2608: Yes), a rotation setting process for controlling the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 (and the rear LED 625) is performed. (S2609), a lighting setting process for controlling the lighting state of each of the lighting regions A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 is performed (S2610), and this process ends. Details of the rotation setting process (S2609) and the lighting setting process (S2610) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, respectively.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2608, if it is determined that the execution command received this time is not a command corresponding to the rotating unit 600 (S2608: No), then, based on the execution command received this time, the role corresponding to the execution command is determined. It is determined whether the number of operation steps set for the object has been reached (S2611). For example, when an execution command corresponding to the motor driver of the upper elevating unit 300 is received, the number of operation steps is determined based on the set operation scenario (upper elevating unit table 222b1) and the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the operation scenario. Is read. If the value of the step counter 223e is equal to or more than the operation step specified in the operation scenario, it is determined that the set number of steps has been reached.

  In the process of S2611, if it is determined that the set number of steps has been reached (S2611: Yes), then 1 is added to the action pointer 223g of the accessory (operation scenario) corresponding to the execution command received this time (S2612). ), The operation content corresponding to the pointer value after the addition is read from the operation scenario table 222b (S2613). Then, an operation command for instructing the corresponding motor driver of the read operation content is set (S2614), and the process ends.

  Next, the details of the initial operation process (S2606) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This initial operation process (S2606) is one of the execution command processes (see FIG. 155), and is a process for executing control according to the progress of the initial operation as described above.

  When the initial operation processing (see FIG. 156) is started, first, the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the operation scenario of the initial operation is read (S2701), and it is determined whether the operation end condition corresponding to the pointer value is satisfied. (S2702). For example, if the current value of the operation pointer 223g is “02H”, it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied when the upper lifting unit 300 reaches the lowering position and the left swing unit 500 reaches the connecting position. (See FIG. 120).

  If it is determined in the process of S2702 that the currently set operation end condition is not satisfied (S2702: No), then the initial operation is performed based on the current value of the operation pointer 223g and the value of the step counter 223e. It is determined whether the number of abnormality determination steps specified in the table 222b7 (see FIG. 120) has been reached (S2703). In the process of S2703, if it is determined that the number of abnormality determination steps has not been reached (S2703: No), an operation for one additional step is set (S2704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of steps has reached the abnormality determination step (S2703: Yes), it is determined that the end condition is not satisfied despite the operation having a sufficient number of steps set to satisfy the end condition. means. For this reason, there is a possibility that the drive motor is not operating normally or an error occurs in communication between the motor driver and the drive motor. Therefore, in this case, an error display is set by setting a display error command (S2705), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2702 that the currently set operation end condition is satisfied (S2702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the initial operation (S2706). The value of each bit of the operable type storage area 223r is read (S2707). Then, it is determined whether the data of the initial operation table 222b7 corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g after the addition is END data (whether the initial operation is completed) (S2708), and the END data is read (the initial operation is completed). In this case (S2708: Yes), the in-initial-operation flag 223j is set to off, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2708 that the initial operation has not been completed (S2708: No), it is next determined whether the initial operation of the accessory corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g can be executed. (S2710). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the initial operation of the accessory corresponding to the bit whose value is set to 1 in the operable type storage area 223r. In the process of S2710, when it is determined that the initial action of the accessory corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223g can be executed (S2710: Yes), the value of the action pointer 223g after 1 is added by the process of S2706. Is read from the initial operation table 222b7 (S2711), an operation command corresponding to the read operation content is set (S2712), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2710 that the initial operation of the accessory corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g is not executable (the corresponding bit of the operable type storage area 223r is 0) (S2710: No) ), The process proceeds to S2706, and the processes of S2706 to S2710 are repeated until the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to the accessory that can execute the initial action is obtained.

  Next, the details of the rotation setting process (S2609) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This rotation setting process (S2609) is one of the execution command processes (see FIG. 155), and is executed to control the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 (and the rear LED 625) as described above.

  When the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are all L (S2801). If the outputs of A to F are in the L state (S2801: Yes), the arrangement of the rotating member 640 cannot be specified (all the non-detecting portions 641c are arranged outside the detection range of the rotational position detection sensor 684). ), And this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2801, if it is determined that any of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is in the H state (S2801: No), then the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F The arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket at the drop position) that matches the combination of the current output is specified by comparing the rotation position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121) (S2802). Then, the rotational position storage area 223u is updated from the specified arrangement (S2803).

  When the processing of S2803 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the ball drop possibility flag 223fv is on (S2804). If it is off (S2804: No), it means that the condition for dropping the ball B is not satisfied. Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2804, when it is determined that the ball fallable flag 223fv is on (S2804: Yes), the ball fallable flag 223fv is determined based on the arrangement stored in the rotational position storage area 223u and the storage contents of the hit position storage area 223k. Then, the type of the five pockets (whether it is a hit pocket or a lost pocket) is read from the pocket at the drop position (S2805). Then, the type of the read five pockets is compared with the type of the pocket in which the ball B is dropped in the present roulette chance effect (S2806).

  When the processing in S2806 is completed, it is next determined whether or not all the comparison results in the processing in S2806 are inconsistent (S2807). If all of the results are inconsistent (S2807: Yes), the ball B is dropped. The rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is set to a high speed (for example, 300 pps) because the pocket that can be formed is not disposed at the drop position while rotating at least five pockets by the rotation operation (S2808). As a result, the time required for the target pocket type to be placed at the drop position can be shortened. It is possible to prevent the swing operation from continuing. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2807, it means that the pocket of the target type is arranged at the drop position before passing through five pockets by the rotation operation. Therefore, in this case, since the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance without changing the rotation speed, the process of S2808 is skipped, and the present process ends as it is.

  Next, the details of the lighting setting process (S2610) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 158. This lighting setting process (S2610) is one of the execution command processes (see FIG. 155), and is a process for controlling the lighting state of each of the lighting regions A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 as described above.

  When the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is executed, first, it is determined whether the first-time setting completed flag 223t is on (whether the lighting state of the lighting areas A1 to A18 has been set) (S2901). If it is off (S2901: No), then it is determined whether the output of the origin sensor (not shown) of the rear LED 625 is on (H) (S2902). That is, it is determined whether or not the LED bar 625a has an arrangement that matches the correction section RA (see FIG. 100A) (S2902). In the process of S2902, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is off (L) (S2902: No), this timing is not the timing of setting the lighting state, and thus the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2902 that the output of the origin sensor is on (H) (S2902: Yes), a process for setting the lighting state for each of the lighting regions A1 to A18 is performed. . More specifically, first, the value of the step counter 223e corresponding to the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is reset (S2903), and the rotation position determination table 222c is read (S2903). Next, the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified based on the read rotation position determination table 222c and the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 (S2905).

  When the processing of S2905 ends, next, the types of all the pockets arranged in the range from the pocket at the current drop position to the pocket 5 to the previous to the pocket 12 from the pocket are read from the hit position storage area 223k (S2906). ). That is, the type of the pocket arranged on the front side of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is specified. Then, the lighting position storage area 223m (see FIG. 123) is updated according to the type of each pocket read by the processing of S2906. As described above, H is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket, and the data is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area arranged on the back side of the missing pocket. Is stored as L. Based on the stored data (lighting data), the LEDs in the lighting area corresponding to the storage area in which H is stored are set to the lighting state with the lighting rate of 100% (that is, the lighting corresponding to the lighting rate of 100%). A control command is output), and the LED in the lighting area corresponding to the storage area in which L is stored is set to the off state with the lighting rate of 0%. When the process of S2907 ends, the value of the correction position counter 223s is initialized, the first-time setting completed flag 223t is set to ON (S2908), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2901 that the first-time setting completed flag 223t is on (S2901: Yes), the state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is switched according to the progress of the rotation of the rotating member 640 (correction). Is performed. Specifically, first, the value of the step counter 223e corresponding to the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 is set to 864 (that is, the number of steps corresponding to 1/3 of the rotation from the origin position) or 1728 (that is, 2/3 from the origin position). (S2909). In the process of S2909, when it is determined that the value of the step counter 223e is neither 864 nor 1728 (S2909: No), it means that the LED bars 625b and 625c are not in the state corresponding to the correction section RA. It is determined whether the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is ON (S2910).

  In the process of S2910, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is off (S2910: No), the LED bar 625a also does not match the correction section RA (all of the LED bars 625a to 625c are in the correction section). RA does not match). Therefore, in this case, the arrangement is such that the correction (switching) of the lighting state cannot be executed, and thus the present processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2910, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is ON (S2910: Yes), the step counter 223e of the rotation operation is reset to 0, and the process proceeds to S2912. If it is determined in step S2909 that the value of the step counter 223e is 864 or 1728 (S2909: Yes), the process skips steps S2910 and S2911, and shifts the process to step S2912.

  In the process of S2912, the value of the correction position counter 223s indicating the type of the LED bar for which the current lighting state is corrected (switched) is updated by 1 (S2912). Next, the rotation position determination table 222c is read (S2913), and based on the read rotation position determination table 222c and the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684, the current rotation member is determined. The arrangement of 640 is specified (S2914). Then, the type of each pocket arranged in the correction section RA (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket) is read from the hit position storage area 223k (S2915), and the lighting position is stored according to the read pocket type. The storage area corresponding to the LED bar indicated by the correction position counter 223s in the area 223m is updated (S2916), and the process ends.

  By executing the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158), the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is corrected every time the rear LED makes 1/3 turn (that is, in units of one LED bar). Can be. That is, every time the rear LED makes a 1/3 turn, the information of the storage area corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) is stored in each pocket of the rotating member 640 generated by the rotating operation, and the lighting area. Correction can be made according to the deviation of the correspondence with A1 to A18. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (appearance in which the hit pocket shines and the missing pocket becomes dark). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from erroneously recognizing the winning pocket and the missing pocket.

  Next, the details of the status command processing (S2115) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This status command process (S2115) is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 150), and is a process for executing various controls according to the status command received from the main control device 110.

  In this state command processing (see FIG. 159), first, the probable change state flag 223n, the time saving state flag 223o, the time saving state counter 223p, and the hit state storage area 223q are updated based on the received state command (S3001). . Next, it is determined whether or not the current status command is a command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002). If the command is not a command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002: No), the process ends as it is. . Note that whether or not the signal has been output at the end of the big hit is determined by, for example, the value stored in the hit state storage area 223q. Specifically, when a new status command is received in a state where “04H” indicating the ending period is stored in the winning status storage area 223q, the status command output at the end of the big hit is received. Is determined. This is because the state is not changed during the jackpot ending period.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the status command received this time is the command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002: Yes), the value of the time-saving status counter 223p updated based on the status command Is greater than 0 (S3003). That is, it is determined whether or not the shift to the “preparation mode” has been made one or seven times after the jackpot, and it has been determined that the shift to the “prepare mode” has not been made (the time-saving state counter 223p is 0). In this case (S3003: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S3003: Yes), a winning pocket allocation process (S3004) for determining the layout of the winning pocket is executed. Details of the hit pocket allocation processing (S3004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the winning pocket is set (determined) by the winning pocket allocation process (S3003), the start of the increase effect (see FIGS. 93A and 93B) is set (S3005), indicating that the increase effect is being performed. For this reason, the increase effect flag 223cv is set to ON (S3006). Then, by resetting the effect timer 223bv, the timing of the effect period from the start of the “rensou mode suggestive effect” is started (S3007), and the process ends.

  Next, the details of the winning pocket allocation process (S3004) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 160. The winning pocket allocation process (S3004) is a process for determining the layout of the winning pocket as described above.

  When the hit pocket allocation process (see FIG. 160) is started, first, five pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x are read (S3101), and the read pockets are set as hit pockets in the hit position storage area 22k. It is set (S3102). That is, H is stored in the storage area corresponding to the read pocket.

  When the processing of S3102 is completed, the value of the additional counter 223av is read out (S3103), and it is determined whether the read value of the additional counter 223av is larger than 0 (S3104). In the processing of S3104, when it is determined that the value of the additional counter 223av is 0 (S3104: No), the present processing is terminated as it is not necessary to increase the number of hit pockets.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3104, if it is determined that the read value of the additional counter 223av is larger than 0 (is 1 or more) (S3104: Yes), a hit pocket corresponding to the value of the additional counter 223av is additionally set (S3104: Yes). In addition, the processing of S3105 to S3110 is executed. Specifically, first, a winning pocket (hit position) is read from the hit position storage area 223k (S3105), and it is determined whether or not there is a place where five or more winning pockets (hit positions) are continuous. (S3106).

  In the process of S3106, when it is determined that there is a portion where the hit pockets are continuous 5 or more (S3106: Yes), one of the missing pockets is other than the one before and after the portion where the hit position is continuous 5 or more. One additional position is selected from the out-of-pocket pocket (S3108), and the process proceeds to S3109. The reason why the hit pocket is further added before and after the place where five or more pieces are continuous is that if the hits are made too continuous, it may be difficult to drop the ball B naturally. In other words, during the execution of the roulette chance effect for notifying of the detachment, when it is detected that the period of the swinging motion of the ball B is shortened at the timing when the hit pocket reaches a continuous place, the hit pocket continues. After passing the spot, the ball B must be dropped. Accordingly, the state in which the period of the swinging operation is short (the swinging operation is weakened) continues for a long time, and the player may feel uncomfortable with the ball B not falling easily. Thus, in the present control example, a limit is set on the number of consecutive hit positions, and a state in which the ball B cannot be dropped is prevented from continuing for a long time.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3106, if it is determined that there is no place where five or more consecutive hit pockets exist (S3106: No), one additional position is selected from all the missing pockets (S3107). ) And the process moves to S3109. In the processing of S3109 executed after the processing of S3107 or S3108, the hit position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected additional position becomes the hit position (S3109), and the value of the additional counter 223av is decremented by one (S3110). Then, the process returns to S3104. Then, thereafter, the processes of S3104 to S3110 are repeatedly executed until the value of the additional counter 223av becomes 0, and this process ends when the value of the additional counter av becomes 0.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning command processing (S2117) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This special figure 2 winning command processing (S2117) is one of the command determination processing (see FIG. 150), and when a ball enters the second entrance 640a during the increase effect, the hit pocket is determined. Is a process for determining whether or not to increase.

  In this special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161), first, it is determined whether the increasing effect flag 223cv is on (S3201). This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3201 that the increasing effect flag 223cv is on (S3201: Yes), then the data of the winning information storage area 223a is read (S3202). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of winning pockets is 5, which is the upper limit (S3203). If the number is equal to the upper limit (S3203: Yes), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the number of winning pockets is less than the upper limit (S3203: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning ball exists in the winning information (S3204). If there is no hit reserve ball (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not the big hit change is being executed (S3205). Then, if there is no winning reserve ball and the big hit change is not being executed (S3204: No, S3205: No), the extra is selected based on the additional low probability table of 5%. Is determined (S3206), and the process proceeds to S3208. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3204 that there is a jackpot reserved ball (S3204: Yes), and when it is determined in the process of S3205 that the jackpot variation is being executed (S3205: Yes), the extra is added. It is determined whether or not to perform the addition based on the added high probability table in which the selected ratio is 25% (S3207), and the process proceeds to S3208.

  In the process of S3208 executed after the process of S3206 or S3207, it is determined whether or not the addition is determined (S3208), and if the addition is not determined (S3208: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3208, if the addition is determined (S3208: Yes), the winning pocket (hit position) is read from the hit position storage area 223k, and five or more winning pockets (hit positions) are continuous. It is determined whether or not the location exists (S3209).

  In the process of S3209, when it is determined that there is a portion where the hit pockets are continuous 5 or more (S3209: Yes), in the missing pockets, other than the one before and after the portion where the hit position is continuous 5 or more. One additional position is selected from the out-of-pocket pocket (S3211), and the process proceeds to S3212. The reason why the hit pocket is further added before and after the place where five or more pieces are continuous is that if the hits are made too continuous, it may be difficult to drop the ball B naturally. In other words, during the execution of the roulette chance effect for notifying of the detachment, when it is detected that the period of the swinging motion of the ball B is shortened at the timing when the hit pocket reaches a continuous place, the hit pocket continues. After passing the spot, the ball B must be dropped. Accordingly, the state in which the period of the swinging operation is short (the swinging operation is weakened) continues for a long time, and the player may feel uncomfortable with the ball B not falling easily. Thus, in the present control example, a limit is set on the number of consecutive hit positions, and a state in which the ball B cannot be dropped is prevented from continuing for a long time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3209 that there is no place where five or more consecutive hit pockets exist (S3209: No), one additional position is selected from all the missing pockets (S3210). ) And the process moves to S3212. In the processing of S3212 executed after the processing of S3210 or S3211, the hit position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected added position becomes the hit position (S3212), and the added hit position is notified (FIG. 93B). Reference), and terminates this processing.

  By executing the special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161), during the execution of the increase effect, it is determined whether or not the number of hit pockets is increased each time a ball enters the second entrance 640a by a lottery (determination). ) And increase the number of pockets when a lottery is won. Therefore, during the execution of the increase effect, it is possible to positively aim and hit the second entrance 640a and launch the ball, thereby improving the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In the special figure 2 winning command processing of the first control example, the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the winning pocket is made different depending on whether or not the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined. However, the variation of the lottery probability may be further increased. For example, when the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined, and when it is undecided whether to shift to the “rensou mode” (the number of start winning prizes in the time saving state is reduced to the set time saving period ), And the case where it is determined not to shift to the “rensou mode” may be configured to differ in the probability (ratio) that the increase of the winning pocket is determined. Specifically, for example, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined at the time of the lottery, a relatively high probability (for example, 25% of the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640a) ), The winning pocket (lucky number) is increased, and when it is determined that the mode does not shift to the “rensou mode”, a relatively high probability (for example, the second entrance 640a) May be configured so that the hit pocket is increased at a rate of 5% when the ball enters the ball). When it is undecided whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”, the probability between the above two cases (for example, a ratio of 10% when the ball enters the second entrance 640a) And the number of hit pockets may be increased. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a variation in how to increase the number of winning pockets, thereby further improving the interest in the lucky number increase effect.For example, it is undecided whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” In the case of (1), the probability that the number of hit pockets may be increased may be changed according to the number of working hours set as the “preparation mode”. That is, when the “preparation mode” with one time reduction period is set, the probability that the number of hit pockets is increased is lower than when the “preparation mode” with seven time reduction periods is set. May be. More specifically, for example, the configuration may be such that the number of hit pockets (lucky numbers) is increased at a rate of 8% when the number of time reductions is one, and at a rate of 12% when the number of time reductions is seven. As a result, the time-saving period can be predicted from the increase in the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers), so that it is possible to expect a shift to the “rensou mode” by increasing the number of winning pockets. In addition, it is possible to expect seven time-saving periods that are advantageous to the player (there are many chances of shifting to the “rensou mode”).

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1615) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S1615). This variable display setting process (S1615) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order for the effect unit 331 to execute the variable effect, the main control device This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S3301). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S3301: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S3306. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S3301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S3302), and then, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151) of S2202, the variation is started. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S3303).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3304). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, and displays the variation effect such that the variation display of the symbol is performed in the effect unit 331 in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Control is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3305). In the process of S3305, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the processing of S3306.

  In the process of S3306, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S3306). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3306: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3306: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3307), and then, in the process of S2105 of the command determination process (see FIG. 150), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3308).

  Next, a display number selection process for determining a display number to be displayed in the rendering unit 331 is executed (S3309). Details of the display number selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S3309 ends, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is generated, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. (S3310), and the process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, and displays a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command such that the stop symbol is stopped and displayed by the rendering unit 331 so that the variation effect is displayed. The stop display is controlled.

  Next, details of the display number selection process (S3409) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This display number selection process (S3409) is one of the variable display setting processes (see FIG. 162), and is a process for determining the display number to be displayed in the rendering unit 331, as described above.

  When the display number selection process (see FIG. 163) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the present time is a normal symbol time saving state (S3401). That is, it is determined whether the time saving state flag 223o is on or the value of the time saving state counter 223p is 1 or more. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S3401: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3401 that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the “normal mode”) (S3401: No), then the lucky number (big hit symbol) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x ) Is read out (S3402), and it is then determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery result is a jackpot (S3403).

  In the processing of S3403, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of order (S3403: No), three different numbers are randomly selected from the 30 kinds of numbers (numbers respectively assigned to the pockets P1 to P30). (S3404). Then, it is determined whether all of the three selected numbers are lucky numbers (big hit symbols) defined in the designated pocket storage area 223x (S3405), and at least one of the at least three types is a lucky number. If it is determined that the numbers are different from each other (S3405: No), one of the remaining 27 numbers excluding the three types selected in the processing of S3404 is selected as a stop symbol (S3406), and The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3405, if it is determined that all three types are lucky numbers (big hit symbols) (S3405: Yes), the remaining one type number (symbol) is replaced with the unselected out-of-number number. A random selection is made from among them (S3407), and this processing ends. The four types of numbers (symbols) selected in the processes of S3404 to S3407 are set as out-of-place stop symbols displayed on the rendering unit 331.

  Also, in S3403, when it is determined that the result of the lottery of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S3403: Yes), four of the five lucky numbers (hit numbers) read from the designated pocket storage area 223x are selected. A selection is made at random (S3408). Then, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a jackpot to which the “preparation mode” (ordinary symbol time reduction state) is given (S3409), and if the “preparation mode” is not given (S3409: No), In the time-saving suggestion effect (see FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b)), one type of a number (notification symbol) displayed on the effect portion 422a is selected from out-of-number numbers (S3410), and the process ends. I do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3409 that the jackpot is a jackpot to which the “preparation mode” is given (S3409: Yes), the time-saving suggestion effect in the jackpot (see FIGS. 92 (a) and (b)) One of the numbers (notification symbols) displayed on the rendering unit 422a is selected from the lucky numbers (winning numbers) (S3411), and the process ends.

  By this display number selection process (see FIG. 163), five types of lucky numbers selected by the player in advance can be set as big hit symbols. In addition, the lucky number selected by the player can be set as a notification symbol in the “preparation mode”.

  Next, details of the accessory operation setting process (S1616) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This accessory operation setting process (S1616) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 145), and is a process for setting the operation of each accessory as described above.

  When the accessory operation setting process (see FIG. 164) is started, first, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the wait period (S3501). This wait period may be set at the time of power-on, and as described above, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of power-on is the ending period of the jackpot, the start of the home position return operation is delayed to This is set so that the ball in one passage forming member 520 is reliably discharged.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3501 that it is the end timing of the wait period (S3501: Yes), then, the origin return processing for returning the mutated character from the origin position to the origin position is executed. (S3502), and ends this process. Note that the origin return processing (S3502) is the same as the origin return processing (S1314) described with reference to FIG. 144, and thus a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3501, if it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the wait period (S3501: No), it is next determined whether it is the operation start timing of any of the accessories (S3503). If it is not the operation start timing (S3503: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3502 that it is the operation start timing of the accessory (S3503: Yes), “01H” is set to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the accessory to start the operation (S3504). ), The operation content corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g is read out of the operation scenario table 222b corresponding to the character that starts the current operation (S3505).

  When the processing of S3505 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the operation of the pitching device 650 has been read (S3506). By setting the effect flag 223ev to ON, it indicates that the ball B has been pitched (S3507), and the flow shifts to the process of S3508. Note that, as described above, the operation of the pitching device 650 is set at the point of time 50 seconds after the roulette chance effect is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3506, when it is determined that the read operation is not the operation of the pitching device 650 (S3506: No), the process of S3507 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3508. In the process of S3508, an operation command is set based on the operation content read in the process of S3505, and the process ends.

<Regarding control processing of display control device in first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great deal of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) in the display control device 114 is immediately performed. There is a problem that it may not be started.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the third symbol display device 81 and the like in the display control device 114 (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, And the control of the directing unit 422a) can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3601), and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and The display control device 114 is activated so that various controls on the effect unit 422a) can be executed.

  Here, the boot process (S3601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S3601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81 or the like. (The third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) are stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the reading speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is low especially when random access is performed. Therefore, when the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 does not. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, a boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S3701.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3702, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S3702, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S3703). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S3704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S3601 in FIG. 165). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S3602 in FIG. 165) (S3705), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process ends.

  By executing the boot process (S3601) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 166, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3701 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3701 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S3702. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S3703 to S3705 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred in the process of S3701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3701. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S3702, the processing of S3703 to S3705 may be executed.

  Thereby, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, upon starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3703 to S3705 without performing the processes of S3701 and S3702. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set in the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, an image of a specific color is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The image controller 237 is instructed to perform image drawing and display processing so that the image is displayed on the entire screen. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) immediately after the power is turned on depends on the model of the pachinko machine. The colors are set to be different. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). By checking whether or not the display is displayed in (1), it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S3603). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a ends based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3603, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S3604). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S3604, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S3605). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 176 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S5102 in FIG. 176 (a)).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. In the meantime, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167 (b)), the simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 125 is drawn. The determination process (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S3909 in FIG. 167 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. If it is through the device 113, that is, if the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation images shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and (c) are immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the transfer takes a long time, and therefore, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on after power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S3605, interruption permission is set (S3606), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S3606, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3801), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the After specifying an image to be displayed on the rendering unit 422a), a drawing list of the image is created (see FIG. 129), and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. This is for instructing execution of drawing processing and display processing.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 167 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), a command determination process (S3902) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3903). Execute.

  In the command determination process (S3902), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the type of fluctuation effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S3903), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3902) and the like, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit) 331, and the content of the image of one frame to be displayed next in the rendering unit 422a) are specifically specified. In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S3904). In this task process, the information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) specified by the display setting process (S3903) or the simple display setting process (S3909). Based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be specified, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified. Determine the parameters.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S3905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S3906). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S3904), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S3905) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 129 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3907). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3907, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop symbol counter corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3901 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3901: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 125 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3908) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3909) is executed. Move on to processing.

  Next, the details of the above-described command determination processing (S3902), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 168, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4001). If there is no unprocessed new command (S4001: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4001: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3903) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4002). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S4003).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4004). If there is a display variation pattern command (S4004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4005), and returns to the process of S4001.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S4005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4101).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S4101, in order to prepare for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is used. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. In the case where the instruction has been given by 110, the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). During this time, the next variation pattern command for display is received from the main control device 110, and another variation display is suddenly started, so that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in fact, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) is performed by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. The player can control the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering) It may continue watching a variation of the third symbol in 422a).

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to ON (S4103). After that, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4101, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S4104), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S4105), and both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S4106), and this processing ends.

  By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 169 (a)), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S4105 is updated and set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4101. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the displayed variable display data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the process proceeds to S4102. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance. Character ROM 234 As will be transferred to the image storage area 236a Luo normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4104, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Control the setting of the stop display.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S4004, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4006). If there is a display stop type command (S4006: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4007), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the stop type command processing (S4007) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 169 (b). FIG. 169 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S4201), and the stop type table and the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167 (b)) Is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated each time is executed, and the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). A later stop symbol is finally set (S4202).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S4202 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S4203), terminates this stop type command processing, and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, In addition, offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S4202 is described as type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed in the rendering unit 422a). In the above-described task processing (S3904), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S4202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S4203, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main controller 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S4201, in order to prepare for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely off, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S4202.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol) even if it is actually "missing the special symbol" On the display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol jackpot". There is a possibility that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure, if the “special symbol jackpot” is actually set, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol) Even if a stop symbol that is completely off is displayed on the display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", which can delight the player.

  Returning to FIG. 168, the description will be continued. In the process of S4006, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4006: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S4008). If there is an opening command for use (S4008: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S4009), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the opening command processing (S4009) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 170A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4301). After that, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4302), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S4303). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4304). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S4305), the opening command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 168, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4008 that there is no display opening command (S4008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S4010). If there is a round number command for use (S4010: Yes), a round number command process is executed (S4011), and the process proceeds to S4001.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S4011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S4401). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4402).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4404). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S4405), the round number command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S4010, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S4010: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S4012). If there is an ending command for use (S4012: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (S4013), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the ending command processing (S4013) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to ON (S4503). After that, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4504). S4505). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S4506), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4012 that there is no ending command for display (S4012: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4014). If there is a change command (S4014: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S4015), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S4015) will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (a). FIG. 172 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 177) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON. (S4601). Then, among the rear image determination flags 233x provided for each of the rear image types (back A to C), the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and other flags are turned on. The back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type is set to off (S4602), the back image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set in the process of S4601 is turned on, the rear image type after change is determined from the rear image determination flag 233x set in the process of S4602. Identify. If the specified rear image type is the rear image B, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is not resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing (S3904), if it is specified to display either the back A or the back B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S4602. From 233x, the type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4602, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S4014, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S4014: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S4016). If (S4016: Yes), error command processing is executed (S4017), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S4017) will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4701). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4702). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S4701, the type of error that occurred is determined from the error determination flag set in the process of S4702, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is performed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4702, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4016 that there is no error command (S4016: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4018), and the processing returns to S4001.

  In the processing of S4001 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4001: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S4002 to S4018 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S4001 to S4018 is repeatedly executed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S3908) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 125, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 169 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 169 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For the command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 169 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4101. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on which are set and required in this case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the fluctuation image area at power-on 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4102, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting processing (S3903), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 173, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4801). In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S4802 to S4804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4805. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4801: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S4802), and then S4803 to S4804. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S4803, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4803). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4803: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S4804).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). First, by referring to the error determination flags, the warning images of the errors corresponding to all the error determination flags that have been set to ON are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). ) Is developed (S4901).

  In the task processing (S3904), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of a sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and the like for each sprite are specified. Various parameters required for drawing are determined.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4901, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4902), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4804) or in the process of S4803, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4803: No), the process proceeds to S4805.

  In S4805, a pointer update process is performed (S4805). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S5001). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing in S5001, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S5002). As a result, if it is End information (S5002: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S5003). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S5003: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S5004), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S5005), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the display data table for demonstration, so that the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) ), The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5003 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S5003: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S5006), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S5002, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S5002: No), the process ends and returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 173, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4806). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4806 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4807), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4808). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4808: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4808: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is determined whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S4809).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is on (S4809: Yes), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. Is set (S4810), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4811). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4812), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4813). After the final display flag 233z indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4814), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4815), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is changed to the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device) in accordance with the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit) can be easily configured. The effect displayed in 422a) can be changed to a fixed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and thus the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) in the next variable effect. It is used to specify the third symbol to be used. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S3904), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S4815 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4809, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off (S4809: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4816). Then, if the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S4816: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect. The contents are set in the table buffer 233d (S4817), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4818). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4819). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4820), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4821), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  With this, if the display variation pattern command or the opening command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the first symbol display device) is automatically received. The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  In the process of S4816, if the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4816: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is completed, and that the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S3909) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d to set the display data table that defines that the image (one of FIGS. 125 (b) and (c)) is to be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S3905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 176 (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5101). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5101: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process Is executed (S5102), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Accordingly, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 176 (b).

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S5101, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S5101: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S5103), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S5102), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (b). FIG. 176 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S5102).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S5201), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S5201: Yes). Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S5202). In the process of S5202, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S5202 (S5202: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S5202: Yes), the process moves to S5203. Also, as a result of the process of S5201, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5203.

  In the process of S5203, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S5203). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S5204), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S5203, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S5203: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S5205), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S3909 in FIG. 167 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 168 to 172) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 173 to 175) are performed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like ( A normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 177) (see S5101: No in FIG. 176 (a)).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately. The responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S5103), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S3905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting processing (S5103).

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update processing (S4805) of the previously executed display setting processing (S3903). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S5301). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S5302). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S5302: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. , The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S5303) Further, the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S5304), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5305.

  Further, in the process of S5302, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S5302: No), the process of S5303 and S5304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5305. In the process of S5305, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S5305), and the transfer instruction is set. If yes (S5305: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S5306).

  In the process of S5306, after setting a transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S5306 (S5306: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S5306: Yes), the process proceeds to S5307. Also, as a result of the processing in S5305, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S5305: No), the processing shifts to S5307.

  In the processing of S5307, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5307). If the transfer start flag is on (S5307: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S5308), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various types of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S5303 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S5313. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S5307: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S5309).

  If the back image change flag 233w is on (S5309: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so that the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S5310) and provided for each back image type. Among the rear image determination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S5311). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S5312), and the flow shifts to the process of S5313.

  In the process of S5309, if the rear image change flag 233w is not on but is off (S5309: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  If the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that it should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Image data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S5315, if the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process ends as it is.

  In the process of S5313, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5313). The determination in the process of S5313 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S5313 (S5313: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S5313, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5313: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S5314). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S5314, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S5315), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, details of the above-described drawing processing (S3906), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3904) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list shown in FIG. 129 is generated from the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S3905) (S5401). That is, in the processing of S5401, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S3904). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3905), the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S5402). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Thus, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer is displayed on the third symbol display 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The drawing process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S5402, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S5403). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 167 (b)) is executed, it is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b is read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example has a configuration in which three types of modes are provided: a "normal mode", a "preparation mode", and a "rensou mode". In order to shift to the most advantageous “rensou mode”, it is basically necessary to first shift from the “normal mode” to the “preparation mode”. That is, it is necessary to shift to the time saving state in which the time saving period is once or seven times. Then, by making a jackpot during the "preparation mode", it is possible to shift to the "rensou mode" which is most advantageous for the player.

  For this reason, it is possible to strongly expect the player to have a probability of changing the jackpot within the limited number of times (one or seven times) set as the “prepare mode”. Therefore, the interest in the game in the “preparation mode” can be improved.

  Further, in the present control example, a plurality of (five types) of identification information (lucky numbers) used to notify a state advantageous to the player are set. Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, the display of the symbol is changed and displayed on the display device, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. However, in this conventional gaming machine, only a predetermined combination of symbols is used for the notification of a hit, and when another notification (for example, notification of a probable change state or the like) is performed, a different notification mode (for example, In general, the notification is performed by a display effect of fighting an enemy). That is, there is a problem that the content of the notification is difficult to understand because the notification mode is not uniform. In addition, when a result that is advantageous to the player is notified, a predetermined mode is generally executed, and there is little room for the player to intervene.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the identification information (lucky number) for notifying the advantageous state includes a role for notifying the special pattern jackpot in the “normal mode” (see FIG. 91 (a)). A role for notifying whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” after the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 92 (b)), and notifying whether or not to shift from the “preparation mode” to the “rensou mode”. It also has a role. Since the lucky number is used for various notifications that are advantageous to the player, the result of each effect can be easily understood by the player only by knowing the lucky number. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand. In addition, the notification of the special symbol jackpot in the "normal mode", the notification of the "preparation mode" executed in the jackpot, and the notification of the "rensou mode" executed in the "preparation mode" are all lucky. An effect aimed at obtaining a number is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel these three different notifications as if they were one effect. Therefore, an effect with a sense of unity can be executed. Further, in the present control example, the player can arbitrarily select (set) identification information (lucky number) for notifying a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to execute the notification mode according to the taste of each player, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in the present control example, when a big hit occurs in the “normal mode”, an entertaining effect (time saving notification effect) for notifying whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” which is more advantageous than the “normal mode” is made. Is configured to run during. At this time, the short notice effect is executed every time it is detected that the ball has reached the second passage forming member 422 via the first passage forming member 520 provided on the downstream side of the first variable winning device 82a. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to actively launch the ball into the first variable winning device 82a to launch the ball. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be increased.

  Further, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected during a jackpot opening period, and the connection is released when the jackpot ends. Here, if the connection is immediately released at the end of the last round (two rounds) of the jackpot, if there is a ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 at the end of the last round, the ball is removed. There is a possibility that the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 may be separated from each other before reaching the second passage forming member 422. In other words, the ball that has flowed down the first passage forming member 520 may be ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 in an unexpected direction without entering the second passage forming member 422. . In this case, the ejected ball may enter the substrate portion or the wiring portion, which may cause a failure such as a short circuit.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when the number of winnings in the first variable winning device 82a and the number of discharges from the second passage forming member 422 coincide with each other in the jackpot ending period, the first passage forming member 520 is set. And the second passage forming member 422 is disconnected. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, so that the ball entering the first variable winning device 82a is subjected to the second passage forming. It can flow down to the member 422 reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited.

  Further, in the present control example, when entering the "preparation mode", as an entertaining effect to suggest whether or not to shift to the "rensou mode" which is the most advantageous for the player, the "rensou mode suggestion" It is configured to execute “draft”. In this “rensou mode suggestion effect”, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” depending on which of the plurality of pockets provided in the rotating member 640 imitating roulette the ball B falls into. Notify if you did. More specifically, a plurality of (30 types) pockets are sorted into a hit pocket and a missed pocket, and when the ball B falls into the hit pocket, the state shifts to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the pocket in which the ball B falls, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the “renjo mode suggestion effect”.

  On the back side of the rotating member 640, a back LED 625 that illuminates the hit pocket from the back side is provided to make the hit pocket stand out (make it look shiny). The rear LED 625 is configured to rotate in the same direction at the same rotation speed as the rotation member 640. In the rear LED 625, a plurality of lighting regions (lighting regions A1 to A18) for illuminating the region for one pocket from the back are arranged at regular intervals. On the other hand, there are 30 types of pockets provided on the rotating member 640, and a plurality of sections with different intervals between the pockets are provided so that the diameter of the rotating member 640 and the diameter of the rear LED 625 are substantially the same. Have been. For this reason, while the back LED 625 makes one turn, the rotating member 640 can make only 18/30 turns. Therefore, according to the amount of rotation of the rotating member 640, each pocket provided in the rotating member 640 and each lighting area A1 to A18 And the corresponding relationship is shifted.

  Here, as a method of matching the correspondence between the lighting area and each pocket, a method of matching the number of areas of each lighting area of the rear LED with the number of each pocket provided in the rotating member 640 is considered. When the number of regions is increased in accordance with the number of pockets, the number of LEDs increases, which leads to an increase in cost and an increase in power consumption. In addition, since the size of the LED bar (LED board) increases, there is a problem that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 is wasted. Further, in order to save space, when each of the lighting regions of the rear LED 625 is configured such that the interval between the lighting regions is variable according to the rotation position (the same configuration as the rotating member 640), the first section of the rotating member 640 is used. In correspondence with S1, it is necessary to provide a section where the LED bar is folded (that is, the interval between the lighting regions is narrow). Therefore, it is necessary to make each LED bar switchable between a normal state (see FIG. 97) and a folded state according to rotation. However, unlike the pocket, the LED bar is provided with a circuit for lighting each LED, so that when folded, a circuit pattern or wiring printed on the substrate is broken, and the LED bar is broken. May not light up. On the other hand, in the case where the number of pockets of the rotating member 640 is reduced to 18 and the interval between the pockets is always constant (the interval when arranged in the second section in the present control example) (for the rear LED 625). In the case where the provided lighting areas A1 to A18 and the pockets have a completely one-to-one correspondence), there is a problem that the variation in the effect is reduced due to a decrease in the number of pockets.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, one of the members (the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625) that perform the rotating operation with respect to each other (that is, the rear LED 625) is changed (lighted state) every time a predetermined condition is satisfied (the rear surface). Each time the rotation amount of the LED 625 becomes 1/3 turn), the correction is made (switched) in accordance with the other operation. By this correction, the control is performed so that the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket in each pocket of the rotating member 640 always has a shining appearance. That is, each time the rear LED makes a 1/3 turn, the information of the storage area corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) is corrected in accordance with the displacement caused by the rotation operation. ing. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (appearance in which the hit pocket shines and the missing pocket becomes dark). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from erroneously recognizing the winning pocket and the missing pocket.

  In the present control example, in the "normal mode", an "additional effect" for expecting that a lottery result advantageous to the player is held is executable. Here, heretofore, there have been conventionally known gaming machines that execute a specific effect (a so-called reservation notice effect) every time the number of reserved balls increases. The hold announcement effect is generally controlled so as to be easily executed when an advantageous lottery result (for example, a win) is held. However, in this conventional gaming machine, it merely indicates whether or not an advantageous lottery result has been held, and a holding ball other than the holding ball on which the holding announcement effect was executed (for example, a holding ball on which the holding announcement was executed) Ball held before the ball).

  On the other hand, in the present control example, a plurality of advantageous states are provided, and the state is gradually shifted (ranked up) to a more advantageous state according to the result of the special symbol lottery. Then, the more the reserved ball which is shifted to a more advantageous state by the pre-reading is reserved, the more easily the additional effect is executed. Thus, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the additional effect. For example, an additional effect is usually performed when the jackpot type in which the “preparation mode” is set after the jackpot is suspended is increased, so that it is normal that the extra jackpot is performed (when the additional effect is not executed). It is possible to have the player play the game with higher expectation. If the jackpot hits, the expectation of shifting to the “preparation mode” increases. In addition, when the jackpot is hit as expected by the player, the player can be made aware that the degree of expectation to shift to the “prepare mode” is higher than usual (when the additional effect is not executed). Thus, it can be strongly expected that a lucky number is displayed on the staging unit 422a during the jackpot game. Furthermore, at the time of execution of the additional production, the case where the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “rensou mode” is suspended is compared with the case where the transition to the “rensou mode” is not determined. Since the execution ratio of the additional effect is configured to be high, when the "prepare mode" is notified as expected by the player, if the degree of expectation to shift to the "rensou mode" is higher than usual, the player Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a stronger sense of expectation for shifting to the “rensou mode”. As described above, in the present control example, the player can be expected to shift to a plurality of advantageous states in a stepwise manner by executing one additional effect. Therefore, since it is possible to give a sense of expectation to all the lotteries corresponding to the held balls that are held at the time when the additional effect is executed, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  In the present control example, when the ball B is dropped into the pocket of the rotating member 640, the ball B is swung on the holding piece 677, and then is moved to the pocket of the target type (hit pocket or detached pocket). It is configured to drop.

  Here, when the ball B is oscillating on the holding piece 677 and the ball B is allowed to fall irrespective of the circumstance (period, amplitude, etc.), the oscillating operation is performed. Despite the state in which the period (amplitude) is large (the state in which the swinging operation of the ball B is likely to continue for a while), the state in which the ball B falls or the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation is extremely small ( Despite the appearance in which the ball B is likely to fall), the ball B may continue to be held on the holding piece 677. That is, the motion of the ball B may have an unnatural appearance (for example, it may fall in an operating condition in which it is unlikely to fall, or may not fall indefinitely in an operating condition in which it is likely to fall). Also, a method is considered in which the elapsed time from the start of the swinging operation is measured, and the ball B is dropped when the elapsed time reaches a period (amplitude) at which a period (amplitude) at which the ball can be dropped with a natural appearance is reached. However, the swinging motion of the ball B can be affected by various conditions such as the angle at the time of pitching, the initial speed, the manner of assembling the holding pieces 677, and the like, so that the period (amplitude) at which the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance is obtained. There is a possibility that individual differences may occur in the time up to.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when the ball B is dropped, the period of the swing operation is determined from the time interval at which the ball B passes through the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the period of the swing operation is sufficiently small. The configuration is such that the ball B is dropped after it is determined that the ball B has come. Thus, the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance regardless of the individual differences of the pachinko machine 10 and the conditions (angle and initial velocity) when the ball B is thrown. That is, when the ball B performs the swinging motion on the holding piece 677, the player can be made to pay more attention to the motion of the ball B, so that the player's interest in the roulette chance effect can be improved. it can.

  Further, in the present control example, each time any of the pockets is placed at the drop position, the pocket placed at the drop position can be specified from the outputs of the detection sensors A to F. Here, if the configuration is such that the ball B can be dropped into the pocket every time the pocket is placed at the drop position, if the ball B falls after the pocket is placed at the drop position, Is started, so that the ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket at the drop position (falls into the next pocket) in some cases. A time lag occurs when the holding piece 677 moves from the projecting position to the immersion position, and a time lag occurs when the ball B falls from the upper portion of the holding piece 677. Therefore, depending on conditions, the ball B may be moved to the pocket at the falling position. This is because there is a risk that the pocket at the drop position may pass by the rotation operation before reaching the position.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when any pocket is arranged at the drop position, the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified from the pocket at the drop position, and the next position of the pocket arranged at the current drop position is specified. The type of the pocket arranged at the falling position is specified, and it is determined whether the ball B can be dropped into the pocket. Then, if it is determined that the ball B can be dropped into the pocket located at the drop position next to the pocket currently located at the drop position, the drop control of the ball B (the immersion position of the holding piece 677) is performed. ) Is executed before the pocket is placed at the drop position. That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the immersion position at a timing when the ball B can be sufficiently dropped into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the drop position). It is configured to be immersed. With this configuration, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the pocket of the target type. Therefore, although the ball B does not shift to the “rensou mode”, the ball B falls into the hit pocket, and conversely, despite the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined, The ball B can be prevented (suppressed) from falling off and falling into the pocket.

  Further, in the present control example, it is possible to execute a specific effect (i.e., "representative operation in the extended-villa mode") over one or a plurality of (one or seven) time-saving times set as the "prepare mode". It is configured. Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are capable of executing the same type of effect over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a variable display of the number of balls reserved at the start of the effect) (a so-called pachinko machine). , "Continuous notice production"). In such a conventional gaming machine, the player can have a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations, based on the number of times the same type of effect is executed, the content of the effect, and the like. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the number of productions and the production time depend on the reserved ball, and when the reserved balls do not exist or are small, sufficient production time cannot be secured. However, there is a problem in that the number of particles decreases.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, an effect for a fixed period of time (that is, a “rensou mode suggestion effect”) can be executed irrespective of whether or not the variable display is being executed and the number of held balls or the like. I have. In order to prevent the `` preparation mode '' from ending during the fixed time production, even if a jackpot has been won in the middle of the number of time reductions, or if the lottery of all special symbols for the The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is defined so that the total fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in “” is constant (or longer than the “renjo mode suggested effect” effect time). With this configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the execution time of the “preparation mode suggestion effect”, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, according to the progress of the game at the time when the ending effect in the “representative mode suggestion effect” is started (the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed, the remaining number of times, etc.), the ending effect period is set. It is configured to be variable. With this configuration, the end timing of the “preparation mode suggestion effect” can be matched with the timing at which the “prepare mode” is actually ended, so that the player can more accurately grasp the playing state. Can be done. Further, in the present control example, the game is stopped in the “prepare mode suggestion effect”, and after the player informs of the departure in the “prepare mode suggestion effect”, the player restarts the game, and the game becomes a probable big hit. When the transition to the “mode” is determined, a special effect (resurrection roulette chance effect) can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the ending effect from continuing for an amount of time during the game stop period, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being bored. In addition, it is possible to appropriately notify the player whether or not the mode has shifted to the “rensou mode”.

  In the present control example, the identification information (lucky number) is configured to be used for the notification of the jackpot, the notification of the “preparation mode”, and the notification of the shift to the “rensou mode”, but the notification is performed by the lucky number. The advantageous conditions that are achieved are not limited to this. For example, only a part of the three advantageous states may be notified by using a lucky number. In addition to the three states, another advantageous state may be notified. Further, an advantageous state different from the above three states may be notified. In addition, as another advantageous state, for example, a lucky number may be used to notify whether or not the jackpot type is such that a large number of prize balls are easily obtained during the jackpot opening period. In addition, for example, a lucky number may be used to notify whether or not the special symbol is in a stable state as an advantageous state.

  In the present control example, the rotation member 640 and the rear LED 625, which require different times for one cycle of operation (one rotation operation), are configured to rotate at the same rotation speed. In a section where the player can visually recognize the lighting area, the lighting state of each lighting area is changed by a predetermined rotation amount so that the correspondence between the pocket type and the lighting area arranged on the back side of each pocket is fixed. The configuration is such that the correction is performed every time the rear LED 625 makes a 1/3 turn). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be applied to any configuration as long as it is a plurality of movable objects that operate at different operation cycles. it can. For example, on the back side of the rotating member 640, a rotating body that can rotate at the same cycle as the back LED 625 is provided in place of the back LED 625, and the movable body is spaced from the rotating body at the same interval as the pocket of the rotating member 640. May be provided. As the movable body of the rotating body, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a movable body that can be changed between an immersion position on the back side in front view and a protruding position on the near side in front view is provided. A passing hole is provided for each pocket so that the movable object can pass when the movable object is changed to the projecting position, and the pocket in which the movable object protrudes to the near side through the passing hole hits the pocket. Alternatively, the configuration shown in FIG. In this case, control is performed so that the correspondence between the movable object that is changed to the protruding position and the hit pocket is fixed in a section (for example, the first section S1, see FIG. 54) visible to the player, and the game is played. A movable object placed in an arrangement that is difficult (not possible) to be visually recognized by a user may be corrected in accordance with the type of pocket of a pocket placed in a section visible by a subsequent rotation operation. This makes it possible to make the correspondence between the rotating member 640 and the rotating body constant in a section that can be visually recognized by the player, regardless of the amount of rotation or the like.

  In the present control example, one of the roles (the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625) of the role members (the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625) that perform the rotating operation is changed every time a predetermined condition is satisfied (the rotation amount of the rear LED 625). Each time turns), the correction is performed (switched) in accordance with the other operation. However, the present invention is not limited to the rotation operation. In a plurality of characters operating in a section that is visible to the player and a section that is not visible (difficult) to the player, the operation of some of the characters is performed in another part in the section that is not visible (difficult). The present concept can be applied as long as the correction is performed according to the movement of an object. For example, in two types of characters that reciprocate by horizontal movement between a section that is visually recognizable by a player and a section that is difficult to visually recognize, the operation of the character arranged in the section that is difficult to recognize is adjusted to the operation of another character. By making the correction, the control may be performed so that the correspondence between the two types of characters in the section visible to the player matches.

  In the present control example, in the rotating member 640 performing the rotation operation and the rear LED 625, the lighting area for illuminating one hit pocket is made different according to the timing (the amount of rotation of the rear LED 625), so that the hit pocket is always illuminated. Although it was configured to keep its appearance, it is not necessarily limited to a rotating accessory. The present concept may be applied to a display device capable of changing display contents and a backlight for illuminating a part or all of the display device from the back side. Specifically, for example, while displaying the image of the roulette that is rotating with respect to the display device, the backlight arranged on the back side of the display area where the image of the hit pocket is displayed, A configuration in which the lighting state is set to be brighter than the displayed display area may be adopted. Then, the lighting position of the backlight may be dynamically switched so as to follow the operation of the image of the winning pocket. With this configuration, the winning pocket can always have a bright appearance, so that it can be more easily recognized whether or not the winning pocket is a winning pocket.

  In the present control example, when five types of identification information (lucky numbers) are displayed one by one on each of the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331, a big hit is notified, and further, the effect unit 422a However, when the remaining lucky numbers are displayed, the "preparation mode" is notified, but the notification is not limited to the lucky numbers. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of conditions (so-called missions) for shifting to an advantageous state are notified to the player, and a jackpot is notified when a part of the notified conditions is achieved. . In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” by achieving some or all of the remaining conditions that have not been achieved during the jackpot. Furthermore, in the “preparation mode”, a configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the “rensou mode” is notified by achieving some or all of the unachieved conditions. The conditions for shifting to the advantageous state include, for example, “generating an effect in which a specific character appears”, “generating an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22”, and “holding”. Storing one or more balls ". These conditions may be displayed instead of the lucky number on the third symbol display device 81, for example. When each condition is displayed, the condition may be displayed in such a manner that the user can easily recognize whether or not each condition has been achieved (for example, a double line is drawn on the completed condition). As described above, by achieving a plurality of conditions, by stepping up to a more advantageous state, the player can pay more attention to whether or not each condition is achieved. Can be done. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. Note that some or all of the achieved conditions may be returned to an unfulfilled state under specific conditions. The specific condition is, for example, a case where a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of special symbols have been drawn since the achievement of the previous condition, or a case where a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the achievement of the previous condition. It is. The condition may be configured to be selectable by the player, or may be configured to be automatically selected (for example, randomly at power-on).

  In this control example, when the ball has passed the sensor member 422c provided in the second passage forming member 422, the winning ball is discharged to the first variable winning device 82a (the first passage forming member 520 is Passed). Then, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected until the number of winnings in the first variable winning device 82a matches the number of discharges from the second passage forming member 422. , But is not limited to this. It is only necessary to prevent the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520. A configuration that limits disconnection for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) after detection is also possible. Note that 1.5 seconds is a value obtained by adding a margin to the time required for the ball to pass through the first passage forming member 520, and the ball that has won the first variable prize device 82a is given a margin. This is the time during which it can be held down to the second passage forming member 422. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) disconnection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  In the present control example, the lighting area on the back side of the hit pocket is set to the lighting state with the lighting rate of 100%, and the back side of the missing pocket is set to the lighting state with the lighting rate of 0%. However, the present invention is limited to this. However, the lighting rate can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the lighting rate of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the missing pocket may be set to 10%. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the numbers attached to the pockets while making them look darker than the hit pockets. Further, for example, the lighting ratio of the lighting region arranged on the back side of the hit pocket may be set to 80%. The power consumption of the LED can be reduced by reducing the lighting rate of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the winning pocket.

  In the present control example, only two types of the hit pocket and the missing pocket are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the pocket type, a pocket type that may or may not be hit (for example, the expected degree of hit is 50%) may be provided. Accordingly, even if the ball B falls due to the roulette chance effect, if the ball B falls into a pocket having an expectation of 50%, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”. Can last longer.

  In the present control example, only two types of lighting states, a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% and a lighting state with a lighting rate of 0%, are set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and variations may be increased. For example, the lighting area arranged on the back side of a part of the winning pocket is set to a lighting rate of 100% and the lighting frequency of 320 Hz, and the lighting area arranged on the back side of the winning pocket different from the part of the winning pocket. At a lighting rate of 80%. As a method of selecting a different lighting rate, for example, the back side of the hit pocket, which is a missed pocket on both sides, is turned on at a lighting rate of 100%, and a portion where the hit pocket is continuous has a relatively dark lighting rate of 80%. May be set. In the case where the winning pockets are continuous, the appearance becomes brighter than in the case where both sides are separated (lighting rate 0%). Therefore, even if the lighting rate is reduced to 80%, the appearance can be made sufficiently bright. As a result, the power consumption of the LED can be reduced without significantly changing the appearance. Further, for example, the lighting area arranged on the back side of each hit pocket may be turned on at a lighting rate of 50% and a frequency of 12 Hz, and the on-period may be reversed between the closest hit pockets. By lowering the frequency to 12 Hz, the player can perceive the on-period and the off-period, and by inverting the on-period (lighting phase), each pocket can be made more conspicuous.

  In addition, when giving a variation to the lighting state of the lighting area on the back side of the hit pocket, a configuration may be adopted in which a lighting control command is output at a different timing for each lighting state. As described above, in this control example, the lighting control command is output to the LED driver by the serial transfer method. Therefore, as compared with the parallel transfer method, it takes more time from the start of output of data (lighting control command) to the end thereof. More specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 234, in order to notify the LED driver of a command for notifying one lighting state, a plurality of data such as lighting area data and lighting rate data are required. Must be sequentially output (see FIG. 234). Further, in order to confirm whether each output data is normally received by the LED driver, each time data of 8 bits is output, a signal indicating that 8 bits of data has been received from the LED driver is received. It is configured to wait until Therefore, if a lighting control command for notifying the setting of some lighting areas is output, and then a lighting control command for notifying the setting of other lighting areas is output, a plurality of lighting states may be output. It takes a longer time to finish outputting all the lighting control commands to the LED driver. For this reason, there is a possibility that the process cannot be shifted to another process for a relatively long time. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which a lighting control command is output at a different timing for each lighting state (for example, one lighting state per loop of one main process (see FIG. 145)). With this configuration, the process of setting the lighting control command can be distributed to a plurality of loops of the main process (see FIG. 145). Therefore, one processing time for outputting the lighting control command can be reduced, so that other processing can be executed normally. In addition, since the number of lighting control commands generated per one loop of the main processing can be reduced, the processing load when generating the lighting control commands can be reduced. As a method of distributing the setting timing of the lighting control command into a plurality of main processing loops, for example, the lighting position storage area 223m of the lighting setting processing (see FIG. 158) is updated, and the corresponding lighting control command is set. 158 (see S2907 and S2916 in FIG. 158), outputs only a lighting control command corresponding to 1 lighting state, and sets a flag indicating that there is another lighting state that has not been set (lighting unset flag). It should be set to ON. Then, in the next loop of the main process (see FIG. 145), or when the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is executed after receiving the execution command, the lighting non-setting flag is in the ON state. For example, it may be configured to output a lighting control command corresponding to one lighting state that has not been set.

  In the present control example, in the "representative effect of extended-villa mode", the lighting state of the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA is corrected so as to conform to the arrangement of the hit pocket every time the rear LED 625 makes 1/3 turn. However, it is not always necessary to perform the correction for each LED bar. The correction section RA can be arbitrarily determined within a range that is invisible (difficult) to the player. For example, a configuration may be used in which the lighting regions arranged at the symmetrical position of the drop position are corrected one by one, or each time the rear LED 625 makes a half turn, the lighting state of the nine lighting regions arranged in the upper half is corrected. It may be configured.

  In the present control example, in the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, every time any LED bar is arranged in the correction section RA, the arrangement of the hit pocket is read from the hit position storage area 223k and switched to the corresponding lighting state. Although it was configured, it is not limited to this. A data table (lighting control scenario) defining the combinations of the winning pockets and the time-dependent change of the lighting state of each lighting area in each combination may be defined in the ROM 222 in advance. That is, according to the combination of the winning pockets, the correspondence between the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the lower half of the rear LED 625 visible to the player and the pocket arranged in front of each lighting area is rotated. The time change of the lighting state may be defined in the ROM 222 so as to be unchanged regardless of the progress of the operation. In this case, in order to make the arrangement of the rotating member 640 at the start of the lighting control and the arrangement of the respective lighting areas A1 to A18 the same, the ending of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” or the “preparation mode” is performed. During a jackpot game or the like before the shift, the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625 are rotated until a predetermined specific arrangement (for example, the pocket P1 is at the drop position and the rear LED 625 is at the origin position) is attained. May be. Then, in the lighting control scenario, a time-dependent change in the lighting state may be defined starting from the predetermined specific arrangement. With such a configuration, during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”, the lighting state of each lighting region may be simply set according to the lighting control scenario, and any LED bar is arranged in the correction section RA. Since it is possible to omit the process of determining whether or not the lighting state of each lighting region included in the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. it can. In addition, instead of defining the lighting control scenario in advance, at the start of the “rendition mode suggestion effect”, a lighting control scenario is generated from the arrangement of the rotating member 640 and the arrangement of the rear LED 625, and stored in the RAM 223. It is good also as a structure to keep. With this configuration, a lighting control scenario can be set regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625.

  In the present control example, it is determined whether or not the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the “preparation mode”, and the type of the pocket in which the ball B is dropped (hit pocket, or (Out pocket). Then, after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes 1 second or less, if a pocket type capable of dropping the ball B is placed at the drop position first, the ball B is dropped into the pocket. Although it was configured to be dropped, the pocket to be dropped is not limited to this. For example, when the ball B is dropped into the missing pocket (the transition to the “rensou mode” is not determined), even if the ball B is controlled to drop into the missing pocket adjacent to the hit pocket, Good. This makes it possible to expect that the ball B will fall into the hit pocket just before the ball B falls even if it comes off. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the roulette chance production. Similarly, when dropping into the hit pocket, control may be performed so as to drop into the hit pocket adjacent to the missing pocket. Thus, even when the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket, it is difficult to determine to which pocket type the ball B falls, so that the roulette chance effect can be enjoyed to the end.

  In the present control example, the game time is stopped in the “preparation mode”, etc., so that the production time of the “rensou mode suggestion production” with a fixed (fixed) production time and the time until the “preparation mode” ends are settled. In the event of a shift, the shift was able to be absorbed by changing the stage time of the ending stage of the “representative mode suggestive stage”, but the shift between the “preparation mode” end timing and the stage period has been resolved. The configuration for performing this is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that the game has stopped in a state in which the player is not playing a game, the “rensou mode suggestion effect” may be interrupted until the game is restarted. That is, the execution period of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” may be adjusted to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In this case, whether or not the game is stopped may be determined by, for example, whether or not the steering wheel 51 is operated, or may be determined for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after entering the second entrance 640a. Alternatively, the determination may be made based on whether or not more than (second) has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the effect time of the “rensou mode suggestive effect” and the time until the “preparation mode” ends from being shifted. In addition, in order to match the time until the “preparation mode” ends with the production time of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” (to reduce the deviation), the first special symbol after the transition to the “preparation mode” May be configured to wait for the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” until the change is executed. With this configuration, even if the state shifts to the “preparation mode” with no reserved balls, the start timing of the “prepare mode suggestion effect” and the first special symbol lottery in the “prepare mode” Can be matched with the execution timing of the “preparation mode”, and the effect time of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” can be matched (to reduce the deviation).

  In the present control example, when the number of winning pockets is increased in the increase effect, the number of consecutive winning pockets is limited to a predetermined number (five consecutive) or less. It is not something that can be done. The number of consecutive missing pockets may be limited to a predetermined number (five consecutive) or less. That is, in the increase effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the hit pocket is preferentially arranged in a section in which the number of missed pockets is six or more. With such a configuration, when the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket in the “roulette chance effect”, the ball B falls in a state where the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging operation of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (1 second). It can be suppressed that only the pocket goes out of position. Therefore, an unnatural appearance such as a stop of the swinging motion of the ball B before the hit pocket is placed at the drop position can be suppressed, and the player is distrusted by the player. Can be prevented more reliably.

  In the present control example, each time an additional effect is executed, one is added to the value of the additional counter 223av. That is, the addition of one pocket per one additional effect is determined. However, the number of additional pockets added in one additional effect is not limited to one. May be determined. Also, taking into account the held lottery results and the five types of winning pockets (lucky numbers) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x, a number that is convenient for the ball B to fall naturally is set. It may be configured. Specifically, for example, when an additional effect is performed based on the fact that the lottery result corresponding to the probability change jackpot in the “preparation mode” is suspended (when the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket), In the case where an additional effect is performed based on the fact that the jackpot to which the seven preparation modes are given is suspended (when there is a possibility that the ball B may fall into the hit pocket according to the subsequent lottery result), the designated pocket The winning pocket (lucky number) selected by the player in advance is read from the storage area 223x, and the initial arrangement of the winning pocket and the missing pocket is determined. Then, the number of sections in which the number of missed pockets is six or more consecutive is determined, and at least a value equal to or greater than the number of sections is added to the counter 223av (the number of hit pockets equal to or greater than the determined number of sections is added). It may be. Then, when determining the position of the added winning pocket in the “preparation mode”, the winning pocket may be preferentially arranged in a section in which six or more missing pockets are continuous. With such a configuration, the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation of the ball B becomes equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second), and when the ball B is hit and dropped into the pocket, the falling pocket is continuously located at the falling position. It can be prevented (suppressed) that a situation in which the ball B cannot be dropped due to the arrangement is caused. That is, the swing operation of the ball B is performed after the condition for dropping the ball B is satisfied and before the pocket (hit pocket) of the type corresponding to the effect result of the present roulette chance effect is arranged at the drop position. Can be prevented (suppressed), and the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target type of pocket (hit pocket) while the ball B performs the swinging operation. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped with a more natural appearance. Further, for example, it is determined that the ball B is to be dropped into the hit pocket, there is a possibility that the ball B is dropped to the hit pocket, and it is determined that the ball B is dropped to the missing pocket. The number of additional items to be selected may be different depending on the case in which the item is added. That is, when it is determined that the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket, it is configured so that a larger number of additional balls can be easily selected, and the ball B is determined to be dropped into the missing pocket. In such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which a small number of additional items is easily selected. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” to the player, based on the notified additional number.

  In the present control example, when the ball B performs the swinging operation above the holding piece 677, the amplitude of the swinging operation is determined from the time interval at which the passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679, and the amplitude is determined. Is allowed (when the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to ON), a different control may be executed based on the detection result of the ball detection sensor 679. For example, the configuration of the music may be changed in accordance with the interval at which the passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679. More specifically, for example, when the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650, the sound (song) of the drum roll is set to flow, and the period (amplitude) of the swing operation of the ball B decreases. Alternatively, the music may be controlled so that the tempo of the drum roll becomes faster. This makes it possible to feel that the falling timing of the ball B is approaching as the tempo of the music increases, so that the expectation of the player can be improved in accordance with the tempo of the music.

  In the present control example, during the rotating operation of the rotating member 640, the arrangement of the LED bars coincides with the correction section RA regardless of the arrangement of each lighting area (whether or not each of the lighting areas is arranged at a position visible to the player). Up to now, the lighting state has not been changed (switched), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a lighting area arranged at a position where the player is difficult to visually recognize (for example, a correction section RA) is set to a light-off state with a lighting rate of 0%. When the arrangement of any one of the LED bars coincides with the correction section RA, a new (for correction) lighting state set for each lighting region forming the LED bar is not immediately reflected. The new lighting state stored in the lighting area that has been stored and moved out of the correction section RA (moved to an arrangement that may be visually recognized by the player) is sequentially reflected. Is also good. With this configuration, the correction is performed while maintaining the correspondence between the type of pocket (hit pocket or missing pocket) arranged at a position visible to the player and the lighting area arranged on the back side thereof. All the lighting regions arranged in the section RA (positions where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize) can be set to a light-off state with a lighting rate of 0%. Thus, power consumption by the rear LED 625 during rotation of the rotating member 640 can be reduced.

  In this control example, when it is determined in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) that the pocket is to be dropped to the pocket next to the pocket currently positioned at the drop position, the rotating member 640 is used regardless of the arrangement of the ball B. After the rotation operation of 100 steps (approximately 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the drop position), the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the holding piece 677 may be immersed to the immersion position at a timing at which the ball B reaches the center portion of the holding piece 677 in the swinging operation. More specifically, for example, even after the pocket to be dropped is specified, the period (amplitude) of the rocking operation is determined each time the ball B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the determination is performed. The period of the swing operation is configured to be stored (updated) in the RAM 223. Then, at the stage when 100 steps have been reached, the value of the swing timer 223w (the elapsed time since the passage of the ball B was detected by the previous ball detection sensor 679) is referred to, and the latest timer value stored in the RAM 223 is referred to. If it is determined that the value is close to the cycle of the swing operation (for example, a value equal to or more than 90% of the cycle of the latest swing operation), control may be performed so that the holding piece 677 is immersed as it is. On the other hand, if the timer value is less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 90% of the period of the latest rocking operation) with respect to the period of the latest rocking operation, it waits until the timer reaches the predetermined ratio, and then holds the holding piece. 677 may be controlled to be immersed in the immersion position. With such a configuration, when the ball B is rolling toward the outside direction (left end or right end direction) of the holding piece 677, or is disposed near the end (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677. In this case, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the holding piece 677 from entering the immersion position. That is, when the holding piece 677 is immersed, the ball B can be reliably dropped in the direction of the drop position without advancing in another direction. Therefore, the time from when the holding piece 677 is immersed to the immersion position to when the ball B starts to fall can be further shortened, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target pocket.

  In the present control example, when the ball B is performing the swinging operation, it is determined that the ball B can be dropped into the pocket located at the drop position next to the pocket currently located at the drop position. In this case, after the rotation operation for 100 steps is performed, the holding piece 677 is configured to be immersed in the immersion position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Randomly every time in a range (for example, within a range after 100 steps to 120 steps) in which the ball B can be surely dropped into the pocket placed next to the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position. It may be configured to drop. More specifically, in the process of S1806 of the fall control process (see FIG. 147), instead of setting the fall after 100 steps, a process of randomly selecting the number of steps in the range of 100 to 120 steps, After the selected number of steps has elapsed, a process of setting the holding piece 677 to be immersed in the immersion position may be executed. With this configuration, the timing at which the ball B falls can be varied. Therefore, compared with the case where the ball B is dropped at the same timing every time, the ball B can be dropped with a more natural appearance (appearance as if the ball B is falling only by gravity).

  In this control example, the type of the pocket placed at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position is determined, and if it is determined that the type is such that the ball B can be dropped, the next drop is performed. Although the configuration is such that the ball B is controlled to drop into the pocket arranged at the position, it is not always necessary to drop the ball B into the pocket arranged at the next drop position. For example, each time a new pocket is placed at the drop position, in addition to determining the type of the pocket placed at the drop position next to that pocket, the type of the pocket currently placed at the drop position is also determined. Even as a configuration to do. If it is determined that both the pocket currently positioned at the drop position and the pocket positioned next at the drop position are of a pocket type that allows the ball B to fall, the pocket at the drop position is determined. Fall control (immersion operation of the holding piece 677) may be set at a timing when there is a possibility of falling into the placed pocket. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be employed in which the timing of the drop control is randomly determined within a range from 5 steps to 120 steps. The range after 5 steps to 99 steps is the timing at which the ball B may fall into the pocket located at the current drop position, and after 100 steps to 120 steps, the next drop position Is the timing at which the ball B falls into the pocket arranged at the position. With this configuration, the timing at which the ball B falls can be made more random, so that it is difficult for the player to have the suspicion that the ball B is intentionally dropped into the determined pocket. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in roulette chance production. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a pocket type of a pocket arranged next at a drop position and a pocket type of a pocket arranged next at a drop position are determined. If it is determined that the two types of pockets are both pockets into which the ball B can be dropped, the drop control (holding piece 677 is randomly performed) within a range in which the two types of pockets can be dropped into either of the two types of pockets. (Immersion) timing may be set. Further, the type of the pocket at the drop position, the type of the pocket arranged at the next drop position, and the type of the pocket arranged at the next drop position may be determined. Then, the pocket arranged next at the drop position is a type that can drop the ball B, and any pocket adjacent to the pocket arranged next at the drop position is also a type that can drop the ball B. In this case, the fall control of the ball B (the immersion of the holding piece 677) may be randomly set within a range in which the ball B can be dropped into any of a plurality of adjacent pockets where the ball B can be dropped. Good. Also in this case, the ball B can be dropped with a more natural appearance as described above. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in roulette chance production.

  In this control example, the type of the pocket placed at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position is determined, and it is determined whether the ball B can be dropped. It is not necessary to determine the type of the next pocket every time is placed at the drop position. Before the pocket of the type capable of dropping the ball B is disposed at the drop position, any configuration may be used so that the drop control of the ball B can be set. For example, one of the pockets capable of dropping the ball B You may comprise so that it may be distinguished whether it is a pocket arrange | positioned at this side. That is, a flag may be provided in the RAM 223 for each of the pockets P1 to P30 to indicate whether the pocket is located immediately before the pocket for dropping the ball B. Then, at the stage where the type in which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance production is determined, the flag corresponding to the pocket arranged in front of the pocket of the type in which the ball B can be dropped is set to ON, and the other pockets are set. Is set to off. Thereafter, after the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes equal to or less than the predetermined cycle (1 second), each time a new pocket is placed at the drop position, a flag corresponding to the pocket at the drop position is set. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is set to ON, and to set the fall control after 100 steps, for example, when ON. With this configuration, it is not necessary to determine the type of the pocket to be placed next at the drop position, and to determine whether the ball B can be dropped, and only to determine whether the flag is on. Since it is possible to determine whether the ball B is to be dropped or not by simply doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load required for determining whether the ball B can be dropped.

  In this control example, in the rotation position determination table 222c of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113, the combination of the output of each of the detection sensors A to F and the pocket arranged at the drop position when the combination of the output is obtained. And the corresponding relationship. In addition, the order in which the pockets provided on the rotating member 640 are arranged has been defined. The current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified based on the pocket at the drop position identified from the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F and the order in which the pockets are arranged. The method for specifying the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, a combination of outputs of the detection sensors A to F and an arrangement of pockets starting from a drop position in the case of the combination may be defined in the rotation position determination table 222c. Then, a storage area for storing the current arrangement of the pockets starting from the drop position may be provided in the RAM 223. Each time a new pocket is placed at the drop position (that is, the output of any of the detection sensors A to F is displaced from the L state to the H state). It is also possible to read the current row of pockets starting from the drop position corresponding to the combination of the outputs from the ROM 222 and store it in the RAM 223. In this way, by configuring the RAM 223 to store the current arrangement of the pockets starting from the drop position, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball B can be dropped. In the control process (see FIG. 147), when specifying a pocket to be placed at the next drop position after the pocket placed at the drop position, it is only necessary to read the pocket from a fixed storage area of the RAM 223 (that is, to drop the pocket). There is no need to perform a two-step process of specifying the position arrangement and specifying the pocket next to the drop position), thereby simplifying the process. The same applies to the case where the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 is changed. The pocket may be simply read from the determined storage area of the RAM 223 and the type of each read pocket may be determined. It can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, in the roulette chance effect, when the ball B performs a swinging operation on the holding piece 677, the ball B passes through the center of the holding piece 677 (on the front side of the ball detection sensor 679). The period (amplitude) of the swinging motion performed by the ball B is determined from the interval at which the ball B moves. When the determined cycle is equal to or shorter than a predetermined cycle (that is, 1 second), the ball B is allowed to fall. Thus, the ball B can be dropped into any of the pockets after the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation becomes sufficiently narrow. This makes it possible to give the appearance that the ball B falls naturally, as compared to dropping the ball B in a state where the period of the swinging motion of the ball B is large, such as immediately after the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling unnatural to the falling position of the ball B and doubting the result of the roulette chance effect, so that the roulette chance effect can be more enjoyed.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, instead of the holding piece 677 in the first control example, a holding piece 6770 that can be driven to tilt in the left-right direction is provided. The inclination of the holding piece 6770 can be changed according to the arrangement of the sphere B on the upper part of the holding piece 6770. This inclination is configured such that the farther the ball B moves away from the center of the holding piece 6770 due to the swinging operation, the larger the inclination in the downward direction toward the center of the holding piece 6770 becomes. Accordingly, the inclination of the holding piece 6770 while the ball B performs the swinging operation is always in the direction of causing the ball B to flow down toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770 due to excessively strong swinging motion performed by the ball B. It can be securely held at the top and dropped into any pocket.

  In the above-described first control example, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket arranged at the drop position) is determined by a combination of the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F of the rotation position detection sensor 684. It was configured to identify. Accordingly, when the lighting control of the rear LED 625 is performed, only the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket set as the hit pocket according to the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately set to the lighting state. Thus, the player could easily recognize the hit pocket from the appearance. Also, when the ball B is dropped, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is determined, and the lottery result of the special symbol executed in the “preparation mode” (ie, whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”) is determined. It was configured so that it could be dropped into an appropriate type of pocket accordingly.

  In addition, in the second control example, the detection sensors A to F are displaced (the output of at least one of the detection sensors has become H), and then the detection sensors A to F are moved over a plurality of operation steps. It is configured to monitor the outputs of A to F and determine the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket arranged at the drop position) based on the detection results over the plurality of operation steps. With such a configuration, the output of any one of the detection sensors is displaced due to noise or the like, or the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket is moved to the detected position due to rattling of the rotating member 640 or the like. Even if the arrangement timing is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be specified accurately.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that a holding piece 6770 is provided instead of the holding piece 677, and the audio lamp control device 113 The configuration of the provided ROM 222 and RAM 223 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. . Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the structure of the holding piece 6770 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 (a) and (b). As described above, the holding piece 6770 is provided in place of the holding piece 677 in the first control example, and is used to temporarily swing the ball B before dropping the ball B into any pocket. Used for

  FIG. 179 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 6700. As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the holding piece retracting mechanism 6700 in this control example includes a holding piece 6770, a shaft support 6740 connected to the back side of the holding piece 6770, and an inclination provided on the shaft support. Gear 6730a, a retracting gear 6730b, a driving gear 6730c meshed with the tilting gear 6730a, a tilting motor 6750a for giving a driving force to the driving gear 6730c, and an engaging gear 6730b. And a drive motor 6750b for applying a driving force to the drive gear 6730d. Note that the configuration (the shaft support 6740, the tilt gear 6730, etc.) provided on the back side of the holding piece 6770 is provided on the back side of the front case 672, and it is impossible for the player to visually recognize the configuration. It is configured to be.

  The holding piece 6770 is configured to be able to hold the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 on its upper part, similarly to the holding piece 677 in the first control example. The holding piece 6770 drives the projecting / retracting motor 6750b in the forward direction (clockwise direction), and thereby pushes the appearing / retreating gear 6730b meshed with the driving gear 6730d toward the back side in front view. As a result, it changes from the holding position to the separated position. On the other hand, by driving the appearing / retreating motor 6750b in the negative direction (counterclockwise direction), a driving force is provided to the appearing / retreating gear 6730b meshed with the driving gear 6730d so as to be drawn out to the near side in front view. As a result, it changes from the separated position to the holding position.

  Further, the holding piece 6770 in this control example can be tilted by driving the tilting motor 6750a. Specifically, by driving the tilt motor 6750a in the forward direction (clockwise), the drive gear 6730c is also driven in the forward direction, and the tilt gear 6730a meshed with the drive gear 6730c rotates counterclockwise. Driven. Thus, the rotational force of the tilt gear 6730a is transmitted to the holding piece 6770 via the shaft support 6740, and the holding piece 6770 rotates counterclockwise. As a result, the holding piece 6770 is inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in a front view.

  On the other hand, by driving the tilt motor 6750a in the negative direction (counterclockwise), the drive gear 6730c is also driven in the negative direction, and the tilt gear 6730a meshed with the drive gear 6730c is driven clockwise. . Accordingly, the rotational force of the tilt gear 6730a is transmitted to the holding piece 6770 via the shaft support 6740, and the holding piece 6770 rotates clockwise. As a result, the holding piece 6770 is inclined downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction.

  Next, a state where the holding piece 6770 is inclined will be described with reference to FIG. 179 (b). FIG. 179 (b) is a front view when the holding piece 6770 is inclined in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 179 (b), the holding piece 6770 can be tilted (rotated) right and left around the shaft support 6740. When it is detected that the ball B has swung to the right, the holding piece 6770 is rotated counterclockwise by the tilting motor 6750a to form a tilt from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front. (See the solid line in FIG. 179 (b)). As a result, the momentum in which the ball B moves rightward in front view due to the swinging operation is offset by the inclination formed by the holding piece 6770. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball B from being ejected (projecting) out of the range of the holding piece 6770. In this control example, the inclination angle when the holding piece 6770 is inclined can be set in increments of 1 degree. The maximum value of the inclination angle is 6 degrees in each of the left and right directions. This 6 degrees is an angle at which even if the holding piece 6770 is inclined, the inclination cannot be perceived (difficult) by the player. By setting the inclination angle to an angle that cannot be perceived by the player, it is possible to make the ball B feel as if swinging naturally.

  When it is detected that the ball B has swung to the left, the holding piece 6770 is rotated clockwise by the tilting motor 6750a, and the tilt is downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front. Is formed (see the dotted line portion in FIG. 179 (b)). As a result, the momentum of the ball B moving to the left in front view due to the swinging operation is offset by the inclination formed by the holding piece 6770, so that the ball B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770 ( Jumping out) can be reliably prevented.

  As described above, in the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in this control example, two types of drive motors (the tilting motor 6750a and the retracting motor 6750b) are provided, and project and retract between the holding position and the separation position. In addition to the operation, a tilt operation in the left and right direction is enabled. Accordingly, when the ball B performs the swinging operation on the upper portion of the holding piece 6770, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770 due to a too strong swinging action. )can do. Therefore, the ball B can be reliably dropped into any pocket in the swinging effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 180, a configuration for specifying the arrangement of the ball B that performs the swinging operation on the holding piece 6770 will be described. FIG. 180 is a front view of the holding piece 6770. As shown in FIG. 180, instead of the ball detection sensor 679 provided on the front case 672 in the first control example, the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790a to 6790i are provided. Each of these ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i has the same function as the ball detection sensor 679 in the first control example, and detects that the ball B has been placed (passed) in front of the front view. The output becomes H, and when the ball B does not obstruct the near side, the output becomes L. These ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i are arranged inside an opening 6780 provided in the front case 672 in the second control example.

  As the arrangement of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i, specifically, a ball detection sensor (oscillation center sensor) 6790e is provided above the center position of the holding piece 6770. Further, when the holding piece 6770 is equally divided into eight sections (first section to eighth section) in the horizontal direction, the ball detection sensor (first section sensor) 6790a to the ball detection A sensor (fourth section sensor) 6790d, a ball detection sensor (fifth section sensor) 6790f to a ball detection sensor (eighth section sensor) 6790i are provided. That is, the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790d and 6790f to 6790i are arranged at regular intervals in this order from left to right in front view. In the present control example, when the ball B is performing a swinging operation, the arrangement of the ball B above the holding piece 6770 can be specified based on the output information of each sensor. For example, if the ball detection sensor 6790g is on, it indicates that the ball B is located in the sixth section (passing). Further, for example, when the ball detection sensor 6790b is on, it means that the ball B is arranged in the second section (it is passing).

  In this control example, it is determined in which section the ball B is located (passing) from the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i, and the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is varied according to the section. Is configured. That is, as the position of the sphere B moves away from the center of the holding piece 677, the inclination angle toward the center of the holding piece 6770 increases, and when reaching the first section and the eighth section, the maximum inclination angle ( That is, 6 degrees). Accordingly, the force (gravity) of returning the ball B toward the center increases as the ball B moves away from the center of the holding piece 6770, so that the ball B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770. Can be prevented. Therefore, the ball B can be reliably dropped into any pocket in the swinging effect.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 181 and FIG. 182, a configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 181 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222.

  The ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that an amplitude determination table 222e and a swing angle determination table 222f are provided. Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 222 in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The amplitude discrimination table 222e stores the sphere B in accordance with the outputs of the sphere detection sensor (sensor for the first section) 6790a to the sphere detection sensor (sensor for the eighth section) 6790i, and the sphere detection sensor (sensor for the swing center) 6790e. 5 is a data table used to specify the amplitude of the swinging operation performed by the user. The amplitude determination table 222e is referred to when the output of any of the sensors is switched from L to H during the swinging operation of the ball B, and the amplitude of the swinging operation of the ball B is determined. In the present control example, it is determined whether or not the amplitude (period) of the swinging motion of the ball B is sufficiently short based on the amplitude specified by using the amplitude determination table 222e, and the falling condition is satisfied (ie, , The ball fallable flag 223fv is set to ON). Note that the amplitude referred to here is based on the width of the section (see FIG. 180). That is, it is a value indicating how many sections the ball B performs the swinging motion. For example, when the amplitude is “4”, it indicates that the sphere B is performing a swinging operation with an amplitude of four sections to the left and right from the center of the holding piece 6770, respectively. In this control example, when the amplitude becomes "1" (that is, for one section to the left and right), the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to ON (see S5511 in FIG. 187).

  The details of the amplitude determination table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 181 (b). As shown in FIG. 181 (b), the amplitude discrimination table 222e includes the type of the ball detection sensor for which the previous output was detected as H and the ball detection sensor for which the current output was detected as H. The amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the ball B is defined in association with the combination with the type. More specifically, for a combination in which the sensor type for which the H output was previously detected is the sensor for the first section 6790a and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790b for the second section, the amplitude of "4 Is specified. In this combination of sensor types, the ball B reaches the first section by rolling to the left in the swinging operation, and reaches the second section by changing direction and rolling to the left. Means you did. Therefore, since the ball B performs the swinging operation with the amplitude of four sections from the center of the holding piece 6770, “4” is set as the amplitude.

  For the combination of the sensor type for which the H output was previously detected for the second section 6790b and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the third section sensor 6790c, "3" is defined as the amplitude. ing. This combination of sensor types is read out because the ball B in the rocking motion reaches the second section by rolling to the left, and changes direction and rolls to the left in the swinging motion. This is the case where three sections are reached. Therefore, since the ball B performs the swing operation with the amplitude of three sections from the center of the holding piece 6770, “3” is set as the amplitude. Note that, when the direction is changed in the first section and the vehicle passes through the second section and the third section (when the amplitude is determined to be “4”), the amplitude is not overwritten. That is, in the present control example, once the amplitude of the swing operation is determined based on the amplitude determination table 222e, the amplitude is not overwritten until the ball B is detected by the swing center sensor 6790e. . Thereby, the amplitude of the swinging operation performed by the ball B can be more accurately determined.

  Similarly, for the combination in which the sensor type for which the H output was previously detected is the sensor for the third section 6790c and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790d for the fourth section, "2" is set as the amplitude. The combination of the prescribed sensor type for which the H output was previously detected is the fourth section sensor 6790d, the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the swing center sensor 6790e, and the sensor type for which the previous H output was detected is For the combination of the fifth section sensor 6790f and the sensor type for which the H output has been detected this time, the swing center sensor 6790e, “1” is defined as the amplitude. For a combination in which the sensor type for which the H output was previously detected is the sensor 6790g for the sixth section and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790f for the fifth section, "2" is defined as the amplitude. For a combination in which the sensor type for which the H output was previously detected is the sensor for the seventh section 6790h and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790g for the sixth section, "3" is defined as the amplitude, For a combination in which the sensor type for which the H output was previously detected is the sensor for the eighth section 6790i and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790h for the seventh section, "4" is defined as the amplitude. .

  As described above, in the present control example, the configuration is such that the amplitude can be determined in accordance with the order in which the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i enter the H output state. As a result, the amplitude of the ball B can be accurately determined, so that the ball B is dropped into any of the pockets at a more natural timing (after the amplitude of the swing operation becomes “1”). Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 181 (a), the description will be continued. The swing angle determination table 222f is a data table used to set the inclination angle set for the holding piece 6770 based on the arrangement of the sphere B on the holding piece 6770. Details of the swing angle determination table 222f will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the swing angle determination table 222f. As shown in FIG. 182, the swing angle determination table 222f is referred to when any of the outputs of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i is in the H state, and detects the amplitude of the swing operation and the current H. The tilt angle (swing angle) set for the holding piece 6770 is defined in association with the type of the sensor (the current type).

  More specifically, The amplitude is "4", This time, for the combination whose type is the first section sensor 6790a, Six degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle) set for the holding piece 6770. For this reason, In the case where the ball B performs the swinging operation with the amplitude of four sections, When detected by the first section sensor 6790a, The inclination angle of holding piece 6770 is set to the upper limit of 6 degrees. This allows Since the holding piece 6770 is inclined by 6 degrees in a direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front, Offset the momentum of the swinging motion performed by ball B, In the first section, it is possible to change the direction and roll toward the center of the holding piece 6770.

  Similarly, for a combination having an amplitude of “4” and a current type of the second section sensor 6790b, a tilt angle (oscillation angle) of 4 degrees is defined, an amplitude of “4”, and a current type of the third section sensor 6790b. With respect to the combination of the sensor 6790c, 2 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle), the combination of the amplitude “4” and the current type of the sixth section sensor 6790g as the inclination angle (swing angle) − Twice is specified. In addition, for the combination of the amplitude of “4” and the current type of the sensor 6790h for the seventh section, −4 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle), the amplitude of “4”, and the current type of the sensor for the eighth section. For the combination of the sensor 6790i, a tilt angle (swing angle) of −6 degrees is defined. It should be noted that the negative angle means an angle at which the holding piece 6770 is inclined from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front.

  Further, for the combination of the amplitude of “3” and the current type of the second section sensor 6790b, 5 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle), and the amplitude of “3” and the current type of the third section sensor 6790b. For the combination of 6790c, 3 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (oscillation angle), and for the combination of the amplitude “3” and the current type of the sixth section sensor 6790g, −3 as the inclination angle (oscillation angle). For the combination of the degree, the amplitude of “4”, and the current type of the seventh section sensor 6790h, −5 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle).

  Further, for the combination of the amplitude “2” and the current type of the third section sensor 6790c, 4 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle), the amplitude “2” and the current type of the sixth section sensor 6790c. For the combination of 6790 g, -4 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle).

  As described above, by changing the inclination angle (oscillation angle) according to the arrangement of the ball B and the amplitude of the swing operation of the ball B, the ball B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770. Can be suppressed. The reason why the inclination angle is increased as the amplitude of the swinging operation decreases is to prevent (suppress) instantaneous stop when the amplitude decreases. If the amplitude becomes small and the period from when it is determined that the condition for dropping the ball B is satisfied to when the swinging motion of the ball B stops is short, the pocket where the ball B can be dropped is located at the drop position. Before the ball B is placed, the swinging motion of the ball B may be stopped, and the player may feel distrust. On the other hand, in the present control example, since the inclination angle (oscillation angle) increases as the amplitude decreases, the oscillation operation can be continued for a longer time. Therefore, while the swinging operation is being performed (before the swinging operation stops), the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket.

  In this control example, the type of the sensor that detected the ball B and the swing angle are defined for each amplitude, but only the sensor type and the tilt angle (the swing angle) are independent of the amplitude of the swing operation. May be specified. Specifically, for example, the correspondence in the case of the amplitude “4” in this control example may be applied regardless of the amplitude of the swing operation. With this configuration, the data amount of the swing angle determination table 222f can be reduced while preventing the ball B from being ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770.

  In the present control example, the upper limit value of the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is set to 6 degrees, but the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 may be arbitrarily determined within a range that makes it difficult for the player to perceive that the inclination of the holding piece 6770 has been changed. Also, the correspondence between the sensor type and the swing angle can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the ball B does not exit out of the range of the holding piece 6770.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 183, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-described first control example, the RAM 223 in this control example further includes an amplitude counter 223iv, a previous type storage area 223jv, a current type storage area 223kv, and an arrangement specification. A flag 223mv, an arrangement specified flag 223nv, a detection value storage area 223ov, and an amplitude determination flag 223pv are provided.

  The amplitude counter 223iv is a counter that indicates the amplitude of the swing operation, and stores the amplitude (any one of 1 to 4) read from the amplitude determination table 222e. In the amplitude discrimination processing (see FIG. 187), the amplitude counter 223iv overwrites the read amplitude each time a different amplitude is read (S5509 in FIG. 187). On the other hand, when it is determined that the amplitude of the swinging operation has become 1, the value is initialized to 0 after the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to ON (see S5512 in FIG. 187). The amplitude counter 223iv determines whether the falling condition of the ball B is satisfied or not and the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770.

  Each of the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv is a storage area for storing information indicating the type of the sensor (any one of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i). The previous type storage area 223jv stores the type (previous type) of the sensor in which the previous passage of the ball B was detected, and the current type storage area 223kv stores the type of the sensor in which the passage of the current ball B was detected (the current Type) is stored. Based on the sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv, the amplitude of the swing motion performed by the ball B is determined. This time, the type storage area 223 kv stores the H output state of any of the sensors in the swing effect processing 2 (see FIG. 185) when it is detected that any of the sensors is in the H output state. The type is stored (see S1722 and S1727 of FIG. 185). Further, the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv is transferred to the previous type storage area 223jv until a new sensor whose output becomes H is detected (see S1726 in FIG. 185).

  The arrangement specifying flag 223mv is a flag indicating whether the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is being specified. If the arrangement specification in-progress flag 223mv is on, it means that the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is being specified, and if it is off, it means that the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is not being specified. This arrangement specifying flag 223mv is set to ON when the output of any one of the sensors becomes H from the state where the output of the rotation position detection sensor 684 is all L (see S5903 in FIG. 193). On the other hand, when the rotation position of the rotating member 640 is completely specified from the detection results over a plurality of steps, the setting is turned off (see S5809 in FIG. 192 and S6009 in FIG. 194).

  The arrangement specified flag 223nv is a flag indicating whether the specification of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 has been completed. If the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on, it indicates that the specification of the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 has been completed, and if it is off, it means that the specification of the rotating member 640 has not been completed. This arrangement specified flag 223nv is set to ON when the specification of the rotation position of the rotation member 640 is completed based on the detection results of the rotation position detection sensor 684 over a plurality of steps (see S5809 in FIG. 192 and S6009 in FIG. 194). ). On the other hand, when it is detected that all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 have been switched to L after the specification of the arrangement of the rotation member 640 is completed, the setting is turned off ( (See S5906 in FIG. 193).

  The detection value storage area 223ov is a storage area in which the detection values of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 can be stored for a plurality of steps (15 steps). When the above-described arrangement specifying flag 223mj is set to ON, the detection values of the respective detection sensors A to F are stored in the detection value storage area 223ov each time the rotating member 640 rotates one step. If the stored values are normal when the detected values for 15 steps are stored, the rotational position member 640 is specified based on the stored values (S5807 in FIG. 192 and S5807 in FIG. 194). See S6007).

  The amplitude determination flag 223pv is a flag indicating whether or not the amplitude has been determined based on the amplitude determination table 222e when the ball B is performing a swinging operation above the holding piece 6770. If the amplitude determination flag 223pv is on, it means that the amplitude has been determined (the sphere B is rolling toward the center of the movable piece 6770), and if it is off, the amplitude determination has been completed. (The ball B is rolling in a direction away from the center of the movable piece 6770). The amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to ON when the amplitude is determined from the detection result of the ball detection sensor when the ball B is performing the swinging operation (see S5506 in FIG. 187). On the other hand, each time the swing center sensor 6790e detects the passage of the ball B, it is turned off.

<Regarding control processing of voice lamp control device in second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. The main process 2 (see FIG. 184) is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 145) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

  Of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 184) in the second control example, in the processing of S1601 to S1610 and S1612 to S1621, S1601 to S1610 and S1612 of the main processing (see FIG. 145) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing as the processing from S1621 to S1621 is executed. In the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) in the second control example, when the process of S1610 ends, the swing effect process 2 (S1631) is executed instead of the swing effect process (S1611) in the first control example. Is done. In the swing effect process 2 (S1631), similarly to the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) in the first control example, the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 when the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is executed. This is a process for executing various controls from the time when the ball B is thrown to the time when the ball B falls into any pocket (during a swing effect). Details of the swing effect process 2 (S1631) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) in this control example, after the end of the effect setting process (S1613), the rotation setting process 2 (S1632) and the lighting setting process 2 (S1633) are executed, and the process proceeds to S1614. Move to. The rotation setting process 2 (S1632) is a process similar to the rotation setting process (see FIG. 155) executed in the execution command process (see FIG. 155) in the first control example, and is performed during the rotation of the rotating member 640. This is a process for changing the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 under conditions. The lighting setting process 2 (S1633) is a process for controlling the lighting of the rear LED 625, similarly to the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) in the first control example.

  Next, the above-described swing effect process 2 (S1631) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 185. In the swing effect process 2 (S1631) in the second control example, in each of the processes of S1701, S1702, S1704, and S1705, S1701, S1702 of the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) in the first control example, respectively. The same processes as those in S1704 and S1705 are executed.

  In the swing effect process 2 (see FIG. 185) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the swing non-detection flag 223v is ON (S1701: Yes), the ball detection sensor 6890a It is determined whether all the outputs of 〜6890i (see FIG. 180) are in the L state (S1721). If all the outputs are in the L state (S1721: Yes), the ball B is thrown but the holding piece 6770 This means that the processing has not yet been reached, and thus this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1721, if it is determined that any of the outputs of the ball detection sensors 6890a to 6890i is in the H state (S1721: No), then the type of the detection sensor whose output is in the H state is determined. The corresponding information is stored in the current type storage area 223 kv (S1722). Next, 4 which is the maximum value is stored in the amplitude counter 223iv, and the amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to ON (S1723). This is because immediately after the ball B is thrown, the momentum of the ball B is the strongest, and the amplitude should be maximum. After the processing in S1723, the process proceeds to S1704.

  In the swing effect process 2 (see FIG. 185) in the present control example, if it is determined in the process of S1705 that the ball fallable flag 223fv is ON (S1705: Yes), the drop control in the first control example is performed. Instead of the process (see FIG. 147), a drop control process 2 is executed (S1724), and the process ends. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 186, this drop control processing 2 (S1724) is similar to the drop control processing (see FIG. 147) in the first control example, in which the ball B is moved to any pocket. This is the process for dropping.

  In the swing effect process 2 (see FIG. 185) in the present control example, when it is determined in the process of S1705 that the ball fallable flag 223fv is off (S1705: No), the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i ( It is determined whether all the outputs in FIG. 180 are in the L state (S1725). If all the outputs are in the L state (S1725: Yes), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1725, when it is determined that the output of any of the sensors is in the H state (S1725: No), the information stored in the current type storage area 223kv is transferred to the previous type storage area 223jv. Then (S1726), the information corresponding to the type of the sensor that has detected the state of output H in the current process of S1725 is overwritten in the current type storage area 223kv (S1727). As a result, the type of the sensor that has detected the output of H this time is stored in the current type storage area 223 kv, and the type of the sensor that has detected the output of H in the previous processing of S1722 or S1727 is stored in the previous type storage area 223jv. Can be kept.

  After the processing of S1727, the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the ball B is determined based on the storage contents of the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv updated in each processing of S1726 and S1727. An amplitude determination process is performed (S1728). The details of the amplitude determination processing (S1728) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the amplitude discrimination process (S1728) ends, a swing angle control process for setting the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 according to the arrangement of the ball B is executed (S1729), and this process ends. . This swing angle control processing (S1729) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, details of the above-described drop control process 2 (S1724) will be described. This drop control process 2 (S1724) is a process executed in place of the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example to drop the ball B into any pocket, as described above. is there.

  In each of the drop control processes 2 (see FIG. 186) in the second control example (see FIG. 186), the processes in S1803 to S1806 are the same as the respective drop processes in steps S1803 to S1806 in the first control example (see FIG. 147). The processing is executed. When the drop control process 2 (see FIG. 186) in the present control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S1811). This arrangement specified flag 223nv is a flag indicating whether the specification of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 has been completed, as described above. If it is determined that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is not on (that is, it is off) (S1811: No), the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is unknown, and can the ball B be dropped? This means that it is in a state where it cannot be determined whether or not the processing is completed, and thus the present processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1811, when it is determined that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S1811: Yes), the pocket of the drop position is read from the rotation position storage area 223u, and the current arrangement of the rotation member 640 is performed. Is specified (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1803.

  By this drop control process 2 (see FIG. 186), similarly to the first control example, the ball B is dropped into a pocket of an appropriate type according to whether or not the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”.

  Next, the details of the amplitude determination processing (S1728) will be described with reference to FIG. This amplitude determination process (S1728) is one of the swing effect processes (see FIG. 185), and is a process for determining the amplitude of the swing operation performed by the ball B as described above. In the amplitude determination process (see FIG. 187), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the swing center sensor (sphere detection sensor) 6790e is in an H state (S5501). (S5501: Yes), it means that the ball B has reached the upper center of the holding piece 6770 by the swinging operation, so that the amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to ON (S5502), and this processing ends. Accordingly, when the ball B passes through the upper center of the holding piece 6770 and rolls to the opposite side, the amplitude can be determined. Therefore, each time the ball B rolls (oscillates) to the upper right or left side of the holding piece 6770, the amplitude of the swing operation can be determined, so that the amplitude can be determined more accurately.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5501, if it is determined that the output of the swing center sensor (ball detection sensor) 6790e is not H (that is, the output is L) (S5501: No), then, the amplitude determination flag 223pv is turned on. Is determined (S5503). If the amplitude determination flag 223pv is on (S5503: Yes), it means that the amplitude of the swinging motion has already been determined and that it is in the process of rolling toward the center of the holding piece 6770, so this processing is performed as it is. To end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5503 that the amplitude determination flag 223pv is off (S5503: No), the amplitude determination table 222e (see FIG. 181 (b)) is read to determine the amplitude (S5504). ).

  Then, the sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv are compared with the specified contents of the read amplitude determination table 222e, and the combination of the sensor types specified in the amplitude determination table 222e is determined. Is determined (S5505). In the process of S5505, when it is determined that a combination not defined in the amplitude determination table 222e is stored (S5505: No), it is determined that the ball B has not reached the left end or the right end of the swing operation. In other words, since the amplitude cannot be determined from the current combination of sensor types (the combination of the sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv), the present processing is terminated and the swing is performed. It returns to effect processing 2 (refer to FIG. 185).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5505 that the combination of the sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv is defined in the amplitude determination table 222e (S5505: Yes), the amplitude is determined. The flag 223pv is set to ON (S5506), and the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is read (S5507). Next, it is determined whether or not the read value of the amplitude counter 223iv matches the amplitude corresponding to the combination of the sensors defined in the amplitude determination table 222e (S5508).

  In the process of S5508, when it is determined that the amplitudes match (S5508: Yes), it means that the amplitude of the swing operation has not changed, and therefore, the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is not updated and is not changed. This processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5508 that the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is different from the amplitude corresponding to the combination of the sensors defined in the amplitude determination table 222e (S5508: No), the process proceeds from the amplitude determination table 222e. The read amplitude value is updated by overwriting the amplitude counter 223iv (S5509), and it is determined whether the updated value of the amplitude counter 223iv is 1 (S5510). If the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is 1 (S5510), it is determined that the amplitude of the swing operation performed by the ball B is sufficiently small (the condition for dropping the ball B into any pocket is satisfied). Therefore, the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to ON (S5511), the amplitude counter 223iv is initialized to 0, and the amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to OFF (S5512), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5510 that the value of the updated amplitude counter 223iv is not 1 (S5510: No), the amplitude of the swing operation performed by the ball B is relatively large, and the ball B falls. Therefore, the present process is terminated as it is likely to have an unnatural appearance.

  By performing the amplitude determination process (see FIG. 187), the amplitude of the swing operation can be accurately determined based on the outputs of the plurality of ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i provided on the front case 661. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped after the amplitude of the swinging operation performed by the ball B becomes sufficiently small, so that the ball B can be dropped from the holding piece 6770 with a natural appearance.

  Next, the swing angle control processing (S1729) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This swing angle control process (S1729) is one of the swing effect processes (see FIG. 185), and as described above, the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 according to the arrangement of the ball B as described above. This is the process for setting

  When the swing angle control process (see FIG. 188) is executed, first, the value of the amplitude counter 223iv and the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv are read out (S5601). 222f (see FIG. 182) is read (S5602). Next, it is determined whether or not the combination of the value of the amplitude counter 223iv read in the process of S5601 and the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv is specified in the swing angle determination table 222f ( (S5603), when it is determined that the combination is not defined in the swing angle determination table 222f (S5603), it means that it is not necessary to change the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770. Then, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, when it is determined that the combination read in the process of S5601 is specified in the swing angle determination table 222f (S5603: Yes), the swing angle is associated with the combination. The inclination angle (oscillation angle) defined in the determination table 222f is set as the inclination angle (oscillation angle) of the holding piece 6770 (S5604), and the process ends.

  By executing the swing angle control process (see FIG. 188), the inclination angle (swing angle) can be varied according to the arrangement of the ball B and the amplitude of the swing operation of the ball B (ball B). The more away from the center of the holding piece 6770, the greater the inclination toward the center of the holding piece 6770 can be increased.) It can be suppressed more reliably. Further, as described above, the swing angle determination table 222f is configured so that the tilt angle increases as the amplitude of the swing operation decreases, so that when the amplitude decreases, the swing operation is immediately performed. Can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, since the swinging operation can be continued for a longer time, the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket while the swinging operation is performed (before the swinging operation stops). .

  Next, the rotation setting process 2 (S1632) will be described with reference to FIG. The rotation setting process 2 is one of the main processes 2 (see FIG. 184), and is for changing the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 under predetermined conditions during the rotation of the rotating member 640, as described above. Processing. Of the rotation setting processing 2 (see FIG. 189) in the second control example, S2801 and S2805 to S2808 in the rotation setting processing (see FIG. 157) in the first control example are S2801 and S2805 and S2808, respectively. The same processing as the above processing is executed.

  In the rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189) in the present control example, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the ball fallable flag 223fv is on (S2801: Yes), the arrangement specified flag 223nv is turned on. It is determined whether or not is (S2811). If it is determined that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is not on (that is, it is off) (S2811: No), the current arrangement is unknown and the pocket where the ball B can be dropped is located near the drop position. Since it is not possible to determine whether or not they are arranged, the present process is terminated and the process returns to the main process 2 (see FIG. 184).

  On the other hand, in the process of S2811, when it is determined that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S2811: Yes), the information corresponding to the pocket arranged at the drop position is read from the rotation position storage area 223u ( S2812), and the process moves to S2805.

  By executing the rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189), the positional relationship between the current drop position and the nearest pocket where the ball B can be dropped is grasped, and the rotational speed of the rotary member 640 is set to the position. It can be changed according to the relationship. As a result, it is possible to prevent the swing operation from being continued for a long time after the period (amplitude) of the swing operation performed by the ball B is reduced, so that any one of the pockets can be more naturally viewed. The ball B can be dropped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 190, execution command processing 2 (S2121) executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 150) instead of execution command processing (S2113, see FIG. 155) in the first control example will be described. I do. This execution command processing 2 (see FIG. 190) is, similarly to the execution command processing (see FIG. 155) in the first control example, a role driven by the motor driver in accordance with the execution command output from various motor drivers. This is a process for determining the progress of the operation of the object and performing control according to the progress.

  In the execution command processing 2 (see FIG. 190) in the second control example, in each of S2601 to S2608 and S2611 to S2614, in the execution command processing (see FIG. 155) in the first control example, S2601 to S2608 are executed. Also, the same processing as the respective processing of S2611 to S2614 is executed. In the execution command processing 2 (see FIG. 190) in this control example, when the processing of S2608 ends, the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are monitored over a plurality of steps (15 steps). (Sampling), and an arrangement specifying process for specifying the pocket arranged at the drop position is executed (S2621), and this process ends. Details of the arrangement specifying process (S2621) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart illustrating the above-described arrangement specifying process (S2621). When this arrangement specifying process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the swing effect flag 223ev is on (S5701). If it is determined that the swing effect flag 223ev is off (S5701: No), the ball B swings At the stage before the operation is performed, the during-rotation specifying process for specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is executed (S5702), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5701 that the swing effect flag 223ev is ON (S5701: Yes), the swinging identifying process for identifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 during the execution of the swing effect is performed. Execute (S5703) and end this process. Details of the during-rotation specifying process (S5702) and the during-swing specifying process (S5703) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 192 to 194.

  First, with reference to FIG. 192, details of the during-rotation identification process (S5702) will be described. When the during-rotation identification process (see FIG. 192) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the placement identification flag 223mv is on (S5801), and it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off). In this case (S5801: No), it is determined whether the output of the rotational position detection sensor 684 has been displaced (the output of any of the detection sensors A to F has been switched from the L state to the H state). Is determined, and when the output is displaced, a non-specified time process for starting the specification of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is executed (S5802), and this process ends. Details of the non-specification process (S5802) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5801 that the placement specification flag 223mv is on (S5801: Yes), the combination of the detection values (output) of the detection sensors A to F is stored in each storage area of the detection value storage area 223ov. Of these, the data is stored in a free area where no data is stored (S5803). Then, it is determined whether or not the output combinations of the detection sensors A to F have been stored in the detection value storage area 223ov for the upper limit of 15 sets (S5804). If it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached (S5804). : No), which means that the number of detections required to determine the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is less than the number of detections, and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5804 that the detected value storage area 223ov is stored with the upper limit (15 sets) of detected value combinations (S5804: Yes), the detected value is stored in the detected value storage area 223ov. It is determined whether the combination of all the detected values is the same (S5805). If it is determined that a combination of mutually different detection values is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S5805: No), all data stored in the detection value storage area 223ov is reset (S5806). Then, the present process ends. By resetting all the data, the combination of the detected values can be stored again in the detected value storage area 223ov until the upper limit (15 sets) is reached for each operation step.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5805, when it is determined that all the combinations of the detection values stored in the detection value storage area 223ov are the same (S5805: Yes), the rotation position determination table 222c is read, and the detection sensors A to F are read. The pocket specified in association with the combination of the detected values is specified (S5807), and information corresponding to the specified pocket is stored in the rotational position storage area 223u (S5808). Then, the placement specification flag 223mv is set to off, and the placement specification completed flag 223nv is set to on (S5809), and this process ends.

  By executing the rotation identification processing (see FIG. 192), the combination of the outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over 15 operation steps and changed to the detection result. It is possible to identify the pocket corresponding to the detection result after judging whether or not there is any. Therefore, the output of any one of the detection sensors is displaced by noise or the like, or the rattling of the rotating member 640 causes the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket to be disposed at the detected position. Even if it is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

  In this control example, if at least one of the combinations of the detection values for the 15 steps is different, the detection value is stored regardless of the timing at which the combination is stored and the number of times different combinations are stored. The configuration is such that the area 223ov is reset, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, of the combinations stored in the detection value storage area 223ov, only the storage area in which a different combination is stored is cleared, and the detection value is additionally acquired by the number of times in which the different combination is stored, and the area is cleared. It may be stored and it may be determined whether all combinations match. Accordingly, when a combination of different detection values is included, it is not necessary to obtain an additional 15 steps of detection value combinations each time, so that it is possible to reduce the time required to specify the pocket at the drop position. it can.

  Next, the details of the non-specification process (S5802) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the non-specific processing (S5802). As described above, in the non-specified time process (S5802), the output of the rotational position detection sensor 684 is displaced (from the state of all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F being L to the state of the output of any of the sensors being H). This is a process for determining whether or not the output has been displaced, and when the output has been displaced, starts specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640.

  When the non-specified time process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S5901). It is determined whether all are L (S5902). In the process of S5902, when it is determined that all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are L (S5902: Yes), it means that no pocket is arranged at the drop position, and the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is detected. Since this processing cannot be performed, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5902, when it is determined that any of the detection sensors A to F is in the H state (S5902: No), it is determined that one of the pockets is arranged at the drop position. Means that the output of the sensor has been displaced. Therefore, in this case, in order to monitor (monitor) the outputs of the detection sensors A to F over a plurality of operation steps in the rotation operation, the arrangement specifying flag 223mv is set to ON (S5903), and the rotation position is stored. The information corresponding to the pocket placed at the previous drop position stored in the area 223u is cleared and reset (S5904), and the process ends. By turning on the arrangement specification flag 223mv, in the subsequent rotation specification processing (see FIG. 192), in the processing of S5801, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored over a plurality of steps. S5803 to S5809 can be executed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5901 that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is ON (S5901: Yes), then, it is determined whether all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are L. It is determined (S5905), and when it is determined that the outputs of all the sensors are L (S5905: Yes), the arrangement specified flag 223nv is turned off (S5906), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the output of at least one of the detection sensors A to F is H (S5905: No), the process ends. By executing the processes of S5905 and S5906, the period during which the arrangement specified flag 223nv is ON can be limited to only while the detected portion 641c passes through the positions of the detection sensors A to F. it can. That is, the period during which the arrangement of the rotating member 640 stored in the rotational position storage area 223u is referred to can be limited to the period during which the detected portion 641c passes the position of each of the detection sensors A to F. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the detected portion 641c passes through the positions of the detection sensors A to F and, for example, a drop of the ball B is set in a state where two pockets straddle the drop position. be able to.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 194, details of the swinging identification process (S5704) will be described. This rocking identification processing (S5704) is one of the arrangement identification processing (see FIG. 191), and is processing for identifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 during execution of the rocking effect, as described above. is there.

  When the swinging identification process (see FIG. 194) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the arrangement identification flag 223mv is on (S6001), and it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off). If (S6001: No), the above-described non-specific processing is executed (S6002), and this processing ends. Since the non-specific processing (S6002) is the same as the non-specific processing (S5802, see FIG. 193), which is one of the rotating specifying processing (see FIG. 192), its detailed processing is described in detail. Description is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6001 that the placement specification flag 223mv is ON (S6001: Yes), the combination of the detection values (output) of the detection sensors A to F is stored in each storage area of the detection value storage area 223ov. Of these, data is stored (stored) in a free area where no data is stored (S6003). Then, it is determined whether the combinations of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F have been stored (stored) in the detection value storage area 223ov for the upper limit of 15 sets (S6004), and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached. (S6004: No) means that the number of detections required to determine the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is less than the number of times, and thus the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6004 that the combination of the upper limit number (15 sets) of the detection value is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S6004: Yes), the combination is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov. It is determined whether or not 80% (2) or more of the 15 combinations of the detection values have the same detection result (S6005). If it is determined that the same combination of detection results is less than 80% (S6005: No), all data stored in the detection value storage area 223ov is reset (S6006), and the process ends. I do. By resetting all the data, the combination of the detected values can be stored again in the detected value storage area 223ov until the upper limit (15 sets) is reached for each operation step.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6005, if it is determined that 80% or more of the combinations of the detection values among the 15 combinations of the detection values stored in the detection value storage area 223ov are the same (S6005: Yes), the rotational position is determined. The discrimination table 222c is read, a pocket defined in association with the combination of the detection values of the detection sensors A to F is specified (S6007), and information corresponding to the specified pocket is stored in the rotation position storage area 223u (S6007). (S6008). Then, the placement specification flag 223mv is set to off, and the placement specification completed flag 223nv is set to on (S6009), and the process ends.

  By executing the swinging specific process (see FIG. 194), the combination of the outputs (detected values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over 15 operation steps, and 80% or more The pocket corresponding to the detection result that matches at the ratio can be specified. That is, since the conditions for specifying the pockets are less strict than in the specification processing during rotation (see FIG. 192), the arrangement of the rotation member 640 (the pocket at the drop position) can be specified more quickly. It should be noted that the during-swinging specific process (see FIG. 194) is executed only during the execution of the swaying effect. The swing effect is an effect in which the ball B is finally dropped into any pocket, as described above. For this reason, if it takes time until the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified, the timing of dropping the ball B is also delayed, and there is a possibility that the ball B cannot be dropped into a target pocket. On the other hand, in the present control example, during the execution of the rocking effect, the rocking determination process is performed with a weak determination condition (that is, the time until the arrangement is specified is relatively short) (see FIG. 194). Configuration. Thus, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be specified more quickly, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target type of pocket.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second control example has the configuration in which the holding piece 6770 whose tilt angle is variable is provided, and the tilt angle of the holding piece 6770 is variable according to the arrangement of the sphere B above the holding piece 6770. The configuration is such that Here, if the arrangement of the holding piece 6770 is fixed in swinging the ball B, if the momentum when the ball B is thrown is too strong (initial velocity is too fast), the ball B There is a risk of passing through the upper surface of the 6770 and entering an unexpected position such as the back side of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, as a method of performing the swinging operation on the upper portion of the holding piece 6770 regardless of the force of the ball B, a method of widening the width of the holding piece 6770 or a steep slope from both sides of the holding piece 6770 toward the center is used. However, if the width of the holding piece 6770 is increased, it is necessary to secure a space correspondingly, so that there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design is reduced. In addition, when the inclination of the holding piece 6770 toward the center is steep, the amplitude (period) of the swinging operation is likely to be small, so that the time for the ball B to perform the swinging operation becomes short, and the ball B falls. There is a risk that the ball B will stop before the movement. In other words, there is a possibility that the appearance of the ball B does not fall into the pocket even though the ball B is at rest, resulting in an extremely unnatural appearance.

  On the other hand, in the present second control example, the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is configured to be variable. The inclination angle is controlled such that the more the ball B moves away from the upper center of the holding piece 6770 by the swinging operation, the larger the inclination of the downward direction toward the upper center of the holding piece 6770 becomes. Accordingly, the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 while the ball B performs the swinging operation can be set to the direction in which the ball B always flows down toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770 due to excessively strong swinging motion performed by the ball B. It can be securely held at the top and dropped into any pocket. Further, by making the configuration in which the ball B is held above the holding piece 6770 by changing the inclination angle (the swing angle), it is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the holding piece 6770, and to save space. be able to. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. Further, in the second control example, the inclination angle (oscillation angle) is configured to decrease as the ball B approaches the upper center of the holding piece 6770, so that the momentum of the oscillation operation is reduced. It can be difficult to be. Therefore, since the swinging operation can be continued for a longer time, the ball B can be surely dropped into any pocket before the swinging operation of the ball B is stopped.

  Further, in the second control example, when the outputs of the detection sensors A to F for detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 are displaced (the output of at least one of the detection sensors becomes H), a plurality of operation steps are performed. To monitor (sampling) the outputs of the detection sensors A to F, and determine the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket arranged at the drop position) based on the detection results over the plurality of operation steps. It is configured. With such a configuration, the output of any one of the detection sensors is displaced due to noise or the like, or the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket is moved to the detected position due to rattling of the rotating member 640 or the like. Even if the arrangement timing is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be specified accurately.

  In this control example, two types of specifying methods are provided as a method of specifying the rotational position of the rotating member 640. As a first method, a combination of outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over a predetermined step (15 steps) of operation steps, and all detections for the predetermined step (15 steps) are detected. When the combination of the values is the same, a method of specifying a pocket corresponding to the detection result is set. In this method, when at least one combination of the detection results is different from the combination of the other detection results, the combination of the detection results for the predetermined step is obtained again, and the combinations of all the detection results are matched. Only when this is done, the type of pocket is specified. According to this first method, the output of any one of the detection sensors is displaced due to noise or the like, and the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket is moved to the detected position due to rattling of the rotating member 640 or the like. Even when the timing at which the rotating member 640 is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

  On the other hand, as a second method, a combination of outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over a predetermined step (15 steps) of operation steps, and is monitored for a predetermined step (15 steps). When a combination of detected values equal to or more than 80% (that is, for 12 steps) among the combinations of detected values is the same, a method is set to specify a pocket corresponding to the combination of detected results occupying 80%. ing. Compared to the first method, the second method is configured to allow a maximum of 20% of the displacement of the detection result, which is inferior in accuracy, but has little re-detection. Can be shortened. This second method is adopted when the ball B is dropped into a pocket. In order to determine whether or not to drop the ball B, when specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640, if it takes time to specify the arrangement, the timing for dropping the ball B is also delayed, and the aim is increased. There is a possibility that the ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket. On the other hand, in the present control example, during the execution of the rocking effect, the rocking determination process is performed with a weak determination condition (that is, the time until the arrangement is specified is relatively short) (see FIG. 194). Configuration. Thus, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be specified more quickly, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target type of pocket.

  In the second control example, in the first method and the second method, the detection result of the rotation position detection sensor 684 for 15 steps is monitored (sampled), and based on the detection result for the 15 steps. Although the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified or the re-detection is determined, the number of monitoring (sampling) steps is not limited to 15 steps. It may be arbitrarily determined according to the number of steps at which the detected portion 641c can be detected.

  In the second control example, it is determined which section of the eight sections (first section to eighth section) the ball B is passing in the swing effect, and the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is determined. Although variable, it is not limited to this. The number of sphere detection sensors may be increased along with the increase of the section, or the number of sphere detection sensors may be reduced along with the decrease of the section. When the number of sections is increased, the arrangement of the sphere B can be specified more accurately, so that the angle of the holding piece 6770 can be set more finely. On the other hand, if the number of sections is reduced, the number of sensors can be reduced, so that the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. Further, the failure rate can be reduced.

  In this control example, the type of sensor that detected the ball B and the swing angle are defined for each swing amplitude of the ball B in the swing angle determination table 222f (see FIG. 182). Regardless of the amplitude of the dynamic operation, only the sensor type and the tilt angle (swing angle) may be defined. Specifically, for example, the correspondence (see the amplitude “4” in FIG. 182) in the case of the amplitude “4” in this control example may be applied regardless of the amplitude of the swing operation. With this configuration, the data amount of the swing angle determination table 222f can be reduced while preventing the ball B from being ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770.

  In the present control example, the upper limit value of the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is set to 6 degrees, but the player can arbitrarily change the tilt of the holding piece 6770 within a range where it is difficult to perceive the change. May be determined. Also, the correspondence between the sensor type and the swing angle can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the ball B does not exit out of the range of the holding piece 6770.

  In the second control example, when the rotation member 640 is rotating and any pocket is placed at the drop position before the ball B is thrown, the detection sensors A to The output of F is monitored, and if at least one of the combinations of outputs for the 15 steps is different, regardless of the timing at which the combination is stored or the number of times different combinations are stored, the detected value storage area is not changed. The 223ov is configured to be reset (that is, the monitoring of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is additionally performed for 15 steps), but is not limited thereto. For example, of the combinations stored in the detection value storage area 223ov, only the storage area in which a different combination is stored is cleared, and the detection value is additionally acquired by the number of times in which the different combination is stored, and the area is cleared. It may be stored and it may be determined whether all combinations match. Accordingly, when a combination of different detection values is included, it is not necessary to obtain an additional 15 steps of detection value combinations each time, so that it is possible to reduce the time required to specify the pocket at the drop position. it can.

  In the second control example, when any one of the pockets of the rotating member 640 is placed at the drop position, the combinations of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are monitored for 15 steps, and all the combinations match. (1st method) or when it is determined that 80% of the 15 steps match (2nd method), the pocket at the drop position is specified. The number of steps for specifying (arrangement of the rotating member 640) is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. By adopting the number of steps (for example, 10 steps) smaller than 15 steps, the pocket at the drop position (the arrangement of the rotating member 640) can be specified more quickly. In addition, by adopting a step number greater than 15 steps (for example, 18 steps), it is possible to more accurately specify the pocket at the drop position (the arrangement of the rotating member 640). In addition, in the first method and the second method, the number of steps for specifying the pocket at the drop position (arrangement of the rotating member 640) does not necessarily need to be the same, and different numbers of steps are employed. Is also good.

  In the second control example, when one of the pockets of the rotating member 640 is placed at the drop position, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored for 15 steps, and the detection result for 15 steps is obtained. Contains at least one combination of different detection values (the first method), or when it is determined that the combination of the detection values is less than 80% in the 15 steps (the second method). Although the configuration is such that the detected values for the additional 15 steps are monitored, it is not always necessary to monitor the detected values for the 15 steps. For example, in the first method, when a detection value changes in the middle of 15 steps, monitoring of an additional 15 steps may be started at that time. Also, for example, in the second method, even if the number of detected steps is less than 15 steps, if it is determined that the matching detection value is less than 80% of 15 steps (for 12 steps), an additional You may comprise so that monitoring of 15 steps may be started. With this configuration, the pocket can be specified more quickly.

  In this control example, when it is determined that one of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F has been displaced during the rotation of the rotating member 640 (the outputs of all the detection sensors have changed from the L state). In addition, irrespective of the type of the sensor whose output has been displaced, the configuration is such that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored during the rotation operation for 15 steps from that point, but is not limited to this. is not. For example, in consideration of the rattling of the rotating member 640, the detection value of the sensor which is most likely to detect the detected portion 641c among the detection sensors (for example, after reaching the first section S1) The monitoring of the detection values for 15 steps may be started when the detection sensor A) disposed at the position where the shortest distance has been rotated has been displaced. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that there is a combination of detection values that are inconsistent among the detection values for the 15 steps, and thus it is possible to make it difficult to perform monitoring again. Therefore, the arrangement of each pocket of the rotating member 640 can be specified more quickly.

  In this control example, regarding the configuration in which the arrangement is determined from the combination of the outputs of the six detection sensors, the first method (when all outputs for a predetermined step are the same, the output corresponding to the same output is determined) However, the first method is not limited to a configuration including six detection sensors. The number of sensors may be large (for example, 10) or small (for example, a single sensor). Further, the first method can be applied to uses other than the use for specifying the arrangement. For example, when it is detected that any of the outputs of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i has switched from the L state to the H state, the output of the detection sensor is output a predetermined number of times (for example, over five main processes. The monitoring may be performed, and if the outputs are all H during a predetermined number of monitoring periods, the configuration may be such that it is determined that the ball B has passed the detection sensor. With this configuration, when the output of the detection sensor instantaneously becomes H regardless of the passage of the ball B due to the influence of noise or the like, the ball B passes the corresponding sensor from the H output. It can be prevented that the user mistakenly recognizes that he / she has done it. Therefore, when the ball B performs the swinging operation, the arrangement of the ball B can be determined more accurately.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, it is configured to determine whether or not the winning pocket (lucky number) is increased (added) in a predetermined period after the “normal mode” or the “preparation mode” starts. . Then, when the additional is determined, in the increase effect executed in the “preparation mode”, the pocket to be increased (added) is randomly determined from the out-of-off pockets. Thereby, in the “roulette chance effect” executed thereafter, it is possible to make the ball B feel as if it is easy to fall into the hitting pocket. Expectations for "mode" can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, when an additional is determined and a winning pocket is determined in the increased effect, a section in which the ratio of the winning pocket is intentionally high is provided. This allows the player to more closely watch the correspondence between the arrangement of the section having a high winning pocket ratio and the momentum (period) of the swinging operation performed by the ball B above the holding piece 677. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the “roulette chance effect” can be further improved.

  In the above-described first control example, the control and the effect in the “normal mode” and the “preparation mode” have been mainly described.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, a description will be given of a chance-continuous effect, which is one of the entertaining effects performed during the “long-split mode” on the third symbol display device 81. Although the details will be described later, the chance consecutive production is a type of entertainment production for indicating whether or not a big hit occurs in the “renjo mode”.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example in terms of configuration is the “chance-continuous production”, which is the production mode executed during the “renjo mode”. Are added, the method of allocating the hit pockets allocated during the “prepare mode” is changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and The point is that a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. Other configurations and various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described above. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the above-described first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 195 to FIG. 196, a description will be given of the “continuous chance effect” executed during the “rensou mode” of the third control example. This “continuation of chance chance effect” is an effect of notifying that the result of the lottery is a big hit by stopping and displaying the chance opportunity a plurality of times (three times) at predetermined intervals (1.2 second intervals).

  Here, as in the above-described first control example, the “rensou mode” in the third control example includes the hit short fluctuation (0.2 seconds) and the hit middle fluctuation (3 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit. Are selected at a ratio of about one to one. In addition, as a variation pattern at the time of departure, a departure short variation (0.2 seconds) and a departure middle variation (3 seconds) are selected at a ratio of about 4: 1.

  Thus, in the “long-sleeping mode”, the fluctuation time is determined to be shorter than the fluctuation time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the “normal mode”. It can be executed quickly. Further, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game in the “rensou mode” becomes monotonous.

  In addition, in the “rensou mode” during which the working hours are shortened, the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 causes the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a to be easily opened, and the second entrance 640a is closed. Since it is easy to win, the ball is fired toward the second ball entrance 640a so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67. Thus, a game (a so-called “right-handed game”) is executed in which the electric accessory 640b is opened and the second winning opening 640a wins a prize.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example, similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first control example, the lottery of the special symbol 2 executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640a is performed. It is configured not to be suspended.

  In a conventional gaming machine, in a predetermined gaming state in which the fluctuation time is shorter than that in a normal gaming state (such as during a time reduction), the player is notified whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Since it is difficult to execute an effect with one variation time, an effect using a plurality of variation times is performed based on winning information stored and stored (a so-called “look-ahead effect”).

  However, in the third control example, as described above, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is configured not to be suspended, and the above-described “look-ahead effect” cannot be executed. Therefore, in the third control example, in a predetermined gaming state (“long-sleeping mode”) in which the fluctuation time is determined to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state, the special control is not provided to the player without using the “look-ahead effect”. It is configured to be able to execute “continuous chance chance effect” as an effect that indicates whether the result of the symbol lottery is a jackpot.

  FIG. 195 (a) is a timing chart illustrating an example of an effect mode corresponding to a winning middle change in the “continuous-effect effect” executed during the “rensou-mode”. The hit middle change is a change pattern selected when the big hit is won, and includes a change time of 3 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. The effect mode corresponding to the winning middle variation is selected in the variation pattern selection processing with reference to the extended-village big-hit table 222a3 (see FIG. 198) (S6107 in FIG. 206).

  With reference to FIG. 195 (a), more specific contents will be described. FIG. 195 (a) is a timing chart showing a state in which “third consecutive chance effect” is executed as an example of an effect mode corresponding to the winning middle fluctuation in “chance continuous effect”. When the “3rd consecutive chance effect” is executed, the opportunity is stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals within one fluctuation time.

  First, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), when the hit middle fluctuation is started (executed) in which the “three consecutive chances effect” is set, first, the pseudo fluctuation is started (executed) (the pseudo fluctuation period is 0.2). Seconds). The pseudo fluctuation is a pseudo fluctuation display until the third symbol is pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped) at the chance, and 0.2 seconds which is the same as the fluctuation time when the short fluctuation is executed. Fluctuating time is set.

  Note that a display mode (non-stop display mode) in which the player does not recognize that the third symbol is stopped at a specific symbol may be executed during the period in which the pseudo variation is performed. May be changed so as to switch, or only a specific symbol may be rotated. In addition, a display mode in which the symbol itself is moved at a high speed or reduced so that it is difficult to visually recognize the symbol may be used so that the player cannot recognize the symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, when the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) elapses, the opportunity (first opportunity) is stopped and displayed (the opportunity stop period is 0.5 seconds). The stop display of the chance is to display the third symbol in a display mode (temporary stop display mode) in which the player recognizes that the third symbol is stopped at a specific symbol, and the short variation is displayed. Is set to the same time as the confirmation time (0.5 seconds) when is executed.

  The temporary stop display mode includes a display mode in which a specific symbol is slightly shaken, in addition to a display mode in which the third symbol is completely stopped. By executing the stop display of the chance eyes in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that one change has ended before the change time of the special symbol (3 seconds in the case of the hit middle change) ends. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to perform an effect of recognizing that a plurality of changes are being performed while a single change of the special symbol is being performed.

  As described above, when the middle fluctuation is executed, the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) and the opportunity stop period (0.5 seconds) are changed by the fluctuation time (period) of the short fluctuation (0.2 seconds). Is set so as to be executed in the same period as the fixed time (period) (0.5 seconds), so that the chance stop display in the middle fluctuation can be displayed to the player without discomfort.

  When the chance stop period elapses, the third symbol is pseudo-stopped (the pseudo stop period is 0.7 seconds). The pseudo stop is a pseudo display of a period until the next change is executed. In the third control example, as described above, the right-handed game is executed during the “rensou mode”, so that the ball enters the second entrance 640a after the special symbol stops changing (start winning). However, a non-game period may occur before the special symbol is changed again.

  Specifically, when the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the “renjo mode” during which the working hours are reduced, the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) fluctuates for 3 seconds (see S620 in FIG. 135), and thereafter, If the symbol lottery result is a hit (S615 in FIG. 135: Yes), the movable control is performed such that the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a executes opening for one second twice (FIG. 135). See S616). Therefore, there may be a case where a time lag occurs after the change of the special symbol is stopped and before the electric accessory 640b is opened and the ball enters the second entrance 640a. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example is configured so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640a is not suspended. Therefore, there may be a non-game period in which a new special symbol is not changed.

  Returning to FIG. 195 (a), the description will be continued. The period in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped is a period for pseudo-displaying a period corresponding to the non-game period described above. A variation similar to the variation of the special symbol can be executed by one middle variation.

  Here, the display mode in the case of performing the pseudo stop may be any display mode that allows the player to recognize the non-game period. For example, the display mode of the third symbol during the chance stop period may be used. A display mode in which the swing width is smaller than the display mode, or a display mode in which the background image of the third symbol display device is switched from the background image corresponding to the change of the special symbol to the background image corresponding to the non-game period.

  In the third control example, as a pseudo-fluctuation effect in which a plurality of changes are performed while one middle change is being performed, the player does not feel uncomfortable. In addition, a pseudo fluctuation period that is the same time as the fluctuation period of the short fluctuation, a chance stop period that is the same time as the symbol confirmation period of the short fluctuation is set, and a non-game period is displayed in a pseudo manner. Although a pseudo stop period is provided for performing the above, it is not necessary to provide all of the components.

  For example, the configuration of the pseudo stop period may be eliminated by extending the chance stop period by the period corresponding to the pseudo stop period and setting the chance stop period to 1.2 seconds. Even with such a configuration, there is an effect that the pseudo fluctuation effect can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  The “three consecutive chance presentations” shown in FIG. 195 (a) are based on the above-described pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds), chance stop period (0.5 seconds), and pseudo stop period (0.7 seconds). The configured pseudo effect (1.4 seconds) is executed twice, and the third pseudo variation (0.2 seconds) is executed after the end of the second pseudo effect. Until the end of the third pseudo variation, the special symbol is changed within the variation time (3 seconds), and the third chance stop display (0.5 seconds) is set to the special symbol determination time (0 seconds). .5 seconds). Then, the big hit is started (executed) after the stop display period (special symbol determination time) at the third chance.

  As described above, the “three consecutive chance effects” shown in FIG. 195 (a) is the timing 0.2 seconds, 1.6 seconds, and 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, that is, 1.4 seconds. Since the chances are stopped and displayed three times at intervals, it is configured to be able to execute an effect mode in which the chances are stopped a plurality of times at predetermined intervals within the single fluctuation time during the “rensou mode”. ing. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations without using the “look-ahead effect”.

  In the “3rd chance chance effect” described with reference to FIG. 195 (a), the stop display of the third chance is executed using the special symbol determination time (0.5 seconds). For example, the period until the stop display of the third chance is executed within the range of the special symbol fluctuation time (3 seconds), and the special symbol determination time (0.5 seconds) is determined as the special symbol hit. , A combination of the third symbols (for example, a combination in which the same numeral symbols are aligned) may be stopped and displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current fluctuation is a hit.

  On the other hand, FIG. 195 (b) is a diagram showing, in a timing chart, an example of an effect mode corresponding to a departure middle fluctuation in the “continuous line effect” executed during the “rensou mode”. The deviation middle fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern selected when a jackpot is not won (is lost by a special symbol lottery), and is composed of a fluctuation time of 3 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. You. The effect mode corresponding to the deviation middle fluctuation is selected in the fluctuation pattern selection processing with reference to the extended short hit table 222a3 (see FIG. 198) (S6107 in FIG. 206).

  With reference to FIG. 195 (b), more specific contents will be described. FIG. 195 (b) is a timing chart showing a state in which “two consecutive chances for a miss” has been executed as an example of an effect mode corresponding to the deviation middle fluctuation in “continuous effects for the chance”. When the "two consecutive chances for miss" effect is executed, the chances are stopped and displayed twice at predetermined intervals within one fluctuation time, and finally the third symbol is stopped at the complete miss. Is displayed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 195 (b), when the departure middle fluctuation in which the “two consecutive chances for departure effect” is set is started (executed), the “third consecutive chance” described above with reference to FIG. 195 (a) is started. The pseudo variation is executed twice as in the case of the “effect”. After that, the third pseudo variation is executed (0.2 seconds), and the completely departure stop display (0.5 seconds) is executed using the special symbol determination time (0.5 seconds).

  As described above, in the "two consecutive chances presentation for departure" shown in FIG. 195 (b), the chance eyes are stopped and displayed at a timing of 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the “rensou mode”, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which the chance is stopped a plurality of times at predetermined intervals within the single fluctuation time. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations without using the “look-ahead effect”.

  In addition, the first and second chances are stopped and displayed at the same timing as that of the “third consecutive chance effect” described above (at a timing of 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). Therefore, the player can expect the jackpot until the current change ends (until the complete gap stops).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196 (a), among the “continuous-challenge effects” executed during the “rensou-mode”, a description will be given of an effect mode in a case where an out-of-short fluctuation and a hit short fluctuation are executed. I do. FIG. 196 (a) shows the “chance-eye effect” in the “chance-eye continuous effect” executed during the “ren-so-mode”, which is executed for two consecutive fluctuations as an effect mode corresponding to the short-circuit change. It is the figure which showed the timing chart at the time of performing "chance eye effect" as an effect mode corresponding to a hit short fluctuation. The deviation short variation is a variation pattern that is selected when a jackpot is not won (a loss is won), and includes a variation time of 0.2 seconds and a confirmation time of 0.5 seconds. The effect mode corresponding to the deviation short variation is selected by referring to the extended holiday table 222a4 (see FIG. 199) in the variation pattern selection processing (S6107 in FIG. 206). In addition, the hit short variation is a variation pattern selected when a jackpot is won, and the process of selecting the variation time, the fixed time, and the effect mode is the same as the above-mentioned out-of-short variation, and therefore the description thereof is omitted. I do.

  With reference to FIG. 196 (a), more specific contents will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 196 (a), when the off-short variation in which “chance eye effect” is set is started (executed), the variation is started (executed) (the variation period is 0.2 seconds). Then, when the fluctuation period elapses, a chance that indicates that the current fluctuation is not a hit (is out of range) is stopped and displayed, and the symbol is determined (determination period 0.5 seconds).

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third control example, the fluctuating time (0.2 seconds) and the fixed time (0.5 seconds) in the short fluctuation are executed during the middle fluctuation (the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds)). And the opportunity stop period (0.5 seconds) are set to be the same timing. Therefore, since it is possible to execute the simulated effect performed during the middle change and the simulated effect performed in the short change at the same timing, the player may feel uncomfortable with the simulated effect performed during the middle change. There is an effect that it can be eliminated.

  Returning to FIG. 196 (a), the description will be continued. After the stop display (first time) of the chance is executed, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped until the next fluctuation starts (until a new ball (start winning) is generated in the second entrance 640a). (Floating suspension period). During this fluctuation stop period, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and the background screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in order to make the player recognize that the special symbol has not changed is changed from the changing background screen. The screen is switched to the background screen while the fluctuation is stopped.

  Then, when a new start prize is generated, a short-circuiting change for “off” in which “chance effect” is set as the next change is started (executed), and the second chance is stopped and displayed. Regarding this short variation for departure, an effect based on the same effect mode as the first chance display described above is displayed.

  Next, the winning short variation that has won the jackpot is executed, the third chance is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot is started (executed) after the lapse of the opportunity stop period.

  Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 198, in the third control example, the chance is won as the chance is stopped and displayed three times at a predetermined interval (interval of 1.4 seconds). In the state in which the short-circuit fluctuation for release with the “chance eye effect” set is performed twice consecutively, if the next short-circuit fluctuation is a short-circuit fluctuation, the “chance eye effect” is displayed. The effect is configured to be able to be set, and in the case of the next change being a short-circuit change, the “chance eye effect” is not set.

  By doing so, when the short fluctuations are repeated a plurality of times, the chances are stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals over a plurality of fluctuations, even though the lottery result is out of order. Can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196 (b), among the “continuous-challenge effects” executed in the “in the extended-village mode”, an effect mode in a case where the short-circuit variation is executed three times in a row will be described. . FIG. 196 (b) shows the “chance-eye effect” in the “continuous-chase effect” executed during the “ren-so-mode” in two consecutive changes as an effect mode corresponding to a miss short-circuit change, and thereafter. It is the figure which showed the timing chart at the time of performing "normal production" as a production mode corresponding to a short variation. The deviation short variation is a variation pattern that is selected when a jackpot is not won (a loss is won), and includes a variation time of 0.2 seconds and a confirmation time of 0.5 seconds. The effect mode corresponding to the deviation short variation is selected by referring to the extended holiday table 222a4 (see FIG. 199) in the variation pattern selection processing (S6107 in FIG. 206).

  First, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), if the off-short fluctuation fluctuates again after two consecutive out-of-short fluctuations in which the “chance eye effect” is set, the effect corresponding to the out-of-short fluctuation The mode is configured so that “chance eye effect” is not selected (see FIG. 199), and “normal effect” is executed as shown in FIG. 196 (b).

  The “normal effect” corresponding to the deviation short variation is an effect mode in which the chance eyes are not stopped and displayed, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the complete deviation after performing the variation display for 0.2 seconds.

  In the third control example, an effect that suggests the result of the lottery (so-called “continuous effect chance effect”) is executed by an effect mode in which the chance is stopped and displayed at a predetermined interval a plurality of times. As a mode executed in the above, a mode other than the stop display of the chance eye may be used. For example, the upper lifting unit 300 may be moved at predetermined intervals. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the result of the lottery using a configuration other than the display of the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide an effect that enhances the interest to the player.

  In the third control example, an interval of 1.4 seconds is provided as the predetermined interval. However, the interval may be shifted within a range in which the player has difficulty in recognizing, for example, an error range of about 0.2 before and after. A predetermined interval may be included. Thereby, in the gaming state in which the winning information of the special symbol 2 is not held and stored, even if the change of the special symbol does not immediately start, it is possible to execute the “continuous-effect chance effect”.

  Further, instead of stopping the chances at predetermined intervals, the number of times the chances are stopped and displayed within a predetermined period (variation time or the number of fluctuations) may indicate the lottery result. .

  Next, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 197 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the third control example is different from the above control examples in that the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a are partially changed, and the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 The difference is that an additional area selection table 222g is added.

  Here, the variation pattern selection table 222a of the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (b). FIG. 197 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222a of the third control example. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 222a in the first control example, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the third control example is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and roughly indicates the variation pattern command indicated by the variation pattern command. 9 is a data table used to determine more detailed variation content from variation content (variation time).

  The variation pattern selection table 222a includes a normal middle and large hit table 222a1, a normal middle and long break table 222a2, a extended-middle swing table 222a3, and a long and short break table 222a4.

  In the normal middle and big hit table 222a1, detailed production modes corresponding to the fluctuation types of the fluctuation times of 7 seconds and 10 seconds are defined based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (shown in FIG. Zu). Here, a description will be given of an effect mode defined in the normal middle and large hit table 222a1. First, a 7-second stop pattern and a 10-second stop pattern are defined in the normal middle and big hit table 222a1 as stop patterns of symbols that are variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the rendering unit 331.

  The 7-second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which symbols that are variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d are stopped and displayed at equal intervals. The 10-second stop pattern is a pattern in which the symbols are displayed last among the display units 331a to 331d. The time from when the symbol corresponding to the lucky number (for example, “2”, “7”, “13”) is stopped and displayed on the display unit other than the display unit 331d to be stopped until the symbol stops on the display unit 331d is long. This is the stop pattern to be set.

  Further, the normal out-of-place table 222a2 is also a detailed effect corresponding to the change type of the change time of 7 seconds and 10 seconds based on the change pattern command output from the main controller 110, similarly to the table of the normal middle and big hits 222a1. An embodiment is defined (not shown).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example, as a variation pattern selected when a normal medium and large hit is won, a variation pattern with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds are selected. The ratio is defined so as to be about 1 to 1 (see FIG. 111A), and as a fluctuation pattern selected in the case of normal deviation, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds Is defined so that the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern is approximately 3 to 1 (FIG. 111B). Therefore, when the 10-second stop pattern is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit.

  In addition, the extended-cassette jackpot table 222a3 is a table in which a detailed rendering mode is defined for the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 during the “extended-cassette mode”. The table for large-medium-sized jackpot 222a3 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the extended-village big hit table 222a3. The table for large and medium-sized jackpots 222a3 includes the fluctuation types indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, such as "short short fluctuation (0.2 seconds)" and "hit middle fluctuation (3 seconds)". In association with the value of the chance eye number counter 223qv and the value of the effect counter 223rv, the effect types are "normal large hit effect", "single single chance effect effect", "hit two consecutive chance effect effect", "three consecutive chance effects". There are four types of effect modes of “eye effect”.

  More specifically, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110 is “hit short fluctuation”, the value of chance chance counter 223qv is “0, 1”, and the value of effect counter 223rv is In the case of “0 to 99”, “normal jackpot effect” is selected as the effect mode.

  The “normal jackpot effect” is an effect that notifies the player that the result of the current lottery is a jackpot within the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, for example, a character displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Are symbols appearing around them (for example, a symbol with a letter “V” indicating a probable jackpot, a symbol with a skull mark indicating a normal jackpot (fall to “normal mode”), etc.) Is performed. In addition, for example, an effect in which a mode (for example, a character “V”) indicating a probability change jackpot is simultaneously displayed on each of the display units 331 a to 331 d of the effect unit 331, or a normal jackpot (fall to “normal mode”) (For example, a skull mark) is simultaneously displayed.

  Here, after the execution of the “normal jackpot effect” is determined, characters and various symbol designs (such as a symbol design with the letter “V” and a symbol design with a skull mark) appear, and the character If it is configured to perform the effect of acquiring a symbol pattern, it is necessary to execute a series of effects for 0.2 seconds, and the effect time is too short for the player to fully understand the effect contents. There is a risk of disappearing. On the other hand, if the production time is secured by increasing the rate at which the long fluctuation time is selected (decided), one special symbol lottery is executed, and then the special symbol lottery is performed. There is a problem that the time required until the game is long, and the game is prolonged. In addition, as the fluctuation time becomes longer, the possibility of entering the second entrance 640a during the variation increases, but the entry to the second entrance 640a is not suspended, so that in the “ren-so mode”, As the ball enters the second entrance 640a, the user may feel that the ball is wasted. That is, there is a possibility that the player may feel dissatisfied.

  Therefore, in the “rensou mode” in this control example, a character is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of whether or not the special symbol is changing. That is, a character performing an effect of acquiring a symbol in the variable effect is displayed as a part of the back image. In the variable effect, a variable effect of an effect mode of acquiring a symbol using a character displayed in advance as a back image is performed. With this configuration, the back image before the start of the variable effect can be seen as a part of the variable effect, so that the change time is extremely short (for example, 0.2 seconds). Even when the pattern is determined, the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, similarly to the characters, images of various symbol designs (symbol designs with the letter “V”, symbol designs with a skull mark, etc.) also appear randomly as part of the back image, and The display position is also switched at random. That is, for example, the symbol design with the letter “V” enters the frame from outside the screen of the third design display device 81 and approaches the character, stays in the vicinity of the character for a predetermined time, and then moves away from the character. In a mode in which the pattern of the rear image in a mode of going out of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 or a symbol symbol with a skull mark similarly performs an operation of approaching and separating from the character Prepare a back image pattern or a back image pattern in which both the symbol design with the letter “V” and the symbol design with the skull mark approach the character and then move away. Each of these rear images is switched randomly. Then, in a state where any one of the symbol designs is close to the character (a distance at which the character can naturally acquire the symbol design with a variation time of 0.2 seconds), the variation effect of the lottery result corresponding to the symbol design is started. In such a case, the symbol pattern displayed as the back image is configured to set a variation pattern of a mode in which the character acquires. With this configuration, it is as if the effect had started before the start of the variable effect (at the time when the corresponding symbol symbol was displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a part of the back image). I can make you think. Therefore, even when a fluctuation effect with a short fluctuation time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed, the effect can be enhanced. Also, it is possible to execute an effect of a natural flow as compared with the case where the effect is executed within a short fluctuation time. In this control example, when a game stop state is detected, a state in which various symbol symbols are close to the character is displayed as a demonstration screen (a distance at which the character can naturally acquire a symbol symbol with a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds). To set the back image of the mode in which the image is stationary. With this configuration, after the game is restarted, if the fluctuation time is determined to be 0.2 seconds in the special symbol lottery executed first and a short fluctuation is determined, the character is brought closer to the character while the game is stopped. It is possible to execute an effect of acquiring a symbol corresponding to the current hit type among the symbol symbols that have been stopped in the state where the symbol has been stopped. Therefore, even when a fluctuation effect with a short fluctuation time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed via the fluctuation stop state, it is possible to execute an effect with less discomfort.

  The variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit short variation”, the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 49”. In this case, “normal jackpot effect” is selected as the effect mode. This “normal jackpot effect” is the same as the content described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit short variation”, the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “50 to 99”. In this case, “winning single-shot chance effect” is selected as the effect mode.

  This “single-hit chance chance effect” is performed when the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, that is, when the chance chance is stopped and displayed twice at a predetermined interval (approximately 1.4 seconds). This is an effect to be executed, in which the opportunity is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. As a result, the two chances stopped and displayed before the "hit single-shot chance effect" is executed and the first chance stopped and displayed in the "hit single-shot chance effect" are displayed. It is possible to notify the player that the three chances have been stopped and displayed.

  When the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit middle variation”, the value of the chance number counter 223qv is “0”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 29” , "Normal jackpot effect" is selected as the effect mode. In the “normal jackpot effect” in the hit middle change in which the change time is 3 seconds, the third symbol display is an effect that informs the player that the result of the current lottery is a big hit within the change time of 3 seconds. In the device 81, an effect of acquiring a mode (for example, a V mark) in which the character indicates a big hit or an effect in which the mode indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 in order is executed.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit middle fluctuation”, the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “0”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “30 to 99”. In this case, “3rd consecutive chance effect” is selected as the effect mode. This “third consecutive chance effect” is an effect mode described with reference to FIG. 195 (a), and is an effect mode in which a chance is stopped and displayed three times within one fluctuation time.

  When the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit middle variation”, the value of the chance number counter 223qv is “1”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 49” , "Normal jackpot effect" is selected as the effect mode. This “normal jackpot effect” is the same effect mode as the “normal jackpot effect” when the hit middle changes, and the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit middle fluctuation”, the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “1”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “50 to 99”. In this case, the “winning second consecutive chance second effect” is selected as the effect mode. The “winning second consecutive chance effect effect” is an effect executed when the value of the chance number counter 223qv is “1”, that is, in a state where the chance effect is stopped and displayed once, and the fluctuation starts. This is an effect mode in which a chance is stopped and displayed at two timings of 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the completion. Thus, it is possible to notify the player that the chance has been stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals, together with the effect mode executed in the previous fluctuation.

  Therefore, since it is possible to stop and display the third chance at predetermined intervals over a plurality of fluctuations, it is possible to perform the plurality of fluctuations without using the “look-ahead effect” based on the stored winning information. By straddling, an effect indicating to the player whether or not the result of the lottery of the special symbol is a big hit can be executed.

  When the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit middle variation”, the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 9” , "Normal jackpot effect" is selected as the effect mode. This “normal jackpot effect” is the same effect mode as the “normal jackpot effect” when the hit middle changes, and the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit middle fluctuation”, the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “10 to 99”. In this case, the “winning single chance chance effect” is selected as the effect mode.

  The “hit single-shot chance effect” is an effect that is executed when the value of the chance-number counter 223qv is “2”, that is, when the chance is stopped and displayed twice at a predetermined interval. Is an effect mode in which the chance is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of the game. This allows the player to be notified that the chances have been stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals (approximately 1.4 second intervals) together with the presentation mode executed in the previous fluctuation. .

  In the case where the “hit single-shot chance effect” is executed as the effect mode corresponding to the hit middle change, the chance (0.2 times after the start of the change, the third chance at a predetermined interval from the previous change) is started. During the period (2.8 seconds) from the stop display of the second chance) to the end of the change (2.8 seconds), an image notifying the player that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, a sound celebrating the big hit is output by a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, and an effect of turning on a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227 is performed.

  As described above, in the third control example, in order to realize the “continuous chance chance effect” that notifies that the result of the lottery is a big hit when a plurality of chance eyes are stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals, The effect mode to be executed is selected by the consecutive-middle-sho big hit table 222a3. Further, since the number of chances to stop and display in the current fluctuation is selectable based on the value of the chance frequency counter 223qv, the chances are stopped at predetermined intervals over a plurality of fluctuations. Can be displayed. Therefore, even if the time of one change is short, it is possible to execute the effect indicating the result of the lottery using the plurality of changes in an effect mode that can be easily recognized by the player.

  Returning to FIG. 197 (b), the description will be continued. The extended holiday table 222a4 is a table in which a detailed rendering mode is defined for the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 during the “extended holiday mode”. The table 222a4 for out-of-villas will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 199 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the out-of-condo table 222a4. In this table 222a4, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is "variation short variation (0.2 seconds)" and "variation middle variation (3 seconds)". In association with the value of the chance count counter 223qv and the value of the staging counter 223rv, three types of staging are provided as the staging mode, “normal staging”, “single-shot chance staging for detachment”, and “two consecutive chance staging for stitching”. Aspects are defined.

  More specifically, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is “missing short variation”, the value of chance number counter 223qv is “0, 1”, and the value of effect counter 223rv is In the case of “0 to 79”, “normal effect” is selected as the effect mode.

  In the “normal effect”, an effect is performed to notify the player that the result of the current lottery is out of the range within the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds. Specifically, an effect (failure effect) in which the character cannot acquire a mode (for example, a V mark) indicating a big hit on the third symbol display device 81, or a mode in which each of the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 indicates that the character is off. Is displayed at the same time.

  In addition, since this “normal effect” is a short-time change of 0.2 seconds, an effect in which the next change is executed without emphasizing and notifying the player that the result of the lottery is out of order. May be used. This can suppress a situation in which the player's willingness to play is reduced when “missing short fluctuations” are continuously performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 199 (b), the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “missing short fluctuation”, the chance count counter 223qv is “0, 1”, and the effect counter 223rv. Is "80 to 99", "single-shot chance effect for departure" is selected as the effect mode.

  This “single chance chance effect for departure” is an effect that is executed when the value of the chance number counter 223qv is “0, 1”, that is, when the stop of the chance eye is not more than once due to the previous fluctuation. This is an effect in which the chance is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Specifically, if the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “1” and the “single-shot chance production for disengagement” is executed, the chance changes twice in accordance with the previous fluctuation and the current fluctuation. Stop display is performed, and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is added to “2”. Therefore, for example, when “hit short change” is selected as the next change and “winning single chance chance effect” is executed as the effect mode, the chance is stopped and displayed three times over three changes. It is possible to execute the jackpot after having made it.

  Next, a case where the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “missing short variation”, the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 99” , “Normal effect” is selected as the effect mode. The “normal effect” is the same effect as the “normal effect” at the time of the above-mentioned short-circuit fluctuation, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “missing short variation” and the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, that is, the chance is twice at a predetermined interval. In the case where the effect mode of “missing short fluctuation” is selected in the state where the stop is displayed, it is defined that the effect mode in which the chance is stopped and displayed is not selected. This is to prevent the chance from being stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals over a plurality of fluctuations. As a result, the production mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed is continuously executed a plurality of times, so that even though the lottery result is out of order, the chance eyes cross over a plurality of fluctuations at a predetermined interval. It is possible to eliminate the situation that the display is stopped twice. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect mode with high reliability to the player.

  On the other hand, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “out-of-short variation” and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, regardless of the value of the effect counter 223rv, the above is described. “Normal effect”, which is the same effect mode as “normal effect”, is selected.

  Next, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “Middle variation” and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “0”, the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 0”. In the case of "59", "normal effect" is selected, in the case of "60-89", "single-shot chance effect for detachment", and in the case of "90-99", "two consecutive chance effects for detachment" is selected. You.

  The "single-shot chance production for detachment" is a production mode in which the chance is stopped 0.2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the "production of two consecutive chances for detachment" is shown in FIG. 195 (b). As shown, this is an effect mode in which the chance is stopped 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. This makes it possible to make the production mode corresponding to the deviation middle fluctuation half the same as the production mode corresponding to the middle fluctuation, so that the player is interested in the production mode until the end of the fluctuation. And the effect of the pachinko machine 10 can be enhanced.

  When the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “Middle variation” and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “1”, the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 59”. In this case, "normal effect" is selected, and in the case of "60 to 99", "single chance chance effect for departure" is selected.

  Lastly, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “middle variation” and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, regardless of the value of the effect counter 223rv, “ Normal production "is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 197 (a), the description will be continued. The additional area selection table 222g is referred to when determining the number of hit pockets to be increased in the "increase effect" in which the number of hit pockets of the rotating member is increased during the "preparation mode" (S6001 in FIG. 203). As described above, this “increased effect” is an effect in which the number of winning pockets (the number of lucky numbers) in the roulette chance effect is added (added). It can be made to seem as if it is easier to hit with the effect (it becomes easier to shift to the “rensou mode”). Therefore, it is an effect that can increase the player's expectation for the roulette chance effect.

  In the third control example, in the “increase effect”, when determining a hit pocket (lucky number) to be added (added), an area that is easily added (easy selection area) and an area that is hard to be added (hard selection area) are determined. Is different from the above-described first control example in that a configuration is added in which a winning pocket (lucky number) added (added) by “addition effect” is intentionally biased (not evenly distributed).

  As described above, by providing a configuration in which the hit pocket (lucky number) added (added) by the “increase effect” is intentionally biased (not equalized), the 30 pockets ( Regions (locations) where the number of hit pockets is large and regions (locations) where the number of hit pockets is small can be intentionally provided for the pockets (P1 to P30). Therefore, since the area that is easy to hit in the roulette chance effect (the area where the setting of the hit pocket is large) and the area that is hard to hit (the area where the setting of the hit pocket is small) pass, the timing at which the ball B falls is determined by the player. Will look interesting and can enhance the effect of production.

  Next, the details of the additional area selection table 222g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the additional area selection table 222g. In the additional area selection table 222g, an “easy selection area” and a “difficult selection area” are defined in association with possible values of the effect counter 223rv.

  More specifically, the “easy selection area” is associated with the value of the effect counter 223rv in the range of “0 to 74”. As described above in the first control example, the effect counter 223rv is configured by a loop counter that can take 100 values of “0 to 99”. Of these, the value of “easy selection area” is 75 of “0 to 74”, so the probability (ratio) of “easy selection area” being selected by the additional area selection table 222g is 75% (75/100). ).

  The "difficulty selection area" is associated with the value of the effect counter 223rv in the range of "75 to 99". Of the 100 possible values of the effect counter 223rv, the values for which the “difficulty selection area” is selected are 25 of “75 to 99”, so that the “difficulty selection area” is selected by the additional area selection table 222g. Is 25% (25/100).

  That is, for example, when four winning pockets (lucky numbers) are added (increased) by the “addition effect”, an average of three winning pockets from the “easy selection area” and one average of the winning pockets (lucky number) from the “hard selection area” Number) is the selected ratio. As a result, it is possible to bias the pocket against the area where the easy selection area is set. The configuration for dividing the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640 into an “easy selection area” and a “difficult selection area” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 200 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 200, the third control example is different from the above control examples in that the content of the hit position storage area 223k is partially changed, and the chance count counter 223qv and the effect counter 223rv are different from each other. The difference is in the added points. The other contents are the same as those in the above-described respective control examples. Therefore, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the hit position storage area 223k whose contents are partially changed in the third control example will be described. The hit position storage area 223k is a storage area for storing the type of each pocket P1 to P30 of the rotating member 640 (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket) in the “rensou mode suggestion effect” as described above. It is. In the hit position storage area 223k, a hit position is set based on the pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x in the hit pocket sorting process 3 (S3102 in FIG. 202). Next, differences from the above-described first control example will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 201 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit position storage area 223k. In the third control example, the type of appointment / rejection corresponding to each of the pockets P1 to P30 is stored, and each of the pockets P1 to P30 is configured to be divided into a “first area” and a “second area”. . As shown in FIG. 201, the “first region” is a region including the pockets P1 to P15, and the “second region” is a region including the pockets P16 to P30. By reading the storage information stored in the hit position storage area 223k configured as described above, the type set in each of the pockets P1 to P30 and the area (the first area and the second area) are set. It becomes possible to grasp the number of hit pockets. In the present control example, at the start of the increase effect (in a state where only the winning pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x is reflected as the winning position), the number of the winning pockets included in the first area and the second area is determined. It is configured such that an area where the number of hit pockets is set to be large is set to the above-mentioned easy selection area, and an area where the number of hit pockets is small is set to the difficult selection area. Thereby, the increase effect can be executed in a state where the number of pockets included in the easy selection area is larger, so that the arrangement of the hit pockets can be biased toward the easy selection area.

  Returning to FIG. 200, the description will be continued. The chance number counter 223qv is a counter that counts the number of times the chance is stopped and displayed over a plurality of fluctuations in the “continuous chance effect” described above. The value of the chance count counter 223qv is referred to in the variation pattern selection process (S6106 in FIG. 206), and when the “chance effect” is determined, a value corresponding to the determined “chance effect”, that is, Then, a value corresponding to the number of times the chance is stopped and displayed in the determined variation pattern is added (S6109 in FIG. 206). Then, when the "chance eye effect" is not determined, that is, when the normal effect is determined, the value of the counter is initialized (S6110 in FIG. 206). Although not shown, the value of the counter is also initialized when a jackpot is executed in a state where the value of the chance count counter 223qv has not been initialized.

  In the present control example, the value of the chance number counter 223qv is initialized when the chance effect is not determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the value of the chance counter 223qv may not be initialized until a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the last stop of the chance. Thus, when the chance is interrupted, a period in which the chance does not appear for at least 5 seconds can be set, so that it is possible to more clearly recognize whether or not the chance is continuous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from erroneously recognizing the number of consecutive chances, and it is possible to provide a more intuitive effect.

  The effect counter 223rv is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for selection of various effects (“continuous chance effect”, “additional effect”, etc.), various lotteries, and the like. It is configured as a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99 in the main processing of the device 113 (see FIG. 145). By using the effect counter 223rv, randomness can be secured when selecting various effects.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing a hit pocket allocation process 3 (S3011) executed in the status command process (see FIG. 159) instead of the hit pocket allocation process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example. In each of the hit pocket sorting processes 3, in the processes of S3101 and S3102, the same processes as the processes of S3101 and S3102 of the hit pocket sorting process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example described above are respectively executed. You.

  In the hit pocket allocation process 3 (see FIG. 202) in the present control example, after the read pocket is set to the hit position of the hit position storage area 223k by the processing of S3102 (S3102), the hit pocket storage area 223k is set. The number of hit pockets included in the first area and the second area is calculated (S3121). For example, when the hit pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x are the pockets P9, P10, P11, P20, and P28, three pockets are included in the first area (pockets P1 to P15). It is calculated that two pockets are included in the second region (pockets P16 to P30).

  When the process of S3121 ends, it is next determined whether the number of hit pockets included in the first region is larger than that of the second region based on the number of hit pockets of each region calculated in the process of S3121 (S3122). ). In the process of S3122, when it is determined that the first region has a larger number of hit pockets (S3122: Yes), the first region is set as the easy selection region, and the second region is set as the difficult selection region. (S3123), the process proceeds to S3103.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3122, when it is determined that the number of hit pockets is larger in the second region than in the first region (S3122: No), the second region is set as the easily selected region, and the first region is set as the easily selected region. A difficulty selection area is set (S3124), and the process proceeds to S3103.

  That is, in the processes of S3122 to S3124, a process for setting an area having a large number of hit pockets as an “easy selection area” in which a hit pocket can be easily added (added) in the “addition effect” is executed. This makes it possible to further bias the region where the hit pocket is set to the thirty pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640, and enhance the effect of the effect.

  When the number of hit pockets set in the first area and the second area is the same, “easy selection area” and “difficulty selection area” may be set at random, or a predetermined area may be set. May be set to be an “easy selection area”. Also, the number of types corresponding to the hit positions stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x is set to be an odd number, and the number of hit pockets set in the first area and the second area is not the same. You may comprise.

  In the third control example, a configuration is used in which the “easy selection area” and the “difficult selection area” are set based on the number of hit pockets set in the first area and the second area defined in advance. However, if the hit pocket is added (added) by “adding effect”, any configuration in which the area where the hit pocket is located may be biased, for example, a position where the hit pocket is continuously set is centered May be configured to set the “first area”.

  As a result, the “first region” and the “second region” can be set based on the position of the hit pocket, so that 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640 can be set. It is possible to further bias the region where the hit pocket is set, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Returning to FIG. 202, the description will be continued. In each process of S3103 and S3104, the same process as each process of S3103 and S3104 in the above-described first control example is executed. If it is determined in the processing of S3104 that the value of the additional counter is greater than 0 (S3104: Yes), an additional position determination processing for determining a pocket to be increased (added) is executed (S3125). ). Details of the additional position determination processing (S3125) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S3125 is completed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the addition counter 233av (S3110), and the flow shifts to S3104. Thereafter, the processes of S3104, S3110, and S3125 are repeatedly executed until the value of the additional counter 223av becomes 0.

  Next, the details of the above-described additional position determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the additional position determination processing (S3125). This additional position determination processing (S3125) is processing for determining the position of a hit pocket to be added (added) in the “increased effect”.

  In the additional position determination processing (S3125), first, the additional area selection table 222g is read (S6001), and an additional area corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223rv is determined (S6002). Specifically, when the value of the obtained effect counter 223rv is “0 to 74”, the region set as the “easy selection region” is determined as the additional region, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223rv is “75”. In the case of “−99”, the area set as the “difficulty selection area” is determined as an additional area (see FIG. 199 (b)). As described above, the easy selection area and the difficult selection area are set according to the arrangement of the hit pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x at the start of the increased effect.

  After the process of S6002, the hit position storage area 223k is read out, and it is determined whether there is a place where the number of continuous hits is 5 or more, that is, a place where 5 or more hit pockets are continuous (S6003). ). In the processing of S6003, when it is determined that there is no place where the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more (S6003: No), one place to be added is selected from pockets in which the type of separation is set (S6004). .

  On the other hand, in the process of S6002, when it is determined that there is a place where the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more (S6003: Yes), five consecutive hits are set among the pockets for which the type of disconnection is set. One additional position is selected from the pockets other than the one before and after the position (S6005).

  Here, the processing executed in S6005 will be described. In the third control example, when the roulette chance effect is executed, the hit pocket is continuously set in order to drop the ball B into a designated pocket (hit pocket or missed pocket) without giving a sense of incongruity to the player. The upper limit of the number to be performed is set to five. If the hit pockets are made too continuous, it takes time to pass through the positions where the hit pockets are continuous in the event of a roulette chance effect, and the swinging motion of the ball B stops during the passage. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the swinging operation will have an extremely small amplitude. In this case, since the ball B stays at the upper portion of the holding piece 677 without falling, the appearance becomes extremely unnatural, and there is a possibility that the player may feel distrust. Therefore, during execution of the “increase effect”, it is necessary to control so that six or more winning pockets do not continue due to addition. Therefore, the situation where the pockets already set as the hit pockets are continuous is grasped, and the position of the hit pocket to be added (added) by the “increase effect” is set. Thereby, a roulette chance effect can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  When the processing in S6004 or S6005 is completed, the hit position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected additional position becomes the hit position (S6006), and this processing ends. This additional position determination processing is also executed in the special figure 2 winning command processing 3 (S2121) shown in FIG.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning command processing 3 (S2121) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 145) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. Of the special figure 2 winning command processing 3 (S2121), each processing of S3201 to S3208 is the same as each processing of S3201 to S3208 of the special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161) in the first control example described above. The processing is executed.

  Then, when it is determined in the processing of S3208 that the additional position is to be added (S3208: Yes), the additional position determination processing is executed (S3221), and thereafter, the present processing ends. Note that the additional position determination processing executed in S3221 is the same as the additional position determination processing executed in S3125 described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the third control example, since the additional position determination processing is also performed in the special figure 2 winning command processing 3 (S2121), the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P1) provided in the rotating member 640 are provided. It is possible to further bias the region where the hit pocket is set with respect to P30), and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  In the above-described special figure 2 winning command processing 3 (see FIG. 204), when it is determined in the processing of S3208 that additional processing is to be performed, the additional position determination processing is configured to be executed. Alternatively, the “easy selection area” and the “difficult selection area” may be set again. This makes it possible to further bias the region where the hit pocket is set to the thirty pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640, and enhance the effect of the effect.

  Next, a variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. This variation display setting process 3 is different from the variation display setting process of the first control example in that a variation pattern selection process (S3321) is added. In the variation pattern selection process (S3321), a process of selecting a variation pattern for performing the above-described “continuous production of chances” is executed.

  First, FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 (S1641) executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. In each of the variable display setting processes 3 in S3301 to S3303, the same processes as those in S3301 to S3303 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the above-described first control example are respectively executed.

  When the process of S3303 is completed, next, a variation pattern selection process (S3 21) for selecting an effect mode corresponding to the current variation pattern command is executed. Details of the variation pattern selection processing (S3321) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the variation pattern selection process (S3321) is completed, the processes of S3-05 to S3-10 are executed, and the process ends. In each process of S3305 to S3310, the same process as each process of S3305 to S3310 in the above-described first control example is executed.

  Next, the above-described variation pattern selection processing (S3321) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection processing. As shown in FIG. 206, when the variation pattern selection processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving state flag 223o is set to ON, that is, whether or not the “long-season mode” is being performed (S6101).

  If it is determined that the time-saving state flag 223o is set to ON (S6101: Yes), the table for the extended holiday corresponding to the current variation pattern is read from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S6105). Specifically, for example, if the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 indicates a fluctuation type (variation pattern) corresponding to “hit middle fluctuation”, the variable pattern selection table 222a determines that The application table 222a3 is read.

  Next, the value of the effect counter 223rv and the value of the chance count counter 223qv are read (S6106), and the effect mode corresponding to the read counter (effect counter 223rv and chance eye counter 223qv) is determined (S6107). . Specifically, for example, if the value of the effect counter 223rv obtained is read out and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “1”, the table 223a3 for the extended-middle-big-big hit is read, "Two consecutive chance effects" is selected (see FIG. 198).

  After finishing the process of S6107 described above, it is determined whether or not the chance eye effect has been determined (selected) as the present effect mode (S6108). If it is determined in the process of S6108 that the chance eye effect has been determined (selected) (S6108: Yes), the corresponding value is added to the chance eye frequency counter 223qv (S6109), and the flow shifts to the process of S6111.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6108 that the chance eye effect has not been determined (selected) (S6108: No), the value of the chance eye number counter 223qv is initialized (S6110), and the flow shifts to S6111.

  On the other hand, if the time saving state flag 223o is not set to ON (is set to OFF) in the process of S6101, (S6101: No), the normal table corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern. It is read from the table 222a (S6102). Specifically, for example, if the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 indicates a fluctuation type (fluctuation pattern) corresponding to “missing middle fluctuation”, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a indicates a normal middle deviation. The table 222a2 is read.

  After the processing of S6102, the value of the effect counter 223rv is read out (S6103), the effect mode corresponding to the read value of the effect counter 223rv is determined (S6104), and the process proceeds to S6111.

  After the processing of S6109, S6110, or S6104 is performed, in the processing of S6111, which is executed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the effect mode determined in each processing is set (S6111), and this processing ends. I do.

  As described above, in the third control example, when the addition is determined and the winning pocket is determined in the increased effect, a section in which the ratio of the winning pocket is intentionally high is provided. Here, if the arrangement of the hit pockets is completely determined at random, the hit pockets may be evenly distributed over the entire rotating member 640. In this case, no matter when the ball B falls from the holding piece 677, there is no difference in the degree of expectation of falling into the hit pocket. In other words, even if the ball B is made to perform a swinging operation, and the player predicts a section (pocket) in which the ball B will fall from the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation, there is no difference in the degree of expectation. There is a fear. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the swing effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, a section where the ratio of the hit pocket is high is intentionally provided. Therefore, the arrangement of the section where the ratio of the hit pocket is high and the swing operation performed by the ball B above the holding piece 677 are performed. The player can watch the correspondence with the momentum (cycle) more carefully. That is, the position (section) at which the ball B falls is expected to be a section where the ratio of the hit pocket is high, and the position (section) at which the ball B falls is predicted from the period (amplitude) of the swing operation. Can be. Therefore, the player's interest in the game during the execution of the rocking effect can be further improved.

  Further, in the third control example, in the “rensou mode” in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is mainly executed, a chance-eye continuous effect in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed one or more times can be executed. . Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are capable of executing the same type of effect over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a variable display of the number of balls reserved at the start of the effect) (a so-called pachinko machine). , "Continuous notice production"). In such a conventional gaming machine, the player can have a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations, based on the number of times the same type of effect is executed, the content of the effect, and the like. However, in conventional gaming machines, the number of performances and the performance time depend on the holding ball, so the continuous announcement performance should be applied to gaming machines that do not have a function to hold the lottery result in the first place. Could not. In addition, some conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to execute an effect as if a plurality of fluctuating displays are being performed in a fluctuating manner in one fluctuating display, In some cases, the above-described continuous announcement effect is executed with one variable display by executing the same type of effect in the variable display. In this conventional gaming machine, a continuous announcement effect can be performed irrespective of the number of pending balls, but since it is necessary to execute the effect within the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display, a sufficient production period is secured. There is a problem that it may be difficult.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, a specific effect (effect in which a chance is displayed) can be executed one or more times in one variable display. Then, when performing the variable display, whether or not to set a specific effect for the variable display, and the number of executions when performing the specific effect, etc. are executed before the variable display. It is configured to make a determination based on the history of a specific effect. Then, based on the result of the lottery of the special symbol which is the trigger of the variable display, the maximum continuous number of the specific effect is made different between the case of the loss and the case of the big hit. With such a configuration, in the variable display based on the special symbol 2 lottery in which the special symbol lottery result is not held, a specific effect is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays, so that the player You can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  Further, in the present control example, when the display of the chance eyes is determined in the short fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds, after the symbol fluctuation of 0.2 seconds is executed, the chance eyes are displayed for 0.5 seconds. Stopped and displayed. Further, when the chance continuous effect is determined in the middle fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 3 seconds, the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) and the temporary stop period of the chance eyes (0.5 seconds) are changed into a fluctuation period of 3 seconds. Set one or more times during In this way, the pseudo fluctuation period during the middle fluctuation and the confirmation time are set to be the same as the fluctuation time (period) (0.2 seconds) and the confirmation time (period) (0.5 seconds) of the short fluctuation, respectively. , It is possible to display the opportunity stop display in the middle fluctuation without discomfort to the player.

  In addition, as a pseudo effect performed during the middle fluctuation, in addition to the pseudo fluctuation period and the temporary stop period, a pseudo stop period that simulates a period in which a new symbol change is not started is provided, so that a special symbol lottery is stored. The fluctuation in the case of using a configuration that does not have a so-called hold-holding function (a configuration in which the fluctuation display is performed discretely (non-continuously) even if the ball is hit continuously) is simulated without discomfort. Can be expressed.

  In the third control example, when the next short fluctuation is determined to be a hit short fluctuation in a state in which the short-circuit fluctuation for release in which the “chance visual effect” is set is performed twice consecutively, the “chance visual effect” is determined. "Can be set, and in the case of the next change deviating from the short change, the" chance chance effect "is limited so as not to be set. That is, only when a special symbol is a big hit, the stop of the chance is allowed to be continuously displayed three times, and in a case where the lottery of the special symbol is lost, the number of times the chance is continued is limited to two times. Configuration.

  With this configuration, a game can be played while focusing on the number of consecutive chances, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. Also, regardless of whether the continuous chance effect has been set in the middle fluctuation or the short fluctuation in which the stop display of the chance eye is set has been performed plural times, the chance eyes are stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals a plurality of times (three times). This can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, an appropriate effect can be provided to the player.

  In the third control example, as described above, the control for restricting the stop display of the chance is executed for the continuous variable display. However, other configurations may be used. After the chance is displayed twice in succession, the production mode in which the chance is stopped and displayed as the production mode corresponding to the fluctuation that has been won is not selected until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. It is good to do so. Thereby, an appropriate effect can be provided to the player.

  In the third control example, the interval at which the opportunity is stopped is set to be a predetermined interval as the “continuous effect at chance”. However, other configurations may be used. A plurality of timings at which the chances are stopped are provided within 3 seconds which is the fluctuation time during which the middle fluctuations are executed, and a predetermined number (three times) of the chances is stopped and displayed at any one of the timings. May be configured. This makes it difficult to know at what timing the chance eyes are displayed during the change of the special symbol, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, as a display mode of the chance eyes in a case where the chance eyes are stopped and displayed, a plurality of patterns of the color of the third symbol to be stopped and the color of the background are facilitated in advance, and the number of the chance eyes displayed in the specific display mode is one. When stopped and displayed three times, the same value as when the normal chance is stopped and displayed three times may be given. As a result, if it becomes difficult to stop and display the chance eyes a predetermined number of times, that is, even if the chance eyes are not stopped and displayed for a certain period of time after the start of the fluctuation, the jackpot is won. Since it is possible to execute an effect for notifying that, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the third control example, a chance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as an object that appears a plurality of times (three times) at predetermined intervals (1.4 second intervals). Anything that can be recognized by a person may be used, and for example, the upper lifting unit 300 may be moved at a predetermined interval. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the result of the lottery using a configuration other than the display of the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with a more interesting effect.

  Furthermore, in the case of using a configuration for moving the movable role associated with the pachinko machine 10 such as the upper elevating unit 300, in addition to the configuration in which the same operation (swinging operation) is performed a plurality of times, for example, the movable role can be stepped The movable role may move to a final stage by moving the movable role a predetermined number of times. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the big hit is approaching, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Even when the third symbol display device 81 is configured to stop and display a predetermined display mode (such as a chance) a plurality of times as in the third control example, the predetermined display mode is the stop display. The third symbol display device 81 may display a frequency display for displaying the number of times performed, and a target display for displaying the number of stop displays in a predetermined display mode necessary for notifying that a jackpot has been won. Thus, each time the predetermined display mode is stopped and displayed, the player can be made to recognize that the big hit is approaching, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  In the third control example, since the process of counting the number of chances is performed with respect to the variation that is continuously performed, the variation in which the effect mode in which the chance is stopped and displayed is selected is repeated a plurality of times. In such a case, the chances can be stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times over a plurality of fluctuations, and the production mode is controlled so that the predetermined number of chances is not stopped and displayed by the production mode corresponding to the fluctuation that has been won. The effect is enhanced.

  As described above, instead of the configuration in which the stop display effect of the chance eyes is performed for the continuously executed fluctuations, the stop display effect of the chance eyes is performed for the fluctuations performed within the predetermined period. You may. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of selecting a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is short as in the third control example, a predetermined number of chances can be stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals even if discontinuous fluctuations are used. It is. In the case of using such a configuration, an effect mode in which the chance is stopped and displayed a plurality of times within a predetermined period is determined in advance, and the chance is displayed in a variable display corresponding to the timing at which the opportunity is stopped and displayed in the effect mode. May be configured to be stopped.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the chance consecutive production using the discontinuous fluctuation. When this configuration is used, it is preferable to provide a slight tolerance to the timing at which the chance is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the fluctuation that enables the continuous production of the chance eyes, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in the third control example, when “missing middle fluctuation” is determined in “chance eye continuous production”, the first or second chance is performed for the first time (0.2 seconds after the fluctuation is started). The stop display can be performed at the stop display timing of the second (after) or the second (1.6 seconds after the start of the change), but, for example, the third time (the change is started at "middle change"). (3 seconds after that), the stop eye may be stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. With this configuration, it is possible to stop and display a plurality of chances at predetermined intervals over the middle fluctuation and the short fluctuation.

  Further, in the third control example, when the “additional effect” is executed, a configuration is provided in which the winning pocket (lucky number) added (added) by the “additional effect” is intentionally biased (not evenly distributed). Therefore, with respect to 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640, an area (location) where the setting of the hit pocket is large and an area (location) where the setting of the hit pocket is small are intentionally provided. Can be. Therefore, since the area that is easy to hit in the roulette chance effect (the area where the setting of the hit pocket is large) and the area that is hard to hit (the area where the setting of the hit pocket is small) pass, the timing at which the ball B falls is determined by the player. Will look interesting and can enhance the effect of production.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, the control and the effect in the “normal mode” and the “preparation mode” have been mainly described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth control example, as one mode of the entertaining effect in the “rensou mode”, a method of improving the interest of the player by the effect using the accessory (the upper elevating unit 300) is used. explain.

  Further, in the first control example described above, if the addition of the winning pocket is determined in the additional effect performed in the first half (20 seconds from the start of the effect) of the “renjo mode suggesting effect”, the position of the additional winning pocket is determined. Is determined randomly within a range in which the number of hit pockets does not become 6 or more. Then, when the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect, after the period (amplitude) of the swing operation of the ball B becomes sufficiently small, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is determined, and the ball B is dropped. The configuration was such that the ball B was held on the holding piece 677 until the possible pocket was located before the drop position (0.2 seconds before reaching the drop position).

  On the other hand, in the present fourth control example, the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 in the roulette chance effect is calculated back in advance during the execution of the increase effect, and the additional position of the winning pocket is determined. Here, the back calculation method will be described in detail. Since the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 is reached 70 seconds after the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, the ball B can drop through the swinging operation. It is approximately 75 seconds to 82 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestion effect”. Therefore, when adding the winning pocket in a state where the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined, when it is about 75 seconds to 82 seconds after the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, the drop position is reached. The pocket to be arranged (or a pocket close to the drop position) is determined from the current elapsed time and the rotational speed of the rotating member 640, and is determined as the additional position. On the other hand, if the transition to the “rensou mode” is not determined, the additional position is determined avoiding the pocket that is predicted to be placed at the drop position after about 75 seconds to 82 seconds described above. As described above, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 at the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” has a different configuration according to the pocket in which the ball B was dropped in the previous “rensou mode suggestion effect”. By arranging the rotating member 640 and estimating the elapsed time, it is possible to easily predict the pocket to be placed at the drop position after about 75 seconds to 82 seconds. Thereby, the ball B can be accurately dropped into the hit or missed pocket, depending on whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”.

  In the above-described first control example, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket arranged at the drop position) is determined by a combination of the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F of the rotation position detection sensor 684. It was configured to identify. Accordingly, when the lighting control of the rear LED 625 is performed, only the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket set as the hit pocket according to the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately set to the lighting state. Thus, the player could easily recognize the hit pocket from the appearance. Also, when the ball B is dropped, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is determined, and the lottery result of the special symbol executed in the “preparation mode” (ie, whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”) is determined. It was configured so that it could be dropped into an appropriate type of pocket accordingly.

  In addition to this, in the fourth control example, when the detection results of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are obtained, the detection results are transferred to the next pocket (current dropping position). The pocket arranged at the drop position next to the pocket arranged at the position is held until it is arranged at the drop position. Then, the held detection result is compared with a new detection result obtained by arranging the next pocket at the drop position to determine whether there is an abnormality. That is, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined by determining whether the previous detection result and the current detection result are continuous (adjacent) pocket detection results. This makes it possible to detect damage to the detection sensors A to F (or damage to the detected portion 641c).

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configurations of the RAM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that some processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
First, the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 207 (a) to 207 (d), the ROM 222 of the present control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 118 (a)) in that the variation pattern selection table 222a and the operation The difference is that the contents of the scenario table 222b are partially changed. The other contents of the ROM 222 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example. Hereinafter, the same portions as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 (a) is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222a of the fourth control example. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 222a in the first control example, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fourth control example is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and roughly indicates the variation pattern command indicated by the variation pattern command. 9 is a data table used to determine more detailed variation content from variation content (variation time).

  As shown in FIG. 207 (a), the variation pattern selection table 222a in the present control example includes a normal middle and large hit table 222a1, a normal out-of-center table 222a2, and a connected-village variation pattern selection table 222a5. I have.

  In the normal middle and big hit table 222a1, detailed production modes corresponding to the fluctuation types of the fluctuation times of 7 seconds and 10 seconds are defined based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (shown in FIG. Zu). Here, a description will be given of an effect mode defined in the normal middle and large hit table 222a1. First, a 7-second stop pattern and a 10-second stop pattern are defined in the normal middle and big hit table 222a1 as stop patterns of symbols that are variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the rendering unit 331.

  The 7-second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which symbols that are variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d are stopped and displayed at equal intervals. The 10-second stop pattern is a pattern in which the symbols are finally displayed among the display units 331a to 331d. The time from when the symbol corresponding to the lucky number (for example, “2”, “7”, “13”) is stopped and displayed on the display unit other than the display unit 331d to be stopped until the symbol stops on the display unit 331d is long. This is the stop pattern to be set.

  Further, the normal out-of-place table 222a2 is also a detailed effect corresponding to the change type of the change time of 7 seconds and 10 seconds based on the change pattern command output from the main controller 110, similarly to the table of the normal middle and big hits 222a1. An embodiment is defined (not shown).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are selected as the fluctuation patterns to be selected in the case of a normal middle and large win. The ratio is defined so as to be about 1 to 1 (see FIG. 111A), and as a fluctuation pattern selected in the case of normal deviation, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds Is defined so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern is about 3 to 1 (see FIG. 111B). Therefore, when the 10-second stop pattern is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 207 (b), the details of the continuous variation pattern selection table 222a5 will be described. The in-house variation pattern selection table 222a5 is a variation pattern selection table that is referred to in the “long-house mode” during which time is being reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 207 (b), when the variation type is the hit short variation (0.2 seconds), the normal jackpot effect is set for the value “0 to 99” of the effect counter 223sw. When the variation type is the hit middle variation (3 seconds), the upper swing effect is set for the value “0 to 99” of the effect counter 223sw. When the variation type is the outlier short variation (0.2 seconds), the outlier is normally set for the value “0-79” of the effect counter 223sw, and the value “80-99” of the effect counter 223sw. In contrast, an upper swing effect, which is an effect mode involving the operation of the upper moving unit 300, is set. When the variation type is the middle variation (3 seconds), a normal deviation effect is set for the value “0 to 89” of the effect counter 223sw, and the upper value is set for the value “90 to 99” of the effect counter 223sw. Swing effect is set.

  Here, the upper swing effect is an effect in which an upper swing operation in which the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 moves up and down a predetermined number of times is performed. Specifically, in the case where a lottery result of the special symbol lottery result is executed, the upper swing operation is performed three times (0 seconds, 1.4 seconds, and 2.8 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). Is performed three times). In the upper swing effect performed when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, an upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed once or twice is performed. As described above, since the number of times of the upper swing operation when the upper swing effect is set is made different depending on whether or not a big hit occurs, the number of times of the upper swing operation can be noticed. That is, it is possible to observe the upper elevating unit 300, hoping that the upper swing operation is performed three times in succession. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the “rensou mode”.

  Next, the contents of the operation scenario table 222b in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 207 (c), the operation scenario table 222b in the fourth control example is different from the configuration of the operation scenario table 222b in the above-described first control example (see FIG. 119 (a)) in the upper swing. The difference is that an effect table 222b8 is added. The upper swing effect table 222b8 is a table that is referred to when the upper swing effect executed in the present control example is set.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 207 (d), the prescribed contents of the upper swing effect table 222b8 will be described. As in the other data tables defined as the operation scenario table 222b, the upper swing effect table 222b8 includes a motor control IC (motor driver IC) for each value of the operation pointer 223g indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario. ) Are set (operation speed (pps), number of operation steps, and operation direction).

  As shown in FIG. 207 (d), the operation for lowering the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the ascending position (origin position) to the descending position (the operation of the forward path) is set to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g. Are associated with each other. Specifically, 635 pps is specified as the operation speed, 127 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is specified as the operation direction. This set content is output (set) to the motor driver when the timing of driving the upper elevating unit 300 in the upper swing effect is reached. In addition, 127 steps mean the number of steps up to the descending position.

  Here, the operating speed of 635 pps means that the motor driver outputs a signal instructing the upper elevating motor 341 to drive for one step at a frequency of 635 pulses (steps) per second. The time required for the elevating body 330 of the elevating unit 300 to perform the 127-step operation (move from the origin position to the descending position) is 127/635 seconds (0.2 seconds).

  The value (02H) of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation (return operation) for raising the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 from the lowered position to the raised position (origin position). Specifically, 635 pps is specified as the operation speed, 127 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. Therefore, the elevating body 330 of the vertical elevating body unit 300 moves from the descending position to the ascending position in 0.2 seconds. Further, END data is associated with the value “03H” of the operation pointer 223g. By reading this END data, it is determined that the execution of all the operations specified in the operation scenario has been completed.

  As described above, the upper swing effect is that the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 descends from the ascending position to the descending position in 0.2 seconds, and then from the descending position to the ascending position in 0.2 seconds. And an ascending motion of a total of 0.4 seconds is performed a predetermined number of times (three times in the case of a big hit and one or two times in the case of a miss). As described above, the upper swing effect is executed as an effect indicating a degree of expectation to be a big hit in the extended game mode.

  Thereby, whether or not the swing operation is executed at a predetermined timing (0 seconds (immediately after the start of the fluctuation), 1.4 seconds, 2.8 seconds) after the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed (started) This can make the player interested.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 in this control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 118B) in that an upper swing effect timer 223pw, an upper swing effect flag 223qw, and a sensor information storage area 223rw are provided. , And an effect counter 223sw are added, and other configurations are the same. The same portions as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The upper swing production timer 223pw is a timer counter for counting (measuring) the production time (elapsed time from the start of the production) of the upper swing production. This upper swing effect timer is initialized to 0 (see S6135 in FIG. 213) when the upper swing effect is determined in the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213), and the upper swing effect is executed. In this case, 1 is added each time the upper swing effect process (see FIG. 214) is executed (see S6204 in FIG. 214).

  The upper swing effect flag 223qw is a flag for determining whether or not the upper swing effect is being executed. The upper swing effect flag 223qw is used in the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213). It is set to ON when the rocking effect is determined (see S6133 in FIG. 213), and when it is determined in the upper rocking effect process (see FIG. 214) that the upper rocking effect has been completed (the big hit has been started). In this case (S6201: Yes), the third swing operation timing (S6207: Yes) is set to off (S6202, S6208).

  The sensor information storage area 223rw is an area for storing (updating) the output values of the six detection sensors (detection sensors AF) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684, and stores the output values of the detection sensors AF. It is configured to be able to store (update) at least once. In the sensor information storage area 223rw, the output values of the detection sensors A to F are stored (updated) in the rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 210) (see S2836 in FIG. 210).

  Although details will be described later, in the rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 210), the output values of the previously stored detection sensors A to F are compared with the current output values of the detection sensors A to F (S2833 in FIG. 210). ), The presence or absence of an abnormality with respect to the detection values of the detection sensors A to F is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F and the current output values of the detection sensors A to F match with each other. Is determined to be abnormal.

  Here, the output values of the detection sensors A to F are a total of six pockets attached to a total of five pockets, that is, a pocket at which the ball B falls, two pockets at the right and two pockets at the left of the pocket. Changes depending on the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c. As shown in the rotation position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121), when the number of pockets at which the drop position is changed by one, the detection target 641c detected by the detection sensors A to E is changed to the detection sensors B to It is moved to the position detected by F. The detected portion 641c that has been detected by the detection sensor F is out of the detection range of the detection sensors A to F, and is moved to a position where a new detected portion 641c is detected by the detection sensor A. Therefore, when the output values of the detection sensors A to E do not match the output values of the detection sensors B to F after the pocket at which the drop position is changed by one, the detected portion 641c is damaged. Can be determined to have occurred.

  The effect counter 223sw is a counter used for selecting various effects (such as “upper swing effect”) and various lotteries in the sound lamp control device 113. Although not shown, the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 is omitted. 4 (see FIG. 209), it is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99.

<Regarding control processing of voice lamp control device in fourth control example>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 209 to 214, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. First, the main process 4 executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The main process 4 in the fourth control example is different from the main process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example in that an upper swing effect process (S1651) is added and the main process 4 in the command determination process (S1614). The rotation setting process 4 (see S2609 and FIG. 210) is executed instead of the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157), and the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the command determination process (S1614) is replaced. The special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117, see FIG. 211) is executed, and the variable display setting process 4 (S1652, see FIG. 212) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (S1615). The other parts are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the main processing 4 in the fourth control example, similarly to the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 145), after executing the processing of S1601 to S1610, the upper elevating unit 300 is used in the “long-sleeping mode”. The upper swing effect process for setting the effect to be performed is executed (S1651), and the process proceeds to S1611. The details of the upper swing effect process (S1651) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the main process 4 (see FIG. 209) in the present control example, after performing the processes of S1611 to S1614, the variable display setting process 4 is performed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. The process is executed (S1652), and the process proceeds to S1616. The details of the variable display setting process 4 (S1652) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the rotation setting process 4 (S2609) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The rotation setting process 4 (S2609) in the fourth control example is a process executed in the execution command process (see FIG. 155) instead of the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) in the first control example. Similar to the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157), this is a process for controlling the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 (and the rear LED 625).

  The rotation setting processing 4 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example is different from the rotation setting processing (see FIG. 157) in the first control example in that the processing of S2831 is executed instead of the processing of S2801; And S2836 are added, and the other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the rotation setting process 4 (S2609) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the outputs of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 have all changed from the L state. (S2831). That is, it is determined whether each of the detected portions 641c provided in the pocket has been displaced from outside the detection range of the detection sensors A to F to within the detection range, and all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F remain in the L state. When it is determined that each of the detected portions 641c remains disposed outside the detection range of the detection sensors A to F (S2831: No), a new (next) pocket is disposed at the drop position of the ball B. If not (the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotation member 640 since the time when the output values of the detection centers A to F were stored in the sensor information storage area 223 rw last time) is equal to or less than the unit rotation amount (the amount of rotation for moving one pocket). In this case, the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2831, the output values of at least one of the detection sensors AF are changed from the state in which the output values of the six detection sensors (detection sensors AF) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are all L. If it is determined that the ball has been displaced to the state of H (S2831: Yes), a new (next) pocket is placed at the drop position of the ball B (previous detection centers A to F are stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw). Since the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotation member 640 has become the unit rotation amount from the time when the output value is stored, the process proceeds to S2802 in this case. Even if the output values of all of the detection sensors A to F are not L, unless the output value of any of the detection sensors A to F has changed from L to H (S2831: No), Since the processing after S2802 is executed, in this case, the present processing ends.

  In the processing of S2802, the pocket at the drop position of the ball B is specified (S2802), and the rotational position storage area 223u is updated based on the specified pocket (S2803), as in the first control example. Next, it is determined whether or not the detection by the detection sensors AF after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is the first time (S2832). Specifically, it is determined whether or not an initial value is stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw. In the sensor information storage area 223rw, L (0) is set to all bits of a 2-byte storage area as an initial value when the power is turned on. In the process of S2832, when L (0) is stored in all the bits allocated to the sensor information storage area 223rw, it is determined that the detection is the first detection.

  In the process of S2832, when it is determined that the detection by the detection sensors A to F is not performed for the first time after the power is turned on (that is, the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F are stored) (S2832). : No), the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw (before the pocket position is changed by one), and this time, one of the pockets is newly placed at the drop position. The output values of the detection sensors A to F that have been displaced due to the operation are compared (S2833). Specifically, as described above, among the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F, five types of output values of the detection sensors A to E and the detection sensor B of the output values of the current detection sensors A to F ＦF are compared with the five output values. The presence or absence of an abnormality with respect to the detection result of the sensor can be determined only by the detection results of the detection sensors A to F for the pocket arranged at the previous drop position and the detection result for the pocket arranged at the current drop position. This is because, when the pocket changes by one, the detected portion 641c detected by the detection sensors A to E is moved to a position detected by the detection sensors B to F. Therefore, when the output values of the detection sensors A to E do not match the output values of the detection sensors B to F before the pocket at which the drop position is changed by one, at least one of the detected portions 641c is damaged. As a result, it can be determined that a problem has occurred such that detection by the detection sensor has become impossible.

  When the processing in S2833 ends, it is determined whether the comparison result executed in the processing in S2833 is abnormal (S2834). Specifically, when the output values of the previous detection sensors A to E and the current output values of the detection sensors B to F match, it is determined that there is no abnormality, and when they do not match, it is determined that there is an abnormality. In the process of S2834, when it is determined that the comparison result is abnormal (S2834: Yes), error information is output (error command for display is set) (S2835), and the process proceeds to S2836.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2832, when it is determined that the detection by the detection sensors A to F is the first time (S2832: Yes), the processing cannot be compared with the previous detection result, and the processing of S2833 to S2835 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S2836. If it is determined in step S2834 that the comparison result is normal (S2834: No), the process skips step S2835 and shifts to step S2836.

  In the process of S2836, the value of the sensor information storage area 223rw is updated based on the current output values of the detection sensors A to F, and the flow shifts to the process of S2804. In the processing of S2804 to S2808, the same processing as the processing of S2804 to S2808 of the first control example is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the rotation setting process 4 in the fourth control example, a plurality of pieces of detection information (output values) of the detection sensors A to F can be stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw, and a predetermined timing (one of the pockets) can be stored. Of the detection information (the detection information of the previously stored detection sensors A to F and the detection information obtained this time) obtained at the timing when the is located at the drop position, the detection information is the same if normal. By comparing the detection information of (range), it is possible to detect failure of the detection sensors A to F or damage of the detection target 641c.

  In the fourth control example, a configuration is used in which the previous detection information (the pocket located at the last drop position) and the current detection information (the pocket located at the current drop position) are compared. The detection information obtained at three or more timings (for example, the timing at which the pocket was placed at the drop position two times before, this time, and the last time) may be compared. With such a configuration, the abnormality can be more accurately detected. Can be determined.

  Further, in the fourth control example, the failure of the detection sensors A to F or the damage of the detected portion 641c is performed using the detection information (output value) of the detection sensors A to F used to specify the pocket of the rotating member 640. Therefore, there is no need to separately acquire detection information for detecting an abnormality of the detection sensors A to F or the detected portion 641c. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  The configuration for detecting the failure of the detection sensors A to F or the damage of the detected portion 641c is based on the combination of the detection result obtained when the pocket was previously placed at the drop position and the current time when the pocket is dropped. The present invention is not limited to a mode in which the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined by comparing a combination of the detection results obtained when being arranged at a position. For example, the arrangement pattern of the detected portion 641c is stored (stored) in advance. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which it is determined whether or not an output value (detection information) output from at least one of the detection sensors A to F matches an arrangement pattern stored in advance. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as in the fourth control example can be obtained.

  Further, based on the output values (detection information) of the detection sensors A to F stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw, prediction detection information that predicts at least a part of the detection information to be stored next time is created, and the prediction detection is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether the information matches the detection information stored next time.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning command processing 4 (S2117) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117) in the fourth control example is different from the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example in that steps S3321 to S3234 are performed instead of steps S3209 to S3211. The difference is that the processing is executed, and the other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117) in the fourth control example is started, first, the processes of S3201 to S3208 are executed as in the first control example. Then, in the process of S3208, when it is determined that the game is to be added (S3208: Yes), a pocket within a fallable range is specified from the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 (S3231). Here, the timing at which the pitching device 650 performs the pitching operation (throws the ball B to the holding piece 677) is 50 seconds after the roulette chance effect is started (70 seconds from the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”). After). The period from when the ball B is thrown to when the ball B is dropped after swinging on the holding piece 677 is about 7 seconds to 10 seconds. Therefore, for example, if the process of S3231 is performed 5 seconds after the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is started, the pitching device 650 performs the pitching operation 65 seconds later, and 72 seconds to 75 seconds later. It can be determined that the ball B falls. Then, the rotation member 640 rotates at a rotation speed capable of moving one pocket per second. For this reason, in this specific example, the ball B falls after performing the rotation operation for 72 to 75 pockets (that is, 12 to 15 pockets ahead of the pocket currently arranged at the drop position). Then, it is determined. In the process of S3231, the seven pockets including the margin are determined as the fallable range. For example, in the above specific example, the pockets 8 to 17 ahead are determined as the fallable range. That is, two margins are provided before and after.

  When the processing of S3231 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved ball that will be a jackpot in the “preparation mode” (when the time-saving state counter is larger than 0) (S3232). In the process of S3232, when it is determined that there is a reserved ball that has a probability of winning in the “preparation mode” (S3232: Yes), the pocket specified in the process of S3231 is selected as an additional position (S3234) and the process of S3212 is performed. Move to.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3232, when it is determined that there is no retained ball that will be a big hit in the preparation mode (S3232: No), a pocket different from the pocket specified in the process of S3231 is selected as an additional position (S3233). ), And proceeds to the process of S3212.

  After the processing of S3212, the processing of S3212 and the processing of S3213 are executed as in the first control example, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the special figure 2 winning command processing 4 (S2117) of the present control example, in the processing of S3232, when it is determined that there is a reserved ball with a probability of changing in the “prepare mode” (that is, in the roulette chance effect) In the case where the ball B hits and falls into the pocket), the pocket having the fallable range specified in the process of S3231 is selected as the additional position. As a result, it is possible to add a pocket which can be dropped as a hit position, so that there are many pockets (lighted pockets) in a range where the ball B can be dropped in the effect of dropping the ball B (roulette chance effect). Will be placed. As a result, it is easy to drop the ball B into the hit pocket (lighted pocket).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3232, when it is determined that there is no reserved ball that will be a probable big hit during the preparation mode (that is, in the case of the roulette chance effect, the ball B falls and falls into the pocket), it is specified in the process of S3231. A pocket different from the pocket in which the fall is allowed is selected as the additional position. As a result, since a pocket that can fall is not added as a hit position, the pocket is out of the range where the ball B can be dropped in the effect of dropping the ball B (roulette chance effect) (a pocket that is turned off). Will be arranged more. As a result, it is easy to drop the ball B into the unplugged pocket (the pocket that is turned off).

  As described above, in the special figure 2 winning command processing 4 (see FIG. 211) in the fourth control example, the range in which the ball B can fall in the roulette chance effect is calculated based on the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650. The 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640 are divided into a range where the ball B can fall (first region) and a range where the ball B does not fall (difficult) (second region). Classified.

  Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not there is a hold to be a probability change big hit during the preparation mode, that is, based on the determination result as to whether the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket or the missed pocket by the roulette chance effect, the hit pocket is determined. Since the region to be added is set to either the first region or the second region, even if the frequency of the effect of adding (adding) a winning pocket is increased, the ball B is appropriately applied to the lottery result of the special symbol. Can be dropped.

  In the fourth control example, as the first area where the ball B can fall, the number of hit pockets (lucky numbers) that can be specified by the player is more than five (ie, the number of pockets 7). ). Thereby, even if the player sets the lucky number to five consecutive pockets and all of the five consecutive pockets are included in the fallable range (first region), the fallable range (first region) is set. It is possible to set at least one missing pocket in one area). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately drop the ball B with respect to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 4 (S1652) in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the variation display setting process 4 (S1652) in the fourth control example, a variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is performed instead of the process in S3304, in contrast to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. And the other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the variation display setting process 4 (S1652) in the present control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on in the process of S3301 (S3301: Yes), the process proceeds from S3302. The processing of S3303 is executed. Then, a variation pattern selection process 4 is executed (S3331), and the process shifts to the process of S3305, where the processes of S3306 to S3310 are executed as in the first control example, and the present process ends. The variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is a process for selecting a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Details of the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The flowchart of FIG. 213 is a flowchart illustrating the above-described variation pattern selection processing 4 (S3331). This variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is a modification of a portion of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 206) in the third control example. Specifically, the difference is that processing related to the upper swing effect (S6131 to S6135) is executed instead of the processing related to the chance eye effect (S6106, S6108 to S6110). The points are the same. Hereinafter, the same portions as those in the third control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331), first, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state flag 223o is on (S6101). In the process of S6101, when it is determined that the time reduction state flag 223o is off (S6101: No), the normal effect mode is determined as in the variation pattern process (see FIG. 206) in the third control example. (S6102 to S6104), a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined effect mode is set (S6111), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6101 that the time reduction state flag 223o is ON (S6101: Yes), the table for extended holiday (variable pattern selection table 222a5 during extended holiday) is read from the variation pattern selection table 222a. (S6105). Then, the value of the effect counter 223sw is read (S6131), and the effect mode is determined based on the read variable pattern selection table 222a5 during consecutive holidays and the value of the effect counter 223sw (S6107).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off and the effect mode determined in the process of S6107 is the upper effect mode (S6132). In the process of S6132, when it is determined that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is ON (that is, the upper swing effect is already being executed) or that the upper swing effect has not been determined in the process of S6107 ( (S6112: No), the display variation pattern command for notifying the normal jackpot effect is set as the effect mode (S6111), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6132, when it is determined that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off and the upper swing effect is determined (S6132: Yes), the upper swing effect flag 223qw is turned on. It is set (S6133), and the upper swing operation is set (S6134). By setting the upper swing operation in the process of S6134, the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 is moved up and down based on the upper swing effect table 222b8 of the operation scenario table 222b described above.

  Thereafter, the upper swing effect timer 223pw is initialized to 0 (S6135), a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined effect mode is set (S6111), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) in the present control example, when the upper swing effect is determined (S6132: Yes), the setting is performed so that the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 can move up and down. At the same time, the upper swing effect timer 223pw is initialized to zero. Using the upper swing effect timer 223pw, the elapsed time from the start of the upper swing effect is measured, and when a predetermined time (1.4 seconds or 2.8 seconds) has elapsed, the upper elevating unit 300 is again activated. The upper swing operation of vertically moving the elevating body 330 can be executed.

  Next, details of the upper swing effect processing (S1651) in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 214. When the upper swing effect is determined (started) in the above-described variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331), the upper swing effect process (S1651) is performed for a predetermined time from the start of the upper swing effect (in the present control example, This is a process for measuring the elapsed time of 1.4 seconds and 2.8 seconds) and executing the upper swing operation when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the upper swing effect process (S1651), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game has been started (S6201). If it is determined in the process of S6201 that the jackpot game has been started (S6201: Yes), the upper swing effect has been started, but thereafter, the jackpot game has been started due to the occurrence of a jackpot due to a hit short variation. In this case, the upper swing effect flag 223qw is set to OFF to end the upper swing effect (S6202), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6201 that the big hit game has not been started (S6201: No), then it is determined whether or not the upper swing effect flag 223qw is on (S6203).

  In the process of S6203, when it is determined that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off (S6203: No), the upper swing effect has not been started, and thus the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is ON (S6203: Yes), the process proceeds to S6204 to execute the upper swing effect.

  In the processing of S6204, the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is added by 1 (S6204). The upper swing effect process (S1651) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 209) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 described above. Therefore, the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is added every 1 ms by the process of S6204.

  After finishing the process of S6204, it is determined whether or not the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw after the addition is 1400 (S6205). That is, it is determined whether 1.4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the upper swing effect.

  In the processing of S6205, when it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw after the addition is 1400 (S6205: Yes), the upper body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 is moved up and down to move it up and down. The swing operation is set (S6206), and the flow shifts to the process of S6207.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is not 1400 (S6205), the process of S6206 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6207. In the process of S6207, it is determined whether or not the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is 2800 (S6207). That is, it is determined whether or not 2.8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the upper swing effect.

  In the process of S6207, when it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is 2800 (S6207: Yes), the upper swing effect flag 223qw is turned off because it is the end timing of the upper swing effect. After setting (S6208), the process proceeds to S6209.

  In the process of S6209, it is determined whether or not a change to be a big hit is being executed (S6209). If it is determined in the process of S6209 that a big change is being executed (S6209: Yes), the upper swing operation is set (S6210).

  On the other hand, in the process of S6209, when it is determined that the change that causes the jackpot has not been executed (S6209: No), the process of S6210 is skipped, and the present process ends.

  Here, the upper swing effect in the present control example is an effect in which the upper swing operation in which the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 can move up and down is performed up to three times as described above. The case where the upper swing operation is performed three times is limited to a case where a big hit is thereafter performed. By performing the upper swing operation three times, the player is notified that the big hit has been won. it can.

  The processing of S6209 is executed in the upper swing effect already in the first upper swing operation (immediately after the start of the upper swing effect) and the second time (1.4 after the upper swing effect is started). (After 2 seconds). In this case, if the change to be a big hit is being executed, the upper swing operation is set to execute the third upper swing operation (2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect). (S6210).

  On the other hand, if the change that results in the jackpot is not executed (S6209: No), the upper swing effect is not set, and the process ends. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a problem that the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times is executed after the upper swing operation is performed even though the big hit does not occur.

  As described above, the upper swing effect performed by the fluctuation pattern selection process 4 (S3331 in FIG. 213) and the upper swing effect process (S1651 in FIG. 214) of the fourth control example is output from the main control device 110. The first upper swing operation is performed based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the second upper swing operation is performed based on the lapse of a predetermined time (1.4 seconds) since the upper swing effect was performed. Be executed. Then, when a predetermined time (1.4 seconds) elapses after the execution of the second upper swing operation, the third upper swing operation is performed when the special symbol that has won the jackpot is changed. Is configured to be executed.

  Thereby, the upper swing effect composed of the operation mode (upper swing operation) performed a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval) is performed by changing the special symbol variation pattern (variation time). Can be performed without being affected by

  Therefore, as in the case of “hit middle fluctuation (variation time: 3 seconds)” selected by the continuous fluctuation pattern selection table 222a5, three upper rocking operations are completed during one fluctuation as an upper rocking effect. In other cases, the upper swing effect is started due to the “short short change (change time 0.2 seconds)”, and the “hit short change (change time 0.2 seconds) is different from the change in which the upper swing effect was started. ) "Is fluctuating 2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect, the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times can be executed.

  Therefore, a predetermined operation mode (upper swing operation) is executed a plurality of times (three times) at predetermined intervals (1.4 second intervals) to notify that a predetermined lottery result (big hit) has been won. The effect (upper swing effect) can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, even if a configuration that does not store a special symbol lottery (a configuration without a so-called storage function) is used, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, an effect that associates a plurality of special symbol variations with each other. Can be performed.

  The configuration of the fourth control example may be used for the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration for storing a special symbol lottery (winning information) (a configuration for holding and storing), for example, the third upper swing operation is executed. It is determined at the timing that the winning information stored on the hold includes winning information that has won the jackpot. If there is winning information that has won the jackpot, the third upper swing operation is performed. It may be configured to be executed. Thereby, the frequency of the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the fourth control example, the second upper swing operation is always performed 1.4 seconds after the upper swing effect is started. For example, the upper swing effect is started. It is configured to determine whether the special symbol is fluctuating when 1.4 seconds have passed since the second symbol, and to execute the second upper swing operation when it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating. Is also good. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed is an effect related to the change display of the special symbol, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. effective.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 in the roulette chance effect is calculated back in advance during the increase effect, and the additional position of the winning pocket is determined. That is, when the ball B is thrown, the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation performed on the upper part of the movable piece 677 is reduced, and the timing (period) that gives a natural appearance when the ball B is dropped is calculated backward. The additional position of the winning pocket is determined based on the calculated period and the result of the present roulette chance production (whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”). Here, after the amplitude of the swinging motion of the ball B simply becomes small, the apparatus waits until the pocket type corresponding to the result of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is placed at the drop position, and the corresponding pocket type becomes In the case where the ball B is dropped at the timing of being placed at the drop position, the state where the corresponding pocket type is not placed at the drop position continues for a long time, so that the ball B may stop before dropping the ball B. There is. In other words, there is a possibility that the appearance of the ball B does not fall into the pocket even though the ball B is at rest, resulting in an extremely unnatural appearance.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, a section in which the ball B can be dropped (a section located at the drop position when the cycle of the swinging motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle) is defined as “a series In the case where the number of hit pockets is determined in advance at the start of the "mode suggestive effect" and the number of hit pockets is increased by the increase effect, the distribution of the hit pockets and the missing pockets in the section where the ball B can be dropped (addition is determined. In this case, whether to set a new hit pocket in the section or not is determined according to the result of the effect (whether the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket or dropped into the missing pocket). With this configuration, in the section where the ball B can be dropped, it is possible to reliably arrange the type of pocket corresponding to the effect result. Accordingly, the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation of the ball B is equal to or less than the predetermined period (1 second), and the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket before the swinging operation of the ball B stops. it can. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance and with high accuracy.

  In the fourth control example, when the detection results of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are acquired, the detection results are placed in the next pocket (currently dropped position). (A pocket placed at the drop position next to the pocket being placed) is held until it is placed at the drop position. Then, the held detection result is compared with a new detection result obtained by arranging the next pocket at the drop position to determine whether there is an abnormality. That is, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined by determining whether the previous detection result and the current detection result are continuous (adjacent) pocket detection results. This makes it possible to detect damage to the detection sensors A to F (or damage to the detected portion 641c).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, as one mode of the entertaining effect in the “rensou mode”, the effect of using the accessory (the upper elevating unit 300) is used to improve the interest of the player. Specifically, it is configured to be able to perform an effect of moving the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 one or more times at predetermined time intervals (intervals of 1.4 seconds). The number of operations of the lifting / lowering body 330 is made different depending on whether or not a big hit occurs. In the case of a deviation, the number of times of operation is two or less, and only in the case of a big hit, three raising / lowering operations are allowed. This allows the player to play a game while paying attention to the number of times of elevating and lowering operations of the elevating body 330, thereby suppressing a monotonous game in the “rensou mode”. .

  The effect in which the elevating body 330 performs the elevating operation (upper swinging effect) is performed for a predetermined number of times irrespective of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol (even if the fluctuation time elapses) unless the jackpot is started. The lifting operation is continued at a predetermined time interval (1.4 second interval). Therefore, as in the case of “hit middle fluctuation (variation time: 3 seconds)” selected by the continuous fluctuation pattern selection table 222a5, three upper rocking operations are completed during one fluctuation as an upper rocking effect. In other cases, the upper swing effect is started due to the “short short change (change time 0.2 seconds)”, and the “hit short change (change time 0.2 seconds) is different from the change in which the upper swing effect was started. ) "Is fluctuating 2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect, the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times can be executed. Therefore, a predetermined operation mode (upper swing operation) is executed a plurality of times (three times) at predetermined intervals (1.4 second intervals) to notify that a predetermined lottery result (big hit) has been won. The effect (upper swing effect) can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the fourth control example, the section in which the ball B can be dropped (the cycle of the swinging motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle) during the execution of the “rendition mode suggestive effect”. Is predicted in advance from the production time, and when setting a new hit pocket, the position of the new hit pocket is determined in consideration of the section where the ball B falls, but in addition to this, , At a predetermined timing in the “rensou mode suggestion” effect (for example, at the start of a roulette chance effect or at the timing of pitching the ball B by the pitching device 650), is there any change in the section where the ball B will fall? May be determined. Then, it is predicted in a section where the ball B is predicted to fall at the time when the winning pocket is newly set, and at a predetermined timing (for example, a start time of a roulette chance effect, a pitching timing of the ball B by the pitching device 650, and the like). If the section where the ball B is predicted to fall is shifted, the shift may be corrected. As a method of correcting the displacement, for example, by changing the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, the section where the ball B can actually fall can be made to match the section predicted at the time when the hit pocket is added. Alternatively, the ball B can be actually dropped by shifting the pitch of the pitch by the pitching device 650 from a predetermined timing (that is, 70 seconds after the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”). The section may be configured to match the section predicted at the time when the winning pocket is added. With this configuration, the ball B can be more reliably viewed with a natural appearance (the period of the swinging motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined period and the ball B is in a range where the ball B is not stationary), and Can be dropped into pocket.

  In this control example, when the detection results of the detection sensors A to F are acquired, the detection results are transferred to the next pocket (the pocket located at the next drop position next to the pocket currently located at the drop position). It is held until it is located at the position, and it is configured to determine the presence or absence of an abnormality by comparing with the new detection result obtained by placing the next pocket at the drop position. The determination method is not limited to this. For example, each time the detection results of the detection sensors A to F are obtained, a combination of the detection results of the pockets to be arranged next at the drop position is predicted in advance from the arrangement of the rotating member 640 specified by the detection results. It may be configured. That is, a combination of outputs of the detection sensors of the pockets to be placed next at the drop position may be read from the rotation position determination table 222c and stored in the RAM 223. Then, when the next pocket is actually placed at the drop position, the combination of the output of the detection sensor predicted in advance (stored in the RAM 223) matches the combination of the output of the actual detection sensor. It may be configured to determine whether or not. With this configuration, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, it is possible to accurately determine whether there is an abnormality such as breakage of each of the detection sensors A to F and breakage of the detected portion 641c. . Also, for example, the configuration is such that all combinations of outputs of the detection sensors A to F are stored in the order in which the pockets are arranged. It is good also as a structure which determines whether it has become. With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine the presence or absence of an abnormality in the detection sensors A to F and the detected portion 641c. Further, for example, when the rotating member 640 makes one rotation, the number of times the detected portion 641c is detected may be determined to determine whether at least a part of the detected portion 641c is damaged. . As described above, the detected portion 641c is provided in 16 of the 30 pockets. For this reason, when the rotating member 640 makes one rotation, the output of each of the detection sensors A to F should be H state 16 times each. In this situation, if it is determined that the number of H outputs per revolution is less than 16, one of the detected portions 641c is in a state where it cannot be detected by the detection sensors A to F due to damage or the like. Likely to be. Therefore, in this case, by reporting the abnormality, it is possible to promptly deal with a problem such as damage to the detected portion 641c. Furthermore, at the time of one rotation, the number of times that each of the detection sensors A to F has changed to the H output state may be compared to determine whether the numbers match. The number of times that the output is in the H state during one round (the number of times each of the detected parts 641c is detected) should be common to all the detection sensors. Can be determined to have a failure or the like. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine the malfunction of the detection sensors A to F.

  In the fourth control example, in the “rensou-mode suggestive effect” in which the effect time is fixed, the rotating member 640 is rotated at the start of the effect, and the rough section in which the ball B falls is predicted from the effect time or the like. However, the production time and the timing for starting the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 need not be fixed. For example, the control of the fourth control example can also be applied to a configuration in which the production time of the “rensou mode suggested production” has a variation and one production time is determined by lottery. That is, at the point in time when the production time is determined, a rough section in which the ball B is dropped may be predicted based on the production time and the rotation speed of the rotating member 640. In addition, similarly, even when a plurality of effect patterns in which one or both of the rotation speed and the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 are different from each other are provided, at the timing at which the rotation operation is started, The configuration may be such that the time until the ball B is thrown is calculated backward, and a rough section in which the ball B is dropped is predicted from the rotation speed of the rotating member 640. With this configuration, when a winning pocket is added, it is possible to arrange a new winning pocket so that a pocket of a type for dropping the ball B is reliably included in a section predicted in consideration of the effect result. it can. Therefore, in each “rensou mode suggestion effect”, the ball B can be dropped into the pocket of the type corresponding to the effect result. Furthermore, even when the timing at which the rendering time in the “rensou-mode suggestive rendering” is determined is later than the timing at which the rotating member 640 starts rotating, the control of the fourth control example is performed. Can be applied. In other words, at the timing at which the rendering time is determined, a section where the ball B may fall is roughly predicted from the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, and the predicted section corresponds to the type corresponding to the current rendering result. It is sufficient to adopt a configuration in which the pockets are placed on top of each other so that the pockets are arranged. Thereby, before the ball B completely stops the swinging operation, the ball B can be surely dropped into the pocket corresponding to the effect result.

<Fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, the first path forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is moved to the connection position when a partial jackpot (a jackpot in which the opening pattern A is set) is obtained by a part of the jackpot. The configuration is such that the ball that has won the winning device 82a is used as a flow-down passage for flowing the ball to the second passage forming member 422. In addition to this, in the present control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is configured to be movable as an effect indicating a degree of expectation that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big hit. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the first control example described above, when the ball B is dropped in the “renjo mode suggestion effect”, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is performed after the period (amplitude) of the swing operation of the ball B becomes sufficiently small. Is determined, and the ball B is held on the holding piece 677 until the pocket where the ball B can be dropped is located in front of the drop position (0.2 seconds before reaching the drop position). .

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example is configured such that the drop position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect is determined in advance. Then, according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol, it is configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined drop position as a hit position (whether to light up). Thus, the ball B may be dropped into the predetermined pocket, so that the control process can be simplified.

  In the first control example described above, the timing at which the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650 is constant (70 seconds after the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is started). On the other hand, in the present control example, in the roulette chance effect, a period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is received (for example, three seconds in one roulette chance effect) is provided, and the player operates the frame button 22. When the ball B is detected, the ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650. Further, during the period in which the frame button 22 can be accepted, a pitch press effect (see FIG. 216) for prompting the player to press the frame button 22 is executed. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period suggested by the pitching press effect, the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650. This allows the player to throw the ball B onto the rotating member 640 at an arbitrary timing, thereby improving the player's willingness to participate in the roulette chance effect.

  Note that the timing of starting the pitching press effect (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is received) is determined based on the rotational position of the rotating member 640. Thereby, the pitch-down effect can be started at a timing at which the ball can easily be dropped to a predetermined drop position (pocket) in the pitch-down effect. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 1.5 seconds) after the above-described pitching press effect is started, the timing at which the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650 is delayed. Configured. This makes it possible to limit the timing at which the ball B is pitched in the pitching press effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of the problem that the ball B falls into a pocket other than the predetermined pocket.

  The difference of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the configurations of the RAM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that a part of the processing performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 215, a description will be given of an effect mode of a notice effect by the left swing unit 500 in the present control example. As described above in the first control example, in the “normal mode” of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is a big hit by the number (number) displayed on the staging unit 331 of the upper elevating unit 300. Is notified. In addition to this, in the present control example, an effect in which the left swing unit 500 can be moved up and down (left swing effect) can be executed as an effect indicating a degree of expectation that the special symbol lottery result will be a big hit. Have been. In addition, as a left swing production, a first left swing production with a relatively low expectation of a big hit and a second left swing production with a high expectation of a big hit as compared with the first left swing production. At least two types are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 215 (a), in the first left swing effect and the second left swing effect, first, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is moved from the release position to the release position and the connection position. Is moved up to an intermediate position between. Thereafter, in the first left swing effect, the left swing unit 500 is moved down from the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position to the release position.

  On the other hand, in the second left swing effect, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), the ascending operation is performed from the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position to the connection position. Then, the lowering operation is performed from the connection position to the release position.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present control example, the left swing effect (first swing movement) in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is movable according to the degree of expectation that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. A left swing effect or a second left swing effect) is executed. Thereby, the player pays attention to whether or not the second left swing effect having a high expectation to be a big hit is executed (note whether the left swing unit 500 rises from the intermediate position). The fun of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 216, a description will be given of the pitching-down effect in the fifth control example. The roulette chance effect in this control example is executed in the order of the pitching press preparation effect, the pitching press effect, and the swinging effect. In the pitching press preparation effect, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), the character “Pitching Chance!” Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the pitching press preparation effect, the player can recognize that the effect of pitching the ball B by pressing the frame button 22 (throwing press effect) is executed. Although the details will be described later, the timing of transition from the pitching press preparation effect to the pitching press effect (ie, the timing at which the pitching press effect is displayed) is based on the position information of the rotating member 640 and the information of the drop position storage area 223ex. Is determined. Thereby, the pitch-down effect can be started so that the pocket to be dropped during the execution of the pitch-in effect for a total of 3 seconds (during the effect) is arranged at the drop position.

  In the pitching press effect, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), an effect prompting the player to press the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the frame button 22 is pressed during execution (during display) of the pitching press effect, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650, and a transition is made to a rocking effect (see FIG. 216 (c)). On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not pressed during execution (display) of the pitching press effect, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 after a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses, and a transition is made to a swinging effect. (See FIG. 216 (c)).

  If the frame button 22 is pressed 1.5 seconds after the start of the pitching effect, the ball B is thrown 1.5 seconds after the start of the pitching effect. (That is, the pitch is delayed). On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is pressed 1.5 seconds after the start of the pitching press effect, the ball B is pitched at the pressing timing. As a result, the timing at which the ball B is thrown can be limited to the latter half 1.5 seconds of the three seconds. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem that the ball B falls into a pocket other than the predetermined pocket.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the present control example is different from the ROM 222 of the first control example (see FIG. 118) in that the contents of the left swing unit table 222b3 are partially changed. The other contents of the ROM 222 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example. Hereinafter, the same portions as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (a), the left swing unit table 222b3 in the present control example executes a first left swing unit table 222b3a for executing a first swing effect, and executes a second swing effect. Left swing unit table 222b3b. In the left swing unit table 222b3, for each value of the operation pointer 223g indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario, a set value (operation speed (pps), operation speed) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) is set. The number of steps and the operation direction) are defined.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 217 (b), the prescribed contents of the first left swing unit table 222b3a will be described. As shown in FIG. 217 (b), in the first left swing unit table 222b3a, the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g indicates that the left swing unit 500 has been shifted from the release position (origin position) to the release position and the connection position. The operation (movement on the outward path) for ascending to the middle of the above is associated. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to drive the left swing unit 500 in the first left swing effect. Here, 100 steps mean the number of steps from the release position to the intermediate position.

  Here, as described above, the operation speed (pps) indicates the frequency (the number of outputs per second) at which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) instructing one-step operation to the corresponding drive motor. . Therefore, the time required to move the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 from the release position to the intermediate position by operating 100 steps at the operation speed of 200 pps is 100/200 seconds (0.5 seconds).

  The operation for stopping (resting) the left swing unit 500 at the intermediate position is associated with the value “02H” of the operation pointer 223g. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 1000 is defined as the operation step, and “stop” is defined as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that the stop command is continuously issued 1000 times at an operation speed of 200 pps. Thereby, the left swing unit 1000 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 5 seconds (1000 times / 200 pps).

  The value (03H) of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation (return operation) for lowering the left swing unit 500 from the intermediate position to the release position (origin position). Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is lowered from the intermediate position to the release position over 0.5 seconds.

  The END data is associated with the value “04H” of the operation pointer 223g. By reading the END data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Next, the contents of the second left swing unit table 222b3b will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 217 (c), the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g in the second left swing unit table 222b3b cancels the left swing unit 500 as in the first left swing unit table 222b3a. An operation for moving up from the position (origin position) to the intermediate position (operation on the forward path) is associated with the operation. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is raised from the release position to the intermediate position over 0.5 seconds (100 steps / 200 pps).

  The operation for stopping (resting) the left swing unit 500 at the intermediate position is associated with the value “02H” of the operation pointer 223g. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 500 is defined as the operation step, and “stop” is defined as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that the stop command is continuously output 500 times at an operation speed of 200 pps. Thus, the left swing unit 500 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 2.5 seconds (500 times / 200 pps).

  The value (03H) of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation for moving the left swing unit 500 from the intermediate position to the connection position (operation on the outward path). Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is raised from the intermediate position to the connection position over 0.5 seconds.

  The value “04H” of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation for stopping (resting) the left swing unit 500 at the connection position. Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the operation speed, 300 is specified as the operation step, and “stop” is specified as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that a stop command is continuously output 300 times at an operation speed of 200 pps. Thus, the left swing unit 500 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 1.5 seconds (300 times / 200 pps).

  The operation (return operation) for lowering the left swing unit 500 from the connection position to the release position (origin position) is associated with the value “05H” of the operation pointer 223g. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is lowered from the connection position to the release position over one second.

  The END data is associated with the value “06H” of the operation pointer 223g. By reading the END data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the RAM 223 provided in the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 118B) in that the effect counter 223ax, the pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx, the pitching depression effect flag 223cx, and the delayed pitching flag 223dx And a drop position storage area 223ex are added, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The effect counter 223ax is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for selecting various effects (such as "left swinging effect") and various lotteries. Although not shown, the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is omitted. (See FIG. 145), it is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99.

  The pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute the setting of the pitching depression effect. The pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx is set to ON when it is the timing to start the pitching depression effect in the roulette effect in the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222) (see S2003: Yes in FIG. 222). The pitch-down effect setting flag 223bx is referred to in the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222), and when it is determined that the switch is turned on (see S2023 in FIG. 222: Yes), the pitch-down effect setting process (see FIG. 223). Is executed. Then, in the pitching press effect setting process (see FIG. 223), when the ball B is pitched from the pitching device 650, it is set to off.

  The pitching depression effect flag 223cx is a flag for determining whether or not a pitching depression effect (see FIG. 216) that prompts the player to press the frame button 22 in order to throw the ball B is displayed. . When the pitching depression effect flag 223cx is determined to be the pitching timing of the ball B in the pitching depression effect setting process (see FIG. 223) (see S6404: Yes in FIG. 223), the display of the pitching depression effect is displayed. It is set (see S6406 in FIG. 223) and turned on (see S6407 in FIG. 223). The pitching depression effect flag 223cx is referred to in the pitching depression effect setting process (refer to FIG. 223), and when it is determined that it is on (S6408 in FIG. 223: Yes), it is determined based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed. Thus, the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is set (see S6414 in FIG. 223), and the process shifts to a swing effect. Even when the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6408: No), the pitching operation of the pitching apparatus 650 is set based on the elapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in this control example) (see S6414 in FIG. 223), and the rocking operation is performed. Move to production. Although the details will be described later, the pitching operation is not allowed for a certain period (1.5 seconds) from the start of the pitching press effect, and the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is set to be delayed. Become.

  The delayed pitch flag 223dx is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed outside the pitch allowable period of the pitch press effect (a period in which pitch is not permitted). The delayed pitch flag 223dx is set when the frame button 22 is pressed in the pitch press effect setting process (see FIG. 223) outside the pitch allowable period of the pitch press effect (within 1.5 seconds from the start of the pitch press effect). It is set to ON (see S6410 in FIG. 223). In the pitching depression effect setting process (see FIG. 223), it is determined whether or not the delayed pitching flag 223dx is on when the pitching allowable period of the pitching depression effect is reached (see S6412 in FIG. 223), and the delay pitching flag 223dx is turned on. When it is determined that there is, the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is executed. That is, the pitching operation is executed with a delay until the pitching allowable period. Thereafter, the delayed pitch flag 223dx is set to off (see S6415 in FIG. 223).

  The drop position storage area 223ex is an area for storing information on a drop position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect. In the drop position storage area 223ex, in the hit pocket sorting process 5 (see FIG. 224) executed at the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, the next reserved ball (lottery result of the special symbol executed first) is stored. Determined based on whether it is a probability change jackpot or not. Specifically, when the next reserved ball is a probable jackpot, one of the pockets (pockets designated by the player) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223av is set as a drop position (S3122 in FIG. 224). If the next hold is not a big hit, a pocket other than the pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223av is designated as a drop position (see S3123 in FIG. 224). The drop position (pocket) stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is used when determining the start timing of the above-described pitching depression effect (see S6404 in FIG. 223) or when increasing the hit pocket in the increase effect (see FIG. 224). S3124 and S3221 in FIG. 225).

<Regarding control processing of voice lamp control device in fifth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. First, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 219, a description will be given of the fall control process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example.

  The fall control process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Like the fall control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example, the ball B falls ( This is a process for controlling the operation of the holding piece 677). Note that the same portions as those in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and only different portions will be described.

  In the fall control process 5 of the fifth control example, first, the processes of S1801 to S1802 are executed in the same manner as the fall control process of the first control example (see FIG. 147). Then, the next pocket is calculated based on the pocket specified in the processing of S1802 (S1831). Here, the next pocket means a pocket arranged at a drop position next to the pocket specified in the processing of S1802. For example, if the pocket specified in the processing of S1802 is the pocket P1, , The pocket P2 is specified as the next pocket. This pocket is calculated with reference to pocket arrangement information (not shown) stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  After the processing of S1831, the information of the pocket (pocket for dropping the ball B) stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is obtained (S1832), and then stored in the drop position storage area 223ex. It is determined whether the pocket matches the pocket (next pocket) calculated by the processing of S1831, that is, whether the pocket to be placed next at the drop position is a pocket for dropping the ball B (S1833). ).

  In the process of S1833, if it is determined that the pocket stored in the fall position storage area 223ex matches the pocket calculated by the process of S1831 (S1833: Yes), the process proceeds to S1806. On the other hand, if the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex does not match the pocket calculated by the processing of S1831 in the processing of S1833 (S1833: No), then the value of the swing timer 223w is set to 100. It is determined whether it is smaller than (corresponding to 0.1 second) (S1834). In the process of S1834, it is determined whether the interval at which H (high) is output from the ball detection sensor 679, that is, whether the half of the cycle in which the ball B swings on the movable piece 677 is less than 0.1 second. I have. This 0.1 second means that the ball B moves the movable piece 677 until H (high) is output from the ball detection sensor 679 next (until the timing at which the next ball B can be set to fall is reached). It is set as a value indicating a state in which there is a risk of stopping above.

  If it is determined in step S1834 that the value of the swing timer 223w is equal to or greater than 100 (S1834: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the swing timer 223w is smaller than 100, that is, if it is determined that the ball B may stop on the movable piece 677 (S1834: Yes), the entirety of the lighting position storage area 223m is determined. Is cleared (all bits are set to L) (S1835), and the routine goes to S1806.

  Here, the process of S1835 will be specifically described. As described above, the lighting position storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the state (lighting state or off state) of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 (see FIG. 97). The lighting of each of the rear LEDs 625 is controlled according to the information stored in the lighting position storage area 223m. Therefore, by clearing all information of the lighting position storage area 223m (all bits are set to L) in the processing of S1835, control is performed such that all of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are turned off. .

  In the processing of S1806, the operation setting for the effect ball (ball B) to be dropped is set after 100 steps, and then the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to off (S1807), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the drop control process 5 (see FIG. 219) of the fifth control example, the pocket for dropping the ball B in the roulette chance effect is stored in the drop position storage area 223ex in advance, and then placed at the drop position. When it is determined that the pocket to be dropped is a pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex, the ball B is dropped. Thus, the ball B can be appropriately dropped into the preset pocket, and thus a problem that the ball B falls into a pocket other than the predetermined pocket can be suppressed (prevented).

  Further, in the fifth control example, after the swing effect is executed, the ball B is not satisfied with the condition for dropping the ball B (the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex and the pocket calculated by the processing of S1831). (Without coincidence with the next pocket), the amplitude of the sphere B swinging on the movable piece 677 is a predetermined magnitude (in this control example, the amplitude of the half of the amplitude cycle is 0.1 second). ), The lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are all set to the unlit state, and then a process of dropping the ball B (abnormal process) is performed. Accordingly, the situation in which the ball B cannot be dropped into the target pocket (the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex) during the rocking performance continues, and the ball B moves during the rocking performance. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation of stopping above, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Note that, in the swing effect performed based on the winning of the jackpot, when the above-described processing of S1835 is performed (all of the lighting regions A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are all set to the unlit state), The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an effect for notifying that a jackpot has been won after the swing effect is completed. Thereby, even when the ball B cannot be dropped, it can be made to seem as one mode of the notification in the roulette chance effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the fifth control example, the falling operation of the ball B is set when the next pocket arranged at the drop position is the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 222ex. The pocket specified on the basis of the value (H (high) or L (low)) output from the detection sensors A to F and the rotation position determination table 222c, and the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 222ex. The number of pocket separations may be calculated, and the timing for setting the drop operation of the ball B may be set based on the calculation result. With this configuration, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the drop operation of the ball B using the number of steps output by the motor control IC (motor driver) of the rotation motor 631. A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, the determination may be made by a counter updated each time the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

  Next, the variable display setting process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The variable display setting process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similarly to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. Note that the same parts as those in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  In the variable display setting process 5 of the fifth control example, first, the processes of S3301 to S3305 are executed similarly to the above-described variable display setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 162), and then the left swing unit is set as a notice effect. A notice effect setting process for setting an effect for moving the 500 is executed (S3321), and the process proceeds to S3306. The details of the announcement effect setting process (S3321) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of S3301, also when the change start flag 223d is off (S3301: No), the process proceeds to S3306. After that, the processes in S3306 to S3310 are executed, and the variable display setting process 5 ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 221, the announcement effect setting process (S3321) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The notice effect setting process (S3321) in the fifth control example is one of the variable display setting processes 5 (see FIG. 220) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. .

  In this announcement effect setting process (S3321), a process of setting an announcement effect for moving the left swing unit 500 based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the effect counter 223ax is executed. When the announcement effect setting process (S3321) is executed, first, the current value of the effect counter 223ax is acquired, and it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223ax is 0 to 9 (S6301). If the value of the effect counter 223ax is not 0 to 9 (S6301: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if the value of the effect counter 223ax is 0 to 9 (S6301: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S6302 in order to set a notice effect for moving the left swing unit 500. As described above, since the effect counter 223ax is a loop counter of 0 to 198, a notice effect for moving the left swing unit 500 is set (executed) with a probability of 10/199 (about 5%).

  In the process of S6302, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery result is a big hit (S6302). If the current special symbol lottery result is out of place (S6302: No), the first left swing unit table 222b3a. The value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to (refer to FIG. 217 (b)) is set to “01H” (S6303), and the flow shifts to the process of S6307. By the process of S6303, the first left swing effect in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to the intermediate position is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6302, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big hit (S6302: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223ax acquired in S6301 is a multiple of 4 (S6304). In the process of S6304, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223ax is a multiple of 4 (S6304: Yes), the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the first left swing unit table 222b3a (see FIG. 217 (b)) is determined. The value is set to "01H" (S6306), and the flow shifts to the process of S6307. On the other hand, in the processing of S6304, if the value of the effect counter ax is not a multiple of 4 (S6304: No), the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the second left swing unit table 222b3b (see FIG. 217 (c)) is set. “01H” is set (S6305), and the flow shifts to the process of S6307. In the process of S6307 to which the process proceeds after any of the processes of S6303, S6305, and S6306 is performed, the operation content corresponding to the set operation pointer 223g is read, and the operation content is notified to the motor driver (instruction). ) Is set (S6307), and the process ends thereafter.

  When the processing of S6307 is executed via the processing of S6306, the first left swing effect in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to the intermediate position is executed, and the processing of S6307 is executed via the processing of S6305. Then, the second left swing effect in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to the connection position is executed. As for the ratio at which each swing effect is set, the first left swing effect is set with a probability of 3/4 and the second left swing effect is set with a probability of 1/4, as set in the process of S6304. Is set. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order and a notice effect is set, the first left swing effect is set with a high probability (1/4) and the first left swing effect is set with a low probability (1/4). Two left swing effects are set. On the other hand, when a special symbol is won by lottery and a notice effect is set, only the second left swing effect is set. Therefore, the second left swing effect is an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, and the first left swing effect is an effect with a low expectation of a big hit.) Therefore, when the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 operates to the intermediate position, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of operating from the intermediate position to the connecting position. That is, since the operation of the first passage forming member 520 can be noticed, the interest of the player during the notice effect can be improved.

  Note that the selection ratio of the announcement effect is not limited to the form of the present control example, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the first left swing effect may be configured to be selected at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1/10) even when the special symbol lottery result is a hit, or when the special symbol is lost. The second left swing effect may not be selected.

  Further, the mode of the notice effect with the operation of the left swing unit 500 is not limited to two types, and may be further diversified. By diversifying the mode of the notice effect, a wider variety of effects can be realized, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. As different modes of the notice effect, for example, a mode of reciprocating between the intermediate position (or the coupling position) and the release position a plurality of times, a mode of stopping at a different intermediate position (for example, a position of 50 steps from the release position), an intermediate position In which the stop times are different. Conversely, the mode of the notice effect may be reduced to one type. In this case, the data amount of the left swing unit table 222b3 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the fifth control example, by moving the left swinging unit 500 including the flow path through which the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 82 during the big hit, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the big hit. An effect indicating the degree of expectation is configured to be executable. This makes it possible to share a member constituting the flow path for passing the ball and a member used for the effect, and to effectively utilize the limited space in the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the left swing unit 500 having a flow path through which the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 82 through which the ball can be won during the big hit is set to a timing other than the big hit (the timing when the special symbol is changed) Therefore, even if the left swing unit 500 is moved, it does not affect the ball flow. In other words, the left swing unit 500 can be used as a ball passage through which a ball passes during a bonus game (during a big hit), and as a movable member for an effect during a normal game (during a special symbol change).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is configured to execute the big hit game with the left swing unit 500 raised from the release position to the connection position. Therefore, for example, as the operation scenario of the left swing unit 500 defined in the left swing unit table 222b3 shown in FIG. It may be provided. With this configuration, the left swing unit 500 can be used not only as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the special symbol lottery result will be a big hit, but also as a notification unit that notifies that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. It can be used. In addition, since the number of times the left swing unit 500 moves can be suppressed, failure of the movable member can be suppressed.

  Further, when the left swing unit 500 is moved as an effect, it is preferable to provide a determination unit for determining whether the left swing unit 500 is normally movable. This makes it possible to determine the abnormality of the left swing unit 500 before the jackpot game starts, and to prevent the left swing unit 500 from rising to the connection position during the jackpot game and becoming abnormal. It is possible to prevent (suppress).

  If the left swing unit 500 is determined to be abnormal when the left swing unit 500 is moved as an effect, the result of the determination is notified, and the left swing unit 500 is moved during the jackpot game. It is preferable that an effect not to be moved is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance during the jackpot game. Here, the left swing unit 500 is provided with a flow-down passage 515 (see FIG. 36), and is configured to discharge a winning ball in the release position to the outside of the game area. That is, even if the left swinging unit 500 is not moved, when a ball wins in the first variable winning device 82a, the winning ball is normally inserted into an unexpected position such as the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Can be discharged).

  As an effect in which the left swing unit 500 is not moved, for example, a jackpot game is started in a state where the left swing unit 500 is located at the release position, and the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 82 flows down the downflow passage 515. The effect may be performed by the effect unit 422a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 in a state where the effect is not connected to the left swing unit 500. In this case, since the ball flowing down the left swing unit 500 does not pass through the sensor member 422c provided in the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, the progress of the effect displayed on the effect unit 422a is determined by the first specific winning opening. Instead of executing based on the ball that has won the prize 82, it may be configured to be executed, for example, by operating the frame button 22. That is, for example, each time the player presses the frame button 22, the design (number) is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the effect part 422a, and when the stop is displayed with the lucky number, an effect of notifying the transition to the "prepare mode" is executed. It may be configured.

  Furthermore, until a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the end of the jackpot game, a prohibition process may be performed so that a notice effect using the left swing unit 500 is not selected, The fluctuation time during which the period from the end of the notice effect (6 seconds (see FIG. 217 (c))) of the left swing unit 500 to the start of the jackpot game is within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). In the set fluctuation pattern, the prohibition processing may be executed so that the notice effect using the left swing unit 500 is not selected. Thereby, a predetermined interval (for example, 2 seconds) is provided between the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 performed during the big hit game and the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 performed during the normal game. be able to.

  The predetermined interval may be set to an interval that is longer than a retry period that is executed when a problem occurs in the movable operation of the left swing unit 500. Thereby, even if a retry operation is performed in the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 during the jackpot game or the normal game, the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 performed when other conditions are satisfied is affected. Can be suppressed, and an appropriate effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, the effect setting process 5 (S1613) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The effect setting process 5 (S1613) in the fifth control example is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) instead of the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) in the first control example, and is executed during the roulette chance effect. This is a process for setting the pitching depression preparation effect (see FIG. 216 (a)) and the pitching depression effect (see FIG. 216 (b)). Note that the same parts as those in the effect setting processing (see FIG. 149) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  When the effect setting process 5 (S1613) is executed, first, after executing each process of S2001 and S2002 as in the effect setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 149), the value of the effect timer 223bv is executed. Is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003). In the process of S2003, if the value of the effect timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the increased effect (S2003: Yes), the pitching press preparation effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pitching press effect is started. (See FIG. 216 (a)) (S2021), then, the increase effect flag 223cv is set to off, the pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is set to on (S2022), and the process is terminated as it is. . Further, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is not the timer value indicating the end of the increased effect (S2003: No), the present process is directly executed without executing the processes of S2021 and S2022 described above. finish.

  In the process of S2001, when it is determined that the increasing effect flag 223cv is off (S2001: No), it is next determined whether or not the pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is on (S2023). If the pitch-down effect setting flag 223bx is ON (S2023: Yes), in the process of S2023, the pitch-press effect setting for setting the pitch-press effect, which is an effect capable of determining the timing at which the player throws the ball B. The process (S2024) is performed, and the process proceeds to S2006. The details of the pitching press effect setting process (S2024) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S2023, when the pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx is off (S2023: No), the processing of S2024 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S2006. Next, the processes of S2006 to S2017 are executed in the same manner as in the effect setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 149), and then the process ends.

  Next, the pitch-down effect setting process (S2024) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 223. The pitching depression effect setting process (S2024) in the fifth control example is one of the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. This pitching press effect setting process (S2024) is a process for setting a pitching press effect which is an effect that allows the player to determine the timing of pitching the ball B in the roulette chance effect by operating the frame button 22. is there.

  When the pitching depression effect setting process (S2024) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pitching depression effect flag 223cv is on (S6401), and if the pitching depression effect flag 223cx is off (S6401: No). Then, information of the drop position storage area 223ex is obtained (S6402), and information of the rotation position storage area 223u is obtained (S6403). That is, the information of the pocket where the ball B is dropped is acquired by the processing of S6402, and the information of the pocket currently arranged at the drop position is acquired by the processing of S6403.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current time is the pitchable timing (S6404). Here, a description will be given of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first control example, when shifting to the “preparation mode”, the effect period of a total of 90 seconds is provided in the “split-house mode suggestion effect”. Is executed, and this “rensou mode suggestion effect” is an increase effect (effect time 20) that increases (adds) a hit pocket based on the entry of a ball into the second entrance 640a. Second), a roulette chance effect (effect period 65 seconds) for directing whether or not the ball B falls into the hit pocket, and an ending effect (effect period 5 seconds) indicating that the roulette chance effect has been completed. ing.

  Further, the above-described roulette chance production (producing time 65 seconds) is performed in the first half in which the presentation progresses according to a notification mode indicating that the roulette chance production has been executed, a notification mode explaining the roulette chance production, and a lively notification mode. (Production time 42 seconds), a middle part (maximum production time 8 seconds) in which a pitch press preparation effect (production time 5 seconds) and a pitch press production (maximum production time 3 seconds) are executed, and pitching by the pitching device 650. The ball B performs a swinging operation at the upper part of the holding piece 677, and then falls into a pocket, and a swinging effect is performed.

  Here, the pitching press effect (maximum effect time of 3 seconds) includes a pitch non-permissible period (1.5 seconds) in which the pitching device 650 does not allow the ball B to be thrown even if the player operates the frame button 22; A pitch allowable period (1.5 seconds) in which the ball B can be pitched by the pitching device 650 based on the operation of the frame button 22. In other words, the ball B is not thrown by the throwing device 650 even if the frame button 22 is operated for 1.5 seconds from the start of the pitching press effect, and 1.5 seconds after the pitching press effect starts. The period from second to three seconds is a period in which the ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650 at the timing when the frame button 22 is operated by the player.

  Therefore, the timing at which the ball B can be thrown in the pitching-down effect is at least 1.5 seconds after the start of the pitching-down effect and the longest at 3 seconds after the start of the pitching-down effect. 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds). In the case where the effect time of the pitching press effect is less than 3 seconds, that is, when the ball button 22 is operated during the pitching press effect and the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650, the second half of the roulette chance effect is performed. The difference is absorbed. Accordingly, when the player operates the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (within a period of 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start of the pitching press effect), the player immediately operates the frame button 22 based on the timing of operating the frame button 22. Since the ball B is thrown, it is possible to make it appear that the player can determine the pocket on which the ball B falls by himself, thereby enhancing the effect.

  Although details will be described later, in the fifth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated within 1.5 seconds after the pitching press effect is executed, the pitching is performed at a timing when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. The pitching operation of the device 650 is configured to be performed. Accordingly, a period (1) in which the timing at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 differs depending on the operation timing of the frame button 22 with respect to the period (3 seconds) of the pitching press effect in which the player can operate the frame button 22. .5 seconds).

  In the fifth control example, in the swinging effect (the effect period of 15 seconds), which is the second half of the roulette chance effect, the ball B thrown by the pitching device 650 swings on the movable piece 677 with an amplitude that cannot fall. A swinging sphere falling prohibition period (7 seconds), which is a moving period (a period in which the value of the swing timer 223w is larger than 500 (see S1709: Yes in FIG. 146)), and then swings with an amplitude that allows the ball to fall. This is a period during which the ball B can be dropped (up to 3 seconds), which is a period (a period in which the value of the swing timer 223w is smaller than 500 (see S1709: No in FIG. 146)), and a period during which the ball B is dropped. And a ball falling period (5 seconds).

  Among these, the period during which the ball can be dropped while swinging (maximum 3 seconds) is set to a period longer than the period (1.5 seconds) at which the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650 in the above-described pitching depression effect. Therefore, no matter at what timing the player operates the frame button 22 during the pitch-down effect, the ball B can be dropped into a predetermined pocket. Further, since a period during which a plurality of (three) pockets move is set as the period during which the ball can be dropped while swinging, the accuracy of dropping the ball B into a predetermined pocket can be improved.

  Note that the ball drop period (5 seconds) is a period in which after the ball B is dropped into the pocket, a notification effect according to the type of the dropped pocket (hit pocket or missing pocket) is performed. Alternatively, it is configured to be extended by a time lag (difference between the actual production time and the set maximum time) generated in the period during which the ball can fall during swinging. Thus, even if the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 or the timing at which the pitching device 650 pitches the ball B are different, the rendering period of the “renjo mode suggestive rendering” can be made to match 90 seconds.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is set to a high speed (an operation speed (500 pps) at which the time required to move one pocket becomes 0.25 seconds) is set. It is configured to be able to control two rotation speeds: a low speed (operating speed (125 pps) at which the time required to move one pocket is 1 second). The rotation speed is configured to be switched by outputting a signal for setting the operation speed (125 pps or 500 pps) from the audio lamp control device 113 to the motor driver.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth control example, the rotating member 640 is rotated at a high speed from the execution of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” to the execution of the pitching depression effect, and the pitching depression effect is executed. Then, the rotating member 640 is configured to rotate at a low speed.

  Returning to FIG. 223, the description will be continued. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above is configured so that the ball B can fall within a range of 10 seconds to 11.5 seconds after the pitching press effect is executed. Specifically, the ball B is dropped into the pocket after the pitching press effect (maximum 3 seconds), the swinging ball falling prohibition period (7 seconds), and the swinging ball fallable period (maximum 3 seconds). However, since the pitch-pressing effect may be as short as 1.5 seconds, the pitch-pressing effect is a total of 10 seconds, which is the sum of the ball-pressing effect (3 seconds) and the swinging ball falling prohibition period (7 seconds). Is executed, the shortest period during which the ball can fall is set, and the pitching press effect (1.5 seconds), the ball falling prohibition period during swinging (7 seconds), and the ball falling possible period during swinging (3 seconds) The total of 11.5 seconds is set as the longest period in which the ball can fall after the pitching depression effect is executed.

  Then, during the pitching press effect in which the rotating member 640 is moving at a low speed, the pocket corresponding to the range from 10 seconds to 11.5 seconds after the pitching press effect is executed is 10 and Since the pocket is the eleventh pocket, whether the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex acquired in the processing of S6402 is 10 and 11 ahead of the current pocket acquired in the processing of S6403. Is determined, it is determined whether the current time is the pitchable time (S6404).

  If the current time is not the pitchable timing (S6404: No), the present process ends. In the fifth control example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is increased to a high speed (500 pps) until the pitching depression effect is executed in order to shorten the period until it is determined that it is the pitchable timing in the process of S6404. (The time required to move one pocket is 0.25 seconds). On the other hand, if it is the current pitching possible timing (S6404: Yes), the rotation speed of the rotating member is set to a low speed (125 pps (the time required to move one pocket) is 1 second) (S6405), and the pitching depression is performed. The display of the effect is set (S6406), and the pitching-in-progress effect flag 223cx is set to ON (S6407), followed by terminating the present process.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6401, if the pitch-in-press effect flag 223cx is on (S6401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the button (frame button 22) has been pressed (S6408). If the button (frame button 22) has been pressed (S6408: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a pitching allowable period (a period of 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after execution of the pitching press effect) (S6409). ), If it is not the pitching allowable period (S6409: No), the delay pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6410), and this processing is ended as it is. If it is the pitching allowable period (S6409: Yes), a pitching effect command is set (S6411), and the process shifts to S6414.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6408, if the button has not been pressed (S6408: No), it is determined whether or not the current time is the pitching allowable period and the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6412). If the pitching allowable period is currently set and the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6412: Yes), the process of S6411 is executed, and the process proceeds to S6414. On the other hand, if the current time is not the pitching allowable period or if the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to OFF (S6412: No), it is determined whether or not the pitching press effect display period has elapsed (S6413). If the pitching press effect display period has not elapsed (S6413: No), the process is terminated as it is, and if the pitching press effect display period has elapsed (S6413: Yes), the process proceeds to S6414.

  In the processing of S6414, the pitching operation at the pitching position is set (S6414), the pitching depression effect flag 223cx, the pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx, and the delayed pitching flag 223dx are set off (S6415), and the rocking effect is performed. Is set (S6416), the swing non-detection flag 223v and the swing effect flag 223ev are set to ON (S6417), and the process ends.

  As described above, the fifth control example is configured so that the player can set the operation timing of the pitching device 650 based on the operation of the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to show that the player can determine the pocket on which the ball B falls by himself, and to enhance the effect. In this control example, the period during which the ball B is thrown (1.5 seconds in the latter half) is shorter than the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid (3 seconds). . Then, when the pitch of the ball B is permitted and the frame button 22 is operated in the first 1.5 seconds of the match, the pitch of the ball B is delayed until the start timing of the period in which the pitch of the ball B is permitted. . This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the control for dropping the ball B into a predetermined pocket while making it appear that the player can determine the pocket on which the ball B falls.

  Further, the swingable ball falling period (3 seconds) is longer than the difference period (1.5 seconds) of the timing at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. Since it is configured to be set, it is possible to increase the accuracy of dropping the ball B into a predetermined pocket regardless of the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22.

  In the fifth control example, when the pitching is possible based on the information of the drop position storage area 223ex and the information of the rotation position storage area 223u, the pitching press effect is executed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable with the swinging motion of the ball B in the chance effect.

  Furthermore, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is high (500 pps (time required to move one pocket) is 0.25 seconds) and low (125 pps (time required to move one pocket is one second)). The rotation speed of the rotation member 640 is set to a high speed until it is determined that it is the pitching possible timing. Thereby, the period until it is determined that it is possible to pitch can be shortened, and a roulette chance effect can be smoothly performed.

  The rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is set to be low during a period from the execution of the pitching depression effect in which the player can operate the frame button 22 to the end of the rocking effect in which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650. Is set to This allows the player to carefully watch the roulette chance effect, thereby enhancing the effect.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 224, the hit pocket sorting process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described.

  The winning pocket allocation process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, similarly to the winning pocket allocation process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example. The same parts as those in the hit pocket distribution processing (see FIG. 160) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  In the hit pocket sorting process 5 in the fifth control example, a process for presetting a pocket in which the ball B falls in the roulette chance effect is executed. When the winning pocket allocation process 5 is executed, first, after the process of S3101 is executed in the same manner as the hit pocket allocation process (see FIG. 160) in the above-described first control example, it is determined whether or not the next hold is a big hit. (S3121). If the next hold is a jackpot (S3121: Yes), one of the read pockets is set as the drop position in the drop position storage area 223ex (S3122), and the process proceeds to S3104.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3121, if the next hold is not a jackpot (S3121: No), a pocket different from the read pocket is set as a drop position in the drop position storage area 223ex (S3123), and the first control example described above is performed. The processing of S3104 and S3105 is executed in the same manner as the winning pocket allocation processing (see FIG. 160). Thereafter, the hit position is read out from the drop position storage area 223ex (S3124), and a position other than the hit position and the drop position is selected as an additional position (S3125). The processing of S3109 and S3110 is executed in the same manner as in (3). After performing the process of S3110, the process returns to the process of S3104, and the subsequent processes are repeated.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example is configured so that the drop position (pocket) where the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect is determined in advance. Then, it is configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined drop position as a hit position (whether or not to light up) according to the result of the special symbol lottery. Thus, the ball B may be dropped into the predetermined pocket, so that the control process can be simplified.

  In the fifth control example, one pocket is stored in the fall position storage area 223ex, but a plurality of continuous pockets may be stored in the fall position storage area 223ex.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning command processing 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special figure 2 winning command process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similarly to the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example. . Note that the same reference numerals as those in the special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161) in the first control example denote the same parts, and a description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  The special figure 2 winning command processing 5 in the fifth control example is stored in the drop position storage area 223ex when the winning command that has won the jackpot is output in the increase effect performed in the “preparation mode”. The processing for changing the pocket in which the player is playing to the winning pocket is executed.

  When the special figure 2 winning command processing 5 in the fifth control example is executed, first, S3201 is executed similarly to the special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161) of the first control example described above. In the process of S3201, if the increasing effect flag 223cv is off (S3201: No), the process proceeds to S3213. If the increase effect flag 223cv is on (S3201: Yes), the fall position is read from the fall position storage area 223ex (S3221), and then a big hit occurs during the time reduction (when the time reduction state counter is larger than 0). It is determined whether or not it is a winning (S3222). If the winning is a big win during the working hours (S3222: Yes), the falling position is selected as the additional position (S3223), and the process proceeds to S3212.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3222, if the winning is not a big win during the working hours (S3222: No), the hit position is read from the hit position storage area 223k (S3224), and a position different from the hit position and the drop position is selected as the additional position. (S3225), and then proceeds to S3212. After that, the processes of S3212 and S3213 are executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is configured to be movable as an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big hit. . Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like. Some of such gaming machines can execute a variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members. However, if the number of variable members is increased to improve the effect, the power consumption will increase, the failure rate will increase due to the increase in the number of parts, the cost of gaming machines will increase, and wiring will be more complicated. Various problems arise.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, a flow path (first path forming member 520) for discharging the ball that has won the first variable prize device 82a to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 in the jackpot game is provided to the player. It is configured to be arranged at a visible position (left side in front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81). The flow path (first passage forming member 520) swings between an arrangement (connection position) for discharging the winning prize ball to the first variable winning device 82a at the big hit and a home position (release position). It is configured to be possible. In addition, as a kind of entertainment effect (effect indicating a degree of expectation to be a big hit) which is usually performed at a time when the jackpot is not being hit, a movable effect of swinging the flow path is configured to be executable. In other words, the flow path (first passage forming member 520) for discharging the prize balls is configured to also be used for an entertaining effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an excessive increase in the number of accessories (variable members), so that the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, the failure rate and cost can be reduced, and wiring and the like can be simplified. Can be realized.

  In the present control example, as an entertaining effect using the flow path (the first passage forming member 520), the first passage forming member 520 moves (moves) from the release position to the intermediate position, and then returns to the release position. One left swing effect and a second left swing effect in which the first passage forming member 520 operates (moves) from the release position to the connection position and then returns to the release position are provided. The second left swing effect is configured such that it is easier to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and harder to be selected when it is out of comparison with the first left swing effect. That is, the second left swing effect in which the amount of operation of the first passage forming member 520 is large is configured to have a higher expectation of a big hit than the first left swing effect. Therefore, when the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 starts operating, the operation can be observed in expectation of operating to the connection position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the “rensou mode”.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example is configured such that a drop position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect is determined at one place in advance. Then, according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol, it is configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined drop position as a hit position (whether to light up). Thus, the ball B may be dropped into the predetermined pocket, so that the control process can be simplified.

  Further, in the present control example, in the roulette chance effect, a period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is received (for example, 3 seconds in one roulette chance effect) is provided, and it is detected that the player has operated the frame button 22. In this case, the ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650. Further, during the period in which the frame button 22 can be accepted, a pitch press effect (see FIG. 216) for prompting the player to press the frame button 22 is executed. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period suggested by the pitching press effect, the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650. This allows the player to throw the ball B onto the rotating member 640 at an arbitrary timing, thereby improving the player's willingness to participate in the roulette chance effect.

  In the fifth control example, one pocket into which the ball B is dropped is determined in advance, but it is not necessarily limited to one pocket. A section where a plurality of pockets are continuous may be defined as a position where the ball B is dropped, and the ball B may be dropped into any of the pockets constituting the section. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom when the ball B is dropped, as compared with the case where the drop position is limited to only one pocket. That is, when it is determined that the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation is relatively large (for example, exceeding 1 second) at the stage when the ball B enters the section in which the ball B is dropped, the ball B is arranged behind the section. By dropping the ball B into the pocket, the ball B can be dropped after the cycle is reduced. Conversely, when it is determined that the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion is too small (eg, 0.5 seconds or less) at the stage when the ball B enters the section where the ball B is dropped, The ball B can be dropped before the ball B completely stops by dropping the ball B into the pocket arranged in the front pocket.

  In the fifth control example, the period of the swing operation of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) before one pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is placed at the drop position. In such a case, a special effect is executed. However, it may be controlled so that the target pocket is placed at the drop position before the predetermined period (0.2 seconds). More specifically, for example, at the start of the roulette chance effect, a pocket in which the ball B can be dropped is predicted from the time until the pitching-down effect is started and the pocket currently placed at the drop position. Then, it may be determined whether or not it matches the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex. When it is expected that the ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex, the remaining time until the ball B can be dropped and the drop position storage area 223ex are stored. The rotation speed of the rotation member 640 may be changed based on the stored position of the pocket so that the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is arranged at the drop position at the timing when the drop is possible. Good. Further, instead of or in addition to changing the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, for example, the execution timing of the pitching depression effect may be changed. That is, by changing the timing at which the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650, the ball B is dropped so that the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex can be dropped at the timing at which the pocket is placed at the drop position. It may be configured. With this configuration, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target pocket.

<Sixth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, a symbol (number) is displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d of the staging unit 331, so as to execute the notification of whether or not a big hit has occurred. The third symbol display device 81 is basically used for displaying an entertaining effect, displaying the number of reserved balls, and displaying details of a symbol (lucky number) to be a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the sixth control example, the third symbol display device 81 is also configured to be capable of executing dynamic display (decorative symbol display) of identification information indicating a special symbol lottery result. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed regardless of the mode and is executed in response to the variable display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the result of the lottery of the special symbol can be confirmed regardless of the mode. .

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that a decorative symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Is a point. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227. FIG. 226 (a) is a diagram showing a display content in a case where a special symbol lottery is executed in the “normal mode” and the decorative symbol (third symbol) is variably displayed. As shown in FIG. 226 (a), when the special symbol lottery is executed in the “normal mode”, the symbol display is changed on the display units 331a to 331d, as in the first control example. In addition, in the sixth control example, in the third symbol display device 81, in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape on the lower right side in front view, a decorative symbol (third symbol) is displayed. ) Is displayed.

  More specifically, in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each symbol row, a decorative symbol (third symbol) to which any one of numbers 0 to 9 is attached is displayed in a prescribed order (descending order of numbers or ascending order). These three symbol rows are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity, and displayed in a variable manner. In particular, in the left symbol row, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row and the right symbol row, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order. In this decorative symbol change display, a decorative symbol (third symbol) in which the same number is assigned to each symbol column is stopped and displayed, thereby indicating a big hit. On the other hand, if at least one of the decorative symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed in each symbol column is a decorative symbol (third symbol) with a different number, the lottery of the special symbol this time is lost. Indicates that there is. The variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 is configured to have a smaller area than each of the display units 331a to 331d. Therefore, it is possible to make the player confirm the lottery result of the special symbol by the variable display executed on each of the display units 331a to 331d.

  Further, FIG. 226 (b) is a diagram showing display contents when the variable display corresponding to the departure of the special symbol ends in the “normal mode” and the decorative symbol (the third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 226 (b), after the elapse of the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display executed in the “normal mode”, the numbers (symbols) are stopped one by one on the display units 331a to 331d as in the first control example. Is displayed. In addition, in the sixth control example, in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 of the third symbol display device 81, the decorative symbol (the third symbol) is stopped and displayed in a combination of the deviation. In the example of FIG. 226 (b), the decorative symbol with the number “6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column, the symbol column with the symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column, and the right symbol is stopped. The symbol row in which the number “3” is attached to the symbol row is stopped and displayed. By displaying the decorative symbol (third symbol) to which a different number is attached, it can be shown that the lottery result of the special symbol has been lost.

  Next, the display contents in the “preparation mode” will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 227 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the decorative symbol (third symbol). As shown in FIG. 227 (a), when a special symbol lottery is executed in the "preparation mode", similarly to the "normal mode", the decorative symbol (third symbol) is displayed in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. ) Is executed. This indicates that it is fluctuating.

  FIG. 227 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where the fluctuating time has elapsed in the “preparation mode” and the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 227 (b), the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display area different from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. FIG. 227 (b) is an example of a case where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper left area Dq1 of a horizontally long rectangular shape formed on the upper left of the front view on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this example, in the upper left area Dq1, the decorative symbol with the number “1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column, the decorative symbol with the number “8” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column, The decorative symbol with the number “9” attached to the right symbol column is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the "preparation mode", the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in a display area different from the variable display, so that the number of time savings in the "preparation mode" this time is hard to be recognized from the stopped and displayed decorative symbol. To do that. If the variable display and the stop display are performed in the variable display area Dd1 even during the “preparation mode”, the variable display time of the decorative symbol executed in the “preparation mode” can be easily obtained by observing the variable display area Dd1. Will be recognized. As described above, in the “preparation mode” in which the time reduction period is one, the long fluctuation A having the fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery (see FIGS. 112 and 113). On the other hand, in the “preparation mode” in which the time saving period is seven times, a long fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the case of a special symbol jackpot (see FIG. 112), and a fluctuation time of 3 is determined in the case of a special symbol. A second variation in seconds is selected. Therefore, if the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed 3 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestion effect” (when the long variation A is selected), it is a jackpot or the time reduction period is 1 Only the number of times is set, and it is determined that this is the case where the special symbol has been removed. In this case, since the lottery of the special symbol is lost and the possibility of shifting to the “normal mode” after the fluctuation increases, the player may not be able to enjoy the subsequent “representative mode of the extended-village mode”. There is. If the first to sixth special symbol lotteries in the “preparation mode” in which the time reduction period is seven are out of the range, the middle fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected (see FIG. 113). Conversely, if the fluctuation continues for 3 seconds or more in the second to sixth fluctuation displays, it is a jackpot without confirming the production result of “renjo mode suggestion production” (with a probability of 97.5%) It shifts to "rensou mode"). For this reason, there is a high possibility that the player will shift to the “rensou mode”, which may make the player feel that there is no need to confirm the subsequent “rensou mode suggestion effect”.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the stop display of the decorative symbol is configured to be executed in a display area different from the variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who has checked the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to recognize whether or not the stop display has been executed. Therefore, before confirming the result of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, it is difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. The expectation of the player can be maintained.

  Further, in the present control example, in order to make the timing of the stop display more difficult to understand, during the execution of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) to the long fluctuation G (72 seconds), each time the fluctuation display is performed for 3 seconds, the decorative symbol is displayed. Is switched to a display area different from the variable display area Dd1 (for example, the upper left area Dq1). The state in which the display position is switched continues for 0.5 seconds, and after 0.5 seconds has elapsed, the display position is switched again to the variable display area Dd1. That is, the variable display for three seconds in the variable display area Dd1 and the variable display for 0.5 seconds in an area different from the variable display area Dd1 (such as the upper left area Dq1) are repeated. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the break of the variable display (switching of the display position) in the variable display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is periodically set in the long fluctuations A to G. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, it is more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode”, so that it is difficult for the player to predict whether to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained to the end during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”.

  Further, in the present control example, a plurality of display areas for displaying a stop symbol are provided in addition to the upper left area Dq1. Specifically, it is formed on the upper right side area Dq2 formed on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81 (see the dotted line on the upper right side in FIG. 227 (b)) and on the lower left side of the third symbol display device 81. A lower left area Dq3 (see the dotted line at the lower left in FIG. 227 (b)) is provided. In the “preparation mode”, when the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (when the fluctuation time has elapsed), and when the position where the fluctuation display is performed during the execution of the long fluctuations A to G is switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1, One display area is selected by lottery from three types of display areas (upper left area Dq1, upper right area Dq2, lower left area Dq3). With such a configuration, it is more difficult to visually recognize the display content (whether the display is stopped or displayed variably) when the display position is switched from the variable display area Dd1 to another display area. can do. Therefore, it is more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode”, so that it is difficult for the player to predict whether to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained to the end during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”.

  In the present control example, the variable display area Dd1 is provided at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be arranged at any position. Further, in the present control example, the upper left area Dq1 and the upper right area are used as the display area when the stop display is performed in the “prepare mode” and when the display position is switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 during the execution of the long fluctuations A to G. Although three types of display areas, the area Dq2 and the lower left area Dq3, are provided, the present invention is not limited to the three types. More or less display areas may be provided. Further, the arrangement of each display area may be arbitrarily determined.

  In the present control example, the decorative pattern is not displayed in the variable display area Dd1 when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1 (the display position is simply moved). It is not limited. For example, even after the display position is switched, the fluctuating display may be pseudo-displayed on the fluctuating display area Dd1. Accordingly, when the variable display area Dd1 is focused on, the appearance becomes as if the variable display is always continued during the “preparation mode” regardless of whether the variable display area Dd1 is stopped or displayed. In the "preparation mode", it can be more difficult to determine whether the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 228 and FIG. FIG. 228 (a) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the ROM 222 in the sixth control example is provided with a symbol position selection table 222h in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 118 (a)). The symbol position selection table 222h is a data table used for selecting a display area after switching when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1 in the “preparation mode”. Details of the symbol position selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 228 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the symbol position selection table 222h. As shown in FIG. 228 (b), in the symbol position selection table 222h, the display position of the decorative symbol (stop display or variable display) is defined for each value of the display position selection counter 223ay. The display position selection counter 223ay is configured as a loop counter that is updated regularly or irregularly within the range of “0 to 99”.

  In the symbol position selection table 222h, the upper left area Dq1 is associated with the range of the display position selection counter 223ay from "0 to 39". Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the display position selection counter 223ay, forty “0 to 39” are associated with each other, so that the decorative symbol can be changed from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. When switching (moving) to another area, the probability (ratio) of selecting the upper left area Dq1 is 40% (40/100).

  The upper right area Dq2 is associated with the range of the display position selection counter 223ay in the range of “40 to 79”. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the display position selection counter 223ay, 40 of “40 to 79” are associated with each other, so that the decorative pattern can be changed from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. When switching (moving) to another area, the probability (ratio) of selecting the upper right area Dq2 is 40% (40/100).

  Further, the lower left area Dq3 is associated with the range of the display position selection counter 223ay in the range of “80 to 99”. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the display position selection counter 223ay, 20 of “80 to 99” are associated with each other, so that the decorative pattern can be changed from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. When switching (moving) to another area, the probability (ratio) of selecting the lower left area Dq3 is 20% (20/100). The probability (proportion) of selecting only the lower left area Dq3 is high because only this area has the same eye level as the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 for the player. This is because there is a possibility of being visually recognized when attention is paid. Therefore, the selection ratio of the lower left area Dq3, which is relatively easy to be visually recognized, is lowered to make it difficult for the display contents when the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to be visually recognized. On the other hand, the reason why the ratio is not set to 0 is that it is difficult to predict the display position after switching. In other words, as the number of display position candidates increases, it becomes more difficult for the player to predict the display position after switching, and to make it difficult to visually recognize the mode of the decorative symbol (stop display or change display) after switching the display position. it can.

  As described above, by switching the display positions of the decorative symbols using the symbol position selection table 222h, it is predicted whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” before the result of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is notified. This can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, it is possible to entertain the “renjo mode suggestion effect” to the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 229, a configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 229, the RAM 223 in this control example has a display position selection counter 223ay, a display time timer 223by, and a display position storage in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example. The difference is that an area 223cy is provided.

  The display position selection counter 223ay is used to select a display area for displaying a decorative symbol from the symbol position selection table 222h described above. The display position selection counter 223ay is configured as a loop counter that is updated in a range of “0 to 99”, and is updated, for example, one by one between S1616 and S1617 of the main process. As described above, when the decorative symbol is switched (moved) from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to another area, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of “0 to 39”. The upper left area Dq1 is selected as an area for displaying a decorative symbol. If the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "40 to 79", the upper right area Dq2 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative pattern, and if the value is in the range of "80 to 99", the decorative pattern is displayed. Is selected as the lower left area Dq3.

  The display time timer 223by causes the decorative symbol (third symbol) to be displayed in one area (the variable display area Dd1, the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, or the lower left area Dq3) in the “preparation mode”. This is a timer for measuring the elapsed time of. The initial value of the display time timer 223by is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 in the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) during the change of the decorative symbol in the "preparation mode" (see FIG. 231). 231 S6503). Since the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230), the display time timer 223by counts up every 1 millisecond. The display time timer 223by is reset to 0 every time the area (display position) where the decorative symbol is displayed is switched (see S6510 and S6513 in FIG. 231). Based on the value of the display time timer 223by, when three seconds have elapsed since the decorative symbol was displayed in the variable display area Dd1, the decorative symbol is switched to another display position (display area). Further, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the decorative symbol was displayed in the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, or the lower left area Dq3, the display position (display area) of the decorative symbol is changed to the variable display area Dd1. Can be switched.

  The display position storage area 223cy is a flag indicating whether the current display position (area) of the decorative pattern is the variable display area Dd1, the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, or the lower left area Dq3. In this display position storage area 223cy, any one of four values of “00H” to “03H” is stored, and if “00H” is stored, it indicates a variable display area (lower right area) Dd1, When "01H" is stored, it indicates the upper left area Dq1, when "02H" is stored, it indicates the upper right area Dq2, and when "03H" is stored, it indicates the lower left area Dq3. Whether or not to change the display position of the decorative symbol is determined based on the value of the display time timer 223by (elapsed time) and the value stored in the display position storage area 223cy. That is, when 3 seconds have elapsed while “00H” is stored in the display position storage area 223cy, the decorative design is switched to another display position (display area). Further, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed while any one of “01H” to “03H” is stored in the display position storage area 223cy, the display position (display area) of the decorative symbol is shifted to the variable display area Dd1. Can be switched.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 233. First, the main process 6 (see FIG. 230) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. This main process 6 (see FIG. 230) is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 145) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

  Of the main processing 6 (see FIG. 230) in the sixth control example, in the processing of S1601 to S1614 and S1616 to S1621, S1601 to S1614 and S1616 in the main processing (see FIG. 145) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing as the processing from S1621 to S1621 is executed. In the main process 6 (see FIG. 230) in the second control example, when the process of S1613 ends, the display position of the decorative symbol is selected according to the elapsed time during the variable display of the decorative symbol in the “preparation mode”. (S1661), and the process proceeds to S1614. Details of the display position selection processing (S1661) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the main process 6 (see FIG. 230) in the present control example, when the process in S1614 ends, the variable display setting process 6 is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. (S1662). This fluctuation display setting processing 6 is for displaying the fluctuation for display on the basis of the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the fluctuation display of the identification information (symbol) in the rendering unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for generating and setting a pattern command. Details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1662) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the variable display setting process 6 ends, the process moves to S1616, and thereafter, the same process as the main process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example is executed.

  Next, details of the above-described display position selection processing (S1661) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the display position selection process (S1661) is a process for selecting the display position of the decorative symbol according to the elapsed time during the variable display of the decorative symbol in the “preparation mode”.

  When the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S6501). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S6501: No) ), Which means that the present mode is not the “preparation mode” (the “normal mode” or the “rensou mode”), and there is no need to change the display position (display area) of the decorative pattern, so this processing is performed as it is. To end.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6501, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S6501: Yes), it means that the current mode is the “preparation mode”, and the display position of the decorative symbol is changed. Since there is a possibility, it is next determined whether or not the decoration symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner (S6502). In the process of S6502, when it is determined that the variable display is not being performed (S6502: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6502 that the variable display is being performed (S6502: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the display time timer 223by (S6503), and the current display position (display area) Is read out from the display position storage area 223cy (S6504).

  Next, based on the information read in the processing of S6504, it is determined whether the current display position (display area) of the decorative symbol is the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (whether the read value is “00H”). If the display position of the decorative symbol is the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (S6505: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the display time timer 223by is 3000 (S6506). That is, it is determined whether three seconds have elapsed since the display position of the decorative symbol became the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. In the process of S6506, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by has become 3000 (S6506: Yes), the symbol position selection table 222h is read (S6507), and the decorative symbol corresponding to the value of the display position selection counter 223ay. Is specified (S6508). Specifically, as described above, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of “0 to 39”, the upper left area Dq1 is specified as the area in which the decorative pattern is displayed, and “40 to 79” If it is a range, the upper right area Dq2 is selected as an area for displaying a decorative symbol, and if it is a range of "80 to 99", a lower left area Dq3 is selected as an area for displaying a decorative symbol (FIG. 228 (b)).

  When the processing of S6508 ends, the display position of the decorative symbol is then switched to the display position specified in the processing of S6508 (S6509). In addition, the value stored in the display position storage area 223cy is also updated in accordance with this switching. That is, when the area is switched to the upper left area Dq1, it is updated to "01H", when it is switched to the upper right area Dq2, it is updated to "02H", and when it is switched to the lower left area Dq3, it is updated to "03H". You. After the processing of S6509, the value of the display time timer 223by is reset to 0 (S6510), and this processing ends. By resetting the display time timer 223by, the elapsed time after changing the display position of the decorative symbol is newly measured, and the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to the variable display area Dd1 when 0.5 second has elapsed. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6506, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by is not 3000 (S6506: No), there is no need to switch the display position. The process ends.

  Also, in the processing of S6505, it is determined that the current display position of the decorative symbol is not the variable display area Dd1 (one of “01H” to “03H” stored in the display position storage area 223cy). In this case (S6505: No), it is determined whether the value of the display time timer 223by is 500 (S6511). That is, it is determined whether 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the display position of the decorative symbol was switched to the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, or the lower left area Dq3.

  In the process of S6511, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by is 500 (S6511: Yes), the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (S6512), and the display is performed. “00H” indicating the variable display area Dd1 is stored in the position storage area 223cy. Then, the value of the display time timer 223by is reset to 0 (S6513), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6511 that the value of the display time timer 223by is not 500 (S6511), the processing of S6512 and S6513 is skipped because it is not necessary to switch the display position of the decorative symbol to the variable display area Dd1. Then, this processing is terminated as it is.

  By executing this display position selection processing (see FIG. 231), when any of the long fluctuations A to G is executed in the “preparation mode”, the fluctuation display for three seconds in the fluctuation display area Dd1 and the fluctuation display The change display for 0.5 seconds in an area different from the area Dd1 (one of the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, and the lower left area Dq3) is repeated. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the break of the variable display (switching of the display position) in the variable display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is periodically set in the long fluctuations A to G. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, it is more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode”, so that it is difficult for the player to predict whether to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained to the end during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1662) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The change display setting process 6 (S1662) is one of the main processes 6 (see FIG. 230), and the change of the identification information (symbol) in the rendering unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81 as described above. In order to generate and set a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 in order to execute the display, the display control is executed instead of the variation display process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. Is done.

  In the variable display setting processing 6 (see FIG. 232), in each processing of S3301 to S3310, the same processing as the processing of each of S3301 to S3310 of the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 162) in the first control example is executed. Is done. In the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 232) in this control example, when the process of S3309 ends, a stop position selection process for selecting a display position at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode” is executed. (S3331), and shifts the processing to S3310. Details of the stop position selection processing (S3331) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing details of the stop position selection processing (S3331). When the stop position selection process (see FIG. 233) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is a value larger than 0 (S6601). If the value is 0 (S6601), the current Is not in the "preparation mode", and there is no need to change the position at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed from the variable display area Dd1 to another display position, and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6601 that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S6601: Yes), it means that the current state is the “preparation mode”. Is read (S6602), and the display position of the decorative symbol corresponding to the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is specified (S6603). Specifically, as described above, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of “0 to 39”, the upper left area Dq1 is specified as the area in which the decorative pattern is displayed, and “40 to 79” If it is a range, the upper right area Dq2 is selected as an area for displaying a decorative symbol, and if it is a range of "80 to 99", a lower left area Dq3 is selected as an area for displaying a decorative symbol (FIG. 228 (b)). When the processing of S6603 ends, the display position of the decorative symbol is then switched to the display position specified in the processing of S6603 (S6604), and this processing ends.

  By executing the stop position selection processing (see FIG. 233), the stop display of the decorative symbol can be executed at a display position (display area) different from the variable display, so that the variable display area (lower right area) ) It is possible to make it difficult for the player who has confirmed Dd1 to recognize whether or not the stop display has been executed. Therefore, before confirming the result of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, it is difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. The expectation of the player can be maintained.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example is configured to execute the display of the special symbol lottery result (decorative display of the decorative symbol) in the variable display area Dd1 of the third symbol display device 81. I have. Thereby, regardless of the mode, the result of the variable display can be determined based on the stop symbol.

  Further, in the present control example, in the "preparation mode", the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed at a display position different from the variable display area Dd1. Here, if the variable display and the stop display are performed in the variable display area Dd1 even in the “preparation mode”, the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the “preparation mode” is performed by observing the variable display area Dd1. Time is easily recognized. As described above, in the “preparation mode” in which the time reduction period is one, the long fluctuation A having the fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery (see FIGS. 112 and 113). On the other hand, in the “preparation mode” in which the time saving period is seven times, a long fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the case of a special symbol jackpot (see FIG. 112), and a fluctuation time of 3 is determined in the case of a special symbol. A second variation in seconds is selected. Therefore, if the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed 3 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestion effect” (when the long variation A is selected), it is a jackpot or the time reduction period is 1 Only the number of times is set, and it is determined that this is the case where the special symbol has been removed. In this case, since the lottery of the special symbol is lost and the possibility of shifting to the “normal mode” after the fluctuation increases, the player may not be able to enjoy the subsequent “representative mode of the extended-village mode”. There is. If the first to sixth special symbol lotteries in the “preparation mode” in which the time reduction period is seven are out of the range, the middle fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected (see FIG. 113). Conversely, if the fluctuation continues for 3 seconds or more in the second to sixth fluctuation displays, it is a jackpot without confirming the production result of “renjo mode suggestion production” (with a probability of 97.5%) It shifts to "rensou mode"). For this reason, there is a high possibility that the player will shift to the “rensou mode”, which may make the player feel that there is no need to confirm the subsequent “rensou mode suggestion effect”.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the stop display of the decorative symbol is configured to be executed in a display area different from the variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who has checked the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to recognize whether or not the stop display has been executed. Therefore, before confirming the result of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, it is difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. The expectation of the player can be maintained.

  Further, in the present control example, in order to make the timing of the stop display more difficult to understand, during the execution of the long fluctuations A to G, the fluctuation display for three seconds in the fluctuation display area Dd1 and an area different from the fluctuation display area Dd1 are performed. The display is changed so as to repeat the change display for 0.5 second in the upper left area Dq1 and the like. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the break of the variable display (switching of the display position) in the variable display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is periodically set in the long fluctuations A to G. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, it is more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode”, so that it is difficult for the player to predict whether to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained to the end during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”.

  In the sixth control example, in the “preparation mode”, when it is determined that three seconds have elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbol was performed in the variable display area Dd1, the display position of the decorative symbol is displayed. Although the position is switched to one of the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, and the lower left area Dq3, or the lottery (determination) is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol may be defined for each fluctuating pattern (fluctuating time) so as to include the display position for each elapse of time. Specifically, for example, when the main controller 110 notifies the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the long fluctuation A (90 seconds), the display position switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 is changed from the upper left area Dq1 to the upper right area. .. And the display area in the order of the lower left area Dq3 → the upper right area Dq2 → the upper left area Dq1 → the lower left area Dq3 →. May be configured so that the display mode of the current variable display can be selected. That is, in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, a plurality of variations in which the display positions of the decorative symbols are different from each other may be defined as the variation display modes of the decorative symbols. With this configuration, it is not necessary for the sound lamp control device 113 to execute the process of selecting (determining) the display position every time the time elapses, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reduced. be able to.

  In the present control example, the variable display area Dd1 is provided at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be arranged at any position. Further, in the present control example, the upper left area Dq1 and the upper right area are used as the display area when the stop display is performed in the “prepare mode” and when the display position is switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 during the execution of the long fluctuations A to G. Although three types of display areas, the area Dq2 and the lower left area Dq3, are provided, the present invention is not limited to the three types. More or less display areas may be provided. Further, the arrangement of each display area may be arbitrarily determined.

  In this control example, the display position of the decorative symbol is switched when three seconds have elapsed since the decorative symbol was displayed in the variable display area Dd1 (stop display timing or during variable display). It is not limited. Instead of switching the display position, the display mode of the variable display area Dd1 may be changed. For example, the variable display area Dd1 may be reduced for 0.5 seconds every 3 seconds, and a display mode of a normal size for 3 seconds and a display mode of a reduced display for 0.5 seconds may be repeated. When the reduced display is performed, the display may be reduced to a size (for example, 1 mm long × 1 mm wide) that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize whether the decorative symbol is stopped or displayed while the thumbnail image is displayed in a reduced size. Has the same effect as in the case of varying. Further, since the lottery (determination) process for switching the display position can be omitted, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the present control example, the decorative pattern is not displayed in the variable display area Dd1 when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1 (the display position is simply moved). It is not limited. For example, even after the display position is switched, the fluctuating display may be pseudo-displayed on the fluctuating display area Dd1. Accordingly, when the variable display area Dd1 is focused on, the appearance becomes as if the variable display is always continued during the “preparation mode” regardless of whether the variable display area Dd1 is stopped or displayed. In the "preparation mode", it can be more difficult to determine whether the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed.

  In this control example, when three seconds have elapsed since the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in the variable display region Dd1, the decorative symbol is moved to another display position (display region). However, the display time of the decorative symbol in the variable display area Dq1 is not limited to three seconds, and may be arbitrarily determined.

  In the present control example, the decorative symbol is displayed at any one of the four display positions for 3 seconds or 0.5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display position (variable display or stop display) of the decorative symbol in the “preparation mode” may always be moved at a high speed. Also, the moving direction may be configured to have a random appearance. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbol, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the result of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is predicted by the player. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the “rensou mode suggestion effect” to the end with a sense of expectation.

  In each of the above control examples, in the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, after the ball B is caused to swing above the holding piece 677 (or the holding piece 6770), the ball B is moved to a pocket of a type corresponding to the present effect result. However, the configuration for identifying the pocket showing the effect result is not limited to the ball B composed of a sphere. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a doll imitating a character appearing in a part of the effect of the pachinko machine 10 is dropped into a pocket corresponding to the effect. In this case, instead of performing the swinging operation above the holding piece 677 (holding piece 6770), a doll imitating a character is suspended above a drop position with a string or the like to perform a pendulum-like swinging operation. It may be performed. Then, when the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging operation is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 second), the doll may be dropped into a pocket of a type corresponding to the present effect result. With such a configuration, even when a doll other than a sphere is used, the effect can be clearly notified as in the case of using the ball B. After the end of the effect, the doll imitating the character is collected in the same manner as the ball B, and returned to the suspended state again, so that the effect of dropping the doll in each of the “mansion mode suggested effects” can be performed. You may comprise.

  In each of the above control examples, a plate-shaped member with a number is adopted as each of the pockets P1 to P30, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotating member 640 may be replaced with an image from a liquid crystal display device or the like. That is, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be enlarged in size, and a roulette image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to execute the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. In this case, the ball B may be replaced with an image. That is, the third symbol display device performs a series of effects in which the ball B is thrown in the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, then swings on the holding piece 677, and then falls into any pocket. The configuration may be such that the processing is performed by a video (image) displayed for 81. With this configuration, the number of the rotating member 640, the holding pieces 677, the ball B, the pitching device 650, and the like can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining some or all of one embodiment with some or all of other one or more embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper end portion (radially outer portion of the distribution convex portion 521e) of the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is opened has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the cover member that covers the open portion at the upper end of the first passage forming member 520 opens the sphere supply side in the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e, and opens the sphere supply side. The opposite side may operate in a lidded manner. In this case, it is possible to prevent foreign matter other than a sphere from being mixed into the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the connecting member 424 is rotated while abutting on the first passage forming member 520 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the connection member 424 may be omitted. In this case, product costs can be reduced by reducing the number of components required for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Further, instead of the connection member 424, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be provided. In this case, the positional displacement between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is absorbed by the deformation of the shape of the rubber elastic body due to the contact of the first passage forming member 520 with the rubber elastic body. be able to.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the drive-side slide member 420 is driven by the one-layer rack 452 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a case where the rack for driving the drive side slide member 420 is composed of two layers in the front and rear, and a case where the drive side slide member 420 is vertically moved by the front rack and a case where the drive side slide member 420 is vertically moved by the rear rack May be configurable. In this case, by adopting a mode in which only one of the two-layered racks abuts on the driven side slide member 430 vertically, the case where the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 move up and down in conjunction with each other, It is possible to switch between a case where the drive side slide member 420 moves up and down independently by passing through the driven side slide member 430.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b protrude outside the circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b may be recessed toward the center side of a circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth, and the other may be extended longer by that amount.

  In each of the above embodiments, the portion that is in contact with the contact portion 351b is the adjacent gear tooth 354c having a gear tooth shape, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape is formed, and the portion and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other.

  In each of the above embodiments, the portion that comes into contact with the abutting portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b in which the tooth shape is not formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a surface that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b may be formed by partially shaving the gear teeth of the portion configured in the tooth shape.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the entire overlapping portion of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b contacts the surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by providing a recessed portion that is recessed toward the rotation axis at an intermediate position between the contact portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b, the area per surface may be reduced.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the left and right ascent control members 417 abut at the same timing as the drive side slide member 420 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the right and left elevation restriction members 417 may be brought into contact with the drive side slide member 420. In this case, a left-right asymmetric load can be applied to the drive-side slide member 420, and the drive-side slide member 420 is inclined even when the center of gravity of the drive-side slide member 420 is shifted to one of the left and right (one of the left and right). Can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the distal end wall member 2560 is provided at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an aspect in which a blower that sends air from the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 toward the base end side is provided, or an aspect in which a magnetic force generator is provided at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 and a ball is attracted by magnetic force Alternatively, a mode in which the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is vibrated in the rotation direction may be used. In this case, it is possible to suppress the ball from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined upward toward the distal end in the release state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an intermediate portion that sinks between the base end and the front end of the first passage forming member 2520 may be provided (may be configured in a U-shape). In this case, if a ball remains inside the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the ball can be retained at an intermediate portion (a position closer to the distal end than the base end), so that the communication state changes. In this case, it is possible to shorten a period until the ball is sent from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the third embodiment described above, the case where the lowering control member 415 and the upward control member 417 are provided on one side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 are disposed on the left and right sides of the base member 410, and the elastic coefficients of the torsion springs 415d and 417g for urging the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 are set on the left side. There may be a difference between the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided and the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided on the right side. At this time, the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the right side in the front view is greater than the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the left side in the front view (the side where the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is closer). It is preferable to reduce the coefficient. In this case, the load that changes the posture of the driven side slide member 3430 in the counterclockwise direction (in the direction in which the driven side slide member 3430 is tilted due to the bias of the center of gravity) by the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 disposed on the right side is used. While suppressing, when the driven slide member 3430 changes its posture clockwise in front view due to a sudden vertical movement of the driven slide member 3430, the change in posture can be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the driven side slide member 430 falls after the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the lowered position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driven side slide member 430 may be dropped in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is located at the intermediate position. In this state, control (control of repeatedly switching between the ascending operation and the descending operation) may be performed such that the driving-side slide member 420 is operated in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the driven-side slide member 430. In this case, an effect can be performed in which the driven side slide member 430 is rebounded by the drive side slide member 420 (such as repeatedly rebounded).

  In each of the above embodiments, the divided member DV in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638. Although the case of driving has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. The split member DV in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link operation groove 621 is connected to one side. It may be driven by the rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638. In this case, since the distance between the divided member DV that applies the driving force and the adjacent divided member DV is widened, the adjacent divided member DV and the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 Can be suppressed, and the diameters of the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation driving member can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to increase the driving torque applied from the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation driving member to the division member DV (the rotation member 640).

  In each of the above embodiments, the period in which the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 Although the case where the period in which the DV is engaged with the driven portion 641 overlaps has been described (see FIG. 75), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the engagement portion 637 b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or another While one of the engagement portions 638b of the side rotation drive member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, the other is not engaged, and the engagement portion of the one side rotation drive member 637 is not engaged. One of the engagement portions 638b of the other side rotation drive member 638 and the other of the engagement portions 638b may be made to be non-engaged while the other is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV.

  In this case, it is possible to avoid that the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. . That is, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 can be alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641. Thereby, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  That is, when a phase shift occurs between the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 due to a dimensional tolerance, an assembly tolerance, a driving tolerance of the driving motor 631, etc. In the rotary member 640 formed by connecting the DVs endlessly, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotary driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotary driving member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the divided member DV. If a phase shift occurs in a state in which the rotary member 640 is engaged with the portion 641, one section in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 is in a compressed state and the other section is in a tensile state, so that the displacement of the rotating member 640 is unstable. Becomes

  On the other hand, as described above, the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 are alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. By doing so, even if a phase shift occurs, it is possible to avoid that the rotating member 640 is affected by the phase shift. As a result, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly, the displacement thereof can be stabilized.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the division members DV are connected endlessly in the rotating unit 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The division members DV are connected endlessly (from one end to the other end). It is of course possible to connect the divided member DV up to and disconnect one end and the other end). In this case, for example, the divided member DV connected in an end shape may be displaced (moved) along the endless trajectory in each of the above embodiments, or may be displaced along the endless trajectory. The divided member DV connected in an end shape may be reciprocated (reciprocated).

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows. "A display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as a burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on a gaming machine installation location can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<About the concept of the invention in which a structure in which the rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted by the locking arc portion 351c is an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a driving unit; a transmitting member for transmitting a driving force of the driving unit; The member includes a first gear and a second gear meshed with the first gear and disposed on the displacement member side of the transmission path of the driving force with respect to the first gear. The gear includes a contact portion formed in a part of the tooth profile, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, predetermined teeth of the second gear are in contact with the contact portion of the first gear. The gaming machine A1 wherein the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by being in contact with the gaming machine A1.

  Here, there is provided a gaming machine including a driving unit, a transmission member that transmits a driving force of the driving unit, and a displacement member that is displaced between an ascending position and a descending position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism, the rotation of the pinion driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the displacement member is raised and lowered between the lowered position and the raised position by the linear motion of the rack. (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-80941, for example). In this case, when the driving force of the driving unit is released in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. For this reason, it is necessary to continue to apply the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem that the energy consumption for holding the displacement member at the raised position increases. On the other hand, a crank mechanism is interposed in a part of the driving means, and by utilizing the dead point of the crank mechanism, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member is not lowered from its raised position by its own weight. A known structure is also known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-140602), but in this case, there is a problem that the entire transmission member is increased in size by the provision of the crank mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first gear includes the contact portion formed on a part of the tooth profile thereof, and the contact of the first gear when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. Since the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by the predetermined teeth of the second gear contacting the portion, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member is It is possible to suppress falling by its own weight. Therefore, energy consumption when the displacement member is held at the raised position can be suppressed. Further, the structure for holding the displacement member at the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and there is no need to separately provide a crank mechanism, so that the size of the transmission member can be reduced. it can.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed on a part of the tooth profile thereof, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at an ascending position, the second gear contacts the contact portion of the first gear. A gaming machine A2 wherein the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by the contact of the receiving portions of the two gears.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, when the receiving portion of the second gear abuts on the abutting portion of the first gear, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises. That is, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the rotation of the second gear is regulated in both the forward and reverse directions. Can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A3, wherein in the gaming machine A1 or A2, the rotation of the first gear in a direction in which the displacement member is lowered is allowed when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the rotation of the first gear in a direction to lower the displacement member is allowed. It is not necessary to separately perform an operation for releasing the contact between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear, and by rotating the first gear by the driving force of the driving means, The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, while the rotation of the second gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is restricted, the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is allowed. Therefore, when the displacement member attempts to descend from its raised position by its own weight, the predetermined teeth of the second gear abut against the contact portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear and displacing the displacement member. Can be held in the raised position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed so as to mesh with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction to raise the displacement member, A gaming machine A4, characterized in that the tooth height of the first gear is lower than that of the teeth of the first gear, and a predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the tooth tip surface.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction to raise the displacement member. The second gear is formed so as to be lower than the teeth of the first gear so that a predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the tooth surface of the first gear. Is rotated, and when the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the second gear can be rotated in a direction to raise the displacement member through the abutment portion and the meshing of the predetermined teeth. As a result, a state in which the predetermined tooth of the second gear can contact the contact portion of the first gear (a state in which the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). It can be formed reliably.

  In the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a greater tooth thickness than the teeth of the first gear.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a larger tooth thickness than the teeth of the first gear, so that the predetermined teeth of the second gear abut. Possible areas can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position can be reduced (the tolerance is increased). As a result, a state where the predetermined teeth of the second gear can contact the contact portion of the first gear can be reliably formed.

  Further, the contact portion of the first gear is a portion that receives a predetermined tooth of the second gear and regulates the rotation of the second gear (that is, supports the weight of the displacement member). Since it is increased, strength can be secured.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the abutment portion of the first gear is formed such that the tip surface is curved in an arc shape about the rotation axis of the first gear. .

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed such that its tooth tip surface is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation center of the first gear. Therefore, while improving the strength of the first gear, the first gear can be rotated until a predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear. Can be planned.

  Further, when the second gear is rotated in a direction to lower the displacement member and a predetermined tooth of the second gear is brought into contact with a contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear, the predetermined gear of the second gear is moved. The rotation of the first gear can be easily suppressed by setting the direction of the force acting on the contact portion of the first gear from the tooth of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the first gear. As a result, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends can be easily regulated, and even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member can be reliably prevented from descending by its own weight.

  In the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of a tooth profile thereof, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at an ascending position, the first gear is provided on a receiving portion of the second gear. The gaming machine A7, wherein the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by the contact of the contact portion of the gear.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes the receiving portion formed on a part of its tooth shape, and the first gear is in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position. Since the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by the contact portion of the gear being in contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, the receiving portion of the second gear is moved to the displacement member. It can function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after being placed at the raised position.

  In the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the arc of the contact portion of the first gear. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being formed into an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the shape.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the first gear has a concave portion. When the contact portion of the first gear is brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, both surfaces are curved. The contact portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the function of the stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after the displacement member is arranged at the raised position can be reliably exerted on the receiving portion of the second gear.

  Further, since the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in an arc shape concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear, the tooth height on both sides in the tooth thickness direction can be increased, and the strength of the receiving portion can be increased. Can be increased. This can prevent the receiving portion of the second gear from being damaged when receiving the contact portion of the first gear.

  In any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the engagement between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and The gaming machine A9, wherein the displacement member is located at an end of a movable range in a rising direction.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear are not provided. Is disengaged and the displacement member is located at the end of the movable range in the ascending direction, so that the displacement member is disposed in the ascending position by the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member is elevated. Later, while stopping the second gear, only the first gear can be rotated in the direction in which the displacement member rises. Thereby, the predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact part of the first gear (the contact part (tooth surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). Can be reliably formed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is an example>
A first passage member and a second passage member formed to allow a ball to pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other; A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member; and a first passage member and a second passage member in which one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member. In a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state in which the first and second passage members are not communicated with each other, the first and second passage members are displaceably disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a connecting member that connects one end of the first passage member and one end of the second passage member in a state of being displaced by contacting the other of the two passage members.

  Here, a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass therethrough are provided, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member so that the first passage member and the second passage member are non-connected. There is known a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state to be communicated (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171636). In this case, it is inevitable that a variation occurs in a stop position and a disposition position of the second passage member when the first passage member is displaced due to a dimensional tolerance and an assembly tolerance of each component. Therefore, in the communication state, a position shift occurs between the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member, and it is difficult to stably throw the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the gaming machine B1 is disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and is displaced by contacting the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. Since the first and second passage members include a connecting member that communicates between one ends of the first and second passage members, even if the positions of the first and second passage members are misaligned, one end of each of the first and second passage members is displaced. The displacement can be absorbed by the displacement of the connecting portion interposed between the two. Thereby, the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized. Further, with the displacement of the first passage member, the first passage member comes into contact with the connection member and displaces the connection member, so that the driving force for displacing the first passage member can also be used, and the connection member is displaced. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving force to be performed.

  In the gaming machine B1, the connection member includes one side wall portion and another side wall portion that are arranged to face each other across an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and the one side wall portion includes: When the first path member is located on the displacement path of the first path member and the first path member is displaced, and the other end of the first path member or the second path member contacts one side wall of the connection member. The gaming machine B2, wherein the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall of the connecting member is brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B1, when the first passage member is displaced and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member comes into contact with one side wall of the connection member. Since the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall of the connecting member is brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, in the communication state, the one side wall and the other side wall of the connecting member are removed. , The one end of the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member, and the positional deviation between the one end of the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member can be easily absorbed. As a result, the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the communication state is formed by the first passage member being rotated with one end thereof being a rotation tip side, and the connection member is provided with a rotating shaft parallel to a rotating shaft of the first passage member. When the first passage member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall of the connection member, the connection member is rotated, and The gaming machine B3, wherein the other side wall of the connection member is close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, a communication state is formed by the first passage member being rotated with one end thereof as a rotation tip side, and the connection member is connected to the first passage member. Since a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the member is provided, the displacement (rotation) of the connection member accompanying the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member can be performed smoothly. In addition, by utilizing the rotation operations of both, the other side wall of the connection member can be brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the communication state, in the communication state, one of the opposing surfaces of the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion has a sphere from the first passage member to the second passage member. A gaming machine B4, which is a rolling surface when a ball is thrown, and in the communication state, the one opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 or B3, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of a ball in a communicating portion between one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member. That is, since the communicating portion between the one end of the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member is a portion in which the positional deviation becomes large, where the feeding of the ball becomes unstable, a rolling surface of the ball in the communicating portion is formed. Since the one opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member, the ball can be rolled and the throwing ball can be stabilized.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be sent from one end of the first passage member, and in the release state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to move. A gaming machine B5 comprising: a throwing regulation means for regulating that a ball is thrown from one end of the first passage member.

  Here, in the release state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated with each other. When the ball is supplied to the passage member, the ball that has passed through the first passage member may fall outside the game area. In the communicating state, even if the ball is supplied to the first passage member, if the ball stays in the first passage member for some reason and shifts to the release state in that state, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball staying in the game area may fall into the game area. If the ball falls out of the game area, the movement of the movable member such as the gear and the crank mechanism may be hindered, or the movable member may be damaged by being caught by the ball.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member. At the same time, in the released state, there is provided a ball feed restricting means for restricting the ball in the first passage member from being thrown from one end of the first path member. For example, when a ball is supplied to the first path member in the released state, Also, even when the state is shifted from the communication state to the release state while the ball stays in the first passage member, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

  In the gaming machine B5, a cover body is provided at one end of the first passage member, the cover body allowing passage of the ball in the communicating state and restricting the passage of the ball in the released state, and the cover body is configured to restrict the throwing of the ball. A gaming machine B6 forming means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B5, a cover as one of the ball-throwing restricting means is provided at one end of the first passage member so as to allow the passage of the ball in the communicating state and restrict the passage of the ball in the released state. Since the body is disposed, for example, even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the release state, or when the state transitions from the communication state to the release state while the ball remains in the first passage member, the first passage The ball can be prevented from falling out of the game area from one end of the member.

  In the gaming machine B5, an urging member that applies an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that regulates the passage of the ball, and acts on the cover body with the displacement of the first passage member. And a functioning member for displacing the cover body in a direction that allows the ball to pass when at least the communication state is established.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B5, since the urging member is provided to apply an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position for restricting the passage of the ball, the cover in the released state is provided. Inadvertent displacement of the body can be suppressed, and as a result, the ball can be more reliably prevented from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, when the communication state is formed, the cover body is displaced in a direction allowing the ball to pass, so that the ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member.

  In this case, since the displacement of the cover body in the direction allowing the ball to pass is performed in accordance with the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the action member, the driving means for displacing the first passage member is displaced by the cover body It can also be used as a driving means for causing the product cost to be reduced.

  The action member is located on the displacement trajectory of the cover body due to the displacement of the first passage member, and comes into contact with the cover body displaced along the displacement trajectory, thereby resisting the urging force of the urging member. (For example, a second passage member, a connecting member, a member fixed to a game board, etc.) and a driving force of a driving means for displacing the first passage member. To the cover body to displace the cover body together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear or a rack and pinion that converts drive means and driving force into rotary motion or linear motion and transmits the same to the cover body) ) Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B5, the throwing regulation means arranges the first passage member in such a state that one end of the first passage member is uppermost in the released state.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B5, the throwing regulation means arranges the first passage member in the released state with one end of the first passage member at the uppermost position. Even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball is transferred from the communicating state to the released state with the ball remaining in the first passage member, the ball moves out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. Falling can be suppressed.

  In the release state, the first passage member disposed such that one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position does not need to be entirely inclined upward. There may be a part of the area which is horizontal or inclined downward.

  In the gaming machine B5, the throwing restricting means is configured to arrange the first passage member in a posture inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member to one end in the released state. Gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the throwing restricting means arranges the first passage member in a posture inclined upward from one end of the first passage member to one end in the released state. Therefore, for example, even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the release state, or when the state transitions from the communication state to the release state while the ball remains in the first passage member, the ball is supplied from one end of the first passage member. Can be easily suppressed from falling outside the game area.

  Further, in the case where the communication state is formed, it is possible to form a state in which the whole of the first passage member is inclined downward from the other end to one end, so that the ball can be easily sent from the first passage member to the second passage member. In this way, the ball can be prevented from staying on the way. Therefore, when the state shifts to the release state, it is possible to suppress the ball remaining in the first passage member from falling into the game area.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage formed to allow a ball to pass therethrough, a one-side position for distributing a ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage, and A distributing member that is displaced between the other side position for distributing the ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the downstream passage, wherein the case body is formed by opening both sides in the displacement direction of the distributing member. A gaming machine B10, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the case body is formed with both sides in the displacement direction of the distribution member open, so that the case body is moved to one side position or the other side position. Even when the ball flows down between the distribution member displaced toward the case and the case body, it is possible to suppress the flowed-down ball from being caught between the distribution member and the case body.

  In the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and when the communication state is formed by displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is disposed at the one side position; The gaming machine B11, wherein, when the release state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is disposed at the other side position.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and the displacement member is disposed at one side position and the other side position according to the displacement of the first passage member. Therefore, the driving means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the distribution member, and the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, in the structure in which the distribution member is displaced independently of the first passage member, for example, if the displacement state of the distribution member and the first passage member is displaced due to the occurrence of control failure, the release state is set. The ball is distributed to the first passage member in (1) (that is, the distribution member is disposed at one side position), and the ball may fall out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, in the gaming machine B10, since the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, the displacement state between the distribution member and the first passage member can always be synchronized. Therefore, even if the control failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the ball from being distributed to the first passage member in the released state (that is, when the released state is formed, the distribution member always moves to the other side position). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from falling from one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area.

  In the gaming machine B11, the gaming machine B12 is characterized in that the first passage member includes a wall section that defines a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall section of the first passage member is the distribution member.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B11, the first passage member has a wall portion that defines a passage through which the ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is a distribution member. In addition, parts can be shared and the cost of parts can be reduced. In addition, by using the wall portion that partitions the passage through which the ball passes as the sorting member, the sorted ball can flow down to the passage without fail.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the structure for restricting the rebound of the driven slide member 430 is an example>
A guide member extending vertically, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between an ascending position and a descending position, and supporting the displacement member at the descending position A support member and an elevating member formed so as to be able to move up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the lifting member as the lifting member is raised. In addition, in a gaming machine in which the displacement member is lowered from the raised position to the lowered position by its own weight as the lifting member is lowered, when the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position, the displacement member moves in the rising direction. A gaming machine C1 comprising a rise regulating member for regulating displacement.

  Here, a guide member extending in the up-down direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between the ascending position and the descending position, and supporting the displacing member at the descending position A supporting member and a lifting member formed so as to be able to move up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is raised from the lowering position to the upper position by being pushed up by the raising and lowering member with the raising of the raising and lowering member, There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is lowered from a raised position to a lowered position by its own weight as a lifting member is lowered (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member lowered by its own weight along the guide member is maintained on the lowered position by being placed on the support member and supported by the support member. However, since the displacement member is placed on the support member and can be displaced in the ascending direction along the guide member, rattling is likely to occur due to disturbance, and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position There is a problem that is unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided along the guide member at the descending position because the displacing member is provided with the elevation regulating member for regulating the displacement of the displacing member in the ascending direction when the displacing member is lowered to the descending position. Displacement in the ascending direction can be restricted, and rattling due to disturbance can be suppressed. As a result, the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C1, there is provided an urging means for urging the elevation regulating member in a direction approaching the displacement member, and the displacement member comes into contact with the elevation regulation member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. A separating action portion for displacing the lift restricting member in a direction away from the displacement member, and allowing the lift restricting member to be displaced in a direction approaching the displacement member at the lowered position, and A gaming machine C2 comprising: an engaging portion that engages.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is configured to displace the rising regulating member in a direction away from the displacement member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight, and a descent position. In this case, since the movable member is provided with an engaging portion that engages with the rising restricting member, the restricted state by the rising restricting member can be formed only by the operation of lowering the displacement member to its lowered position by its own weight, and the restricted state by the rising restricting member is formed. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving source for performing the operation. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost of the product can be reduced.

  In addition, since the engagement between the rise regulating member and the engaging portion is performed after allowing the displacement regulating member to be displaced in a direction approaching the displacement member, the engagement between the rising regulating member and the engaging portion is accordingly made. The force required to release the engagement and the displacement of the elevation restriction member can be increased. As a result, even when disturbance is input, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement between the rise restricting member and the engagement portion.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein in the gaming machine C2, the release of the engagement between the elevation regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C2, the disengagement of the lifting regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the lifting member, so that the displacement member is disturbed. Can be suppressed from being inadvertently disengaged from the engaging portion of the upward movement restricting member and the displacing member.

  In addition, since the release of the engagement between the lifting regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the lifting member, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for releasing the engagement, and The drive source for raising and lowering the member can also be used as a drive source for releasing the engagement between the lift restricting member and the engagement portion of the displacement member, thereby reducing the product cost. .

  Further, in the case where a drive source for releasing the engagement between the elevation restriction member and the engagement portion of the displacement member is separately provided, for example, due to the occurrence of control failure, the engagement portion between the elevation restriction member and the displacement member In the state where the lifting member may rise and push up the displacement member in a state where the engagement of the displacement member is not released, according to the gaming machine C3, the release of the engagement between the lifting restriction member and the engagement portion of the displacement member is canceled. This can be performed in accordance with the operation of pushing up the displacement member by the elevating member as the elevating member is raised. Can be reliably released.

  In the gaming machine C3, when the elevating member is lifted, the elevating member comes into contact with the ascending restricting member to displace the ascending restricting member. A gaming machine C4 comprising a release action portion for releasing the engagement.

  Here, the disengagement of the engagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member can be performed by a pushing force at the time of pushing up the displacement member as the lifting member moves up and down. In this case, the pushing force is used. Therefore, it is necessary to make the engagement state such that it can be released, and it becomes difficult to firmly engage. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, vibration is generated by the reaction, and the posture of the displacement member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C3, the elevating member comes into contact with the elevating restricting member when the elevating member is raised, thereby displacing the elevating restricting member, thereby restricting the ascent. Since there is provided a release action portion for releasing the engagement between the member and the engaging portion of the displacement member, even if the rising regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member are firmly engaged, the release is reliably performed. be able to. In other words, since the strong engagement state can be formed, the play of the displacement member due to disturbance can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized. Further, the vibration due to the recoil when the engagement is released can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the engagement of the displacement member with the engagement portion of the displacement member is released, the elevation regulating member is configured to move the displacement member up and down between the descending position and the ascending position. A gaming machine C5 to be abutted.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the lift regulating member moves the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position when the engagement of the displacement member with the engagement portion is released. Since it is in contact with the elevating member to be moved up and down, it functions as a guide and can suppress rattling when the elevating member is moved up and down. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member that moves up and down with the elevating member.

  The gaming machine C6, wherein in the gaming machine C5, a lifting regulating member abutting on the lifting member is urged by the urging means in a direction approaching the lifting member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C5, the lifting regulating member abutting on the elevating member is urged by the urging means in the direction approaching the elevating member. And the posture can be stabilized. Also, rattling of the lifting member can be suppressed by the elastic buffering action of the biasing means.

  In the gaming machine C6, a drive unit, a pinion rotationally driven by the drive unit, and a rack meshed with the pinion, the rack is disposed on the elevating member, the elevating member, A gaming machine C7, wherein the rack is urged by the urging means in a direction away from the pinion via an ascending restricting member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C6, the rotational motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear motion. You. In this case, the elevating member is urged in the direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the elevating member, so that the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized. That is, when the elevating member rattles in the direction in which the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is reduced, the urging force of the urging means acts in the direction to increase the interval, while the direction in which the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion increases. When the elevating member rattles, it can be regulated by the guide structure by the guide member that the distance between the members increases. Therefore, the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion becomes narrow, and it is possible to suppress the tooth resistance from becoming excessive.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, a gaming machine C8 including a descent regulating member that regulates displacement of the elevating member in a descending direction when the elevating member pushes the displacement member up to the ascending position.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, when the elevating member pushes the displacement member up to the ascending position, the lowering member is provided to regulate the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction. The provided displacement member and the elevating member can be supported by the descent restricting member. As a result, a driving force for holding the displacement member at the ascending position can be made unnecessary, so that energy consumption of the driving means for driving the elevating member can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the regulation by the descending member is performed by raising the elevating member, there is no need to separately provide a driving source for forming the regulation by the descending member, and the driving source for elevating the elevating member is not required. Can also be used as a drive source for forming the regulation by the descending regulation member, and the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C8, the release of the regulation by the descending regulating member is performed by lowering the elevating member. The gaming machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, the release of the restriction by the descent restricting member is performed by lowering the elevating member, so it is necessary to separately provide a drive source for releasing the restriction. Therefore, the drive source for raising and lowering the lifting member can be used also as the drive source for releasing the restriction of the lowering restriction member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, in the case where a drive source for releasing the restriction by the descent restricting member is separately provided, for example, when the restriction by the descent restricting member is not released due to the occurrence of control failure, the elevating member moves down and drives. Where the overload may act on the source or the descent regulating member may be damaged, according to the gaming machine C9, the restriction by the descent regulating member can be released in synchronization with the descending operation of the elevating member. When the elevating member is lowered, a state in which the restriction by the descent restricting member is surely released can be formed.

  In the case where the lowering regulating member is a structure that restricts displacement of the displacement member in the lowering direction instead of the raising and lowering member, a structure in which the restriction by the lowering restricting member is released with the lowering of the raising and lowering member is complicated. However, according to the gaming machines C8 and C9, since the descent restricting member has a structure for restricting the displacement of the elevating member in the descent direction, the release of the restriction by the descent restricting member is accompanied by the descent of the elevating member. The structure to be performed can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine C8 or C9, in a state where the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction is regulated by the descending member, the ascent member is in contact with the elevating member, and the descending member is in contact with the elevating member. A gaming machine C10, wherein the contacting direction is different from the direction in which the elevation regulating member contacts the elevation member.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in the gaming machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the descent regulating member contacts the elevating member is different from the direction in which the ascent regulating member contacts the elevating member. The rattling of the lifting member in different directions can be suppressed by the restriction member and the lifting restriction member. As a result, the posture of the elevating member can be effectively stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C10, a drive unit, a pinion that is rotationally driven by the drive unit, and a rack that meshes with the pinion are provided, and the rack is disposed on the elevating member. A gaming machine C11, which is in contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine C11, the rotational motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into linear motion of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear motion. In this case, the rack (elevating member) can be displaced in a direction parallel to the tooth surface with respect to the pinion, and the descending regulating member abuts on the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack. Therefore, the displacement of the rack (elevating member) with respect to the pinion in the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack can be restricted.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state in which the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the lift regulating member and the support member can contact the displacement member from one side and the other side across the guide member. , A gaming machine C12.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the rising regulating member and the supporting member are on one side and the other side of the guiding member. Are arranged so as to be able to abut against the displacement member, so that rattling in either direction of the displacement member with respect to the guide member in one direction or the other side is regulated by the abutment member or the support member, respectively. it can. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member provided at the lowered position from rattling due to disturbance.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the support member and the rising restriction member abut on the displacement member while changing their positions along the extending direction of the guide member. The gaming machine C13, wherein the gaming machine C13 is disposed as possible, and the support member is disposed above the elevation restriction member.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state where the displacement member is arranged at the lowered position, the support member and the elevation regulating member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member. The displacement member is disposed so as to be able to abut on the displacement member while being different from each other. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member provided at the lowered position from rattling due to disturbance.

  Further, since the support member is disposed above the elevation regulating member, the support member does not hinder the elevation of the elevation member, and a space for the elevation member to elevate can be secured. Therefore, the degree of freedom of design can be secured.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which a structure in which the detected portion 641 of the rotating member 640 is detected by the detection sensor 684 is an example>
In a gaming machine having a movable member movably formed and a detecting means for detecting a moving position of the moving member, the detecting means is arranged at irregular intervals along the moving direction of the moving member. A gaming machine D1 comprising: a plurality of detected parts provided; and a plurality of detection sensors disposed on a movement locus of the detected part.

  Here, there has been known a gaming machine including a rotatable moving member and a detecting unit for detecting a rotational position of the moving member (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-46467). According to this gaming machine, the detecting means includes the plurality of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the moving member, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit arranged to face each other with the slit interposed therebetween, and the light receiving unit receives light. The number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added, and the amount of rotation of the moving member from the reference position (that is, the rotational position) is detected based on the cumulatively added number of pulses. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a failure in light reception of the light receiving unit or the like, a deviation occurs between the rotational position of the moving member and the cumulative addition number, and the rotational position of the moving member cannot be accurately detected. There was a problem. That is, when a detection failure occurs, the subsequent detection results are affected, and each time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection results is accumulated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the detecting means includes a plurality of detected portions arranged on the moving member at unequal intervals along the direction of the movement, and a plurality of detected portions arranged on the movement locus of the detected portion. Since a plurality of detection sensors are provided, the movement position of the moving member can be detected based on a combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the plurality of detecting sensors, and the past detecting result of the detecting sensor is required to detect the moving position of the moving member. Therefore, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

  In the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction, and the detected portion is one of the plurality of divided members. And a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on an arrangement interval of the divided members. Gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction, and the detected portion Is disposed on some of the plurality of divided members and is not disposed on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are disposed on the basis of the arrangement intervals of the divided members. Therefore, each time the movable member is displaced by an amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members, the combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors can be made different. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected with the moving amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members as the minimum unit.

  Note that a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the divided members, which means that the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at positions corresponding to any of the plurality of divided members. Means that. That is, it means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is disposed at a position where the presence or absence of the detected portion of the corresponding divided member can be detected.

  In the gaming machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the plurality of divided members have an interval smaller than the first interval. And a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on an arrangement interval of the divided members in the first section, and a movement locus of the detected portion in the first section A gaming machine D3, which is disposed above.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval, and a plurality of divided members that are larger than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval, which is a narrow interval, is formed, the length of the moving member can be reduced as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In this case, the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the movement locus of the detected portion in the first section at intervals based on the arrangement interval (first interval) of the divided members in the first section. Space required for disposing the detection sensor can be easily secured. In other words, when setting the arrangement interval (second interval) of the divided members in the second section, there is no need to consider the space for disposing the detection sensor, and therefore, the second interval is set to be smaller. Can be set at narrow intervals. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed from this point as well.

  In the gaming machine D3, the division member includes a main body member on which the detected member is disposed, and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and main body portions of the adjacent division members. The distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, and the link member is displaced in the first section. The gaming machine D4, wherein the end of the gaming machine D4 is restricted from being displaced in a direction to increase the distance between adjacent divided members.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D3, both ends of the divided member can be displaced to the main body member on which the detected member is disposed and the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member. And the link member is displaced with respect to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, thereby increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member. Further, the structure for forming the second section can be simplified.

  In this case, in the first section, the link member reaches the displacement end, and the displacement of the divided member in the direction of increasing the distance between the adjacent divided members is restricted, so that the detection in the direction of increasing the distance is performed. Variations in the position of the part can be suppressed. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

  The gaming machine D4 includes a base member on which the divided member is displaceably disposed, and the base member guides the main body member and the link member for guiding the main body member when the divided member is displaced. When the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member, the link guide portion acts on the link member to cause the main body member and the adjacent main body member to be displaced. A gaming machine D5 wherein the attitude of the link member with respect to the main body member of the divided member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D4, the base member includes a main body guiding portion that guides the main body member when the divided member is displaced, and a link guiding portion that guides the link member. Since the guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member, the posture of the link member changes with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. With the change in the posture of the link member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.

  In the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by a link guiding portion of the base member, and the link guiding portion of the base member is slidably inserted through the guided portion of the link member. The gaming machine D6, wherein the gaming machine D6 is formed in a groove shape having a width corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guiding portion of the base member, and the link guiding portion of the base member is guided by the link member. The portion is formed in a groove shape slidably inserted, and the width of the groove is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member, so that the link member can be easily maintained at the displacement end in the first section. Thereby, since it is possible to reliably restrict displacement of the divided member in the direction of increasing the interval between the adjacent divided members, it is possible to suppress variation in the position of the detection target in the direction of increasing the interval. The detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the division member includes a displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the main body member, and in the first section, abuts against a main body member of the adjacent division member. The gaming machine D7, wherein the displacement member is displaced to a position, and displacement of the divided member in a direction to reduce a distance between adjacent divided members is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the division member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member. The displacement member is displaced to a position where it abuts on the main body member, and the displacement of the divided member in the direction of narrowing the gap with the adjacent divided member is regulated. Can be suppressed. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure for adjusting the interval between the divided members DV in the moving member 640 is an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member movably formed, the movable member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction. A first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval; and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval smaller than the first interval. A gaming machine E1 wherein a section is formed.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a rotatable moving member is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, an effect can be produced by displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information on the front of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and allowing the player to visually recognize the identification information provided at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more, so if the number of display of the identification information is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of displayed identification information decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval and an interval in which the plurality of divided members is smaller than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be reduced as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed. That is, the space required for disposing the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. Therefore, for example, when displaying the identification information on each of the divided members, it is possible to suppress the space required for disposing the moving member while securing the number of displayed identification information.

  In the gaming machine E1, the division member includes a main body member, and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and main body portions of adjacent division members, wherein the link member includes the main body member and the main body member. A gaming machine E2 wherein the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by being displaced with respect to the main body of the adjacent divided member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the dividing member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent dividing member. Since the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, the first section and the second section are formed. Can be simplified.

  The gaming machine E2 includes a base member on which the divided member is displaceably disposed, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member for guiding the main body member when the divided member is displaced. When the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, the link guide portion acts on the link member, and the main body member and the adjacent A gaming machine E3 wherein the attitude of the link member with respect to the main body member of the divided member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E2, the base member includes a main body guiding portion for guiding the main body member when the divided member is displaced, and a link guiding portion for guiding the link member. Since the guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member, the posture of the link member changes with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. With the change in the posture of the link member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the division member includes a displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the main body member, and the displacement member has a posture tilted toward an adjacent division member in the first section. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the second section is in a more upright posture than the posture in the first section.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, in the first section, the displacement member is in a posture inclined toward the adjacent divided member, so that the displacement member is visually recognized by the player. It can be easier. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be improved. In the first section, the space between the divided members is widened, so that a space for the tilting of the displacement member can be secured, and the size of the displacement member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, also from this point, the visibility of the displacement member, that is, the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the second section, the displacing member is set to a more upright posture than the posture in the first section, so that the displacing member can be separated from the main body member of the adjacent divided member. To reduce the distance between them. That is, the second interval in the second section can be reduced. As a result, the length of the moving member can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable on the upper surface of the main body member, and is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member in the second section. Gaming machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed displaceably on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, is higher than the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member. Since it is provided, interference with the displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought close to each other until they come into contact with each other, and the interval between them can be further reduced. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the moving member can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E3, the orbit of the main body guide portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E3, since the trajectory of the main body guide of the base member is formed in a circular shape, a structure for displacing the main body member guided by the main body guide of the base member. Can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine E3, the trajectory of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape connects all of the plurality of divided members in the circumferential direction at the first interval. A gaming machine E7 characterized by having a radius equal to that of a circular arrangement.

  Here, a first section in which a plurality of divided members are circumferentially connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members in a circumferential direction connected at a second interval which is smaller than the first interval. When the second section is formed on the moving member (hereinafter, referred to as “the former case”), the moving member is compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval (hereinafter, referred to as “the latter”). Can be shortened in the circumferential direction, so that the space required for disposing the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. However, when the orbits of the plurality of divided members are formed in a circular shape, the radius in the former case is made smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the divided members of the first section in the former case, based on the number and radius of the divided members in the first section, the actual number as the total number of the divided members forming the moving member is determined. Recall fewer numbers than.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, the trajectory of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape is such that all of the plurality of divided members are formed. Since the radius is equal to the radius of a circular connection at the first interval, the number of the plurality of divided members is secured, and the space required for the arrangement of the plurality of divided members is suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to remind the player of a number corresponding to the actual number as the total number of divided members forming the moving member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Drive Mechanism 630 as an Example>
A moving member formed by connecting a base member on which the guide portion is extended, a plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member, and applying a driving force to the moving member. A driving unit, wherein the guide portion of the base member acts on the split member to set a gap between the split members to a first interval, and a first guide portion that sets the interval between the split members to a first interval. A second guide portion for setting the interval between the divided members at a narrow second interval, wherein the driving means includes a rotary drive member having an engagement portion engageable with the split member, and The gaming machine F1, wherein the plurality of divided members are displaced along a guide portion of the base member by rotating a member while engaging the engaging portion with the divided member.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a rotatable moving member is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, an effect can be produced by displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information on the front of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and allowing the player to visually recognize the identification information provided at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more, so if the number of display of the identification information is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of displayed identification information decreases.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of divided members, and the moving member has a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval and a section smaller than the first interval. By forming a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the second interval of the interval, compared with a case where the entirety is connected at the first interval, while maintaining the number of divided members, The space required for arranging the divided members can be suppressed. That is, when identifying information is displayed on each divided member, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed while securing the number of displayed identification information. I thought.

  However, a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval is connected to the moving member to which the plurality of divided members are connected, and the plurality of divided members are connected at the second interval smaller than the first interval. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to displace such a moving member with respect to the base member while forming a section to be formed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member, and the first guide portion sets the interval between the divided members to the first interval, and is smaller than the first interval. A second guide for setting an interval between the divided members at the second interval, wherein the driving means includes a rotary drive member having an engagement portion engageable with the divided member, and the rotary drive member is Since the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portion of the base member by rotating the portions while being engaged with the divided members, the intervals between the divided members are wide and narrow (the first interval The moving member can be displaced with respect to the base member while forming the section and the second interval) in the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F1, the rotating drive member is formed with a plurality of the engaging portions.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F1, the rotational drive member is formed with a plurality of engaging portions, thereby improving the transmission efficiency of the driving force from the rotational drive member to the moving member. Can be.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the moving member is formed by connecting the plurality of divided body members endlessly in the circumferential direction, and the driving unit includes two of the rotation driving members, A gaming machine F3, wherein driving members are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the two rotary drive members are provided at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member, and thus are provided from the rotary drive member to the moving member. Driving force can be distributed to different positions in the circumferential direction of the moving member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the bias of the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F3, the trajectories of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member have a circular shape, and the two rotation driving members cause the phases of the circular trajectories to differ by 180 degrees. Gaming machine F4, wherein the gaming machine F4 is disposed at a different position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the orbit of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member is circular, and the two rotary driving members are circular orbits. Are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase with each other, so that the driving force from the rotary driving member can be applied to two of the moving members (the plurality of divided members) which are most separated from each other. Thus, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the second rotary drive member is configured such that while the engagement portion of one rotary drive member is not engaged with the split member, the engagement portion of the other rotary drive member is not engaged. A gaming machine F5, wherein the engaging portions are arranged with different phases so as to be engaged with the division member.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine F3 or F4, the two rotary drive members are connected to each other while the engaging portion of one rotary drive member is not engaged with the divided member. Since the phases of the engagement portions are arranged to be different from each other so that the engagement portions of the rotation drive member are engaged with the divided members, the engagement portions of one rotation drive member and the other rotation drive members are arranged. It is possible to avoid that the engaging portion and the splitting member are simultaneously disengaged from each other, and it is possible to suppress intermittent transmission of the driving force from the rotary driving member to the moving member. Thereby, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  That is, in the configuration in which the plurality of divided members are connected endlessly as in the present invention, when the transmission of the driving force from the rotary driving member to the moving member is intermittent, the division and the transmission of the driving force and the release are performed. Since the distance between the members is increased or decreased, the posture of the entire moving member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F5, one of the engagement portion of the one rotation drive member and the engagement portion of the other rotation drive member is always engaged with the split member, and the driving force is always applied to the moving member. Can be formed, so that the interval between the divided members can be easily kept constant. As a result, even if the moving member is formed by connecting a plurality of divided members endlessly, the posture thereof can be stabilized. That is, the displacement can be stabilized.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion with which an engaging portion of the rotation driving unit is engaged, and the engaged portion is a track of the plurality of divided members. A gaming machine F6, which is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the game machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion with which the engaging portion of the rotary drive unit is engaged, and Since the portion is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the track of the plurality of divided members, the amount of rotation of the moving member (the plurality of divided members) with respect to the amount of rotation of the rotary drive member can be reduced. That is, since the reduction ratio can be reduced, the driving torque applied from the rotary driving member to the moving member can be increased accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotation drive member is disposed at a position where the engagement portion can be engaged with the division member guided along a first guide portion of the guide portion. A gaming machine F7.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the rotation drive member is a divided member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions, that is, the divided members are separated from each other. Since the engaging portion is disposed at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member guided in a state where the distance is widened, interference between the adjacent divided member and the rotary driving member can be suppressed, and the rotary driving member is accordingly reduced. Can be increased in diameter. As a result, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member displaced along the guide portion, thereby reducing the interval between the divided members to the first interval or the second interval. A third guide portion that transitions from the interval to the second interval or the first interval, and the rotation drive member is configured to be attached to the divided member guided along a third guide portion of the guide portion. A gaming machine F8, wherein the gaming machine F8 is provided at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the rotation drive member is a divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions, that is, an adjacent divided portion. Since the engaging portion is arranged at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member whose interval with the member is changed from the first interval or the second interval to the second interval or the first interval, the guide portion is provided. The division member that receives a relatively large reaction force from the (third guide portion) can be directly driven by the rotation driving member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member formed by connecting the plurality of divided members from being bent in the middle, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the divided member includes a main body member displaced along the guide portion, and one end rotatably connected to the main body member and a main body member of an adjacent divided member. A link member whose end is slidably connected, wherein one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member, respectively, so that the split member and The distance between the adjacent divided members is increased or decreased, and the engagement portion of the rotation drive member is a main body member of the divided member, and is located at a position where the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected. The gaming machine F9, wherein one end of the link member is also engaged at a position close to a portion to which the link member is rotatably connected.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the split member is connected to the main body member displaced along the guide portion, and one end is rotatably connected to the main body member. A link member having the other end slidably connected to the main body member of the adjacent divided member, wherein one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member, respectively. Thereby, the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotary drive member is a main body member of the divided member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected. Since the one end of the link member is engaged at a position closer to the portion where the link member is rotatably connected than the portion where the link member is rotatably connected, the main body member of the split member is driven by the rotation drive member and displaced along the guide portion. When that can be easily transmitted through the body member to the link member of divided member adjacent the displacement of the body member. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the gaming machine F10 is provided with driving gears which are arranged concentrically with a circle which is a track of the plurality of divided members and are respectively meshed with the two rotary driving members.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4 or F5, since the driving gears provided with the two rotation driving members are provided, the two rotation driving members are synchronized by rotating the driving gears. It can be rotated in the state where it was done. As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the drive gear is disposed concentrically with the circle which is the trajectory of the plurality of divided members, the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 are moved by the moving member (the plurality of divided members) in a front view of the base member. Can be arranged inward of the outer circumference of the movement trajectory. That is, the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 do not protrude outside the outer shape of the moving member, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.

<Feature G group> (Bunny foot control)
A first flow path through which game balls can flow, a second flow path configured to allow game balls to flow, and a second flow path different from the first flow path; and a determination that a game ball has entered the first flow path. Possible first determining means, the first flow path and the second flow path communicate with each other, and at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is set to a communication state in which a game ball can flow down. Movable means capable of being moved, release determination means for determining whether a release condition capable of releasing the communication state is established based on a determination result of the first determination means, and release by the release determination means A maintenance means for maintaining the communication state until it is determined that the communication is possible.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine which executes a lottery triggered by a winning start and gives a winning state advantageous to a player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery. In this conventional gaming machine, a privilege is given to a player by causing a game ball to enter a specific ball entry area which is opened (or enlarged) when a hit state occurs. Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, a plurality of flow paths are provided inside the ball entry area, and by giving different privileges depending on the flow paths passing therethrough, the interest in the hit state is improved. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-59445). Note that, among the plurality of flow paths, the flow path in which the game ball advances is switched according to, for example, the type of hit, the elapsed time, and the like.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the traveling direction of the game ball may not be completely controlled in some cases, and the game ball may not be able to flow down properly.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, the entering of the game ball into the first flow path is determined by the first determination means. At least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved by the movable means to a communication state in which the first flow path and the second flow path communicate with each other so that game balls can flow down. Based on the result of the determination by the first determination unit, the release determination unit determines whether a release condition that can release the communication state is satisfied, and the maintenance unit continues until the release determination unit determines that the release condition can be released. Is maintained.

  As a result, the communication state is maintained until the release condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the game balls can flow down appropriately.

  The gaming machine G1 includes a second determination unit that performs a predetermined determination based on a game ball entering the second flow path, and the release condition is determined by the first determination unit. A gaming machine G2, which is established when the number of gaming balls matches the number of gaming balls determined by the second determining means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, a predetermined determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second flow path. The release condition is satisfied when the number of game balls determined by the first determination unit matches the number of game balls determined by the second determination unit.

  Thus, the communication state can be maintained until the game ball flows down from one of the first flow path and the second flow path in the communication state to the other. That is, it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released while flowing down from one flow path to the other flow path, and to surely cause the game ball to flow down to the other flow path. Therefore, there is an effect that the flow destination of the game ball can be suitably controlled.

  In the gaming machine G1, the cancellation condition is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed since the first determination unit determined that the game ball was entered.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed since the first discriminating means has determined that the game ball has entered the ball. Through the first flow path and the second flow path that are in communication with each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released while the game ball is flowing down any one of the flow paths, and it is possible to suitably cause the game ball to flow down.

  In the gaming machine G1, the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed since the first determination unit last determined that the game ball was entered during the communication state of 1. Gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed since the last determination of a game ball by the first determination means in the one communication state. Therefore, the communication state can be released after all the game balls that have entered the first flow path in the communication state pass through for a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released while the game ball is flowing down any one of the flow paths, and it is possible to suitably cause the game ball to flow down.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an open state in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a closed state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the open state. A variable member that can be changed to a state and a variable unit that changes the variable member from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied when a specific condition is satisfied; The gaming machine G5, wherein the flow path is disposed at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entry means enters the ball.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4. That is, the variable member is changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the open state. When the specific condition is satisfied, the variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state by the variable means. Here, the first flow path is arranged at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entry means enters the ball.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released before the game ball that has entered the ball entry means reaches the second flow path. Therefore, when the ball entry means is in the open state, there is an effect that the game balls entered into the ball entry means can be appropriately flowed down.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the production means for performing the production, and the production means based on a predetermined elapsed time elapsed after the first discrimination means has determined that the game ball has entered the ball. A gaming machine G6, which has an effect changing means for changing an effect mode executed in the game machine G6.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, based on the fact that a predetermined elapsed period has elapsed since the first discriminating means has determined that the game ball has entered, the effect means The effect mode executed by is changed by the effect changing means.

  This makes it possible for the player to launch the game ball aiming at the first road, with the pleasure of varying the effect mode executed by the effect means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G6, the effect means is disposed on the front side of the second flow path, and during the predetermined elapsed period, the game ball entering the first flow path reaches the second flow path. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that the gaming machine G7 is configured to be longer than a period required until the game is completed.

  According to the gaming machine G7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G6. That is, the effect means is arranged on the front side of the second flow path. Then, a period that is equal to or longer than a period required for the game ball that has entered the first ball entry means to reach the second flow path is set as a predetermined elapsed period.

  As a result, the effect mode executed by the effecting means after the game ball reaches the second flow path provided on the back side of the effecting means is changed, so that the game ball reaches the effecting means for the player. This makes it possible to execute a visual effect as if the effect mode were changed. Therefore, a novel effect can be realized, and there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Also, since it can be determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second flow path based on whether or not a predetermined elapsed time has elapsed, a configuration of a sensor or the like for determining whether the game ball has entered the second flow path Can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine G7, the gaming machine G8 is characterized in that at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G7, at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means, so that the effect is produced in a process in which the game ball passes through the second flow path. A game ball can be made to enter the inside of the means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel effect in which the effect mode executed by the effect device is changed when the game ball enters the inside of the effect device. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, a second determination unit that performs a predetermined determination based on a game ball that has entered the second flow path, an effect unit that performs an effect, and a determination result by the second determination unit. A gaming machine G9 comprising: an effect varying means for varying an effect mode executed by the effect means on the basis of the effect means.

  According to the gaming machine G9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, a predetermined determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the game ball that has entered the second flow path. Then, based on the result of the determination by the second determining means, the effect mode executed by the effecting means is varied by the effect varying means.

  This allows the player to launch the game ball so that the game ball enters the second flow path in order to change the presentation mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G9, the effect means is disposed on the front side of the second flow path, and the second determination means determines that the game ball has reached the second flow path. A gaming machine G10.

  According to the gaming machine G10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G9. That is, the effect means is arranged on the front side of the second flow path. Then, it is determined by the second determination means that the game ball has reached the second flow path.

  As a result, the effect mode executed by the effecting means after the game ball reaches the second flow path provided on the back side of the effecting means is changed, so that the game ball reaches the effecting means for the player. This makes it possible to execute a visual effect as if the effect mode were changed. Therefore, a novel effect can be realized, and there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G10, at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means, and the second determination means is provided inside the effect means of the second flow path. A gaming machine G11 for determining whether or not a gaming ball has flowed down a formed portion.

  According to the gaming machine G11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G10. That is, at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means. Then, it is determined by the second determination means whether or not the game ball has flowed down the portion formed inside the effect means in the second flow path.

  This makes it possible to realize a novel effect in which the effect performed by the effecting means is changed when the game ball enters the inside of the effecting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G11, it is determined whether or not it is a release timing for releasing the communication state after at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path has been moved to the communication state by the movable means. A determining unit, wherein the movable unit is configured to determine whether the release condition is satisfied by the release determining unit when the determining unit determines that the release timing is reached; A gaming machine G12 wherein at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to release the communication state.

  According to the gaming machine G12, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines G1 to G11. That is, after at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path has been moved to the communication state by the movable means, the determination means determines whether it is a release timing for releasing the communication state. When the release timing is determined by the determination unit, at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is movable based on the release determination unit determining that the release condition is satisfied. It is moved by the means, and the communication state is released.

  Thus, even when the release timing comes, the communication state can be maintained until the release condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when the game ball advances to the first flow path immediately before the release timing or the like, the game can be maintained. There is an effect that the sphere can flow down properly.

  In the gaming machine G12, the release determination unit determines that the release condition is satisfied based on a lapse of a specific period since the determination unit determines that the release timing has come. Gaming machine G13.

  According to the gaming machine G13, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G12, it is determined by the release determining means that the release condition has been satisfied based on the fact that a specific period has elapsed since the determining means determined that it was the release timing. Therefore, during a specific period until it is determined that the release condition is satisfied by the release determination unit, the game ball flowing down the first flow path can be reliably discharged from the first path and the second flow path. . Therefore, there is an effect that a game ball can be made to flow down suitably.

  In the gaming machine G13, the specific period is equal to or longer than a period in which gaming balls entering the first flow path are discharged.

  According to the gaming machine G14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G13, since the specific period is configured to be equal to or longer than the period in which the gaming ball entering the second flow path is discharged, it is determined that it is the release timing. There is an effect that a game ball that has entered the first flow path immediately before the start can be more reliably discharged while the communication state is maintained.

<Characteristic H group> (Control target is variable depending on operation status (pocket LED control))
A movable body on which a plurality of decorative parts are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, and a position of the decorative part arranged on the movable body can be changed corresponding to the movement of the movable body. A variable means, an operating body capable of following the movable body, and having a plurality of operating parts less than the decorative part, and a plurality of operating parts arranged on the operating body being predetermined; Operation control means that can be operated for each number, determining means for determining a specific decorative part from the plurality of decorative parts, and the position of the position corresponding to the specific decorative part determined by the determining means A gaming machine H1 comprising: a determination unit configured to determine an operation unit, wherein the operation control unit activates the operation unit based on information determined by the determination unit.

  Here, there are known gaming machines that execute an entertaining effect by using a plurality of effect members such as various types of character and display means. Some of such gaming machines can execute a wide variety of entertainment effects by operating a plurality of effect members in one effect. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it may be difficult to perform a uniform production using different production members, and thus it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the player. was there. In addition, some conventional gaming machines are capable of slidably moving an effect member composed of a liquid crystal display device provided on the left and right sides of a gaming board in a direction toward and away from each other. In some of the conventional gaming machines, the display mode of each effect member displayed on the display screen is varied according to the distance between the left and right effect members to improve the interest (for example, JP 2014-239965 A). However, in such a conventional gaming machine, only two effect members are operated symmetrically with each other. For this reason, when the number of the effect members is increased and the symmetric operation is not possible, there is a possibility that the operation of the effect member cannot be appropriately set.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the plurality of decorative portions are arranged on the movable body, and the movable body is moved by the movable means. The position of the decorative portion arranged on the movable body is changed by the variable means in accordance with the movement of the movable body. The operating body moves following the movable body. The operating body is provided with a plurality of operating portions less than the decorative portion, and the operating portions are respectively operated by the operation control means at predetermined intervals. A specific decorative part is determined by the determining means from the plurality of decorative parts, and the operating part at a position corresponding to the specific decorative part determined by the determining means is determined by the determining means. Then, the operation section is operated by the operation control means based on the discrimination information by the discrimination means.

  Accordingly, the operation unit corresponding to the arrangement of the decoration unit can be operated, so that a united operation can be executed by the decoration unit and the operation unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H1, the operating body is fixed to the movable body.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H1, the operating body is fixed to the movable body, so that the decorative part of the movable body and the operating part of the operating pair realize an operation with a sense of unity. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the operation control unit may be configured to determine the operation unit determined by the determination unit while the specific decorative unit is movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position. A gaming machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, while the specific decorative portion is moved from at least the first position to the second position different from the first position, the determination is made by the determining unit. Since the operating part is operated by the operation control means, it is possible to control the operating part at a position corresponding to the specific decorative part to operate at least after the second position. Therefore, since the unified operation can be realized by the decorative section and the operating section, the operation of the decorative section and the operating section having different numbers from each other can be suitably set.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the gaming machine has position determining means capable of determining the positions of the plurality of decorative portions, and the determining means is based on the position determining information determined by the position determining means. A gaming machine H4 for determining the operating portion at a position corresponding to the specific decorative portion.

  According to the gaming machine H4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines H1 to H3. That is, the positions of the plurality of decorative portions are determined by the position determining means. Then, based on the position determination information determined by the position determination unit, the operation unit at the position corresponding to the specific decorative portion is determined by the determination unit.

  Accordingly, the operating section can be operated in accordance with the positions of the plurality of decorative sections, so that there is an effect that the unified operation can be performed between the decorative section and the operating section.

  In the gaming machine H4, on the movable body, a plurality of projecting pieces are arranged at predetermined positions, and each time the movable body moves to a plurality of predetermined movable positions, of the plurality of projecting pieces, Detecting means for detecting the one or more projecting pieces set in correspondence with each of the movable positions, wherein the position determining means detects the plurality of projecting pieces based on a detection result of the detecting means; A gaming machine H5 for determining the position of the decorative portion of the game machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H4. That is, a plurality of projecting pieces are arranged at predetermined positions of the movable body. Each time the movable body moves to a plurality of predetermined movable positions, one or a plurality of projecting pieces set corresponding to the respective movable positions are detected by the detecting means among the plurality of projecting pieces. Based on the detection result by the means, the positions of the plurality of decorative portions are determined by the position determining means.

  Thereby, the arrangement of the decorative portion can be determined by mechanically detecting the protruding pieces by the detecting means, and thus there is an effect that the determination can be performed more accurately.

  In the gaming machine H5, different identification information is set in advance for each of the plurality of decoration units, and the decoration units corresponding to the identification information are arranged on the movable body in a predetermined order, The position determining means has identification information determining means for determining identification information of the decorative portion located at a predetermined position based on a detection result of the detecting means, and the identification information determining means determines the identification information. The gaming machine H6, wherein the position of the remaining decorative portion is determined based on the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H5. That is, different identification information is set in advance for each of the plurality of decoration portions, and the decoration portions corresponding to the identification information are arranged on the movable body in a predetermined order. Also, in the position determining means, the identification information of the decorative part located at a predetermined position is determined by the identification information determining means based on the detection result of the detecting means, and the identification information determined by the identification information determining means is determined. , The positions of the remaining decorative portions are determined.

  This makes it possible to determine the positions of all the decorative portions only by determining the identification information of the predetermined position, so that only the detecting means for detecting the decorative portions arranged at the predetermined position may be provided. The number of means can be reduced. Therefore, since the number of parts can be reduced, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H4, the movable means moves the movable body in a predetermined movable pattern, and stores positional information in which positional information of the plurality of decorative portions is stored corresponding to the movable pattern. Means for determining the positions of the plurality of decorative portions from the position information stored in the position information storage means based on information on the movable pattern in which the movable body is moved. A gaming machine H7 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine H7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H4. That is, the movable body is moved by the movable means in a predetermined movable pattern. Position information of a plurality of decorative portions is stored in the position information storage means in correspondence with the movable pattern. The positions of the plurality of decorative portions are determined by the position determining means from the position information stored in the position information storing means based on information on the movable pattern in which the movable body is moved.

  This makes it possible to determine the position of the decorative portion by a simple control of simply reading out the position information stored in the position information storage means, thereby reducing the processing load when determining the position of the decorative portion. There is an effect that can be. Further, since there is no need to provide a detecting means such as a sensor, the number of components of the gaming machine can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the movable body is disposed on the front side of the operating body, and the operating section is configured by a light emitting unit that emits light to the decorative section located on the front side. A gaming machine H8, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the movable body is disposed on the front side of the operating body, and the operating section emits light to the decorative section located on the front side. Since it is constituted by the means, the specific decorative part can be made to have a shining appearance by the operating part. Therefore, there is an effect that a specific decorative portion can be made to stand out.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the movable means rotates the movable body, and the movable pattern is a predetermined rotation pattern for rotating the movable body. A gaming machine H9 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the movable body is rotated by the movable means based on a predetermined rotation pattern defined as a movable pattern. The operating part corresponding to the specific decorative part can be operated while rotating. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the rotation operation can be improved.

<Feature I group> (Pocket position control)
In a gaming machine having a movable body movable in a predetermined movable range, movable means for moving the movable body in the movable range, and movable control means for movably controlling the movable means, the movable body includes: The game machine has a plurality of detection units arranged at a plurality of predetermined positions, and the gaming machine includes a plurality of the detection units when the movable body is moved to the plurality of the predetermined positions. A detecting means capable of detecting one or more of the detecting sections configured in a predetermined combination corresponding to each of the predetermined positions; and a predetermined number of the detecting sections are detected by the detecting means. In the case, while the movable body is moved by a predetermined amount, a position is determined based on a detection result detected by the detection unit on condition that the detection unit detected by the detection unit is constant. The discriminator who judges the information Gaming machine I1, characterized in that the, and has a.

  Here, there are known gaming machines capable of executing a movable effect using movable means such as an accessory. In this conventional gaming machine, an accurate rendering operation is realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using a detecting means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the erroneous recognition of the movable position of the movable means may occur when the detection means makes an erroneous detection.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, a plurality of detectors arranged at a plurality of predetermined positions are provided on the movable body. When the movable body is moved to a plurality of predetermined positions, at least one of a plurality of detection units configured by a predetermined combination corresponding to each predetermined position is detected by the detection unit. Is done. When a predetermined number of the detection units are detected by the detection unit, the detection unit detects the detection unit on the condition that the detection unit detected by the detection unit is constant while the movable body is moved by a predetermined amount. Based on the detection result, the position information is determined by the determination unit.

  Thus, the detection unit can be more reliably determined, and thus there is an effect that the position information of the movable unit can be accurately determined.

  In the gaming machine I1, determining means for determining a specific predetermined position from the plurality of predetermined positions based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determining means. And a notifying unit that executes a notifying process that indicates that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position when the discriminating unit determines that the game machine is in the game machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, a specific predetermined position is determined from the plurality of predetermined positions by the determining means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. When the determination unit determines that the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determination unit, a notification process indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position is executed by the notification unit.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the player can clearly recognize that the movable body has reached the specific predetermined position.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the detecting means is arranged such that a multiplier of 2 with respect to the number of the detecting means is larger than the plurality of predetermined positions. I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the detection means is arranged such that the multiplier of 2 with respect to the number of the detection means is larger than a plurality of predetermined positions. The combination of the presence or absence of the detection unit at the position where the detection means is arranged can be different at all the predetermined positions. That is, since the combination of the detection result by the detection means and each predetermined position can be made to correspond one-to-one, there is an effect that the position of the movable means can be more accurately determined from the detection result by the detection means.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the movable body is provided with a plurality of decorative portions, and the decorative portions are respectively disposed on the movable body corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions. A gaming machine I4 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the decorative portions are arranged on the movable body corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions, respectively. can do. Therefore, since the movable body can be noticed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the movable means is for rotating the movable body, and the plurality of predetermined positions are positions at which the movable body is rotated for each predetermined angle. A gaming machine I5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I1 to I4. That is, the movable body is rotated by the movable means. A plurality of predetermined positions are arranged at positions where the movable body is rotated at predetermined angles.

  Thereby, when the movable body is rotating, the arrangement of the movable body can be determined at every predetermined angle, so that there is an effect that the rotation operation can be executed more accurately.

  Determining means for determining a specific predetermined position from the plurality of predetermined positions based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition in any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5; and setting the specific predetermined position determined by the determining means to the specific predetermined position. When the determination unit determines that the movable body is moved, the determination unit performs a notification process indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position, and the determination is performed based on establishment of a determination condition. And a privilege granting unit that grants a benefit advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the determining unit being a specific determination result. The gaming machine I6, wherein the specific predetermined position is determined based on a determination result of a determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine I6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5. That is, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, a specific predetermined position is determined by the determining unit from the plurality of predetermined positions, and the determining unit determines that the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determining unit. In this case, the notifying unit executes a notifying process indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and based on the determination result of the determination unit being a specific determination result, a benefit advantageous to the player is provided by the privilege providing unit. Further, the specific predetermined position is determined by the determining means based on the determination result of the determining means.

  Thereby, a specific predetermined position according to the determination result of the determination means can be notified by the notification processing, and thus the effect of allowing the player to clearly understand the determination result by the determination means can be obtained.

  In the gaming machine I6, among the plurality of predetermined positions, the movable body stops, and the selection unit that selects the predetermined position indicating that the determination result of the determination unit is a specific determination result, When the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, the determination means determines the specific predetermined position from the predetermined position selected by the selection means, and the determination result of the determination means is The gaming machine I7, characterized in that when the result is other than a specific determination result, the specific predetermined position is determined from a position other than the predetermined position selected by the selection means.

  According to the gaming machine I7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I6. That is, the predetermined position is selected by the selection unit from among the plurality of predetermined positions, which indicates that the determination result of the determination unit is a specific determination result when the movable body stops. When the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the specific predetermined position is determined by the determination means from the predetermined position selected by the selection means. If the determination result by the determination means is other than the specific determination result, the specific predetermined position is determined by the determination means from a position other than the predetermined position selected by the selection means.

  Accordingly, it is possible to expect that the predetermined position selected by the selection unit is notified as the specific predetermined position, and therefore, it is possible to pay more attention to the operation of the movable body. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I7, the movable body is provided with a plurality of the decorative portions respectively corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions, and the notifying unit is configured to move the movable body to the specific predetermined position. The gaming machine I8, characterized in that, based on the result, the notifying member is moved relative to the decorative portion corresponding to the specific predetermined position so as to notify the player and notify the player.

  According to the gaming machine I8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I7. That is, a plurality of decorative portions are respectively arranged on the movable body corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions. Further, based on the fact that the movable body has moved to the specific predetermined position, the notification means is controlled so as to notify the player by moving the notification member to the decorative portion corresponding to the specific predetermined position.

  This allows the player to pay attention to the operation of the movable body and the operation of the notification member. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Character J group> (Next pocket control)
A movable body movable in a predetermined movable range and a plurality of decorative portions are respectively arranged at different positions, a movable means for moving the movable body in the movable range, and effect information determining means for determining predetermined effect information And a movable part that moves the specific decorative part of the plurality of decorative parts of the movable body to the predetermined rendering position based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means. Control means, and in a gaming machine having: Determining means for determining the certain decorative portion, and the movable portion being moved to the effect position after the decorative portion determined by the determining portion based on a determination result by the determining portion. Gaming machine J1, characterized in that the decorative portion are those having an identification means for identifying from the arrangement information stored in the storage means.

  Here, there are known gaming machines capable of executing a movable effect using movable means such as an accessory. In this conventional gaming machine, an accurate rendering operation is realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using a detecting means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the arrangement of the movable means cannot be accurately specified until the arrangement of the movable means is detected by the sensor, the degree of freedom of the staging operation may be reduced. . That is, there has been a problem that the interest in the game of the player cannot be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the arrangement information of the decorative portion arranged on the movable body is stored in the storage means. When the movable body is moved by the movable means, the decorative portion at the rendering position is determined by the determining device, and based on the determination result by the determining device, the decorative portion is moved to the rendering position after the decorative portion determined by the determining device. The movable decoration part is identified from the arrangement information stored in the storage means by the identification means.

  With this, it is possible to identify in advance that the specific decorative portion is to be arranged at the rendering position before the specific decorative portion is to be arranged to the rendering position, so that the rendering operation based on the rendering information is performed. Degree of freedom can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, identification information for identifying each of the plurality of decorative portions is set in the plurality of decorative portions, and the specific decorative portion determined by the effect determination means is provided with the specific identification information. Is set in the gaming machine J2.

  According to the gaming machine J2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J1. That is, identification information for identifying each of the plurality of decorative portions is set. Specific identification information is set for a specific decorative part determined by the effect determining means.

  Accordingly, when specific identification information is set for a plurality of decorative portions, any specific decorative portion may be moved to the rendering position, so that the degree of freedom of the rendering can be increased. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the specific decorative portion is moved to the rendering position, the specific decorative portion determined by the rendering information determining means is notified to the specific decorative portion. A game machine J3 having a notifying means for notifying a player by moving the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect provided by either the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the specific decorative portion is moved to the staging position, the notification member is moved to the specific decorative portion to move to the specific decorative portion. Since the notification means notifies the player of the decorative member, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation of the notification member. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since it is possible to identify in advance that the specific decoration member is to be arranged at the production position before the specific decoration member is arranged at the production position, it is possible to identify before the decoration member is arranged at the production position. Then, it is possible to start moving the notification member to a specific decorative member. Therefore, there is an effect that the notification member can be more reliably moved to the specific decorative member.

  In the gaming machine J3, the notifying unit has a sphere configured as a sphere as the notifying member, a holding unit capable of holding the sphere at a holding position, and a case where the holding of the sphere by the holding unit is released. A swinging path capable of swinging the sphere at a position where the sphere can be moved to the effecting position and allowing the sphere to stand by for a predetermined period of time; A gaming machine J4 having at least a variable means for varying a traveling direction.

  According to the gaming machine J4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J3. That is, in the notification means, the notification member is formed of a spherical ball pair, and the sphere is held at the holding position by the holding means. When the holding of the sphere by the holding means is released, the sphere is swung at a position where the sphere can be moved to the presentation position in the standby swing path, and waits for a predetermined time. The moving direction of the sphere is changed by the changing means from the standby swing path to the effect position.

  This allows the player to pay attention to the timing at which the traveling direction of the sphere is changed from the standby swing path to the presentation position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J4, the notification means has variable control means for changing the variable means, and the variable control means determines a timing for changing the variable means based on an identification result by the identification means. A gaming machine J5 characterized by being variable.

  According to the gaming machine J5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J4. That is, in the notification means, the variable means is changed by the variable control means. The timing for varying the variable means based on the identification result by the identification means is determined and varied by the variable control means.

  With this, it is possible to determine the timing of changing the variable means before the specific decorative portion changes to the production position, so that the moving time of the sphere moving from the variable means to the production position is taken into consideration, and the specific There is an effect that the sphere can be reliably moved to the rendering position in a state where the decorative portion is arranged at the rendering position.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the movable body is provided with detection units at a plurality of positions, and may detect the detection units arranged at a predetermined number of predetermined positions. A possible detecting means, wherein the determining means determines the decorative part located at the staging position based on a combination of the detecting parts detected by the detecting means. Machine J6.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the detection units are arranged at a plurality of positions of the movable body. Detecting means capable of detecting the detecting unit are respectively arranged at a predetermined number of predetermined positions. Based on the combination of the detection units detected by the detection unit, the decoration unit located at the presentation position is determined by the determination unit.

  Thereby, since the detection unit can be mechanically detected by the detection unit, there is an effect that it is possible to more accurately determine the decorative portion arranged at the presentation position.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J6, the identification unit is configured to determine a type of the decoration unit that is moved to the effect position next to the decoration unit determined by the determination unit. Gaming machine J7.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines J1 to J6, the type of the decorative part that is moved to the presentation position next to the decorative part determined by the determining means is identified by the identifying means, so that the specific At the stage where the decorative part in front of the decorative part is arranged at the production position, it can be identified in advance that a specific decorative part is arranged at the production position. Therefore, since the degree of freedom of the effect operation based on the effect information can be increased, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Feature K group> (Identify pockets based on output of multiple steps)
A movable body having a plurality of detectors at a predetermined position, a movable means for moving the movable body, and a movable body movable by the movable means, a predetermined one of the plurality of detectors at a predetermined detection position Detecting means capable of simultaneously detecting the detecting portions arranged in a range over a predetermined period; determining means for determining a detection result by the detecting means a plurality of times in a predetermined time; And a discriminating means for discriminating the discrimination result of the above, and discriminating the discrimination result identified as satisfying a predetermined condition as a normal discrimination result.

  Here, there are known gaming machines capable of executing a movable effect using movable means such as an accessory. In this conventional gaming machine, an accurate rendering operation is realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using a detecting means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, such a conventional gaming machine has a problem that, when an erroneous detection occurs by the detecting means, the movable position of the movable means is erroneously recognized, and the movable means cannot be suitably controlled.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, a movable body provided with a plurality of detectors at predetermined positions is moved by the movable means. With respect to the movable body that is movable by the movable means, a detection unit disposed in a predetermined range among a plurality of detection units at a predetermined detection position is simultaneously detected by the detection means over a predetermined period. The detection result by the detecting means is determined a plurality of times by the determining means during a predetermined period, and among the plurality of determination results by the determining means, a determination result satisfying a predetermined condition is identified as a normal determination result by the identifying means. Is done.

  Accordingly, when detecting the detection unit of the movable body, the detection can be performed based on the determination result satisfying the predetermined condition, and thus the detection unit can be accurately detected. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable body can be suitably controlled.

  In the gaming machine K1, a plurality of different decorative portions are arranged on the movable body, and the detecting means is constituted by a predetermined number, and is arranged corresponding to an arrangement interval of the decorative portions. The gaming machine K2, wherein the part is arranged corresponding to a position of the specific decorative part among the plurality of decorative parts.

  According to the gaming machine K2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1. That is, a plurality of different decorative portions are arranged on the movable body. A predetermined number of detection means are arranged corresponding to the arrangement intervals of the decorative portions. The detection unit is arranged corresponding to the position of a specific decoration unit among the plurality of decoration units.

  This makes it possible to detect the detection unit every time the movable body moves the arrangement interval of the detection means. Therefore, there is an effect that the detection unit can be periodically detected while the movable body is moving.

  In the gaming machine K2, the plurality of decorative portions are disposed on the movable body at predetermined intervals, respectively, and the detecting section is configured to divide the plurality of decorative portions into units corresponding to the predetermined number. A gaming machine K3, wherein the gaming machines K3 are arranged in the decorative part so as not to have the same arrangement relationship with respect to the parts.

  According to the gaming machine K3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K2. That is, the plurality of decorative portions are arranged on the movable body at predetermined intervals. The detection units are arranged such that the plurality of decorative units are divided into units corresponding to a predetermined number, and do not have the same arrangement relationship.

  Thus, the arrangement of the detection unit detected by the detection unit and the arrangement of the movable body can be made one-to-one, so that the arrangement of the movable body can be accurately determined from the detection result by the detection unit. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the detection unit detects the detection unit in a predetermined order based on the movable body being moved by a predetermined movable amount. Gaming machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the detection unit detects the detection unit in a predetermined order based on the fact that the movable body is moved by a predetermined movable amount. Therefore, there is an effect that the arrangement of the movable body can be accurately determined based on the order in which the detection units are detected.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the identification unit, when the same determination result is included in the plurality of determination results by the determination unit in a predetermined ratio or more, A gaming machine K5 characterized in that the same determination result is identified as a regular determination result.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the same determination result is included in a plurality of determination results by the determination unit in a predetermined ratio or more. In such a case, the same discrimination result is discriminated as a proper discrimination result by the discrimination means. It is possible to prevent an incorrect determination result from being identified as a normal determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that more accurate determination can be performed.

  In the gaming machine K5, when the same discrimination result included in the plurality of discrimination results by the discrimination means is determined to be less than a predetermined specific ratio, Avoidance means for avoiding the identification of a legitimate determination result from the results of the determinations; and, when the identification of the regular determination result is avoided by the avoidance means, the detection means And a detection control means for controlling the detection to be additionally performed over the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine K6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K5. That is, when it is determined that the same determination result included in the plurality of determination results by the determination unit is less than the predetermined specific ratio, the normal determination is performed from the plurality of determination results. The identification of the result is avoided by the avoidance means. Then, when it is avoided that the correct discrimination result is identified by the avoidance means, the detection means controls the detection unit so that the detection unit is additionally detected over a predetermined period.

  With this, it is possible to identify the regular discrimination result again by the identification unit based on the additional detection result by the detection unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the regular determination result can be more reliably determined.

<Feature L group> (Control to drop the ball into the target pocket)
A movable body on which a plurality of different identification sections are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, and the identification section movable to a predetermined effect position when the movable body is moved by the movable means. Discriminating means for discriminating information, and a presentation body used for a predetermined effect, a holding means capable of holding at least until the predetermined effect is started, and when the holding of the effector by the holding means is released, A swinging means capable of swinging at a position where the effecting body can be moved to the effecting position, and a swinging state of the effecting body swung by the swinging means can be detected; Detection means, determination means for determining the identification section for moving the director based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition from the plurality of identification sections, and a swing state of the director by the detection means. Is in motion A moving means for moving the directing body to the identification section determined by the determining means based on a result of the determination by the determining means when issued. .

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of flow paths is known. Some of such conventional gaming machines may be advantageous or disadvantageous to a player depending on the flow path in which a sphere such as a game ball advances. In addition, a swing path capable of swinging the sphere is provided on the upstream side of the branch position of each flow path, and while the sphere performs the swing operation in the swing path, the player (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-179166) can increase a sense of expectation that a sphere flows down to an advantageous flow path. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the mode of the swinging operation is changed by the momentum when the ball enters the swinging path, so that the swinging action is performed before the expectation of the player is sufficiently increased. The sphere may flow down from the flow path to any flow path. Therefore, there has been a problem that the player's interest in the game may not be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, a plurality of different identification portions are arranged on the movable body, and the movable body is moved by the movable means. The movable body is moved by the movable means, and the information of the identification unit moved to the predetermined effect position is determined by the determination means. The effecting body used for the predetermined effect is held by the holding means at least until the predetermined effect is started, and when the holding of the effecting body by the holding means is released, it is possible to move the effecting body to the effecting position The directing body is rocked by the rocking means at a suitable position. The swinging state of the effecting body swung by the swinging means is detected by the detecting means. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the identification unit that moves the director is determined by the determination unit from the plurality of identification units. If the detecting means detects that the oscillating state of the director is a predetermined oscillating state, the director is moved to the identification section determined by the determining means by the moving means based on the determination result by the determining means. You.

  Thereby, in each predetermined effect, the effector can be moved to the identification unit after the effector is in the predetermined swinging state, so that the operation quality of the effector in the predetermined effect can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the swing motion of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, the effecting body is formed of a sphere, and the swinging means has a swinging path capable of swinging the effecting body. L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1. That is, the director is composed of a sphere. And in the rocking means, a rocking path capable of rocking the effecting body is provided.

  Thus, the effecting body can be rocked by reciprocating on the rocking path by rolling, so that the effecting body can be rocked simply by giving the initial speed in the rocking path direction. Therefore, there is no need to provide a special structure for causing the effecting body to perform a swinging operation, and thus the number of parts can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine L2, the detection unit includes: a director detection unit configured to detect the director swinging on the swing path at a predetermined position; and a swing width of the director by the director detector is equal to or less than a predetermined width. And a swing width detecting means for determining whether or not the game machine L3 is a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine L3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L2. In other words, in the detecting means, the director that swings on the swing path is detected at a predetermined position by the director detector, and the director detecting unit determines whether the swing width of the director is less than or equal to the predetermined width. It is determined by the width detecting means.

  Thereby, in each predetermined effect, the effecting body can be moved to the effect position after the swing width of the rocking body becomes equal to or less than the predetermined width. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the motion of the directing body.

  In any of the gaming machines L2 and L3, the moving means is formed by a part of the swing path, and is formed in a swing groove for swinging the director, and in front of the swing groove, A swinging piece having at least a flow-down groove for causing the effecting body to flow down to the effecting position, and the swinging piece, from a first position where the swinging groove and the swinging path communicate with each other, A swinging piece moving means for moving the flow-down groove to a second position arranged on the swing path, the gaming machine L4.

  According to the gaming machine L4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by either the gaming machine L2 or L3. That is, in the moving means, it is constituted by a part of the swing path, and a swing groove for swinging the director, and formed in front of the swing groove, for flowing the director to the stage position An oscillating piece having at least a downflow groove is provided. The rocking piece is moved by the rocking piece moving means from a first position where the rocking groove communicates with the rocking path to a second position where the downflow groove is disposed on the rocking path.

  With this, it is possible to cause the director to flow from the downflow groove to the director position simply by moving the rocking piece moving means to the second position. Therefore, a configuration for moving the director to the director position is provided. There is an effect that it can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine L2 or L3, the moving means includes a rocking piece constituted by a part of the rocking path, and rocking piece tilting means for tilting the rocking piece in the direction of the production position. A gaming machine L5.

  According to the gaming machine L5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L2 or L3. That is, in the moving means, a rocking piece constituted by a part of the rocking path is provided, and the rocking piece is inclined by the rocking piece tilting means in the direction of the production position.

  Thus, the director can be moved to the presentation position only by dropping the director from the inclined rocking piece, so that the configuration for moving the director to the presentation position can be simplified. This has the effect.

<Feature M group> (roulette dark zone)
Determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition; and a privilege providing means for providing a benefit advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result; An identification body in which different identification units are arranged, and among the identification units in the identification body, a determination unit that determines the specific identification unit, and when a determination result by the determination unit is the specific determination result, A notification state setting unit configured to set the specific identification unit to a notification state; and a specific effect of notifying a player of a determination result by the determination unit by the identification unit of the identification body based on establishment of a specific condition. A specific effect execution unit, wherein the determination unit divides the identification object into a plurality of regions, and among the regions, a high determination region having a high ratio determined by the specific identification unit and the identification unit. Identification part of Gaming machine M1 proportion to be determined is low so that the low determining regions and are formed, characterized in that what determines the specific identification unit.

  Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a determination of a hit or the like is performed, and the determination result is rotated by arranging a plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of different symbols arranged on the front side, and stopping at a predetermined position. It is notified by the combination of. As a result of the notification, a gaming machine is proposed in which, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped, a game in which the variable winning device is changed so that game balls can enter is executed. (Eg, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-204318). In this case, the player plays the game with the expectation that a predetermined number of the same symbols will stop at the same time, but for the rotating rotator, the number of winning symbol combinations is arranged. Since the game type is always constant, there is a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets tired early. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired early.

  According to the gaming machine M1, a plurality of different identification units are arranged, and when the identification unit determined to be a specific identification unit among the identification units is in a notification state, a privilege is given to the player. There is a possibility that the unit becomes a specific identification unit, and the degree of expectation can be changed by the identification unit determined as the specific identification unit. Further, the identification object is divided into a plurality of regions, and a specific region is determined such that a high determination region having a high ratio determined by the specific identification portion and a low determination region having a low ratio determined by the specific identification portion are formed. Since the identification unit is determined, the ratio of the specific identification unit can be varied depending on the area of the identification object, and the degree of expectation for the specific identification unit can be varied among the identification objects. Therefore, the degree of expectation of the player can be changed, and the effect of suppressing the game from becoming monotonous and suppressing the player from getting tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine M1, there is a movable means for moving the identification body, and the notification state setting means moves the identification body by the movable means to the specific identification section at a predetermined position. The gaming machine M2, wherein the notification state is set by stopping the determined identification unit.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1, the discrimination result is obtained by the notification state in which the identification body is moved and the specific identification unit is stopped at a predetermined position. Since the player is notified that the result is a specific determination result, the player can be interested in where the identification object is stopped, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine M2, the effecting body, a moving means capable of moving the effecting body to the predetermined position, and the effecting means moving the effecting body at the predetermined position by the moving means in accordance with a timing at which the identification object stops. A gaming machine M3, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M2, the directing body is moved to a predetermined position in accordance with the stop timing of the identification body, so that the identification unit stopped at the predetermined position can be easily understood by the player. It has the effect of being able to inform.

  In the gaming machine M3, the effecting body has a rotating part, and a holding means capable of holding the effecting body, and when the holding by the holding means is released, the effecting body swings by the rotating part. A gaming machine M4, comprising: a movable rocking path, wherein the moving means moves the effecting body from the rocking path to the predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M3, the effecting body is moved to a predetermined position by the moving means after swinging on the rocking path by the rotating portion. By making the player interested in moving to the section, there is an effect that the player can recognize the identification section stopped at a predetermined position in an easily understandable manner.

  The rotating portion may be a member formed of a sphere, a cylinder, an arc, or the like.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, if the determination result is not a specific determination result, the notification state setting unit may determine whether the specific identification unit located next to the specific identification unit is determined to be the specific identification unit. A gaming machine M5 wherein an unidentified identification unit is set to the notification state.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, if the result is not a specific determination result, the specific identification unit located next to the specific identification unit is determined. Since the not-yet-identifying part is in the notification state, it is possible to make the player think that the specific identification part is in the notifying state soon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic N group> (Control to stabilize the swing width of the ball)
Effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect, a directing body used as a part of the effect executed by the effect executing means, and a rocking means capable of rocking the directing body within a predetermined range; A determining unit configured to determine a swing state of the director when the director is rocked by the rocking unit; and adjusting a rocking force applied to the director based on a determination result by the determining unit. A gaming machine N1 comprising: adjusting means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of winning ports are arranged on the front side of a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and one of the winning ports is a starting winning port which is used as a trigger for determining whether or not a game is accepted. When the ball enters, a predetermined lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a winning, a game in which the variable winning device is opened is executed, and the player can obtain many prize balls and the like. In such a gaming machine, a flow path is formed so that it is easy to win a prize port such as a start prize port, and a game ball entering the flow path falls from directly above the start prize port. You will be guided to. In addition, even for game balls flowing down the flow path that facilitates winning, the inclination angle of the flow path is varied so that the ease of entering the starting winning opening changes, and the rolling speed of the game ball varies. There has been proposed a gaming machine configured so that the game does not become monotonous by configuring the game machine such that the game is performed (for example, JP-A-2015-65977). Furthermore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that suppresses the game from becoming monotonous by improving interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine N1, since the rocking power applied to the director is adjusted by the adjuster based on the rocking state of the director determined by the determiner, the rocking motion that can enhance the interest for the player is improved. It is possible to swing the directing body in a moving state, suppress a problem that the game becomes monotonous, and improve the interest of the game.

  The effecting body is rotatably supported by a support (a thin line such as a thread or a piano wire or a thin shaft member) and swings, or swings from an upper part of a swing path such as an arc shape. It is conceivable that the vehicle is rocked by rolling or sliding on the road. Here, when the adjusting means is rocked by the support, it is conceivable to apply a force to the director or to apply a force to the support. It is conceivable to vary the inclination of the swing path or apply an external force to the director.

  In the gaming machine N1, the determining means determines at least a swing width of the effecting body, and the adjusting means determines that the swing width is equal to or less than a predetermined swing width by the determining means. A game machine N2 for increasing a swinging power to the effecting body.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1, the swinging width is determined by the determining means, and when the swinging width is equal to or smaller than the predetermined swinging width, the swinging power to the effecting body is increased. Therefore, the swinging state of the directing body is continued for a long time, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the adjusting means may increase the swinging power to the effecting body based on a result of the determination by the determining means being determined to be larger than the predetermined swing width. A gaming machine N3 for stopping an increase in rocking power for a director.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the increase in the swinging power by the adjusting means is also stopped based on the swing width of the director being larger than the predetermined swing width. Therefore, the swing width of the effecting body can be prevented from becoming excessively large, and the swing width can be adjusted within a predetermined range, so that there is an effect that a stable effect can be provided to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the adjusting means moves the position of the effecting body so that the potential energy with respect to the effecting body increases.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the adjusting means moves the position of the directing body so that the potential energy with respect to the directing body increases. There is an effect that the swing width of the director can be increased by making it variable.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the effecting body has a rotating portion capable of rotating and rolling, and the swinging means includes a rotating portion that repeatedly changes a rotating direction. A gaming machine N5 having a swing path that can rotate.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines N1 to N4, since the rotating portion of the effecting body swings by rolling on the swing path, the effecting body can be swung with an easy configuration. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine N5, the swing path is configured in an arc shape.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N5, the swing path is formed in an arc shape, so that there is an effect that the rotating portion of the effecting body can easily swing.

  In the gaming machine N5 or N6, the adjusting means changes the inclination of the swing path in the direction in which the effecting body swings to increase the swinging power, wherein the swinging power is increased.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N5 or N6, the adjusting means increases the swinging power by changing the inclination of the swing path, so that the player can naturally give the player a swinging power. There is an effect that it can be made to look as if it is rocking while keeping the sway.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the swinging means includes a holding means capable of holding the effecting body at a position higher than a lowermost position when the effecting body is rocked, and holding the holding means. A gaming machine N8 comprising: a releasing means capable of releasing the game.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the swinging means is held at a position higher than the lowermost position when the swinging means is swung by the holding means, and the releasing means holds the swinging means. Since the holding is released, there is an effect that it is possible to start swinging of the director using the potential energy.

  In the gaming machine N8, when the holding of the director is released by the release unit, the holding unit holds the director in a position where the director can be guided to the rocking path. A gaming machine N9.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N8, when the holding means is released by the release means, the director is guided to the rocking path, so that the driving force is given to the director by an electric machine or the like. There is an effect that the directing body can be smoothly swung by its own weight even without it.

  In the gaming machines N1 to N9, the adjusting unit includes a swing damping unit that adjusts the swing width of the effecting body to be equal to or less than a specific swing width when a specific condition is satisfied. Gaming machine N10.

  According to the gaming machine N10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines N1 to N9, when the specific condition is satisfied, the swing width of the effecting body is less than or equal to the specific swing width by the swing damping means of the adjusting means. Therefore, the swing width can be intentionally varied, and the effects can be improved by diversifying the effects.

<Character O group> (The position of the pocket to be dropped is determined in advance.)
A movable body on which a plurality of different identification sections are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, a movable control means for moving the movable body by the movable means, and the movable body based on establishment of a movable condition. Determining means for determining a movable pattern for moving the movable body in which a stoppable range that can be stopped is set in advance, and the specific identification unit is stopped at a predetermined effect position after being moved by the movable pattern. In this case, when the movable body is moved in the movable pattern, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player is set in the stoppable range based on satisfaction of a specific condition. Identification unit determining means for determining one identification unit from the identification unit, and a stop for stopping the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination means at the production position at a specific stop timing. Gaming machine O1, characterized in that those having a control means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a hit determination is performed, a plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of different symbols arranged on the front side are arranged, and a combination of symbols stopped at a predetermined position is determined in advance as a determination result. It is determined based on the information and notified by controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a gaming machine is proposed in which, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped, a game in which the variable winning device is changed so that game balls can enter is executed. (Eg, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-204318). Since the stop position of the rotating body is determined in advance before rotation, it is not possible to perform a novel effect such as changing the combination of symbols to be stopped depending on the state of the effect, etc. There was a problem of getting tired early. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and further provides a novel gaming machine, which suppresses the game from becoming monotonous, and the player gets tired early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing defects.

  According to the gaming machine O1, the stoppable range of the movable body is moved according to the preset movable pattern, and the stoppable range determined by the identification unit determination means is determined based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. One of the identification units is determined from the set identification unit, and the movable body is stopped by the stop control unit so that the identification unit stops at the presentation position. Therefore, the stop position of the movable body is stopped until a specific condition is satisfied. Is not specified, and by providing a real-time effect to the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and to suppress the problem that the player gets tired early.

  The gaming machine O1 has a determination unit that performs a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and the stop control unit determines that the specific identification unit is to be used when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. A gaming machine O2 which is stopped at the effect position.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, the specific identification unit is stopped at the production position. There is an effect that the notification can be made by the identification unit that stops at the presentation position.

  The gaming machine O3, characterized in that the gaming machine O1 or O2 has a setting means for setting the plurality of different identifying sections to the specific identifying section based on establishment of a setting condition.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, since the specific identification unit is set by a plurality of different identification units by the setting unit, which identification unit is set to the specific identification unit Has an effect that the player can be interested in the game and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O3, the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on a selection of a player.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O3, at least one of the specific identification units is set by the setting unit based on the selection of the player, so that any identification unit of the player can be set. This can be a specific identification unit, and has the effect that the player can participate in the game and improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine O3 or O4, the setting unit sets the specific identification unit based on a determination result by the determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O3 or O4, the specific identification section is set by the setting section based on the determination result of the determination section. There is an effect that the determination result can be predicted by the player.

  The gaming machine O6 according to any one of the gaming machines O2 to O5, wherein the determining means determines the movable pattern based on a determination result of the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O2 to O5, the movable pattern is determined by the determination means based on the determination result, and thus the movable pattern can be changed according to the determination result. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O6, a notification body for indicating that the identification unit is stopped at the rendering position, and guidance for guiding the notification body to the identification unit stopped at the rendering position. And a game machine O7.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O6, the notifying body is guided by the guiding means to the identification unit stopped at the rendering position, so that the identification unit stopped at the rendering position is further reduced. There is an effect that the player can be notified easily.

  In any of the gaming machines O1 to O7, the movable pattern has a variable setting period in which the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination unit can be varied. Gaming machine O8.

  According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O7, a variable period in which the identification unit determined by the identification unit determining means can be varied is set in the movable pattern. Therefore, the identification unit can be changed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine O8 has operation means operable by a player, and in the variable setting period, the identification unit determined by the identification determination means is variable according to a timing at which the operation means is operated. A gaming machine O9 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine O9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O8, the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination unit is changed according to the timing at which the player operates the operation unit. It is possible to play a game in which the operating means is operated so as to stop at the presentation position, and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, since the identification unit determined by the timing operated by the player is variable, there is an effect that control for stopping the identification unit corresponding to the determination result at the rendering position can be easily performed.

<Characteristic P group> (Nail break determination)
In a gaming machine having a movable body movable in a predetermined movable range, movable means for moving the movable body in the movable range, and movable control means for movably controlling the movable means, the movable body includes: The game machine has a plurality of detection units arranged at a plurality of predetermined positions, and the gaming machine includes a plurality of the detection units when the movable body is moved to the plurality of the predetermined positions. A detecting unit that can detect one or more of the detecting units configured in a predetermined combination corresponding to each of the predetermined positions, and based on a detection result detected by the detecting unit, Determining means for determining movable position information of the movable body, and abnormality determining means for determining whether a detection result detected by the detecting means matches an abnormal condition set in advance based on satisfaction of the predetermined condition, Have Gaming machine P1, wherein those.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a hit determination is performed, a plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of different symbols arranged on the front side are arranged, and a combination of symbols stopped at a predetermined position is determined in advance as a determination result. It is determined based on the information and notified by controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a gaming machine is proposed in which, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped, a game in which the variable winning device is changed so that game balls can enter is executed. (Eg, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-204318). The stop position of the rotating body is generally a method of detecting the position of the rotating body with a plurality of sensors, but if a sensor failure occurs, the rotating body may be stopped at an incorrect position. There is a problem that the player is erroneously informed of the situation. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of detecting a failure at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine P1, when the movable body is moved to a predetermined plurality of predetermined positions, one or more detection units configured in a predetermined combination for each predetermined position among the plurality of detection units. Is detected by the detecting means. The movable position information of the movable body is determined based on the detection result detected by the detecting means. Therefore, it is possible to accurately identify to which predetermined position the movable body has been moved based on the movable position information. Further, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the abnormality detection unit determines whether the detection result detected by the detection unit matches the abnormal condition. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the detection unit or the detection unit, the abnormality is detected early. This has the effect of being able to detect and to prevent erroneous movement of the movable body.

  In the gaming machine P1, a movable position information storage means for storing the determined movable position information based on the determination of the movable position information by the determination means, and a detecting unit at each of the plurality of predetermined positions. And collation data setting means in which a detection result that should be detected when the detection means normally detects is set as collation data, and the abnormality determination means is configured to determine the movable position by the determination means. Determining that the information is determined as the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and determining whether or not the movable condition information matches the abnormal condition based on the movable position information previously determined by the determination unit and stored in the storage unit and the verification data. A gaming machine P2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the abnormality determination means determines whether or not the movable position information determined by the previous determination means and the collation data match the abnormal condition. It is possible to constantly monitor the movable position information when the device is normally moved, and it is possible to detect a defect at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine P2, the abnormality determination unit determines whether the movable position information determined by the determination unit matches the next movable position information of the previous movable position information stored in the movable position information storage unit. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that an abnormality is determined by making a determination based on the collation data.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1 or P2, it is determined from the collation data whether the movable position information determined by the determination means matches the next movable position information of the previous movable position information. Since the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determining means, the abnormality can be determined each time the movable member is moved to a predetermined position, and the effect of detecting the abnormality earlier can be obtained.

  In the gaming machine P1, the abnormality determination unit determines that the movable body has moved by a predetermined amount as the predetermined condition is satisfied, and determines whether the abnormality condition is satisfied based on the number of the detection units based on the detection result of the detection unit. A gaming machine P4 characterized in that the determination is made.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, when the movable body moves by a predetermined amount, it is determined whether or not the abnormal condition is met based on the number of the detection units detected by the detection unit. An abnormality can be detected each time the movable body moves by a predetermined amount, and there is an effect that the abnormality can be detected early.

  In the gaming machine P4, when the movable body has moved by a predetermined amount, the number of detections of the detection unit normally detected by the detection unit has a detection number storage unit that is stored in advance, and the abnormality determination unit includes: A gaming machine P5 for determining whether or not the number of the detection units detected by the detection unit matches the detection number stored in the detection number storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, the abnormality determination means determines whether the number matches the detection number stored in the detection number storage means in advance, so that the abnormality can be determined more accurately. This has the effect.

<Characteristic Q group> (division of LED lighting data)
A plurality of operating parts, based on operating data for operating the operating parts, an operating means for operating each of the operating parts, and an operating pattern for operating each of the operating parts based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Based on the operation pattern determined by the operation pattern determining unit, the obtaining unit that obtains the operation data of each of the operating units based on the operation pattern determined by the operation pattern determining unit, and the operation data obtained by the obtaining unit. A gaming machine Q1 comprising: setting means for setting by dividing.

  Here, there are known gaming machines which include a light emitting means such as an LED, and an effect member such as a movable means such as an accessory. In such a conventional gaming machine, a variety of effecting operations are performed using a plurality of effecting members to improve the interest of the player. Also, in this conventional gaming machine, the effect patterns of the effect members, such as the light emitting pattern of the light emitting means and the movable pattern of the movable means, are stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM and executed. There has been known a gaming machine that reads an effect pattern corresponding to an effect to be performed and executes an effect operation of a corresponding effect member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-18495). However, increasing the number of the effect members increases the amount of setting data for setting the effect operation, thereby increasing the processing load.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, each operating unit is operated by the operating means based on the operation data for operating the plurality of operating units. An operation pattern for operating each operation unit is determined by the operation pattern determination unit based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and operation data of each operation unit is acquired based on the operation pattern determined by the operation pattern determination unit. Obtained by means. The operation data acquired by the acquisition unit is divided and set by the setting unit.

  This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data to be divided and set each time as compared with the case where the operation data is set collectively by the setting unit. That is, since the processing load for setting the operation data can be dispersed, the processing load can be reduced.

  The gaming machine Q2, wherein in the gaming machine Q1, the setting means is capable of dividing and setting the operation data in units of the operation unit.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the operation data is divided and set for each operation unit by the setting means, so that the processing load can be more finely distributed.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation data includes at least data specifying an operation mode when operating the operation section, and data specifying the operation section operated in the operation mode. Gaming machine Q3.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation data includes data specifying an operation mode when operating the operation section and data specifying an operation section operated in the operation mode. Therefore, different operation modes can be set for a plurality of operation units. Therefore, since the operation mode can be diversified, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q3, the acquisition means may acquire the operation data associated with data specifying a different operation unit, wherein the data specifies a plurality of different operation modes. Machine Q4.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine Q3, the acquisition unit acquires the operation data associated with the data that specifies a plurality of different operation modes and the data that specifies the different operation units. According to the operation data acquired by the acquisition unit, different operation modes can be set for different operation units. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation modes of the plurality of operation units can be further diversified.

  In the gaming machine Q4, the setting means divides and sets the operation data for each of the operation units in which the same operation mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4, the same operation mode can be set to the operation unit at the same timing, so that the same operation mode can be reflected at the same timing. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the appearance quality of each operation unit immediately after setting the operation data.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the operating unit is configured by a light emitting unit that emits light, and the operation data is configured by data for setting a light emitting pattern by the light emitting unit. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5. That is, the operating section is configured by a light emitting unit that emits light. The operation data includes data for setting a light emission pattern by the light emitting means.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that the processing load when setting the light emission pattern by the light emitting means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine Q7, any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q6, wherein the operation data is set by setting means in a serial communication system.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q6, since the operation data is set by the setting means in the serial communication system, the data is set with a smaller number of wires than in the parallel communication system. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced by reducing the number of wirings.

<Characteristic R group> (The mission set by the player (select a combination of winning symbols) continues until the middle of the big hit)
Determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition; display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determination means; and identification information based on a specific determination result on the display means. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the gaming machine having the award that is advantageous to the player when a specific condition is satisfied. The special effect execution means for executing a specific effect to be notified is provided, and the specific effect execution means executes the privilege game by the privilege game execution means from a period in which the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is displayed. A gaming machine R1 that continuously executes at least the specific effect over a period of time.

  Here, an effect for notifying whether or not a jackpot has been won is executed during the normal gaming state, and an effect for notifying whether or not a bonus (for example, a probable change gaming state) given after the end of the jackpot is given is given. A pachinko machine that is executed during a game (during a big hit game) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-178292). In this case, since an independent effect is executed according to each game state, an effect for notifying that a jackpot has been won and an effect for notifying that a privilege is to be provided are executed in a series of effects. And the player's willingness to play decreases.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine R1, a benefit that is advantageous to the player is provided from the period in which the identification information based on the determination result by the determination unit is displayed to the period in which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution unit. The specific effect for notifying that the operation is performed is continuously executed. Thereby, during the period in which the privilege game is being executed, it is possible to determine whether or not the next privilege is to be given based on the specific effect that is continuously executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to the specific effect that is continuously executed in the privilege game, which has an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, the specific condition is satisfied when a plurality of different small conditions are satisfied, and the specific effect execution means determines that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. A game machine R2 for executing the specific effect indicating that a predetermined number of the small conditions are satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1, a specific condition is established by a plurality of different small conditions being satisfied, and a specific effect is executed when a predetermined number of small conditions are satisfied. Therefore, the player can recognize that the predetermined number of small conditions have been satisfied by the specific effect, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine R2, the specific effect execution means performs a remaining specific effect that indicates whether the remaining small conditions are satisfied among the plurality of different small conditions during a period in which the special game is executed by the special game execution means. A gaming machine R3 that is executed as the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R2, a remaining specific effect that indicates whether the remaining small conditions among a plurality of different small conditions are satisfied is executed as the specific effect. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of remaining small conditions by executing the remaining specific effect, and can make the player expect that the specific condition is satisfied. This has the effect of increasing interest.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, at least a normal privilege game advantageous to the player and a special privilege game more advantageous to the player than the normal privilege game are set as privilege games by the privilege game execution means. A gaming machine R4 having privilege game type determining means for determining the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, any one of the normal bonus game set as the bonus game and the special bonus game which is more advantageous to the player than the normal bonus game. Is determined by the privilege game type determining means. Therefore, the variation of the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is increased, so that it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the gaming machine R4, the remaining special effect indicating that the remaining small condition is satisfied is executed during the bonus game, thereby indicating that the special bonus game is being executed by the bonus game executing means. A gaming machine R5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R4, the fact that the special privilege game is being executed is indicated by the execution of the remaining privilege effect, so that the gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand. There is an effect that can be provided.

  In the gaming machine R4 or R5, the gaming machine R6 is characterized in that the special bonus game is such that, after the bonus game, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is given until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R4 or R5, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the privilege game. Therefore, since a more advantageous state can be given to the player, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  A gaming machine R7 characterized by having a selecting means in any one of the gaming machines R2 to R6 for allowing the player to select the small condition.

  According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R2 to R6, the player can select a small condition by the selection means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

<Characteristic S group> (increase in roulette hit pockets)
Determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition; and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result. A display device on which a plurality of different pieces of identification information are displayed, and, among the plurality of different pieces of identification information displayed on the display means, when stopped at a predetermined stop position, Identification information determining means for determining the specific identification information for notifying that the determination result is a specific determination result; and dynamically identifying the identification information displayed on the display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. After performing the effect, the effect is executed by stopping the identification information at the stop position, and when the effect is executed by the effect executing means, the discrimination is executed by the determining means. Gaming machine S1, and wherein the that the state, those having a variable setting means for variably set the identification information is determined as the specific identification information by the identification information determination means.

  Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine having a game property of providing a bonus game (for example, a jackpot game) when a predetermined character among a plurality of characters displayed on a roulette wheel stops at a specific stop position ( For example, JP-A-2004-73580). In this case, it is necessary to control the roulette stop position based on the special symbol lottery result. For example, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, a predetermined character is set to a specific stop position from a plurality of characters. In such a case, the rotation of the roulette becomes unnatural, and it is not possible to provide a suitable effect to the player, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. Was.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, any one of the plurality of pieces of identification information displayed on the display means in the effect performed by the effect performing means in accordance with the state in which the determination means performs the determination. Is changed to specific identification information for notifying that the determination result is a specific determination result (that is, that a privilege advantageous to the player is provided) by the variable setting unit. Thereby, the specific identification information can be varied in the effect performed by the effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable effect to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine S1, the effect performed by the effect executing means has a predetermined period set in advance, and the identification information determining means determines the effect based on the fact that a first period has elapsed among the predetermined period. A gaming machine S2 in which specific identification information is determined.

  According to the gaming machine S2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine S1. That is, the effect by the effect executing means is executed in a predetermined period set in advance. The specific identification information is determined by the identification information determining means based on the elapse of the first period of the predetermined period in which the effect is executed. Thus, the specific identification information is determined at the time when the first period has elapsed, so that the identification information can be dynamically displaced without any discomfort in the performance performed by the performance performing means. Therefore, a suitable effect can be provided to the player, and the effect of suppressing a decrease in the willingness to play can be suppressed.

  A gaming machine S3, characterized in that the gaming machine S1 or S2 has an obtaining means for obtaining the determination information determined by the determining means based on establishment of an obtaining condition.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the determination information determined by the determination unit is obtained by the obtaining unit based on the establishment of the obtaining condition, so that the determination information is reliably obtained. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the effect is not executed by the effect execution unit even though the determination condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine S3, a storage means for storing at least the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means until the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the discrimination condition corresponding to the discrimination information stored in the storage means. And a variable setting unit configured to variably set the identification information based on a determination result of the preliminary determination unit. A gaming machine S4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine S4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine S3. That is, the determination information obtained by the obtaining unit is stored by the storage unit until at least the determination condition is satisfied. The determination information stored in the storage means is determined by the preliminary determination means before the determination condition is satisfied, and the identification information is variably set based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means. This makes it possible to change the identification information before the effect based on the discrimination information for which the identification information is changed, so that the effect performed by the effect execution means can be performed without any discomfort. Can be dynamically displaced. Therefore, a suitable effect can be provided to the player, and the effect of suppressing a decrease in the willingness to play can be suppressed.

<Characteristic T group> (Bunny foot production)
A ball entry means having an opening through which a game ball can enter, an open state in which a game ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means, and a closure in which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than in the open state A variable member that can be changed into a state, a variable means that can change the variable member between the open state and the closed state, and a position where a game ball that has entered the opening flows down and is visible to a player. A first flow path, and a first position at which the first flow path can cause a game ball having entered the opening to flow down, and a second position at which it is difficult to flow down. A gaming machine T1 comprising: displacement means for displacing; and displacement control means for moving the displacement means to at least the first position while the variable member is in the open state.

  Here, in the gaming machine, as an effect for improving the interest of the player, there is known a game machine that performs an effect of moving a movable member called a production role on a game board (for example, JP-A-2004-2004). No. 121464). In this case, there is a problem in that the installation space such as a winning opening required for the game of the gaming machine is lost by providing the directing object.

  According to the gaming machine T1, during the period in which the variable member is changed to the open state in which the game ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means, the first flow path arranged at a position visible to the player. Is changed to the first position so that the game ball entering the opening flows down. The first flow path can be displaced between a first position and a second position. Thereby, when the game ball enters the opening of the ball entry means, the first flow path is changed to the first position, so that the game ball can flow down, and the ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means. When the game ball does not enter, the first flow path can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and can be used for effects and the like. Therefore, since the first flow path can be diverted to the effect, the interest of the player can be improved, and further, the installation space on the game board can be secured.

  The gaming machine T1 includes a privilege game execution unit that executes a privilege game in which the variable member is changed to the open state a plurality of times when the specific condition is satisfied until the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable unit. A game machine wherein the displacement control means displaces the first flow path to the first position until a predetermined period elapses after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means. T2.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine T1, the privilege game in which the variable member is changed to the open state is executed a plurality of times until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and after the execution of the privilege game ends. The first flow path is displaced to the first position until a predetermined period elapses. Therefore, the first flow path is not displaced to the second position even though the game ball that has entered the opening of the ball entry means has not finished flowing down, so that the game ball enters the opening of the ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to cause the ball to flow down without clogging the ball.

  The gaming machine T1 or T2 has an effect executing means for executing an effect, wherein the effect executing means controls the displacement control as one of the effects in the first flow path other than during the period in which the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine T3 characterized by being displaced by means.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first flow path is displaced as one of the effects except during the period in which the bonus game is executed. Therefore, the variation of the effect can be increased, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T3, a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition is provided. Executing a bonus game, wherein the effect execution means is configured to displace the first flow path by the displacement control means as one of the effects indicating the determination result by the determination means. Gaming machine T4.

  According to the gaming machine T4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine T3. That is, when the discrimination result becomes a specific discrimination result, the bonus game is executed, and the displacement of the first flow path is executed as one of the effects indicating the discrimination result. Therefore, whether the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result can be determined by the effect in which the first flow path is displaced, and the player pays attention to the effect in which the first flow path is displaced. This has the effect of improving the interest of the elderly.

<Characteristic U group>
Determining means for performing a determination based on the establishment of the determination condition; privilege providing means for providing a benefit that is advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; Until is established, a state setting means for setting a special game state in which the determination condition is easily satisfied, and an effect is executed for a predetermined period when the special game state is set by the state setting means. An effect executing means, and an accompanying effect for executing an accompanying effect accompanying the effect executed by the effect executing means when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within a period in which the effect is executed by the effect executing means. A gaming machine U1 comprising: an execution unit.

  Here, during a predetermined period, there has been a pachinko machine in which a special game state (for example, a certain-change game state) different from a normal game state is executed. In such a pachinko machine, as a technique for informing the player that the current gaming state is a special gaming state using an effect performed for a predetermined period, an effect performed for a predetermined period. A pachinko machine has been proposed that changes the progress of an effect performed in a predetermined period when it is determined that the timing at which the game ends and the timing at which the special game state ends differ (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-2008). 173320). In this case, if the timing at which the effect performed in the predetermined period ends and the timing at which the special game state ends, control for changing the progress of the effect performed in the predetermined period is performed. However, there is a problem that the processing load must be increased.

  According to the gaming machine U1, a special game state in which the determination condition is easily set until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set, and when the special game state is set, an effect is executed for a predetermined period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period in which the effect is executed, an accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed. Here, the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period in which the effect is executed is a case where the display period of the effect ends even though the special game state is continued. In this case, an accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed by the accompanying effect executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the special game state is continued. In addition, an effect is executed for a predetermined period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period in which the effect is executed, the accompanying effect is executed, so that control for changing the content of the effect performed in the predetermined period is performed. There is no need to do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when executing the effect can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine U1, a ball-in means for allowing a game ball to enter, an acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information determined by the discrimination means when a game ball enters the ball-in means, and the acquisition means thereof A storage means for storing at least the discrimination information acquired until the discrimination condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine U2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine U1. That is, the discrimination information is acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the acquired discrimination information is stored until the discrimination condition is satisfied. Thereby, at the time when the game ball enters the ball entry means and the discrimination information is acquired, even if the discrimination condition is not satisfied, the discrimination information can be stored in the storage means. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the case where the determination unit does not perform the determination even though the game ball has entered the ball entry unit, thereby suppressing excessive disadvantage to the player. (Prevention).

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the effect execution means is a specific effect indicating the specific determination result based on the result of the determination by the determination means during the period in which the effect is executed. Is executed in the remaining period.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U1 or the gaming machine U2, when it is determined that the specific determination result is obtained during the period in which the effect is executed, the specific effect is executed in the remaining period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that a specific determination result has been obtained during the period of performing the effect.

  Any one of the gaming machines U1 to U3, display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determination means, and a dynamic display period for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means And a determining unit, wherein the predetermined condition is established based on a lapse of the dynamic display period based on a predetermined number of determinations by the determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine U4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines U1 to U3. That is, the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the elapse of the dynamic display period based on the determination by the determination unit at the predetermined number of times. Thereby, during the period in which the special game state is set (that is, the period during which the effect until the predetermined condition is satisfied, or the period during which the accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed), the determination based on the determination result is performed. The dynamic display of the identification information is displayed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, during the period in which the special game state is set, it is possible to pay attention to the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Feature V group> (read ahead in RUSH)
A ball-inserting means into which a game ball can enter, an acquiring means for acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the ball-entering means, and the information acquired by the acquiring means to satisfy a determination condition Discriminating means for discriminating based on the discriminating means, storing means for storing the information acquired by the acquiring means at least until the discriminating condition is satisfied, and displaying means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means. And when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means, dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determining means display period And a dynamic display period storing means for storing at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period by a predetermined multiple, and determining the dynamic display period. Means for executing a first effect at a timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the first dynamic display period when the first dynamic display period is determined by the means; When the second dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on that the determination result by the is the specific determination result, the second dynamic display period starts from the start of the second dynamic display period. A second effect capable of executing the first effect at a timing when one period has elapsed, and repeatedly executing the first effect up to a predetermined number of times at the same timing every time the first dynamic display period elapses Executing means and the discriminator If the decision result by is not the specific determination result, a game machine, wherein the first effect are those having a limiting means for limiting the number of times to be performed in a continuous below the predetermined number of times, the V1.

  Here, an effect (so-called pseudo-continuous notice effect) that suggests a jackpot winning expectation degree to a player by stopping and displaying a predetermined display mode a plurality of times in one special symbol change display is proposed (for example, And JP-A-2008-161390). In order to execute this pseudo continuous notice effect, the fluctuation time of one special symbol fluctuation must be set to a time in which a predetermined display mode can be stopped and displayed a plurality of times, and the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time There was a problem that there was less. Also, in a pachinko machine having a function capable of storing the winning information of a special symbol a plurality of times (holding storage function), a predetermined display mode is used by using a variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the plurality of winning information stored and held. (So-called continuous notice effect) has also been proposed to stop and display a plurality of times to indicate the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-207261). It is necessary to store a plurality of special symbol winning information in order to execute this continuous announcement effect, so it is difficult to store multiple special symbol winning information on pachinko machines or pachinko machines that do not have a hold storage function. There was a problem that the notice effect could not be executed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine V1, the first dynamic display period determined as the dynamic display period of the identification information, the second dynamic display period longer than a predetermined multiple of the first dynamic display period, , The first effect is executed at the timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the dynamic display period. In the second dynamic display period, after the first effect is displayed, the first effect is executed a predetermined number of times at the same timing every time the first dynamic display period elapses.

  Accordingly, while having a different dynamic display period from the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period, the second dynamic display period is executed in the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period. The execution timing of one effect can be matched. Therefore, the first effect is executed based on the fact that the second dynamic display period is set (that is, the determination result is a specific determination result) while increasing the variation of the dynamic display period. Since the player can be recognized, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the first effect is executed a predetermined number of times based on the determination result being a specific determination result. If the determination result is not the specific determination result, the number of times the first effect is continuously executed is limited. Accordingly, the first effect is not executed a predetermined number of times, even though the period is not the second dynamic display period (that is, the determination result is not a specific determination result). There is an effect that it can be provided.

  In the gaming machine V1, the dynamic display period determining means is configured to more easily determine the first dynamic display period than the second dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine V1, the first dynamic display period having a shorter display period than the second dynamic display period is easily determined. This can prevent the dynamic display period from becoming long. Therefore, there is an effect that the game time is not prolonged and the player is not bored.

  The gaming machine V3, wherein in the gaming machine V1 or V2, the first effect execution means executes the first effect based on a start timing of the first dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V1 or V2, the first effect is executed based on the start timing of the first dynamic display period. Thereby, the first effect can be executed only when the first dynamic display period is started at a specific start timing, and the first effect displayed in the first dynamic display period is changed to the second dynamic display period. In the display period, it is possible to match the timing at which the first effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the first effect is displayed in the first dynamic display period or the first effect is displayed in the second dynamic display period. There is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the gaming machine V4 is characterized in that the first dynamic display period is configured to have a period shorter than twice as long as the rendering period of the first rendering.

  According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the first dynamic display period is configured to have a period shorter than twice the rendering period of the first rendering. Thereby, it is only necessary to control whether or not to perform the first effect in the first dynamic display period without executing the first effect a plurality of times in the first dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that control processing for executing the first effect can be simplified in the first dynamic display period.

  Further, the first dynamic display period is a period shorter than twice the production period of the first effect, that is, the period of the first production effect is longer than half of the first dynamic display period. Thereby, even if the first dynamic display period is a short period, the effect period of the first effect can be sufficiently secured. Therefore, there is an effect that the first effect can be easily recognized by the player.

<Characteristic W group> (Random display of decorative design)
Determining means for executing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition; display means for displaying identification information based on a determination result by the determination means; and dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means Dynamic display means, effect execution means for executing an effect, after a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, a privilege granting means for imparting a benefit advantageous to a player, and the identification information to the display means And a display position determining means for determining a position to be displayed each time the determination is performed by the determination means.

  Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine that notifies a player of a special symbol lottery result using identification information displayed on a display means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 6-134105). In this case, since the display means is constituted by the dot LED, the display position of the identification information displayed on the display means cannot be changed, and the interest of the player cannot be improved. .

  As a pachinko machine that displays a decorative symbol that fluctuates on the display means based on a lottery of a special symbol, a pachinko device that changes the display mode of the decorative symbol has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-2358336). In this case, while the special symbol is being changed, the display mode of the decorative symbol can be changed to various modes to enhance the interest of the game, but the decorative symbol is also predetermined at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Since the stop display is made at the position, the player can easily grasp whether or not the special symbol has stopped (whether or not the change of the special symbol has ended) only by checking the predetermined position. For example, when a series of effects using a plurality of special symbol variations are executed, there is a problem that the stop display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means reduces the effect of the effect of the series of effects.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine W1, when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, a privilege advantageous to the player is given. Each time the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means, the position where the identification information is dynamically displayed based on the discrimination result is determined by the display position determination means. Thereby, the position where the identification information is dynamically displayed can be changed every time the identification information is dynamically displayed. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the identification information, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Also, the display position of the identification information is determined to be moved to a plurality of locations at a predetermined interval by the display position determination means, so that the display position at the timing when the identification information is stopped and displayed (the timing when the special symbol stops) is determined. It can be difficult for the player to know whether or not the identification information is displayed. Therefore, for example, when executing a series of effects using a plurality of special symbols, the player can easily grasp the display content (whether or not stopped) of the identification information displayed on the display means. And the effect of a series of effects can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine W1, the effect execution means causes the display means to display an effect mode as a part of the effect, and the identification information is displayed in a display area smaller than a display area in which the effect mode is displayed. A gaming machine W2 to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine W2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W1. That is, the effect execution means displays the effect mode on the display means as part of the effect. Further, the identification information is displayed in a display area smaller than the display area in which the effect mode is displayed. This can prevent the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine W1, the effect execution means displays an effect mode on an effect display means different from the display means as a part of the effect, and the effect display means has a display area larger than the display means. A gaming machine W3 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine W3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W1. That is, the effect display means is constituted by a display area larger than the display means, and the effect execution means, which is a part of the effect, is displayed on the effect display means as a part of the effect. This makes it possible to display an effect mode which is a part of the effect by the effect display means having a display area larger than the display means on which the identification information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at the presentation mode displayed on the presentation display unit, and to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, a display position changing unit that changes a display position of the identification information determined by the display position determination unit during dynamic display of the identification information is provided. A gaming machine W4 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the display position of the identification information determined by the display position determination means is variable by the display position variable means during dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the effect executing means executes the effect in a predetermined effect period in which a plurality of discriminations by the discriminating means are possible, and is displayed on the display means. A dynamic display period determining unit that determines a dynamic display period of the identification information, wherein the dynamic display period determining unit specifies the dynamic display period by the determination unit while the effect is being executed by the effect executing unit. The gaming machine W5 is characterized in that when the determination result is determined, a period longer than the remaining period of the effect is easily determined as a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the effect is executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined effect period in which the discriminating means can perform the discrimination a plurality of times. The dynamic display period determining unit determines the dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display unit. Then, the dynamic display period determining means sets the period equal to or longer than the remaining period of the effect as the dynamic display period when a specific determination result is determined by the determiner in a state where the effect is being performed by the effect executing means. It is set to be easily determined. Accordingly, when a specific determination result is determined by the determination unit, a period longer than the remaining period of the effect being performed by the effect execution unit as the dynamic display period of the identification information based on the determination result is easily determined. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the identification information based on the specific determination result from being displayed during the effect and to reduce the effect of the effect.

  In the gaming machine W5, the dynamic display period determining means determines a dynamic display period to be a first period based on a result of the determination by the determining means being a result other than the specific result of determination. A gaming machine W6, wherein the effect period executed by the effect executing means is constituted by a period that is at least a predetermined multiple of the first period.

  According to the gaming machine W6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W5. That is, the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period as the first period based on the determination result of the determining means being a determination result other than the specific determination result, and is executed by the effect executing means. The effect period is constituted by a period that is at least a predetermined multiple of the first period. Thus, in the case of a determination result other than the specific determination result, the number of determinations performed by the determination unit per unit time can be increased, and there is an effect that the determination efficiency can be improved.

  Furthermore, during the period of the effect performed by the effect execution means, the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means is displayed on the display means, but the display position determination means determines the display position of the identification information, It is possible for the player to watch the presentation mode displayed on the presentation display means, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). . Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  Note that by selectively adopting the configuration described in any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the above-described effects can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine W5 or W6, the gaming machine W5 or W6 has state setting means for setting a special state that facilitates the establishment of the determination condition until the end condition is satisfied, and the effect execution means is configured such that the special state is set by the state setting means. A game machine W7 for starting execution of the effect based on the fact.

  According to the gaming machine W7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine W5 or W6, a special state in which the determination means is easily established by the state setting means is set until the end condition is satisfied. The execution of the effect is started by the effect executing means based on the setting of the special state. Thus, there is an effect that the effect of the effect performed for a predetermined period in the special state can be enhanced.

<Feature X group> (variable addition to roulette depending on time and short period)
Determining means for executing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition; display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determination means; and the identification information indicating the specific determination result on the display means In this case, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, an identification body in which a plurality of different identification sections are arranged, and a specific identification section among the identification sections in the identification body are determined. Determining means for determining, when the determination result by the determining means is the specific determination result, special state setting means for setting the specific identification unit to a special state different from normal, based on establishment of a specific condition A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for notifying a player of the determination result by the identification unit of the identification body; and executing the specific effect based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition during execution of the specific effect. Additional Gaming machine X1 to the additional setting means for setting, and the probability changing means for varying a probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied, characterized in that with.

  Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine having a game property of providing a bonus game (for example, a jackpot game) when a predetermined character among a plurality of characters displayed on a roulette wheel stops at a specific stop position ( For example, JP-A-2004-73580). However, since the predetermined number of characters is not changed (added) during the execution of the roulette game, the notification mode indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot remains unchanged while the roulette game is in progress. During the execution of the roulette game, the player's willingness to play is reduced, and the player may get tired of the game early.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine X1, when a specific identification unit among the plurality of identification units arranged on the identification object has a specific determination result by the determination unit (that is, the player Is set to a special state different from the usual state. That is, if any one of the specific identification units is set to a special state different from the normal state, a benefit that is advantageous to the player is provided. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific effect is being executed, a specific identification unit is additionally set. With this, when a specific identification unit is additionally set in a specific effect, the player feels that the possibility that the advantageous privilege is given becomes higher, and thus the effect of improving the interest of the player can be improved. .

  Further, the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is varied by the probability varying means. That is, the probability that a specific identification unit is added can be changed. Therefore, since the probability that a specific identification unit is added changes, the disadvantage that the player gets tired early can be suppressed (prevented).

  In the gaming machine X1, the privilege granting unit sets at least one of a first gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, and a second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The probability varying means sets the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied higher when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set. A gaming machine X2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X1, the second gaming state which is more advantageous for the player and the second gaming state which is more advantageous than the first gaming state. When the gaming state is set, the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is set high. Thus, when the predetermined condition is easily satisfied, a specific identification unit is easily added. Therefore, since the player expects that the second game state is set by adding the specific identification unit, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine X1 or X2, ball-in means capable of entering a game ball, and acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information determined by the discrimination means based on a game ball entering the ball-in means. The game machine X3, wherein the additional setting means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine X3, the information determined by the determining means is acquired based on the game ball entering the entering means (that is, the information for providing the privilege providing means is acquired), When a game ball enters the ball means, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (that is, it is determined whether a specific identification unit is added). Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to enter the game ball into the ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine X3, the additional setting means executes a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters the ball input means, and when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, the additional setting means A gaming machine X4 characterized by determining that a condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X3, a predetermined lottery is executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, and when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, A predetermined condition is satisfied (that is, a specific identification unit is added). Therefore, since the specific identification unit is added based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, it is possible to give the player an impression that the addition of the specific identification unit is being performed fairly.

  In the gaming machine X4, the probability varying means varies the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means.

  According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X4, it becomes possible to vary the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means by the probability varying means. Therefore, since the probability that a specific identification unit is added changes, the disadvantage that the player gets tired early can be suppressed (prevented).

  In the gaming machine X4, the probability varying means sets a probability table in which the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means is set for each number of game balls entered.

  According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X4, the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means is varied by setting a probability table set for each number of game balls entered. Therefore, since the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means can be easily changed, there is an effect that the control load on the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine X6, the probability varying unit sets a first probability table as the probability table based on the first game state being set, and sets the second game state based on the second game state being set. A gaming machine X7 for setting a second probability setting table in which a lottery probability is set relatively higher than the first probability setting table.

  According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X6, based on the first gaming state being set, the first probability table is set, and based on the second gaming state being set, A second probability setting table in which the lottery probability is set higher than the first probability setting table is set. Therefore, by setting the probability table according to the gaming state, it is possible to easily change the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means, so that there is an effect that the control load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

<Characteristic Y group> (When a hit is announced in the background effect, stop at a position where it can hit within 0.2 Y when temporarily stopping.)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means Display means; dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the determination result; and the determination result specific to the display means When the identification information indicating is displayed, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player, an effect dynamic display unit that dynamically displays an effect on the display unit, and the dynamic display unit When a period during which the dynamic display of the identification information is not performed continues for a predetermined period or more, a stop control unit that stops the dynamic display of the effect by the effect dynamic display unit, and an identification based on the specific determination result. In the case where information is dynamically displayed, the presentation dynamic display means has a presentation mode determination unit that determines a specific presentation mode as the presentation mode dynamically displayed, and the stop control unit includes: The gaming machine Y1 wherein the dynamic display of the effect is stopped in a state where the display can be displayed by switching to the specific effect mode.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is known that an effect is dynamically displayed in a specific effect mode when identification information based on a specific determination result is dynamically displayed. Further, when dynamic display of identification information is not continuously performed for a predetermined period or longer, for example, an effect such as a demonstration screen is displayed. In such a gaming machine, when a determination result is a specific determination result when a demonstration screen or the like is displayed, it is necessary to switch the effect from the demonstration screen to a specific effect mode, and it takes time to switch the effect. In such a case, there is a problem that the player feels strange.

  In addition, an effect has been proposed in which a character (icon) symbolizing a privilege (eg, a big hit) given to the player is displayed on a display screen of the display means, and the fact that the privilege is given by acquiring the character is proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236851). In this case, after the change of the special symbol is started, that is, after the result of the lottery of the special symbol is determined, a character (icon) symbolizing the privilege is displayed on the display screen, and the result of the special symbol is selected. Is performed (the effect of acquiring a character or not), the character (icon) is displayed on the display screen during a single special symbol change time, and then the character is acquired or not. There has been a problem that it is necessary to produce and display the results up to that result, and it is necessary to set the fluctuation time of the special symbol long.

  According to the gaming machine Y1, when identification information based on a specific determination result is dynamically displayed, an effect is dynamically displayed in a specific effect mode, and the dynamic display of the identification information is continuously performed for a predetermined period or more. If not, the dynamic display of the effect is stopped in a state where it can be switched to a specific effect mode and displayed. Thereby, even if the determination condition is satisfied and the dynamic display based on the specific determination result is performed when the dynamic display of the identification information is not continuously performed for a predetermined period or more, the dynamic display of the effect is performed. Can be switched to a specific effect mode and displayed. Therefore, the effect can be performed in a specific effect mode without delay, and there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine Y1, the specific effect mode includes a notification mode indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result in a period from the start to the first effect period. The gaming machine Y2, wherein the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the result is constituted by the first rendering period or more.

  According to the gaming machine Y2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Y1. That is, the specific effect mode includes a notification mode indicating that the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result in a period from the start to the first effect period, and when the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result. The dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is composed of the first rendering period or more. Thus, when performing an effect in the notification mode indicating that the result is a specific determination result, the dynamic display period longer than the first effect period is determined. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display the effect in the notification mode indicating that the result is the specific determination result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the effect dynamic display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the effect over a plurality of dynamic displays of the identification information, and to dynamically display the identification information. A gaming machine Y3 that dynamically displays an effect mode that can be switched to the specific effect mode in accordance with a start timing.

  According to the gaming machine Y3, the effect can be dynamically displayed over a plurality of times of dynamic display of the identification information, and can be switched to a specific effect mode in accordance with the dynamic display start timing of the identification information. A dynamic presentation mode is dynamically displayed. Thus, when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, an effect mode that can be switched to a specific effect mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, even if the dynamic display period of the identification information is short, it is possible to switch to a specific effect mode without delay after the dynamic display is started, so that it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the player. There is no effect.

  In any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, in the effect, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are dynamically displayed at least simultaneously, and the specific effect mode is the first effect symbol and the first effect symbol. A gaming machine Y4 characterized by being displayed in contact with a second effect symbol.

  According to the gaming machine Y4, in the specific effect mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, which are dynamically displayed at the same time, are displayed in contact with each other. Therefore, the player can recognize that the specific effect mode is being executed by visually checking the contact between the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand. effective.

<Characteristic AA group> (roulette interruption control)
A ball-in means capable of entering a game ball, a discriminating means for performing a discrimination based on a game ball having entered the ball-in means, and a discrimination result based on a discrimination result by the discriminating means. A determination period determining means for determining a period until determination, and a privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being determined by a specific determination result, In the gaming machine having, the identification means in which a plurality of different identification information is set, and among the plurality of different identification information set in the identification means, the player is notified that the determination result is a specific determination result. Identification information determining means for determining the specific identification information to be notified, and, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, in a predetermined effect period, one of the identification information is selected from the identification information of the identification means, Selected A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in which a notification mode indicating identification information is notified; and when the specific effect is being executed by the specific effect execution means, the specific determination result is determined by the determination means. Setting means for setting the specific identification information determined by the identification information determining means as the identification information selected in the specific effect, based on the specific effect, during the effect period, for a predetermined period, the determination A gaming machine AA1 comprising: interruption means for interrupting the effect period when the determination is not performed by the means continues.

  Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine that executes a specific effect regardless of the presence or absence of a change in a special symbol during a period from the start of the time-saving gaming state to the end of the time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-2013). -236851). In this case, the special effect is started even if the special symbol is not changed during the time saving game, so the special effect that is executed only during the specific period of time during the time saving game state, do not change the special symbol You can see it for a long time. Therefore, there was a problem that a sense of expectation for a specific effect was lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AA1, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit, and the determination result is determined by the determination period determination unit based on the determination result. Is determined. The privilege is provided by the privilege providing means based on the determination result being determined as a specific result. Then, among a plurality of different pieces of identification information set by the identification means, the identification information determining means determines specific identification information for notifying that the result is a specific determination result, and the specific identification information is notified to the player. You. If the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific effect execution unit notifies the notification mode indicating the selected one of the pieces of identification information set in the identification unit during the predetermined effect period during a predetermined effect period. Is executed. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means, the identification information determined by the identification information determining means as the identification information to be selected in the specific effect based on the specific determination result being determined by the determining means. Is set by the setting means. Furthermore, when the case where the determination is not performed by the predetermined period determination unit continues during the production period, the production period is interrupted by the interruption unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific effect performed using the predetermined effect period progresses while the determination is not performed by the determination unit. There is an effect that the feeling can be prevented from being impaired.

  In addition, by interrupting the production period, rather than performing control for changing (extending) the content of the specific production performed during the production period so that the expectation for the specific production is not impaired, There is an effect that processing can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine AA1, the production period is set as a first production period from the start until the first period elapses, and the interruption unit does not perform the determination for the predetermined period in the first production period. A gaming machine AA2 characterized by executing interruption based on the continuation of a case.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AA2. That is, the period from the start of the production period to the lapse of the first period is set as the first production period, and based on the fact that the case where the discrimination for the predetermined period is not performed in the first production period has been continued, the production period is determined by the interruption means. Is executed. Thus, the period for determining whether or not to interrupt the effect period can be set as a part of the effect period (first effect period). Therefore, when the production period is restarted, it is possible to secure a predetermined production period, and it is possible to execute a specific production without damaging the player's expectation.

  In the gaming machine AA2, the interruption unit determines whether or not the determination by the determination unit has been performed in the predetermined period until the first effect period has elapsed. A gaming machine AA3 wherein the effect period is interrupted based on the elapse of the effect period.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AA1. That is, when it is determined that the determination by the determination unit has not been performed in the predetermined period until the first production period elapses, the production period is interrupted by the interruption unit based on the elapse of the first production period. . This makes it possible to make the timing at which the effect period is interrupted constant. This makes it possible to keep the remaining production period constant when the production period is restarted, thereby reducing the processing load for executing the specific production after the restart.

  In the first effect period, a predetermined effect may be executed in the first effect period irrespective of the result of the determination by the determining means, and the specific effect may be executed after the first effect period elapses. Thereby, even if the production period is interrupted, it is possible to execute the specific production without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the determination period determining means determines that a predetermined number of determination results is determined within the effect period as a period until the determination result determined by the determination means is determined. A gaming machine AA4 characterized by determining a period.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3. That is, as the period until the determination result determined by the determination unit is determined, the period is determined by the determination period determination unit so that the determination result is determined a predetermined number of times within the production period. Thereby, the discrimination by the discriminating means can be executed a plurality of times within the effect period, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Further, even if a situation occurs in which the discrimination by the discriminating means is not performed during the production period, that is, after the discriminating means 1 performs the discrimination, the game ball does not enter the ball-entering means and the next discrimination is performed. Even if a situation in which the effect is not executed occurs, the effect period is interrupted by the interruption means, so that there is an effect that the sense of expectation for the specific effect in the effect period is not impaired.

<Characteristics AB group> (Available period of button PUSH is different from notification)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition; privilege providing means for providing a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result; Means that can be operated by a user, a validity period setting means for setting a validity period during which an operation by the operation means is valid, and when the validity period is set by the validity period setting means, the operation means An effect executing means for executing an effect based on the operation, a first period setting means for setting a first period within an effective period by the effective period setting means, and the operation means during the first period. A gaming machine AB1 comprising: delay means for delaying execution of the effect by the effect execution means until the first period has elapsed when operated.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a discrimination symbol is dynamically displayed on a display device for a predetermined period, and then stopped and displayed with a symbol based on the determination result. During the period in which the judgment symbol is dynamically displayed, the effect mode is changed based on the player pressing an operable operation means (for example, a button) as various effects, and the judgment result is determined in advance in the game. There has been proposed a gaming machine for improving the interest of a player by displaying a notice display or the like to give a notice to a player (for example, JP-A-2007-185224). In this case, the period during which the player can operate the operation means is limited to the period during which the effect mode can be variably displayed. When the player is notified of the operable period, the period is short, and the effective period There is a problem that the operation means cannot be operated, and the game becomes difficult. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of easily playing a game.

  According to the gaming machine AB1, when a valid period in which the operation by the operation unit is valid is set, the effect is produced when the operation unit is operated within the valid period after the first period of the valid period has elapsed. Is executed. On the other hand, if the operating means is operated before the first period of the valid period has elapsed, the execution of the effect is delayed. Therefore, the validity period can be set even if the period is different from the start timing of the effect performed based on the operation means, and the validity period can be set longer, so that the player can operate the operation means. Since the period is long, there is an effect that the player can play an easy game.

  In the gaming machine AB1, the effect executed by the effect executing means is such that an effect mode is determined based on a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means.

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is determined based on the determination result by the determining means. That is, the player can recognize the determination result by the determination unit by visually recognizing the effect mode of the effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the production mode of the production, so that the operation of the operation means for displaying the production can be motivated and the player's motivation to participate can be improved. effective.

  In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the identification means in which a plurality of different pieces of identification information are set, and among the plurality of different pieces of identification information set in the identification means, the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result to the player. And identification information determining means for determining the specific identification information for notifying, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, in a predetermined execution period, one identification information is selected from the identification information of the identification means, A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in which a notification mode indicating the selected identification information is notified; and, when the specific effect is being executed by the specific effect execution means, the specific determination by the determination means. The specific identification information determined by the identification information determination means is set as the identification information selected in the specific effect based on the determination of the result. A setting means, wherein the presentation execution section, the gaming machine is characterized in that to perform the notification effect indicating the selected identification information in the specific effect AB3.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2. That is, when a specific result is determined by the determining means while the specific effect is being performed, a notification effect based on the specific identification information that notifies the fact that the determination result is the specific determination result by the effect performing means. Is executed. Accordingly, when the determination result becomes a specific determination result during execution of the specific effect, the determination result is a specific determination in the effect by the effect executing means (ie, the effect based on the operation of the operation means). A notification effect that allows the player to recognize the result is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect based on the operation of the operation means, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate.

<Feature AC group> (The next roulette effect is set based on the previous stop position of the roulette)
A movable body on which a plurality of different identification sections are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, a movable control means for moving the movable body by the movable means, and the movable body based on establishment of a movable condition. Determining means for determining a movable pattern in which a stoppable range that can be stopped is set in advance, and after being moved by the movable pattern determined by the determining means, the specific identification unit is located at a predetermined rendering position. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when stopped, and, when the movable body is moved by the movable pattern, setting the stoppable range based on the satisfaction of a specific condition. Identification unit determining means for determining one identification unit from the identification unit that has been determined, and stopping the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination means at the production position at a specific stop timing Stop control means for stopping, wherein the determination means determines a movable pattern in which the stoppable range to be stopped next is preset corresponding to the identification unit stopped by the stop control means. A gaming machine AC1 characterized by the following.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a hit determination is performed, a plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of different symbols arranged on the front side are arranged, and a combination of symbols stopped at a predetermined position is determined in advance as a determination result. It is determined based on the information and notified by controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a gaming machine is proposed in which, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped, a game in which the variable winning device is changed so that game balls can enter is executed. (Eg, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-204318). Even if the rotating body is stopped by the first rotation effect, the degree of expectation for the next rotation effect cannot be varied depending on the stop position, and the problem that the game becomes monotonous causes the player to get tired early. There was a point. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and further provides a novel gaming machine, which suppresses the game from becoming monotonous, and the player gets tired early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing defects.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, of the plurality of identification units in the movable body, the identification unit corresponding to the stoppable range set in the determined movable pattern is stopped at the predetermined rendering position. As the movable pattern, when the movable body is stopped, a movable pattern in which a stoppable range to be stopped next is set in advance is determined. That is, the next stopable range is determined in a state where the movable body is stopped. Therefore, from the position where the position of the movable body is stopped in accordance with the next stoppable range, the degree of expectation of whether or not the specific identification unit stops at the production position can be changed, and the specific identification unit does not stop at the production position. Also in this case, the stop position can be interesting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  The gaming machine AC2 in the gaming machine AC1, wherein the movable pattern has an execution period set in advance.

  According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AC1, a preset execution period is set in the movable pattern of the movable body. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem that the player gets tired early due to the prolonged movement of the movable body.

  Further, according to the configuration including the gaming machine AC1, the next stoppable range is determined in a state where the movable body is stopped. Therefore, even if the movable period of the movable body is a preset execution period, The stoppable range can be determined based on the execution period. That is, a stoppable range suitable for a period during which the movable body is moved (movable pattern) can be determined. For example, an identification unit that does not reach the rendering position in a set period (movable pattern) is determined as a stoppable range. There is no. Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable effect can be provided without giving a natural feeling to the player without making the movable operation of the movable body unnatural.

  The gaming machine AC1 or AC2 has a determination unit for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and the stop control unit performs the specific identification when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. A game machine AC3 for stopping a part at the presentation position.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, the specific identification unit is stopped at the production position, so that the determination by the determination means There is an effect that the result can be notified by the identification unit that stops at the presentation position.

  A gaming machine AC4, comprising: a setting unit configured to set one of the plurality of different identifying units to the specific identifying unit based on establishment of a setting condition in any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3.

  According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, since the specific identification unit is set by a plurality of different identification units by the setting unit, which identification unit is set to the specific identification unit It is possible to make the player interested in whether the game is played or not, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AC4, the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on a selection of a player.

  According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC4, at least one of the specific identification units is set by the setting unit based on the selection of the player, so that any identification unit of the player can be set. This can be a specific identification unit, and has the effect that the player can participate in the game and improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine AC4 or AC5, the setting unit sets the specific identification unit based on a result of the determination by the determining unit.

  According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC4 or AC6, the specific identification unit is set by the setting unit based on the determination result of the determination unit. There is an effect that the determination result can be predicted by the player.

<Feature AD group> (Executed after entering Bunny's foot production)
A ball entry means having an opening through which a game ball can enter, an open state in which a game ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means, and a closure in which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than in the open state A variable member that can be changed into a state, a variable means that can change the variable member between the open state and the closed state, a detecting means that detects a game ball that has passed through the opening, and a passage that passes through the opening. A guiding path that guides a game ball that has flowed down for a predetermined period and leads to a performance body in which the performance is performed, and based on the fact that the predetermined time has elapsed since the detection of the game ball by the detection means, A gaming machine AD1 comprising: an effect varying means for varying an effect.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of winning ports are arranged on the front side of a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and one of the winning ports is a starting winning port which is used as a trigger for determining whether or not a game is accepted. When the ball enters, a predetermined lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a winning, a game in which the variable winning device is opened is executed, and the player can obtain many prize balls and the like. In such a gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a plurality of gaming balls are allowed to pass through by a passage member through which the gaming balls can flow, thereby causing the gaming balls to flow to a predetermined position. (JP 2014-133036 A). Furthermore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that suppresses the game from becoming monotonous by improving interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine AD1, the effect of the production body is varied by the production variable means based on a lapse of a predetermined period from the detection of the game ball passing through the opening to the reaching of the production body. The effect of the director can be varied by guiding the ball to the director. Therefore, the timing at which the effect of the effecting body is changed can be easily understood, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AD2 according to the gaming machine AD1, wherein the guide path is formed of a visual recognition member that allows a player to visually recognize a game ball flowing down inside the player.

  According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD1, since the guiding path is configured so that the gaming ball flowing down to the inside of the player can be visually recognized, it is visually recognized that the gaming ball is guided to the director. There is an effect that the timing at which the effect of the effecting body is changed can be more easily understood.

  In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the guide path is configured to be at least movable to a first position at which a game ball can be guided to the director and a second position at which a game ball cannot be guided to the director, Movable means for moving the guide path between the first position and the second position; and the variable means for changing the movable member to the open state, the guide path is moved from the second position to the second position. A gaming machine AD3 characterized by being movable to one position.

  According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, when the variable member is opened, the guide path is moved to the first position, so that the variable member is opened. Can be notified to the player more easily.

  In the gaming machine AD2 or AD3, when the guide path is not moved to the first position, the gaming machine AD2 or AD3 has a discharge flow path for discharging a game ball entering the opening. Gaming machine AD4.

  According to the gaming machine AD4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AD2 or AD3, even when the taxiway is not moved to the first position due to a failure or the like, the gaming ball entering the opening can be discharged from the discharge passage. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines AD1 to AD4, a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the fulfillment of the discriminating condition, and if the discrimination result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result, the variable A gaming machine AD5, comprising: a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game for changing a member to the open state by the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine AD5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD4, when the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, so that the player's interest can be further improved. .

  In the gaming machine AD5, when the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result, there is a deciding means for deciding whether to set a special game state advantageous to the player after the privilege game by the privilege game execution means. The gaming machine AD6, wherein the effecting body notifies the result of the determination by the determining means by the effect.

  According to the gaming machine AD6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD5, it is notified whether or not a special gaming state is set by the director, so that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous even during the bonus game. is there.

  In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 1st entrance (part of entry means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 display control device (dynamic display means)
202d fluctuation pattern selection table (dynamic display period storage means)
203a Special design 1 holding ball storage area 640a Second entrance (part of entry means)
S305, S508 Determination means S310, S312 Part of dynamic display period determination means S402 Acquisition means S512, S517 Part of dynamic display period determination means S1102 Privilege grant means S3321 First effect execution means, second effect execution means, restriction means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect of notifying whether or not a winning has been executed is performed, and after the end of the winning, an effect of notifying whether or not a privilege (for example, a probable change game state) is provided is determined. There is something to do .

JP 2009-178292 A

However, in the conventional type of game machine, the player interest was Tsu problem there that that can not be be directed above.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, based on the establishment of determine specific conditions, display and determination means for performing determination, the first identification information for indicating a discrimination result of the discriminating means Possible display means, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information on the display means and then displaying the first identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means with the, on said display means, based particular the first identification information corresponding to a particular determine specific results are displayed, and benefits game execution means for executing an advantageous and Do that benefits the player to the player, the The game state after the end of the privilege game is one of a plurality of games including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Game state setting means for setting a state; A plurality of display areas capable of displaying second identification information for suggesting the above, and the second identification information is dynamically displayed in some of the plurality of display areas, By displaying predetermined specific identification information on the display area, it is suggested that the specific determination result has been obtained, and the specific combination predetermined for the plurality of display areas may be displayed. Display control means capable of indicating the setting of the second game state by displaying the second identification information, wherein the display control means is configured to control the first identification corresponding to the specific determination result. A dynamic display of the second identification information is started based on a start of a first period which is at least a part of a period in which information is dynamically displayed, and the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. Less of the period Also part, in the second period consecutive to the first period, is shall have the second identification information to the plurality of display areas is configured to be able to display control so that the displayed state .

According to claim 1 the gaming machine according, based on the establishment of determine specific conditions, a determination means for performing determination, a first capable of displaying identification information display means for indicating a discrimination result of the discriminating means Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information on the display means and then displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; and the display means , based in particular the first identification information corresponding to a particular determine specific results are displayed, those having the benefits game execution means for executing an advantageous and Do that benefits the player to the player, the, the A game in which one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state is set as a game state after the privilege game has ended. State setting means and for making a predetermined suggestion After a plurality of display areas capable of displaying the second identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed in a part of the plurality of display areas, the plurality of display areas are displayed. Displaying predetermined specific identification information suggests that the specific determination result has been obtained, and displaying the predetermined specific combination of the second identification information on the plurality of display areas. Display control means capable of suggesting the setting of the second game state by causing the display control means to dynamically display the first identification information corresponding to the specific determination result. The dynamic display of the second identification information is started based on the start of the first period which is at least a part of the period, and at least one of the periods during which the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. Part and before In a second successive periods in the first period, is shall have the second identification information is displayed controllably configured such that the state of being displayed on the plurality of display areas.

  This has the effect of increasing the interest of the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an upper raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of an upper lifting unit. It is a front view of an upper lifting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper elevating unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of an upper elevating unit. (A) is a front view of the first gear, (b) is a rear view of the first gear, (c) is a front view of the second gear, and (d) is a second gear. FIG. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a raising / lowering body and a transmission device. It is a front perspective view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side slide member. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a driving slide member. It is a rear view of a drive side slide member. 26A is a front perspective view of the connection member, FIG. 26B is a front view of the connection member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26A, and FIG. 26C is an arrow of FIG. It is a rear view of the connection member seen in XXVIc direction. It is a rear view of a 2nd passage formation member and a connection member. It is a rear view of a 2nd passage formation member and a connection member. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXX in FIG. 29. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and a left swing unit. It is a front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a swing operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a swing operation unit. It is a front view of a swing operation unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit and a left swing unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit and a left swing unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of the rotation unit in the state where the guide member was removed. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit in the state where a guide member was removed. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of the rotation unit in the state where the rotation member, a part of the pitching device, and the guide member were removed. It is a front schematic diagram of a guide member. (A) is a front view of the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-side rotation member and the other-side rotation member along the line LIb-LIb in FIG. 51 (a). is there. It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit cut | disconnected by the plane containing the rotation axis of a center transmission member. It is a front view of a case member and a drive mechanism. (A) is a front view of the rotating member, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LV in FIG. 54 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of a division member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a division member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a division member. It is an exploded back perspective view of a division member. (A) and (b) are the upper surface perspective view and the lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned at the 1st area. (A) and (b) are the upper surface perspective view and the lower surface perspective view of the division member in the state arrange | positioned at the 2nd area. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is an exploded front perspective view of an arm rotation mechanism. It is a front view of the pitching apparatus in the state where the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism was arranged in the holding position. It is a front view of the pitching apparatus in the state where the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism was arranged at the separated position. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding pieces are arranged at a protruding position. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at a retracted position. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the protruding position, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the holding piece retracting mechanism along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. It is sectional drawing. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the holding piece retracting mechanism along the line LXIXb-LXIXb in FIG. 69 (a). It is sectional drawing. It is a front perspective view of a guide member. It is a rear perspective view of a guide member. It is a front view of a guide member and a rotating member. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotation member in the first section, and (b) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotation member in the second section. (A) to (d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation driving member is rotated by 30 degrees. FIG. 9 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the state of engagement or disengagement of the one-side rotation drive member and the other-side rotation drive member with the divided member and the phase. (A) to (c) are state transition diagrams for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member. It is the elements on larger scale which expanded the part in the 1st section of a rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left swing unit in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a front view of the main body member of the distal end wall member, (b) is a top view of the main body member of the distal end wall member, and (c) is a line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 79 (b). It is sectional drawing of the main body member of a front-end wall member, (d) is a front view of the main body member of a front-end wall member. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit and the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal raising / lowering unit. (A) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a), and (c) FIG. 4 is a partial front view of a driving-side slide member. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during symbol variable display, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where a combination of symbols to be lost is stopped and displayed. . (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case where the combination of the symbol which becomes a big hit is stopped and displayed, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during execution of a time saving suggestion effect. is there. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in the case where a departure is reported in a time-saving suggestion effect, and (b) is an example of a display mode in a case where a hit is reported in a time-saving suggestion effect. FIG. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during execution of an increase effect. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during execution of a roulette chance production, and (b) is a figure showing a state where a thrown ball is performing a rocking operation on a holding piece. . (A) is a diagram showing a state where a ball has fallen into a pocket in a roulette chance effect, and (b) is a diagram showing a state where a ball has fallen into a hit pocket. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a case where an additional effect is executed, and (b) is an example of a display mode in a case where a lucky number corresponding to the additional effect is notified in the increased effect. FIG. It is a front view of back LED. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a case where a lighting area of a part of a rear LED is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%. It is a front view of the rotating member in the case where the lighting area of a part of back LED is set to the lighting state of 100% of lighting rates. (A) is a front view of the back LED when the lighting state is set for each lighting area of the back LED, and (b) is a lighting state setting for each lighting area of the back LED. It is a front view of the rotating member when performing. (A) is a front view of the back LED at the time when the back LED turns 1/3 after the setting of the lighting state, and (b) is the front view of the back LED when the back LED turns 1/3 after the setting of the lighting state. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the rear LED when the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the correction section is corrected, and (b) is a case where the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the correction section is corrected. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a figure which shows the case where the ball which is oscillating is arrange | positioned out of the detection range of a ball detection sensor, (b) is the figure which shows the ball which is oscillating in the detection range of a ball detection sensor. It is a figure showing the case where it is arranged. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing about the control of a stepping motor. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number table, and (c) is a first random number table. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special figure per hit type selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special type 2 winning type selection table. It is the model which showed typically the state transition method of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number table, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal middle and big hit table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal middle-out table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time-saving medium-and-large jackpot table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detailed contents of the extended holiday table included in the time-saving medium-and-large jackpot table; FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table during the working hours, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the detailed contents of the table during the extended holiday included in the working hours table. FIG. (A) is a timing chart showing the time change of the mode of the roulette chance, and (b) is a timing chart showing the time change of the mode of the roulette chance when the fluctuation is interrupted during the working hours. is there. (A) is a timing chart showing the time change of the mode of the winning roulette chance, and (b) is a timing chart showing the time change of the mode of the winning roulette chance when the fluctuation is interrupted during the working hours. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a game result setting table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a state setting table. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of an operation scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents of an upper elevating unit table, and (c) is a contents of a specific opening table. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the initial operation table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the rotation position determination table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the hit position storage area typically. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a lighting position storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first storage area, and (c) is a second storage area. (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third storage area. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the display data table typically. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 change start process performed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on state setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the origin return process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the swing effect process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fall control process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows discharge detection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process performed by MPU in an audio ramp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the disconnection determination process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an execution command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an initial operation process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a rotation setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lighting setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the state command process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket allocation process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 winning command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the display number selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece in the second control example, and (b) is a front view of the holding piece in the second control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the arrangement | positioning of each ball detection sensor in 2nd control example, and the correspondence with an area. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the amplitude discrimination table in the second control example. It is. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a swing angle determination table in a second control example. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the swing effect process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fall control process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows amplitude discrimination processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 2nd example of control. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a swing angle control process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a rotation setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating execution command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the arrangement | positioning specific processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the specific process during rotation performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of non-specification performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the specific process during rocking | swing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of the time change of the effect mode when the hit middle variation is set during the extended-play mode in the third control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the third control example. It is the timing chart which showed an example of the time change of the effect form when the deviation middle fluctuation | variation was set during the extended play mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the timing change of the effect mode when the hit short fluctuation is determined after the disconnection short fluctuation has been determined twice consecutively in the extended play mode in the third control example. (B) is a timing chart showing the time-based change of the presentation mode when the short-circuit variation is determined three times consecutively during the extended-villa mode. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM in an audio ramp control device in a third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the third control example. is there. It is the mimetic diagram which showed typically the contents of the extended-short-home big hit table in the 3rd example of control. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a table for out-of-condominium in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an additional region selection table. . FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in a third control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the hit position storage area in the 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket distribution process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the additional position determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 winning command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous variation pattern selection table in the fourth control example. It is a figure, (c) is a block diagram showing the composition of the operation scenario table in the 4th example of control, and (d) showed the contents of the upper swing effect table in the 4th example of control typically. It is a schematic diagram. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM in a voice lamp control device in the 4th example of control. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a rotation setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 winning command processing 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern selection process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the upper swing effect process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the operation | movement aspect of the left swing unit in the case of a left swing effect in execution in 5th control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the pitching press effect in 5th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the left swing unit table in the fifth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the first left swing unit table in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd left swing unit table in 5th control example. FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows fall control processing 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 5th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the notice effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pitching press effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket distribution processing 5 performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 winning command processing 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed the display aspect of the variable display performed during "normal mode" in the 6th control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which showed the display aspect of the variable display performed during "preparation mode" in the 6th control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the symbol position selection table in the sixth control example. FIG. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM in a sound lamp control device in the 6th example of control. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the display position selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop position selection process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example. 5 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a signal waveform of a lighting control command in a first control example.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  On the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to (i), whereby the ball is hit on the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged in the front direction. By sliding the ball-pulling lever 52 in the rearward direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand boxes") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640a, the second variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is formed by the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1). See) on the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640a, the second variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be properly used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640a. . Specifically, when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball has won the second ball entrance 640a, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by a lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device is used to display a round during a jackpot. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to a prize winning at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, there are prepared probability change jackpots A to K and normal jackpots A and B. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “probable change jackpots A to K” have a maximum number of rounds of two rounds, and shift to a special symbol high probability state after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, when "normal jackpots A and B" are reached, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the special symbol low probability state after two rounds of jackpots.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) according to the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of a second symbol described later increases and a ball easily wins at the second entrance 640a. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a state of a game in which a ball can easily be won to 640a. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable changes or during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the motorized accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is opened is changed, and a longer time than during normal times Is set. When the electric accessory 640b is in an open state (open state), a ball is awarded to the second entrance 640a as compared to when the electric accessory 640b is in a closed state (closed state). It is easy to do. Therefore, during probable changes or during working hours, it is easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640a, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a, or in addition to changing the opening time, one time A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640b is opened from the normal number. In addition, during probability change or during working hours, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640b is opened once. At least one of the number of times to perform the change may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640b is opened per one time is not determined. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal case.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a as a trigger to synchronize with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing symbol variation display, and an LED for varying display of the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device 83 (not shown).

  Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol “O” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol). If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entrance 640a is moved. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640b of the second entrance 640a. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640a.

  In addition, the second entrance 640a may be increased during the probability change or during the working hours by increasing the probability of hitting during the probability changing or the working hours, or by increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640b per hit. If the hemisphere is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640b may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. If so, a symbol "x" is displayed as a symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol display. You may make it perform using a part of 3 symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball wins in the first entrance opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is made at 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in a front view, a second entrance 640a where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second entrance 640a, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on by the second entrance switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640a is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640a are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640a are different numbers, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball opening 64 may be set to three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640a may be set to five.

  An electric accessory 640b is attached to the second entrance 640a. The electric accessory 640b is configured to be openable and closable, and usually, the electric accessory 640b is in a closed state (extended state), so that the ball is unlikely to enter the second entrance 640a. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640 b is in the open state ( (Retracted state), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640a.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640b is opened (retracted) increases. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640b is opened is longer than during normal working. Therefore, during probable changes and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second entrance 640a as compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball has won the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball has won the second entrance 640a is the same regardless of whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state. is there. However, as the type of the jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot, the selection ratio of the jackpot type that can acquire a relatively large amount of prize balls is set higher when a ball is won at the second entrance 640a. Have been. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have a motorized accessory as in the second entrance 640a, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second entrance 640a is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640a. The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the 64 (so-called “left hit”). It is more advantageous for a player to aim for a jackpot.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, the ball is passed through the through gate 67, so that the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a tends to be in an open state, and the second entrance 640a can be easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 a so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to be driven by the electric accessory. It is more advantageous for the player to make the player open and aim for a big hit by winning the second entrance 640a.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 82a is provided at the upper left of the first entrance 64, and a first specific winning opening 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the first variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to a predetermined opening pattern according to the jackpot type at the time of a specific jackpot (for example, the probability jackpot A). As a predetermined opening pattern, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times (opening pattern A) and an opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once ) Are provided.

  The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 82a according to a predetermined opening pattern can be repeated, for example, at most twice (two rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed. In each round, even if the opening pattern has not been completed, when it is detected that a predetermined number (for example, 10) or more balls have won the first specific winning opening 82, the first forcing is forcibly performed. The variable winning device 82a is closed and the end of the round is set.

  A second variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first entrance 64, and a second rectangular winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion of the second variable winning device 65. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to a prize in the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640a becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. When the jackpot type is the type corresponding to the second specific winning opening 65a, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball easily enters the second specific winning opening 65a. In this special game state, the second specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won). That is, a longer opening time is set as compared to the type of the big hit in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened. Therefore, in the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened, the upper limit number (for example, 10) of balls can be won in the second specific winning opening 65a in many cases. On the other hand, more prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to make the second specific winning opening 65a of the type of the jackpot to be opened. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot, the second specific winning opening 65a can be noticed. .

  The second specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the second specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the second specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, at most twice (two rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The second variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening / closing frontward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis ( (Not shown)). The second specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or is hardly won. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front lower side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the state with the closed state.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first entrance port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 uses the MPU 201 to perform major jackpot lotteries, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. Execute the process.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp, and a cover for opening and closing the second specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the lower side as an axis, and the MPU 201 issues various commands to these via an input / output port 205. And control signals.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, various sensors 230, the frame button 22, and the like.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

  FIGS. 6 and 7 show a state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the lowered position. In FIGS. 9A and 9B, the second path forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the first path forming member of the left swing unit 500 are shown. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is connected to the liquid crystal lifting unit 520, and FIG. FIGS. 6 to 10 show a state in which the upper elevating unit 300 is arranged at the ascending position.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and includes an upper elevating unit 300, a liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and a left swing unit in an inner space of the rear case 210. 500, a rotation unit 600, and a light emitting decoration member 700 are respectively housed.

  The rear case 210 includes a bottom wall 211 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 212 erected from four outer edges of the bottom wall 211 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. The bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 has a concave portion having a substantially circular frontal shape at the center thereof, and the rotating unit 600 is housed in the concave portion. The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the rotating unit 600, and the upper elevating unit 300, the left swing unit 500, and the decorative light emitting member 700 are connected to the upper edge, the left edge, and the lower edge of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. It is arranged in each part.

  The upper elevating unit 300 includes a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating members 330 arranged side by side in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 8), and the elevating members 330 are independently provided in the height direction (FIG. 8). It is formed to be able to move up and down (up and down) (see FIGS. 12 and 13). In a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the lowered position, when the elevating body 330 is arranged at the elevating position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 8). When the 330 is arranged at the lowered position (see FIG. 12), a part of the third symbol display device 81 is made invisible by the elevating body 330.

  The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 has a pair of guide rods 451 that are disposed in a vertical position with their axes aligned in the vertical direction and that are disposed at predetermined intervals in the width direction. A drive slide member 420 and a driven slide member 430 supported so as to be slidably displaceable, and a drive motor 441 that drives the drive slide member 420 up and down are provided. The drive motor 441 drives the drive slide member 420 up and down. Accordingly, the driven slide member 430 is moved up and down by being driven.

  That is, when the drive side slide member 420 is raised, the drive side slide member 420 pushes the driven side slide member 430 upward while resisting the action of gravity, while the drive side slide member 420 is lowered. As the drive side slide member 420 is lowered, the driven side slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight.

  The drive side slide member 420 is provided with a second passage forming member 422, and the driven side slide member 430 is provided with a display device 81 shown in FIG. When the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the connection position between the raised position and the lowered position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (FIG. 9). When the drive-side slide member 420 is located at the ascending position, the upper area of the third symbol display device 81 is located on the back side of the upper elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 10).

  The left swing unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 that swings around the base end in a direction in which the distal end is moved up and down. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the front end side, it is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 9), and the front end side is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, while When swinging in the direction of swinging the distal end side down, it is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10), and the connection of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 to the second passage forming member 422 is released.

  The ball flowing down the game area can flow into the left swing unit 500, and the left swing unit 500 flows in the state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 9). The thrown ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520, while the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position (see FIG. 10). The inflow ball is sent to the game area via a passage, which will be described later, provided separately from the first passage forming member 520.

  The rotating unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate roulette. In other words, a member (rotating member 640) corresponding to a wheel (rotating disk) formed rotatably, and the wheel formed by partitioning the wheel in the circumferential direction are colored red or black and different numbers are displayed. (A display plate 646 and a partition plate 647) corresponding to a pocket to be thrown, and a ball B thrown from a device on the inner peripheral side of the wheel (a pitching device 650) is provided. It is formed to fall on either.

  In a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is disposed at the lower position (see FIG. 8), almost the entire rotating unit 600 is shielded by the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 so as to be invisible to the player, while the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is at the connection position. In the arranged state (see FIG. 9), a part (lower part) of a member corresponding to the wheel is exposed, and in a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the ascending position (see FIG. 10), In addition to the part (lower part) of the corresponding member, the ball B held on the inner peripheral side of the member corresponding to the wheel and the path from when the ball B is thrown until it falls into the part corresponding to the pocket are They are exposed and made visible to the player.

  The light emitting decoration member 700 includes a case body formed of a light transmissive material, and a plurality of LEDs disposed inside the case body, and forms a light emitted from the LED (for example, a light emitting LED). By changing the number and the light emission time), an effect by light emission is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20, the detailed configurations of the upper elevating unit 300, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotating unit 600, and the light emitting decoration member 700 will be described. First, the upper elevating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper elevating unit 300. 11 and 12 show a state in which all the elevating bodies 330 arranged side by side in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 12) are arranged at the ascending position. In FIG. 13, all the elevating bodies 330 are lowered. The state where it is arranged at the position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, in the upper elevating unit 300, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating bodies 330 are arranged in the width direction of the base member 310 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape. It is configured to be able to move up and down between a raised position (see FIG. 12) and a lowered position (see FIG. 13). Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each lifting / lowering body 330 will be described.

  FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the upper elevating unit 300 includes a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310 and a space for accommodating the transmission device 350 between the base member 310 and the base member 310. A back cover 320 fastened and fixed to the back side, an elevating body 330 in which a rack 332 is accommodated between the base member 310 and the back cover 320 and a circular effect part 331 is arranged on the front side of the base member 310; A driving device 340 that is fastened and fixed to the back cover member 320 and generates a driving force required for the elevating operation of the elevating body, and a transmission device 350 that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the elevating body 330 Prepare.

  The cover member 310 includes a semicircular recessed portion 311 having a semicircular shape with the center of the circle disposed at the lower end and recessed from the front side surface to the rear side, and a rack 332 of the elevating body 330 from the rear side surface. A guide rib 312 protruding in a rib shape toward a position with a slight gap left and right.

  The semicircular recessed portion 311 has a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rendering portion 331 of the elevating body 330, and the center of the circle of the semicircular recessed portion 311 and the center of the rendering portion 331 are in a vertical line. Is arranged at the position that matches. Thus, when the rendering section 331 moves upward, it can be moved to a position in front of the base member 310 up to a position where the rendering section 331 interferes with the semicircular concave section 311, and the vertical width of the base member 310 is secured. Also, it is possible to secure a large moving width of the staging unit 331.

  The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-shaped portion extending in the vertical direction, and protrudes to a position where the guide rib portion 312 can contact the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 in an assembled state (see FIG. 11). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the elevating body 330 from moving in the left-right direction during the elevating movement (parallel movement or tilting operation).

  Further, by forming the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recessed portion recessed from the front side to the back side, the area in which the back side can be made invisible can be increased as compared with the case where the space penetrates in the front-back direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for arranging a mechanical portion (a portion not intended to be visually recognized by a player, such as a gear and a motor).

  The rear cover 320 includes a main body 321 configured in a case shape with the front side and the lower part opened, a cylindrical shaft support 322 protruding from the main body 321 to the front, and a front surface from the shaft support 322. A guide hole 323, which is a long hole formed in a position displaced in the left-right direction with the extension direction coinciding with the vertical direction, and a shaft support portion from the bottom where the upper shaft support portion 322 protrudes. 322, and a locking portion 324 formed in a rib shape along the radial direction.

  The shaft support 322 is a portion that supports the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, respectively, and the guide hole 323 is a hole that guides the elevating operation of the elevating body 330.

  The locking portion 324 is disposed vertically above and vertically below the axis of the upper shaft support portion 322, and in the state where the elevating body 330 is disposed at the ascending position or the descending position, respectively, the first The end of the locking arc 351c of the gear 351 is a portion that can be brought into contact in the rotation direction.

  The elevating body 330 includes an effect portion 331 configured in a circular plate shape, and a rack 332 fixed to the back surface of the effect portion 331 and extending vertically in a position spaced from the rear side surface of the effect portion 331. , Is provided.

  The rendering section 331 is a section in which a circular liquid crystal panel is disposed inside a circular outer frame, and performs rendering by displaying patterns and graphics on the liquid crystal panel.

  The rack 332 includes a slide shaft 332 a protruding to the rear side and protruding to a position where the rack 332 is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the rear cover 320.

  The slide shaft 332a does not have a plurality of protrusions but one protrusion. Therefore, the number of the guide holes 323 can be reduced to one, so that the space for disposing the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction can be suppressed, and a large moving distance of the rack 332 can be secured. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can contact the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, even if the rack 332 is connected to the guide hole 323 at one position, the rack 332 is not moved in the left-right direction. Can be prevented. Thereby, when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, the staging portion 331 can be prevented from swinging in the left and right direction, and the gap between the second gear 352 and the rack 332 can be prevented from fluctuating and the meshing relationship can be prevented from deteriorating. be able to.

  The driving device 340 includes a driving motor 341 that is a driving source fastened and fixed to the rear cover 320, and a driving gear 342 that is rotated by rotation of a driving shaft of the driving motor 341 and transmits driving force to the transmission device 350. .

  The transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support 322 and meshed with the drive gear 342, and is meshed with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and supported by the shaft support 322. And a second gear 352.

  As described above, the plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating members 330 are provided with the independent driving motors 341, respectively. It can be individually raised and lowered. Since the technical ideas of the lifting members 330 are common, the lifting member 330 arranged at the left end of FIG. 11 will be described below, and the description of the other lifting members 330 will be omitted.

  Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16B is a rear view of the first gear 351, and FIG. 16C is a front view of the second gear 352. FIG. 16D is a rear view of the second gear 352.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the first gear 351 has a through hole through which the shaft support 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and a main body 351a in which gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. In the outer peripheral surface of the main body 351a, a portion where the formation of the gear teeth is omitted is extended to about half the length of the gear teeth (extends to a pitch circle C1 where the contacts of the meshing teeth are connected). Abutment portion 351b formed in the radial direction with an extension length), and a lock projecting from the rear side surface of main body portion 351a in an arc shape centered on the axis along a direction parallel to the axis. And an arc portion 351c.

  The abutting portion 351b has a distal end surface in a radial direction having an arc shape with a radius r around the center axis of the main body portion 351a, and has a tooth thickness (circular arc) of approximately two to three gear teeth formed on the main body portion 351a. (The tooth thickness in the range of approximately 45 degrees to 60 degrees). That is, since the formation length in the circumferential direction of the main body 351a is longer than the tooth thickness of one gear tooth, the strength in the circumferential direction can be secured as compared with the gear teeth of the main body 351a.

  The locking arc portion 351c is a portion whose distal end in the circumferential direction can contact the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the rear cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. Has a role.

  As shown in FIGS. 16C and 16D, the second gear 352 includes two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side and the rear side, and has an intermediate plate 353 configured in a donut plate shape. And a gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially irregular tooth shape, and a spur gear shape formed on the back side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshed with a rack 332 (see FIG. 15). And a transmission gear unit 355.

  The intermediate plate 352 is formed so as to protrude radially outward from tips of gear teeth of the modified gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the mating member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (refer to FIG. 15)) overlaps in a direction parallel to the tooth surface and can be brought into contact with the mating member (refer to FIG. 17). The movement in the direction parallel to the tooth surface during the elevating operation of the 330 can be suppressed.

  The deformed gear portion 354 is a portion that meshes with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), and has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted. A main body 354a to be formed, a receiving portion 354b formed on a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the main body 354a where the gear teeth are not formed, and one end of the receiving portion 354b (the right side of FIG. 16C) And an adjacent gear tooth 354c adjacent to the end).

  The receiving portion 354b extends counterclockwise from the adjacent gear teeth 354c along the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a (the side where the first gear 351 bites into the adjacent gear portion 354c when the lifting body 330 is moved upward. ) Is formed at an arrangement angle of about two gear teeth (approximately 30 degrees to 50 degrees), and when the transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support portion 322, the distal end surface of the contact portion 351b is formed. And the tooth height of the adjacent gear tooth 354c between the curved wall portion 354b1 and the circumferential tooth surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c. And a connecting wall portion 354b2 formed with a half of the tooth height (tooth length extending to a pitch circle C2 connecting the contact points of the meshing teeth). Therefore, the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the side of the connection wall portion 354b2 has an overhang length that is approximately half the radial extension length of the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the side opposite to the connection wall portion 354b2. The connecting wall 354b2 is formed integrally with the connecting wall 354b2 so as to protrude radially from the connecting wall 354b2.

  As shown in FIG. 16C, in a state where the transmission device 350 is supported by the shaft support portion 322, the second gear 352 has a curved wall along an arc shape having a radius r formed by the distal end surface of the contact portion 351b. When the portion 354b1 is in the posture of being arranged, the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the arc of the radius r (the second gear 352 side) (the adjacent gear teeth 354c have the radius r of the radius r). It is limited to formation at a position that does not interfere with the circle).

  Next, the elevating operation of the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. Since the operation path of the ascending operation and the descending operation are common, the ascending operation will be described here, and the explanation of the descending operation will be omitted.

  17 to 20 are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in which the elevating operation of the elevating body 330 is illustrated in chronological order. Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state in which the elevating body 330 is disposed at the lowered position. In FIG. 18, the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in front view from the state illustrated in FIG. FIG. 19 illustrates a state in which the distance-up operation has been performed and the circumferential end of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 has started to mesh with the adjacent gear tooth 354c of the second gear 352. In FIG. 19, the state illustrated in FIG. The state immediately after the first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise in front view and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in front view, and the contact between the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c is released. FIG. 20 illustrates a state in which only the first gear 351 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount in a front view from the state illustrated in FIG. 19.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the elevating body 330 is moved up and down by the driving force of the driving motor 341 (see FIG. 14) being transmitted to the rack 332 via the driving gear 342 and the transmission device 350. You. More specifically, the driving force of the driving gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 meshed with the driving gear 342 to the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 meshed with the first gear 351. The rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to the rack meshed with the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 16D) of the second gear 352, so that the elevating body 330 moves up and down.

  In the lowered position illustrated in FIG. 17, the slide shaft 332a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is disposed at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the rear cover 320. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically prevent the rack 332 from moving further downward.

  Further, in the state illustrated in FIG. 17, the circumferential end of the locking arc portion 351 c of the first gear 351 and the locking portion 324 on the lower side of the back cover 320 abut, so that the first gear 351 is formed. Is mechanically prevented from rotating in the clockwise direction (the direction in which the rack 332 is moved down) when viewed from the front.

  Accordingly, even if the drive gear 342 is over-rotated due to poor control of the drive motor 341 or the like, a load is generated to rotate the first gear 351 further clockwise from the state shown in FIG. Since the rotation of the first gear 351 is mechanically prevented, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the situation where the rack 332 moves down can be avoided. 15) is pressed against the lower surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15), thereby preventing the slide shaft 322a or the guide hole 323 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the process of elevating the elevating body 330, the circumferential end face of the contact portion 351 b whose circumferential tooth thickness is larger than the other gear teeth meshes with the adjacent gear tooth 354 c. Therefore, the load (the load due to the weight of the elevating body 330) transmitted in the reverse direction from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 can be received by the contact portion 351b having a greater strength than other gear teeth. Thus, the durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.

  Since the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 extends to the pitch circle C1 and the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 extends to the pitch circle C2, the contact portion 351b is connected in the state of FIG. It is brought close to the position where it rubs against the wall 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b can be brought into contact with the adjacent gear tooth 354c at a portion close to the root of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be improved.

  Further, since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are connected to one side in the circumferential direction to the connecting wall portion 354b2, the strength against the load received from the circumferential direction is improved as compared with the other gear teeth. In other words, since the radially extending length of the side surface on the side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 is shortened, resistance to deformation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c in a direction perpendicular to the tooth height direction increases, and the connecting wall portion 354b also increases. Since the 354b2 is formed integrally with the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion that receives the force applied to the adjacent gear tooth 354c is increased. Accordingly, the resistance of the adjacent gear teeth 354c to deformation in the circumferential direction increases. This can prevent the adjacent gear teeth 354c from being damaged when receiving the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in a state immediately after the lifting / lowering body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, the arc-shaped tip of the abutting portion 351b abuts on the adjacent gear tooth 354c. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, the transmission of the driving force in the rotation direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. You.

  Therefore, the force supporting the weight of the elevating body 330 meshed with the second gear 352 is not transmitted from the first gear 351, and the elevating body 330 starts moving in the falling direction. It starts to rotate in the direction for lowering (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, the contact portion 351b is arranged in the range of rotation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c (inside the circle formed by the tip of the adjacent gear tooth 354c), so that the second gear When rotating 352, it is necessary to push the contact part 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

  Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component toward the axial side of the first gear 351. Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

  The axial component Fa is not in the direction in which the first gear 351 can rotate, and in a state where the rigidity of the first gear 351 is ensured (in a structure that does not expand and contract in the radial direction), the abutting portion is formed by the axial component Fa. It is difficult to push 351b out of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

  The circumferential direction component Fb is directed in the rotation direction of the first gear 351, but since the adjacent gear tooth 354 c and the contact portion 351 b contact at a point, the circumferential component Fb slides between the adjacent gear tooth 354 c and the contact portion 351 b. And the first gear 351 is not easily rotated, so that it is difficult to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the circumferential component Fb.

  Accordingly, since the abutting portion 351b is prevented from being pushed to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the second gear 352 is prevented from rotating, and the second gear 352 and The state of the elevating body 330 is maintained.

  The contact portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are both formed in an arc shape having a radius r around the first gear 351 and, as shown in FIG. Since the first gear 351 is abutted against the surface in the direction, the rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received using the entire area of the curved wall portion 354b1. Thus, even if the stop of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is delayed after the elevating body 330 reaches the ascending position, it is possible to prevent the first gear 351 from over-rotating, and to stop the drive motor 341. Can be prevented from affecting the operation mode of the elevating body 330.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates and stops until the locking arc portion 351c contacts the upper locking portion 324. Between FIG. 18 and FIG. 20, since the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 pushes the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the second gear 352 is rotated. The position of 354c is aligned with the position of the second gear 352, so that the state where the adjacent gear teeth 354c abut on the tooth tip surface of the abutment portion 351b in the state shown in FIG. 20 can be reliably formed.

  Since the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position from the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the rotation of the second gear 352 in the direction for moving the rack 332 upward (clockwise in FIG. 20) is restricted. Is done. Therefore, even if the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 19 with respect to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 does not rotate. Therefore, a state in which the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be reliably formed.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in a state in which the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position, the second gear 352 has a curved wall portion 354b1 along an arc shape with a radius r formed by the distal end surface of the contact portion 351b. Since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the circular arc having the radius r (on the side of the second gear 352), only the first gear 351 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 19 (counterclockwise direction).

  At this time, since the tooth thickness of the contact portion 351b is thicker than the other gear teeth (about the thickness of two to three gear teeth), the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is moderated. can do. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops at the intermediate phase from the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b at the contact position is the same. And the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted.

  In addition, the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions can be restricted while the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is kept low. That is, even if the second gear 352 starts to rotate clockwise in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b comes into contact with the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b, so that the direction of the load is described in detail below. The rotation of the second gear 352 is regulated in the same manner as when the set gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other. Therefore, the movement of the rack 332 in both the up and down directions in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position is regulated, so that it is possible to suppress the rattling of the elevating body 330. It is difficult to regulate both the upper and lower directions (particularly, the restriction in the ascending direction) with a conventional crank mechanism, and is first achieved by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in the present embodiment. Things.

  As described above, the shape of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 can prevent the rotation of the second gear 352 in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged at the ascending position. It is not necessary to continuously apply the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) with a magnitude equal to or greater than its own weight in order to maintain the position at the ascending position, and it is possible to suppress energy consumption.

  Further, it is possible to maintain the elevating body 330 at the ascending position by using the dead point of the crank mechanism, but in this case, there is a problem that the crank mechanism becomes large corresponding to the moving distance of the elevating body 330. there were. In the present embodiment, the crank mechanism is not required, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted by the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, so that the size of the transmission portion can be reduced.

  A method of releasing the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, another member that interferes with the contact portion 351b in the rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is rotated in the reverse direction is not provided. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first gear 351 in the direction of lowering the elevating body 330 (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) is allowed.

  When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. 19, and further rotated in the same direction, the restriction in the rotation direction of the second gear 352 is released (the contact part 351b is not rotated). The leading end surface is separated from the adjacent gear tooth 354c), and the elevating body 330 can move downward. That is, the rotation operation of the first gear 351 can release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352, and the first gear 351 can perform another operation to release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352. Since it is unnecessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.

  Next, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 includes a drive-side slide member 420 having a staging portion 422 a having a circular liquid crystal portion and performing an ascending / descending operation, and a member that moves up and down following the drive-side slide member 420. And a driven side slide member 430 provided with a third symbol display device 81. The driven side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are communicated with a common guide rod 451 and operate in the same direction. Is done.

  FIG. 22 is a front exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 includes a base member 410 composed of a pair of long plate-like members, a driving slide member 420 configured to be capable of vertically elevating and lowering, A driven slide member 430 disposed above the side slide member 420 and configured to be operable in the vertical direction, a drive device 440 for generating a driving force for the drive slide member 420 to move up and down, and generated from the drive device 440. A transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 for transmitting the driving force to the driving slide member 420 and guiding the operation of the driving slide member 420 and the driven slide member 430, and lower end portions of the pair of base members 410 And a lower front plate member 460 connected to the drive side slide member 420 and the left side of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. And a cover member 470 which is disposed on the front side of the upper, and mainly includes a.

  The base member 410 includes a main body member 411 configured as a vertically long plate-like member, and a U-shaped concave portion that is disposed at a position that vertically coincides with both upper and lower ends of the main body member 411 and that opens to the front. A guide rod support portion 412 configured and a member disposed inside (vertical to the other base member 410) of a vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412 and extending to the front side of the main body member 411. A stopper 413, a first shaft support 414 protruding in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411 on the side opposite to the locking part 413 across a vertical line drawn from the guide rod support 412, A lowering regulating member 415 which is supported by the shaft supporting portion 414 and regulates a lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420; and a column-shaped protruding member which is disposed below the first shaft supporting portion 414 and is in front of the main body member 411. A second shaft support 416, the elevation regulating member 417 for regulating the upward movement of the driven sliding member 430 while being axially supported on the second shaft support portion 416 mainly comprises a.

  The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450, and has an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In the present embodiment, when the cover member 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, the front opening of the guide rod support 412 is closed, and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support 412.

  The locking portion 413 is a portion that vertically contacts the lower side surface of the fall prevention portion 435 of the driven slide member 430, and the driven slide member 430 further descends from the contact state. Regulate.

  The descent regulating member 415 and the ascent regulating member 417 are members that rotate in accordance with the elevating operation of the driving slide member 420 and have a role of regulating the movement of the driven slide member 430, which will be described in detail later.

  The drive-side slide member 420 is a member that has both left and right ends fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 and is moved up and down by the slide operation of the rack 452.

  The driven slide member 430 does not have an independent driving device, and its left and right ends are slidably supported by the guide rods 451, and move up and down by following the lifting and lowering operation of the drive slide member 420. The driven-side slide member 430 includes a main body member 431 having the third symbol display device 81 and configured to be long in the left-right direction, function units 432 arranged at both ends in the left-right direction of the main body member 431, A guide hole 433 which is a hole bored in the vertical direction in 432 and through which a guide rod 451 is inserted; a hook-shaped portion 434 which extends upward and downward in the left and right outer directions at the lower end of the function portion 432; It mainly includes a fall prevention portion 435 extending rearward inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the function portion 432 (on the side close to the other guide hole 433).

  The hook-shaped portion 434 is a portion that is hooked on the elevation regulating member 417. When the driven slide member 430 is located at the lowered position, the lift regulating member 417 wraps around and engages with the engagement surface 434a, which is the upper surface of the hook-shaped portion 434 (see FIG. 29), so that the driven slide can be performed. The member 430 can be prevented from moving in the ascending direction (for example, it can be prevented from bouncing due to the recoil of the fall). Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is inclined upward and the engaging claw portion 417e of the rising regulating member 417 is formed in parallel with the inclination, the engagement between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the rising regulating member 417 causes the horizontal direction. Wobble can also be suppressed.

  The shape of the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434 (outside the tip of the engagement claw 417e in the state shown in FIG. 29 (the portion on the right side in FIG. 29)) is based on the movement locus of the engagement claw 417e. Also have a shape that fits down. Therefore, even in a state where the engaging claw portion 417e and the hook-shaped portion 434 are engaged with each other and a load is applied to each other, the rotation operation of the elevation restriction member 417 can be performed.

  The drive device 440 includes a drive motor 441 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a drive gear 442 that is rotated by the drive force of the drive motor.

  The transmission device 450 includes a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410, and is slidably supported by the guide rod 451, and the drive side slide member 420 is fastened and fixed, and the drive gear 442. The rack mainly includes a rack 452 meshed from the inside (the inside of the pair of drive gears 442), and a vertically long plate-shaped contact wall 453 extending from the vicinity of the root of the rack 452 to the front side.

  The contact wall 453 has a role of rotating the elevation restriction member 417 to the release side and a role of receiving the urging force of the elevation restriction member 417 to move the rack 452 in a direction away from the drive gear 442, and details will be described later. I do.

  The lower front plate member 460 is bent such that the left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and the center portion is offset by a predetermined amount toward the back side compared to the left and right ends. A main body member 461 having a shape, a guide hole 462 formed in the left half portion of the main body member 461 along the left-right direction (in a manner inclining upward toward the outside), and extending above the main body member 461. And a tubular passage portion 463 whose upper end is opened to the front side.

  The guide hole 462 is a long hole through which the slide shaft 423b of the wiring housing member 423 is slidably guided.

  The tubular passage portion 463 is a tubular member through which a ball can pass, and in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 31), the second passage formation of the drive side slide member 420 is performed. It is a member through which a ball flowing down through the member 422 passes.

  The detailed configuration of the driving side slide member 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, FIG. 24 is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the drive side slide member 420.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the drive-side slide member 420 is a disk having a main body member 421 configured as a plate-like member elongated in the left-right direction and a rendering unit 422a configured of a circular liquid crystal. A second passage forming member 422 whose portion is fastened and fixed to the center of the main body member 421 from the front side, and a groove through which a ball can pass from the disk portion to the left as viewed from the front extends from the disc portion; A wire housing member 423 having one end pivotally supported at the lower left end of the forming member 422 in a front view and the other end supported by the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460; And a connection member 424 that has a passage portion that is axially supported and penetrates along the circumferential direction of the shaft, and that serves as a portion for introducing a sphere into the groove portion 422b of the second flow path forming member 422.

  The main body member 421 is open to the front side to a guide portion 421a that constitutes a part of a cylindrical portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and to a portion that extends from the center to the left as viewed from the front. Mainly includes a groove 421b disposed to be inclined downward to the left in a manner, and a discharge opening 421c formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at a lower left end of the groove 421b with a size larger than the diameter of the sphere. .

  The guide portion 421a is a groove portion having an arc-shaped cross section that is open to the rear side and extends in the vertical direction, and the open portion is closed by a rack 452 (see FIG. 22) of the transmission device 450, so that the guide rod is provided. 451 (see FIG. 22) is formed.

  The groove 421b is a member that forms a path of a sphere in cooperation with the second path forming member 422, and the sphere flowing down along the groove 421b is discharged to the back side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening 421c. You.

  The second passage forming member 422 includes a rendering portion 422a formed of a circular liquid crystal, a shaft support portion 422b protruding in a cylindrical shape from the disk portion disposed on the back side of the circular liquid crystal to the rear side, A sensor member 422c disposed below the shaft support portion 422b and detecting passage of a ball, and a groove that is opened to the rear side with a width that allows the ball that has passed through the sensor member 422c to flow down. A groove 422d having the same shape, a guide 422e forming a cylindrical portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and a shape capable of accommodating the connection member 424 between the shaft support 422b and the sensor member 422c. And a housing recess 422f that is recessed at the center.

  The shaft support 422b is a portion where the connection member 424 is supported. In a state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is disposed at the connection position, the sphere flowing down the left swing unit 500 passes through the sensor member 422c via the connecting member 424, and then passes through the passage formed by the grooves 422d and 421b. I do.

  The wire housing member 423 is a member that houses a wire that is extended from the lower front member 460 and the like and that is connected to the effect portion 422a and the like, and that is supported by the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 in a front view. It mainly includes a main body 423a, which is a rod-shaped portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a cylindrical slide shaft 423b protruding rearward from the lower end of the main body 423a.

  The main body portion 423a is a member that accommodates wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shaped cross section, and has a shape that is curved in a manner to be convex in a direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction. You. Accordingly, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape near the position of the pivot support with the second passage forming member 422, and the wiring can be prevented from being broken and broken.

  The slide shaft 423b is a rod-shaped portion inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.

  Next, the configuration of the connection member 424 will be described with reference to FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the connection member 424, FIG. 26B is a front view of the connection member 424 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26A, and FIG. FIG. 27 is a rear view of the connection member 424 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXVIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the connecting member 424 has a cylindrical portion 424a formed in a cylindrical shape and supported by the shaft supporting portion 422b, and extends in the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 424a. A plate-shaped upper wall portion 424b to be provided, and a curved plate-shaped lower wall portion 424c arranged to face the upper wall portion 424b with a length longer than the diameter of the sphere below the upper wall portion 424b in a front view. And a connection cover 424d that connects the rear side end portions of the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c and is provided between the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c, and is wound around and connected to the cylindrical portion 424a. And a torsion spring 424e for applying a downward (counterclockwise in FIG. 25B) urging force to the member 424.

  The upper side wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases as it approaches the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a from the radial end of the cylindrical portion 424a, and the side surface is formed along a straight line in FIG. It is a plate-shaped part.

  The lower wall portion 424c is a plate-shaped portion curved and formed along an arc centered on the axis of the cylindrical portion 424a, and has a space between the upper wall portion 424b and the upper wall portion 424b. Will be arranged.

  The connection cover 424d is a plate member that suppresses the sphere passing through the connection member 424 from spilling to the rear side. The opening of the connecting member 424 on the opposite side (front side) of the connection cover 424d is closed by the bottom of the housing recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 abutting from the front side. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from spilling from the open portion of the connection member 424.

  The operation of the connection member 424 with respect to the second passage forming member 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connecting member 424. Note that FIG. 27 illustrates a downwardly inclined state in which the opening formed by the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 is oriented in the left-right direction. In FIG. FIG. 27 corresponds to an upwardly inclined state in which the opening formed by the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the member 424 is directed obliquely upward, and FIG. 27 corresponds to a separated state described later (see FIG. 41), and FIG. This corresponds to a communication state described later (see FIG. 42).

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connection member 424 is rotatable around the shaft support 422 b in a state of being housed in the housing recess 422 f of the second passage forming member 422, and The front side end surfaces of the upper wall portion 424b and the lower wall portion 424c abut on the bottom of the housing recess 422f.

  The accommodation recess 422f is formed in a circular arc shape centered on the shaft supporting portion 422b along the outer diameter of the lower wall portion 424c in a portion facing the lower wall portion 424c in the state shown in FIG. 27. The curved wall portion 422f1 and a surface opposed to the curved wall portion 422f1 are recessed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1 and smoothly connected to the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in an upwardly inclined state (see FIG. 42). And a facing wall portion 422f2 having a curved surface to be formed.

  Since the curved wall portion 422f1 is radially contacted with the lower wall portion 424c in the downwardly inclined state of the connection member 424, the displacement of the connection member 424 in the axial direction can be suppressed.

  Therefore, even if the fitting between the shaft support portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connection member 424 is loosened (a state where the gap is large, for example, a state where the dimension has a gap between 0.5 mm and 1 mm), the connection member When the 424 is in the downward inclined state, the posture of the connection member 424 can be maintained with high accuracy by the contact between the lower wall portion 424c and the curved wall portion 422f1.

  On the other hand, when the fitting between the shaft supporting portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened, the operating resistance generated in the shaft supporting portion is reduced, so that the connection is performed unless a load from another member occurs. The member 424 can be reliably maintained in the downwardly inclined state by the action of gravity and the urging force of the torsion spring 424e. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the connection member 424 is maintained in the upwardly inclined state even when no load is generated from another member.

  The opposing wall portion 422f2 is a portion that guides the ball from the connection member 424 to the sensor member 422c. In the present embodiment, the sphere can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c by bending the surface facing the curved wall portion 422f1.

  The upward inclined state is formed in a communication state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connection member 424 communicate with each other. In this state, since the lower wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, the ball that has rolled and passed through the lower wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1, and the sensor member 422c After passing through the opening, it flows down the groove 422d.

  On the other hand, the downward inclined state is formed in a separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connecting member 424 are separated. In this state, the lower wall portion 424c extends to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower wall portion 422c and the wall surface of the housing recess 422f disposed opposite to the lower end portion (sensor member 422c). Is smaller than or equal to the diameter of the sphere, the sphere is prevented from passing through the connecting member 424 (the sphere is discharged from the lower end).

  Therefore, as described later, even if the ball reaches the connection member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the ball can be stopped by the connection member 424.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. 33, a description will be given of the elevating operation of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430. First, the positional relationship among the drive side slide member 420, the driven side slide member 430, and the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 29 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXX in FIG. FIGS. 29 and 30 show a state in which the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged at the lowered position, and the illustration of a pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. The transmission member 450 is made visible. Further, in FIG. 29, the lowering restriction member 415 and the raising restriction member 417 on the right side in a front view are partially enlarged, and the rack immediately before the contact wall 453 contacts the release convex portion 417c of the raising restriction member 417. The outline of 452 is shown in phantom lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the driven side slide member 430, in the lowered position, the fall prevention portion 435 is brought into contact with the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from below, and the hook-shaped portion 434 is raised. It comes into contact with the regulating member 417 from above. As described above, since the driven slide member 430 is configured to be restricted from moving in both the up and down directions, it is possible to prevent the driven slide member 430 from rattling in the vertical direction at the lowered position.

  In addition, a lift restricting member 417 and a locking portion 413 are provided with a guide rod 451 inserted into the guide hole 433 therebetween, and these can be brought into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven slide member 430, so that the function is improved. The portion 432 can be prevented from rattling in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even when a disturbance occurs in the driven-side slide member 430, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by a player at the moment when the driven-side slide member 430 is placed at the lowered position, the driven-side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the vertical position of the lifting control member 417 and the locking portion 413 are displaced from each other, the functional portion 432 rattles in an oblique direction (for example, a direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the lifting control member 417). Can be suppressed. Therefore, even when a disturbance occurs in the driven-side slide member 430, such as when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player at the moment when the driven-side slide member 430 is placed at the lowered position, the driven-side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  Note that, since the locking portion 413 is displaced upward as compared with the rising regulating member 417, the locking portion 413 is disposed at a position far from the driving slide member 420, and the locking portion 413 is The lifting operation of the member 420 can be hardly hindered. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the drive side slide member 420 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the descending regulation member 415 is disposed in front of the elevation regulating member 417, and the height at which the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450 is formed (length of the rack 452 protruding from the vicinity of the tooth root). Is set to a height short of reaching the descent control member 415, so that the descent control member 415 and the contact wall 453 do not abut in the rotation direction of the descent control member 415. In addition, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is disposed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the elevation regulating member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 and the descending regulation member 415 do not abut in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a protruding plate 453a that protrudes from the upper end of the contact wall 453 to the front side, and the protruding plate 453a can be brought into contact with the descent restricting member 415 in the rotation direction.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. Note that FIG. 31 illustrates a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up from the lowered position and is disposed at the connection position, and a pair of right and left cover members in the cover member 470 is not illustrated. Also, in FIG. 31, the lowering regulating member 415 and the rising regulating member 417 on the right side in a front view are partially enlarged.

  In a state where the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the connection position, a ball can be introduced into the connection member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 42).

  As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 31, the lift regulating member 417 is a member that covers the hook-shaped portion 434 from above in a state before the upper end of the contact wall 453 comes into contact with the rise regulating member 417, Rotation can be performed between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the released state shown in FIG. Note that the release state is not limited to the state of FIG. 31, but refers to a state in which the elevation restriction member 417 has been rotated from a position vertically above the hook-shaped portion 434 to a position where the elevation restriction member 417 is retracted.

  The elevation restricting member 417 includes a cylindrical portion 417a pivotally supported by the second shaft support portion 416, an extension plate 417b extending linearly in a tangential direction of the cylinder portion 417a, and one of the extension plates 417b. A release projection 417c vertically projecting from the end (lower end), an engagement projection 417d vertically projecting from the other end of the extension plate 417b, and the engagement projection At the protruding end of the hook-shaped portion 417d, the hook-shaped portion 434 extends in parallel with the extending direction of the hook-shaped portion 434 in an engaged state and is disposed above and inside (upper left of the enlarged view in FIG. 29) the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434. A dovetail portion 417e, a separation inclined portion 417f that is inclined downward on the upper side surface of the protruding end of the engagement convex portion 417d, and one end portion formed around the cylindrical portion 417a is formed on the main body member 411 of the base member 410. How to wrap the elevation regulating member 417 inward by being locked Mainly includes a spring 417g torsion biasing (Figure 29 enlarged view counterclockwise direction), the.

  The extension plate 417b extends above the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. Thus, when the release convex portion 417c is pushed up, the other end of the extension plate 417b can be moved in a direction away from the driven slide member 430, and the release operation can be performed.

  In the engaged state, even when the driven slide member 430 moves upward, the engagement claw 417e engages with the hook-shaped portion 434 (the engagement claw portion between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the functional portion 432). The movement of the driven side slide member 430 is strongly suppressed by the entry of the driven member 417e).

  The release operation of the elevation restriction member 417 will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the contact wall 453 is brought into contact with the release convex portion 417c, while the rising regulating member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. When the rack 452 is raised from this state to the state shown in FIG. 31, the end of the contact wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c, so that the lift restricting member 417 is wound in the outer winding direction (the clockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 31). ), The engaging protrusion 417d is retracted from above the hook-shaped portion 434 (released state).

  That is, the release operation of the elevation restriction member 417 can be performed only by the elevation operation of the rack 452. For this reason, for example, as compared with a case where a solenoid member for releasing the lifting restriction member 417 is separately provided, a driving device for releasing the lifting restriction member 417 is also used by the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22). And the number of driving devices can be reduced (product cost can be reduced). In addition, it is possible to prevent the rise regulating member 417 from being operated carelessly.

  In other words, according to the present embodiment, since the elevation regulating member 417 is operated in accordance with the arrangement of the rack 452, compared with the case where the elevation regulating member 417 is operated by another drive source (such as a solenoid), It is possible to prevent the operation timing of the rack 452 and the lifting control member 417 from being synchronized with each other and to cause an operation failure. When the driven slide member 430 moves upward, the lifting control member 417 is surely shifted to the release state. Can be done. For example, it is possible to prevent the rack 452 from being lifted up while the rise restricting member 417 is in the engaged state, so that an excessive load is applied to the hook-shaped portion 434 and the engaging projection 417d of the rise restricting member 417.

  Further, the rack 452 is raised, and the lift restricting member 417 is shifted to the released state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 is brought into contact with the lower end of the driven slide member 430, so that the rack 452 continues the lift operation. Only when the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 are separated from each other, an engaged state (see FIG. 29) is formed to prevent the driven slide member 430 from rattling while the driven slide member 430 is separated from the driven slide member 430. When the member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, a release state (see FIG. 31) is configured, and the driving force required for raising the driven side slide member 430 can be suppressed.

  Here, in the case where the driving slide member 420 pushes up the driven slide member 430 during the ascent operation of the drive slide member 420 as in the present embodiment, the disengagement between the driven slide member 430 and the engagement portion is performed. Can be performed by the operation of pushing up the driven side slide member 430, but in this case, it is necessary to make the engagement state enough to be released by the pushing up force of the driven side slide member 430, and it is difficult to firmly engage. Becomes In addition, in this case, there is a problem that the driven side slide member 430 vibrates due to a reaction generated when the driven side slide member 430 and the engagement portion are released, and the posture becomes unstable.

  In the present embodiment, on the other hand, the engagement is released by rotating the elevation regulating member 417 and retracting the elevation regulating member 417 from above the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven slide member 430. The force that can be applied to the driven-side slide member 430 and the force that causes the ascending restricting member 417 to rotate can be different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the force that suppresses the upward movement of the driven-side slide member 430 in the engaged state while suppressing the force required for release.

  Further, since the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 do not come into contact with each other when performing the releasing operation of the elevation restriction member 417, it is difficult for the driven side slide member 430 to recoil, and the driven side slide member 430 at the time of the release is released. Posture can be stabilized.

  In the connection state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421c of the drive side slide member 420 and the cylindrical passage 463 of the lower front plate member 460 communicate with each other. Thus, the sphere flowing down the second passage forming member 422 can be discharged to the cylindrical passage portion 463.

  32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. FIG. Note that FIG. 32 illustrates a state where the drive-side slide member 420 moves upward from the state illustrated in FIG. 31 and the protruding plate 453a of the transmission device 450 abuts on the lowering regulating member 415, and FIG. 32 shows a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 32, and the raised plate 453a is disposed at the raised position on the upper side of the lowering regulating member 415. In FIG. 33, the vicinity of the lowering control member 415 is partially enlarged.

  In the state illustrated in FIG. 32, the release convex portion 417c of the elevation restriction member 417 is in contact with the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 is disposed symmetrically, and the direction in which the release protrusion 417c contacts the contact wall 453 is also symmetrical. Therefore, the release convex portion 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive side slide member 420, and it is possible to suppress the drive side slide member 420 from rattling in the left-right direction during the elevating operation.

  Since the lift regulating member 417 is urged in the left and right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 by the torsion spring 417g, the load in the left and right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c. Can be hung. Accordingly, the driving slide member 420 is urged in a constant direction along the left-right direction, so that the posture of the driving slide member 420 during the elevating operation can be stabilized.

  Further, when the driving slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c returns the pair of left and right driving slide members 420 to the center position. The ascending restriction member 417 is left-right asymmetric.

  That is, on the side where the contact wall 453 moves in the direction approaching the release protrusion 417c, the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g is increased and the urging force is increased by further rotating the lift regulating member 417 to the release side. While the force for pushing back the contact wall 453 increases, the torsion spring 417g is rotated by rotating the ascending regulating member 417 in the direction opposite to the release side on the side where the contact wall 453 moves away from the release projection 417c. Is reduced, the urging force is reduced, and the force for pushing the contact wall 453 is reduced. Thereby, it is possible to suppress rattling in the left-right direction when the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down.

  Since the drive gear 442 and the elevation regulating member 417 are disposed on the same side with respect to the rack 452, the urging force of the torsion spring 417g acts in a direction to separate the rack 452 from the drive gear 442, so that the drive side slide member 420 The rack 452 and the drive gear 442 approach each other in the left-right direction, so that an increase in drive resistance can be suppressed (the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).

  That is, when the drive side slide member 420 rattles in the left and right direction and the rack 452 moves in a direction approaching the drive gear 442, the lift regulating member 417 is wound outward (the engagement protrusion 417 d is formed on the left and right outer sides of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400). In this case, the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g increases, and the urging force increases, so that the urging force for pushing back the drive side slide member 420 increases, while the rack 452 is driven. When moving in a direction away from the gear 442, the guide rod 451 supports the rack 452, so that the rack 452 separates from the drive gear 442 beyond a gap provided in a support structure between the guide rod 451 and the rack 452. Is regulated. Thereby, the gap between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is reduced, and it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the meshing resistance. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in a state where the driving slide member 420 and the driven slide member 430 are arranged at the ascending position, the lower surface of the projection plate 453 a of the transmission device 450 has the release projection 415 c of the descent regulating member 415. Contact the upper surface (locked state).

  The protruding plate 453a includes an inclined side surface 453a1 on the lower surface, which is inclined upward and outward toward the left and right.

  The descending inclined member 415 includes a cylindrical portion 415a pivotally supported by the first shaft support portion 414, an extended plate 415b extending linearly in a tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, and one of the extended plates 415b. A release protrusion 415c vertically projecting from an end (upper end) and having a semicircular tip is formed, and one end is connected to the main body member 411 of the base member 410 by being wound around the cylindrical portion 415a. And a torsion spring 415d for urging the descending restricting member 415 in the inner winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 33) by being stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the lowering restriction member 415. Therefore, the supply of the driving force of the driving motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held at the raised position, and the power consumption of the driving motor 441 can be reduced.

  In addition, the rotation of the descent restricting member 415 to the locked state shown in FIG. 33 is performed when the rack 452 is raised and the protruding plate 453a gets over the release convex portion 415c of the descent restricting member 415. Therefore, both the driving force for raising the rack 452 and the driving force for forming the locked state of the descent restricting member 415 can be generated by the driving motor 441 (see FIG. 2). That is, the drive motor 441 can be used as well, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Returning to FIG. 30, the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the descending regulation member 415, the elevation regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering regulating member 415 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 30) as compared with the raising regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 can abut on the rising regulating member 417 in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. And the rear side surface of the descent restricting member 415 can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the contact wall 453.

  Returning to FIG. The descent regulating member 415 and the contact wall 453 are contacted in the front-back direction. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the contact wall 453 and the elevation regulating member 417 are in contact in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 33), and the contact wall 453 and the downward regulation member 415 are in the front-rear direction (see FIG. (Vertical direction). Thereby, the rattling of the drive side slide member 420 in the left-right direction can be suppressed by the rising regulating member 417, and the longitudinal direction (the direction parallel to the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the driving gear 442) can be reduced by the descending regulating member 415. The rattling can be suppressed.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the area of the meshing surface due to the relative movement of the rack 452 and the driving gear 442 in a direction parallel to the tooth surface, and to cause the rack 452 to fall forward in a state where the rack 452 is arranged at the raised position. Can be prevented.

  By rotating the drive gear 442 in the direction in which the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, when the rack 452 is about to be lowered, the protruding plate 453a applies a load to the release protruding portion 415c, thereby lowering the lowering restricting member. 415 is rotated outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 33). Thus, the locking by the descending regulating member 415 is released, and the driving slide member 420 can be moved downward. That is, the locking by the descending regulating member 415 can be released by the driving force of the driving motor 441 (the driving source can be used as well), so that the product cost can be reduced.

  In addition, since the locking of the lowering regulating member 415 is released by the lowering operation of the driving side slide member 420, the lowering of the lowering operation is performed with the operation timing shifted as in the case of rotating the lowering restricting member 415 by another driving source. The drive-side slide member 420 is lowered before the restriction of the member 415 is released, so that it is possible to prevent the drive source and the lowering restriction member 415 from being overloaded.

  In the structure in which both the driving slide member 420 and the driven slide member 430 are maintained at the raised position in the raised position as in the present embodiment, the locking of each member at the raised position is performed by the driven slide member 430. However, in this case, the structure for connecting and separating the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 is complicated, and the cost is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the driven slide member 430 is maintained at the raised position by locking the drive slide member 420, the driven slide member 430 and the drive slide member 420 are maintained at the raised position. Therefore, the number of necessary configurations can be reduced (only the driving device 450 and the driving side slide member 420 can be used). In addition, the interlocking of the driven side slide member 430 with the drive side slide member 420 is performed solely by the action of gravity, thereby simplifying the structure between the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420. it can.

  When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven slide member 430 moves down on the rack 452. However, for example, the guide rod 451 becomes dirty and the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (see FIG. 22). ), The descending speed of the driven slide member 430 may be lower than the descending speed of the rack 452. Also in this case, when the driven side slide member 430 contacts the elevation restriction member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 acts on the separation inclined portion 417f of the elevation restriction member 417, and the elevation restriction member 417 can be rotated. By the weight of the driven side slide member 430, the lift regulating member 417 and the hook 434 can be engaged with each other.

  Next, the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 34, the left swing unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the first variable winning device 82a and the first specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13, and the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 82 is played. A passage for passage is provided inside. In the present embodiment, a sensor member 82b that detects that a ball has passed is provided between the first variable winning device 82a and the first specific winning opening 82. Note that the sensor member 82b is a part of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4).

  FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swing unit 500 is configured to hang the first passage forming member 520 downward and to the right in a front view, and is a unit that performs an effect by swinging the first passage forming member 520. is there.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the left swing unit 500 includes a base member 510 forming a skeleton, a first passage forming member 520 pivotally supported by the base member 510, and a base. A driving device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the member 510 to generate a driving force of the first passage forming member 520; a transmission device 540 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520; And a cover member 550 having an introduction cylindrical portion 552 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and connected to the first specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13.

  The base member 510 includes a main body member 511 formed of an L-shaped plate in a front view, a shaft support hole 512 formed in a front-rear direction right end of the main body member in a front-rear direction, and a shaft support hole. A first wall portion 513 which is arranged vertically above the hole 512 and has a flat plate shape whose surface faces in the front-rear direction, and at least one sphere leftward from the lower left end of the first wall portion 513 in a front view A second wall portion 514 which is disposed at an interval and has a curved plate shape whose surface faces in the left-right direction, and a sphere which is disposed on the back side of the second wall portion 514 and reaches the second wall portion 514 is A flow-down passage 515 that flows down, a shaft support portion 516 that is disposed on the lower left of the shaft support hole 512 in a front view and that is protruded in a columnar shape on the front side, and a lock that is provided around the axis of the shaft support portion 516. A wall 517 and a detection sensor 518 disposed above the shaft support 516 to detect the phase of the transmission device. To prepare for.

  The shaft support hole 512 is a hole through which the shaft support portion 521c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted. The first passage forming member 520 swings around the shaft support hole 512.

  The first wall portion 513 includes a pair of guide wall portions 513a extending from both ends in the left-right direction to the front side.

  The locking wall portion 517 includes an arc wall portion 517 a having an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 516 above the shaft support portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517 b extending downward and to the right in front view. .

  The arc wall portion 517a is an end surface of the detection sensor 518 and extends to a circumferential end surface of the shaft support portion 516.

  The first passage forming member 520 includes a long rod-shaped distribution base member 521, which is a member supported by the shaft support hole 512, and a distribution base member 521 disposed on the front side of the distribution base member 521. And a passage cover member 522 that is fastened and fixed and forms a passage through which the sphere can flow down with the distribution base member 521.

  The distribution base member 521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a that constitutes one side of the ball flow passage, and one ball extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 521a from the upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a. An intermediate plate portion 521b disposed at a position separated by a minute gap V1, and a shaft support portion 521c protruding rearward in a columnar shape near the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a and inserted through the shaft support hole 512. A long hole 521d formed in a plate-like portion extending in the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c along the extending direction, and a rear side from an end of the intermediate plate portion 521b on the side of the hanging plate portion 521a. And a gap V1 extending along the left side of the sorting projection 521e as viewed from the rear, in a manner that the width is reduced toward the outside in the radial direction of the shaft support 521c. The upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a extended to the front side Mainly and a curved wall portion 521f which is curved along the arc shape having a center.

  The hanging plate portion 521a has a shape in which the lower portion from the middle portion is bent downward from the middle portion as compared with the upper portion, and a ball feeding portion in which the front-side thick portion is shaved and thinned at the lower end portion. 521a1.

  The gap V1 is a space that allows a sphere reaching the right side of the distribution convex portion 521e in a front view to pass in the front direction.

  The passage cover member 522 has a plate-like plate-shaped portion 522a covered on the front side of the distribution base member 521, and extends in a plate-like shape from both ends in the short direction of the plate-shaped portion 522a toward the back side. And upper and lower wall portions 522b.

  The plate-shaped portion 522a is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and has a ball receiving portion 522a1 which is bent rearward at a portion of the lower end portion which is disposed in front of the ball feed portion 521a1 of the distribution base member 521. Prepare.

  The upper and lower wall portions 522b are portions that roll the sphere that has passed through the gap V1, and since the inclination angle changes at the middle portion as in the case of the hanging plate portion 521a, the falling speed of the sphere can be changed at the middle portion. it can.

  In the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b, a step is provided inside the front end portion. The step has a role of displacing the rolling sphere in a direction opposite to the upper and lower wall portions 522b (a direction from one wall portion to the other wall portion) to decelerate the sphere.

  The ball that has reached the lower end of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the rear side by the ball feeder 521a1 and the ball receiver 522a1. Thereby, the speed of the ball before discharge can be reduced, and the discharge of the ball can be stabilized.

  The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 that is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the drive gear 532 meshes with the main body gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.

  The transmission device 540 includes a main body gear portion 541 that is supported by the shaft support portion 516 and meshes with the drive gear 532, and a first passage forming member that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the eccentric position of the main body gear portion 541 to the front side. The eccentric convex portion 542 inserted into the long hole 521 d of the 520, the eccentric convex portion 542 extends in the radial direction from the main body gear portion 541, is configured to be able to abut on the locking wall portion 517, and is able to pass through the gap of the detection sensor 518. And an extension portion 543 that extends.

  The cover member 550 is connected to the first specific winning opening 82 at the right end of the main body member 551 in a front view, and has a rear end at the first end. A cylindrical introduction cylindrical portion 552 abutting on the wall portion 513, and a pair of guide wall portions 553 extending downward from the left and right ends of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 on the rear side surface of the main body member 551. Prepare mainly.

  The guide wall portion 553 is a portion that overlaps the guide wall portion 513a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The sphere that has passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 flows downward between the guide wall portions 513a and 553.

  The swing operation of the first passage forming member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40 are front views of the swing operation unit 500. FIG. 38 to 40, the illustration of the cover member 550 is omitted, and the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 in a cross-sectional view at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a is illustrated. The external shape is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  In FIG. 38, the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position is shown. In FIG. 39A, the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. In a state in which the split convex portion 521e is disposed at an intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a, in FIG. 39B, the first passage forming member 520 swings by a predetermined amount from the state illustrated in FIG. 40 shows a state immediately before contacting the connecting member 424, and FIG. 40 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. You.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 occurs when the transmission device 540 is rotated and the position of the long hole 521 d is moved with the movement of the eccentric convex part 542.

  As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, a direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric convex 542 and a direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (radial direction of the shaft support 521c) intersect perpendicularly. I do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress generation of a load for rotating the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the driving gear 532, and the power consumption of the driving motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  In the release position, the extension 543 of the transmission device 540 is disposed in the gap between the detection sensors 518 and abuts against the end of the arc wall 517a. That is, the extending portion 543 has both a role as a portion used for detecting the phase of the transmission device 540 and a role as a detent member.

  As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the right side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed by the distribution convex portion 521e to a path on the left side as viewed from the front, and is discharged to the outside of the game area through the downflow passage 515. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (a), at an intermediate position between the release position and the connection position, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed at an intermediate position between the pair of guide walls 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (stays on the distal end portion of the distribution convex portion 521e). ).

  As shown in FIG. 39B, in a state immediately before the first passage forming member 520 contacts the connection member 424, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (while the ball is still riding on the distal end portion of the distribution convex portion 521e, stay). Thereby, in the state of FIG. 39 (b), the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520, is sent to the connecting member 424, and is prevented from reaching the opposing wall portion 422f2.

  Here, the opposing wall portion 422f2 is smoothly connected to the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in the upward inclined state (see FIG. 42), so that the upper end portion is connected to the connecting member 424 in the downward inclined state (see FIG. 41). From the lower end of the upper side wall 424b. Therefore, when the ball is sent to the connecting member 424 in the downwardly inclined state and the ball collides with the upper end of the opposing wall 422f2, the opposing wall 422f2 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39B, the introduction of the sphere into the first passage forming member 520 is prevented, so that the sphere can be prevented from colliding with the opposing wall portion 422f2, It is possible to prevent the opposing wall portion 422f2 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 40, at the connection position, a direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric convex 542 and a direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (radial direction of the shaft support 521c) intersect perpendicularly. I do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress generation of a load for rotating the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the driving gear 532, and the power consumption of the driving motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

  In addition, at the connection position, the extending portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is brought into contact with the inclined wall portion 517b. Accordingly, the phase in which the transmission device 540 is stopped by abutting the extension portion 543 against the inclined wall portion 517b is stabilized, and the extension portion is compared with a case where a load is locally applied to the extension portion 543. 543 can be improved in durability.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed to face the guide wall portion 513a on the left side of the base member 510 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and has passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is sorted by the distribution convex portion 521e into a path on the right side in front view, and moves to the front side through the gap V1. From the upper and lower walls 522b of the passage cover member 522 (see FIG. 37).

  The flow of the sphere in the connected state will be described. First, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 82 from the game area through the first variable winning device 82a moves back and forth toward the back side through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 (see FIG. 36), and the first wall portion. When it comes into contact with 513, it flows down the passage formed by the guide walls 513 a and 553, moves forward and backward through the gap V <b> 1 of the first passage forming member 520, and moves upward and downward of the passage cover member 522. Roll on the lower wall of 522b.

  That is, before the ball flows down inside the first passage forming member 520, the ball is sent in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even if the balls are supplied to the first specific winning opening 82 in a daisy chain, the balls can be prevented from jumping and the like and can smoothly flow into the first passage forming member 520. Further, by causing the ball sent in the front-back direction to flow down along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), the direction of the speed of the ball can be changed, and the ball smoothly flows into the first passage forming member 520. Can be done.

  In the first passage forming member 520, the direction in which the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend is changed at an intermediate portion. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend along the straight line Y1 from the middle portion to the base end side (the shaft support portion 521c side), and extend from the middle portion to the front end side (opposite to the base end side). Up to a straight line Y2 inclined downward from the straight line Y1.

  Therefore, the speed of the ball rolling inside the first passage forming member 520 is slower from the base end to the middle portion than from the middle portion to the front end. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the ball immediately after the ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.

  Further, as compared with the case where the first passage forming member 520 is formed in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, the direction in which the ball is thrown from the first passage forming member 520 at the connection position (see FIG. 42). The angle with respect to the direction (vertical direction) in which the sphere is introduced into the sensor member 422c can be reduced. Thereby, the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422 can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the rotation of the transmission device 540 swings the first passage forming member 520, and the arrangement of the distribution convex portion 521e switches the path through which the ball flows down.

  Here, when a wall member is disposed to face the distribution convex portion 521e in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the distribution convex portion 521e approaches the wall member to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere. If the configuration is adopted, when the ball stays in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the ball may be caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, and a malfunction may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position illustrated in FIG. 40, an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the distribution convex portion 521 e and the second wall portion 514, and the distribution convex portion No wall member is disposed on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 across the 521e, and the second wall portion 514 is opened. Therefore, a situation in which the ball is bitten in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e does not occur, and malfunction can be prevented.

  With reference to FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, connection of the flow path between the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 will be described. 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500. In FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, the second passage forming member 422 is viewed in cross section and the connecting member 424 is visible, and the first passage forming member 520 has an outer shape at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a. The distribution convex portion 521e shown in the drawing is visible.

  FIGS. 41 and 42 show a state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 31). In FIG. 41, the left swing unit 500 is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 38). FIG. 42 illustrates a state in which the left swing unit 500 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 40).

  When the first passage forming member 520 is oscillated from the state shown in FIG. 41 to the state shown in FIG. 42, the distal end thereof abuts on the lower side surface of the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424, and the connecting member 424 is moved. Rock it. That is, since the connecting member 424 is moved along with the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, even if the stop position of the drive side slide member 420 is slightly deviated from an ideal position, for example, the first The generation of a gap between the distal end of the passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 can be suppressed. This suppresses the ball from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424, and stabilizes the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. Can be.

  By swinging the connecting member 424, the lower wall portion 424c on which the ball flowing down from the first passage forming member 520 rolls is moved in a direction approaching the tip of the first passage forming member 520. The gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 can be narrowed, and the ball is prevented from falling from the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. Therefore, the throwing of the ball can be stabilized.

  In the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower wall portion 424c is inclined downward toward the sensor member 422c communicating with the groove portion 422d (see FIG. 27). Thereby, the ball can be rolled along the downward inclination, and the ball can be stably sent to the second passage forming member 422.

  Note that the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting passage of the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) and the sensor member 422c through a sphere. For example, in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connection position shown in FIG. 42, the detected numbers of the spheres of the sensor members 82b and 422c match (the sphere remains in the first passage forming member 520). The swing of the first passage forming member 520 toward the release position (see FIG. 41) is started at the timing, thereby preventing the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 to the outside of the game area. can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the ball is distributed by moving the distribution convex portion 521e, and the first passage forming member 520 and the connection member 424 are brought into contact with each other by swinging the first passage forming member 520. The driving force required for the operation of forming the flow path of the sphere by contact is also used (provided by the driving force of the driving motor 531 (see FIG. 36) for operating the first passage forming member 520). Since the states are synchronized, for example, a situation in which a sphere is introduced into the first passage forming member 520 in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is disposed at the release position can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 to the outside of the game area.

  Further, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed at the upper end of the distribution base member 521, and partitions (forms the upper end) a wall of a sphere that flows down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36). Doubles. Thus, the cost of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the distribution is performed by other parts, and the balls distributed to the first passage forming member 520 can be surely separated from the hanging plate portion 521a and the passage cover member. 522.

  Next, the rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is a front view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600. FIG. 45 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the rotating unit 600 includes a case member 610 formed in a container shape with one side open, a guide member 620 covered on one side of the case member 610, A driving mechanism 630 disposed between the member 610 and the guide member 620, a rotating member 640 rotationally driven by the driving force of the driving mechanism 630, and a pitch disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. It mainly includes a device 650 and a guide member 680 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640.

  The case member 610 includes a bottom wall portion 611 having a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 erected from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front, and each of the wall portions 611 and 612 forms one surface. It is formed in a container shape whose side is open. The guide member 620 is formed in a disk shape having a ring shape in a front view, and is disposed (fixed) at the standing end of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. Thereby, an internal space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in the internal space.

  The guide member 620 is a member for holding the rotating member 640 so as to be displaceable, and has a connecting link operation groove 621 and an undulating link operation groove 622 formed in the front thereof. The connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section extending along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link of the rotating member 640, which will be described later. The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are inserted respectively.

  Note that the groove widths of the connection link operation groove 621 and the undulation link operation groove 622 are set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameters of the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connecting link operating groove 621 and the undulating link operating groove 622.

  When the rotation member 640 is rotationally driven, the connection link operation groove 621 acts on the connection link member 644 to increase or decrease the interval between the divided members DV (see FIG. 73), while the undulating link operation groove 622 Acting on the undulating link member 648, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are undulated (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, the connection link operation groove 621 and the undulating link operation groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 49 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 in a state where the rotating member 640, a part of the pitching device 650 and the guide member 680 have been removed, and FIG. 50 is a schematic front view of the guide member 620. In FIG. 50, the shapes of the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. Such a two-dot chain line is illustrated as a line passing through the center of the groove width of each of the action grooves 621 and 622.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the connecting link action groove 621 has a large-diameter portion 621a that is curved in an arc with a radius R1 about the axis O, and an arc-shaped curve with a radius R2 about the axis O. And a pair of connecting portions 621c connecting between the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to be larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2 <R1).

  The undulating link action groove 622 includes a large-diameter portion 622a curved in an arc with a radius R3 about the axis O, a small-diameter portion 622b curved in an arc with a radius R4 about the axis O, and a large-diameter portion thereof. 622a and a pair of connecting portions 622c connecting between the small diameter portion 622b. The radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to be larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4 <R3).

  In the present embodiment, the large-diameter portion 621a and the small-diameter portion 621b of the connection link operation groove 621 and the large-diameter portion 622a and the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link operation groove 622 are concentrically arranged about the axis O. In this case, the axis O coincides with the center of rotation when the rotating member 640 is rotated. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotated, the large diameter portions 621a and 622a and the small diameter portions 622a and 622b of the connection link operation groove 621 and the undulation link operation groove 622 act on the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648, respectively. The output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced by suppressing the force.

  In addition, the pair of connecting portions 621c of the connecting link action groove 621 are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase. Similarly, the pair of connecting portions 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase. Therefore, when the rotation member 640 is driven to rotate, the force applied to the connection link member 644 from one connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 and the force applied to the connection link member 644 from the other connection portion 621c. And can be offset. Similarly, the force applied to the undulating link member 648 from one connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 and the force applied to the undulating link member 648 from the other connecting portion 622c can be offset. Accordingly, the force applied to the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, so that the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced. .

  In this embodiment, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link action groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are formed to have different phases. That is, in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 becomes the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter of the undulation link operation groove 622. When the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is inserted into one of the portions 622b and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is connected to the connecting link 644a. It is inserted into one of the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b of the action groove 621.

  Since the connection portions 621c and 622c are portions for changing the interval between the divided members DV or displacing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647, they receive relatively large reaction force from the connection portions 621c and 622c. By preventing 644a and 648a from being simultaneously inserted into connection portions 621c and 622c, necessary driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the driving mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for driving the rotation of the rotating member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a first gear (first A transmission gear train to which the transmission gear 633a) meshes; a central transmission body 634 having a gear 634a meshed with the last gear (second transmission gear 633b) of the transmission gear train; The one-side distribution gear train and the other-side distribution gear train in which the first gear (first distribution gears 635a and 636a) meshes with the gear 634a, and the last gear (the first-side distribution gear train and the other-side gear train) of the one-side distribution gear train and the other-side gear train. It mainly includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and another-side rotation drive member 638 having gears 637a and 638a meshed with the three distribution gears 635c and 636c). The second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.

  The one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are members that are the end of the transmission path for transmitting the rotation driving force generated from the driving motor 631 (the output end of the driving mechanism 630). The motor itself is rotated by the rotational driving force, and the rotation causes the rotating member 640 to rotate. Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 51 (a) is a front view of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation member 638, and FIG. 51 (b) is the one-side rotation member 637 and the other on line LIb-LIb in FIG. 51 (a). It is sectional drawing of the side rotation member 638.

  Since the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are members formed in the same shape, only the one-side rotation drive member 637 will be described, and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described. Only the reference numerals are given in the diagram of FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the one-side rotation driving member 637 is formed in a disk shape, and the engaging portions 637b are recessed at a plurality of positions (three positions in the present embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer edge thereof. It is formed.

  The engaging portion 637b is a portion that engages with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and has a width (a distance between opposing surfaces) from the open side to the recessed inner side. ) Is formed substantially in a V-shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the axial direction). As described later, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement between the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641, and the rotation member 640 is rotated. Can be rotated.

  The one-side rotation driving member 637 is formed with a connection wall 637c that partially connects opposing inner surfaces of the engagement portion 637b. The connection wall 637c is formed in a shape curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front (axial view) with the center of the axis of the one-side rotation driving member 637 as a center, and at the open side of the engagement portion 637b (the one-side rotation driving member 637). (Outer edge side) are connected to each other, and the inner surfaces of the engagement portion 637b on the inner side of the concave portion are not connected.

  Here, when the rotation member 640 is driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637, the engagement and release of the engagement portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are intermittently repeated (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 starts to engage with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load is input, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 may be damaged. On the other hand, when the weight of the one-side rotation drive member 637 increases, a large output is required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the connecting wall 637c is formed only on the open side of the engaging portion 637b, reinforcement against an impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start to be engaged. And weight reduction can be effectively achieved at the same time. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced while improving the durability of the one-side drive member 637.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is disposed on the case member 610 except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the center transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back side of the guide member 620. Here, the holding structure of the center transmission member 634 on the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 600 cut along a plane including the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the central transmission body 634 is formed in a hat shape having a circular shape when viewed from the front and a central portion depressed, and a gear 634a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the central depressed portion, and the outermost edge is formed. A protruding portion 634b is formed to protrude radially outward from the portion in a flange shape.

  On the back side of the guide member 620, a pair of holding collars 623 and 624 (see FIGS. 47 and 48) are superimposed at three places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (ie, positions at 120 ° intervals). The extension 634 b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the pair of holding collars 623 and 624. Thus, the center transmission member 634 can be rotatably held on the guide member 620 via the pair of holding collars 623 and 624.

  That is, the displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 52) with respect to the guide member 620 can be regulated by bringing the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634. The displacement of the central transmission member 634 relative to the guide member 620 in the axial direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 52) is regulated by bringing the overhanging portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 into contact with the opposing surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623, 624. it can.

  In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 are formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front (when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the central transmission member 634). Accordingly, since the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 and the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634 can be in a relationship where their arc shapes circumscribe (i.e., point-contact) each other, their contact area is reduced. Thus, the frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, by adopting a structure for holding the outer edge side (overhang portion 634 b) of the central transmission member 634 in this manner, the central recessed portion of the central transmission member 634 is axially attached to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. There is no need to support it, and there is no need for a space for disposing parts for the pivotal support, so that the disposing space for the pitching device 650 described later can be secured accordingly.

  Next, the operation of the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, and illustrates a state where the center transmission member 634 is viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the drive mechanism 630 has a central transmission member 634 disposed at a position concentric with the axis O which is the center of rotation of the rotation member 640, and the second transmission member 634 is provided to the gear 634 a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633b and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged in a state where they are meshed. The third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase (that is, at positions opposing each other with the axis O interposed therebetween).

  Accordingly, when the drive motor 631 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633a, and the rotation of the second transmission gear 633b causes The center transmission member 634 is rotated.

  When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are respectively rotated with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, and the rotation is performed by the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution gear 635b and 636b. The gears 635c and 636c are transmitted to the gears 637a and 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 rotate. Is done.

  As described above, since the central transmission gear 634 is meshed with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a, the central transmission gear 634 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 631, whereby the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, the driving of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In this case, since the central transmission gear 634 is disposed concentrically with the axis O of the rotating member 640, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are viewed in the direction of the axis O. In this case, the rotary member 640 can be disposed inward (on the axial center O side) of the outer edge portion. That is, since the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 do not protrude outside the outer shape of the rotation member 640, the size can be reduced accordingly.

  When the guide member 620 is disposed on the case member 610, the engagement portions 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are located radially outward of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement between the engagement portions 637b and 638b and the engaged portion 641. Thus, the rotating member 640 can be rotated.

  In this case, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are disposed at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, at positions opposing each other with the axis O interposed therebetween). Therefore, as described later, the position at which the driving force is applied to the rotating member 640 (engagement position) is maximally separated, and the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In addition, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are disposed in postures (rotational positions) where the phases of the engaging portions 637b and 638b are different from each other. That is, when one of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is disengaged from the engaged portion 641, the other of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. (One and the other are prevented from being disengaged at the same time). Therefore, as described later, transmission of the driving force from the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 to the rotation member 640 can be suppressed from being intermittent, and the rotation of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. As described above, the rotation member 640 is an annular member in a front view that is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotation mechanism 630, and is positioned concentrically with the center transmission member 634 and the guide member 620. It is arranged on the front side of. In the present embodiment, the rotating member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Here, the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 54 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 640, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the rotating member 640 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member 640 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LV in FIG. 54B.

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 includes a plurality (30 in this embodiment) of divided members DV, and the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly to each other along the circumferential direction. Thereby, it is formed in an annular shape in a front view.

  In this case, the plurality of divided members DV are formed so that the distance between adjacent divided members DV can be changed. That is, the rotating member 640 includes a first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected to each other in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a second interval in which the divided members DV have an interval smaller than the first interval. To form a second section S2 that is connected in the circumferential direction. Note that, between the first section S1 and the second section S2, the interval between the divided members DV transitions from the first interval in the first section S1 to the second interval in the second section S2 (or vice versa). Is formed.

  FIG. 56 (a) is a front perspective view of the division member DV, and FIG. 56 (b) is a rear perspective view of the division member DV. FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the division member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the division member DV. 56 to 58, the connection link member 644 of the adjacent division member DV is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line in order to understand the connection structure between the division members DV.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the detected portion 641c is formed in a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV have The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. The divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed and the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed have the same other configuration except for the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c. Therefore, hereinafter, the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the split member DV includes an engaged portion 641, a rear side main body 642 having the engaged portion 641 disposed on the rear side, and a front side of the rear side main body 642. , A connection link member 644 whose base end is rotatably supported between the rear body 642 and the front body 643, and a front body 643 disposed on the front side of the front body 643. The plate holding member 645, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 that are displaceably held by the plate holding member 645, and the front side main body 643 and the plate holding member 645 are slidably disposed. And an undulating link member 648.

  As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion that is engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotation driving members 637 and 638 of the driving mechanism 630, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangular shape in a front view. The rear body 642 is disposed so as to protrude from the rear surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 56B).

  On the mounting surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the rear side main body 642, an opposing portion 641a is formed facing the rear side of the rear side main body 642 at a predetermined interval, and the opposing portion 641a and the rear side main body are formed. The outer edge of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the surface facing the second member 642. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the division member DV (one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642) from rising from the front of the guide member 620.

  A pair of columnar sliding rollers 641b is rotatably supported on the side of the mounting surface of the engaged portion 641 to the rear side body 642. The sliding roller 641b can make its rotation axis perpendicular to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the division member DV) and make its outer peripheral surface abut on the outer peripheral surface of the outer edge of the guide member 620. It is arranged in a posture. Thereby, the sliding resistance when the divided member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a plate-shaped detected portion 641c is formed to protrude from the surface opposite to the surface on which the engaged portion 641 is attached to the rear side main body 642. The detected portion 641c is a plate-shaped portion detected by the detection sensor 684 disposed on the guide member 680, and has a horizontal posture on the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV). You.

  The rear side body 642 is a part whose rear surface is placed on the front surface of the guide member 620 and slides on the front surface of the guide member 620 when the rotating member 640 rotates, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view. In a state where the rotating member 640 is provided on the guide member 620, the rear side main body 642 is provided in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, each of the rear side main body portions 642 is arranged in a radial straight line with the axis O as the center (see FIG. 54).

  The rear side body 642 is provided with a connecting link opening 642a and an undulating link opening 642b, which are groove-shaped openings extending linearly along the longitudinal direction, and a front surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 57). A shaft support portion 642c formed to support the base end side of the connection link member 644 between the front side main body 643 (the shaft support portion 643b) and a bent portion protruding from the rear surface on the other longitudinal side (the upper side in FIG. 58). 642d.

  The connection link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 of the adjacent division member DV is slidably inserted. When the insertion portion 644a is inserted into the connection link opening 642a, the division member is opened. The DV can be connected to the adjacent divided member DV via the connection link member 644. In addition, the connection link member 644 allows the tip of the insertion portion 644a inserted into the connection link opening 642a to be inserted into the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620.

  The opening width of the connection link opening 642a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connection link opening 642a.

  When the division member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 receives an action from the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a is connected to the connection link opening 642a. , The attitude of the connection link member 644 can be allowed to change with the action from the connection link action groove 621. As a result, the posture of the connection link member 644 with respect to the rear side main body 642 is generated, and the interval between the divided members DV can be increased or decreased.

  The undulating link opening 642b is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is slidably inserted. The undulating link member 648 guides the distal end of the insertion portion 648a inserted through the undulating link opening 642b to a guide member. 620 is inserted through the undulating link action groove 622.

  The opening width of the undulating link opening 642b is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the undulating link opening 642b.

  When the divided member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 receives an action from the undulating link operation groove 622 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 648a is moved to the undulating link opening 642b. , The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 can be undulated.

  As described above, the shaft support portion 642c is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side body 642 (the lower side in FIG. 57), so that the base end side of the connection link member 644 is viewed from the front with the engaged portion 641 in front view. It can be pivotally supported at the overlapping position. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637b, 638b of the respective rotation driving members 637, 638, and the divided member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement is set to be adjacent. To the divided member DV through the connecting link member 644.

  The bent portion 642d is protruded from the rear surface on the other longitudinal side (the upper side in FIG. 58) of the rear main body 642, and its protruding tip is opposed to the rear surface of the rear main body 642 at a predetermined interval. The inner edge of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the bent portion of the protruding tip and the opposing surface of the rear side body 642. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the rising of the divided member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620.

  In addition, the bent portion 642d is disposed in such a manner that its base can contact the inner peripheral surface of the inner edge of the guide member 620, and the distance between the base of the bent portion 642d and the sliding roller 641b described above is The dimension is set equal to or slightly larger than the radial width of the guide member 620. Accordingly, the displacement of the division member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620 can be regulated, and thus the main body member DV (the back side main body 642) is kept in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. Thus, the guide member 620 can be displaced in the circumferential direction.

  The front-side main body 643 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view having substantially the same size as the rear-side main body 642, and is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A link slide groove 643a and a shaft supporting portion 643b formed on the back surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (the lower side in FIG. 58) and supporting the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between a back side main body 642 (a shaft supporting portion 642c). And a support plate 643c protruding from the front and rotatably supporting the partition plate 647.

  The undulating link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the undulating link member 648 is slidably provided, and extends in parallel with the undulating link opening 642b. That is, the up / down link member 648 is slid along the up / down link slide groove 643a, so that the insertion portion 648a slides along the up / down link opening 642b.

  In the rear-side main body 642 and the front-side main body 643, the width dimension on the other side in the longitudinal direction is smaller than the width dimension on one side in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the front. That is, the rotation member 640 is formed in a wedge shape in a front view in which the width dimension of the portion located on the inner periphery side is smaller than the width dimension of the portion located on the outer periphery side. Therefore, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made smaller, the divided members DV can be brought close to each other, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, in the second section S2, the rear-side main body 642 and the front-side main body 643 are circumferentially brought into contact with the adjacent rear-side main body 642 and the front-side main body 643 (see FIGS. 54 and 73). .

  The connecting link member 644 is a long member, and its base end is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting portions 642c and 643b of the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and has a cylindrical insertion portion at the distal end side. 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a protrudes in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connection link member 644, and as described above, the connection link of the guide member 620 via the connection link opening 642a of the rear body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV. Through the working groove 621.

  The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the connection link opening 642a and the connection link operation groove 621. Therefore, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, the displacement of the divided member DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can be minimized, and the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained constant. This can suppress the variation in the position of the detected portion 641c, so that the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684 (see FIG. 71) can be improved.

  The base end side of the connecting link member 644 rotatably supported by the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the shaft supporting portions 642c and 643b of the main bodies 642 and 643) is connected to the connecting link opening 642a. Is also provided at a position close to the engaged portion 641. In the present embodiment, the base end side of the connection link member 644 is disposed at a position overlapping the engaged portion 641 in a front view (view in the direction of the axis O of the rotating member 640).

  As a result, the engagement portions 637b and 638b of the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, and the rotation of the one-side and the other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 is performed. When the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the divided member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via the connection link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  The undulating link member 648 is a member that is slidably held in the undulating link slide groove 643a of the front side main body 643, and has a columnar insertion portion 648a formed on the back side and an action groove 648b formed on the front side. It is formed. The insertion portion 648a is projected in a posture parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644, and as described above, is inserted into the up / down link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 through the up / down link opening 642b of the back side body 642. It is inserted.

  The action groove 648b is a portion for acting on the operated portion 646d of the display plate 646 by slidingly moving the undulating link member 648 to undulate the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647. It is formed in a groove shape extending linearly along the sliding direction, and an actuated portion 646d of the display panel 646 is slidably inserted between opposing surfaces of the groove portion.

  The display plate 646 has a plate portion 646a formed in a rectangular plate shape as viewed from the front, a shaft portion 646b and a connection shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and an operation groove 648b of the undulating link member 648 facing each other. And a plate-shaped actuated portion 646d inserted between the surfaces. Since the affected part 646d is formed by bending in a substantially S-shape when viewed from the front, when the undulating link member 648 is slid, the affected part 646d is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the sliding displacement. The display plate 646 can be rotated around the shaft portion 646b as a center of rotation.

  The partition plate 647 includes a plate-shaped plate portion 647a formed in a trapezoidal shape in a front view, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and a pair of shaft portions 647b on the same side as the pair of shaft portions 647b. And a shaft support portion 647c that is formed and rotatably supports the connection shaft 646c of the display panel 646.

  Here, as described above, the rotation unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate a roulette that rotates a wheel in which a plurality of pockets are continuously provided in a circumferential direction and drops a thrown ball into one of the pockets. The space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 of one divided member DV and the partition plate 647 of the adjacent divided member DV is a pocket, and the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) has a red color. Alternatively, black numbers are added and different numbers (1 to 29) are displayed.

  In this embodiment, one display panel 646 is colored green and has a predetermined mark (star shape). Further, only the display plate 646 of the rotating member 640 located in the first section S1 is visually recognized by the player. That is, the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member disposed on the front side thereof, and is made invisible to the player.

  The plate holding member 645 includes a shaft support 645a that rotatably supports the shaft 646b of the display plate 646 and a shaft support 645b that rotatably supports the shaft 647b of the partition plate 647. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front side main body 643 by the pivotal support by 645a and 645b.

  In this case, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated around the shaft portion 646b with the sliding displacement of the undulating link member 648. Then, the rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, and the partition plate 647 is rotated around the shaft portion 647b as a rotation center. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the division member DV in a state where it is disposed in the first section S1, and FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) It is the upper surface perspective view and lower surface perspective view of the division | segmentation member DV in the state arrange | positioned in 2nd area S2. 59 and 60 show a state in which a part of the configuration is seen through for easy understanding, and the illustration of the connecting link member 644, the detected portion 641c, and the bent portion 642d are omitted. .

  As shown in FIG. 59, in a state where the division member DV is arranged in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is inserted into the small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620. It is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid and displaced to the other longitudinal side of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the inner peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the axis O side), As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is placed in the horizontal position, while the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is placed in the upright position.

  Note that the horizontal posture is a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the back surface of the rear side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the division member DV), and the standing posture is a plate of the partition plate 647. The portion 647a is in a posture of being orthogonally parallel to the rear surface of the rear side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the divided member DV).

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the division member DV is arranged in the second section S2, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is connected to the large diameter portion 622a of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 (see FIG. 50). Is inserted through. Therefore, the up-and-down link member 648 is slid to one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear body 642 and the front body 643 (that is, the outer periphery of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the side opposite to the axis O). Thereby, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted from the horizontal position to the plate portion 647a side of the partition plate 647, and is disposed in the inclined position, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is moved from the upright position. The display plate 646 is tilted toward the plate portion 646a, and is disposed in an inclined posture.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, so that the display plate 646 is rotated by the sliding displacement of the undulating link member 648. The partition plate 647 can also be rotated via the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c.

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately provide the undulating link action groove and the undulating link member for the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647. The link action groove and the undulating link member can be shared. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is heavier than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (that is, the state in which the plate 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted up and the plate 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward), the state shown in FIG. When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is in the horizontal position and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is in the upright position, the rotation action of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) by its own weight is used. Thus, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and quickly.

  That is, since the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward, the display portion 646 is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the display plate 646 is tilted downward, so that a horizontal posture can be formed and the rotation of the display plate 646 (own weight). Is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connection shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, whereby the partition plate 647 can be lifted to form an upright posture. Therefore, even when the rotation is hindered by the attachment of dirt or dust, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be reliably and promptly formed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the length of the display plate 646 that the plate portion 646a projects from the shaft portion 646b is set to be larger than the length of the partition plate 647 that the plate portion 647a projects from the shaft portion 647b. Therefore, the center of gravity of the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 can be separated from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 can be close to the shaft portion 647b. As a result, the state shown in FIG. Can be performed more reliably and promptly by utilizing the weight of the display panel 646.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. The pitching device 650 is a device for throwing the ball B to the rotating member 640, is housed in a central depression of the central transmission member 634 of the driving mechanism 630, and is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Here, the pitching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the pitching apparatus 650. FIG. FIG. 62 shows a state in which the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651, and illustration of the passage member 655 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the pitching device 650 includes a case body 651 formed in a container shape with an open front side, an arm rotating mechanism 660 disposed inside the case body 651, and a holding piece projecting / retracting. It mainly includes a mechanism 670, a passage member 655 disposed on the front side of the case body 651, and a sphere B formed of a translucent material into a sphere.

  The case body 651 has a substantially circular bottom wall portion 651a in front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b standing upright from the bottom wall portion 651a toward the front, and a radially outer portion from the outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b. And an overhanging wall portion 651c formed so as to protrude in a flange shape toward the front, and the overhanging wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the back side of the guide member 620, so that the standing end (opening portion) of the outer wall portion 651b is provided. Are disposed substantially at the front of the rotating member 640 (the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646).

  A ball holding portion 652 is provided in front of the bottom wall portion 651a. A spherical depression having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the ball B is formed on the front surface of the ball holding portion 652, and the depression is set as a holding position (initial position) of the ball B. That is, when the ball B is placed on the ball holding portion 652, the ball B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).

  In this case, the pitching device 650 is disposed with the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 positioned at the lowest position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B is moved to the outer wall portion. The inner peripheral surface of 651b (inner passage 651c1) rolls and is held on holding piece 677 at the projecting position of holding piece retracting mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. FIG. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pitching apparatus 660 in a state where the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is located at the holding position. FIG. 65 is a view in which the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is located at the separated position. FIG. 17 is a front view of the pitching device 660 in a folded state. 64 and 65 show a state in which the front case 662 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 has been removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a rear case 661 disposed on the bottom wall 651a of the case body 651, a front case 662 disposed in front of the rear case 661, A crank member 663 and an arm member 664 rotatably held between the opposing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, and a drive motor 665 and a pinion gear 666 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664. Prepare.

  Shafts 661a and 661b protrude from the rear case 661, and a crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a, and an arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. A gear 663a meshed with the pinion gear 676 is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the crank member 663, and a pin portion 663b protrudes at a position eccentric from the center of rotation (the shaft 661a). A sliding groove 664a into which the pin 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted extends linearly in the arm member 664, and a rotation center (shaft 661b) is formed with respect to the sliding groove 664a. ), A curved portion 664b in a front view shape obtained by dividing the annular shape into halves is formed.

  Therefore, the drive motor 665 is driven to rotate in the forward or reverse direction, and the crank member 663 is rotated through the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is rotated. By acting on the sliding groove 664a of the arm member 664, the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction around the shaft 661b.

  That is, the arm member 664 has a holding position (see FIG. 64) for holding the ball B on the ball holding portion 652 with the bending shape of the bending portion 664b along the outer peripheral portion of the ball holding portion 652, and a ball holding portion for holding the bending portion 664b. The ball B can be rotated (oscillated) between the ball holding portion 652 and the separated position (see FIG. 65) at which the ball B drops from the ball holding portion 652 to the inner peripheral passage 651c1.

  In the present embodiment, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b (a range of a central angle of about 90 degrees on a side (lower side) separated from the shaft 661b) is formed by the cantilever plate 664c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-like body that curves along the inner peripheral surface of the bending portion 664b, and a shaft 664c1 provided on the base end side is rotatably supported by the bending portion 664b, and has a distal end side. Is held upward (inward in the radial direction) by the elastic force of the leaf spring 667a of the limit switch 667 disposed on the rear side (outer peripheral surface side) of the optical disc.

  Therefore, when the ball B is held by the ball holding portion 652 in a state where the arm member 664 is located at the holding position, the weight of the ball B pushes down the cantilever plate 664c about the shaft 664c1 as a rotation center, If the ball B is not held by the ball holding portion 652 while the limit switch 667 is turned on, the cantilever plate 664c is set in the posture in which it is lifted as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence or absence of the ball B in the ball holding unit 652 can be detected.

  In this case, the concave portion of the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the sphere holding portion 652 are formed to have such a size that the sphere B can be displaced when the arm member 664 is arranged at the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664b and the inner diameter of the depression of the ball holding portion 652 are made larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when an external force (vibration) is input by the player being hit or shaken by the pachinko machine 10, the ball B can be displaced in accordance with the input of the vibration. That is, when the ball B is displaced (vibrated), the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced with the vibration, and the limit switch 667 can be turned on / off. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, the input of the external force to the pachinko machine 10 can be detected using the arm rotation mechanism 660.

  Returning to FIGS. 61 and 62, the description will be continued. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 is rotated to the separated position, the ball B is rolled on the inner peripheral surface (the inner peripheral passage 651c1) of the outer wall 651b, and the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is moved. It is held on the holding piece 677 at the projecting position (see FIG. 68). The holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is formed such that the holding piece 677 is able to protrude and retract between the protruding position and the retracted position, and when the retaining piece 677 is retracted to the retracted position, the ball B is moved to the plurality of rotating members 640. Is thrown on any one of the divided members DV (display panel 646). Here, the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the protruding position. FIG. 67 is a holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG.

  FIG. 68A is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the protruding position, and FIG. 68B is a holding view taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the one-side retracting mechanism 670. FIG. 69A is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 69B is a line LXIXb-LXIXb of FIG. 69A. 10 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is formed to be curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall 651 b of the case body 651, and is disposed on the bottom wall 651 a of the case body 651. Rear case 671, a front case 672 disposed in front of the rear case 671, a slide member 673 slidably held between opposing surfaces of the rear case 671 and the front case 672, and the slide member A drive motor 675 and a pinion gear 676 for driving the 673 are provided, and a holding piece 677 that comes and goes with the sliding displacement of the slide member 673 is provided.

  The rear case 671 includes two sets of one-to-one sets of roller members 674 that are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and holds the slide member 673 between the sets of roller members 674 so as to be slidable. The rear case 671 includes a sliding base 671a having a rectangular plate shape as viewed from above, which is formed so as to protrude from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction toward the front side, and the upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the front base 672. The sliding displacement (projection to the front side and immersion to the back side) of the holding piece 677 is guided between the lower surface (outer peripheral surface) and the lower surface of the holding piece 677.

  A pin portion 673a protrudes from one end (lower portion) in the circumferential direction of the slide member 673, and a rack gear 673b meshed with the pinion gear 676 is formed on the other end (information portion) in the circumferential direction. It is engraved along the surface. Further, a sliding groove 677a into which the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 is slidably inserted is bent and extends in the holding piece 677 in a substantially Z-shape. That is, the sliding groove 677a has one end (the right side in FIG. 66) offset from the other end (the left side in FIG. 66) toward the front side.

  Therefore, by driving the drive motor 675 to rotate in the forward or reverse direction and rotating the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675, the slide member 673 is slid and displaced via the rack gear 673b. By causing the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 to act on the slide groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be protruded to the front side or immersed to the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 can be slid and displaced between a protruding position (see FIG. 68) protruding toward the front side and an immersing position (see FIG. 69) immersing toward the rear side.

  Here, on the upper surface of the holding piece 677, the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner peripheral passage 651c1) is located on the back side (the right side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). A curved surface 677b curved concentrically with the inner peripheral passage 651c1 and smoothly connected in the circumferential direction to the inner circumferential passage 651c1, and connected to the edge of the curved surface 677b and toward the front side (the left side in FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). And a descending inclined surface 677d which is continuous with the edge of the inclined surface 677c and which is inclined downward toward the front side.

  Therefore, in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the protruding position (see FIGS. 68A and 68B), the holding piece 677 falls down from the ball holding portion 652 and rolls on the inner circumferential passage 651c1, thereby bending the holding piece 677. The rolling of the ball B reaching the surface 677b to the front side (the left side in FIG. 68 (b)) is regulated by the rising slope of the rising slope 677c, and is held on the holding piece 677 (curved surface 677b). Can be.

  On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is sunk to the rear side from the protruding position and is arranged at the sunk position (see FIGS. 69A and 69B), the front side of the front case 672 faces the rear side (FIG. 69B ) The ball B whose movement is restricted to the right) is positioned on the descending inclined surface 677d after climbing over the ascending inclined surface 677c with the displacement of the holding piece 677 in the immersion direction (back side). Thus, the ball B can be rolled along the descending slope of the descending inclined surface 677d, and the ball B can be thrown toward the front side (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  Since the curved surface 677b has both sides in the circumferential direction smoothly connected to the inner circumferential passage 651c1, the ball B dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolling on one inner circumferential passage 651c1 is bent by the holding piece 677. It can pass over the surface 677b and roll to the other inner circumferential passage 651c1. That is, the ball B can be reciprocated between the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on one side in the circumferential direction and the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on the other side in the circumferential direction via the curved surface 677b. Also, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located below the inner peripheral passage 651c1, when the momentum of the ball B is lost and the rolling is converged, the ball B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. Can be done.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, the passage member 655 is provided on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is located on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670, and the ball B thrown by the immersion operation (immersion into the immersion position) of the holding piece 677 is divided by the dividing member DV (display) of the rotating member 640. The ball 646) has a throwing path 655a serving as a path when the ball is thrown up, and a return path 655b serving as a path when returning the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 to the ball holding portion 652.

  The throwing path 655a has a groove 655a1 having a substantially U-shaped cross-section and having a width substantially equal to that of the downwardly inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 and extending to the front side. A front portion 655a2 connected to the side edge portion and substantially flush with the display plate 646 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and a front portion 655a2 standing from both sides in the width direction of the front portion 655a2 and the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 A pair of facing portions 655a3 facing each other at substantially the same spacing as that of the partition plate 647 is provided.

  Therefore, when the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is retracted to the retracted position, the ball B rolled on the downwardly inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 is received by the groove 655a1, and the extending direction of the groove 655a1. , The ball B can be thrown while suppressing rattling.

  Further, the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the division member DV, and the opposing interval of the pair of opposing portions 655a3 is substantially the same as the opposing interval of the partition plate 647 of the split member DV. The ball B thus formed can be smoothly arranged on the display plate 646 of the division member DV. When the ball B is thrown, the rotation member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotational position) where the partition plate 647 of the division member DV matches the facing portion 655a3 based on the detection result by the detection sensor 684 described later.

  The return passage 655b includes a rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface for rolling the ball B sent from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 to the downstream side when the ball B is received on the upstream side, and a downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1. And a standing portion 655b2 that is formed to be upright and curved so as to direct the rolling direction of the ball B toward the back side.

  In the front view of the pitching device 650, the rolling portion 655b1 has the upstream side arranged on the inner peripheral edge of the rotating member 640 and the downstream side arranged on the front side of the ball holding portion 652b. Further, the rolling portion 655b1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side, and to be inclined downwardly toward the ball holding portion 652 on the downstream side.

  The sphere B placed on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 and conveyed in the circumferential direction with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is moved radially by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b of the guide member 680 described later. When the ball B is pushed out to the upstream side and is fed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B is rolled downstream by the rolling portion 655b1 and dropped to the ball holding portion 652 while being guided by the standing portion 655b2. You.

  Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. As described above, the guide member 680 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member disposed along the lower part of the rotating member 640, and guides the sphere B on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 at the time of transportation accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 640 (that is, the guide member 680). The ball B is supported from below), and a detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is held. Here, the guide member 680 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG.

  70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide member 680 includes a base 681 disposed on the case member 610, a plate-shaped transmission plate 682 disposed on the front side of the base 681, and a rear side of the transmission plate 682. , And a plurality of (six in this embodiment) detection sensors 684 disposed on the base 681.

  The base portion 681 is a member formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape at a central angle of approximately 120 degrees (that is, a shape curved in an arc shape in a front view), and a guide surface 681a is formed on an inner peripheral surface side thereof. . The guide surface 681a is arranged on the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member 640, and faces the sphere B arranged on the division member DV (that is, the space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). That is, it is arranged on the division member DV of the rotating member 640, and supports the ball B conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 from below.

  A return guide 681b is formed on the inner peripheral surface side of the base 681, and is connected to the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681a. The return guide 681b is a portion for sending the ball B conveyed along with the rotation of the rotating member 640 to the return passage 655b of the passage member 655, and has a smaller width than the guide surface 681a and a radial direction. By being formed in a shape protruding inward, the rotating member 640 is disposed facing the divided member DV (display plate 646) (see FIGS. 43 and 44).

  Therefore, when the ball B placed on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 is conveyed in the circumferential direction along with the rotation of the rotating member 640, the return guide is provided by the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the divided member DV. Sphere B is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of 681b. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the ball B is pushed radially inward by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b, and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b.

  Here, even when the formation of the return guide 681b is omitted, if the rotating member 640 is rotated to the position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) is inclined downward toward the return passage 655b, the partition plate is not rotated. The ball B can be dropped into the return path 655b along the downward slope of 647. However, in this case, the ball B is conveyed upward before the ball B starts rolling by its own weight, so that the falling position when the ball B is dropped becomes high and the ball B Since the ball B is dropped after being rolled along the descending inclination, the moment when the ball B is dropped is large. Therefore, the return passage 655b may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, by providing the return guide 681b, the falling position when the ball B is dropped into the return passage 655b can be lowered, and the ball B slides on the return guide 681b. The ball is sent to the return passage 655b while being sent, so that the speed of the ball can be reduced. As a result, breakage of the return passage 655b can be suppressed.

  The transmission plate 682 is a portion facing the divided member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 at a predetermined interval (interval capable of holding the ball B), and a part of the upper edge side portion in the center in the width direction is formed. The passage member 655 is extended upward to a position facing the throwing path 655a (front portion 655a2). This can prevent the ball B thrown from the throwing device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 from jumping out.

  In addition, the transmission plate 682 is not only the divided member DV on which the ball B is thrown (that is, the divided member DV having the same phase as the front part 655a2 of the ball-sending passage 655a), but also the downstream side of the divided member DV (the Since it is formed with a size (width dimension) that can partially face the divided member DV adjacent to the downstream side in the transport direction), the ramp of the ball B thrown from the throwing path 655a can The ball B can be easily converged, and the ball B can be stably transported to the return guide 681b.

  On the other hand, the transmitting plate 682 has a size (width dimension) that can face the divided member DV on which the ball B is thrown and the divided member DV adjacent to the downstream side of the divided member DV, and the divided member DV on which the ball is thrown. And it does not face the divided member DV located downstream from the adjacent divided member DV. That is, the ball B can be exposed between the edge of the transmission plate 682 on the downstream side in the transport direction of the ball B (the right side in FIG. 70) and the return guide 681b, and the transport of the ball B can be visually recognized by the player. Can be easier.

  In addition, since the transmission plate 682 is entirely formed of a light-transmitting material, it is possible for a player to see through the member and the ball B located on the back side thereof. Therefore, the thrown ball B passes through the throwing path 655a, falls between the display plate 647 and the transmission plate 682 of the divided member DV, and rotates by the rotation of the rotating member 640 while being supported by the guide surface 681a. A series of transported modes can be visually recognized by the player.

  The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the base 681 together with the guide surface 681a, and is formed as a plate-like body that curves along the guide surface 681a (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the base 681). One end of the cantilever plate 683 in the circumferential direction is rotatably supported on the base 681 by a shaft 685, and the other end in the circumferential direction is formed by the elastic force of a leaf spring of a limit switch (not shown) disposed on the base 681. It is maintained in a posture raised upward (inward in the radial direction).

  In a posture in which the other end in the circumferential direction of the cantilever plate 683 is lifted upward, the limit switch is off, and when the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, the ball B Due to the weight, the cantilever plate 683 is pushed down around the shaft 685 as the center of rotation, and the limit switch is turned on. Thereby, it can be detected that the ball B thrown from the ball throwing device 650 is arranged at an appropriate position (the divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

  On the other hand, when the ball B is conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 and the weight of the ball B acting on the cantilever plate 683 is reduced to a predetermined value or less, the posture in which the cantilever plate 683 is lifted as described above. And the limit switch is turned off.

  The detection sensor 684 is a sensor device for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640, and is formed as a non-contact type sensor in which a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit are arranged to face each other. Are disposed on the movement locus of the detection portion 641c of the divided member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1.

  Therefore, a plurality of (six in the present embodiment) divided members DV that are adjacent in the circumferential direction can be respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the detection sensor 684, and the rotating member 640 is moved by a predetermined amount (that is, corresponding to the first interval). Each time the rotation is performed by the amount corresponding to the rotation amount), the divided member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be shifted in the circumferential direction.

  In this case, as described above, the detected portion 641c is formed in a part (15 in this embodiment) of the plurality of divided members DV, while the remaining divided members DV are The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. Therefore, in the detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed is disposed, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned on. The detection sensor 684 in which the divided member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed is arranged to receive the light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion, and the detection signal is turned off (see FIG. 76). As a result, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on a combination of the detection results of the respective detection sensors 684, as described later.

  In the present embodiment, six (ON / OFF) detection results based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively, so that 64 (= 2 to the sixth power) is obtained. Different combinations can be formed. In this case, the number of the divided members DV is 30. Therefore, as described later, the detection sensor 684 detects which of the plurality of divided members DV is located at the reference position. It can always be determined based on the result.

  Next, the operation of the rotation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, an operation of changing the interval between the divided members DV when the rotating member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640. FIG. 73 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the first section S1, and FIG. 73 (b) is a part of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the second section S2. It is an enlarged front view.

  In order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, FIGS. 72 and 73 show only the rear side main body 642, the connecting link member 644, and the undulating link member 648 among the components of the dividing member DV. 73 shows a state in which the connecting link operation groove 621 and the undulating link operation groove 622 are hatched.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the rotating member 640 is a member that is formed to be rotatable around the axis O as a center of rotation (that is, along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620). Endlessly connected to That is, in each of the divided members DV, the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is rotatably supported by the back side body 642, while the insertion portion 644a on the distal end side of the connecting link member 644 is on the back side of the adjacent divided member DV. It is inserted into the connection link action groove 621 through the connection link opening 642 a in the main body 642.

  As described above, the rear side main body 642 of the divided member DV has the sliding roller 641b on one side in the longitudinal direction and the bent portion 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction abutting on the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the guide member 620. When the guide member 620 is moved in the circumferential direction, the posture of the guide member 620 with respect to the guide member 620 is such that the axis O is located on an extension of the longitudinal direction of the back side body 642 (that is, the axis O is radiated about the axis O). (A linear posture). That is, only movement in a state where the posture is maintained is allowed.

  In this case, the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed at a position closer to the base end side (the rotatably supported side) of the connection link member 644 than the small-diameter portion 621b. When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the action groove 621 (see FIG. 73A), the connection link member 644 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the rear side body 642. As a result, the back-side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (the back side main body 642) in the first section S1 can be made a large interval (first interval).

  On the other hand, the small-diameter portion 621b of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the base end side (the side rotatably supported) of the connection link member 644 than the large-diameter portion 621a. When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the small diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73 (b)), the connection link member 644 is positioned along the longitudinal direction of the rear side body 642, and The side bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (the back side main body 642) in the second section S2 can be made a small interval (second interval).

  Here, as described above, the rotating member 640 is an effect device formed by imitating roulette, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a). That is, an effect is performed by allowing the player to visually recognize the identification information displayed on the display board 646. Therefore, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the display board 646 (display of identification information) is preferably large, and in order to ensure a variation in the effect, the number of display boards 646 (the identification information Type) is preferably large.

  In this case, considering the visibility of the player, the display of the identification information (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646) needs to have a certain size or more, and the size is maintained. When the number of display of the identification information (the number of the display boards 646) is increased while increasing the diameter of the rotating member 640, the rotating member 640 is not accommodated in a predetermined arrangement space, but is rotated so as to fit in a predetermined space. When the diameter is reduced, the number of displayed identification information (the number of display boards 646) decreases, and it becomes impossible to secure a variation in the effect.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and the first section S1 having the interval smaller than the first interval in the first section S1. As described above, the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) located in the first section S1 is formed while the rotating section 640 can be formed with the second section S2 in which the division member DV is circumferentially connected at intervals of 2. The display is made visible to the player (the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member).

  Therefore, compared with the case where all of the plurality of divided members DV are connected at the first interval, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In addition, the number of display of the identification information (the number of the display boards 646) can be increased while the display of the identification information (that is, the display board 646) has a certain size or more. As a result, it becomes impossible to ensure the visibility of the player and the variation of the effect.

  Here, in the first section S1, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is disposed in a horizontal posture (a posture parallel to the moving plane of the division member DV) in the first section S1. The identification information displayed at 646 can be easily recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, in the second section S2, as described above, the dividing member DV is in a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display panel 646 is higher than the horizontal posture in the first section S1. Interference with the DV can be suppressed, and the divided members DV can be brought closer to each other. That is, the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 can be reduced. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is disposed on the upper surface of the front-side main body 643 so as to be displaceable (rotatable), and in the second section S2, the plate portion 646a is connected to the adjacent divided member DV (plate holding member). The member 645) can be lifted above the upper surface (that is, a position where no interference occurs) (see FIG. 54). Therefore, the dividing member DV can be brought close to the position where the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 come into contact with each other. That is, the second interval in the second section S2 can be further reduced. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the rotating member can be suppressed.

  Next, the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 74A to 74D are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and illustrate the one-side rotation driving member 637 viewed from the front.

  FIGS. 74 (b), 74 (c), and 74 (d) correspond to the states rotated by 30, 60 and 90 degrees from FIG. 74 (a), respectively. Also, in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV is shown in a cross-sectional view, and the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 is indicated by a two-dot chain line. It is illustrated by using FIG.

  Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are formed in the same shape as each other as described above. In the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by these, only the driving operation by the one-side rotation driving member 637 is described, and the description of the driving operation by the other-side rotation driving member 638 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the one-side rotation driving member 637 has a movement locus of the engagement portion 637b partially corresponding to a movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. It is arranged at an overlapping position, and in the overlapping portion, it is rotatable in a state where the engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. Note that the circular shape of the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle having a smaller diameter than the circular shape of the movement locus of the engaged portion 641.

  When the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the division member DV via the engagement between the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. Then, the divided member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent divided member DV via each connecting link member 644, whereby the rotating member 640 is rotated. Rotated in the direction.

  In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is provided on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the rotation amount of the rotation member 640 with respect to the unit rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 can be reduced (the rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 necessary for rotating the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased). ). Therefore, the apparent reduction ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axis O of the rotating member 640, the rotating torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotational drive of the rotating member 640 (particularly, the rotational drive from a stopped state) can be stabilized, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Here, the driving mechanism 630 includes one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638, which are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be dispersed to different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, so that the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members DV can be suppressed. That is, even when the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are arranged at positions where the phases are different by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force from each of the rotation driving members 637 and 638 can be applied to the two most distant portions of the rotation member 640 (the plurality of divided members DV), and as a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is reduced. Can be stabilized.

  In this case, in the state of the division member DV, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 that is pivotally supported by the division member DV is inserted into the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link operation groove 621 of the guide member 620. , The second state inserted through the small-diameter portion 621b, and the third state inserted through the connecting portion 621c. In the present embodiment, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other side The rotation driving member 638 can apply a driving force to the divided member DV in the third state (that is, the engaging portions 637b and 638b can be engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV in the third state). ).

  Thereby, the driving force can be applied to the divided member DV in a state where the distance between the adjacent divided member DV is changed from the first distance to the second distance (or vice versa). Since such a divided member DV receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c, the rotation of the entire rotating member 640 to which the plurality of divided members DV are connected endlessly (movement of each divided member DV in the circumferential direction). The division member DV which receives a relatively large reaction force from the connection portion 621c is directly driven by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, so that the plurality of division members DV are endless. Can be stably displaced (rotated).

  Note that the period during which the driving force is transmitted from the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 to the division member DV completely coincides with the period when the division member DV is in the above-described third state. It is not necessary that the former period in which the driving force is transmitted and the latter period in the third state at least partially overlap.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the undulating link operation groove 622 are formed at positions where the phases are different. That is, when the divided member DV is in the third state described above, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 provided in the divided member DV is inserted into the large-diameter portion 622a or the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622. It is inserted.

  Therefore, when the division member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 supported by the division member DV passes through the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621. Thereafter, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 (or vice versa).

  Accordingly, a reaction force is not received at the same time from both the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 and the connection portion 622c of the undulating link operation groove 622, and the timing of receiving the reaction force can be made different. As a result, the required driving force can be dispersed, and accordingly, the output required for the driving motor 631 of the driving mechanism 630 can be reduced.

  Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged with their phases (rotational positions of the engagement portions 637b, 638b) different from each other, so that the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is performed. Can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the state of engagement or disengagement of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 with the division member DV and the phase. In FIG. 75, the upper-level state relationship diagram corresponds to the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the lower-level state relationship diagram corresponds to the other-side rotation drive member 638. In FIG. 75, the horizontal axis indicates the phase, and the vertical axis indicates the engaged or released state.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engagement portion 637b of the engagement portions 637b formed at three places of the one-side rotation drive member 637 engages with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. Is defined as 0 ° (reference position), the one-side rotation driving member 637 moves the first rotation drive member 637 until the phase reaches approximately 100 ° (that is, until the phase rotates 100 ° from the reference position). The first engaging portion 637b is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV, and the driving force is transmitted to the divided member DV, while the engagement is released when the phase is approximately from 100 ° to 120 °. And the transmission of the driving force to the divided member DV is released.

  After that, the second engagement portion 637b and the third engagement portion 637b of the engagement portions 637b formed at three places of the one-side rotation driving member 637 are the first engagement portion 637b. The same state of engagement and disengagement (that is, engagement during a rotation angle of approximately 100 ° and release during a rotation angle of approximately 20 °) is repeated.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 75, with respect to the other-side rotation driving member 638, the engagement portions 638 b formed at the three positions are respectively engaged and released in the same manner as in the case of the above-described one-side rotation driving member 637. (That is, engagement during a rotation angle of approximately 100 ° and release during a rotation angle of approximately 20 °) are repeated.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as described above, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged with different phases (rotational positions of the engagement portions 637b and 638b). You. That is, the other side rotation drive member 638 has a phase at which the first engagement portion 638b of the engagement portions 638b formed at the three positions starts engaging with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. The phase is set to a phase delayed by approximately 40 ° from the phase (reference position) at which the first engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 starts engagement.

  Thus, while one of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 is disengaged from the division member DV (that is, the transmission of the driving force is released), the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the other-side rotation driving member 638 is disengaged. The phase (rotational position) of the engagement portions 637b and 638b is set such that the other one of the rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the division member DV. Thus, it is possible to avoid a state in which the engagement with the division member DV is simultaneously released from both the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638. As a result, intermittent transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be suppressed, and the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly, when the transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 becomes intermittent, Due to the transmission and release of the driving force, the interval between the divided members DV tends to be increased or decreased. Therefore, the posture of the entire rotating member 640 becomes unstable, and its displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 is in the release state, the other is in the engaged state, and the driving force is applied to the rotation member 640. Can always be transmitted, so that the interval between the divided members DV can be easily maintained constant. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly can be stabilized, and the displacement (rotation) can be stabilized.

  Next, the operation of detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a state transition diagram for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member 640, and illustrates a state in which the arrangement of the detection sensor 684 and the divided member DV is developed on a straight line.

  In FIG. 76, for convenience of explanation, reference numerals “A to F” are shown for the detection sensor 684, and reference numerals “1 to 10, 30” are shown for the divided member DV. The detection state is illustrated by the symbol of “ON, OFF”. In FIG. 76, the detected portion 641c is hatched for easy understanding.

  Here, in the description of FIG. 76, each of the detection sensors 684 is represented by a detection sensor A, a detection sensor B,. , The detection sensor F, and the divided members DV are referred to as a first divided member DV, a second divided member DV,..., A thirtieth divided member DV, and are distinguished from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first divided member DV reaches a phase (rotational position) that can be detected by the detection sensor A, the second divided member DV switches to the sixth position. The division members DV are arranged in phases that can be detected by the detection sensors BF.

  Therefore, in the detection sensors A and C to F, the light received by the light receiving unit of the light emitted from the light emitting unit is blocked by the detected portions 641c of the first divided member DV and the third to sixth divided members DV. Then, while the detection state is turned on by detecting the detected portion 641c, the detection sensor B can receive light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion, and does not detect the detected portion 641c. And the detection state is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the divided member DV moves in the circumferential direction (FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b)). (To the left), the division member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned on by the light shielding of the third to seventh divided members DV (detected portions 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned off. You.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), the division member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed ( In the detection sensors A to D and F, the detection state is turned on by the light shielding of the third to sixth divided members DV and the eighth divided member DV (detected portion 641c), while the detection is performed. In the sensor E, the detection state is turned off.

  Thereafter, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount, the division member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one), and this is changed to the number of division members DV (this embodiment). When the rotation is repeated 30 times (that is, the rotation member 640 is rotated once), the state returns to the state shown in FIG.

  In this case, as described above, there are two types of rotating members 640, one in which the detected portion 641c is formed and one in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. By connecting these two types of divided members DV in the circumferential direction, the detected portions 641c are arranged at predetermined intervals that are unequal in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement refers to a combination of the presence or absence of the detection target portion 641c (that is, the detection sensor A), regardless of which of the six divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction is taken out of the six adjacent divided members DV.検 出 F) means sequences in which all combinations are different.

  Therefore, a table of such combinations (a table in which the detection states of the detection sensors A to F are associated with the divided members DV to be detected at the time of the detection) is created in advance and stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be ascertained by referring to the table each time the detection sensors A to F perform detection. That is, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of (30 in the present embodiment) divided members DV is located at the reference position.

  Here, a slit continuous in the circumferential direction is provided on the rotating member 640, and the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added. The rotation amount (phase) of the rotation member 640 from the reference position can also be detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a failure in light reception of the light receiving unit of the detection sensor 684 or the like, a deviation occurs between the rotation amount of the rotating member 640 and the cumulative addition number of the pulse number, and the phase of the rotating member 640 becomes accurate. Cannot be detected. That is, if a detection failure occurs even once, it affects subsequent detection results, and each time a detection failure occurs, the effect on the detection results is accumulated.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of detected parts 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and the movement of the plurality of detected parts 641c Since a plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A to F) are provided on the trajectory, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is detected based on a combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F. be able to. That is, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based only on the current detection results detected by the detection sensors A to F. Is not required, so that even if a detection failure has occurred in the past, the detection failure does not affect the detection, and the phase of the rotating member 640 can be accurately detected.

  As described above, the interval between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).

  Therefore, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV, the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F can be made different. That is, it is possible to detect the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 using the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the divided members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to any of the plurality of divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction (that is, any pocket of the rotatable member 640 simulating roulette). be able to.

  Further, as described above, the arrangement interval of the detection sensors A to F is set based on the interval of the division members DV in the first section S1 (that is, the detection sensors A to F are divided by the division members DV in the first section S1). Is located at a position where the detected portion 641c can be detected), as compared with the case where the interval between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is used as a reference, the space required for disposing the detection sensors A to F. Can be easily secured, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In other words, when the detection sensors A to F are arranged at positions where the detection target 641c of the divided member DV can be detected in the second section S2, a space for disposing these detection sensors A to F is secured. Therefore, there is a limitation in reducing the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV. On the other hand, since the detection sensors A to F are disposed on the first section S1 side, the setting of the interval (second interval) between the divided members DV in the second section S2 is not restricted, and the second sensor S is not limited to the second section S2. The interval of 2 can be narrower. As a result, the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, two (on / off) detection results based on the presence or absence of the detection target portion 641c of the divided member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively. 2 6) combinations can be formed.

  In this case, since the number of the divided members DV is 30, five detection sensors 684 are sufficient (that is, 32 (= 2 to the fifth power) combinations can be formed). However, in this case, a state occurs in which all the detection results of the five detection sensors 684 are turned off (the light is not shielded by the detected portion 641c), and therefore, at a predetermined phase (rotational position) corresponding to the state. However, the timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 cannot be obtained.

  On the other hand, by using the six detection sensors 684 as in the present embodiment, the detection results of all of the six detection sensors 684 are turned off (the state in which the light is not blocked by the detected portion 641c). ) Can be avoided. That is, in at least one of the six detection sensors 684, the detection result can be turned on (light is blocked by the detection target 641), so that all the phases (rotation) At the position), the timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can be obtained.

  FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view in which a portion of the rotating member 640 in the first section S1 is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, the display plate 646 of the divided member DV has the plate portion 646a arranged in a horizontal posture and the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (see FIGS. 57 and 58). (See FIG. 77, left side) faces the side surface of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV.

  In the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is formed such that a side surface of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b is curved in an arc shape (see an enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Therefore, when the display panel 646 is arranged in a horizontal position by rotating the plate 646a about the shaft 646b, the side opposite to the shaft 646b of the plate 646a faces the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent divided member DV. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the distance between the side of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b (the arc-shaped side surface) and the side surface of the plate holding member 645.

  Thereby, in the first section S1, when the divided member DV and the adjacent divided member DV try to make a relative displacement in a direction to reduce the interval (first interval) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is closed. Such a relative displacement can be restricted by contacting the side surface with the side surface of the plate holding member 645. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the divided members DV from being displaced in a direction to reduce the distance therebetween, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684.

  On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is connected to the end of the connecting link opening 642a in the rear side body 642 of the adjacent divided member DV (the end on one side in the extending direction, FIG. ) (See FIG. 73 (a)), so that when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV try to make a relative displacement in a direction to increase their interval (first interval), When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 abuts on the end of the connection link opening 642a, such phase displacement can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the divided members DV from being displaced in a direction to increase the distance between them, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always open has been described. , A tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes the passage. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those in the above-described embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 78 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the release position.

  As illustrated in FIG. 78, the left swing unit 2500 includes a base member 2510 that discharges a ball to the right rear of the first wall portion 513 in a front view, a direction in which the distribution base member 2521 extends, and a length of the elongated hole 2521d. It mainly includes a first passage-forming member 2520 whose extension direction is substantially straight, and a tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes the tip of the first passage-forming member 2520.

  The base member 2510 includes a side downflow passage 2515 extending rearward from the right side of the guide wall portion 513a. Although the outer shape of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 is different from the outer shape of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 in the first embodiment, the technical idea is the same, and therefore, the description is omitted in this embodiment.

  The side flow-down passage 2515 is a passage for discharging the ball that has reached the first wall portion 513 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is located at the release position.

  The first passage forming member 2520 includes a distribution base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The distribution base member 2521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 2521a that forms one side of the ball flow passage, a long hole 2521d extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and a gap V1. A second distribution convex portion 521e disposed to face the distribution convex portion 521e on the right side in frontal view of the front side, and a rear side toward the front side of the hanging plate portion on the right side in front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521g. And a discharge recess 2521h recessed from the side surface.

  At the lower end, the hanging plate portion 2521a has a recessed portion 2521a2 in which a portion of the lower wall surface facing the passage cover member 2522 (the left side in FIG. 78) is cut and recessed. A shaft support hole 2521a3 which is formed in a circular shape in a direction opposite to the passage cover member on the side opposite to the hole 2522a.

  The concave portion 2521a2 is a concave portion that forms an opening on the lower surface of the first passage forming member 2520 in cooperation with the concave portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The distal end wall member 2560 passes through the opening formed by the concave portion 2521a by the rotation operation.

  The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body 2561a of the distal end wall member 2560 is supported by a pin member on a rod, and is disposed at a position (coaxial position) corresponding to the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522. You.

  The second distribution convex portion 2521g is a portion having substantially the same shape as the distribution convex portion 521e, and is a portion that distributes the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 to the left and right. The discharge concave portion 2521h is provided with a space larger than the diameter of a sphere provided between the discharge concave portion 2521h and the first wall portion 513, and reaches the first wall portion 513 to the right of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in a front view. The sorted balls are introduced from the discharge concave portion 2521h into the side downflow passage 2515, and then discharged outside the game area.

  The passage cover member 2522 has a plate-like plate portion 2522a covered on the front side of the distribution base member 2521, and extends in a plate-like shape from both ends in the short direction of the plate portion 2522a toward the back side. And upper and lower wall portions 2522b.

  The plate-shaped portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described in the first embodiment and a shaft support hole 2522a2 formed at the lower end portion in a circular shape coaxial with the shaft support hole 2521a3 of the distribution base member 2521. Prepare. The shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes that rotatably support the distal end wall member 2560.

  The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are provided with recesses 2522b1 that are recessed at positions facing the recessed portions 2521a2 and that together with the recessed portions 2521a2 form an opening through which a ball can pass.

  The distal end wall member 2560 is disposed between the distribution base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520, and rotates as a rod-shaped pin member coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2. It mainly includes a main body member 2561 having a substantially Z-shape as viewed from the front, which is rotatably supported, and a torsion spring 2562 for urging the main body member 2561 clockwise as viewed from the front.

  The torsion spring 2562 is configured such that one arm is fixed to the distal end of the passage cover member 2522 and the other arm abuts on a locking pin 2561e protruding rearward from the distal end wall member 2560.

  With reference to FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 will be described. FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (d) are front views of main body member 2561 of distal wall member 2560, and FIG. 79 (b) is a top view of main body member 2561 of distal wall member 2560, and FIG. FIG. 79C is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 79B. In FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (d), the shape of the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 79 (a), the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position ( FIG. 79 (d) illustrates a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position (see FIG. 81).

  As shown in FIG. 79, a main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 includes a cylindrical main body 2561a that is coaxially supported with the shaft supporting holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78), and a radial direction from the main body 2561a. Plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line, a flow-down hole 2561c formed in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b with a diameter equal to or larger than the diameter of a sphere, and a side opposite to the main body portion 2561a of the plate portion 2561b. A curved wall portion 2561d extending along an arc centered on the main body portion 2561a from an end of the main body portion 2561a, and a locking pin protruding at the tip end of the curved wall portion 2561d in parallel with the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a. 2561e and a portion disposed on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d with respect to the main body member 2561a, and has a shape smaller than the opening at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520. A pushing portion 2561F, mainly it comprises.

  The plate portion 2561b is formed such that the radial length (length in the extending direction) of the main body portion 2561a is longer than the dimension of the opening at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 in the short direction (vertical direction in FIG. 80). You. Thereby, the rotation stop position of tip wall member 2560 in the biasing direction of torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to the position where plate portion 2561b and upper wall portion of upper and lower wall portion 2522b abut. 79 (d)).

  In the released state (see FIG. 79 (d)), the curved wall portion 2561d stops the downward flow by causing the sphere to collide with the contact wall 2561d1 disposed opposite to the sphere flowing down the first passage forming member 2520. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball is allowed to pass by moving below the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is moved by a rolling wall disposed behind the contact wall 2561d1. Rolling over 2561d2 has the role of smoothing the subsequent flow.

  Next, the operation of the left swing unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swing unit 2500. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is not shown, FIG. 80 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position, and FIG. FIG. 82 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount when viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed at the connection position. In addition, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by an outline at a middle position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is at the release position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 is the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in a front view. And stays between the discharge recess 2521h and the first wall portion 513, the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise in front view, and the discharge recess 2521h is disposed on the front side of the side flow passage 2515. This allows the ball to flow down the side downflow passage 2515, and the ball is discharged out of the game area. This prevents the ball from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 when the first passage forming member 2520 is located at the release position.

  In the state shown in FIG. 80, the sphere introduced into the discharge recess 2521h stays in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that the next incoming ball enters the discharge recess 2521h. Thus, the next ball can be kept outside the rotation trajectory of the tip of the second distribution projection 2521g (upper side in FIG. 80).

  The sphere fixed to the outside (the upper side in FIG. 80) of the rotation trajectory of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g rotates the first passage forming member 2520 clockwise as viewed from the front, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g guides. By being disposed at a position along the right wall of the wall 513a, it is introduced to the left of the second distribution projection 2521g, and is supplied between the upper and lower walls 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. You. Thus, even if a plurality of balls reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, only one ball can be introduced into the discharge recess 2521h.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is located at the release position, the first passage forming member 2520 moves from the base end (the left end in FIG. 80) to the distal end (the right end in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured to be inclined upward. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated with the sphere supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 remaining, and reaches the state shown in FIG. Flows toward the base end by the action of gravity, so that the ball can be prevented from dropping from the front end.

  As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the state between the release position and the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 has the second distribution convex. The rider gets on the tip of the part 2521g and stops flowing down. Thus, when the first passage forming member 2520 is disposed between the release position and the connection position, the ball is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Can be prevented.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the first path forming member 2520 is inclined downward toward the distal end. For this reason, if the opening at the distal end is always open, the ball is left between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 (see FIG. 78). May fall from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be caught by another unit (such as the rotating unit 600 (see FIG. 5)), which may cause malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the distal end wall member 2560 is disposed at the opening at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as a lid for the opening. Can be reliably prevented from dropping from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 is the left of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in a front view. Is moved to the front side through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, and the extending direction of the first passage forming member 2520. Down along.

  At the connection position, the pushing portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 abuts against the wall surface of the housing recess 422f of the driving slide member 420 (the wall surface of the housing recess 422f is disposed on the displacement trajectory of the pushing portion 2561f). The curved wall portion 2561d of the wall member 2560 is rotated in a direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 82) protruding outside the first passage forming member 2520. That is, since the rotation of the tip wall member 2560 is caused by the change in the position of the first passage forming member 2520, the driving force of the tip wall member 2560 can be used also as the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. As a result, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

  At this time, at the connection position, the tip end wall member 2560 is rotated to a position where the plate portion 2561b is in a plane position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b, so that the sphere reaching the tip end of the first passage forming member 2520 can be smoothly moved. The ball can be sent to the downflow hole 2561c (without bouncing as in the case where a step is generated between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and the plate portion 2561b).

  The sphere that has passed through the downflow hole 2561c is guided to the sensor member 422c of the drive side slide member 420 by rolling on the rolling wall 2561d2 of the curved wall portion 2561d. That is, the curved wall portion 2561d serves to stop the sphere that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and to guide the sphere sent from the first passage forming member 2520 through the downflow hole 2561c. , Is also used.

  Note that, at the connection position (see FIG. 82), the plate portion 2561b is in surface position with the lower walls of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, so that before reaching the connection position. , The plate portion 2561b enters the inside (upper side in FIG. 82) of the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. That is, the ball can pass through the downflow hole 2561c only after reaching the connection position (a state where the ball is stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d until the connection position is reached).

  Accordingly, even if the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from the connected position to the release position in a state where the ball remains inside the first passage forming member 2520, the ball is moved to the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520. It can be reliably prevented from falling from. This is maintained even when a plurality of balls are thrown in a row.

  With reference to FIG. 83, a case where a plurality of balls are sent to the first passage forming member 2520 in a row will be described. FIGS. 83A to 83C are partial front views of the left swing unit 2500 and the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c), the sphere passages of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially cross-sectionally viewed. FIG. 83 (b) shows a state where the forming member 2520 is arranged at the connection position. In FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 rotates a predetermined amount counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 83 (a). 83 (c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), and the distal end wall member 2560 is partitioned. FIG.

  In addition, in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c), a sphere that flows down to the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the pushing portion 2561f is in contact with the housing recess 422f in the connected state, and has a recessed portion 2561f1 on the lower side in FIG. 83 (a) starting from the contact position. The recessed portion 2561f1 is recessed closer to the shaft support 516 than the arc C21 centered on the shaft support 516 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, the tip wall member 2560 starts rotating by the urging force of the torsion spring 2562 as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from FIG. In FIG. 83 (a), the ball disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d is referred to as a feed ball P21, and the ball disposed on the left side is referred to as a residual ball P22.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the first passage forming member 2520 starts to rotate, the tip wall member 2560 rotates, so that the curved wall portion 2561d enters the inside of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. As a result, the residual sphere P22 comes into contact with the contact wall 2561d, and the flow of the residual sphere P22 stops.

  On the other hand, the feed ball P21 is disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, so that the flowing ball P21 does not stop flowing down by the contact wall 2561d and passes through the flow-down hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520. It is possible to throw balls.

  In this case, the feed ball P21 may be lifted to the upper end of the curved wall 2561d (see FIG. 83 (b)). The upper walls of the upper and lower walls 2522b are opposed to each other in the moving direction of the curved wall 2561d. Since the feed ball P21 is pushed in by its wall, it can be ensured that the feed ball P21 passes through the downflow hole 2561c. Thus, the diameter of the opening of the flow-down hole 2561c can be suppressed to approximately the same as the diameter of the sphere, and the flow path of the sphere flowing down the flow-down hole 2561c can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c), from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (c), and the curved wall 2561d is Even if the feed ball P21 remains on the curved wall portion 2561d side when moved above the curved wall portion 422f1, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a portion for rolling the feed ball P21, and the rolling wall thereof. The feed ball P21 is caused to flow down while the distance between the lower end of the 2561d2 and the upper end of the curved wall portion 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (the first passage is formed until the feed ball P21 partitions off). By stopping the member 2520 at the position shown in FIG. 83 (c) or reducing the speed near the position shown in FIG. 83 (c)), it is ensured that the ball flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422. To do It can be.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the third symbol display device 81 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction of the driven side slide member 430 has been described. The device 81 is disposed on the left side of the driven slide member 3430 in the left-right direction. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those in the above-described embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 according to the third embodiment, illustrating the elevating operation of the driving-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 3430 in chronological order. 84 to 88, the right and left members of the cover member 470 are not shown, and the vicinity of the lowering control member 415 and the upper control member 417 is partially enlarged.

  84 shows a state immediately after the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 abuts on the driven side slide member 3430. In FIG. 85, the rack 452 is raised from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 86 shows a state in which only the drive side slide member 420 is moved down from the state shown in FIG. 85 and is arranged in the lowered position. 86, the driven side slide member 3430 is dropped from the state shown in FIG. 86, and the separation action surface 434b, which is the lower side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434, and the separation inclined portion 417f of the lift control member 417 are in contact with each other. FIG. 88 illustrates a state in which the driven side slide member 3430 is further dropped from the state illustrated in FIG. State dynamic side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 to 88, the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 3400 includes a base member 410, a driving side sliding member 420, a driven side sliding member 3430, a driving device 440, a transmission device 450, and a lower front side. It mainly includes a plate member 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 that is disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and that operates in a manner to prevent the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

  In the base member 410, the lowering control member 415 and the raising control member 417 are provided only on the left side in the front view, and the installation on the right side in the front view is omitted.

  The driven-side slide member 3430 has a third symbol display device 81 at a position eccentric leftward in front view from the left-right center position and is configured to be long in the left-right direction, and the left-right direction of the main body member 3431. Functional portions 432 disposed at both ends, guide holes 433 which are vertically formed in the functional portions 432 and through which guide rods 451 are inserted, and rise in the left and right outer directions at the lower end of the functional portions 432 A hook-shaped portion 434 extending inclining, a fall prevention portion 435 extending to the rear side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the functional portion 432 (on the side close to the other guide hole 433), Mainly equipped.

  The main body member 3431 is provided with a locking projection 3431a that is provided at the upper end thereof so as to protrude leftward in front view. The locking convex portion 3431a is a portion that is locked by a solenoid 3480 disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and is prevented from falling. The locking convex portion 3431a is inclined downward as the upper surface thereof approaches the front end in the protruding direction.

  The solenoid 3480 includes a rod member 3481 which can be protruded and retracted rightward in a front view, and the lower surface of the rod member 3481 is inclined upward toward the front end in the projecting direction. Note that the solenoid 3480 is in a retracted state when energized, and is in an extended state when not energized, and in this extended state, the tip of the rod member 3481 projects to the left and right center side beyond the tip of the locking projection 3431a. It consists of.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged to the left in front view. As a result, while securing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the area divided into the left and right of the third symbol display device 81 is gathered at one place (to the right of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84). By configuring as a large area, the degree of freedom of the size of the movable member that can be arranged in the empty area can be improved.

  Since the third symbol display device 81 is disposed closer to the left side when viewed from the front, the load applied to the rack 452 from the driven side slide member 420 is asymmetrical (the left side is larger). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the drive side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to incline the attitude of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 84, a wiring housing member 423 is provided at the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 when viewed from the front. At this time, the gravity center position G31 of the wiring housing member 423 is located to the left from the center position of the driving slide member 420. The slide member 420 may receive a load and may be inclined counterclockwise as viewed from the front.

  As described above, since the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are easily inclined counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the play side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are prevented from rattling during the elevating operation. The rattling between the state in which the 452 maintains the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) and the state in which the driving slide member 420 and the rack 452 are inclined counterclockwise in front view can be limited (driving slide). The member 420 and the rack 452 can be prevented from tilting clockwise as viewed from the front from the horizontal posture.

  Therefore, the descent regulating member 415 and the elevation regulating member 417 disposed on the left side when viewed from the front guide the elevation operation of the driving slide member 420 and the rack 452 while effectively suppressing the inclination of the driving slide member 420 and the rack 452. I do. On the other hand, since the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not tilted to the right in front view, it is not necessary to dispose the lowering and lowering control members 415 and 417 outside the functional unit 432 on the right in front view. Costs (material costs and assembly man-hours) can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the drive side slide member 420 is disposed at the raised position, the wiring housing member 423 rises as compared with the state shown in FIG. 84, and its center of gravity G31 is compared with the state shown in FIG. To the left in front view.

  Therefore, the load in the direction of inclining the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise in front view increases, and there is a possibility that the meshing relationship between the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the raised position, the protruding plate 453a is abutted on the lowering regulating member 415 and supported. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the posture of the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 from inclining counterclockwise in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven slide member 3430 is arranged at the raised position, the locking projection 3431 gets over the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking projection 3431 is placed on the rod member 3481. .

  At this time, when the bar member 3481 is pushed in the left-right direction along the inclination of the upper surface of the locking projection 3431, the locking projection 3431 can get over the bar member 3481. Thus, the locking projection 3431 can be placed on the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 without passing electricity through the solenoid 3480.

  As shown in FIG. 86, even if the drive side slide member 420 is lowered in a state where the driven side slide member 3430 is located at the raised position, the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 is locked by the locking projection 3431a of the driven side slide member 3430. , The driven-side slide member 3430 is prevented from descending in conjunction with the drive-side slide member 420, and the driven-side slide member 3430 is maintained at the raised position.

  At this time, the driven side slide member 3430 is disposed at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is shifted leftward from the center position as viewed from the front, and the center of gravity is shifted leftward. Also, it is possible to suppress the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

  That is, when the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is located at the center in the left-right direction, the driven side slide member 3430 may be swung clockwise or counterclockwise in a front view due to vibration or the like. If the driven side slide member 3430 inclines clockwise as viewed from the front in a state where the solenoid 3480 is located only on the left side, the locking projection 3431a may be displaced from the rod member 3481.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is shifted to the left side in front view. Is suppressed.

  Therefore, the locking protrusion 3431a is easily inclined in the direction approaching the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the contact between the locking protrusion 3431a and the rod member 3481 is maintained. It is prevented from falling off.

  Accordingly, the driven slide member 3430 can be stably maintained at the raised position without disposing the solenoids 3480 on both sides in the left-right direction of the driven slide member 3430. The operation of the driven side slide member 3430 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the rod member 3481 is in the immersion state, the driven slide member 3430 falls. In the process of falling of the driven side slide member 3430, since the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the descent regulating member 415 are shifted in the front-rear direction, the hook-shaped portion 434 may be caught by the descent regulating member 415 and cause malfunction. Can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the hook-shaped portion 434 falls in a state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 is in contact with the separation inclined portion 417 f of the rise regulating member 417, thereby rotating the rise regulating member 417 in an outer winding (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 87) ( Release state).

  As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven-side slide member 3430 is disposed at the lowered position, the elevation regulating member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engagement claw 417e of the elevation regulating member 417, The hook-shaped portion 434 is arranged to face in the vertical direction (engaged state).

  As shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, the state changes from the released state to the engaged state by the rotation of the ascending restricting member 417 with respect to the hook-shaped part 434 of the driven slide member 3430, so that the posture does not change. The amount of load and posture change required to change the disengaged state and the engaged state is increased as compared with the case where the disengaged state and the engaged state are changed by elasticity of the member. be able to. Accordingly, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven-side slide member 3430 and the elevation regulating member 417 are engaged.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the falling-down of the driven-side slide member 3430 causes the ascending restricting member 417 to rotate. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving device to form the engagement state of the elevation regulating member 417. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described embodiments, the case where the opposing wall portion 422f2 protrudes from the lower end of the upper wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 at the lower inclined position has been described. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 disposed to oppose the wall portion 422f1 is configured as a planar wall portion extending in the up-down direction. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same portions as those in the above-described embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a side view of the drive side slide member 4420 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a). FIG. 89 (c) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420. In FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (c), the drive side slide member 4420 is viewed in cross section at the center position of the connecting member 4424 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 89 (a)). Also, FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b) illustrate a downward inclined state of the connecting member 4424, and FIG. 89 (c) illustrates an upward inclined state of the connecting member 4424.

  The connection member 4424 includes an extension claw 4424f that extends rightward in a front view from the lower end of the upper side wall 424b.

  The extension claw portion 4424f is disposed to face the curved wall portion 422f1 in the upwardly inclined state, is depressed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and is curved, as shown in FIG. (B) Right and left direction) A pair of concave portions is provided in the middle part.

  The second passage forming member 4422 includes an opposing wall 4422f2 that is disposed to oppose the curved wall 422f1. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion that extends in the vertical direction along the opening of the sensor member 422c. In this state, it is extended to a position overlapping with the extension claw portion 4424f.

  According to the present embodiment, in the downwardly inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (a), there is no portion (projection or the like) that is broken by the collision of the ball with the path of the ball, so that the first passage forming member is provided. When the ball is sent from 520 to the connection member 4424, it is possible to prevent the member from being damaged by colliding with the ball.

  In the upward inclined state shown in FIG. 89 (b), the extended claw portion 4424f and the opposing wall portion 4422f2 guide the sphere, so that the sphere can be suppressed from being clogged near the sensor member 422c.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 179. In the present control example, regardless of whether or not the special symbol is in the probable state, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is more advantageous to the player than the ordinary state of the ordinary symbol (low probability state). ing. More specifically, a special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol 1 lottery) executed based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 will be compared with a case where a jackpot has been won. The player who wins a special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol 2 lottery) that is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640a receives a larger amount of prize balls. The jackpot type that can be obtained (the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened) is configured to be easily selected. In other words, in the normal symbol time reduction state, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is easily opened, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily executed. Prize balls easily. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player in the normal symbol time saving state. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state) of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a becomes difficult to be opened, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes difficult to be executed (the lottery of the special symbol 1 is performed). This makes it difficult to obtain a large amount of prize balls even if a big hit occurs. Therefore, the normal state of the normal symbol is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the time reduction state of the normal symbol.

  In addition, although details will be described later, in the present control example, if a big hit occurs in the time saving state of a normal symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol is set with a high probability (for example, 97.5%) after the end of the big hit. This time-saving state of the ordinary symbol continues until the next big hit. That is, once a big hit occurs in the normal symbol time saving state, the jackpot and the normal symbol time saving state are repeated with a high probability (97.5%). Therefore, as long as the time saving state is kept set after the jackpot, the jackpot can be repeatedly won without reducing the number of possessed balls, so that an advantageous state in which a large amount of prize balls are expected to be obtained. Hereinafter, the state in which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol that is continued until the next big hit is set is referred to as “rensou mode”.

  On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state) of a normal symbol, even if a big hit occurs, it is difficult to set the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit. Even if the normal symbol time reduction state is given, most of the set time reduction state ends before the special symbol lottery is executed seven times. That is, the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol set after the big hit is mostly 7 times or less (1 time or 7 times). As described above, if a jackpot is won during this time saving state, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” with a high probability (97.5%). Because it is difficult to become, in many cases, it will return to the normal state of the ordinary symbol without a jackpot. That is, the normal state (low probability state) of the ordinary symbol in which the number of balls is easily reduced and the jackpot (a jackpot in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened) in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball are easily repeated. Therefore, the normal state of the normal symbol is disadvantageous for the player. Hereinafter, for the convenience of description, the normal state (low probability state) of a normal symbol is referred to as “normal mode”. In addition, a time-saving state in which the number of times that there is a possibility of shifting after the end of the jackpot (the job ends when a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries are executed after the end of the jackpot) is referred to as a “preparation mode”.

  By providing a configuration in which the "rensou mode" which is advantageous for the player and the "normal mode" which is disadvantageous for the player, the game can be sharpened. Therefore, it can be suppressed (prevented) that the game becomes monotonous.

  First, with reference to FIG. 90 to FIG. 96, various modes of effects performed in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 90 and FIG. 91 (a) are diagrams showing an example of a fluctuation display (fluctuation pattern effect) executed when a special symbol lottery is executed in the “normal mode” (normal state of a normal symbol). FIG. 91 (b) and FIG. 92 are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode executed at the jackpot when the jackpot is hit in the “normal mode”. FIGS. 93 to 96 show the jackpot. When the mode is shifted to the “preparation mode” after the end (one or seven time-saving periods are given), an effect mode that indicates whether to shift from the “preparation mode” to the “rensou mode” or not It is a figure showing an example.

  First, with reference to FIG. 90 and FIG. 91 (a), a description will be given of an effect mode when the variable display is executed in the “normal mode”. In the "normal mode", the number (number) displayed on the staging unit 331 of the upper elevating unit 300 notifies whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit. More specifically, of the five types (predetermined) of numbers selected in advance by the player, any four types are displayed one by one on each of the display units 331a to 331d constituting the staging unit 331. By doing so, the jackpot is announced. On the other hand, when a number different from any of the five types of predetermined numbers is displayed on at least one of the display units 331a to 331d, the special symbol is notified.

  A combination of five types of numbers indicating the special symbol lottery results is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), a combination of five types of numbers is arranged inside a vertically long and substantially rectangular small area Ds2 formed on the right side in front view on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (Lucky number) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 90 (a), five types of "2", "7", "13", "17", and "25" are displayed as a combination of five predetermined numbers (lucky numbers). ing. In addition, in the large area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a character “Get a Lucky Number !!” is displayed. By these display contents, five kinds of numbers (“2”, “7”, “13”, “17”, “25”) displayed as a lucky number are displayed on the effect part 331 so that a special symbol is displayed. Can be easily recognized by the player. The five types of lucky numbers displayed in the small area Ds2 can be selected by a player from a game menu screen, for example. The game menu screen is, for example, a screen displayed by operating the frame button 22 in a game stop state. By setting the lucky number to be selectable by the player, a combination of numbers (symbols) displayed in the rendering unit 331 when a special symbol is hit can be set to a number (symbol) desired by the player. Can be. That is, the winning symbol can be changed according to the taste of each player.

  Further, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a reserved symbol indicating the current number of retained balls is displayed inside a vertically-long and substantially rectangular small area Ds1 formed on the left side in a front view. Since the example of FIG. 90A shows the case where the number of reserved balls is four, four reserved symbols indicated by black circles are displayed in the small area Ds1. By visually recognizing the number of the reserved symbols, the player can easily recognize the number of the reserved balls.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (a), when the special symbol lottery is started, the symbol display is changed on each of the display units 331a to 331d of the rendering unit 331. When the special symbol lottery result is out of order, a number different from the lucky number is displayed on at least one display section (see FIG. 90 (b)). FIG. 90 (b) shows numbers (“8” and “1”) different from the lucky numbers on the display unit 331b and the display unit 331c in the out-of-position change display, and the display unit 331a and the display. An example in which lucky numbers (“17” and “2”) are displayed in the section 331d is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the out-of-combination combination is stopped and displayed on the rendering unit 331, the character "Sorry ..." is displayed in the large area Dm on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the result of the special symbol lottery has been lost.

  The numbers displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 are set in different modes depending on whether or not they are lucky numbers. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), when one of the numbers defined as the lucky number is displayed, white numbers are displayed (display units 331a and 331d). On the other hand, when a number different from the lucky number is displayed, the number is displayed in black characters (display units 331b and 331c). By making the display mode of numbers different according to whether or not it is a lucky number, the player can more easily recognize whether or not the number displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d is a lucky number. be able to.

  In the present control example, the lucky number is displayed in white and numbers other than the lucky number are displayed in black characters, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lucky number may be displayed in red letters so that it can be easily distinguished whether it is a lucky number or the background of the lucky number is set to red and the background of numbers other than the lucky number is set to white. By doing so, it may be configured to be easily distinguishable from the lucky number, or by increasing the character size of the lucky number, it may be configured to be easily distinguishable from the lucky number.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, one of the five lucky numbers is displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d. In the example of FIG. 91A, among the five types of lucky numbers (“2”, “7”, “13”, “17”, “25”), “17”, “25”, “25” "2" and "13" are displayed as white numbers. In addition, a lucky number is displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d, and the character "Success !!" is displayed in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. With these display contents, the player can easily recognize that the big hit has occurred.

  In the present control example, four of the five types of lucky numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed one by one on each of the display units 331a to 331d to notify the big hit. , But is not limited to this. For example, the lucky number may not be specified, and the same number may be simply displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d to notify the big hit. By doing so, it is only necessary to pay attention to whether or not the same number has been collected, and it is not necessary to illuminate the lucky number with the number displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d. It can be easier. In addition, for example, the variable display of the symbols does not necessarily need to be performed on each of the display units 331a to 331d, and the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to perform the variable display of the symbols. Accordingly, since the display units 331a to 331d can be omitted, the number of components of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. In addition, the yield rate during production can be improved by reducing the number of parts. Further, the failure rate can be reduced.

  Next, an effect performed at the jackpot in the “normal mode” will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b) and FIG. Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the first variable winning device 82a repeats the opening for 0.6 seconds and the closing for 0.9 seconds 20 times per round (opening pattern A ) And an opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which opening for 0.052 seconds per round is performed only once. In FIG. 91 (b) and FIG. 92, a description will be given of a big hit effect when the open pattern A is set.

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents at the jackpot where the opening pattern A is set. Here, when the big hit type in which the opening pattern A is set in the “normal mode” is won, first, the driving side slide member 420 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 are connected. Placed in the position. Thereafter, the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern A. By connecting the drive side slide member 420 and the first passage forming member 520 before setting the opening pattern A, all the balls that have won the first variable prize winning device 82a can be replaced by the first passage forming member 82a. It can flow down to the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 via 520. In the present control example, each time a ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 (each time the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c of the second passage forming member 422). A time saving suggestion effect is performed to indicate whether or not the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, a character "Align lucky numbers !!" is displayed. In addition, the lucky number displayed at the time of notifying the jackpot is continuously displayed on the display units 331a to 331d even during the jackpot. Further, in the effect section 422a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, a symbol change display is executed. With these display contents, the remaining one type of numbers different from the numbers displayed on the respective display units 331a to 331d among the five types of lucky numbers (see the small area Ds2) is displayed on the rendering unit 422a, so that the player is displayed. The player can easily recognize that the time saving state that is advantageous for the player is set. In addition, in the variation display of the symbol executed in the rendering unit 422a, a stop display is executed every time the ball reaches the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 (the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c).

  FIG. 92 (a) is a diagram showing a case where a ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 and is notified that the ball has come off. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), when the deviation is notified, the effect part 422a is a number different from the lucky number (see the small area Ds2) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. "3" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the characters "failure ..." are displayed in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the time saving state is given after the end of the jackpot. Even if the release is notified, if the opening period of the opening pattern A remains, the variation display of the symbol (see FIG. 91 (b)) is restarted in the rendering unit 422a. In other words, the more variable the ball is made to enter the first variable winning device 82a (winning), the more variable display is executed, so that it can be made to positively want the ball to be awarded to the first variable winning device 82a. . Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved.

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is reported. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when it is determined that the ball has passed the sensor member 422c of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400, "7", which is one type of lucky number, is given to the effect part 422a. Stopped and displayed. That is, out of the five types of lucky numbers, numbers different from the four types of lucky numbers stopped and displayed on the display units 331a to 331d to notify the big hit are stopped and displayed. In addition, the characters "Great success! Roulette chance GET!" Are displayed in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. With these displays, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the transition to the “preparation mode” (normal symbol time saving state) after the end of the big hit.

  In the present control example, a number (symbol) different from the lucky number is displayed in the rendering unit 422a when not shifting to the “prepare mode”, and is defined as a lucky number when shifting to the “prepare mode”. Although one of the numbers (symbols) is configured to be displayed on the rendering unit 422a, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the start of the big hit, an effect may be executed in which an image of a wall is displayed on the effect portion 422a, and the displayed wall is gradually broken down each time the passage of a sphere is detected by the sensor member 422c. Then, as the wall collapses, the lucky number displayed behind the wall is exposed, and the lucky number can be obtained when the wall completely collapses ("preparation mode" is notified). You may. As described above, each time the ball that has won the first variable prize device 82a is detected by the sensor member 422c, an effect is performed in a manner as if the lucky number is approaching. On the other hand, the ball can be launched more actively during the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to increase a player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game.

  In the present control example, when notifying the “preparation mode”, the lucky number is displayed on the rendering unit 422a. It is not limited to numbers. A symbol irrelevant to the lucky number may be displayed. For example, the symbol "V" may be displayed to notify the transition to the "preparation mode".

  In the present control example, in the big hit where the “opening pattern A” is set, the fluctuation display is executed every time a ball is detected by the sensor member 422c. However, the fluctuation display is not necessarily performed each time a ball is detected (“ Notification of whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode”) may be omitted. For example, a configuration in which the variable display is performed only once during the big hit may be adopted. More specifically, for example, an effect (variable display) of whether or not a lucky number is displayed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls pass through the sensor member 422c is executed. Is also good. With this configuration, the ball can be more positively launched in order to quickly know whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode”. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved. In this case, if the number of balls that have passed through the sensor member 422c is less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) before the end of the final round of the jackpot, the game enters the “preparation mode” during the ending period. It may be notified whether or not to shift, or may be configured to notify whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” when the jackpot ends and the first variable display is executed. Thereby, even if a predetermined number of balls cannot be made to enter the first variable winning device 82a during the big hit, it is notified whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode". Because it is possible, the player can accurately grasp the game state after the big hit. In addition, the number of balls to be awarded to the first variable winning device 82a before the effect (variable display) of whether or not the lucky number is displayed does not need to be fixed every time, and the "open pattern A" is not required. May be changed by lottery or the like every time a big hit is set.

  In the present control example, in the big hit where the “opening pattern A” is set, the variable display is executed every time a ball is detected by the sensor member 422c, but the present invention is not limited to this. A variation display may be performed each time the sensor member 422c detects the passage of a sphere a predetermined number of times (for example, twice or five times). With this configuration, even if the ball continuously wins in the first variable prize device 82a, a sufficient time interval can be provided between the completion of each change and the start of the next change. (It is possible to prevent the condition for starting the next change from being satisfied during the change). Therefore, it is possible to make the player confirm the result of each variable display more reliably.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the big hit of the opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which the opening is performed only once for 0.052 seconds per round, whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” is immediately notified. You. That is, in the case of shifting to the “preparation mode” after the jackpot, a lucky number is displayed on the effect portion 422a when the first variable winning device 82a is opened, regardless of whether the ball has won. On the other hand, when not shifting to the “preparation mode”, a number (symbol) different from the lucky number is displayed when the first variable winning device 82a is opened.

  The jackpot in which the “open pattern B” is set will be described in detail. The jackpot in which the “opening pattern B” is set includes an opening period of 3 seconds, a round period of 0.052 seconds (for two rounds), an interval period of 0.5 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds. Have been. That is, the jackpot ends in about 6.6 seconds. By using these 6.6 seconds, the effect display unit 422a executes the symbol change display. Then, when the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” after the jackpot, the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the staging unit 422a when 5.6 seconds have elapsed, and the lucky number continues to be displayed for about the remaining one second of the jackpot. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the mode has shifted to the “preparation mode”. On the other hand, when shifting to the “normal mode” after the jackpot, a number different from the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the rendering unit 422a. Thereby, it is possible to easily recognize the transition to the “normal mode”. By executing an effect to determine whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” during the big hit in which the “opening pattern B” is set, it is possible to draw attention to the staging unit 422a during the big hit. That is, even if the "opening pattern B" is set in which the first variable winning device 82a is released only for a short time (0.052 seconds) (that is, it is extremely difficult to obtain a prize ball), the slight opening time is set. During the opening period, the player's attention can be diverted from the first variable winning device 82a. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the fact that the “open pattern B” has reached the set jackpot, and it is possible to recognize as if it were one mode of the variable effect selected in the “normal mode”. In other words, it is possible to make the player recognize as if it were directly shifted from the “normal mode” to the “preparation mode”. Therefore, a lucky number is given to the staging unit 422a by a time-saving suggestion effect performed by causing the first variable prize device 82a to win a ball during the hit, in which the "opening pattern A" is set to the jackpot. Can be recognized even if it does not go through a plurality of stages of being displayed, so that the player can be more easily shifted to the "prepare mode". You can feel like. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG. 96, an example of the effect in the case where the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” after the end of the big hit (one or seven time-saving periods are given) will be described. As described above, in the present control example, when a big hit occurs in the time-saving state of a normal symbol, a “rensou mode” that is advantageous to the player with a high probability (for example, 97.5%) after the end of the big hit (the next big hit) To the normal symbol time-saving state, which continues until a certain time. In the “rensou mode”, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily executed. When a jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type (probably variable jackpot H to K, normal jackpot B) in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened is selected, so that more prize balls are given to the player. Can be acquired. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with one goal being to shift to the advantageous “rensou mode”.

  In order to shift from the “normal mode” to the “rensou mode”, it is basically necessary to shift to the “preparation mode” and win a jackpot during the “preparation mode”. For this reason, whether or not a big hit occurs in the “preparation mode” is one of the most important scenes in the game, because it determines the degree of advantage of the player playing the game in the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, in the present control example, in the “preparation mode”, a relatively large (flashy) “rensou mode suggestion effect” (see FIGS. 94 and 95) involving the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 (see FIG. 45) Is configured to execute.

  Although the details will be described later, in this “rensou mode suggestion effect”, the ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650 during the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 (see FIG. 45) configured to simulate roulette. Depending on the type of the pocket (the display board 646 and the partition board 647) into which the ball B falls, an effect of notifying whether or not the mode has been shifted to the “rensou mode” is executed. More specifically, 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640 are divided into a hit pocket and a missed pocket, and the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 falls into the hit pocket. By doing so, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the “rensou mode”. A rear LED 625 is provided on the rear side of the rotating member 640 (see FIG. 97). The back LED 625 is controlled to be turned on such that the back side of the hit pocket is turned on and the back side of the missing pocket is turned off. Therefore, by visually recognizing the lit pocket, the player can easily recognize the position of the hit pocket.

  The “rensou mode suggestion effect” is, specifically, an effect of setting (lighting) a winning pocket (effect of increasing a lucky number) and an effect of throwing a ball B into any pocket of the rotating member 640 (roulette chance). Production) and ending production. In the lucky number increase effect, each time a ball enters the second entrance 640a, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the hit pocket (lucky number). By increasing the number of winning pockets, the player can be made to feel as if it has become easier to shift to the “rensou mode”, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the lottery of whether or not to increase the winning pocket, whether or not the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined (whether the winning variation of the jackpot is changing or the “rensou mode” The lottery probability of whether or not to increase the number of winning pockets is made different depending on whether or not there is a probable variable jackpot inside. Specifically, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined, the hit pocket increases with a high probability (each time a ball enters the second entrance 640a, at a rate of 25%). Is determined. On the other hand, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is undetermined, or when it is confirmed that the return to the “normal mode” without the transition to the “rensou mode” is made (the last In the case where the special symbol lottery is missed), the increase in the number of hit pockets is determined with a low probability (a rate of 5% every time a ball enters the second entrance 640a). When the shift to the “rensou mode” is confirmed, the winning pockets are more likely to be increased, so that the winning pockets are increased, thereby improving the player's expectation of the “rensou mode”. Can be.

  Before increasing the number of winning pockets, a pocket having the same number as the lucky number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as the winning pocket. That is, the lucky number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 serves to notify the special symbol jackpot in the “normal mode” (see FIG. 91 (a)), and shifts to the “preparation mode” after the end of the jackpot. In addition to the role of notifying whether or not to shift (see FIG. 92 (b)), it also has the role of notifying whether or not to shift to “rensou mode”. Since the lucky number is used for various notifications that are advantageous to the player, knowing the lucky number allows the player to easily understand the result of each effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand. In addition, the notification of the special symbol jackpot in the "normal mode", the notification of "preparation mode" (normal symbol time saving state) executed in the jackpot, and the "rensou mode" executed in the "preparation mode" With the notification of, an effect aimed at obtaining all lucky numbers is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel these three different notifications as if they were one effect. Therefore, an effect with a sense of unity can be executed.

  The details of the lucky number increase effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the lucky number increase effect. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), during the effect of increasing the lucky number, the character “preparing roulette chance” is displayed in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the roulette chance effect is executed by the rotating member 640 configured as a roulette.

  In addition, below the word "roulette chance preparation" is displayed the character "Right-click to increase lucky number !!" When this character is displayed, during the execution of the lucky number increase effect, the player hits the ball toward the right side of the game board 13 (hits the ball right), thereby informing the player that the hit pocket may increase. Can be informed. Therefore, in the “preparation mode” in which the lucky number increase effect is set, the player can be made to make a right strike, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is advantageous to the player in the normal symbol time reduction state is executed. It will be easier. Therefore, a game can be played under advantageous conditions of the player, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 93 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the winning pocket (lucky number) increases in the lucky number increase effect. As shown in FIG. 93, during the execution of the lucky number increase effect, a prize (entrance) to the second entrance 640a is detected, and if the winning lottery of the winning pocket is won, an additional symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A winning pocket (lucky number) is announced. That is, in the large area Dm, the character “10GET !!” is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the number of hit pockets has increased by one, so that the player can be pleased. When the increase of the hit pocket is notified, the back side of the hit pocket is set to a lighting state. Thus, the position of the hit pocket on the rotating member 640 can be easily determined.

  In the first control example, the lottery for determining whether or not to increase the winning pocket (lucky number) is performed when the ball enters the second entrance 640a. The opportunity to increase the pocket (lucky number) is not limited to this. For example, a lottery may be performed to determine whether to increase the number of hit pockets (lucky numbers) when passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, or according to the elapsed time (for example, the end of the big hit). (Every 3 seconds have elapsed), a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of hit pockets (lucky numbers), or according to the number of ejected balls (for example, every five balls are fired). The lottery for determining whether or not to increase the winning pocket (lucky number) may be performed.

  In the first control example, during the execution of the lucky number increase effect, the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the winning pocket is made different depending on whether or not the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined. However, the variation of the lottery probability may be further increased. For example, when the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined, and when it is undecided whether to shift to the “rensou mode” (the number of start winning prizes in the time saving state is reduced to the set time saving period ), And the case where it is determined not to shift to the “rensou mode” may be configured to differ in the probability (ratio) that the increase of the winning pocket is determined. Specifically, for example, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined at the time of the lottery, a relatively high probability (for example, 25% of the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640a) ), The winning pocket (lucky number) is increased, and when it is determined that the mode does not shift to the “rensou mode”, a relatively high probability (for example, the second entrance 640a) May be configured so that the hit pocket is increased at a rate of 5% when the ball enters the ball). When it is undecided whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”, the probability between the above two cases (for example, a ratio of 10% when the ball enters the second entrance 640a) And the number of hit pockets may be increased. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a variation in how to increase the number of winning pockets, thereby further improving the interest in the lucky number increase effect.For example, it is undecided whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” In the case of (1), the probability that the number of hit pockets may be increased may be changed according to the number of working hours set as the “preparation mode”. That is, when the “preparation mode” with one time reduction period is set, the probability that the number of hit pockets is increased is lower than when the “preparation mode” with seven time reduction periods is set. May be. More specifically, for example, the configuration may be such that the number of hit pockets (lucky numbers) is increased at a rate of 8% when the number of time reductions is one, and at a rate of 12% when the number of time reductions is seven. As a result, the time-saving period can be predicted from the increase in the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers), so that it is possible to expect a shift to the “rensou mode” by increasing the number of winning pockets. In addition, it is possible to expect seven time-saving periods that are advantageous to the player (there are many chances of shifting to the “rensou mode”).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94 and FIG. 95, a roulette chance effect, which is one of the effects constituting the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, will be described. In the roulette chance effect, as described above, an effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” based on whether or not the ball B falls into the hit pocket.

  When the roulette chance effect is executed, first, in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, a character “Roulette Chance !!” is displayed, and a “ball in a shining pocket” is displayed below the character. If it falls, the text "rensou mode" is displayed. This allows the player to understand that the ball B falls into the pocket whose back side is set to the lighted state among the pockets of the rotating member 640, and that the game shifts to the “rensou mode”. .

  FIG. 94 (b) is a view showing a state where the arm member 664 of the pitching device 650 is rotated (see FIG. 65), and the ball B performs a swinging operation on the holding piece 677 at the protruding position. In FIG. 94 (b), the hitting pocket of the rotating member 640 is hatched, and the missing pocket is displayed in white.

  In the roulette chance production, when the cycle of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 second), the ball B is dropped to a target pocket (either a missing pocket or a hit pocket). (The holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position). By causing the ball B to swing once on the holding piece 677 and dropping the ball B after the period of the swing is reduced, it is possible to make it seem as if the ball B falls naturally. That is, when the ball B performs the swinging motion on the holding piece 677, the motion of the ball B can be more noticed, so that the player's interest in the roulette chance effect can be improved. In the following description, among the roulette chance effects, a series of effects from when the ball B is thrown toward the holding piece 677 until the ball B falls into one of the pockets is referred to as a rocking effect.

  FIG. 95 (a) is a diagram showing a case where the ball B has fallen and dropped into the pocket. Here, the case where the ball B comes off and falls into the pocket is, specifically, a case where the rocking effect is executed without a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol during the “preparation mode” (start of the rocking effect) At the point in time, the deviation fluctuation is being executed or the fluctuation is stopped). In this case, since the shift to the “rensou mode” has not been determined at the start of the swing effect, control is performed so that the ball B falls into the missing pocket.

  When the swinging effect is started without the special symbol jackpot, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the rotation of the rotating member 640 causes a detached pocket (opened pocket) immediately below the holding piece 677. The ball B is controlled to drop from the holding piece 677 in accordance with the arrangement. In addition, the character “Sorry” is displayed on the effect part 422 a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. This allows the player to easily understand that the transition from the "preparation mode" to the "rensou mode" could not be performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode will shift to the “rensou mode” at the start of the rocking production, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the hit pocket (hatched display) is directly below the holding piece 677. Is controlled so that the ball B falls from the holding piece 677 in accordance with the arrangement of the pockets. In addition, the characters “great success” are displayed on the effect part 422 a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the transition to the “rensou mode”.

  When the ball B falls into the falling pocket or the hit pocket, the cantilever plate 683 of the guide member 680 is pushed down by the weight of the ball B as described above, so that the limit switch is turned on. By detecting the ON state of the limit switch, it can be easily determined that the ball B has dropped normally. When the falling of the ball B is detected, the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 is stopped. In other words, the pocket (the pocket where the ball B has fallen) to which the number (identification information) indicating the effect of the current “renjo mode suggestion effect” is attached is stopped immediately below the holding piece 677 as the ball B falls. You. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the result of the effect by observing the same position (immediately below the holding piece 677) in each “rendition mode suggestive effect”. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect in which the effect of the effect is more easily understood.

  As described above, the positions of the pockets while the rotating member 640 is rotating are determined by monitoring the outputs of the detection sensors A to F (see FIG. 76) provided on the guide member 680 and outputting the outputs. Is determined by the combination of That is, the type of the pocket arranged immediately below the holding piece 677 is determined based on the combination of the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F (rotational position detection sensor 684). In the following description, a position immediately below the holding piece 677 is referred to as a drop position.

  In this control example, while the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677, the type of the pocket at the drop position is specified (determined) from the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F. Then, according to the result of the determination, the type of the pocket arranged to the next drop position after the pocket currently arranged at the drop position (the pocket adjacent to the pocket currently arranged at the drop position) is determined. Is done. Next, the type of pocket arranged at the drop position matches the type of pocket (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket) in which the ball B is dropped in the present swing effect, and the ball B swings. When the cycle of the operation is equal to or shorter than a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 second), the ball B is dropped into the next pocket to be placed at the drop position.

  Here, it is not the type of the pocket at the drop position, but the type of the pocket to be arranged at the next drop position determined by the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 that is determined after the ball B is determined to be dropped. This is because it takes time for the ball to reach the pocket at the falling position. That is, a time lag occurs between the time when the driving motor (holding piece motor) 675 is driven to start the operation of the holding piece 677 to the immersion position and the time when the ball B actually falls. If the configuration in which the type of the pocket at the drop position is determined and the drop control of the ball B is performed (the operation of the holding piece 677 to the immersion position) is executed, the time until the ball B actually falls becomes long. For example, the ball B may fall after the target pocket has passed. Also, for example, while the ball B is falling in the throwing path 655a, the partition plate 647 provided on the right side in the front view of the pocket arranged at the drop position moves by a rotating operation, so that the ball B is thrown. There is a possibility that the rotary member 640 may be caught by the passage 655a and the partition plate 647 and hinder the rotation operation of the rotary member 640.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the type of the pocket to be placed next at the drop position and the drop control of the ball B based on the determination result are executed before the pocket is placed at the drop position. It is configured to That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the immersion position at a timing when the ball B can be sufficiently dropped into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the drop position). And can be immersed. Therefore, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the pocket of the target type. Therefore, although the ball B does not shift to the “rensou mode”, the ball B falls into the hit pocket, and conversely, despite the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined, The ball B can be prevented (suppressed) from falling off and falling into the pocket.

  In this control example, the type of the pocket placed at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position is determined, and the fall control of the ball B is executed. It is not limited to this. For example, the type of the pocket two or three ahead from the current drop position may be determined in advance, and the fall control of the ball B with respect to the determined pocket may be performed. With such a configuration, the drop control can be executed with more margin, so that the ball B can be reliably dropped into the pocket of the target type.

  The rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is stopped based on the detection that the ball B has fallen into the missing pocket or the hit pocket, and when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the stop, the “rensou” Ending indicating the end of the “mode suggestion effect” is started. In the ending, the result of the effect is notified again in the third symbol display device 81, and the rotating member 640 is turned in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotating operation in the “rensou mode suggesting effect” (ie, the clockwise direction in front view). Rotate. This rotating operation is performed until the rotating member 640 is disposed at a position (for example, five pockets in a counterclockwise direction) at which the ball B dropped from the holding piece 677 can be rolled to the return passage 655b. continue. In the course of the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, when the pocket in which the ball B has dropped is positioned in the upper right direction in front view with respect to the return path 655b, the ball B falls from the opening of the pocket to the return path 655b. . When the ball B falls into the return passage 655b, the ball B rolls along the inclination of the rolling portion 655b1, and is placed on the ball holding portion 652. As described above, during the ending, by returning the ball B to a state in which the ball B can be pitched by the pitching device 650, an effect of dropping the ball B into any pocket in each of the “renjo mode suggestion effects” is executed. can do.

  When the rotating operation for returning the ball B to the ball holding unit 652 performed during the ending is completed, the rotating member 640 is kept in the stopped state until the next “rensou mode suggestion effect” is executed. Dripping. That is, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 after the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is completed differs depending on the pocket where the ball B has fallen. By simply rotating the ball B from the position where the ball B was dropped for five pockets without returning the arrangement of the rotating member 640 to the determined position, the time until the end of the rotating operation can be shortened. Therefore, the operation of the rotating member 640 can be surely ended during the ending of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, an additional effect performed in order to expect the player to shift to the “preparation mode” or the “rensou mode” in the “normal mode” will be described. The "addition" mentioned here means adding (adding) the number of winning pockets (the number of lucky numbers) in the roulette chance production of the "renjo mode suggestion production". If the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is executed during that time, the number of pockets is increased by the number added in the additional effect. By adding the winning pocket (lucky number), it is possible to make the player feel as if it is easier to win in the roulette chance effect, so that the player's expectation for the roulette chance effect can be increased.

  Whether or not to execute the additional effect is determined by a lottery (additional lottery) executed when the winning in the first entrance 64 is suspended in the “normal mode”. In this additional lottery, the ratio of additional effects determined differs according to the content of each reserved ball. Specifically, a lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "preparation mode" (a jackpot in which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set) and a lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "rensou mode" (Normal probability big hit in the time saving state of the normal symbol) exists (when it is determined that the roulette chance effect succeeds), the execution of the additional effect is determined at the highest ratio (25%). On the other hand, when the holding ball does not include the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “renso mode” or the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “preparation mode” (when the roulette chance effect is not executed) , The execution of the additional effect is determined at the lowest rate (5%). Furthermore, when the holding ball does not include the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “rensou mode” and includes only the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “preparation mode” (only the execution of the roulette chance effect is performed) Is determined and the effect result is undetermined), the execution of the additional effect is determined at an intermediate ratio (15%) between the two cases described above.

  As described above, the lottery result included in the pending ball is configured to be more advantageous to the player, so that the execution of the additional effect is configured to be easily determined. By digesting the holding ball, it can be expected that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be improved.

  Next, a specific mode of the additional effect will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 96 (a), when the number of reserved balls increases in the “normal mode”, the number of reserved symbols (designated by black circles) displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 increases by one. Three. Further, when the execution of the additional effect is determined by the additional lottery executed in response to the increase in the number of the reserved balls, the character “add !!!! + 1” is displayed on the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, "+1" indicating the total added number is displayed below the lucky number displayed in the small area Ds2. The display of the number of additions to the small area Ds2 is performed until the effect of increasing the number of pockets by the number added in the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is performed when the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is executed. Continue to be displayed. On the other hand, in a case where the additional effect is executed, but the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is not executed (when the jackpot in which the time saving state is set is not included in the reserved ball), the execution of the additional effect is determined. The accumulated number of additions continues to be displayed until the reserved ball that has been triggered is consumed (the lottery of the special symbol based on the reserved ball ends).

  FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when one extra pocket (lucky number) is added by the additional effect, and then the “renjo mode suggestive effect” is started while the holding ball is being digested. is there. As described above, the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is executed when the special symbol is a big hit in the “normal mode”, and the normal symbol time-saving state is set after the big hit is finished. Therefore, at the start of the “representative mode suggestion effect”, the lucky numbers (that is, “17”, “25”, “2”, and “13”) displayed on the respective display units 331a to 331d when the jackpot is announced. The symbol is continued to be displayed, and the lucky number (that is, the symbol of “7”) displayed at the time of informing the “preparation mode” to the staging unit 422a is continuously displayed (see FIG. 96 (b)).

  In addition, when the `` rensou mode suggestion effect '' is started in an added state, as a part of the lucky number increase effect, an effect of notifying the lucky number added in the additional effect in the `` normal mode '' is executed. You. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the character “added lucky number” is displayed for the large area Dm. Then, a character "5GET !!" is displayed below the character. Since this character is displayed inside the balloon generated from the position where the total added number is displayed, the lucky number added by the additional effect before the jackpot was "5". You can recognize that. Further, the pocket of the rotating member 640 corresponding to the lucky number notified by this effect is newly set as a hit pocket. That is, the pocket numbered “5” is set to the lighting state. By performing the effect of increasing the winning pocket (lucky number), it is made to feel as if the possibility of being notified of the winning (transition to the “rensou mode”) is increased in the subsequently performed roulette chance effect. be able to. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation for the roulette chance effect can be increased.

  As described above, in the present control example, in the “normal mode”, an additional effect that is more easily executed as the lottery result advantageous to the player is suspended is provided. Thus, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the additional effect. For example, an additional effect is usually performed when the jackpot type in which the “preparation mode” is set after the jackpot is suspended is increased, so that it is normal that the extra jackpot is performed (when the additional effect is not executed). It is possible to have the player play the game with higher expectation. If the jackpot hits, the expectation of shifting to the “preparation mode” increases.

  In addition, when the jackpot is hit as expected by the player, the player can be made aware that the degree of expectation to shift to the “prepare mode” is higher than usual (when the additional effect is not executed). In this way, it is possible to more strongly expect that the lucky number is displayed on the staging unit 422a during the jackpot game. Furthermore, at the time of execution of the additional production, the case where the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “rensou mode” is suspended is compared with the case where the transition to the “rensou mode” is not determined. Since the execution ratio of the additional effect is configured to be high, when the "prepare mode" is notified as expected by the player, if the degree of expectation to shift to the "rensou mode" is higher than usual, the player Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a stronger sense of expectation for shifting to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, by executing the additional effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in a stepwise manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the present control example, the case where it is determined that the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined within the range of the reserved ball, and the case where only the transition to the “prepare mode” is determined within the range of the reserved ball. , The ratio (probability) at which the additional effect is executed is different in each of the three cases (ie, 25%, 10%, and 5%), however, the additional effect is executed. The lottery probability of whether or not may be divided into more detailed cases. More specifically, for example, when all the reserved balls are out of place, an additional effect is executed at a rate (probability) of 3%, the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot is included in the reserved balls, and the jackpot type is When only the jackpot type that shifts to the “normal mode” after the jackpot is included, an additional effect may be executed at a rate (probability) of 5%. In addition, if the holding ball includes a jackpot type that shifts to the “preparation mode”, and it is determined that the shift to the “rensou mode” is not determined at the time of the additional lottery, 7% It may be configured such that the additional effect is executed at the ratio (probability) of. Here, the case where it is determined not to shift to the “rensou mode” is, for example, a state where only the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot type to which one time saving period is given is suspended, This is the case where an additional lottery is executed due to the newly reserved ball corresponding to the lottery result. Furthermore, when only the transition to the “preparation mode” is determined at the time of the additional lottery, the additional production is determined at a rate (probability) of 10%, and When the transition is determined, the additional effect may be executed at a rate (probability) of 25%.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to divide into finer stages and give expectations to various advantageous states. That is, at the time when the additional effect is executed, it is possible to expect that a big hit will be stronger than usual (when the additional effect is not executed). This is because if a jackpot occurs, expectations for the transition to the “preparation mode” and the transition to the “rensou mode” increase. Then, when the jackpot is hit as expected by the player, it can be expected that the transition to the “preparation mode” is notified at the jackpot more strongly than usual. This is because, if a transition is made to the “preparation mode” after the additional production, the degree of expectation for the transition to the “rensou mode” is increased. Furthermore, when the jackpot is hit as expected by the player, it is more strongly expected that the roulette chance effect executed in the “preparation mode” notifies the hit (that is, shift to the “rensou mode”). Can be done.

  Next, the lighting control of the rear LED 625 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the rear LED 625 is provided to illuminate the contact pocket of the rotating member 640 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 97, the rear LED 625 includes three arc-shaped LED bars 625a, 625b, and 625c, and these are combined to form a ring shape in a front view. As shown in FIG. 97, each of the LED bars 625a, 625b, and 625c is provided with six lighting regions in which four LED chips are densely arranged at equal intervals (lighting regions A1 to A18). By lighting each of the lighting regions A1 to A18, a region having substantially the same area as one pocket of the rotating member 640 can emit light. Therefore, by lighting the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket, the hit pocket can be made to look shiny.

  Here, the lighting of each LED chip included in the rear LED 625 is controlled by a known LED driver. The LED driver can switch the ratio (DUTY ratio) between the ON period and the OFF period of the LED and change the lighting frequency based on the lighting control command received from the audio lamp control device 113. For example, when a lighting control command indicating that the ON period is 80% (DUTY ratio 80%) and the frequency is 320 Hz is output to the LED driver, the LED driver outputs 80% of one cycle (1/320 second). The ON period of the width and the OFF period of the 20% time width are repeatedly set. This operation is continued until a new lighting control command is received.

  A method of specifying the ON period by a lighting control command output to the LED driver will be described more specifically. The data (lighting rate data) indicating the length of the ON period (lighting rate) is composed of data of a plurality of bits (for example, 8 bits). If the lighting rate data is 00H (0 in decimal notation), it means the lighting rate (DUTY ratio) is 0%, and if the lighting rate data is FFH (255 in decimal number), the lighting rate (DUTY ratio) Means 100%. Further, the lighting rate is set to increase at regular intervals as the lighting rate data goes from 00H to FFH. For example, when 80H (128 in decimal notation) is set as the lighting rate data, the lighting state is 50% (that is, 128/255).

  The reference signal (synchronization signal) serving as a reference for the lighting frequency of the LED can generate the frequency designated by the lighting control command by the LED driver itself (set it to free run), or can be input from outside the LED driver. The synchronization signal (external synchronization signal) can be used. Further, whether to use the free-run mode or use the external synchronization signal can be specified by a lighting control command. When an external synchronization signal is input to the LED driver, it is not necessary to set the lighting frequency by the lighting control command.

  Further, in one cycle of turning on and off the LED, the position of the on period can be changed by the lighting control command. That is, the LED on-period can be set at the same time as the detection of the synchronization signal, and the LED off-period can be set at the end of the on-period. An on-period can also be set after the end of the period.

  A specific example of the lighting control command for setting the position of the ON period will be described in detail. The setting start position of the ON period is specified by, for example, 8-bit data. Specifically, one cycle is divided into 255 equal parts, and it is possible to specify from which section the on-period is started by 8-bit data. If the data designating the position of the ON period is 00H, the ON period starts from the first section of one cycle divided into 255 equal parts (that is, simultaneously with the start of one cycle). If the data that specifies the position of the ON period is 1EH (that is, 30 in decimal notation), the ON period starts from the 31st section of one cycle divided into 255 equal parts.

  The lighting control command includes data for specifying a lighting area. That is, the above-mentioned lighting rate, lighting frequency, lighting phase, and the like can be set by designating a part or all of the lighting areas A1 to A18. The setting of the lighting area is specified by, for example, data of 3 bytes (24 bits). Specifically, bits corresponding to each of the lighting regions A1 to A18 are set (for example, the lighting regions A1 to A18 are associated with the lower bits in order), and the lighting region corresponding to the ON bit is set. Thus, the lighting state specified by the lighting control command is reflected by the LED driver.

  As described above, the LED driver for controlling the LEDs according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to receive a lighting control command including a plurality of data. The plurality of data are output by a serial transfer method such as an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) method. That is, a signal corresponding to various lighting control data (serial data) such as a lighting rate from the audio lamp control device 113 and what data (the bit of the data is the serial data) currently being output. And a signal (serial clock) indicating the following.

  More specifically, for example, from the audio lamp control device 113, as serial data, 24-bit data corresponding to the lighting area, 8-bit data corresponding to the lighting rate of the specified lighting area, or the lighting frequency 8-bit data, 8-bit data indicating an ON period setting start position, and the like are output. The LED driver outputs a signal (so-called ACK) indicating that data has been normally received to the sound lamp control device 113 every time, for example, every data of 8 bits is received. The sound ramp control device 113 waits until an ACK is received, and outputs the next 8 bits of data when the ACK is received. Thus, omission of data reception can be prevented. In addition, the output order of various types of data output from the audio lamp control device 113 is fixed each time, and the order of data types output from the audio lamp control device 113 is also stored in the LED driver. , It is possible to easily understand what data has been received. Each data is output in synchronization with a serial clock that repeats on (1) and off (0) at a predetermined frequency (for example, 100 kHz). That is, the bit indicated by the serial clock in the output data is on depending on whether the serial data is on (1) or off (0) when the serial clock is on (1). Or off.

  Here, a specific example of the mode of the serial clock and the serial data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a diagram illustrating an example of a lighting control command including a serial clock and serial data. The serial clock and the serial data can be set to either on or off values. The data of each bit constituting the lighting control command can be notified according to the state of the serial data when the serial clock is on (1). In this example, a command for setting a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% for the lighting areas A1 and A2 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 234, the serial clock and serial data are set to ON (1) when no data is output. When the lighting control command is output, the serial data is changed from on (1) to off (0) while the serial clock is on (1). Due to this displacement, the LED driver can easily recognize that the lighting control command will be notified from now on.

  When the serial data shifts from on (1) to off (0) and notifies the start of the output of the lighting control command, first, the lighting area data (data specifying which of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is to be output). Is output. This data is composed of 24 bits, and is output in three times of 8 bits. As shown in the figure, after the start of the output of the lighting control command is notified, the serial data is set to ON while the serial clock repeats ON and OFF twice. That is, it is notified that the 0th bit and the 1st bit of the lighting area data are ON. Then, although illustration is omitted, the serial data is thereafter set to off while the serial clock repeats on and off 22 times. That is, it is notified that the third to 24th bits of the lighting area data are all off. This makes it easy for the LED driver to recognize that the current lighting control command is a command for notifying the lighting state of the lighting areas A1 and A2 corresponding to the 0th and 1st bits of the lighting area data. Can be.

  The on-period of the serial data is configured so that the beginning is earlier than the timing when the serial clock rises from off to on, and the end is later than the timing when the serial clock falls from on to off. It is configured to be. This allows the serial data to be more reliably kept on while the serial clock is on. In other words, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the LED driver from determining that the off data has been received in spite of the output of the on data, and to notify various data more accurately. For the same reason, the beginning of the off period of the serial data is configured to be earlier than the timing at which the serial clock rises from off to on, and the end is more than the timing at which the serial clock falls from on to off. It is configured to be slow.

  The lighting area data is divided into eight bits and output three times, and an ACK is returned from the LED driver for each of the three outputs (notifying that the LED driver has normally received each data of eight bits). Then, data of 8 bits is output as the lighting rate data. As described above, in this specific example, since the lighting rate is 100% (11111111B in binary notation), the serial data is set to ON while the serial clock is set to 8 times. Thereby, "11111111B" can be notified to the LED driver as the lighting rate data. Although illustration is omitted, other data (8-bit data corresponding to the lighting frequency, 8-bit data indicating a start position for setting the ON period, and the like) are output according to the same rule. When all data constituting the lighting control command has been output, the serial clock is first set to the on (1) state, and then the serial data rises from the off (0) state to the on (1) state. . When serial data rises from the off (0) state to the on (1) state during the on (1) state of the serial clock, it is possible to notify the LED driver that all data has been output.

  As described above, in this control example, the lighting state can be accurately notified by using the two types of signals, the serial clock and the serial data. Since it is not necessary to use different wiring for each data type, the number of wirings can be reduced. Therefore, the unit cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of wires.

  Note that the LED driver is not limited to the one that receives the lighting control command in the above-described mode. For example, a driver that can specify the position and length of the ON period with a simpler lighting control command may be employed. For example, an LED driver capable of receiving a lighting control command in which a lighting state of each section when one cycle is divided into eight equal to each bit of 8-bit data may be used. Specifically, the sections that are earlier in time are associated with the lower bits in order, the section corresponding to the bit of data 1 is turned on, and the section corresponding to the bit of data 0 is turned off. For example, if the control data is 07H (that is, 00000111B in binary notation), of the sections obtained by dividing one cycle into eight, the first three sections are turned on and the second half are turned off. This makes it possible to simplify the lighting control command output from the MPU 221 to the LED driver, so that the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced. Further, as the LED driver, a driver that can change the LED current value (anode voltage value) of each of the lighting regions A1 to A18 may be adopted.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a state in which the lighting areas A13, A15, and A17 are set to the lighting state (lighting rate 100%), and the other lighting areas are set to the light-off state (lighting rate 0%). . The dotted line in FIG. 98 shows the outer shape of the rotating member 640 provided on the front surface of the rear LED 625. As shown in FIG. 98, each of the divided members DV (each pocket) arranged in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) in which the divided members DV (each pocket) are circumferentially connected at a first interval. The arrangement matches the arrangement of the lighting regions A1, A2, A12 to A18.

  FIG. 99 is a view showing the appearance of the rotating member 640 when the lighting state shown in FIG. 98 is set. As shown in FIG. 99, when the lighting areas A13, A15, and A17 are set to the lighting state with the lighting rate of 100%, the pockets P2, P28, and P30 arranged on the front side of the lighting areas A13, A15, and A30 have a shining appearance. (The hatched display part in FIG. 99). In this way, by setting the lighting area arranged on the back side of the winning pocket to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, the winning pocket can be made to look shining. Therefore, the player can easily discriminate from the appearance of the winning pocket and the missing pocket.

  The rear LED 625 is controlled so as to follow the rotating member 640 and rotate around the rotation axis O of the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 at the same rotation speed as the rotating member 640. Therefore, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, the lighting area with the lighting rate of 100% can be made to follow the winning pocket, so that the winning pocket can be kept as it looks in the roulette chance effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the correspondence between the lighting position and the winning pocket is broken and the player mistakenly recognizes the winning pocket and the missing pocket.

  As described above, the rotating member 640 includes the first section S1 in which the divided members DV are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and the second interval in which the divided members DV are smaller than the first interval. , And a second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed, and a total of 30 divided members DV are formed in the circumferential direction in an annular shape in a front view. On the other hand, in the rear LED 625, 18 lighting areas are arranged at equal intervals. That is, while the rear LED 625 makes one rotation, the rotating member 640 can make only 18/30 rotations. The type is shifted according to the progress of the rotation operation. For example, in the examples of FIGS. 98 and 99, the lighting area A17 is set to the lighting rate of 100%, so that the pocket P2 has a shining appearance. When the LED 625 is rotated until the rear LED 625 makes a full turn, the pocket provided on the front side of the lighting area A17 changes. That is, while the back LED 625 makes one round, the rotating member 640 moves by 18 pockets, so that the type of the pocket arranged on the front side of the lighting area A17 changes to the pocket P20. Therefore, if the same position is simply kept lit, the illuminated appearance pocket changes each time the rear LED goes around, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in the present control example, the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is corrected every time the rear LED makes 1/3 turn (that is, in units of one LED bar), and the hit pocket is always set. It is controlled so that it looks shiny. More specifically, each time any of the LED bars matches the correction section RA shown in FIG. 98, the lighting state of the LED bar that matches the correction section RA is adjusted according to the deviation from the arrangement of the rotating member 640. Correction (switching).

  Here, the correction section RA is a section that is invisibly shielded from the player by the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 disposed at the ascending position. For this reason, even if the lighting state of each lighting area arranged in the correction section RA is switched, it is impossible (difficult) for the player to visually recognize the switching. That is, the appearance of the player is always kept as if the hit pocket was shining. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more surely distinguish the winning pocket and the missing pocket from the appearance of the pocket.

  Next, the correction (switching) of the lighting state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example in which pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30 are set as hit pockets. In the present control example, when the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is started, each time the arrangement of the LED bar 625a and the correction section RA first match after the rotating member 640 is rotated, each Lighting control of the lighting area is started. Here, whether or not the correction section RA and the LED bar 625a are arranged in the same state is detected by a rotation position detection sensor 684 (not shown) for detecting the rotation position of the rear LED 625.

  In the example of FIG. 100, when the LED bar 625a is first arranged to coincide with the correction section RA after the rotation member 640 starts rotating, the pocket arranged at the drop position is the pocket P1. (See FIG. 100 (b)). In this case, the type of the six pockets (pockets P25 to P30) in the traveling direction of the rotation operation from the pocket P1 (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket) and the traveling direction of the rotation operation are opposite. The types of pockets (pockets P1 to P12) for 12 pockets are read in the direction, and the lighting state corresponding to the type of each pocket is set for each lighting area A1 to A18. That is, the types of the pockets P25 to P30 are read out, and the lighting states respectively corresponding to the lighting areas A7 to A12 are reflected. In addition, the types of the pockets P1 to P12 are read, and the lighting states corresponding to the lighting areas A6 to A13 are reflected.

  More specifically, among the pockets P25 to P30, since the pockets P28 to P30 are the winning pockets, the corresponding lighting areas A10 to A12 are set to the lighting state with the lighting rate of 100%, respectively. Further, among the pockets P1 to P12, the pocket P3 and the pockets P9 to P11 are the hit pockets, so that the lighting area A15 corresponding to the pocket P3 and the lighting areas A3 to A5 corresponding to the pockets P9 to P11 have the lighting rates. The lighting state is set to 100% (see FIG. 100A). As a result, the pocket P3 and the pockets P28 to P30 in the lower half of the rotating member 640 (arrangement that is visible to the player) have a shining appearance (see FIG. 100 (b)). Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that these shiny-looking pockets are hit pockets. Note that the type of each of the pockets P1 to P30 (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket) is stored in a hit position storage area 223k provided in the RAM 223.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating the arrangement of the rear LED 625 and the rotating member 640 when the rear LED 625 makes a 1/3 turn from the state of FIG. As shown in the figure, the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 maintain the state set in FIG. That is, the lighting regions A3 to A5, A10 to A12, and the lighting region A15 make a 1/3 turn at the same rotation speed as the rotating member 640 while maintaining the lighting state of the lighting rate of 100%. Thereby, the LED bar 625b is arranged so as to coincide with the correction section RA. Since the rear LED 625 rotates in the state described with reference to FIG. 100, each of the lighting areas A7 to A12 forming the LED bar 625b has a lighting state according to the type of the pockets P25 to P30 (whether or not it is a hit pocket). Has remained. However, as shown in FIG. 101B, the arrangement order of the pockets in the correction section RA is the arrangement of the pockets P13 to P30. That is, if the rotation operation is further continued while maintaining the state of each of the lighting areas A7 to A12 of the LED bar 625b, the lighting corresponding to the pockets P25 to P30 is performed for the six pockets P13 to P18. The state is applied. Therefore, the correspondence between the hit pocket and the missing pocket may be broken, and the player may be confused.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when any one of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged in the correction section RA, the lighting state of the lighting area forming the LED bar included in the correction section RA is corrected (switched). It is configured as follows. More specifically, six types of pockets arranged in the correction section RA are read from the beginning of the section (that is, in order of being arranged in the non-correction section NA by the rotation operation in an earlier order) and read. The lighting state according to the type is controlled to be reflected in each lighting area included in the correction section RA. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the type of all the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA from being shifted from the lighting state of the lighting area arranged on the back side of each pocket.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a case where the states of the lighting areas A7 to A12 forming the LED bar 625b are corrected according to the types of the pockets P13 to P18. As described above, of the pockets P13 to P18, there are two hit pockets, P15 and P16. That is, the third and fourth pockets out of the six pockets that will be arranged in the non-correction section NA will be the winning pockets due to the rotation operation. Accordingly, the third and fourth lighting areas A9 among the lighting areas A7 to A12 constituting the LED bar 625b are arranged such that the third and fourth pockets shine. , A10 are each set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% (see FIG. 102). As a result, the appearance of the pockets P13 to P18 to be arranged in the non-correction section NA by rotation of the rotating member 640 in the future is changed in advance to the appearance corresponding to the type of each pocket (a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, or a lighting rate of 0%). In the off state).

  Thereafter, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, each time any one of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged in the correction section RA, the lighting state of the lighting area constituting the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA. Is corrected. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (appearance in which the hit pocket shines and the missing pocket becomes dark). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from erroneously recognizing the winning pocket and the missing pocket.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a description will be given of a configuration for determining the period of the swinging operation when the ball B performs the swinging operation on the holding piece 677. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), the movable piece 677 and the front case 672 disposed on the back side of the ball B performing the swinging operation at the upper part of the movable piece 677 have a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape. An opening 678 is provided. A ball detection sensor 679 for determining whether or not the ball B is located on the near side is provided inside the opening 678. In a state where the ball B is not arranged on the near side in front view with respect to the ball detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103A), the output of the ball detection sensor 679 becomes L (low). On the other hand, when the ball B is arranged in front of the ball detection sensor 679 by performing the swinging operation (see FIG. 103B), the ball B is detected, and the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is output. H (high). In the present control example, when the ball B performs the swinging operation, the cycle of the swinging operation of the ball B is determined based on the interval (period) in which the output of the ball detection sensor 679 becomes H. For example, if the period from when the H output of the ball detection sensor 679 is detected (see FIG. 103 (b)) to when the next H output is detected is 1 second, the ball B now performs Since the half of the period of the swing operation is 1 second, it is determined that the period of the swing operation is 2 seconds.

  As described above, in the present control example, in a state where the ball B is performing the swinging operation, the cycle of the swinging operation is determined, and when the ball B becomes shorter than a predetermined period (1 second), the ball B is allowed to fall. It is configured to That is, the period of the swinging operation is sufficiently short, and even if the ball B is dropped, the ball B is dropped at a timing at which the player does not feel unnatural. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having the impression that the type of the pocket in which the ball B falls in the roulette chance effect is intentionally operated. Therefore, the production can be enjoyed to the end without giving doubt to the result of the roulette chance production.

  The holding piece 677 in the present control example has a width enough to hold the ball B thereon when the swinging motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second). For this reason, the ball B can be reliably dropped by immersing the holding piece 677 to the immersion position in a state where the amplitude of the swing operation of the ball B is equal to or less than the predetermined period (1 second).

  Next, a description will be given of a method of driving various drive motors (upper lift motor 341, liquid crystal lift motor 441, left swing motor 531, rotation motor 631, pitching motor 665, holding piece motor 675). These various drive motors are configured by, for example, known stepping motors, and a plurality of these motors are provided in association with each accessory in order to operate each accessory mounted on the pachinko machine 10. These various drive motors are driven by corresponding motor control ICs (motor drivers). Specifically, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 sends a command to the motor control IC (motor driver) including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotation direction (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotation speed. Is output. The control IC (motor driver) drives various corresponding drive motors based on the output command. The motor control IC (motor driver) may be a single IC capable of setting operations for a plurality of drive motors, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor drivers) may be provided. In this case, the drive motors corresponding to the different accessories may be respectively operated. When a motor control IC (motor driver) capable of setting the operation for a plurality of drive motors is employed, the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps and the like includes information for specifying the type of the drive motor. You only need to output it.

  Here, the operation of the drive motor will be described using the upper elevating motor 341 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the upper elevating motor 341 based on the set command, the operation is performed on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 each time the one-step operation is executed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that the operation has been performed is output. With this execution signal, the MPU 221 can grasp the progress of the set operation. Note that a step counter (not shown) is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. The step counter is provided for each accessory, and is a counter for counting how many steps each accessory has operated from the origin (retreat) position. That is, the origin (retreat) position is set to the position of 0 step, and the value is updated by 1 each time the execution signal is received from the control IC. More specifically, each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (forward direction) from the origin (retreat) position to the end point (extend) position, the value is incremented by one. In addition, the value is decremented by 1 each time one step operation is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (overhang) position to the origin (retreat) position. Therefore, the operating position of each accessory can be easily grasped based on the value of the step counter.

  Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement set for each accessory, and refers to a position to which a transition is made in returning to the origin based on power-on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not the origin position is at the origin position. If the origin sensor is not turned on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor is turned on. The accessory is varied until it is detected (that is, various drive motors are driven). This origin position is a reference position for the operation of each accessory. Note that the above-described step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory comes to the origin position due to the origin return (that is, when the origin sensor detects ON). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated by one based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

  Next, an example of control of various drive motors (here, the upper elevating motor 341) by the motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. In order to make the description easy to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one revolution in four steps) will be described as an example. It is configured so that the rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

  First, FIG. 104 (a) is a diagram showing an outline of an upper elevating motor 341 constituted by a stepping motor. The upper elevating motor 341 is configured such that a portion corresponding to the excitation control data is excited by transmitting the excitation control data from the audio lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC. Specifically, the motor control IC is excited by excitation control data composed of 4-digit binary numbers corresponding to “A, B, C, D” shown in FIG. More specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (that is, any one of A, B, C, and D) of the upper elevating motor 341 is “1”, the excitation is performed, and the excitation control data is “0”. If it is not excited. For example, if the data of the excitation control is “1100”, A and B are excited, and C and D are not excited. The excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 104 (b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The sound ramp control device 113 includes an excitation counter used to select and set one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data specified in an excitation table (see FIG. 104B). Is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from “0”, and a loop counter that returns to “0” when the value of the excitation counter is updated after the value of the excitation counter becomes “3”. Has become. Each time the excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, the excitation of each part based on the excitation control data is immediately performed (that is, the upper lifting motor 341 operates without a time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). Further, the excitation counter can be updated in the negative direction. That is, the values can be updated in the order of “0” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” starting from “0”. In the case of updating in the negative direction, the rotation direction of the upper elevating motor 341 is opposite to the case of updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (whether the direction is positive or negative) and the frequency of updating the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of accessory for which an operation is set. Note that the maximum value of the excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once in one step (that is, 360 steps are required for the motor to make one rotation), the excitation counter is updated in the range of “0” to “359”. It becomes a loop counter.

  Next, a specific example of the excitation control data for exciting each part of the upper elevating motor 341 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the excitation table defining the excitation control data and the state of the upper elevating motor 341 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. . As shown in FIG. 104 (b), the excitation table defines the excitation control data for each value of the excitation counter.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the excitation control of “1100, 0110, 0011, 1001” in the order of the excitation counters “0” to “3” is performed as the sequence data corresponding to the upper elevating motor 341. Data is specified respectively. When “1100”, which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “0”, is set, each position of A and B of the upper elevating motor 341 is excited. Further, when the sequence data “0110” corresponding to the excitation counter value “1” is set, the positions of B and C of the upper elevating motor 341 are excited, so that the excitation counter value becomes “0”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state. When the sequence data “0011” corresponding to the excitation counter value “2” is set, the positions of C and D of the upper elevating motor 341 are excited, and the excitation counter value is “1”. From 90 degrees clockwise. When the sequence data “1001” corresponding to the excitation counter value “3” is set, the positions of A and D of the upper elevating motor 341 are excited, so that the excitation counter value becomes “2”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state. In this manner, in the example shown in FIG. 104, each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by one in the positive direction, the upper elevating motor 341 rotates 90 degrees clockwise. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the upper elevating motor 341 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

  As described above, the control of the upper elevating motor 341 has been described using the simplified operation model. It can be rotated once each time (for each update). That is, when varying each of the accessories, the value of the excitation counter is updated one by one by the number of times corresponding to the number of steps to be varied, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set every time the excitation counter is updated. Each character can be accurately changed.

  As described above, in this control example, by setting a command to the motor driver, it is possible to drive various drive motors at the rotation speed, the rotation direction, and the number of rotation steps designated by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize various effect operations using the accessory.

  In addition, a unique operation pattern (operation scenario) corresponding to the effect is set for each of the accessories. Although the details will be described later, this operation pattern (operation scenario) defines a command to be set for the above-described motor control IC (motor driver) for each elapsed time.

  Further, in the present control example, it is determined whether or not the operation of the various drive motors has been completed based on the command set for the motor driver based on the number of steps in which the various drive motors have operated. That is, based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times the execution signal output from the motor driver is received each time the operation of one step is set by the motor driver, whether the operations set for the various drive motors are completed. It is determined whether or not, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the elapsed time after setting a command for operating various drive motors is measured, and whether or not the operation of each drive motor has been completed is determined based on the elapsed time. .

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting of the pachinko machine, is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display on the third symbol display device 81. Is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to make settings and the like.

  For the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. 1st hitting type counter C2 used to perform the setting, a stop type selection counter C3 used to select an outage stop type in the special symbol, and a first initial value used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1. A value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 139). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a common execution area and a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each of these areas has a first prize. The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the mouth 64 and the second entrance 640a. A special symbol lottery is executed based on various counter values stored in the common execution area. On the other hand, with respect to various counter values stored in each holding area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the execution of the lottery is held until the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied. In the present control example, only the lottery of the special symbol 1 is held, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is not held. Therefore, when the ball entry to the second entrance 640a is detected, the lottery of the special symbol 1 is not suspended, and when the symbol is not fluctuating, various counter values are stored in the common execution area and the special symbol is stored. The lottery of symbol 2 is executed.

  Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 139).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640a. It is stored in the common execution area of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. If the value matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a large jackpot than the low probability. (A period in which the symbol is in a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)) includes a first random number table for low probability and a first random number table for high probability, and is included in each table. The number of random hits to be hit is different. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B when a special symbol hits a big hit. , And reaches a maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999), and then returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present control example), and the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640a. Is stored in the common execution area of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a special symbol big hit, that is, a random number that is out of the special symbol. Then, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is the one when the special symbol is removed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol big hit, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B displays The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same common execution area or the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 999. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are 40 random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random numbers “0 to 39” are the first random numbers for the low probability. It is stored in a table 202a (see FIG. 106B). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is 40, and the total number of the random numbers is 40 in the total number of the random numbers.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 41 random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value “500 to 540” is stored in the first random number table 202a for the high probability at the time of the high probability (FIG. 106 (b)). ) See). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of the random numbers is 41 out of the total number of the random numbers of 1,000, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is “1 / 24.4”. That is, the probability of a special symbol jackpot at the high probability of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol) and the low probability of the special symbol are substantially equal. This is because the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example has little benefit to the player if the jackpot is just hit in the “normal mode”. That is, as described above, in the “normal mode”, the first variable prize device 82a is likely to be a big hit in which the first variable prize device 82a is opened (that is, relatively few prize balls can be obtained), and in many cases in the case of the big hit, After that, the mode shifts to the “normal mode” again without shifting to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, since the jackpot and the normal mode in which the prize balls that can be acquired are relatively small are easily repeated, it is disadvantageous for the player while staying in the “normal mode”.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example is very advantageous for the player by shifting to the “rensou mode”. Then, in order to shift to the “rensou mode”, it is necessary to be a big hit mainly in the “preparation mode”. To shift to the preparation mode, a big hit in which the time reduction state is given in the “normal mode” It is necessary to assign a type. Therefore, the jackpot in the “normal mode” merely plays the role of shifting to the “preparation mode”, and the player plays the game in the “normal mode” with the main purpose of becoming the jackpot itself. is not. Under this situation, if the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is extremely low compared to the high probability state of the special symbol, instead of shifting to the “rensou mode” or the “preparation mode”, In some cases, the situation in which even the jackpot, which is the preceding stage, is not won may be continued for a long time, so that the motivation of the player to play the game may be significantly impaired. Therefore, in this control example, the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the special symbol have almost the same probability of a jackpot, and in either case, the jackpot is relatively easily won. I have. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which even a jackpot, which is a stage before the “rensou mode” or the “preparation mode”, does not continue for a long time, so that the motivation of the player for the game can be kept high.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The big hit type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106 (c)). The correspondence between the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the determined big hit type will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reaching, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "Completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present control example), and the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640a. Is stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set in a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fine fluctuation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 139) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 110 (b)) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67. Are stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the ordinary symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 110 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. If the value of the random number matches the value of the random number set in the second random number table (see FIG. 110A), it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, the second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (period in a normal state of a normal symbol) and for a high probability of a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability. ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when the ordinary symbol has a low probability, there is one random number value which is a hit for the ordinary symbol, and the value is "5". This random number value is stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, the total number of the random numbers is 240 out of the total number of the random numbers, and therefore the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is “1/240”.

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 , The normal symbol change display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is “5”, it is determined that the winning has been achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, “O” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is displayed, and the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the second entrance 640a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device 83 , The normal symbol change display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a stopped symbol (normal symbol) The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the second entrance 640a is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and the second entrance 640a is opened. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first winning opening 64. In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance 640a is opened only for “1 second × 2 times” when a normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  As described above, in the present control example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol at a low probability of a normal symbol is significantly lower than at the time of a high probability of a normal symbol. By reducing the number of times the opening 640a is opened and reducing the opening period of the second entrance 640a once, the ball is in the second state at the time of a low probability of the normal symbol (that is, the "normal mode"). It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the ball entrance 640a. Thus, when the normal symbol has a low probability (that is, in the “normal mode”), the ball is entered into the second entrance 640a, so that the jackpot (the second specific winning opening 65a is opened) where a relatively large number of prize balls can be obtained is obtained. It is possible to suppress an irregular game method of aiming at a big hit type. If the irregular gaming method is performed and the second specific winning opening 65a is successively won in the jackpot which is opened, the payout rate greatly exceeds the payout rate due to the design of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, there is a possibility that an unexpected disadvantage is given to the hall. On the other hand, in the present control example, it is extremely difficult to make the ball enter the second entrance 640a at the time of the low probability of the normal symbol (that is, the “normal mode”). In the "normal mode", it is possible to prevent (suppress) the execution of the irregular game method of hitting the ball aiming at the second entrance 640. Therefore, the payout rate as designed can be realized.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 139).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 uses the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the ROM 202 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and fixed value data.

  FIG. 106A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 106a, in the ROM 202, a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting table 202e, and a state setting table 202f are stored. Is provided at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 106B) is a data table in which the big hit determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored as described above. Specifically, as the jackpot determination value in the special symbol low probability state, 40 determination values of “0 to 39” are defined, and as the jackpot determination value in the special symbol high probability state (probable change state), “500” is set. 41 judgment values of ".about.540" are defined. If the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106B), a special symbol is displayed. Is determined to be a jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 106 (c)) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining a big hit type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for each big hit type. It is defined in association. Here, details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 106 (c) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the first hit type selection table 202b described above. As shown in FIG. 106 (c), the first hit type selection table 202b is a special type 1 hit type selection table 202b1 that is used to determine the big hit type when a special symbol 1 is determined to be a big hit. And a special type 2 hit type selection table 202b2 used to determine a big hit type when a special symbol 2 lottery is selected. First, the details of the special figure 1 type selection table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the type selection table 202b1 per special figure 1. The special figure 1 hit type selection table 202b1 includes eight types of hits of “probable change jackpot A” to “probable change jackpot G” and “normal jackpot A” in association with possible values of the first hit type counter C2. The type is specified.

  More specifically, “probably variable big hit A” is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 being “0 to 4”. As described above, the first hit type counter C2 is a counter that can take 1000 values of “0 to 999”. Among these, the number of judgment values that become “probable jackpot A” is five of “0 to 4”, and therefore, when a lottery of the special symbol 1 becomes a jackpot, the probability of becoming “probable jackpot A” is 0.5%. (5/1000).

  The “probable change jackpot A” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two rounds, and in each round, the second specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won). is there. If the player keeps hitting the ball continuously, ten balls can be sufficiently won to the second specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds elapse, and in many cases, the player A relatively large number (300) of prize balls can be obtained. After the “probable change jackpot A” ends, the state shifts to the special change state of the special symbol, and shifts to the normal symbol time reduction state. It should be noted that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol given after the end of the “probable change jackpot A” is irrespective of the state at the time of winning (whether the “normal mode”, the “preparation mode”, or the “rensou mode”). Continue until the next big hit. That is, after the “probable change jackpot A” ends, the process directly shifts to the “rensou mode” without going through the “preparation mode”. Since it is possible to acquire a relatively large amount of prize balls and to directly shift to the “rensou mode” which is the most advantageous for the player, “probable change jackpot A” is one of the jackpot types that can be selected in the special symbol 1 lottery. , Is the type of jackpot most advantageous to the player. Therefore, especially in the “normal mode”, when the jackpot is notified (the lucky numbers are displayed on all of the effect parts 331a to 331d), it is strongly expected that the player will be “probable change jackpot A”. Can be done.

  "Probably variable big hit B" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "5 to 84". Of the 1000 determination values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of determination values that are “probably variable jackpots B” is 80, “5 to 84”, so the special symbol 1 lottery Is "8% (80/1000)".

  The “probable change jackpot B” has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable prize device 82a performs the opening pattern A (opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times). A jackpot that opens and closes according to. The maximum opening time per round is a total of 12 seconds (0.6 seconds × 20 times), which is shorter than the maximum opening time (30 seconds) of the second specific winning opening 65a, and one opening period Because it is as short as 0.6 seconds, it is difficult to make the ball win continuously. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot is reduced as compared with the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. It is disadvantageous for the player in terms of the number of winning balls.

  After the “probable change big hit B” is finished, the state is shifted to the special symbol probable change state. In addition, the type of the time saving state of the ordinary symbol given after the end of the "probable change big hit B" is the game state at the time of the "probable change big hit B" ). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, in the case of “probable change big hit B” in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol which continues until the next big hit. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. As described above, since the “rensou mode” is the most advantageous state for the player, the player can be pleased by setting “probably variable big hit B” in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

  On the other hand, in the case of "low probability big hit B" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, after the big hit is completed, the state shifts to the ordinary symbol time saving state which continues until the special symbol lottery is completed seven times. I do. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. As described above, if a special symbol hits in the "preparation mode", the game shifts to the "rensou mode" which has the highest probability (97.5%) and is the most advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the “preparation mode” to which the game shifts after the “probable change big hit B” ends, a game can be played in expectation of a big hit. Also, if the number of lotteries (seven times) does not result in a jackpot, the game does not shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, anxiety about returning to the “normal mode” without hitting the jackpot, It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for shifting to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the “preparation mode” can be improved.

  As described above, in the normal symbol time-saving state, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640a, so that the special symbol 2 lottery is basically executed. Conversely, it is unlikely that the lottery of the special symbol 1 will be executed in the “normal mode”. However, since the lottery of the special symbol 1 is held up to four times at the maximum, it is possible that the "probably variable jackpot B" in the "prepare mode" is included in the reserved ball at the time of shifting to the "prepare mode". There is. In this case, it is severe for the player not to shift to the “rensou mode” (shift to the “preparation mode”). Therefore, in the present control example, there is a case where a ball is held in the special symbol 1 which is digested during the “preparation mode” or a ball is accidentally hit in the direction of the first entrance 64 in the “rensou mode”. In order to rescue the game, if the “probable change jackpot B” occurs in the normal symbol time reduction state (“preparation mode” or “rensou mode”), the mode is shifted to the “rensou mode”. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling dissatisfied with the game, and to make the game more enjoyable. In the same manner, for other probability-variable jackpots defined in the special figure 1 hit type selection table 202b1 (that is, “probability-variable jackpots C to G”), when the winning is achieved in the normal symbol time reduction state, the It is configured to shift to the “sou mode”.

  "Probable change big hit C" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "85-274". Of the 1000 determination values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of determination values that are “probable variable hit C” is 190 of “85 to 274”, so the special symbol 1 lottery In this case, the probability (proportion) of being “probably variable jackpot C” is 19% (190/1000).

  The “probable change jackpot C” has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable prize device 82a performs the opening pattern A (opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times). A jackpot that opens and closes according to. Therefore, as in the case of the "probable change jackpot B", the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot is reduced, and the player has a smaller number of prize balls than the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. Disadvantaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when the “probably variable jackpot C” is obtained in the normal symbol time reduction state, the normal symbol time reduction is performed while continuing to the special symbol probability variation state and continuing until the next large hit. Transition to state. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, in the case of "probable change big hit C" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the special change state of the special symbol, and once the big hit ends, the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol which continues until. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. The “preparation mode” set after the “probable change jackpot C” is completed has a smaller number of special symbol lotteries than the “preparation mode” set after the “probable change jackpot B” is completed. State), the “probably variable jackpot C” is more disadvantageous than the “probably variable jackpot B”.

  "Probably variable big hit D" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "275 to 774". Of the 1000 determination values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of determination values that become “probable variable jackpot D” is 500 of “275 to 774”, so the special symbol 1 lottery Is 50% (500/1000).

  The “probable change jackpot D” has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable prize device 82a performs the opening pattern A (opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times). A jackpot that opens and closes according to. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in a single jackpot is reduced as in the case of the “probably variable jackpot B” and the “probably variable jackpot C”. It is disadvantageous for the player in terms of number.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, in the case of “probable change big hit D” in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the process shifts to the special change state of the special symbol and continues until the next big hit. Transition to state. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, in the case of the “probable change jackpot D” in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol, the state shifts to the special symbol positive change state, but the normal symbol time reduction state is not set. That is, since the mode does not shift to the “preparation mode”, no chance is given to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, when the "probable variable jackpot D" is reached in the "normal mode" (non-probable variable state), the "probable variable jackpot A" directly transitions to the "rensou mode" or the "probable variable jackpot" transitions to the "preparation mode" after the jackpot. It is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the case of "B" or "probable jackpot C".

  "Probability change big hit E" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "775 to 804". Of the 1000 determination values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of determination values that become “probable variable jackpot E” is 30 of “775 to 804”, so the special symbol 1 lottery Is 3% (30/1000).

  The “probable change jackpot E” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening is performed only once for 0.052 seconds). is there. The opening time per round is 0.052 seconds at the maximum, which is a significantly shorter opening period than when the second specific winning opening 65a is opened or when the opening pattern A is set. During this time, it becomes difficult to make the first variable winning device 82a win a ball, and in many cases, the big hit ends without being able to win even one ball. Therefore, the “probable change jackpot E” is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types in terms of prize balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when the “probably variable jackpot E” is reached in the normal symbol time reduction state, the normal symbol time reduction continues to the special symbol probability variation state and continues until the next large hit. Transition to state. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, in the case of "probably variable jackpot E" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, similarly to "probably variable jackpot B", the state is shifted to the special symbol probable state, and after the jackpot, The state shifts to a normal symbol time reduction state that continues until the special symbol lottery is completed seven times. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. Except for the “probable change jackpot A” that directly shifts to the “rensou mode”, the “normal mode” is a type of jackpot in which the “preparation mode” (usually the time saving state of the symbol) continues for the longest number of lotteries. In the case of "probably variable jackpot E", the player is more advantageous than "probably variable jackpot C" in which the number of lotteries in the "preparation mode" is small or "probably variable jackpot D" which does not shift to the "prepare mode".

  "Probable change big hit F" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "805 to 874". Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are “probable variable jackpot F” is 70 of “805 to 874”, so the special symbol 1 lottery In this case, the probability (proportion) of the probability change jackpot F is 7% (70/1000).

  The “probably variable jackpot F” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two and the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening is performed only once for 0.052 seconds). Therefore, like "probable change big hit E", it is one of the most disadvantageous big hit types for the player in terms of the number of prize balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when the “probably variable jackpot F” is obtained in the normal symbol time reduction state, the normal symbol time reduction is continued while continuing to the special symbol probability variation state. Transition to state. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, in the case of “probable change big hit F” in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the special change state of the special symbol, and once the big hit ends, the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol which continues until. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. The “preparation mode” set after the “probable jackpot F” is completed has a smaller number of special symbol lotteries than the “preparation mode” set after the “probably changed jackpot B” or “probably changed jackpot E”. In the “normal mode” (non-probable variable state), “probable variable jackpot F” is more disadvantageous than “probable variable jackpot B” and “probable variable jackpot E”. On the other hand, as compared with “probable change jackpot D” in which “preparation mode” is not set, a chance to shift to “rensou mode” is given even if it is only once, which is advantageous for the player.

  The “probably variable big hit G” is associated with the range where the first hit type counter C2 is “875 to 974”. Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that become “probable variable jackpot G” is 100 of “875 to 974”. Is "10% (100/1000)".

  The “probable change jackpot G” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening is performed only once for 0.052 seconds). is there. Therefore, like "probably variable jackpot E" and "probably variable jackpot F", this is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types for the player in terms of the number of prize balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, when the “probably variable jackpot G” is reached in the normal symbol time reduction state, the normal symbol time reduction is continued while continuing to the special symbol probability variation state. Transition to state. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, in the case of the “probable change jackpot G” in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the special symbol state of the special symbol. Is not set. That is, since the mode does not shift to the “preparation mode”, no chance is given to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, when the "probable variable jackpot D" is reached in the "normal mode" (non-probable variable state), the "probable variable jackpot A" directly transitions to the "rensou mode" or the "probable variable jackpot" transitions to the "preparation mode" after the jackpot. It is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the case of "B", "probable jackpot C", "probable jackpot E", and "probable jackpot F".

  "Normal jackpot A" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "975 to 999". Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "normal jackpot A" is 25, "975 to 999". In this case, the probability (proportion) of “normal jackpot A” is 2.5% (25/1000).

  The “normal jackpot A” has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable prize device 82a performs the opening pattern A (opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times). A jackpot that opens and closes according to. Therefore, similarly to “probably variable jackpot B” to “probably variable jackpot D”, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is smaller than that of the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. On the other hand, the number of prize balls that can be acquired increases as compared with the jackpot type in which the opening pattern B is set. Therefore, in terms of the number of prize balls, “normal jackpot A” is more disadvantageous than “probable jackpot A”, but is more advantageous than “probable jackpot E” to “probable jackpot G”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, in the case of “normal jackpot A” in the normal symbol time saving state, the state shifts to the special symbol low probability state, but does not shift to the normal symbol time saving state. . That is, the mode shifts to the “normal mode”. For this reason, when the “normal jackpot A” is set in the “preparation mode”, the mode shifts to the “normal mode” regardless of the remaining number of time savings. Also, in the case of "normal jackpot A" in the "rensou mode", since the mode shifts to the "normal mode" after the jackpot, the "rensou mode" which is most advantageous for the player ends. For this reason, in the “preparation mode” and the “rensou mode”, the “normal jackpot A” has a disadvantageous result for the player.

  On the other hand, in the case of "normal jackpot A" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, and after the jackpot, the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol which continues until it does. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. Since the “preparation mode” set after the “normal jackpot A” is completed, the number of special symbol lotteries is smaller than the “preparation mode” set after the “probable variation jackpot B” or the “probable variation jackpot E” is completed. In the "normal mode" (non-probable change state), "normal jackpot A" is more disadvantageous than "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot E". On the other hand, compared to “probably variable jackpot D” or “probably variable jackpot G” in which “preparation mode” is not set, the player is given a chance to shift to “renshou mode” although it is only once, which is advantageous for the player. Become.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 hit type selection table 202b2, which is referred to in order to determine the big hit type when the special symbol 2 has been won by lottery, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 hit type selection table 202b2. In the special figure 2 hit type selection table 202b2, five kinds of jackpots of “probable change jackpot H” to “probable change jackpot K” and “normal jackpot B” are associated with possible values of the first hit type counter C2. The type is specified.

  "Probable change big hit H" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 4". Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are “probably variable jackpots H” is 5 from “0 to 4”. Is 0.5% (5/1000).

  The “probably variable jackpot H” is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two and the second specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won). Therefore, as in the case of the “probable jackpot A”, the player has a larger amount of prize balls than the jackpot types (“probable jackpot BG” and “normal jackpot A”) in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened. Can be acquired. In addition, all the jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2 have the second specific winning opening 65a opened as in the case of the “stochastic jackpot H” and the “stochastic jackpot A” described above. You. Therefore, in the case of a big win due to the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is more advantageous than the big hit of the lottery of the special symbol 1 in terms of the number of award balls that can be obtained (excluding the “probable change big hit A”).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 108, in the case of "probable change big hit H", regardless of the state at the time of winning (whether or not it is the time saving state of the ordinary symbol), the state is shifted to the special symbol probable change state. Then, it shifts to the normal symbol time-saving state which continues until the next jackpot. That is, the mode directly shifts to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, especially in the “normal mode” (non-time saving state), when the “probable change big hit H” is reached, the player is compared with the big hit type shifting to the “preparation mode” or the big hit type shifting to the “normal mode”. This is advantageous.

  The value “5” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with “probable change big hit I”. Among the 1000 determination values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of the determination value that is “probably variable big hit I” is one. The probability (proportion) of the “probable change big hit I” is 0.1% (1/1000).

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the case where the “probable change big hit I” is obtained in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the special change state of the special symbol and to the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol which continues until the next big hit. And migrate. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, when the probability is "probable jackpot I" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state is shifted to the probable state of the special symbol like "probable jackpot B" and "probable jackpot E". At the same time, after the end of the jackpot, the state shifts to a normal symbol time reduction state which is continued until the special symbol lottery ends seven times. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. Except for “probably variable jackpot A” or “probably variable jackpot H” that directly shifts to the “renjo mode”, this is a type of jackpot type in which the “preparation mode” (usually the time saving state of symbols) continues for the longest number of lotteries. Therefore, when the “probable change jackpot I” is set in the “normal mode”, the “probably changed jackpot C”, the “probably changed jackpot F”, the “normal jackpot A”, and the “preparation mode”, in which the number of lotteries to be in the “preparation mode” are small, are changed. This is advantageous for the player as compared to “probably variable jackpot D” and “probably variable jackpot G” that do not shift.

  In addition, as described above, when the “probable change big hit I” occurs in the normal state (low probability state) of the ordinary symbol, the transition to the “preparation mode” in which the time reduction period is seven times is in the “normal mode”. This is for preventing (suppressing) an irregular game method of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640a. More specifically, even if any of the special symbols 2 in the “normal mode” is selected by lottery of the special symbol 2 (that is, the “variable large hits H to K”), the mode is shifted to the “rensou mode”. In the case of the configuration, a player who hits the ball aiming at the second entrance 640a (so-called right-handed) may appear in the "normal mode" for the purpose of shifting to the "rensou mode". There is. If the game is shifted from the "normal mode" directly to the "renshou mode" due to the irregular playing method, there is a possibility that a large number of prize balls will be paid out, which greatly exceeds the design payout rate. This may cause unexpected disadvantages. Therefore, in the present control example, when a special jackpot has been hit by a lottery, the game state after the jackpot is made different depending on whether or not the time of the jackpot is a normal symbol time saving state. It has a configuration. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the merit for the player when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, in the “normal mode”). Can be prevented (suppressed). Thereby, the payout rate of each of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall can be more reliably contained within the design range, so that it is possible to easily predict the sales of the hall.

  The value “6” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with “probable change big hit J”. Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are “probably variable jackpot J” is one, so if a special symbol 2 lottery results in a jackpot, “ The probability (proportion) of the probability jackpot J ”is 0.1% (1/1000).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 108, in the case where the “probably variable jackpot J” is obtained in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the specially variable state of the special symbol, and the time reduction of the ordinary symbol continues until the next jackpot is reached. Transition to state. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, in the case of the “probable change jackpot J” in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the special symbol change state, and after the jackpot, the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol which continues until. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. The “preparation mode” set after the “probable jackpot J” is more specially designed than the “preparation mode” set after the “probably changed jackpot B”, “probably changed jackpot E”, and “probably changed jackpot I”. Since the number of lotteries is small, in the “normal mode” (non-probable change state), the “probable jackpot J” is more disadvantageous than the “probable jackpot B”, the “probable jackpot E”, and the “probable jackpot I”. On the other hand, compared to “probably variable jackpot D” or “probably variable jackpot G” in which “preparation mode” is not set, the player is given a chance to shift to “renshou mode” although it is only once, which is advantageous for the player. Become.

  "Probable change big hit K" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "7 to 974". Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are “probable variable jackpot K” is 968 of “7 to 974”. In this case, the probability (proportion) of being “probable change jackpot K” is 96.8% (968/1000).

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the case of “probable change big hit K” in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol, and to the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol which continues until the next big hit. And migrate. That is, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode”. On the other hand, if the probability is "variable jackpot K" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the state shifts to the special variable probability state of the special symbol, but it is the same as the "variable jackpot D" or the "variable jackpot G" The time saving state of the normal symbol is not set. That is, since the mode does not shift to the “preparation mode”, no chance is given to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, in the "normal mode" (non-probable change state), when the "probable change big hit D" is reached, it is most disadvantageous for the player.

  "Normal big hit B" is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 of "975 to 999". Of the 1000 judgment values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of judgment values that are "normal jackpot B" is 25, "975 to 999", so the special symbol 1 lottery In this case, the probability (ratio) of “normal jackpot B” is 2.5% (25/1000).

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the case of “normal jackpot B” in the normal symbol time reduction state, the state shifts to the special symbol low probability state, but does not shift to the normal symbol time reduction state. That is, the mode shifts to the “normal mode”. For this reason, as in the case of the "normal jackpot A", when the "normal jackpot B" is set in the "preparation mode", the mode shifts to the "normal mode" regardless of the number of remaining time savings. It is disadvantageous for the player. Also, in the case of "normal jackpot B" in the "rensou mode", since the mode shifts to the "normal mode" after the hit, the "rensou mode" which is most advantageous for the player ends. Therefore, in the “preparation mode” and the “rensou mode”, the “normal jackpot B” results in a disadvantageous result for the player.

  On the other hand, in the case of “normal jackpot B” in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (non-time saving state), the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, and after the jackpot, the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol that continues until it does. That is, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”. The “preparation mode” set after the “normal jackpot B” is finished is a special symbol lottery than the “preparation mode” set after the “probably changed jackpot B”, “probably changed jackpot E” or “probably changed jackpot I”. Since the number of times is small, in the "normal mode" (non-probable change state), the "normal jackpot B" is more disadvantageous than the "probable jackpot B", the "probable jackpot E" or the "probable jackpot I". On the other hand, when compared to “probably variable jackpot D”, “probably variable jackpot G” or “probably variable jackpot K” in which “preparation mode” is not set, there is provided a chance to shift to “renso mode” although it is only once. , Which is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, in the present control example, a plurality of jackpot types are provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained and the state after the jackpot (“normal mode”, “preparation mode”, or “rensou mode”) are different. By providing a variety of jackpot types, it is possible to make the player more interested in which jackpot type will be used when a jackpot occurs. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the present control example, even when the special symbol 2 has a big hit in the “normal mode”, the big hit that shifts to the “rensou mode” (that is, the “probably variable big hit H”) or the “preparation mode” (That is, “probably variable jackpot I” and “probably variable jackpot J”) are provided, but it is not always necessary to provide all of them. For example, in the case where a jackpot has been won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, “probably variable jackpot K” is determined with a probability of 97.5%, and “normal jackpot B” is determined with a probability of 2.5%. Is also good. In other words, if the special symbol 2 has a jackpot in the “normal mode”, the game returns to the “normal mode” after the jackpot (in the case of “probable variable jackpot K”), or the time reduction period is 1 after the jackpot. It may be configured to make a transition to the “preparation mode” (for “normal jackpot B”). With this configuration, the disadvantage of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640a in the “normal mode” can be further increased, so that the irregular game method (“the normal mode”) can be more reliably performed. In this case, it is possible to prevent a game method in which the ball is aimed at the second entrance 640a.

  Next, the state transition performed by determining the big hit type based on the special symbol 1 hit type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 107) and the special symbol 2 hit type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 108). This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing conditions for switching between three types of states (“normal mode”, “preparation mode”, or “rensou mode”) in this control example. First, the state transition in the “normal mode” (non-time saving state) which is the most disadvantageous for the player will be described. This "normal mode" is shown on the upper side of FIG. As shown in FIG. 109, in the "normal mode", when a big hit occurs, the game shifts to another game state. As described above, the jackpot probability in this control example is approximately equal to 1 / 24.4 in the low probability state of the special symbol and 1/25 in the high probability state of the special symbol. For simplicity, the jackpot probability is represented as 1/25 in FIG. As described above, since the "normal mode" is a low probability state (non-time saving state) of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is hard to be opened, so that the player is required to be in the basic mode. The ball is aimed at the first entrance 64. Therefore, since the lottery of the special symbol 1 is executed, the big hit type is basically determined from the special figure 1 per type selection table 202b1.

  In the "normal mode" (probable variable non-saving time state and non-probable variable non-saving time state), if the special pattern 1 is a jackpot, a 60% rate of "probable variable jackpot D" (50%) or "probable variable jackpot G" (10%) is determined (see FIG. 107). When these jackpot types are set in the "normal mode", the mode shifts to the "normal mode" again after the end of the jackpot (see the upper left portion of FIG. 109). That is, the “normal mode” is looped. Even if the player wins “Probably Variable Jackpot D” or “Probably Variable Jackpot G”, he or she continues to win “Probably Variable Jackpot D” and “Probably Variable Jackpot G” because the prize balls that can be obtained are relatively small (the “normal mode” is looped). In many cases, more balls are consumed in the "normal mode" than prize balls obtained at the jackpot. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol 1 has been won in the lottery, the winning rate is 39.5%, one of “probably variable jackpot B, C, E, F” and “normal jackpot A”. In this case, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” (non-probable variable non-time saving state) after the end of the jackpot (see the upper center part of FIG. 109). That is, since the state is relatively easily shifted to the “rensetsu mode”, it is more advantageous to the player than “probably variable jackpot D” or “probably variable jackpot G”.

  Then, in the case of "Surely changing jackpot A" which is won at 0.5% of the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery, the process directly shifts to the "renjo mode" after the end of the jackpot (Fig. 109). See upper right). In this “renjo mode”, as described above, the time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot, and the jackpot where a relatively large amount of prize balls are easily obtained (“probably variable jackpot H” to “probably variable jackpot K”, “normal jackpot B”) ) Is easily repeated, which is the most advantageous for the player.

  As described above, in the “normal mode” (probable variable non-time saving state, non-probable variable non-time saving state), the same state (ie, “normal mode”) is looped at a rate of 60% in the case of a jackpot, while 40 At the rate of%, it is configured to shift to the “preparation mode” or the “rensou mode” which is more advantageous than the current state. Therefore, the player can play the game paying attention to the state after the big hit.

  Next, a description will be given of a state transition in the "preparation mode" which is more advantageous for the player than the "normal mode" described above (the transition to the "rensou mode" is easier). This "preparation mode" is shown in the center of FIG. Since the “preparation mode” is a normal symbol time-saving state, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is easily opened. Therefore, since the player basically plays the game aiming at the second entrance 640a, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed. However, when the lottery of the special symbol 1 is held before the big hit or during the big hit, the lottery of the special symbol 1 held is executed after the “preparation mode” starts. For this reason, in the “preparation mode”, when the player is playing a game as usual, there may be a case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 or a lottery of the special symbol 2 occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 109, in the “preparation mode”, the state shifts to another state when a big hit occurs or the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol given after the previous big hit elapses. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 109, in the “preparation mode”, a case where a normal jackpot is won at a rate of 2.5% (a case where “a normal jackpot A” is obtained in the lottery of special symbol 1) , And the special symbol 2 is "normal jackpot B" in the lottery), and after the jackpot is over, the mode shifts to the "normal mode" (see the lower left of the center in FIG. 109). That is, since the player falls into a disadvantageous state, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the “preparation mode” in the hope that the player does not usually have a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the “preparation mode”, a winning probability of 97.5% is won at a rate of 97.5%. (If any of the "variable jackpot H" to the "variable jackpot K"), the mode shifts to the "rensou mode" (see the center part of FIG. 109). For this reason, the player can expect a large amount of prize balls to be obtained in the “rensou mode”, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 109, in the “preparation mode”, when the set number of time savings (one or seven lottery times of special symbols) elapses, as in the case of the normal jackpot, the disadvantage is lower than the current situation. To the normal mode. For this reason, the game in the “preparation mode” can be performed in expectation of any one of the probability change jackpots before the number of time savings elapses. In general gaming machines, the time saving state of the design is usually such that the ball is not easily reduced, and the benefit from the jackpot does not change depending on whether it is a big hit in the time saving state or a big hit in the non-time saving state Is the most. On the other hand, in the present control example, the transition to the “rensou mode”, which is most advantageous for the player by making a probability change jackpot during the “preparation mode” (time saving state), is performed. The majority loops through the "normal mode" where the majority is the most unfavorable even during a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gaming ability in which whether or not the winning in the jackpot during the time reduction state greatly affects the subsequent development. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the “rensou mode” shown in the lower part of FIG. 109 will be described. In addition, as described above, since the “rensou mode” is a time saving state of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is easily opened. Therefore, since the player basically plays the game aiming at the second entrance 640a, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed. In addition, in many cases, the mode shifts from the “preparation mode” in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed to the “rensou mode”. It is rare. Therefore, in the “rensou mode”, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is basically executed.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 109, in the “rensou mode”, there is a possibility that the state is shifted to another state only when a special symbol hits. Specifically, in the “rensou mode”, when the “normal jackpot B” is determined at a rate of 2.5% when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the “normal mode” is set after the end of the jackpot. (See the lower left part of FIG. 109). That is, the player falls from the most advantageous state to the most disadvantageous state, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, when it becomes “probable change jackpot H” to “probable change jackpot K” determined at a rate of 97.5% in the case of a jackpot due to the lottery of the special symbol 2, after the jackpot is over, the “renso mode” is returned again. Transition (loops the “rensou mode”). For this reason, in the “rensou mode”, a jackpot (a jackpot in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened) in which a relatively large amount of prize balls can be obtained and a next jackpot are obtained as long as one of the certain jackpots is continuously won. Since the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol that continues to the big hit is repeated, it is extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the “rensou mode”, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that the player will continue to win the probability change jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the player in the “rensou mode”. Can be.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to shift to the “preparation mode” where it is easy to shift to the “rensou mode” at a part of the jackpot in the “normal mode”. Then, in the "preparation mode", by winning any one of the jackpots, the game shifts to the "rensou mode" after the end of the jackpot. In this “rensou mode”, the jackpot is likely to be a jackpot capable of obtaining a large amount of prize balls. Mode "is set. Therefore, by continuously winning the probability change jackpot, a large amount of prize balls can be continuously obtained, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to perform the game by expecting to shift to the “rensou mode” and to loop the “rensou mode” more times. Interest in games can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 106, the description is continued. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 110 (a)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, as described above, in the low probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbol, “5” is defined as the determination value for hitting the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 110A). Further, in the high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 110A). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and a normal symbol hit is obtained. It is determined whether or not there is.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a data table that defines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation indicating the current special symbol lottery result in association with the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 (b) to 113.

  FIG. 110B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in this control example. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is used to determine the fluctuation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the normal state of the ordinary symbol (ie, “normal mode”). A normal medium-and-large jackpot table 202d1, a normal middle-off table 202d2 for determining a variation time when a lottery result of a special symbol is missed in a normal state of a normal symbol, and a time-saving state of a normal symbol (that is, “preparation mode”) , Or “rensou mode”), when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, when the special symbol lottery result is missing in the time-saving medium-and-big-hit jackpot table 202d3 for determining the fluctuation time, and in the normal symbol time-saving state The table 202d4 is provided with an out-of-hours short time table 202d4 for determining the fluctuation time. Each of these tables will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS.

  First, the normal medium and large hit table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal medium and large hit table 202d1. As described above, the normal middle and big hit table 202d1 is a data table used to determine a fluctuating time (a fluctuating pattern) when a lottery result of a special symbol is a big hit in a normal state of a normal symbol. There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns: a hit normal change (7 seconds) and a hit long change (10 seconds). For each change pattern, the value of the change type counter CS1 is used as a judgment value. Is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111A, “0 to 99” is changed for the hit normal change (7 seconds), and “100 to 198” is changed for the hit long change (10 seconds). It is defined as a judgment value of the type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the normal state of the normal symbol, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the normal medium and large hit table 202d1.

  FIG. 111 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal out-of-center table 202d2. As described above, the normal out-of-place table 202d2 is a data table used to determine a fluctuating time (a fluctuating pattern) when a lottery result of a special symbol is out of order in a normal state of a normal symbol. Two types of deviation fluctuation patterns are provided: deviation normal fluctuation (7 seconds) and deviation long fluctuation (10 seconds). For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is used as a judgment value. Is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), “0 to 150” is changed for the off-normal fluctuation (7 seconds), and “151 to 198” is changed for the off-long fluctuation (10 seconds). It is defined as a judgment value of the type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the ordinary medium and large hit table 202d1.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving medium and large hit table 202d3. As described above, the time-saving medium-and-big-hit table 202d3 determines the variation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the normal symbol time-saving state (that is, “preparation mode” or “rensou mode”). Is a data table used for the following. Nine types of fluctuation patterns when a big hit occurs during the time saving state include short fluctuation (0.2 seconds), middle fluctuation (3 seconds), and long fluctuation A (90 seconds) to long fluctuation G (72 seconds). Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 112, in the normal symbol time reduction state, different fluctuation patterns (variation time) according to the previous jackpot type and the number of lotteries (variation times) of special symbols executed since the previous jackpot was completed. Is configured to be selected. This is in order to secure a sufficient effect period for executing the “representative effect in extended-villa mode” (see FIGS. 93 to 95) in the “preparation mode”. Note that the “rensou mode suggestion effect” executed in the “preparation mode” is a fixed effect with an effect time of 90 seconds. However, the maximum number of times of change in the “preparation mode” is one, or seven, as described above (see FIGS. 107 and 108). Further, even in the “preparation mode” in which seven time saving periods are set, if a big hit occurs before the seven changes are completed, the state is changed to another state before all the seven changes are displayed. Transition. Therefore, the number of lotteries of the special symbol in which the “preparation mode” is continued differs every time according to the set number of times of saving, the lottery result in the time saving state, and the like.

  Therefore, in the present control example, regardless of the set number of time savings and the lottery result during the time saving state, the previous jackpot type and the previous jackpot type are set so that the mode can be shifted from the "preparation mode" to another mode at the same timing. The configuration is such that a variation pattern (variation time) is selected according to the number of variations (number of special symbol lotteries) after the end of the big hit. Then, the selected fluctuation time is the same time (90 seconds, which is the production time of the “renjo mode suggestion production”), irrespective of the set number of time savings (one or seven times) and the lottery result during the time savings. ), All the variable displays are terminated. With this configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the effect period of the “rensou mode suggestive effect” executed in the “preparation mode”. In addition, since the production time of the “renjo mode suggested production” can be unified, there is no need to prepare a plurality of patterns of production modes having different production times. Therefore, the processing load and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  The prescribed contents of the time-saving medium-and-big-hits table 202d3 will be described more specifically. As shown in FIG. 112, if the previous jackpot type was any of “probably variable jackpots A, D, G, H, and K”, the number of fluctuations since the end of the jackpot (the number of special symbol lotteries) ), The variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to the extended table (at the time of the big hit) shown in the lower part of FIG. This extended-villa table (at the time of the big hit) is used for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in the “extended-village mode”. Note that the reason for determining the fluctuation time as the “rensou mode” irrespective of the number of fluctuations (number of special symbol lotteries) is to shift to the “preparation mode” after “probable change big hits A, D, G, H, K”. Because there is nothing. That is, if the time-saving state of the ordinary symbols is reached after the end of each of the above jackpots, the "rensou mode" is always set, so there is no need to secure the effect period of the "rensou mode suggesting effect".

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 112, in the extended table (at the time of the big hit), a short variation (0.2 seconds) is associated with the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 99” as the variation type. I have. On the other hand, when the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “100 to 198”, a middle variation of 3 seconds is associated with the variation type. As described above, in the “rensou mode”, the fluctuation time that is shorter than the fluctuation time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the “normal mode” is determined. Can be executed speedily. Further, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game in the “rensou mode” becomes monotonous.

  As shown in FIG. 112, when the previous jackpot type is any of the “probable change jackpots B, E, and I”, the variation time (the number of special symbol lotteries) varies after the jackpot. Fluctuation pattern) is determined. More specifically, if a big win is made in the first special symbol lottery after the “probable change big hit B, E, I”, the long change A is used as a change pattern regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. (90 seconds) is determined. This makes it possible to match the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) with the production time of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. The timing at which the “effect” ends can be matched.

  In addition, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I”, a long change B (87 seconds) is used as a change pattern regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. Is determined. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 113, in the present control example, when the lottery of the special symbol is lost in the “preparation mode”, the variation time is independent of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is determined to have a middle fluctuation of 3 seconds. For this reason, after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I”, if the first special pattern lottery is missed and the second lottery wins, the middle fluctuation is 3 seconds and the long fluctuation B is 87. After a fluctuation time of 90 seconds in total, the "preparation mode" ends, and a big hit occurs. In other words, even if the special symbol lottery executed for the second time after the “probable change big hits B, E, I” results in a big hit, the fluctuation time until the “preparation mode” ends is indicated in the “renso mode suggestion effect”. Can be adjusted to 90 seconds, which is the production time of ".

  Similarly, after the “probable change big hits B, E, I”, even if the third to seventh lottery of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the fluctuation indicating the departure of the special symbol executed up to the big hit. The long fluctuation C is set such that the total of the fluctuation time of the display (middle fluctuation) (3 seconds × the number of times of deviation) and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display indicating the jackpot (any of the long fluctuations C to G) becomes 90 seconds. To G are set. For example, in the case of the fifth big hit after the end of the big hit, the change time of the first to fourth out-of-change display is 3 seconds (middle change), and the change time of the fifth change display is 78 seconds ( Since the long fluctuation E) is determined, the fluctuation time is a total of 90 seconds (3 seconds × 4 + 78 seconds). Therefore, in the “preparation mode” in which the seven time-saving periods are set, even if a big hit occurs in any of the first to seventh fluctuation times (number of lotteries for special symbols), the execution is performed until the big hit is reached. The sum of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (middle fluctuation) corresponding to the departure of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (long fluctuation A to long fluctuation G) corresponding to the jackpot is referred to as “renjo mode suggestion effect”. 90 seconds, which is the production time of Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure the effect period of the “renjo mode suggestive effect” executed in the “preparation mode”. In addition, since the production time of the “renjo mode suggested production” can be unified, there is no need to prepare a plurality of patterns of production modes having different production times. Therefore, the processing load and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  Note that if the number of fluctuations (number of special symbol lotteries) after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I” is over 7 times, the extended-villa table (big hit) shown in the lower part of FIG. ), And a variation pattern (variation time) is selected. When the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I” ends, seven time-saving periods are always set. This is because, if the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol continues more than once, it means that it is in the “rensou mode”.

  Here, even when the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I” ends, the time-saving medium-and-big hit table 202d3 is referred to. If it hits within, a long fluctuation time (72 seconds to 90 seconds) is set. If a long fluctuation time is set in the “rensou mode”, the period until the big hit becomes long, and the game may be prolonged. In this regard, in the present control example, in the case where the jackpot has been won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (ratio) of determining the “probable variable jackpot I” is extremely low as 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the “rensou-so mode”, since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the special symbol 1. That is, while the “rensou mode” and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the “rensou mode” is looped), the “probable variable jackpot B” and the “probable variable jackpot E” are not obtained. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the “rensou mode” becomes long.

  As shown in FIG. 112, after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J”, if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the long change A is set as a change pattern regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. (90 seconds) is determined. This makes it possible to match the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) with the production time of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. The timing at which the “effect” ends can be matched.

  Also, if the number of fluctuations (number of special symbol lotteries) since the end of the “probable change big hit C, F, J” is two or more, the extended-house table shown at the bottom of FIG. 112 (at the time of the big hit) , A variation pattern (variation time) is selected. When the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J” is completed, the time saving period is always set only once. This is because, if the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol continues more than once, it means that it is in the “rensou mode”.

  As shown in FIG. 112, if the jackpot type is “normal jackpot A, B” and the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot after the “normal jackpot A, B”, the last jackpot type is “probable variable jackpot C, F, J”. , The long variation A (90 seconds) is determined as the variation pattern irrespective of the value of the variation type counter CS1. This makes it possible to match the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) with the production time of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. The timing at which the “effect” ends can be matched.

  On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) is two or more, the fluctuation time is not specified. There is no case where the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the “normal jackpot A, B” ends (see FIGS. 107 and 108). This is because the time reduction period is always one "preparation mode".

  As described above, regardless of the number of time savings in the “preparation mode” and the lottery result of the special symbol in the “preparation mode”, the total fluctuation time until the jackpot becomes the “time-saving mode” It is configured to coincide with 90 seconds, which is the production time of the “proposed production”. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure the effect period of the “renjo mode suggestive effect” executed in the “preparation mode”. In addition, since the production time of the “renjo mode suggested production” can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of production modes having different production times. Therefore, the processing load and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, the time-saving medium and large hit table 202d3 is configured so that the fluctuation time in the “rensou mode” is shorter than that in the “normal mode”. As a result, the game can be quickly executed during the “rensou mode”. Further, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game in the “rensou mode” becomes monotonous.

  Here, even when the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J” ends, the time-saving medium-and-big hit table 202d3 is referred to, so the first time since the “rensou mode” is entered , A long fluctuation time (90 seconds) is set. If a long fluctuation time is set in the “rensou mode”, the period until the big hit becomes long, and the game may be prolonged. In this regard, in the present control example, when a jackpot is won due to the lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (ratio) of determining the “probable variable jackpot J” is extremely low as 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the “rensou-so mode”, since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the special symbol 1. That is, while the “rensou mode” and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the “rensou mode” is looped), the “probable variable jackpot C” and the “probable variable jackpot F” are not obtained. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the “rensou mode” becomes long.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the time-saving out-of-time table 202d4 will be described. As described above, the time-saving out-of-time table 202d4 determines the fluctuation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of time in the normal symbol time-saving state (that is, “preparation mode” or “rensou mode”). Is a data table used for the following. There are four types of fluctuation patterns in the case of a deviation during the time saving state: short fluctuation (0.2 seconds), middle fluctuation (3 seconds), long fluctuation A (90 seconds), and long fluctuation G (72 seconds). Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 113, in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol, the variation pattern (variation time) varies according to the previous jackpot type and the number of lotteries (variations) of the special symbol executed since the previous jackpot was completed. Is configured to be selected. This is to ensure a sufficient effect period (90 seconds) for executing the “representative mode suggestion effect” (see FIGS. 93 to 95) in the “preparation mode” in the same manner as the time saving medium and big hit table 202 d 3. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 113, if the previous jackpot type was any of “probably variable jackpots A, D, G, H, and K”, the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) since the end of the jackpot ), The variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to the extended table (at the time of disconnection) shown in the lower part of FIG. This extended table (at the time of disconnection) is used for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in the “extended mode”. Note that the reason for determining the fluctuation time as the “rensou mode” irrespective of the number of fluctuations (number of special symbol lotteries) is to shift to the “preparation mode” after “probable change big hits A, D, G, H, K”. Because there is nothing. That is, when the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is reached after the end of each of the above-mentioned jackpots, the "rensou mode" is always provided, so there is no need to secure the effect period (90 seconds) of the "rensou mode suggesting effect". It is.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 113, in the extended table (at the time of disconnection), a short variation (0.2 seconds) is associated with the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 160” as the variation type. I have. On the other hand, in the range where the variation type counter CS1 is “161 to 198”, a middle variation of 3 seconds is associated as a variation type. As described above, in the “rensou mode”, the fluctuation time that is shorter than the fluctuation time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the “normal mode” is determined. Can be executed speedily. Further, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game in the “rensou mode” becomes monotonous. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is out of order in the “rensou mode”, the middle fluctuation (0.2 seconds) is less likely to be selected than in the case of winning. Thus, in the “rensou mode”, a relatively long (3 seconds) fluctuation time is determined, so that a sense of expectation for the special symbol jackpot can be increased. Therefore, since the game can be played while paying attention to the fluctuation time, it is possible to prevent the game in the “rensou mode” from becoming monotonous, and to improve the interest in the game.

  As shown in FIG. 113, when the previous jackpot type is any of the “probable change jackpots B, E, and I”, the variation time (the number of special symbol lotteries) varies after the jackpot. Fluctuation pattern) is determined. More specifically, when the first to sixth special symbol lotteries are missed after the “probable variation jackpot B, E, I”, the variation pattern is determined as a variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Middle variation (3 seconds) is determined. On the other hand, if the lottery of the seventh special symbol is missed after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I”, the long change G (72 seconds) as a change pattern regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. Is determined. As a result, after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I” ends, the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” (seven short time periods). The total can be 90 seconds (3 seconds × 6 + 72 seconds). That is, the total fluctuation time from the end of the “preparation mode” to the transition to the “normal mode” can be made to coincide with the production time of the “renjo mode suggestion production”.

  Note that if the number of fluctuations (number of special symbol lotteries) after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I” is over 7 times, the extended-villa table (big hit) shown in the lower part of FIG. ), And a variation pattern (variation time) is selected. When the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” after the “probable change jackpot B, E, I” ends, seven time-saving periods are always set. This is because, if the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol continues more than once, it means that it is in the “rensou mode”.

  Here, even if the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the end of the “probable change jackpot B, E, I”, the out-of-hours time table 202d4 is referred to. If the deviation is continuous, a long fluctuation time (72 seconds) is set. If a long fluctuation time is set in the “rensou mode”, the period until the big hit becomes long, and the game may be prolonged. In this regard, in the present control example, in the case where the jackpot has been won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (ratio) of determining the “probable variable jackpot I” is extremely low as 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the “rensou-so mode”, since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the special symbol 1. That is, while the “rensou mode” and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the “rensou mode” is looped), the “probable variable jackpot B” and the “probable variable jackpot E” are not obtained. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the “rensou mode” becomes long.

  As shown in FIG. 113, after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J”, if the first special symbol lottery results in a loss, the long change A is used as a change pattern regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. (90 seconds) is determined. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) can be matched with the production time of the “renjo mode suggested production”. ”And the timing when the“ rensou mode suggestion effect ”ends.

  In addition, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J” ends is two or more, the extended-village table shown at the bottom of FIG. , A variation pattern (variation time) is selected. When the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J” is completed, the time saving period is always set only once. This is because, if the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol continues more than once, it means that it is in the “rensou mode”.

  Here, even when the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the “probable change jackpot C, F, J” ends, the first and second times after the “rensou mode” is entered, because the table for out-of-hours hours 202d4 is referred to. When the lottery of the special symbol is lost, a long fluctuation time (90 seconds) is set. If a long fluctuation time is set in the “rensou mode”, the period until the big hit becomes long, and the game may be prolonged. In this regard, in the present control example, in the case where a jackpot has been won due to the lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (proportion) of determining the “probably variable jackpot C” is extremely low as 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the “rensou-so mode”, since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it is difficult to perform the lottery of the special symbol 1. That is, while the “rensou mode” and the special symbol jackpot are repeated (the “rensou mode” is looped), the “probable variable jackpot C” and the “probable variable jackpot F” are not obtained. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the “rensou mode” becomes long.

  As shown in FIG. 113, if the last jackpot type is “normal jackpot A, B” and the first special symbol lottery is lost after the “normal jackpot A, B”, the last jackpot type is “probable variable jackpot C, F, J”. , The long variation A (90 seconds) is determined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Thereby, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) can be matched with the production time of the “representative production mode effect”, so that the “preparation mode” ends and shifts to the “normal mode”. And the timing when the “rensou mode suggestion effect” ends.

  On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) is two or more, the fluctuation time is not specified. There is no case where the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the “normal jackpot A, B” ends (see FIGS. 107 and 108). This is because the time reduction period is always one "preparation mode".

  In this way, the time-saving out-of-hours table 202d4 indicates that the total fluctuation time until the preparation mode ends is 90 seconds, which is the production time of the “renjo mode suggestion production”, regardless of the number of times of the “preparation mode”. It is configured to match. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure the effect period of the “renjo mode suggestive effect” executed in the “preparation mode”. In addition, since the production time of the “renjo mode suggested production” can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of production modes having different production times. Therefore, the processing load and the storage capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, the time-saving out-of-office table 202d4 is configured such that the fluctuation time in the “rensou mode” is shorter than that in the “normal mode”. As a result, the game can be quickly executed during the “rensou mode”. Further, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game in the “rensou mode” becomes monotonous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, a description will be given of a correspondence relationship between the fluctuation time and the effect mode when the number of times of normal symbols is reduced to seven in the “preparation mode”. FIG. 114 (a) is a diagram showing a case in which the number of times of normal symbols has been set to seven times, and all special symbols have been lost by lottery. In other words, it is a diagram showing a case where a departure is reported in a roulette chance effect.

  As shown in FIG. 114A, in the “preparation mode”, when the fluctuation effect corresponding to the departure is executed seven times, the first (hour reduction 1) to the sixth (hour reduction 6) fluctuation display is a fluctuation of 3 seconds. The time is set. On the other hand, in the seventh (time saving 7) fluctuation display, a fluctuation time of 72 seconds is set. Then, when the seventh special symbol lottery ends, the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol ends because the number of time reductions has elapsed, and the mode shifts to the “normal mode”. For a total of 90 seconds, a “renjo mode suggestion effect” is executed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), when the jackpot ends and the mode shifts to the “preparation mode”, first, a lucky number increase effect (see FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (b)) is executed. Is done. As described above, this lucky number increase effect is an effect of executing a lottery every time a ball enters the second entrance 640a and increasing the lucky number (hit pocket) when the lottery is won. . This lucky number increase effect is an effect in which the effect time is fixed for 20 seconds.

  When the lucky number increase effect ends, a roulette chance effect (see FIGS. 94 and 95) starts. As described above, this roulette chance effect is an effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” according to the type of the pocket in which the ball B falls. This roulette chance production is a production in which the production time is fixed for 65 seconds. After the end of the roulette chance effect, an ending effect for 5 seconds is set to notify the end of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”. The effect time of the ending effect may be extended depending on the game situation in the “preparation mode”.

  As described above, the “rensou mode suggestion effect” of this control example is basically a 90-second effect of a lucky number increase effect of 20 seconds, a roulette chance effect of 65 seconds, and an ending effect of 5 seconds. Are executed in this order. The fluctuation time of each fluctuation display (variation effect) executed in the “preparation mode” is set in accordance with the effect time of 90 seconds, and seven fluctuation displays are executed without intervals, and all the fluctuation displays are performed. The configuration is such that when the game ends, the “rensou mode suggestion effect” ends. As a result, even though the “preparation mode” has not ended, the “rensou mode suggestion effect” has ended. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the execution of the "suggest" effect from being continued, and to link the game state and the effect to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the current state is the “preparation mode” by the effect to be executed.

  By setting the lucky number increase effect to 20 seconds, a roulette chance effect can be executed in consideration of the lottery results of all special symbols executed in the “preparation mode”. In other words, if the special symbol lottery is executed without interruption, the seventh lottery is executed after a maximum of 18 seconds. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the seventh special symbol lottery result is a hit. It is possible to start a roulette chance production after making a determination and determining whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” according to the determination result. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether to shift to the “rensou mode” during the roulette chance production, and it is not necessary to execute processing such as rewriting the result during the production, and the result of the production at the start of the roulette chance production Since it can be set to include, the processing load during the execution of the roulette chance effect can be reduced.

  Next, referring to FIG. 114 (b), when the number of times of the normal symbol is reduced to seven and the lottery of all the special symbols is lost, a special symbol is displayed during the seven times of variable display corresponding to the departure. A description will be given of an effect mode when the symbol lottery is interrupted. That is, a case where a period in which the ball does not enter the second entrance 640a during the “preparation mode” occurs. In FIG. 114 (b), since the ball did not enter the second entrance 640a for 5 seconds after the end of the second fluctuation display, the second fluctuation display and the third fluctuation display 5 shows a case where the fluctuation stop state for 5 seconds occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (b), even if the fluctuation stop state occurs during the “preparation mode”, the lucky number increase effect and the effect time of the roulette chance effect are not changed. That is, when the “preparation mode” is started, a lucky number increase effect for 20 seconds is executed, and thereafter, a roulette chance effect for 65 seconds is executed. On the other hand, the execution period of the ending effect is extended for 5 seconds in accordance with the fluctuation stop period. That is, as shown in FIG. 114B, the ending effect is executed for 10 seconds. As described above, in the present control example, when the fluctuation stop state occurs in the “preparation mode” and the period in the “preparation mode” is shifted from 90 seconds, the production time of the ending production is varied. It is configured to be able to absorb the displacement by the. Thereby, even if the fluctuation stop state has occurred, the period in the “preparation mode” can be made to coincide with the production period of the “renjo mode suggested production”.

  In this control example, the fluctuation stop period is absorbed by changing the production period of the ending production, and the production period of the “preparation mode” is made to coincide with the production period of the “renjo mode suggested production”. , But is not limited to this. For example, the effect time of the lucky number increase effect may be changed, or the effect period of the roulette chance effect may be changed. Further, the configuration may be such that the “rensou-mode suggested effect” is interrupted when the fluctuation stop is detected, and then the effect is restarted when the start of the fluctuation is detected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (a), a description will be given of the relationship between the effect mode and the fluctuation time in the case where the special symbol is won by lottery in the “preparation mode” in the “preparation mode”. FIG. 115 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where a big win has been achieved in the fourth special symbol lottery out of seven normal symbol time reduction times set. As shown in FIG. 115 (a), in the special symbol lottery executed in the “preparation mode”, the first time (time reduction 1) to the third time (time reduction 3) are lost, and the fourth time (time reduction 4) is a big hit. Then, 3 seconds are set as the fluctuation time of the first (time reduction 1) to third (time reduction 3) fluctuation display, and 81 seconds (long fluctuation D) is set as the fluctuation time of the fourth (time reduction 4) fluctuation display. Is done. This makes it possible to make the total of the fluctuation time coincide with the 90-second effect period of the “renjo mode suggestive effect”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), the “long-shooting mode suggestion effect” for a total of 90 seconds of the lucky number increase effect for 20 seconds, the roulette chance effect for 65 seconds, and the ending effect for 5 seconds ends. At the timing, the “preparation mode” can be ended. Therefore, the game state and the effect to be executed can be linked, so that the player can recognize whether or not the current state is the “preparation mode” by the effect to be executed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 115 (b), when the number of times of normal symbol reduction is set to seven times and the fourth special symbol lottery is a big hit, the special symbol lottery is performed in the middle of the four variable displays. Will be described in the case where is interrupted. That is, a case where a period in which the ball does not enter the second entrance 640a during the “preparation mode” occurs. FIG. 115 (b) shows the third variation display and the fourth variation display because the ball did not enter the second entrance 640a for 40 seconds after the third variation display (time saving 3) was completed. The case where the fluctuation stop state for 40 seconds occurs between the fluctuation display and the fluctuation display.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (b), even if the fluctuation stop state occurs during the “preparation mode”, the effect time of the lucky number increase effect and the roulette chance effect is not changed. That is, when the “preparation mode” is started, a lucky number increase effect for 20 seconds is executed, and thereafter, a roulette chance effect for 65 seconds is executed. At the start of the execution of the roulette chance effect, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, the roulette chance effect is notified of the departure (the ball B falls into the departure pocket). ). In the example of FIG. 115 (b), the player enters the second entrance 640a in the middle of a roulette chance effect for notifying the player of a loss, and a large symbol is won by lottery of a special symbol. For this reason, in this control example, in order to notify that it shifts to the “rensou mode”, it is notified once that the roulette chance effect is being executed, and after setting the ending effect for 5 seconds as usual, It is configured to execute a roulette chance effect again (execute a resurrection roulette chance effect). This resurrection roulette chance effect is executed for 30 seconds, and finally, the ball falls into the hit pocket and the shift to the “rensou mode” is notified. After the end of the resurrection roulette chance effect, an ending effect for 10 seconds is set. The ending effect is set to absorb a shift between the effect period due to the occurrence of the fluctuation stop period and the period of the “preparation mode”, and the effect period can be changed according to the shift.

  In this way, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined in the middle of the roulette chance production for notifying the departure, the player can be pleased by executing the resurrection roulette chance. Further, even if a fluctuation stop period occurs, an effect having a length corresponding to the fluctuation stop period can be executed, so that a shift between the effect period and the period of the “preparation mode” is prevented (suppressed). can do. If the fluctuation stop period is shorter than 30 seconds and the resurrection roulette chance cannot be executed, a short display effect that does not involve the rotation of the rotating member 640 and ends in a relatively short time (for example, 5 seconds) is executed. Is done. When the fluctuation stop period is shorter than 30 seconds, whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” is notified by this short display effect, and it is determined whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”. Can be surely grasped.

  Returning to FIG. 106 (a), the description will be continued. The game result setting table 202e is a data table that defines information (state setting information) for determining a game state after a jackpot has been completed by a special symbol lottery. Further, the state setting table 202f determines various setting values (probable change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and medium time saving counter 203h) related to the game state after the end of the jackpot based on the state setting information selected from the game result setting table 202e. This is a data table used to perform the operation.

  In the pachinko machine 10, based on the winning of the jackpot, the state setting information corresponding to the type of the winning jackpot is stored in the state setting information provided in the RAM 203 from the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 116A). It is stored in the storage area 203j (see FIG. 117). The state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is retained during the jackpot, and at the end timing of the jackpot, various setting values relating to the game state after the end of the jackpot (probable change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving medium time). The counter 203h is read from the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 116B) and set. More specifically, for each value of the state setting information, a state setting table 202f (see FIG. 116 (b)) that defines various setting values (probable change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and medium time counter 203h) regarding the gaming state. Is used to select and set a combination of various setting values from. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the random number value (counter value) itself acquired in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640a is changed to the end of the jackpot. The game state after the end of the jackpot is not determined based on the random number value (counter value), and the game state is not determined based on the random number value (counter value). Only the state setting information value selected from the game result setting table 202e based on the random number value (counter value) acquired with the start winning) is held in the big hit.

  Here, when the random number value of the jackpot is held during the fluctuation pattern production at the time of the jackpot winning or during the subsequent jackpot state, the jackpot random number is read out by the unauthorized player, and the jackpot is won. A random value may be specified. Therefore, the timing at which the specified random number value appears is analyzed, and there is a possibility that the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, in the present control example, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into a state setting information value and held until the end of the jackpot, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is based on the state setting information value. Since it is configured so as to be set, the period during which the random number value itself serving as the jackpot of the special symbol is held can be limited to a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, various set values (probable change flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, and medium-time-time counter 203h) relating to the game state after the end of the big hit are displayed during the fluctuation display of the symbol for notifying the big hit. Instead of being held during the subsequent jackpot (privilege gaming state), only the state setting information is held. Rather than providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various set values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the state setting information values, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

  The game result setting table 202e and the state setting table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 (a) and 116 (b), respectively. As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the game result setting table 202e, the jackpot is ended for each of the gaming state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed and the type of the jackpot won by the special symbol lottery. The value of the state setting information which is information for setting the game state after the game is defined. Also, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the state setting table 202f, for each value of the state setting information, setting values relating to the gaming state after the end of the big hit are defined.

  More specifically, in the game result setting table 202e, "00H" is associated as the value of the state setting information with "probable change jackpots A to K" in the normal symbol time saving state, and the normal symbol time saving state Is associated with “05H” as the value of the state setting information. Similarly, “00H” is associated with the value of the state setting information for “probable change jackpot A, H” in the normal state of the normal symbol (non-time saving state), and the normal state of the normal symbol (non-time saving state). Is associated with “01H” as the value of the state setting information. Furthermore, “02H” is associated with the value of the state setting information for “probable change jackpot C, F, J” in the normal state of the ordinary symbol (non-time saving state), and the normal state of the ordinary symbol (non-time saving state). ) Is associated with “03H” as the value of the state setting information, and is associated with “normal jackpot A, B” in the normal state (non-time saving state) of a normal symbol. In this case, “04H” is associated with the value of the state setting information.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the state setting table 202f, for the value “00H” of the state setting information, the probability change flag 203f, the time reduction flag 203g, and the time reduction medium counter 203h are each “on”. , “ON”, and “0” are associated with each other. Although details will be described later, the probable change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is in the probable change state, and the time reduction flag 203g is a time reduction state of an ordinary symbol that continues until the next big hit (that is, “ The time reduction counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of time reductions of a normal symbol (that is, the remaining number of time reductions in the “preparation mode”). Therefore, if the probability change flag 203f is “ON”, the time reduction flag 203g is “ON”, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is “0”, the probability that the special symbol will change after the jackpot is over and the normal will continue to the next jackpot The state shifts to the symbol time reduction state (that is, “rensou mode”). As described above, in the case of a probability variable jackpot (probable variation jackpots A to K) in the time saving state of a normal symbol, or in the case of "probability variation jackpot A, H" in the normal state of a normal symbol, the direct connection mode is performed. (See FIGS. 107 and 108), and by referring to the game result setting table 202e and the state setting table 202f, it is possible to set a correct game state after the end of the big hit.

  In the state setting table 202f, for the value “01H” of the state setting information, “ON”, “OFF”, and “7” are respectively set as the probability change flag 203f, the time reduction flag 203g, and the medium time reduction counter 203h. Are associated. Therefore, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol (that is, in the “normal mode”), “probable change big hit B, E, I” is obtained, and “01H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (see FIG. a)), it is possible to shift to the "preparation mode" in which the number of times saved is seven after the big hit.

  In the state setting table 202f, “ON”, “OFF”, and “1” are respectively associated with the value “02H” of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the medium time counter 203h. Have been. Therefore, in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, in the “normal mode”), the “probable change big hit C, F, J” is obtained, and when “02H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (see FIG. a)), it is possible to shift to the "preparation mode" in which the number of times saved is one after the big hit.

  In the state setting table 202f, “ON”, “OFF”, and “0” are respectively associated with the value “03H” of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the medium time saving counter 203h. Have been. Therefore, in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, in the “normal mode”), “probably large hit D, G, K” is obtained, and “03H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (see FIG. a)), and after the jackpot, the mode can be shifted to the “normal mode”.

  In the state setting table 202f, “OFF”, “OFF”, and “1” are respectively associated with the value “04H” of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the medium time saving counter 203h. Have been. Therefore, in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, in the “normal mode”), “normal jackpot A, B” is obtained, and “04H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (FIG. 116 (a)). After the big hit, the special symbol can be shifted to the low probability state, and the normal symbol can be shifted to the “preparation mode” in which the number of times of saving is one.

  In the state setting table 202f, the value “05H” of the state setting information is associated with “OFF”, “OFF”, and “0” as the probability change flag 203f, the time reduction flag 203g, and the medium time reduction counter 203h, respectively. Have been. Therefore, when the normal symbol is in the time saving state (that is, “preparation mode” or “rensou mode”), “normal jackpot A, B” is set, and “05H” is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j. (See FIG. 116 (a)), it is possible to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot and to shift to the normal state of the ordinary symbol (that is, "normal mode").

  In this way, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the value of the state setting information corresponding to the big hit type is read from the game result setting table 202e and stored in the state setting information storage area 203j, and the big hit is stored. At the end of the process, various setting values corresponding to the state setting information are read out from the state setting table 202f and set, whereby the state transition as shown in FIG. 109 can be realized. That is, it is possible to realize a gaming ability in which three states of the “normal mode”, the “preparation mode”, and the “renshou mode” are switched.

  In the present control example, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into a state setting information value, held until the end of the jackpot, and the game state after the end of the jackpot is set based on the state setting information value. Therefore, the period during which the random number value itself serving as the special symbol jackpot is held can be limited to a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, various set values (probable change flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, and medium-time-time counter 203h) relating to the game state after the end of the big hit are displayed during the fluctuation display of the symbol for notifying the big hit. Instead of being held during the subsequent jackpot (privilege gaming state), only the state setting information is held. Rather than providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various set values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the state setting information values, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 117, the RAM 203 of this control example includes a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d. A winning information storage area 203e, a probability change flag 203f, a time reduction flag 203g, a time reduction medium counter 203h, a winning number counter 203i, a state setting information storage area 203j, a state storage area 203k, and a prefetching certainty change flag 203m. , A counter buffer 203y, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing a winning in the first winning port 64, and has four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Each of these areas stores a value of a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning opening 64, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Of the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is changed to the common execution area. Is shifted (moved), and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the common execution area, determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning opening 64, and as soon as each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in accordance with the starting winning, the big hit lottery of the original special symbol starts. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, a fluctuation pattern, etc.) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts a winning / wrong, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information as a winning information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning are obtained. From the above, various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted. In addition, this prediction (look-ahead) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or positively varying gaming state) at the time when the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning is started. . This makes it possible to accurately predict the result of the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area to first holding area). Of the vacant areas (four areas), the area numbers are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning stored in the other reserved areas. Is shifted to the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is a ball for displaying a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B based on a ball entering the first winning port 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number (the number of times of waiting) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special value 1 reserved ball number counter 203c increases by one to four. (See S404 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 131).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of times of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 131 and S405 in FIG. 133). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display retained by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the number of the spheres of the actual variable display held by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable number of reserved balls (standby) of the variable symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the ordinary entrance (through gate) 67. Is a counter for counting the number of times up to four times. The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the number of changing display-holding balls increases, the maximum value becomes 4. One is added up to (see S704 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 135).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, the second random number counter per second The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S703 in FIG. 136: No).

  The probable change flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability change flag 203f is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol change state, and if the value is OFF, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). Indicates that there is. The initial value of the probability change flag 203f is set to off, and every time the jackpot ends, a state corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. , The probability change flag 203f is set. That is, when “ON” is read from the state setting table 202f, the probability change flag 203f is set to “ON”, and when “OFF” is read, the probability change flag 203f is set to “OFF”. You. In the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 132) and the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134), it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is in the probable change state (S302 in FIG. 132, FIG. 134). Is set to off when the next big hit game is started (see S213 in FIG. 131).

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 132) or the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 132) or the special symbol 2 winning process (FIG. 134), the value of the probable change flag 203f is referred to. While the special symbol lottery is performed based on 202a, if the value of the probability change flag 203f is OFF, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

  The time-saving flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state of a normal symbol that continues until the next big hit (that is, is in the “rensou mode”). If the value of the time saving flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol that continues until the next big hit, and if it is off, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the “rensou mode”. Show. In addition, as described above, in the present control example, in addition to the "rensou mode", the time of the ordinary symbol is reduced in the "preparation mode". The remaining number of time savings in the “preparation mode” is counted by the medium time saving counter 203h. That is, in the present control example, only when the time reduction flag 203g is off and the value of the during-time reduction counter 203h is 0, the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the "normal mode") is set.

  The initial value of the time saving flag 203g is set to off, and every time the jackpot ends, a state corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. , The time reduction flag 203g is set. That is, when "ON" is read from the state setting table 202f, the time saving flag 203g is set to "ON", and when "OFF" is read, the time saving flag 203g is set to "OFF". You. Then, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), it is referred to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state (see S608, S614, 619 in FIG. 135), and the next big hit game is started. Is set to off (see S213 in FIG. 131).

  The time reduction counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of time reductions of a normal symbol (that is, the remaining number of time reductions in the “preparation mode”). When the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 has the number of time reductions of the normal symbol (that is, the “preparation mode”), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0. If there is, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the "prepare mode". As described above, if the time-saving flag 203g is on even when the value of the time-saving time counter 203h is 0, it means that the symbol is in the time-saving state of a normal symbol. That is, in the present control example, only when the time reduction flag 203g is off and the value of the during-time reduction counter 203h is 0, the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the "normal mode") is set.

  The initial value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0, and a value corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f every time the jackpot ends. Then, it is set as the value of the counter 203h during the working hours. That is, when "0" is read from the state setting table 202f, the value of the counter 203h during time saving is set to "0", and when "1" is read, the value of the counter 203h during time saving is set. When “1” is set and “7” is read, the value of the during-hours counter 203h is set to “7”. Then, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), it is referred to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state (see S608, S614, 619 in FIG. 135), and the next big hit game is started. Is initialized to 0 (see S213 in FIG. 131).

  The winning number counter 203i is a counter for counting the total number of balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a or the second variable winning device 65 in each round of the jackpot. In each round of the jackpot, it is determined whether or not the end condition of each round is satisfied according to the value of the winning number counter 203i. The winning number counter 203i is incremented by one each time a win is detected in the first variable winning device 82a or the second variable winning device 65 at the big hit (see S1203 in FIG. 141). Then, when it is detected that the winning number counter 203i has reached 10 or more in the jackpot, the running round is ended (see S1207 in FIG. 141). The initial value of the winning number counter 203i is set to 0, and the value of the winning number counter 203i is initialized to 0 when each round ends. The value of the winning number counter 203i is backed up even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  The state setting information storage area 203j stores (holds) the state setting information read from the game result setting table 202e according to the type of the jackpot until the jackpot ends, when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery. This is a storage area for storing. As described above, based on the state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j, various setting values corresponding to the gaming state after the end of the big hit are read from the state setting table 202f and set (FIG. 140). See S1115).

  The state storage area 203k is a storage area in which information indicating a period during which the present is a big hit is stored. Here, the jackpot is an opening period for notifying the start of the jackpot, a round period during which the first variable prize device 82a or the second specific prize port 65a is opened and closed, and an ending period for notifying the end of the jackpot. At least. In the state storage area 203k, information for distinguishing the current period among these plural types of periods is stored. More specifically, a jackpot is started, "01H" is stored in the state storage area 203k in the opening period, "02H" is stored in the state storage area 203k in the first round, and two rounds are performed. At first, “03H” is stored in the state storage area 203k, and “04H” is stored in the state storage area 203k in the ending period. On the other hand, in the state other than the big hit, “00H” is stored in the state storage area 203k.

  The initial value of the state storage area 203k is set to “00H”, and the stored values are backed up even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The value stored in the state storage area 203k is referred to when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. A status command is set for the operation. Thereby, even if the power is cut off during the game, the game state grasped by main controller 110 when the power is restored and the game state grasped by voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an inconsistency between the actual game state and the effect.

  The pre-reading probable changing flag 203m is used when the pachinko machine 10 pre-reads a special symbol lottery result based on a random number value (counter value) acquired in accordance with the starting prize. A flag indicating whether the prize data should be analyzed as being in the "probability state" or whether the prize data should be analyzed as if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). It is.

  When the prefetching certainty changing flag 203m is ON, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the specially changed state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched. On the other hand, if the prefetching certainty changing flag 203m is off, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched. The prefetching certainty changing flag 203m is initialized to off at the time of initializing the RAM (see S916 in FIG. 138), and is set to on each time the prefetched lottery result is determined to be a certainty change big hit (FIG. 133 (S410, FIG. 134, S514). On the other hand, each time the prefetched lottery result is determined to be a normal jackpot, it is set to off (see S412 in FIG. 133 and S515 in FIG. 134).

  The counter buffer 203y includes the above-described counters (the first random number counter C1, the first random counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4). , A second initial value random number counter CINI2). The counter value stored in the counter buffer 203y is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data. And a work area (work area) for storing values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Have.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 139), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 138). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 137) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 defines at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, an operation scenario table 222b, a rotational position determination table 222c, and an additional determination table 222d.

  Since the variation pattern selection table 222a is already known, a brief description will be given. More detailed fluctuation contents are determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a based on the contents (variation time). As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode from among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from main controller 110.

  The operation scenario table 222b indicates the operation of the accessory in the case of executing a movable effect in which at least one of the various accessories (the upper elevating unit 300, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotating unit 600, etc.) is movable. It is a data table that defines contents (operation scenario). More specifically, it is a data table in which set values (operation speed, operation step number, operation direction, and the like) set for various drive motors corresponding to each accessory are defined. Details of the operation scenario table 222b will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120.

  FIG. 119A is a block diagram showing the operation scenario table 222b. The operation scenario table 222b stores data for each type of a drivable (variable) character. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), an upper elevation unit table 222b1 that is referred to when an effect for driving the upper elevation unit 300 is set, and an effect for driving the liquid crystal elevation unit 400 are set. The liquid crystal elevating unit table 222b2 referred to when the operation is performed, the left swing unit table 222b3 referred to when the effect for driving the left swing unit 500 is set, and the effect for driving the rotary unit 600 are set. And a rotation unit table 222b4 to be referred to in the case of the above. In addition, when the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 are connected to a jackpot type (specific jackpot type), a specific opening in which the operation content of each accessory in the jackpot opening period is specified. Table 222b5, a specific ending table 222b6 in which the operation content of each accessory during the ending period of the specific jackpot type is specified, and the operation content of the initial operation of each accessory executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. An initial operation table 222b7 defined for each accessory is defined.

  Each of these tables will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 119 (b) to 120. FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-described upper elevating unit table 222b1. As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the setting to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) in the upper elevating unit table 222b1 for each value of the operation pointer 223g indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario. Values (operation speed, operation step number, and operation direction) are defined.

  Here, the operation speed indicates the frequency at which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) for setting one-step operation to the corresponding drive motor (motor 341). Are output (pps, pulse per second). For example, if the operation speed is 333 pps, it means that the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) 333 times to the upper elevating motor 341 per second. That is, it means that the upper elevating motor 341 is driven at a speed of 333 steps per second. The number of operation steps indicates the number of operations performed by the upper elevating motor 341, in other words, a signal (pulse) for setting one-step operation from the motor driver to the upper elevating motor 341. ) Is output. For example, the number of operation steps 127 means that one step operation is set 127 times for the upper elevating motor 341. Further, the operation direction means a driving direction (rotation direction of the motor) of the upper elevating motor 341, and two types of directions, a positive direction and a negative direction, can be set. In the upper elevating motor 341, the direction from the ascending position (origin position) to the descending position is a positive direction, and the direction from the descending position to the ascending position (origin position) is a negative direction. By setting these set values for the motor driver for driving the upper elevating motor 341, the corresponding operation can be executed accurately.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (b), an operation for lowering the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the ascending position (origin position) to the descending position is provided at the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g (outward operation). Are associated. Specifically, 333 pps is defined as the operation speed, 127 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when the timing at which the upper elevating unit 300 is driven is reached in the effect. In addition, 127 steps mean the number of steps up to the descending position.

  An operation for stopping (resting) the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 at the lowered position is associated with the value “02H” of the operation pointer 223g. Specifically, 333 pps is specified as the operation speed, 1000 is specified as the operation step, and “stop” is specified as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that the stop command is continuously issued 1000 times at an operation speed of 333 pps. Thus, the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 can be stopped at the lowered position for about 3 seconds (1000 times / 333 pps).

  The value (03H) of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation (return operation) for raising the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the lowered position to the raised position (origin position). Specifically, 333 pps is specified as the operation speed, 127 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. Further, END data is associated with the value “04H” of the operation pointer 223g. By reading the END data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Similarly, for the liquid crystal elevating unit table 222b2, the left swing unit table 222b3, and the rotating unit table 222b4, a motor driver corresponding to the drive motor for driving each accessory is provided for each value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to each accessory. The setting contents to be set are specified.

  FIG. 119 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the specific opening table 222b5 described above. As described above, when the jackpot type (specific jackpot type) in which the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 are connected is a specific jackpot type, the specific opening table 222b5 is provided with each accessory during the jackpot opening period. Is a data table in which the operation contents are specified. Note that the specific jackpot type is, specifically, an opening pattern A (opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds 20 times with respect to the first variable winning device 82a in each round of jackpot). (A repeating opening pattern) is a jackpot type to be set.

  As described above, when the jackpot type in which the open pattern A is set in the “normal mode” is won, the driving slide member 420 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 are connected to each other. , The configuration is such that all the balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a flow down to the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520. Each time the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 (every time the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor member 422c of the second passage forming member 422), a normal symbol is used. A time saving suggestion effect is performed to indicate whether or not the time saving state is set.

  In this control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are driven during the jackpot opening period in which the opening pattern A is set in order to execute the time saving suggestion effect. Before the first round of the jackpot is started (that is, before the ball is ready to enter the first variable winning device 82a), these characters are moved to the connection position. Have been. The operation content of each accessory during this opening period is defined in the specific opening table 222b5.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in order to drive the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 from the lowered position to the connected position (see FIG. 9) for the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g in the specific opening table 222b5. Are associated with each other. Specifically, 500 pps is defined as the operation speed, 250 is defined as the operation step, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction. By setting this operation content, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 can be arranged at the connection position.

  For the value “02H” of the operation pointer 223g, an operation content for swinging the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 from the release position (origin position) to the connection position is defined. ing. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction. By setting this operation content, the first passage forming member 520 can be arranged at the connection position. Accordingly, the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 previously arranged at the connection position can be connected to the first passage forming member 520. It can be guided (flowed down) to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 via 520.

  The value “03H” of the operation pointer 223g is associated with END data indicating the end of the operation. By reading the END data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  As for the specific ending table 222b6, similarly to the specific opening table 222b5, the operation content of the left swing unit 500 and the operation content of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are defined. Specifically, settings for driving the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 from the connection position to the release position, and settings for driving the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 from the connection position to the lower position. The contents are specified. The specific ending table 222b6 is not shown in the drawing because the operation direction and the operation order of the accessory are only reversed from those of the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)).

  Next, details of the above-described initial operation table 222b7 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the initial operation table 222b7. As shown in FIG. 120, the initial operation table 222b7 includes, in association with the value of the operation pointer 223g, the type of the accessory for which the operation is set, and the set value for setting the motor driver corresponding to the accessory. Is stipulated.

  Unlike the other tables defined in the operation scenario table 222b, the initial operation table 222b7 does not specify the number of operation steps, but specifies the operation end condition and the number of steps to be determined as abnormal. That is, in the initial operation in the present control example, one-step operation is performed at the operation speed and the operation direction specified in the initial operation table 222b7 until the arrival at the various sensors provided corresponding to each accessory is detected. It is configured to execute repeatedly. For example, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is provided with a plurality of sensors for determining the lifting position. That is, when the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 is located at the lowering position (origin position), the output is H (high) when the liquid crystal originating unit 400 is located at the coupling position. And at least an intermediate sensor 419 for liquid crystal. In the initial operation of the liquid crystal lifting / lowering unit 400 corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g, the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 detects that the liquid crystal has reached the connection position (the output of the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 becomes H). Until the operation speed is 500 pps, it is driven one step at a time in the forward direction (upward direction).

  During the execution of the initial operation, if it is determined that the abnormality determination step value specified in the initial operation table 222b7 has been reached without the arrival at the connection position being detected by the intermediate sensor for liquid crystal 419, the operation proceeds to the connection position. This means that the operation has not reached the connection position despite the setting of the number of steps that can be sufficiently reached. Therefore, in this case, the liquid crystal raising / lowering motor 441 for driving the liquid crystal raising / lowering unit 400 breaks down and the operation corresponding to the instruction of the motor driver cannot be executed, or the gear and the motor are displaced, and the liquid crystal is shifted. There is a possibility that a problem such as idling of the elevating motor 441 has occurred. For this reason, if the abnormality determination step value (1050 steps) is reached before the operation end condition of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is satisfied in the initial operation, an error is notified. By reporting this error, the clerk of the hall can be immediately made aware of the occurrence of the problem, so that appropriate measures such as repair can be executed.

  The operation in the case of the operation pointer “01H” has been described as an example. However, as shown in FIG. 120, the operation speed of each character, the operation end condition, the number of abnormality determination steps, The direction of operation is likewise defined. By executing the initial operation according to the initial operation table 222b7, it is possible to confirm whether or not all the accessories are operating normally each time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, by allowing the player to play the game after the initial operation is completed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in a state where each accessory always operates normally.

  Returning to FIG. 118 (a), the description will be continued. The rotation position determination table 222c is a data table in which information for specifying the current arrangement of the rotation member 640 from the output of the rotation position detection sensor 684 is specified. Details of the rotation position determination table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rotational position determination table 222c. As shown in FIG. 121, the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are different from each other in the pocket provided with the detected portion 641c, depending on the phase (arrangement) of the rotation member 640. (Divided member DV) and a pocket (divided member DV) not provided. The rotation position determination table 222c in this control example is a data table that defines combinations of outputs of the detection sensors A to F specified based on the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c for each pocket arranged at the drop position. Since the pockets P1 to P30 are arranged in this order in a counterclockwise direction, if the pocket at the drop position can be identified, the arrangement of all pockets can be identified.

  As shown in FIG. 121, the pocket P1 is defined as the pocket at the drop position for the combination of the outputs “L, L, H, H, L, H” of the detection sensors A to F. Therefore, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, if it is detected that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is L, L, H, H, L, H, respectively, It is determined that the rotation member 640 is at the rotation position where the pocket P1 is arranged at the drop position.

  Similarly, for the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F “L, L, L, H, H, L”, P2 is defined as the pocket at the drop position. Therefore, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, if it is detected that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is L, L, L, H, H, L, respectively, It is determined that the rotation member 640 is at the rotation position where the pocket P2 is arranged at the drop position.

  Similarly, for the pockets P3 to P30, combinations of outputs of the corresponding detection sensors A to F are defined in the rotation position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121). As described above, the combinations of the outputs of the different detection sensors are associated with the pockets P1 to P30. It can be specified accurately.

  Returning to FIG. 118 (a), the description will be continued. The additional discrimination table 222d is special when the ball is detected to enter the second entrance 640a during the execution of the lucky number increase effect (see FIGS. 93 (a) and (b)), and in the “normal mode”. It is a data table used to determine whether to increase the winning pocket (lucky number) when the lottery of the symbol 1 is newly suspended. Although illustration is omitted, the additional determination table 222d includes an additional high probability table in which the increase of the lucky number is determined with a relatively high probability (25%), and an additional high probability table with a relatively low probability (5%). There is provided an additional low probability table in which the number increase is determined, and an additional medium probability table in which the lucky number increase is determined with an intermediate probability (10%). If the determination condition for determining whether or not to increase the lucky number is satisfied, the above-described three types of tables are changed according to the situation (for example, whether or not the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined). One of them is selected and used to determine whether to increase the lucky number. Here, a random number value (counter) used to determine (decide) whether or not to increase the lucky number (hit pocket) is provided in, for example, the RAM 223, and the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 145). Each time is executed, the value is updated.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 118B is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a step counter 223e, an operation scenario flag 223f, and an operation pointer 223g. Origin return flag 223i, initial operation flag 223j, hit position storage area 223k, lighting position storage area 223m, probability change state flag 223n, time reduction state flag 223o, time reduction state counter 223p, and hit state. Storage area 223q, operable type storage area 223r, correction position counter 223s, first set flag 223t, rotation position storage area 223u, swing non-detection flag 223v, swing timer 223w, and designated pocket storage. Area 223x and above Counter 223av, effect timer 223bv, increased effect flag 223cv, roulette flag 223dv, swing effect flag 223ev, ball fallable flag 223fv, winning counter 223gv, discharge counter 223hv, and power-off flag. 223y and at least a memory area 223z.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area for special symbol 1), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. You. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning are obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various information (whether or not, a variation pattern, etc.) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn, and the predicted various information is The control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, fluctuation pattern, etc.) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and stores the prize information in the prize information storage area. 223a. More specifically, the extracted prize information is sequentially assigned to the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the free areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas) of the special symbol. It is memorized. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, a variable effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (and the third symbol display device 81) ( This is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of standbys) of the variation effect of the special symbol 1 which is suspended in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of retained balls of the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first winning opening 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main When the number of balls has been subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2107 in FIG. 150). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203c.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball count after the storage. In order to notify the value of the counter 223 b to the display control device 114, a display pending ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on in a fluctuation pattern reception process executed when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 151), and turned off when fluctuation display is set. (See S3302 in FIG. 162). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 uses the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command to generate the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81 and the rendering unit 331). ), The display control of the variation effect is started so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2104 in FIG. 150), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3307 in FIG. 162). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. The set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop effect of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The step counter 223e is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of each accessory driven by the drive motor. Note that the reference for counting (the position where the number of operation steps is 0) is set at the origin position of each accessory. The step counter 223e is configured to separately count the number of operation steps for each type of accessory. That is, the step counter 223 e is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the elevating body 330 in the upper elevating unit 300, and the number of operation steps of the oscillating operation of the first passage forming member 520 in the left oscillating member 500. There are provided separate counters for the number of drive motors for driving the accessory, such as a counter for counting the number of characters.

  The step counter 223e outputs the execution signal (execution command) every time it receives an execution signal indicating that a one-step operation has been executed from any of various driving motors provided in the pachinko machine 10. The counter value corresponding to the motor type is updated by one (see S2601 in FIG. 155). When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, an origin return operation is performed to return the various accessories to the origin position. 0 is set for the value. With this origin return operation, the position where the value of the step counter 223e becomes 0 can be reliably set as the origin position of each accessory, so that the operation status (drive position) of each accessory can be accurately grasped. it can.

  The operation scenario flag 223f is a flag that indicates which of the operation scenarios corresponding to the staging operation of each accessory specified in the operation scenario table 222b is set. The operation scenario flag 223f is composed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and the type of the operation scenario is associated with each bit. For example, the 0th bit of the operation scenario flag 223f corresponds to the upper lifting unit table 222b1, and if the 0th bit is 1 (ON), the upper lifting unit table 222b1 is set as the operation scenario. If 0 (off), it means that the upper elevating unit table 222b1 is not set. Similarly, for the other bits, if the operation scenario corresponding to each bit is set, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on), and if the corresponding operation scenario is not set, the corresponding bit is set to 0. (Off).

  When the operation scenario is set based on the variation pattern command in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151) (see S2204 in FIG. 151), the bit corresponding to the scenario is 1 (see FIG. 151). ON). In addition, every time the variation effect in which the operation scenario is set ends, the bit corresponding to the set scenario is set to 0 (off). With the operation scenario flag 223f, the type of the operation scenario currently set can be easily determined.

  The operation pointer 223g is a pointer used to identify the progress of the set operation scenario. As described above, in each data table constituting the operation scenario table 222b, the value of the operation pointer 223g and the operation content to be set (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction) are defined in association with each other. In this control example, the operation of the setting content of 1 is set to the drive motor, and when the operation according to the setting content is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223g is updated.

  The operation pointer 223g can separately update the pointer value for each set operation scenario. That is, the operation pointer 223g is a general term for different pointers provided for each operation scenario. The value of each pointer constituting the operation pointer 223g is set to "01H" when a corresponding operation scenario is newly set. Thereafter, each time the operation content corresponding to the pointer value is completed, the pointer value is updated (see S2612 in FIG. 155 and S2706 in FIG. 156), and the operation content corresponding to the updated pointer value is set. Further, when the variable effect in which the corresponding operation scenario is set ends, the pointer value is reset to “00H”. By using the operation pointer 223g, the set operation scenario can be accurately grasped.

  The home position return flag 223i indicates that the home position return operation (operation for returning an accessory shifted from the home position to the home position) that is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on is being executed. It is a flag indicating whether or not. If the home return flag 223i is on, it indicates that the home return operation is being performed, and if it is off, it indicates that the home return operation is not being performed. The origin return flag 223i is turned on when the origin return operation is set in the origin return process (see FIG. 144) (see S1505 in FIG. 144). On the other hand, in the home position return operation, when it is determined that all of the accessories have returned to the home position, they are set to off (see S2605 in FIG. 155). By using the origin return flag 223i, it can be easily determined whether or not the origin return operation is being performed.

  The in-initial-operation flag 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the initial operation is being performed to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally after the origin return operation is completed. . If the initial operation in-progress flag 223j is on, it indicates that the initial operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the initial operation is not being executed. The flag 223j during the initial operation is set when it is determined that all the accessories are located at the origin position when the power is turned on (S1507 in FIG. 144), or after the origin return operation executed after the power is turned on ends. It is set to on (see S2605 in FIG. 155), and is set to off when all the operations specified in the initial operation table 222b7 are completed (see S2709 in FIG. 156). By using the initial operation flag 223j, it can be easily determined whether or not the initial operation is being executed.

  The hit position storage area 223k is a storage area for storing the type of each of the pockets P1 to P30 of the rotating member 640 (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket) in the “rendition mode suggestion effect”. In the present control example, the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 is set with reference to the hit position storage area 223k. That is, the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket is set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, and the lighting area arranged on the back side of the missing pocket is set to a light-off state. When the ball B is dropped from the holding piece 677 to any of the pockets, the type of each pocket stored in the hit position storage area 223k is compared with the pocket arranged at the drop position, and the ball B is dropped. Is determined to be able to be dropped into the pocket next to the pocket arranged at the drop position.

  Details of the hit pocket storage area 223k will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 122, the storage area corresponding to each pocket is provided in the hit pocket storage area 223k. Can be stored. One bit is allocated to the storage area corresponding to each pocket, and when each bit is H (1), it means that the corresponding pocket is a hit pocket. , Meaning that the corresponding pocket is a detached pocket.

  Here, as described above, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined at the start of the roulette chance production (in the “rensou mode suggesting production” in the “preparation mode”, the special symbol is randomly selected and drawn. In the case of a big hit), the ball B is allowed to drop to any of the hit pockets, and the drop of the ball B to the missing pocket is restricted. On the other hand, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is not determined at the start of the roulette chance production (when all the special symbol lottery executed up to the start of the production is lost), the ball is placed in any of the pockets. B is allowed to fall, and falling of the ball B into the hit pocket is regulated. In the present control example, when the condition for dropping the ball B is satisfied (when the period of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes 1 second or less), the type of each pocket is determined with reference to the hit position storage area 223k. Then, it is determined whether or not the pocket arranged to the drop position next to the pocket currently arranged at the drop position is a pocket in which the ball B is allowed to fall in the present roulette chance effect. If the next pocket is a pocket that is allowed to fall, control is performed so that the ball B falls into that pocket. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from dropping into a pocket different from the pocket of the target type, so that the player determines whether or not the ball B has shifted to the “rensou mode”. An accurate notification can be given according to the type of the dropped pocket.

  FIG. 122 shows that when the pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30 are set as hit pockets, and the remaining pockets are set as missing pockets, they are stored in the hit position storage area 223k. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing data of the present invention. In this case, as shown in FIG. 122, H (1) indicating the hit pocket is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30, and the other pockets are stored. Is stored in the storage area corresponding to.

  The lighting position storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 (a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% or a light-off state with a lighting rate of 0%). The lighting of each LED of the rear LED 625 is controlled according to the information stored in the lighting position storage area 223m.

  Details of the lighting position storage area 223m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the lighting position storage area 223m. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), this lighting position storage area 223m is composed of a first storage area 223m1 to a third storage area 223m3 indicating respective lighting positions of the three LED bars 625a to 625c constituting the rear LED 625. It consists of two storage areas.

  The first storage area 223m1 is a storage area for storing the state of each lighting area A1 to A6 of the LED bar 625a. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), H (1) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area with the lighting rate of 100% among the lighting areas A1 to A6, and the storage corresponding to the lighting area in the unlit state. L (0) is stored in the area. In the example of FIG. 123 (b), H (1) indicating a lighting state at a lighting rate of 100% is set in the storage areas corresponding to the lighting areas A3 to A5. On the other hand, in the storage areas corresponding to the lighting areas A1, A2, and A6, L (0) indicating a light-off state with a lighting rate of 0% is set.

  The second storage area 223m2 corresponding to the LED bar 625b and the third storage area 223m3 corresponding to the LED bar 625c have the same configuration as the first storage area 223m1. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 123 (c) and (d), data (H or L) corresponding to the lighting state of the lighting areas A7 to A12 is set in the second storage area 223m2. A storage area is provided, and a storage area for setting data (H or L) corresponding to the lighting state of the lighting areas A13 to A18 is provided in the third storage area 223m3.

  These three storage areas are sequentially updated according to the arrangement of the hit pockets, and the state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is controlled according to the information stored in each storage area, so that only the hit pocket has a shining appearance. can do. As described above, since the rotating member 640 can make only 18/30 rotations while the rear LED 625 makes one rotation, the type of each pocket and the type of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket are determined by the rotation operation. Will shift depending on the progress of the game. Therefore, in the present control example, the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is corrected every time the rear LED makes 1/3 turn (that is, in units of one LED bar), and the hit pocket is always set. It is controlled so that it looks shiny. That is, each time the rear LED makes a 1/3 turn, the information of the storage area corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) is corrected in accordance with the displacement caused by the rotation operation. ing. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (appearance in which the hit pocket shines and the missing pocket becomes dark). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from erroneously recognizing the winning pocket and the missing pocket.

  Returning to FIG. 118 (b), the description will be continued. The probable change state flag 223n is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state. If the probable change state flag 223n is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probable change state, and if it is off, it indicates that it is not the probable change state. The probable change state flag 223n is updated in response to a state command output to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the game state is changed in the main control device 110. That is, when the certain symbol is notified of the certain symbol state by the state command, the certain symbol state flag 223n is set to ON (updated). 223n is set to off (updated) (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The time-saving state flag 223o is a flag that indicates whether or not the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol that continues until the next big hit (that is, the “rensou mode”). If the time saving state flag 223o is on, it indicates that it is in the "rensou mode", and if it is off, it is not in the "rensou mode" (that is, it is in the "normal mode" or "preparation mode"). Is shown. The time saving state flag 223o is updated in response to a state command output to the sound ramp control device 113 each time the game state is changed in the main control device 110, similarly to the probability change state flag 223n. That is, when the “long-run mode” is notified by the state command, the time-saving state flag 223o is set (updated) to ON, and when the “normal mode” or the “prepare mode” is notified, The time-saving state flag 223o is set to off (updated) (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The time reduction state counter 223p is a counter for counting the number of remaining time reductions in the “prepare mode”. If the value of the time reduction counter is 1 or more, it indicates that the "preparation mode" (that is, the normal symbol time reduction state) is continued until the number of times corresponding to the counter value and the special symbol lottery are executed. On the other hand, if the counter value is 0, it indicates that the mode is not the “prepare mode”. The time-saving state counter 223p, like the probable change state flag 223n and the time-saving state flag 223o, responds to a state command output to the sound ramp control device 113 every time the game state is changed in the main control device 110. Be updated. That is, when the number of times (one or seven times) of the “prepare mode” is notified by the status command, the value of the time-saving state counter 223p is updated to 1 or 7 according to the notified number. . On the other hand, when the “normal mode” or the “rensou mode” is notified by the state command, the value of the time saving state counter 223p is set (updated) to 0 (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The hit state storage area 223q is a storage area in which information indicating the current period during the big hit is stored, and has the same configuration as the state storage area 203k of the main control device 110. That is, during the jackpot opening period, “01H” is stored in the winning state storage area 223q, “02H” is stored in the first round, “03H” is stored in the second round, and “03H” is stored in the ending period. 04H "is stored. On the other hand, in a state other than the big hit state, “00H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q. The time reduction state counter 223p is updated according to a state command output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

  The operable type storage area 223r is information indicating whether or not it is permitted to operate each accessory in the initial operation when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Is a storage area in which is stored. The operable type storage area 223r is composed of, for example, one byte, and each character of the pachinko machine 10 (the upper elevating unit 300, the left swing unit 500, etc.) is associated with each bit of one byte. I have. When 0 is stored in each bit (set to H), the operation of the accessory corresponding to the bit is restricted (the origin return operation or the initial The operation cannot be executed), and when 1 is stored (set to L), it means that the operation of the accessory corresponding to the bit is permitted.

  Note that the state in which the operation of the accessory (return-to-origin operation or initial operation) is restricted is, for example, when the power is cut off during a big hit in which the opening pattern A is set for the first variable winning device 82a. It is. As described above, when the opening pattern A is set, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are connected to the first variable winning device 82a. The ball that wins the game can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. For this reason, if the home position return operation and the initial operation are performed on all the characters regardless of the state at the time of power-off, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 are connected at the time of power-off. Even in such a case, the connection is released by the home return operation or the initial operation. Therefore, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is instantaneously shut off in a state where the ball has entered the first passage forming member 520 and the power is immediately restored, the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520. During this time, the home position return operation or the initial operation is started, and the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 may be released. That is, the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 may enter the back side of the pachinko machine 10 without entering the second passage forming member 422. As a result, there is a possibility that a problem such as a short circuit of a wiring or a circuit may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the configuration is such that the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of power-on can be accurately grasped even at the sound lamp control device 113 side by the status command output from the main control device 110 at the time of power-on. When the gaming state grasped from the state command is in the middle of the jackpot set in the opening pattern A, the gaming state corresponds to the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 in the operable type storage area 223r. A 1 is stored in the bit, which means that the operation is restricted (set to L). Therefore, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off in a state where the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected, it is prevented (suppressed) that the connection is released when the power is restored. be able to. Therefore, even if the power is restored while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, the ball can reliably flow down from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited.

  The correction position counter 223 s is used to rewrite the data in the lighting position storage area 223 m in order to correct the deviation of the correspondence between the state of the lighting area provided in the rear LED 625 and the pocket of the rotating member 640. This is a counter indicating whether data stored in (first storage area 223m1 to third storage area 223m3) should be rewritten. As described above, the rotating member 640 is provided with 30 pockets P1 to P30. On the other hand, 18 lighting areas A1 to A18 are provided for lighting or extinguishing each pocket. Further, in order to operate the pocket arranged in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) by following the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket (that is, visible to the player), the rotating member 640 is provided. The rear LED 625 is configured to rotate at the same rotational speed. For this reason, since the rotating member 640 has only 18/30 rotations while the back LED 625 makes one rotation, the correspondence between the pocket and the lighting area is shifted every time the rotating member 640 enters the second section S2. Therefore, in this control example, when any one of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) in which the player cannot see (difficult), each of the LED bars constituting the LED bar 625a to 625c is arranged. By switching the state of the lighting area, the shift of the correspondence between the pocket and the lighting area is corrected. When the correction is performed, the type of the LED bar 625 to be corrected is specified from the value of the correction position counter 223s. Accordingly, no matter how much the rear LED 625 performs the rotation operation, the correspondence between the type of each pocket in the first section visible to the player and the lighting state of the lighting area arranged on the back side of each pocket. Can be immobilized. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the position of the hit pocket from the appearance of each pocket.

  The correction position counter 223s is configured as a loop counter that counts up by one in a range of “0” to “2” and returns to “0” when the value is updated in a state of “2”. If the value of the correction position counter 223s is “0”, it indicates that correction is performed for each of the lighting areas A1 to A6 configuring the LED bar 625a, and if the value is “1”, the LED bar 625b is configured. When the value is “2”, it indicates that the correction is performed on the lighting regions A13 to A18 constituting the LED bar 625c. The correction position counter 223s is updated one by one in the lighting setting processing for setting and correcting the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 (see S2912 in FIG. 158).

  The first set flag 223t indicates that the first lighting areas A1 to A18 have been turned on since the rotating member 640 (and the rear LED 625) configured to imitate a roulette has started a rotating operation in the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. This flag indicates whether the setting of the status has been executed. If the initial setting completed flag 223t is on, it means that the setting of the first lighting state has been executed after the start of the rotation operation, and if it is off, the setting of the first lighting state has not been executed. Means that. During the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625, the initial setting completed flag 223t is referred to. When the initial setting completed flag 223t is turned off, all the lights are turned on when the rotation of the rear LED 625 becomes the origin position. The lighting state of the areas A1 to A18 is set. On the other hand, when the first-time setting completed flag 223t is on, it means that the setting of the first lighting state has already been performed, so the rear LED 625 makes 1/3 turn, and the arrangement of any one of the LED bars is corrected. The lighting state of the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA is corrected each time the area matches the section RA. This first-set flag 223t is detected after the start of the “rensou-mode suggestion effect” by first detecting that the rear LED 625 has been located at the origin position (the output of the origin sensor has become H), and the respective lighting areas When the lighting state of A1 to A18 is set, it is set to ON (see S2908 in FIG. 158). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the “representative mode suggestion effect”.

  The rotation position storage area 223u is a storage area for storing the current arrangement of the rotation member 640. In the rotation position storage area 223u, during the rotation of the rotation member 640, every time when it is detected that any of the pockets is arranged at the drop position based on the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684. , Information corresponding to the pocket arranged at the drop position is stored (S2803 in FIG. 157). Based on the information stored in the rotation position storage area 223u, the current arrangement of the rotation member 640 can be specified while the rotation member 640 is rotating.

  The swing non-detection flag 223v is a flag indicating whether the ball B has been detected at least once by the ball detection sensor 679 after the swing effect has started. If the swing non-detection flag 223v is on, it means that the ball B has not been detected by the ball detection sensor 679 at least once. On the other hand, if the swing non-detection flag 223v is off, it means that the ball B has been detected at least once by the ball detection sensor 679 during the execution of the swing effect.

  As described above, in the present control example, the period (amplitude) of the swing operation of the ball B is determined based on the time interval at which the ball detection sensor 679 detects the ball B during the execution of the swing effect. It is configured to allow the ball B to fall when it becomes shorter (the cycle becomes 1 second or less). However, when the ball B is first detected by the ball detection sensor 679, the previous detection result does not exist, and the time interval cannot be calculated. Therefore, in the present control example, the swing non-detection flag 223v is provided, and whether the passage of the ball B has already been detected at least once by the ball detection sensor 679 (whether or not the cycle can be determined from the previous detection result) is determined. And the cycle of the swinging motion of the ball B is determined only when the ball detection sensor 679 is off. Thereby, it is possible to more accurately determine the period of the swing operation of the ball B.

  The swing non-detection flag 223v is set to ON based on the fact that the ball B has been thrown by the throwing operation of the throwing device 650 during execution of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” (see S3507 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, it is set to off based on the detection of passage of the ball B by the ball detection sensor 679 while the swing non-detection flag 223v is on (see S1704 in FIG. 146).

  The swing timer 223w is used to measure a time interval at which the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679 when the ball B performs a swing operation on the holding piece 677. The initial value of the swing timer 223w is set to 0, and the value is incremented by one each time a swing effect process for executing various settings during the swing effect is performed (see S1707 in FIG. 146). . This swing effect process (see FIG. 146) is a process executed every one millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, so that the swing timer 223w Is also updated in 1 millisecond units. On the other hand, the value is reset each time the passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679 (that is, the output of the ball detection sensor 679 becomes H) (see S1704 and S1710 in FIG. 146). The cycle (amplitude) of the swing operation is determined by the swing timer 223w, and the ball B is dropped by dropping the ball B after the cycle becomes sufficiently small (after the cycle becomes 1 second or less). It can make you feel as if you are falling. Therefore, it is possible to make it harder to doubt that the swinging motion of the ball B is being controlled, so that the player can more enjoy the swinging motion of the ball B.

  The designated pocket storage area 223x includes a winning symbol in the “normal mode” (see FIG. 91 (a)), a “preparation mode” notification symbol in the big hit (see FIG. 92 (b)), and a winning pocket position (FIG. 95 (b)) is a storage area for storing information corresponding to a lucky number (hit pocket) used as the lucky number. In accordance with the information stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x, it is used for displaying a lucky number in the "normal mode" (see Ds2 in FIG. 90 (a)) and controlling lighting of the hit pocket. Note that the player can select five types of lucky numbers.

  Here, the lucky number can be selected by the player from the displayed game menu screen by, for example, pressing the frame button 22 when the change is stopped. Specifically, one of the items on the game menu screen is provided with a lucky number selection. Then, on the lucky number selection screen, five numbers can be selected from the 30 types of numbers shown in each pocket (divided member DV). In the designated pocket storage area 223x, information corresponding to the five types of numbers selected on the lucky number selection screen is stored.

  Based on the storage contents of the designated pocket storage area 223x, when displaying the special symbol lottery result in the “normal mode” on each of the display units 331a to 331d of the rendering unit 331, it is stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x. The display content is determined according to the lucky number. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, four kinds of lucky numbers are selected from among the five kinds of lucky numbers and are controlled so as to be displayed one by one on the display units 331a to 331d (FIG. 163). S3408). On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, control is performed so that an off-number other than the lucky number is displayed on at least one of the display units 331a to 331d (see S3407 in FIG. 163).

  If the jackpot type shifts to the “preparation mode” after the jackpot, one lucky number that is not displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d at the time of the jackpot notification is displayed in the “preparation mode”. The number is set as a number, and is controlled so as to be displayed to the effect part a during the big hit. Furthermore, in the “rensou mode suggestion effect” which is executed when the mode is shifted to the “preparation mode”, the pocket corresponding to the lucky number selected by the player is first hit based on the storage contents of the designated pocket storage area 223x. (S3102 in FIG. 160).

  In this way, the lucky number designated (selected) by the player is the notification of the jackpot in the “normal mode”, the notification of the “preparation mode” during the jackpot, and the “rensou mode” in the Notification is commonly used for notification that is advantageous to three types of players. As a result, the pleasure of selecting a lucky number can be given to the player, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The additional counter 223av is a counter for counting the total number of winning pockets added in the “additional effect” (see FIG. 96A) executed in the normal mode. The additional counter 223av is incremented by one at the time of setting the “additional effect” (see S2312 in FIG. 152). At the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, a winning pocket is added by the winning pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) based on the count value of the adding counter 223av.

  The production timer 223bv is a timer that measures the elapsed time from the start of the “renjo mode suggested production”. The initial value of the effect timer 223bv is set to 0, and the value is incremented by one each time the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is performed during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”. (See S2007 in FIG. 149). Since the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed every millisecond, the effect timer 223bv is counted up in units of 1 millisecond. For example, if the value of the production timer 223bv is 1000, it means that one second (1000 milliseconds) has elapsed since the start of the “renjo mode suggested production”. It is determined whether or not the effect time has ended according to the value of the effect timer 223bv, and the effect mode is switched. That is, switching from the lucky number increase effect to the roulette chance effect, or switching from the roulette chance effect to the ending effect in the “rensou mode suggestion effect” (S2004, S2008: Yes in FIG. 149). For the sake of simplicity, in the following description, the lucky number increase effect is simply referred to as “increase effect”.

  The increasing effect flag 223cv is a flag indicating whether the increasing effect is being executed. If the increasing effect flag 223cv is on, it indicates that the increasing effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the increasing effect is not being executed. The flag 223cv during the increase effect is notified of the transition to the “prepare mode” in the status command output from the main control device 110 after the end of the jackpot (1 or 7 is set to the value of the time reduction status counter by the status command). Is set to ON (see S3006 in FIG. 159). On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is a value indicating the end timing of the increased effect (start of the roulette chance effect) (that is, a counter value indicating 20 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestive effect”). It is set to off when it is done.

  The roulette flag 223dv is a flag indicating whether a roulette chance effect is being executed. When the roulette 223dv is on, it indicates that a roulette chance effect is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that a roulette chance effect is not being executed. The roulette flag 223dv is such that the value of the staging timer 223bv is a value indicating the start (end of the increase effect) timing of the roulette chance effect (that is, a counter value indicating 20 seconds after the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”). Is set to ON when it is determined to be (see S2005 in FIG. 149). On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the production timer 223bv is a value indicating the end of the roulette chance production (start of the ending production) (that is, a counter value indicating 85 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestion production”). In this case, it is turned off (see S2009 in FIG. 149).

  The swing effect flag 223ev is a flag indicating whether the swing effect is being executed. When the swing effect flag 223ev is on, it indicates that the swing effect is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the swing effect is not being executed. The swing effect flag 223ev is a drive timing of the pitching device 650 during execution of the roulette chance effect, and is set to ON when the ball B is thrown (see s3505 in FIG. 164). In the present control example, the drive timing of the pitching device 650 is set to a time when 50 seconds have elapsed since the start of the “roulette chance effect”. On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the production timer 223bv is a value indicating the end of the roulette chance production (start of the ending production) (that is, a counter value indicating 85 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestion production”). In this case, it is turned off (see S2009 in FIG. 149).

  The ball droppable flag 223fv is a flag indicating whether or not the ball B can be dropped into any pocket when the ball B is swinging above the holding piece 677. . If the ball drop flag 223fv is on, it means that the ball B can be dropped, and if it is off, it means that the ball B is restricted from dropping. I do. In this control example, when the momentum of the ball B performing the swinging operation is weakened and the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging operation becomes equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second), the ball B can be dropped. It is determined that the state is possible, and the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to ON (see S1711 in FIG. 146). In addition, when the falling of the ball B is set, it is set to off (see S1807 in FIG. 147).

  The winning counter 223gv is a counter that counts the number of winning balls with respect to the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a in a jackpot. The value of the prize counter 223gv at the jackpot (probably variable jackpot BD, usually the jackpot A) where the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are connected. , The number of balls that have won the first variable prize device 82a is counted, and it is determined whether the number of balls has passed through the second passage forming member 422. Then, when the winning number and the discharge number match, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released. This prevents (suppresses) the disconnection during the passage of the first passage forming member 520, so that the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a can be reliably transferred to the second passage forming member 422. Can flow down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited. The winning counter 223gv has an initial value set to 0, and is incremented by one each time a large open mouth winning command notifying of winning of a ball is received (see S2413 in FIG. 153). On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning number and the discharge number match, and the release of the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set, it is initialized to 0 (S2505 in FIG. 154). reference).

  The discharge counter 223hv has a first jackpot 520 of the left swinging unit 500 and a second jackpot 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 that are connected to each other. This is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the two-passage forming member 422. The value of the discharge counter 223hv is compared with the value of the prize counter 223gv during the ending period of the jackpot. Then, when the values match, release of the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set. The initial value of the discharge counter 223hv is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the discharge of the ball is detected (the passage of the sensor member 422c is detected) (see S1902 in FIG. 148). On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning number and the discharge number match, and the release of the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set, it is initialized to 0 (S2505 in FIG. 154). reference).

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is set to on before a power-off command is received from the main controller 110 and power-off processing is executed (see S1619 in FIG. 145). Since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (for example, 100 milliseconds). Therefore, in the startup process (see FIG. 142) of the audio lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1308 in FIG. 142: Yes), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then kept constant. This is the case where the sound lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (for example, 100 milliseconds) elapses, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not been erased, and unnecessary information (or information incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information of the work area in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1309 in FIG. 142). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the sound lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 150) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. Further, the output side of the output port 239 is connected to the third symbol display device 81, the effect part 331 of the upper elevating unit 300, and the effect part 422 a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 generates a third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit) based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. 331 and the display contents of the rendering unit 422a). The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction for the instruction pointer 231a, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead of storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), the character ROM 234 is provided. ing.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the reading speed is slow especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the reading of the instructions constituting the control program is not possible. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversification and complexity are increased by using the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). , MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal Transfer to video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, The second program storage area 234a1 for storing fixed value data for driving the rendering unit 331 and the rendering unit 422a), the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit) 422a) at least a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, it is possible to diversify and complicate the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). it can.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, And the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the staging unit 422a), so that the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. An increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) can be executed. Yes, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. Thereby, the display control device 114 can be brought into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are output from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory 234a in that, in reading data of the first page, it takes a long time from designating an address to outputting data. There is a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) in the display control device 114 is immediately performed. There is a problem that it may not be started.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM 234d is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the third symbol display device 81 and the like in the display control device 114 (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, And the control of the directing unit 422a) can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S3602 in FIG. 165) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S3601 in FIG. 165) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading out the control program from the work RAM 233 constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 draws an image and causes the drawn image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) at a predetermined timing. DSP). The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 129) transmitted from the MPU 231, which will be described later. By developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information of one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol) An image is displayed on the display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Are processed in parallel during the image display time for one frame (20 ms in this control example).

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and displays the image developed by drawing first on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit). 331 and a process to be displayed on the rendering unit 422a).

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Can be.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) is improved. Can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the character symbol 234, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. The images drawn on the rendering unit 331 and the rendering unit 422a) can be displayed.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Accordingly, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. , The display on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) can be prevented from being missed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. The power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is provided. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640a is detected. The fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) based on the fluctuating image at the time of power-on changes to a game state at the time of power-on (whether in the “normal mode”, the “preparation mode”, or the “rensou mode”). Irrespective of this, it is executed in the third symbol display device 81. The main image at power-on and the variation image at power-on are both displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a portion to be displayed according to the type of the image (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit) 331 or the rendering unit 422a), so that the processing can be speeded up. Therefore, the period from when the power is turned on to when the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are displayed can be further reduced.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3603 and S3604 in FIG. 165).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a).

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 proceeds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 125, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “○” is provided at a lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 125 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped. The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and it is detected that the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640a has entered the ball. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and (c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance 64 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 14, a description will be given of the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of back images and a range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. FIG. 126 (b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sky stage" and the back surface A corresponding to the "sky stage".

  As shown in FIG. 126, the character ROM 234 prepares an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scroll-displayed with a proper connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “city stage” or the “empty stage”, the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between the first position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 126 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, a game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage, which is frequently displayed, is displayed in the rear image area. By resident in the 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, in the resident video RAM 235. Is stored in the back image area 235c.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range from FIG. 125 (a) to (b)). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 125 (a) and (b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the resident video RAM 235 is stored. By using the image data resident in the back image area 235c, the initial position of the back B is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Shown to be possible, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 124) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably. Further, in the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b overlaps. Stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward in a smooth connection.

  Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the effect unit 331 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-described 30 types of numbers (main symbols), which are numbers “1” to “30”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing the variable effect in the effect unit 331, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 every time, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the effect unit 331 starts the variable effect quickly. be able to. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37A, 37B has started a fluctuating effect after the entry of the ball into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640a, the production unit 331. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Also, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “1” to “30”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, and a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the accessory symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the effect unit 331 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped. As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the effect part 331, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the display image of the rendering unit 331 without numbers.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses By reading out image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the received error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). This is an area for storing image data that has not been processed. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the character ROM 234, image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to image data required for subsequent image rendering, from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed and the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (along with the drive signal) ( By transmitting the image information to the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit). In 422a), a process of displaying the image for one frame is executed.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image of one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. , The image of one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the read one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Minute image can be displayed.

  Then, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and an image for one frame to display an image on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The frame buffer from which the information is read is designated by the MPU 231 by alternately switching one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Is done.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b is read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b stores the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit) with respect to one rendering to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 with time. 422a), a display data table describing display contents to be displayed, transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the display data table, and This is an area where a transfer data table that defines transfer timing is stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter uses the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b to display the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device). 81, the display of the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) are controlled. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using the 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), diversified and complicated renderings can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is based on a command from the main control device 110, and the effect form of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). One display data table is prepared for each of them, for example, a fluctuation effect, an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect.

  The fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) when receiving the display fluctuation pattern command from the audio lamp control device 113. It is a production. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state and the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  Note that, as described above, if the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect, the demonstration unit outputs “0” to the effect unit 331 as described above. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers from "" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and the rear image on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the rear image for demonstration. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the effect part 331 and the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that a game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table indicates the time during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) (20 milliseconds in the present control example). Corresponds to an address expressed as one unit, and defines in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) is defined. ing.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) where the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, four third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And a light in the image, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address. For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display one of the back surfaces A and B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either the "city stage" or the "empty stage") or a back surface different from the back surfaces A and B. Information for specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, in the case of specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the backs A and B is to be displayed by the back type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A and B as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In this control example, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81 or the like) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81 or the like) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81 or the like).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. Is the information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the image is displayed, or the information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display on the third symbol display device 81 or the like) is started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the immediately preceding variable effect stopped symbol is switched to the offset information of the variable effect stopped symbol performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  The “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 127) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 129) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f. 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a).

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d can be used, and the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331) can be used. , And the effect image to be displayed on the effect unit 422a) can be changed.

  Here, like the conventional pachinko machine, the MPU 231 is executed every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) is changed. When the program is configured to be activated, a great deal of load is imposed on the processing of starting and executing the program, which is complicated and enormous due to the diversification of the effect images, so that the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited. Therefore, there is a possibility that diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. Can be created in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start-up, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect part 331, and the effect This is because the effect to be displayed on the section 422a) is determined. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer 233d is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is stored frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be created is such that the pachinko machine 10 causes the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) to display in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. This can be realized for the first time based on the configuration for determining the effect mode.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. As described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 128). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 128 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 128, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 129) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 128, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like. 3 symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a It can be displayed on.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 125 (a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 165) executed by the MPU 231 (see S3605 in FIG. 165). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. , Is set to off (see S5205 in FIG. 176 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3901 in FIG. 167 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 167 (b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 167 (b) of S3909) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 168 to 172) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 173 to 175) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S5101 in FIG. 176 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 176 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 177) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, or the like) in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. And a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to a presentation mode to be displayed on the presentation section 422a). The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113. Then, a display data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 129) described below, which describes the contents of an instruction to draw an image, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). .

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 129) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 129) that describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect portion 331, and the effect portion 422a). Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 167 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S4805 in FIG. 167 (b)) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one (see S5001 in FIG. 175).

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 129), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an effect to be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) is provided. Can be changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite based on the transfer data table is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect portion 331, and the effect portion 422a). Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. This drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. , Symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,. For each sprite such as an error pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is an effect of an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. It is a counter that counts time. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data indicates that the effect time is the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) (20 milliseconds in the present control example). Divided by.

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 167 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4807 in FIG. 173). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5402 in FIG. 178).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information that has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and, together with the drive signal, displays the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display). By transferring the image information to the device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), the image information is transferred to the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). A display process for displaying an image is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see S3906 in FIG. 167 (b)) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b is read out and sent to the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). It is a flag. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S4601 in FIG. 172 (a)). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 177), and is turned off when the rear image change process is executed (see S5310 in FIG. 177). As a result, a rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the back type corresponding to the ON bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON in the rear image determination flag 233x (see FIG. 172 (a)). )) S4602). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With the back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it indicates that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it indicates that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 173) (see S4821 in FIG. 173), and the demo display data table other than the demonstration display data table is set. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S4106 in FIG. 169 (a), S4305 in FIG. 170 (a), S4405 in FIG. 170 (b), FIG. 171 of S4506). With the demonstration display flag 233y, it can be easily determined whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect is an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped (determined) for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. When the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and when it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 173) (S4814 in FIG. 173), and other than the confirmed display data table. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S4106 in FIG. 169 (a), S4305 in FIG. 170 (a), S4405 in FIG. 170 (b), FIG. 171 of S4506). With the final display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether the final display effect is currently being produced.

<Control processing of main controller in first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 130 to 141. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up processing started upon power-on and a main processing executed after the start-up processing, and is started periodically (at an interval of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The processing and the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (999 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 999, 999, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). The details of the special symbol change process (S104) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the special symbol change process (S104), a start winning process (S105) associated with the passage of the ball at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640a is executed. Details of the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134.

  After the start winning process (S105), a normal symbol variation process for performing a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106). The details of the ordinary symbol change process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the normal symbol variation process is executed, a through gate passage process (S107) for performing a process associated with the passage of a ball in the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is executed. The details of the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the execution of the through gate passage process (S107), a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, referring to FIG. 131, a special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variable display of symbols and the like performed in the effect display units 331a to 331d.

  In the special symbol change process (FIG. 131, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot game is currently being played (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the effect display units 331a to 331d are displaying a jackpot of the first special symbol (including a special symbol jackpot game). , During the predetermined time after the end of the first special symbol jackpot game. If it is determined that the present is the first special symbol big hit (S201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being changed and displayed (S202).

  If it is determined in the process of S202 that the first special symbol is not being fluctuated and displayed (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) is obtained (S202). S203), it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c ( S205), a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the subtraction is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 139) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S208). The special symbol 1 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S209: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S210), and this processing ends.

  In the processing of S209, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed (S209: Yes), the symbols for stopping the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are stopped. Is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol 1 change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol 1 change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined in accordance with the value of the first random number counter C1. The jackpot type (see FIGS. 107 and 108) is determined.

  After the processing in S211 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process is started. ) Is a special symbol jackpot (S212). If the current lottery result is the first special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the probability change flag 203f and the time reduction flag 203g are set to off, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is initialized to 0 (S213). Then, the start of the special symbol big hit is set (S214), and the process proceeds to S218. When the start of the jackpot of the first special symbol is set by the process of S214, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (refer to FIG. 139) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes to open the opening command. Is set. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big hit effect is started.

  In the processing of S212, if the result of the current lottery is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is greater than 0 (S215). If it is larger (S215: Yes), the value of the during-hours counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S216), a state command for notifying the value of the during-hours counter 203h after the subtraction is set (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. I do. The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output as a voice in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 139) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the state command, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the values of the probability change state flag 223n, the time reduction state flag 223o, the time reduction state counter 223p, and the hit state storage area 223q according to the gaming state notified by the state command. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, when it is determined that the value of the during-hours counter 203h is 0 (S215: No), the processes of S216 and S217 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and thereafter, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the special symbol 1 change start process (S208 in FIG. 132) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 change start process (S208). This special symbol 1 change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol 1 change process (see FIG. 131) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and includes the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of (1), a lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is carried out (whether or not), and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol are displayed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed on the display device 81.

  In the special symbol 1 change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. Is acquired (S301).

  Next, with reference to the state of the probability change flag 203f, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is performing the probability change of the special symbol (S302). In the processing of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is performing the certainty change of the special symbol (that is, the certainty change flag 203f is ON) (S302: Yes), the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301. And a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of and the first random number table 202a for a high probability (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 41 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, 41 random numbers of “500 to 540” are set as the random numbers of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these wins. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probability change (that is, the probability change flag 203f is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not the first special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). . Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 40 random number values stored in the first large random number table 202a for low probability. As described above, 40 random numbers “0 to 39” are set as the random numbers to be the big hit of the first special symbol, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the random numbers to be hit by these are set. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol 1 is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), The current big hit type is specified based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special type 1 hit type selection table 202b1, and the special type big hit of eight types is obtained. It is determined what the jackpot type is among (probably variable jackpot A to probability jackpot G, normal jackpot A). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 4”, it is determined that the probability is big hit A (2R certain big hit), and if it is in the range of “5 to 84”, If it is determined to be the probability variable jackpot B (2R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of "85 to 274", it is determined to be the probability variable jackpot C (2R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of "275 to 774", If it is determined to be the probability variable jackpot D (2R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of “775 to 804”, it is determined to be the probability variable jackpot E (2R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of “805 to 874”, If it is determined to be the probability variable jackpot F (2R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of “875 to 974”, it is determined to be the probability variable jackpot G (2R probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of “975 to 999”, Usually jackpot It determines that (2R Normal jackpot) (see FIG. 107).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changed according to the determined jackpot type (any one of the probability jackpot A to the probability jackpot G and the normal jackpot A). Is set. In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (probably variable jackpot A to positive jackpot G, normal jackpot A) is set as the stop type.

  Next, state setting information corresponding to the specified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e (S307), and the value of the read state setting information is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (S308). Thereafter, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S309), and the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S310). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S310, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the time until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 110B), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. (Fluctuation time) is determined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery of the special symbol 1 is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the out is set (S311). In the process of S311, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set to a display mode corresponding to the deviated symbol, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The stop type to be displayed in the rendering unit 331 is set based on the value of.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the certain state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S312). Here, the display time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the effect symbol 331 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S310, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d, and the variation pattern ( Fluctuating time).

  When the processing of S310 or the processing of S312 ends, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S310 or S312 is set (S313). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S309 or S311 is set (S314). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 139). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114 (S315). When the process of S315 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol 1 changing process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and determines whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640a. This is a process for executing a holding process of the values indicated by the various random number counters when there is a start winning prize, and a prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203c is 4 If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N) of the ball counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition is set (S405).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 139) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  After the processing of S406, the value of the prefetch certainty changing flag 203m and the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 are stored. (S407), the winning / non-successful lottery of the special symbol, the stop type, and the variation pattern are predicted (read ahead) (S407), and the winning information command including the predicted lottery, the stop type, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is set (S407). S408). Next, in the processing of S408, it is determined whether or not the lottery of the special symbol predicted (look-ahead) is a probability change jackpot (S409). : Yes), the prefetch certainty changing flag 203m is set to ON (S410), and the process proceeds to S413.

  On the other hand, in the process of S409, if the predicted success or failure of the lottery of the special symbol is not the probability change jackpot (S409: No), then it is determined whether the predicted success or failure of the lottery of the special symbol is the normal big hit (S411). If the predicted success or failure of the special symbol lottery is a normal jackpot (S411: Yes), the prefetching certainty changing flag 203m is set to OFF (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. Further, in the process of S411, when the predicted success or failure of the lottery of the special symbol is not usually a big hit (S411: No), the process of S412 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S413.

  In the process of S413, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (started winning) the second entrance 640a (S413). If there is no winning in the second entrance 640a (S413: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second entrance 640a (S413: Yes), the sound lamp control device 113 is notified of the detection of the winning (entering) in the second entrance 640a. The special figure 2 winning command is set (S414). The special figure 2 winning command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the special figure 2 winning command during the execution of the increase effect (lucky number increase effect), the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to increase the lucky number (hit pocket).

  When the process of S414 is completed, then, a special symbol 2 winning process for executing a lottery of the special symbol 2 based on various counter values (random number values) acquired based on the winning start to the second entrance 640a. Is executed (S415), and this process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The details of the special symbol 2 winning process (S415) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 winning process (S415). As described above, the special symbol 2 winning process (S415 in FIG. 134) is based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area upon detection of the start winning to the second entrance 640a. A process of performing a lottery (judgement of success or failure) of “big hit” or “missing special symbol” and determining an effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the effect unit 331. It is.

  In the special symbol 2 winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is changing (S501). If it is determined that the current display mode is changing (S501: Yes), this process is directly performed. finish. On the other hand, if the current display mode is not fluctuating (S501: No), the value (N) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203c is acquired (S502), and it is determined whether the value is 0 (S503). ). When it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S503: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203c is 0 (S503: Yes), each counter (first random number counter C1, first random counter C2, and stop) is stopped. The value of the type selection counter C3) is stored in the common execution area (S504). Next, with reference to the state of the probability change flag 203f, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is performing a certainty change of the special symbol (S505). If it is determined that there is (S505: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is determined based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S504 and the first random number table 202a for high probability. The result of the lottery is obtained (S506). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 41 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, 41 random numbers of “500 to 540” are set as the random number value which is the big hit of the second special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value of these are set. Is determined to be a big hit of the second special symbol. When the lottery result of the second special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S508.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S505, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probability change (that is, the probability change flag 203f is off) (S505: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the special symbol, Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S504 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S507). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 40 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As described above, 40 random numbers of "0 to 39" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these wins. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S508.

  In the processing of S508, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 2 acquired by the processing of S506 or S507 is a special symbol jackpot (S508), and if it is determined that the special symbol 2 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S508) S508: Yes), the current jackpot type (see FIG. 108) is specified based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S504, and the state setting information corresponding to the specified jackpot type is determined as a game. It is read from the result setting table 202e (S509).

  Next, the value of the read state setting information is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (S510). Thereafter, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S511), and the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S512). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S512, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the time until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol. The fluctuation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 110B), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. (Fluctuation time) is determined.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determined in the processing of S512 is a probability variable jackpot (S513). If the determined jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (S513: Yes), the prefetching certainty variable flag 203m is set to ON. (S514), and the process proceeds to S518. On the other hand, if the determined jackpot is not a probability changing jackpot (S513: No), the prefetching certainty changing flag 203m is set to off (S515), and the process proceeds to S518.

  In the process of S508, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of the way (S508: No), the display mode at the time of being out of place is set (S516). In the process of S516, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the rendering section is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the common execution area. At 331, the type of stop to be displayed is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S517). Here, the display time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the effect symbol 331 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S512, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d, and the variation pattern ( Fluctuating time).

  When the process of S517 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S512 or S517 is set (S518). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S511 or S516 is set (S519). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 139). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. Upon completion of the process in S519, the process returns to the start winning process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and is performed by the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) to display the variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol), This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the control for opening and closing the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is performed during the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S602), and the normal symbol is determined. Is determined not to be in the variable display mode (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of variable display suspended in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S608). In the process of S608, if the time-saving flag 203g of the RAM 203 is ON or the value of the medium-time-time counter 203h is 1 or more, it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is set.

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time is in a state of a normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the rendering unit 331 display a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game) and a special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the second random number table 202c for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239". It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 110 (a)).

  In the processing of S608, when it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is not present (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 is Based on the probability random second hit random number table 202c, a lottery result is obtained as to whether or not a normal symbol has been won (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is "5", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. Is determined (see FIG. 110A).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “と し て” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (S614), and it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (the time reduction flag 203g is ON or the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more). In this case (S614: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617.

  In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory 640b attached to 640a is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S614, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol) (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is set. At 0.2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to one (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the processing shifts to S619.

  In the processing of S619, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (S619), and the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (the time reduction flag 203g is ON or the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more). If it is determined (S619: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S619, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol) (S619: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds. Is set (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability. Since the release period of the motorized accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is very long, "0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times,” a ball enters the second entrance 640a. It is easy to do.

  In the processing of S602, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S602: Yes), the variable time of the ordinary symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S622). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83 (not shown).

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that has been fluctuation displayed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). . In the process of S623, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) displays the symbol as the ordinary symbol (the second symbol). ○ ”is set so that the symbol is stopped (lit). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of the departure is set by the processing of S618, the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) displays the normal symbol (the second symbol) as "a normal symbol (second symbol)". The symbol "x" is set so as to be stopped (lit). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is set to the second symbol in the display mode set by the processes of S613 and S618. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the two symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S624). If it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S624: Yes), the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is set (S625). When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 139) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the processing of S625 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 130), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is to acquire and hold the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S703). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 138, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when power is turned on to the main control device 110. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 138), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S914 in this case.

  In the process of S905, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907). : No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed-up data has been destroyed. In such a case, the process also proceeds to S914. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S914). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which the payout control of the game ball can be started. . After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S915, S916).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S915, S916) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S915, S916) is performed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, S907: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S910, the values of the probability change flag 203f, the time reduction flag 203g, the medium time reduction counter 203h, and the state storage area 203k are read (S910), and the read probability change flag 203f, the time reduction flag 203g, the medium time reduction counter 203h, and the state storage area 203k are read. A status command is set based on each value of (S911). The status command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. By receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of power-on (whether the special symbol is in a certain state of change, whether a big hit is in progress, or the like). Thereby, it is possible to specify the type of the accessory that can be operated in the home position return operation or the initial operation, and to execute an effect corresponding to the state.

  When the process of S911 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (S912), and interruption is permitted (S912). S913), and proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripherals). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is prize detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130). Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command to hold the number of balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 131) and the start winning process (see FIG. 133) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the ending command, and the like set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 140) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A big hit control process for opening or closing the 1 variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or the ball has won a specified number. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the round ends. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640b associated with the second entrance 640a is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the ordinary symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display updating process, the variation pattern is obtained by the process of S310 or S312 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 132) and the process of S512 or S517 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134). Is set in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the variation display according to the variation pattern is started. In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LED 37a of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the process of S310 or S312 of the special symbol 1 change start process (see FIG. 132) and the process of S512 or S517 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) are performed. When the fluctuating time corresponding to the set fluctuating pattern ends, the fluctuating display executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the process of S309 of the special symbol 1 fluctuating start process (see FIG. 132) is performed. Alternatively, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in the display mode set by the process of S311 and the process of S511 or the process of S516 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134). Display (lit).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 135), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 executes a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 135). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, which means that the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1009: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, until the next main processing execution timing is reached. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (255 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1008, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 137 has been executed, the process at S1012 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. In the process at the time of power-off, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that power has been turned off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 111 or voice lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the initialization process (see S901 in FIG. 138) can be performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a first variable prize are performed. This is a process for executing opening / closing control of the device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a.

  In the big hit control process, first, it is determined whether a big hit of a special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 131) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol big hit is set, it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1101, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), “01H” indicating an opening period is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1102), and an opening command is set. (S1103), this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, in the audio ramp control device. It is transmitted to 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game is included. In the process of S1104, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1104: No), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a corresponding to the jackpot type is opened. A pattern is set (S1106). Specifically, as described above, if the jackpot type is any one of the probable jackpots B to D and the regular jackpot A, the open pattern A (0) is set as the open pattern of the first variable winning device (first large open mouth) 82a. .6 an opening pattern in which opening for 6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times) is set, and if the jackpot type is the probability variable jackpots E to G, the first variable winning device (first large opening port) 82a An opening pattern B (an opening pattern in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once) is set as an opening pattern. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is any of the probability jackpot A, the probability jackpot H to K, or the normal jackpot B, the second specific winning port (second large opening port) 65a is set for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse). Alternatively, an opening pattern in which the ball is opened (until 10 balls are won) is set.

  When the process of S1106 is completed, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1107). The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  After the processing in S1107, the state storage area 203k is updated according to the number of rounds (S1108), and this processing ends. Specifically, as described above, if the current round is one round of a big hit, “02H” is stored in the state storage area 203k, and if the round is two, “03H” is stored. The reason why the updated value is not notified to the sound ramp control device 113 is that the sound lamp control device 113 is made to grasp the number of rounds started by the round number command set in the process of S1107. This is because you can do it. Since the number of command outputs can be reduced, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when the special game state (all two rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

  In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing (S1109: Yes), the ending command is set (S1110), 04H is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1111), and the present process is performed. finish. The ending command set in the process of S1110 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects an ending effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command according to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1109 that it is not the ending start timing (S1109: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the current big hit (special game state) (S1112). In the process of S1112, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S1112: Yes), the state setting table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is read (S1113) and the current jackpot is notified. At the start of the variable display, the status setting information stored in the status setting information storage area 203j is read (S1114).

  Next, from the read state setting table 202f, a combination of set values (probable change flag 203f, time reduction flag 203g, and medium time reduction counter 203h) corresponding to the state setting information is read (S1115). The time reduction flag 203g and the medium time reduction counter 203h are set (S1116). As described above, in the present control example, the state setting information selected from the game result setting table 202e is held during the big hit, and the game state is set at the end of the big hit based on the held state setting information. are doing. With this configuration, it is not necessary to set the gaming state after the big hit from the various counter values (random number values) acquired at the time of the start winning, and the state in which the various counter values are held is used as the state setting information. It can be limited to a short time until the information is stored in the state setting information storage area 202j. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a random number value which becomes a jackpot of a special symbol to be obtained illegally from the outside, so that the timing at which the random number value which becomes a jackpot appears is analyzed, and a fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by setting the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging substrate, acquiring a random number at a timing when a random number value to be a big hit appears, and suppressing a fraudulent act of performing control so as to judge the success or failure of the big hit. Can be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, various set values (probable change flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, and medium-time-time counter 203h) relating to the game state after the end of the big hit are displayed during the fluctuation display of the symbol for notifying the big hit. Instead of being held during the subsequent jackpot (privilege gaming state), only the state setting information is held. Rather than providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various set values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the state setting information values, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

  After the processing of S1116, “00H” is stored in the state storage area 203k, which means that no big hit is occurring (S1117), and the game state after the big hit (probable change flag 203f, time-saving flag 203g, medium-time counter 203h, state) The state command for notifying the storage area 203k) to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S1118), and this processing ends. The status command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the state command, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the values of the probability change state flag 223n, the time reduction state flag 223o, the time reduction state counter 223p, and the hit state storage area 223q according to the gaming state notified by the state command. I do.

  In the process of S1112, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1112: No), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second). A prize-winning process for executing control corresponding to the case where the ball has won the large opening (65a) is executed (S1119), and the present process ends. Details of the winning process (S1119) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1119). In this winning processing (S1119 in FIG. 141), first, it is determined whether or not a round is valid (S1201). The round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, an opening pattern is set for the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. This is a collective term for the period of time and the interval period (3 seconds) after the end of the round. In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the current time is outside the round validity period (S1201: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the validity period (S1201: Yes), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a is set. It is determined whether or not a prize has been detected (S1202). If it is determined that a prize has been detected (S1202: Yes), the winning number counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1203). A large opening winning command for notifying the device 113 is set (S1204), and the process shifts to S1205. The status command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 can determine the winning number of balls based on the received large open mouth winning command.

  In addition, at the jackpot where the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are connected (probably variable jackpots B to D, usually large jackpot A), this large opening is performed. The number of balls winning the first variable winning device 82a is counted based on the winning number (the value of the winning counter 223gv) grasped based on the winning command, and the ball is discharged through the second passage forming member 422. A match with the number of spheres is determined. Then, when the winning number and the discharge number match, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released. This prevents (suppresses) the disconnection during the passage of the first passage forming member 520, so that the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a can be reliably transferred to the second passage forming member 422. Can flow down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited.

  In the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the winning in the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a is not detected (S1202: No), the process of S1203 and S1204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1205. In the processing of S1205, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203i is 10 or more (S1205). If the value is 10 or more (S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to S1207. On the other hand, in the processing of S1205, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203i is less than 10 (S1205: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1206). Here, the round time means the end time of the opening pattern set in the first variable winning device 82a or the opening time (30 seconds) set in the second specific winning opening 65a.

  In the processing of S1206, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1206: No), it means that the condition for ending the round is not satisfied, and thus this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1206, when it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1206: Yes), the process proceeds to S1207. The process of S1207 is performed when the upper limit number of balls has won the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a (S1205: Yes) or when the round time has elapsed ( S1206: Yes). That is, this is a case where the end condition of the round is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the end of the running round is set (S1207), the value of the winning number counter 203i is initialized to 0 (S1208), and the process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 142 to FIG. 164, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 142, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1620 (see FIG. 145). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 145, upon receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (S1617 in FIG. 145: Yes), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1620. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1620 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1302: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off processing in S1620 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1304. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1620 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308. .

  In the process of S1302, if the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1620, This is started by resetting the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304), and it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1305). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  In the processing of S1305, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set ( S1306). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  After the processing of S1306, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on (see S1619 in FIG. 145) when power-off processing (see S1620 in FIG. 145) is executed. In other words, the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145) is executed. This is a case where the power-up process is started after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145) has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the power-off flag 223y is set to off (S1310). The process moves to S1311. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1308 is reached when the power-off flag 223y is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process from step S1304 to step S1306 passes through step S1308. Or the process is started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), the process proceeds to S1311 by skipping S1309 for clearing the work area of the RAM 223 and S1310 for setting the power-off flag 223y to off.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1309 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1304 to the process of S1308 via the process of S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S1311, an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1311), and then interruption permission is set (S1312). After that, based on the status command received from the main control device 110, a power-on state setting process for identifying the game state at power-on is executed (S1313), and the character mutated from the origin position is moved to the origin position. Is executed (S1314), and the process proceeds to the main process. Details of the closing state setting process (S1313) and the origin return process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, respectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 143, a power-on state setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing this state setting process at the time of insertion (S1313). This power-on state setting processing (S1313) is executed in the start-up processing (see FIG. 142), and as described above, is a processing for identifying the game state at power-on.

  In the power-on state setting process (S1313), first, the probable change state flag 223n, the time reduction state flag 223o, the time reduction state counter 223p, and the hitting state according to the state command output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113. The value of the status storage area 223q is updated (S1401).

  As described above, the status command notifies each value of the probability change flag 203f, the time reduction flag 203g, the time reduction counter 203h, and the status storage area 203k when the power is turned on during the startup processing of the main control device 110. (See S911 in FIG. 138). Based on this status command, in the processing of S1401, the probable change status flag 223n is updated to match the status of the probable change flag 203f, the time reduction status flag 223o is updated to match the status of the time reduction flag 203g, and The time reduction state counter 223p is updated so as to match the value of the counter 203h, and the hit state storage area 223q is updated so as to match the storage value of the state storage area 203k. As a result, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the gaming state recognized by the audio ramp control device 113 can be matched in the startup processing.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stored value of the updated hit state storage area 223q is a value indicating that a big hit is being made (S1402). Here, as described above, if “01H” is stored in the winning state storage area 223q, it indicates the opening period of the jackpot, and if “02H” is stored, one round of the round is performed. If “03H” is stored, it indicates a two-round period, and if “04H” is stored, it indicates an ending period. On the other hand, if “00H” is stored, it indicates that the present is not a big hit.

  In the process of S1402, if it is determined that the value of the hit state storage area 223q is not a value indicating that the big hit is occurring (that is, “00H” is stored) (S1402: No), the process proceeds to S1403. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hit state storage area 223q is a value indicating that the big hit is being made (that is, any one of “01H” to “04H”) (S1402: Yes), It is determined whether “04H” indicating the ending period is stored in the state storage area 223q (S1404).

  In the process of S1404, when it is determined that the current time is during the ending period (S1404: Yes), a wait period of 1.5 seconds is set (S1405), and the process proceeds to S1403. The wait period set here is set to delay execution of the home position return process (see FIG. 144). By setting the weight period, it is possible to prevent the origin return operation from being performed while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, thereby preventing the connection with the second passage forming member 422 from being released. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 does not enter the second passage forming member 422 but enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  More specifically, at the jackpot where the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected (probably variable jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A), the connection is released during the ending period, and Is driven to the origin position. Driving to the origin position is performed after confirming that the value of the prize counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv match during the ending period, and that no ball remains in the first passage forming member 520. You. However, when the power is turned off during the ending period and the power is turned on again, the RAM 223 is initialized during the startup process (see S1311 in FIG. 142), and the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv are reset. Since the value is also cleared, it becomes impossible to determine whether or not a sphere remains in the first passage forming member 520 when the power is turned on. Therefore, in the present control example, if it is determined that the power is turned off and turned on during the jackpot ending period, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are in a connected state, and Even if a sphere remains inside the first passage forming member 520, 1.5 seconds, which is a period during which the sphere in the first passage forming member 520 can sufficiently reach the second passage forming member 422, It is configured to wait for the home return operation. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the origin return operation from being performed while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, and to prevent the connection with the second passage forming member 422 from being released. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the ball does not enter the second passage forming member 422 but is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  In the processing of S1402, when it is determined that the game is not a jackpot (S1402: No), and in the processing of S1403 executed after the processing of S1405, the bit corresponding to all the characters in the operable type storage area 223r is set to the operation. The value 1 indicating possible is set (S1403), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the start-up process. By setting the value (1) indicating operable for all the characters by the process of S1403, the origin return operation and the initial operation can be performed for all the characters. Therefore, it can be confirmed whether all the accessories are in a normally operable state.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, when it is determined that the current time is not during the ending period (a value other than “04H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1404: No), It is determined whether it is during the opening period (whether “01H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1406). In the process of S1406, when it is determined that the opening period is in progress (“01H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1406: Yes), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member are determined. 422 are set to the connection positions, respectively (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408. On the other hand, if it is not during the opening period in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), the process of S1407 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1408.

  When the start-up process (see FIG. 142) is performed during the opening period, the setting of the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 to the connection position is performed by initializing the RAM 223 in the start-up process ( This is because the step counter 223e is initialized by S1311 in FIG. 142). For this reason, when the power is cut off during the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 during the opening periods of the probability change jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A, the power is turned on again. Sometimes the arrangement of each member is unknown. Therefore, in the present control example, the drive to the connection position is set again regardless of the arrangement of each member. Thus, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be reliably connected during the opening period.

  In the processing of S1408, a bit corresponding to the accessory (the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500) set at the connection position in the operable type storage area 223r is set to 0, and 1 is set to other bits. This is set (S1408), and this process ends. Accordingly, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be excluded from the target of the home position return operation and the initial operation, so that the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 at a big hit. And can be kept connected. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the sphere is passing through the first passage forming member 520. It is possible to suppress a problem that the light is ejected from the opening of the one passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  Next, the origin return process (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the origin return processing (S1314). This origin return processing (S1314) is executed in the start-up processing (see FIG. 142) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the character that is mutated from the origin position when the power is turned on is identified. This is a process for returning to the position.

  In the home position return processing, first, it is determined whether or not the current time is during the wait period (S1501). If the current time is during the wait period (S1501: Yes), the present processing ends. The weight period is set when the insertion state setting process is executed during the jackpot ending period, as described above (see S1405 in FIG. 143). This is set to prevent execution of the return operation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1501 that the current time is not during the wait period (S1501: No), the value stored in each bit of the operable type storage area 223r is read (S1502), and It is determined whether all the origin sensors of the corresponding accessory are in the H output state (S1503). If it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of at least one of the characters corresponding to the bit having the value of 1 is in the L state (S1503: No), the output corresponds to the origin sensor in the L state. An operation in the direction of the origin (origin return operation) is set for the accessory to be performed (S1504). Then, in order to indicate that the home position return operation is being performed, the home position return flag 223i is set to ON (S1505), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1503, when it is determined that all the outputs of the origin sensor of the accessory corresponding to the bit whose value in the operable type storage area 223r is 1 are H (S1503: Yes), the origin is returned. Since it is not necessary to execute the operation, the start of the initial operation is set (S1506), and the initial operation flag 223j is set to ON to indicate that the initial operation is being executed (S1507). The process ends.

  By executing the origin return processing (S1314), each accessory can be returned to the origin position, so that the subsequent initial operation can be started from the origin position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, a description will be given of a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing in S1601 was executed (S1601). If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1614 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1613. In the processing of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. The processing in S1602 to S1613 is mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S1614 and the variable display setting processing in S1615 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1614 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S1615 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1603 to S1616 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1602). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1604). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1605 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1605, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. Also, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1607 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1609, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the effect unit 331 based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is set. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1609 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the rendering unit 331.

  When the process of S1610 is completed, a swing effect process for performing control during the swing effect in which the ball B performs a swing operation above the holding piece 677 is executed (S1611). Next, a sphere that has passed through the second passage forming member 422 (discharged from the pachinko machine 10) is detected, and a discharge detection process for performing corresponding control is performed (S1612). Next, an effect setting process for controlling various effects performed during the execution of the "representative mode suggestion effect" is executed (S1613), and the process proceeds to S1614. The details of the swing effect process (S1611), the discharge detection process (S1612), and the effect setting process (S1613) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the process of S1614, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1614). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1615). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the rendering unit 331 to perform a variation effect (variation display). As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. Then, after the variable display setting process (S1615) ends, an accessory operation setting process for setting the operation of each accessory is executed (S1616). The details of the accessory operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S1616 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1617). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the process of S1617, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1617: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off process flag are set to ON (S1619), and the power is turned off. A disconnection process is performed (S1620). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1621), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1617 (S1617: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1618), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1618: No), the process returns to S1601, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1618: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, so that the display contents on the rendering unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81 do not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the swing effect process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the swing effect processing (S1611). This swing effect process (S1611) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, various controls during execution of the swing effect are performed. Is

  In the swing effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the swing effect flag 223ev provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is on (S1701). If the swing effect flag 223ev is off (S1701: No) ), Since the swing effect is not being executed, the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1701, when it is determined that the swing effect flag 223ev is on (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the swing non-detection flag 223v is on (S1702). If the detection flag 223v is on (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the output of the ball detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103) is in the H state (S1703). That is, it is determined whether or not the ball B has passed the near side of the ball detection sensor 679 provided at the upper central portion of the holding piece 677.

  In the process of S1703, when it is determined that the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is not in the H state (that is, the output is in the L state) (S1703: No), the ball passes the front side of the ball detection sensor 679. This means that this processing has not been performed, so this processing is ended as it is, and the processing returns to the main processing. On the other hand, in the processing of S1703, when it is determined that the output of the ball detection sensor is in the H state (S1703: Yes), the ball B is first thrown by the ball detection sensor 679 after the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650. Therefore, the swing non-detection flag 223v is turned off, the swing timer 223w is reset (S1704), and the process ends. Thereby, every time the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679, the period of the swing operation can be determined from the measured value of the swing timer 223w.

  In the processing of S1702, when it is determined that the swing non-detection flag 223v is off (S1702: No), it is next determined whether the ball fallable flag 223fv is on (S1705). In the processing of S1705, when it is determined that the ball dropping flag 223fv is on (S1705: Yes), the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation performed by the ball B is sufficiently small, and the condition for dropping the ball B is set. Is established, a fall control process (S1706) for determining the arrangement of the rotating member 640 and controlling the fall of the ball B is executed, and the present process ends. The details of the drop control process (S1706) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1705, when it is determined that the ball fallable flag 223fv is off (S1705: No), 1 is added to the value of the swing timer 223w (S1707), and then the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is output. Is in the H state (S1708). In the process of S1708, when it is determined that the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is not H (that is, the output is in the state of L) (S1708: No), the ball B has not returned to the upper center of the holding piece 677. This indicates that the cycle cannot be determined, and thus this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1708 that the output of the ball detection sensor is in the H state (S1708: Yes), it is next determined whether the value of the swing timer 223w is greater than 500 (S1709). ). In the process of S1709, if the value of the swing timer 223w is 500 or less (S1709: No), the period from the time when the ball B was detected to pass by the ball detection sensor 679 last time to the time when the passage is detected again this time is determined. It means less than 500 milliseconds. In other words, it means that the swing cycle has become shorter than 1 second (500 milliseconds × 2) or less, so that the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to ON (S1711), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1709, if the value of the swing timer 223w is larger than 500 (S1709: Yes), it means that the period of the swing operation performed by the ball B is relatively long (the amplitude of the swing operation is large). However, if the ball B is dropped in this state, the ball B may have an unnatural appearance. Therefore, the value of the swing timer 223w is reset without satisfying the condition for dropping the ball B (keeping the ball fallable flag 223fv off). (S1710), and then return to the main process.

  Next, the drop control process (S1706) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the drop control process (S1706). This drop control process (S1706) is executed in the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the drop control process (S1706), first, it is determined whether or not the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all L (S1801). When it is determined that the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all L (S1801: Yes), the arrangement of each of the detection target 641c and each of the detection sensors A to F is shifted, and the rotating member Since the arrangement of 640 cannot be specified, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1801, when it is determined that at least one output of the detection sensors A to F is not L (that is, at least one output is H) (S1801: No), the detection sensors A to F Based on the output of F and the rotation position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121), the pocket located at the drop position (immediately below the holding piece 677) is specified (S1802). Next, from the hit position storage area 223k (see FIG. 122), the type of the pocket located at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket). ) Is specified (S1803). Then, the determined pocket type is compared with the success / failure of the current roulette chance (whether or not the shift to the “rensou mode” has been determined) (S1804), and it is determined whether the comparison results match (S1804). S1805).

  In the process of S1805, if the comparison results do not match (S1805: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if the comparison results match (S1805: Yes), the ball B is set to fall after 100 steps (that is, the holding piece 677 is driven to the immersion position) and set. (S1806), the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to off (S1807), and the process ends. Here, 100 steps are the number of steps in which the holding piece 677 is driven to the immersion position 0.2 seconds before reaching the next pocket. This 0.2 second is set to be substantially the same as the falling time of the ball B dropped from the holding piece 677. Thereby, the ball B can be exactly entered into the next pocket at the timing when the next pocket is arranged at the drop position.

  As described above, in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the present control example, the determination of the type of the pocket to be placed next at the drop position and the drop control of the ball B based on the determination result are performed when the pocket is moved to the drop position. It is configured to execute before being placed in That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the immersion position at a timing when the ball B can be sufficiently dropped into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the drop position). And can be driven (immersed). Therefore, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the pocket of the target type. Therefore, although the ball B does not shift to the “rensou mode”, the ball B falls into the hit pocket, and conversely, despite the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined, The ball B can be prevented (suppressed) from falling off and falling into the pocket.

  In the present control example, when it is determined that the holding piece 677 is dropped into the next pocket, the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position after the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 for 100 steps regardless of the arrangement of the ball B. But it is not limited to this. For example, the holding piece 677 may be immersed to the immersion position at a timing at which the ball B reaches the center portion of the holding piece 677 in the swinging operation. More specifically, for example, even after the pocket to be dropped is specified, the period (amplitude) of the rocking operation is determined each time the ball B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the determination is performed. The period of the swing operation is configured to be stored (updated) in the RAM 223. Then, when the value reaches 100 steps, the value of the swing timer 223w (the elapsed time since the passage of the ball B was detected by the previous ball detection sensor 679) is referred to, for example, the latest swing stored in the RAM 223. If it is determined that the value is close to the cycle of the moving operation (for example, a value equal to or more than 90% of the cycle of the latest swinging operation), the control may be performed so that the holding piece 677 is immersed as it is. On the other hand, if the value is less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 90% of the period of the latest rocking operation) with respect to the period of the latest rocking operation, the holding piece 677 is immersed after waiting for the predetermined ratio. It may be controlled so as to be immersed in the position. With such a configuration, when the ball B is rolling toward the outside direction (left end or right end direction) of the holding piece 677, or is disposed near the end (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677. In this case, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the holding piece 677 from entering the immersion position. That is, when the holding piece 677 is immersed, the ball B can be reliably dropped in the direction of the drop position without advancing in another direction. Therefore, the time from when the holding piece 677 is immersed to the immersion position to when the ball B starts to fall can be further shortened, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target pocket.

  In this control example, when it is determined that the ball B can be dropped into the pocket located at the drop position next to the pocket currently located at the drop position, the rotation operation for 100 steps is executed. After that, the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position, but is not limited to this. A range in which the ball B can be reliably dropped into the pocket at the drop position without falling into the pocket at the drop position and the pocket two adjacent to the drop position (for example, after 100 to 120 steps) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is randomly dropped every time (within the range). With this configuration, it is possible to vary the timing at which the ball B falls, so that the ball B has a more natural appearance than the case where the ball B is dropped at the same timing every time (the ball B acts only by gravity). The ball B can be dropped as if the ball B were falling.

  Next, the discharge detection processing (S1612) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 148. This discharge detection processing (S1612) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and has passed through the second passage forming member 422 (the pachinko machine) as described above. This is a process for detecting a ball (discharged from 10) and performing a corresponding control.

  In the discharge detection process (see FIG. 148), first, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected in the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating / lowering unit 400 (S1901). If no ball has been detected (S1901: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1901 that a ball has been detected to enter the second passage forming member 422 (S1901: Yes), the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a passes through the first passage forming member 520. Since it means that it has reached the second passage forming member 422 normally, first, 1 is added to the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S1902).

  When the processing in S1902 ends, it is then determined whether or not a discharge standby flag (not shown) is on. The discharge standby flag is a flag indicating whether or not a period (discharge standby period) is set after all rounds of the jackpot have been completed in order to discharge all the winning balls to the first variable winning device 82a. is there. In the processing of S1903, when it is determined that the discharge standby flag is off (S1903: No), it means that it is not the discharge standby period, and that it is during the jackpot round period. Is set (S1904), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1903 that the discharge standby flag is ON (S1903: Yes), the value of the prize counter 223gv is read (S1905), and the read value of the prize counter 223gv is used as the discharge counter. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of 223hv (S1906). In the processing of S1906, when the read value of the winning counter 223gv does not match the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S1906: No), this processing is ended as it is to continue the discharge waiting period.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1906 that the read value of the prize counter 223gv matches the discharge counter 223hv (S1906: Yes), all the spheres that have won the first variable prize device 82a are normally replaced with the second prize. It means that it has been discharged from the passage forming member 422. Therefore, a process for releasing the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is executed. Specifically, the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the specific ending table 222b6 is set to “01H” (S1907), and an operation command for notifying the operation content according to the value of the operation pointer 223g is set. (S1908). Then, the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv are reset to 0 (S1909), and this processing ends.

  By executing this discharge detection processing, after all the balls that have entered the first variable winning device 82a are discharged via the second passage forming member 422, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming The connection (connection) with the member 422 can be released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited.

  Next, the effect setting process (S1613) in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This effect setting process (S1613) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 145), and as described above, a process for controlling various effects performed during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestive effect”. It is.

  In the effect setting process (see FIG. 149), first, it is determined whether or not the increasing effect flag 223cv is on (S2001). If the increasing effect flag 223cv is on (S2001: Yes), 1 is set to the effect timer 223bv. Is added (S2002), and it is determined whether or not the value of the effect timer 223bv after the addition is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (lucky number increase effect) (S2003).

  In the processing of S2003, if it is determined that the effect timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: Yes), a roulette chance effect is set (S2004), and the increase effect flag 223cv is turned off. At the same time, the roulette flag 223dv is set to ON (S2005), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is not the timer value indicating the end of the increased effect (S2003: No), the processes of S2004 and S2005 are skipped, and the present process is skipped. finish.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the increasing effect flag 223cv is not on (S2001: No), it is next determined whether or not the roulette flag 223dv is on (S2006) and determined to be off. If it has been performed (S2006: No), it means that the “rensou-mode suggestive effect” is not being executed, and thus this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2006 that the roulette flag 223dv is on (S2006: Yes), it is determined that the roulette chance effect is currently being executed (see FIGS. 95 (a) and (b)). Next, 1 is added to the staging timer 223bv (S2007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the staging timer 223bv after the addition is a timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008). ).

  In the processing of S2008, when it is determined that the staging timer 223bv is not the timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008: No), the process ends as it is in order to continue the roulette chance effect. On the other hand, in the processing of S2008, when it is determined that the value of the staging timer 223bv is the timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008: Yes), the roulette chance effect is ended and the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. First, the roulette flag 223dv and the swing effect flag 223ev are set to off (S2009).

  When the processing in S2009 ends, it is next determined whether or not the shift to the “rensou mode” has been notified (the ball B has hit and dropped into the pocket) in the present roulette chance effect (S2010). When the transition to the “rensou mode” (fall into the hit pocket) is notified (S2010: Yes), the display time of the ending image is displayed so that the ending image is continuously displayed until the ongoing big hit variation ends. Is set (S2011), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2010, if it is determined that the transition to the “rensou mode” has not been notified in the current roulette chance effect (S2010), then, in the current roulette chance effect, a disconnection is notified (disconnection). It is determined whether the ball B has been dropped into the pocket) (S2012), and if it is determined that the ball B has not been notified (the ball B has not been dropped into the pocket) (S2010: No), a roulette chance effect is produced. This means that the ball B has not been dropped (not notified of the result of the roulette chance effect) despite the end timing of, and a malfunction such as a malfunction of the holding piece 677 has occurred. Could be. Therefore, in this case, the display of the error is set by setting the display error command (S2013), and the process ends. By executing the error display by the display error command, the clerk of the hall can easily recognize that the malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to promptly take appropriate measures such as repair.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2012 that the ball has been notified (the ball B has been dropped into the missing pocket) (S2012: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being fluctuated and displayed. It is determined (S2014), and if it is not fluctuating (S2014: No), the display of the ending image is set to 5 seconds (S2015), and this processing ends. In addition, at the end timing of the roulette chance effect (85 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestion effect”), the fluctuation stop state is set in the “preparation mode” by the lottery of the special symbols for the number of time savings. This is a case where the fluctuation stop is performed before the execution is performed. Therefore, when the probability change jackpot is reached within the remaining number of time savings, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” after the termination of the probability change jackpot. In this case, a resurrection roulette chance effect (see FIG. 115 (b)) is executed, and control is performed so that the ball B falls into the hit pocket.

  In the processing of S2014, if it is determined that the special symbol is currently being displayed for fluctuation (S2014: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation type is a deviation fluctuation (S2016), and if the deviation fluctuation is being executed. (S2016: Yes), as the display time of the ending image, the remaining time until the end of the running deviation fluctuation is set (S2018), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2016 that the fluctuation is not a deviation fluctuation (that is, a jackpot fluctuation is being executed) (S2016: No), a resurrection roulette chance effect (see FIG. 115B) is set (S2017). Then, the present process ends. By executing this effect setting process (see FIG. 149), it is possible to execute an appropriate effect in the “renjo mode suggested effect”.

  Next, the command determination process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1614). This command determination processing (S1614) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  In this command determination processing, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is read from main controller 110 by main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2101). In the process of S2101, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2101: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2102), and the process returns to the main process. The details of this variation pattern command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2101: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2103). When the stop type command is received (S2103: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2104), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2105). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2103: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2106). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2106: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 is determined. The value (the number of times N of the fluctuation display in the special symbol is suspended) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2107). In the process of S2107, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S2107, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Every time is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S2107 to the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning is detected. During the lottery of the special symbol and the special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S2107 is performed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S2106, when it is determined that the command of the number of reserved balls has not been received (S2106: No), it is next determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S2108). In the process of S2108, if a winning information command has been received (S2108: Yes), a winning information command process for setting an effect according to the winning information is executed (S2109), and this process ends. The details of the winning information command processing (S2109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2108 that the winning information command has not been received (S2108: No), then, the command related to the jackpot (ie, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the large open mouth winning command, the ending command) ) Is determined (S2110). If it is determined in the process of S2110 that a command related to the jackpot has been received (S2110: Yes), a hit-related command process for executing a process corresponding to various commands related to the jackpot is executed (S2111), and this process is performed. To end. The details of the hit-related command processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2110, if a command related to the jackpot has not been received (S2110: No), it is then determined whether an execution command has been received from any of the motor drivers (S2112). In the process of S2112, if the execution command is received (S2112: Yes), the progress of the operation of the accessory driven by the motor driver is determined in accordance with the execution command output from the various motor drivers, and the progress is determined. (S2113), and terminates the present process. The execution command processing (S2113) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2112, if an execution command has not been received (S2112: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S2114), and if a status command has been received (S2114: Yes), The game state notified by the state command is determined, state command processing for performing corresponding control is executed (S2115), and this processing ends. Details of this status command processing (S2115) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  On the other hand, if the status command has not been received in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), then it is determined whether a special figure 2 winning command has been received (S2116). In the processing of S2116, if the special figure 2 prize command is received (S2116: Yes), the special figure 2 prize command processing for setting an effect corresponding to the ball entering the second entrance 640a is performed. The process is executed (S2117), and this process ends. The details of the special figure 2 winning command processing (S2117) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2116, when it is determined that the special figure 2 winning command has not been received (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is performed. Is executed (S2118), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variation pattern command processing (S2102) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S2102). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S2102) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 150), and is a processing for specifying the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) from the fluctuation pattern command and setting the operation of the accessory. is there.

  In the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 151), first, the variation start flag 223c is set to ON (S2201), and a variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2202). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory operation scenario (S2203), and if there is no accessory operation scenario (S2203: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2203 that there is an accessory operation scenario (S2203: Yes), the operation scenario of the corresponding accessory is set (S2204), and then this process ends.

  Next, the details of the winning information command processing (S2109) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This prize information command processing (S2109) is processing executed when a prize information command is received in the command determination processing (see FIG. 150), and as described above, processing for setting an effect according to the prize information It is.

  When the prize information command processing (see FIG. 152) is started, first, the winning / non-prize, the stop type, and the variation pattern are extracted from the received prize information command, and are extracted as prize information in the prize information storage area 223a of the RAM 233. It is stored (S2301). Next, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, each processing of S2302 to S2313 for setting an additional effect (see FIG. 96 (a)) is executed. As described above, this additional production is executed when the winning in the first entrance 64 is suspended in the “normal mode”, and the “preparation mode” and the “rensou mode” are set in the reserved ball. This is an effect for causing the player to expect to shift.

  The processing of S2302 to S2313 for setting an additional effect will be described more specifically. First, in the process of S2302, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state flag 223o is on (S2302). This is not a "normal mode"), and no additional effect is executed regardless of whether the winning information is correct or not. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, when it is determined that the time reduction state flag 223o is off (S2302: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S2303).

  In the process of S2303, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S2303: Yes), it means that the current mode is the “preparation mode” (not the “normal mode”), and the winning information is determined. Irrespective of the above, the additional effect is not executed, and thus this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2303 that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is 0 (S2303: No), then, the value of the additional counter 223av (the number of additional items) is 3, which is the upper limit value. This is determined (S2304), and if it is the upper limit value, no additional effect is set, and the present process is terminated as it is. In the present control example, the upper limit of the number of additional pieces is set to three uniformly, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the lottery result advantageous to the player is suspended, the upper limit number may be increased. Thereby, the number of executions of the additional effect is likely to increase as the lottery result advantageous to the player is suspended, so that the more the additional effect is performed, the higher the expectation of the player.

  In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the value of the additional counter 223av is less than the upper limit value (less than 3) (S2304: No), then, each of the holdings currently held from the respective areas of the winning information storage area 223a. The winning information corresponding to the ball is read (S2305), and the read winning information includes any of the probability variable jackpots B, C, E, F and the normal jackpot A (reserved). It is determined whether or not it is (S2306). That is, it is determined whether the jackpot type for shifting to the “preparation mode” is suspended.

  In the process of S2306, if it is determined that the jackpot that shifts to the “preparation mode” is not held (S2306: No), the jackpot falls outside the hold and the jackpot type to which the “preparation mode” is not added (“after the jackpot” This is a case where only the “normal mode”) is included, so that a lottery result that is disadvantageous for the player compared to other cases is held. Therefore, in this case, it is determined whether or not the additional effect is to be executed based on the additional low probability table in which the additional effect is determined at the lowest rate (ie, 5%) of the additional effect determination table 222d ( (S2310), the process proceeds to S2311.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2306, when it is determined that the jackpot type shifting to the “preparation mode” is suspended (S2306: Yes), the setting is performed after the end of the jackpot type shifting to the “preparation mode”. It is determined whether or not the probable change jackpot is suspended in the “preparation mode” (ordinary symbol time-saving state) (S2307). If it is determined that the probable change jackpot is suspended in the “prepare mode” (S2307: Yes), which means that the transition to the most advantageous “rensou mode” has been determined, and therefore, in the additional discrimination table 222d, the proportion of the additional effect determined by the additional effect is the lowest (that is, 25%). Based on the low probability table, it is determined whether or not to execute an additional effect (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2311.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2307, when the probability change jackpot in the “preparation mode” (the time saving state of the ordinary symbol) is not suspended (S2307), only the “preparation mode” which is relatively advantageous for the player is provided. Since it is determined, the additional effect is executed based on the additional-probability table determined by the rate at which the additional effect is determined in the additional-addition determination table 222d, which is intermediate between the low-probability table and the high-probability table (that is, 10%). It is determined whether or not to perform (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2311.

  In the process of S2311 executed after any of S2308 to S2310 is executed, it is determined whether the execution of the additional effect has been determined in the processes of S2308 to S2310 (S2311), and the execution of the additional effect has been determined. If it is (S2311: Yes), 1 is added to the additional counter 223av (S2312), the execution of the additional effect is set (S2313), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2311, when it is determined that the execution of the additional effect has not been determined (S2311: No), the processes of S2312 and S2313 are skipped, and the present process ends as it is.

  By the winning information command processing (see FIG. 152), it is possible to vary the rate at which the additional effect is determined according to the content of the reserved ball. Thus, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the additional effect. For example, an additional effect is usually performed when the jackpot type in which the “preparation mode” is set after the jackpot is suspended is increased, so that it is normal that the extra jackpot is performed (when the additional effect is not executed). It is possible to have the player play the game with higher expectation. If the jackpot hits, the expectation of shifting to the “preparation mode” increases.

  In addition, when the jackpot is hit as expected by the player, the player can be made aware that the degree of expectation to shift to the “prepare mode” is higher than usual (when the additional effect is not executed). In this way, it is possible to more strongly expect that the lucky number is displayed on the staging unit 422a during the jackpot game. Furthermore, at the time of execution of the additional production, the case where the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “rensou mode” is suspended is compared with the case where the transition to the “rensou mode” is not determined. Since the execution ratio of the additional effect is configured to be high, when the "prepare mode" is notified as expected by the player, if the degree of expectation to shift to the "rensou mode" is higher than usual, the player Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a stronger sense of expectation for shifting to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, by executing the additional effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in a stepwise manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, the hit-related command processing (S2111) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 153. The hit-related command process (S2111) is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 150), and is a process for performing a corresponding control when a command related to the big hit is received, as described above. is there.

  When the hit-related command processing (see FIG. 153) is started, it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2401). If an opening command has been received (S2401: Yes), It is determined whether it is an opening indicating any one of .about.D and the normal jackpot A (S2402). That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit in which the opening pattern A is set for the first variable winning device 82a.

  In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the command is an opening command for any of the probable jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A (S2402: Yes), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected. In order to drive to the connection position, “01H” is set to the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) (S2403). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g is read from the specific opening table 222b5, and an operation command for setting the read operation content in the motor driver is set (S2404). The process moves to S2405. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the opening command corresponding to the jackpot different from any of the probable jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A has been received (S2402: No), the first passage forming member 520 and the second Since it is not necessary to connect the passage forming member 422, the processes of S2403 and S2404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2405.

  In the processing of S2405, an opening command for display is set in order to start a jackpot opening effect (S2405), and this processing is ended to return to the command determination processing (see FIG. 150). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the display control of the opening effect so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the jackpot opening effect.

  Also, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the opening command is not included in the command received from main controller 110 (S2401: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received. (S2406) If the round number command has been received (S2406: Yes), first, the number of jackpot rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S2407). Next, it is determined whether the specified number of rounds is the first round (S2408). If it is the first round (S2408: Yes), the operation pointer corresponding to the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) It is determined whether the value of 223g is “00H” (S2409). That is, it is determined whether the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are operating. Then, when it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223g is a value other than “00H” (S2409: No), the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 despite the end of the opening period, This means that the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is in operation. Since the opening period is set to a time long enough to dispose each of the above-mentioned characters in the connection position, the opening period is specified in the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) at the start of one round. The fact that the performed operation has not been completed means that the drive motor may have stopped or run idle due to some abnormality, or an abnormality may have occurred in the communication between the motor driver and the drive motor. Therefore, in this case, a display error command is set (S2410) in order to display an error image notifying the error, and the process ends.

  By displaying the error image by the error command, the clerk of the hall can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 in which the abnormality has occurred to take appropriate measures such as repair.

  In the processing of S2408, when it is determined that the number of rounds extracted from the round number command is not the first round (that is, the second round) (S2408: No), and in the processing of S2409, the specific opening table 222b5 (FIG. 119) If it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to (c) is “00H” (S2409: Yes), a display round number command for displaying the number of rounds extracted in the processing of S2408 is issued. This is set (S2411), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2406 that the round number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S2406: No), it is then determined whether or not a large open mouth winning command has been received (S2412). If the large open mouth winning command has been received (S2412: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 223gv (S2413), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2412, when it is determined that the large opening winning command has not been received (S2412: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S2414). (S2414: Yes), it is determined whether the ending is one of the probable jackpots B to D or the normal jackpot A (S2415). That is, it is determined whether the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are the jackpot type ending driven to the connection position. In the process of S2415, if it is determined that the ending is one of the probable jackpots B to D or the normal jackpot A (S2415: Yes), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 A connection release determination process for releasing the connection (connection) is performed (S2416), and the process proceeds to S2417. Details of the connection release determination processing (S2416) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2415, if it is determined that the ending is not one of the probable jackpots B to D or the normal jackpot A (S2415: No), the process of S2416 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2417. I do. In the processing of S2417, the display ending command is set (S2417), and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the above-described connection release determination processing (S2416) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This connection release determination processing (S2416) is processing for releasing the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422.

  In this connection release processing (see FIG. 154), first, the values of the winning counter 223gv and the discharge counter 223hv are read (S2501), and it is determined whether or not these counter values match (S2502). In the process of S2502, if it is determined that the read counter values match (S2502: Yes), all the balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a have reached the second passage forming member 422 (the first passage). (There is no ball passing through the forming member 520), so that the processes of S2503 to S2505 for releasing the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are executed. .

  Specifically, “01H” is set as the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the specific ending table 222b6 (S2503), and the operation content corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g is read from the specific ending table 222b6. Then, an operation command for notifying the motor driver of the read operation content is set (S2504). Then, both the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharge counter 223hv are reset to 0 (S2505), and this processing ends. As described above, after determining that the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a has reached the second passage forming member 422, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 ( With the configuration for releasing the connection, it is possible to prevent the connection from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the ball is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  On the other hand, if the value of the prize counter 223gv does not match the value of the discharge counter 223hv in the process of S2502 (S2502: No), it is determined whether the value of the prize counter 223gv is larger than the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S2506). If the value of the winning counter 223gv is larger (S2506: Yes), it means that a part of the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a has not reached the second passage forming member 422. Then, in order to wait until the unreached ball reaches the second passage forming member 422, the discharge standby flag is set to ON (S2507), and this processing is ended. By setting the discharge standby flag to ON, it is determined that the value of the prize counter 223gv matches the value of the discharge counter 223hv every time the above-described discharge detection processing (see FIG. 148) is executed. When they match, the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released.

  In the process of S2506, when it is determined that the value of the winning counter 223gv is equal to or less than the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S2506: No), balls equal to or more than the number of winnings in the first variable winning device 82a are passed through the second passage. Since it means that it is discharged through the forming member 422, there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred. Therefore, in this case, a display error command is set in order to display an error image notifying the error (S2508), and the process ends. By displaying the error image by the error command, the clerk of the hall can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 in which the abnormality has occurred to take appropriate measures such as repair.

  Next, the details of the execution command processing (S2113) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This execution command processing (S2113) is one processing in the command determination processing (see FIG. 150), and is a processing for executing the control according to the progress of the operation set for each character as described above. .

  When the execution command processing (see FIG. 155) is started, first, 1 is added to the value of the step counter 223e of the accessory corresponding to the received execution command (S2601). Next, it is determined whether the origin return flag 223i is on (S2602). If it is on (S2603: Yes), it means that the origin return operation is being performed. It is determined whether or not it exists (S2603). That is, it is determined whether or not all the accessories have returned to the origin position by the origin return operation. In the process of S2603, if it is determined that there is an origin sensor whose output is in the state of L (S2603: Yes), it means that the origin return operation of the accessory corresponding to the origin sensor is not completed. In order to execute the home position return operation, the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2603, when it is determined that the outputs of all the origin sensors are in the H state (all the accessories have returned to the origin positions) (S2603: No), the origin return operation is completed. Then, the start of the initial operation is set (S2604). This initial operation is executed to determine whether each of the accessories is in a normally operable state by setting a predetermined operation for each of the accessories. As described above, the operation content in this initial operation is defined in the initial operation table 222b7. That is, in the process of S2604, the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the initial operation table 222b7 is set to “01H”, and the operation content corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g is read from the initial operation table 222b7 to execute the operation. Set the command. When the process of S2604 ends, the in-return-to-origin flag 223i is set to off, and the initial operation flag 223j is set to on (S2605), and the process ends.

  In the process of S2602, if it is determined that the origin return flag 223i is off (S2602: No), then it is determined whether the initial operation flag 223j is on (S2606). That is, it is determined whether or not the initial operation is being performed. If it is determined that the initial operation flag 223j is ON (S2606: Yes), an initial operation process for executing control according to the progress of the initial operation is performed. Is executed (S2607), and this processing ends. Details of this initial operation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2606, if it is determined that the initial operation flag 223j is off (S2606: No), then, it is determined whether the execution command received this time is an execution command output from the motor driver of the rotation unit 600. Is determined (S2608). That is, it is determined whether the command is an execution command for notifying that the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 for one step has been performed. If it is determined in step S2608 that the command is an execution command output from the motor driver of the rotating unit 600 (S2608: Yes), a rotation setting process for controlling the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 (and the rear LED 625) is performed. (S2609), a lighting setting process for controlling the lighting state of each of the lighting regions A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 is performed (S2610), and this process ends. Details of the rotation setting process (S2609) and the lighting setting process (S2610) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, respectively.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2608, if it is determined that the execution command received this time is not a command corresponding to the rotating unit 600 (S2608: No), then, based on the execution command received this time, the role corresponding to the execution command is determined. It is determined whether the number of operation steps set for the object has been reached (S2611). For example, when an execution command corresponding to the motor driver of the upper elevating unit 300 is received, the number of operation steps is determined based on the set operation scenario (upper elevating unit table 222b1) and the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the operation scenario. Is read. If the value of the step counter 223e is equal to or more than the operation step specified in the operation scenario, it is determined that the set number of steps has been reached.

  In the process of S2611, if it is determined that the set number of steps has been reached (S2611: Yes), then 1 is added to the action pointer 223g of the accessory (operation scenario) corresponding to the execution command received this time (S2612). ), The operation content corresponding to the pointer value after the addition is read from the operation scenario table 222b (S2613). Then, an operation command for instructing the corresponding motor driver of the read operation content is set (S2614), and the process ends.

  Next, the details of the initial operation process (S2606) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This initial operation process (S2606) is one of the execution command processes (see FIG. 155), and is a process for executing control according to the progress of the initial operation as described above.

  When the initial operation processing (see FIG. 156) is started, first, the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the operation scenario of the initial operation is read (S2701), and it is determined whether the operation end condition corresponding to the pointer value is satisfied. (S2702). For example, if the current value of the operation pointer 223g is “02H”, it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied when the upper lifting unit 300 reaches the lowering position and the left swing unit 500 reaches the connecting position. (See FIG. 120).

  If it is determined in the process of S2702 that the currently set operation end condition is not satisfied (S2702: No), then the initial operation is performed based on the current value of the operation pointer 223g and the value of the step counter 223e. It is determined whether the number of abnormality determination steps specified in the table 222b7 (see FIG. 120) has been reached (S2703). In the process of S2703, if it is determined that the number of abnormality determination steps has not been reached (S2703: No), an operation for one additional step is set (S2704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of steps has reached the abnormality determination step (S2703: Yes), it is determined that the end condition is not satisfied despite the operation having a sufficient number of steps set to satisfy the end condition. means. For this reason, there is a possibility that the drive motor is not operating normally or an error occurs in communication between the motor driver and the drive motor. Therefore, in this case, an error display is set by setting a display error command (S2705), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2702 that the currently set operation end condition is satisfied (S2702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the initial operation (S2706). The value of each bit of the operable type storage area 223r is read (S2707). Then, it is determined whether the data of the initial operation table 222b7 corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g after the addition is END data (whether the initial operation is completed) (S2708), and the END data is read (the initial operation is completed). In this case (S2708: Yes), the in-initial-operation flag 223j is set to off, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2708 that the initial operation has not been completed (S2708: No), it is next determined whether the initial operation of the accessory corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g can be executed. (S2710). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the initial operation of the accessory corresponding to the bit whose value is set to 1 in the operable type storage area 223r. In the process of S2710, when it is determined that the initial action of the accessory corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223g can be executed (S2710: Yes), the value of the action pointer 223g after 1 is added by the process of S2706. Is read from the initial operation table 222b7 (S2711), an operation command corresponding to the read operation content is set (S2712), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2710 that the initial operation of the accessory corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g is not executable (the corresponding bit of the operable type storage area 223r is 0) (S2710: No) ), The process proceeds to S2706, and the processes of S2706 to S2710 are repeated until the value of the action pointer 223g corresponding to the accessory that can execute the initial action is obtained.

  Next, the details of the rotation setting process (S2609) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This rotation setting process (S2609) is one of the execution command processes (see FIG. 155), and is executed to control the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 (and the rear LED 625) as described above.

  When the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are all L (S2801). If the outputs of A to F are in the L state (S2801: Yes), the arrangement of the rotating member 640 cannot be specified (all the non-detecting portions 641c are arranged outside the detection range of the rotational position detection sensor 684). ), And this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2801, if it is determined that any of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is in the H state (S2801: No), then the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F The arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket at the drop position) that matches the combination of the current output is specified by comparing the rotation position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121) (S2802). Then, the rotational position storage area 223u is updated from the specified arrangement (S2803).

  When the processing of S2803 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the ball drop possibility flag 223fv is on (S2804). If it is off (S2804: No), it means that the condition for dropping the ball B is not satisfied. Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2804, when it is determined that the ball fallable flag 223fv is on (S2804: Yes), the ball fallable flag 223fv is determined based on the arrangement stored in the rotational position storage area 223u and the storage contents of the hit position storage area 223k. Then, the type of the five pockets (whether it is a hit pocket or a lost pocket) is read from the pocket at the drop position (S2805). Then, the type of the read five pockets is compared with the type of the pocket in which the ball B is dropped in the present roulette chance effect (S2806).

  When the processing in S2806 is completed, it is next determined whether or not all the comparison results in the processing in S2806 are inconsistent (S2807). If all of the results are inconsistent (S2807: Yes), the ball B is dropped. The rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is set to a high speed (for example, 300 pps) because the pocket that can be formed is not disposed at the drop position while rotating at least five pockets by the rotation operation (S2808). As a result, the time required for the target pocket type to be placed at the drop position can be shortened. It is possible to prevent the swing operation from continuing. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2807, it means that the pocket of the target type is arranged at the drop position before passing through five pockets by the rotation operation. Therefore, in this case, since the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance without changing the rotation speed, the process of S2808 is skipped, and the present process ends as it is.

  Next, the details of the lighting setting process (S2610) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 158. This lighting setting process (S2610) is one of the execution command processes (see FIG. 155), and is a process for controlling the lighting state of each of the lighting regions A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 as described above.

  When the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is executed, first, it is determined whether the first-time setting completed flag 223t is on (whether the lighting state of the lighting areas A1 to A18 has been set) (S2901). If it is off (S2901: No), then it is determined whether the output of the origin sensor (not shown) of the rear LED 625 is on (H) (S2902). That is, it is determined whether or not the LED bar 625a has an arrangement that matches the correction section RA (see FIG. 100A) (S2902). In the process of S2902, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor is off (L) (S2902: No), this timing is not the timing of setting the lighting state, and thus the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2902 that the output of the origin sensor is on (H) (S2902: Yes), a process for setting the lighting state for each of the lighting regions A1 to A18 is performed. . More specifically, first, the value of the step counter 223e corresponding to the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is reset (S2903), and the rotation position determination table 222c is read (S2903). Next, the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified based on the read rotation position determination table 222c and the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 (S2905).

  When the processing of S2905 ends, next, the types of all the pockets arranged in the range from the pocket at the current drop position to the pocket 5 to the previous to the pocket 12 from the pocket are read from the hit position storage area 223k (S2906). ). That is, the type of the pocket arranged on the front side of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is specified. Then, the lighting position storage area 223m (see FIG. 123) is updated according to the type of each pocket read by the processing of S2906. As described above, H is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket, and the data is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area arranged on the back side of the missing pocket. Is stored as L. Based on the stored data (lighting data), the LEDs in the lighting area corresponding to the storage area in which H is stored are set to the lighting state with the lighting rate of 100% (that is, the lighting corresponding to the lighting rate of 100%). A control command is output), and the LED in the lighting area corresponding to the storage area in which L is stored is set to the off state with the lighting rate of 0%. When the process of S2907 ends, the value of the correction position counter 223s is initialized, the first-time setting completed flag 223t is set to ON (S2908), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2901 that the first-time setting completed flag 223t is on (S2901: Yes), the state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is switched according to the progress of the rotation of the rotating member 640 (correction). Is performed. Specifically, first, the value of the step counter 223e corresponding to the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 is set to 864 (that is, the number of steps corresponding to 1/3 of the rotation from the origin position) or 1728 (that is, 2/3 from the origin position). (S2909). In the process of S2909, when it is determined that the value of the step counter 223e is neither 864 nor 1728 (S2909: No), it means that the LED bars 625b and 625c are not in the state corresponding to the correction section RA. It is determined whether the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is ON (S2910).

  In the process of S2910, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is off (S2910: No), the LED bar 625a also does not match the correction section RA (all of the LED bars 625a to 625c are in the correction section). RA does not match). Therefore, in this case, the arrangement is such that the correction (switching) of the lighting state cannot be executed, and thus the present processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2910, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is ON (S2910: Yes), the step counter 223e of the rotation operation is reset to 0, and the process proceeds to S2912. If it is determined in step S2909 that the value of the step counter 223e is 864 or 1728 (S2909: Yes), the process skips steps S2910 and S2911, and shifts the process to step S2912.

  In the process of S2912, the value of the correction position counter 223s indicating the type of the LED bar for which the current lighting state is corrected (switched) is updated by 1 (S2912). Next, the rotation position determination table 222c is read (S2913), and based on the read rotation position determination table 222c and the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684, the current rotation member is determined. The arrangement of 640 is specified (S2914). Then, the type of each pocket arranged in the correction section RA (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket) is read from the hit position storage area 223k (S2915), and the lighting position is stored according to the read pocket type. The storage area corresponding to the LED bar indicated by the correction position counter 223s in the area 223m is updated (S2916), and the process ends.

  By executing the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158), the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is corrected every time the rear LED makes 1/3 turn (that is, in units of one LED bar). Can be. That is, every time the rear LED makes a 1/3 turn, the information of the storage area corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) is stored in each pocket of the rotating member 640 generated by the rotating operation, and the lighting area. Correction can be made according to the deviation of the correspondence with A1 to A18. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (appearance in which the hit pocket shines and the missing pocket becomes dark). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from erroneously recognizing the winning pocket and the missing pocket.

  Next, the details of the status command processing (S2115) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This status command process (S2115) is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 150), and is a process for executing various controls according to the status command received from the main control device 110.

  In this state command processing (see FIG. 159), first, the probable change state flag 223n, the time saving state flag 223o, the time saving state counter 223p, and the hit state storage area 223q are updated based on the received state command (S3001). . Next, it is determined whether or not the current status command is a command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002). If the command is not a command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002: No), the process ends as it is. . Note that whether or not the signal has been output at the end of the big hit is determined by, for example, the value stored in the hit state storage area 223q. Specifically, when a new status command is received in a state where “04H” indicating the ending period is stored in the winning status storage area 223q, the status command output at the end of the big hit is received. Is determined. This is because the state is not changed during the jackpot ending period.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the status command received this time is the command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002: Yes), the value of the time-saving status counter 223p updated based on the status command Is greater than 0 (S3003). That is, it is determined whether or not the shift to the “preparation mode” has been made one or seven times after the jackpot, and it has been determined that the shift to the “prepare mode” has not been made (the time-saving state counter 223p is 0). In this case (S3003: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S3003: Yes), a winning pocket allocation process (S3004) for determining the layout of the winning pocket is executed. Details of the hit pocket allocation processing (S3004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the winning pocket is set (determined) by the winning pocket allocation process (S3003), the start of the increase effect (see FIGS. 93A and 93B) is set (S3005), indicating that the increase effect is being performed. For this reason, the increase effect flag 223cv is set to ON (S3006). Then, by resetting the effect timer 223bv, the timing of the effect period from the start of the “rensou mode suggestive effect” is started (S3007), and the process ends.

  Next, the details of the winning pocket allocation process (S3004) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 160. The winning pocket allocation process (S3004) is a process for determining the layout of the winning pocket as described above.

  When the hit pocket allocation process (see FIG. 160) is started, first, five pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x are read (S3101), and the read pockets are set as hit pockets in the hit position storage area 22k. It is set (S3102). That is, H is stored in the storage area corresponding to the read pocket.

  When the processing of S3102 is completed, the value of the additional counter 223av is read out (S3103), and it is determined whether the read value of the additional counter 223av is larger than 0 (S3104). In the processing of S3104, when it is determined that the value of the additional counter 223av is 0 (S3104: No), the present processing is terminated as it is not necessary to increase the number of hit pockets.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3104, if it is determined that the read value of the additional counter 223av is larger than 0 (is 1 or more) (S3104: Yes), a hit pocket corresponding to the value of the additional counter 223av is additionally set (S3104: Yes). In addition, the processing of S3105 to S3110 is executed. Specifically, first, a winning pocket (hit position) is read from the hit position storage area 223k (S3105), and it is determined whether or not there is a place where five or more winning pockets (hit positions) are continuous. (S3106).

  In the process of S3106, when it is determined that there is a portion where the hit pockets are continuous 5 or more (S3106: Yes), one of the missing pockets is other than the one before and after the portion where the hit position is continuous 5 or more. One additional position is selected from the out-of-pocket pocket (S3108), and the process proceeds to S3109. The reason why the hit pocket is further added before and after the place where five or more pieces are continuous is that if the hits are made too continuous, it may be difficult to drop the ball B naturally. In other words, during the execution of the roulette chance effect for notifying of the detachment, when it is detected that the period of the swinging motion of the ball B is shortened at the timing when the hit pocket reaches a continuous place, the hit pocket continues. After passing the spot, the ball B must be dropped. Accordingly, the state in which the period of the swinging operation is short (the swinging operation is weakened) continues for a long time, and the player may feel uncomfortable with the ball B not falling easily. Thus, in the present control example, a limit is set on the number of consecutive hit positions, and a state in which the ball B cannot be dropped is prevented from continuing for a long time.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3106, if it is determined that there is no place where five or more consecutive hit pockets exist (S3106: No), one additional position is selected from all the missing pockets (S3107). ) And the process moves to S3109. In the processing of S3109 executed after the processing of S3107 or S3108, the hit position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected additional position becomes the hit position (S3109), and the value of the additional counter 223av is decremented by one (S3110). Then, the process returns to S3104. Then, thereafter, the processes of S3104 to S3110 are repeatedly executed until the value of the additional counter 223av becomes 0, and this process ends when the value of the additional counter av becomes 0.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning command processing (S2117) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This special figure 2 winning command processing (S2117) is one of the command determination processing (see FIG. 150), and when a ball enters the second entrance 640a during the increase effect, the hit pocket is determined. Is a process for determining whether or not to increase.

  In this special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161), first, it is determined whether the increasing effect flag 223cv is on (S3201). This processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3201 that the increasing effect flag 223cv is on (S3201: Yes), then the data of the winning information storage area 223a is read (S3202). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of winning pockets is 5, which is the upper limit (S3203). If the number is equal to the upper limit (S3203: Yes), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the number of winning pockets is less than the upper limit (S3203: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning ball exists in the winning information (S3204). If there is no hit reserve ball (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not the big hit change is being executed (S3205). Then, if there is no winning reserve ball and the big hit change is not being executed (S3204: No, S3205: No), the extra is selected based on the additional low probability table of 5%. Is determined (S3206), and the process proceeds to S3208. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3204 that there is a jackpot reserved ball (S3204: Yes), and when it is determined in the process of S3205 that the jackpot variation is being executed (S3205: Yes), the extra is added. It is determined whether or not to perform the addition based on the added high probability table in which the selected ratio is 25% (S3207), and the process proceeds to S3208.

  In the process of S3208 executed after the process of S3206 or S3207, it is determined whether or not the addition is determined (S3208), and if the addition is not determined (S3208: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3208, if the addition is determined (S3208: Yes), the winning pocket (hit position) is read from the hit position storage area 223k, and five or more winning pockets (hit positions) are continuous. It is determined whether or not the location exists (S3209).

  In the process of S3209, when it is determined that there is a portion where the hit pockets are continuous 5 or more (S3209: Yes), in the missing pockets, other than the one before and after the portion where the hit position is continuous 5 or more. One additional position is selected from the out-of-pocket pocket (S3211), and the process proceeds to S3212. The reason why the hit pocket is further added before and after the place where five or more pieces are continuous is that if the hits are made too continuous, it may be difficult to drop the ball B naturally. In other words, during the execution of the roulette chance effect for notifying of the detachment, when it is detected that the period of the swinging motion of the ball B is shortened at the timing when the hit pocket reaches a continuous place, the hit pocket continues. After passing the spot, the ball B must be dropped. Accordingly, the state in which the period of the swinging operation is short (the swinging operation is weakened) continues for a long time, and the player may feel uncomfortable with the ball B not falling easily. Thus, in the present control example, a limit is set on the number of consecutive hit positions, and a state in which the ball B cannot be dropped is prevented from continuing for a long time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3209 that there is no place where five or more consecutive hit pockets exist (S3209: No), one additional position is selected from all the missing pockets (S3210). ) And the process moves to S3212. In the processing of S3212 executed after the processing of S3210 or S3211, the hit position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected added position becomes the hit position (S3212), and the added hit position is notified (FIG. 93B). Reference), and terminates this processing.

  By executing the special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161), during the execution of the increase effect, it is determined whether or not the number of hit pockets is increased each time a ball enters the second entrance 640a by a lottery (determination). ) And increase the number of pockets when a lottery is won. Therefore, during the execution of the increase effect, it is possible to positively aim and hit the second entrance 640a and launch the ball, thereby improving the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In the special figure 2 winning command processing of the first control example, the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the winning pocket is made different depending on whether or not the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined. However, the variation of the lottery probability may be further increased. For example, when the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined, and when it is undecided whether to shift to the “rensou mode” (the number of start winning prizes in the time saving state is reduced to the set time saving period ), And the case where it is determined not to shift to the “rensou mode” may be configured to differ in the probability (ratio) that the increase of the winning pocket is determined. Specifically, for example, when the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined at the time of the lottery, a relatively high probability (for example, 25% of the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640a) ), The winning pocket (lucky number) is increased, and when it is determined that the mode does not shift to the “rensou mode”, a relatively high probability (for example, the second entrance 640a) May be configured so that the hit pocket is increased at a rate of 5% when the ball enters the ball). When it is undecided whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”, the probability between the above two cases (for example, a ratio of 10% when the ball enters the second entrance 640a) And the number of hit pockets may be increased. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a variation in how to increase the number of winning pockets, thereby further improving the interest in the lucky number increase effect.For example, it is undecided whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” In the case of (1), the probability that the number of hit pockets may be increased may be changed according to the number of working hours set as the “preparation mode”. That is, when the “preparation mode” with one time reduction period is set, the probability that the number of hit pockets is increased is lower than when the “preparation mode” with seven time reduction periods is set. May be. More specifically, for example, the configuration may be such that the number of hit pockets (lucky numbers) is increased at a rate of 8% when the number of time reductions is one, and at a rate of 12% when the number of time reductions is seven. As a result, the time-saving period can be predicted from the increase in the number of winning pockets (lucky numbers), so that it is possible to expect a shift to the “rensou mode” by increasing the number of winning pockets. In addition, it is possible to expect seven time-saving periods that are advantageous to the player (there are many chances of shifting to the “rensou mode”).

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1615) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S1615). This variable display setting process (S1615) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order for the effect unit 331 to execute the variable effect, the main control device This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S3301). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S3301: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S3306. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S3301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S3302), and then, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151) of S2202, the variation is started. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S3303).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3304). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, and displays the variation effect such that the variation display of the symbol is performed in the effect unit 331 in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Control is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3305). In the process of S3305, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the processing of S3306.

  In the process of S3306, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S3306). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3306: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3306: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3307), and then, in the process of S2105 of the command determination process (see FIG. 150), The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3308).

  Next, a display number selection process for determining a display number to be displayed in the rendering unit 331 is executed (S3309). Details of the display number selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S3309 ends, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is generated, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. (S3310), and the process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, and displays a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command such that the stop symbol is stopped and displayed by the rendering unit 331 so that the variation effect is displayed. The stop display is controlled.

  Next, details of the display number selection process (S3409) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This display number selection process (S3409) is one of the variable display setting processes (see FIG. 162), and is a process for determining the display number to be displayed in the rendering unit 331, as described above.

  When the display number selection process (see FIG. 163) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the present time is a normal symbol time saving state (S3401). That is, it is determined whether the time saving state flag 223o is on or the value of the time saving state counter 223p is 1 or more. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S3401: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3401 that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the “normal mode”) (S3401: No), then the lucky number (big hit symbol) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x ) Is read out (S3402), and it is then determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery result is a jackpot (S3403).

  In the processing of S3403, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of order (S3403: No), three different numbers are randomly selected from the 30 kinds of numbers (numbers respectively assigned to the pockets P1 to P30). (S3404). Then, it is determined whether all of the three selected numbers are lucky numbers (big hit symbols) defined in the designated pocket storage area 223x (S3405), and at least one of the at least three types is a lucky number. If it is determined that the numbers are different from each other (S3405: No), one of the remaining 27 numbers excluding the three types selected in the processing of S3404 is selected as a stop symbol (S3406), and The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3405, if it is determined that all three types are lucky numbers (big hit symbols) (S3405: Yes), the remaining one type number (symbol) is replaced with the unselected out-of-number number. A random selection is made from among them (S3407), and this processing ends. The four types of numbers (symbols) selected in the processes of S3404 to S3407 are set as out-of-place stop symbols displayed on the rendering unit 331.

  Also, in S3403, when it is determined that the result of the lottery of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S3403: Yes), four of the five lucky numbers (hit numbers) read from the designated pocket storage area 223x are selected. A selection is made at random (S3408). Then, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a jackpot to which the “preparation mode” (ordinary symbol time reduction state) is given (S3409), and if the “preparation mode” is not given (S3409: No), In the time-saving suggestion effect (see FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b)), one type of a number (notification symbol) displayed on the effect portion 422a is selected from out-of-number numbers (S3410), and the process ends. I do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3409 that the jackpot is a jackpot to which the “preparation mode” is given (S3409: Yes), the time-saving suggestion effect in the jackpot (see FIGS. 92 (a) and (b)) One of the numbers (notification symbols) displayed on the rendering unit 422a is selected from the lucky numbers (winning numbers) (S3411), and the process ends.

  By this display number selection process (see FIG. 163), five types of lucky numbers selected by the player in advance can be set as big hit symbols. In addition, the lucky number selected by the player can be set as a notification symbol in the “preparation mode”.

  Next, details of the accessory operation setting process (S1616) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This accessory operation setting process (S1616) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 145), and is a process for setting the operation of each accessory as described above.

  When the accessory operation setting process (see FIG. 164) is started, first, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the wait period (S3501). This wait period may be set at the time of power-on, and as described above, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of power-on is the ending period of the jackpot, the start of the home position return operation is delayed to This is set so that the ball in one passage forming member 520 is reliably discharged.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3501 that it is the end timing of the wait period (S3501: Yes), then, the origin return processing for returning the mutated character from the origin position to the origin position is executed. (S3502), and ends this process. Note that the origin return processing (S3502) is the same as the origin return processing (S1314) described with reference to FIG. 144, and thus a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3501, if it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the wait period (S3501: No), it is next determined whether it is the operation start timing of any of the accessories (S3503). If it is not the operation start timing (S3503: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3502 that it is the operation start timing of the accessory (S3503: Yes), “01H” is set to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the accessory to start the operation (S3504). ), The operation content corresponding to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g is read out of the operation scenario table 222b corresponding to the character that starts the current operation (S3505).

  When the processing of S3505 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the operation of the pitching device 650 has been read (S3506). By setting the effect flag 223ev to ON, it indicates that the ball B has been pitched (S3507), and the flow shifts to the process of S3508. Note that, as described above, the operation of the pitching device 650 is set at the point of time 50 seconds after the roulette chance effect is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3506, when it is determined that the read operation is not the operation of the pitching device 650 (S3506: No), the process of S3507 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3508. In the process of S3508, an operation command is set based on the operation content read in the process of S3505, and the process ends.

<Regarding control processing of display control device in first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great deal of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) in the display control device 114 is immediately performed. There is a problem that it may not be started.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the third symbol display device 81 and the like in the display control device 114 (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, And the control of the directing unit 422a) can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3601), and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and The display control device 114 is activated so that various controls on the effect unit 422a) can be executed.

  Here, the boot process (S3601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S3601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81 or the like. (The third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) are stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the reading speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is low especially when random access is performed. Therefore, when the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 does not. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, a boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S3701.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3702, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S3702, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S3703). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S3704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S3601 in FIG. 165). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S3602 in FIG. 165) (S3705), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process ends.

  By executing the boot process (S3601) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 166, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3701 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3701 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S3702. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S3703 to S3705 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred in the process of S3701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3701. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S3702, the processing of S3703 to S3705 may be executed.

  Thereby, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, upon starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3703 to S3705 without performing the processes of S3701 and S3702. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set in the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, an image of a specific color is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The image controller 237 is instructed to perform image drawing and display processing so that the image is displayed on the entire screen. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) immediately after the power is turned on depends on the model of the pachinko machine. The colors are set to be different. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). By checking whether or not the display is displayed in (1), it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S3603). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a ends based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3603, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S3604). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S3604, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S3605). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 176 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S5102 in FIG. 176 (a)).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. In the meantime, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167 (b)), the simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 125 is drawn. The determination process (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S3909 in FIG. 167 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. If it is through the device 113, that is, if the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation images shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and (c) are immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the transfer takes a long time, and therefore, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on after power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S3605, interruption permission is set (S3606), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S3606, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3801), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the After specifying an image to be displayed on the rendering unit 422a), a drawing list of the image is created (see FIG. 129), and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. This is for instructing execution of drawing processing and display processing.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 167 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), a command determination process (S3902) is executed, and then a display setting process (S3903). Execute.

  In the command determination process (S3902), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the type of fluctuation effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S3903), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3902) and the like, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit) 331, and the content of the image of one frame to be displayed next in the rendering unit 422a) are specifically specified. In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S3904). In this task process, the information is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) specified by the display setting process (S3903) or the simple display setting process (S3909). Based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be specified, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified. Determine the parameters.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S3905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S3906). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S3904), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S3905) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 129 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3907). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3907, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop symbol counter corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3901 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3901: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 125 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3908) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3909) is executed. Move on to processing.

  Next, the details of the above-described command determination processing (S3902), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 168, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4001). If there is no unprocessed new command (S4001: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4001: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3903) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4002). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S4003).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4004). If there is a display variation pattern command (S4004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4005), and returns to the process of S4001.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S4005) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4101).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S4101, in order to prepare for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is used. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. In the case where the instruction has been given by 110, the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). During this time, the next variation pattern command for display is received from the main control device 110, and another variation display is suddenly started, so that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in fact, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) is performed by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. The player can control the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering) It may continue watching a variation of the third symbol in 422a).

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to ON (S4103). After that, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4101, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S4104), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S4105), and both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S4106), and this processing ends.

  By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 169 (a)), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S4105 is updated and set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4101. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the displayed variable display data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the process proceeds to S4102. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance. Character ROM 234 As will be transferred to the image storage area 236a Luo normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4104, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Control the setting of the stop display.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S4004, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4006). If there is a display stop type command (S4006: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4007), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the stop type command processing (S4007) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 169 (b). FIG. 169 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S4201), and the stop type table and the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167 (b)) Is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated each time is executed, and the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). A later stop symbol is finally set (S4202).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S4202 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S4203), terminates this stop type command processing, and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, In addition, offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S4202 is described as type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed in the rendering unit 422a). In the above-described task processing (S3904), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S4202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S4203, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main controller 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S4201, in order to prepare for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely off, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S4202.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol) even if it is actually "missing the special symbol" On the display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol jackpot". There is a possibility that the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure, if the “special symbol jackpot” is actually set, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol) Even if a stop symbol that is completely off is displayed on the display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a), the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", which can delight the player.

  Returning to FIG. 168, the description will be continued. In the process of S4006, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4006: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S4008). If there is an opening command for use (S4008: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S4009), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the opening command processing (S4009) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 170A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4301). After that, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4302), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S4303). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4304). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S4305), the opening command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 168, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4008 that there is no display opening command (S4008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S4010). If there is a round number command for use (S4010: Yes), a round number command process is executed (S4011), and the process proceeds to S4001.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S4011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S4401). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4402).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4404). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S4405), the round number command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S4010, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S4010: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S4012). If there is an ending command for use (S4012: Yes), the ending command processing is executed (S4013), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the ending command processing (S4013) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502).

  Next, the data table determination flag is set to ON (S4503). After that, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4504). S4505). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S4506), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4012 that there is no ending command for display (S4012: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4014). If there is a change command (S4014: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S4015), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S4015) will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (a). FIG. 172 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 177) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON. (S4601). Then, among the rear image determination flags 233x provided for each of the rear image types (back A to C), the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and other flags are turned on. The back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type is set to off (S4602), the back image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set in the process of S4601 is turned on, the rear image type after change is determined from the rear image determination flag 233x set in the process of S4602. Identify. If the specified rear image type is the rear image B, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is not resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing (S3904), if it is specified to display either the back A or the back B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S4602. From 233x, the type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4602, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S4014, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S4014: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S4016). If (S4016: Yes), error command processing is executed (S4017), and the process returns to S4001.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S4017) will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4701). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4702). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S4701, the type of error that occurred is determined from the error determination flag set in the process of S4702, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is performed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4702, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S4016 that there is no error command (S4016: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4018), and the processing returns to S4001.

  In the processing of S4001 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4001: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S4002 to S4018 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S4001 to S4018 is repeatedly executed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S3908) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 125, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 169 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 169 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. For the command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 169 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4101. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on which are set and required in this case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the fluctuation image area at power-on 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4102, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting processing (S3903), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 173, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4801). In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S4802 to S4804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4805. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4801: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S4802), and then S4803 to S4804. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S4803, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4803). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4803: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S4804).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). First, by referring to the error determination flags, the warning images of the errors corresponding to all the error determination flags that have been set to ON are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). ) Is developed (S4901).

  In the task processing (S3904), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of a sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and the like for each sprite are specified. Various parameters required for drawing are determined.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4901, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4902), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4804) or in the process of S4803, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4803: No), the process proceeds to S4805.

  In S4805, a pointer update process is performed (S4805). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S5001). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing in S5001, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S5002). As a result, if it is End information (S5002: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S5003). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S5003: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S5004), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S5005), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the display data table for demonstration, so that the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) ), The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5003 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S5003: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S5006), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S5002, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S5002: No), the process ends and returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 173, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4806). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4806 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4807), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4808). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4808: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4808: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is determined whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S4809).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag 233z is on (S4809: Yes), the finalized display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the finalized display effect. Is set (S4810), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4811). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4812), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4813). After the final display flag 233z indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4814), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4815), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is changed to the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device) in accordance with the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit) can be easily configured. The effect displayed in 422a) can be changed to a fixed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and thus the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) in the next variable effect. It is used to specify the third symbol to be used. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S3904), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S4815 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4809, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off (S4809: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4816). Then, if the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S4816: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect. The contents are set in the table buffer 233d (S4817), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4818). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4819). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4820), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4821), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  With this, if the display variation pattern command or the opening command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the first symbol display device) is automatically received. The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

  In the process of S4816, if the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4816: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is completed, and that the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S3909) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d to set the display data table that defines that the image (one of FIGS. 125 (b) and (c)) is to be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S3905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 176 (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5101). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5101: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process Is executed (S5102), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Accordingly, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 176 (b).

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S5101, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S5101: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S5103), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S5102), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (b). FIG. 176 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S5102).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S5201), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S5201: Yes). Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S5202). In the process of S5202, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S5202 (S5202: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S5202: Yes), the process moves to S5203. Also, as a result of the process of S5201, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5203.

  In the process of S5203, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S5203). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S5204), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S5203, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S5203: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S5205), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S3909 in FIG. 167 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 168 to 172) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 173 to 175) are performed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like ( A normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 177) (see S5101: No in FIG. 176 (a)).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately. The responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a) can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S5103), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S3905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting processing (S5103).

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update processing (S4805) of the previously executed display setting processing (S3903). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S5301). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S5302). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S5302: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. , The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S5303) Further, the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S5304), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5305.

  Further, in the process of S5302, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S5302: No), the process of S5303 and S5304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5305. In the process of S5305, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S5305), and the transfer instruction is set. If yes (S5305: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S5306).

  In the process of S5306, after setting a transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S5306 (S5306: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S5306: Yes), the process proceeds to S5307. Also, as a result of the processing in S5305, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S5305: No), the processing shifts to S5307.

  In the processing of S5307, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5307). If the transfer start flag is on (S5307: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S5308), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various types of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S5303 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S5313. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S5307: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S5309).

  If the back image change flag 233w is on (S5309: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so that the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S5310) and provided for each back image type. Among the rear image determination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S5311). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S5312), and the flow shifts to the process of S5313.

  In the process of S5309, if the rear image change flag 233w is not on but is off (S5309: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  If the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that it should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Image data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S5315, if the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process ends as it is.

  In the process of S5313, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5313). The determination in the process of S5313 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S5313 (S5313: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S5313, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5313: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S5314). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S5314, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S5315), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, details of the above-described drawing processing (S3906), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3904) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list shown in FIG. 129 is generated from the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S3905) (S5401). That is, in the processing of S5401, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S3904). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3905), the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S5402). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Etc. (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). Thus, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer is displayed on the third symbol display 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). The drawing process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S5402, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S5403). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 167 (b)) is executed, it is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b is read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (the third symbol display device 81, the rendering unit 331, and the rendering unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example has a configuration in which three types of modes are provided: a "normal mode", a "preparation mode", and a "rensou mode". In order to shift to the most advantageous “rensou mode”, it is basically necessary to first shift from the “normal mode” to the “preparation mode”. That is, it is necessary to shift to the time saving state in which the time saving period is once or seven times. Then, by making a jackpot during the "preparation mode", it is possible to shift to the "rensou mode" which is most advantageous for the player.

  For this reason, it is possible to strongly expect the player to have a probability of changing the jackpot within the limited number of times (one or seven times) set as the “prepare mode”. Therefore, the interest in the game in the “preparation mode” can be improved.

  Further, in the present control example, a plurality of (five types) of identification information (lucky numbers) used to notify a state advantageous to the player are set. Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, the display of the symbol is changed and displayed on the display device, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. However, in this conventional gaming machine, only a predetermined combination of symbols is used for the notification of a hit, and when another notification (for example, notification of a probable change state or the like) is performed, a different notification mode (for example, In general, the notification is performed by a display effect of fighting an enemy). That is, there is a problem that the content of the notification is difficult to understand because the notification mode is not uniform. In addition, when a result that is advantageous to the player is notified, a predetermined mode is generally executed, and there is little room for the player to intervene.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the identification information (lucky number) for notifying the advantageous state includes a role for notifying the special pattern jackpot in the “normal mode” (see FIG. 91 (a)). A role for notifying whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” after the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 92 (b)), and notifying whether or not to shift from the “preparation mode” to the “rensou mode”. It also has a role. Since the lucky number is used for various notifications that are advantageous to the player, the result of each effect can be easily understood by the player only by knowing the lucky number. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand. In addition, the notification of the special symbol jackpot in the "normal mode", the notification of the "preparation mode" executed in the jackpot, and the notification of the "rensou mode" executed in the "preparation mode" are all lucky. An effect aimed at obtaining a number is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel these three different notifications as if they were one effect. Therefore, an effect with a sense of unity can be executed. Further, in the present control example, the player can arbitrarily select (set) identification information (lucky number) for notifying a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to execute the notification mode according to the taste of each player, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in the present control example, when a big hit occurs in the “normal mode”, an entertaining effect (time saving notification effect) for notifying whether or not to shift to the “preparation mode” which is more advantageous than the “normal mode” is made. Is configured to run during. At this time, the short notice effect is executed every time it is detected that the ball has reached the second passage forming member 422 via the first passage forming member 520 provided on the downstream side of the first variable winning device 82a. . Therefore, it is possible for the player to actively launch the ball into the first variable winning device 82a to launch the ball. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be increased.

  Further, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected during a jackpot opening period, and the connection is released when the jackpot ends. Here, if the connection is immediately released at the end of the last round (two rounds) of the jackpot, if there is a ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 at the end of the last round, the ball is removed. There is a possibility that the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 may be separated from each other before reaching the second passage forming member 422. In other words, the ball that has flowed down the first passage forming member 520 may be ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 in an unexpected direction without entering the second passage forming member 422. . In this case, the ejected ball may enter the substrate portion or the wiring portion, which may cause a failure such as a short circuit.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when the number of winnings in the first variable winning device 82a and the number of discharges from the second passage forming member 422 coincide with each other in the jackpot ending period, the first passage forming member 520 is set. And the second passage forming member 422 is disconnected. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, so that the ball entering the first variable winning device 82a is subjected to the second passage forming. It can flow down to the member 422 reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the ball enters the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and the wiring or the circuit is short-circuited.

  Further, in the present control example, when entering the "preparation mode", as an entertaining effect to suggest whether or not to shift to the "rensou mode" which is the most advantageous for the player, the "rensou mode suggestion" It is configured to execute “draft”. In this “rensou mode suggestion effect”, the mode shifts to the “rensou mode” depending on which of the plurality of pockets provided in the rotating member 640 imitating roulette the ball B falls into. Notify if you did. More specifically, a plurality of (30 types) pockets are sorted into a hit pocket and a missed pocket, and when the ball B falls into the hit pocket, the state shifts to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the pocket in which the ball B falls, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the “renjo mode suggestion effect”.

  On the back side of the rotating member 640, a back LED 625 that illuminates the hit pocket from the back side is provided to make the hit pocket stand out (make it look shiny). The rear LED 625 is configured to rotate in the same direction at the same rotation speed as the rotation member 640. In the rear LED 625, a plurality of lighting regions (lighting regions A1 to A18) for illuminating the region for one pocket from the back are arranged at regular intervals. On the other hand, there are 30 types of pockets provided on the rotating member 640, and a plurality of sections with different intervals between the pockets are provided so that the diameter of the rotating member 640 and the diameter of the rear LED 625 are substantially the same. Have been. For this reason, while the back LED 625 makes one turn, the rotating member 640 can make only 18/30 turns. Therefore, according to the amount of rotation of the rotating member 640, each pocket provided in the rotating member 640 and each lighting area A1 to A18 And the corresponding relationship is shifted.

  Here, as a method of matching the correspondence between the lighting area and each pocket, a method of matching the number of areas of each lighting area of the rear LED with the number of each pocket provided in the rotating member 640 is considered. When the number of regions is increased in accordance with the number of pockets, the number of LEDs increases, which leads to an increase in cost and an increase in power consumption. In addition, since the size of the LED bar (LED board) increases, there is a problem that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 is wasted. Further, in order to save space, when each of the lighting regions of the rear LED 625 is configured such that the interval between the lighting regions is variable according to the rotation position (the same configuration as the rotating member 640), the first section of the rotating member 640 is used. In correspondence with S1, it is necessary to provide a section where the LED bar is folded (that is, the interval between the lighting regions is narrow). Therefore, it is necessary to make each LED bar switchable between a normal state (see FIG. 97) and a folded state according to rotation. However, unlike the pocket, the LED bar is provided with a circuit for lighting each LED, so that when folded, a circuit pattern or wiring printed on the substrate is broken, and the LED bar is broken. May not light up. On the other hand, in the case where the number of pockets of the rotating member 640 is reduced to 18 and the interval between the pockets is always constant (the interval when arranged in the second section in the present control example) (for the rear LED 625). In the case where the provided lighting areas A1 to A18 and the pockets have a completely one-to-one correspondence), there is a problem that the variation in the effect is reduced due to a decrease in the number of pockets.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, one of the members (the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625) that perform the rotating operation with respect to each other (that is, the rear LED 625) is changed (lighted state) every time a predetermined condition is satisfied (the rear surface). Each time the rotation amount of the LED 625 becomes 1/3 turn), the correction is made (switched) in accordance with the other operation. By this correction, the control is performed so that the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket in each pocket of the rotating member 640 always has a shining appearance. That is, each time the rear LED makes a 1/3 turn, the information of the storage area corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) is corrected in accordance with the displacement caused by the rotation operation. ing. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (appearance in which the hit pocket shines and the missing pocket becomes dark). Since the player can visually recognize only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from erroneously recognizing the winning pocket and the missing pocket.

  In the present control example, in the "normal mode", an "additional effect" for expecting that a lottery result advantageous to the player is held is executable. Here, heretofore, there have been conventionally known gaming machines that execute a specific effect (a so-called reservation notice effect) every time the number of reserved balls increases. The hold announcement effect is generally controlled so as to be easily executed when an advantageous lottery result (for example, a win) is held. However, in this conventional gaming machine, it merely indicates whether or not an advantageous lottery result has been held, and a holding ball other than the holding ball on which the holding announcement effect was executed (for example, a holding ball on which the holding announcement was executed) Ball held before the ball).

  On the other hand, in the present control example, a plurality of advantageous states are provided, and the state is gradually shifted (ranked up) to a more advantageous state according to the result of the special symbol lottery. Then, the more the reserved ball which is shifted to a more advantageous state by the pre-reading is reserved, the more easily the additional effect is executed. Thus, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the additional effect. For example, an additional effect is usually performed when the jackpot type in which the “preparation mode” is set after the jackpot is suspended is increased, so that it is normal that the extra jackpot is performed (when the additional effect is not executed). It is possible to have the player play the game with higher expectation. If the jackpot hits, the expectation of shifting to the “preparation mode” increases. In addition, when the jackpot is hit as expected by the player, the player can be made aware that the degree of expectation to shift to the “prepare mode” is higher than usual (when the additional effect is not executed). Thus, it can be strongly expected that a lucky number is displayed on the staging unit 422a during the jackpot game. Furthermore, at the time of execution of the additional production, the case where the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the “rensou mode” is suspended is compared with the case where the transition to the “rensou mode” is not determined. Since the execution ratio of the additional effect is configured to be high, when the "prepare mode" is notified as expected by the player, if the degree of expectation to shift to the "rensou mode" is higher than usual, the player Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a stronger sense of expectation for shifting to the “rensou mode”. As described above, in the present control example, the player can be expected to shift to a plurality of advantageous states in a stepwise manner by executing one additional effect. Therefore, since it is possible to give a sense of expectation to all the lotteries corresponding to the held balls that are held at the time when the additional effect is executed, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  In the present control example, when the ball B is dropped into the pocket of the rotating member 640, the ball B is swung on the holding piece 677, and then is moved to the pocket of the target type (hit pocket or detached pocket). It is configured to drop.

  Here, when the ball B is oscillating on the holding piece 677 and the ball B is allowed to fall irrespective of the circumstance (period, amplitude, etc.), the oscillating operation is performed. Despite the state in which the period (amplitude) is large (the state in which the swinging operation of the ball B is likely to continue for a while), the state in which the ball B falls or the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation is extremely small ( Despite the appearance in which the ball B is likely to fall), the ball B may continue to be held on the holding piece 677. That is, the motion of the ball B may have an unnatural appearance (for example, it may fall in an operating condition in which it is unlikely to fall, or may not fall indefinitely in an operating condition in which it is likely to fall). Also, a method is considered in which the elapsed time from the start of the swinging operation is measured, and the ball B is dropped when the elapsed time reaches a period (amplitude) at which a period (amplitude) at which the ball can be dropped with a natural appearance is reached. However, the swinging motion of the ball B can be affected by various conditions such as the angle at the time of pitching, the initial speed, the manner of assembling the holding pieces 677, and the like, so that the period (amplitude) at which the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance is obtained. There is a possibility that individual differences may occur in the time up to.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when the ball B is dropped, the period of the swing operation is determined from the time interval at which the ball B passes through the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the period of the swing operation is sufficiently small. The configuration is such that the ball B is dropped after it is determined that the ball B has come. Thus, the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance regardless of the individual differences of the pachinko machine 10 and the conditions (angle and initial velocity) when the ball B is thrown. That is, when the ball B performs the swinging motion on the holding piece 677, the player can be made to pay more attention to the motion of the ball B, so that the player's interest in the roulette chance effect can be improved. it can.

  Further, in the present control example, each time any of the pockets is placed at the drop position, the pocket placed at the drop position can be specified from the outputs of the detection sensors A to F. Here, if the configuration is such that the ball B can be dropped into the pocket every time the pocket is placed at the drop position, if the ball B falls after the pocket is placed at the drop position, Is started, so that the ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket at the drop position (falls into the next pocket) in some cases. A time lag occurs when the holding piece 677 moves from the projecting position to the immersion position, and a time lag occurs when the ball B falls from the upper portion of the holding piece 677. Therefore, depending on conditions, the ball B may be moved to the pocket at the falling position. This is because there is a risk that the pocket at the drop position may pass by the rotation operation before reaching the position.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, when any pocket is arranged at the drop position, the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified from the pocket at the drop position, and the next position of the pocket arranged at the current drop position is specified. The type of the pocket arranged at the falling position is specified, and it is determined whether the ball B can be dropped into the pocket. Then, if it is determined that the ball B can be dropped into the pocket located at the drop position next to the pocket currently located at the drop position, the drop control of the ball B (the immersion position of the holding piece 677) is performed. ) Is executed before the pocket is placed at the drop position. That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the immersion position at a timing when the ball B can be sufficiently dropped into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the drop position). It is configured to be immersed. With this configuration, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the pocket of the target type. Therefore, although the ball B does not shift to the “rensou mode”, the ball B falls into the hit pocket, and conversely, despite the shift to the “rensou mode” is determined, The ball B can be prevented (suppressed) from falling off and falling into the pocket.

  Further, in the present control example, it is possible to execute a specific effect (i.e., "representative operation in the extended-villa mode") over one or a plurality of (one or seven) time-saving times set as the "prepare mode". It is configured. Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are capable of executing the same type of effect over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a variable display of the number of balls reserved at the start of the effect) (a so-called pachinko machine). , "Continuous notice production"). In such a conventional gaming machine, the player can have a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations, based on the number of times the same type of effect is executed, the content of the effect, and the like. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the number of productions and the production time depend on the reserved ball, and when the reserved balls do not exist or are small, sufficient production time cannot be secured. However, there is a problem in that the number of particles decreases.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, an effect for a fixed period of time (that is, a “rensou mode suggestion effect”) can be executed irrespective of whether or not the variable display is being executed and the number of held balls or the like. I have. In order to prevent the `` preparation mode '' from ending during the fixed time production, even if a jackpot has been won in the middle of the number of time reductions, or if the lottery of all special symbols for the The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is defined so that the total fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in “” is constant (or longer than the “renjo mode suggested effect” effect time). With this configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the execution time of the “preparation mode suggestion effect”, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, according to the progress of the game at the time when the ending effect in the “representative mode suggestion effect” is started (the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed, the remaining number of times, etc.), the ending effect period is set. It is configured to be variable. With this configuration, the end timing of the “preparation mode suggestion effect” can be matched with the timing at which the “prepare mode” is actually ended, so that the player can more accurately grasp the playing state. Can be done. Further, in the present control example, the game is stopped in the “prepare mode suggestion effect”, and after the player informs of the departure in the “prepare mode suggestion effect”, the player restarts the game, and the game becomes a probable big hit. When the transition to the “mode” is determined, a special effect (resurrection roulette chance effect) can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the ending effect from continuing for an amount of time during the game stop period, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being bored. In addition, it is possible to appropriately notify the player whether or not the mode has shifted to the “rensou mode”.

  In the present control example, the identification information (lucky number) is configured to be used for the notification of the jackpot, the notification of the “preparation mode”, and the notification of the shift to the “rensou mode”, but the notification is performed by the lucky number. The advantageous conditions that are achieved are not limited to this. For example, only a part of the three advantageous states may be notified by using a lucky number. In addition to the three states, another advantageous state may be notified. Further, an advantageous state different from the above three states may be notified. In addition, as another advantageous state, for example, a lucky number may be used to notify whether or not the jackpot type is such that a large number of prize balls are easily obtained during the jackpot opening period. In addition, for example, a lucky number may be used to notify whether or not the special symbol is in a stable state as an advantageous state.

  In the present control example, the rotation member 640 and the rear LED 625, which require different times for one cycle of operation (one rotation operation), are configured to rotate at the same rotation speed. In a section where the player can visually recognize the lighting area, the lighting state of each lighting area is changed by a predetermined rotation amount so that the correspondence between the pocket type and the lighting area arranged on the back side of each pocket is fixed. The configuration is such that the correction is performed every time the rear LED 625 makes a 1/3 turn). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be applied to any configuration as long as it is a plurality of movable objects that operate at different operation cycles. it can. For example, on the back side of the rotating member 640, a rotating body that can rotate at the same cycle as the back LED 625 is provided in place of the back LED 625, and the movable body is spaced from the rotating body at the same interval as the pocket of the rotating member 640. May be provided. As the movable body of the rotating body, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a movable body that can be changed between an immersion position on the back side in front view and a protruding position on the near side in front view is provided. A passing hole is provided for each pocket so that the movable object can pass when the movable object is changed to the projecting position, and the pocket in which the movable object protrudes to the near side through the passing hole hits the pocket. Alternatively, the configuration shown in FIG. In this case, control is performed so that the correspondence between the movable object that is changed to the protruding position and the hit pocket is fixed in a section (for example, the first section S1, see FIG. 54) visible to the player, and the game is played. A movable object placed in an arrangement that is difficult (not possible) to be visually recognized by a user may be corrected in accordance with the type of pocket of a pocket placed in a section visible by a subsequent rotation operation. This makes it possible to make the correspondence between the rotating member 640 and the rotating body constant in a section that can be visually recognized by the player, regardless of the amount of rotation or the like.

  In the present control example, one of the roles (the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625) of the role members (the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625) that perform the rotating operation is changed every time a predetermined condition is satisfied (the rotation amount of the rear LED 625). Each time turns), the correction is performed (switched) in accordance with the other operation. However, the present invention is not limited to the rotation operation. In a plurality of characters operating in a section that is visible to the player and a section that is not visible (difficult) to the player, the operation of some of the characters is performed in another part in the section that is not visible (difficult). The present concept can be applied as long as the correction is performed according to the movement of an object. For example, in two types of characters that reciprocate by horizontal movement between a section that is visually recognizable by a player and a section that is difficult to visually recognize, the operation of the character arranged in the section that is difficult to recognize is adjusted to the operation of another character. By making the correction, the control may be performed so that the correspondence between the two types of characters in the section visible to the player matches.

  In the present control example, in the rotating member 640 performing the rotation operation and the rear LED 625, the lighting area for illuminating one hit pocket is made different according to the timing (the amount of rotation of the rear LED 625), so that the hit pocket is always illuminated. Although it was configured to keep its appearance, it is not necessarily limited to a rotating accessory. The present concept may be applied to a display device capable of changing display contents and a backlight for illuminating a part or all of the display device from the back side. Specifically, for example, while displaying the image of the roulette that is rotating with respect to the display device, the backlight arranged on the back side of the display area where the image of the hit pocket is displayed, A configuration in which the lighting state is set to be brighter than the displayed display area may be adopted. Then, the lighting position of the backlight may be dynamically switched so as to follow the operation of the image of the winning pocket. With this configuration, the winning pocket can always have a bright appearance, so that it can be more easily recognized whether or not the winning pocket is a winning pocket.

  In the present control example, when five types of identification information (lucky numbers) are displayed one by one on each of the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331, a big hit is notified, and further, the effect unit 422a However, when the remaining lucky numbers are displayed, the "preparation mode" is notified, but the notification is not limited to the lucky numbers. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of conditions (so-called missions) for shifting to an advantageous state are notified to the player, and a jackpot is notified when a part of the notified conditions is achieved. . In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode shifts to the “preparation mode” by achieving some or all of the remaining conditions that have not been achieved during the jackpot. Furthermore, in the “preparation mode”, a configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the “rensou mode” is notified by achieving some or all of the unachieved conditions. The conditions for shifting to the advantageous state include, for example, “generating an effect in which a specific character appears”, “generating an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22”, and “holding”. Storing one or more balls ". These conditions may be displayed instead of the lucky number on the third symbol display device 81, for example. When each condition is displayed, the condition may be displayed in such a manner that the user can easily recognize whether or not each condition has been achieved (for example, a double line is drawn on the completed condition). As described above, by achieving a plurality of conditions, by stepping up to a more advantageous state, the player can pay more attention to whether or not each condition is achieved. Can be done. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. Note that some or all of the achieved conditions may be returned to an unfulfilled state under specific conditions. The specific condition is, for example, a case where a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of special symbols have been drawn since the achievement of the previous condition, or a case where a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the achievement of the previous condition. It is. The condition may be configured to be selectable by the player, or may be configured to be automatically selected (for example, randomly at power-on).

  In this control example, when the ball has passed the sensor member 422c provided in the second passage forming member 422, the winning ball is discharged to the first variable winning device 82a (the first passage forming member 520 is Passed). Then, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected until the number of winnings in the first variable winning device 82a matches the number of discharges from the second passage forming member 422. , But is not limited to this. It is only necessary to prevent the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520. A configuration that limits disconnection for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) after detection is also possible. Note that 1.5 seconds is a value obtained by adding a margin to the time required for the ball to pass through the first passage forming member 520, and the ball that has won the first variable prize device 82a is given a margin. This is the time during which it can be held down to the second passage forming member 422. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) disconnection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  In the present control example, the lighting area on the back side of the hit pocket is set to the lighting state with the lighting rate of 100%, and the back side of the missing pocket is set to the lighting state with the lighting rate of 0%. However, the present invention is limited to this. However, the lighting rate can be arbitrarily determined. For example, the lighting rate of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the missing pocket may be set to 10%. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the numbers attached to the pockets while making them look darker than the hit pockets. Further, for example, the lighting ratio of the lighting region arranged on the back side of the hit pocket may be set to 80%. The power consumption of the LED can be reduced by reducing the lighting rate of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the winning pocket.

  In the present control example, only two types of the hit pocket and the missing pocket are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the pocket type, a pocket type that may or may not be hit (for example, the expected degree of hit is 50%) may be provided. Accordingly, even if the ball B falls due to the roulette chance effect, if the ball B falls into a pocket having an expectation of 50%, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”. Can last longer.

  In the present control example, only two types of lighting states, a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% and a lighting state with a lighting rate of 0%, are set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and variations may be increased. For example, the lighting area arranged on the back side of a part of the winning pocket is set to a lighting rate of 100% and the lighting frequency of 320 Hz, and the lighting area arranged on the back side of the winning pocket different from the part of the winning pocket. At a lighting rate of 80%. As a method of selecting a different lighting rate, for example, the back side of the hit pocket, which is a missed pocket on both sides, is turned on at a lighting rate of 100%, and a portion where the hit pocket is continuous has a relatively dark lighting rate of 80%. May be set. In the case where the winning pockets are continuous, the appearance becomes brighter than in the case where both sides are separated (lighting rate 0%). Therefore, even if the lighting rate is reduced to 80%, the appearance can be made sufficiently bright. As a result, the power consumption of the LED can be reduced without significantly changing the appearance. Further, for example, the lighting area arranged on the back side of each hit pocket may be turned on at a lighting rate of 50% and a frequency of 12 Hz, and the on-period may be reversed between the closest hit pockets. By lowering the frequency to 12 Hz, the player can perceive the on-period and the off-period, and by inverting the on-period (lighting phase), each pocket can be made more conspicuous.

  In addition, when giving a variation to the lighting state of the lighting area on the back side of the hit pocket, a configuration may be adopted in which a lighting control command is output at a different timing for each lighting state. As described above, in this control example, the lighting control command is output to the LED driver by the serial transfer method. Therefore, as compared with the parallel transfer method, it takes more time from the start of output of data (lighting control command) to the end thereof. More specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 234, in order to notify the LED driver of a command for notifying one lighting state, a plurality of data such as lighting area data and lighting rate data are required. Must be sequentially output (see FIG. 234). Further, in order to confirm whether each output data is normally received by the LED driver, each time data of 8 bits is output, a signal indicating that 8 bits of data has been received from the LED driver is received. It is configured to wait until Therefore, if a lighting control command for notifying the setting of some lighting areas is output, and then a lighting control command for notifying the setting of other lighting areas is output, a plurality of lighting states may be output. It takes a longer time to finish outputting all the lighting control commands to the LED driver. For this reason, there is a possibility that the process cannot be shifted to another process for a relatively long time. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which a lighting control command is output at a different timing for each lighting state (for example, one lighting state per loop of one main process (see FIG. 145)). With this configuration, the process of setting the lighting control command can be distributed to a plurality of loops of the main process (see FIG. 145). Therefore, one processing time for outputting the lighting control command can be reduced, so that other processing can be executed normally. In addition, since the number of lighting control commands generated per one loop of the main processing can be reduced, the processing load when generating the lighting control commands can be reduced. As a method of distributing the setting timing of the lighting control command into a plurality of main processing loops, for example, the lighting position storage area 223m of the lighting setting processing (see FIG. 158) is updated, and the corresponding lighting control command is set. 158 (see S2907 and S2916 in FIG. 158), outputs only a lighting control command corresponding to 1 lighting state, and sets a flag indicating that there is another lighting state that has not been set (lighting unset flag). It should be set to ON. Then, in the next loop of the main process (see FIG. 145), or when the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is executed after receiving the execution command, the lighting non-setting flag is in the ON state. For example, it may be configured to output a lighting control command corresponding to one lighting state that has not been set.

  In the present control example, in the "representative effect of extended-villa mode", the lighting state of the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA is corrected so as to conform to the arrangement of the hit pocket every time the rear LED 625 makes 1/3 turn. However, it is not always necessary to perform the correction for each LED bar. The correction section RA can be arbitrarily determined within a range that is invisible (difficult) to the player. For example, a configuration may be used in which the lighting regions arranged at the symmetrical position of the drop position are corrected one by one, or each time the rear LED 625 makes a half turn, the lighting state of the nine lighting regions arranged in the upper half is corrected. It may be configured.

  In the present control example, in the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, every time any LED bar is arranged in the correction section RA, the arrangement of the hit pocket is read from the hit position storage area 223k and switched to the corresponding lighting state. Although it was configured, it is not limited to this. A data table (lighting control scenario) defining the combinations of the winning pockets and the time-dependent change of the lighting state of each lighting area in each combination may be defined in the ROM 222 in advance. That is, according to the combination of the winning pockets, the correspondence between the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the lower half of the rear LED 625 visible to the player and the pocket arranged in front of each lighting area is rotated. The time change of the lighting state may be defined in the ROM 222 so as to be unchanged regardless of the progress of the operation. In this case, in order to make the arrangement of the rotating member 640 at the start of the lighting control and the arrangement of the respective lighting areas A1 to A18 the same, the ending of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” or the “preparation mode” is performed. During a jackpot game or the like before the shift, the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625 are rotated until a predetermined specific arrangement (for example, the pocket P1 is at the drop position and the rear LED 625 is at the origin position) is attained. May be. Then, in the lighting control scenario, a time-dependent change in the lighting state may be defined starting from the predetermined specific arrangement. With such a configuration, during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”, the lighting state of each lighting region may be simply set according to the lighting control scenario, and any LED bar is arranged in the correction section RA. Since it is possible to omit the process of determining whether or not the lighting state of each lighting region included in the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. it can. In addition, instead of defining the lighting control scenario in advance, at the start of the “rendition mode suggestion effect”, a lighting control scenario is generated from the arrangement of the rotating member 640 and the arrangement of the rear LED 625, and stored in the RAM 223. It is good also as a structure to keep. With this configuration, a lighting control scenario can be set regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625.

  In the present control example, it is determined whether or not the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the “preparation mode”, and the type of the pocket in which the ball B is dropped (hit pocket, or (Out pocket). Then, after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes 1 second or less, if a pocket type capable of dropping the ball B is placed at the drop position first, the ball B is dropped into the pocket. Although it was configured to be dropped, the pocket to be dropped is not limited to this. For example, when the ball B is dropped into the missing pocket (the transition to the “rensou mode” is not determined), even if the ball B is controlled to drop into the missing pocket adjacent to the hit pocket, Good. This makes it possible to expect that the ball B will fall into the hit pocket just before the ball B falls even if it comes off. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the roulette chance production. Similarly, when dropping into the hit pocket, control may be performed so as to drop into the hit pocket adjacent to the missing pocket. Thus, even when the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket, it is difficult to determine to which pocket type the ball B falls, so that the roulette chance effect can be enjoyed to the end.

  In the present control example, the game time is stopped in the “preparation mode”, etc., so that the production time of the “rensou mode suggestion production” with a fixed (fixed) production time and the time until the “preparation mode” ends are settled. In the event of a shift, the shift was able to be absorbed by changing the stage time of the ending stage of the “representative mode suggestive stage”, but the shift between the “preparation mode” end timing and the stage period has been resolved. The configuration for performing this is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that the game has stopped in a state in which the player is not playing a game, the “rensou mode suggestion effect” may be interrupted until the game is restarted. That is, the execution period of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” may be adjusted to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In this case, whether or not the game is stopped may be determined by, for example, whether or not the steering wheel 51 is operated, or may be determined for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after entering the second entrance 640a. Alternatively, the determination may be made based on whether or not more than (second) has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the effect time of the “rensou mode suggestive effect” and the time until the “preparation mode” ends from being shifted. In addition, in order to match the time until the “preparation mode” ends with the production time of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” (to reduce the deviation), the first special symbol after the transition to the “preparation mode” May be configured to wait for the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” until the change is executed. With this configuration, even if the state shifts to the “preparation mode” with no reserved balls, the start timing of the “prepare mode suggestion effect” and the first special symbol lottery in the “prepare mode” Can be matched with the execution timing of the “preparation mode”, and the effect time of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” can be matched (to reduce the deviation).

  In the present control example, when the number of winning pockets is increased in the increase effect, the number of consecutive winning pockets is limited to a predetermined number (five consecutive) or less. It is not something that can be done. The number of consecutive missing pockets may be limited to a predetermined number (five consecutive) or less. That is, in the increase effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the hit pocket is preferentially arranged in a section in which the number of missed pockets is six or more. With such a configuration, when the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket in the “roulette chance effect”, the ball B falls in a state where the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging operation of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (1 second). It can be suppressed that only the pocket goes out of position. Therefore, an unnatural appearance such as a stop of the swinging motion of the ball B before the hit pocket is placed at the drop position can be suppressed, and the player is distrusted by the player. Can be prevented more reliably.

  In the present control example, each time an additional effect is executed, one is added to the value of the additional counter 223av. That is, the addition of one pocket per one additional effect is determined. However, the number of additional pockets added in one additional effect is not limited to one. May be determined. Also, taking into account the held lottery results and the five types of winning pockets (lucky numbers) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x, a number that is convenient for the ball B to fall naturally is set. It may be configured. Specifically, for example, when an additional effect is performed based on the fact that the lottery result corresponding to the probability change jackpot in the “preparation mode” is suspended (when the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket), In the case where an additional effect is performed based on the fact that the jackpot to which the seven preparation modes are given is suspended (when there is a possibility that the ball B may fall into the hit pocket according to the subsequent lottery result), the designated pocket The winning pocket (lucky number) selected by the player in advance is read from the storage area 223x, and the initial arrangement of the winning pocket and the missing pocket is determined. Then, the number of sections in which the number of missed pockets is six or more consecutive is determined, and at least a value equal to or greater than the number of sections is added to the counter 223av (the number of hit pockets equal to or greater than the determined number of sections is added). It may be. Then, when determining the position of the added winning pocket in the “preparation mode”, the winning pocket may be preferentially arranged in a section in which six or more missing pockets are continuous. With such a configuration, the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation of the ball B becomes equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second), and when the ball B is hit and dropped into the pocket, the falling pocket is continuously located at the falling position. It can be prevented (suppressed) that a situation in which the ball B cannot be dropped due to the arrangement is caused. That is, the swing operation of the ball B is performed after the condition for dropping the ball B is satisfied and before the pocket (hit pocket) of the type corresponding to the effect result of the present roulette chance effect is arranged at the drop position. Can be prevented (suppressed), and the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target type of pocket (hit pocket) while the ball B performs the swinging operation. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped with a more natural appearance. Further, for example, it is determined that the ball B is to be dropped into the hit pocket, there is a possibility that the ball B is dropped to the hit pocket, and it is determined that the ball B is dropped to the missing pocket. The number of additional items to be selected may be different depending on the case in which the item is added. That is, when it is determined that the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket, it is configured so that a larger number of additional balls can be easily selected, and the ball B is determined to be dropped into the missing pocket. In such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which a small number of additional items is easily selected. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” to the player, based on the notified additional number.

  In the present control example, when the ball B performs the swinging operation above the holding piece 677, the amplitude of the swinging operation is determined from the time interval at which the passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679, and the amplitude is determined. Is allowed (when the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to ON), a different control may be executed based on the detection result of the ball detection sensor 679. For example, the configuration of the music may be changed in accordance with the interval at which the passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679. More specifically, for example, when the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650, the sound (song) of the drum roll is set to flow, and the period (amplitude) of the swing operation of the ball B decreases. Alternatively, the music may be controlled so that the tempo of the drum roll becomes faster. This makes it possible to feel that the falling timing of the ball B is approaching as the tempo of the music increases, so that the expectation of the player can be improved in accordance with the tempo of the music.

  In the present control example, during the rotating operation of the rotating member 640, the arrangement of the LED bars coincides with the correction section RA regardless of the arrangement of each lighting area (whether or not each of the lighting areas is arranged at a position visible to the player). Up to now, the lighting state has not been changed (switched), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a lighting area arranged at a position where the player is difficult to visually recognize (for example, a correction section RA) is set to a light-off state with a lighting rate of 0%. When the arrangement of any one of the LED bars coincides with the correction section RA, a new (for correction) lighting state set for each lighting region forming the LED bar is not immediately reflected. The new lighting state stored in the lighting area that has been stored and moved out of the correction section RA (moved to an arrangement that may be visually recognized by the player) is sequentially reflected. Is also good. With this configuration, the correction is performed while maintaining the correspondence between the type of pocket (hit pocket or missing pocket) arranged at a position visible to the player and the lighting area arranged on the back side thereof. All the lighting regions arranged in the section RA (positions where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize) can be set to a light-off state with a lighting rate of 0%. Thus, power consumption by the rear LED 625 during rotation of the rotating member 640 can be reduced.

  In this control example, when it is determined in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) that the pocket is to be dropped to the pocket next to the pocket currently positioned at the drop position, the rotating member 640 is used regardless of the arrangement of the ball B. After the rotation operation of 100 steps (approximately 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed at the drop position), the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the holding piece 677 may be immersed to the immersion position at a timing at which the ball B reaches the center portion of the holding piece 677 in the swinging operation. More specifically, for example, even after the pocket to be dropped is specified, the period (amplitude) of the rocking operation is determined each time the ball B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the determination is performed. The period of the swing operation is configured to be stored (updated) in the RAM 223. Then, at the stage when 100 steps have been reached, the value of the swing timer 223w (the elapsed time since the passage of the ball B was detected by the previous ball detection sensor 679) is referred to, and the latest timer value stored in the RAM 223 is referred to. If it is determined that the value is close to the cycle of the swing operation (for example, a value equal to or more than 90% of the cycle of the latest swing operation), control may be performed so that the holding piece 677 is immersed as it is. On the other hand, if the timer value is less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 90% of the period of the latest rocking operation) with respect to the period of the latest rocking operation, it waits until the timer reaches the predetermined ratio, and then holds the holding piece. 677 may be controlled to be immersed in the immersion position. With such a configuration, when the ball B is rolling toward the outside direction (left end or right end direction) of the holding piece 677, or is disposed near the end (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677. In this case, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the holding piece 677 from entering the immersion position. That is, when the holding piece 677 is immersed, the ball B can be reliably dropped in the direction of the drop position without advancing in another direction. Therefore, the time from when the holding piece 677 is immersed to the immersion position to when the ball B starts to fall can be further shortened, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target pocket.

  In the present control example, when the ball B is performing the swinging operation, it is determined that the ball B can be dropped into the pocket located at the drop position next to the pocket currently located at the drop position. In this case, after the rotation operation for 100 steps is performed, the holding piece 677 is configured to be immersed in the immersion position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Randomly every time in a range (for example, within a range after 100 steps to 120 steps) in which the ball B can be surely dropped into the pocket placed next to the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position. It may be configured to drop. More specifically, in the process of S1806 of the fall control process (see FIG. 147), instead of setting the fall after 100 steps, a process of randomly selecting the number of steps in the range of 100 to 120 steps, After the selected number of steps has elapsed, a process of setting the holding piece 677 to be immersed in the immersion position may be executed. With this configuration, the timing at which the ball B falls can be varied. Therefore, compared with the case where the ball B is dropped at the same timing every time, the ball B can be dropped with a more natural appearance (appearance as if the ball B is falling only by gravity).

  In this control example, the type of the pocket placed at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position is determined, and if it is determined that the type is such that the ball B can be dropped, the next drop is performed. Although the configuration is such that the ball B is controlled to drop into the pocket arranged at the position, it is not always necessary to drop the ball B into the pocket arranged at the next drop position. For example, each time a new pocket is placed at the drop position, in addition to determining the type of the pocket placed at the drop position next to that pocket, the type of the pocket currently placed at the drop position is also determined. Even as a configuration to do. If it is determined that both the pocket currently positioned at the drop position and the pocket positioned next at the drop position are of a pocket type that allows the ball B to fall, the pocket at the drop position is determined. Fall control (immersion operation of the holding piece 677) may be set at a timing when there is a possibility of falling into the placed pocket. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be employed in which the timing of the drop control is randomly determined within a range from 5 steps to 120 steps. The range after 5 steps to 99 steps is the timing at which the ball B may fall into the pocket located at the current drop position, and after 100 steps to 120 steps, the next drop position Is the timing at which the ball B falls into the pocket arranged at the position. With this configuration, the timing at which the ball B falls can be made more random, so that it is difficult for the player to have the suspicion that the ball B is intentionally dropped into the determined pocket. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in roulette chance production. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a pocket type of a pocket arranged next at a drop position and a pocket type of a pocket arranged next at a drop position are determined. If it is determined that the two types of pockets are both pockets into which the ball B can be dropped, the drop control (holding piece 677 is randomly performed) within a range in which the two types of pockets can be dropped into either of the two types of pockets. (Immersion) timing may be set. Further, the type of the pocket at the drop position, the type of the pocket arranged at the next drop position, and the type of the pocket arranged at the next drop position may be determined. Then, the pocket arranged next at the drop position is a type that can drop the ball B, and any pocket adjacent to the pocket arranged next at the drop position is also a type that can drop the ball B. In this case, the fall control of the ball B (the immersion of the holding piece 677) may be randomly set within a range in which the ball B can be dropped into any of a plurality of adjacent pockets where the ball B can be dropped. Good. Also in this case, the ball B can be dropped with a more natural appearance as described above. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in roulette chance production.

  In this control example, the type of the pocket placed at the drop position next to the pocket currently placed at the drop position is determined, and it is determined whether the ball B can be dropped. It is not necessary to determine the type of the next pocket every time is placed at the drop position. Before the pocket of the type capable of dropping the ball B is disposed at the drop position, any configuration may be used so that the drop control of the ball B can be set. For example, one of the pockets capable of dropping the ball B You may comprise so that it may be distinguished whether it is a pocket arrange | positioned at this side. That is, a flag may be provided in the RAM 223 for each of the pockets P1 to P30 to indicate whether the pocket is located immediately before the pocket for dropping the ball B. Then, at the stage where the type in which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance production is determined, the flag corresponding to the pocket arranged in front of the pocket of the type in which the ball B can be dropped is set to ON, and the other pockets are set. Is set to off. Thereafter, after the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes equal to or less than the predetermined cycle (1 second), each time a new pocket is placed at the drop position, a flag corresponding to the pocket at the drop position is set. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is set to ON, and to set the fall control after 100 steps, for example, when ON. With this configuration, it is not necessary to determine the type of the pocket to be placed next at the drop position, and to determine whether the ball B can be dropped, and only to determine whether the flag is on. Since it is possible to determine whether the ball B is to be dropped or not by simply doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load required for determining whether the ball B can be dropped.

  In this control example, in the rotation position determination table 222c of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113, the combination of the output of each of the detection sensors A to F and the pocket arranged at the drop position when the combination of the output is obtained. And the corresponding relationship. In addition, the order in which the pockets provided on the rotating member 640 are arranged has been defined. The current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified based on the pocket at the drop position identified from the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F and the order in which the pockets are arranged. The method for specifying the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, a combination of outputs of the detection sensors A to F and an arrangement of pockets starting from a drop position in the case of the combination may be defined in the rotation position determination table 222c. Then, a storage area for storing the current arrangement of the pockets starting from the drop position may be provided in the RAM 223. Each time a new pocket is placed at the drop position (that is, the output of any of the detection sensors A to F is displaced from the L state to the H state). It is also possible to read the current row of pockets starting from the drop position corresponding to the combination of the outputs from the ROM 222 and store it in the RAM 223. In this way, by configuring the RAM 223 to store the current arrangement of the pockets starting from the drop position, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball B can be dropped. In the control process (see FIG. 147), when specifying a pocket to be placed at the next drop position after the pocket placed at the drop position, it is only necessary to read the pocket from a fixed storage area of the RAM 223 (that is, to drop the pocket). There is no need to perform a two-step process of specifying the position arrangement and specifying the pocket next to the drop position), thereby simplifying the process. The same applies to the case where the lighting state of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 is changed. The pocket may be simply read from the determined storage area of the RAM 223 and the type of each read pocket may be determined. It can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, in the roulette chance effect, when the ball B performs a swinging operation on the holding piece 677, the ball B passes through the center of the holding piece 677 (on the front side of the ball detection sensor 679). The period (amplitude) of the swinging motion performed by the ball B is determined from the interval at which the ball B moves. When the determined cycle is equal to or shorter than a predetermined cycle (that is, 1 second), the ball B is allowed to fall. Thus, the ball B can be dropped into any of the pockets after the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation becomes sufficiently narrow. This makes it possible to give the appearance that the ball B falls naturally, as compared to dropping the ball B in a state where the period of the swinging motion of the ball B is large, such as immediately after the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling unnatural to the falling position of the ball B and doubting the result of the roulette chance effect, so that the roulette chance effect can be more enjoyed.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, instead of the holding piece 677 in the first control example, a holding piece 6770 that can be driven to tilt in the left-right direction is provided. The inclination of the holding piece 6770 can be changed according to the arrangement of the sphere B on the upper part of the holding piece 6770. This inclination is configured such that the farther the ball B moves away from the center of the holding piece 6770 due to the swinging operation, the larger the inclination in the downward direction toward the center of the holding piece 6770 becomes. Accordingly, the inclination of the holding piece 6770 while the ball B performs the swinging operation is always in the direction of causing the ball B to flow down toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770 due to excessively strong swinging motion performed by the ball B. It can be securely held at the top and dropped into any pocket.

  In the above-described first control example, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket arranged at the drop position) is determined by a combination of the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F of the rotation position detection sensor 684. It was configured to identify. Accordingly, when the lighting control of the rear LED 625 is performed, only the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket set as the hit pocket according to the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately set to the lighting state. Thus, the player could easily recognize the hit pocket from the appearance. Also, when the ball B is dropped, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is determined, and the lottery result of the special symbol executed in the “preparation mode” (ie, whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”) is determined. It was configured so that it could be dropped into an appropriate type of pocket accordingly.

  In addition, in the second control example, the detection sensors A to F are displaced (the output of at least one of the detection sensors has become H), and then the detection sensors A to F are moved over a plurality of operation steps. It is configured to monitor the outputs of A to F and determine the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket arranged at the drop position) based on the detection results over the plurality of operation steps. With such a configuration, the output of any one of the detection sensors is displaced due to noise or the like, or the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket is moved to the detected position due to rattling of the rotating member 640 or the like. Even if the arrangement timing is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be specified accurately.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that a holding piece 6770 is provided instead of the holding piece 677, and the audio lamp control device 113 The configuration of the provided ROM 222 and RAM 223 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. . Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the structure of the holding piece 6770 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 (a) and (b). As described above, the holding piece 6770 is provided in place of the holding piece 677 in the first control example, and is used to temporarily swing the ball B before dropping the ball B into any pocket. Used for

  FIG. 179 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 6700. As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the holding piece retracting mechanism 6700 in this control example includes a holding piece 6770, a shaft support 6740 connected to the back side of the holding piece 6770, and an inclination provided on the shaft support. Gear 6730a, a retracting gear 6730b, a driving gear 6730c meshed with the tilting gear 6730a, a tilting motor 6750a for giving a driving force to the driving gear 6730c, and an engaging gear 6730b. And a drive motor 6750b for applying a driving force to the drive gear 6730d. Note that the configuration (the shaft support 6740, the tilt gear 6730, etc.) provided on the back side of the holding piece 6770 is provided on the back side of the front case 672, and it is impossible for the player to visually recognize the configuration. It is configured to be.

  The holding piece 6770 is configured to be able to hold the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 on its upper part, similarly to the holding piece 677 in the first control example. The holding piece 6770 drives the projecting / retracting motor 6750b in the forward direction (clockwise direction), and thereby pushes the appearing / retreating gear 6730b meshed with the driving gear 6730d toward the back side in front view. As a result, it changes from the holding position to the separated position. On the other hand, by driving the appearing / retreating motor 6750b in the negative direction (counterclockwise direction), a driving force is provided to the appearing / retreating gear 6730b meshed with the driving gear 6730d so as to be drawn out to the near side in front view. As a result, it changes from the separated position to the holding position.

  Further, the holding piece 6770 in this control example can be tilted by driving the tilting motor 6750a. Specifically, by driving the tilt motor 6750a in the forward direction (clockwise), the drive gear 6730c is also driven in the forward direction, and the tilt gear 6730a meshed with the drive gear 6730c rotates counterclockwise. Driven. Thus, the rotational force of the tilt gear 6730a is transmitted to the holding piece 6770 via the shaft support 6740, and the holding piece 6770 rotates counterclockwise. As a result, the holding piece 6770 is inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in a front view.

  On the other hand, by driving the tilt motor 6750a in the negative direction (counterclockwise), the drive gear 6730c is also driven in the negative direction, and the tilt gear 6730a meshed with the drive gear 6730c is driven clockwise. . Accordingly, the rotational force of the tilt gear 6730a is transmitted to the holding piece 6770 via the shaft support 6740, and the holding piece 6770 rotates clockwise. As a result, the holding piece 6770 is inclined downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction.

  Next, a state where the holding piece 6770 is inclined will be described with reference to FIG. 179 (b). FIG. 179 (b) is a front view when the holding piece 6770 is inclined in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 179 (b), the holding piece 6770 can be tilted (rotated) right and left around the shaft support 6740. When it is detected that the ball B has swung to the right, the holding piece 6770 is rotated counterclockwise by the tilting motor 6750a to form a tilt from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front. (See the solid line in FIG. 179 (b)). As a result, the momentum in which the ball B moves rightward in front view due to the swinging operation is offset by the inclination formed by the holding piece 6770. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball B from being ejected (projecting) out of the range of the holding piece 6770. In this control example, the inclination angle when the holding piece 6770 is inclined can be set in increments of 1 degree. The maximum value of the inclination angle is 6 degrees in each of the left and right directions. This 6 degrees is an angle at which even if the holding piece 6770 is inclined, the inclination cannot be perceived (difficult) by the player. By setting the inclination angle to an angle that cannot be perceived by the player, it is possible to make the ball B feel as if swinging naturally.

  When it is detected that the ball B has swung to the left, the holding piece 6770 is rotated clockwise by the tilting motor 6750a, and the tilt is downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front. Is formed (see the dotted line portion in FIG. 179 (b)). As a result, the momentum of the ball B moving to the left in front view due to the swinging operation is offset by the inclination formed by the holding piece 6770, so that the ball B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770 ( Jumping out) can be reliably prevented.

  As described above, in the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in this control example, two types of drive motors (the tilting motor 6750a and the retracting motor 6750b) are provided, and project and retract between the holding position and the separation position. In addition to the operation, a tilt operation in the left and right direction is enabled. Accordingly, when the ball B performs the swinging operation on the upper portion of the holding piece 6770, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770 due to a too strong swinging action. )can do. Therefore, the ball B can be reliably dropped into any pocket in the swinging effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 180, a configuration for specifying the arrangement of the ball B that performs the swinging operation on the holding piece 6770 will be described. FIG. 180 is a front view of the holding piece 6770. As shown in FIG. 180, instead of the ball detection sensor 679 provided on the front case 672 in the first control example, the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790a to 6790i are provided. Each of these ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i has the same function as the ball detection sensor 679 in the first control example, and detects that the ball B has been placed (passed) in front of the front view. The output becomes H, and when the ball B does not obstruct the near side, the output becomes L. These ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i are arranged inside an opening 6780 provided in the front case 672 in the second control example.

  As the arrangement of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i, specifically, a ball detection sensor (oscillation center sensor) 6790e is provided above the center position of the holding piece 6770. Further, when the holding piece 6770 is equally divided into eight sections (first section to eighth section) in the horizontal direction, the ball detection sensor (first section sensor) 6790a to the ball detection A sensor (fourth section sensor) 6790d, a ball detection sensor (fifth section sensor) 6790f to a ball detection sensor (eighth section sensor) 6790i are provided. That is, the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790d and 6790f to 6790i are arranged at regular intervals in this order from left to right in front view. In the present control example, when the ball B is performing a swinging operation, the arrangement of the ball B above the holding piece 6770 can be specified based on the output information of each sensor. For example, if the ball detection sensor 6790g is on, it indicates that the ball B is located in the sixth section (passing). Further, for example, when the ball detection sensor 6790b is on, it means that the ball B is arranged in the second section (it is passing).

  In this control example, it is determined in which section the ball B is located (passing) from the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i, and the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is varied according to the section. Is configured. That is, as the position of the sphere B moves away from the center of the holding piece 677, the inclination angle toward the center of the holding piece 6770 increases, and when reaching the first section and the eighth section, the maximum inclination angle ( That is, 6 degrees). Accordingly, the force (gravity) of returning the ball B toward the center increases as the ball B moves away from the center of the holding piece 6770, so that the ball B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770. Can be prevented. Therefore, the ball B can be reliably dropped into any pocket in the swinging effect.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 181 and FIG. 182, a configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. FIG. 181 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222.

  The ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that an amplitude determination table 222e and a swing angle determination table 222f are provided. Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 222 in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The amplitude discrimination table 222e stores the sphere B in accordance with the outputs of the sphere detection sensor (sensor for the first section) 6790a to the sphere detection sensor (sensor for the eighth section) 6790i, and the sphere detection sensor (sensor for the swing center) 6790e. 5 is a data table used to specify the amplitude of the swinging operation performed by the user. The amplitude determination table 222e is referred to when the output of any of the sensors is switched from L to H during the swinging operation of the ball B, and the amplitude of the swinging operation of the ball B is determined. In the present control example, it is determined whether or not the amplitude (period) of the swinging motion of the ball B is sufficiently short based on the amplitude specified by using the amplitude determination table 222e, and the falling condition is satisfied (ie, , The ball fallable flag 223fv is set to ON). Note that the amplitude referred to here is based on the width of the section (see FIG. 180). That is, it is a value indicating how many sections the ball B performs the swinging motion. For example, when the amplitude is “4”, it indicates that the sphere B is performing a swinging operation with an amplitude of four sections to the left and right from the center of the holding piece 6770, respectively. In this control example, when the amplitude becomes "1" (that is, for one section to the left and right), the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to ON (see S5511 in FIG. 187).

  The details of the amplitude determination table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 181 (b). As shown in FIG. 181 (b), the amplitude discrimination table 222e includes the type of the ball detection sensor for which the previous output was detected as H and the ball detection sensor for which the current output was detected as H. The amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the ball B is defined in association with the combination with the type. More specifically, for a combination in which the sensor type for which the H output was previously detected is the sensor for the first section 6790a and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790b for the second section, the amplitude of "4 Is specified. In this combination of sensor types, the ball B reaches the first section by rolling to the left in the swinging operation, and reaches the second section by changing direction and rolling to the left. Means you did. Therefore, since the ball B performs the swinging operation with the amplitude of four sections from the center of the holding piece 6770, “4” is set as the amplitude.

  For the combination of the sensor type for which the H output was previously detected for the second section 6790b and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the third section sensor 6790c, "3" is defined as the amplitude. ing. This combination of sensor types is read out because the ball B in the rocking motion reaches the second section by rolling to the left, and changes direction and rolls to the left in the swinging motion. This is the case where three sections are reached. Therefore, since the ball B performs the swing operation with the amplitude of three sections from the center of the holding piece 6770, “3” is set as the amplitude. Note that, when the direction is changed in the first section and the vehicle passes through the second section and the third section (when the amplitude is determined to be “4”), the amplitude is not overwritten. That is, in the present control example, once the amplitude of the swing operation is determined based on the amplitude determination table 222e, the amplitude is not overwritten until the ball B is detected by the swing center sensor 6790e. . Thereby, the amplitude of the swinging operation performed by the ball B can be more accurately determined.

  Similarly, for the combination in which the sensor type for which the H output was previously detected is the sensor for the third section 6790c and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790d for the fourth section, "2" is set as the amplitude. The combination of the prescribed sensor type for which the H output was previously detected is the fourth section sensor 6790d, the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the swing center sensor 6790e, and the sensor type for which the previous H output was detected is For the combination of the fifth section sensor 6790f and the sensor type for which the H output has been detected this time, the swing center sensor 6790e, “1” is defined as the amplitude. For a combination in which the sensor type for which the H output was previously detected is the sensor 6790g for the sixth section and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790f for the fifth section, "2" is defined as the amplitude. For a combination in which the sensor type for which the H output was previously detected is the sensor for the seventh section 6790h and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790g for the sixth section, "3" is defined as the amplitude, For a combination in which the sensor type for which the H output was previously detected is the sensor for the eighth section 6790i and the sensor type for which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790h for the seventh section, "4" is defined as the amplitude. .

  As described above, in the present control example, the configuration is such that the amplitude can be determined in accordance with the order in which the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i enter the H output state. As a result, the amplitude of the ball B can be accurately determined, so that the ball B is dropped into any of the pockets at a more natural timing (after the amplitude of the swing operation becomes “1”). Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 181 (a), the description will be continued. The swing angle determination table 222f is a data table used to set the inclination angle set for the holding piece 6770 based on the arrangement of the sphere B on the holding piece 6770. Details of the swing angle determination table 222f will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the swing angle determination table 222f. As shown in FIG. 182, the swing angle determination table 222f is referred to when any of the outputs of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i is in the H state, and detects the amplitude of the swing operation and the current H. The tilt angle (swing angle) set for the holding piece 6770 is defined in association with the type of the sensor (the current type).

  More specifically, for the combination of the amplitude of “4” and the current type of the first section sensor 6790a, 6 degrees is defined as the tilt angle (swing angle) set in the holding piece 6770. For this reason, in the case where the ball B performs the swinging operation with the amplitude of the four sections, when the ball 6B is detected by the first section sensor 6790a, the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 becomes 6 degrees which is the upper limit value. Is set. As a result, the holding piece 6770 is tilted 6 degrees downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front, thereby canceling the momentum of the swing operation performed by the ball B, and changing the direction in the first section to hold the piece 6770. Can be rolled in the direction of the center.

  Similarly, for a combination having an amplitude of “4” and a current type of the second section sensor 6790b, a tilt angle (oscillation angle) of 4 degrees is defined, an amplitude of “4”, and a current type of the third section sensor 6790b. With respect to the combination of the sensor 6790c, 2 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle), the combination of the amplitude “4” and the current type of the sixth section sensor 6790g as the inclination angle (swing angle) − Twice is specified. In addition, for the combination of the amplitude of “4” and the current type of the sensor 6790h for the seventh section, −4 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle), the amplitude of “4”, and the current type of the sensor for the eighth section. For the combination of the sensor 6790i, a tilt angle (swing angle) of −6 degrees is defined. It should be noted that the negative angle means an angle at which the holding piece 6770 is inclined from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front.

  Further, for the combination of the amplitude of “3” and the current type of the second section sensor 6790b, 5 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle), and the amplitude of “3” and the current type of the third section sensor 6790b. For the combination of 6790c, 3 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (oscillation angle), and for the combination of the amplitude “3” and the current type of the sixth section sensor 6790g, −3 as the inclination angle (oscillation angle). For the combination of the degree, the amplitude of “4”, and the current type of the seventh section sensor 6790h, −5 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle).

  Further, for the combination of the amplitude “2” and the current type of the third section sensor 6790c, 4 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle), the amplitude “2” and the current type of the sixth section sensor 6790c. For the combination of 6790 g, -4 degrees is defined as the inclination angle (swing angle).

  As described above, by changing the inclination angle (oscillation angle) according to the arrangement of the ball B and the amplitude of the swing operation of the ball B, the ball B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770. Can be suppressed. The reason why the inclination angle is increased as the amplitude of the swinging operation decreases is to prevent (suppress) instantaneous stop when the amplitude decreases. If the amplitude becomes small and the period from when it is determined that the condition for dropping the ball B is satisfied to when the swinging motion of the ball B stops is short, the pocket where the ball B can be dropped is located at the drop position. Before the ball B is placed, the swinging motion of the ball B may be stopped, and the player may feel distrust. On the other hand, in the present control example, since the inclination angle (oscillation angle) increases as the amplitude decreases, the oscillation operation can be continued for a longer time. Therefore, while the swinging operation is being performed (before the swinging operation stops), the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket.

  In this control example, the type of the sensor that detected the ball B and the swing angle are defined for each amplitude, but only the sensor type and the tilt angle (the swing angle) are independent of the amplitude of the swing operation. May be specified. Specifically, for example, the correspondence in the case of the amplitude “4” in this control example may be applied regardless of the amplitude of the swing operation. With this configuration, the data amount of the swing angle determination table 222f can be reduced while preventing the ball B from being ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770.

  In the present control example, the upper limit value of the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is set to 6 degrees, but the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 may be arbitrarily determined within a range that makes it difficult for the player to perceive that the inclination of the holding piece 6770 has been changed. Also, the correspondence between the sensor type and the swing angle can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the ball B does not exit out of the range of the holding piece 6770.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 183, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-described first control example, the RAM 223 in this control example further includes an amplitude counter 223iv, a previous type storage area 223jv, a current type storage area 223kv, and an arrangement specification. A flag 223mv, an arrangement specified flag 223nv, a detection value storage area 223ov, and an amplitude determination flag 223pv are provided.

  The amplitude counter 223iv is a counter that indicates the amplitude of the swing operation, and stores the amplitude (any one of 1 to 4) read from the amplitude determination table 222e. In the amplitude discrimination processing (see FIG. 187), the amplitude counter 223iv overwrites the read amplitude each time a different amplitude is read (S5509 in FIG. 187). On the other hand, when it is determined that the amplitude of the swinging operation has become 1, the value is initialized to 0 after the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to ON (see S5512 in FIG. 187). The amplitude counter 223iv determines whether the falling condition of the ball B is satisfied or not and the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770.

  Each of the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv is a storage area for storing information indicating the type of the sensor (any one of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i). The previous type storage area 223jv stores the type (previous type) of the sensor in which the previous passage of the ball B was detected, and the current type storage area 223kv stores the type of the sensor in which the passage of the current ball B was detected (the current Type) is stored. Based on the sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv, the amplitude of the swing motion performed by the ball B is determined. This time, the type storage area 223 kv stores the H output state of any of the sensors in the swing effect processing 2 (see FIG. 185) when it is detected that any of the sensors is in the H output state. The type is stored (see S1722 and S1727 of FIG. 185). Further, the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv is transferred to the previous type storage area 223jv until a new sensor whose output becomes H is detected (see S1726 in FIG. 185).

  The arrangement specifying flag 223mv is a flag indicating whether the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is being specified. If the arrangement specification in-progress flag 223mv is on, it means that the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is being specified, and if it is off, it means that the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is not being specified. This arrangement specifying flag 223mv is set to ON when the output of any one of the sensors becomes H from the state where the output of the rotation position detection sensor 684 is all L (see S5903 in FIG. 193). On the other hand, when the rotation position of the rotating member 640 is completely specified from the detection results over a plurality of steps, the setting is turned off (see S5809 in FIG. 192 and S6009 in FIG. 194).

  The arrangement specified flag 223nv is a flag indicating whether the specification of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 has been completed. If the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on, it indicates that the specification of the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 has been completed, and if it is off, it means that the specification of the rotating member 640 has not been completed. This arrangement specified flag 223nv is set to ON when the specification of the rotation position of the rotation member 640 is completed based on the detection results of the rotation position detection sensor 684 over a plurality of steps (see S5809 in FIG. 192 and S6009 in FIG. 194). ). On the other hand, when it is detected that all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 have been switched to L after the specification of the arrangement of the rotation member 640 is completed, the setting is turned off ( (See S5906 in FIG. 193).

  The detection value storage area 223ov is a storage area in which the detection values of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 can be stored for a plurality of steps (15 steps). When the above-described arrangement specifying flag 223mj is set to ON, the detection values of the respective detection sensors A to F are stored in the detection value storage area 223ov each time the rotating member 640 rotates one step. If the stored values are normal when the detected values for 15 steps are stored, the rotational position member 640 is specified based on the stored values (S5807 in FIG. 192 and S5807 in FIG. 194). See S6007).

  The amplitude determination flag 223pv is a flag indicating whether or not the amplitude has been determined based on the amplitude determination table 222e when the ball B is performing a swinging operation above the holding piece 6770. If the amplitude determination flag 223pv is on, it means that the amplitude has been determined (the sphere B is rolling toward the center of the movable piece 6770), and if it is off, the amplitude determination has been completed. (The ball B is rolling in a direction away from the center of the movable piece 6770). The amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to ON when the amplitude is determined from the detection result of the ball detection sensor when the ball B is performing the swinging operation (see S5506 in FIG. 187). On the other hand, each time the swing center sensor 6790e detects the passage of the ball B, it is turned off.

<Regarding control processing of voice lamp control device in second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. The main process 2 (see FIG. 184) is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 145) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

  Of the main processing 2 (see FIG. 184) in the second control example, in the processing of S1601 to S1610 and S1612 to S1621, S1601 to S1610 and S1612 of the main processing (see FIG. 145) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing as the processing from S1621 to S1621 is executed. In the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) in the second control example, when the process of S1610 ends, the swing effect process 2 (S1631) is executed instead of the swing effect process (S1611) in the first control example. Is done. In the swing effect process 2 (S1631), similarly to the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) in the first control example, the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 when the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is executed. This is a process for executing various controls from the time when the ball B is thrown to the time when the ball B falls into any pocket (during a swing effect). Details of the swing effect process 2 (S1631) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) in this control example, after the end of the effect setting process (S1613), the rotation setting process 2 (S1632) and the lighting setting process 2 (S1633) are executed, and the process proceeds to S1614. Move to. The rotation setting process 2 (S1632) is a process similar to the rotation setting process (see FIG. 155) executed in the execution command process (see FIG. 155) in the first control example, and is performed during the rotation of the rotating member 640. This is a process for changing the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 under conditions. The lighting setting process 2 (S1633) is a process for controlling the lighting of the rear LED 625, similarly to the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) in the first control example.

  Next, the above-described swing effect process 2 (S1631) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 185. In the swing effect process 2 (S1631) in the second control example, in each of the processes of S1701, S1702, S1704, and S1705, S1701, S1702 of the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) in the first control example, respectively. The same processes as those in S1704 and S1705 are executed.

  In the swing effect process 2 (see FIG. 185) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the swing non-detection flag 223v is ON (S1701: Yes), the ball detection sensor 6890a It is determined whether all the outputs of 〜6890i (see FIG. 180) are in the L state (S1721). If all the outputs are in the L state (S1721: Yes), the ball B is thrown but the holding piece 6770 This means that the processing has not yet been reached, and thus this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1721, if it is determined that any of the outputs of the ball detection sensors 6890a to 6890i is in the H state (S1721: No), then the type of the detection sensor whose output is in the H state is determined. The corresponding information is stored in the current type storage area 223 kv (S1722). Next, 4 which is the maximum value is stored in the amplitude counter 223iv, and the amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to ON (S1723). This is because immediately after the ball B is thrown, the momentum of the ball B is the strongest, and the amplitude should be maximum. After the processing in S1723, the process proceeds to S1704.

  In the swing effect process 2 (see FIG. 185) in the present control example, if it is determined in the process of S1705 that the ball fallable flag 223fv is ON (S1705: Yes), the drop control in the first control example is performed. Instead of the process (see FIG. 147), a drop control process 2 is executed (S1724), and the process ends. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 186, this drop control processing 2 (S1724) is similar to the drop control processing (see FIG. 147) in the first control example, in which the ball B is moved to any pocket. This is the process for dropping.

  In the swing effect process 2 (see FIG. 185) in the present control example, when it is determined in the process of S1705 that the ball fallable flag 223fv is off (S1705: No), the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i ( It is determined whether all the outputs in FIG. 180 are in the L state (S1725). If all the outputs are in the L state (S1725: Yes), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1725, when it is determined that the output of any of the sensors is in the H state (S1725: No), the information stored in the current type storage area 223kv is transferred to the previous type storage area 223jv. Then (S1726), the information corresponding to the type of the sensor that has detected the state of output H in the current process of S1725 is overwritten in the current type storage area 223kv (S1727). As a result, the type of the sensor that has detected the output of H this time is stored in the current type storage area 223 kv, and the type of the sensor that has detected the output of H in the previous processing of S1722 or S1727 is stored in the previous type storage area 223jv. Can be kept.

  After the processing of S1727, the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the ball B is determined based on the storage contents of the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv updated in each processing of S1726 and S1727. An amplitude determination process is performed (S1728). The details of the amplitude determination processing (S1728) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the amplitude discrimination process (S1728) ends, a swing angle control process for setting the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 according to the arrangement of the ball B is executed (S1729), and this process ends. . This swing angle control processing (S1729) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, details of the above-described drop control process 2 (S1724) will be described. This drop control process 2 (S1724) is a process executed in place of the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example to drop the ball B into any pocket, as described above. is there.

  In each of the drop control processes 2 (see FIG. 186) in the second control example (see FIG. 186), the processes in S1803 to S1806 are the same as the respective drop processes in steps S1803 to S1806 in the first control example (see FIG. 147). The processing is executed. When the drop control process 2 (see FIG. 186) in the present control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S1811). This arrangement specified flag 223nv is a flag indicating whether the specification of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 has been completed, as described above. If it is determined that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is not on (that is, it is off) (S1811: No), the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is unknown, and can the ball B be dropped? This means that it is in a state where it cannot be determined whether or not the processing is completed, and thus the present processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1811, when it is determined that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S1811: Yes), the pocket of the drop position is read from the rotation position storage area 223u, and the current arrangement of the rotation member 640 is performed. Is specified (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1803.

  By this drop control process 2 (see FIG. 186), similarly to the first control example, the ball B is dropped into a pocket of an appropriate type according to whether or not the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”.

  Next, the details of the amplitude determination processing (S1728) will be described with reference to FIG. This amplitude determination process (S1728) is one of the swing effect processes (see FIG. 185), and is a process for determining the amplitude of the swing operation performed by the ball B as described above. In the amplitude determination process (see FIG. 187), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the swing center sensor (sphere detection sensor) 6790e is in an H state (S5501). (S5501: Yes), it means that the ball B has reached the upper center of the holding piece 6770 by the swinging operation, so that the amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to ON (S5502), and this processing ends. Accordingly, when the ball B passes through the upper center of the holding piece 6770 and rolls to the opposite side, the amplitude can be determined. Therefore, each time the ball B rolls (oscillates) to the upper right or left side of the holding piece 6770, the amplitude of the swing operation can be determined, so that the amplitude can be determined more accurately.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5501, if it is determined that the output of the swing center sensor (ball detection sensor) 6790e is not H (that is, the output is L) (S5501: No), then, the amplitude determination flag 223pv is turned on. Is determined (S5503). If the amplitude determination flag 223pv is on (S5503: Yes), it means that the amplitude of the swinging motion has already been determined and that it is in the process of rolling toward the center of the holding piece 6770, so this processing is performed as it is. To end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5503 that the amplitude determination flag 223pv is off (S5503: No), the amplitude determination table 222e (see FIG. 181 (b)) is read to determine the amplitude (S5504). ).

  Then, the sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv are compared with the specified contents of the read amplitude determination table 222e, and the combination of the sensor types specified in the amplitude determination table 222e is determined. Is determined (S5505). In the process of S5505, when it is determined that a combination not defined in the amplitude determination table 222e is stored (S5505: No), it is determined that the ball B has not reached the left end or the right end of the swing operation. In other words, since the amplitude cannot be determined from the current combination of sensor types (the combination of the sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv), the present processing is terminated and the swing is performed. It returns to effect processing 2 (refer to FIG. 185).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5505 that the combination of the sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv is defined in the amplitude determination table 222e (S5505: Yes), the amplitude is determined. The flag 223pv is set to ON (S5506), and the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is read (S5507). Next, it is determined whether or not the read value of the amplitude counter 223iv matches the amplitude corresponding to the combination of the sensors defined in the amplitude determination table 222e (S5508).

  In the process of S5508, when it is determined that the amplitudes match (S5508: Yes), it means that the amplitude of the swing operation has not changed, and therefore, the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is not updated and is not changed. This processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5508 that the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is different from the amplitude corresponding to the combination of the sensors defined in the amplitude determination table 222e (S5508: No), the process proceeds from the amplitude determination table 222e. The read amplitude value is updated by overwriting the amplitude counter 223iv (S5509), and it is determined whether the updated value of the amplitude counter 223iv is 1 (S5510). If the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is 1 (S5510), it is determined that the amplitude of the swing operation performed by the ball B is sufficiently small (the condition for dropping the ball B into any pocket is satisfied). Therefore, the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to ON (S5511), the amplitude counter 223iv is initialized to 0, and the amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to OFF (S5512), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5510 that the value of the updated amplitude counter 223iv is not 1 (S5510: No), the amplitude of the swing operation performed by the ball B is relatively large, and the ball B falls. Therefore, the present process is terminated as it is likely to have an unnatural appearance.

  By performing the amplitude determination process (see FIG. 187), the amplitude of the swing operation can be accurately determined based on the outputs of the plurality of ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i provided on the front case 661. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped after the amplitude of the swinging operation performed by the ball B becomes sufficiently small, so that the ball B can be dropped from the holding piece 6770 with a natural appearance.

  Next, the swing angle control processing (S1729) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This swing angle control process (S1729) is one of the swing effect processes (see FIG. 185), and as described above, the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 according to the arrangement of the ball B as described above. This is the process for setting

  When the swing angle control process (see FIG. 188) is executed, first, the value of the amplitude counter 223iv and the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv are read out (S5601). 222f (see FIG. 182) is read (S5602). Next, it is determined whether or not the combination of the value of the amplitude counter 223iv read in the process of S5601 and the sensor type stored in the current type storage area 223kv is specified in the swing angle determination table 222f ( (S5603), when it is determined that the combination is not defined in the swing angle determination table 222f (S5603), it means that it is not necessary to change the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770. Then, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, when it is determined that the combination read in the process of S5601 is specified in the swing angle determination table 222f (S5603: Yes), the swing angle is associated with the combination. The inclination angle (oscillation angle) defined in the determination table 222f is set as the inclination angle (oscillation angle) of the holding piece 6770 (S5604), and the process ends.

  By executing the swing angle control process (see FIG. 188), the inclination angle (swing angle) can be varied according to the arrangement of the ball B and the amplitude of the swing operation of the ball B (ball B). The more away from the center of the holding piece 6770, the greater the inclination toward the center of the holding piece 6770 can be increased.) It can be suppressed more reliably. Further, as described above, the swing angle determination table 222f is configured so that the tilt angle increases as the amplitude of the swing operation decreases, so that when the amplitude decreases, the swing operation is immediately performed. Can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, since the swinging operation can be continued for a longer time, the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket while the swinging operation is performed (before the swinging operation stops). .

  Next, the rotation setting process 2 (S1632) will be described with reference to FIG. The rotation setting process 2 is one of the main processes 2 (see FIG. 184), and is for changing the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 under predetermined conditions during the rotation of the rotating member 640, as described above. Processing. Of the rotation setting processing 2 (see FIG. 189) in the second control example, S2801 and S2805 to S2808 in the rotation setting processing (see FIG. 157) in the first control example are S2801 and S2805 and S2808, respectively. The same processing as the above processing is executed.

  In the rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189) in the present control example, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the ball fallable flag 223fv is on (S2801: Yes), the arrangement specified flag 223nv is turned on. It is determined whether or not is (S2811). If it is determined that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is not on (that is, it is off) (S2811: No), the current arrangement is unknown and the pocket where the ball B can be dropped is located near the drop position. Since it is not possible to determine whether or not they are arranged, the present process is terminated and the process returns to the main process 2 (see FIG. 184).

  On the other hand, in the process of S2811, when it is determined that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S2811: Yes), the information corresponding to the pocket arranged at the drop position is read from the rotation position storage area 223u ( S2812), and the process moves to S2805.

  By executing the rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189), the positional relationship between the current drop position and the nearest pocket where the ball B can be dropped is grasped, and the rotational speed of the rotary member 640 is set to the position. It can be changed according to the relationship. As a result, it is possible to prevent the swing operation from being continued for a long time after the period (amplitude) of the swing operation performed by the ball B is reduced, so that any one of the pockets can be more naturally viewed. The ball B can be dropped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 190, execution command processing 2 (S2121) executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 150) instead of execution command processing (S2113, see FIG. 155) in the first control example will be described. I do. This execution command processing 2 (see FIG. 190) is, similarly to the execution command processing (see FIG. 155) in the first control example, a role driven by the motor driver in accordance with the execution command output from various motor drivers. This is a process for determining the progress of the operation of the object and performing control according to the progress.

  In the execution command processing 2 (see FIG. 190) in the second control example, in each of S2601 to S2608 and S2611 to S2614, in the execution command processing (see FIG. 155) in the first control example, S2601 to S2608 are executed. Also, the same processing as the respective processing of S2611 to S2614 is executed. In the execution command processing 2 (see FIG. 190) in this control example, when the processing of S2608 ends, the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are monitored over a plurality of steps (15 steps). (Sampling), and an arrangement specifying process for specifying the pocket arranged at the drop position is executed (S2621), and this process ends. Details of the arrangement specifying process (S2621) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart illustrating the above-described arrangement specifying process (S2621). When this arrangement specifying process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the swing effect flag 223ev is on (S5701). If it is determined that the swing effect flag 223ev is off (S5701: No), the ball B swings At the stage before the operation is performed, the during-rotation specifying process for specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is executed (S5702), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5701 that the swing effect flag 223ev is ON (S5701: Yes), the swinging identifying process for identifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 during the execution of the swing effect is performed. Execute (S5703) and end this process. Details of the during-rotation specifying process (S5702) and the during-swing specifying process (S5703) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 192 to 194.

  First, with reference to FIG. 192, details of the during-rotation identification process (S5702) will be described. When the during-rotation identification process (see FIG. 192) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the placement identification flag 223mv is on (S5801), and it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off). In this case (S5801: No), it is determined whether the output of the rotational position detection sensor 684 has been displaced (the output of any of the detection sensors A to F has been switched from the L state to the H state). Is determined, and when the output is displaced, a non-specified time process for starting the specification of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is executed (S5802), and this process ends. Details of the non-specification process (S5802) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5801 that the placement specification flag 223mv is on (S5801: Yes), the combination of the detection values (output) of the detection sensors A to F is stored in each storage area of the detection value storage area 223ov. Of these, the data is stored in a free area where no data is stored (S5803). Then, it is determined whether or not the output combinations of the detection sensors A to F have been stored in the detection value storage area 223ov for the upper limit of 15 sets (S5804). If it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached (S5804). : No), which means that the number of detections required to determine the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is less than the number of detections, and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5804 that the detected value storage area 223ov is stored with the upper limit (15 sets) of detected value combinations (S5804: Yes), the detected value is stored in the detected value storage area 223ov. It is determined whether the combination of all the detected values is the same (S5805). If it is determined that a combination of mutually different detection values is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S5805: No), all data stored in the detection value storage area 223ov is reset (S5806). Then, the present process ends. By resetting all the data, the combination of the detected values can be stored again in the detected value storage area 223ov until the upper limit (15 sets) is reached for each operation step.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5805, when it is determined that all the combinations of the detection values stored in the detection value storage area 223ov are the same (S5805: Yes), the rotation position determination table 222c is read, and the detection sensors A to F are read. The pocket specified in association with the combination of the detected values is specified (S5807), and information corresponding to the specified pocket is stored in the rotational position storage area 223u (S5808). Then, the placement specification flag 223mv is set to off, and the placement specification completed flag 223nv is set to on (S5809), and this process ends.

  By executing the rotation identification processing (see FIG. 192), the combination of the outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over 15 operation steps and changed to the detection result. It is possible to identify the pocket corresponding to the detection result after judging whether or not there is any. Therefore, the output of any one of the detection sensors is displaced by noise or the like, or the rattling of the rotating member 640 causes the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket to be disposed at the detected position. Even if it is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

  In this control example, if at least one of the combinations of the detection values for the 15 steps is different, the detection value is stored regardless of the timing at which the combination is stored and the number of times different combinations are stored. The configuration is such that the area 223ov is reset, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, of the combinations stored in the detection value storage area 223ov, only the storage area in which a different combination is stored is cleared, and the detection value is additionally acquired by the number of times in which the different combination is stored, and the area is cleared. It may be stored and it may be determined whether all combinations match. Accordingly, when a combination of different detection values is included, it is not necessary to obtain an additional 15 steps of detection value combinations each time, so that it is possible to reduce the time required to specify the pocket at the drop position. it can.

  Next, the details of the non-specification process (S5802) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the non-specific processing (S5802). As described above, in the non-specified time process (S5802), the output of the rotational position detection sensor 684 is displaced (from the state of all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F being L to the state of the output of any of the sensors being H). This is a process for determining whether or not the output has been displaced, and when the output has been displaced, starts specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640.

  When the non-specified time process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S5901). It is determined whether all are L (S5902). In the process of S5902, when it is determined that all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are L (S5902: Yes), it means that no pocket is arranged at the drop position, and the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is detected. Since this processing cannot be performed, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S5902, when it is determined that any of the detection sensors A to F is in the H state (S5902: No), it is determined that one of the pockets is arranged at the drop position. Means that the output of the sensor has been displaced. Therefore, in this case, in order to monitor (monitor) the outputs of the detection sensors A to F over a plurality of operation steps in the rotation operation, the arrangement specifying flag 223mv is set to ON (S5903), and the rotation position is stored. The information corresponding to the pocket placed at the previous drop position stored in the area 223u is cleared and reset (S5904), and the process ends. By turning on the arrangement specification flag 223mv, in the subsequent rotation specification processing (see FIG. 192), in the processing of S5801, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored over a plurality of steps. S5803 to S5809 can be executed.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5901 that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is ON (S5901: Yes), then, it is determined whether all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are L. It is determined (S5905), and when it is determined that the outputs of all the sensors are L (S5905: Yes), the arrangement specified flag 223nv is turned off (S5906), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the output of at least one of the detection sensors A to F is H (S5905: No), the process ends. By executing the processes of S5905 and S5906, the period during which the arrangement specified flag 223nv is ON can be limited to only while the detected portion 641c passes through the positions of the detection sensors A to F. it can. That is, the period during which the arrangement of the rotating member 640 stored in the rotational position storage area 223u is referred to can be limited to the period during which the detected portion 641c passes the position of each of the detection sensors A to F. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the detected portion 641c passes through the positions of the detection sensors A to F and, for example, a drop of the ball B is set in a state where two pockets straddle the drop position. be able to.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 194, details of the swinging identification process (S5704) will be described. This rocking identification processing (S5704) is one of the arrangement identification processing (see FIG. 191), and is processing for identifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 during execution of the rocking effect, as described above. is there.

  When the swinging identification process (see FIG. 194) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the arrangement identification flag 223mv is on (S6001), and it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off). If (S6001: No), the above-described non-specific processing is executed (S6002), and this processing ends. Since the non-specific processing (S6002) is the same as the non-specific processing (S5802, see FIG. 193), which is one of the rotating specifying processing (see FIG. 192), its detailed processing is described in detail. Description is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6001 that the placement specification flag 223mv is ON (S6001: Yes), the combination of the detection values (output) of the detection sensors A to F is stored in each storage area of the detection value storage area 223ov. Of these, data is stored (stored) in a free area where no data is stored (S6003). Then, it is determined whether the combinations of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F have been stored (stored) in the detection value storage area 223ov for the upper limit of 15 sets (S6004), and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached. (S6004: No) means that the number of detections required to determine the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is less than the number of times, and thus the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6004 that the combination of the upper limit number (15 sets) of the detection value is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S6004: Yes), the combination is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov. It is determined whether or not 80% (2) or more of the 15 combinations of the detection values have the same detection result (S6005). If it is determined that the same combination of detection results is less than 80% (S6005: No), all data stored in the detection value storage area 223ov is reset (S6006), and the process ends. I do. By resetting all the data, the combination of the detected values can be stored again in the detected value storage area 223ov until the upper limit (15 sets) is reached for each operation step.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6005, if it is determined that 80% or more of the combinations of the detection values among the 15 combinations of the detection values stored in the detection value storage area 223ov are the same (S6005: Yes), the rotational position is determined. The discrimination table 222c is read, a pocket defined in association with the combination of the detection values of the detection sensors A to F is specified (S6007), and information corresponding to the specified pocket is stored in the rotation position storage area 223u (S6007). (S6008). Then, the placement specification flag 223mv is set to off, and the placement specification completed flag 223nv is set to on (S6009), and the process ends.

  By executing the swinging specific process (see FIG. 194), the combination of the outputs (detected values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over 15 operation steps, and 80% or more The pocket corresponding to the detection result that matches at the ratio can be specified. That is, since the conditions for specifying the pockets are less strict than in the specification processing during rotation (see FIG. 192), the arrangement of the rotation member 640 (the pocket at the drop position) can be specified more quickly. It should be noted that the during-swinging specific process (see FIG. 194) is executed only during the execution of the swaying effect. The swing effect is an effect in which the ball B is finally dropped into any pocket, as described above. For this reason, if it takes time until the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified, the timing of dropping the ball B is also delayed, and there is a possibility that the ball B cannot be dropped into a target pocket. On the other hand, in the present control example, during the execution of the rocking effect, the rocking determination process is performed with a weak determination condition (that is, the time until the arrangement is specified is relatively short) (see FIG. 194). Configuration. Thus, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be specified more quickly, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target type of pocket.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second control example has the configuration in which the holding piece 6770 whose tilt angle is variable is provided, and the tilt angle of the holding piece 6770 is variable according to the arrangement of the sphere B above the holding piece 6770. The configuration is such that Here, if the arrangement of the holding piece 6770 is fixed in swinging the ball B, if the momentum when the ball B is thrown is too strong (initial velocity is too fast), the ball B There is a risk of passing through the upper surface of the 6770 and entering an unexpected position such as the back side of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, as a method of performing the swinging operation on the upper portion of the holding piece 6770 regardless of the force of the ball B, a method of widening the width of the holding piece 6770 or a steep slope from both sides of the holding piece 6770 toward the center is used. However, if the width of the holding piece 6770 is increased, it is necessary to secure a space correspondingly, so that there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design is reduced. In addition, when the inclination of the holding piece 6770 toward the center is steep, the amplitude (period) of the swinging operation is likely to be small, so that the time for the ball B to perform the swinging operation becomes short, and the ball B falls. There is a risk that the ball B will stop before the movement. In other words, there is a possibility that the appearance of the ball B does not fall into the pocket even though the ball B is at rest, resulting in an extremely unnatural appearance.

  On the other hand, in the present second control example, the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is configured to be variable. The inclination angle is controlled such that the more the ball B moves away from the upper center of the holding piece 6770 by the swinging operation, the larger the inclination of the downward direction toward the upper center of the holding piece 6770 becomes. Accordingly, the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 while the ball B performs the swinging operation can be set to the direction in which the ball B always flows down toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770 due to excessively strong swinging motion performed by the ball B. It can be securely held at the top and dropped into any pocket. Further, by making the configuration in which the ball B is held above the holding piece 6770 by changing the inclination angle (the swing angle), it is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the holding piece 6770, and to save space. be able to. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. Further, in the second control example, the inclination angle (oscillation angle) is configured to decrease as the ball B approaches the upper center of the holding piece 6770, so that the momentum of the oscillation operation is reduced. It can be difficult to be. Therefore, since the swinging operation can be continued for a longer time, the ball B can be surely dropped into any pocket before the swinging operation of the ball B is stopped.

  Further, in the second control example, when the outputs of the detection sensors A to F for detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 are displaced (the output of at least one of the detection sensors becomes H), a plurality of operation steps are performed. To monitor (sampling) the outputs of the detection sensors A to F, and determine the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket arranged at the drop position) based on the detection results over the plurality of operation steps. It is configured. With such a configuration, the output of any one of the detection sensors is displaced due to noise or the like, or the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket is moved to the detected position due to rattling of the rotating member 640 or the like. Even if the arrangement timing is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be specified accurately.

  In this control example, two types of specifying methods are provided as a method of specifying the rotational position of the rotating member 640. As a first method, a combination of outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over a predetermined step (15 steps) of operation steps, and all detections for the predetermined step (15 steps) are detected. When the combination of the values is the same, a method of specifying a pocket corresponding to the detection result is set. In this method, when at least one combination of the detection results is different from the combination of the other detection results, the combination of the detection results for the predetermined step is obtained again, and the combinations of all the detection results are matched. Only when this is done, the type of pocket is specified. According to this first method, the output of any one of the detection sensors is displaced due to noise or the like, and the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket is moved to the detected position due to rattling of the rotating member 640 or the like. Even when the timing at which the rotating member 640 is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

  On the other hand, as a second method, a combination of outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over a predetermined step (15 steps) of operation steps, and is monitored for a predetermined step (15 steps). When a combination of detected values equal to or more than 80% (that is, for 12 steps) among the combinations of detected values is the same, a method is set to specify a pocket corresponding to the combination of detected results occupying 80%. ing. Compared to the first method, the second method is configured to allow a maximum of 20% of the displacement of the detection result, which is inferior in accuracy, but has little re-detection. Can be shortened. This second method is adopted when the ball B is dropped into a pocket. In order to determine whether or not to drop the ball B, when specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640, if it takes time to specify the arrangement, the timing for dropping the ball B is also delayed, and the aim is increased. There is a possibility that the ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket. On the other hand, in the present control example, during the execution of the rocking effect, the rocking determination process is performed with a weak determination condition (that is, the time until the arrangement is specified is relatively short) (see FIG. 194). Configuration. Thus, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be specified more quickly, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target type of pocket.

  In the second control example, in the first method and the second method, the detection result of the rotation position detection sensor 684 for 15 steps is monitored (sampled), and based on the detection result for the 15 steps. Although the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified or the re-detection is determined, the number of monitoring (sampling) steps is not limited to 15 steps. It may be arbitrarily determined according to the number of steps at which the detected portion 641c can be detected.

  In the second control example, it is determined which section of the eight sections (first section to eighth section) the ball B is passing in the swing effect, and the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is determined. Although variable, it is not limited to this. The number of sphere detection sensors may be increased along with the increase of the section, or the number of sphere detection sensors may be reduced along with the decrease of the section. When the number of sections is increased, the arrangement of the sphere B can be specified more accurately, so that the angle of the holding piece 6770 can be set more finely. On the other hand, if the number of sections is reduced, the number of sensors can be reduced, so that the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. Further, the failure rate can be reduced.

  In this control example, the type of sensor that detected the ball B and the swing angle are defined for each swing amplitude of the ball B in the swing angle determination table 222f (see FIG. 182). Regardless of the amplitude of the dynamic operation, only the sensor type and the tilt angle (swing angle) may be defined. Specifically, for example, the correspondence (see the amplitude “4” in FIG. 182) in the case of the amplitude “4” in this control example may be applied regardless of the amplitude of the swing operation. With this configuration, the data amount of the swing angle determination table 222f can be reduced while preventing the ball B from being ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770.

  In the present control example, the upper limit value of the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is set to 6 degrees, but the player can arbitrarily change the tilt of the holding piece 6770 within a range where it is difficult to perceive the change. May be determined. Also, the correspondence between the sensor type and the swing angle can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the ball B does not exit out of the range of the holding piece 6770.

  In the second control example, when the rotation member 640 is rotating and any pocket is placed at the drop position before the ball B is thrown, the detection sensors A to The output of F is monitored, and if at least one of the combinations of outputs for the 15 steps is different, regardless of the timing at which the combination is stored or the number of times different combinations are stored, the detected value storage area is not changed. The 223ov is configured to be reset (that is, the monitoring of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is additionally performed for 15 steps), but is not limited thereto. For example, of the combinations stored in the detection value storage area 223ov, only the storage area in which a different combination is stored is cleared, and the detection value is additionally acquired by the number of times in which the different combination is stored, and the area is cleared. It may be stored and it may be determined whether all combinations match. Accordingly, when a combination of different detection values is included, it is not necessary to obtain an additional 15 steps of detection value combinations each time, so that it is possible to reduce the time required to specify the pocket at the drop position. it can.

  In the second control example, when any one of the pockets of the rotating member 640 is placed at the drop position, the combinations of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are monitored for 15 steps, and all the combinations match. (1st method) or when it is determined that 80% of the 15 steps match (2nd method), the pocket at the drop position is specified. The number of steps for specifying (arrangement of the rotating member 640) is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. By adopting the number of steps (for example, 10 steps) smaller than 15 steps, the pocket at the drop position (the arrangement of the rotating member 640) can be specified more quickly. In addition, by adopting a step number greater than 15 steps (for example, 18 steps), it is possible to more accurately specify the pocket at the drop position (the arrangement of the rotating member 640). In addition, in the first method and the second method, the number of steps for specifying the pocket at the drop position (arrangement of the rotating member 640) does not necessarily need to be the same, and different numbers of steps are employed. Is also good.

  In the second control example, when one of the pockets of the rotating member 640 is placed at the drop position, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored for 15 steps, and the detection result for 15 steps is obtained. Contains at least one combination of different detection values (the first method), or when it is determined that the combination of the detection values is less than 80% in the 15 steps (the second method). Although the configuration is such that the detected values for the additional 15 steps are monitored, it is not always necessary to monitor the detected values for the 15 steps. For example, in the first method, when a detection value changes in the middle of 15 steps, monitoring of an additional 15 steps may be started at that time. Also, for example, in the second method, even if the number of detected steps is less than 15 steps, if it is determined that the matching detection value is less than 80% of 15 steps (for 12 steps), an additional You may comprise so that monitoring of 15 steps may be started. With this configuration, the pocket can be specified more quickly.

  In this control example, when it is determined that one of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F has been displaced during the rotation of the rotating member 640 (the outputs of all the detection sensors have changed from the L state). In addition, irrespective of the type of the sensor whose output has been displaced, the configuration is such that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored during the rotation operation for 15 steps from that point, but is not limited to this. is not. For example, in consideration of the rattling of the rotating member 640, the detection value of the sensor which is most likely to detect the detected portion 641c among the detection sensors (for example, after reaching the first section S1) The monitoring of the detection values for 15 steps may be started when the detection sensor A) disposed at the position where the shortest distance has been rotated has been displaced. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that there is a combination of detection values that are inconsistent among the detection values for the 15 steps, and thus it is possible to make it difficult to perform monitoring again. Therefore, the arrangement of each pocket of the rotating member 640 can be specified more quickly.

  In this control example, regarding the configuration in which the arrangement is determined from the combination of the outputs of the six detection sensors, the first method (when all outputs for a predetermined step are the same, the output corresponding to the same output is determined) However, the first method is not limited to a configuration including six detection sensors. The number of sensors may be large (for example, 10) or small (for example, a single sensor). Further, the first method can be applied to uses other than the use for specifying the arrangement. For example, when it is detected that any of the outputs of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i has switched from the L state to the H state, the output of the detection sensor is output a predetermined number of times (for example, over five main processes. The monitoring may be performed, and if the outputs are all H during a predetermined number of monitoring periods, the configuration may be such that it is determined that the ball B has passed the detection sensor. With this configuration, when the output of the detection sensor instantaneously becomes H regardless of the passage of the ball B due to the influence of noise or the like, the ball B passes the corresponding sensor from the H output. It can be prevented that the user mistakenly recognizes that he / she has done it. Therefore, when the ball B performs the swinging operation, the arrangement of the ball B can be determined more accurately.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, it is configured to determine whether or not the winning pocket (lucky number) is increased (added) in a predetermined period after the “normal mode” or the “preparation mode” starts. . Then, when the additional is determined, in the increase effect executed in the “preparation mode”, the pocket to be increased (added) is randomly determined from the out-of-off pockets. Thereby, in the “roulette chance effect” executed thereafter, it is possible to make the ball B feel as if it is easy to fall into the hitting pocket. Expectations for "mode" can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, when an additional is determined and a winning pocket is determined in the increased effect, a section in which the ratio of the winning pocket is intentionally high is provided. This allows the player to more closely watch the correspondence between the arrangement of the section having a high winning pocket ratio and the momentum (period) of the swinging operation performed by the ball B above the holding piece 677. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the “roulette chance effect” can be further improved.

  In the above-described first control example, the control and the effect in the “normal mode” and the “preparation mode” have been mainly described.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, a description will be given of a chance-continuous effect, which is one of the entertaining effects performed during the “long-split mode” on the third symbol display device 81. Although the details will be described later, the chance consecutive production is a type of entertainment production for indicating whether or not a big hit occurs in the “renjo mode”.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example in terms of configuration is the “chance-continuous production”, which is the production mode executed during the “renjo mode”. Are added, the method of allocating the hit pockets allocated during the “prepare mode” is changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and The point is that a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. Other configurations and various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described above. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the above-described first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 195 to FIG. 196, a description will be given of the “continuous chance effect” executed during the “rensou mode” of the third control example. This “continuation of chance chance effect” is an effect of notifying that the result of the lottery is a big hit by stopping and displaying the chance opportunity a plurality of times (three times) at predetermined intervals (1.2 second intervals).

  Here, as in the above-described first control example, the “rensou mode” in the third control example includes the hit short fluctuation (0.2 seconds) and the hit middle fluctuation (3 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit. Are selected at a ratio of about one to one. In addition, as a variation pattern at the time of departure, a departure short variation (0.2 seconds) and a departure middle variation (3 seconds) are selected at a ratio of about 4: 1.

  Thus, in the “long-sleeping mode”, the fluctuation time is determined to be shorter than the fluctuation time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the “normal mode”. It can be executed quickly. Further, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the game in the “rensou mode” becomes monotonous.

  In addition, in the “rensou mode” during which the working hours are shortened, the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 causes the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a to be easily opened, and the second entrance 640a is closed. Since it is easy to win, the ball is fired toward the second ball entrance 640a so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67. Thus, a game (a so-called “right-handed game”) is executed in which the electric accessory 640b is opened and the second winning opening 640a wins a prize.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example, similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first control example, the lottery of the special symbol 2 executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640a is performed. It is configured not to be suspended.

  In a conventional gaming machine, in a predetermined gaming state in which the fluctuation time is shorter than that in a normal gaming state (such as during a time reduction), the player is notified whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Since it is difficult to execute an effect with one variation time, an effect using a plurality of variation times is performed based on winning information stored and stored (a so-called “look-ahead effect”).

  However, in the third control example, as described above, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is configured not to be suspended, and the above-described “look-ahead effect” cannot be executed. Therefore, in the third control example, in a predetermined gaming state (“long-sleeping mode”) in which the fluctuation time is determined to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state, the special control is not provided to the player without using the “look-ahead effect”. It is configured to be able to execute “continuous chance chance effect” as an effect that indicates whether the result of the symbol lottery is a jackpot.

  FIG. 195 (a) is a timing chart illustrating an example of an effect mode corresponding to a winning middle change in the “continuous-effect effect” executed during the “rensou-mode”. The hit middle change is a change pattern selected when the big hit is won, and includes a change time of 3 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. The effect mode corresponding to the winning middle variation is selected in the variation pattern selection processing with reference to the extended-village big-hit table 222a3 (see FIG. 198) (S6107 in FIG. 206).

  With reference to FIG. 195 (a), more specific contents will be described. FIG. 195 (a) is a timing chart showing a state in which “third consecutive chance effect” is executed as an example of an effect mode corresponding to the winning middle fluctuation in “chance continuous effect”. When the “3rd consecutive chance effect” is executed, the opportunity is stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals within one fluctuation time.

  First, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), when the hit middle fluctuation is started (executed) in which the “three consecutive chances effect” is set, first, the pseudo fluctuation is started (executed) (the pseudo fluctuation period is 0.2). Seconds). The pseudo fluctuation is a pseudo fluctuation display until the third symbol is pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped) at the chance, and 0.2 seconds which is the same as the fluctuation time when the short fluctuation is executed. Fluctuating time is set.

  Note that a display mode (non-stop display mode) in which the player does not recognize that the third symbol is stopped at a specific symbol may be executed during the period in which the pseudo variation is performed. May be changed so as to switch, or only a specific symbol may be rotated. In addition, a display mode in which the symbol itself is moved at a high speed or reduced so that it is difficult to visually recognize the symbol may be used so that the player cannot recognize the symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, when the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) elapses, the opportunity (first opportunity) is stopped and displayed (the opportunity stop period is 0.5 seconds). The stop display of the chance is to display the third symbol in a display mode (temporary stop display mode) in which the player recognizes that the third symbol is stopped at a specific symbol, and the short variation is displayed. Is set to the same time as the confirmation time (0.5 seconds) when is executed.

  The temporary stop display mode includes a display mode in which a specific symbol is slightly shaken, in addition to a display mode in which the third symbol is completely stopped. By executing the stop display of the chance eyes in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that one change has ended before the change time of the special symbol (3 seconds in the case of the hit middle change) ends. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to perform an effect of recognizing that a plurality of changes are being performed while a single change of the special symbol is being performed.

  As described above, when the middle fluctuation is executed, the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) and the opportunity stop period (0.5 seconds) are changed by the fluctuation time (period) of the short fluctuation (0.2 seconds). Is set so as to be executed in the same period as the fixed time (period) (0.5 seconds), so that the chance stop display in the middle fluctuation can be displayed to the player without discomfort.

  When the chance stop period elapses, the third symbol is pseudo-stopped (the pseudo stop period is 0.7 seconds). The pseudo stop is a pseudo display of a period until the next change is executed. In the third control example, as described above, the right-handed game is executed during the “rensou mode”, so that the ball enters the second entrance 640a after the special symbol stops changing (start winning). However, a non-game period may occur before the special symbol is changed again.

  Specifically, when the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the “renjo mode” during which the working hours are reduced, the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) fluctuates for 3 seconds (see S620 in FIG. 135), and thereafter, If the symbol lottery result is a hit (S615 in FIG. 135: Yes), the movable control is performed such that the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a executes opening for one second twice (FIG. 135). See S616). Therefore, there may be a case where a time lag occurs after the change of the special symbol is stopped and before the electric accessory 640b is opened and the ball enters the second entrance 640a. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example is configured so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640a is not suspended. Therefore, there may be a non-game period in which a new special symbol is not changed.

  Returning to FIG. 195 (a), the description will be continued. The period in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped is a period for pseudo-displaying a period corresponding to the non-game period described above. A variation similar to the variation of the special symbol can be executed by one middle variation.

  Here, the display mode in the case of performing the pseudo stop may be any display mode that allows the player to recognize the non-game period. For example, the display mode of the third symbol during the chance stop period may be used. A display mode in which the swing width is smaller than the display mode, or a display mode in which the background image of the third symbol display device is switched from the background image corresponding to the change of the special symbol to the background image corresponding to the non-game period.

  In the third control example, as a pseudo-fluctuation effect in which a plurality of changes are performed while one middle change is being performed, the player does not feel uncomfortable. In addition, a pseudo fluctuation period that is the same time as the fluctuation period of the short fluctuation, a chance stop period that is the same time as the symbol confirmation period of the short fluctuation is set, and a non-game period is displayed in a pseudo manner. Although a pseudo stop period is provided for performing the above, it is not necessary to provide all of the components.

  For example, the configuration of the pseudo stop period may be eliminated by extending the chance stop period by the period corresponding to the pseudo stop period and setting the chance stop period to 1.2 seconds. Even with such a configuration, there is an effect that the pseudo fluctuation effect can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  The “three consecutive chance presentations” shown in FIG. 195 (a) are based on the above-described pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds), chance stop period (0.5 seconds), and pseudo stop period (0.7 seconds). The configured pseudo effect (1.4 seconds) is executed twice, and the third pseudo variation (0.2 seconds) is executed after the end of the second pseudo effect. Until the end of the third pseudo variation, the special symbol is changed within the variation time (3 seconds), and the third chance stop display (0.5 seconds) is set to the special symbol determination time (0 seconds). .5 seconds). Then, the big hit is started (executed) after the stop display period (special symbol determination time) at the third chance.

  As described above, the “three consecutive chance effects” shown in FIG. 195 (a) is the timing 0.2 seconds, 1.6 seconds, and 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, that is, 1.4 seconds. Since the chances are stopped and displayed three times at intervals, it is configured to be able to execute an effect mode in which the chances are stopped a plurality of times at predetermined intervals within the single fluctuation time during the “rensou mode”. ing. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations without using the “look-ahead effect”.

  In the “3rd chance chance effect” described with reference to FIG. 195 (a), the stop display of the third chance is executed using the special symbol determination time (0.5 seconds). For example, the period until the stop display of the third chance is executed within the range of the special symbol fluctuation time (3 seconds), and the special symbol determination time (0.5 seconds) is determined as the special symbol hit. , A combination of the third symbols (for example, a combination in which the same numeral symbols are aligned) may be stopped and displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current fluctuation is a hit.

  On the other hand, FIG. 195 (b) is a diagram showing, in a timing chart, an example of an effect mode corresponding to a departure middle fluctuation in the “continuous line effect” executed during the “rensou mode”. The deviation middle fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern selected when a jackpot is not won (is lost by a special symbol lottery), and is composed of a fluctuation time of 3 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. You. The effect mode corresponding to the deviation middle fluctuation is selected in the fluctuation pattern selection processing with reference to the extended short hit table 222a3 (see FIG. 198) (S6107 in FIG. 206).

  With reference to FIG. 195 (b), more specific contents will be described. FIG. 195 (b) is a timing chart showing a state in which “two consecutive chances for a miss” has been executed as an example of an effect mode corresponding to the deviation middle fluctuation in “continuous effects for the chance”. When the "two consecutive chances for miss" effect is executed, the chances are stopped and displayed twice at predetermined intervals within one fluctuation time, and finally the third symbol is stopped at the complete miss. Is displayed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 195 (b), when the departure middle fluctuation in which the “two consecutive chances for departure effect” is set is started (executed), the “third consecutive chance” described above with reference to FIG. 195 (a) is started. The pseudo variation is executed twice as in the case of the “effect”. After that, the third pseudo variation is executed (0.2 seconds), and the completely departure stop display (0.5 seconds) is executed using the special symbol determination time (0.5 seconds).

  As described above, in the "two consecutive chances presentation for departure" shown in FIG. 195 (b), the chance eyes are stopped and displayed at a timing of 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the “rensou mode”, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which the chance is stopped a plurality of times at predetermined intervals within the single fluctuation time. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations without using the “look-ahead effect”.

  In addition, the first and second chances are stopped and displayed at the same timing as that of the “third consecutive chance effect” described above (at a timing of 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). Therefore, the player can expect the jackpot until the current change ends (until the complete gap stops).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196 (a), among the “continuous-challenge effects” executed during the “rensou-mode”, a description will be given of an effect mode in a case where an out-of-short fluctuation and a hit short fluctuation are executed. I do. FIG. 196 (a) shows the “chance-eye effect” in the “chance-eye continuous effect” executed during the “ren-so-mode”, which is executed for two consecutive fluctuations as an effect mode corresponding to the short-circuit change. It is the figure which showed the timing chart at the time of performing "chance eye effect" as an effect mode corresponding to a hit short fluctuation. The deviation short variation is a variation pattern that is selected when a jackpot is not won (a loss is won), and includes a variation time of 0.2 seconds and a confirmation time of 0.5 seconds. The effect mode corresponding to the deviation short variation is selected by referring to the extended holiday table 222a4 (see FIG. 199) in the variation pattern selection processing (S6107 in FIG. 206). In addition, the hit short variation is a variation pattern selected when a jackpot is won, and the process of selecting the variation time, the fixed time, and the effect mode is the same as the above-mentioned out-of-short variation, and therefore the description thereof is omitted. I do.

  With reference to FIG. 196 (a), more specific contents will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 196 (a), when the off-short variation in which “chance eye effect” is set is started (executed), the variation is started (executed) (the variation period is 0.2 seconds). Then, when the fluctuation period elapses, a chance that indicates that the current fluctuation is not a hit (is out of range) is stopped and displayed, and the symbol is determined (determination period 0.5 seconds).

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third control example, the fluctuating time (0.2 seconds) and the fixed time (0.5 seconds) in the short fluctuation are executed during the middle fluctuation (the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds)). And the opportunity stop period (0.5 seconds) are set to be the same timing. Therefore, since it is possible to execute the simulated effect performed during the middle change and the simulated effect performed in the short change at the same timing, the player may feel uncomfortable with the simulated effect performed during the middle change. There is an effect that it can be eliminated.

  Returning to FIG. 196 (a), the description will be continued. After the stop display (first time) of the chance is executed, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped until the next fluctuation starts (until a new ball (start winning) is generated in the second entrance 640a). (Floating suspension period). During this fluctuation stop period, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and the background screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in order to make the player recognize that the special symbol has not changed is changed from the changing background screen. The screen is switched to the background screen while the fluctuation is stopped.

  Then, when a new start prize is generated, a short-circuiting change for “off” in which “chance effect” is set as the next change is started (executed), and the second chance is stopped and displayed. Regarding this short variation for departure, an effect based on the same effect mode as the first chance display described above is displayed.

  Next, the winning short variation that has won the jackpot is executed, the third chance is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot is started (executed) after the lapse of the opportunity stop period.

  Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 198, in the third control example, the chance is won as the chance is stopped and displayed three times at a predetermined interval (interval of 1.4 seconds). In the state in which the short-circuit fluctuation for release with the “chance eye effect” set is performed twice consecutively, if the next short-circuit fluctuation is a short-circuit fluctuation, the “chance eye effect” is displayed. The effect is configured to be able to be set, and in the case of the next change being a short-circuit change, the “chance eye effect” is not set.

  By doing so, when the short fluctuations are repeated a plurality of times, the chances are stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals over a plurality of fluctuations, even though the lottery result is out of order. Can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196 (b), among the “continuous-challenge effects” executed in the “in the extended-village mode”, an effect mode in a case where the short-circuit variation is executed three times in a row will be described. . FIG. 196 (b) shows the “chance-eye effect” in the “continuous-chase effect” executed during the “ren-so-mode” in two consecutive changes as an effect mode corresponding to a miss short-circuit change, and thereafter. It is the figure which showed the timing chart at the time of performing "normal production" as a production mode corresponding to a short variation. The deviation short variation is a variation pattern that is selected when a jackpot is not won (a loss is won), and includes a variation time of 0.2 seconds and a confirmation time of 0.5 seconds. The effect mode corresponding to the deviation short variation is selected by referring to the extended holiday table 222a4 (see FIG. 199) in the variation pattern selection processing (S6107 in FIG. 206).

  First, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), if the off-short fluctuation fluctuates again after two consecutive out-of-short fluctuations in which the “chance eye effect” is set, the effect corresponding to the out-of-short fluctuation The mode is configured so that “chance eye effect” is not selected (see FIG. 199), and “normal effect” is executed as shown in FIG. 196 (b).

  The “normal effect” corresponding to the deviation short variation is an effect mode in which the chance eyes are not stopped and displayed, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the complete deviation after performing the variation display for 0.2 seconds.

  In the third control example, an effect that suggests the result of the lottery (so-called “continuous effect chance effect”) is executed by an effect mode in which the chance is stopped and displayed at a predetermined interval a plurality of times. As a mode executed in the above, a mode other than the stop display of the chance eye may be used. For example, the upper lifting unit 300 may be moved at predetermined intervals. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the result of the lottery using a configuration other than the display of the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide an effect that enhances the interest to the player.

  In the third control example, an interval of 1.4 seconds is provided as the predetermined interval. However, the interval may be shifted within a range in which the player has difficulty in recognizing, for example, an error range of about 0.2 before and after. A predetermined interval may be included. Thereby, in the gaming state in which the winning information of the special symbol 2 is not held and stored, even if the change of the special symbol does not immediately start, it is possible to execute the “continuous-effect chance effect”.

  Further, instead of stopping the chances at predetermined intervals, the number of times the chances are stopped and displayed within a predetermined period (variation time or the number of fluctuations) may indicate the lottery result. .

  Next, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 197 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the third control example is different from the above control examples in that the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a are partially changed, and the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 The difference is that an additional area selection table 222g is added.

  Here, the variation pattern selection table 222a of the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (b). FIG. 197 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222a of the third control example. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 222a in the first control example, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the third control example is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and roughly indicates the variation pattern command indicated by the variation pattern command. 9 is a data table used to determine more detailed variation content from variation content (variation time).

  The variation pattern selection table 222a includes a normal middle and large hit table 222a1, a normal middle and long break table 222a2, a extended-middle swing table 222a3, and a long and short break table 222a4.

  In the normal middle and big hit table 222a1, detailed production modes corresponding to the fluctuation types of the fluctuation times of 7 seconds and 10 seconds are defined based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (shown in FIG. Zu). Here, a description will be given of an effect mode defined in the normal middle and large hit table 222a1. First, a 7-second stop pattern and a 10-second stop pattern are defined in the normal middle and big hit table 222a1 as stop patterns of symbols that are variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the rendering unit 331.

  The 7-second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which symbols that are variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d are stopped and displayed at equal intervals. The 10-second stop pattern is a pattern in which the symbols are displayed last among the display units 331a to 331d. The time from when the symbol corresponding to the lucky number (for example, “2”, “7”, “13”) is stopped and displayed on the display unit other than the display unit 331d to be stopped until the symbol stops on the display unit 331d is long. This is the stop pattern to be set.

  Further, the normal out-of-place table 222a2 is also a detailed effect corresponding to the change type of the change time of 7 seconds and 10 seconds based on the change pattern command output from the main controller 110, similarly to the table of the normal middle and big hits 222a1. An embodiment is defined (not shown).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example, as a variation pattern selected when a normal medium and large hit is won, a variation pattern with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds are selected. The ratio is defined so as to be about 1 to 1 (see FIG. 111A), and as a fluctuation pattern selected in the case of normal deviation, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds Is defined so that the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern is approximately 3 to 1 (FIG. 111B). Therefore, when the 10-second stop pattern is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit.

  In addition, the extended-cassette jackpot table 222a3 is a table in which a detailed rendering mode is defined for the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 during the “extended-cassette mode”. The table for large-medium-sized jackpot 222a3 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the extended-village big hit table 222a3. The table for large and medium-sized jackpots 222a3 includes the fluctuation types indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, such as "short short fluctuation (0.2 seconds)" and "hit middle fluctuation (3 seconds)". In association with the value of the chance eye number counter 223qv and the value of the effect counter 223rv, the effect types are "normal large hit effect", "single single chance effect effect", "hit two consecutive chance effect effect", "three consecutive chance effects". There are four types of effect modes of “eye effect”.

  More specifically, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110 is “hit short fluctuation”, the value of chance chance counter 223qv is “0, 1”, and the value of effect counter 223rv is In the case of “0 to 99”, “normal jackpot effect” is selected as the effect mode.

  The “normal jackpot effect” is an effect that notifies the player that the result of the current lottery is a jackpot within the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, for example, a character displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Are symbols appearing around them (for example, a symbol with a letter “V” indicating a probable jackpot, a symbol with a skull mark indicating a normal jackpot (fall to “normal mode”), etc.) Is performed. In addition, for example, an effect in which a mode (for example, a character “V”) indicating a probability change jackpot is simultaneously displayed on each of the display units 331 a to 331 d of the effect unit 331, or a normal jackpot (fall to “normal mode”) (For example, a skull mark) is simultaneously displayed.

  Here, after the execution of the “normal jackpot effect” is determined, characters and various symbol designs (such as a symbol design with the letter “V” and a symbol design with a skull mark) appear, and the character If it is configured to perform the effect of acquiring a symbol pattern, it is necessary to execute a series of effects for 0.2 seconds, and the effect time is too short for the player to fully understand the effect contents. There is a risk of disappearing. On the other hand, if the production time is secured by increasing the rate at which the long fluctuation time is selected (decided), one special symbol lottery is executed, and then the special symbol lottery is performed. There is a problem that the time required until the game is long, and the game is prolonged. In addition, as the fluctuation time becomes longer, the possibility of entering the second entrance 640a during the variation increases, but the entry to the second entrance 640a is not suspended, so that in the “ren-so mode”, As the ball enters the second entrance 640a, the user may feel that the ball is wasted. That is, there is a possibility that the player may feel dissatisfied.

  Therefore, in the “rensou mode” in this control example, a character is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of whether or not the special symbol is changing. That is, a character performing an effect of acquiring a symbol in the variable effect is displayed as a part of the back image. In the variable effect, a variable effect of an effect mode of acquiring a symbol using a character displayed in advance as a back image is performed. With this configuration, the back image before the start of the variable effect can be seen as a part of the variable effect, so that the change time is extremely short (for example, 0.2 seconds). Even when the pattern is determined, the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, similarly to the characters, images of various symbol designs (symbol designs with the letter “V”, symbol designs with a skull mark, etc.) also appear randomly as part of the back image, and The display position is also switched at random. That is, for example, the symbol design with the letter “V” enters the frame from outside the screen of the third design display device 81 and approaches the character, stays in the vicinity of the character for a predetermined time, and then moves away from the character. In a mode in which the pattern of the rear image in a mode of going out of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 or a symbol symbol with a skull mark similarly performs an operation of approaching and separating from the character Prepare a back image pattern or a back image pattern in which both the symbol design with the letter “V” and the symbol design with the skull mark approach the character and then move away. Each of these rear images is switched randomly. Then, in a state where any one of the symbol designs is close to the character (a distance at which the character can naturally acquire the symbol design with a variation time of 0.2 seconds), the variation effect of the lottery result corresponding to the symbol design is started. In such a case, the symbol pattern displayed as the back image is configured to set a variation pattern of a mode in which the character acquires. With this configuration, it is as if the effect had started before the start of the variable effect (at the time when the corresponding symbol symbol was displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a part of the back image). I can make you think. Therefore, even when a fluctuation effect with a short fluctuation time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed, the effect can be enhanced. Also, it is possible to execute an effect of a natural flow as compared with the case where the effect is executed within a short fluctuation time. In this control example, when a game stop state is detected, a state in which various symbol symbols are close to the character is displayed as a demonstration screen (a distance at which the character can naturally acquire a symbol symbol with a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds). To set the back image of the mode in which the image is stationary. With this configuration, after the game is restarted, if the fluctuation time is determined to be 0.2 seconds in the special symbol lottery executed first and a short fluctuation is determined, the character is brought closer to the character while the game is stopped. It is possible to execute an effect of acquiring a symbol corresponding to the current hit type among the symbol symbols that have been stopped in the state where the symbol has been stopped. Therefore, even when a fluctuation effect with a short fluctuation time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed via the fluctuation stop state, it is possible to execute an effect with less discomfort.

  The variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit short variation”, the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 49”. In this case, “normal jackpot effect” is selected as the effect mode. This “normal jackpot effect” is the same as the content described above, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit short variation”, the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “50 to 99”. In this case, “winning single-shot chance effect” is selected as the effect mode.

  This “single-hit chance chance effect” is performed when the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, that is, when the chance chance is stopped and displayed twice at a predetermined interval (approximately 1.4 seconds). This is an effect to be executed, in which the opportunity is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. As a result, the two chances stopped and displayed before the "hit single-shot chance effect" is executed and the first chance stopped and displayed in the "hit single-shot chance effect" are displayed. It is possible to notify the player that the three chances have been stopped and displayed.

  When the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit middle variation”, the value of the chance number counter 223qv is “0”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 29” , "Normal jackpot effect" is selected as the effect mode. In the “normal jackpot effect” in the hit middle change in which the change time is 3 seconds, the third symbol display is an effect that informs the player that the result of the current lottery is a big hit within the change time of 3 seconds. In the device 81, an effect of acquiring a mode (for example, a V mark) in which the character indicates a big hit or an effect in which the mode indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 in order is executed.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit middle fluctuation”, the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “0”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “30 to 99”. In this case, “3rd consecutive chance effect” is selected as the effect mode. This “third consecutive chance effect” is an effect mode described with reference to FIG. 195 (a), and is an effect mode in which a chance is stopped and displayed three times within one fluctuation time.

  When the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit middle variation”, the value of the chance number counter 223qv is “1”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 49” , "Normal jackpot effect" is selected as the effect mode. This “normal jackpot effect” is the same effect mode as the “normal jackpot effect” when the hit middle changes, and the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit middle fluctuation”, the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “1”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “50 to 99”. In this case, the “winning second consecutive chance second effect” is selected as the effect mode. The “winning second consecutive chance effect effect” is an effect executed when the value of the chance number counter 223qv is “1”, that is, in a state where the chance effect is stopped and displayed once, and the fluctuation starts. This is an effect mode in which a chance is stopped and displayed at two timings of 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the completion. Thus, it is possible to notify the player that the chance has been stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals, together with the effect mode executed in the previous fluctuation.

  Therefore, since it is possible to stop and display the third chance at predetermined intervals over a plurality of fluctuations, it is possible to perform the plurality of fluctuations without using the “look-ahead effect” based on the stored winning information. By straddling, an effect indicating to the player whether or not the result of the lottery of the special symbol is a big hit can be executed.

  When the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit middle variation”, the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 9” , "Normal jackpot effect" is selected as the effect mode. This “normal jackpot effect” is the same effect mode as the “normal jackpot effect” when the hit middle changes, and the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “hit middle fluctuation”, the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “10 to 99”. In this case, the “winning single chance chance effect” is selected as the effect mode.

  The “hit single-shot chance effect” is an effect that is executed when the value of the chance-number counter 223qv is “2”, that is, when the chance is stopped and displayed twice at a predetermined interval. Is an effect mode in which the chance is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of the game. This allows the player to be notified that the chances have been stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals (approximately 1.4 second intervals) together with the presentation mode executed in the previous fluctuation. .

  In the case where the “hit single-shot chance effect” is executed as the effect mode corresponding to the hit middle change, the chance (0.2 times after the start of the change, the third chance at a predetermined interval from the previous change) is started. During the period (2.8 seconds) from the stop display of the second chance) to the end of the change (2.8 seconds), an image notifying the player that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, a sound celebrating the big hit is output by a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, and an effect of turning on a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227 is performed.

  As described above, in the third control example, in order to realize the “continuous chance chance effect” that notifies that the result of the lottery is a big hit when a plurality of chance eyes are stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals, The effect mode to be executed is selected by the consecutive-middle-sho big hit table 222a3. Further, since the number of chances to stop and display in the current fluctuation is selectable based on the value of the chance frequency counter 223qv, the chances are stopped at predetermined intervals over a plurality of fluctuations. Can be displayed. Therefore, even if the time of one change is short, it is possible to execute the effect indicating the result of the lottery using the plurality of changes in an effect mode that can be easily recognized by the player.

  Returning to FIG. 197 (b), the description will be continued. The extended holiday table 222a4 is a table in which a detailed rendering mode is defined for the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 during the “extended holiday mode”. The table 222a4 for out-of-villas will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 199 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the out-of-condo table 222a4. In this table 222a4, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is "variation short variation (0.2 seconds)" and "variation middle variation (3 seconds)". In association with the value of the chance count counter 223qv and the value of the staging counter 223rv, three types of staging are provided as the staging mode, “normal staging”, “single-shot chance staging for detachment”, and “two consecutive chance staging for stitching”. Aspects are defined.

  More specifically, the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is “missing short variation”, the value of chance number counter 223qv is “0, 1”, and the value of effect counter 223rv is In the case of “0 to 79”, “normal effect” is selected as the effect mode.

  In the “normal effect”, an effect is performed to notify the player that the result of the current lottery is out of the range within the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds. Specifically, an effect (failure effect) in which the character cannot acquire a mode (for example, a V mark) indicating a big hit on the third symbol display device 81, or a mode in which each of the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 indicates that the character is off. Is displayed at the same time.

  In addition, since this “normal effect” is a short-time change of 0.2 seconds, an effect in which the next change is executed without emphasizing and notifying the player that the result of the lottery is out of order. May be used. This can suppress a situation in which the player's willingness to play is reduced when “missing short fluctuations” are continuously performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 199 (b), the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “missing short fluctuation”, the chance count counter 223qv is “0, 1”, and the effect counter 223rv. Is "80 to 99", "single-shot chance effect for departure" is selected as the effect mode.

  This “single chance chance effect for departure” is an effect that is executed when the value of the chance number counter 223qv is “0, 1”, that is, when the stop of the chance eye is not more than once due to the previous fluctuation. This is an effect in which the chance is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Specifically, if the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “1” and the “single-shot chance production for disengagement” is executed, the chance changes twice in accordance with the previous fluctuation and the current fluctuation. Stop display is performed, and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is added to “2”. Therefore, for example, when “hit short change” is selected as the next change and “winning single chance chance effect” is executed as the effect mode, the chance is stopped and displayed three times over three changes. It is possible to execute the jackpot after having made it.

  Next, a case where the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “missing short variation”, the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, and the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 99” , “Normal effect” is selected as the effect mode. The “normal effect” is the same effect as the “normal effect” at the time of the above-mentioned short-circuit fluctuation, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “missing short variation” and the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, that is, the chance is twice at a predetermined interval. In the case where the effect mode of “missing short fluctuation” is selected in the state where the stop is displayed, it is defined that the effect mode in which the chance is stopped and displayed is not selected. This is to prevent the chance from being stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals over a plurality of fluctuations. As a result, the production mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed is continuously executed a plurality of times, so that even though the lottery result is out of order, the chance eyes cross over a plurality of fluctuations at a predetermined interval. It is possible to eliminate the situation that the display is stopped twice. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect mode with high reliability to the player.

  On the other hand, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “out-of-short variation” and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, regardless of the value of the effect counter 223rv, the above is described. “Normal effect”, which is the same effect mode as “normal effect”, is selected.

  Next, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “Middle variation” and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “0”, the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 0”. In the case of "59", "normal effect" is selected, in the case of "60-89", "single-shot chance effect for detachment", and in the case of "90-99", "two consecutive chance effects for detachment" is selected. You.

  The "single-shot chance production for detachment" is a production mode in which the chance is stopped 0.2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the "production of two consecutive chances for detachment" is shown in FIG. 195 (b). As shown, this is an effect mode in which the chance is stopped 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. This makes it possible to make the production mode corresponding to the deviation middle fluctuation half the same as the production mode corresponding to the middle fluctuation, so that the player is interested in the production mode until the end of the fluctuation. And the effect of the pachinko machine 10 can be enhanced.

  When the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “Middle variation” and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “1”, the value of the effect counter 223rv is “0 to 59”. In this case, "normal effect" is selected, and in the case of "60 to 99", "single chance chance effect for departure" is selected.

  Lastly, when the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is “middle variation” and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “2”, regardless of the value of the effect counter 223rv, “ Normal production "is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 197 (a), the description will be continued. The additional area selection table 222g is referred to when determining the number of hit pockets to be increased in the "increase effect" in which the number of hit pockets of the rotating member is increased during the "preparation mode" (S6001 in FIG. 203). As described above, this “increased effect” is an effect in which the number of winning pockets (the number of lucky numbers) in the roulette chance effect is added (added). It can be made to seem as if it is easier to hit with the effect (it becomes easier to shift to the “rensou mode”). Therefore, it is an effect that can increase the player's expectation for the roulette chance effect.

  In the third control example, in the “increase effect”, when determining a hit pocket (lucky number) to be added (added), an area that is easily added (easy selection area) and an area that is hard to be added (hard selection area) are determined. Is different from the above-described first control example in that a configuration is added in which a winning pocket (lucky number) added (added) by “addition effect” is intentionally biased (not evenly distributed).

  As described above, by providing a configuration in which the hit pocket (lucky number) added (added) by the “increase effect” is intentionally biased (not equalized), the 30 pockets ( Regions (locations) where the number of hit pockets is large and regions (locations) where the number of hit pockets is small can be intentionally provided for the pockets (P1 to P30). Therefore, since the area that is easy to hit in the roulette chance effect (the area where the setting of the hit pocket is large) and the area that is hard to hit (the area where the setting of the hit pocket is small) pass, the timing at which the ball B falls is determined by the player. Will look interesting and can enhance the effect of production.

  Next, the details of the additional area selection table 222g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 199 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the additional area selection table 222g. In the additional area selection table 222g, an “easy selection area” and a “difficult selection area” are defined in association with possible values of the effect counter 223rv.

  More specifically, the “easy selection area” is associated with the value of the effect counter 223rv in the range of “0 to 74”. As described above in the first control example, the effect counter 223rv is configured by a loop counter that can take 100 values of “0 to 99”. Of these, the value of “easy selection area” is 75 of “0 to 74”, so the probability (ratio) of “easy selection area” being selected by the additional area selection table 222g is 75% (75/100). ).

  The "difficulty selection area" is associated with the value of the effect counter 223rv in the range of "75 to 99". Of the 100 possible values of the effect counter 223rv, the values for which the “difficulty selection area” is selected are 25 of “75 to 99”, so that the “difficulty selection area” is selected by the additional area selection table 222g. Is 25% (25/100).

  That is, for example, when four winning pockets (lucky numbers) are added (increased) by the “addition effect”, an average of three winning pockets from the “easy selection area” and one average of the winning pockets (lucky number) from the “hard selection area” Number) is the selected ratio. As a result, it is possible to bias the pocket against the area where the easy selection area is set. The configuration for dividing the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640 into an “easy selection area” and a “difficult selection area” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 200 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 200, the third control example is different from the above control examples in that the content of the hit position storage area 223k is partially changed, and the chance count counter 223qv and the effect counter 223rv are different from each other. The difference is in the added points. The other contents are the same as those in the above-described respective control examples. Therefore, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the hit position storage area 223k whose contents are partially changed in the third control example will be described. The hit position storage area 223k is a storage area for storing the type of each pocket P1 to P30 of the rotating member 640 (whether it is a hit pocket or a missing pocket) in the “rensou mode suggestion effect” as described above. It is. In the hit position storage area 223k, a hit position is set based on the pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x in the hit pocket sorting process 3 (S3102 in FIG. 202). Next, differences from the above-described first control example will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 201 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit position storage area 223k. In the third control example, the type of appointment / rejection corresponding to each of the pockets P1 to P30 is stored, and each of the pockets P1 to P30 is configured to be divided into a “first area” and a “second area”. . As shown in FIG. 201, the “first region” is a region including the pockets P1 to P15, and the “second region” is a region including the pockets P16 to P30. By reading the storage information stored in the hit position storage area 223k configured as described above, the type set in each of the pockets P1 to P30 and the area (the first area and the second area) are set. It becomes possible to grasp the number of hit pockets. In the present control example, at the start of the increase effect (in a state where only the winning pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x is reflected as the winning position), the number of the winning pockets included in the first area and the second area is determined. It is configured such that an area where the number of hit pockets is set to be large is set to the above-mentioned easy selection area, and an area where the number of hit pockets is small is set to the difficult selection area. Thereby, the increase effect can be executed in a state where the number of pockets included in the easy selection area is larger, so that the arrangement of the hit pockets can be biased toward the easy selection area.

  Returning to FIG. 200, the description will be continued. The chance number counter 223qv is a counter that counts the number of times the chance is stopped and displayed over a plurality of fluctuations in the “continuous chance effect” described above. The value of the chance count counter 223qv is referred to in the variation pattern selection process (S6106 in FIG. 206), and when the “chance effect” is determined, a value corresponding to the determined “chance effect”, that is, Then, a value corresponding to the number of times the chance is stopped and displayed in the determined variation pattern is added (S6109 in FIG. 206). Then, when the "chance eye effect" is not determined, that is, when the normal effect is determined, the value of the counter is initialized (S6110 in FIG. 206). Although not shown, the value of the counter is also initialized when a jackpot is executed in a state where the value of the chance count counter 223qv has not been initialized.

  In the present control example, the value of the chance number counter 223qv is initialized when the chance effect is not determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the value of the chance counter 223qv may not be initialized until a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the last stop of the chance. Thus, when the chance is interrupted, a period in which the chance does not appear for at least 5 seconds can be set, so that it is possible to more clearly recognize whether or not the chance is continuous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from erroneously recognizing the number of consecutive chances, and it is possible to provide a more intuitive effect.

  The effect counter 223rv is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for selection of various effects (“continuous chance effect”, “additional effect”, etc.), various lotteries, and the like. It is configured as a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99 in the main processing of the device 113 (see FIG. 145). By using the effect counter 223rv, randomness can be secured when selecting various effects.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing a hit pocket allocation process 3 (S3011) executed in the status command process (see FIG. 159) instead of the hit pocket allocation process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example. In each of the hit pocket sorting processes 3, in the processes of S3101 and S3102, the same processes as the processes of S3101 and S3102 of the hit pocket sorting process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example described above are respectively executed. You.

  In the hit pocket allocation process 3 (see FIG. 202) in the present control example, after the read pocket is set to the hit position of the hit position storage area 223k by the processing of S3102 (S3102), the hit pocket storage area 223k is set. The number of hit pockets included in the first area and the second area is calculated (S3121). For example, when the hit pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x are the pockets P9, P10, P11, P20, and P28, three pockets are included in the first area (pockets P1 to P15). It is calculated that two pockets are included in the second region (pockets P16 to P30).

  When the process of S3121 ends, it is next determined whether the number of hit pockets included in the first region is larger than that of the second region based on the number of hit pockets of each region calculated in the process of S3121 (S3122). ). In the process of S3122, when it is determined that the first region has a larger number of hit pockets (S3122: Yes), the first region is set as the easy selection region, and the second region is set as the difficult selection region. (S3123), the process proceeds to S3103.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3122, when it is determined that the number of hit pockets is larger in the second region than in the first region (S3122: No), the second region is set as the easily selected region, and the first region is set as the easily selected region. A difficulty selection area is set (S3124), and the process proceeds to S3103.

  That is, in the processes of S3122 to S3124, a process for setting an area having a large number of hit pockets as an “easy selection area” in which a hit pocket can be easily added (added) in the “addition effect” is executed. This makes it possible to further bias the region where the hit pocket is set to the thirty pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640, and enhance the effect of the effect.

  When the number of hit pockets set in the first area and the second area is the same, “easy selection area” and “difficulty selection area” may be set at random, or a predetermined area may be set. May be set to be an “easy selection area”. Also, the number of types corresponding to the hit positions stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x is set to be an odd number, and the number of hit pockets set in the first area and the second area is not the same. You may comprise.

  In the third control example, a configuration is used in which the “easy selection area” and the “difficult selection area” are set based on the number of hit pockets set in the first area and the second area defined in advance. However, if the hit pocket is added (added) by “adding effect”, any configuration in which the area where the hit pocket is located may be biased, for example, a position where the hit pocket is continuously set is centered May be configured to set the “first area”.

  As a result, the “first region” and the “second region” can be set based on the position of the hit pocket, so that 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640 can be set. It is possible to further bias the region where the hit pocket is set, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Returning to FIG. 202, the description will be continued. In each process of S3103 and S3104, the same process as each process of S3103 and S3104 in the above-described first control example is executed. If it is determined in the processing of S3104 that the value of the additional counter is greater than 0 (S3104: Yes), an additional position determination processing for determining a pocket to be increased (added) is executed (S3125). ). Details of the additional position determination processing (S3125) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S3125 is completed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the addition counter 233av (S3110), and the flow shifts to S3104. Thereafter, the processes of S3104, S3110, and S3125 are repeatedly executed until the value of the additional counter 223av becomes 0.

  Next, the details of the above-described additional position determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the additional position determination processing (S3125). This additional position determination processing (S3125) is processing for determining the position of a hit pocket to be added (added) in the “increased effect”.

  In the additional position determination processing (S3125), first, the additional area selection table 222g is read (S6001), and an additional area corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223rv is determined (S6002). Specifically, when the value of the obtained effect counter 223rv is “0 to 74”, the region set as the “easy selection region” is determined as the additional region, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223rv is “75”. In the case of “−99”, the area set as the “difficulty selection area” is determined as an additional area (see FIG. 199 (b)). As described above, the easy selection area and the difficult selection area are set according to the arrangement of the hit pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x at the start of the increased effect.

  After the process of S6002, the hit position storage area 223k is read out, and it is determined whether there is a place where the number of continuous hits is 5 or more, that is, a place where 5 or more hit pockets are continuous (S6003). ). In the processing of S6003, when it is determined that there is no place where the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more (S6003: No), one place to be added is selected from pockets in which the type of separation is set (S6004). .

  On the other hand, in the process of S6002, when it is determined that there is a place where the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more (S6003: Yes), five consecutive hits are set among the pockets for which the type of disconnection is set. One additional position is selected from the pockets other than the one before and after the position (S6005).

  Here, the processing executed in S6005 will be described. In the third control example, when the roulette chance effect is executed, the hit pocket is continuously set in order to drop the ball B into a designated pocket (hit pocket or missed pocket) without giving a sense of incongruity to the player. The upper limit of the number to be performed is set to five. If the hit pockets are made too continuous, it takes time to pass through the positions where the hit pockets are continuous in the event of a roulette chance effect, and the swinging motion of the ball B stops during the passage. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the swinging operation will have an extremely small amplitude. In this case, since the ball B stays at the upper portion of the holding piece 677 without falling, the appearance becomes extremely unnatural, and there is a possibility that the player may feel distrust. Therefore, during execution of the “increase effect”, it is necessary to control so that six or more winning pockets do not continue due to addition. Therefore, the situation where the pockets already set as the hit pockets are continuous is grasped, and the position of the hit pocket to be added (added) by the “increase effect” is set. Thereby, a roulette chance effect can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  When the processing in S6004 or S6005 is completed, the hit position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected additional position becomes the hit position (S6006), and this processing ends. This additional position determination processing is also executed in the special figure 2 winning command processing 3 (S2121) shown in FIG.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning command processing 3 (S2121) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 145) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. Of the special figure 2 winning command processing 3 (S2121), each processing of S3201 to S3208 is the same as each processing of S3201 to S3208 of the special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161) in the first control example described above. The processing is executed.

  Then, when it is determined in the processing of S3208 that the additional position is to be added (S3208: Yes), the additional position determination processing is executed (S3221), and thereafter, the present processing ends. Note that the additional position determination processing executed in S3221 is the same as the additional position determination processing executed in S3125 described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the third control example, since the additional position determination processing is also performed in the special figure 2 winning command processing 3 (S2121), the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P1) provided in the rotating member 640 are provided. It is possible to further bias the region where the hit pocket is set with respect to P30), and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  In the above-described special figure 2 winning command processing 3 (see FIG. 204), when it is determined in the processing of S3208 that additional processing is to be performed, the additional position determination processing is configured to be executed. Alternatively, the “easy selection area” and the “difficult selection area” may be set again. This makes it possible to further bias the region where the hit pocket is set to the thirty pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640, and enhance the effect of the effect.

  Next, a variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. This variation display setting process 3 is different from the variation display setting process of the first control example in that a variation pattern selection process (S3321) is added. In the variation pattern selection process (S3321), a process of selecting a variation pattern for performing the above-described “continuous production of chances” is executed.

  First, FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 (S1641) executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. In each of the variable display setting processes 3 in S3301 to S3303, the same processes as those in S3301 to S3303 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the above-described first control example are respectively executed.

  When the process of S3303 is completed, next, a variation pattern selection process (S3 21) for selecting an effect mode corresponding to the current variation pattern command is executed. Details of the variation pattern selection processing (S3321) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the variation pattern selection process (S3321) is completed, the processes of S3-05 to S3-10 are executed, and the process ends. In each process of S3305 to S3310, the same process as each process of S3305 to S3310 in the above-described first control example is executed.

  Next, the above-described variation pattern selection processing (S3321) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection processing. As shown in FIG. 206, when the variation pattern selection processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving state flag 223o is set to ON, that is, whether or not the “long-season mode” is being performed (S6101).

  If it is determined that the time-saving state flag 223o is set to ON (S6101: Yes), the table for the extended holiday corresponding to the current variation pattern is read from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S6105). Specifically, for example, if the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 indicates a fluctuation type (variation pattern) corresponding to “hit middle fluctuation”, the variable pattern selection table 222a determines that The application table 222a3 is read.

  Next, the value of the effect counter 223rv and the value of the chance count counter 223qv are read (S6106), and the effect mode corresponding to the read counter (effect counter 223rv and chance eye counter 223qv) is determined (S6107). . Specifically, for example, if the value of the effect counter 223rv obtained is read out and the value of the chance count counter 223qv is “1”, the table 223a3 for the extended-middle-big-big hit is read, "Two consecutive chance effects" is selected (see FIG. 198).

  After finishing the process of S6107 described above, it is determined whether or not the chance eye effect has been determined (selected) as the present effect mode (S6108). If it is determined in the process of S6108 that the chance eye effect has been determined (selected) (S6108: Yes), the corresponding value is added to the chance eye frequency counter 223qv (S6109), and the flow shifts to the process of S6111.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6108 that the chance eye effect has not been determined (selected) (S6108: No), the value of the chance eye number counter 223qv is initialized (S6110), and the flow shifts to S6111.

  On the other hand, if the time saving state flag 223o is not set to ON (is set to OFF) in the process of S6101, (S6101: No), the normal table corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern. It is read from the table 222a (S6102). Specifically, for example, if the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 indicates a fluctuation type (fluctuation pattern) corresponding to “missing middle fluctuation”, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a indicates a normal middle deviation. The table 222a2 is read.

  After the processing of S6102, the value of the effect counter 223rv is read out (S6103), the effect mode corresponding to the read value of the effect counter 223rv is determined (S6104), and the process proceeds to S6111.

  After the processing of S6109, S6110, or S6104 is performed, in the processing of S6111, which is executed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the effect mode determined in each processing is set (S6111), and this processing ends. I do.

  As described above, in the third control example, when the addition is determined and the winning pocket is determined in the increased effect, a section in which the ratio of the winning pocket is intentionally high is provided. Here, if the arrangement of the hit pockets is completely determined at random, the hit pockets may be evenly distributed over the entire rotating member 640. In this case, no matter when the ball B falls from the holding piece 677, there is no difference in the degree of expectation of falling into the hit pocket. In other words, even if the ball B is made to perform a swinging operation, and the player predicts a section (pocket) in which the ball B will fall from the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation, there is no difference in the degree of expectation. There is a fear. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the swing effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, a section where the ratio of the hit pocket is high is intentionally provided. Therefore, the arrangement of the section where the ratio of the hit pocket is high and the swing operation performed by the ball B above the holding piece 677 are performed. The player can watch the correspondence with the momentum (cycle) more carefully. That is, the position (section) at which the ball B falls is expected to be a section where the ratio of the hit pocket is high, and the position (section) at which the ball B falls is predicted from the period (amplitude) of the swing operation. Can be. Therefore, the player's interest in the game during the execution of the rocking effect can be further improved.

  Further, in the third control example, in the “rensou mode” in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is mainly executed, a chance-eye continuous effect in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed one or more times can be executed. . Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are capable of executing the same type of effect over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a variable display of the number of balls reserved at the start of the effect) (a so-called pachinko machine). , "Continuous notice production"). In such a conventional gaming machine, the player can have a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations, based on the number of times the same type of effect is executed, the content of the effect, and the like. However, in conventional gaming machines, the number of performances and the performance time depend on the holding ball, so the continuous announcement performance should be applied to gaming machines that do not have a function to hold the lottery result in the first place. Could not. In addition, some conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to execute an effect as if a plurality of fluctuating displays are being performed in a fluctuating manner in one fluctuating display, In some cases, the above-described continuous announcement effect is executed with one variable display by executing the same type of effect in the variable display. In this conventional gaming machine, a continuous announcement effect can be performed irrespective of the number of pending balls, but since it is necessary to execute the effect within the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display, a sufficient production period is secured. There is a problem that it may be difficult.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, a specific effect (effect in which a chance is displayed) can be executed one or more times in one variable display. Then, when performing the variable display, whether or not to set a specific effect for the variable display, and the number of executions when performing the specific effect, etc. are executed before the variable display. It is configured to make a determination based on the history of a specific effect. Then, based on the result of the lottery of the special symbol which is the trigger of the variable display, the maximum continuous number of the specific effect is made different between the case of the loss and the case of the big hit. With such a configuration, in the variable display based on the special symbol 2 lottery in which the special symbol lottery result is not held, a specific effect is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays, so that the player You can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

  Further, in the present control example, when the display of the chance eyes is determined in the short fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds, after the symbol fluctuation of 0.2 seconds is executed, the chance eyes are displayed for 0.5 seconds. Stopped and displayed. Further, when the chance continuous effect is determined in the middle fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 3 seconds, the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) and the temporary stop period of the chance eyes (0.5 seconds) are changed into a fluctuation period of 3 seconds. Set one or more times during In this way, the pseudo fluctuation period during the middle fluctuation and the confirmation time are set to be the same as the fluctuation time (period) (0.2 seconds) and the confirmation time (period) (0.5 seconds) of the short fluctuation, respectively. , It is possible to display the opportunity stop display in the middle fluctuation without discomfort to the player.

  In addition, as a pseudo effect performed during the middle fluctuation, in addition to the pseudo fluctuation period and the temporary stop period, a pseudo stop period that simulates a period in which a new symbol change is not started is provided, so that a special symbol lottery is stored. The fluctuation in the case of using a configuration that does not have a so-called hold-holding function (a configuration in which the fluctuation display is performed discretely (non-continuously) even if the ball is hit continuously) is simulated without discomfort. Can be expressed.

  In the third control example, when the next short fluctuation is determined to be a hit short fluctuation in a state in which the short-circuit fluctuation for release in which the “chance visual effect” is set is performed twice consecutively, the “chance visual effect” is determined. "Can be set, and in the case of the next change deviating from the short change, the" chance chance effect "is limited so as not to be set. That is, only when a special symbol is a big hit, the stop of the chance is allowed to be continuously displayed three times, and in a case where the lottery of the special symbol is lost, the number of times the chance is continued is limited to two times. Configuration.

  With this configuration, a game can be played while focusing on the number of consecutive chances, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. Also, regardless of whether the continuous chance effect has been set in the middle fluctuation or the short fluctuation in which the stop display of the chance eye is set has been performed plural times, the chance eyes are stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals a plurality of times (three times). This can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, an appropriate effect can be provided to the player.

  In the third control example, as described above, the control for restricting the stop display of the chance is executed for the continuous variable display. However, other configurations may be used. After the chance is displayed twice in succession, the production mode in which the chance is stopped and displayed as the production mode corresponding to the fluctuation that has been won is not selected until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. It is good to do so. Thereby, an appropriate effect can be provided to the player.

  In the third control example, the interval at which the opportunity is stopped is set to be a predetermined interval as the “continuous effect at chance”. However, other configurations may be used. A plurality of timings at which the chances are stopped are provided within 3 seconds which is the fluctuation time during which the middle fluctuations are executed, and a predetermined number (three times) of the chances is stopped and displayed at any one of the timings. May be configured. This makes it difficult to know at what timing the chance eyes are displayed during the change of the special symbol, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, as a display mode of the chance eyes in a case where the chance eyes are stopped and displayed, a plurality of patterns of the color of the third symbol to be stopped and the color of the background are facilitated in advance, and the number of the chance eyes displayed in the specific display mode is one. When stopped and displayed three times, the same value as when the normal chance is stopped and displayed three times may be given. As a result, if it becomes difficult to stop and display the chance eyes a predetermined number of times, that is, even if the chance eyes are not stopped and displayed for a certain period of time after the start of the fluctuation, the jackpot is won. Since it is possible to execute an effect for notifying that, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the third control example, a chance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as an object that appears a plurality of times (three times) at predetermined intervals (1.4 second intervals). Anything that can be recognized by a person may be used, and for example, the upper lifting unit 300 may be moved at a predetermined interval. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the result of the lottery using a configuration other than the display of the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with a more interesting effect.

  Furthermore, in the case of using a configuration for moving the movable role associated with the pachinko machine 10 such as the upper elevating unit 300, in addition to the configuration in which the same operation (swinging operation) is performed a plurality of times, for example, the movable role can be stepped The movable role may move to a final stage by moving the movable role a predetermined number of times. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the big hit is approaching, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Even when the third symbol display device 81 is configured to stop and display a predetermined display mode (such as a chance) a plurality of times as in the third control example, the predetermined display mode is the stop display. The third symbol display device 81 may display a frequency display for displaying the number of times performed, and a target display for displaying the number of stop displays in a predetermined display mode necessary for notifying that a jackpot has been won. Thus, each time the predetermined display mode is stopped and displayed, the player can be made to recognize that the big hit is approaching, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  In the third control example, since the process of counting the number of chances is performed with respect to the variation that is continuously performed, the variation in which the effect mode in which the chance is stopped and displayed is selected is repeated a plurality of times. In such a case, the chances can be stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times over a plurality of fluctuations, and the production mode is controlled so that the predetermined number of chances is not stopped and displayed by the production mode corresponding to the fluctuation that has been won. The effect is enhanced.

  As described above, instead of the configuration in which the stop display effect of the chance eyes is performed for the continuously executed fluctuations, the stop display effect of the chance eyes is performed for the fluctuations performed within the predetermined period. You may. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of selecting a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is short as in the third control example, a predetermined number of chances can be stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals even if discontinuous fluctuations are used. It is. In the case of using such a configuration, an effect mode in which the chance is stopped and displayed a plurality of times within a predetermined period is determined in advance, and the chance is displayed in a variable display corresponding to the timing at which the opportunity is stopped and displayed in the effect mode. May be configured to be stopped.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the chance consecutive production using the discontinuous fluctuation. When this configuration is used, it is preferable to provide a slight tolerance to the timing at which the chance is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the fluctuation that enables the continuous production of the chance eyes, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in the third control example, when “missing middle fluctuation” is determined in “chance eye continuous production”, the first or second chance is performed for the first time (0.2 seconds after the fluctuation is started). The stop display can be performed at the stop display timing of the second (after) or the second (1.6 seconds after the start of the change), but, for example, the third time (the change is started at "middle change"). (3 seconds after that), the stop eye may be stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. With this configuration, it is possible to stop and display a plurality of chances at predetermined intervals over the middle fluctuation and the short fluctuation.

  Further, in the third control example, when the “additional effect” is executed, a configuration is provided in which the winning pocket (lucky number) added (added) by the “additional effect” is intentionally biased (not evenly distributed). Therefore, with respect to 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640, an area (location) where the setting of the hit pocket is large and an area (location) where the setting of the hit pocket is small are intentionally provided. Can be. Therefore, since the area that is easy to hit in the roulette chance effect (the area where the setting of the hit pocket is large) and the area that is hard to hit (the area where the setting of the hit pocket is small) pass, the timing at which the ball B falls is determined by the player. Will look interesting and can enhance the effect of production.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, the control and the effect in the “normal mode” and the “preparation mode” have been mainly described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth control example, as one mode of the entertaining effect in the “rensou mode”, a method of improving the interest of the player by the effect using the accessory (the upper elevating unit 300) is used. explain.

  Further, in the first control example described above, if the addition of the winning pocket is determined in the additional effect performed in the first half (20 seconds from the start of the effect) of the “renjo mode suggesting effect”, the position of the additional winning pocket is determined. Is determined randomly within a range in which the number of hit pockets does not become 6 or more. Then, when the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect, after the period (amplitude) of the swing operation of the ball B becomes sufficiently small, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is determined, and the ball B is dropped. The configuration was such that the ball B was held on the holding piece 677 until the possible pocket was located before the drop position (0.2 seconds before reaching the drop position).

  On the other hand, in the present fourth control example, the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 in the roulette chance effect is calculated back in advance during the execution of the increase effect, and the additional position of the winning pocket is determined. Here, the back calculation method will be described in detail. Since the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 is reached 70 seconds after the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, the ball B can drop through the swinging operation. It is approximately 75 seconds to 82 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestion effect”. Therefore, when adding the winning pocket in a state where the transition to the “rensou mode” is determined, when it is about 75 seconds to 82 seconds after the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, the drop position is reached. The pocket to be arranged (or a pocket close to the drop position) is determined from the current elapsed time and the rotational speed of the rotating member 640, and is determined as the additional position. On the other hand, if the transition to the “rensou mode” is not determined, the additional position is determined avoiding the pocket that is predicted to be placed at the drop position after about 75 seconds to 82 seconds described above. As described above, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 at the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” has a different configuration according to the pocket in which the ball B was dropped in the previous “rensou mode suggestion effect”. By arranging the rotating member 640 and estimating the elapsed time, it is possible to easily predict the pocket to be placed at the drop position after about 75 seconds to 82 seconds. Thereby, the ball B can be accurately dropped into the hit or missed pocket, depending on whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”.

  In the above-described first control example, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 (the pocket arranged at the drop position) is determined by a combination of the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F of the rotation position detection sensor 684. It was configured to identify. Accordingly, when the lighting control of the rear LED 625 is performed, only the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket set as the hit pocket according to the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately set to the lighting state. Thus, the player could easily recognize the hit pocket from the appearance. Also, when the ball B is dropped, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is determined, and the lottery result of the special symbol executed in the “preparation mode” (ie, whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”) is determined. It was configured so that it could be dropped into an appropriate type of pocket accordingly.

  In addition to this, in the fourth control example, when the detection results of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are obtained, the detection results are transferred to the next pocket (current dropping position). The pocket arranged at the drop position next to the pocket arranged at the position is held until it is arranged at the drop position. Then, the held detection result is compared with a new detection result obtained by arranging the next pocket at the drop position to determine whether there is an abnormality. That is, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined by determining whether the previous detection result and the current detection result are continuous (adjacent) pocket detection results. This makes it possible to detect damage to the detection sensors A to F (or damage to the detected portion 641c).

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configurations of the RAM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that some processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Control Example>
First, the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 207 (a) to 207 (d), the ROM 222 of the present control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 118 (a)) in that the variation pattern selection table 222a and the operation The difference is that the contents of the scenario table 222b are partially changed. The other contents of the ROM 222 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example. Hereinafter, the same portions as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 (a) is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222a of the fourth control example. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 222a in the first control example, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fourth control example is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and roughly indicates the variation pattern command indicated by the variation pattern command. 9 is a data table used to determine more detailed variation content from variation content (variation time).

  As shown in FIG. 207 (a), the variation pattern selection table 222a in the present control example includes a normal middle and large hit table 222a1, a normal out-of-center table 222a2, and a connected-village variation pattern selection table 222a5. I have.

  In the normal middle and big hit table 222a1, detailed production modes corresponding to the fluctuation types of the fluctuation times of 7 seconds and 10 seconds are defined based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (shown in FIG. Zu). Here, a description will be given of an effect mode defined in the normal middle and large hit table 222a1. First, a 7-second stop pattern and a 10-second stop pattern are defined in the normal middle and big hit table 222a1 as stop patterns of symbols that are variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the rendering unit 331.

  The 7-second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which symbols that are variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d are stopped and displayed at equal intervals. The 10-second stop pattern is a pattern in which the symbols are finally displayed among the display units 331a to 331d. The time from when the symbol corresponding to the lucky number (for example, “2”, “7”, “13”) is stopped and displayed on the display unit other than the display unit 331d to be stopped until the symbol stops on the display unit 331d is long. This is the stop pattern to be set.

  Further, the normal out-of-place table 222a2 is also a detailed effect corresponding to the change type of the change time of 7 seconds and 10 seconds based on the change pattern command output from the main controller 110, similarly to the table of the normal middle and big hits 222a1. An embodiment is defined (not shown).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are selected as the fluctuation patterns to be selected in the case of a normal middle and large win. The ratio is defined so as to be about 1 to 1 (see FIG. 111A), and as a fluctuation pattern selected in the case of normal deviation, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds Is defined so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern is about 3 to 1 (see FIG. 111B). Therefore, when the 10-second stop pattern is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 207 (b), the details of the continuous variation pattern selection table 222a5 will be described. The in-house variation pattern selection table 222a5 is a variation pattern selection table that is referred to in the “long-house mode” during which time is being reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 207 (b), when the variation type is the hit short variation (0.2 seconds), the normal jackpot effect is set for the value “0 to 99” of the effect counter 223sw. When the variation type is the hit middle variation (3 seconds), the upper swing effect is set for the value “0 to 99” of the effect counter 223sw. When the variation type is the outlier short variation (0.2 seconds), the outlier is normally set for the value “0-79” of the effect counter 223sw, and the value “80-99” of the effect counter 223sw. In contrast, an upper swing effect, which is an effect mode involving the operation of the upper moving unit 300, is set. When the variation type is the middle variation (3 seconds), a normal deviation effect is set for the value “0 to 89” of the effect counter 223sw, and the upper value is set for the value “90 to 99” of the effect counter 223sw. Swing effect is set.

  Here, the upper swing effect is an effect in which an upper swing operation in which the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 moves up and down a predetermined number of times is performed. Specifically, in the case where a lottery result of the special symbol lottery result is executed, the upper swing operation is performed three times (0 seconds, 1.4 seconds, and 2.8 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). Is performed three times). In the upper swing effect performed when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, an upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed once or twice is performed. As described above, since the number of times of the upper swing operation when the upper swing effect is set is made different depending on whether or not a big hit occurs, the number of times of the upper swing operation can be noticed. That is, it is possible to observe the upper elevating unit 300, hoping that the upper swing operation is performed three times in succession. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the “rensou mode”.

  Next, the contents of the operation scenario table 222b in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 207 (c), the operation scenario table 222b in the fourth control example is different from the configuration of the operation scenario table 222b in the above-described first control example (see FIG. 119 (a)) in the upper swing. The difference is that an effect table 222b8 is added. The upper swing effect table 222b8 is a table that is referred to when the upper swing effect executed in the present control example is set.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 207 (d), the prescribed contents of the upper swing effect table 222b8 will be described. As in the other data tables defined as the operation scenario table 222b, the upper swing effect table 222b8 includes a motor control IC (motor driver IC) for each value of the operation pointer 223g indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario. ) Are set (operation speed (pps), number of operation steps, and operation direction).

  As shown in FIG. 207 (d), the operation for lowering the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the ascending position (origin position) to the descending position (the operation of the forward path) is set to the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g. Are associated with each other. Specifically, 635 pps is specified as the operation speed, 127 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is specified as the operation direction. This set content is output (set) to the motor driver when the timing of driving the upper elevating unit 300 in the upper swing effect is reached. In addition, 127 steps mean the number of steps up to the descending position.

  Here, the operating speed of 635 pps means that the motor driver outputs a signal instructing the upper elevating motor 341 to drive for one step at a frequency of 635 pulses (steps) per second. The time required for the elevating body 330 of the elevating unit 300 to perform the 127-step operation (move from the origin position to the descending position) is 127/635 seconds (0.2 seconds).

  The value (02H) of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation (return operation) for raising the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 from the lowered position to the raised position (origin position). Specifically, 635 pps is specified as the operation speed, 127 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. Therefore, the elevating body 330 of the vertical elevating body unit 300 moves from the descending position to the ascending position in 0.2 seconds. Further, END data is associated with the value “03H” of the operation pointer 223g. By reading this END data, it is determined that the execution of all the operations specified in the operation scenario has been completed.

  As described above, the upper swing effect is that the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 descends from the ascending position to the descending position in 0.2 seconds, and then from the descending position to the ascending position in 0.2 seconds. And an ascending motion of a total of 0.4 seconds is performed a predetermined number of times (three times in the case of a big hit and one or two times in the case of a miss). As described above, the upper swing effect is executed as an effect indicating a degree of expectation to be a big hit in the extended game mode.

  Thereby, whether or not the swing operation is executed at a predetermined timing (0 seconds (immediately after the start of the fluctuation), 1.4 seconds, 2.8 seconds) after the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed (started) This can make the player interested.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 in this control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 118B) in that an upper swing effect timer 223pw, an upper swing effect flag 223qw, and a sensor information storage area 223rw are provided. , And an effect counter 223sw are added, and other configurations are the same. The same portions as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The upper swing production timer 223pw is a timer counter for counting (measuring) the production time (elapsed time from the start of the production) of the upper swing production. This upper swing effect timer is initialized to 0 (see S6135 in FIG. 213) when the upper swing effect is determined in the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213), and the upper swing effect is executed. In this case, 1 is added each time the upper swing effect process (see FIG. 214) is executed (see S6204 in FIG. 214).

  The upper swing effect flag 223qw is a flag for determining whether or not the upper swing effect is being executed. The upper swing effect flag 223qw is used in the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213). It is set to ON when the rocking effect is determined (see S6133 in FIG. 213), and when it is determined in the upper rocking effect process (see FIG. 214) that the upper rocking effect has been completed (the big hit has been started). In this case (S6201: Yes), the third swing operation timing (S6207: Yes) is set to off (S6202, S6208).

  The sensor information storage area 223rw is an area for storing (updating) the output values of the six detection sensors (detection sensors AF) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684, and stores the output values of the detection sensors AF. It is configured to be able to store (update) at least once. In the sensor information storage area 223rw, the output values of the detection sensors A to F are stored (updated) in the rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 210) (see S2836 in FIG. 210).

  Although details will be described later, in the rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 210), the output values of the previously stored detection sensors A to F are compared with the current output values of the detection sensors A to F (S2833 in FIG. 210). ), The presence or absence of an abnormality with respect to the detection values of the detection sensors A to F is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F and the current output values of the detection sensors A to F match with each other. Is determined to be abnormal.

  Here, the output values of the detection sensors A to F are a total of six pockets attached to a total of five pockets, that is, a pocket at which the ball B falls, two pockets at the right and two pockets at the left of the pocket. Changes depending on the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c. As shown in the rotation position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121), when the number of pockets at which the drop position is changed by one, the detection target 641c detected by the detection sensors A to E is changed to the detection sensors B to It is moved to the position detected by F. The detected portion 641c that has been detected by the detection sensor F is out of the detection range of the detection sensors A to F, and is moved to a position where a new detected portion 641c is detected by the detection sensor A. Therefore, when the output values of the detection sensors A to E do not match the output values of the detection sensors B to F after the pocket at which the drop position is changed by one, the detected portion 641c is damaged. Can be determined to have occurred.

  The effect counter 223sw is a counter used for selecting various effects (such as “upper swing effect”) and various lotteries in the sound lamp control device 113. Although not shown, the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 is omitted. 4 (see FIG. 209), it is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99.

<Regarding control processing of voice lamp control device in fourth control example>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 209 to 214, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. First, the main process 4 executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The main process 4 in the fourth control example is different from the main process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example in that an upper swing effect process (S1651) is added and the main process 4 in the command determination process (S1614). The rotation setting process 4 (see S2609 and FIG. 210) is executed instead of the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157), and the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the command determination process (S1614) is replaced. The special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117, see FIG. 211) is executed, and the variable display setting process 4 (S1652, see FIG. 212) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (S1615). The other parts are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the main processing 4 in the fourth control example, similarly to the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 145), after executing the processing of S1601 to S1610, the upper elevating unit 300 is used in the “long-sleeping mode”. The upper swing effect process for setting the effect to be performed is executed (S1651), and the process proceeds to S1611. The details of the upper swing effect process (S1651) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the main process 4 (see FIG. 209) in the present control example, after performing the processes of S1611 to S1614, the variable display setting process 4 is performed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. The process is executed (S1652), and the process proceeds to S1616. The details of the variable display setting process 4 (S1652) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the rotation setting process 4 (S2609) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The rotation setting process 4 (S2609) in the fourth control example is a process executed in the execution command process (see FIG. 155) instead of the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) in the first control example. Similar to the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157), this is a process for controlling the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 (and the rear LED 625).

  The rotation setting processing 4 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example is different from the rotation setting processing (see FIG. 157) in the first control example in that the processing of S2831 is executed instead of the processing of S2801; And S2836 are added, and the other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the rotation setting process 4 (S2609) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the outputs of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 have all changed from the L state. (S2831). That is, it is determined whether each of the detected portions 641c provided in the pocket has been displaced from outside the detection range of the detection sensors A to F to within the detection range, and all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F remain in the L state. When it is determined that each of the detected portions 641c remains disposed outside the detection range of the detection sensors A to F (S2831: No), a new (next) pocket is disposed at the drop position of the ball B. If not (the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotation member 640 since the time when the output values of the detection centers A to F were stored in the sensor information storage area 223 rw last time) is equal to or less than the unit rotation amount (the amount of rotation for moving one pocket). In this case, the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2831, the output values of at least one of the detection sensors AF are changed from the state in which the output values of the six detection sensors (detection sensors AF) constituting the rotational position detection sensor 684 are all L. If it is determined that the ball has been displaced to the state of H (S2831: Yes), a new (next) pocket is placed at the drop position of the ball B (previous detection centers A to F are stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw). Since the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotation member 640 has become the unit rotation amount from the time when the output value is stored, the process proceeds to S2802 in this case. Even if the output values of all of the detection sensors A to F are not L, unless the output value of any of the detection sensors A to F has changed from L to H (S2831: No), Since the processing after S2802 is executed, in this case, the present processing ends.

  In the processing of S2802, the pocket at the drop position of the ball B is specified (S2802), and the rotational position storage area 223u is updated based on the specified pocket (S2803), as in the first control example. Next, it is determined whether or not the detection by the detection sensors AF after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is the first time (S2832). Specifically, it is determined whether or not an initial value is stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw. In the sensor information storage area 223rw, L (0) is set to all bits of a 2-byte storage area as an initial value when the power is turned on. In the process of S2832, when L (0) is stored in all the bits allocated to the sensor information storage area 223rw, it is determined that the detection is the first detection.

  In the process of S2832, when it is determined that the detection by the detection sensors A to F is not performed for the first time after the power is turned on (that is, the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F are stored) (S2832). : No), the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw (before the pocket position is changed by one), and this time, one of the pockets is newly placed at the drop position. The output values of the detection sensors A to F that have been displaced due to the operation are compared (S2833). Specifically, as described above, among the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F, five types of output values of the detection sensors A to E and the detection sensor B of the output values of the current detection sensors A to F ＦF are compared with the five output values. The presence or absence of an abnormality with respect to the detection result of the sensor can be determined only by the detection results of the detection sensors A to F for the pocket arranged at the previous drop position and the detection result for the pocket arranged at the current drop position. This is because, when the pocket changes by one, the detected portion 641c detected by the detection sensors A to E is moved to a position detected by the detection sensors B to F. Therefore, when the output values of the detection sensors A to E do not match the output values of the detection sensors B to F before the pocket at which the drop position is changed by one, at least one of the detected portions 641c is damaged. As a result, it can be determined that a problem has occurred such that detection by the detection sensor has become impossible.

  When the processing in S2833 ends, it is determined whether the comparison result executed in the processing in S2833 is abnormal (S2834). Specifically, when the output values of the previous detection sensors A to E and the current output values of the detection sensors B to F match, it is determined that there is no abnormality, and when they do not match, it is determined that there is an abnormality. In the process of S2834, when it is determined that the comparison result is abnormal (S2834: Yes), error information is output (error command for display is set) (S2835), and the process proceeds to S2836.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2832, when it is determined that the detection by the detection sensors A to F is the first time (S2832: Yes), the processing cannot be compared with the previous detection result, and the processing of S2833 to S2835 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S2836. If it is determined in step S2834 that the comparison result is normal (S2834: No), the process skips step S2835 and shifts to step S2836.

  In the process of S2836, the value of the sensor information storage area 223rw is updated based on the current output values of the detection sensors A to F, and the flow shifts to the process of S2804. In the processing of S2804 to S2808, the same processing as the processing of S2804 to S2808 of the first control example is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the rotation setting process 4 in the fourth control example, a plurality of pieces of detection information (output values) of the detection sensors A to F can be stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw, and a predetermined timing (one of the pockets) can be stored. Of the detection information (the detection information of the previously stored detection sensors A to F and the detection information obtained this time) obtained at the timing when the is located at the drop position, the detection information is the same if normal. By comparing the detection information of (range), it is possible to detect failure of the detection sensors A to F or damage of the detection target 641c.

  In the fourth control example, a configuration is used in which the previous detection information (the pocket located at the last drop position) and the current detection information (the pocket located at the current drop position) are compared. The detection information obtained at three or more timings (for example, the timing at which the pocket was placed at the drop position two times before, this time, and the last time) may be compared. With such a configuration, the abnormality can be more accurately detected. Can be determined.

  Further, in the fourth control example, the failure of the detection sensors A to F or the damage of the detected portion 641c is performed using the detection information (output value) of the detection sensors A to F used to specify the pocket of the rotating member 640. Therefore, there is no need to separately acquire detection information for detecting an abnormality of the detection sensors A to F or the detected portion 641c. Therefore, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  The configuration for detecting the failure of the detection sensors A to F or the damage of the detected portion 641c is based on the combination of the detection result obtained when the pocket was previously placed at the drop position and the current time when the pocket is dropped. The present invention is not limited to a mode in which the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined by comparing a combination of the detection results obtained when being arranged at a position. For example, the arrangement pattern of the detected portion 641c is stored (stored) in advance. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which it is determined whether or not an output value (detection information) output from at least one of the detection sensors A to F matches an arrangement pattern stored in advance. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as in the fourth control example can be obtained.

  Further, based on the output values (detection information) of the detection sensors A to F stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw, prediction detection information that predicts at least a part of the detection information to be stored next time is created, and the prediction detection is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether the information matches the detection information stored next time.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning command processing 4 (S2117) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117) in the fourth control example is different from the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example in that steps S3321 to S3234 are performed instead of steps S3209 to S3211. The difference is that the processing is executed, and the other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117) in the fourth control example is started, first, the processes of S3201 to S3208 are executed as in the first control example. Then, in the process of S3208, when it is determined that the game is to be added (S3208: Yes), a pocket within a fallable range is specified from the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 (S3231). Here, the timing at which the pitching device 650 performs the pitching operation (throws the ball B to the holding piece 677) is 50 seconds after the roulette chance effect is started (70 seconds from the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”). After). The period from when the ball B is thrown to when the ball B is dropped after swinging on the holding piece 677 is about 7 seconds to 10 seconds. Therefore, for example, if the process of S3231 is performed 5 seconds after the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is started, the pitching device 650 performs the pitching operation 65 seconds later, and 72 seconds to 75 seconds later. It can be determined that the ball B falls. Then, the rotation member 640 rotates at a rotation speed capable of moving one pocket per second. For this reason, in this specific example, the ball B falls after performing the rotation operation for 72 to 75 pockets (that is, 12 to 15 pockets ahead of the pocket currently arranged at the drop position). Then, it is determined. In the process of S3231, the seven pockets including the margin are determined as the fallable range. For example, in the above specific example, the pockets 8 to 17 ahead are determined as the fallable range. That is, two margins are provided before and after.

  When the processing of S3231 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved ball that will be a jackpot in the “preparation mode” (when the time-saving state counter is larger than 0) (S3232). In the process of S3232, when it is determined that there is a reserved ball that has a probability of winning in the “preparation mode” (S3232: Yes), the pocket specified in the process of S3231 is selected as an additional position (S3234) and the process of S3212 is performed. Move to.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3232, when it is determined that there is no retained ball that will be a big hit in the preparation mode (S3232: No), a pocket different from the pocket specified in the process of S3231 is selected as an additional position (S3233). ), And proceeds to the process of S3212.

  After the processing of S3212, the processing of S3212 and the processing of S3213 are executed as in the first control example, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the special figure 2 winning command processing 4 (S2117) of the present control example, in the processing of S3232, when it is determined that there is a reserved ball with a probability of changing in the “prepare mode” (that is, in the roulette chance effect) In the case where the ball B hits and falls into the pocket), the pocket having the fallable range specified in the process of S3231 is selected as the additional position. As a result, it is possible to add a pocket which can be dropped as a hit position, so that there are many pockets (lighted pockets) in a range where the ball B can be dropped in the effect of dropping the ball B (roulette chance effect). Will be placed. As a result, it is easy to drop the ball B into the hit pocket (lighted pocket).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3232, when it is determined that there is no reserved ball that will be a probable big hit during the preparation mode (that is, in the case of the roulette chance effect, the ball B falls and falls into the pocket), it is specified in the process of S3231. A pocket different from the pocket in which the fall is allowed is selected as the additional position. As a result, since a pocket that can fall is not added as a hit position, the pocket is out of the range where the ball B can be dropped in the effect of dropping the ball B (roulette chance effect) (a pocket that is turned off). Will be arranged more. As a result, it is easy to drop the ball B into the unplugged pocket (the pocket that is turned off).

  As described above, in the special figure 2 winning command processing 4 (see FIG. 211) in the fourth control example, the range in which the ball B can fall in the roulette chance effect is calculated based on the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650. The 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640 are divided into a range where the ball B can fall (first region) and a range where the ball B does not fall (difficult) (second region). Classified.

  Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not there is a hold to be a probability change big hit during the preparation mode, that is, based on the determination result as to whether the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket or the missed pocket by the roulette chance effect, the hit pocket is determined. Since the region to be added is set to either the first region or the second region, even if the frequency of the effect of adding (adding) a winning pocket is increased, the ball B is appropriately applied to the lottery result of the special symbol. Can be dropped.

  In the fourth control example, as the first area where the ball B can fall, the number of hit pockets (lucky numbers) that can be specified by the player is more than five (ie, the number of pockets 7). ). Thereby, even if the player sets the lucky number to five consecutive pockets and all of the five consecutive pockets are included in the fallable range (first region), the fallable range (first region) is set. It is possible to set at least one missing pocket in one area). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately drop the ball B with respect to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 4 (S1652) in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the variation display setting process 4 (S1652) in the fourth control example, a variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is performed instead of the process in S3304, in contrast to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. And the other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the variation display setting process 4 (S1652) in the present control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on in the process of S3301 (S3301: Yes), the process proceeds from S3302. The processing of S3303 is executed. Then, a variation pattern selection process 4 is executed (S3331), and the process shifts to the process of S3305, where the processes of S3306 to S3310 are executed as in the first control example, and the present process ends. The variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is a process for selecting a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Details of the variation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213) will be described with reference to FIG.

  The flowchart of FIG. 213 is a flowchart illustrating the above-described variation pattern selection processing 4 (S3331). This variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is a modification of a portion of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 206) in the third control example. Specifically, the difference is that processing related to the upper swing effect (S6131 to S6135) is executed instead of the processing related to the chance eye effect (S6106, S6108 to S6110). The points are the same. Hereinafter, the same portions as those in the third control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331), first, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state flag 223o is on (S6101). In the process of S6101, when it is determined that the time reduction state flag 223o is off (S6101: No), the normal effect mode is determined as in the variation pattern process (see FIG. 206) in the third control example. (S6102 to S6104), a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined effect mode is set (S6111), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6101 that the time reduction state flag 223o is ON (S6101: Yes), the table for extended holiday (variable pattern selection table 222a5 during extended holiday) is read from the variation pattern selection table 222a. (S6105). Then, the value of the effect counter 223sw is read (S6131), and the effect mode is determined based on the read variable pattern selection table 222a5 during consecutive holidays and the value of the effect counter 223sw (S6107).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off and the effect mode determined in the process of S6107 is the upper effect mode (S6132). In the process of S6132, when it is determined that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is ON (that is, the upper swing effect is already being executed) or that the upper swing effect has not been determined in the process of S6107 ( (S6112: No), the display variation pattern command for notifying the normal jackpot effect is set as the effect mode (S6111), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6132, when it is determined that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off and the upper swing effect is determined (S6132: Yes), the upper swing effect flag 223qw is turned on. It is set (S6133), and the upper swing operation is set (S6134). By setting the upper swing operation in the process of S6134, the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 is moved up and down based on the upper swing effect table 222b8 of the operation scenario table 222b described above.

  Thereafter, the upper swing effect timer 223pw is initialized to 0 (S6135), a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined effect mode is set (S6111), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) in the present control example, when the upper swing effect is determined (S6132: Yes), the setting is performed so that the lifting body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 can move up and down. At the same time, the upper swing effect timer 223pw is initialized to zero. Using the upper swing effect timer 223pw, the elapsed time from the start of the upper swing effect is measured, and when a predetermined time (1.4 seconds or 2.8 seconds) has elapsed, the upper elevating unit 300 is again activated. The upper swing operation of vertically moving the elevating body 330 can be executed.

  Next, details of the upper swing effect processing (S1651) in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 214. When the upper swing effect is determined (started) in the above-described variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331), the upper swing effect process (S1651) is performed for a predetermined time from the start of the upper swing effect (in the present control example, This is a process for measuring the elapsed time of 1.4 seconds and 2.8 seconds) and executing the upper swing operation when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the upper swing effect process (S1651), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game has been started (S6201). If it is determined in the process of S6201 that the jackpot game has been started (S6201: Yes), the upper swing effect has been started, but thereafter, the jackpot game has been started due to the occurrence of a jackpot due to a hit short variation. In this case, the upper swing effect flag 223qw is set to OFF to end the upper swing effect (S6202), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6201 that the big hit game has not been started (S6201: No), then it is determined whether or not the upper swing effect flag 223qw is on (S6203).

  In the process of S6203, when it is determined that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off (S6203: No), the upper swing effect has not been started, and thus the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is ON (S6203: Yes), the process proceeds to S6204 to execute the upper swing effect.

  In the processing of S6204, the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is added by 1 (S6204). The upper swing effect process (S1651) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 209) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 described above. Therefore, the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is added every 1 ms by the process of S6204.

  After finishing the process of S6204, it is determined whether or not the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw after the addition is 1400 (S6205). That is, it is determined whether 1.4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the upper swing effect.

  In the processing of S6205, when it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw after the addition is 1400 (S6205: Yes), the upper body 330 of the upper lifting unit 300 is moved up and down to move it up and down. The swing operation is set (S6206), and the flow shifts to the process of S6207.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is not 1400 (S6205), the process of S6206 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6207. In the process of S6207, it is determined whether or not the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is 2800 (S6207). That is, it is determined whether or not 2.8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the upper swing effect.

  In the process of S6207, when it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is 2800 (S6207: Yes), the upper swing effect flag 223qw is turned off because it is the end timing of the upper swing effect. After setting (S6208), the process proceeds to S6209.

  In the process of S6209, it is determined whether or not a change to be a big hit is being executed (S6209). If it is determined in the process of S6209 that a big change is being executed (S6209: Yes), the upper swing operation is set (S6210).

  On the other hand, in the process of S6209, when it is determined that the change that causes the jackpot has not been executed (S6209: No), the process of S6210 is skipped, and the present process ends.

  Here, the upper swing effect in the present control example is an effect in which the upper swing operation in which the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 can move up and down is performed up to three times as described above. The case where the upper swing operation is performed three times is limited to a case where a big hit is thereafter performed. By performing the upper swing operation three times, the player is notified that the big hit has been won. it can.

  The processing of S6209 is executed in the upper swing effect already in the first upper swing operation (immediately after the start of the upper swing effect) and the second time (1.4 after the upper swing effect is started). (After 2 seconds). In this case, if the change to be a big hit is being executed, the upper swing operation is set to execute the third upper swing operation (2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect). (S6210).

  On the other hand, if the change that results in the jackpot is not executed (S6209: No), the upper swing effect is not set, and the process ends. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a problem that the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times is executed after the upper swing operation is performed even though the big hit does not occur.

  As described above, the upper swing effect performed by the fluctuation pattern selection process 4 (S3331 in FIG. 213) and the upper swing effect process (S1651 in FIG. 214) of the fourth control example is output from the main control device 110. The first upper swing operation is performed based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the second upper swing operation is performed based on the lapse of a predetermined time (1.4 seconds) since the upper swing effect was performed. Be executed. Then, when a predetermined time (1.4 seconds) elapses after the execution of the second upper swing operation, the third upper swing operation is performed when the special symbol that has won the jackpot is changed. Is configured to be executed.

  Thereby, the upper swing effect composed of the operation mode (upper swing operation) performed a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval) is performed by changing the special symbol variation pattern (variation time). Can be performed without being affected by

  Therefore, as in the case of “hit middle fluctuation (variation time: 3 seconds)” selected by the continuous fluctuation pattern selection table 222a5, three upper rocking operations are completed during one fluctuation as an upper rocking effect. In other cases, the upper swing effect is started due to the “short short change (change time 0.2 seconds)”, and the “hit short change (change time 0.2 seconds) is different from the change in which the upper swing effect was started. ) "Is fluctuating 2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect, the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times can be executed.

  Therefore, a predetermined operation mode (upper swing operation) is executed a plurality of times (three times) at predetermined intervals (1.4 second intervals) to notify that a predetermined lottery result (big hit) has been won. The effect (upper swing effect) can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, even if a configuration that does not store a special symbol lottery (a configuration without a so-called storage function) is used, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, an effect that associates a plurality of special symbol variations with each other. Can be performed.

  The configuration of the fourth control example may be used for the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration for storing a special symbol lottery (winning information) (a configuration for holding and storing), for example, the third upper swing operation is executed. It is determined at the timing that the winning information stored on the hold includes winning information that has won the jackpot. If there is winning information that has won the jackpot, the third upper swing operation is performed. It may be configured to be executed. Thereby, the frequency of the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the fourth control example, the second upper swing operation is always performed 1.4 seconds after the upper swing effect is started. For example, the upper swing effect is started. It is configured to determine whether the special symbol is fluctuating when 1.4 seconds have passed since the second symbol, and to execute the second upper swing operation when it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating. Is also good. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed is an effect related to the change display of the special symbol, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. effective.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 in the roulette chance effect is calculated back in advance during the increase effect, and the additional position of the winning pocket is determined. That is, when the ball B is thrown, the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation performed on the upper part of the movable piece 677 is reduced, and the timing (period) that gives a natural appearance when the ball B is dropped is calculated backward. The additional position of the winning pocket is determined based on the calculated period and the result of the present roulette chance production (whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode”). Here, after the amplitude of the swinging motion of the ball B simply becomes small, the apparatus waits until the pocket type corresponding to the result of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is placed at the drop position, and the corresponding pocket type becomes In the case where the ball B is dropped at the timing of being placed at the drop position, the state where the corresponding pocket type is not placed at the drop position continues for a long time, so that the ball B may stop before dropping the ball B. There is. In other words, there is a possibility that the appearance of the ball B does not fall into the pocket even though the ball B is at rest, resulting in an extremely unnatural appearance.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, a section in which the ball B can be dropped (a section located at the drop position when the cycle of the swinging motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle) is defined as “a series In the case where the number of hit pockets is determined in advance at the start of the "mode suggestive effect" and the number of hit pockets is increased by the increase effect, the distribution of the hit pockets and the missing pockets in the section where the ball B can be dropped (addition is determined. In this case, whether to set a new hit pocket in the section or not is determined according to the result of the effect (whether the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket or dropped into the missing pocket). With this configuration, in the section where the ball B can be dropped, it is possible to reliably arrange the type of pocket corresponding to the effect result. Accordingly, the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation of the ball B is equal to or less than the predetermined period (1 second), and the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket before the swinging operation of the ball B stops. it can. Therefore, the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance and with high accuracy.

  In the fourth control example, when the detection results of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are acquired, the detection results are placed in the next pocket (currently dropped position). (A pocket placed at the drop position next to the pocket being placed) is held until it is placed at the drop position. Then, the held detection result is compared with a new detection result obtained by arranging the next pocket at the drop position to determine whether there is an abnormality. That is, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined by determining whether the previous detection result and the current detection result are continuous (adjacent) pocket detection results. This makes it possible to detect damage to the detection sensors A to F (or damage to the detected portion 641c).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, as one mode of the entertaining effect in the “rensou mode”, the effect of using the accessory (the upper elevating unit 300) is used to improve the interest of the player. Specifically, it is configured to be able to perform an effect of moving the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 one or more times at predetermined time intervals (intervals of 1.4 seconds). The number of operations of the lifting / lowering body 330 is made different depending on whether or not a big hit occurs. In the case of a deviation, the number of times of operation is two or less, and only in the case of a big hit, three raising / lowering operations are allowed. This allows the player to play a game while paying attention to the number of times of elevating and lowering operations of the elevating body 330, thereby suppressing a monotonous game in the “rensou mode”. .

  The effect in which the elevating body 330 performs the elevating operation (upper swinging effect) is performed for a predetermined number of times irrespective of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol (even if the fluctuation time elapses) unless the jackpot is started. The lifting operation is continued at a predetermined time interval (1.4 second interval). Therefore, as in the case of “hit middle fluctuation (variation time: 3 seconds)” selected by the continuous fluctuation pattern selection table 222a5, three upper rocking operations are completed during one fluctuation as an upper rocking effect. In other cases, the upper swing effect is started due to the “short short change (change time 0.2 seconds)”, and the “hit short change (change time 0.2 seconds) is different from the change in which the upper swing effect was started. ) "Is fluctuating 2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect, the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times can be executed. Therefore, a predetermined operation mode (upper swing operation) is executed a plurality of times (three times) at predetermined intervals (1.4 second intervals) to notify that a predetermined lottery result (big hit) has been won. The effect (upper swing effect) can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the fourth control example, the section in which the ball B can be dropped (the cycle of the swinging motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle) during the execution of the “rendition mode suggestive effect”. Is predicted in advance from the production time, and when setting a new hit pocket, the position of the new hit pocket is determined in consideration of the section where the ball B falls, but in addition to this, , At a predetermined timing in the “rensou mode suggestion” effect (for example, at the start of a roulette chance effect or at the timing of pitching the ball B by the pitching device 650), is there any change in the section where the ball B will fall? May be determined. Then, it is predicted in a section where the ball B is predicted to fall at the time when the winning pocket is newly set, and at a predetermined timing (for example, a start time of a roulette chance effect, a pitching timing of the ball B by the pitching device 650, and the like). If the section where the ball B is predicted to fall is shifted, the shift may be corrected. As a method of correcting the displacement, for example, by changing the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, the section where the ball B can actually fall can be made to match the section predicted at the time when the hit pocket is added. Alternatively, the ball B can be actually dropped by shifting the pitch of the pitch by the pitching device 650 from a predetermined timing (that is, 70 seconds after the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”). The section may be configured to match the section predicted at the time when the winning pocket is added. With this configuration, the ball B can be more reliably viewed with a natural appearance (the period of the swinging motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined period and the ball B is in a range where the ball B is not stationary), and Can be dropped into pocket.

  In this control example, when the detection results of the detection sensors A to F are acquired, the detection results are transferred to the next pocket (the pocket located at the next drop position next to the pocket currently located at the drop position). It is held until it is located at the position, and it is configured to determine the presence or absence of an abnormality by comparing with the new detection result obtained by placing the next pocket at the drop position. The determination method is not limited to this. For example, each time the detection results of the detection sensors A to F are obtained, a combination of the detection results of the pockets to be arranged next at the drop position is predicted in advance from the arrangement of the rotating member 640 specified by the detection results. It may be configured. That is, a combination of outputs of the detection sensors of the pockets to be placed next at the drop position may be read from the rotation position determination table 222c and stored in the RAM 223. Then, when the next pocket is actually placed at the drop position, the combination of the output of the detection sensor predicted in advance (stored in the RAM 223) matches the combination of the output of the actual detection sensor. It may be configured to determine whether or not. With this configuration, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, it is possible to accurately determine whether there is an abnormality such as breakage of each of the detection sensors A to F and breakage of the detected portion 641c. . Also, for example, the configuration is such that all combinations of outputs of the detection sensors A to F are stored in the order in which the pockets are arranged. It is good also as a structure which determines whether it has become. With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine the presence or absence of an abnormality in the detection sensors A to F and the detected portion 641c. Further, for example, when the rotating member 640 makes one rotation, the number of times the detected portion 641c is detected may be determined to determine whether at least a part of the detected portion 641c is damaged. . As described above, the detected portion 641c is provided in 16 of the 30 pockets. For this reason, when the rotating member 640 makes one rotation, the output of each of the detection sensors A to F should be H state 16 times each. In this situation, if it is determined that the number of H outputs per revolution is less than 16, one of the detected portions 641c is in a state where it cannot be detected by the detection sensors A to F due to damage or the like. Likely to be. Therefore, in this case, by reporting the abnormality, it is possible to promptly deal with a problem such as damage to the detected portion 641c. Furthermore, at the time of one rotation, the number of times that each of the detection sensors A to F has changed to the H output state may be compared to determine whether the numbers match. The number of times that the output is in the H state during one round (the number of times each of the detected parts 641c is detected) should be common to all the detection sensors. Can be determined to have a failure or the like. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine the malfunction of the detection sensors A to F.

  In the fourth control example, in the “rensou-mode suggestive effect” in which the effect time is fixed, the rotating member 640 is rotated at the start of the effect, and the rough section in which the ball B falls is predicted from the effect time or the like. However, the production time and the timing for starting the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 need not be fixed. For example, the control of the fourth control example can also be applied to a configuration in which the production time of the “rensou mode suggested production” has a variation and one production time is determined by lottery. That is, at the point in time when the production time is determined, a rough section in which the ball B is dropped may be predicted based on the production time and the rotation speed of the rotating member 640. In addition, similarly, even when a plurality of effect patterns in which one or both of the rotation speed and the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 are different from each other are provided, at the timing at which the rotation operation is started, The configuration may be such that the time until the ball B is thrown is calculated backward, and a rough section in which the ball B is dropped is predicted from the rotation speed of the rotating member 640. With this configuration, when a winning pocket is added, it is possible to arrange a new winning pocket so that a pocket of a type for dropping the ball B is reliably included in a section predicted in consideration of the effect result. it can. Therefore, in each “rensou mode suggestion effect”, the ball B can be dropped into the pocket of the type corresponding to the effect result. Furthermore, even when the timing at which the rendering time in the “rensou-mode suggestive rendering” is determined is later than the timing at which the rotating member 640 starts rotating, the control of the fourth control example is performed. Can be applied. In other words, at the timing at which the rendering time is determined, a section where the ball B may fall is roughly predicted from the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, and the predicted section corresponds to the type corresponding to the current rendering result. It is sufficient to adopt a configuration in which the pockets are placed on top of each other so that the pockets are arranged. Thereby, before the ball B completely stops the swinging operation, the ball B can be surely dropped into the pocket corresponding to the effect result.

<Fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, the first path forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is moved to the connection position when a partial jackpot (a jackpot in which the opening pattern A is set) is obtained by a part of the jackpot. The configuration is such that the ball that has won the winning device 82a is used as a flow-down passage for flowing the ball to the second passage forming member 422. In addition to this, in the present control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is configured to be movable as an effect indicating a degree of expectation that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a big hit. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the first control example described above, when the ball B is dropped in the “renjo mode suggestion effect”, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is performed after the period (amplitude) of the swing operation of the ball B becomes sufficiently small. Is determined, and the ball B is held on the holding piece 677 until the pocket where the ball B can be dropped is located in front of the drop position (0.2 seconds before reaching the drop position). .

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example is configured such that the drop position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect is determined in advance. Then, according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol, it is configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined drop position as a hit position (whether to light up). Thus, the ball B may be dropped into the predetermined pocket, so that the control process can be simplified.

  In the first control example described above, the timing at which the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650 is constant (70 seconds after the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is started). On the other hand, in the present control example, in the roulette chance effect, a period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is received (for example, three seconds in one roulette chance effect) is provided, and the player operates the frame button 22. When the ball B is detected, the ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650. Further, during the period in which the frame button 22 can be accepted, a pitch press effect (see FIG. 216) for prompting the player to press the frame button 22 is executed. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period suggested by the pitching press effect, the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650. This allows the player to throw the ball B onto the rotating member 640 at an arbitrary timing, thereby improving the player's willingness to participate in the roulette chance effect.

  Note that the timing of starting the pitching press effect (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is received) is determined based on the rotational position of the rotating member 640. Thereby, the pitch-down effect can be started at a timing at which the ball can easily be dropped to a predetermined drop position (pocket) in the pitch-down effect. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 1.5 seconds) after the above-described pitching press effect is started, the timing at which the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650 is delayed. Configured. This makes it possible to limit the timing at which the ball B is pitched in the pitching press effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of the problem that the ball B falls into a pocket other than the predetermined pocket.

  The difference of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the configurations of the RAM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that a part of the processing performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 215, a description will be given of an effect mode of a notice effect by the left swing unit 500 in the present control example. As described above in the first control example, in the “normal mode” of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is a big hit by the number (number) displayed on the staging unit 331 of the upper elevating unit 300. Is notified. In addition to this, in the present control example, an effect in which the left swing unit 500 can be moved up and down (left swing effect) can be executed as an effect indicating a degree of expectation that the special symbol lottery result will be a big hit. Have been. In addition, as a left swing production, a first left swing production with a relatively low expectation of a big hit and a second left swing production with a high expectation of a big hit as compared with the first left swing production. At least two types are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 215 (a), in the first left swing effect and the second left swing effect, first, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is moved from the release position to the release position and the connection position. Is moved up to an intermediate position between. Thereafter, in the first left swing effect, the left swing unit 500 is moved down from the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position to the release position.

  On the other hand, in the second left swing effect, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), the ascending operation is performed from the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position to the connection position. Then, the lowering operation is performed from the connection position to the release position.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present control example, the left swing effect (first swing movement) in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is movable according to the degree of expectation that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. A left swing effect or a second left swing effect) is executed. Thereby, the player pays attention to whether or not the second left swing effect having a high expectation to be a big hit is executed (note whether the left swing unit 500 rises from the intermediate position). The fun of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 216, a description will be given of the pitching-down effect in the fifth control example. The roulette chance effect in this control example is executed in the order of the pitching press preparation effect, the pitching press effect, and the swinging effect. In the pitching press preparation effect, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), the character “Pitching Chance!” Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the pitching press preparation effect, the player can recognize that the effect of pitching the ball B by pressing the frame button 22 (throwing press effect) is executed. Although the details will be described later, the timing of transition from the pitching press preparation effect to the pitching press effect (ie, the timing at which the pitching press effect is displayed) is based on the position information of the rotating member 640 and the information of the drop position storage area 223ex. Is determined. Thereby, the pitch-down effect can be started so that the pocket to be dropped during the execution of the pitch-in effect for a total of 3 seconds (during the effect) is arranged at the drop position.

  In the pitching press effect, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), an effect prompting the player to press the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the frame button 22 is pressed during execution (during display) of the pitching press effect, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650, and a transition is made to a rocking effect (see FIG. 216 (c)). On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not pressed during execution (display) of the pitching press effect, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 after a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses, and a transition is made to a swinging effect. (See FIG. 216 (c)).

  If the frame button 22 is pressed 1.5 seconds after the start of the pitching effect, the ball B is thrown 1.5 seconds after the start of the pitching effect. (That is, the pitch is delayed). On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is pressed 1.5 seconds after the start of the pitching press effect, the ball B is pitched at the pressing timing. As a result, the timing at which the ball B is thrown can be limited to the latter half 1.5 seconds of the three seconds. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem that the ball B falls into a pocket other than the predetermined pocket.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Control Example>
Next, the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 of the present control example is different from the ROM 222 of the first control example (see FIG. 118) in that the contents of the left swing unit table 222b3 are partially changed. The other contents of the ROM 222 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example. Hereinafter, the same portions as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (a), the left swing unit table 222b3 in the present control example executes a first left swing unit table 222b3a for executing a first swing effect, and executes a second swing effect. Left swing unit table 222b3b. In the left swing unit table 222b3, for each value of the operation pointer 223g indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario, a set value (operation speed (pps), operation speed) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) is set. The number of steps and the operation direction) are defined.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 217 (b), the prescribed contents of the first left swing unit table 222b3a will be described. As shown in FIG. 217 (b), in the first left swing unit table 222b3a, the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g indicates that the left swing unit 500 has been shifted from the release position (origin position) to the release position and the connection position. The operation (movement on the outward path) for ascending to the middle of the above is associated. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to drive the left swing unit 500 in the first left swing effect. Here, 100 steps mean the number of steps from the release position to the intermediate position.

  Here, as described above, the operation speed (pps) indicates the frequency (the number of outputs per second) at which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) instructing one-step operation to the corresponding drive motor. . Therefore, the time required to move the first passage forming member 520 of the left swinging unit 500 from the release position to the intermediate position by operating 100 steps at the operation speed of 200 pps is 100/200 seconds (0.5 seconds).

  The operation for stopping (resting) the left swing unit 500 at the intermediate position is associated with the value “02H” of the operation pointer 223g. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 1000 is defined as the operation step, and “stop” is defined as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that the stop command is continuously issued 1000 times at an operation speed of 200 pps. Thereby, the left swing unit 1000 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 5 seconds (1000 times / 200 pps).

  The value (03H) of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation (return operation) for lowering the left swing unit 500 from the intermediate position to the release position (origin position). Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is lowered from the intermediate position to the release position over 0.5 seconds.

  The END data is associated with the value “04H” of the operation pointer 223g. By reading the END data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Next, the contents of the second left swing unit table 222b3b will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 217 (c), the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223g in the second left swing unit table 222b3b cancels the left swing unit 500 as in the first left swing unit table 222b3a. An operation for moving up from the position (origin position) to the intermediate position (operation on the forward path) is associated with the operation. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is raised from the release position to the intermediate position over 0.5 seconds (100 steps / 200 pps).

  The operation for stopping (resting) the left swing unit 500 at the intermediate position is associated with the value “02H” of the operation pointer 223g. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 500 is defined as the operation step, and “stop” is defined as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that the stop command is continuously output 500 times at an operation speed of 200 pps. Thus, the left swing unit 500 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 2.5 seconds (500 times / 200 pps).

  The value (03H) of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation for moving the left swing unit 500 from the intermediate position to the connection position (operation on the outward path). Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the forward direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is raised from the intermediate position to the connection position over 0.5 seconds.

  The value “04H” of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation for stopping (resting) the left swing unit 500 at the connection position. Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the operation speed, 300 is specified as the operation step, and “stop” is specified as the operation direction. That is, it is defined that a stop command is continuously output 300 times at an operation speed of 200 pps. Thus, the left swing unit 500 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 1.5 seconds (300 times / 200 pps).

  The operation (return operation) for lowering the left swing unit 500 from the connection position to the release position (origin position) is associated with the value “05H” of the operation pointer 223g. Specifically, 200 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is lowered from the connection position to the release position over one second.

  The END data is associated with the value “06H” of the operation pointer 223g. By reading the END data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been completed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the RAM 223 provided in the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The RAM 223 in the present control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 118B) in that the effect counter 223ax, the pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx, the pitching depression effect flag 223cx, and the delayed pitching flag 223dx And a drop position storage area 223ex are added, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The effect counter 223ax is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for selecting various effects (such as "left swinging effect") and various lotteries. Although not shown, the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is omitted. (See FIG. 145), it is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99.

  The pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute the setting of the pitching depression effect. The pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx is set to ON when it is the timing to start the pitching depression effect in the roulette effect in the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222) (see S2003: Yes in FIG. 222). The pitch-down effect setting flag 223bx is referred to in the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222), and when it is determined that the switch is turned on (see S2023 in FIG. 222: Yes), the pitch-down effect setting process (see FIG. 223). Is executed. Then, in the pitching press effect setting process (see FIG. 223), when the ball B is pitched from the pitching device 650, it is set to off.

  The pitching depression effect flag 223cx is a flag for determining whether or not a pitching depression effect (see FIG. 216) that prompts the player to press the frame button 22 in order to throw the ball B is displayed. . When the pitching depression effect flag 223cx is determined to be the pitching timing of the ball B in the pitching depression effect setting process (see FIG. 223) (see S6404: Yes in FIG. 223), the display of the pitching depression effect is displayed. It is set (see S6406 in FIG. 223) and turned on (see S6407 in FIG. 223). The pitching depression effect flag 223cx is referred to in the pitching depression effect setting process (refer to FIG. 223), and when it is determined that it is on (S6408 in FIG. 223: Yes), it is determined based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed. Thus, the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is set (see S6414 in FIG. 223), and the process shifts to a swing effect. Even when the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6408: No), the pitching operation of the pitching apparatus 650 is set based on the elapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in this control example) (see S6414 in FIG. 223), and the rocking operation is performed. Move to production. Although the details will be described later, the pitching operation is not allowed for a certain period (1.5 seconds) from the start of the pitching press effect, and the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is set to be delayed. Become.

  The delayed pitch flag 223dx is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed outside the pitch allowable period of the pitch press effect (a period in which pitch is not permitted). The delayed pitch flag 223dx is set when the frame button 22 is pressed in the pitch press effect setting process (see FIG. 223) outside the pitch allowable period of the pitch press effect (within 1.5 seconds from the start of the pitch press effect). It is set to ON (see S6410 in FIG. 223). In the pitching depression effect setting process (see FIG. 223), it is determined whether or not the delayed pitching flag 223dx is on when the pitching allowable period of the pitching depression effect is reached (see S6412 in FIG. 223), and the delay pitching flag 223dx is turned on. When it is determined that there is, the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is executed. That is, the pitching operation is executed with a delay until the pitching allowable period. Thereafter, the delayed pitch flag 223dx is set to off (see S6415 in FIG. 223).

  The drop position storage area 223ex is an area for storing information on a drop position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect. In the drop position storage area 223ex, in the hit pocket sorting process 5 (see FIG. 224) executed at the start of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, the next reserved ball (lottery result of the special symbol executed first) is stored. Determined based on whether it is a probability change jackpot or not. Specifically, when the next reserved ball is a probable jackpot, one of the pockets (pockets designated by the player) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223av is set as a drop position (S3122 in FIG. 224). If the next hold is not a big hit, a pocket other than the pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223av is designated as a drop position (see S3123 in FIG. 224). The drop position (pocket) stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is used when determining the start timing of the above-described pitching depression effect (see S6404 in FIG. 223) or when increasing the hit pocket in the increase effect (see FIG. 224). S3124 and S3221 in FIG. 225).

<Regarding control processing of voice lamp control device in fifth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. First, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 219, a description will be given of the fall control process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example.

  The fall control process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Like the fall control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example, the ball B falls ( This is a process for controlling the operation of the holding piece 677). Note that the same portions as those in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and only different portions will be described.

  In the fall control process 5 of the fifth control example, first, the processes of S1801 to S1802 are executed in the same manner as the fall control process of the first control example (see FIG. 147). Then, the next pocket is calculated based on the pocket specified in the processing of S1802 (S1831). Here, the next pocket means a pocket arranged at a drop position next to the pocket specified in the processing of S1802. For example, if the pocket specified in the processing of S1802 is the pocket P1, , The pocket P2 is specified as the next pocket. This pocket is calculated with reference to pocket arrangement information (not shown) stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  After the processing of S1831, the information of the pocket (pocket for dropping the ball B) stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is obtained (S1832), and then stored in the drop position storage area 223ex. It is determined whether the pocket matches the pocket (next pocket) calculated by the processing of S1831, that is, whether the pocket to be placed next at the drop position is a pocket for dropping the ball B (S1833). ).

  In the process of S1833, if it is determined that the pocket stored in the fall position storage area 223ex matches the pocket calculated by the process of S1831 (S1833: Yes), the process proceeds to S1806. On the other hand, if the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex does not match the pocket calculated by the processing of S1831 in the processing of S1833 (S1833: No), then the value of the swing timer 223w is set to 100. It is determined whether it is smaller than (corresponding to 0.1 second) (S1834). In the process of S1834, it is determined whether the interval at which H (high) is output from the ball detection sensor 679, that is, whether the half of the cycle in which the ball B swings on the movable piece 677 is less than 0.1 second. I have. This 0.1 second means that the ball B moves the movable piece 677 until H (high) is output from the ball detection sensor 679 next (until the timing at which the next ball B can be set to fall is reached). It is set as a value indicating a state in which there is a risk of stopping above.

  If it is determined in step S1834 that the value of the swing timer 223w is equal to or greater than 100 (S1834: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the swing timer 223w is smaller than 100, that is, if it is determined that the ball B may stop on the movable piece 677 (S1834: Yes), the entirety of the lighting position storage area 223m is determined. Is cleared (all bits are set to L) (S1835), and the routine goes to S1806.

  Here, the process of S1835 will be specifically described. As described above, the lighting position storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the state (lighting state or off state) of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 (see FIG. 97). The lighting of each of the rear LEDs 625 is controlled according to the information stored in the lighting position storage area 223m. Therefore, by clearing all information of the lighting position storage area 223m (all bits are set to L) in the processing of S1835, control is performed such that all of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are turned off. .

  In the processing of S1806, the operation setting for the effect ball (ball B) to be dropped is set after 100 steps, and then the ball fallable flag 223fv is set to off (S1807), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the drop control process 5 (see FIG. 219) of the fifth control example, the pocket for dropping the ball B in the roulette chance effect is stored in the drop position storage area 223ex in advance, and then placed at the drop position. When it is determined that the pocket to be dropped is a pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex, the ball B is dropped. Thus, the ball B can be appropriately dropped into the preset pocket, and thus a problem that the ball B falls into a pocket other than the predetermined pocket can be suppressed (prevented).

  Further, in the fifth control example, after the swing effect is executed, the ball B is not satisfied with the condition for dropping the ball B (the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex and the pocket calculated by the processing of S1831). (Without coincidence with the next pocket), the amplitude of the sphere B swinging on the movable piece 677 is a predetermined magnitude (in this control example, the amplitude of the half of the amplitude cycle is 0.1 second). ), The lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are all set to the unlit state, and then a process of dropping the ball B (abnormal process) is performed. Accordingly, the situation in which the ball B cannot be dropped into the target pocket (the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex) during the rocking performance continues, and the ball B moves during the rocking performance. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation of stopping above, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Note that, in the swing effect performed based on the winning of the jackpot, when the above-described processing of S1835 is performed (all of the lighting regions A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are all set to the unlit state), The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an effect for notifying that a jackpot has been won after the swing effect is completed. Thereby, even when the ball B cannot be dropped, it can be made to seem as one mode of the notification in the roulette chance effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the fifth control example, the falling operation of the ball B is set when the next pocket arranged at the drop position is the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 222ex. The pocket specified on the basis of the value (H (high) or L (low)) output from the detection sensors A to F and the rotation position determination table 222c, and the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 222ex. The number of pocket separations may be calculated, and the timing for setting the drop operation of the ball B may be set based on the calculation result. With this configuration, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the drop operation of the ball B using the number of steps output by the motor control IC (motor driver) of the rotation motor 631. A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, the determination may be made by a counter updated each time the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

  Next, the variable display setting process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The variable display setting process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similarly to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. Note that the same parts as those in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  In the variable display setting process 5 of the fifth control example, first, the processes of S3301 to S3305 are executed similarly to the above-described variable display setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 162), and then the left swing unit is set as a notice effect. A notice effect setting process for setting an effect for moving the 500 is executed (S3321), and the process proceeds to S3306. The details of the announcement effect setting process (S3321) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of S3301, also when the change start flag 223d is off (S3301: No), the process proceeds to S3306. After that, the processes in S3306 to S3310 are executed, and the variable display setting process 5 ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 221, the announcement effect setting process (S3321) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The notice effect setting process (S3321) in the fifth control example is one of the variable display setting processes 5 (see FIG. 220) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. .

  In this announcement effect setting process (S3321), a process of setting an announcement effect for moving the left swing unit 500 based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the effect counter 223ax is executed. When the announcement effect setting process (S3321) is executed, first, the current value of the effect counter 223ax is acquired, and it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223ax is 0 to 9 (S6301). If the value of the effect counter 223ax is not 0 to 9 (S6301: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if the value of the effect counter 223ax is 0 to 9 (S6301: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S6302 in order to set a notice effect for moving the left swing unit 500. As described above, since the effect counter 223ax is a loop counter of 0 to 198, a notice effect for moving the left swing unit 500 is set (executed) with a probability of 10/199 (about 5%).

  In the process of S6302, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery result is a big hit (S6302). If the current special symbol lottery result is out of place (S6302: No), the first left swing unit table 222b3a. The value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to (refer to FIG. 217 (b)) is set to “01H” (S6303), and the flow shifts to the process of S6307. By the process of S6303, the first left swing effect in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to the intermediate position is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6302, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big hit (S6302: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223ax acquired in S6301 is a multiple of 4 (S6304). In the process of S6304, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223ax is a multiple of 4 (S6304: Yes), the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the first left swing unit table 222b3a (see FIG. 217 (b)) is determined. The value is set to "01H" (S6306), and the flow shifts to the process of S6307. On the other hand, in the processing of S6304, if the value of the effect counter ax is not a multiple of 4 (S6304: No), the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the second left swing unit table 222b3b (see FIG. 217 (c)) is set. “01H” is set (S6305), and the flow shifts to the process of S6307. In the process of S6307 to which the process proceeds after any of the processes of S6303, S6305, and S6306 is performed, the operation content corresponding to the set operation pointer 223g is read, and the operation content is notified to the motor driver (instruction). ) Is set (S6307), and the process ends thereafter.

  When the processing of S6307 is executed via the processing of S6306, the first left swing effect in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to the intermediate position is executed, and the processing of S6307 is executed via the processing of S6305. Then, the second left swing effect in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to the connection position is executed. As for the ratio at which each swing effect is set, the first left swing effect is set with a probability of 3/4 and the second left swing effect is set with a probability of 1/4, as set in the process of S6304. Is set. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order and a notice effect is set, the first left swing effect is set with a high probability (1/4) and the first left swing effect is set with a low probability (1/4). Two left swing effects are set. On the other hand, when a special symbol is won by lottery and a notice effect is set, only the second left swing effect is set. Therefore, the second left swing effect is an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, and the first left swing effect is an effect with a low expectation of a big hit.) Therefore, when the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 operates to the intermediate position, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of operating from the intermediate position to the connecting position. That is, since the operation of the first passage forming member 520 can be noticed, the interest of the player during the notice effect can be improved.

  Note that the selection ratio of the announcement effect is not limited to the form of the present control example, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the first left swing effect may be configured to be selected at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1/10) even when the special symbol lottery result is a hit, or when the special symbol is lost. The second left swing effect may not be selected.

  Further, the mode of the notice effect with the operation of the left swing unit 500 is not limited to two types, and may be further diversified. By diversifying the mode of the notice effect, a wider variety of effects can be realized, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. As different modes of the notice effect, for example, a mode of reciprocating between the intermediate position (or the coupling position) and the release position a plurality of times, a mode of stopping at a different intermediate position (for example, a position of 50 steps from the release position), an intermediate position In which the stop times are different. Conversely, the mode of the notice effect may be reduced to one type. In this case, the data amount of the left swing unit table 222b3 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the fifth control example, by moving the left swinging unit 500 including the flow path through which the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 82 during the big hit, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the big hit. An effect indicating the degree of expectation is configured to be executable. This makes it possible to share a member constituting the flow path for passing the ball and a member used for the effect, and to effectively utilize the limited space in the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the left swing unit 500 having a flow path through which the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 82 through which the ball can be won during the big hit is set to a timing other than the big hit (the timing when the special symbol is changed) Therefore, even if the left swing unit 500 is moved, it does not affect the ball flow. In other words, the left swing unit 500 can be used as a ball passage through which a ball passes during a bonus game (during a big hit), and as a movable member for an effect during a normal game (during a special symbol change).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is configured to execute the big hit game with the left swing unit 500 raised from the release position to the connection position. Therefore, for example, as the operation scenario of the left swing unit 500 defined in the left swing unit table 222b3 shown in FIG. It may be provided. With this configuration, the left swing unit 500 can be used not only as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the special symbol lottery result will be a big hit, but also as a notification unit that notifies that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. It can be used. In addition, since the number of times the left swing unit 500 moves can be suppressed, failure of the movable member can be suppressed.

  Further, when the left swing unit 500 is moved as an effect, it is preferable to provide a determination unit for determining whether the left swing unit 500 is normally movable. This makes it possible to determine the abnormality of the left swing unit 500 before the jackpot game starts, and to prevent the left swing unit 500 from rising to the connection position during the jackpot game and becoming abnormal. It is possible to prevent (suppress).

  If the left swing unit 500 is determined to be abnormal when the left swing unit 500 is moved as an effect, the result of the determination is notified, and the left swing unit 500 is moved during the jackpot game. It is preferable that an effect not to be moved is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance during the jackpot game. Here, the left swing unit 500 is provided with a flow-down passage 515 (see FIG. 36), and is configured to discharge a winning ball in the release position to the outside of the game area. That is, even if the left swinging unit 500 is not moved, when a ball wins in the first variable winning device 82a, the winning ball is normally inserted into an unexpected position such as the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Can be discharged).

  As an effect in which the left swing unit 500 is not moved, for example, a jackpot game is started in a state where the left swing unit 500 is located at the release position, and the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 82 flows down the downflow passage 515. The effect may be performed by the effect unit 422a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 in a state where the effect is not connected to the left swing unit 500. In this case, since the ball flowing down the left swing unit 500 does not pass through the sensor member 422c provided in the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, the progress of the effect displayed on the effect unit 422a is determined by the first specific winning opening. Instead of executing based on the ball that has won the prize 82, it may be configured to be executed, for example, by operating the frame button 22. That is, for example, each time the player presses the frame button 22, the design (number) is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the effect part 422a, and when the stop is displayed with the lucky number, an effect of notifying the transition to the "prepare mode" is executed. It may be configured.

  Furthermore, until a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the end of the jackpot game, a prohibition process may be performed so that a notice effect using the left swing unit 500 is not selected, The fluctuation time during which the period from the end of the notice effect (6 seconds (see FIG. 217 (c))) of the left swing unit 500 to the start of the jackpot game is within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). In the set fluctuation pattern, the prohibition processing may be executed so that the notice effect using the left swing unit 500 is not selected. Thereby, a predetermined interval (for example, 2 seconds) is provided between the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 performed during the big hit game and the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 performed during the normal game. be able to.

  The predetermined interval may be set to an interval that is longer than a retry period that is executed when a problem occurs in the movable operation of the left swing unit 500. Thereby, even if a retry operation is performed in the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 during the jackpot game or the normal game, the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 performed when other conditions are satisfied is affected. Can be suppressed, and an appropriate effect can be provided to the player.

  Next, the effect setting process 5 (S1613) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The effect setting process 5 (S1613) in the fifth control example is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) instead of the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) in the first control example, and is executed during the roulette chance effect. This is a process for setting the pitching depression preparation effect (see FIG. 216 (a)) and the pitching depression effect (see FIG. 216 (b)). Note that the same parts as those in the effect setting processing (see FIG. 149) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof will be omitted, and only different parts will be described.

  When the effect setting process 5 (S1613) is executed, first, after executing each process of S2001 and S2002 as in the effect setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 149), the value of the effect timer 223bv is executed. Is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003). In the process of S2003, if the value of the effect timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the increased effect (S2003: Yes), the pitching press preparation effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pitching press effect is started. (See FIG. 216 (a)) (S2021), then, the increase effect flag 223cv is set to off, the pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is set to on (S2022), and the process is terminated as it is. . Further, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is not the timer value indicating the end of the increased effect (S2003: No), the present process is directly executed without executing the processes of S2021 and S2022 described above. finish.

  In the process of S2001, when it is determined that the increasing effect flag 223cv is off (S2001: No), it is next determined whether or not the pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is on (S2023). If the pitch-down effect setting flag 223bx is ON (S2023: Yes), in the process of S2023, the pitch-press effect setting for setting the pitch-press effect, which is an effect capable of determining the timing at which the player throws the ball B. The process (S2024) is performed, and the process proceeds to S2006. The details of the pitching press effect setting process (S2024) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S2023, when the pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx is off (S2023: No), the processing of S2024 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S2006. Next, the processes of S2006 to S2017 are executed in the same manner as in the effect setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 149), and then the process ends.

  Next, the pitch-down effect setting process (S2024) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 223. The pitching depression effect setting process (S2024) in the fifth control example is one of the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. This pitching press effect setting process (S2024) is a process for setting a pitching press effect which is an effect that allows the player to determine the timing of pitching the ball B in the roulette chance effect by operating the frame button 22. is there.

  When the pitching depression effect setting process (S2024) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pitching depression effect flag 223cv is on (S6401), and if the pitching depression effect flag 223cx is off (S6401: No). Then, information of the drop position storage area 223ex is obtained (S6402), and information of the rotation position storage area 223u is obtained (S6403). That is, the information of the pocket where the ball B is dropped is acquired by the processing of S6402, and the information of the pocket currently arranged at the drop position is acquired by the processing of S6403.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current time is the pitchable timing (S6404). Here, a description will be given of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first control example, when shifting to the “preparation mode”, the effect period of a total of 90 seconds is provided in the “split-house mode suggestion effect”. Is executed, and this “rensou mode suggestion effect” is an increase effect (effect time 20) that increases (adds) a hit pocket based on the entry of a ball into the second entrance 640a. Second), a roulette chance effect (effect period 65 seconds) for directing whether or not the ball B falls into the hit pocket, and an ending effect (effect period 5 seconds) indicating that the roulette chance effect has been completed. ing.

  Further, the above-described roulette chance production (producing time 65 seconds) is performed in the first half in which the presentation progresses according to a notification mode indicating that the roulette chance production has been executed, a notification mode explaining the roulette chance production, and a lively notification mode. (Production time 42 seconds), a middle part (maximum production time 8 seconds) in which a pitch press preparation effect (production time 5 seconds) and a pitch press production (maximum production time 3 seconds) are executed, and pitching by the pitching device 650. The ball B performs a swinging operation at the upper part of the holding piece 677, and then falls into a pocket, and a swinging effect is performed.

  Here, the pitching press effect (maximum effect time of 3 seconds) includes a pitch non-permissible period (1.5 seconds) in which the pitching device 650 does not allow the ball B to be thrown even if the player operates the frame button 22; A pitch allowable period (1.5 seconds) in which the ball B can be pitched by the pitching device 650 based on the operation of the frame button 22. In other words, the ball B is not thrown by the throwing device 650 even if the frame button 22 is operated for 1.5 seconds from the start of the pitching press effect, and 1.5 seconds after the pitching press effect starts. The period from second to three seconds is a period in which the ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650 at the timing when the frame button 22 is operated by the player.

  Therefore, the timing at which the ball B can be thrown in the pitching-down effect is at least 1.5 seconds after the start of the pitching-down effect and the longest at 3 seconds after the start of the pitching-down effect. 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds). In the case where the effect time of the pitching press effect is less than 3 seconds, that is, when the ball button 22 is operated during the pitching press effect and the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650, the second half of the roulette chance effect is performed. The difference is absorbed. Accordingly, when the player operates the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (within a period of 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the start of the pitching press effect), the player immediately operates the frame button 22 based on the timing of operating the frame button 22. Since the ball B is thrown, it is possible to make it appear that the player can determine the pocket on which the ball B falls by himself, thereby enhancing the effect.

  Although details will be described later, in the fifth control example, when the frame button 22 is operated within 1.5 seconds after the pitching press effect is executed, the pitching is performed at a timing when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. The pitching operation of the device 650 is configured to be performed. Accordingly, a period (1) in which the timing at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 differs depending on the operation timing of the frame button 22 with respect to the period (3 seconds) of the pitching press effect in which the player can operate the frame button 22. .5 seconds).

  In the fifth control example, in the swinging effect (the effect period of 15 seconds), which is the second half of the roulette chance effect, the ball B thrown by the pitching device 650 swings on the movable piece 677 with an amplitude that cannot fall. A swinging sphere falling prohibition period (7 seconds), which is a moving period (a period in which the value of the swing timer 223w is larger than 500 (see S1709: Yes in FIG. 146)), and then swings with an amplitude that allows the ball to fall. This is a period during which the ball B can be dropped (up to 3 seconds), which is a period (a period in which the value of the swing timer 223w is smaller than 500 (see S1709: No in FIG. 146)), and a period during which the ball B is dropped. And a ball falling period (5 seconds).

  Among these, the period during which the ball can be dropped while swinging (maximum 3 seconds) is set to a period longer than the period (1.5 seconds) at which the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650 in the above-described pitching depression effect. Therefore, no matter at what timing the player operates the frame button 22 during the pitch-down effect, the ball B can be dropped into a predetermined pocket. Further, since a period during which a plurality of (three) pockets move is set as the period during which the ball can be dropped while swinging, the accuracy of dropping the ball B into a predetermined pocket can be improved.

  Note that the ball drop period (5 seconds) is a period in which after the ball B is dropped into the pocket, a notification effect according to the type of the dropped pocket (hit pocket or missing pocket) is performed. Alternatively, it is configured to be extended by a time lag (difference between the actual production time and the set maximum time) generated in the period during which the ball can fall during swinging. Thus, even if the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 or the timing at which the pitching device 650 pitches the ball B are different, the rendering period of the “renjo mode suggestive rendering” can be made to match 90 seconds.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is set to a high speed (an operation speed (500 pps) at which the time required to move one pocket becomes 0.25 seconds) is set. It is configured to be able to control two rotation speeds: a low speed (operating speed (125 pps) at which the time required to move one pocket is 1 second). The rotation speed is configured to be switched by outputting a signal for setting the operation speed (125 pps or 500 pps) from the audio lamp control device 113 to the motor driver.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth control example, the rotating member 640 is rotated at a high speed from the execution of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” to the execution of the pitching depression effect, and the pitching depression effect is executed. Then, the rotating member 640 is configured to rotate at a low speed.

  Returning to FIG. 223, the description will be continued. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above is configured so that the ball B can fall within a range of 10 seconds to 11.5 seconds after the pitching press effect is executed. Specifically, the ball B is dropped into the pocket after the pitching press effect (maximum 3 seconds), the swinging ball falling prohibition period (7 seconds), and the swinging ball fallable period (maximum 3 seconds). However, since the pitch-pressing effect may be as short as 1.5 seconds, the pitch-pressing effect is a total of 10 seconds, which is the sum of the ball-pressing effect (3 seconds) and the swinging ball falling prohibition period (7 seconds). Is executed, the shortest period during which the ball can fall is set, and the pitching press effect (1.5 seconds), the ball falling prohibition period during swinging (7 seconds), and the ball falling possible period during swinging (3 seconds) The total of 11.5 seconds is set as the longest period in which the ball can fall after the pitching depression effect is executed.

  Then, during the pitching press effect in which the rotating member 640 is moving at a low speed, the pocket corresponding to the range from 10 seconds to 11.5 seconds after the pitching press effect is executed is 10 and Since the pocket is the eleventh pocket, whether the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex acquired in the processing of S6402 is 10 and 11 ahead of the current pocket acquired in the processing of S6403. Is determined, it is determined whether the current time is the pitchable time (S6404).

  If the current time is not the pitchable timing (S6404: No), the present process ends. In the fifth control example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is increased to a high speed (500 pps) until the pitching depression effect is executed in order to shorten the period until it is determined that it is the pitchable timing in the process of S6404. (The time required to move one pocket is 0.25 seconds). On the other hand, if it is the current pitching possible timing (S6404: Yes), the rotation speed of the rotating member is set to a low speed (125 pps (the time required to move one pocket) is 1 second) (S6405), and the pitching depression is performed. The display of the effect is set (S6406), and the pitching-in-progress effect flag 223cx is set to ON (S6407), followed by terminating the present process.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6401, if the pitch-in-press effect flag 223cx is on (S6401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the button (frame button 22) has been pressed (S6408). If the button (frame button 22) has been pressed (S6408: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a pitching allowable period (a period of 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after execution of the pitching press effect) (S6409). ), If it is not the pitching allowable period (S6409: No), the delay pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6410), and this processing is ended as it is. If it is the pitching allowable period (S6409: Yes), a pitching effect command is set (S6411), and the process shifts to S6414.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6408, if the button has not been pressed (S6408: No), it is determined whether or not the current time is the pitching allowable period and the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6412). If the pitching allowable period is currently set and the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6412: Yes), the process of S6411 is executed, and the process proceeds to S6414. On the other hand, if the current time is not the pitching allowable period or if the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to OFF (S6412: No), it is determined whether or not the pitching press effect display period has elapsed (S6413). If the pitching press effect display period has not elapsed (S6413: No), the process is terminated as it is, and if the pitching press effect display period has elapsed (S6413: Yes), the process proceeds to S6414.

  In the processing of S6414, the pitching operation at the pitching position is set (S6414), the pitching depression effect flag 223cx, the pitching depression effect setting flag 223bx, and the delayed pitching flag 223dx are set off (S6415), and the rocking effect is performed. Is set (S6416), the swing non-detection flag 223v and the swing effect flag 223ev are set to ON (S6417), and the process ends.

  As described above, the fifth control example is configured so that the player can set the operation timing of the pitching device 650 based on the operation of the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to show that the player can determine the pocket on which the ball B falls by himself, and to enhance the effect. In this control example, the period during which the ball B is thrown (1.5 seconds in the latter half) is shorter than the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid (3 seconds). . Then, when the pitch of the ball B is permitted and the frame button 22 is operated in the first 1.5 seconds of the match, the pitch of the ball B is delayed until the start timing of the period in which the pitch of the ball B is permitted. . This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the control for dropping the ball B into a predetermined pocket while making it appear that the player can determine the pocket on which the ball B falls.

  Further, the swingable ball falling period (3 seconds) is longer than the difference period (1.5 seconds) of the timing at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. Since it is configured to be set, it is possible to increase the accuracy of dropping the ball B into a predetermined pocket regardless of the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22.

  In the fifth control example, when the pitching is possible based on the information of the drop position storage area 223ex and the information of the rotation position storage area 223u, the pitching press effect is executed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable with the swinging motion of the ball B in the chance effect.

  Furthermore, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is high (500 pps (time required to move one pocket) is 0.25 seconds) and low (125 pps (time required to move one pocket is one second)). The rotation speed of the rotation member 640 is set to a high speed until it is determined that it is the pitching possible timing. Thereby, the period until it is determined that it is possible to pitch can be shortened, and a roulette chance effect can be smoothly performed.

  The rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is set to be low during a period from the execution of the pitching depression effect in which the player can operate the frame button 22 to the end of the rocking effect in which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650. Is set to This allows the player to carefully watch the roulette chance effect, thereby enhancing the effect.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 224, the hit pocket sorting process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described.

  The winning pocket allocation process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, similarly to the winning pocket allocation process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example. The same parts as those in the hit pocket distribution processing (see FIG. 160) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  In the hit pocket sorting process 5 in the fifth control example, a process for presetting a pocket in which the ball B falls in the roulette chance effect is executed. When the winning pocket allocation process 5 is executed, first, after the process of S3101 is executed in the same manner as the hit pocket allocation process (see FIG. 160) in the above-described first control example, it is determined whether or not the next hold is a big hit. (S3121). If the next hold is a jackpot (S3121: Yes), one of the read pockets is set as the drop position in the drop position storage area 223ex (S3122), and the process proceeds to S3104.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3121, if the next hold is not a jackpot (S3121: No), a pocket different from the read pocket is set as a drop position in the drop position storage area 223ex (S3123), and the first control example described above is performed. The processing of S3104 and S3105 is executed in the same manner as the winning pocket allocation processing (see FIG. 160). Thereafter, the hit position is read out from the drop position storage area 223ex (S3124), and a position other than the hit position and the drop position is selected as an additional position (S3125). The processing of S3109 and S3110 is executed in the same manner as in (3). After performing the process of S3110, the process returns to the process of S3104, and the subsequent processes are repeated.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example is configured so that the drop position (pocket) where the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect is determined in advance. Then, it is configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined drop position as a hit position (whether or not to light up) according to the result of the special symbol lottery. Thus, the ball B may be dropped into the predetermined pocket, so that the control process can be simplified.

  In the fifth control example, one pocket is stored in the fall position storage area 223ex, but a plurality of continuous pockets may be stored in the fall position storage area 223ex.

  Next, the special figure 2 winning command processing 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special figure 2 winning command process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, similarly to the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example. . Note that the same reference numerals as those in the special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161) in the first control example denote the same parts, and a description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

  The special figure 2 winning command processing 5 in the fifth control example is stored in the drop position storage area 223ex when the winning command that has won the jackpot is output in the increase effect performed in the “preparation mode”. The processing for changing the pocket in which the player is playing to the winning pocket is executed.

  When the special figure 2 winning command processing 5 in the fifth control example is executed, first, S3201 is executed similarly to the special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161) of the first control example described above. In the process of S3201, if the increasing effect flag 223cv is off (S3201: No), the process proceeds to S3213. If the increase effect flag 223cv is on (S3201: Yes), the fall position is read from the fall position storage area 223ex (S3221), and then a big hit occurs during the time reduction (when the time reduction state counter is larger than 0). It is determined whether or not it is a winning (S3222). If the winning is a big win during the working hours (S3222: Yes), the falling position is selected as the additional position (S3223), and the process proceeds to S3212.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3222, if the winning is not a big win during the working hours (S3222: No), the hit position is read from the hit position storage area 223k (S3224), and a position different from the hit position and the drop position is selected as the additional position. (S3225), and then proceeds to S3212. After that, the processes of S3212 and S3213 are executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is configured to be movable as an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big hit. . Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like. Some of such gaming machines can execute a variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members. However, if the number of variable members is increased to improve the effect, the power consumption will increase, the failure rate will increase due to the increase in the number of parts, the cost of gaming machines will increase, and wiring will be more complicated. Various problems arise.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, a flow path (first path forming member 520) for discharging the ball that has won the first variable prize device 82a to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 in the jackpot game is provided to the player. It is configured to be arranged at a visible position (left side in front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81). The flow path (first passage forming member 520) swings between an arrangement (connection position) for discharging the winning prize ball to the first variable winning device 82a at the big hit and a home position (release position). It is configured to be possible. In addition, as a kind of entertainment effect (effect indicating a degree of expectation to be a big hit) which is usually performed at a time when the jackpot is not being hit, a movable effect of swinging the flow path is configured to be executable. In other words, the flow path (first passage forming member 520) for discharging the prize balls is configured to also be used for an entertaining effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an excessive increase in the number of accessories (variable members), so that the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, the failure rate and cost can be reduced, and wiring and the like can be simplified. Can be realized.

  In the present control example, as an entertaining effect using the flow path (the first passage forming member 520), the first passage forming member 520 moves (moves) from the release position to the intermediate position, and then returns to the release position. One left swing effect and a second left swing effect in which the first passage forming member 520 operates (moves) from the release position to the connection position and then returns to the release position are provided. The second left swing effect is configured such that it is easier to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and harder to be selected when it is out of comparison with the first left swing effect. That is, the second left swing effect in which the amount of operation of the first passage forming member 520 is large is configured to have a higher expectation of a big hit than the first left swing effect. Therefore, when the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 starts operating, the operation can be observed in expectation of operating to the connection position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the “rensou mode”.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example is configured such that a drop position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect is determined at one place in advance. Then, according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol, it is configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined drop position as a hit position (whether to light up). Thus, the ball B may be dropped into the predetermined pocket, so that the control process can be simplified.

  Further, in the present control example, in the roulette chance effect, a period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is received (for example, 3 seconds in one roulette chance effect) is provided, and it is detected that the player has operated the frame button 22. In this case, the ball B is thrown by the throwing device 650. Further, during the period in which the frame button 22 can be accepted, a pitch press effect (see FIG. 216) for prompting the player to press the frame button 22 is executed. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period suggested by the pitching press effect, the ball B is pitched by the pitching device 650. This allows the player to throw the ball B onto the rotating member 640 at an arbitrary timing, thereby improving the player's willingness to participate in the roulette chance effect.

  In the fifth control example, one pocket into which the ball B is dropped is determined in advance, but it is not necessarily limited to one pocket. A section where a plurality of pockets are continuous may be defined as a position where the ball B is dropped, and the ball B may be dropped into any of the pockets constituting the section. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom when the ball B is dropped, as compared with the case where the drop position is limited to only one pocket. That is, when it is determined that the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation is relatively large (for example, exceeding 1 second) at the stage when the ball B enters the section in which the ball B is dropped, the ball B is arranged behind the section. By dropping the ball B into the pocket, the ball B can be dropped after the cycle is reduced. Conversely, when it is determined that the period (amplitude) of the rocking motion is too small (eg, 0.5 seconds or less) at the stage when the ball B enters the section where the ball B is dropped, The ball B can be dropped before the ball B completely stops by dropping the ball B into the pocket arranged in the front pocket.

  In the fifth control example, the period of the swing operation of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) before one pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is placed at the drop position. In such a case, a special effect is executed. However, it may be controlled so that the target pocket is placed at the drop position before the predetermined period (0.2 seconds). More specifically, for example, at the start of the roulette chance effect, a pocket in which the ball B can be dropped is predicted from the time until the pitching-down effect is started and the pocket currently placed at the drop position. Then, it may be determined whether or not it matches the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex. When it is expected that the ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex, the remaining time until the ball B can be dropped and the drop position storage area 223ex are stored. The rotation speed of the rotation member 640 may be changed based on the stored position of the pocket so that the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is arranged at the drop position at the timing when the drop is possible. Good. Further, instead of or in addition to changing the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, for example, the execution timing of the pitching depression effect may be changed. That is, by changing the timing at which the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650, the ball B is dropped so that the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex can be dropped at the timing at which the pocket is placed at the drop position. It may be configured. With this configuration, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target pocket.

<Sixth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first control example, a symbol (number) is displayed on each of the display units 331a to 331d of the staging unit 331, so as to execute the notification of whether or not a big hit has occurred. The third symbol display device 81 is basically used for displaying an entertaining effect, displaying the number of reserved balls, and displaying details of a symbol (lucky number) to be a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the sixth control example, the third symbol display device 81 is also configured to be capable of executing dynamic display (decorative symbol display) of identification information indicating a special symbol lottery result. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed regardless of the mode and is executed in response to the variable display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the result of the lottery of the special symbol can be confirmed regardless of the mode. .

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that a decorative symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Is a point. Other configurations, various processes performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227. FIG. 226 (a) is a diagram showing a display content in a case where a special symbol lottery is executed in the “normal mode” and the decorative symbol (third symbol) is variably displayed. As shown in FIG. 226 (a), when the special symbol lottery is executed in the “normal mode”, the symbol display is changed on the display units 331a to 331d, as in the first control example. In addition, in the sixth control example, in the third symbol display device 81, in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 formed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape on the lower right side in front view, a decorative symbol (third symbol) is displayed. ) Is displayed.

  More specifically, in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each symbol row, a decorative symbol (third symbol) to which any one of numbers 0 to 9 is attached is displayed in a prescribed order (descending order of numbers or ascending order). These three symbol rows are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity, and displayed in a variable manner. In particular, in the left symbol row, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row and the right symbol row, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order. In this decorative symbol change display, a decorative symbol (third symbol) in which the same number is assigned to each symbol column is stopped and displayed, thereby indicating a big hit. On the other hand, if at least one of the decorative symbols (third symbol) stopped and displayed in each symbol column is a decorative symbol (third symbol) with a different number, the lottery of the special symbol this time is lost. Indicates that there is. The variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 is configured to have a smaller area than each of the display units 331a to 331d. Therefore, it is possible to make the player confirm the lottery result of the special symbol by the variable display executed on each of the display units 331a to 331d.

  Further, FIG. 226 (b) is a diagram showing display contents when the variable display corresponding to the departure of the special symbol ends in the “normal mode” and the decorative symbol (the third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 226 (b), after the elapse of the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display executed in the “normal mode”, the numbers (symbols) are stopped one by one on the display units 331a to 331d as in the first control example. Is displayed. In addition, in the sixth control example, in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 of the third symbol display device 81, the decorative symbol (the third symbol) is stopped and displayed in a combination of the deviation. In the example of FIG. 226 (b), the decorative symbol with the number “6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column, the symbol column with the symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column, and the right symbol is stopped. The symbol row in which the number “3” is attached to the symbol row is stopped and displayed. By displaying the decorative symbol (third symbol) to which a different number is attached, it can be shown that the lottery result of the special symbol has been lost.

  Next, the display contents in the “preparation mode” will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 227 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the decorative symbol (third symbol). As shown in FIG. 227 (a), when a special symbol lottery is executed in the "preparation mode", similarly to the "normal mode", the decorative symbol (third symbol) is displayed in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. ) Is executed. This indicates that it is fluctuating.

  FIG. 227 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where the fluctuating time has elapsed in the “preparation mode” and the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 227 (b), the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display area different from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. FIG. 227 (b) is an example of a case where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper left area Dq1 of a horizontally long rectangular shape formed on the upper left of the front view on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this example, in the upper left area Dq1, the decorative symbol with the number “1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column, the decorative symbol with the number “8” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column, The decorative symbol with the number “9” attached to the right symbol column is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the "preparation mode", the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in a display area different from the variable display, so that the number of time savings in the "preparation mode" this time is hard to be recognized from the stopped and displayed decorative symbol. To do that. If the variable display and the stop display are performed in the variable display area Dd1 even during the “preparation mode”, the variable display time of the decorative symbol executed in the “preparation mode” can be easily obtained by observing the variable display area Dd1. Will be recognized. As described above, in the “preparation mode” in which the time reduction period is one, the long fluctuation A having the fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery (see FIGS. 112 and 113). On the other hand, in the “preparation mode” in which the time saving period is seven times, a long fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the case of a special symbol jackpot (see FIG. 112), and a fluctuation time of 3 is determined in the case of a special symbol. A second variation in seconds is selected. Therefore, if the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed 3 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestion effect” (when the long variation A is selected), it is a jackpot or the time reduction period is 1 Only the number of times is set, and it is determined that this is the case where the special symbol has been removed. In this case, since the lottery of the special symbol is lost and the possibility of shifting to the “normal mode” after the fluctuation increases, the player may not be able to enjoy the subsequent “representative mode of the extended-village mode”. There is. If the first to sixth special symbol lotteries in the “preparation mode” in which the time reduction period is seven are out of the range, the middle fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected (see FIG. 113). Conversely, if the fluctuation continues for 3 seconds or more in the second to sixth fluctuation displays, it is a jackpot without confirming the production result of “renjo mode suggestion production” (with a probability of 97.5%) It shifts to "rensou mode"). For this reason, there is a high possibility that the player will shift to the “rensou mode”, which may make the player feel that there is no need to confirm the subsequent “rensou mode suggestion effect”.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the stop display of the decorative symbol is configured to be executed in a display area different from the variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who has checked the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to recognize whether or not the stop display has been executed. Therefore, before confirming the result of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, it is difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. The expectation of the player can be maintained.

  Further, in the present control example, in order to make the timing of the stop display more difficult to understand, during the execution of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) to the long fluctuation G (72 seconds), each time the fluctuation display is performed for 3 seconds, the decorative symbol is displayed. Is switched to a display area different from the variable display area Dd1 (for example, the upper left area Dq1). The state in which the display position is switched continues for 0.5 seconds, and after 0.5 seconds has elapsed, the display position is switched again to the variable display area Dd1. That is, the variable display for three seconds in the variable display area Dd1 and the variable display for 0.5 seconds in an area different from the variable display area Dd1 (such as the upper left area Dq1) are repeated. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the break of the variable display (switching of the display position) in the variable display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is periodically set in the long fluctuations A to G. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, it is more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode”, so that it is difficult for the player to predict whether to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained to the end during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”.

  Further, in the present control example, a plurality of display areas for displaying a stop symbol are provided in addition to the upper left area Dq1. Specifically, it is formed on the upper right side area Dq2 formed on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81 (see the dotted line on the upper right side in FIG. 227 (b)) and on the lower left side of the third symbol display device 81. A lower left area Dq3 (see the dotted line at the lower left in FIG. 227 (b)) is provided. In the “preparation mode”, when the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (when the fluctuation time has elapsed), and when the position where the fluctuation display is performed during the execution of the long fluctuations A to G is switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1, One display area is selected by lottery from three types of display areas (upper left area Dq1, upper right area Dq2, lower left area Dq3). With such a configuration, it is more difficult to visually recognize the display content (whether the display is stopped or displayed variably) when the display position is switched from the variable display area Dd1 to another display area. can do. Therefore, it is more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode”, so that it is difficult for the player to predict whether to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained to the end during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”.

  In the present control example, the variable display area Dd1 is provided at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be arranged at any position. Further, in the present control example, the upper left area Dq1 and the upper right area are used as the display area when the stop display is performed in the “prepare mode” and when the display position is switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 during the execution of the long fluctuations A to G. Although three types of display areas, the area Dq2 and the lower left area Dq3, are provided, the present invention is not limited to the three types. More or less display areas may be provided. Further, the arrangement of each display area may be arbitrarily determined.

  In the present control example, the decorative pattern is not displayed in the variable display area Dd1 when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1 (the display position is simply moved). It is not limited. For example, even after the display position is switched, the fluctuating display may be pseudo-displayed on the fluctuating display area Dd1. Accordingly, when the variable display area Dd1 is focused on, the appearance becomes as if the variable display is always continued during the “preparation mode” regardless of whether the variable display area Dd1 is stopped or displayed. In the "preparation mode", it can be more difficult to determine whether the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 228 and FIG. FIG. 228 (a) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the ROM 222 in the sixth control example is provided with a symbol position selection table 222h in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 118 (a)). The symbol position selection table 222h is a data table used for selecting a display area after switching when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1 in the “preparation mode”. Details of the symbol position selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 228 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the symbol position selection table 222h. As shown in FIG. 228 (b), in the symbol position selection table 222h, the display position of the decorative symbol (stop display or variable display) is defined for each value of the display position selection counter 223ay. The display position selection counter 223ay is configured as a loop counter that is updated regularly or irregularly within the range of “0 to 99”.

  In the symbol position selection table 222h, the upper left area Dq1 is associated with the range of the display position selection counter 223ay from "0 to 39". Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the display position selection counter 223ay, forty “0 to 39” are associated with each other, so that the decorative symbol can be changed from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. When switching (moving) to another area, the probability (ratio) of selecting the upper left area Dq1 is 40% (40/100).

  The upper right area Dq2 is associated with the range of the display position selection counter 223ay in the range of “40 to 79”. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the display position selection counter 223ay, 40 of “40 to 79” are associated with each other, so that the decorative pattern can be changed from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. When switching (moving) to another area, the probability (ratio) of selecting the upper right area Dq2 is 40% (40/100).

  Further, the lower left area Dq3 is associated with the range of the display position selection counter 223ay in the range of “80 to 99”. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the display position selection counter 223ay, 20 of “80 to 99” are associated with each other, so that the decorative pattern can be changed from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. When switching (moving) to another area, the probability (ratio) of selecting the lower left area Dq3 is 20% (20/100). The probability (proportion) of selecting only the lower left area Dq3 is high because only this area has the same eye level as the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 for the player. This is because there is a possibility of being visually recognized when attention is paid. Therefore, the selection ratio of the lower left area Dq3, which is relatively easy to be visually recognized, is lowered to make it difficult for the display contents when the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to be visually recognized. On the other hand, the reason why the ratio is not set to 0 is that it is difficult to predict the display position after switching. In other words, as the number of display position candidates increases, it becomes more difficult for the player to predict the display position after switching, and to make it difficult to visually recognize the mode of the decorative symbol (stop display or change display) after switching the display position. it can.

  As described above, by switching the display positions of the decorative symbols using the symbol position selection table 222h, it is predicted whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode” before the result of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is notified. This can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, it is possible to entertain the “renjo mode suggestion effect” to the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 229, a configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 229, the RAM 223 in this control example has a display position selection counter 223ay, a display time timer 223by, and a display position storage in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example. The difference is that an area 223cy is provided.

  The display position selection counter 223ay is used to select a display area for displaying a decorative symbol from the symbol position selection table 222h described above. The display position selection counter 223ay is configured as a loop counter that is updated in a range of “0 to 99”, and is updated, for example, one by one between S1616 and S1617 of the main process. As described above, when the decorative symbol is switched (moved) from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to another area, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of “0 to 39”. The upper left area Dq1 is selected as an area for displaying a decorative symbol. If the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "40 to 79", the upper right area Dq2 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative pattern, and if the value is in the range of "80 to 99", the decorative pattern is displayed. Is selected as the lower left area Dq3.

  The display time timer 223by causes the decorative symbol (third symbol) to be displayed in one area (the variable display area Dd1, the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, or the lower left area Dq3) in the “preparation mode”. This is a timer for measuring the elapsed time of. The initial value of the display time timer 223by is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 in the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) during the change of the decorative symbol in the "preparation mode" (see FIG. 231). 231 S6503). Since the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230), the display time timer 223by counts up every 1 millisecond. The display time timer 223by is reset to 0 every time the area (display position) where the decorative symbol is displayed is switched (see S6510 and S6513 in FIG. 231). Based on the value of the display time timer 223by, when three seconds have elapsed since the decorative symbol was displayed in the variable display area Dd1, the decorative symbol is switched to another display position (display area). Further, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the decorative symbol was displayed in the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, or the lower left area Dq3, the display position (display area) of the decorative symbol is changed to the variable display area Dd1. Can be switched.

  The display position storage area 223cy is a flag indicating whether the current display position (area) of the decorative pattern is the variable display area Dd1, the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, or the lower left area Dq3. In this display position storage area 223cy, any one of four values of “00H” to “03H” is stored, and if “00H” is stored, it indicates a variable display area (lower right area) Dd1, When "01H" is stored, it indicates the upper left area Dq1, when "02H" is stored, it indicates the upper right area Dq2, and when "03H" is stored, it indicates the lower left area Dq3. Whether or not to change the display position of the decorative symbol is determined based on the value of the display time timer 223by (elapsed time) and the value stored in the display position storage area 223cy. That is, when 3 seconds have elapsed while “00H” is stored in the display position storage area 223cy, the decorative design is switched to another display position (display area). Further, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed while any one of “01H” to “03H” is stored in the display position storage area 223cy, the display position (display area) of the decorative symbol is shifted to the variable display area Dd1. Can be switched.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 233. First, the main process 6 (see FIG. 230) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. This main process 6 (see FIG. 230) is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 145) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

  Of the main processing 6 (see FIG. 230) in the sixth control example, in the processing of S1601 to S1614 and S1616 to S1621, S1601 to S1614 and S1616 in the main processing (see FIG. 145) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing as the processing from S1621 to S1621 is executed. In the main process 6 (see FIG. 230) in the second control example, when the process of S1613 ends, the display position of the decorative symbol is selected according to the elapsed time during the variable display of the decorative symbol in the “preparation mode”. (S1661), and the process proceeds to S1614. Details of the display position selection processing (S1661) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the main process 6 (see FIG. 230) in the present control example, when the process in S1614 ends, the variable display setting process 6 is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. (S1662). This fluctuation display setting processing 6 is for displaying the fluctuation for display on the basis of the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the fluctuation display of the identification information (symbol) in the rendering unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for generating and setting a pattern command. Details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1662) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the variable display setting process 6 ends, the process moves to S1616, and thereafter, the same process as the main process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example is executed.

  Next, details of the above-described display position selection processing (S1661) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the display position selection process (S1661) is a process for selecting the display position of the decorative symbol according to the elapsed time during the variable display of the decorative symbol in the “preparation mode”.

  When the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is greater than 0 (S6501). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S6501: No) ), Which means that the present mode is not the “preparation mode” (the “normal mode” or the “rensou mode”), and there is no need to change the display position (display area) of the decorative pattern, so this processing is performed as it is. To end.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S6501, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S6501: Yes), it means that the current mode is the “preparation mode”, and the display position of the decorative symbol is changed. Since there is a possibility, it is next determined whether or not the decoration symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner (S6502). In the process of S6502, when it is determined that the variable display is not being performed (S6502: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6502 that the variable display is being performed (S6502: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the display time timer 223by (S6503), and the current display position (display area) Is read out from the display position storage area 223cy (S6504).

  Next, based on the information read in the processing of S6504, it is determined whether the current display position (display area) of the decorative symbol is the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (whether the read value is “00H”). If the display position of the decorative symbol is the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (S6505: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the display time timer 223by is 3000 (S6506). That is, it is determined whether three seconds have elapsed since the display position of the decorative symbol became the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. In the process of S6506, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by has become 3000 (S6506: Yes), the symbol position selection table 222h is read (S6507), and the decorative symbol corresponding to the value of the display position selection counter 223ay. Is specified (S6508). Specifically, as described above, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of “0 to 39”, the upper left area Dq1 is specified as the area in which the decorative pattern is displayed, and “40 to 79” If it is a range, the upper right area Dq2 is selected as an area for displaying a decorative symbol, and if it is a range of "80 to 99", a lower left area Dq3 is selected as an area for displaying a decorative symbol (FIG. 228 (b)).

  When the processing of S6508 ends, the display position of the decorative symbol is then switched to the display position specified in the processing of S6508 (S6509). In addition, the value stored in the display position storage area 223cy is also updated in accordance with this switching. That is, when the area is switched to the upper left area Dq1, it is updated to "01H", when it is switched to the upper right area Dq2, it is updated to "02H", and when it is switched to the lower left area Dq3, it is updated to "03H". You. After the processing of S6509, the value of the display time timer 223by is reset to 0 (S6510), and this processing ends. By resetting the display time timer 223by, the elapsed time after changing the display position of the decorative symbol is newly measured, and the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to the variable display area Dd1 when 0.5 second has elapsed. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6506, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by is not 3000 (S6506: No), there is no need to switch the display position. The process ends.

  Also, in the processing of S6505, it is determined that the current display position of the decorative symbol is not the variable display area Dd1 (one of “01H” to “03H” stored in the display position storage area 223cy). In this case (S6505: No), it is determined whether the value of the display time timer 223by is 500 (S6511). That is, it is determined whether 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the display position of the decorative symbol was switched to the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, or the lower left area Dq3.

  In the process of S6511, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by is 500 (S6511: Yes), the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (S6512), and the display is performed. “00H” indicating the variable display area Dd1 is stored in the position storage area 223cy. Then, the value of the display time timer 223by is reset to 0 (S6513), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6511 that the value of the display time timer 223by is not 500 (S6511), the processing of S6512 and S6513 is skipped because it is not necessary to switch the display position of the decorative symbol to the variable display area Dd1. Then, this processing is terminated as it is.

  By executing this display position selection processing (see FIG. 231), when any of the long fluctuations A to G is executed in the “preparation mode”, the fluctuation display for three seconds in the fluctuation display area Dd1 and the fluctuation display The change display for 0.5 seconds in an area different from the area Dd1 (one of the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, and the lower left area Dq3) is repeated. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the break of the variable display (switching of the display position) in the variable display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is periodically set in the long fluctuations A to G. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, it is more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode”, so that it is difficult for the player to predict whether to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained to the end during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1662) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The change display setting process 6 (S1662) is one of the main processes 6 (see FIG. 230), and the change of the identification information (symbol) in the rendering unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81 as described above. In order to generate and set a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 in order to execute the display, the display control is executed instead of the variation display process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. Is done.

  In the variable display setting processing 6 (see FIG. 232), in each processing of S3301 to S3310, the same processing as the processing of each of S3301 to S3310 of the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 162) in the first control example is executed. Is done. In the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 232) in this control example, when the process of S3309 ends, a stop position selection process for selecting a display position at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode” is executed. (S3331), and shifts the processing to S3310. Details of the stop position selection processing (S3331) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing details of the stop position selection processing (S3331). When the stop position selection process (see FIG. 233) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is a value larger than 0 (S6601). If the value is 0 (S6601), the current Is not in the "preparation mode", and there is no need to change the position at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed from the variable display area Dd1 to another display position, and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6601 that the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S6601: Yes), it means that the current state is the “preparation mode”. Is read (S6602), and the display position of the decorative symbol corresponding to the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is specified (S6603). Specifically, as described above, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of “0 to 39”, the upper left area Dq1 is specified as the area in which the decorative pattern is displayed, and “40 to 79” If it is a range, the upper right area Dq2 is selected as an area for displaying a decorative symbol, and if it is a range of "80 to 99", a lower left area Dq3 is selected as an area for displaying a decorative symbol (FIG. 228 (b)). When the processing of S6603 ends, the display position of the decorative symbol is then switched to the display position specified in the processing of S6603 (S6604), and this processing ends.

  By executing the stop position selection processing (see FIG. 233), the stop display of the decorative symbol can be executed at a display position (display area) different from the variable display, so that the variable display area (lower right area) ) It is possible to make it difficult for the player who has confirmed Dd1 to recognize whether or not the stop display has been executed. Therefore, before confirming the result of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, it is difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. The expectation of the player can be maintained.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example is configured to execute the display of the special symbol lottery result (decorative display of the decorative symbol) in the variable display area Dd1 of the third symbol display device 81. I have. Thereby, regardless of the mode, the result of the variable display can be determined based on the stop symbol.

  Further, in the present control example, in the "preparation mode", the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed at a display position different from the variable display area Dd1. Here, if the variable display and the stop display are performed in the variable display area Dd1 even in the “preparation mode”, the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the “preparation mode” is performed by observing the variable display area Dd1. Time is easily recognized. As described above, in the “preparation mode” in which the time reduction period is one, the long fluctuation A having the fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery (see FIGS. 112 and 113). On the other hand, in the “preparation mode” in which the time saving period is seven times, a long fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the case of a special symbol jackpot (see FIG. 112), and a fluctuation time of 3 is determined in the case of a special symbol. A second variation in seconds is selected. Therefore, if the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed 3 seconds after the start of the “representative mode suggestion effect” (when the long variation A is selected), it is a jackpot or the time reduction period is 1 Only the number of times is set, and it is determined that this is the case where the special symbol has been removed. In this case, since the lottery of the special symbol is lost and the possibility of shifting to the “normal mode” after the fluctuation increases, the player may not be able to enjoy the subsequent “representative mode of the extended-village mode”. There is. If the first to sixth special symbol lotteries in the “preparation mode” in which the time reduction period is seven are out of the range, the middle fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected (see FIG. 113). Conversely, if the fluctuation continues for 3 seconds or more in the second to sixth fluctuation displays, it is a jackpot without confirming the production result of “renjo mode suggestion production” (with a probability of 97.5%) It shifts to "rensou mode"). For this reason, there is a high possibility that the player will shift to the “rensou mode”, which may make the player feel that there is no need to confirm the subsequent “rensou mode suggestion effect”.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, the stop display of the decorative symbol is configured to be executed in a display area different from the variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who has checked the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to recognize whether or not the stop display has been executed. Therefore, before confirming the result of the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, it is difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. The expectation of the player can be maintained.

  Further, in the present control example, in order to make the timing of the stop display more difficult to understand, during the execution of the long fluctuations A to G, the fluctuation display for three seconds in the fluctuation display area Dd1 and an area different from the fluctuation display area Dd1 are performed. The display is changed so as to repeat the change display for 0.5 second in the upper left area Dq1 and the like. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the break of the variable display (switching of the display position) in the variable display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is periodically set in the long fluctuations A to G. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, it is more difficult to determine whether or not the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed in the “preparation mode”, so that it is difficult for the player to predict whether to shift to the “rensou mode”. Therefore, the player's expectation can be maintained to the end during the execution of the “renjo mode suggestion effect”.

  In the sixth control example, in the “preparation mode”, when it is determined that three seconds have elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbol was performed in the variable display area Dd1, the display position of the decorative symbol is displayed. Although the position is switched to one of the upper left area Dq1, the upper right area Dq2, and the lower left area Dq3, or the lottery (determination) is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol may be defined for each fluctuating pattern (fluctuating time) so as to include the display position for each elapse of time. Specifically, for example, when the main controller 110 notifies the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the long fluctuation A (90 seconds), the display position switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 is changed from the upper left area Dq1 to the upper right area. .. And the display area in the order of the lower left area Dq3 → the upper right area Dq2 → the upper left area Dq1 → the lower left area Dq3 →. May be configured so that the display mode of the current variable display can be selected. That is, in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, a plurality of variations in which the display positions of the decorative symbols are different from each other may be defined as the variation display modes of the decorative symbols. With this configuration, it is not necessary for the sound lamp control device 113 to execute the process of selecting (determining) the display position every time the time elapses, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reduced. be able to.

  In the present control example, the variable display area Dd1 is provided at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be arranged at any position. Further, in the present control example, the upper left area Dq1 and the upper right area are used as the display area when the stop display is performed in the “prepare mode” and when the display position is switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 during the execution of the long fluctuations A to G. Although three types of display areas, the area Dq2 and the lower left area Dq3, are provided, the present invention is not limited to the three types. More or less display areas may be provided. Further, the arrangement of each display area may be arbitrarily determined.

  In this control example, the display position of the decorative symbol is switched when three seconds have elapsed since the decorative symbol was displayed in the variable display area Dd1 (stop display timing or during variable display). It is not limited. Instead of switching the display position, the display mode of the variable display area Dd1 may be changed. For example, the variable display area Dd1 may be reduced for 0.5 seconds every 3 seconds, and a display mode of a normal size for 3 seconds and a display mode of a reduced display for 0.5 seconds may be repeated. When the reduced display is performed, the display may be reduced to a size (for example, 1 mm long × 1 mm wide) that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize whether the decorative symbol is stopped or displayed while the thumbnail image is displayed in a reduced size. Has the same effect as in the case of varying. Further, since the lottery (determination) process for switching the display position can be omitted, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the present control example, the decorative pattern is not displayed in the variable display area Dd1 when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1 (the display position is simply moved). It is not limited. For example, even after the display position is switched, the fluctuating display may be pseudo-displayed on the fluctuating display area Dd1. Accordingly, when the variable display area Dd1 is focused on, the appearance becomes as if the variable display is always continued during the “preparation mode” regardless of whether the variable display area Dd1 is stopped or displayed. In the "preparation mode", it can be more difficult to determine whether the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed.

  In this control example, when three seconds have elapsed since the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in the variable display region Dd1, the decorative symbol is moved to another display position (display region). However, the display time of the decorative symbol in the variable display area Dq1 is not limited to three seconds, and may be arbitrarily determined.

  In the present control example, the decorative symbol is displayed at any one of the four display positions for 3 seconds or 0.5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display position (variable display or stop display) of the decorative symbol in the “preparation mode” may always be moved at a high speed. Also, the moving direction may be configured to have a random appearance. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbol, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the result of the “rensou mode suggestion effect” is predicted by the player. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the “rensou mode suggestion effect” to the end with a sense of expectation.

  In each of the above control examples, in the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, after the ball B is caused to swing above the holding piece 677 (or the holding piece 6770), the ball B is moved to a pocket of a type corresponding to the present effect result. However, the configuration for identifying the pocket showing the effect result is not limited to the ball B composed of a sphere. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a doll imitating a character appearing in a part of the effect of the pachinko machine 10 is dropped into a pocket corresponding to the effect. In this case, instead of performing the swinging operation above the holding piece 677 (holding piece 6770), a doll imitating a character is suspended above a drop position with a string or the like to perform a pendulum-like swinging operation. It may be performed. Then, when the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging operation is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 second), the doll may be dropped into a pocket of a type corresponding to the present effect result. With such a configuration, even when a doll other than a sphere is used, the effect can be clearly notified as in the case of using the ball B. After the end of the effect, the doll imitating the character is collected in the same manner as the ball B, and returned to the suspended state again, so that the effect of dropping the doll in each of the “mansion mode suggested effects” can be performed. You may comprise.

  In each of the above control examples, a plate-shaped member with a number is adopted as each of the pockets P1 to P30, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotating member 640 may be replaced with an image from a liquid crystal display device or the like. That is, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be enlarged in size, and a roulette image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to execute the “rensou mode suggestion effect”. In this case, the ball B may be replaced with an image. That is, the third symbol display device performs a series of effects in which the ball B is thrown in the “rensou mode suggestion effect”, then swings on the holding piece 677, and then falls into any pocket. The configuration may be such that the processing is performed by a video (image) displayed for 81. With this configuration, the number of the rotating member 640, the holding pieces 677, the ball B, the pitching device 650, and the like can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining some or all of one embodiment with some or all of other one or more embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper end portion (radially outer portion of the distribution convex portion 521e) of the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is opened has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the cover member that covers the open portion at the upper end of the first passage forming member 520 opens the sphere supply side in the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e, and opens the sphere supply side. The opposite side may operate in a lidded manner. In this case, it is possible to prevent foreign matter other than a sphere from being mixed into the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the connecting member 424 is rotated while abutting on the first passage forming member 520 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the connection member 424 may be omitted. In this case, product costs can be reduced by reducing the number of components required for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Further, instead of the connection member 424, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be provided. In this case, the positional displacement between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is absorbed by the deformation of the shape of the rubber elastic body due to the contact of the first passage forming member 520 with the rubber elastic body. be able to.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the drive-side slide member 420 is driven by the one-layer rack 452 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a case where the rack for driving the drive side slide member 420 is composed of two layers in the front and rear, and a case where the drive side slide member 420 is vertically moved by the front rack and a case where the drive side slide member 420 is vertically moved by the rear rack May be configurable. In this case, by adopting a mode in which only one of the two-layered racks abuts on the driven side slide member 430 vertically, the case where the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 move up and down in conjunction with each other, It is possible to switch between a case where the drive side slide member 420 moves up and down independently by passing through the driven side slide member 430.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b protrude outside the circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b may be recessed toward the center side of a circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth, and the other may be extended longer by that amount.

  In each of the above embodiments, the portion that is in contact with the contact portion 351b is the adjacent gear tooth 354c having a gear tooth shape, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape is formed, and the portion and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other.

  In each of the above embodiments, the portion that comes into contact with the abutting portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b in which the tooth shape is not formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a surface that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b may be formed by partially shaving the gear teeth of the portion configured in the tooth shape.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the entire overlapping portion of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b contacts the surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by providing a recessed portion that is recessed toward the rotation axis at an intermediate position between the contact portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b, the area per surface may be reduced.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the left and right ascent control members 417 abut at the same timing as the drive side slide member 420 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the right and left elevation restriction members 417 may be brought into contact with the drive side slide member 420. In this case, a left-right asymmetric load can be applied to the drive-side slide member 420, and the drive-side slide member 420 is inclined even when the center of gravity of the drive-side slide member 420 is shifted to one of the left and right (one of the left and right). Can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the distal end wall member 2560 is provided at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an aspect in which a blower that sends air from the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 toward the base end side is provided, or an aspect in which a magnetic force generator is provided at the distal end of the first passage forming member 2520 and a ball is attracted by magnetic force Alternatively, a mode in which the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is vibrated in the rotation direction may be used. In this case, it is possible to suppress the ball from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined upward toward the distal end in the release state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an intermediate portion that sinks between the base end and the front end of the first passage forming member 2520 may be provided (may be configured in a U-shape). In this case, if a ball remains inside the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the ball can be retained at an intermediate portion (a position closer to the distal end than the base end), so that the communication state changes. In this case, it is possible to shorten a period until the ball is sent from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

  In the third embodiment described above, the case where the lowering control member 415 and the upward control member 417 are provided on one side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 are disposed on the left and right sides of the base member 410, and the elastic coefficients of the torsion springs 415d and 417g for urging the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 are set on the left side. There may be a difference between the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided and the torsion springs 415d and 417g provided on the right side. At this time, the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the right side in the front view is greater than the torsion springs 415d and 417g disposed on the left side in the front view (the side where the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is closer). It is preferable to reduce the coefficient. In this case, the load that changes the posture of the driven side slide member 3430 in the counterclockwise direction (in the direction in which the driven side slide member 3430 is tilted due to the bias of the center of gravity) by the downward regulating member 415 and the upward regulating member 417 disposed on the right side is used. While suppressing, when the driven slide member 3430 changes its posture clockwise in front view due to a sudden vertical movement of the driven slide member 3430, the change in posture can be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the driven side slide member 430 falls after the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the lowered position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driven side slide member 430 may be dropped in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is located at the intermediate position. In this state, control (control of repeatedly switching between the ascending operation and the descending operation) may be performed such that the driving-side slide member 420 is operated in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the driven-side slide member 430. In this case, an effect can be performed in which the driven side slide member 430 is rebounded by the drive side slide member 420 (such as repeatedly rebounded).

  In each of the above embodiments, the divided member DV in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link operation groove 621 is formed by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638. Although the case of driving has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. The split member DV in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large-diameter portion 621a of the connection link operation groove 621 is connected to one side. It may be driven by the rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638. In this case, since the distance between the divided member DV that applies the driving force and the adjacent divided member DV is widened, the adjacent divided member DV and the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 Can be suppressed, and the diameters of the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation driving member can be increased accordingly. As a result, it is possible to increase the driving torque applied from the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation driving member to the division member DV (the rotation member 640).

  In each of the above embodiments, the period in which the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 Although the case where the period in which the DV is engaged with the driven portion 641 overlaps has been described (see FIG. 75), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the engagement portion 637 b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or another While one of the engagement portions 638b of the side rotation drive member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, the other is not engaged, and the engagement portion of the one side rotation drive member 637 is not engaged. One of the engagement portions 638b of the other side rotation drive member 638 and the other of the engagement portions 638b may be made to be non-engaged while the other is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV.

  In this case, it is possible to avoid that the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. . That is, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 can be alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641. Thereby, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

  That is, when a phase shift occurs between the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 due to a dimensional tolerance, an assembly tolerance, a driving tolerance of the driving motor 631, etc. In the rotary member 640 formed by connecting the DVs endlessly, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotary driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotary driving member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the divided member DV. If a phase shift occurs in a state in which the rotary member 640 is engaged with the portion 641, one section in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 is in a compressed state and the other section is in a tensile state, so that the displacement of the rotating member 640 is unstable. Becomes

  On the other hand, as described above, the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 are alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV. By doing so, even if a phase shift occurs, it is possible to avoid that the rotating member 640 is affected by the phase shift. As a result, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members DV endlessly, the displacement thereof can be stabilized.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the division members DV are connected endlessly in the rotating unit 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The division members DV are connected endlessly (from one end to the other end). It is of course possible to connect the divided member DV up to and disconnect one end and the other end). In this case, for example, the divided member DV connected in an end shape may be displaced (moved) along the endless trajectory in each of the above embodiments, or may be displaced along the endless trajectory. The divided member DV connected in an end shape may be reciprocated (reciprocated).

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows. "A display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as a burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on a gaming machine installation location can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<About the concept of the invention in which a structure in which the rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted by the locking arc portion 351c is an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a driving unit; a transmitting member for transmitting a driving force of the driving unit; The member includes a first gear and a second gear meshed with the first gear and disposed on the displacement member side of the transmission path of the driving force with respect to the first gear. The gear includes a contact portion formed in a part of the tooth profile, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, predetermined teeth of the second gear are in contact with the contact portion of the first gear. The gaming machine A1 wherein the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by being in contact with the gaming machine A1.

  Here, there is provided a gaming machine including a driving unit, a transmission member that transmits a driving force of the driving unit, and a displacement member that is displaced between an ascending position and a descending position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism, the rotation of the pinion driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the displacement member is raised and lowered between the lowered position and the raised position by the linear motion of the rack. (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-80941, for example). In this case, when the driving force of the driving unit is released in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. For this reason, it is necessary to continue to apply the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem that the energy consumption for holding the displacement member at the raised position increases. On the other hand, a crank mechanism is interposed in a part of the driving means, and by utilizing the dead point of the crank mechanism, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member is not lowered from its raised position by its own weight. A known structure is also known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-140602), but in this case, there is a problem that the entire transmission member is increased in size by the provision of the crank mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first gear includes the contact portion formed on a part of the tooth profile thereof, and the contact of the first gear when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position. Since the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by the predetermined teeth of the second gear contacting the portion, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member is It is possible to suppress falling by its own weight. Therefore, energy consumption when the displacement member is held at the raised position can be suppressed. Further, the structure for holding the displacement member at the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and there is no need to separately provide a crank mechanism, so that the size of the transmission member can be reduced. it can.

  In the gaming machine A1, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed on a part of the tooth profile thereof, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at an ascending position, the second gear contacts the contact portion of the first gear. A gaming machine A2 wherein the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by the contact of the receiving portions of the two gears.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, when the receiving portion of the second gear abuts on the abutting portion of the first gear, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises. That is, in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the rotation of the second gear is regulated in both the forward and reverse directions. Can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A3, wherein in the gaming machine A1 or A2, the rotation of the first gear in a direction in which the displacement member is lowered is allowed when the displacement member is disposed at the raised position.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the rotation of the first gear in a direction to lower the displacement member is allowed. It is not necessary to separately perform an operation for releasing the contact between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear, and by rotating the first gear by the driving force of the driving means, The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, while the rotation of the second gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is restricted, the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is allowed. Therefore, when the displacement member attempts to descend from its raised position by its own weight, the predetermined teeth of the second gear abut against the contact portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear and displacing the displacement member. Can be held in the raised position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed so as to mesh with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction to raise the displacement member, A gaming machine A4, characterized in that the tooth height of the first gear is lower than that of the teeth of the first gear, and a predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the tooth tip surface.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction to raise the displacement member. The second gear is formed so as to be lower than the teeth of the first gear so that a predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the tooth surface of the first gear. Is rotated, and when the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the second gear can be rotated in a direction to raise the displacement member through the abutment portion and the meshing of the predetermined teeth. As a result, a state in which the predetermined tooth of the second gear can contact the contact portion of the first gear (a state in which the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). It can be formed reliably.

  In the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a greater tooth thickness than the teeth of the first gear.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a larger tooth thickness than the teeth of the first gear, so that the predetermined teeth of the second gear abut. Possible areas can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position can be reduced (the tolerance is increased). As a result, a state where the predetermined teeth of the second gear can contact the contact portion of the first gear can be reliably formed.

  Further, the contact portion of the first gear is a portion that receives a predetermined tooth of the second gear and regulates the rotation of the second gear (that is, supports the weight of the displacement member). Since it is increased, strength can be secured.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the abutment portion of the first gear is formed such that the tip surface is curved in an arc shape about the rotation axis of the first gear. .

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed such that its tooth tip surface is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation center of the first gear. Therefore, while improving the strength of the first gear, the first gear can be rotated until a predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear. Can be planned.

  Further, when the second gear is rotated in a direction to lower the displacement member and a predetermined tooth of the second gear is brought into contact with a contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear, the predetermined gear of the second gear is moved. The rotation of the first gear can be easily suppressed by setting the direction of the force acting on the contact portion of the first gear from the tooth of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the first gear. As a result, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends can be easily regulated, and even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member can be reliably prevented from descending by its own weight.

  In the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of a tooth profile thereof, and in a state where the displacement member is disposed at an ascending position, the first gear is provided on a receiving portion of the second gear. The gaming machine A7, wherein the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by the contact of the contact portion of the gear.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A6, the second gear includes the receiving portion formed on a part of its tooth shape, and the first gear is in the state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position. Since the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by the contact portion of the gear being in contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, the receiving portion of the second gear is moved to the displacement member. It can function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after being placed at the raised position.

  In the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the arc of the contact portion of the first gear. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being formed into an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the shape.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the first gear has a concave portion. When the contact portion of the first gear is brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, both surfaces are curved. The contact portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the function of the stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after the displacement member is arranged at the raised position can be reliably exerted on the receiving portion of the second gear.

  Further, since the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in an arc shape concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear, the tooth height on both sides in the tooth thickness direction can be increased, and the strength of the receiving portion can be increased. Can be increased. This can prevent the receiving portion of the second gear from being damaged when receiving the contact portion of the first gear.

  In any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the engagement between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and The gaming machine A9, wherein the displacement member is located at an end of a movable range in a rising direction.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the ascending position, the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined teeth of the second gear are not provided. Is disengaged and the displacement member is located at the end of the movable range in the ascending direction, so that the displacement member is disposed in the ascending position by the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member is elevated. Later, while stopping the second gear, only the first gear can be rotated in the direction in which the displacement member rises. Thereby, the predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact part of the first gear (the contact part (tooth surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). Can be reliably formed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is an example>
A first passage member and a second passage member formed to allow a ball to pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other; A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member; and a first passage member and a second passage member in which one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member. In a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state in which the first and second passage members are not communicated with each other, the first and second passage members are displaceably disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a connecting member that connects one end of the first passage member and one end of the second passage member in a state of being displaced by contacting the other of the two passage members.

  Here, a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass therethrough are provided, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member so that the first passage member and the second passage member are non-connected. There is known a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state to be communicated (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171636). In this case, it is inevitable that a variation occurs in a stop position and a disposition position of the second passage member when the first passage member is displaced due to a dimensional tolerance and an assembly tolerance of each component. Therefore, in the communication state, a position shift occurs between the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member, and it is difficult to stably throw the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the gaming machine B1 is disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and is displaced by contacting the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. Since the first and second passage members include a connecting member that communicates between one ends of the first and second passage members, even if the positions of the first and second passage members are misaligned, one end of each of the first and second passage members is displaced. The displacement can be absorbed by the displacement of the connecting portion interposed between the two. Thereby, the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized. Further, with the displacement of the first passage member, the first passage member comes into contact with the connection member and displaces the connection member, so that the driving force for displacing the first passage member can also be used, and the connection member is displaced. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving force to be performed.

  In the gaming machine B1, the connection member includes one side wall portion and another side wall portion that are arranged to face each other across an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and the one side wall portion includes: When the first path member is located on the displacement path of the first path member and the first path member is displaced, and the other end of the first path member or the second path member contacts one side wall of the connection member. The gaming machine B2, wherein the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall of the connecting member is brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B1, when the first passage member is displaced and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member comes into contact with one side wall of the connection member. Since the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall of the connecting member is brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, in the communication state, the one side wall and the other side wall of the connecting member are removed. , The one end of the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member, and the positional deviation between the one end of the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member can be easily absorbed. As a result, the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the communication state is formed by the first passage member being rotated with one end thereof being a rotation tip side, and the connection member is provided with a rotating shaft parallel to a rotating shaft of the first passage member. When the first passage member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall of the connection member, the connection member is rotated, and The gaming machine B3, wherein the other side wall of the connection member is close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, a communication state is formed by the first passage member being rotated with one end thereof as a rotation tip side, and the connection member is connected to the first passage member. Since a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the member is provided, the displacement (rotation) of the connection member accompanying the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member can be performed smoothly. In addition, by utilizing the rotation operations of both, the other side wall of the connection member can be brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the communication state, in the communication state, one of the opposing surfaces of the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion has a sphere from the first passage member to the second passage member. A gaming machine B4, which is a rolling surface when a ball is thrown, and in the communication state, the one opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 or B3, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of a ball in a communicating portion between one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member. That is, since the communicating portion between the one end of the first passage member and the one end of the second passage member is a portion in which the positional deviation becomes large, where the feeding of the ball becomes unstable, a rolling surface of the ball in the communicating portion is formed. Since the one opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member, the ball can be rolled and the throwing ball can be stabilized.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be sent from one end of the first passage member, and in the release state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to move. A gaming machine B5 comprising: a throwing regulation means for regulating that a ball is thrown from one end of the first passage member.

  Here, in the release state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated with each other. When the ball is supplied to the passage member, the ball that has passed through the first passage member may fall outside the game area. In the communicating state, even if the ball is supplied to the first passage member, if the ball stays in the first passage member for some reason and shifts to the release state in that state, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball staying in the game area may fall into the game area. If the ball falls out of the game area, the movement of the movable member such as the gear and the crank mechanism may be hindered, or the movable member may be damaged by being caught by the ball.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the communication state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member. At the same time, in the released state, there is provided a ball feed restricting means for restricting the ball in the first passage member from being thrown from one end of the first path member. For example, when a ball is supplied to the first path member in the released state, Also, even when the state is shifted from the communication state to the release state while the ball stays in the first passage member, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

  In the gaming machine B5, a cover body is provided at one end of the first passage member, the cover body allowing passage of the ball in the communicating state and restricting the passage of the ball in the released state, and the cover body is configured to restrict the throwing of the ball. A gaming machine B6 forming means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B5, a cover as one of the ball-throwing restricting means is provided at one end of the first passage member so as to allow the passage of the ball in the communicating state and restrict the passage of the ball in the released state. Since the body is disposed, for example, even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the release state, or when the state transitions from the communication state to the release state while the ball remains in the first passage member, the first passage The ball can be prevented from falling out of the game area from one end of the member.

  In the gaming machine B5, an urging member that applies an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that regulates the passage of the ball, and acts on the cover body with the displacement of the first passage member. And a functioning member for displacing the cover body in a direction that allows the ball to pass when at least the communication state is established.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B5, since the urging member is provided to apply an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position for restricting the passage of the ball, the cover in the released state is provided. Inadvertent displacement of the body can be suppressed, and as a result, the ball can be more reliably prevented from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, when the communication state is formed, the cover body is displaced in a direction allowing the ball to pass, so that the ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member.

  In this case, since the displacement of the cover body in the direction allowing the ball to pass is performed in accordance with the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the action member, the driving means for displacing the first passage member is displaced by the cover body It can also be used as a driving means for causing the product cost to be reduced.

  The action member is located on the displacement trajectory of the cover body due to the displacement of the first passage member, and comes into contact with the cover body displaced along the displacement trajectory, thereby resisting the urging force of the urging member. (For example, a second passage member, a connecting member, a member fixed to a game board, etc.) and a driving force of a driving means for displacing the first passage member. To the cover body to displace the cover body together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear or a rack and pinion that converts drive means and driving force into rotary motion or linear motion and transmits the same to the cover body) ) Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B5, the throwing regulation means arranges the first passage member in such a state that one end of the first passage member is uppermost in the released state.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B5, the throwing regulation means arranges the first passage member in the released state with one end of the first passage member at the uppermost position. Even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball is transferred from the communicating state to the released state with the ball remaining in the first passage member, the ball moves out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. Falling can be suppressed.

  In the release state, the first passage member disposed such that one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position does not need to be entirely inclined upward. There may be a part of the area which is horizontal or inclined downward.

  In the gaming machine B5, the throwing restricting means is configured to arrange the first passage member in a posture inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member to one end in the released state. Gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the throwing restricting means arranges the first passage member in a posture inclined upward from one end of the first passage member to one end in the released state. Therefore, for example, even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the release state, or when the state transitions from the communication state to the release state while the ball remains in the first passage member, the ball is supplied from one end of the first passage member. Can be easily suppressed from falling outside the game area.

  Further, in the case where the communication state is formed, it is possible to form a state in which the whole of the first passage member is inclined downward from the other end to one end, so that the ball can be easily sent from the first passage member to the second passage member. In this way, the ball can be prevented from staying on the way. Therefore, when the state shifts to the release state, it is possible to suppress the ball remaining in the first passage member from falling into the game area.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage formed to allow a ball to pass therethrough, a one-side position for distributing a ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage, and A distributing member that is displaced between the other side position for distributing the ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the downstream passage, wherein the case body is formed by opening both sides in the displacement direction of the distributing member. A gaming machine B10, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the case body is formed with both sides in the displacement direction of the distribution member open, so that the case body is moved to one side position or the other side position. Even when the ball flows down between the distribution member displaced toward the case and the case body, it is possible to suppress the flowed-down ball from being caught between the distribution member and the case body.

  In the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and when the communication state is formed by displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is disposed at the one side position; The gaming machine B11, wherein, when the release state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is disposed at the other side position.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and the displacement member is disposed at one side position and the other side position according to the displacement of the first passage member. Therefore, the driving means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the distribution member, and the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly.

  Here, in the structure in which the distribution member is displaced independently of the first passage member, for example, if the displacement state of the distribution member and the first passage member is displaced due to the occurrence of control failure, the release state is set. The ball is distributed to the first passage member in (1) (that is, the distribution member is disposed at one side position), and the ball may fall out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, in the gaming machine B10, since the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, the displacement state between the distribution member and the first passage member can always be synchronized. Therefore, even if the control failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the ball from being distributed to the first passage member in the released state (that is, when the released state is formed, the distribution member always moves to the other side position). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from falling from one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area.

  In the gaming machine B11, the gaming machine B12 is characterized in that the first passage member includes a wall section that defines a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall section of the first passage member is the distribution member.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B11, the first passage member has a wall portion that defines a passage through which the ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is a distribution member. In addition, parts can be shared and the cost of parts can be reduced. In addition, by using the wall portion that partitions the passage through which the ball passes as the sorting member, the sorted ball can flow down to the passage without fail.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the structure for restricting the rebound of the driven slide member 430 is an example>
A guide member extending vertically, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between an ascending position and a descending position, and supporting the displacement member at the descending position A support member and an elevating member formed so as to be able to move up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the lifting member as the lifting member is raised. In addition, in a gaming machine in which the displacement member is lowered from the raised position to the lowered position by its own weight as the lifting member is lowered, when the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position, the displacement member moves in the rising direction. A gaming machine C1 comprising a rise regulating member for regulating displacement.

  Here, a guide member extending in the up-down direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between the ascending position and the descending position, and supporting the displacing member at the descending position A supporting member and a lifting member formed so as to be able to move up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is raised from the lowering position to the upper position by being pushed up by the raising and lowering member with the raising of the raising and lowering member, There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is lowered from a raised position to a lowered position by its own weight as a lifting member is lowered (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member lowered by its own weight along the guide member is maintained on the lowered position by being placed on the support member and supported by the support member. However, since the displacement member is placed on the support member and can be displaced in the ascending direction along the guide member, rattling is likely to occur due to disturbance, and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position There is a problem that is unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided along the guide member at the descending position because the displacing member is provided with the elevation regulating member for regulating the displacement of the displacing member in the ascending direction when the displacing member is lowered to the descending position. Displacement in the ascending direction can be restricted, and rattling due to disturbance can be suppressed. As a result, the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C1, there is provided an urging means for urging the elevation regulating member in a direction approaching the displacement member, and the displacement member comes into contact with the elevation regulation member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. A separating action portion for displacing the lift restricting member in a direction away from the displacement member, and allowing the lift restricting member to be displaced in a direction approaching the displacement member at the lowered position, and A gaming machine C2 comprising: an engaging portion that engages.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is configured to displace the rising regulating member in a direction away from the displacement member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight, and a descent position. In this case, since the movable member is provided with an engaging portion that engages with the rising restricting member, the restricted state by the rising restricting member can be formed only by the operation of lowering the displacement member to its lowered position by its own weight, and the restricted state by the rising restricting member is formed. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving source for performing the operation. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost of the product can be reduced.

  In addition, since the engagement between the rise regulating member and the engaging portion is performed after allowing the displacement regulating member to be displaced in a direction approaching the displacement member, the engagement between the rising regulating member and the engaging portion is accordingly made. The force required to release the engagement and the displacement of the elevation restriction member can be increased. As a result, even when disturbance is input, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement between the rise restricting member and the engagement portion.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein in the gaming machine C2, the release of the engagement between the elevation regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C2, the disengagement of the lifting regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the lifting member, so that the displacement member is disturbed. Can be suppressed from being inadvertently disengaged from the engaging portion of the upward movement restricting member and the displacing member.

  In addition, since the release of the engagement between the lifting regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the lifting member, there is no need to separately provide a drive source for releasing the engagement, and The drive source for raising and lowering the member can also be used as a drive source for releasing the engagement between the lift restricting member and the engagement portion of the displacement member, thereby reducing the product cost. .

  Further, in the case where a drive source for releasing the engagement between the elevation restriction member and the engagement portion of the displacement member is separately provided, for example, due to the occurrence of control failure, the engagement portion between the elevation restriction member and the displacement member In the state where the lifting member may rise and push up the displacement member in a state where the engagement of the displacement member is not released, according to the gaming machine C3, the release of the engagement between the lifting restriction member and the engagement portion of the displacement member is canceled. This can be performed in accordance with the operation of pushing up the displacement member by the elevating member as the elevating member is raised. Can be reliably released.

  In the gaming machine C3, when the elevating member is lifted, the elevating member comes into contact with the ascending restricting member to displace the ascending restricting member. A gaming machine C4 comprising a release action portion for releasing the engagement.

  Here, the disengagement of the engagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member can be performed by a pushing force at the time of pushing up the displacement member as the lifting member moves up and down. In this case, the pushing force is used. Therefore, it is necessary to make the engagement state such that it can be released, and it becomes difficult to firmly engage. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, vibration is generated by the reaction, and the posture of the displacement member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C3, the elevating member comes into contact with the elevating restricting member when the elevating member is raised, thereby displacing the elevating restricting member, thereby restricting the ascent. Since there is provided a release action portion for releasing the engagement between the member and the engaging portion of the displacement member, even if the rising regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member are firmly engaged, the release is reliably performed. be able to. In other words, since the strong engagement state can be formed, the play of the displacement member due to disturbance can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member at the lowered position can be stabilized. Further, the vibration due to the recoil when the engagement is released can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the engagement of the displacement member with the engagement portion of the displacement member is released, the elevation regulating member is configured to move the displacement member up and down between the descending position and the ascending position. A gaming machine C5 to be abutted.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the lift regulating member moves the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position when the engagement of the displacement member with the engagement portion is released. Since it is in contact with the elevating member to be moved up and down, it functions as a guide and can suppress rattling when the elevating member is moved up and down. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member that moves up and down with the elevating member.

  The gaming machine C6, wherein in the gaming machine C5, a lifting regulating member abutting on the lifting member is urged by the urging means in a direction approaching the lifting member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C5, the lifting regulating member abutting on the elevating member is urged by the urging means in the direction approaching the elevating member. And the posture can be stabilized. Also, rattling of the lifting member can be suppressed by the elastic buffering action of the biasing means.

  In the gaming machine C6, a drive unit, a pinion rotationally driven by the drive unit, and a rack meshed with the pinion, the rack is disposed on the elevating member, the elevating member, A gaming machine C7, wherein the rack is urged by the urging means in a direction away from the pinion via an ascending restricting member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C6, the rotational motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear motion. You. In this case, the elevating member is urged in the direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the elevating member, so that the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized. That is, when the elevating member rattles in the direction in which the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is reduced, the urging force of the urging means acts in the direction to increase the interval, while the direction in which the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion increases. When the elevating member rattles, it can be regulated by the guide structure by the guide member that the distance between the members increases. Therefore, the interval between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion becomes narrow, and it is possible to suppress the tooth resistance from becoming excessive.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, a gaming machine C8 including a descent regulating member that regulates displacement of the elevating member in a descending direction when the elevating member pushes the displacement member up to the ascending position.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, when the elevating member pushes the displacement member up to the ascending position, the lowering member is provided to regulate the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction. The provided displacement member and the elevating member can be supported by the descent restricting member. As a result, a driving force for holding the displacement member at the ascending position can be made unnecessary, so that energy consumption of the driving means for driving the elevating member can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the regulation by the descending member is performed by raising the elevating member, there is no need to separately provide a driving source for forming the regulation by the descending member, and the driving source for elevating the elevating member is not required. Can also be used as a drive source for forming the regulation by the descending regulation member, and the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine C8, the release of the regulation by the descending regulating member is performed by lowering the elevating member. The gaming machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, the release of the restriction by the descent restricting member is performed by lowering the elevating member, so it is necessary to separately provide a drive source for releasing the restriction. Therefore, the drive source for raising and lowering the lifting member can be used also as the drive source for releasing the restriction of the lowering restriction member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, in the case where a drive source for releasing the restriction by the descent restricting member is separately provided, for example, when the restriction by the descent restricting member is not released due to the occurrence of control failure, the elevating member moves down and drives. Where the overload may act on the source or the descent regulating member may be damaged, according to the gaming machine C9, the restriction by the descent regulating member can be released in synchronization with the descending operation of the elevating member. When the elevating member is lowered, a state in which the restriction by the descent restricting member is surely released can be formed.

  In the case where the lowering regulating member is a structure that restricts displacement of the displacement member in the lowering direction instead of the raising and lowering member, a structure in which the restriction by the lowering restricting member is released with the lowering of the raising and lowering member is complicated. However, according to the gaming machines C8 and C9, since the descent restricting member has a structure for restricting the displacement of the elevating member in the descent direction, the release of the restriction by the descent restricting member is accompanied by the descent of the elevating member. The structure to be performed can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine C8 or C9, in a state where the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction is regulated by the descending member, the ascent member is in contact with the elevating member, and the descending member is in contact with the elevating member. A gaming machine C10, wherein the contacting direction is different from the direction in which the elevation regulating member contacts the elevation member.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in the gaming machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the descent regulating member contacts the elevating member is different from the direction in which the ascent regulating member contacts the elevating member. The rattling of the lifting member in different directions can be suppressed by the restriction member and the lifting restriction member. As a result, the posture of the elevating member can be effectively stabilized.

  In the gaming machine C10, a drive unit, a pinion that is rotationally driven by the drive unit, and a rack that meshes with the pinion are provided, and the rack is disposed on the elevating member. A gaming machine C11, which is in contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine C11, the rotational motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into linear motion of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear motion. In this case, the rack (elevating member) can be displaced in a direction parallel to the tooth surface with respect to the pinion, and the descending regulating member abuts on the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack. Therefore, the displacement of the rack (elevating member) with respect to the pinion in the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack can be restricted.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state in which the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the lift regulating member and the support member can contact the displacement member from one side and the other side across the guide member. , A gaming machine C12.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the rising regulating member and the supporting member are on one side and the other side of the guiding member. Are arranged so as to be able to abut against the displacement member, so that rattling in either direction of the displacement member with respect to the guide member in one direction or the other side is regulated by the abutment member or the support member, respectively. it can. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member provided at the lowered position from rattling due to disturbance.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the lowered position, the support member and the rising restriction member abut on the displacement member while changing their positions along the extending direction of the guide member. The gaming machine C13, wherein the gaming machine C13 is disposed as possible, and the support member is disposed above the elevation restriction member.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state where the displacement member is arranged at the lowered position, the support member and the elevation regulating member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member. The displacement member is disposed so as to be able to abut on the displacement member while being different from each other. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member provided at the lowered position from rattling due to disturbance.

  Further, since the support member is disposed above the elevation regulating member, the support member does not hinder the elevation of the elevation member, and a space for the elevation member to elevate can be secured. Therefore, the degree of freedom of design can be secured.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which a structure in which the detected portion 641 of the rotating member 640 is detected by the detection sensor 684 is an example>
In a gaming machine having a movable member movably formed and a detecting means for detecting a moving position of the moving member, the detecting means is arranged at irregular intervals along the moving direction of the moving member. A gaming machine D1 comprising: a plurality of detected parts provided; and a plurality of detection sensors disposed on a movement locus of the detected part.

  Here, there has been known a gaming machine including a rotatable moving member and a detecting unit for detecting a rotational position of the moving member (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-46467). According to this gaming machine, the detecting means includes the plurality of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the moving member, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit arranged to face each other with the slit interposed therebetween, and the light receiving unit receives light. The number of pulses of the pulse-like signal is cumulatively added, and the amount of rotation of the moving member from the reference position (that is, the rotational position) is detected based on the cumulatively added number of pulses. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a failure in light reception of the light receiving unit or the like, a deviation occurs between the rotational position of the moving member and the cumulative addition number, and the rotational position of the moving member cannot be accurately detected. There was a problem. That is, when a detection failure occurs, the subsequent detection results are affected, and each time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection results is accumulated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the detecting means includes a plurality of detected portions arranged on the moving member at unequal intervals along the direction of the movement, and a plurality of detected portions arranged on the movement locus of the detected portion. Since a plurality of detection sensors are provided, the movement position of the moving member can be detected based on a combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the plurality of detecting sensors, and the past detecting result of the detecting sensor is required to detect the moving position of the moving member. Therefore, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

  In the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction, and the detected portion is one of the plurality of divided members. And a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on an arrangement interval of the divided members. Gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction, and the detected portion Is disposed on some of the plurality of divided members and is not disposed on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are disposed on the basis of the arrangement intervals of the divided members. Therefore, each time the movable member is displaced by an amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members, the combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors can be made different. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected with the moving amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members as the minimum unit.

  Note that a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the divided members, which means that the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at positions corresponding to any of the plurality of divided members. Means that. That is, it means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is disposed at a position where the presence or absence of the detected portion of the corresponding divided member can be detected.

  In the gaming machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the plurality of divided members have an interval smaller than the first interval. And a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on an arrangement interval of the divided members in the first section, and a movement locus of the detected portion in the first section A gaming machine D3, which is disposed above.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval, and a plurality of divided members that are larger than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval, which is a narrow interval, is formed, the length of the moving member can be reduced as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In this case, the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the movement locus of the detected portion in the first section at intervals based on the arrangement interval (first interval) of the divided members in the first section. Space required for disposing the detection sensor can be easily secured. In other words, when setting the arrangement interval (second interval) of the divided members in the second section, there is no need to consider the space for disposing the detection sensor, and therefore, the second interval is set to be smaller. Can be set at narrow intervals. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed from this point as well.

  In the gaming machine D3, the division member includes a main body member on which the detected member is disposed, and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and main body portions of the adjacent division members. The distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, and the link member is displaced in the first section. The gaming machine D4, wherein the end of the gaming machine D4 is restricted from being displaced in a direction to increase the distance between adjacent divided members.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D3, both ends of the divided member can be displaced to the main body member on which the detected member is disposed and the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member. And the link member is displaced with respect to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, thereby increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member. Further, the structure for forming the second section can be simplified.

  In this case, in the first section, the link member reaches the displacement end, and the displacement of the divided member in the direction of increasing the distance between the adjacent divided members is restricted, so that the detection in the direction of increasing the distance is performed. Variations in the position of the part can be suppressed. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

  The gaming machine D4 includes a base member on which the divided member is displaceably disposed, and the base member guides the main body member and the link member for guiding the main body member when the divided member is displaced. When the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member, the link guide portion acts on the link member to cause the main body member and the adjacent main body member to be displaced. A gaming machine D5 wherein the attitude of the link member with respect to the main body member of the divided member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D4, the base member includes a main body guiding portion that guides the main body member when the divided member is displaced, and a link guiding portion that guides the link member. Since the guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member, the posture of the link member changes with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. With the change in the posture of the link member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.

  In the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by a link guiding portion of the base member, and the link guiding portion of the base member is slidably inserted through the guided portion of the link member. The gaming machine D6, wherein the gaming machine D6 is formed in a groove shape having a width corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guiding portion of the base member, and the link guiding portion of the base member is guided by the link member. The portion is formed in a groove shape slidably inserted, and the width of the groove is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member, so that the link member can be easily maintained at the displacement end in the first section. Thereby, since it is possible to reliably restrict displacement of the divided member in the direction of increasing the interval between the adjacent divided members, it is possible to suppress variation in the position of the detection target in the direction of increasing the interval. The detection accuracy by the detection sensor can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the division member includes a displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the main body member, and in the first section, abuts against a main body member of the adjacent division member. The gaming machine D7, wherein the displacement member is displaced to a position, and displacement of the divided member in a direction to reduce a distance between adjacent divided members is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the division member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member. The displacement member is displaced to a position where it abuts on the main body member, and the displacement of the divided member in the direction of narrowing the gap with the adjacent divided member is regulated. Can be suppressed. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure for adjusting the interval between the divided members DV in the moving member 640 is an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member movably formed, the movable member includes a plurality of divided members, and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction. A first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval; and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a second interval smaller than the first interval. A gaming machine E1 wherein a section is formed.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a rotatable moving member is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, an effect can be produced by displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information on the front of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and allowing the player to visually recognize the identification information provided at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more, so if the number of display of the identification information is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of displayed identification information decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval and an interval in which the plurality of divided members is smaller than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be reduced as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed. That is, the space required for disposing the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. Therefore, for example, when displaying the identification information on each of the divided members, it is possible to suppress the space required for disposing the moving member while securing the number of displayed identification information.

  In the gaming machine E1, the division member includes a main body member, and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and main body portions of adjacent division members, wherein the link member includes the main body member and the main body member. A gaming machine E2 wherein the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by being displaced with respect to the main body of the adjacent divided member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the dividing member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent dividing member. Since the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by displacing the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body of the adjacent divided member, the first section and the second section are formed. Can be simplified.

  The gaming machine E2 includes a base member on which the divided member is displaceably disposed, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member for guiding the main body member when the divided member is displaced. When the main body member is guided and displaced by the main body guide portion of the base member, the link guide portion acts on the link member, and the main body member and the adjacent A gaming machine E3 wherein the attitude of the link member with respect to the main body member of the divided member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E2, the base member includes a main body guiding portion for guiding the main body member when the divided member is displaced, and a link guiding portion for guiding the link member. Since the guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member, the posture of the link member changes with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member. With the change in the posture of the link member, the interval between the divided members can be increased or decreased. That is, the first section and the second section can be formed by increasing or decreasing the interval between the divided members while moving the moving member.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the division member includes a displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the main body member, and the displacement member has a posture tilted toward an adjacent division member in the first section. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the second section is in a more upright posture than the posture in the first section.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2 or E3, in the first section, the displacement member is in a posture inclined toward the adjacent divided member, so that the displacement member is visually recognized by the player. It can be easier. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be improved. In the first section, the space between the divided members is widened, so that a space for the tilting of the displacement member can be secured, and the size of the displacement member can be increased accordingly. Therefore, also from this point, the visibility of the displacement member, that is, the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the second section, the displacing member is set to a more upright posture than the posture in the first section, so that the displacing member can be separated from the main body member of the adjacent divided member. To reduce the distance between them. That is, the second interval in the second section can be reduced. As a result, the length of the moving member can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable on the upper surface of the main body member, and is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member in the second section. Gaming machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed displaceably on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, is higher than the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent divided member. Since it is provided, interference with the displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought close to each other until they come into contact with each other, and the interval between them can be further reduced. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the moving member can be reduced, and the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E3, the orbit of the main body guide portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E3, since the trajectory of the main body guide of the base member is formed in a circular shape, a structure for displacing the main body member guided by the main body guide of the base member. Can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine E3, the trajectory of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape connects all of the plurality of divided members in the circumferential direction at the first interval. A gaming machine E7 characterized by having a radius equal to that of a circular arrangement.

  Here, a first section in which a plurality of divided members are circumferentially connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members in a circumferential direction connected at a second interval which is smaller than the first interval. When the second section is formed on the moving member (hereinafter, referred to as “the former case”), the moving member is compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval (hereinafter, referred to as “the latter”). Can be shortened in the circumferential direction, so that the space required for disposing the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of divided members. However, when the orbits of the plurality of divided members are formed in a circular shape, the radius in the former case is made smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the divided members of the first section in the former case, based on the number and radius of the divided members in the first section, the actual number as the total number of the divided members forming the moving member is determined. Recall fewer numbers than.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, the trajectory of the divided member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape is such that all of the plurality of divided members are formed. Since the radius is equal to the radius of a circular connection at the first interval, the number of the plurality of divided members is secured, and the space required for the arrangement of the plurality of divided members is suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to remind the player of a number corresponding to the actual number as the total number of divided members forming the moving member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Drive Mechanism 630 as an Example>
A moving member formed by connecting a base member on which the guide portion is extended, a plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member, and applying a driving force to the moving member. A driving unit, wherein the guide portion of the base member acts on the split member to set a gap between the split members to a first interval, and a first guide portion that sets the interval between the split members to a first interval. A second guide portion for setting the interval between the divided members at a narrow second interval, wherein the driving means includes a rotary drive member having an engagement portion engageable with the split member, and The gaming machine F1, wherein the plurality of divided members are displaced along a guide portion of the base member by rotating a member while engaging the engaging portion with the divided member.

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a rotatable moving member is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, an effect can be produced by displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information on the front of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and allowing the player to visually recognize the identification information provided at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the identification information needs to have a certain size or more, so if the number of display of the identification information is increased, the moving member becomes larger in diameter, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, when the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of displayed identification information decreases.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of divided members, and the moving member has a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval and a section smaller than the first interval. By forming a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the second interval of the interval, compared with a case where the entirety is connected at the first interval, while maintaining the number of divided members, The space required for arranging the divided members can be suppressed. That is, when identifying information is displayed on each divided member, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed while securing the number of displayed identification information. I thought.

  However, a section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at the first interval is connected to the moving member to which the plurality of divided members are connected, and the plurality of divided members are connected at the second interval smaller than the first interval. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to displace such a moving member with respect to the base member while forming a section to be formed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member, and the first guide portion sets the interval between the divided members to the first interval, and is smaller than the first interval. A second guide for setting an interval between the divided members at the second interval, wherein the driving means includes a rotary drive member having an engagement portion engageable with the divided member, and the rotary drive member is Since the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portion of the base member by rotating the portions while being engaged with the divided members, the intervals between the divided members are wide and narrow (the first interval The moving member can be displaced with respect to the base member while forming the section and the second interval) in the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F1, the rotating drive member is formed with a plurality of the engaging portions.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F1, the rotational drive member is formed with a plurality of engaging portions, thereby improving the transmission efficiency of the driving force from the rotational drive member to the moving member. Can be.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the moving member is formed by connecting the plurality of divided body members endlessly in the circumferential direction, and the driving unit includes two of the rotation driving members, A gaming machine F3, wherein driving members are disposed at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the two rotary drive members are provided at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member, and thus are provided from the rotary drive member to the moving member. Driving force can be distributed to different positions in the circumferential direction of the moving member. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the bias of the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

  In the gaming machine F3, the trajectories of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member have a circular shape, and the two rotation driving members cause the phases of the circular trajectories to differ by 180 degrees. Gaming machine F4, wherein the gaming machine F4 is disposed at a different position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the orbit of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member is circular, and the two rotary driving members are circular orbits. Are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase with each other, so that the driving force from the rotary driving member can be applied to two of the moving members (the plurality of divided members) which are most separated from each other. Thus, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the second rotary drive member is configured such that while the engagement portion of one rotary drive member is not engaged with the split member, the engagement portion of the other rotary drive member is not engaged. A gaming machine F5, wherein the engaging portions are arranged with different phases so as to be engaged with the division member.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine F3 or F4, the two rotary drive members are connected to each other while the engaging portion of one rotary drive member is not engaged with the divided member. Since the phases of the engagement portions are arranged to be different from each other so that the engagement portions of the rotation drive member are engaged with the divided members, the engagement portions of one rotation drive member and the other rotation drive members are arranged. It is possible to avoid that the engaging portion and the splitting member are simultaneously disengaged from each other, and it is possible to suppress intermittent transmission of the driving force from the rotary driving member to the moving member. Thereby, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  That is, in the configuration in which the plurality of divided members are connected endlessly as in the present invention, when the transmission of the driving force from the rotary driving member to the moving member is intermittent, the division and the transmission of the driving force and the release are performed. Since the distance between the members is increased or decreased, the posture of the entire moving member becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F5, one of the engagement portion of the one rotation drive member and the engagement portion of the other rotation drive member is always engaged with the split member, and the driving force is always applied to the moving member. Can be formed, so that the interval between the divided members can be easily kept constant. As a result, even if the moving member is formed by connecting a plurality of divided members endlessly, the posture thereof can be stabilized. That is, the displacement can be stabilized.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion with which an engaging portion of the rotation driving unit is engaged, and the engaged portion is a track of the plurality of divided members. A gaming machine F6, which is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the game machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion with which the engaging portion of the rotary drive unit is engaged, and Since the portion is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the track of the plurality of divided members, the amount of rotation of the moving member (the plurality of divided members) with respect to the amount of rotation of the rotary drive member can be reduced. That is, since the reduction ratio can be reduced, the driving torque applied from the rotary driving member to the moving member can be increased accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotation drive member is disposed at a position where the engagement portion can be engaged with the division member guided along a first guide portion of the guide portion. A gaming machine F7.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the rotation drive member is a divided member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions, that is, the divided members are separated from each other. Since the engaging portion is disposed at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member guided in a state where the distance is widened, interference between the adjacent divided member and the rotary driving member can be suppressed, and the rotary driving member is accordingly reduced. Can be increased in diameter. As a result, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member acts on the divided member displaced along the guide portion, thereby reducing the interval between the divided members to the first interval or the second interval. A third guide portion that transitions from the interval to the second interval or the first interval, and the rotation drive member is configured to be attached to the divided member guided along a third guide portion of the guide portion. A gaming machine F8, wherein the gaming machine F8 is provided at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the rotation drive member is a divided member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions, that is, an adjacent divided portion. Since the engaging portion is arranged at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member whose interval with the member is changed from the first interval or the second interval to the second interval or the first interval, the guide portion is provided. The division member that receives a relatively large reaction force from the (third guide portion) can be directly driven by the rotation driving member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member formed by connecting the plurality of divided members from being bent in the middle, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the divided member includes a main body member displaced along the guide portion, and one end rotatably connected to the main body member and a main body member of an adjacent divided member. A link member whose end is slidably connected, wherein one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member, respectively, so that the split member and The distance between the adjacent divided members is increased or decreased, and the engagement portion of the rotation drive member is a main body member of the divided member, and is located at a position where the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected. The gaming machine F9, wherein one end of the link member is also engaged at a position close to a portion to which the link member is rotatably connected.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the split member is connected to the main body member displaced along the guide portion, and one end is rotatably connected to the main body member. A link member having the other end slidably connected to the main body member of the adjacent divided member, wherein one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent divided member, respectively. Thereby, the interval between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotary drive member is a main body member of the divided member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent divided member is slidably connected. Since the one end of the link member is engaged at a position closer to the portion where the link member is rotatably connected than the portion where the link member is rotatably connected, the main body member of the split member is driven by the rotation drive member and displaced along the guide portion. When that can be easily transmitted through the body member to the link member of divided member adjacent the displacement of the body member. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the gaming machine F10 is provided with driving gears which are arranged concentrically with a circle which is a track of the plurality of divided members and are respectively meshed with the two rotary driving members.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4 or F5, since the driving gears provided with the two rotation driving members are provided, the two rotation driving members are synchronized by rotating the driving gears. It can be rotated in the state where it was done. As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the drive gear is disposed concentrically with the circle which is the trajectory of the plurality of divided members, the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 are moved by the moving member (the plurality of divided members) in a front view of the base member. Can be arranged inward of the outer circumference of the movement trajectory. That is, the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 do not protrude outside the outer shape of the moving member, so that the size can be reduced accordingly.

<Feature G group> (Bunny foot control)
A first flow path through which game balls can flow, a second flow path configured to allow game balls to flow, and a second flow path different from the first flow path; and a determination that a game ball has entered the first flow path. Possible first determining means, the first flow path and the second flow path communicate with each other, and at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is set to a communication state in which a game ball can flow down. Movable means capable of being moved, release determination means for determining whether a release condition capable of releasing the communication state is established based on a determination result of the first determination means, and release by the release determination means A maintenance means for maintaining the communication state until it is determined that the communication is possible.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine which executes a lottery triggered by a winning start and gives a winning state advantageous to a player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery. In this conventional gaming machine, a privilege is given to a player by causing a game ball to enter a specific ball entry area which is opened (or enlarged) when a hit state occurs. Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, a plurality of flow paths are provided inside the ball entry area, and by giving different privileges depending on the flow paths passing therethrough, the interest in the hit state is improved. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-59445). Note that, among the plurality of flow paths, the flow path in which the game ball advances is switched according to, for example, the type of hit, the elapsed time, and the like.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the traveling direction of the game ball may not be completely controlled in some cases, and the game ball may not be able to flow down properly.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, the entering of the game ball into the first flow path is determined by the first determination means. At least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved by the movable means to a communication state in which the first flow path and the second flow path communicate with each other so that game balls can flow down. Based on the result of the determination by the first determination unit, the release determination unit determines whether a release condition that can release the communication state is satisfied, and the maintenance unit continues until the release determination unit determines that the release condition can be released. Is maintained.

  As a result, the communication state is maintained until the release condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the game balls can flow down appropriately.

  The gaming machine G1 includes a second determination unit that performs a predetermined determination based on a game ball entering the second flow path, and the release condition is determined by the first determination unit. A gaming machine G2, which is established when the number of gaming balls matches the number of gaming balls determined by the second determining means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, a predetermined determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second flow path. The release condition is satisfied when the number of game balls determined by the first determination unit matches the number of game balls determined by the second determination unit.

  Thus, the communication state can be maintained until the game ball flows down from one of the first flow path and the second flow path in the communication state to the other. That is, it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released while flowing down from one flow path to the other flow path, and to surely cause the game ball to flow down to the other flow path. Therefore, there is an effect that the flow destination of the game ball can be suitably controlled.

  In the gaming machine G1, the cancellation condition is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed since the first determination unit determined that the game ball was entered.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed since the first discriminating means has determined that the game ball has entered the ball. Through the first flow path and the second flow path that are in communication with each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released while the game ball is flowing down any one of the flow paths, and it is possible to suitably cause the game ball to flow down.

  In the gaming machine G1, the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed since the first determination unit last determined that the game ball was entered during the communication state of 1. Gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed since the last determination of a game ball by the first determination means in the one communication state. Therefore, the communication state can be released after all the game balls that have entered the first flow path in the communication state pass through for a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released while the game ball is flowing down any one of the flow paths, and it is possible to suitably cause the game ball to flow down.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an open state in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a closed state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the open state. A variable member that can be changed to a state and a variable unit that changes the variable member from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied when a specific condition is satisfied; The gaming machine G5, wherein the flow path is disposed at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entry means enters the ball.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4. That is, the variable member is changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the open state. When the specific condition is satisfied, the variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state by the variable means. Here, the first flow path is arranged at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entry means enters the ball.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released before the game ball that has entered the ball entry means reaches the second flow path. Therefore, when the ball entry means is in the open state, there is an effect that the game balls entered into the ball entry means can be appropriately flowed down.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the production means for performing the production, and the production means based on a predetermined elapsed time elapsed after the first discrimination means has determined that the game ball has entered the ball. A gaming machine G6, which has an effect changing means for changing an effect mode executed in the game machine G6.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, based on the fact that a predetermined elapsed period has elapsed since the first discriminating means has determined that the game ball has entered, the effect means The effect mode executed by is changed by the effect changing means.

  This makes it possible for the player to launch the game ball aiming at the first road, with the pleasure of varying the effect mode executed by the effect means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G6, the effect means is disposed on the front side of the second flow path, and during the predetermined elapsed period, the game ball entering the first flow path reaches the second flow path. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that the gaming machine G7 is configured to be longer than a period required until the game is completed.

  According to the gaming machine G7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G6. That is, the effect means is arranged on the front side of the second flow path. Then, a period that is equal to or longer than a period required for the game ball that has entered the first ball entry means to reach the second flow path is set as a predetermined elapsed period.

  As a result, the effect mode executed by the effecting means after the game ball reaches the second flow path provided on the back side of the effecting means is changed, so that the game ball reaches the effecting means for the player. This makes it possible to execute a visual effect as if the effect mode were changed. Therefore, a novel effect can be realized, and there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Also, since it can be determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second flow path based on whether or not a predetermined elapsed time has elapsed, a configuration of a sensor or the like for determining whether the game ball has entered the second flow path Can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine G7, the gaming machine G8 is characterized in that at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G7, at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means, so that the effect is produced in a process in which the game ball passes through the second flow path. A game ball can be made to enter the inside of the means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel effect in which the effect mode executed by the effect device is changed when the game ball enters the inside of the effect device. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, a second determination unit that performs a predetermined determination based on a game ball that has entered the second flow path, an effect unit that performs an effect, and a determination result by the second determination unit. A gaming machine G9 comprising: an effect varying means for varying an effect mode executed by the effect means on the basis of the effect means.

  According to the gaming machine G9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1. That is, a predetermined determination is performed by the second determination unit based on the game ball that has entered the second flow path. Then, based on the result of the determination by the second determining means, the effect mode executed by the effecting means is varied by the effect varying means.

  This allows the player to launch the game ball so that the game ball enters the second flow path in order to change the presentation mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G9, the effect means is disposed on the front side of the second flow path, and the second determination means determines that the game ball has reached the second flow path. A gaming machine G10.

  According to the gaming machine G10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G9. That is, the effect means is arranged on the front side of the second flow path. Then, it is determined by the second determination means that the game ball has reached the second flow path.

  As a result, the effect mode executed by the effecting means after the game ball reaches the second flow path provided on the back side of the effecting means is changed, so that the game ball reaches the effecting means for the player. This makes it possible to execute a visual effect as if the effect mode were changed. Therefore, a novel effect can be realized, and there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G10, at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means, and the second determination means is provided inside the effect means of the second flow path. A gaming machine G11 for determining whether or not a gaming ball has flowed down a formed portion.

  According to the gaming machine G11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G10. That is, at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means. Then, it is determined by the second determination means whether or not the game ball has flowed down the portion formed inside the effect means in the second flow path.

  This makes it possible to realize a novel effect in which the effect performed by the effecting means is changed when the game ball enters the inside of the effecting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G11, it is determined whether or not it is a release timing for releasing the communication state after at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path has been moved to the communication state by the movable means. A determining unit, wherein the movable unit is configured to determine whether the release condition is satisfied by the release determining unit when the determining unit determines that the release timing is reached; A gaming machine G12 wherein at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to release the communication state.

  According to the gaming machine G12, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines G1 to G11. That is, after at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path has been moved to the communication state by the movable means, the determination means determines whether it is a release timing for releasing the communication state. When the release timing is determined by the determination unit, at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is movable based on the release determination unit determining that the release condition is satisfied. It is moved by the means, and the communication state is released.

  Thus, even when the release timing comes, the communication state can be maintained until the release condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when the game ball advances to the first flow path immediately before the release timing or the like, the game can be maintained. There is an effect that the sphere can flow down properly.

  In the gaming machine G12, the release determination unit determines that the release condition is satisfied based on a lapse of a specific period since the determination unit determines that the release timing has come. Gaming machine G13.

  According to the gaming machine G13, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G12, it is determined by the release determining means that the release condition has been satisfied based on the fact that a specific period has elapsed since the determining means determined that it was the release timing. Therefore, during a specific period until it is determined that the release condition is satisfied by the release determination unit, the game ball flowing down the first flow path can be reliably discharged from the first path and the second flow path. . Therefore, there is an effect that a game ball can be made to flow down suitably.

  In the gaming machine G13, the specific period is equal to or longer than a period in which gaming balls entering the first flow path are discharged.

  According to the gaming machine G14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G13, since the specific period is configured to be equal to or longer than the period in which the gaming ball entering the second flow path is discharged, it is determined that it is the release timing. There is an effect that a game ball that has entered the first flow path immediately before the start can be more reliably discharged while the communication state is maintained.

<Characteristic H group> (Control target is variable depending on operation status (pocket LED control))
A movable body on which a plurality of decorative parts are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, and a position of the decorative part arranged on the movable body can be changed corresponding to the movement of the movable body. A variable means, an operating body capable of following the movable body, and having a plurality of operating parts less than the decorative part, and a plurality of operating parts arranged on the operating body being predetermined; Operation control means that can be operated for each number, determining means for determining a specific decorative part from the plurality of decorative parts, and the position of the position corresponding to the specific decorative part determined by the determining means A gaming machine H1 comprising: a determination unit configured to determine an operation unit, wherein the operation control unit activates the operation unit based on information determined by the determination unit.

  Here, there are known gaming machines that execute an entertaining effect by using a plurality of effect members such as various types of character and display means. Some of such gaming machines can execute a wide variety of entertainment effects by operating a plurality of effect members in one effect. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it may be difficult to perform a uniform production using different production members, and thus it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the player. was there. In addition, some conventional gaming machines are capable of slidably moving an effect member composed of a liquid crystal display device provided on the left and right sides of a gaming board in a direction toward and away from each other. In some of the conventional gaming machines, the display mode of each effect member displayed on the display screen is varied according to the distance between the left and right effect members to improve the interest (for example, JP 2014-239965 A). However, in such a conventional gaming machine, only two effect members are operated symmetrically with each other. For this reason, when the number of the effect members is increased and the symmetric operation is not possible, there is a possibility that the operation of the effect member cannot be appropriately set.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the plurality of decorative portions are arranged on the movable body, and the movable body is moved by the movable means. The position of the decorative portion arranged on the movable body is changed by the variable means in accordance with the movement of the movable body. The operating body moves following the movable body. The operating body is provided with a plurality of operating portions less than the decorative portion, and the operating portions are respectively operated by the operation control means at predetermined intervals. A specific decorative part is determined by the determining means from the plurality of decorative parts, and the operating part at a position corresponding to the specific decorative part determined by the determining means is determined by the determining means. Then, the operation section is operated by the operation control means based on the discrimination information by the discrimination means.

  Accordingly, the operation unit corresponding to the arrangement of the decoration unit can be operated, so that a united operation can be executed by the decoration unit and the operation unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H1, the operating body is fixed to the movable body.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H1, the operating body is fixed to the movable body, so that the decorative part of the movable body and the operating part of the operating pair realize an operation with a sense of unity. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the operation control unit may be configured to determine the operation unit determined by the determination unit while the specific decorative unit is movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position. A gaming machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, while the specific decorative portion is moved from at least the first position to the second position different from the first position, the determination is made by the determining unit. Since the operating part is operated by the operation control means, it is possible to control the operating part at a position corresponding to the specific decorative part to operate at least after the second position. Therefore, since the unified operation can be realized by the decorative section and the operating section, the operation of the decorative section and the operating section having different numbers from each other can be suitably set.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the gaming machine has position determining means capable of determining the positions of the plurality of decorative portions, and the determining means is based on the position determining information determined by the position determining means. A gaming machine H4 for determining the operating portion at a position corresponding to the specific decorative portion.

  According to the gaming machine H4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines H1 to H3. That is, the positions of the plurality of decorative portions are determined by the position determining means. Then, based on the position determination information determined by the position determination unit, the operation unit at the position corresponding to the specific decorative portion is determined by the determination unit.

  Accordingly, the operating section can be operated in accordance with the positions of the plurality of decorative sections, so that there is an effect that the unified operation can be performed between the decorative section and the operating section.

  In the gaming machine H4, on the movable body, a plurality of projecting pieces are arranged at predetermined positions, and each time the movable body moves to a plurality of predetermined movable positions, of the plurality of projecting pieces, Detecting means for detecting the one or more projecting pieces set in correspondence with each of the movable positions, wherein the position determining means detects the plurality of projecting pieces based on a detection result of the detecting means; A gaming machine H5 for determining the position of the decorative portion of the game machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H4. That is, a plurality of projecting pieces are arranged at predetermined positions of the movable body. Each time the movable body moves to a plurality of predetermined movable positions, one or a plurality of projecting pieces set corresponding to the respective movable positions are detected by the detecting means among the plurality of projecting pieces. Based on the detection result by the means, the positions of the plurality of decorative portions are determined by the position determining means.

  Thereby, the arrangement of the decorative portion can be determined by mechanically detecting the protruding pieces by the detecting means, and thus there is an effect that the determination can be performed more accurately.

  In the gaming machine H5, different identification information is set in advance for each of the plurality of decoration units, and the decoration units corresponding to the identification information are arranged on the movable body in a predetermined order, The position determining means has identification information determining means for determining identification information of the decorative portion located at a predetermined position based on a detection result of the detecting means, and the identification information determining means determines the identification information. The gaming machine H6, wherein the position of the remaining decorative portion is determined based on the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H5. That is, different identification information is set in advance for each of the plurality of decoration portions, and the decoration portions corresponding to the identification information are arranged on the movable body in a predetermined order. Also, in the position determining means, the identification information of the decorative part located at a predetermined position is determined by the identification information determining means based on the detection result of the detecting means, and the identification information determined by the identification information determining means is determined. , The positions of the remaining decorative portions are determined.

  This makes it possible to determine the positions of all the decorative portions only by determining the identification information of the predetermined position, so that only the detecting means for detecting the decorative portions arranged at the predetermined position may be provided. The number of means can be reduced. Therefore, since the number of parts can be reduced, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H4, the movable means moves the movable body in a predetermined movable pattern, and stores positional information in which positional information of the plurality of decorative portions is stored corresponding to the movable pattern. Means for determining the positions of the plurality of decorative portions from the position information stored in the position information storage means based on information on the movable pattern in which the movable body is moved. A gaming machine H7 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine H7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H4. That is, the movable body is moved by the movable means in a predetermined movable pattern. Position information of a plurality of decorative portions is stored in the position information storage means in correspondence with the movable pattern. The positions of the plurality of decorative portions are determined by the position determining means from the position information stored in the position information storing means based on information on the movable pattern in which the movable body is moved.

  This makes it possible to determine the position of the decorative portion by a simple control of simply reading out the position information stored in the position information storage means, thereby reducing the processing load when determining the position of the decorative portion. There is an effect that can be. Further, since there is no need to provide a detecting means such as a sensor, the number of components of the gaming machine can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the movable body is disposed on the front side of the operating body, and the operating section is configured by a light emitting unit that emits light to the decorative section located on the front side. A gaming machine H8, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the movable body is disposed on the front side of the operating body, and the operating section emits light to the decorative section located on the front side. Since it is constituted by the means, the specific decorative part can be made to have a shining appearance by the operating part. Therefore, there is an effect that a specific decorative portion can be made to stand out.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the movable means rotates the movable body, and the movable pattern is a predetermined rotation pattern for rotating the movable body. A gaming machine H9 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the movable body is rotated by the movable means based on a predetermined rotation pattern defined as a movable pattern. The operating part corresponding to the specific decorative part can be operated while rotating. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the rotation operation can be improved.

<Feature I group> (Pocket position control)
In a gaming machine having a movable body movable in a predetermined movable range, movable means for moving the movable body in the movable range, and movable control means for movably controlling the movable means, the movable body includes: The game machine has a plurality of detection units arranged at a plurality of predetermined positions, and the gaming machine includes a plurality of the detection units when the movable body is moved to the plurality of the predetermined positions. A detecting means capable of detecting one or more of the detecting sections configured in a predetermined combination corresponding to each of the predetermined positions; and a predetermined number of the detecting sections are detected by the detecting means. In the case, while the movable body is moved by a predetermined amount, a position is determined based on a detection result detected by the detection unit on condition that the detection unit detected by the detection unit is constant. The discriminator who judges the information Gaming machine I1, characterized in that the, and has a.

  Here, there are known gaming machines capable of executing a movable effect using movable means such as an accessory. In this conventional gaming machine, an accurate rendering operation is realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using a detecting means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the erroneous recognition of the movable position of the movable means may occur when the detection means makes an erroneous detection.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, a plurality of detectors arranged at a plurality of predetermined positions are provided on the movable body. When the movable body is moved to a plurality of predetermined positions, at least one of a plurality of detection units configured by a predetermined combination corresponding to each predetermined position is detected by the detection unit. Is done. When a predetermined number of the detection units are detected by the detection unit, the detection unit detects the detection unit on the condition that the detection unit detected by the detection unit is constant while the movable body is moved by a predetermined amount. Based on the detection result, the position information is determined by the determination unit.

  Thus, the detection unit can be more reliably determined, and thus there is an effect that the position information of the movable unit can be accurately determined.

  In the gaming machine I1, determining means for determining a specific predetermined position from the plurality of predetermined positions based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determining means. And a notifying unit that executes a notifying process that indicates that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position when the discriminating unit determines that the game machine is in the game machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, a specific predetermined position is determined from the plurality of predetermined positions by the determining means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. When the determination unit determines that the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determination unit, a notification process indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position is executed by the notification unit.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the player can clearly recognize that the movable body has reached the specific predetermined position.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the detecting means is arranged such that a multiplier of 2 with respect to the number of the detecting means is larger than the plurality of predetermined positions. I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the detection means is arranged such that the multiplier of 2 with respect to the number of the detection means is larger than a plurality of predetermined positions. The combination of the presence or absence of the detection unit at the position where the detection means is arranged can be different at all the predetermined positions. That is, since the combination of the detection result by the detection means and each predetermined position can be made to correspond one-to-one, there is an effect that the position of the movable means can be more accurately determined from the detection result by the detection means.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the movable body is provided with a plurality of decorative portions, and the decorative portions are respectively disposed on the movable body corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions. A gaming machine I4 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the decorative portions are arranged on the movable body corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions, respectively. can do. Therefore, since the movable body can be noticed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the movable means is for rotating the movable body, and the plurality of predetermined positions are positions at which the movable body is rotated for each predetermined angle. A gaming machine I5 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I1 to I4. That is, the movable body is rotated by the movable means. A plurality of predetermined positions are arranged at positions where the movable body is rotated at predetermined angles.

  Thereby, when the movable body is rotating, the arrangement of the movable body can be determined at every predetermined angle, so that there is an effect that the rotation operation can be executed more accurately.

  Determining means for determining a specific predetermined position from the plurality of predetermined positions based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition in any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5; and setting the specific predetermined position determined by the determining means to the specific predetermined position. When the determination unit determines that the movable body is moved, the determination unit performs a notification process indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position, and the determination is performed based on establishment of a determination condition. And a privilege granting unit that grants a benefit advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the determining unit being a specific determination result. The gaming machine I6, wherein the specific predetermined position is determined based on a determination result of a determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine I6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines I1 to I5. That is, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, a specific predetermined position is determined by the determining unit from the plurality of predetermined positions, and the determining unit determines that the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determining unit. In this case, the notifying unit executes a notifying process indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and based on the determination result of the determination unit being a specific determination result, a benefit advantageous to the player is provided by the privilege providing unit. Further, the specific predetermined position is determined by the determining means based on the determination result of the determining means.

  Thereby, a specific predetermined position according to the determination result of the determination means can be notified by the notification processing, and thus the effect of allowing the player to clearly understand the determination result by the determination means can be obtained.

  In the gaming machine I6, among the plurality of predetermined positions, the movable body stops, and the selection unit that selects the predetermined position indicating that the determination result of the determination unit is a specific determination result, When the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, the determination means determines the specific predetermined position from the predetermined position selected by the selection means, and the determination result of the determination means is The gaming machine I7, characterized in that when the result is other than a specific determination result, the specific predetermined position is determined from a position other than the predetermined position selected by the selection means.

  According to the gaming machine I7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I6. That is, the predetermined position is selected by the selection unit from among the plurality of predetermined positions, which indicates that the determination result of the determination unit is a specific determination result when the movable body stops. When the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the specific predetermined position is determined by the determination means from the predetermined position selected by the selection means. If the determination result by the determination means is other than the specific determination result, the specific predetermined position is determined by the determination means from a position other than the predetermined position selected by the selection means.

  Accordingly, it is possible to expect that the predetermined position selected by the selection unit is notified as the specific predetermined position, and therefore, it is possible to pay more attention to the operation of the movable body. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I7, the movable body is provided with a plurality of the decorative portions respectively corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions, and the notifying unit is configured to move the movable body to the specific predetermined position. The gaming machine I8, characterized in that, based on the result, the notifying member is moved relative to the decorative portion corresponding to the specific predetermined position so as to notify the player and notify the player.

  According to the gaming machine I8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I7. That is, a plurality of decorative portions are respectively arranged on the movable body corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions. Further, based on the fact that the movable body has moved to the specific predetermined position, the notification means is controlled so as to notify the player by moving the notification member to the decorative portion corresponding to the specific predetermined position.

  This allows the player to pay attention to the operation of the movable body and the operation of the notification member. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Character J group> (Next pocket control)
A movable body movable in a predetermined movable range and a plurality of decorative portions are respectively arranged at different positions, a movable means for moving the movable body in the movable range, and effect information determining means for determining predetermined effect information And a movable part that moves the specific decorative part of the plurality of decorative parts of the movable body to the predetermined rendering position based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means. Control means, and in a gaming machine having: Determining means for determining the certain decorative portion, and the movable portion being moved to the effect position after the decorative portion determined by the determining portion based on a determination result by the determining portion. Gaming machine J1, characterized in that the decorative portion are those having an identification means for identifying from the arrangement information stored in the storage means.

  Here, there are known gaming machines capable of executing a movable effect using movable means such as an accessory. In this conventional gaming machine, an accurate rendering operation is realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using a detecting means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the arrangement of the movable means cannot be accurately specified until the arrangement of the movable means is detected by the sensor, the degree of freedom of the staging operation may be reduced. . That is, there has been a problem that the interest in the game of the player cannot be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the arrangement information of the decorative portion arranged on the movable body is stored in the storage means. When the movable body is moved by the movable means, the decorative portion at the rendering position is determined by the determining device, and based on the determination result by the determining device, the decorative portion is moved to the rendering position after the decorative portion determined by the determining device. The movable decoration part is identified from the arrangement information stored in the storage means by the identification means.

  With this, it is possible to identify in advance that the specific decorative portion is to be arranged at the rendering position before the specific decorative portion is to be arranged to the rendering position, so that the rendering operation based on the rendering information is performed. Degree of freedom can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, identification information for identifying each of the plurality of decorative portions is set in the plurality of decorative portions, and the specific decorative portion determined by the effect determination means is provided with the specific identification information. Is set in the gaming machine J2.

  According to the gaming machine J2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J1. That is, identification information for identifying each of the plurality of decorative portions is set. Specific identification information is set for a specific decorative part determined by the effect determining means.

  Accordingly, when specific identification information is set for a plurality of decorative portions, any specific decorative portion may be moved to the rendering position, so that the degree of freedom of the rendering can be increased. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the specific decorative portion is moved to the rendering position, the specific decorative portion determined by the rendering information determining means is notified to the specific decorative portion. A game machine J3 having a notifying means for notifying a player by moving the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect provided by either the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the specific decorative portion is moved to the staging position, the notification member is moved to the specific decorative portion to move to the specific decorative portion. Since the notification means notifies the player of the decorative member, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation of the notification member. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since it is possible to identify in advance that the specific decoration member is to be arranged at the production position before the specific decoration member is arranged at the production position, it is possible to identify before the decoration member is arranged at the production position. Then, it is possible to start moving the notification member to a specific decorative member. Therefore, there is an effect that the notification member can be more reliably moved to the specific decorative member.

  In the gaming machine J3, the notifying unit has a sphere configured as a sphere as the notifying member, a holding unit capable of holding the sphere at a holding position, and a case where the holding of the sphere by the holding unit is released. A swinging path capable of swinging the sphere at a position where the sphere can be moved to the effecting position and allowing the sphere to stand by for a predetermined period of time; A gaming machine J4 having at least a variable means for varying a traveling direction.

  According to the gaming machine J4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J3. That is, in the notification means, the notification member is formed of a spherical ball pair, and the sphere is held at the holding position by the holding means. When the holding of the sphere by the holding means is released, the sphere is swung at a position where the sphere can be moved to the presentation position in the standby swing path, and waits for a predetermined time. The moving direction of the sphere is changed by the changing means from the standby swing path to the effect position.

  This allows the player to pay attention to the timing at which the traveling direction of the sphere is changed from the standby swing path to the presentation position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J4, the notification means has variable control means for changing the variable means, and the variable control means determines a timing for changing the variable means based on an identification result by the identification means. A gaming machine J5 characterized by being variable.

  According to the gaming machine J5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J4. That is, in the notification means, the variable means is changed by the variable control means. The timing for varying the variable means based on the identification result by the identification means is determined and varied by the variable control means.

  With this, it is possible to determine the timing of changing the variable means before the specific decorative portion changes to the production position, so that the moving time of the sphere moving from the variable means to the production position is taken into consideration, and the specific There is an effect that the sphere can be reliably moved to the rendering position in a state where the decorative portion is arranged at the rendering position.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the movable body is provided with detection units at a plurality of positions, and may detect the detection units arranged at a predetermined number of predetermined positions. A possible detecting means, wherein the determining means determines the decorative part located at the staging position based on a combination of the detecting parts detected by the detecting means. Machine J6.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the detection units are arranged at a plurality of positions of the movable body. Detecting means capable of detecting the detecting unit are respectively arranged at a predetermined number of predetermined positions. Based on the combination of the detection units detected by the detection unit, the decoration unit located at the presentation position is determined by the determination unit.

  Thereby, since the detection unit can be mechanically detected by the detection unit, there is an effect that it is possible to more accurately determine the decorative portion arranged at the presentation position.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J6, the identification unit is configured to determine a type of the decoration unit that is moved to the effect position next to the decoration unit determined by the determination unit. Gaming machine J7.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines J1 to J6, the type of the decorative part that is moved to the presentation position next to the decorative part determined by the determining means is identified by the identifying means, so that the specific At the stage where the decorative part in front of the decorative part is arranged at the production position, it can be identified in advance that a specific decorative part is arranged at the production position. Therefore, since the degree of freedom of the effect operation based on the effect information can be increased, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Feature K group> (Identify pockets based on output of multiple steps)
A movable body having a plurality of detectors at a predetermined position, a movable means for moving the movable body, and a movable body movable by the movable means, a predetermined one of the plurality of detectors at a predetermined detection position Detecting means capable of simultaneously detecting the detecting portions arranged in a range over a predetermined period; determining means for determining a detection result by the detecting means a plurality of times in a predetermined time; And a discriminating means for discriminating the discrimination result of the above, and discriminating the discrimination result identified as satisfying a predetermined condition as a normal discrimination result.

  Here, there are known gaming machines capable of executing a movable effect using movable means such as an accessory. In this conventional gaming machine, an accurate rendering operation is realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means using a detecting means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, such a conventional gaming machine has a problem that, when an erroneous detection occurs by the detecting means, the movable position of the movable means is erroneously recognized, and the movable means cannot be suitably controlled.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, a movable body provided with a plurality of detectors at predetermined positions is moved by the movable means. With respect to the movable body that is movable by the movable means, a detection unit disposed in a predetermined range among a plurality of detection units at a predetermined detection position is simultaneously detected by the detection means over a predetermined period. The detection result by the detecting means is determined a plurality of times by the determining means during a predetermined period, and among the plurality of determination results by the determining means, a determination result satisfying a predetermined condition is identified as a normal determination result by the identifying means. Is done.

  Accordingly, when detecting the detection unit of the movable body, the detection can be performed based on the determination result satisfying the predetermined condition, and thus the detection unit can be accurately detected. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable body can be suitably controlled.

  In the gaming machine K1, a plurality of different decorative portions are arranged on the movable body, and the detecting means is constituted by a predetermined number, and is arranged corresponding to an arrangement interval of the decorative portions. The gaming machine K2, wherein the part is arranged corresponding to a position of the specific decorative part among the plurality of decorative parts.

  According to the gaming machine K2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1. That is, a plurality of different decorative portions are arranged on the movable body. A predetermined number of detection means are arranged corresponding to the arrangement intervals of the decorative portions. The detection unit is arranged corresponding to the position of a specific decoration unit among the plurality of decoration units.

  This makes it possible to detect the detection unit every time the movable body moves the arrangement interval of the detection means. Therefore, there is an effect that the detection unit can be periodically detected while the movable body is moving.

  In the gaming machine K2, the plurality of decorative portions are disposed on the movable body at predetermined intervals, respectively, and the detecting section is configured to divide the plurality of decorative portions into units corresponding to the predetermined number. A gaming machine K3, wherein the gaming machines K3 are arranged in the decorative part so as not to have the same arrangement relationship with respect to the parts.

  According to the gaming machine K3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K2. That is, the plurality of decorative portions are arranged on the movable body at predetermined intervals. The detection units are arranged such that the plurality of decorative units are divided into units corresponding to a predetermined number, and do not have the same arrangement relationship.

  Thus, the arrangement of the detection unit detected by the detection unit and the arrangement of the movable body can be made one-to-one, so that the arrangement of the movable body can be accurately determined from the detection result by the detection unit. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the detection unit detects the detection unit in a predetermined order based on the movable body being moved by a predetermined movable amount. Gaming machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the detection unit detects the detection unit in a predetermined order based on the fact that the movable body is moved by a predetermined movable amount. Therefore, there is an effect that the arrangement of the movable body can be accurately determined based on the order in which the detection units are detected.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the identification unit, when the same determination result is included in the plurality of determination results by the determination unit in a predetermined ratio or more, A gaming machine K5 characterized in that the same determination result is identified as a regular determination result.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the same determination result is included in a plurality of determination results by the determination unit in a predetermined ratio or more. In such a case, the same discrimination result is discriminated as a proper discrimination result by the discrimination means. It is possible to prevent an incorrect determination result from being identified as a normal determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that more accurate determination can be performed.

  In the gaming machine K5, when the same discrimination result included in the plurality of discrimination results by the discrimination means is determined to be less than a predetermined specific ratio, Avoidance means for avoiding the identification of a legitimate determination result from the results of the determinations; and, when the identification of the regular determination result is avoided by the avoidance means, the detection means And a detection control means for controlling the detection to be additionally performed over the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine K6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K5. That is, when it is determined that the same determination result included in the plurality of determination results by the determination unit is less than the predetermined specific ratio, the normal determination is performed from the plurality of determination results. The identification of the result is avoided by the avoidance means. Then, when it is avoided that the correct discrimination result is identified by the avoidance means, the detection means controls the detection unit so that the detection unit is additionally detected over a predetermined period.

  With this, it is possible to identify the regular discrimination result again by the identification unit based on the additional detection result by the detection unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the regular determination result can be more reliably determined.

<Feature L group> (Control to drop the ball into the target pocket)
A movable body on which a plurality of different identification sections are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, and the identification section movable to a predetermined effect position when the movable body is moved by the movable means. Discriminating means for discriminating information, and a presentation body used for a predetermined effect, a holding means capable of holding at least until the predetermined effect is started, and when the holding of the effector by the holding means is released, A swinging means capable of swinging at a position where the effecting body can be moved to the effecting position, and a swinging state of the effecting body swung by the swinging means can be detected; Detection means, determination means for determining the identification section for moving the director based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition from the plurality of identification sections, and a swing state of the director by the detection means. Is in motion A moving means for moving the directing body to the identification section determined by the determining means based on a result of the determination by the determining means when issued. .

  Here, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of flow paths is known. Some of such conventional gaming machines may be advantageous or disadvantageous to a player depending on the flow path in which a sphere such as a game ball advances. In addition, a swing path capable of swinging the sphere is provided on the upstream side of the branch position of each flow path, and while the sphere performs the swing operation in the swing path, the player (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-179166) can increase a sense of expectation that a sphere flows down to an advantageous flow path. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the mode of the swinging operation is changed by the momentum when the ball enters the swinging path, so that the swinging action is performed before the expectation of the player is sufficiently increased. The sphere may flow down from the flow path to any flow path. Therefore, there has been a problem that the player's interest in the game may not be sufficiently improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, a plurality of different identification portions are arranged on the movable body, and the movable body is moved by the movable means. The movable body is moved by the movable means, and the information of the identification unit moved to the predetermined effect position is determined by the determination means. The effecting body used for the predetermined effect is held by the holding means at least until the predetermined effect is started, and when the holding of the effecting body by the holding means is released, it is possible to move the effecting body to the effecting position The directing body is rocked by the rocking means at a suitable position. The swinging state of the effecting body swung by the swinging means is detected by the detecting means. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the identification unit that moves the director is determined by the determination unit from the plurality of identification units. If the detecting means detects that the oscillating state of the director is a predetermined oscillating state, the director is moved to the identification section determined by the determining means by the moving means based on the determination result by the determining means. You.

  Thereby, in each predetermined effect, the effector can be moved to the identification unit after the effector is in the predetermined swinging state, so that the operation quality of the effector in the predetermined effect can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the swing motion of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, the effecting body is formed of a sphere, and the swinging means has a swinging path capable of swinging the effecting body. L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1. That is, the director is composed of a sphere. And in the rocking means, a rocking path capable of rocking the effecting body is provided.

  Thus, the effecting body can be rocked by reciprocating on the rocking path by rolling, so that the effecting body can be rocked simply by giving the initial speed in the rocking path direction. Therefore, there is no need to provide a special structure for causing the effecting body to perform a swinging operation, and thus the number of parts can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine L2, the detection unit includes: a director detection unit configured to detect the director swinging on the swing path at a predetermined position; and a swing width of the director by the director detector is equal to or less than a predetermined width. And a swing width detecting means for determining whether or not the game machine L3 is a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine L3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L2. In other words, in the detecting means, the director that swings on the swing path is detected at a predetermined position by the director detector, and the director detecting unit determines whether the swing width of the director is less than or equal to the predetermined width. It is determined by the width detecting means.

  Thereby, in each predetermined effect, the effecting body can be moved to the effect position after the swing width of the rocking body becomes equal to or less than the predetermined width. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the motion of the directing body.

  In any of the gaming machines L2 and L3, the moving means is formed by a part of the swing path, and is formed in a swing groove for swinging the director, and in front of the swing groove, A swinging piece having at least a flow-down groove for causing the effecting body to flow down to the effecting position, and the swinging piece, from a first position where the swinging groove and the swinging path communicate with each other, A swinging piece moving means for moving the flow-down groove to a second position arranged on the swing path, the gaming machine L4.

  According to the gaming machine L4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by either the gaming machine L2 or L3. That is, in the moving means, it is constituted by a part of the swing path, and a swing groove for swinging the director, and formed in front of the swing groove, for flowing the director to the stage position An oscillating piece having at least a downflow groove is provided. The rocking piece is moved by the rocking piece moving means from a first position where the rocking groove communicates with the rocking path to a second position where the downflow groove is disposed on the rocking path.

  With this, it is possible to cause the director to flow from the downflow groove to the director position simply by moving the rocking piece moving means to the second position. Therefore, a configuration for moving the director to the director position is provided. There is an effect that it can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine L2 or L3, the moving means includes a rocking piece constituted by a part of the rocking path, and rocking piece tilting means for tilting the rocking piece in the direction of the production position. A gaming machine L5.

  According to the gaming machine L5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L2 or L3. That is, in the moving means, a rocking piece constituted by a part of the rocking path is provided, and the rocking piece is inclined by the rocking piece tilting means in the direction of the production position.

  Thus, the director can be moved to the presentation position only by dropping the director from the inclined rocking piece, so that the configuration for moving the director to the presentation position can be simplified. This has the effect.

<Feature M group> (roulette dark zone)
Determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition; and a privilege providing means for providing a benefit advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result; An identification body in which different identification units are arranged, and among the identification units in the identification body, a determination unit that determines the specific identification unit, and when a determination result by the determination unit is the specific determination result, A notification state setting unit configured to set the specific identification unit to a notification state; and a specific effect of notifying a player of a determination result by the determination unit by the identification unit of the identification body based on establishment of a specific condition. A specific effect execution unit, wherein the determination unit divides the identification object into a plurality of regions, and among the regions, a high determination region having a high ratio determined by the specific identification unit and the identification unit. Identification part of Gaming machine M1 proportion to be determined is low so that the low determining regions and are formed, characterized in that what determines the specific identification unit.

  Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a determination of a hit or the like is performed, and the determination result is rotated by arranging a plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of different symbols arranged on the front side, and stopping at a predetermined position. It is notified by the combination of. As a result of the notification, a gaming machine is proposed in which, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped, a game in which the variable winning device is changed so that game balls can enter is executed. (Eg, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-204318). In this case, the player plays the game with the expectation that a predetermined number of the same symbols will stop at the same time, but for the rotating rotator, the number of winning symbol combinations is arranged. Since the game type is always constant, there is a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets tired early. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired early.

  According to the gaming machine M1, a plurality of different identification units are arranged, and when the identification unit determined to be a specific identification unit among the identification units is in a notification state, a privilege is given to the player. There is a possibility that the unit becomes a specific identification unit, and the degree of expectation can be changed by the identification unit determined as the specific identification unit. Further, the identification object is divided into a plurality of regions, and a specific region is determined such that a high determination region having a high ratio determined by the specific identification portion and a low determination region having a low ratio determined by the specific identification portion are formed. Since the identification unit is determined, the ratio of the specific identification unit can be varied depending on the area of the identification object, and the degree of expectation for the specific identification unit can be varied among the identification objects. Therefore, the degree of expectation of the player can be changed, and the effect of suppressing the game from becoming monotonous and suppressing the player from getting tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine M1, there is a movable means for moving the identification body, and the notification state setting means moves the identification body by the movable means to the specific identification section at a predetermined position. The gaming machine M2, wherein the notification state is set by stopping the determined identification unit.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1, the discrimination result is obtained by the notification state in which the identification body is moved and the specific identification unit is stopped at a predetermined position. Since the player is notified that the result is a specific determination result, the player can be interested in where the identification object is stopped, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine M2, the effecting body, a moving means capable of moving the effecting body to the predetermined position, and the effecting means moving the effecting body at the predetermined position by the moving means in accordance with a timing at which the identification object stops. A gaming machine M3, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M2, the directing body is moved to a predetermined position in accordance with the stop timing of the identification body, so that the identification unit stopped at the predetermined position can be easily understood by the player. It has the effect of being able to inform.

  In the gaming machine M3, the effecting body has a rotating part, and a holding means capable of holding the effecting body, and when the holding by the holding means is released, the effecting body swings by the rotating part. A gaming machine M4, comprising: a movable rocking path, wherein the moving means moves the effecting body from the rocking path to the predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M3, the effecting body is moved to a predetermined position by the moving means after swinging on the rocking path by the rotating portion. By making the player interested in moving to the section, there is an effect that the player can recognize the identification section stopped at a predetermined position in an easily understandable manner.

  The rotating portion may be a member formed of a sphere, a cylinder, an arc, or the like.

  In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, if the determination result is not a specific determination result, the notification state setting unit may determine whether the specific identification unit located next to the specific identification unit is determined to be the specific identification unit. A gaming machine M5 wherein an unidentified identification unit is set to the notification state.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, if the result is not a specific determination result, the specific identification unit located next to the specific identification unit is determined. Since the not-yet-identifying part is in the notification state, it is possible to make the player think that the specific identification part is in the notifying state soon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic N group> (Control to stabilize the swing width of the ball)
Effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect, a directing body used as a part of the effect executed by the effect executing means, and a rocking means capable of rocking the directing body within a predetermined range; A determining unit configured to determine a swing state of the director when the director is rocked by the rocking unit; and adjusting a rocking force applied to the director based on a determination result by the determining unit. A gaming machine N1 comprising: adjusting means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of winning ports are arranged on the front side of a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and one of the winning ports is a starting winning port which is used as a trigger for determining whether or not a game is accepted. When the ball enters, a predetermined lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a winning, a game in which the variable winning device is opened is executed, and the player can obtain many prize balls and the like. In such a gaming machine, a flow path is formed so that it is easy to win a prize port such as a start prize port, and a game ball entering the flow path falls from directly above the start prize port. You will be guided to. In addition, even for game balls flowing down the flow path that facilitates winning, the inclination angle of the flow path is varied so that the ease of entering the starting winning opening changes, and the rolling speed of the game ball varies. There has been proposed a gaming machine configured so that the game does not become monotonous by configuring the game machine such that the game is performed (for example, JP-A-2015-65977). Furthermore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that suppresses the game from becoming monotonous by improving interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine N1, since the rocking power applied to the director is adjusted by the adjuster based on the rocking state of the director determined by the determiner, the rocking motion that can enhance the interest for the player is improved. It is possible to swing the directing body in a moving state, suppress a problem that the game becomes monotonous, and improve the interest of the game.

  The effecting body is rotatably supported by a support (a thin line such as a thread or a piano wire or a thin shaft member) and swings, or swings from an upper part of a swing path such as an arc shape. It is conceivable that the vehicle is rocked by rolling or sliding on the road. Here, when the adjusting means is rocked by the support, it is conceivable to apply a force to the director or to apply a force to the support. It is conceivable to vary the inclination of the swing path or apply an external force to the director.

  In the gaming machine N1, the determining means determines at least a swing width of the effecting body, and the adjusting means determines that the swing width is equal to or less than a predetermined swing width by the determining means. A game machine N2 for increasing a swinging power to the effecting body.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1, the swinging width is determined by the determining means, and when the swinging width is equal to or smaller than the predetermined swinging width, the swinging power to the effecting body is increased. Therefore, the swinging state of the directing body is continued for a long time, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the adjusting means may increase the swinging power to the effecting body based on a result of the determination by the determining means being determined to be larger than the predetermined swing width. A gaming machine N3 for stopping an increase in rocking power for a director.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the increase in the swinging power by the adjusting means is also stopped based on the swing width of the director being larger than the predetermined swing width. Therefore, the swing width of the effecting body can be prevented from becoming excessively large, and the swing width can be adjusted within a predetermined range, so that there is an effect that a stable effect can be provided to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the adjusting means moves the position of the effecting body so that the potential energy with respect to the effecting body increases.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the adjusting means moves the position of the directing body so that the potential energy with respect to the directing body increases. There is an effect that the swing width of the director can be increased by making it variable.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the effecting body has a rotating portion capable of rotating and rolling, and the swinging means includes a rotating portion that repeatedly changes a rotating direction. A gaming machine N5 having a swing path that can rotate.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines N1 to N4, since the rotating portion of the effecting body swings by rolling on the swing path, the effecting body can be swung with an easy configuration. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine N5, the swing path is configured in an arc shape.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N5, the swing path is formed in an arc shape, so that there is an effect that the rotating portion of the effecting body can easily swing.

  In the gaming machine N5 or N6, the adjusting means changes the inclination of the swing path in the direction in which the effecting body swings to increase the swinging power, wherein the swinging power is increased.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N5 or N6, the adjusting means increases the swinging power by changing the inclination of the swing path, so that the player can naturally give the player a swinging power. There is an effect that it can be made to look as if it is rocking while keeping the sway.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the swinging means includes a holding means capable of holding the effecting body at a position higher than a lowermost position when the effecting body is rocked, and holding the holding means. A gaming machine N8 comprising: a releasing means capable of releasing the game.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N7, the swinging means is held at a position higher than the lowermost position when the swinging means is swung by the holding means, and the releasing means holds the swinging means. Since the holding is released, there is an effect that it is possible to start swinging of the director using the potential energy.

  In the gaming machine N8, when the holding of the director is released by the release unit, the holding unit holds the director in a position where the director can be guided to the rocking path. A gaming machine N9.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N8, when the holding means is released by the release means, the director is guided to the rocking path, so that the driving force is given to the director by an electric machine or the like. There is an effect that the directing body can be smoothly swung by its own weight even without it.

  In the gaming machines N1 to N9, the adjusting unit includes a swing damping unit that adjusts the swing width of the effecting body to be equal to or less than a specific swing width when a specific condition is satisfied. Gaming machine N10.

  According to the gaming machine N10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines N1 to N9, when the specific condition is satisfied, the swing width of the effecting body is less than or equal to the specific swing width by the swing damping means of the adjusting means. Therefore, the swing width can be intentionally varied, and the effects can be improved by diversifying the effects.

<Character O group> (The position of the pocket to be dropped is determined in advance.)
A movable body on which a plurality of different identification sections are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, a movable control means for moving the movable body by the movable means, and the movable body based on establishment of a movable condition. Determining means for determining a movable pattern for moving the movable body in which a stoppable range that can be stopped is set in advance, and the specific identification unit is stopped at a predetermined effect position after being moved by the movable pattern. In this case, when the movable body is moved in the movable pattern, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player is set in the stoppable range based on satisfaction of a specific condition. Identification unit determining means for determining one identification unit from the identification unit, and a stop for stopping the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination means at the production position at a specific stop timing. Gaming machine O1, characterized in that those having a control means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a hit determination is performed, a plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of different symbols arranged on the front side are arranged, and a combination of symbols stopped at a predetermined position is determined in advance as a determination result. It is determined based on the information and notified by controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a gaming machine is proposed in which, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped, a game in which the variable winning device is changed so that game balls can enter is executed. (Eg, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-204318). Since the stop position of the rotating body is determined in advance before rotation, it is not possible to perform a novel effect such as changing the combination of symbols to be stopped depending on the state of the effect, etc. There was a problem of getting tired early. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and further provides a novel gaming machine, which suppresses the game from becoming monotonous, and the player gets tired early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing defects.

  According to the gaming machine O1, the stoppable range of the movable body is moved according to the preset movable pattern, and the stoppable range determined by the identification unit determination means is determined based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. One of the identification units is determined from the set identification unit, and the movable body is stopped by the stop control unit so that the identification unit stops at the presentation position. Therefore, the stop position of the movable body is stopped until a specific condition is satisfied. Is not specified, and by providing a real-time effect to the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and to suppress the problem that the player gets tired early.

  The gaming machine O1 has a determination unit that performs a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and the stop control unit determines that the specific identification unit is to be used when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. A gaming machine O2 which is stopped at the effect position.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, the specific identification unit is stopped at the production position. There is an effect that the notification can be made by the identification unit that stops at the presentation position.

  The gaming machine O3, characterized in that the gaming machine O1 or O2 has a setting means for setting the plurality of different identifying sections to the specific identifying section based on establishment of a setting condition.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, since the specific identification unit is set by a plurality of different identification units by the setting unit, which identification unit is set to the specific identification unit Has an effect that the player can be interested in the game and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O3, the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on a selection of a player.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O3, at least one of the specific identification units is set by the setting unit based on the selection of the player, so that any identification unit of the player can be set. This can be a specific identification unit, and has the effect that the player can participate in the game and improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine O3 or O4, the setting unit sets the specific identification unit based on a determination result by the determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O3 or O4, the specific identification section is set by the setting section based on the determination result of the determination section. There is an effect that the determination result can be predicted by the player.

  The gaming machine O6 according to any one of the gaming machines O2 to O5, wherein the determining means determines the movable pattern based on a determination result of the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O2 to O5, the movable pattern is determined by the determination means based on the determination result, and thus the movable pattern can be changed according to the determination result. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O6, a notification body for indicating that the identification unit is stopped at the rendering position, and guidance for guiding the notification body to the identification unit stopped at the rendering position. And a game machine O7.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O6, the notifying body is guided by the guiding means to the identification unit stopped at the rendering position, so that the identification unit stopped at the rendering position is further reduced. There is an effect that the player can be notified easily.

  In any of the gaming machines O1 to O7, the movable pattern has a variable setting period in which the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination unit can be varied. Gaming machine O8.

  According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O7, a variable period in which the identification unit determined by the identification unit determining means can be varied is set in the movable pattern. Therefore, the identification unit can be changed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine O8 has operation means operable by a player, and in the variable setting period, the identification unit determined by the identification determination means is variable according to a timing at which the operation means is operated. A gaming machine O9 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine O9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O8, the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination unit is changed according to the timing at which the player operates the operation unit. It is possible to play a game in which the operating means is operated so as to stop at the presentation position, and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, since the identification unit determined by the timing operated by the player is variable, there is an effect that control for stopping the identification unit corresponding to the determination result at the rendering position can be easily performed.

<Characteristic P group> (Nail break determination)
In a gaming machine having a movable body movable in a predetermined movable range, movable means for moving the movable body in the movable range, and movable control means for movably controlling the movable means, the movable body includes: The game machine has a plurality of detection units arranged at a plurality of predetermined positions, and the gaming machine includes a plurality of the detection units when the movable body is moved to the plurality of the predetermined positions. A detecting unit that can detect one or more of the detecting units configured in a predetermined combination corresponding to each of the predetermined positions, and based on a detection result detected by the detecting unit, Determining means for determining movable position information of the movable body, and abnormality determining means for determining whether a detection result detected by the detecting means matches an abnormal condition set in advance based on satisfaction of the predetermined condition, Have Gaming machine P1, wherein those.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a hit determination is performed, a plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of different symbols arranged on the front side are arranged, and a combination of symbols stopped at a predetermined position is determined in advance as a determination result. It is determined based on the information and notified by controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a gaming machine is proposed in which, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped, a game in which the variable winning device is changed so that game balls can enter is executed. (Eg, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-204318). The stop position of the rotating body is generally a method of detecting the position of the rotating body with a plurality of sensors, but if a sensor failure occurs, the rotating body may be stopped at an incorrect position. There is a problem that the player is erroneously informed of the situation. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of detecting a failure at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine P1, when the movable body is moved to a predetermined plurality of predetermined positions, one or more detection units configured in a predetermined combination for each predetermined position among the plurality of detection units. Is detected by the detecting means. The movable position information of the movable body is determined based on the detection result detected by the detecting means. Therefore, it is possible to accurately identify to which predetermined position the movable body has been moved based on the movable position information. Further, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the abnormality detection unit determines whether the detection result detected by the detection unit matches the abnormal condition. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the detection unit or the detection unit, the abnormality is detected early. This has the effect of being able to detect and to prevent erroneous movement of the movable body.

  In the gaming machine P1, a movable position information storage means for storing the determined movable position information based on the determination of the movable position information by the determination means, and a detecting unit at each of the plurality of predetermined positions. And collation data setting means in which a detection result that should be detected when the detection means normally detects is set as collation data, and the abnormality determination means is configured to determine the movable position by the determination means. Determining that the information is determined as the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and determining whether or not the movable condition information matches the abnormal condition based on the movable position information previously determined by the determination unit and stored in the storage unit and the verification data. A gaming machine P2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the abnormality determination means determines whether or not the movable position information determined by the previous determination means and the collation data match the abnormal condition. It is possible to constantly monitor the movable position information when the device is normally moved, and it is possible to detect a defect at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine P2, the abnormality determination unit determines whether the movable position information determined by the determination unit matches the next movable position information of the previous movable position information stored in the movable position information storage unit. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that an abnormality is determined by making a determination based on the collation data.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1 or P2, it is determined from the collation data whether the movable position information determined by the determination means matches the next movable position information of the previous movable position information. Since the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determining means, the abnormality can be determined each time the movable member is moved to a predetermined position, and the effect of detecting the abnormality earlier can be obtained.

  In the gaming machine P1, the abnormality determination unit determines that the movable body has moved by a predetermined amount as the predetermined condition is satisfied, and determines whether the abnormality condition is satisfied based on the number of the detection units based on the detection result of the detection unit. A gaming machine P4 characterized in that the determination is made.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, when the movable body moves by a predetermined amount, it is determined whether or not the abnormal condition is met based on the number of the detection units detected by the detection unit. An abnormality can be detected each time the movable body moves by a predetermined amount, and there is an effect that the abnormality can be detected early.

  In the gaming machine P4, when the movable body has moved by a predetermined amount, the number of detections of the detection unit normally detected by the detection unit has a detection number storage unit that is stored in advance, and the abnormality determination unit includes: A gaming machine P5 for determining whether or not the number of the detection units detected by the detection unit matches the detection number stored in the detection number storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, the abnormality determination means determines whether the number matches the detection number stored in the detection number storage means in advance, so that the abnormality can be determined more accurately. This has the effect.

<Characteristic Q group> (division of LED lighting data)
A plurality of operating parts, based on operating data for operating the operating parts, an operating means for operating each of the operating parts, and an operating pattern for operating each of the operating parts based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Based on the operation pattern determined by the operation pattern determining unit, the obtaining unit that obtains the operation data of each of the operating units based on the operation pattern determined by the operation pattern determining unit, and the operation data obtained by the obtaining unit. A gaming machine Q1 comprising: setting means for setting by dividing.

  Here, there are known gaming machines which include a light emitting means such as an LED, and an effect member such as a movable means such as an accessory. In such a conventional gaming machine, a variety of effecting operations are performed using a plurality of effecting members to improve the interest of the player. Also, in this conventional gaming machine, the effect patterns of the effect members, such as the light emitting pattern of the light emitting means and the movable pattern of the movable means, are stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM and executed. There has been known a gaming machine that reads an effect pattern corresponding to an effect to be performed and executes an effect operation of a corresponding effect member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-18495). However, increasing the number of the effect members increases the amount of setting data for setting the effect operation, thereby increasing the processing load.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, each operating unit is operated by the operating means based on the operation data for operating the plurality of operating units. An operation pattern for operating each operation unit is determined by the operation pattern determination unit based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and operation data of each operation unit is acquired based on the operation pattern determined by the operation pattern determination unit. Obtained by means. The operation data acquired by the acquisition unit is divided and set by the setting unit.

  This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data to be divided and set each time as compared with the case where the operation data is set collectively by the setting unit. That is, since the processing load for setting the operation data can be dispersed, the processing load can be reduced.

  The gaming machine Q2, wherein in the gaming machine Q1, the setting means is capable of dividing and setting the operation data in units of the operation unit.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the operation data is divided and set for each operation unit by the setting means, so that the processing load can be more finely distributed.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation data includes at least data specifying an operation mode when operating the operation section, and data specifying the operation section operated in the operation mode. Gaming machine Q3.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the operation data includes data specifying an operation mode when operating the operation section and data specifying an operation section operated in the operation mode. Therefore, different operation modes can be set for a plurality of operation units. Therefore, since the operation mode can be diversified, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q3, the acquisition means may acquire the operation data associated with data specifying a different operation unit, wherein the data specifies a plurality of different operation modes. Machine Q4.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine Q3, the acquisition unit acquires the operation data associated with the data that specifies a plurality of different operation modes and the data that specifies the different operation units. According to the operation data acquired by the acquisition unit, different operation modes can be set for different operation units. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation modes of the plurality of operation units can be further diversified.

  In the gaming machine Q4, the setting means divides and sets the operation data for each of the operation units in which the same operation mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q4, the same operation mode can be set to the operation unit at the same timing, so that the same operation mode can be reflected at the same timing. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the appearance quality of each operation unit immediately after setting the operation data.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the operating unit is configured by a light emitting unit that emits light, and the operation data is configured by data for setting a light emitting pattern by the light emitting unit. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5. That is, the operating section is configured by a light emitting unit that emits light. The operation data includes data for setting a light emission pattern by the light emitting means.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that the processing load when setting the light emission pattern by the light emitting means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine Q7, any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q6, wherein the operation data is set by setting means in a serial communication system.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q6, since the operation data is set by the setting means in the serial communication system, the data is set with a smaller number of wires than in the parallel communication system. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced by reducing the number of wirings.

<Characteristic R group> (The mission set by the player (select a combination of winning symbols) continues until the middle of the big hit)
Determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition; display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determination means; and identification information based on a specific determination result on the display means. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the gaming machine having the award that is advantageous to the player when a specific condition is satisfied. The special effect execution means for executing a specific effect to be notified is provided, and the specific effect execution means executes the privilege game by the privilege game execution means from a period in which the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is displayed. A gaming machine R1 that continuously executes at least the specific effect over a period of time.

  Here, an effect for notifying whether or not a jackpot has been won is executed during the normal gaming state, and an effect for notifying whether or not a bonus (for example, a probable change gaming state) given after the end of the jackpot is given is given. A pachinko machine that is executed during a game (during a big hit game) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-178292). In this case, since an independent effect is executed according to each game state, an effect for notifying that a jackpot has been won and an effect for notifying that a privilege is to be provided are executed in a series of effects. And the player's willingness to play decreases.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine R1, a benefit that is advantageous to the player is provided from the period in which the identification information based on the determination result by the determination unit is displayed to the period in which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution unit. The specific effect for notifying that the operation is performed is continuously executed. Thereby, during the period in which the privilege game is being executed, it is possible to determine whether or not the next privilege is to be given based on the specific effect that is continuously executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to the specific effect that is continuously executed in the privilege game, which has an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, the specific condition is satisfied when a plurality of different small conditions are satisfied, and the specific effect execution means determines that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. A game machine R2 for executing the specific effect indicating that a predetermined number of the small conditions are satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1, a specific condition is established by a plurality of different small conditions being satisfied, and a specific effect is executed when a predetermined number of small conditions are satisfied. Therefore, the player can recognize that the predetermined number of small conditions have been satisfied by the specific effect, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine R2, the specific effect execution means performs a remaining specific effect that indicates whether the remaining small conditions are satisfied among the plurality of different small conditions during a period in which the special game is executed by the special game execution means. A gaming machine R3 that is executed as the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R2, a remaining specific effect that indicates whether the remaining small conditions among a plurality of different small conditions are satisfied is executed as the specific effect. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of remaining small conditions by executing the remaining specific effect, and can make the player expect that the specific condition is satisfied. This has the effect of increasing interest.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, at least a normal privilege game advantageous to the player and a special privilege game more advantageous to the player than the normal privilege game are set as privilege games by the privilege game execution means. A gaming machine R4 having privilege game type determining means for determining the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, any one of the normal bonus game set as the bonus game and the special bonus game which is more advantageous to the player than the normal bonus game. Is determined by the privilege game type determining means. Therefore, the variation of the privilege game which is advantageous to the player is increased, so that it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the gaming machine R4, the remaining special effect indicating that the remaining small condition is satisfied is executed during the bonus game, thereby indicating that the special bonus game is being executed by the bonus game executing means. A gaming machine R5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R4, the fact that the special privilege game is being executed is indicated by the execution of the remaining privilege effect, so that the gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand. There is an effect that can be provided.

  In the gaming machine R4 or R5, the gaming machine R6 is characterized in that the special bonus game is such that, after the bonus game, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is given until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R4 or R5, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the privilege game. Therefore, since a more advantageous state can be given to the player, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  A gaming machine R7 characterized by having a selecting means in any one of the gaming machines R2 to R6 for allowing the player to select the small condition.

  According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R2 to R6, the player can select a small condition by the selection means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

<Characteristic S group> (increase in roulette hit pockets)
Determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition; and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result. A display device on which a plurality of different pieces of identification information are displayed, and, among the plurality of different pieces of identification information displayed on the display means, when stopped at a predetermined stop position, Identification information determining means for determining the specific identification information for notifying that the determination result is a specific determination result; and dynamically identifying the identification information displayed on the display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. After performing the effect, the effect is executed by stopping the identification information at the stop position, and when the effect is executed by the effect executing means, the discrimination is executed by the determining means. Gaming machine S1, and wherein the that the state, those having a variable setting means for variably set the identification information is determined as the specific identification information by the identification information determination means.

  Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine having a game property of providing a bonus game (for example, a jackpot game) when a predetermined character among a plurality of characters displayed on a roulette wheel stops at a specific stop position ( For example, JP-A-2004-73580). In this case, it is necessary to control the roulette stop position based on the special symbol lottery result. For example, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, a predetermined character is set to a specific stop position from a plurality of characters. In such a case, the rotation of the roulette becomes unnatural, and it is not possible to provide a suitable effect to the player, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. Was.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, any one of the plurality of pieces of identification information displayed on the display means in the effect performed by the effect performing means in accordance with the state in which the determination means performs the determination. Is changed to specific identification information for notifying that the determination result is a specific determination result (that is, that a privilege advantageous to the player is provided) by the variable setting unit. Thereby, the specific identification information can be varied in the effect performed by the effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable effect to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine S1, the effect performed by the effect executing means has a predetermined period set in advance, and the identification information determining means determines the effect based on the fact that a first period has elapsed among the predetermined period. A gaming machine S2 in which specific identification information is determined.

  According to the gaming machine S2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine S1. That is, the effect by the effect executing means is executed in a predetermined period set in advance. The specific identification information is determined by the identification information determining means based on the elapse of the first period of the predetermined period in which the effect is executed. Thus, the specific identification information is determined at the time when the first period has elapsed, so that the identification information can be dynamically displaced without any discomfort in the performance performed by the performance performing means. Therefore, a suitable effect can be provided to the player, and the effect of suppressing a decrease in the willingness to play can be suppressed.

  A gaming machine S3, characterized in that the gaming machine S1 or S2 has an obtaining means for obtaining the determination information determined by the determining means based on establishment of an obtaining condition.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the determination information determined by the determination unit is obtained by the obtaining unit based on the establishment of the obtaining condition, so that the determination information is reliably obtained. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the effect is not executed by the effect execution unit even though the determination condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine S3, a storage means for storing at least the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means until the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the discrimination condition corresponding to the discrimination information stored in the storage means. And a variable setting unit configured to variably set the identification information based on a determination result of the preliminary determination unit. A gaming machine S4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine S4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine S3. That is, the determination information obtained by the obtaining unit is stored by the storage unit until at least the determination condition is satisfied. The determination information stored in the storage means is determined by the preliminary determination means before the determination condition is satisfied, and the identification information is variably set based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means. This makes it possible to change the identification information before the effect based on the discrimination information for which the identification information is changed, so that the effect performed by the effect execution means can be performed without any discomfort. Can be dynamically displaced. Therefore, a suitable effect can be provided to the player, and the effect of suppressing a decrease in the willingness to play can be suppressed.

<Characteristic T group> (Bunny foot production)
A ball entry means having an opening through which a game ball can enter, an open state in which a game ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means, and a closure in which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than in the open state A variable member that can be changed into a state, a variable means that can change the variable member between the open state and the closed state, and a position where a game ball that has entered the opening flows down and is visible to a player. A first flow path, and a first position at which the first flow path can cause a game ball having entered the opening to flow down, and a second position at which it is difficult to flow down. A gaming machine T1 comprising: displacement means for displacing; and displacement control means for moving the displacement means to at least the first position while the variable member is in the open state.

  Here, in the gaming machine, as an effect for improving the interest of the player, there is known a game machine that performs an effect of moving a movable member called a production role on a game board (for example, JP-A-2004-2004). No. 121464). In this case, there is a problem in that the installation space such as a winning opening required for the game of the gaming machine is lost by providing the directing object.

  According to the gaming machine T1, during the period in which the variable member is changed to the open state in which the game ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means, the first flow path arranged at a position visible to the player. Is changed to the first position so that the game ball entering the opening flows down. The first flow path can be displaced between a first position and a second position. Thereby, when the game ball enters the opening of the ball entry means, the first flow path is changed to the first position, so that the game ball can flow down, and the ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means. When the game ball does not enter, the first flow path can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and can be used for effects and the like. Therefore, since the first flow path can be diverted to the effect, the interest of the player can be improved, and further, the installation space on the game board can be secured.

  The gaming machine T1 includes a privilege game execution unit that executes a privilege game in which the variable member is changed to the open state a plurality of times when the specific condition is satisfied until the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable unit. A game machine wherein the displacement control means displaces the first flow path to the first position until a predetermined period elapses after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means. T2.

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine T1, the privilege game in which the variable member is changed to the open state is executed a plurality of times until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and after the execution of the privilege game ends. The first flow path is displaced to the first position until a predetermined period elapses. Therefore, the first flow path is not displaced to the second position even though the game ball that has entered the opening of the ball entry means has not finished flowing down, so that the game ball enters the opening of the ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to cause the ball to flow down without clogging the ball.

  The gaming machine T1 or T2 has an effect executing means for executing an effect, wherein the effect executing means controls the displacement control as one of the effects in the first flow path other than during the period in which the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine T3 characterized by being displaced by means.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first flow path is displaced as one of the effects except during the period in which the bonus game is executed. Therefore, the variation of the effect can be increased, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine T3, a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition is provided. Executing a bonus game, wherein the effect execution means is configured to displace the first flow path by the displacement control means as one of the effects indicating the determination result by the determination means. Gaming machine T4.

  According to the gaming machine T4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine T3. That is, when the discrimination result becomes a specific discrimination result, the bonus game is executed, and the displacement of the first flow path is executed as one of the effects indicating the discrimination result. Therefore, whether the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result can be determined by the effect in which the first flow path is displaced, and the player pays attention to the effect in which the first flow path is displaced. This has the effect of improving the interest of the elderly.

<Characteristic U group>
Determining means for performing a determination based on the establishment of the determination condition; privilege providing means for providing a benefit that is advantageous to the player based on a result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; Until is established, a state setting means for setting a special game state in which the determination condition is easily satisfied, and an effect is executed for a predetermined period when the special game state is set by the state setting means. An effect executing means, and an accompanying effect for executing an accompanying effect accompanying the effect executed by the effect executing means when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within a period in which the effect is executed by the effect executing means. A gaming machine U1 comprising: an execution unit.

  Here, during a predetermined period, there has been a pachinko machine in which a special game state (for example, a certain-change game state) different from a normal game state is executed. In such a pachinko machine, as a technique for informing the player that the current gaming state is a special gaming state using an effect performed for a predetermined period, an effect performed for a predetermined period. A pachinko machine has been proposed that changes the progress of an effect performed in a predetermined period when it is determined that the timing at which the game ends and the timing at which the special game state ends differ (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-2008). 173320). In this case, if the timing at which the effect performed in the predetermined period ends and the timing at which the special game state ends, control for changing the progress of the effect performed in the predetermined period is performed. However, there is a problem that the processing load must be increased.

  According to the gaming machine U1, a special game state in which the determination condition is easily set until the predetermined condition is satisfied is set, and when the special game state is set, an effect is executed for a predetermined period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period in which the effect is executed, an accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed. Here, the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period in which the effect is executed is a case where the display period of the effect ends even though the special game state is continued. In this case, an accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed by the accompanying effect executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the special game state is continued. In addition, an effect is executed for a predetermined period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period in which the effect is executed, the accompanying effect is executed, so that control for changing the content of the effect performed in the predetermined period is performed. There is no need to do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when executing the effect can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine U1, a ball-in means for allowing a game ball to enter, an acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information determined by the discrimination means when a game ball enters the ball-in means, and the acquisition means thereof A storage means for storing at least the discrimination information acquired until the discrimination condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine U2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine U1. That is, the discrimination information is acquired by the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the acquired discrimination information is stored until the discrimination condition is satisfied. Thereby, at the time when the game ball enters the ball entry means and the discrimination information is acquired, even if the discrimination condition is not satisfied, the discrimination information can be stored in the storage means. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the case where the determination unit does not perform the determination even though the game ball has entered the ball entry unit, thereby suppressing excessive disadvantage to the player. (Prevention).

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the effect execution means is a specific effect indicating the specific determination result based on the result of the determination by the determination means during the period in which the effect is executed. Is executed in the remaining period.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U1 or the gaming machine U2, when it is determined that the specific determination result is obtained during the period in which the effect is executed, the specific effect is executed in the remaining period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that a specific determination result has been obtained during the period of performing the effect.

  Any one of the gaming machines U1 to U3, display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determination means, and a dynamic display period for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means And a determining unit, wherein the predetermined condition is established based on a lapse of the dynamic display period based on a predetermined number of determinations by the determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine U4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines U1 to U3. That is, the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the elapse of the dynamic display period based on the determination by the determination unit at the predetermined number of times. Thereby, during the period in which the special game state is set (that is, the period during which the effect until the predetermined condition is satisfied, or the period during which the accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed), the determination based on the determination result is performed. The dynamic display of the identification information is displayed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, during the period in which the special game state is set, it is possible to pay attention to the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Feature V group> (read ahead in RUSH)
A ball-inserting means into which a game ball can enter, an acquiring means for acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the ball-entering means, and the information acquired by the acquiring means to satisfy a determination condition Discriminating means for discriminating based on the discriminating means, storing means for storing the information acquired by the acquiring means at least until the discriminating condition is satisfied, and displaying means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means. And when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. Dynamic display means, dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determining means display period And a dynamic display period storing means for storing at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period by a predetermined multiple, and determining the dynamic display period. Means for executing a first effect at a timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the first dynamic display period when the first dynamic display period is determined by the means; When the second dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on that the determination result by the is the specific determination result, the second dynamic display period starts from the start of the second dynamic display period. A second effect capable of executing the first effect at a timing when one period has elapsed, and repeatedly executing the first effect up to a predetermined number of times at the same timing every time the first dynamic display period elapses Executing means and the discriminator If the decision result by is not the specific determination result, a game machine, wherein the first effect are those having a limiting means for limiting the number of times to be performed in a continuous below the predetermined number of times, the V1.

  Here, an effect (so-called pseudo continuous notice effect) has been proposed in which a predetermined display mode is stopped and displayed a plurality of times in one special symbol change display to indicate a degree of expectation of winning a jackpot to a player (for example, a pseudo continuous notice effect). And JP-A-2008-161390). In order to execute this pseudo continuous notice effect, the fluctuation time of one special symbol fluctuation must be set to a time in which a predetermined display mode can be stopped and displayed a plurality of times, and the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time There was a problem that there was less. Also, in a pachinko machine having a function capable of storing the winning information of a special symbol a plurality of times (holding storage function), a predetermined display mode is used by using a variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the plurality of winning information stored and held. (So-called continuous notice effect) has also been proposed to stop and display a plurality of times to indicate the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-207261). It is necessary to store a plurality of special symbol winning information in order to execute this continuous announcement effect, so it is difficult to store multiple special symbol winning information on pachinko machines or pachinko machines that do not have a hold storage function. There was a problem that the notice effect could not be executed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine V1, the first dynamic display period determined as the dynamic display period of the identification information, the second dynamic display period longer than a predetermined multiple of the first dynamic display period, , The first effect is executed at the timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the dynamic display period. In the second dynamic display period, after the first effect is displayed, the first effect is executed a predetermined number of times at the same timing every time the first dynamic display period elapses.

  Accordingly, while having a different dynamic display period from the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period, the second dynamic display period is executed in the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period. The execution timing of one effect can be matched. Therefore, the first effect is executed based on the fact that the second dynamic display period is set (that is, the determination result is a specific determination result) while increasing the variation of the dynamic display period. Since the player can be recognized, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the first effect is executed a predetermined number of times based on the determination result being a specific determination result. If the determination result is not the specific determination result, the number of times the first effect is continuously executed is limited. Accordingly, the first effect is not executed a predetermined number of times, even though the period is not the second dynamic display period (that is, the determination result is not a specific determination result). There is an effect that it can be provided.

  In the gaming machine V1, the dynamic display period determining means is configured to more easily determine the first dynamic display period than the second dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine V1, the first dynamic display period having a shorter display period than the second dynamic display period is easily determined. This can prevent the dynamic display period from becoming long. Therefore, there is an effect that the game time is not prolonged and the player is not bored.

  The gaming machine V3, wherein in the gaming machine V1 or V2, the first effect execution means executes the first effect based on a start timing of the first dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V1 or V2, the first effect is executed based on the start timing of the first dynamic display period. Thereby, the first effect can be executed only when the first dynamic display period is started at a specific start timing, and the first effect displayed in the first dynamic display period is changed to the second dynamic display period. In the display period, it is possible to match the timing at which the first effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the first effect is displayed in the first dynamic display period or the first effect is displayed in the second dynamic display period. There is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the gaming machine V4 is characterized in that the first dynamic display period is configured to have a period shorter than twice as long as the rendering period of the first rendering.

  According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the first dynamic display period is configured to have a period shorter than twice the rendering period of the first rendering. Thereby, it is only necessary to control whether or not to perform the first effect in the first dynamic display period without executing the first effect a plurality of times in the first dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that control processing for executing the first effect can be simplified in the first dynamic display period.

  Further, the first dynamic display period is a period shorter than twice the production period of the first effect, that is, the period of the first production effect is longer than half of the first dynamic display period. Thereby, even if the first dynamic display period is a short period, the effect period of the first effect can be sufficiently secured. Therefore, there is an effect that the first effect can be easily recognized by the player.

<Characteristic W group> (Random display of decorative design)
Determining means for executing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition; display means for displaying identification information based on a determination result by the determination means; and dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means Dynamic display means, effect execution means for executing an effect, after a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, a privilege granting means for imparting a benefit advantageous to a player, and the identification information to the display means And a display position determining means for determining a position to be displayed each time the determination is performed by the determination means.

  Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine that notifies a player of a special symbol lottery result using identification information displayed on a display means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 6-134105). In this case, since the display means is constituted by the dot LED, the display position of the identification information displayed on the display means cannot be changed, and the interest of the player cannot be improved. .

  As a pachinko machine that displays a decorative symbol that fluctuates on the display means based on a lottery of a special symbol, a pachinko device that changes the display mode of the decorative symbol has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-2358336). In this case, while the special symbol is being changed, the display mode of the decorative symbol can be changed to various modes to enhance the interest of the game, but the decorative symbol is also predetermined at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Since the stop display is made at the position, the player can easily grasp whether or not the special symbol has stopped (whether or not the change of the special symbol has ended) only by checking the predetermined position. For example, when a series of effects using a plurality of special symbol variations are executed, there is a problem that the stop display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means reduces the effect of the effect of the series of effects.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine W1, when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, a privilege advantageous to the player is given. Each time the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means, the position where the identification information is dynamically displayed based on the discrimination result is determined by the display position determination means. Thereby, the position where the identification information is dynamically displayed can be changed every time the identification information is dynamically displayed. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the identification information, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Also, the display position of the identification information is determined to be moved to a plurality of locations at a predetermined interval by the display position determination means, so that the display position at the timing when the identification information is stopped and displayed (the timing when the special symbol stops) is determined. It can be difficult for the player to know whether or not the identification information is displayed. Therefore, for example, when executing a series of effects using a plurality of special symbols, the player can easily grasp the display content (whether or not stopped) of the identification information displayed on the display means. And the effect of a series of effects can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine W1, the effect execution means causes the display means to display an effect mode as a part of the effect, and the identification information is displayed in a display area smaller than a display area in which the effect mode is displayed. A gaming machine W2 to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine W2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W1. That is, the effect execution means displays the effect mode on the display means as part of the effect. Further, the identification information is displayed in a display area smaller than the display area in which the effect mode is displayed. This can prevent the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine W1, the effect execution means displays an effect mode on an effect display means different from the display means as a part of the effect, and the effect display means has a display area larger than the display means. A gaming machine W3 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine W3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W1. That is, the effect display means is constituted by a display area larger than the display means, and the effect execution means, which is a part of the effect, is displayed on the effect display means as a part of the effect. This makes it possible to display an effect mode which is a part of the effect by the effect display means having a display area larger than the display means on which the identification information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at the presentation mode displayed on the presentation display unit, and to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, a display position changing unit that changes a display position of the identification information determined by the display position determination unit during dynamic display of the identification information is provided. A gaming machine W4 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the display position of the identification information determined by the display position determination means is variable by the display position variable means during dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the effect executing means executes the effect in a predetermined effect period in which a plurality of discriminations by the discriminating means are possible, and is displayed on the display means. A dynamic display period determining unit that determines a dynamic display period of the identification information, wherein the dynamic display period determining unit specifies the dynamic display period by the determination unit while the effect is being executed by the effect executing unit. The gaming machine W5 is characterized in that when the determination result is determined, a period longer than the remaining period of the effect is easily determined as a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the effect is executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined effect period in which the discriminating means can perform the discrimination a plurality of times. The dynamic display period determining unit determines the dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display unit. Then, the dynamic display period determining means sets the period equal to or longer than the remaining period of the effect as the dynamic display period when a specific determination result is determined by the determiner in a state where the effect is being performed by the effect executing means. It is set to be easily determined. Accordingly, when a specific determination result is determined by the determination unit, a period longer than the remaining period of the effect being performed by the effect execution unit as the dynamic display period of the identification information based on the determination result is easily determined. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the identification information based on the specific determination result from being displayed during the effect and to reduce the effect of the effect.

  In the gaming machine W5, the dynamic display period determining means determines a dynamic display period to be a first period based on a result of the determination by the determining means being a result other than the specific result of determination. A gaming machine W6, wherein the effect period executed by the effect executing means is constituted by a period that is at least a predetermined multiple of the first period.

  According to the gaming machine W6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine W5. That is, the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period as the first period based on the determination result of the determining means being a determination result other than the specific determination result, and is executed by the effect executing means. The effect period is constituted by a period that is at least a predetermined multiple of the first period. Thus, in the case of a determination result other than the specific determination result, the number of determinations performed by the determination unit per unit time can be increased, and there is an effect that the determination efficiency can be improved.

  Furthermore, during the period of the effect performed by the effect execution means, the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means is displayed on the display means, but the display position determination means determines the display position of the identification information, It is possible for the player to watch the presentation mode displayed on the presentation display means, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content of the identification information (whether or not it is stopped). . Therefore, there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  Note that by selectively adopting the configuration described in any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the above-described effects can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine W5 or W6, the gaming machine W5 or W6 has state setting means for setting a special state that facilitates the establishment of the determination condition until the end condition is satisfied, and the effect execution means is configured such that the special state is set by the state setting means. A game machine W7 for starting execution of the effect based on the fact.

  According to the gaming machine W7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine W5 or W6, a special state in which the determination means is easily established by the state setting means is set until the end condition is satisfied. The execution of the effect is started by the effect executing means based on the setting of the special state. Thus, there is an effect that the effect of the effect performed for a predetermined period in the special state can be enhanced.

<Feature X group> (variable addition to roulette depending on time and short period)
Determining means for executing a determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition; display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determination means; and the identification information indicating the specific determination result on the display means In this case, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, an identification body in which a plurality of different identification sections are arranged, and a specific identification section among the identification sections in the identification body are determined. Determining means for determining, when the determination result by the determining means is the specific determination result, special state setting means for setting the specific identification unit to a special state different from normal, based on establishment of a specific condition A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for notifying a player of the determination result by the identification unit of the identification body; and executing the specific effect based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition during execution of the specific effect. Additional Gaming machine X1 to the additional setting means for setting, and the probability changing means for varying a probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied, characterized in that with.

  Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine having a game property of providing a bonus game (for example, a jackpot game) when a predetermined character among a plurality of characters displayed on a roulette wheel stops at a specific stop position ( For example, JP-A-2004-73580). However, since the predetermined number of characters is not changed (added) during the execution of the roulette game, the notification mode indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot remains unchanged while the roulette game is in progress. During the execution of the roulette game, the player's willingness to play is reduced, and the player may get tired of the game early.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine X1, when a specific identification unit among the plurality of identification units arranged on the identification object has a specific determination result by the determination unit (that is, the player Is set to a special state different from the usual state. That is, if any one of the specific identification units is set to a special state different from the normal state, a benefit that is advantageous to the player is provided. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific effect is being executed, a specific identification unit is additionally set. With this, when a specific identification unit is additionally set in a specific effect, the player feels that the possibility that the advantageous privilege is given becomes higher, and thus the effect of improving the interest of the player can be improved. .

  Further, the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is varied by the probability varying means. That is, the probability that a specific identification unit is added can be changed. Therefore, since the probability that a specific identification unit is added changes, the disadvantage that the player gets tired early can be suppressed (prevented).

  In the gaming machine X1, the privilege granting unit sets at least one of a first gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, and a second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The probability varying means sets the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied higher when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set. A gaming machine X2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X1, the second gaming state which is more advantageous for the player and the second gaming state which is more advantageous than the first gaming state. When the gaming state is set, the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is set high. Thus, when the predetermined condition is easily satisfied, a specific identification unit is easily added. Therefore, since the player expects that the second game state is set by adding the specific identification unit, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine X1 or X2, ball-in means capable of entering a game ball, and acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information determined by the discrimination means based on a game ball entering the ball-in means. The game machine X3, wherein the additional setting means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine X3, the information determined by the determining means is acquired based on the game ball entering the entering means (that is, the information for providing the privilege providing means is acquired), When a game ball enters the ball means, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (that is, it is determined whether a specific identification unit is added). Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to enter the game ball into the ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine X3, the additional setting means executes a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters the ball input means, and when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, the additional setting means A gaming machine X4 characterized by determining that a condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X3, a predetermined lottery is executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, and when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, A predetermined condition is satisfied (that is, a specific identification unit is added). Therefore, since the specific identification unit is added based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, it is possible to give the player an impression that the addition of the specific identification unit is being performed fairly.

  In the gaming machine X4, the probability varying means varies the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means.

  According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X4, it becomes possible to vary the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means by the probability varying means. Therefore, since the probability that a specific identification unit is added changes, the disadvantage that the player gets tired early can be suppressed (prevented).

  In the gaming machine X4, the probability varying means sets a probability table in which the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means is set for each number of game balls entered.

  According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X4, the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means is varied by setting a probability table set for each number of game balls entered. Therefore, since the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means can be easily changed, there is an effect that the control load on the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine X6, the probability varying unit sets a first probability table as the probability table based on the first game state being set, and sets the second game state based on the second game state being set. A gaming machine X7 for setting a second probability setting table in which a lottery probability is set relatively higher than the first probability setting table.

  According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X6, based on the first gaming state being set, the first probability table is set, and based on the second gaming state being set, A second probability setting table in which the lottery probability is set higher than the first probability setting table is set. Therefore, by setting the probability table according to the gaming state, it is possible to easily change the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means, so that there is an effect that the control load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

<Characteristic Y group> (When a hit is announced in the background effect, stop at a position where it can hit within 0.2 Y when temporarily stopping.)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means Display means; dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the determination result; and the determination result specific to the display means When the identification information indicating is displayed, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player, an effect dynamic display unit that dynamically displays an effect on the display unit, and the dynamic display unit When a period during which the dynamic display of the identification information is not performed continues for a predetermined period or more, a stop control unit that stops the dynamic display of the effect by the effect dynamic display unit, and an identification based on the specific determination result. In the case where information is dynamically displayed, the presentation dynamic display means has a presentation mode determination unit that determines a specific presentation mode as the presentation mode dynamically displayed, and the stop control unit includes: The gaming machine Y1 wherein the dynamic display of the effect is stopped in a state where the display can be displayed by switching to the specific effect mode.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is known that an effect is dynamically displayed in a specific effect mode when identification information based on a specific determination result is dynamically displayed. Further, when dynamic display of identification information is not continuously performed for a predetermined period or longer, for example, an effect such as a demonstration screen is displayed. In such a gaming machine, when a determination result is a specific determination result when a demonstration screen or the like is displayed, it is necessary to switch the effect from the demonstration screen to a specific effect mode, and it takes time to switch the effect. In such a case, there is a problem that the player feels strange.

  In addition, an effect has been proposed in which a character (icon) symbolizing a privilege (eg, a big hit) given to the player is displayed on a display screen of the display means, and the fact that the privilege is given by acquiring the character is proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236851). In this case, after the change of the special symbol is started, that is, after the result of the lottery of the special symbol is determined, a character (icon) symbolizing the privilege is displayed on the display screen, and the result of the special symbol is selected. Is performed (the effect of acquiring a character or not), the character (icon) is displayed on the display screen during a single special symbol change time, and then the character is acquired or not. There has been a problem that it is necessary to produce and display the results up to that result, and it is necessary to set the fluctuation time of the special symbol long.

  According to the gaming machine Y1, when identification information based on a specific determination result is dynamically displayed, an effect is dynamically displayed in a specific effect mode, and the dynamic display of the identification information is continuously performed for a predetermined period or more. If not, the dynamic display of the effect is stopped in a state where it can be switched to a specific effect mode and displayed. Thereby, even if the determination condition is satisfied and the dynamic display based on the specific determination result is performed when the dynamic display of the identification information is not continuously performed for a predetermined period or more, the dynamic display of the effect is performed. Can be switched to a specific effect mode and displayed. Therefore, the effect can be performed in a specific effect mode without delay, and there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine Y1, the specific effect mode includes a notification mode indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result in a period from the start to the first effect period. The gaming machine Y2, wherein the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the result is constituted by the first rendering period or more.

  According to the gaming machine Y2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Y1. That is, the specific effect mode includes a notification mode indicating that the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result in a period from the start to the first effect period, and when the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result. The dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is composed of the first rendering period or more. Thus, when performing an effect in the notification mode indicating that the result is a specific determination result, the dynamic display period longer than the first effect period is determined. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display the effect in the notification mode indicating that the result is the specific determination result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, the effect dynamic display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the effect over a plurality of dynamic displays of the identification information, and to dynamically display the identification information. A gaming machine Y3 that dynamically displays an effect mode that can be switched to the specific effect mode in accordance with a start timing.

  According to the gaming machine Y3, the effect can be dynamically displayed over a plurality of times of dynamic display of the identification information, and can be switched to a specific effect mode in accordance with the dynamic display start timing of the identification information. A dynamic presentation mode is dynamically displayed. Thus, when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, an effect mode that can be switched to a specific effect mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, even if the dynamic display period of the identification information is short, it is possible to switch to a specific effect mode without delay after the dynamic display is started, so that it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the player. There is no effect.

  In any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, in the effect, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are dynamically displayed at least simultaneously, and the specific effect mode is the first effect symbol and the first effect symbol. A gaming machine Y4 characterized by being displayed in contact with a second effect symbol.

  According to the gaming machine Y4, in the specific effect mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, which are dynamically displayed at the same time, are displayed in contact with each other. Therefore, the player can recognize that the specific effect mode is being executed by visually checking the contact between the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand. effective.

<Characteristic AA group> (roulette interruption control)
A ball-in means capable of entering a game ball, a discriminating means for performing a discrimination based on a game ball having entered the ball-in means, and a discrimination result based on a discrimination result by the discriminating means. A determination period determining means for determining a period until determination, and a privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being determined by a specific determination result, In the gaming machine having, the identification means in which a plurality of different identification information is set, and among the plurality of different identification information set in the identification means, the player is notified that the determination result is a specific determination result. Identification information determining means for determining the specific identification information to be notified, and, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, in a predetermined effect period, one of the identification information is selected from the identification information of the identification means, Selected A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in which a notification mode indicating identification information is notified; and when the specific effect is being executed by the specific effect execution means, the specific determination result is determined by the determination means. Setting means for setting the specific identification information determined by the identification information determining means as the identification information selected in the specific effect, based on the specific effect, during the effect period, for a predetermined period, the determination A gaming machine AA1 comprising: interruption means for interrupting the effect period when the determination is not performed by the means continues.

  Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine that executes a specific effect regardless of the presence or absence of a change in a special symbol during a period from the start of the time-saving gaming state to the end of the time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-2013). -236851). In this case, the special effect is started even if the special symbol is not changed during the time saving game, so the special effect that is executed only during the specific period of time during the time saving game state, do not change the special symbol You can see it for a long time. Therefore, there was a problem that a sense of expectation for a specific effect was lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AA1, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit, and the determination result is determined by the determination period determination unit based on the determination result. Is determined. The privilege is provided by the privilege providing means based on the determination result being determined as a specific result. Then, among a plurality of different pieces of identification information set by the identification means, the identification information determining means determines specific identification information for notifying that the result is a specific determination result, and the specific identification information is notified to the player. You. If the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific effect execution unit notifies the notification mode indicating the selected one of the pieces of identification information set in the identification unit during the predetermined effect period during a predetermined effect period. Is executed. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means, the identification information determined by the identification information determining means as the identification information to be selected in the specific effect based on the specific determination result being determined by the determining means. Is set by the setting means. Furthermore, when the case where the determination is not performed by the predetermined period determination unit continues during the production period, the production period is interrupted by the interruption unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific effect performed using the predetermined effect period progresses while the determination is not performed by the determination unit. There is an effect that the feeling can be prevented from being impaired.

  In addition, by interrupting the production period, rather than performing control for changing (extending) the content of the specific production performed during the production period so that the expectation for the specific production is not impaired, There is an effect that processing can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine AA1, the production period is set as a first production period from the start until the first period elapses, and the interruption unit does not perform the determination for the predetermined period in the first production period. A gaming machine AA2 characterized by executing interruption based on the continuation of a case.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AA2. That is, the period from the start of the production period to the lapse of the first period is set as the first production period, and based on the fact that the case where the discrimination for the predetermined period is not performed in the first production period has been continued, the production period is determined by the interruption means. Is executed. Thus, the period for determining whether or not to interrupt the effect period can be set as a part of the effect period (first effect period). Therefore, when the production period is restarted, it is possible to secure a predetermined production period, and it is possible to execute a specific production without damaging the player's expectation.

  In the gaming machine AA2, the interruption unit determines whether or not the determination by the determination unit has been performed in the predetermined period until the first effect period has elapsed. A gaming machine AA3 wherein the effect period is interrupted based on the elapse of the effect period.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AA1. That is, when it is determined that the determination by the determination unit has not been performed in the predetermined period until the first production period elapses, the production period is interrupted by the interruption unit based on the elapse of the first production period. . This makes it possible to make the timing at which the effect period is interrupted constant. This makes it possible to keep the remaining production period constant when the production period is restarted, thereby reducing the processing load for executing the specific production after the restart.

  In the first effect period, a predetermined effect may be executed in the first effect period irrespective of the result of the determination by the determining means, and the specific effect may be executed after the first effect period elapses. Thereby, even if the production period is interrupted, it is possible to execute the specific production without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the determination period determining means determines that a predetermined number of determination results is determined within the effect period as a period until the determination result determined by the determination means is determined. A gaming machine AA4 characterized by determining a period.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3. That is, as the period until the determination result determined by the determination unit is determined, the period is determined by the determination period determination unit so that the determination result is determined a predetermined number of times within the production period. Thereby, the discrimination by the discriminating means can be executed a plurality of times within the effect period, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Further, even if a situation occurs in which the discrimination by the discriminating means is not performed during the production period, that is, after the discriminating means 1 performs the discrimination, the game ball does not enter the ball-entering means and the next discrimination is performed. Even if a situation in which the effect is not executed occurs, the effect period is interrupted by the interruption means, so that there is an effect that the sense of expectation for the specific effect in the effect period is not impaired.

<Characteristics AB group> (Available period of button PUSH is different from notification)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition; privilege providing means for providing a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result; Means that can be operated by a user, a validity period setting means for setting a validity period during which an operation by the operation means is valid, and when the validity period is set by the validity period setting means, the operation means An effect executing means for executing an effect based on the operation, a first period setting means for setting a first period within an effective period by the effective period setting means, and the operation means during the first period. A gaming machine AB1 comprising: delay means for delaying execution of the effect by the effect execution means until the first period has elapsed when operated.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a discrimination symbol is dynamically displayed on a display device for a predetermined period, and then stopped and displayed with a symbol based on the determination result. During the period in which the judgment symbol is dynamically displayed, the effect mode is changed based on the player pressing an operable operation means (for example, a button) as various effects, and the judgment result is determined in advance in the game. There has been proposed a gaming machine for improving the interest of a player by displaying a notice display or the like to give a notice to a player (for example, JP-A-2007-185224). In this case, the period during which the player can operate the operation means is limited to the period during which the effect mode can be variably displayed. When the player is notified of the operable period, the period is short, and the effective period There is a problem that the operation means cannot be operated, and the game becomes difficult. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of easily playing a game.

  According to the gaming machine AB1, when a valid period in which the operation by the operation unit is valid is set, the effect is produced when the operation unit is operated within the valid period after the first period of the valid period has elapsed. Is executed. On the other hand, if the operating means is operated before the first period of the valid period has elapsed, the execution of the effect is delayed. Therefore, the validity period can be set even if the period is different from the start timing of the effect performed based on the operation means, and the validity period can be set longer, so that the player can operate the operation means. Since the period is long, there is an effect that the player can play an easy game.

  In the gaming machine AB1, the effect executed by the effect executing means is such that an effect mode is determined based on a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means.

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is determined based on the determination result by the determining means. That is, the player can recognize the determination result by the determination unit by visually recognizing the effect mode of the effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the production mode of the production, so that the operation of the operation means for displaying the production can be motivated and the player's motivation to participate can be improved. effective.

  In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the identification means in which a plurality of different pieces of identification information are set, and among the plurality of different pieces of identification information set in the identification means, the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result to the player. And identification information determining means for determining the specific identification information for notifying, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, in a predetermined execution period, one identification information is selected from the identification information of the identification means, A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in which a notification mode indicating the selected identification information is notified; and, when the specific effect is being executed by the specific effect execution means, the specific determination by the determination means. The specific identification information determined by the identification information determination means is set as the identification information selected in the specific effect based on the determination of the result. A setting means, wherein the presentation execution section, the gaming machine is characterized in that to perform the notification effect indicating the selected identification information in the specific effect AB3.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2. That is, when a specific result is determined by the determining means while the specific effect is being performed, a notification effect based on the specific identification information that notifies the fact that the determination result is the specific determination result by the effect performing means. Is executed. Accordingly, when the determination result becomes a specific determination result during execution of the specific effect, the determination result is a specific determination in the effect by the effect executing means (ie, the effect based on the operation of the operation means). A notification effect that allows the player to recognize the result is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect based on the operation of the operation means, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate.

<Feature AC group> (The next roulette effect is set based on the previous stop position of the roulette)
A movable body on which a plurality of different identification sections are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, a movable control means for moving the movable body by the movable means, and the movable body based on establishment of a movable condition. Determining means for determining a movable pattern in which a stoppable range that can be stopped is set in advance, and after being moved by the movable pattern determined by the determining means, the specific identification unit is located at a predetermined rendering position. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when stopped, and, when the movable body is moved by the movable pattern, setting the stoppable range based on the satisfaction of a specific condition. Identification unit determining means for determining one identification unit from the identification unit that has been determined, and stopping the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination means at the production position at a specific stop timing Stop control means for stopping, wherein the determination means determines a movable pattern in which the stoppable range to be stopped next is preset corresponding to the identification unit stopped by the stop control means. A gaming machine AC1 characterized by the following.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a hit determination is performed, a plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of different symbols arranged on the front side are arranged, and a combination of symbols stopped at a predetermined position is determined in advance as a determination result. It is determined based on the information and notified by controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a gaming machine is proposed in which, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped, a game in which the variable winning device is changed so that game balls can enter is executed. (Eg, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-204318). Even if the rotating body is stopped by the first rotation effect, the degree of expectation for the next rotation effect cannot be varied depending on the stop position, and the problem that the game becomes monotonous causes the player to get tired early. There was a point. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and further provides a novel gaming machine, which suppresses the game from becoming monotonous, and the player gets tired early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing defects.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, of the plurality of identification units in the movable body, the identification unit corresponding to the stoppable range set in the determined movable pattern is stopped at the predetermined rendering position. As the movable pattern, when the movable body is stopped, a movable pattern in which a stoppable range to be stopped next is set in advance is determined. That is, the next stopable range is determined in a state where the movable body is stopped. Therefore, from the position where the position of the movable body is stopped in accordance with the next stoppable range, the degree of expectation of whether or not the specific identification unit stops at the production position can be changed, and the specific identification unit does not stop at the production position. Also in this case, the stop position can be interesting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  The gaming machine AC2 in the gaming machine AC1, wherein the movable pattern has an execution period set in advance.

  According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AC1, a preset execution period is set in the movable pattern of the movable body. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress (prevent) a problem that the player gets tired early due to the prolonged movement of the movable body.

  Further, according to the configuration including the gaming machine AC1, the next stoppable range is determined in a state where the movable body is stopped. Therefore, even if the movable period of the movable body is a preset execution period, The stoppable range can be determined based on the execution period. That is, a stoppable range suitable for a period during which the movable body is moved (movable pattern) can be determined. For example, an identification unit that does not reach the rendering position in a set period (movable pattern) is determined as a stoppable range. There is no. Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable effect can be provided without giving a natural feeling to the player without making the movable operation of the movable body unnatural.

  The gaming machine AC1 or AC2 has a determination unit for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and the stop control unit performs the specific identification when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. A game machine AC3 for stopping a part at the presentation position.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, the specific identification unit is stopped at the production position, so that the determination by the determination means There is an effect that the result can be notified by the identification unit that stops at the presentation position.

  A gaming machine AC4, comprising: a setting unit configured to set one of the plurality of different identifying units to the specific identifying unit based on establishment of a setting condition in any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3.

  According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, since the specific identification unit is set by a plurality of different identification units by the setting unit, which identification unit is set to the specific identification unit It is possible to make the player interested in whether the game is played or not, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AC4, the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on a selection of a player.

  According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC4, at least one of the specific identification units is set by the setting unit based on the selection of the player, so that any identification unit of the player can be set. This can be a specific identification unit, and has the effect that the player can participate in the game and improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine AC4 or AC5, the setting unit sets the specific identification unit based on a result of the determination by the determining unit.

  According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC4 or AC6, the specific identification unit is set by the setting unit based on the determination result of the determination unit. There is an effect that the determination result can be predicted by the player.

<Feature AD group> (Executed after entering Bunny's foot production)
A ball entry means having an opening through which a game ball can enter, an open state in which a game ball can enter the opening of the ball entry means, and a closure in which the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than in the open state A variable member that can be changed into a state, a variable means that can change the variable member between the open state and the closed state, a detecting means that detects a game ball that has passed through the opening, and a passage that passes through the opening. A guiding path that guides a game ball that has flowed down for a predetermined period and leads to a performance body in which the performance is performed, and based on the fact that the predetermined time has elapsed since the detection of the game ball by the detection means, A gaming machine AD1 comprising: an effect varying means for varying an effect.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of winning ports are arranged on the front side of a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and one of the winning ports is a starting winning port which is used as a trigger for determining whether or not a game is accepted. When the ball enters, a predetermined lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a winning, a game in which the variable winning device is opened is executed, and the player can obtain many prize balls and the like. In such a gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a plurality of gaming balls are allowed to pass through by a passage member through which the gaming balls can flow, thereby causing the gaming balls to flow to a predetermined position. (JP 2014-133036 A). Furthermore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that suppresses the game from becoming monotonous by improving interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  According to the gaming machine AD1, the effect of the production body is varied by the production variable means based on a lapse of a predetermined period from the detection of the game ball passing through the opening to the reaching of the production body. The effect of the director can be varied by guiding the ball to the director. Therefore, the timing at which the effect of the effecting body is changed can be easily understood, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AD2 according to the gaming machine AD1, wherein the guide path is formed of a visual recognition member that allows a player to visually recognize a game ball flowing down inside the player.

  According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD1, since the guiding path is configured so that the gaming ball flowing down to the inside of the player can be visually recognized, it is visually recognized that the gaming ball is guided to the director. There is an effect that the timing at which the effect of the effecting body is changed can be more easily understood.

  In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the guide path is configured to be at least movable to a first position at which a game ball can be guided to the director and a second position at which a game ball cannot be guided to the director, Movable means for moving the guide path between the first position and the second position; and the variable means for changing the movable member to the open state, the guide path is moved from the second position to the second position. A gaming machine AD3 characterized by being movable to one position.

  According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, when the variable member is opened, the guide path is moved to the first position, so that the variable member is opened. Can be notified to the player more easily.

  In the gaming machine AD2 or AD3, when the guide path is not moved to the first position, the gaming machine AD2 or AD3 has a discharge flow path for discharging a game ball entering the opening. Gaming machine AD4.

  According to the gaming machine AD4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AD2 or AD3, even when the taxiway is not moved to the first position due to a failure or the like, the gaming ball entering the opening can be discharged from the discharge passage. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines AD1 to AD4, a discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the fulfillment of the discriminating condition, and if the discrimination result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result, the variable A gaming machine AD5, comprising: a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game for changing a member to the open state by the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine AD5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD4, when the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, so that the player's interest can be further improved. .

  In the gaming machine AD5, when the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result, there is a deciding means for deciding whether to set a special game state advantageous to the player after the privilege game by the privilege game execution means. The gaming machine AD6, wherein the effecting body notifies the result of the determination by the determining means by the effect.

  According to the gaming machine AD6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AD5, it is notified whether or not a special gaming state is set by the director, so that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous even during the bonus game. is there.

  In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball in a starting winning opening is a hit, the game machine shifts to a winning state that is advantageous to the player. In this conventional gaming machine, every time a lottery is executed, a suggestive effect indicating whether or not a win is made is performed to improve the interest in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-2001). -25543 publication).
However, the suggestive effect of the conventional gaming machine has not been able to sufficiently enhance the interest of the player.
Therefore, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest in games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises a ball-inserting means into which a game ball can enter, and an acquisition means for acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the ball-entering means. A determination unit configured to determine the information acquired by the acquisition unit based on establishment of a determination condition, and a storage unit configured to store the information acquired by the acquisition unit at least until the determination condition is satisfied; Display means for displaying identification information based on a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and privilege providing means for providing a benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information displayed on the display means, and dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means And its dynamic As the dynamic display period determined by the display period determining means, at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period by a predetermined multiple or more are stored. When the first dynamic display period is determined by the display period storage unit and the dynamic display period determination unit, the first effect is performed at a timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the first dynamic display period. When the second dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit based on the first effect execution unit to be executed and the determination result by the determination unit being the specific determination result, The first effect is executed at a timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the second dynamic display period, and the execution of the first effect is determined at the same timing every time the first dynamic display period elapses. Repeated up to the number of times A second effect executing means capable of performing the first effect, and a limiting means for limiting the number of times the first effect is continuously executed to less than the predetermined number when the result of the determination by the determining means is not the specific result. .
The gaming machine according to the second technical concept is the gaming machine according to the first technical concept, wherein the dynamic display period determining unit is configured to determine the first dynamic display period more easily than the second dynamic display period. Is what it is.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the first effect execution means executes the first effect based on a start timing of the first dynamic display period. Things.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the first dynamic display period is configured to have a period shorter than twice a production period of the first effect. Is what is being done.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a ball-entering means into which a game ball can enter, an acquiring means for acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the ball-entering means, and an acquiring means therefor A determination unit configured to determine the information acquired based on the establishment of the determination condition; a storage unit configured to store the information acquired by the acquisition unit until at least the determination condition is satisfied; Display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result, privilege providing means for providing a benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, and display thereof Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information displayed on the means, dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, Decision period A dynamic display period storing means for storing at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period by a predetermined multiple as the dynamic display period determined by: And when the first dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means, a first effect is executed at a timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the first dynamic display period. When the second dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit based on the result of the determination by the effect execution unit and the determination unit being the specific determination result, the second dynamic Executing the first effect at a timing when the first period elapses from the start of the dynamic display period, and repeatedly executing the first effect at a predetermined timing the same time each time the first dynamic display period elapses Can do A second effect performing means, and a limiting means for limiting the number of times the first effect is continuously performed to less than the predetermined number when the result of the determination by the determining means is not the specific result. It is.
This has the effect of increasing the interest of the player.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, the dynamic display period determining means is configured to determine the first dynamic display period more easily than the second dynamic display period.
Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the first effect execution means executes the first effect based on the start timing of the first dynamic display period.
Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first dynamic display period is configured to have a period shorter than twice as long as the effect period of the first effect.
Thereby, there is an effect that the control processing can be simplified.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
37A, 37B first symbol display device (display means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
82a first variable winning device (variable ball entry means)
114 display control device ( display control means)
331a to 331d display unit (display area)
422a production section (display area)
S305, S508 Determination means S310, S312 Dynamic display means
S214 bonus game execution means
S1126 game state setting means

Claims (4)

Ball entry means that game balls can enter,
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means,
Determining means for determining the information obtained by the obtaining means based on establishment of a determination condition;
At least until the determination condition is satisfied, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means,
Display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determination means;
A privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means;
Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information displayed on the display means,
Dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means,
At least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period by a predetermined multiple are stored as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Dynamic display period storage means,
When the first dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means, a first effect execution for executing the first effect at a timing when the first period has elapsed from the start of the first dynamic display period. Means,
When the second dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit based on the result of the determination by the determination unit being the specific determination result, the start of the second dynamic display period is started. It is possible to execute the first effect at a timing when the first period elapses, and to repeatedly execute the first effect up to a predetermined number of times at the same timing every time the first dynamic display period elapses Second production execution means,
Limiting means for limiting the number of times the first effect is continuously executed to less than the predetermined number of times when the result of the determination by the determination means is not the specific determination result. Machine.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the dynamic display period determining means is configured to determine the first dynamic display period more easily than the second dynamic display period.   The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first effect execution means executes the first effect based on a start timing of the first dynamic display period.   4. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first dynamic display period is configured to have a period shorter than twice as long as the production period of the first production. 5.

Images